‘a icdsdincnn

+ bt eaekslon ah eedaere eee?

~ penn re
on ‘ol ra

~~ Ptr Pe Tol shacion

menses

ze
at
2

THE

Pio Owl DINGS

or THE

LISMEAN OOGIETY

OF

New Sou WALES

FOR THE YEAR

1939

VOL. LXIV.

WITH TWELVE PLATES
3 Maps and 496 Text-figures.

SYDNEY:
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY

AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LTD,
Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney,

and
SOLD BY THE SOCIETY.
1939.

li

CONTENTS OF PROCEEDINGS, 1939.

PARTS I-II (Nos. 281-282).
(Issued 15th May, 1939.)

Pages.
Presidential Address, delivered at the Sixty-fourth Annual General
Meeting, 29th March, 1939, by Mr. T. C. Roughley .. i-xxvli
Elections XXVii
Balance-sheets for the year ending 28th February, 1939 Pad te oie hy, VA XXVili-xxx
Abstractzorubrocecdines’ 4.455%) 5 Ree a ee! NE ee ae XXXI-XXxX1i
The Ecology of the Upper Williams River and Barrington Tops Districts.
iii. The EHucalypt Forests, and General Discussion. By Lilian Fraser,
D.Sce., and Joyce W. Vickery, M.Sc. (Plates i-iii.) .. 1-33
Miscellaneous Notes on Australian Diptera. v. On Hye-coloration, and
other Notes. By G. H. Hardy. (One Text-figure.) .. 34-50
Description of a New Genus and Two New Species from Papua. Family
Pyrgotidae (Diptera). By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by Frank
H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8S.) (Two Text-figures. ) 51-53
Revision of Australian Lepidoptera. Oecophoridae. viii. By A. Jefferis
Turner, M.D., F.R.E.S. 54-72
Trombidiid Larvae in New Guinea (Acarina: Trombidiidae). By Carl
HEH. M. Gunther, M.B., B.S., D.T.M. (Communicated by Frank H.
Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.S.) (Forty Text-figures.) 73-96
The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. vii. Family Otitidae
(Ortalidae). By John R. Malloch. (Communicated by Frank H.
Taylor, F.R.ES., F.Z.S.) (Plates iv—v.) 97-154
The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. viii. Dolichopodidae. By
VYabbé O. Parent. (Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E.S.,
F.Z.8.) (Thirty-one Text-figures.) 155-168
The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. ix. Family Phytalmiidae.
By John R. Malloch. (Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E.S.,
F.Z.S.) (Thirteen Text-figures.) 169-180
Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. i. The Genotype of
Oligotoma Westwood. By Consett Davis, M.Se. (Five Text-figures.) 181-190

A Key to the Marine Algae of New South Wales. Part 2. Melanophyceae
(Phaeophyceae). By Valerie May, B.Sc. ..

191-215

CONTENTS.

PARTS III-IV (Nos. 283-284).
(Issued 15th September, 1939.)

Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. ii. A New Neotropical Genus
of Embioptera. By Consett Davis, M.Sc. (Twenty-one Text-figures. )

A New Species of Chalcid (Genus Hurytoma) associated with Tepperella
trilineata Cam., a Wasp causing Galling of the Flower Buds of
Acacia decurrens. By N. S. Noble, D.Sc.Agr., M.Se., D.I.C. (Twelve
Text-figures. )

The Upper Palaeozoic meer Retna Mourit George Hand Wanenams N. S.
Wales. By A. H. Voisey, M.Sc. (One Map and three Text-figures.)

The Lorne Triassic Basin and Associated Rocks. By A. H. Voisey, M.Sc.
(One Map and two Text-figures.) .

A New Species of Megastigmus parasitic on Crenpenctla, Hilinenia Can a
Wasp causing Galling of the Flower Buds of Acacia decurrens. By
N. S. Noble, D.Sc.Agr., M.Sec., D.I.C. (Ten Text-figures.) ERNST

A Reconnaissance Survey of the Vegetation of the Myall Lakes. By Prof.
T. G. B. Osborn, D.Sc., F.L.S., and R. N. Robertson, Ph.D.,. B.Sc.
(Plates vi-vii and three Text-figures.) Arora Puen hy Geary esi

Australian Coleoptera. Notes and New Species. No. xi. (Mostly
Elateridae.). By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.R.H.S. (Plates viii-ix and
one Text-figure.)

The Genus Adrama, with eceriptions, of Three New Bpccice) (Diptera,
Trypetidae). By John R. Malloch. (Communicated by Frank H.
Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.S.) (Two Text-figures.) .. 5

A New Family of Lepidoptera. By A. Jefferis Turner, M. D., F. R. H. S.

Hymenopterous Parasites of Hmbioptera. By Alan P. Dodd Bae

Miscellaneous Notes on Australian Diptera. vi. Dolichopodinae. By
G. H. Hardy ;

Observations on the Bionomies on Morpiolosy of Sénen Spevics of tite
Tribe Paropsini (Chrysomelidae). By D. Margaret Cumpston,
M.Se., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology. (Plate x
and twenty-two Text-figures.) PEN Tae sack RONEN, OE REL a

The Diptera of the Territory of New Cine x. Family Ceratopogonidae.
By J. W. S. Macfie, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.E.S. (Communicated by Frank H.
Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.S.) (Two Text-figures.) .. aster ee niece

Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. iii. The Genus Burmitembia
Cockerell. By Consett Davis, M.Se. (Six Text-figures.)

Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. iv. The Genus Cloiloda
Enderlein. By Consett Davis, M.Sc. (Twenty-five Text-figures.) .

Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. v. The Genus Donaconethis
Enderlein. By Consett Davis, M.Se. (Five Text-figures.) :

The Geology of the County of Buller, N.'S.W. By A. H. Norsey, M.Se.
(One Map and two Text-figures.) Sieh

The Geology of the Lower Manning District of New Soni ‘juales, By
A. H. Voisey, M.Se. (One Map and one Text-figure.) PE Tor I

A Note on the Synonymy of Leptops (Coleoptera: Curculionidae). By
K. C. McKeown .. : Sickie ag EStck a MnO PS A

The Diptera of the mMonritory. of Mew feuinied! xi. Family Trypetidae.
By John R. Malloch. (Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E.S.,
F.Z.S.) (Plate xi and fifteen Text-figures. )

iii

Pages.

217-222

223-241
242-254

"955-265
266-278
279-296
297-330

331-334
335-337
338-344

345-352

353-366

367-368
369-372
373-380
381-384
385-393
394-407

408

409-465

iv CONTENTS.

PARTS V-VI (Nos. 285-286).
(Issued 15th December, 1939.)

Pages.

The Association between the Larva described as Vrombicula hirsti var.
buloloensis Gunther 1939, and Trombicula minor Berlese 1904.
(Acarina: Trombidiidae.) By C. E. M. Gunther, M.B., B.S., D.T.M.

(Three Text-figures. ) We) | Rep eee deb al rc lel (ca RU Aeon ee bo a O40)

Observations on the Life-history of Neoschéngastia kallipygos Gunther
1939. (Acarina: Trombidiidae.) By C. E. M. Gunther, M.B., B.S.,

DUVME Sa WO Mhext-neures.)) ii tkm meee cle a Ban. Se ae, ESE oe NEAT ATS
Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. vi-x. By Consett Davis,

IMISO5 (Caiksaiaycdapeerey UNepqeaitbhResh)) do ell aohu tek col toe ce odo tee es
Elementary Hydrography of South-eastern Australia. By Frank A. Craft,

B.Se. (Ten Text-figures.) Dis ean Meat cgosh cai/itp atest Laitircr hs gies aay RAEY aU EO Ge by ey

Strongylate Nematodes from Marsupials in New South Wales. By
Professor T. Harvey Johnston and Patricia M. Mawson. (Sixty-six
Text-figures. ) Ties a PREC Urol) is ce aa Onee role heb cs | Tes Ste FL Brak

Ectocarpus confervoides (Roth) Le Jol. By Valerie May, B.Se., Linnean
Macleay Fellow of the Society in Botany. (Forty-six Text-figures.) 537-554
A Note on the Re-examination of Australian Species of Ceratopogonidae
(Diptera). By J. W. S. Macfie. (Communicated by Frank H. Taylor,

PURI SL LGoSo)) | (CAM ORES) AMES UTNE) 50 oo oe too oo co co Oo
Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. xi-xiv. By Consett Davis,

MeESC= a Chibty-onelRext-211neSs) snl ween non nae Hah TA tao eos Hoos
The General Geology of the District east of Yass, N.S.W. By Kathleen

Sherrard, M.Se. (Plate xii and three Text-figures. ) So eee Wyle wD n= 000

Contributions to the Microbiology of Australian Soils. v. Abundance of
Microorganisms and Production of Mineral Nitrogen in relation to
Temperature. By H. L. Jensen, Macleay Bacteriologist ‘2 the Society.

GHIVEECRENEUTES i. ca. cic. eSic ll cir ok bata ACR OLS ewe eer HOOT 60S
IADSLLact Ofeenroceedingsie 2S) ot ds RR a Pn ae XXXi1i-xXxxvili
Donations and Exchanges PDN NN v in, SUN eh ane iam <2 Mee mle SA a eh aU XXXix—xlix
TLE: Ope IN ACS oo XS ES) ee scenery ME BPE Fa Vern Genco cad sre gin eRON ncke lary eiere L-liv
Index EAE Pragifatea Gus. 2 © Grctast yrattety Phathay oy ee og cee I eae re he eee a a a lv—lxvi
SI SHORE IATCS INAS Veith we! wh! dt TTD SR Te eT ae ea * 1xvii
isSuroOresNewiHaniyrand (Genera os) ts + eee 8 Fan et ee ces Ixvii

CORRIGENDUM.

Paracardiophorus assimilis n. sp., was unfortunately omitted from the table,
page 312. Its place therein would be as follows:
8. Hinder pair of maculae round, basal oblong.
(a) -BasalmaculaekwidevananODliguemersicy..8-) ete terial een niente fulvosignatus Cand.
(b) Basal maculae narrow and longitudinal (dumb-bell-like) ........ assimilis, n. sp.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING.
WEDNESDAY, 29th Marcu, 1939.

The Sixty-fourth Annual General Meeting was held in the Society’s Rooms,
Science House, Gloucester Street, Sydney, on Wednesday, 29th March, 1939.

Mr. T. C. Roughley, B.Sc., F.R.Z.S., President, in the Chair.

The minutes of the preceding Annual General Meeting (30th March, 1938) were
read and confirmed.

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRHESS.

The concluding part of Volume Ixiii of the Society’s ProckEDINGsS was issued
in December. The complete volume (467 plus Ixxx pages, twenty-two plates and
255 text-figures) contains thirty-three papers on a variety of subjects in Natural
History.

Exchanges from scientific societies and institutions totalled 1,860 for the
session, compared with 2,069, 1,795 and 1,865 for the three preceding years.

Since the last Annual Meeting the names of twelve members have been added
to the list, five members and one Corresponding member have been lost by death,
the names of five have been removed on account of arrears of subscription and
two have resigned.

Mary ELLEN FuLier, who died suddenly at her mother’s home in Sydney on
25th September, 1938, had been a member of the Society since 1930. She graduated
Bachelor of Science at the University of Sydney in 1929, her final subjects being
Botany and Entomology. In January, 1929, she was appointed to the staff of the
Division of Economic Entomology of the Council for Scientific and Industrial
Research to work at Canberra on the blowfly problem. She continued to work
on this problem till her death—first under the late Dr. R. J. Tillyard and later
under Dr. I. M. Mackerras. As results of her work on Diptera she published
eighteen papers (eleven of them in our PRockEEDINGS) and at the time of her
death had completed the material for three more papers.

SARAH HYNES, who died at her home in Randwick on 28th May, 1938, at the
age of seventy-eight, was the first woman member of the Society. She became an
Associate member in 1892, and in 1909, when women were first admitted to full
membership, she became an Ordinary member. Her early education was received
in London and Edinburgh, and she was one of the early women graduates at the
University of Sydney, where she obtained the degree of Bachelor of Arts in 1891.
Her chief scientific interest was botany, and she served for a time on the staff
of the Technological Museum and also at the Sydney Botanic Gardens. She was
chiefly instrumental in having the Commonwealth Government acquire the
collection of paintings of Australian flowers by the late Mrs. Ellis Rowan. She
was included in the Honours list in 1934, being made M.B.E.

Epwarp Meyrick, who died at Marlborough, England, on 31st March, 1938,
was born on 24th November, 1854. In December, 1877, he came to Sydney as

A

li PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

Classics Master at Sydney Grammar School. While in Australia he had the
opportunity to collect systematically at many localities in New South Wales, and
also in Tasmania and Western Australia. He returned to England in 1887 to
become Classics Master at Marlborough College, where he remained until he
retired in 1914. He was the chief authority on the Microlepidoptera, and bequeathed
his collection of about 100,000 specimens to the British Museum of Natural
History. He was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of London in 1904. He
had been a Corresponding member of our Society since 1902 and had contributed
thirty-two papers to the Procrrpines. Since 1912 he had published privately a
journal entitled Hxotic Microlepidoptera, containing his descriptions of many
species of this special group.

LESLIE JOHN WILLIAM NEWMAN, who died at Claremont, Western Australia,
on 8th December, 1938, was born in Melbourne in 1878. He had been a member
of this Society since 1913. He was appointed an inspector under the Plant
Diseases Act in Western Australia in 1904, Assistant Entomologist, Western
Australia, in 1908 and Entomologist in 1920, occupying the latter position until
his death. He had collected in New South Wales and Victoria as well as in
Western Australia, and had published a large number of papers and reports, chiefly
in the Journal of the Department of Agriculture of Western Australia.

Monragu AUSTIN PHILLIPS, who died in England on 11th January, 1939, at
the age of fifty-nine years, was a well-known lecturer on Natural History subjects
and had for many years been associated with the British Museum of Natural
History as a guide-lecturer. He had been a member of this Society since 1921 and
was a fellow of a number of the scientific societies in London.

JOHN JAMES WALKER, who died at his home, “Aorangi’, Lonsdale Road,
Summertown, Oxford, England, on 12th January, 1939, had been a member of
the Society since 1900. He paid two visits to Australia, in H.M.S. “Penguin”
(1890-91), and in H.M.S. “Ringarooma”’ (1900-1904). During these visits he had
many opportunities of collecting insects, and has described his experiences in
two series of papers in the Hntomologists’ Monthly Magazine (1891-92 and
1905-06).

In May, 1938, the Linnean Society of London celebrated the 150th Anniversary
of its foundation, and Professor T. G. B. Osborn represented our Society at the
celebrations.

The Australian and New Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science
held its jubilee meeting at Canberra in January last, this Society being
represented by the President and Mr. H. J. Carter.

In August last, the Australian National Research Council commenced
publication of a new journal of general science, the Australian Journal of ‘Science.
There appears to be some need for such a journal in Australia, and we may offer
our best wishes for the success of this new venture.

During the year the Council decided to include each year in its list of
nominations of members of Council, the names of two members who have not
been members of the Council for the whole of the preceding year. The two
members who have retired this year in terms of this resolve are Mr. H. J.
Carter and Mr. A. R. Woodhill, and I should like to take this opportunity of
expressing our appreciation of Mr. Carter’s services to the Society and to the
Council over a long period of years. Mr. Woodhill leaves for England shortly for
a period of a year and we wish him a pleasant and profitable trip.

The year’s work of the Society’s research staff may be summarized thus:

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. lii

Mr. H. L. Jensen, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society, concluded his work
on nitrogen fixation in the wheat soils. Additional soils were tested for content
of nitrogen-fixing bacteria, so that the survey is now based on eighty-five soils
altogether; five more strains of Azotobacter have been tested for nitrogen fixation
in pure culture and have, like those previously examined, been found to possess a
normal but not outstanding N-fixing capacity; a few other organisms have been
tested with a negative result. Further experiments on nitrogen fixation in soil
with addition of straw have been conducted over periods of one to three months
and have given results in. full agreement with those of previous experiments: no
nitrogen is fixed unless Azotobacter develops abundantly and the decomposition
of the organic matter of the straw takes place under conditions of high moisture.
It has been shown that with free access of oxygen (i.e. in soil of moderate or
low moisture content) only the water-soluble constituents of the straw can serve
as food material for Azotobacter. Only under conditions that are hardly ever
fulfilled in the wheat soils can a gain of about three parts of nitrogen per 1,000
parts of straw be expected. Qualitative tests with a large number of wheat soils
have shown that these are practically all too poor in available phosphoric acid to
allow a vigorous growth of Azotobacter. Certain blue-green algae have again been
found capable of fixing elementary nitrogen, but not in quantities that can be
considered significant under the conditions obtaining in the wheat fields. A
paper giving a full and detailed account of these and the previous experiments on
non-symbiotic nitrogen fixation, aS well as a discussion of the literature dealing
with the importance of this phenomenon under field conditions, has been prepared
and submitted to the Society. Preliminary work has been commenced on the
isolation of cellulose-decomposing microorganisms in order to test their ability
to produce food material for nitrogen-fixing bacteria when growing in association
with these.

Miss Hlizabeth Pope, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology,
has continued her work on the anatomy of the Port Jackson Shark and has
completed a paper on the nervous system. The morphology of the brain and
central nervous system have been described in detail and the paths of the main
peripheral nerves traced. The organs of special sense were also described, since
differences in detail from published accounts were found. Although strictly not
part of the nervous system, the histological structure of the pituitary gland was
included. Another paper on the blood vascular system is in course of preparation.
It should supply the need for an account of this system in the Heterodonti and
thus complete the series in which the other groups, namely the Notidani, Scylioidei,
Squaliformes and Raja, have already been dealt with adequately. The surveys at
Long Reef have been continued and as far as possible a list of the larger animals
and their habitats and biotic relationships have been recorded. Certain groups
of animals will have to be omitted owing to difficulties in determining their
names. Some interesting facts have, however, emerged from this work. There
are two types of community present on the area. One type is confined to the
rocky platform and consists of animals capable of withstanding exposure to all
the elements. The other type of community inhabits an area which character-
istically consists of small rocks and boulders lying on a substratum of coarse
sand. This latter type of community is inhabited by forms which require shelter
and which live on the lower surface of the rocks or which burrow in the sand.

Mr. Consett Davis, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology, has
continued work on the Order Embioptera, chiefly on the taxonomic side. Some
work has also been done on the bionomics of the Order. One paper on the

iv PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

taxonomy of the genus Metoligotoma, and related problems, submitted during the
previous year, has been revised and enlarged, and published in the Procerprngs.
Further work has been carried out on the ecology of the Five Islands, and the
first paper of a series on this subject has been published, with Messrs. M. Day
and D. Waterhouse as co-authors. Subsequently, further data have been collected
for later papers in this series. By permission of the Council, six weeks were
devoted to work on the plant ecology of the Bulli District, the first paper of this
series having been published in the Procrrpines in 1936. As a result of this
work, concerned mainly with the collection and analysis of soil samples, the
data necessary for the compilation of the remaining papers of this series were
completed. Mr. Davis was able, by the Council’s grant of three months’ special
leave without pay, to spend some time abroad carrying out research. He worked
for some time in the United States and also in England, France and other
countries. Research carried out oyerseas was concerned with a study of the
physiology of respiration in aquatic beetles at the University of California, and
with the taxonomy of the Order Embioptera from a world standpoint. This latter
work consisted chiefly of an examination of the types of inadequately described
species, and was carried out chiefly at the Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Harvard University; the British Museum of Natural History, London; and the
Museum d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris. Type specimens were also obtained from
other Huropean museums, and examined at the British Museum, and several
collections of unidentified Embioptera were borrowed for further study. In all,
some eighty species of exotic HEmbioptera were examined, mostly from the types.

Mr. A. H. Voisey, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology,
continued his geological field work on the Upper Palaeozoic rocks of the North
Coast region, particularly in the Upper Clarence and Manning River Districts.
A number of reconnaissance trips were carried out. The aim of the work was
to describe rocks ranging from Devonian to Tertiary in age and to attempt a
correlation between them and other beds in New South Wales and Queensland.
Two reports were published which referred to work done in 1937. A third small
paper related to rocks in the neighbourhood of Armidale. Four more reports
were prepared and are awaiting publication.

Miss Ilma M. Pidgeon, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Botany,
attempted to summarize in one scheme the mosaic of vegetation of the Central
Coast of New South Wales, with special reference to the succession of plant
communities under various climatic and soil conditions. The succession on sand-
dunes has been investigated. One outstanding fact, which has not previously
been recorded in the literature, is that the chloride content of dune-soils increases
with distance from the sea. This is explained by the fact that the leaching of
chlorine ions is minimized by the presence of humus in the soil, and the humus
content increases with distance from the sea. Work has been continued on the
effects of variation in climate on the structure of forests on sandstone and shale;
data for this work are now almost complete. In addition to the ecological work, an
investigation was begun on the comparative anatomy and physiology of mature
and juvenile leaf-forms of Hucalyptus globulus. This problem has proved to be
very interesting. The results are briefly summarized: Preliminary anatomical
investigations indicate that (i) the two leaf-types differ in internal structure and
arrangement of palisade and mesophyll cells; (ii) stomatal index (which is
usually constant for a species) is twice as high in the juvenile as in the mature
leaves; (ili) stomatal frequency is approximately three times higher in the
juvenile leaves. It has been established also that the transpiration rate of mature

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Vv

leaves is greater than that of juvenile leaves. Thus transpiration is not pro-
portional to stomatal frequency. In addition, the ratio of the transpiration rates
of the two leaf-types, as measured by potometers, is reversed on the second and
third days of the experiment. This indicates that stomatal behaviour is different
in the two forms, and this matter is now being investigated. Another interesting
fact which has been established, and which hitherto has not been recorded from
any leaves, is that there are curious irregularities in the transpiration rate at
different places over the surface of individual leaves. Observations of the osmotic
pressure of the cell sap, by Barger’s method, reveal the fact that the osmotic
pressure of the mature leaves is higher than that of the juvenile leaves.

Six applications for Linnean Macleay Fellowships were received in response
to the Council’s invitation of 28th September, 1938. I have pleasure in reminding
you that the Council reappointed Miss BHlizabeth C. Pope, Mr. Consett Davis,
Mr. A. H. Voisey and Miss Ilma M. Pidgeon to Fellowships in Zoology, Zoology,
Geology and Botany respectively for one year from 1st March, 1939. Subsequently
Mr. Consett Davis and Mr. A. H. Voisey were appointed to Lectureships in Biology,
and Geology and Geography respectively in the New England University College
at Armidale, and resigned their Fellowships as from 28th February, 1939. The
Council then decided to invite applications for the two vacant Fellowships and
three applications were received. I have pleasure in announcing that the Council
has appointed Miss D. M. Cumpston, B.Se., and Miss Valerie May, B.Sc., to Linnean
Macleay Fellowships in Entomology and Botany respectively for the period
ist April, 1939, to 29th February, 1940.

Miss Margaret Cumpston graduated in Science in 1938 with First Class
Honours in Entomology, and was awarded a Science Research Scholarship in the
University of Sydney. For her honours degree she presented a thesis on the
biology and larval morphology of the genus Paropsis, which added very con-
siderably to our knowledge of the genus, and whilst holding the Research
Scholarship she has done similar work on the family Scarabaeidae, her results
now having been submitted for the M.Sc. degree.

Miss Valerie May graduated in Science in 1937 with First Class Honours in
Botany, having been placed first in Botany in all four years during her University
course. She then, for 1937-38, was awarded a Science Research Scholarship, and
for 1988-39 a Commonwealth Research Scholarship. She has worked on the
Marine Algae of New South Wales, having prepared for publication keys to the
Chlorophyceae and Melanophyceae. She has also described an albino form of
Macrozamia spiralis, and has in preparation papers on the distribution of Mistletoe
in New South Wales, and the life-history of Hctocarpus confervoides.

During the coming year Miss Pope and Miss Pidgeon will continue the
researches already commenced, Miss Cumpston will conduct investigations on
species of larval Scarabaeidae, and Miss May will study drought-resistance of
plants in New South Wales. We wish all four a very successful tenure of their
Fellowships. We also offer our congratulations to Messrs. Consett Davis and
Voisey on their appointments to the New England University College, and wish
them every success in their new sphere.

vi PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

A REVIEW OF THE SCIENTIFIC INVESTIGATION OF THE FISHERIES OF
New SoutH WALES.

In choosing this subject for my Presidential Address I was guided by the fact
that Australia is now embarking on a new era of scientific investigation of the
fisheries. At Fisheries Conferences held in Melbourne in 1927 and in Sydney in
1929, at which all States of the Commonwealth were represented, a strong recom-
mendation was made that the Commonwealth Government establish a Department
of Fisheries for the purpose of investigating the potentialities of the Australian
coast for fisheries development. In 1937 the Commonwealth Government announced
that a sum of £80,000 was being set aside for investigation work of this character,
and the control of the investigation was placed in the hands of the Council for
Scientific and Industrial Research. A boat, the “Warreen’’, suitable for various
types of fishing, but more especially for the capture of pelagic fish, was constructed,
and Dr. Harold Thompson was brought from Newfoundland to take charge of
the investigations.

With a suitable boat, and a staff capable of handling the large-scale
investigations which confront our fisheries, we are at the beginning of a period
of activity the like of which has never before been known in our history. The
time appeared opportune, then, to take stock of the scientific work that has already
been accomplished, and I have therefore endeavoured to present in this address
a brief outline of the essential features of these investigations.

The volume of this scientific research is singularly small. Much work of a
general nature, based on observations that all too frequently cannot be regarded
as critical, has been published, but, lacking a strictly scientific foundation, it can
scarcely be considered as coming within the range of this discussion. In sorting
over the great amount of literature that has appeared on our fisheries, I have been
guided in my choice largely, but not solely, by the consideration of whether
it has been published in scientific journals. Of course, taxonomic investigation,
in which field great activity has been displayed over a long period of years by
a number of capable workers, does not fall within the scope of the subject of my
address.

Small as is the scientific work on the fisheries of New South Wales, it is far
smaller in the other States, and little of importance has been accomplished there.
This will be remedied to some extent by the Commonwealth investigations recently
inaugurated, for, although the base of operations has been established at Port
Hacking, near Sydney, the field will embrace all States. It is probable that the
most intensive work will be directed to the waters adjacent to the areas of densest
population, for the problem of marketing fish over long distances in a warm climate
is one that must be weighed in any plan of economic exploitation. ‘

Trawling Investigations.

Until 1915 the only methods used for the capture of bottom-dwelling fishes
offshore, not only in New South Wales, but in all the other States, consisted of
hand-lines and long-lines. Now, in the principal fisheries of the northern
hemisphere these methods of fishing had been largely replaced by trawlers, which,
dragging a large net over the bottom, caught fish in much greater quantities and
far more economically. Concerning the economic possibilities of trawlers operating
on the Australian coast there had long been a division of opinion, and although
several attempts, dating back as far as 1857, had been made to test the offshore
waters in various localities, the results obtained were so conflicting, owing to the
unsuitability of both vessels and gear, that little information of value was

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. vii

obtained. In 1907, however, the Commonwealth Government decided to make a
thorough survey of the possibilities of trawling on the Australian coast by means
of an investigation trawler. This trawler, the “Hndeavour’’, was constructed at
the New South Wales Government dockyards at Newcastle and was placed in
commission on the 9th March, 1909, with H. C. Dannevig in charge of the
investigations.

The principal objects of the investigation were: (1) by various means of
capture to ascertain what marketable food-fishes may be obtained in the ocean
waters adjacent to Australia; (2) in what quantity they may be taken; (3) to
what extent they migrate, and where; (4) how they may conveniently and
economically be captured; and (5) by systematic survey to discover and chart
suitable fishing grounds.

The Commonwealth Investigation Trawler carried out this survey from
9th March, 1909, to December, 1914, when she was lost with all hands while
returning from a cruise to Macquarie Island. It was discovered that two extensive
areas carried fish in payable quantities, one on the south-east coast, the other in
the Great Australian Bight. The former was found to extend from near Port
Stephens in New South Wales southwards to Gabo Island, and to continue
across the eastern slope of Bass Strait, past Flinders Island to Tasmania. It
covered approximately 6,000 square miles within easy access to Sydney and
Melbourne. The other ground was found to lie along the edge of the continental
shelf in the Great Australian Bight and to cover an area of 4,000 square miles,
the depth varying from 80 to 300 fathoms, although the greater portion is situated
between 100 and 200 fathoms. This ground is about two days’ steaming from
Adelaide and Albany. Although great hopes had been entertained that the
extensive area of bottom in Bass Strait would prove to be a rich trawling ground,
the “Hndeavour’ found that only limited portions carried fish in payable quantities.

It was seen that the “Hndeavour’s’ catches compared favourably with the
average catches obtained in the North Sea by commercial vessels of modern type
and working in accordance with long-established experience of the movements of
the fish.

The Sydney—Gabo Island section was examined during whole or part of
sixteen different cruises at intervals between April, 1909, and August, 1913. During
this period the trawl was on the bottom for 2284 hours, and produced a total of
84,721 lb. of marketable fish, or at the rate of 371 lb. per hour of fishing.

The area south of Gabo Island, including the eastern. slope and Flinders
Island, was visited during twenty-three cruises over the same period, the actual
trawling time occupying 4324 hours, and the total catch of marketable fish
amounted to 81,715 lb., or an average of 189 lb. per hour of fishing.

In the Great Australian Bight, five cruises were devoted to an examination of
the edge of the continental shelf, two during February and March, 1912, and the
other three between February and April, 1913. The net was fishing for 144 hours,
and landed 29,232 lb. of marketable fish, the average being 203 lb. per hour of
fishing. The deeper section of the Bight was examined during three cruises
in May and June, 1913, when the actual fishing time occupied 122 hours, and the
catch of marketable fish amounted to 13,939 lb., at an average rate of 118 lb. per
hour.

As Dannevig (1913) pointed out, it was to be reasonably expected that a
commercial trawler would obtain results which would considerably exceed the
catches of the “Hndeavour’, for this vessel had to cover as much ground as possible
consistent with systematic work; and frequently she had to leave rich grounds
and proceed to others which were either quite unexplored or which previous

Vili PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

experience indicated were likely to be inferior. A commercial trawler would,
however, remain on a rich ground and revisit it as long as the catches proved to
be good.

Thus the “Hndeavour’, under the capable direction of Dannevig, was able to
establish beyond doubt that rich trawling grounds existed on at least two areas
of the Australian coast, and the New South Wales Government decided to exploit
them commercially. Now, the commercial development of trawling scarcely comes
within the scope of this address, but in view of the unexpected decline in
productiveness of the trawling grounds on the south-eastern Australian coast
during recent years, a brief review of the trawling industry seems fairly warranted.

In May, 1915, the New South Wales Government initiated commercial trawling
with three modern steam trawlers, and began at once to reap a rich harvest. In
1919 a larger trawler was launched from the Government dockyards at Newcastle;
this was intended both for trawling and investigational work, and was shortly
afterwards sold to the Queensland Government; but in these northern waters she
worked with so little success that in 1922 she was sold and returned to New South
Wales. In 1920 four more steel trawlers and a fish-carrier were commissioned
from Newcastle. But in spite of the fact that consistently good hauls were
obtained and there was a satisfactory demand for the fish, the State Government,
facing a loss of £330,000 since the beginning of the industry, decided in 1923 to
cease commercial trawling.

The vessels were purchased by private firms and individuals, and under their
new management returned a considerable profit to their owners. In 1928 the fleet
had increased to nineteen, but, beginning in 1926, the productiveness of those
grounds nearest to Sydney fell away alarmingly, forcing the trawlers further
afield and increasing their operating costs considerably. It was at first thought
that this decline might be only temporary, perhaps a seasonal fluctuation, but
unfortunately it has been maintained to the present day, and the number of
trawlers operating has been reduced to fifteen. Here we shall leave them for a
moment, but we shall have occasion to discuss in greater detail certain features
of this decline when reviewing an investigation of the most important fish yielded
by them.

The Productivity of the Sea.

In 1929 Professor W. J. Dakin was appointed to the chair of zoology in
the University of Sydney, and he at once planned to conduct research into marine
biological problems, with special reference to the fisheries.

Up to this time research into the fisheries of New South Wales had, as we
have seen, consisted for the most part of observations on the adult fishes, their
seasonal migrations, spawning habits, their food as indicated by the contents of
their stomachs, and the best methods of catching them. But practically no work
had been done on the more fundamental problems, such as why they migrated
seasonally, the reason for their fluctuating numbers, their young stages from the
egg to the post-larva, their age at various sizes and their rate of growth. With
the exception of the last-mentioned, such problems cannot be solved by a study of
the adult fishes. For instance, if the catch of a certain species of edible fish
suddenly drops to a low level at a period when it may be expected from previous
experience to be much more abundant, it will probably be found quite useless to
study the conditions that obtain in the waters of its occurrence during the season
when the low returns were actually noted; rather must the reason be sought for
much earlier. Perhaps certain biological, physical or chemical conditions of the
water militated against a heavy spawning, or were so unfavourable during the
early stages after hatching that relatively few survived. But we cannot investigate

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. ix

these questions at the time the actual paucity of fish is noticed, at a time, in
other words, when they have reached a size which warrants their capture for
market; they can be solved only by an investigation when the unfavourable
conditions themselves obtained, perhaps four or five years earlier. If, for instance,
it is found that there is a lack of sufficient food for the vast population of these
young fish, or, perhaps, that one of the many other conditions that influence the
rate of survival is adverse at this critical period, the number that can possibly
survive will necessarily be restricted, and it will be known long before these fish
are taken in the fishermen’s nets that the catch will be a poor one. Indeed, as the
result of continuous research along these lines in the North Sea, it has been found
possible with some species of fish to predict with reasonable certainty the extent of
the probable catches for some seasons ahead.

Clearly, therefore, much light has been thrown on the fundamental problems
of the productivity of the sea in Huropean waters, and it will help us who face
similar problems in the waters of Australia, if we are familiar with the knowledge
gained there. On account of its great productivity over a long period and its
proximity to scientific marine laboratories, the North Sea and the English Channel
have received most study, and I therefore propose to summarize one aspect,
probably the most important aspect, of the discoveries that have been made in
that region.

We shall have much to say about the plankton, and it is therefore advisable
that we understand clearly just what the plankton is. It consists of a great
drifting community of plant and animal life, most of it microscopic. The plant
life of this community is known as the phytoplankton, and the animal life as the
zooplankton.

In the English Channel and the North Sea, during the early months of the
year, March and April (spring in Europe), when the strength of the light is
increasing, a great change in the plankton occurs. The phytoplankton increases
enormously. Now, these microscopic plants form the food of a host of marine
animals, and with such an abundant food supply available, these animals in turn
multiply greatly; so greatly, indeed, that the supply of plant life cannot long
stand up to the strain, and by May or June it is found to have diminished very
strikingly. It has not only maintained the animal life that swarms at the surface,
but much of it has also fallen to the bottom, where it is consumed by the animal
communities that favour that environment. It has served the purpose of developing
a great, a new animal plankton which continues to survive during the summer
period of diminished plant life by warring amongst itself, the larger forms preying
on the smaller.

In the autumn, about October, there is another outburst of plant life, but never
so great as in the spring, and then follows, during the winter months, a period
when the plankton is at its very lowest, but always with sufficient of all forms
surviving to give birth to the great increase characteristic of the spring months.

The abundance of these forms of life in the plankton determines the ultimate
productivity of the sea. The phytoplankton provides food for the zooplankton,
the smaller forms of which are consumed by the larger, which in turn provide food
for the small fishes and other marine creatures adapted to consuming them, and
these in their turn fall a prey to the larger fishes that provide a diet for man.
If, then, there were no phytoplankton in the sea, there would be no fishes for man
to harvest. A knowledge of the seasonal abundance of the plankton is, therefore,
a fundamental necessity before the abundance or scarcity of the fishes can be
understood.

x PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

But we have not yet gone back to the very beginning, for it is necessary that
we know the causes of the fluctuations of the plankton and the succession of
life in the sea. This problem, too, has received careful study by European scientists
during recent years and much light has been thrown on it.

The plant life, which, as we have seen, forms the basis of the food of the
animal life of the sea, is dependent for its existence on the nutrient salts
contained in sea water, and on the strength of the light which will enable it to use
these salts for the storage of nourishment in its tissues. If, therefore, these
forms of nourishment in solution are not constant, and if the light varies in its
intensity, we should expect to find the plant life of the plankton to vary
accordingly. And this is just what has been found to occur.

Of the many constituents of sea water the phosphates and the nitrates have
been found to play, more than any others, a determining role in regulating the
quantity of plant life that may develop in the sea. In the North Sea these
salts are present in greatest quantities during the winter months and up to the
beginning of March. It is in March, as we have seen, that the great outburst of
plant life occurs; why, then, if the requisite nutrient salts were abundant during
the winter, did it not develop then? It is here that the intensity of the light
plays its part. During the winter the days in the North Sea are short and the
intensity of the light at its poorest, so poor in fact that the plant life in
the plankton is unable to avail itself of the salts at its disposal. As the days
lengthen and the light increases, more and more of these salts can be absorbed
and thus it is that the great outburst occurs in the spring. So great a toll is
taken of the available salts that they are quickly used up and within about a
month or six weeks little remains, and the further increase of the plant life is
inhibited. It does not remain stationary, however, for much of it perishes for
lack of further nutriment, and great quantities are consumed by the animal life
of the plankton which, too, has developed enormously as the result of the abundant
food supply the plant life has provided.

But we still have the increase of plant life in the autumn to account for.
The heat of the sun’s rays during the summer has caused a rise in temperature
of the surface waters, but not in the deeper layers, and while the nutrient salts
have been used up at the surface, they have been maintained in the deeper
layers by the large quantities of animals that have died at the surface and fallen
to the bottom. It is not till the autumn, however, when the surface waters cool
down, that the two layers are able to mix, and this is aided considerably by the
gales that are common in the North Sea during that season. And so the surface
layers are replenished with nitrates and phosphates in sufficient quantities to
allow of another marked outburst of plant life.

Plankton Fluctuations in New South Wales Waters.

That, in brief, is the story that has unfolded itself after many years of
research by a considerable number of marine biologists and chemists. But how far
has our knowledge of these fundamental data progressed in Australia? What is
the nature of the plankton in the seas washing our coast? In what way, both in
the types to be found here and in their seasonal abundance, does this plankton
differ from that of EKuropean waters? Is there a great seasonal fluctuation such
as has been found to be a characteristic feature of the plankton of the North Sea?
Concerning these questions we in Australia knew practically nothing, and it
was these and related problems that Dakin set about to investigate, for a knowledge
of them will enable us to explain the natural fluctuations of the fish in the sea,

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. xi

and will help us to account for the migrations that many of these fish undertake
periodically. But these migrations may be very extensive; they may extend in
some cases from the waters of Tasmania, cooled by an antarctic current, to those
of Queensland, warmed by a tropical current from the north. A complete under-
standing of these movements will therefore be gained only if the conditions
throughout the range of the migration be understood, and this would involve
continuous work at a series of stations from Tasmania to Queensland. Dakin had
to limit the sphere of his activities practically to one restricted area, in the
vicinity of Sydney; even then it was a giant’s task for one investigator to
undertake, and it was rendered all the more difficult by the lack of a boat which
would allow of the work being carried out in reasonable comfort. Nevertheless,
in the comparatively short time of ten years he has succeeded in throwing much
light on the problems he set about to solve.

An area, four miles east of North Head, Port Jackson, was chosen for the
investigation, and efforts were made to reach this spot at fortnightly intervals, at
or about the hour of high water, and at about the same time of day on each
occasion. The period of high water was chosen to ensure that the water where
the investigations were to be carried out would not be contaminated by the water
flowing from Sydney Harbour on the ebb tide.

After two years’ work, Dakin (1931) was able to announce that the catches
of plankton were very uniform compared with the seasonal variations of those of
the North Atlantic. But there were variations, nevertheless, both in quality
and quantity, and the regular hauls of plankton over this period at last enabled
a comparison to be made with the catches in other waters. For two years two
nets had been towed twice a week in the Irish Sea, the average plankton catch
being 14 c.c. Two similar nets towed each fortnight in the sea off Sydney
Harbour gave an average of only 4 e«.c., and Dakin’ pertinently asks if this is a
measure of the relative productivity of the two regions in fish food.

In a conjoint paper published in these Procrepines, Dakin and Colefax (1933),
working in the area previously selected by Dakin, discussed the species of diatoms
most prominent in their catches; they found that at this station they consisted of
the usual admixture of oceanic and neritic species, which might be expected
within the vicinity of a continental shelf and the open ocean, with, as usual, only
a few species quantitatively of great significance. All the important species were
found to be well-known types, those predominating belonging to the genera
Chaetoceras, Asterionella, and Thalassiosira, which have a wide distribution in the
seas of the northern hemisphere. With few exceptions, however, they were recorded
from Australian waters for the first time. While peculiarly Antarctic species
played little part in their catches, there was found to be an admixture of temperate
and tropical types.

Quantitatively, these authors confirmed Dakin’s previous conclusion that the
changes in volume of the diatom catches during the year east of Sydney is nothing
like so marked as it is in certain colder seas. Seasonal variations were scarcely
obvious from inspections of the nets, and it was not until their enumerations
were complete that a picture of diatom change directly comparable with that of
northern seas became clear, the net result being a curve representing the rise
and fall in the quantity of the plant plankton, with a peak in early spring and
another smaller one in late autumn. There is, therefore, a striking similarity
with the plankton rhythm of Huropean seas, and this was the first time a

rhythm of this kind had been discovered in the southern hemisphere. The

Xil PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

abundance of planktonic algae in spring is nothing like so great as in the colder
waters about Britain, but it is nevertheless quite marked, though it is relatively
earlier than in British seas.

An analysis was also made of the animal plankton, and a clear indication
was obtained that the chief constituents of the zooplankton have their maxima
just after those of the phytoplankton. Thus the zooplankton presents a maximum
in the summer, with peaks in the early summer (November to December) and
another in autumn. The zooplankton maxima were found to be due principally to
Copepoda and Cladocera.

Fish Eggs in the Plankton.

During these investigations, also, Dakin and Colefax discovered eggs of several
species of fish in considerable abundance. Anchovy eggs, distinctive on account
of their elliptical shape and characteristically segmented yolk, were found in
large numbers in January, 1931, and in November of that year they again began
to appear and remained in the catches till January, 1932, although in January
they were not found in large numbers. Eggs of two different sizes, but very
striking on account of a vitelline membrane with a distinct blue tinge, a
relatively large perivitelline space and a segmented yolk, were found in great
abundance between June and August, 1931. These were thought to be clupeid
eggs, possibly those of Sardinops neopilchardus, the common pilchard of New
South Wales waters. From January to April, 1932, eggs of several unknown
species of fish also occurred in considerable numbers, the peak being reached in
March.

In March the following year Dakin and Colefax (1934) were able to state
definitely that these “blue” eggs were actually those of the Australian pilchard,
for early stages from those newly hatched to young fish up to 28 mm. in length
were obtained, and these allowed of a definite determination being made. The
eggs were abundant in three successive years during the months of June, July
and August. Actually, in 1933 the eggs were first found in the catches late in
May. Special efforts were then made to obtain later and later larval stages, and
in this great success was attained until, at the beginning of August, they
disappeared. The eggs range from 1:27 mm. to 1:5 mm. in diameter, the average
being 1-44 mm. The bluish tinge previously noted is purely optical and not due
to the presence of pigment; it disappears when the membrane is dissected away
from the egg. A single oil globule is present as in the Huropean and Japanese
pilchard eggs. In addition to these characters of the egg, the authors describe in
detail those of the young fish till it reaches a length of 28 mm.

The number of eggs and larvae captured was at times considerable. For
instance, in a net of cheese cloth with a circular mouth three feet in diameter and
towed only for ten minutes near the surface, 406 eggs of S. neopilchardus were
obtained on 18th July, 1931, and over a thousand in a similar haul on 21st June of
that year.

This was a very important discovery, for, although it has been known tor a
long time that pilchards may be found to occur on the eastern Australian and
Tasmanian coasts in great quantities, there are very few reliable records of the
season of their occurrence, for satisfactory identification of the actual species
comprising the shoals has all too frequently not been obtained. If a shoal of small
fishes is seen breaking the surface of the water, it is usually assumed that they
are pilchards, whereas in many cases a more critical examination of actual
specimens might possibly have disclosed that they were sprats, anchovies,

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. xiii

maray, or perhaps herrings. There has been a good deal of evidence, however,
to show that pilchards do occur on the New South Wales coast during the winter
months, and the finding of the eggs and the early stages of the young fish at that
period during three successive years is not only a striking confirmation of these
observations, but it has the additional importance that in the area of these
investigations, from Port Stephens on the north to Port Hacking on the south
at least, the fish were spawning at that time.

Further investigations by Dakin (1937) indicated that the spawning of the
pilchard on the coast of New South Wales occurs over a much longer period
than was indicated previously, for small pilchard larvae varying between 8 and
20 mm. in length were taken in the months from April to November. Large
numbers of eggs were obtained at Port Hacking at the beginning of May, and
some very large catches were made off Broken Bay in October. Since, however,
larvae were obtained in April, it may be assumed that some spawning takes place
in February, and Dakin suggests that possibly eggs may be taken in every
month of the year. The largest catches made to date, however, were obtained
during May, July and October.

In this paper, also, the occurrence of pilchards at the entrance to Broken
Bay was recorded for four consecutive weeks in May, 1935, and in the same
locality in July, 1937. Shoals of maray were seen and captured at the entrance
of Sydney Harbour in August, 1937, and sandy sprats about the same locality in
June, while freshwater herring in full roe were marketed from the freshwater
reaches of the Clarence River in July, 1937.

Physical and Chemical Conditions of the Sea Water.

In 19385, Dakin and Colefax published some observations on the seasonal
changes in temperature, salinity, phosphates, nitrate nitrogen and oxygen of the
ocean waters on the continental shelf of New South Wales and their relationship
to plankton production. The records were obtained at the same station as
previously, about four miles east of North Head, Sydney Harbour.

The total range of temperature variation of the surface water was found to
be only about 7° C., the average range at a depth of 30 fathoms being still less.
The highest temperatures reached are usually between 22° and 23° C. and occur in
February and March. The lowest-surface temperatures, 15°-16° C., occur in August
and September. During the period that the temperature is at its lowest the water
at the surface and the bottom is almost at the same temperature, while from the
date in spring when the surface waters begin to rise in temperature the difference
between the surface and the bottom becomes more and more pronounced. The
condition in summer will therefore hinder any rapid regeneration of nitrate and
phosphate supplies if these substances are exhausted in the surface waters by the
activity of the plankton, for the pronounced “layering” will tend to prevent supplies
passing upwards from the sea bottom. Abnormal weather conditions may, however,
on the continental shelf, bring about a temporary destruction of the summer
conditions.

At this station the water had an average salinity of approximately 35:5%., the
extremes on the surface in 1933 being 35-80%, and 35:36%,.. No seasonal rhythm
was apparent.

The phosphate content was found on the whole to be very stable throughout
the year; there are variations, but the average during the summer is not appre-
ciably less than during the winter, and at the surface it varies between about 15
and 25 milligrams of P.O; per cubic metre. On the whole, the coastal water of

xiv PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

New South Wales approximates somewhat to the English Channel conditions, but
without the exhaustion of P.O; in the summer. A seasonal cycle is therefore not
pronounced. There are, nevertheless, some important variations, but they are
usually of brief duration; for instance, the phosphate content was almost down to
zero during the whole month of September and the first week of October, 1934.
The plankton catches provided a striking confirmation of the theories advanced in
Europe to explain the variation in nitrate and phosphate content of the surface
waters of the sea during the year, for they showed that the phosphate content
never went down to zero without there being an unusual (for this place) develop-
ment of diatoms.

Notwithstanding the fact, however, that a large outburst of phytoplankton
will bring down the phosphate content of our coastal waters to zero, this condition
does not continue for the long season noted in British waters. On occasions in
1933, when the phosphate in the surface waters was reduced to a trace, it was
again normal ten days or so afterwards. After the spring diatom maximum in
September, 1934, the phosphates were down to zero for about three weeks.
Regeneration from deeper waters then resulted in the amount rising to 20 mg.
per cubic metre, and this figure was maintained during the summer.

While, therefore, the presence of large numbers of diatoms and other phyto-
planktonic organisms may reduce the phosphate content of our waters, it cannot
be said that the spring or autumn maxima of the phytoplankton are dependent
upon the phosphates gradually attaining a maximum. Phosphate has been avail-
able in sufficient quantity for two or three months before the spring plankton
maximum, and it is also present during the greater part of the summer.

The rapid regeneration of phosphate in the surface waters after the diminution
in the speed of plant production may be accounted for by the quantity present in
deeper water. On all occasions in 1933 when the surface phosphate was reduced
to zero, it was never less than 13 mg. per cubic metre at 50 feet, and was between
20 and 38 mg. per cubic metre at 150 feet.

Dakin and Colefax also found that in New South Wales waters there are
fluctuations in the nitrate nitrogen content of the sea which can be correlated
quite clearly with fluctuations in the productivity of the sea in plankton. But
here, too, it was found that the seasonal changes are not nearly of such amplitude
as those of the Hnglish Channel. Of special interest, however, is the discovery that
the nitrogen content is apparently much more sensitive to the reproduction of the
phytoplankton than is the phosphate.

In the spring of both 1933 and 1934 the nitrate nitrogen was reduced to zero,
and on both occasions the reduction was accompanied by a great diatom outburst.
During 1934 the concentration of the nitrate nitrogen in the surface water remained
below 10 mg. per cubic metre for practically the whole of the summer.

Trawled Flathead. =

Of all the species of fish marketed in New South Wales the tiger flathead
(Neoplatycephalus macrodon) taken in the nets of the trawlers is the most
abundant; it may also be regarded as the most important. We have seen that
commercial trawling was initiated in New South Wales in 1915 when three trawlers
began operations. From the beginning the predominant fish caught was the tiger
flathead, which rapidly replaced the sea mullet (Mugil dobula) as the species
marketed in greatest abundance in New South Wales. The trawling grounds
exploited in the early years of the industry extended from Newcastle to Cape
Howe, although only circumscribed areas of sea bottom were fished. For several

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XV

years the grounds situated nearest to Sydney, particularly that lying north-east of
Sydney Harbour and that extending some distance north and south of Botany Bay,
which are usually referred to as the ‘‘Home Grounds”, were found to yield great
quantities of flathead every year between early September and the beginning of
December or at times a little later. Then in 1926 these grounds failed to produce
their customary supplies and the trawlers were forced further afield during that
period. Unfortunately, this proved to be not an isolated experience, for these
grounds, so prolific in their yield for about eleven years, have remained poor
right to the present day.

During these early days of the industry it was found, also, that the “southern”
grounds situated in the Hden—Green Cape area, produced fish in prolific quantities
during the period from January to July, but these grounds, too, deteriorated, not
only in their production of flathead, but of all other classes of fish, which formerly
were found in great abundance. The trawlers were consequently forced still further
afield, and in 1929 the grounds discovered by the “Hndeavour” off Cape Everard in
Victoria and east of Flinders Island were explored. These were found to yield
rich hauls and an intensive fishery was conducted there, but their subsequent
history was little different from that of the grounds previously worked, and in
the course of a few years their yield showed a marked decline.

Now, as the trawlers were forced further and further away from their base,
the operating costs mounted considerably; the cruises, which originally lasted
from three to six days, were now occupying from seven to ten days, involving a
much heavier consumption of coal, an increased wages bill and the provision of
much greater quantities of ice. Moreover, there has been a considerable decline
in the hourly yield of both flathead and other fish.

What has happened? When we come to reflect that the trawling grounds in
European waters, such as those of the North Sea, which, although they have shown
a decline in productiveness, have withstood a fishery extending over several genera-
tions with a far greater number of trawlers operating, the much more rapid decline
in the yield of the New South Wales trawling grounds gives much food for thought.
It must be realized, however, that the total area of the grounds worked by the New
South Wales trawlers embraces about 6,000 square miles, while those of the North
Sea embrace about 130,000 square miles. Have our trawlers, confined to a very
restricted area, removed fish from our waters at a greater rate than they can with-
stand? An excellent comparison between the rate of catch here and that of the
Irish Sea has been made by Dakin (1931), who stated: “The present New South
Wales grounds all added together are only about two-thirds of the Irish Sea—the
area of water between Ireland and Hngland—and this from the point of view of
steam trawling is nothing more than a huge lake. Discussions are frequent in
Europe on the impoverishment of the Irish Sea and North Sea owing to the
enormous fishing. Well, we have removed from our coastal area, in one year by
trawling alone, four times the catch that the Irish Sea has provided in the same
time with its far more boats and men.”

Are the fish caught by the New South Wales trawlers more susceptible to over-
fishing than those of Huropean waters? If so, how can we stay the decline? Can
we restore the grounds to the level of their former productiveness? Those are the
vital questions facing the trawling industry today, but before we can hope to solve
them we must know much more about the natural history of the various fish
comprising the catches than we do at present.

On account of the great economic importance of this branch of our fisheries,
and because of the fact, too, that we knew practically nothing of the habits of the

xvi PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

fish, such as the flathead, that formed the basis. of the industry, A. N. Colefax
decided in 1930 to devote considerable attention to the study of trawled fish, with
particular reference to the flathead, the most important species caught. The results
of this investigation were published in this Society’s ProcrErpines in 1934 when the
distribution, supply and length statistics were discussed, and in 1938 when its
feeding and breeding habits were described.

Beginning in 1930, Colefax made thirteen cruises in trawlers over a period of
twelve months, the length of trip varying from seven to nine days. Practically
all of the trawling grounds were visited at least once, and in some cases several
visits were made. He found that the decline in the yield of “mixed’’ fish is one
of the most important changes that have occurred during the later years of the
industry. The average hourly catch for the year 1930 was found to be 2:97 ecwt.
only, compared with 4:56 cwt. during 1921 and 4-68 cwt. during 1922. This
decline was even greater than the figures indicate, for fishing operations were
conducted in 1930 with much increased efficiency, and an improved form of otter
trawl (the Vigneron-Dahl) was in use. Reducing the production figures to curves,
Coletax found that perhaps the most striking feature of the 1930 curve for all
species, flathead included, apart from the general low level of the catches, was its
“flatness” when compared with corresponding curves for, say, 1921 or 1922. This
was due to the almost entire disappearance of fish from the Botany area, and the
considerable decline in the yield of the southern grounds.

Length measurements of the flathead, as they occurred in the hauls, were
conducted with several objects in view. Firstly, as Colefax states, it is well
known that if taken over a sufficiently long period at different seasons and
without artificial selection of the samples, they may present a picture of size
classes which may be used for the determination of age. The distribution of size
classes can be used for the discovery of migratory movements of the fish, and,
finally, comparative treatments of length measurements may give valuable
information regarding over-fishing.

In waters where the range of temperature between summer and winter is more
marked than it is in New South Wales, the growth-rate during those seasons
frequently shows itself in the form of well-defined bands on the scales, and in
the uneven development of the otoliths, opercular bones and vertebrae, so that the
age of a fish can be readily determined by a study of those parts. In the more
equable waters of New South Wales, however, the growth-rate of the fish appears
to be much more regular; the secondary indications on the scales are not nearly
so clearly delineated, and the age of the fish cannot usually be determined with
the same degree of certainty. Recent experiments by Professor Dakin in the
grinding down of the otoliths give promise, however, of throwing much light on
this question.

Another very valuable method, which not only gives an accurate picture of
the growth-rate over a certain period, but also gives an indication of the migration
of fish, is that of tagging them when caught and immediately liberating them.
This method is scarcely open to an investigator working on board a commercial
trawler, for the reason that most of the fish when brought to the surface are dead.
It should have practicable application, however, on a boat using a Danish seine
net, in which most of the fish are brought up alive, and this should be kept
in mind in subsequent investigations of this nature.

The measurements of some 35,000 flathead were taken by Colefax during a
series of monthly cruises, the period ranging from March, 1930, to April, 1931,
and over an area of coast extending from Port Stephens to Cape Everard. It was

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Xvii

found that four age groups were readily distinguishable, the first being represented
by fish 24 cm. in length, the second by fish 30-36 cm., with a tendency to
predominance at 31-33 cm., the third mainly by fish of 42 cm., the range being
41-44 em., and the fourth by fish of 54 cm. in length. But a serious discrepancy
was found inasmuch as flathead less than 20 cm. were not taken in numbers, so
that data regarding the sizes from 1 to 20 cm. are entirely lacking. The intervals
between these ‘“‘peaks” are approximately equal, about 8-10 cm., and it is reasonable
to assume that they correspond with four age groups. If, therefore, the period
from 1 to 20 cm. be denoted by the symbol “x” years, then the ages of the
succeeding groups are x+1, x+2, and x+3 years respeetively.

It was also found that there is a tendency for the flathead of one age group
to remain on the same ground for long periods, and for the fish to move about
in age groups, while on two occasions the study of the measurements of the fish
indicated important migratory movements.

In his investigations of the feeding habits of the tiger flathead, Colefax (1938)
found abundant confirmation of the experience of the men engaged in trawling
that only on rare occasions can flathead be caught after dark. It has become
the custom for the trawlers to fish up till about 7 p.m. and then cease operations
until the following morning, though heavy catches of flathead have been taken
on occasions during the night, indicating that the fish do not always leave the
bottom. This migration from the bottom towards the surface at night is apparently
correlated with the feeding habits of the fish, for the contents of the stomachs
examined indicated that it preys extensively on the HEuphausid, Nyctiphanes
australis, the stomachs of even the largest individuals being frequently found
distended with this small crustacean, while some of the remaining food-types
were found to be mid-water or even surface-swimming forms.

Gut samples were taken on each cruise over a period of some fifteen months
from practically every fishing ground along the coast. For all sizes of flathead the
most common constituent is fish (51:2%), followed by crustaceans (25%). Of the
fish, Apogonops anomalus is consumed in greatest numbers, comprising 36°4% of
the total. This is quite a small fish, seldom exceeding five inches in length, and it
must be very abundant on the trawling grounds at times, for considerable
quantities are occasionally brought up in the nets, in spite of their wide mesh.
The most abundant crustacean found in the flathead’s stomach was Nyctiphanes
australis, which constituted 60% of the whole of the crustaceans consumed. It
was found that the flathead tends to change its diet as it becomes larger, the
proportion of fish consumed increasing with the size of the flathead.

On account of the great prominence of Apogonops in the diet of the flathead,
considerable attention was paid to the diet of this small fish, and it was found
that the main item consisted of copepods (76%), followed by Nyctiphanes larvae
(26:3%), Nyctiphanes (13:1%), with a smaller percentage of bottom mud and
unrecognizable debris. It is in part, therefore, a plankton feeder, and this suggests
that the flathead may pursue it into the upper layers of the water.

Colefax also found. that the smaller sizes of flathead tend to occur in the
shallow water near the coast, while hauls made in deeper water provided
individuals of a larger average size, and he found evidence that would appear to
indicate that this is largely due to the marked difference in the types of food
available in those regions.

Coming now to the breeding habits of the flathead, it was found that the first
definite indication of the breeding season occurs in September, although as early
as July the ovaries may show signs of development. Breeding extends almost to

B

xviii PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

the end of summer, but the actual breeding grounds were not discovered, for only
about a half-dozen really ripe females were seen amengst thousands of fish
examined, and spent females were also scarce, this presumably indicating that
the flathead were not spawning on the actual fishing grounds. The northern
flathead were found to spawn earlier than those on the southern grounds, the
spawning period in the north terminating about the middle of December. It was
determined also that the tiger flathead produces up to two and a half million
eggs in one season.

The smallest flathead examined with partially ripe ovaries measured 30 cm.
(11:8 inches) in length. This is interesting in view of the fact that the minimum
lawful size for the sale of this fish is 13 inches. The smallest sexually mature
male examined was 23 cm. in length, 10 cm. shorter than the smallest female.
There appears to be a size dimorphism in the two sexes and a probability that
the females mature more slowly.

The Life History of New South Wales Prawns.

The prawn industry of New South Wales is one of considerable economic
importance, the value of the yield averaging about £38,000 annually, an unusually
high figure being recorded in 1931, when the quantity obtained amounted to
1,537,420 lb., valued at £76,871. Yet, although a good deal was known about
the habits of our commercial prawns in the adult stage, practically nothing was
known until the last few years about their breeding habits, a knowledge of which
is essential before sound measures can be applied towards their conservation.

Actually, there are two principal commercial species in New South Wales
waters, one known as the king prawn (Penaeus plebejus), the other as the school
prawn (Penaeopsis macleayi). The habits of the adults of both species are very
similar. They are found in estuaries and so-called lakes, which usually have
a narrow outlet to the sea, and are caught in greatest abundance as they make
a Mass migration to the sea during the period after full moon, before the moon
actually rises, when the nights are at their darkest.

But why this migration to the sea? Although it was assumed in some quarters
that they were making to the sea to spawn, they were rarely found with roe, and
most fishermen were firmly of the opinion, without any real evidence, however,
to support it, that spawning took place in the estuaries. On account of the
importance of the fishery, and in an effort to establish beyond doubt the breeding
place of these prawns, Professor Dakin included this investigation in his
programme, concentrating his attention on the king prawn.

Dakin (1935) found that in Port Jackson the only time when king prawns
were taken with well developed roes was in late summer, and they were always
located near the entrance. But always when large king prawns were obtained
from the ocean (these were brought up in the trawl nets) the gonads were well
developed. Early larval stages of king prawns were obtained in plankton nets
at sea, but never in the estuaries and lakes, and this was regarded as reasonable
evidence that this prawn, at least, spawns at sea.

Continuing this work, Dakin (1938) was able to obtain sufficient evidence to
establish this without any possible doubt. So far he has not located the eggs
and the very earliest stage of the newly hatched young, the nauplii, but the
capture of an almost complete series beyond those stages has enabled a fairly
full picture to be presented.

The evidence from the plankton collections indicates that this prawn breeds
over a long period of the year; this will explain the occurrence of prawns of

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Ib

such different sizes as can be obtained in any particular week from different
localities on the same river estuary. The captures of larvae in the plankton
indicate the deposition of eggs between January and June, and also in August,
the largest captures during 1937 being taken in March and April.

It was found that it is during the post-Mysis stage and later planktonic stages
that the young prawns enter the harbours and estuaries and migrate to the
upper waters of these regions. The earliest stage at which the king prawn
leaves the plankton and seeks the bottom is that in which eight, nine or ten
rostral teeth are present, and when it is approximately 17 mm. in length. The
growth of the king prawn, like that of related species overseas, appears to be
very rapid, for the evidence obtainable indicates that many large king prawns,
leaving the estuaries for the sea in February, entered the estuaries as post-larval
stages approximately twelve months before. In some cases it may be even less;
in others, where growth has been retarded or the lake has been closed, the age
will naturally be greater, and two years may be necessary before maturity is
reached. Dakin is also of the opinion that from four to eight months elapse
between the time when the prawns make to the sea and when they are ready
to spawn; in other words, that it is probably eighteen months at least before the
first sexual maturity is attained, the final development of the gonads being
accompanied by a very considerable increase in the size of the animal.

Dakin observes, also, that nothing is more certain than the fact that these
large prawns never re-enter the estuaries after spawning, for they would be at
once recognized by their size, but no evidence has been obtained to show whether
the mature prawn dies after one season’s reproduction, or whether it remains in the
ocean to breed more than once. He inclines towards the former view because no
very large specimens with spent gonads have been obtained from the sea.

The Murray Cod.

Although the Murray cod (Maccullochella macquariensis) is the most important
freshwater edible fish found in New South Wales, scant attention has been given
to the study of its habits and life history. Owing to the rather alarming state-
ments that are made from time to time concerning its rapid depletion, Dakin
joined forces with G. L. Kesteven, a young scientist until recently on the staff of
State Fisheries, in a preliminary investigation of this fish, with particular reference
to its life history and its artificial propagation with a view to re-stockng the streams
of its occurrence.

Dakin and Kesteven (1938) found that it is possible to hold the Murray cod
in cages of relatively small dimensions for considerable periods when suspended
in the river; after thirteen weeks’ confinement the fish appeared to be quite healthy
and became so tame that they fed out of the keeper’s hand. In a system of ponds
it should therefore be possible to keep them alive indefinitely.

The spawning period appears to vary considerably according to locality, and it
is possible to find some fish in full roe from October (and possibly September) to
January.

During their experiments on artificial propagation it was found that only when
approaching full development of the roe was it possible to distinguish males from
females; at this period the female showed a greater swelling of the abdomen and
the genital opening became more swollen than that of the male. It was seen, also,
that when the female is ripe the eggs come away very easily, but considerable
pressure has to be exerted to strip the male. The actual procedure in artificial

fertilization consisted of stripping the milt from the male into a flat dish containing.

\¢

i

xX PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

a small quantity of river water; the milt was stirred well in the water and then
the eggs were stripped into it. The sperm of the Murray cod is immobile until
it makes contact with water, and it lives only a few minutes, while the eggs, after
fertilization takes place, become adhesive. More than 90 per cent. of the eggs
produced larvae, the actual hatching period occupying nine days at a temperature
which varied from 62°F. to 74° F., with an average of approximately 68° F.
Following the success of their experiments the authors consider that there should
be no difficulty in the hatching of the Murray cod on a large scale, though there
would appear to be considerable difficulty in obtaining a sufficient number of both
females and males in a spawning condition at the same time.

The development of the Murray cod after hatching was found to be rather
rapid; the yolk sac had almost disappeared ten days after hatching, and in less
than nineteen days the adult form of the fish was well developed. They were kept
alive for 32 days and during this time the growth-rate was noted, but a reliable
comparison between the growth-rate of young fish kept in an aquarium, as these
were, and those in a large body of water can scarcely be made, for apart from the
consideration of the most suitable types of food, experience with other fish reared
in captivity indicates that the small body of water contained in the aquarium is
itself a deterrent to rapid growth.

The Oyster.

As in other branches of the fisheries of New South Wales, scant attention was
paid until recent years to the scientific investigation of the oyster. There are
several species found on the coast of New South Wales, and in the early days of
the Colony two of them were common; one, the present commercial oyster, Ostrea
commercialis (cucullata), was extremely abundant from the Queensland to the
Victorian border, the other, O. angasi, was prevalent only along the southern half
of the coast. Owing principally to the ravages of the mud worm (Polydora ciliata),
O. angasi has been almost exterminated throughout its range on the New South
Wales coast, but O. commercialis, more valuable on account of its superior edible
and keeping qualities, has been cultivated extensively and forms a valuable
industry, the average annual production for the years 1928 to 1937 being valued
at £75,600.

In 1883 Tenison-Woods stated that the sexes of the common commercial oyster
(O. commercialis) are distinct, and the eggs are probably discharged into the
water where they may easily meet with sperm from the males. By mixing “the
male and female fluid” it was found that fertilization of the ova readily occurred.
Later, in 1888, Tenison-Woods appears to have altered his views on the discharge
of the sexual products into the water, for he stated that the “young oysters are
reared in the gill-chambers of the mother, in the case of the Australian oyster,
O. mordax”’. It seems probable that Tenison-Woods was confused with his species,
tor the taxonomy of the New South Wales oysters was at that time very unstable.
In the first instance, he was apparently dealing with the oviparous O. commercialis,
and in the second with the larviparous O. angasi, both of which were then plentiful
in the neighbourhood of Sydney. Altogether Tenison-Woods’s observations were
quite confusing and threw little real light on the subject.

The work of Saville-Kent (1890), although it erred in a number of particulars,
contained much of value. He stated that in the case of O. glomerata (commer-
cialis) fertilization takes place in the water, “the young embryos .. . being thrown
upon their own resources from the earliest period of their existence”, and that
the embryos of O. angasi are retained within the mantle cavity of the parent.

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Xxi

Saville-Kent described the embryonic development of O. commercialis as far as
the complete envelopment of the embryo by a shell, but erroneously assumed and
actually illustrated their attachment at that stage as spat, stating that the length
of larval life occupied, under favourable conditions, four days.

The “Mud Worm’. f

{

In the early days of the oyster industry, the bulk of the oysters were obtained
for market from beds situated below low-tide level, and, a dredge being: necessary
to gather them, the grounds on which they were grown came to be known as
“dredge” beds. About 1870, however, the oysters growing on the dredge beds of
the Hunter River were found to be dying in large numbers, and an examination
disclosed that the shells of the oysters were extensively infected with mud worms
(Polydora ciliata). Until that time there appears to have been no reference to
such an infection, and there is no satisfactory evidence as to the cause of the
outbreak. Gradually, however, it spread to other rivers and in the course of time
rendered the principal dredge beds of the State useless for the cultivation of
oysters. With the deterioration of the oyster-bearing grounds situated below low-
tide level, oyster growers were forced to confine their cultivation to the inter-tidal
zone. The mud worm has therefore had a profound effect on the cultivation of
oysters in New South Wales, and it remains to this day the greatest pest the
oyster growers have to combat.

Much light was thrown on the attacks of this worm by an investigation carried
out by Thomas Whitelegge (1890), a zoologist of the Australian Museum.
Whitelegge found that the attacks were most severe on the mud flats about low-
water mark. He formed the opinion that the worm in its early larval stage swims
into the oyster and fixes itself by its head on the margin of the shell; here it
immediately begins to construct a tube and rapidly accumulates a large quantity
of mud, which is at once covered over by the oyster with a thin layer of shelly
matter; if the oyster is healthy the deposit is laid down quickly, confining the
worm with its patch of mud to a very small space. On the other hand, if the
oyster is unhealthy and already infected, deposition of the shell material is slower
and the worm collects a large patch of mud before the layer is solidified. Hence
it is that the size of these accumulations gets larger as the attacks increase and
the oyster gets weaker.

Whitelegge studied the life history of the worm and found that for the first
six days the larvae swim about vigorously, after which they begin to settle down
and are capable of attaching themselves by the head with leech-like tenacity, a
faculty which appears to be of great value to the worm for it enables it, when it
swims between the gaping valves of the shell of an oyster, to exercise some choice
in its place of attachment.

Whitelegge found that if the oysters were removed from the beds, washed free
of mud, and then placed where they were sheltered from the sun’s rays for a
period of about ten days, the worms were killed and the oysters survived.

Winter Mortality of Oysters.

Of recent years the oysters from Port Stephens on the north to the Victorian
border on the south have been subject to a mortality during the late winter months;
this varies in its intensity from year to year, but usually causes heavy losses to
the oyster growers. On account of the mortality making its appearance during
the coldest months of the year, it was thought that it was the outcome of the
chilling of the oysters, and many oyster growers considered that it was caused by

XXii PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

the trost lying on them when bared by the tide. This mortality was investigated
by me at the George’s River during the winters of 1924 and 1925, and an account
was published in these ProcreEpines in 1926.

It was found that the mortality was not caused by frost, nor even by the direct
action of low temperatures, for experiments carried out during both winters
actually shioowed that those oysters survived which were exposed to the cold air
longest, while those submerged during the winter in the more equable temperature
of the water died in large numbers. During this investigation it was found that the
lowest temperature to which the oysters were exposed was 36° F.; that after
packing oysters in ice for 72 hours few of them died when replaced on the beds;
and that oysters whose tissues were lightly frozen by a combination of ice and
salt survived for a period up to two months afterwards, and even after their
tissues had been frozen hard they lived for some weeks.

The food extracted from the oysters’ stomachs corresponded, in the types
comprising the bulk of it, with that extracted from the stomachs of the oysters
at Port Hacking and the Hawkesbury River, where no abnormal winter mortality
had been known to occur. The volume of the food obtained by the oysters was
found to increase with a rise in the temperature of the water, and on the flood
tide as against the ebb. At a temperature of or below 50° F. the shells of the
oysters remain closed.

Where a heavy mortality occurred during the winter of 1924 many of the
oysters still remaining alive had abscesses, ulcerations or inflammation of the
tissues, particularly common on the labial palps, gills and inner surfaces of the
mantles, but they also occurred in the gonad, digestive diverticula, stomach and
adductor muscle. Where the mortality was greatest ulcerated oysters were most
prevalent; in fact, a fairly definite ratio of ulceration to mortality was seen. The
cause of the abscesses and ulcerations was not determined, though microscopical
examination of the pathological areas indicated that they probably have a bacterial
origin. It was found that adverse conditions other than low temperatures, such as
lack of aeration, food, and the presence of decomposition products of dead oysters,
may also result in the formation of abscesses and ulcers.

Although the actual cause of the mortality was not discovered, the incidence
of the disease as determined by experiments conducted during both winters suggests
that it might be avoided by raising the oysters on wire-netting racks during the
menths from June to September inclusive.

The Life History of the New South Wales Oyster.

In 1928 I was able to announce that a sex-change occurs in the common
commercial oyster (0. commercialis) of New South Wales, which is an oviparous
species. Previous to this discovery all oviparous oysters were regarded as
unisexual, but subsequently it has been shown that the dominant oviparous species
of the Atlantic coast of North America (0. virginica), of Japan (O. gigas), of
India (0. cucullata), and of Portugal (O. angulata) also undergo a sex-change.

The results of an investigation of the life history of the New South Wales
oyster, conducted by me at intervals over a number of years, the field work being
carried out at Port Macquarie and the Hawkesbury River, were published in these
PROCEEDINGS (1933).

The spawning of the oyster on the coast of New South Wales is very irregular.
With the warming of the water during spring the gonads develop rapidly, and may
become fully developed by the middle of December. Spawning frequently occurs in
such oysters during the high spring tides round about the Christmas period.

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XXxiii

These oysters may spawn again in late summer. If, however, owing to an
abnormally cool spring, the gonad develops slowly, spawning may occur in January,
or even as late as April or May. In other cases there may be several partial
spawnings throughout the summer months. Spawning is not confined to the
summer months, however, for on rare occasions intermittent light spawnings may
occur throughout the winter, as shown by an irregular winter catch of spat. When,
as is usual, spawning is completed by the end of summer, the gonad displays great
activity during the winter in the storage of glycogen in the vesicular tissue in
preparation for the development of ova and sperm in the spring.

This oyster was found to spawn on the ebb tide following a high spring-tide,
the temperature of the water being 68° F. and the density 1:020. The rate of
development of artificially fertilized eggs decreases as the density of the water
is lowered. At a density of 1:005 a large proportion of the eggs remained
unfertilized, and in no case did development proceed beyond the morula stage. At
a temperature varying from 68°F. to 70° F. and a water density of 1-021, the
free-swimming stage was reached in seven hours, and the embryos were completely
enveloped in shells in 34 hours. At an average temperature of 78° F. the embryos
began to swim as trochophores in six hours, while at an average temperature of
62° F. the same stage was not reached until 22 hours after fertilization.

Although practically all, if not all, young oysters spawn for the first time
as males, it was found that the sex-ratio of 3,000 oysters of marketable size from
the principal oyster-bearing grounds of New South Wales presented a very
different picture, for females always predominated, varying from 54 per cent. to
88 per cent. The average percentage was found to be: females 73, and males 27;
in other words, there were 2:7 times as many females as males. The determination
of sex in this oyster does not appear to be governed by the amount of food
available, as has been suggested for other oviparous oysters.

Fishery Investigations by the Commonwealth Government.

As I stated at the beginning of this address, a new outlook on fishery research
is dawning in Australia, for the Commonwealth Government has already begun a
large-scale investigation into various branches of our fisheries which should lay
a foundation for the sound development of new industries, just as the exploratory
work of the Commonwealth Investigation Trawler ‘‘Hndeavour’ did for our
trawling industry. But these investigations are intended to go much further than
did those of the “Hndeavour”, for, in addition to the all-important task of
discovering new sources of wealth in our fisheries, the research will be directed
towards the determination of the limits beyond which the exploitation of those
fisheries may proceed with safety in order that we may avoid the spectacle, already
seen here and in most of the fisheries of the world, of the removal of fish from
the sea at a greater rate than they can be replenished. When a new fishery is
established, it is customary to exploit it to the limit the available markets will
stand, without thought of the limit the fishery itself will stand, and all too
frequently the production is suddenly found to be subject to a progressive decline,
which, if not stayed, leads eventually to the failure of the industry. It is far
preferable that the limits of the fishery be realized at the beginning and the
extent of the catches so regulated that the fishery is maintained permanently
at a fairly uniform level, rather than that a spectacular rise in production occur,
to be followed by a similarly depressing fall in the yield. That is to be the
constant aim of the Commonwealth fisheries investigations.

XXiv PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

The exploratory investigations of the Council for Scientific and Industrial
Research, which has been entrusted with the work, have, as stated by Dr. Harold
Thompson (1939) in a recent address to the meeting of the Australian and New
Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science held at Canberra, been
divided into two sections embracing tropical and temperate areas. Of these,
the latter will receive first consideration, and the region chosen for immediate
exploration extends from about the tropic of Capricorn on the north to Tasmania
and South Australia on the south. This is a natural choice, for it embraces the
most populous areas of five States.

We have already seen that no great extensions of the trawling industry are
likely, and I am convinced that the problems of our estuarine fisheries are for
the most part those of conservation rather than exploitation; if, therefore, there
is to be any large-scale development of Australian fisheries it would appear that
it can come only from our pelagic fishes, such as tunny, Australian salmon,
barracouta, pilchards, sprats and anchovies. And it is on these that the Common-
wealth investigations are being especially concentrated. We have known for some
time that the blue-fin tunny occurs in large shoals on the southern half of the
coast of New South Wales during the spring months, September, October and
November, and we have found that it cans excellently, but three months (or,
perhaps, one should say a maximum of three months) is a rather restricted
period for the commercial exploitation of this species with its present somewhat
uncertain methods of capture on a large scale. Would it be possible to can fish
of other species during the intervening period when tunny are no longer on our
coast in large shoals? Now, the Australian salmon, which, incidentally is a very
different species from the salmon of the northern hemisphere, is one of the most
abundant fish on the south-eastern Australian coast, but unfortunately it is not
regarded as a fish of prime edible quality. Would it be possible to improve the
quality of this fish when canned? Experiments to determine this were under-
taken by me, and it was found that, provided the fish were penned up for several
weeks, as is done in Victoria, before they are marketed, the palatableness and
texture of the fish improve considerably when canned. A factory was established
on the banks of the Wagonga River, on the south coast of New South Wales, and
provision has already been made for the disposal in Australia of over four
million tins during the next two years. So busy has the factory been in the
canning of salmon that the initial plans for the canning of tunny have had to
be left in abeyance.

But what becomes of the tunny when they leave the coast of New South Wales?
No evidence at all was available on this question until the Council for Scientific
and Industrial Research, at the suggestion of one of the officers of its fishery
section, S. Fowler, decided to carry out an aerial survey of the waters of south-
eastern Australia for the purpose of locating shoals of this and other species of
pelagic fish. Fowler (1937) found that during February and March very large
shoals of tunny and salmon were lying in an area extending from near Babel
Island, east of Bass Strait, to Schouten Island, on the eastern Tasmanian coast, a
distance of about 140 miles. The shoals generally were from about five to fifteen
miles offshore. This was an important observation and fully justified the survey,
for the occurrence of shoals of such magnitude had not been observed by the
fishermen operating in that region, possibly because they work usually closer
inshore, and it is conceivable that they might have been missed by an investigation
vessel, which, with its much more restricted range of observation, might easily
have failed to locate them. An interesting point arises as to whether the tunny

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XXV

seen in that area are the same fish as those which earlier were found on the
southern New South Wales coast. They may, of course, be a different race, but
anglers fishing for them on the south coast of New South Wales have reported
that late in the season the tunny appear to make off in a southerly direction.

The great value of the discovery, however, is that the season of the occurrence
of this important fish appears now to extend from September to March at the
least, although the regularity of its appearance in more southerly waters at the
season of these aerial observations has yet to be established. And then, of course,
the question arises as to the distance to be travelled to obtain the fish. Actually,
this should present no real obstacles, for, when it is realized that California tuna
boats travel up to three thousand miles for their fish, the distance to be travelled
in Australian waters to secure them is a relatively short one.

During these aerial observations, also, Fowler observed a shoal of salmon
lying in the Wagonga River, New South Wales, which he estimated to weigh a
thousand tons, while many thousands of tons were lying offshore adjacent to the
mouth of the river and in the vicinity of Montague Island. During a later aerial
survey (July, 1937) he also saw large concentrations of small fish, which he
believed to be pilchards, extending for about twenty miles in the vicinity of Port
Stephens, New South Wales, and at various points in the area bounded by Coff’s
Harbour on the south and Cakora Point on the north. These shoals were from
two to eight miles from the coast.

As Thompson states (1939), the outcome to date of this aerial work, which
has now been proceeding on and off for two years, is that the general distribution
of some of the more prolific pelagic fishes such as the tunny, salmon, pilchard and
related species, has been distinguished, and valuable guidance, at least in the
preliminary stages, has been given to the movements of the research vessel, which
has by her catches confirmed the evidence obtained from the aerial reconnaissance.
Naturally, the vessel will at times catch tunny which rise to the lure from deeper
water where they cannot be observed from the air, and to this extent the agree-
ment is imperfect, but it has led to the avoidance of much fruitless cruising of
the vessel.

In the ten months that the Commonwealth Research Vessel ‘“‘Warreen”’ has
been in commission it has been found possible to maintain touch with the chief
tunny shoals in the south-eastern area, from the first onshore manifestation in the
Jervis Bay—Eden sector (October-December) to the later appearances (January—
May) in Tasmanian and South Australian waters. Blue-fin tunny chiefly, and to a
lesser extent striped tunny and long-finned tunny (albacore), have been found to
occur in what appear to be sufficient quantity to support a fishery—subject to the
development of satisfactory means of capture.

An important commercial species, the yellow-fin tunny, has been located in
Queensland waters, but its distribution and numbers remain to be determined.

It is here, perhaps, that a warning should be issued. If great shoals of a
valuable species of edible fish are located at a certain season of the year, it must
not at once be assumed that their commercial exploitation is warranted, for subse-
quent investigations may reveal that during the following season they may not
appear in that region at all; they may, owing to certain physical and biological
conditions, have moved to other grounds. For this reason, therefore, an investiga-
tion must extend over a period of at least three years before the regular seasonal
appearance of the fish can be assumed with any degree of confidence, and then, as
Dr. Thompson points out, if a certain species, of good quality, can be shown to occur
in great numbers with a good average size and growth-rate, and if this species is

xxvi PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

present with a high measure of reliability over a period of several years, there is
little danger in stating that a reliable and enduring fishery can be based on it—
that is, if it can also be shown that it can be caught with a fair measure of ease,
and if safe harbours exist nearby.

The programme of the Commonwealth investigations, therefore, includes
continuous investigations of pelagic fishes for at least three years in the south-
eastern area; these embrace the study of the regions of their occurrence, move-
ments, biological features such as growth-rate, food, age and size at first maturity,
migrations, influence of hydrographic and plankton conditions, and the systematic
relationship of species, especially the tunnies, to similar types abroad. Chemical
studies are also being undertaken to determine the value of certain species for the
production of fish meal, the fluctuations in chemical composition, and the best
seasons for such processes as canning and smoking.

The programme is a formidable one but, for the first time in the history of
Australia, adequate resources have been made available for the purpose, and we
may confidently expect that much light is about to penetrate the darkness that has
enveloped our fisheries for a period that has been unreasonably prolonged.

References.

DANNEVIG, H. C., 1913.—Notes on Australia’s Fisheries, with a Summary of the Results
Obtained by F.1.S. “Endeavour”. Published by the Commonwealth of Australia,
Dept. of Trade and Customs, 1913.

CoLEerax, A. N., 1934.—A Preliminary Investigation of the Natural History of the Tiger
Flathead (Neoplatycephalus macrodon) on the South-eastern Australian Coast. I.
Distribution and Supply; Length Statistics. Proc. LInn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. lix, Parts
1-2, 1934.

, 1938.—A Preliminary Investigation of the Natural History of the Tiger Flat-
head (Neoplatycephalus macrodon) on the South-eastern Australian Coast. II.
Feeding Habits; Breeding Habits. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. lxiii, Parts 1-2, 1938.

DakIN, W. J., 1931.—Migrations and Productivity in the Sea. Pres. Address, Aust.
Zoologist, Vol. vii, Part 1, 1931.

, 1934.—Science and Sea Fisheries with Special Reference to Australia. Pap.
and Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1934.

, 1937.—The Occurrence of the Australian Pilchard, Sardinops neopilchardus
(Steind.), and its Spawning Season in New South Wales Waters, Together with
Brief Notes on Other New South Wales Clupeids. Proc Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. Lxii,
Parts 3-4, 1937.

, 1988.—The Habits and Life-history of a Penaeid Prawn (Penaeus plebejus
Hesse). Proc. Zool. Soc. London, Series A, Vol. 108, Part 2, 1938.

DAKIN, W. J., and Couprax, A. N., 1933.—The Marine Plankton of the Coastal Waters
of New South Wales. I. The Chief Planktonic Forms and their Seasonal Distribu-
tion. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. lviii, Parts 3-4, 1933.

, 1934.—The Eggs and Early Larval Stages of the Australian Pilchard—
Sardinia neopilchardus (Steind.). Rec. Aust. Mus., Vol. xix, No. 2, 1934.

, 1935.—Observations on the Seasonal Changes in Temperature, Salinity, Phos-
phates, and Nitrate Nitrogen and Oxygen of the Ocean Waters on the Continental
Shelf off New South Wales and the Relationship to Plankton Production. Proc.
LINN. Soo. N.S.W., Vol. Ix, Parts 5-6, 1935.

DAKIN, W. J., and KESTEVEN, G. L., 1938.—The Murray Cod (Maccullochella macquari-
ensis, Cuv. et Val.). Research Bulletin, No. 1, State Fisheries, N.S.W. Govt. Printer.

FOWLER, S., 1937.—Aerial Observations of Pelagic Fish. Departmental Report (unpub-
lished), Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, 1937.

ROuUGHLEY, T. C., 1926.—An Investigation of the Cause of an Oyster Mortality on the
George’s River, New South Wales, 1924-5. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. li, Part 4,
1926. :

, 1928.—The Dominant Species of Ostrea. Nature, Vol. 122, No. 3074, Sept. 29,
1928.

, 1933.—The Life History of the Australian Oyster (Ostrea commercialis). Proc.
LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. lviii, Parts 3-4, 1933.

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XXVI1i

SAVILLE-KENT, W., 1890.—Notes on the Embryology of the Australian Rock Oyster
(Ostrea glémerata [commercialis]). Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, Vol. 7, Part 1,
1890.

TENISON-Woops, J. E., 18838. Fish and Fisheries of New South Wales. Sydney, Govern-
ment Printer. 1883.

THOMPSON, H., 1939.—The Investigation of the Fishery Resources of the Australian
Commonwealth. Paper read before meeting of the Aust. and N.Z. Assoc. for the
Advancement of Science, Canberra, Jan., 1939. (Published in Aust. Journ. Sci., i,
No. 5, 1939.)

WHITBLEGGE, T., 1890.—Report on the Worm Disease Affecting the Oysters on the Coast
of New South Wales. Rec. Aust. Mus., Vol. i, No. 2, 1890.

Dr. G. A. Waterhouse, Honorary Treasurer, presented the balance-sheets for
the year ended 28th February, 1939, duly signed by the Auditor, Mr. F. H.
Rayment, F.C.A. (Aust.); and he moved that they be received and adopted, which
was carried unanimously.

No nominations of other candidates having been received, the Chairman
declared the following elections for the ensuing session to be duly made:

President: Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Sc., Ph.D.

Members of Council: C. Anderson, M.A., D.Sc., Professor HE. Ashby, D.Sc.,
Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Sc., Ph.D., A. F. Basset Hull, M.B.E., T. C.
Roughley, B.Sc., F.R.Z.S., C. A. Sussmilch, F.G.S., E. Le G. Troughton, C.M.Z.S.

Auditor: F. H. Rayment, F.C.A. (Aust.).

A cordial vote of thanks to the retiring President was carried by acclamation.

XXVili

“686T ‘YORI IST

‘IdINSBILT, “UO

‘ASNOHYALV AA "VY ‘XD

'6S6T ‘MOIR 19
“1O}IpHY
‘(4sny) ‘V0 ‘INGWAVY “H
‘peonpoid setilindeg joeI100 punoy pue peulWwex

IT OL6‘TS G IL 0L6‘TS
eR Gh vourleg “ Q) f, sk 2 Ee eS OATOSOU SopouesUTU0D :uolyeLIdoiddy “
tT. S5 662 Gomera? 6S6L ‘Alenaiqoay 6 6.0 aan ween Ssesuedxy Yyueg “
1183 ye ouloouL snj[dins) jJunOoDJy sdtysMmoTjoy “ GanGiangy —
G OL Pte <a Se CA'S'N jo JusuIUAaA0H Aq paseyo 0 8st TP ee he SUyUeOID pue sduepuez}y “
“nd BE NTAIOC cy q0) SeTdoo 09 SUIpN[oUl) seTes “ € 6 ST 2 te g sosucodxm “
0-0) OLT x esnoyF, voUs1DG “ It 0 FT = all Nigh eae ae suljung “
0 OT 8&€ i ee. quey “ 02 2 o> rae gee eee yipny “
ORE Sur eee ee Ss SOLOMON 0 FT FS
0 Gtr GL = Seay souvIjUug “ IT GE GL yseg Ayjed “
0 ST GT UOoTJdLIOsqng sayiTy “ wo wy “0 a3seysog “
9 OL SLI 0 8 TZ o- oa o- .. oa o. “. ALCGIQGUT “e
0 OL O 8} B1ID0SSY OL ST L&I ie a OUTS Ulli PUlba Son ies
0 8 8 “* Q0UBAPYV UT 8 8T 88g
0 OF OF j SIVILIY G GT G6 SUOTIRIISNIIT “
Sexe ES 29 7 * 252 68/8E6T :SuoT}dLIosqng SeeGi 9 OF en EXO) SINS suljuntg “
Pr 8 92 ee ote S.. O ds 88/LE6T Worl sdueleg Ag 0 0 OTOT i ok : SOTIe[VS OL
p's ¢ Ds F ; | 9 3 DS F
"6E6L ‘Auenuqey Yigg pepuy uweaA “LNNODDV AWOONI
L 9T $3S‘60F L 91 $6S‘6es
tT 6 &F aaa ape SR SEE yunodd.V VUIODUT OL L O OG i asuedsns
0 0 OL Ss Sie ee ee oe ee puey ul yseg 8 ZL 60Z . ‘PYT soupag Jo ‘09 yesuneaiee [B10.1aUIUOD
ORO} S85 uvoT [einy Te On Sicece "* 9AlaSey sSaTIauesuTUOD
9 L F6P Sainjueqed pleog ‘Gd F 'S'M ‘doe 0 0 000'02
0 0 O69 FT ; pater PllY}-9U0) asnOF{ VvdUEING 0 0 000°9 IITLM sty Aq peyyeenbaq UINS JI9q VAIN
0 0 00s’ odes }101N uo Ssueo'y OW (Nis 2° 8 “* 9uly}
0 0 00S aM a ee ee a” ae % s[Osuoy -OJIT SIY SULINp Avapoeyy WeITTIM
0 0 OOO'TE °° °.@ chm) ) Soh* ployee1 s8,4}91009 IIG WOIJ peATsoII yuNOWYy :[elIdeD
‘p's 3 ‘p Ss 3 bl i) 3
‘SLHOSSV “SHLLITIGVIT

"661 ‘Auenigay Yyigz 32 3994S BOUR|EG "LNNOODOV IVHANAD

“Saye M Y nog MOK] jo Aya190G UeQUUT'|

Xxix

Us
SON
BN \
le <} 3
\OE~. f oe
5 3 1 /
a} we a
Nie
"6S6T “UII ST "6861 ‘Vole 49
“IOVPNY
“I9INS¥OL,], ‘UO ‘Cysny) “VOW “INGWAVY “HW
‘ASNOHYALVM “VY “ ‘pesonpoid setjlindeS ‘joe1100 punojy pue poululexq
T S 668°¢s T & 668°CS
I G 66L ae oe ae oe oe ne oe oe yuNODDy [eles 66
0 0 00T oe oe oe ee no oe oe oe quNnodDDV [ei1deg 6c
TG .668'¢ Gut “REE” > oS aeiceeaivae Gin reisorenu Ag 0 0 00ST °° ** °° SMOTIOA AveTOBIT UROUUI'T JO Sol1eles OF,
‘pS § eS ae
"6S6L ‘Auenuqey yigg pepug wee9A “LNNODODV AWOONI
Pb TT 882°0SF Pb IT 882°0S3
TT &L LOT sige ‘* '* yueg SSUIABS Y}[POMUOUIUIOD
LT OL 1é2 eo yp eae jo Auedwuop Ssulyueg [vlo1euu0p
0 0 S00°T rae inet? EOF Buea ‘d x ‘SM ue} [Odo.1}0 IN
0 OL LLY ee a wie oe uvo7T j[einy
> TL 9L0'8S§ °° eRe Ce co ae ie eer ose o3¥3}.10 M1 uo suvoyT He SUL ASS2-Sk <7 om y oth oss ss pngziyeiIdeg suloouy sny{dins
O= OR 2007501 eta ee Ss = ae ge Bo as sjosuopD | 0 0 o00;Ss °° acer WITTIM IS Aq peyjyeenbeq JuNoWYy
ps & DS oe
‘SLHSSV “SHILITIGVIT

"6e6L ‘Auenuqey yigz 32 LAAHS AONV1IVG
“LNNODDV SdIHSMO1144 AVATOVN NVANNIT

XXX

“686T “YORI IST

“6E6T ‘Woe 419

“IOINSBILT, ‘UOFT *I1OJIPNW
‘ASNOHYALV AA “VY YD ‘CIsny) “WOW ‘SINGWAVY “HOW
‘peonpoid seljiindeg "j0e1100 punoy pue peulwmexy
2.6 ie GBT BES : 18 6 wists - ITE
8 LT 6S 0s 6861 0} vour[eg “
OR Saar “* ysep A}eg “
OT LT $29 ysor0}Uy “ 6 G OT sosuedxay “
SET IES * 88-LE6T Woy souvleg Aq 0 0 009 ALKTRS OL,
ps 1 WS
“6E61 ‘Avenugay yigz pepuy weeaA “LNNOOOV AWOONI
8 LI 698‘9TS 8 LI 698‘9TS
8 LT 67S
oY © § puey uf
0 L 82 yueg SBUIAGS qi[eeMUOwWUOD
8 OL 608 ‘PYT Aoupsg
jo eee sulyueg [elo1euu0g 8 LL 6FS 6E6T ‘Aleniqgeag 418Z 7B JUNODDY VUIODUT
—ysep 0 0 O028's ; peztTeyideD euloouy poeze[nunoy
0 0 088*ST STOSUOD | 0 0 O00'CT °° °° AvOTORI WITTIM 11g Aq pey}yeenbeq JunowWYy
iPE-38. as a Vistiy 253 ‘p's 3
‘S\LUSSV ‘SHILITIGAVIT

"6861 ‘Asenugey yigz i LAAHS AONVI1Va
“LNNODDV ADSOTOIYSLOVA

ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXxXi

ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
29th Marcu, 1939.

Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Sc., Ph.D., President, in the Chair.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(30th November, 1938), amounting to 53 Volumes, 504 Parts or Numbers, 29
Bulletins, 12 Reports and 27 Pamphlets, received from 178 Societies and Institu-
tions and 4 private donors, were laid upon the table.

PAPERS READ.

1. The Ecology of the Upper Williams River and Barrington Tops Districts.
iii. The Eucalypt Forests and General Discussion. By Lilian Fraser, D.Sc., and
Joyce W. Vickery, M.Sc.

2. Revision of Australian Lepidoptera. Oecophoridae. viii. By A. Jefferis
Turner, M.D., F.R.E.S.

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
26th Aprin, 1939.

Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Sc., Ph.D., President, in the Chair.

Miss Frances M. V. Hackney, Summer Hill, and Mr. G. F. K. Naylor, M.A.,
M.Sc., Dip.Ed., Sydney, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society.

The Chairman announced that the Council had elected Dr. W. L. Waterhouse,
Mr. C. A. Sussmilch, Mr. H. C. Andrews and Mr. T. C. Roughley to be Vice-
Presidents for the Session 1939-40.

The Chairman also announced that the Council had elected Dr. G. A.
Waterhouse to be Honorary Treasurer for the Session 1939-40.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(29th March, 1939), amounting to 17 Volumes, 126 Parts or Numbers, 6 Bulletins,
2 Reports and 40 Pamphlets, received from 71 Societies and Institutions and 2
private donors, were laid upon the table.

PAPERS READ.

1. A Key to the Marine Algae of New South Wales. ii. Melanophyceae
(Phaeophyceae). By Valerie May, B.Sc.

2. Miscellaneous Notes on Australian Diptera. v. On Eye-coloration and other
Notes. By G. H. Hardy.

3. Papuan Diptera. ii. Description of a New Genus and Two New Species
from Papua. Fam. Pyrgotidae (Diptera). By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by
F. H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8.)

4. The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. Family Phytalmiidae. By
J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by F. H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8.)

5. The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. Family Otitidae (Ortalidae).
By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by F. H. Taylor, F.R.EWS., F.Z.8.)

XXXil ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.

6. The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. Dolichopodidae. By l’abbé
O. Parent. (Communicated by F. H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8.)

7. Trombidiid Larvae in New Guinea (Acarina: Trombidiidae). By Carl
E. M. Gunther, M.B., B.S., D.T.M. (Communicated by F. H. Taylor, F.R.ES.,
F.Z.8.)

8. Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. i. The Genotype of
Oligotoma Westwood. By Consett Davis, M.Sc.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Miss J. W. Vickery exhibited a specimen of Trianthema portulacastrum L.
recently received by the National Herbarium from Mr. W. W. Hardy of Narrabri,
who stated that it is exhibiting a vigorous growth in several places in the town.
This species has not previously been recorded in New South Wales, though it has
been known since about 1917 in Queensland, where it bears the vernacular name
of “Giant Pig Weed’. It is a common weed of cultivation, roadsides and waste
places in tropical regions, such as in the Philippines, Java, India, the West Indies,
tropical America and subtropical United States.

In 1917 it had already become a troublesome weed of cultivation at Bowen in
Queensland, but it is less likely to be a serious nuisance in New South Wales than
it is further north. As stock are said to be fond of it, it may have some value as a
fodder plant in pastoral districts.

Mr. E. Cheel exhibited fresh flowering specimens of Dahlia raised by Mr. W.
Sharland of Malvern, Victoria, from seed obtained from cultivated Dahlias “single
crimson-red” crossed with a ‘‘semi double yellow”. The new variety raised by Mr.
Sharland differs from the commonly cultivated forms in being of an “evergreen
perennial duration” whereas the ordinary cultivated varieties are cut down by
frosts in winter and new growth is obtained from the tubers in spring. The well-
known “Tree Dahlias” (Dahlia imperialis and Dahlia excelsa) also die down in
winter and commence new growth in summer from a perennial root-stock. Mr.
Sharland has raised the question of certain hereditary factors being dormant for
a long period and now transmitted to the new variety called “Sharlandia”.
Although the Dahlia was first mentioned by Hernandes in 1651 and by Cervantes
in 1789, it was not properly described until 1805, when Cavanilles prepared a
formal description from plants cultivated in Madrid. Since that time formal
descriptions have been published for D. coccinea, D. variabilis and D. frustranea,
which are probably the parents of the cultivated varieties of Dahlia. More recently
two species, viz., D. Popenovii and D. Maxonii, have been collected in Guatemala.
The two latter are said to be “Tree Dahlias”. Photographic illustrations were
also exhibited on behalf of Mr. Sharland.

ie Y =|
= : | >
\e\ i J ey
\& ase” ©
Go heer WO
One 4

THE ECOLOGY OF THE UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS
DISTRICTS. III.

THE EUCALYPT FORESTS, AND GENERAL DISCUSSION.
By Linran Fraser, D.Sc., and Joyce W. Vickery, M.Sc.
(Plates i-iii.)

[Read 29th March, 1939.]

THE HUCALYPT ForREstTS: Structure and Composition; Conclusions.
GENERAL DISCUSSION. GENERAL SUMMARY.

The rain-forests of the Williams River and associated valley systems have
been described in a previous paper (Fraser and Vickery, 1938). These forests
occupy sheltered and moist areas in the valleys and on the slopes above 900 feet
altitude. The surrounding country is occupied by a more open type of forest in
which species of the genus Hucalyptus predominate. This forest forms part of the
Kucalypt-forest formation which occurs throughout the coast and adjacent high-
lands of New South Wales. It extends from the valley floors bordering and below
the sub-tropical rain-forest, along the crests and upper parts of spurs and ridges
to the Barrington Tops Plateau. It comprises a number of well marked, altitude-
delimited communities which grade into each other so that the forest forms a
continuous whole. These communities have been grouped, according to their
occurrence, into associations which are interpreted as local expressions of large
associations widely distributed elsewhere. Hach community will be described
separately.

The general structure of the forest is similar throughout. Three main strata
can be distinguished: (a) Tree, (b) Shrub, and (c) Ground Flora. The tree
stratum may be considered to consist of two parts, viz., trees whose foliage forms
the canopy, and smaller trees, 30-35 feet in height, which do not reach the canopy.
The leaves of the tall trees are leathery, and all of the same form, narrow
lanceolate-faleate. As in most species of Hucalyptus, the leaves hang almost
vertically, so that, though the canopy is more or less continuous, a considerable
amount of sunlight reaches the ground.

The tallest forest occurs in the valley floor, and there is a continuous gradation
between this and the plateau forest, which is comparatively stunted. The taller
trees range from 120 to 180 feet in height, those on the plateau from 30 to 60 feet.
The smaller trees are rarely present in sufficient numbers to give a distinctive
appearance to the forest, and they never form a continuous stratum. Usually they
are far less frequent than the tall trees, but in places on certain slopes may become
important. The ground flora forms a more or less continuous stratum in all the
communities. It comprises mostly hemicryptophytes and chamaephytes with some
geophytes and therophytes. Grasses are conspicuous, becoming more so with
increasing altitude. Between the tree and herb or ground strata is the shrub
stratum which may be important and continuous, sparse, or even entirely absent

Cc

2 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

over large areas. As in the tree stratum it is possible to distinguish two sections:
a tall-shrub layer, attaining a height of 6 to 12 feet, in places forming dense
communities, but usually very discontinuous in all associations, and a low-shrub
layer 1 to 6 feet in height, which also varies from very dense and continuous to
discontinuous and scanty. The members of the tall-shrub layer have moderately
large, but sclerophyllous types of leaves; those of the lower stratum have for the
most part very small, coriaceous, stiff leaves.

Lianes and epiphytic ferns and angiosperms, which are such a feature of the
sub-tropical rain-forest, are, with one exception, absent from the Eucalypt forest.
The exception is the epiphytic orchid Cymbidium suave, which grows almost
exclusively in the dead branch gaps of HEucalypts. It does not extend upwards
beyond an altitude of about 2,000 feet as far as could be observed. Occasionally
plants of Davallia pyxidata, Platycerium bifurcatum and Cyclophorus serpens may
be present on Casuarina torulosa and Trochocarpa laurina trees along the margins
of the sub-tropical rain-forest, but these are obviously intruders from the rain-
forest and do not form a natural part of the Hucalypt-forest associations.

Mosses and lichens are very uncommon in the lower parts of the Hucalypt
forest, but with increasing altitude their importance increases, especially as the
mist zone is approached. Above 4,000 feet any exposed rock surface is densely
covered with mosses and lichens. Even at these altitudes their development is
not so great in the Hucalypt forest as it is in the adjoining sub-antarctic rain-
forest, while nothing in the Hucalypt forest can compare with the development
of mosses in the most humid parts of the sub-tropical rain-forest. Mosses and
lichens are fewer in the plateau forests, which, being more exposed to the drying
action of the westerly wind than the upper slopes of the ranges, are consequently
less humid.

THE HUCALYPT FORESTS.
Structure and Composition.

(a) The Forests of the Valley Floor.

1. The forest of the lower valley, below 900 feet.

The boundary of the Chichester State Forest cuts at right angles across the
valley of the Williams River at the lower limit of the sub-tropical rain-forest at
an altitude of about 900 feet. Practically all the EHucalypt forest south of this,
both in the valley floor and in the adjacent spurs, has been cleared for pastoral
purposes. Little remains of the original flora except scattered trees which have
been left for shade. A detailed study of this part of the forest has not been
attempted. Hucalyptus tereticornis, Casuarina torulosa and Angophora subvelutina
are the most important trees, but Hucalyptus maculata and EF. hemiphloia are
dominants over large areas, becoming of greater importance further from the rain-
forest, at comparatively low altitudes. Species which are widely distributed but
not as a rule very numerous are EH. paniculata and EH. eugenioides. EH. saligna and
Syncarpia laurifolia occur in restricted areas of specially good soil-moisture. They
may be regarded as outliers of the main H. saligna-S. laurifolia forest which occurs
at an altitude of 1,000 to 1,200 feet.

On the flats by the river Angophora subvelutina is most common, occasionally
attaining a height of more than 100 feet. Melaleuca linariifolia, a small tree not
exceeding 30 feet, is present in dense communities in damp places in the flat valley-
floor. Casuarina Cunninghamiana and Callistemon viminalis form a narrow fringe
along the river bank mingling with species intrusive from the rain-forest, e.g.,
Tristania laurina and Hugenia spp. Angophora subvelutina extends part of the

oN)

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY.

way up the east-facing slopes of the enclosing mountain ranges, but is absent from
the drier parts and from the west-facing slopes. Another tree of importance on the
river flats is Eucalyptus amplifolia.

The pasture is composed largely of native grasses, of which Hragrostis
leptostachya, Sporobolus indicus, Microlaena stipoides, Bothriochloa decipiens,
Panicum effusum, Entolasia marginata, Themeda australis, Echinopogon
caespitosus, Agrostis avenacea, Danthonia penicillata, Cynodon dactylon and
Poa caespitosa are most prominent. Occasional large patches of Imperata cylindrica
var. Koenigii, which is harsh and useless for grazing, and the bracken fern
Pteridium aquilinum detract from the value of the pastures. Some Paspalum
dilatatum is present on the river flats, and Paspalum distichum in very moist places.
On these river flats large, ungrazed clumps of Carex longifolia are sometimes
present, a relic of the original vegetation which has spread under the new
conditions. EHphemerals such as Aira caespitosa, Wahlenbergia gracilis,
Gnaphalium japonicum, Siegesbeckia orientalis, Stellaria flaccida and Swainsona
coronillifolia are common in the more disturbed areas. Notholaena Brownii and
Pteris paradoxa (which are the only ferns except Pteridium aquilinum), Lomandra
longifolia, Ranunculus lappaceus and the common trailing Hibbertia volubilis are
present and appear to have formed part of the original vegetation.

2. The forest of the valley floor at 900 to 1,400 feet.

The sub-tropical rain-forest at its lower limit occupies a relatively narrow area
each side of the river. The remainder of the valley floor and the sheltered lower
slopes of the adjacent mountain ranges are occupied by an association in which
Hucalyptus saligna and Syncarpia laurifolia are dominants. These species are
also present throughout the sub-tropical rain-forest (see Fraser and Vickery, 1938).
The valley floor narrows rather rapidly above the State Forest boundary, and after
about one-half mile from the boundary is occupied entirely by rain-forest, so that
the Hucalypt forest is restricted to the slopes of the spurs. An approximately
complete list of species present in this part of the formation is given in Table 1,
column 1. It can be seen that the numbers of herbs and low shrubs are greatly in
excess of the numbers of tall shrubs and trees.

The density of the forest varies considerably from place to place. On dry
westerly-ftacing slopes the trees are somewhat shorter, and are slightly less
numerous than on the more sheltered slopes and on the valley floor. On an
easterly-facing slope of the Williams Range, the average density of the trees in
the Hucalyptus saligna forest was observed to be 4 per 1,000 square feet.

The Hucalyptus saligna—Syncarpia laurifolia association extends upwards to
an altitude varying with the exposure of the slope. On dry, westerly-facing slopes,
the upper margin is only about 200 feet above the valley floor, i.e., at an altitude
of 1,200 feet. Along sheltered gullies, especially in the easterly-facing slopes, the
association may extend upward to about 2,500 feet, and scattered members of it to
3,000 feet. The tree stratum forms a continuous canopy (PI. i, figs. 1, 3). Because
of this, and because of the physiographic position in which the forest is developed,
less light reaches the forest floor here than on the ridges and upper slopes.

Hucalyptus saligna occurs throughout the association and forms pure
communities on westerly-facing spurs or sunny, dry, upper parts of northerly-
facing slopes. The necessary requirements for the growth of H. saligna appear
to be a deep, good, rather heavy soil, and abundant moisture. Its light require-
ments are not restricted. It is able to develop satisfactorily in areas of maximum

light intensity, but is also capable of equally good development under conditions [yy
of shade which are unsatisfactory for most other species of Hucalyptus. Was Walrus ys*
So
aN
& : Ae
aol ie
Fae \ =

4 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

Syncarpia laurifolia is found fairly frequently throughout the lower forest
association, but does not extend so far beyond its edge as Hucalyptus saligna,
particularly on sunny slopes. It is fairly abundant on the valley floor and on
moist parts of westerly-facing slopes, but the lower parts of northerly- and
southerly-tacing slopes which receive least light do not appear to be particularly
well suited for its growth, and it may be absent entirely from large areas occupied
by Eucalyptus saligna.

Hucalyptus amplifolia is found only along the lower edges where the £. saligna-—
Syncarpia lauwrifolia association abuts on the association of the lower valley, of
which EH. amplifolia is a subordinate species. H. acmenioides occurs near the border
of the adjoining forest association of which it is a subordinate species, on sheltered
but fairly dry slopes.

The height of the Hucalyptus saligna and Syncarpia laurifolia trees ranges
from 180 feet in the valley floor to 100 feet on the upper parts of the slopes. The
diameter of mature specimens on the valley floor may commonly reach 6 feet.

The small-tree stratum is very discontinuous, the only species being Callistemon
salignus, Casuarina torulosa and Acacia spp. Callistemon salignus forms local,
dense communities in damp areas. Casuarina torulosa appears to prefer cool slopes,
and is often abundant on the north, north-west and south-east sides of ridges. The
transition from Eucalypt forest from which it is absent to forest in which it is
present is often very marked. Acacia spp. are scanty except after fire, when they
form dense thickets (see Fraser and Vickery, 1938).

The tall-shrub stratum is absent (Pl. i, figs. 2, 3). The small-shrub stratum
is discontinuous, scanty and not widespread. It occurs over small areas in shaded
localities only.

The nature of the ground flora varies considerably with aspect. The floor of
the valley, which is shaded for a considerable part of the day, is relatively moist
at all times and supports the following species: Brunella vulgaris, Gratiola
peruviand, Mentha gracilis, Plectranthus parviflorus, Veronica plebeja, Hranthemum
variabile, Hydrocotyle geraniifolia, and a number of grasses, notably Microlaena
stipoides, Poa caespitosa and Panicum pygmaeum.

The slopes afford several different types of habitats. The sheltered slope near
to the creek or valley just above the rain-forest is usually cool and humid. Here
Culcita dubia torms almost a pure ground community (PI. ii, fig. 10). Other
important species are Blechnum cartilagineum, Microlaena stipoides, Themeda
australis, Poa caespitosa, Pterostylis spp. and Viola spp.

Other slopes which may be sheltered and shaded by virtue of their position
on the spurs on the protected sides of ranges are relatively much drier than the
valley areas on account of their steepness. These support a less dense ftora. The
most common species here is Imperata cylindrica var. Koenigii, which in places
forms an almost pure community (PI. i, fig. 2). Other species are Desmodium spp.,
Entolasia marginata, Vernonia cinerea, Lagenophora Billardieri and Hibbertia
volubilis.

Pockets or flat areas on such slopes, where moisture collects, show the develop-
ment of a greater amount of grass and finally of ferns. The most rigorous type of
habitat of this association occurs on westerly-facing, well-drained spurs. These
are comparatively dry and sunny (PI. i, fig. 2). Imperata cylindrica var. Koenigii
is the dominant species in the ground flora, forming very dense stands; other
species are Botrychium australe, Pteridium aquilinum and Hibbertia volubilis.

In addition to the typical Eucalypt-forest species, a number of species occur
around the edge of the rain-forest which are intrusive from it. Of these the tree-

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. 5

fern Alsophila australis is one of the most conspicuous, forming communities in
advance of the rain-forest in sheltered localities (Pl. ix, fig. 19, in Fraser and
Vickery, 1938), associated with Culcita dubia.

(bo) The Forests of the Valley Sides at 1,400-3,000 feet.

At about 1,200 feet on dry slopes and 1,500 feet on sheltered slopes, the
Hucalyptus saligna—Syncarpia laurifolia forest grades into a forest in which
EH. campanulata, E. punctata and E. acmenioides occur. The gradation takes place
over a vertical range of about 300 feet or more because of the variability in the
range of EH. saligna. An approximately complete list of the species occurring in
this part of the forest is given in Table 1, column 2.

This part of the forest is dominated by Hucalyptus campanulata and HE.
punctata. It is of considerable extent, occupying the crests and upper slopes of
the lower ranges and extending upwards to an altitude of 3,000 feet. It occupies
soil derived at the lower levels from mudstone, and at the upper levels from
basalt, but, as far as could be seen, the change of soil type exerted little or no
influence on the flora over this area.

The composition of the forest varies from place to place, largely as the result
of aspect.

Eucalyptus acmenioides is confined to the lower sheltered parts of slopes,
particuiarly easterly-facing slopes, where it merges into the EH. saligna association
(Pl. i, fig. 4). In places it forms almost a pure community, but at higher altitudes
it is associated with HL. campanulata (Pl. i, fig. 5). It appears to have higher soil-
moisture requirements than H. campanulata. E. Wilkinsoniana also occupies the
lower slopes (PI. i, fig. 5), but is confined to areas of high soil-moisture as well as
shelter. On sunny, dry, westerly-facing slopes H. acmenioides may be lacking or
very scanty, and the #. saligna association grades almost directly into the
EH. campanulata—E. punctata association.

E. campanulata is the most abundant species, and is found throughout the
association, particularly on westerly-facing or upper slopes (PI. i, fig. 8), where
it occurs in an almost pure state. It does not grow at low altitudes on shaded
slopes, but comes down to 1,200 feet on westerly-facing slopes, which are light
and well-drained. It is not found around moist, sheltered, shady gullies even as
high as 1,800 feet. H. punctata prefers sunny, fairly moist localities (PI. i, fig. 6).
It is common on ridges, especially on the Chichester Range (PI. i, fig. 7), but is
absent from the driest parts of the ridge tops (PI. i, fig. 8). It extends upwards
to an altitude of 2,000 feet only.

Of the smaller trees, Casuarina torulosa is the only species occurring in this
part of the forest. It is more abundant on sheltered northerly- and easterly-facing
hillsides in regions of relatively abundant moisture (PI. i, fig. 5), and is relatively
less important on southerly- and westerly-facing slopes. It does not extend upwards
beyond an altitude of about 2,000 feet.

The tree stratum forms a closed or nearly closed canopy. The height of the
trees varies from 120 feet on the lower slopes to 60 feet on the crests and flat tops
of ridges. The lateral spread of each tree may be considerable, especially on ridge
tops. The density is much the same as in the Eucalyptus saligna forest in the
same locality, averaging 4:12 trees per 1,000 square feet, and ranging from 1 to 6
per 1,000 square feet.

Above 2,000 feet the forest consists almost entirely of Eucalyptus campanulata,
until about 3,000 feet, where it gives place rather abruptly to the next type of

6 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

forest. The abruptness of this transition is much more marked than the transition
between the #. saligna and EL. campanulata forest types.

The tall-shrub stratum is very discontinuous and scanty. Acacia mollissima
forms local thickets, but these are not of wide extent and may have resulted from
burning. Persoonia linearis and Xanthorrhoea resinosa are present on sheltered
slopes.

The low-shrub stratum is also discontinuous and scanty, but is more abundant
than the tall-shrub stratum. It is best developed in regions of greatest light, such
as on the crests of spurs, where Leucopogon lanceolatus, Oxylobium trilobatum and
other shrubs may form local thickets. A few less xeromorphic species such as
Indigofera australis and Desmodium rhytidophyllum appear to be restricted to
shaded, humid slopes.

In the ground stratum Poa caespitosa and Lomandra longifolia are most
important at higher levels. Other grasses, including IJmperata cylindrica var.
Koenigii, Themeda australis and Microlaena stipoides, are dominant, especially at
lower levels. These form a continuous ground-cover which is rather thin, especially
on well-drained, shaded slopes. Moist areas support a denser cover, the more
common species being Desmodium spp., Viola spp., Podolepis acuminata and
Lagenophora Billardieri, in addition to the above-mentioned grasses. Culcita dubia
forms dense communities above the rain-forest margin in humid parts.

(c) The Forests of the Upper Spurs.

Below 3,000 feet zonation of the Hucalypt species is rather masked by the
differential effect of aspect on the various species, but above that level it is most
conspicuous. The forest consists of successive zones of different species. The
lowest zone is formed by #. obliqua, which occupies the crests and upper slopes of
the ranges approaching the plateau between 2,800 feet and 3,500 feet. The average
tree-height is about 80 feet and diameter 2 to 3 feet. The canopy is fairly thick
and continuous or nearly so. Because this forest type occurs mainly on the ridge
tops and upper slopes, a considerable amount of light reaches the ground stratum.
This region also, since it occurs at high altitudes, probably receives more rain
than the lower spurs and ranges. In addition the soil is derived from basalt and
has a high water-retaining capacity. These factors of high soil-moisture and
strong light intensity lead to an extensive development of the ground flora. This
is very dense, much more so than in the lower forests, the average height being
12 to 18 inches.

The transition from the Hucalyptus campanulata forest to the EH. obliqua forest
takes place over a vertical range of about 100 feet, and in this zone the two
species occur mingled together. The other tree species of the H#. campanulata
zone do not extend upwards to this altitude. H. saligna, however, which reaches
its Maximum development in the valley at 1,000 feet, extends upwards to the
#. obliqua zone along sheltered creek sides to 3,000 feet (PI. ii, fig. 10).

At about 3,500 feet H. obliqua gives place to EL. viminalis. The transition zone
is fairly wide, taking place over a vertical range of about 250 feet. In the greater
part of this zone the two species are present in about equal amounts (PI. i, fig. 11).
The trees are spaced to about the same degree as in the lower forest, and have an
average height of about 80 feet and a diameter of 2-2-5 feet. The canopy on the
whole is rather thinner than that of the H. obliqua forest, but is continuous or
nearly so.

The associated shrubs and herbs are similar in both the Hucalyptus viminalis
and the #. obliqua forests. A list of the most prominent species is given in Table 1,

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. U

column 8. Some of these are of special interest. Hakea eriantha, a diffuse shrub
attaining a height of about 10 feet, has a sporadic distribution between 3,000 and
3,500 feet. Acacia melanoxylon is common throughout both forests in regions of
specially high soil-moisture. It attains the dimensions of a small tree, 20 to 25
feet in height with a diameter of 10 inches. This species occurs in the valley
below the sub-tropical rain-forest at 800 to 900 feet, chiefly along river banks, but
it is absent from the lower Hucalypt associations. Acacia floribunda has a very
limited vertical range, forming thickets at about 3,000 feet. Banksia integrifolia,
growing to a tree 30 to 35 feet high, is a conspicuous member of both forests
(Pl. ii, fig. 12). It reaches its maximum development in the Hucalyptus viminalis
forest, but extends upwards beyond its limits, and in places also downwards as far
as the EH. campanulata forest.

The low shrubs, of which Leucopogon lanceolatus is the most common, are
scanty, forming occasional communities. Senecio amygdalifolius, S. dryadeus and
Olearia Nernstii, forming shrubs up to 5 feet in height, are locally common. The
ground flora is very dense and continuous. Poa caespitosa and Lomandra longifolia
are .o-dominants. Scattered throughout this community are single plants and
small groups of WHibbertia volubilis, Dianella coerulea, Scutellaria humilis,
Plectranthus parviflorus, Festuca Hookeriana (?), Pteridium aquilinum and
Helichrysum lucidum. These are specially common on moist slopes where the soil
is rather shallow and continual seepage of water takes place; in addition, Ajuga
australis, Crassula Sieberiana, Luzula campestris, the ferns Asplenium flabelli-
folium, Pleopeltis diversifolia, Polystichum aculeatum, and the trailing Angiosperms
Tecoma australis, Rubus parvifolius and Smilax australis are frequent.

The large number of ferns in the Eucalyptus obliqua—E. viminalis forests can
be related to the very moist conditions prevailing there, this region being within
the mist belt. Above this, though the conditions are no less moist, the ferns are
less frequent, probably because of the colder temperatures. The moist conditions
are reflected in the large number of mosses present on exposed rock surfaces and
the lower parts of tree trunks.

(d@) The Hucalyptus fastigata Forest.

At an altitude of 4,200—4,500 feet there is a considerable area to the south-east,
east and north-east of the highest part of the plateau occupied by a distinctive
forest in which Hucalyptus fastigata is dominant. EH. viminalis is present as a sub-
dominant species in the lower part of this forest, but does not extend upwards
above 4,300 feet. This region is fairly flat for the most part, constituting the tops
of the ridges diverging from the plateau whose sides are occupied by sub-antarctic
rain-forest and by the #. obliqua—E. viminalis forests. The soil is particularly
moist and the whole habitat distinctly more sheltered and less cold than the actual
plateau. It is chiefly this forest area which is being invaded by the beech forest
(see Fraser and Vickery, 1938) (PI. ii, fig. 14). The transition between it and the
E. viminalis forest is not abrupt, considerable mixing taking place in the ecotone
region. On slopes or areas exposed to the action of the westerly wind this forest
type is replaced by communities of Hucalyptus paucifiora invading from the plateau
forest.

The trees of the H. fastigata forest average 60 to 80 feet in height and have a
diameter of 2 to 3 feet (Pl. ii, fig. 13). The canopy is nearly closed but not dense.
The ground flora is particularly well developed. The important component species
are shown in Table 1, column 4. The low-shrub communities are rather more
common and better developed than in the lower forests, forming mixed or pure

8 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. ITI,

communities over considerable areas. The individual plants are often evenly
scattered. The tree-fern Dicksonia antarctica is common in damp areas, together
with Polystichum aculeatum and such herbs as Stellaria flaccida and Veronica
calycina. The herb stratum is dense and continuous. Poa caespitosa is perhaps
slightly more abundant than Lomandra longifolia over most of the area. The
bracken fern Pteridium aquilinum is fairly widely distributed, but does not form
dense stands here. The only small tree is Banksia integrifolia, which is wide-
spread and fairly abundant.

Tall shrubs, such as occur in the lower forests, are absent, and their place
is taken by a shrub stratum 5 to 8 feet high comprising species which do not
occur at lower altitudes, such as Gaultheria appressa, Drimys purpurascens, and
Olearia spp., which in places form dense thickets. Acacia melanoxylon, Tieghemo-
panax sambucifolius and Lomatia arborescens are also part of this layer. The
species of this stratum are marked off very distinctly from those of the low-shrub
stratum by their larger size and larger leaves. The low-shrub communities are
rather more common and better developed than in the lower forests, forming mixed
or pure communities of large extent. The component species are small, woody
perennials with stiff, small leaves, and rarely exceed 2 feet in height. Lewcopogon
Hookeri and Omphacomeria acerba are amongst the most important.

(e) The Vegetation of the Plateau.
1. The Eucalypt forest.

The plateau region at an altitude of 4,500 to 5,000 feet is exposed to consider-
able wind action, and is the only area in this region where snow lies for more
than a few days at a time. At 4,500 feet the H. fastigata forest gives place to the
typical forest of the Barrington Tops Plateau, in which E. pauciflora is the
dominant species. On northerly, fairly sheltered slopes this species may attain a
height of 60 feet and a diameter of 2 feet (PI. ii, fig. 16). It becomes smaller with
increasing exposure, and at 5,000 feet rarely exceeds 40 feet in height (PI. ii,
fig. 15). It is commonly rather gnarled and twisted. Possibly owing to the action
of wind and snow and also to the rather brittle nature of the branches, fallen trees
and broken limbs are a conspicuous feature of this forest community (PI. ii, figs. 14,
16, 17), and are the more striking because of their absence or rarity in the lower
forests.

The canopy is nearly continuous but very thin, and a considerable amount of
light reaches the ground stratum. Hucalyptus stellulata, the only other tree occur-
ring in this forest, is not a prominent species. It is most commonly found near
water, and forms a community along creek banks and swamp margins.

The species found in this forest are shown in Table 1, column 5. The shrub
strata reach their best development on the eastern and northern slopes of the hills.
There are two strata, similar to those of the H. fastigata forest. The tall-shrub
stratum includes such species as Acacia dealbata, <A. Clunies-Rossiae,
A. melanoxylon, Hakea microcarpa, Persoonia oxycoccoides, Drimys lanceolata,
D. purpurascens, Lomatia arborescens, Hovea longifolia and Olearia spp. Some of
these species, such as Gaultheria appressa, Drimys purpurascens and Olearia spp.,
appear to be relatively restricted to the south-eastern part of the plateau.

The small-shrub stratum includes small, upright, woody perennials such as
Leucopogon Hookeri, Pimelea linifolia and Comesperma sylvestre, and a number of
woody, prostrate or decumbent perennials such as Pultenaea fasciculata,
Leucopogon collinus, Persoonia oxycoccoides and Bossiaea neo-anglica. The
prostrate habit is most marked on wind-swept, exposed hillsides or hill tops. On

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. 9

sheltered slopes the same species may grow to the size of small bushes 2 to 3 feet
in height.

The ground flora is very dense and consists predominantly of Poa caespitosa,
which forms a thick, continuous carpet throughout the whole forest (PI. ii, fig. 16).
A number of herbaceous perennial and annual species and geophytic orchids are
present between the clumps of Poa, the most important being Candollea serrulata,
Ranunculus lappaceus, Lotus corniculatus, Scleranthus biflorus, Prasophyllum spp.,
Lomandra longifolia, Dianella coerulea and Pteridium aquilinum. Glycine
clandestina, Hovea heterophylla, Smilax australis and Rubus parvifolius are
trailing woody or semi-woody perennials mostly forming tangled masses on the
ground stratum, but rarely ascending to the height of 2 to 3 feet over woody
shrubs.

A considerable part of the plateau is composed of grano-dioritic rock and the
remainder of basalt. The forest here described is that developed on the basaltic
part, and a detailed examination of the granitic part has not been made. As far
as could be seen, however, in preliminary surveys, the forest is slightly more open
and the development of the shrub strata is not quite so pronounced on the soils
derived from the granite. The ground flora is scarcely less luxuriant and appears
to have a similar composition.

2. The swamps at the head-waters of the Barrington River.

As previously described (Fraser and Vickery, 1937), the Barrington Tops
Plateau consists of rounded hills up to 200 feet high covered by Hucalyptus
paucifiora forest. The southern part of the plateau is drained by a system of small,
permanently running streams which converge to form the upper Barrington River.
In the flatter places these streams are bordered by swamps, varying in size from a
few square yards to a hundred acres or more (PI. iii, figs. 21, 22, 23). The largest
swamps occur along the main stream. They are not all at the same level. The
successive swamps along the upper Barrington River are progressively lower,
while those of the tributary streams may be at a much higher level than those
of the main stream. The actual depth of the swamps does not appear to be more
than 10 feet in any case, and is sometimes not more than 1 to 2 feet in the case
of the restricted areas of swamps fringing the smaller streams.

After leaving the swamps the Barrington River plunges into a deep and
inaccessible gorge dissecting the plateau edge on the eastern edge. Consequently
there has been a slow cutting-back and deepening of the river bed progressively
from the top of the gorge along the plateau for several miles. This has resulted
in the partial or complete drainage of much land which appears to have been at
one time occupied by typical swamp. Entrenchment is very slow and in this
partly dissected region the river has deep, still pools alternating with short
stretches of rapids (Pl. ii, fig. 18, Pl. iii, fig. 19).

A distinct and very dense river-bank flora composed of shrubs up to 10 feet
high occupies the steep sides of the upper gorge below the level of the swamps.
The following species are common: Baeckea Gunniana var. latifolia, Leptospermum
myrtifolium, Callistemon pallidus, Prostanthera lasianthos, Oxylobium ellipticum
var. alpinum, Olearia chrysophylla, Phebalium squamulosum and some Dicksonia
antarctica. This gives way further down the gorge to beech forest particularly rich
in tree-ferns (Dicksonia antarctica). A prominent feature of this phase of the
river-bank flora is the presence of large and numerous plants of a stocky tree-fern,
Todea barbara. This does not occur in any other part of the beech forest or sub-
tropical rain-forest, and in this area is restricted to siliceous soil.

10 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

Undrained swamps occur around the actual head-waters of the Barrington
River (Pl. iii, fig. 21). Here the water table is permanently high, much of the
vegetation being just above the water level (Pl. iii, fig. 23). The main constituent
of the swamps is the moss Sphagnum, which forms compact hummocks in places
protruding above the water level. These support a large variety of geophytic and
hemicryptophytie plants which flourish in the swamp only in these slightly drier
areas, such as Lagenophora Billardieri, Prasophyllum spp., Asperula conferta,
Microtis spp., Ranunculus lappaceus, Euphrasia Brownii var., Utricularia dichotoma,
Scaevola Hookeri, Deyeuxia breviglumis, Cardamine hirsuta var. tenuifolia
and Plantago spp. In the partly submerged areas between these hummocks Carex
cernua var. lobolepis and Scirpus Brownii form a continuous stratum, with
seattered communities of Restio australis, Juncus falcatus, J. pallidus, Claytonia
australasica, Euphrasia Brownii var., and Utricularia dichotoma. Carex Brownii
is especially common along the margins of the streams. Myriophyllum peduncu-
latum is common in the smaller, shallow creeks, where it often forms with
Sphagnum compact, cushion-like masses at the level of the running water.

A definite border community, comprising small, woody shrubs and a number
of herbs, occupies the edges of the swamps and any elevated, dry parts within
them (Pl. iii, fig. 21). Around small swamps the border may not exceed a foot
Or so in width. The constituent species are Poa caespitosa, Epacris spp., Hypolaena
lateriflora, Oreomyrrhis andicola, Ajuga australis, Erigeron pappochromus,
Scleranthus biflorus, Velleya montana, Scaevola Hookeri and Plantago spp. The
moss Polytrichum australe frequently forms a definite community behind the border
herbs and shrubs. In some cases, especially around very large swamps, the border
community may be 30 to 40 yards wide, consisting predominantly of Hypolaena,
with scattered plants of Hpacris spp. (PI. iii, fig. 21).

3. The creek-edge communities.

Some of the species found in the swamp edge also form communities along
the banks of the slightly swampy creeks which drain the upper parts of the hills
(Pl. iii, fig. 19). Here they become taller and more robust than around the
margins of the swamps. This is probably largely due to the greater degree of
shelter received by them.

A number of species are present in the creek-bank flora which are not usually
found bordering the swamps. These are Billardiera longiflora, Leptospermum
myrtifolium, Prostanthera lasianthos, Olearia chrysophylla, Baeckea Gunniana var.
latifolia, Coprosma spp. and Hpacris microphylla var. rhombifolia. These
communities rarely extend more than 8 to 6 feet on either side of the creek, and
have a maximum height of 6 to 7 feet. They grade into a second type of creek-
bank flora which appears to require more shelter. This is found only along fairly
large, non-swampy creeks well entrenched between sheltering hills, and enclosed
on either side by Hucalypt forest (Pl. ii, fig. 17). This community reaches a
maximum height of about 30 feet. It is of mixed origin, in part consisting of
elements from the beech forest, and in part of true alpine species not found in the
main beech forest. It has been described briefly in a previous paper (Fraser and
Vickery, 1938).

The species occurring here are Nothofagus Moorei, Prostanthera lasianthos,
Elaeocarpus holopetalus, Atherosperma moschatum, Libertia pulchella, Uncinia
riparia, Hierochloa redolens and Polystichum aculeatum. On the plateau this
community is never very dense. As the main beech forest is approached it becomes
more and more like it in composition and structure, and finally the plateau species,

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. 11

notably Prostanthera lasianthos, disappear entirely or are found only as border
communities.

4. The grassland community.

Though the forest extends to the margins of the larger, non-swampy streams
draining the hills, it does not extend down to the edges of the swamps, but ceases
abruptly at a vertical level of about 20 to 30 feet above them (PI. iii, figs. 21,
22, 23). The tree level is relatively higher above the larger swamps than above
the smaller ones (cf. Pl. iii, figs. 21 and 23). Thus an area of grassland of
varying width borders all the swamps.

The grassland is composed of species which form the low-shrub and herb strata
in the forest, but not in the same proportions (for comparison see Table 1, columns
5 and 6). The grassland is more compact and lower in habit than the ground
stratum in the forest. The principal and dominant species Poa caespitosa forms
a continuous cover (PI. iii, fig. 20). In this occur isolated individuals, clumps or
societies of other species. The species present are shown in Table 1, column 5. A
few species are apparently restricted to the grassland. Of these Hxocarpus nana
is the most noteworthy.

The habit of these species is chiefly very low; only a few exceed one foot in
height. The community includes small, prostrate herbs such as Scleranthus
biflorus and Scaevola Hookeri, rosette herbs such as Ranunculus lappaceus and
Plantago spp., and small, woody perennials such as Hxocarpus nana, Pultenaea
fasciculata, Pimelea linifolia and Comesperma sylvestre.

5. Change of swamp to grassland and grassland to forest.

The first stages in swamp reclamation are shown in those swamps along the
course of the river just below the undrained swamps. In the main swamps the
water level of the draining stream is as high as the water level in the swamp
(Pl. iii, fig. 23). The first sign of reclamation is the entrenchment of the stream
and the consequent draining of the upper levels of the swamp (PI. iii, fig. 24).
As a result of this action the Sphagnum dies out, persisting in the damper depres-
sions till a relatively late stage. Hypolaena laterifiora, Epacris spp. and Poa
caespitosa become established over the greater part of the reclaimed area, but
Utricularia dichotoma, Claytenia- australasica, Restio australis and the sedges
disappear. A few species which may have been present in the higher places
before draining commenced persist throughout the process, eg. Scaevola Hookeri,
Geranium pilosum and Ranunculus lappaceus.

When the river is more entrenched, to a depth of about 3 to 4 feet, Hypolaena
lateriflora and Epacris spp. disappear, Poa caespitosa becomes dominant, and the
grassland species, e.g., Pimelea linifolia, Comesperma sylvestre, Hakea microcarpa
and Candollea serrulata make their appearance. Eucalyptus stellulata becomes
established along the banks of the streams (PI. iii, figs. 25, 26).

Drained swamps passing to forest can be seen as wide, flat plains on the side
of the river (Pl. iii, fig. 25). At this stage the river is entrenched about 10 to 12
feet, and Hucalyptus paucifilora seedlings are becoming established on these grassy
flats.

6. River flora.

In the parts of the river draining the upper swamps, the flow of water is fairly
swift, and Myriophyllum pedunculatum is the only aquatic Angiosperm species.
Further down where the stream is slightly entrenched (PI. iii, fig. 26), large,

12 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

relatively still pools occur, and in these Potamogeton tricarinatus and Ranunculus
rivularis are also present.

7. The flora of the western part of the plateau.

The Barrington Tops Plateau falls away rapidly on its western side, where it
is drained by the upper Hunter River and its tributaries (Pl. xiv, fig. 3, in Fraser
and Vickery, 1937). The rainfall on these western slopes is less than that of the
eastern, southern and north-eastern slopes, and the evaporation rate is high, as the
slopes are exposed to the full action of the westerly winds. This country has been
extensively cleared for grazing.

The tree association is different from that found on the other slopes of the
plateau, and is definitely related to that found on the central-western parts of the
Main Dividing Range. Because of the amount of clearing which has taken place,
it is not possible to determine exactly the nature of the original vegetation.

The following species of Hucalyptus occur: EH. sideroxylon, E. crebra, E.
melanophloia, HE. melliodora, E. laevopinea and E. Stuartiana. The association
appears to have been of the open forest or woodland type, with strong development
of grasses, such as Aristida spp., Dichanthium sericeum, Bothriochloa decipiens,
Danthonia spp. and Eragrostis spp. Poa caespitosa is absent. Casuarina Cunning-
hamiana occurs along river banks, and Angophora subvelutina on river flats.

The Hucalyptus pauciflora forest persists to the edge of the plateau, with a
characteristic undergrowth of Poa caespitosa. Acacia dealbata is the most common
shrub, which seems to indicate a great degree of disturbance by fire.

(f) Regeneration in the EHucalypt Forest.

The Eucalypt forests are, except for the lowest associations, uncleared and
relatively undisturbed, except for occasional fires which destroy the undergrowth.
The woody species quickly regenerate. Large stands of Acacia mollissima result
in the lower forest, and of A. dealbata in the plateau forest. Hucalyptus saplings
are not common in the forest between 1,800 and 4,800 feet, but are locally abundant
below 1,800 feet in parts of the H. saligna forest, where trees have been felled.

In the Hucalyptus pauciflora forest, chiefly above 4,800 feet, where the canopy
is light, Hucalyptus seedlings are quite common. This forest is subject to occasional
burns and slight grazing by cattle. These do not seem to have had a modifying
influence on the vegetation as a whole, but the burning may be partly responsible
for the large numbers of Hucalyptus seedlings.

Except for occasional plants of Erechtites arguta and Taraxacum officinale, and
in the upper forests Picris hieracioides, no plants not native to the area have
become established in the main part of the forest. The plateau forest ‘and the
swamps, being subjected to grazing, have a few aliens established, of which the
most important are Trifolium repens and Sonchus oleraceus.

Conclusions.
(a) The Eucalypt Forest Associations.

With the possible exception of the association of the western slopes of the
plateau, the various types of Eucalypt forest here described all belong to the one
formation, as all have a similar structure and appearance, though varying in height
and density. The Hucalyptus pauciflora forest is the most open, and in places
on some granite hillsides approaches in structure the open forest or woodland type.

Owing to the vertical sequence of species, each type of Eucalyptus forms a
nearly pure consociation over most of its range in the area studied. An attempt

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. 13

has been made to group them into associations compatible with associations
elsewhere. Owing to the broken nature of the topography of the east coast and
highlands of New South Wales and the variety of climatological and soil habitats,
the associations are often fragmentary in their occurrence. It is unlikely that a
complete understanding of the associations and the principles underlying their
distribution will be reached until ecological surveys of many more areas are
available. The associations tentatively recognized in this area are interpreted as
being local expressions of widely occurring associations. Hlsewhere they rarely
occur in vertical sequence in adjoining areas, as they do here, and there are
considerable differences in detail, especially in the ground- and shrub-strata. This
is probably due to the interaction of the associations and invasion from one to
another, but may also be due in part to the fact that the Williams River forests are
developed under very favourable soil and water conditions, which stimulate the
development of a luxuriant ground flora.
Five main associations have been recognized in this area:

1.—Eucalyptus pauciflora and EH. stellulata form a natural association on the
plateau and are widespread in the colder parts of the dividing range from the
New England Tableland to Victoria. Poa caespitosa, which is the chief element
of the ground flora, extends throughout the range of the association as a sub-
dominant. This type of association is here classed as forest, but in many parts
of New South Wales it approaches the savannah woodland in structure.

2.— Eucalyptus viminalis and EH. obliqua occur here mixed over a considerable area,
though to a certain extent they occupy a different height range. They are inter-
preted as forming part of a large and widespread H. viminalis—E. obliqua
association characteristic of fairly well watered soils in cool localities from
Tasmania, South Australia and Victoria at low elevations, and at increasingly
high elevations on the New South Wales Dividing Range to as far north as
Dorrigo. Both species occur throughout the whole range of the association. In
other localities associated Hucalypts are H. rubida, EH. dives and H. Blakelyi towards
the drier parts of its range, and H. radiata and H. fastigata towards the colder
parts of its range. ,

H. fastigata, which in the area under investigation forms an almost pure
consociation, is characteristic of well watered soils at high elevations on the
southern and central highlands of New South Wales. It is frequently associated
with H. viminalis, EH. obliqua and EH. Dalrympleana, and may perhaps best be
regarded as a consociation within the #. viminalis—EH. obliqua association, occurring
only in cool localities which receive a well distributed rainfall.

3.—Eucalyptus acmenioides, EH. Wilkinsoniana and EH. punctata are part of an
association of which H. acmenioides, H. punctata and H. carnea are dominants
occurring on fairly heavy, moderately moist soils on the north coast of New South
Wales. It is essentially an association of warm climates, and is present here in a
depauperated form. To the north #. propinqua takes the place of H. punctata, and
#. carnea also occurs. EH. punctata extends southwards, where it occurs on fairly
well watered and well drained sandy soils, on the margins of other associations.

EH. campanulata may best be considered as forming part of this association,
occurring along the upper limits of its range. It occurs at comparable positions
at Comboyne, the upper Hastings River, and other parts of the northern tablelands.

4.—Hucalyptus saligna and Syncarpia laurifolia are the dominant species of a very
well marked association restricted to deep, rich soils in well watered areas,

14 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

especially on the northern parts of the coast. 2H. grandis, EH. microcorys,
E. paniculata and E. pilularis also form part of this association in other localities.

5.—Eucalyptus hemiphloia and E. tereticornis form extensive associations on clay
and sandy soil in the drier parts of the coast. #H. maculata is often associated
with these species.

Casuarina Cunninghamiana forms a river-bank community, and Angophora
subvelutina and Eucalyptus amplifolia river-flat communities occurring widely
throughout the forest associations of the coast and highlands.

(bd) Extent of the Associations.

The distribution and extent of the various associations in the Hucalypt-forest
formation are governed by the individual requirements of the dominant species.
The main factors governing distribution here are altitude and therefore
temperature, and soil moisture. Hach species has a different optimum temperature
and soil-moisture requirement. The area offers a number of types of environment,
the plateau being cold, the upper slopes cool and the lower slopes both warmer
and drier than the upper. Since in this area good soil-moisture conditions prevail
except on the slopes below 2,000 feet, temperature appears to be the main
controlling influence, with soil-moisture conditions second in importance. This is
evident from the vertical sequence of the forest above that level.

The boundary between the Hucalyptus saligna and the #. campanulata forest
is probably conditioned by soil moisture rather than by temperature, as EZ. saligna
occurs sporadically in the better watered parts of the slopes upwards to the lower
edges of the #. obliqua zone. It appears probable that the upward extent of the
E. campanulata and E. saligna forests is limited by frost, for within their canopies
frost does not form at ground level. Within the H. acmenioides—E. punctata
association distribution is conditioned by aspect, i.e, exposure to evaporation
with its consequent effect on soil moisture and transpiration. This is very easily
seen as the spurs and hollows provide a number of habitats in close proximity, and
the change from one type of community to another, such as a community of
EBucalyptus acmenioides with Casuarina torulosa on a north-eastern slope to a
community of #. campanulata and LE. punctata on the crest of a spur or a western
slope, is very evident.

The only soil type is clay loam, below 2,000 feet derived from mudstone and
alluvium, and above 2,000 feet from basalt. On the northern part of the plateau,
outside the area considered in detail in this paper, the soil is a sandy loam
derived from grano-diorite. None of the species of Hucalyptus here mentioned are
restricted to basaltic soils, but many other species which occur elsewhere in
association with them are not found on this soil type. Thus while temperature
and rainfall are the main factors controlling the distribution of the associations,
soil type may exert a considerable influence on the distribution of the species
within it. The limited variety of soil types found in this area may therefore
account for the fragmentary nature of the associations.

(c) Distribution of Shrubs and Ground Flora.

As far as the dominant Hucalyptus species are concerned the associations are
fairly well defined. This does not apply equally to the undergrowth, as can be
seen from a consideration of Table 1.

There appear to be two main types of undergrowth: (a) characteristic of low
altitudes, and (0) characteristic of the sub-alpine forests. The floras of the inter-
vening associations are mixtures, in various proportions, of these, together with a
very few additional localized species. It can be seen at once that a fair proportion

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. 15

are limited in upward extent by cold temperature, i.e., by approximately the lowest
limit of the formation of snow. A considerable number, however, range from
plateau to valley floor. With the exception of Poa caespitosa and Lomandra
longifolia, these are species of minor importance.

It can be seen that a greater number of species is restricted to the higher
altitudes than to the lower, and that there is a greater total number of species
occurring at the higher levels than at the lower. This is probably due to the
greater amount of light and moisture available in the upper forests. The greatest
development of shrubs in the lower forest takes place in areas of greatest moisture
and shade. The species are quite distinct from those of the upper forest and are
much more mesophytic.

The species restricted to the higher altitudes here are for the most part
restricted to high altitudes elsewhere in the State, but a few, such as
Sphaerolobium vimineum, Candollea serrulata, Lotus corniculatus and Pimelea
linifolia, are commonly found at low levels along parts of the coast.

(d) Swamps.

The swamps of the Barrington Tops Plateau are similar in many respects
to those occurring on the Kosciusko Plateau in the extreme southern part of the
State, but they lack the diversity of species characteristic of these more alpine
regions. The bog moss Sphagnum is the main constituent of the wettest parts in
both localities. A similar ecotone or margin community is formed by Hypolaena
lateriflora and Poa caespitosa, with Hypolaena extending further into the swamps
than Poa. Such species as Oreomyrrhis andicola, Euphrasia Brownti var., Restio
australis and the moss Polytrichum commune occur in both areas in this type of
habitat. EHpacris serpyllifolia and Epacris paludosa, which are important members
of the margin community at Kosciusko, are replaced on the Barrington Tops
Plateau by EHpacris breviflora and Epacris microphylla var. rhombifolia, and
Plantago stellaris and P. Brownii are replaced by P. palustris. A number of
margin and swamp species present on the Barrington Tops do not occur at
Kosciusko.

(e) Species Common to Swamp and Forest.

The species found both in the swamps and in the forests of the Barrington
Tops Plateau are shown in Table 2. Some of these, such as Deyeuxia
breviglumis, Cardamine hirsuta var. tenuifolia, Scaevola Hookeri, Asperula conferta
and Prasophyllum spp. have the same appearance in both habitats. A number,
however, are slightly modified. Halorrhagis micrantha, Hydrocotyle hirta, Ajuga
australis, Ranunculus lappaceus, Viola hederacea and Lagenophora Billardieri are
dwarfed, with smaller leaves and flowers, when growing in the swamp. Hpilobiwm
glabellum on the other hand produces larger flowers and has a more vigorous
growth form in the swamp than in the forest.

The absence of Hucalyptus paucifiora from the region immediately surrounding
the swamps is probably due to the waterlogging of the soil. This conclusion was
also reached by McLuckie and Petrie (1927) in connection with the swamps at
Kosciusko. E. stellulata appears to be capable of growing under conditions of
greater soil moisture than #. pauciflora, as it is common along the margins of
streams and parts of the swamps.

(f) Floristic Relationships.
1. The lower Eucalypt-forest.
The shrubs and herbs of the lower Eucalypt-forest are for the most part

16 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

widely distributed elsewhere. Except for a few cosmopolitan species, they form,
together with the species of Hucalyptus, a part of the ‘Australian Flora” (Maiden,
1914). The distribution of a few species is, however, of special interest.

Acacia elata occurs sparingly around the rain-forest margins at 2,000 feet and
below. This is the most northerly occurrence of this species, which elsewhere
appears to be restricted to cool, moist, sandy soils from Gosford south to
Illawarra, and is specially common on the Blue Mountains.

The distribution of Banksia integrifolia is particularly interesting. This
species occurs commonly along the coast of New South Wales in positions close to
the salt water, and reappears again in the Hucalyptus viminalis association at
elevations of 3,000 feet and above on the northern tablelands.

Acacia dealbata and A. melanoxylon are both southern species, reaching their
best development in Tasmania, where they attain the dimensions of trees of 50 feet
and 100 feet respectively. A. dealbata is characteristic of cold localities of moderate
to good rainfall in light forest associations. The distribution of A. melanoxylon
appears to be limited more by rainfall than by temperature, though it is best
developed in cold localities. It is restricted to areas of fairly high rainfall. In the
Williams River district it is most abundant in the upper forests. At 4,500 to 5,000
feet it forms a shrub 6 to 8 feet high, and at 3,500 to 4,000 feet a small tree up
to 25 feet. It is also present occasionally in the lower sub-tropical rain-forest,
where it attains a height of 40 to 50 feet. Its absence from the Hucalyptus
campanulata—E. acmenioides forest must be attributed to the greater degree of
dryness obtaining there.

Tieghemopanax sambucifolius, Rapanea variabilis, Celastrus Cunningham
and Breynia oblongifolia are found in shady, moist areas throughout the coastal
forests. They are especially well developed along creeks. Tieghemopanax
sambucifolius, which is present sparingly in light places in the lower sub-tropical
rain-forest and extends to 4,500 feet, has the greatest range.

Leptospermum flavescens is one of the most common tea-trees along creek
banks on the shale and good sandstone soils of the central coast district. In this
area it occurs only in a restricted range at 4,500 feet.

Lomatia arborescens has the same distribution and form in this locality as has
Acacia melanoxylon. In the sub-tropical and sub-antarctic rain-forests it attains
the dimensions of a tree, but at higher altitudes, where, on account of the greater
rainfall, it is also present in the Eucalypt forest, it is a shrub 6 to 8 feet high.
This species is restricted to comparable areas on the northern tablelands, such
as at Barrington Tops, the Williams River, Comboyne and Dorrigo, but it is rather
closely allied to L. longifolia, a river bank species extending to Victoria and best
developed in the fern gullies there.

2. The sub-alpine forest and swamps.

The Australian Alps in the southern part of the State support a flora which
may be termed sub-alpine to alpine, at 5,000 to 7,000 feet. The tree line there
stands at about 6,500 feet, being lower on the western side. The Barrington Tops
Plateau reaches an altitude of only 5,000 feet and does not support a truly alpine
flora of the same extent and purity, nor does a tree line occur, the forest extending
to the highest parts of the plateau.

There appears to be in the herb and shrub communities of the plateau an
admixture of three more or less distinct floral assemblages, (a) sub-alpine,
(6) montane, and (c) coastal. The distribution of the sub-alpine and montane
species is shown in Table 8. The sub-alpine species occurring on the plateau are

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. 117,

found exclusively on high mountain areas on the mainland, or in Tasmania, and
in many cases Barrington Tops is the most northerly recorded locality (see Fraser
and Vickery, 1937a). Important species are Juncus falcatus, Scaevola Hookeri,
Claytonia australasica, Exocarpus nana, Billardiera longifiora, Restio australis,
Lycopodium clavatum var. fastigatum, Gentiana diemensis, Patersonia glauca,
Hakea microcarpa, Baeckea Gunniana var. latifolia, Atherosperma moschatum and
Coprosma spp. Some of these are present aiso on the mountains of the central
part of the coast, but a number are recorded only at Kosciusko and Barrington
Tops, about 300 miles apart in a direct line.

The montane species are found on the New England Tableland or Blue
Mountains, and have no special southern or alpine affinities. They include Bossiaea
neo-anglica, Persoonia oxycoccoides and Comesperma sylvestre.

The third element in the plateau flora includes Lotus corniculatus, Pimelea
linifolia, Sphaerolobium vimineum, Candollea serrulata and Hovea heterophylla.
These species do not occur at lower levels in the Williams River district, but are
found in areas of suitable soil moisture along the coast. Their presence on the
plateau and absence from the lower forests may be due to the greater amount of
water and greater degree of light on the plateau.

A feature of the vegetation of the plateau is the relatively large number of
endemic species or varieties. Drimys purpurascens, Plantago palustris, Diuris
venosa (Rupp, 1937), Prasophyllum Rogersii and possibly the forms of Gentiana
diemensis and Acacia Clunies-Rossiae are restricted to this district.

The plateau is relatively isolated, being connected by lower mountains to the
main range, which is itself lower than the plateau, and is surrounded on all other
sides by low ground. The eroding action of the Hunter and Manning Rivers must
have caused its isolation relatively soon after the conclusion of the uplift which
was responsible for the formation of the main dividing range. The plateau is
higher than any other large land mass north of the Kosciusko Plateau. The nearest
area of similar type is the Ebor district in the New England Tableland, which it
resembles in certain respects. Its altitude and high rainfall therefore seem to
have permitted the survival of many species which are now gone from the
intervening localities.

GENERAL DISCUSSION.
Floristic Relationships of the Formations.

Maiden (1914), Herbert (1935) and others have pointed out that there are
three main elements contributing to the formation of the flora of Australia as
a whole, (a) Indo-Malayan, (0b) Antarctic and (c) Australian. The Indo-Malayan
species are allied to species occurring in the rain-forests of the Malayan
Archipelago, and are regarded as having invaded Australia during the early
Tertiary period along the east coast. The extent of the invasion has varied
throughout subsequent geological history with changing climatic and physiographic
conditions. Since Australia has been separated from the source of this flora since
early Pleistocene times, the actual species and genera, though obviously related
to the tropical families, are mostly endemic to Australia. Relatively few species
are common to Australia and the Malay Archipelago (Merrill, 1923).

While most of the Indo-Malayan species are found only as members of the
rain-forests of the coast, a number have become adapted to the more rigorous
conditions of the drier Hucalypt forests. Examples of these are Flindersia maculosa
in New South Wales and southern Queensland, Atalaya hemiglauca in western
New South Wales, and Alphitonia excelsa, Ficus rubiginosa and Alectryon

D

18 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

subdentatus on the western slopes of northern New South Wales. Others, which
are perhaps intermediate in requirements between the rain-forest and Eucalypt-
forest representatives of the Indo-Malayan flora, reach their best development in
the more sunny, marginal parts of rain-forests; others again are restricted to
river banks.

The Australian Flora is supposed by Andrews (1913, 1914, 1916) to have
arisen in Western Australia in the early Tertiary, such families as the
Epacridaceae, Proteaceae, sections of the Myrtaceae, Rutaceae and Leguminosae
being best represented. Andrews postulates that this flora came to occupy the
western and the poorer, drier soils of the eastern part of Australia, while the
rain-forest of Indo-Malayan species occupied the better eastern soils.

Within the eastern part of the Australian flora a certain degree of
specialization has taken place, a number of species being restricted to such
habitats as alpine, desert, river bank, etc. As Herbert (1935) has pointed out,
the rain-forests have been augmented by additions from the Australian flora
which have become adapted to life under rain-forest conditions, and do not now
occur elsewhere. Intermediate in requirements between these and the species of
the open forests are certain species which are restricted to localities of good soil
and rainfall. They are most common along sheltered water courses and form
what Pidgeon (1938) has called the “gully flora” phase of the Eucalypt-forest
formation. The gully flora is best developed in the southern parts of the State in
localities which are either too cool or too restricted for the development of typical
rain-forest. As can be expected, there is often a considerable admixture with rain-
forest types, especially those characteristic of the margin communities. In the
Williams River rain-forest a number of species are present which are probably
representatives of the gully flora. These are Acacia melanoxylon, Lomatia
arborescens, Pittosporum spp., Tristania laurina, T. conferta and Trochocarpa
laurina. It is often not, possible to decide, on the evidence so far available, from
what system a species may have originated, e.g., Callicoma serratifolia and
Ceratopetalum apetalum, which are common constituents of the gully flora and
rain-forest margin communities, and in places extend into the rain-forest.

The sub-tropical rain-forest margin community is a definite ecological unit,
but the component species are of diverse origin. It has a close relationship with
the gully flora, which may perhaps be regarded as its southern expression. Margin
communities are found bordering rain-forests throughout the coastal districts, and
increase in variety of species to the north.

A similar relationship to that shown to the sub-tropical rain-forest by the
margin community, is shown to the beech forest by a community comprising
Prostanthera lasianthos, Leptospermum flavescens, Hedycarya angustifolia,
Trochocarpa laurina, and the tree-fern Dicksonia antarctica.

Ecological Relationships of the Formations.

So long as a species fits into the general structure of a formation without
disturbing the balance between the different life forms, it can be considered
ecologically to form part of the formation, whatever its geographical associations
may be. If, however, a species occurs in such numbers as to alter the appearance
and destroy the typical structure of the formation, it is desirable to consider the
resultant as a mixed formation. An example of the latter may be seen in the lower
Chichester rain-forest, where Tristania conferta and Eucalyptus saligna form a
type of mixed, open rain-forest with some true Indo-Malayan species.

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. 19

A complete range of forest types between true rain-forest and Eucalypt forest
could be found. In parts of southern Queensland and northern New South Wales
communities occur which appear to be more or less stable and transitional between
the two forest-types. In the southern and central parts of New South Wales the
rain-forests become mixed with addition of margin and gully flora species. At
Mt. Wilson (Brough, McLuckie and Petrie, 1924), for example, the formation has
the structure of a sub-tropical rain-forest, and floristically is a mixture of Indo-
Malayan, Antarctic and Australian elements. The presence of Alsophila australis
and Dicksonia antarctica throughout the Mt. Wilson forest indicates that the
canopy is less dense than that of the pure sub-tropical rain-forests in which these
species never occur, but form communities around the margins.

Similarly in southern Queensland (Herbert, 1936) the sub-antarctic rain-forest
is so mixed with Indo-Malayan species that the structure is greatly modified.

Petrie, Jarrett and Patton (1929) and Patton (1934) have stated that the
plant communities of the moist gullies of the Blacks’ Spur Region and eastern
mountains of Victoria are related structurally and floristically to the Indo-Malayan
rain-forests. The chief structural features of the tropical rain-forest are, however,
almost completely lacking. The canopy formed by the upper tree stratum is,
according to Patton (1934), so broken and discontinuous that a second layer of
tall shrubs has been able to form, and it is these which, by producing a continuous
canopy, are responsible for the reduction of light to the strata below. This is quite
unlike the structure of typical rain-forest. The liane species, whose presence
Patton stresses, are only three in number, and of these Clematis aristata is a
margin or gully flora species. Large lianes such as Vitis spp. and Palmeria
scandens are completely absent. As Herbert (1935) has pointed out, very few
of the species are floristically related to the Indo-Malayan flora, the affinities of
most lying with the Antarctic and Australian elements of the flora. The presence
of the tree-ferns Alsophila australis and Dicksonia antarctica indicates that this is
a less dense community than the true rain-forest. Patton has argued that because
some of the component species show features which are considered to be primitive
and characteristic of tropical countries, such as woodiness of the Compositae, and
large size of the Gramineae, their presence confirms the tropical affinities of the
community. The floristic relationships seem doubtful in view of the complete
absence of similar species from the rain-forests of New South Wales and
Queensland. Even if floristic relationships were stronger, the structure is such
that an ecological relationship seems very distant and slight. Using the system
of nomenclature followed in this paper, the Victorian fern gully association would
be impure sub-antarctic rain-forest, with strong admixture with HEucalypt-forest
gully flora species and a very few species, such as Tieghemopanax sambucifolius,
which may be of Indo-Malayan origin.

Inter-relations of the Formations in the Williams River District.

It can be seen that, given uniform conditions, the rain-forest will advance
over the Eucalypt forest, forming its own interior climate as it advances, and this
is due to the inability of the Hucalypt-forest species to grow under conditions of low
light intensity.

As the advance is relatively slow and the presence of only a few advance
species will provide shelter for a second invasion of perhaps less hardy types, it
follows that aspect is of secondary importance in deciding the composition of the
final forest. Thus, though the advance up one slope may be fast and that up
another very slow, the final result will be a mature forest of similar structure,
and probably composition.

20 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

The sub-tropical rain-forest invades the adjoining formations as a unit. First
tree seedlings and hardy epiphytes become established in the adjoining formation.
These grow and are supplemented, providing a shade that causes the ground flora
of the invaded formation to become weakened. Further shading results in the
elimination of many of these species, and the rain-forest shrubs and herbs take
their place. Epiphytes and lianes follow, and in time a mature forest of typical
structure results. The trees of the invaded formation persist for the length of their
usual lifetime, and then the species die out altogether, unless, like Hucalyptus
saligna and Syncarpia laurifolia, they are able to regenerate.

The history of the Williams River rain-forest cannot, of course, be traced, but
it is evident that much of the ground now covered by rain-forest previously
supported a Eucalypt-forest formation. Fossil evidence from other parts of the
State indicates that rain-forests were at one time far more extensive than they
are at present (Brough, McLuckie and Petrie, 1924). It is suggested that after
the orogenic movements of the late Tertiary, which apparently were the cause of a
retrogression of the rain-forests by providing exposed land masses and alteration
of precipitation, the rain-forests once more commenced to advance. In some areas
their progress was stopped after a while by soil or rainfall conditions, but in other
places, such as the Williams River district, it appears that a steady advance has
taken place ever since.

Life-Form Spectra of the Formations.

The differences between formations are shown often very clearly by
comparisons of life-form spectra, following the method of Raunkiaer (1934).

Table 4 gives the life-form spectra and Pteridophyte quotient of the various
associations of the Hucalypt-forest formation, the total EHucalypt forest and the
sub-alpine swamps, and also, for comparison, the sub-tropical and sub-antarctie
rain-forests. The spectra for the Eucalypt-forest associations are all similar.
The most significant features are the importance of the geophytes, mostly orchids,
especially in the sub-alpine forests, and the relatively few therophytes. The greater
number of nanophytes in the plateau forest is indicative of the greater amount
of light reaching the lower strata there. In the lower forests, chamaephytes are
in excess of hemicryptophytes. This relationship is reversed in the upper forest,
which is to be expected because of the colder conditions obtaining there.

The spectrum for the sub-tropical rain-forest brings out very strongly the
importance of the phanerophytes and epiphytes, and the unimportance of the
chamaephytes and cryptophytes.

When considering the spectra of the sub-tropical and sub-antarctic rain-forests,
the most conspicuous feature is the high Pteridophyte quotient of the latter, though
the actual total number of species is very much fewer. The absence or paucity
of hemicryptophytes, geophytes and therophytes in both rain-forests is a clear
indication of the absence of dry conditions. The greater percentage of
chamaephytes in the sub-antarctic rain-forest is a reflection of the greater amount
of light reaching the ground there.

Allan (1937) has pointed out some of the weaknesses of a system devised with
special reference to the climate of the cold temperate northern hemisphere. His
remarks on the difficulty of classification of and diverse nature of the hemicrypto-
phytes and chamaephytes of the New Zealand flora apply equally to the species
of the Eucalypt forests here discussed, especially those of the sub-alpine forest,
grassland and swamps. The altitudinal distribution of woody chamaephytes is
similar to that found by Allan.

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. ill

When the Hucalypt-forest spectrum is compared with spectra of the flora of
arid parts of Australia (Adamson and Osborn, 1922) the most striking differences
are seen in the chamaephyte and therophyte classes. At Mt. Lofty, South Australia
(Adamson and Osborn, 1924), which has a period of drought during the summer
months, there is a greater proportion of hemicryptophytes and fewer chamaephytes
than in the Williams River forests.

GENERAL SUMMARY.

The area studied includes the upper Williams and Allyn River valleys and
adjacent ranges and the southern part of the Barrington Tops Plateau. This
plateau is an isolated, elevated area of land of mature topography rising to an
altitude of about 5,000 feet and lying at about latitude 32°S. and longitude
151:5°H. It is connected to the main dividing ranges by the Mount Royal Range,
of which it is the southern extension. It is drained on its western and southern
sides by the tributaries of the Hunter River, and on the eastern and north-eastern
sides by the Karuah River and the tributaries of the Manning River. The
topography of the upper valleys draining the plateau is very juvenile, the country
often being very rough.

From about 1,800 feet to the summit of the plateau, the underlying rock is
basaltic, with a large intrusive mass of a dioritic nature. Below this level, in
the valleys and sides of the ridges, Carboniferous limestones and mudstones
outcrop. The soil appears to be of fairly good quality throughout the area studied,
and its water-retaining capacity is high.

The annual rainfall received by the highland mass and the upper parts of the
river valleys draining it is high (probably about 8,000 points p.a.). The average
annual rainfall decreases to the west, south and east of the plateau region, which
is therefore surrounded by a drier zone.

Three plant-formations are present in the area studied: (1) sub-tropical rain-
forest; (2) sub-antarctic rain-forest or beech forest; (3) HEucalypt forest.

The sub-tropical rain-forest is a tall, dense forest composed largely of trees
belonging to many genera and families. The tree stratum is continuous and the
most conspicuous, while the shrub and herb strata are relatively scanty. Lianes
and epiphytic ferns, orchids, mosses and lichens are common. The canopy is very
dense and prevents all but a small proportion of the light from reaching the
ground beneath. The species present show affinities with the species of the flora of
the islands of the Malayan Archipelago.

This forest type occurs in sheltered valleys in the upper. parts of the rivers
draining the southern and eastern parts of the plateau, at an altitude of about
1,000 to 3,000 feet. At the higher altitude it gives place to the sub-antarctic
rain-forest.

The sub-tropical rain-forest is not homogeneous in composition, and no species
assumes any marked degree of dominance. In one area certain species may be
present in large numbers, and in another these species may be absent and different
species numerous. This variation is due in some particular cases to variations
in the habitat; for example, communities of water-loving species are found only
in wet places in the forest. Many other variations, however, are probably due to
chance.

The density of the rain-forest varies from 1:9 to 9:15 trees more than 30 feet
high per 100 square feet, and from 11:74 to 23-49 total trees and tall shrubs per
100 square feet in the areas analysed. The greatest density is found in the main
valley and the least on the slopes at the side of the main valley.

22 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

The sub-tropical rain-forest is advancing over the HEucalypt forest except at
high altitudes, where its advance is stopped by the low temperature. This advance
is possible because the species found in the Eucalypt forest are light-loving forms,
and the establishment of rain-forest species and consequent formation of a dense
canopy cause them to die out. The rapidity of the advance depends on the position,
the most rapid advance taking place on sheltered, moist slopes.

Special features characteristic of the sub-tropical rain-forest, such as lianes,
epiphytes, buttressing of tree trunks, and leaf features, are described.

Regeneration of the sub-tropical rain-forest after partial destruction is
considered.

A comparison is made with the sub-tropical rain-forests of some of the
associated river valleys. The distribution of a number of species is described, and
it is concluded that there has been an invasion of the area by rain-forest species
from the north-east.

The sub-tropical rain-forest becomes less rich in species with increasing
altitude. It ceases at the altitude at which snow forms, and is replaced here by
the sub-antarctic rain-forest. The transition from sub-tropical to sub-antarctic
rain-forest is described.

The sub-antarctic rain-forest is a tree formation dominated by the antarctic
beech Nothofagus Moorei. The canopy is moderately dense and very thick. Strati-
fication is less marked in this forest, and relatively few small trees and shrubs
are present. In wet areas Polystichum aculeatum and the tree-fern Dicksonia
antarctica are common, but they are scarce in areas of good drainage. This
formation occurs on sheltered slopes and along creeks from 3,000 to 5,000 feet.

The density of the sub-antarctic rain-forest is about 2-4 trees and about 4:6 to
7-6 total trees and shrubs per 100 square feet. Lianes are few, and angiospermic
epiphytes are almost absent, probably because of the low temperatures. Epiphytic
mosses and lichens are abundant.

The sub-antarctic rain-forest is advancing over the adjacent Eucalypt-forest
except at its lowest margin, where it is probably stopped by high temperature.

Certain species form definite margin communities round the sub-tropical and
sub-antarctic rain-forests.

The Eucalypt-forest formation surrounds the two rain-forest formations,
occurring in areas of less shelter and moisture. It comprises a tree stratum
consisting of various species of Hucalyptus which form a more or less continuous
but relatively thin canopy, a discontinuous small-tree stratum, a tall-shrub stratum
6 to 8 feet high, a low-shrub stratum and a ground stratum. The shrub strata
are usually discontinuous, but may be continuous over some areas. The ground
stratum is usually continuous. i

The Eucalypt forest occupies the ridge tops and upper slopes from 1,400 to
5,000 feet, and also the valley floor and slopes below 1,000 feet. The largest trees
are found adjacent to the sub-tropical rain-forest in the valley floor and lower
slopes at 1,000 to 1,500 feet. The average tree-height decreases from more than
150 feet on the valley floor to less than 40 feet on the more exposed parts of the
plateau.

The composition of the forest varies with altitude. The following association
groupings have been made:

(1) Hucalyptus tereticornis—E. maculata—E. hemiphloia association, character-
istic of the rather dry valley floor and slopes below 900 feet.

(2) An association characterized by Z. saligna and Syncarpia laurifolia, which
occurs on the lower slopes and valley floors in situations of good soil moisture

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. 23

and shelter at 900 to 1,400 feet. Trees of this association also occur scattered
throughout the sub-tropical rain-forest.

(3) £. punctata—E. acmenioides association with H#. campanulata, BE. Wilkin-
soniana and Casuarina torulosa, characteristic of the ridge tops and slopes from
1,400 to 3,000 feet. In the lower part of this association the Hucalyptus species
occur together, but towards its upper limit it is represented by an almost pure
forest of #. campanulata.

(4) H. obliqua-—E. viminalis association with #H. fastigata, characteristic of
upper spurs and ridges from 3,000 to 4,500 feet. HH. obliqua occupies the lower
altitudes, and H. fastigata forms an almost pure consociation at the higher altitudes
of this association.

(5) H. paucifiora and EH. stellulata association, characteristic of the plateau
forest at 4,500 to 5,000 feet.

In this formation the undergrowth does not vary very much with each
association. Two main types of undergrowth occur, one characteristic of low
altitudes, and another characteristic of high altitudes. The undergrowth at any
particular altitude is largely a mixture in various proportions of these. Some
species range from the valley floor to the plateau. The most important of these is
the “tussock grass” or “snow grass” Poa caespitosa. This is present in the herb
stratum of the valley floor, becomes increasingly important at higher altitudes,
and at 5,000 feet is the most important species in the herb stratum. Shrubs become
more important at high altitudes.

The floras of the swamps and creek banks at the head-waters of the Barrington
River are described, and the successive stages in the drainage of the swamps are
indicated. The swamps are surrounded by a zone of grassland, which separates
them from the E. pauciflora forest, the development of which is apparently limited
by the high water-table around the swamps.

The distribution of the alpine and montane species is discussed. The flora
of the plateau appears to have two main constituents, one which is present also
in the southern alpine regions of New South Wales and in Tasmania, and another
characteristic of high altitudes in the northern parts of New South Wales. As
well as these there are a number of species which also occur near sea level on
parts of the coastal districts.

Lists of species occurring in the various formations and associations described
have been compiled. The life-form spectra of the HEucalypt-forest associations
and of the sub-tropical and sub-antarctic rain-forests are discussed.

In conclusion the writers desire to express their thanks to Professor T. G. B.
Osborn, formerly of the Department of Botany, University of Sydney, for his
interest and helpful criticism during the progress of this work, and to Mr. R. H.
Anderson, Botanist and Curator, National Herbarium, Sydney, and other members
of the Herbarium staff for generous assistance in the identification of many
plants. They are also greatly indebted to many members of the staff and research
students, past and present, of the Department of Botany, University of Sydney,
for assistance in field work. In particular acknowledgement is due to Miss J. M.
Wilson for the help given by her during the course of field work and in the
preparation of the manuscript, and to Dr. N. A. Burges, who collaborated in the
early part of the ecological survey.

24 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

Literature Cited.

ADAMSON, R. S., and Osgporn, T. G. B., 1922.—On the Ecology of the Ooldea District.
Trans. Roy. Soc. South Australia, xlvi, pp. 5389-564.

, 1924.—The Ecology of the Hucalyptus forests of the Mount Lofty Ranges
(Adelaide District), South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. South Australia, xlviii, pp.
87-144.

ALLAN, H. H., 1937.—A Consideration of the “Biological Spectra’ of New Zealand.
Journ. Ecology, XxXvi, pp. 116-152.

ANDREWS, EH. C., 1913.—The Development of the Natural Order Myrtaceae. Proc. LINN.
Soc. N.S.W., xxxviii, pp. 529-568.

, 1914.—The Development and Distribution of the Natural Order Leguminosae.
Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xlviii, pp. 333-407.

, 1916.—The Geological History of the Australian Flowering Plants. Amer.
Journ. Sci., Ser. 4, 42, pp. 171-232.

BrouecH, P., McLuckiz, J., and PETRIE, A. H. K., 1924.—An Ecological Study of the
Flora of Mount Wilson. Part I. The Vegetation of the Basalt. Proc. LINN. Soc.
N.S.W., xlix (4), pp. 475-498.

FRASER, LILIAN, and VICKERY, JOYCE W., 1937.—The Ecology of the Upper Williams River
and Barrington Tops Districts. Part I. Introduction. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.,
Ixii (5-6), 269-283.

, 1937a.—Notes on some Species occurring in the Upper Williams River and
Barrington Tops Districts, with Descriptions of 2 New Species and 2 New Varieties.
Ibid., Ixii (5-6), 284-293.

, 1938.—The Ecology of the Upper Williams River and Barrington Tops Districts.
Part II. The Rain-Forest Formations. Ibid., lxili (3-4), 139-184.

HERBERT, D. A., 1935.—The Climatic Sifting of Australian Vegetation. Aust. N.Z. Assoc.
Adv. Sci., xxii, pp. 349-370.

, 1936.—An Advancing Beech Forest. Queensland Naturalist, x (v), pp. 8-10.

Maipen, J. H., 1914.—Australian Vegetation. Federal Handbook on Australia, Brit.
Assoc. Adv. Sci., pp. 163-209.

MERRILL, H. D., 1923.—Distribution of the Dipterocarpaceae, Origin and Relationships
of the Philippine Flora and Causes of the Difference between the Floras of Eastern
and Western Malaysia. Philippine Journ. Science, 23 (1), pp. 1-33.

McLuckin, J., and Petriz, A. H. K., 1927.—The Vegetation of the Kosciusko Plateau.
Part I. The Plant Communities. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., lii (3), pp. 187-221.

Patron, R. T., 1934.—Hcological Studies in Victoria. Part II]. The Fern Gully. Proc.
Roy. Soc. Victoria, (n.s.) 46 (1), pp. 117-129.

Parrig, A. H. K., JARRETT, PHYLLIS H., and Patron, R. T., 1929.—The Vegetation of the
Blacks’ Spur Region. A Study in the Ecology of some Australian Mountain
Eucalyptus Forests. I. The Mature Plant Communities. Journ. Ecology, xvii (2),
pp. 223-248.

PipGEON, IuMa, 1938.—The Ecology of the Central Coastal Area of New South Wales.
Part II. Plant Succession on the Hawkesbury Sandstone. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W.,
ibabhe (GlaP)) york

RAUNKIAER, C., 1934.—The Life Forms of Plants and Statistical Plant Geography.
Oxford University Press.

Rupp, H. M. R., 1937.—Notes on the Distribution of Certain Orchids. Victorian Naturalist,
lili (11), pp. 189-191.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES I-III.
Plate i.

1.—A partially cleared area of Eucalypt forest on the valley floor of the Williams
River, at an altitude of about 1,000 feet, showing Hucalyptus saligna (about 150 feet
high) and Casuarina torulosa.

2.—Hucalyptus saligna forest, with occasional Syncarpia laurifolia trees, and a
ground flora of Imperata cylindrica var. Koenigii. Rain-forest along the side of a
sheltered creek can be seen on the right. (Altitude about 1,200 feet.)

3.—A pure stand of Hucalyptus saligna (about 150 feet high) on a westerly-facing
hillside. (Altitude about 1,300 feet.)

4.—The mingling of two associations, Hucalyptus saligna with EH. acmenioides and
EB. Wilkinsoniana on a north-easterly-facing slope of the Williams Range at an altitude
of about 1,300 feet. Trees about 160 feet high.

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. 25

5.—Hucalyptus campanulata-H. acmenioides forest (about 120 feet high) with
Casuarina torulosa, on a north-easterly-facing slope of the Williams Range, at about
1,500 feet.

6.—Mixed Hucalyptus punctata-E. campanulata forest at an altitude of about 1,700
feet on the Chichester Range.

7.—Eucalyptus punctata on the crest of the Chichester Range at about 1,800 feet.
E. campanulata and Casuarina torulosa occur on the right.

8.—Eucalypius campanulata on the crest of the Williams Range at about 1,800 feet;
ground flora of Imperata cylindrica var. Koenigii, Pteridium aquilinum, Lomandra longi-
folia and scattered small shrubs in the foreground.

9.—A ground community of Culcita dubia in a forest of Hucalyptus saligna and
Casuarina torulosa on a sheltered south-easterly-facing slope, just above the sub-tropical
rain-forest association. Poa caespitosa and other grasses occur in the foreground.

11.—Eucalyptus viminalis (with white trunks) and #. obliqua (with stringy-bark) ;
ground flora of Poa caespitosa, and Lomandra longifolia. (Altitude about 3,800 feet.)

Plate ii.

10.—Eucalyptus obliqua forest with H. saligna intrusive into it along the margins of
a sheltered creek. Rain-forest elements are present in a soakage area in the back-
ground. (Altitude about 3,000 feet.)

12.— Eucalyptus viminalis, EH. obliqua and Banksia integrifolia, with a ground flora
of Lomandra longifolia and Poa caespitosa. (Altitude about 4,000 feet.)

13.—EHucalyptus fastigata forest with Banksia integrifolia, showing the presence of
tree-ferns (Dicksonia antarctica) in sheltered areas. (Altitude about 4,700 feet.)

14.—On the right, Nothofagus Moorei at the head of a creek, facing north; on the
left, Hucalyptus fastigata forest with a ground flora of Poa caespitosa, Lomandra longi-
folia, and some small plants of Lomatia arborescens. (Altitude about 4,800 feet.)

15.—Hucalyptus pauciflora trees on the southern edge of the Barrington Tops
Plateau, showing their stunted habit. The steep upper slopes of the escarpment can be
seen on the extreme right.

16.—Hucalyptus pauciflora forest with a ground flora of Poa caespitosa, Lomandra
longifolia and scattered shrubs on the Barrington Tops Plateau at an altitude of about
4,800 feet.

17.—EHucalyptus paucifiora forest (in foreground) in contact with a border community
of Nothofagus Moorei, Atherosperma moschatum, Prostanthera lasianthos, etc., along a
ereek on the Barrington Tops Plateau.

18.—Hucalyptus paucifiora woodland with a ground flora of grass and scattered
shrubs, on the upper Barrington River. (Altitude about 4,500 feet.)

Plate iii.

19.—Grano-diorite country on the Barrington Tops Plateau showing scattered
boulders. A small-shrub community occurs near the river, with grassland and Eucalyptus
paucifiora forest behind. (Altitude about 4,500 feet.)

20.—Grassland community on the Barrington Tops Plateau showing the shrub and
grass strata; Hucalyptus stellulata trees occur in the background,

21.—Swamp and grassland areas on the Barrington Tops Plateau at an altitude of
4,500-5,000 feet. Hucalyptus pauciflora forest covers the hills in the background.

22—A comparatively small swamp through which the meandering course of the
stream fringed by tall sedges can be seen. Hucalyptus pauciflora forest occurs in the
hillsides, and some trees of H. stellulata along the creeks and margins of the swamp.
(Altitude about 4,500 feet.)

23.—Hucalyptus pauciflora forest, grassland and swamp communities on the Barring-
ton Tops Plateau. #H. stellulata occurs by the margin of the small creek where it enters
the swamp. A community of Restio australis can be seen in the foreground beside the
stream draining the swamp.

24.—A partly entrenched creek in a Swamp on the Barrington Tops Plateau.

25.—The upper Barrington River entrenched below the level of old swamps.
Eucalyptus stellulata occurs along the river banks.

26.—The upper Barrington River entrenched below the level of ancient swamps (the
flat ground in the background) which it has drained. Eucalyptus stellulata occurs along
the river banks, Poa caespitosa in the foreground.

26

ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

TABLE 1.
List of Plants occurring in the Eucalypt Forest Associations.

Life forms classed according to Raunkiaer’s (1934) system.
W, woody ; R, rare; 8, scanty; F, frequent; C, common; LC, locally common; VC, very common.

Col.
Col.
Col.
Col.
Col.
Col.
Col.

1—E#. saligna-Syncarpia laurifolia Association.

2—E. campanulata-E. acmenioides-E. punctata Association.
3—E. viminalis-E. obliqua Association.

4—E. fastigata Community.

5—#. pauciflora Association.

6—Sub-alpine Grassland.

7—Sub-alpine Swamp.

Dicksonia antarctica Labill.
Alsophila australis R.Br. ..

Adiantum aethiopicum L. ..
formosum R.Br. .. ae
Asplenium flabellifolium Cay.
Blechnum capense Schlecht.
cartilagineum Sw.
penna-marina Kuhn.
Culcita dubia Maxon.
Cyclophorus serpens C. Chr.
Davallia pyxidata Cav.
Doodia aspera R.Br.
Histiopteris incisa J.Sm. ..
LTindsaya linearis Sw.

Life
Species. Form. 1

1)
oo
i
a
for)
|

Pteridophyta.
Dicksoniaceae.
LC bs)
Cyatheaceae.

Polypodiaceae.

Hehe A 4
M

A
Q
o

LC S-R

LC LC-VC LC

mM
ez)

Pellaea falcata Fée
paradoxa Hook. bi
Pleopeltis diversifolia Melvaine
Platycerium bifurcatum C.Chr.
Polystichum aculeatum Schott.
Pteridium aquilinum Kuhn.
Gleicheniaceae.
Gleichenia flagellaris Spreng.
Ophioglossaceae.
Botrychium australe R.Br...
Lycopodiaceae.

Iycopodium clavatum L. var. fastigi-

atum Benth.

. Monocotyledons.
Potamogetonaceae.

Potamogeton tricarinatus F.v.M.

: Gramineae.
Agropyrum scabrum Beauv.
Cymbopogon refractus A.Camus
Danthonia penicillata F.v.M.
Deyeuxia breviglumis Benth.

rudis Roem. & Schult.
Dichelachne micrantha Domin.
Digitaria parviflora Hughes
Entolasia marginata Hughes

stricta Hughes .. bag
Festuca Hookeriana F.v.M.
Hierochloa redolens R.Br.

Imperata cylindrica var. Koenigii

Durand & Schinz.

® fH QHe4hhtrtSeene

Q

HH

iS)

LC

NANRnN

LC

LC

mM

Nn wn

m

LC

F-C

LC

LC

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY.

TABLE 1.—Continued.

Species.

Life

Form.

27

Microlaena stipoides R.Br.

Panicum fulgidum Hughes
pygmaeum R.Br.

Paspalidium distans Hanes

Poa caespitosa G.Forst. (sensu lato)
Sorghum leiocladum C. EK. Hubbard

Themeda australis Stapf.
Cyperaceae.
Carex Brownit Tuck. :
cernua var. lobolepis Kiikenth.
Gahnia melanocarpa R.Br.
Lepidosperma laterale R.Br.

Schoenus apogon Roem. & Schult.

ericetorum R.Br. ..
Scirpus setaceus L.
Uncinia riparia R.Br.
Restionaceae.
Hypolaena lateriflora Benth,
Restio australis R.Br.
Juncaceae.
Juncus falcatus H.Mey.
pallidus R.Br.
paucifiorus R.Br.
Luzula campestris DC.
Liliaceae.

Arthropodium paniculatum R.Br. ..

Dianella coerulea Sims

Geitonoplesium cymosum A.Cunn. ..

Lomandra longifolia Labill.
Smilax australis R.Br.
Xanthorrhoea resinosa Pers.
Tridaceae.
Tibertia pulchella Spreng.
Patersonia glauca R.Br.
Orchidaceae.
Acianthus fornicatus R.Br.
Adenochilus Nortoni Fitzg.
Chiloglottis Gunnii Lindl. . .
trapeziformis Fitzg.
Corysanthes bicalcarata R.Br.
Cymbidium suave R.Br.
Diuris venosa Rupp
Gastrodia sesamoides R.Br.
Microtis parviflora R.Br. ..
porrifolia R.Br.
Prasophylium brevilabre Hook. f.
fimbriatum R.Br.
odoratum Rogers
Rogersii Rupp
Ruppiit Rogers
Pterostylis acuminata R. Be,
coccina Fitzg.
cynocephala Fitzg.
decurva Rogers
grandiflora R.Br.
longifolia R.Br.
nutans R.Br.
Spiranthes australis Lindl.
Thelymitra ixioides Swartz.
venosa R.Br.

Mamealo Hee e He Hee ee eee

ie}
5

RARARMWARMDDAMDMADAADMANMRNMNBNRERDRAD F

AaraAnDR

n

HE nn

rma

LC

C vc VC Ae
8 SS)
S rs)

BARNRR
Ry ey ey

LC iS)

LC LC

aaa

C-VC
LC

LC
LC

LC
LC

LC
LC

28 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

TABLE 1.—Continued.

Life
Species. Form. il 2 3 4 5 6
Dicotyledons.
Casuarineae.
Casuarina torulosa Ait. M Ss LC R
Proteaceae.

Banksia integrifolia L. ue ace M R LC LC

Hakea eriantha R.Br. N Ds)
microcarpa R.Br. ae N LC LC

Lomatia arborescens Fraser &

Vickery os oe ae N-M bs) F Ss

Persoonia linearis Andr. .. $c N-M Ss
oxycoccoides Sieb. et avi N r LC

Santalaceae.

Exocarpus nana Hook. f. .. Ch(W) Ss
Omphacomeria acerba A. DC. ate N LC

Loranthaceae.
Loranthus Betchei Blakely. . te E s

Portulacaceae.
Claytonia australasica Hook.f. .. Ch

Caryophyllaceae.

Scleranthus biflorus Hook. f. .- H-Ch S ¥

Stellaria flaccida Hook. .. so da k(O)an S s :
pungens Brongn. Se a H Ss S

Ranunculaceae.

Ranunculus lappaceus Sm. ce H F Ss S F VC VC

rivularis Banks & Sol. .. ins HH
Winteraceae.
Drimys lanceolata Baill. .. a N LC
purpurascens J.Vickery ae N S LC
Monimiaceae.
Hedycarya angustifolia A.Cunn. .. N bs)
Cruciferae.
Cardamine hirsuta L. var. tenuifolia
Svs Meeee ae es es Th $ s NS)
Crassulaceae.
Crassula Sieberiana Druce als Th LC
Pittosporaceae.

Billardiera longiflora Labill. ne N R
scandens Sm. S 30 ae N S

Citriobatus multiflorus A.Cunn. .. N Ss R

Rosaceae.
Acaena sanguisorba Vahl. Ms Ch Ss R F
Rubus parvifolius L. ae .. Ch-N Ss S Ss Ss Ss
Leguminosae.

Acacia Clunies-Rossiae Maiden .. N s LC
dealbata Link. .. e ae N-M Cc
floribunda Sieb. .. ae ae M F
melanozylon R.Br. ae sit M LC LC F
mollissima Willd. 4A ds M LC LE

Bossiaea neo-anglica ¥F.v.M. .. Ch(W) s

Desmodium brachypodium A.Gray.. Ch-N Ss
rhytidophyllum F.v.M. .. .. Ch-N Ss
varians Endl. aS = .. Ch-N iS) Ss

Glycine clandestina Wendl. .. Ch-N Ss Ss Ss

Hardenbergia monophylla Benth. Ch-N F

Hovea heterophylla A.Cunn. Ho COnedy S SS)
longifolia R.Br. .. ro at N SS)

Indigofera australis Willd. Ae N R LC

Kennedya rubicunda Vent. ee C= S) Ss DS)

Lotus corniculatus L. A ae Th C (e)

~I

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY.

TABLE 1.—Continued.

29

>

Species.

Oxylobium ellipticum R.Br. var.

alpinum Maide . & Betche
trilobatum Benth.
Pultenaea fasciculata Benth.
Sphaerolobium vimineum Sm.
Trifolium repens L.
Zornia diphylla Pers.
Geraniaceae.
Geranium pilosum Forst. ..
Rutaceae.
Phebalium squamulosum Vent.
Polygalaceae.
Comesperma sylvestre Lindl.
Euphorbiaceae.
Breynia oblongifolia J.Muell.

Poranthera microphylla Brongn. ..

Celastraceae.
Celasirus Cunninghamii F.v.M.
Dilleniaceae.
Hibbertia dentata R.Br.
volubilis Andr.
Guttiferae.
Hypericum japonicum Thunb.
Violaceae.
Hymenanthera dentata R.Br.
Viola betonicifolia Sm.
hederacea Labill.
Thymeliaceae.
Pimelea ligustrina Labill. ..
linifolia Sm.
Myrtaceae.
Angophora subvelutina F.v.M.
Baeckea Gunniana
latifolia Benth.
Callistemon pallidus DC.
salignus DC. 8 ae
Eucalyptus acmenioides Schau.
amplifolia Naudin
campanulata R.T.Baker
fastigata Deane & Maiden
obliqua L’ Hér.
pauciflora Sieb.
punctata DC.
saligna Sm.
stellulata Sieb.
viminalis Labill. . . Ee
Wilkinsoniana R.T.Baker
Leptospermum flavescens Sm.
myrtifolium Sieb.. .
Myrtus Beckleri F.v.M.
Syncarpia laurifolia Ten. ..
Tristania laurina R.Br.
Oenotheraceae.
Epilobium glabellum G.Forst.
Halorrhagaceae.
Halorrhagis micrantha R.Br.
tetragyna Hook. f.
teucrioides P. DC. ng

Myriophyllum pedunculatum Hook. f.

Schau. var.

Life
Form. 1
N
N
Ch (W)
Ch
H
Ch Ss
Th R
N
N
N SS)
Ch-Th Ss
N S
Ch-N Ss
Ch-N Ss
Th N)
N
H N)
H-Ch F
N
N
MM NS)
N
M
M LC
MM Ss
MM SS)
MM
MM
MM
M
MM
MM Cc
M
MM
MM R
N
N
N bs)
MM F
N-M LC
H-Ch
Th
Ch NS)
Ch
HH

LC

ym

LC

Qn

LC

5 6
s

LC LC
S) SS)

R

s
R
F S)
SS) s
S) tS)
NS)
Fr LC
FE
SS)

VC

LC
Fr
s S)

T!

LC

LC

LC

LC

30 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS.

Species.

Araliaceae.
Astrotricha floccosa DC. ‘
Tieghemopanax sambucifolius
R.Viguier Sie
Umbelliferae.
Apium leptophyllum F.v.M.
Daucus brachiatus Sieb.
Hydrocotyle geranifolia F.v.M.
hirta R.Br. of
Oreomyrrhis andicola Endl.
Ericaceae.
Gaultheria appressa A.W.Hill
Epacridaceae.
Epacris microphylla R.Br. var.
rhombifolia Fraser & Vickery
breviflora Stapf. 3
Leucopogon collinus R.Br...
Hookeri Sond.
lanceolatus R.Br...
Myrsinaceae.
Rapanea variabilis Mez.
Primulaceae.
Iysimachia japonica Thunb.
Oleaceae.
Notelaea venosa F.v.M.
Loganiaceae.
Mitrasacme serpyllifolia R.Br.
Gentianaceae.
Gentiana diemensis Griseb. var.
Convolvulaceae.
Dichondra repens R. & G.Forst.
Borraginaceae.
Myosotis australis R.Br.
Labiatae.
Ajuga australis R.Br.
Brunella vulgaris DC.
Mentha gracilis R.Br.
Plectranthus parviflorus Henck.
Scutellaria humilis R.Br.
Prostanthera lasianthos Labill.
Scrophulariaceae.
Euphrasia Brownii F.v.M. var.
Gratiola peruviana L.
Veronica calycina R.Br.
plebeja R.Br.
Bignoniaceae.
Tecoma australis R.Br.
Lentibulariaceae.
Utricularia dichotoma Labill.
Acanthaceae.
Eranthemum variabile R.Br.
Plantaginaceae.
Plantago palustris Fraser & Vickery
varia R.Br.
Rubiaceae.
Asperula conferta Hook. f.
Coprosma Billardieri Hook. f.
hirtella Labill.
Galium australe DC.

TABLE 1,—Continued.

Form.

He m A

zag

ANN

LC

LC

LC

nn

LC

LC

LC
LC

LC

LC

LC

LC

Ill,
6 7
Ss ibe
LC
LC
LC
TC
c
F Ss
Giace
F LC
s C
G
1610
s iy
LC

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY. 31

TABLE 1.—Continued.

Species.

Campanulaceae.
Lobelia gibbosa Labill.
pedunculata R.Br. Ae
Wahlenbergia gracilis A. DC.
Goodeniaceae.
Goodenia hederacea Sm.
Scaevola Hookerit F.v.M.
microcarpa Cav.
Velleia montana Hook. f.
Candolleaceae.
Candollea serrulata Labill.
Compositae.
Centipeda orbicularis Lour.
Cotula australis Hook. f.
filicula Thunb.
Craspedia Richea Cass.
Erechtites arguita DC.
Erigeron pappochromus Labill.
Gnaphalium japonicum Thunb.
Helichrysum lucidum Henck.
elatum A.Cunn.
ferrugineum Less.
scorpoides Labill.
Lagenophora Billardieri Cass.
emphysopus Hook. f.
Olearia chrysophylla Benth.
Nernstii F.v.M. ..
stellulata DC.
Picris hieracioides L.
Podolepis acuminata R.Br.
Senecio amygdalifolius F.v.M.
dryadeus Sieb.
Stegesbeckia orientalis L. ..
Vernonia cinerea Less.

LC

fo)
i=
nm
ney

N R R LC
N LC

TABLE 2.

4 5 6 7
F F F F
Ss) F FE
EF LC LC
Fr
Cc VC C
SS)
iS) R
LC Cc Cc
R
LC Ss
SS) LC LC
LC Cc
s
F
S iS) LC
F LC
LC
LC rs)
LC LC
LC LC
iS)

Species Common to the Sub-alpine Forest or Grassland and the Swamps.

Acacia Clunies-Rossiae.
Ajuga australis.
Asperula conferta
Cardamine hirsuta var.
folia.
Deyeuxia breviglumis.
Diuris venosa.
Epilobium glabellum.
Erigeron pappochromus.
Euphrasia Brownii var.
Geranium pilosum.

tenui-

Halorrhagis micrantha.
Hydrocotyle hirta.
Hypolaena lateriflora.
Lagenophora Billardiert.
Lobelia pedunculata.
Microtis parviflorus.
Microtis porrifolius.
Mitrasacme serpyllifolia.
Oreomyrrhis andicola.
Plantago varia.

Poa caespitosa.

Prasophyllum brevilabre.
Prasophyllum odoratum.
Ranunculus lappaceus.
Scaevola Hookeri.
Schoenus apogon.
Schoenus ericetorum.
Scirpus setaceus.
Scleranthus biflorus.
Thelymitra ixioides.
Viola hederacea.

32 ECOLOGY OF UPPER WILLIAMS RIVER AND BARRINGTON TOPS DISTRICTS. III,

TABLE 3.
Distribution of the Sub-alpine and Montane Species.

3 : a a = ai
s ; Z eee ae
5 2 E 58 Eee) os
Species. = 8 3 488 o Sita Beis
; g iS 64.) Bia esheets eis
a > ae na a Oa Aa
Adenochilus Nortoni .. oe x x
Atherosperma moschatum x x Xs x
Baeckea Gunniana var. latifolia x x x %
Blechnum penna-marina x x De x x x
Bossiaea neo-anglica aK: x x
Callistemon pallidus x x x X Bg x
Carex cernua var. lobolepis x >.¢
Chiloglottis Gunnii x X x x
Claytonia australasica. . Xs x x x x x
Comesperma sylvestre x X:
Coprosma Billardieri .. X: x x x xe X
hirtella ae ei ae b.¢ x i. x x x x
Cotula filicula ae ae axe X: x x x
Deyeuxia breviglumis . . So ae x x x x
Diuris venosa .. x
Drimys lanceolata xe x: x x x: x
purpurascens 5 x
Elaeocarpus holopetalus x x eX: xe xe xe
Epacris breviflora <2 sie xx x x x x x
microphylla var. rhombifolia x x
Erigeron pappochromus 6 x. x x
Exocarpus nana 4 x x x
Festuca Hookeriana (?) x xe x x
Gaultheria appressa xx x x x
Gentiana diemensis B:¢ > X
(form)
Hakea microcarpa x X x x xX x X:
Helichrysum ferrugineum x ™ x x x
Hierochloa redolens x x x x
Juncus faleatus X: x x x
Lagenophora emphysopus x x X X X:
Leptospermum myrtifolium x xe xe xe X
Leucopogon collinus x x x X: x
Hookeri are aie Xs Se x x Ss x
Libertia pulchella 5a tne _ Xx: X x x
Lycopodium clavatum var. fastigiatum °K X: x x
Mitrasacme serpyllifolia x x x x x
Myriophyllum pedunculatum x x x Xs x
Olearia chrysophylla x >
stellulata x x x x
Oreomyrrhis andicola Au xe xe xe >.¢ x x x
Oxylobium ellipticum var. alpinum .. x > x x
Persoonia oxycoccoides Xi: x x xe
Plantago palustris x
Prasophyllum Rogersit x
Pultenaea fasciculata Se x D6 x
Restio australis x x x xe x
Scaevola Hookeri xe x Xe x xe x x
Scleranthus biflorus x x xe x x x x
Uncinia riparia x x x x
Velleia montana x x ae ve xe

PLATE I.

Soc. N.S.W., 1939.

Proc. LINN.

of Williams River and Barrington Tops District.

Ecology

7 at

leh eae

. Zp 7
Wc

2) > TINY CQ 1 | IS 7 @)
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939. PLATE It.

Ecology of Williams River and Barrington Tops District.

ne

: oye
wi
i)
‘
‘i on
~) S
Nee
")
i
jaa i “
i
‘
a ili cia
¢
» =
(ro -
fr
i
a 1
Vy mi a on
Pye
Nid
ab

aan A

ae

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939. PLATE III.

33

BY LILIAN FRASER AND JOYCE VICKERY.

P-L

IT

8-1

6-6

L-1

GT

6-¢

9-&

‘quazjont
oy Aydoprieyg

€-T

“UL

for)
ie)

S
pres}

9-361

FL aT 6L &

66S G06 es I-g
&-86 0-16 Pa Bolg
g- FT 6:9 ea = =
¥-61 1-26 6-36 ar
¥-06 g-86 = § =~
€-6L &-96 6:¢ G-&
g-16 g-SS 6-¢ 6-&
¥-16 ¥-16 9-8 Lots
6-&6 F-&6 T-OL 4-9
0-6& 0-8 = L-G 0-8
9-FE 9-2 v9 6-8
G-GE ¢-OL G-& 6-9
9-F§ £11 6-& 9-2
6:91 6-21 6-21 6-21
6-16 GT-ST 6:46 6: FG
G:F 9-§ Z-L1 GIF
GP 6-1 €-16 6-0¢
att) N “W ‘WH

PES

FIG

€0L

*sotoodg
jo
IaquinN
1e40.L

suIey ITAA

SUIOJ JNOUITAA
suIoy FNOUIIM
sures UII
suIoy JNOUGIAL
sua} WIM
SUIOJ NOTIN,
surey UII
sures JNOUGIM,
suIOy UGTA
SuIEZ JNOUILA
SUIay UGTA
SuIey NOY
suIoy UGE
suIey NOU,
sures ITAA

sUIay JNOYITM.

**uunIqoods [BUIION

qsaloy ydA[eong [e407

SdUIVMS QUId[e-qng

qselojl Duoyionnd “a

4soloy vwbYysvs ‘A

qso1oj
pyojound “Wy - vwinunduiws “WT

qsoloy DI0f.inn}
pidipouhig - vubyos snjdfjoony

qso1Oj-UTeI o1goreQUe-qng

“ULI, -9JTT

“DAIOAG ULLOT-afVvT
‘p ATAVL

34

MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. V.
ON EYE-COLORATION, AND OTHER NOTES.
By G. H. Harpy.

(One Text-figure. )
[Read 26th April, 1939.]

A theory of the Eye-marking.—David Sharp (Cambridge Natural History, vi,
part 2, 1899, p. 440), referring to eye marks on living flies, states that it is uncertain
what use the variegated eye-coloration may have; subsequent authors seem to
have limited their interests, in print, to the needs of taxonomy, and they figure
markings more effectively than they describe them. There does not seem to be
any plan upon which a uniform system of descriptions can be based. Enough,
however, has been published to indicate that eye-marking is a phenomenon in
the evolutionary process of the insect.

Probably the primitive eye-colour is black; this is common in the Nematocera,
but limited to the lowest section in the Brachycera, where black is rarely found.
The first advance is indicated by the possession of red eyes, a common feature
throughout the Brachycera, with other hues, which may partly or completely
cover the eye. The variegated colour pattern so frequently found seems always
to be based on a red eye, and is never found on the primitive black eye.

The most advanced eye is normally green, rarely yellow, blue, or some other
colour, and it is the change from the red to green that is considered here.

The change takes place in two ways. In some cases the green invades the
red uniformly so that there first appears the red eye with green reflections,
changing to red and green equally reflected, then green with red reflections, and
finally the eye becomes wholly green. The other method is a change through
the colour-band development, an account of which is given below. Actually several
large genera show a range from a species with red eyes, through species with the
red invaded with green to varying degrees, to a species with entirely green eyes.
The variegated eyes can be arranged in a series to show how the change proceeded,
and this seems to follow a uniform plan for all genera, but varies in the details
with each genus.

The consistency of marking retained by each species suggests that some
slight change in structure within the eye may take place uniformly with the
change in colour; thus there are produced the marked contours that vary very
little on any one species, although some variation in actual colour is not unusual.

I make no attempt to explain why colour changes should proceed through the
colour-band system, but it seems advisable to point out that perhaps vision given
by black eyes is less efficient than that by red eyes, whilst the green may be
much superior to both; even a small area of green in a red field may be
advantageous. Entirely green eyes occur consistently throughout the Asilidae
and are common in many other predaceous Brachycera, whilst blood-sucking forms

BY G. H. HARDY. 35

have both red and green, as well as the variegated eyes. Black eyes occur rarely
in Stratiomyiidae, but apparently always in Cyrtidae, and perhaps in most
Conopidae. Exotic Leptidae are often recorded with green eyes, but in the
Australian species the eyes always seem to be red.

The theory of colour-band development.—By simplifying the complexities seen
in colour marks, it becomes apparent that there first develops a green spot which
extends laterally across the red field at antennal level, and lying in band
formation practically parallel with the central line of the insect from head to
abdomen, no matter what this direction may be in relation to the major axis
of the eye. The band of green becomes complete when it reaches the anterior
and posterior eye-margins. Above and below the green band so formed, the red
areas of the eye form two blotches touching respectively the upper and the lower
eye-margins and in either or both of these, further green spots form, running
to bands parallel to the original one. By this process red bands are isolated;
the blotches which still retain contact with the eye-margins above and below
become smaller in area, and between them now lie alternating green and red bands.

Complications are introduced by the green having a tendency to spread,
upsetting the band formation by invading the red areas in another way. In the
lower Brachycera, this takes place largely by the green invading along the eye-
margin, and in the higher Brachycera the invasion is strongly marked in the
central field of the eye. It is also quite normal to see this spread more pronounced
over the lower half of the eye than the upper half. The green thus encroaches
over the red areas until the bands and blotches disappear. There is no uniformity
in this matter; many species have eye-markings which may be used with
conspicuous success in specific determinations, and any large genus may exhibit
grades in markings, all being of the one general type.

HKye-coloration and markings may take some other form, as in Syrphidae,
where some unusually active Hristalis have yellow eyes with minute black spots
that survive death, but the chief interest lies in the colour-band type found in
the following families: Stratiomyiidae, Tabanidae and Therevidae (colour band
range very wide), Syrphidae (colour band at least in genus Bacchus), Ortalidae
(colour band plentiful, but not studied in detail), and Calliphoridae (colour band
limited to Rhiniinae).

A Scheme for Describing Eye-markings.

1. The primary green band.—All marks are orientated about that green band
which forms the original invasion of the red eye and is situated at antennal
level. It is to be noted that the area at antennal level is almost invariably
green at least in part. This colour may extend indefinitely above and below, the
nature of the band thus becoming lost in the general green field on species with
advanced eye marks.

2. The red bands.—With the development of additional green bands above and
below the primary one, red bands are left between them. Thus one red band
lies just above, another just below the primary green band; rarely do either
of these red bands lie in a position that can be confused with the antennal level.

3. The multiplicity of bands——Further green bands may develop above and
below, leaving red bands between them. This division of the red area may
develop until seven green and six red bands are present, these being the maximum
numbers of true bands observed in Diptera, although the green may spread along
the eye-margins (as in some Rhiniinae), making the remnant of the original
red blotch at the upper and lower eye-margins resemble a further band of red.

36 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. V,

4. The blotches.—With the formation of the primary band, there are left two
red areas retaining contact with the upper and lower eye-margins respectively.
These two portions of red are the blotches, and they become smaller with every
successive increase in the number of bands formed in the red areas. If perchance
the green colour isolates the blotch from contact with the eye-margin, then the
area of red left becomes a spot and the term blotch will no longer apply.

5. The spots—This may apply either to the red or the green areas that do
not touch the eye-margins and that are sufficiently spot-like to warrant the term.

6. Colour invasion and elimination.—Together with the tendency to build up
the eye-markings to a maximum number of green and red bands, there is also
a tendency for the green to invade and eliminate the bands formed and blotches
left. This extra invasion by the green mostly takes place along the eye-margin
in the lower Brachycera and largely in the central area in the higher Brachycera.
In this way there is a trend towards the production of two markedly distinct
eye-patterns, both traceable to band formations when analysed. The red colour
disappears by suppression and the green increases by invasion and by the fusion
of one green area with another. For descriptive purposes, when bands and blotches
have been enumerated relative to antennal level, then this further invasion of
green, bringing distortions and alterations in the red areas, is described only when
marked effects are present.

7. Abortive band development.—It sometimes happens that the eye-marks
show an abortive development, as in the case of Wallacea. Here the band at
antennal level does not develop, but remains as a small elongate spot in a field
of red, and above it in the same field are two other small elongate spots of green.
This has produced an apparent blotch containing markings within, but on analysis
with regard to antennal level they are readily interpreted. There are other
abnormal markings which need to be interpreted in another way.

8. Abnormal band development.—That the simple horizontal band development
does not apply in all cases is well illustrated in the case of some exotic Tabanidae,
but is not yet known in the Australian fauna. In the genus Chrysops studied in
the Palaearctic and the two American regions, the band development is vertical
and irregular in shape; the blotches lie along the anterior and posterior eye-
margins when present. Further invasion by the green takes place along the
eye-margins and the red bars give way to spots that retain strong traces of their
original irregularity. The genus Chrysops has its antennae placed near the
eye-centre level, but Tabanus has the antennae nearly level with the lower eye-
margin, and it is interesting to note the angle in these two cases; the line between
the eye-centre and antennae compared with the direction of the eye-bands is
about the same. p

9. Variations in colour.—IiIn the eye-colour the green and the red are not
necessarily constant. Blue and purple may develop in their place, or an area may
be bordered with these colours, and more rarely the green may give place to yellow.
Melanism may appear in the eye, or at least a deepening of the shade resembling
black may give this effect, but the actual markings seem nearly always to remain
constant for each species.

10. Irregularities in bands and blotches.—Bands may disappear by elimination
of the red and fusion of the green; they may reach the eye-border or fail to do so;
the size of the blotches may depend on the number of bands formed, all lending
themselves to description in general terms in conformity with the present
discussion. In addition, markings are frequently different in the sexes, but usually

BY G. H. HARDY. 37

these have their salient points in common and differ in details. The markings
may become distorted even to the extent of hiding the band formation, such as
forming circular rings, but seldom do marks require special description apart
from that outlined here.

STRATIOM YIIDAE.
NEOEXAIRETA SPINIGERA Wiedemann.

In life the eyes are entirely black and the habits are striking when regarded
in this light, for the fly is particularly active and wary of movements so as to be
not readily caught. It breeds in piles of decayed vegetation in gardens and
orchards, where it mostly abounds, and is often abundant around sheds; it rarely
enters houses, apparently avoiding dark places. The fly is very rapid in flight
and has quick dodging movements.

ACTINA BRISBANENSIS, Nn. Sp.

Actina incisuralis (dark form), Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, xliii, 1932, 53.

The exact identity of Actina incisuralis is uncertain; it is regarded as being
that form most commonly met with in Sydney, but owing to variations found
in collections there would appear to be several forms already discussed by me.
This incisuralis group, which includes the Tasmanian form as a possible sub-
species, becomes difficult to unravel. Possibly more than one species occurs in
Tasmania and certainly two occur in Queensland; the one described here is not
known to me outside this State with certainty, but is very common at times in
Brisbane, where it would seem to be the only species occurring.

The other Queensland species, still regarded as being incisuralis, has on the
female a red band at one-quarter of the eye-depth from the summit in a green
field and stretching from the anterior margin three-quarters of the way towards
the posterior margin, which marking differs from the present species considerably.

3, 2. Very like A. incisuralis Macq., but the black markings on the tergites
are invariably broadly black, thus reducing the orange colour, which may be
entirely eliminated in the case of the male. The orange colour varies in amount,
but never seems to increase in size comparable with that of the other various
forms of incisuralis seen. The eyes on both sexes have the red and green
intermingling with shot effect in more or less equal amounts, and there is no
trace of a marking in the eye.

Hab.—A very long series taken in Brisbane over many years, throughout the
summer half of the year; it seems quite common in the autumn on the underside
of the leaves of the Moreton Bay Fig trees in the Botanical Gardens and
University grounds.

LECOMYIA CYANEA White.

At the time of capture (10.10.1923), I made a sketch of the eye-marks on this
species, and this shows a blue-green field with a red band above antennal level,
strongly angulated near, but not reaching, the posterior margin. This is the
effect of a sudden broadening of the band just before terminating; the narrowest
part is about the centre. The green band above is thus very irregular in shape
and fuses along the posterior eye-border with the green covering the eye below
the red band. The upper red blotch reaches about half the length of the frons.

A pair of these rather rare flies recently captured (Sunnybank, October, 1938)
shows a normal green field on both sexes and, instead of the upper blotch, a second
red band which slopes about 45 degrees upwards from the middle of the frons,

38 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. V,

petering out to a point before reaching the posterior eye-margin. The latter is
perhaps the normal, the former the variation as the ground-colour is abnormal.
Also there is a common Brisbane Ortalid in some swamps that shows two forms
of eye-marks, a red band being either present or absent, an alternative variation
that might suggest how certain abnormal markings occur by suppression of red
on certain specific areas, not as a gradual development but rather as an abrupt
change. Alternative variations like these seem to be very rare.

Genus DAMAROMYIA Kertesz.
Hardy, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (10) viii, 1931, 120-8.

D. whitei Hardy has the eyes green with a red band just above antennal
level, and the band curves upwards posteriorly, but does not reach the posterior
eye-margin. D. clivosa Hardy has a green band at antennal level between a red
band below and a red blotch above; below this the eye is green. A sketch pinned
with the specimen shows the blotch has a sinuous lower border, making the
green band irregular in depth.

Two new species described below run out at couplet 5 of my key which can
be used here by substituting the following new rendering of couplet 5 and adding
the couplets 12 and 13:

5. Frons with a median deep depression; frons one-fifth to one-sixth head-width .. 6

Frons without the depression; scutellum with one marginal depression .......... 12
12. Hair-pits plentiful on frons and with the hairs abnormally long there; body hairs

also much more conspicuous than normal. Frons one-quarter the head-width
OES tc Gao OO Oe CISTR I Sea MERC MEMO CRONE Ot One ho Ol tate er Oia ao oraio ahem ats hirsuta Hardy

ELAIT=Pits AN AUINAITS MOLINA lars, ore versus cite co ede eho ic cuenenesetene, Cusvole setae cere nua aVetet emo onseora cs aieretene 13
ie erons one-quarter thes head-width seers aeierie es chetoniencieaierenenens neohirsuta, n. sp.
Mrons! one-sixthe the Neaadswidthl Mies sels ees oe eeila este as Seen similis, n. sp.

D. neohirsuta is one of the two species recorded by me as near D. hirsuta;
the other referred to is in the Ferguson collection and from Sydney; no further
specimens have come before me. D. similis is quite a new form and both sexes
are known.

DAMAROMYIA SIMILIS, N. Sp.

©. Frons converging towards antennae, median width one-sixth that of the
head. The hair-pits are arranged two together each side of the ocellar triangle
and increase to three in a diagonal row towards the antennae; these lie mostly
in a long slight depression each side of the very narrow grooved carina. The eyes
in life are red shot with green and the eye-frons-eye proportions are 15:6:15.
The thorax, scutellum and abdomen dorsally are completely covered with punctures
uniformly dense and the triangular scutellum, lying in a plane with the thorax,
has but one marginal depression. The coxae are black, the remainder of the
legs is yellow, usually fuscated centrally on the femora and tibiae.

¢. Body characters very much as in the female, with occasional small areas
on which the punctures may be less dense. The eyes are contiguous, with the
lower third (antennal level and below) green in life, the remainder red.

Variations from this normal do not seem to occur, and although there is a
general depression each side of the carina, this may be due to shrinkage after
death and is not to be confused with those deep depressions on the lower section
of the frons and seen on other species. Those species having the frons one-sixth
the head-width or near are distinguished by the presence of the depression
and in additional characters; confusa has two marginal scutellar depressions,
tasmanica has a parallel-sided frons, whitei has a distinctive eye-mark when alive,

BY G. H. HARDY. 39

and trina is less regularly pitted on the body. The raised scutellum distinguishes
recemipuncta, the only other species with a narrow frons and also without the
deep frontal depression.

Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, September and October, 1932 to 1937, mostly in
the latter year. 10 g, 18 ? from a persimmon tree and nearby foliage in my
garden at Sunnybank. I have no hesitation in relegating the male to this
position, as the only other species taken was represented by two females referred
to below and apparently were stray visitors, and not breeding in the locality.

DAMAROMYIA NEOHIRSUTA, N. Sp.

2. Very like D. similis, but differing by the frons being one-fourth head-width,
with coarser punctures more generally distributed, reaching nearer the eyes over
most of the length, and there are four punctures in a diagonal line anteriorly.
The eyes, when alive, have the lower quarter green, the remainder red. The
eye-frons-eye proportions are 9:6:9. The abdomen also differs in the punctures
being less dense than on the thorax and scutellum; on the two latter they are as
on D. similis. The male is not known.

The female is liable to be confused only with D. hirsuta because the characters
on other known species with a wide frons differ in many ways, but hirsuta differs
in having a greater density of hair-pits from head to scutellum and very con-
spicuous hairs; the hair-pits of the frons are too dense for the regular rows to be
seen.

Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, September, 1937, 2 females taken on a persimmon
tree in my garden at Sunnybank, and in company with D. similis. Another
female (now without a head) was taken in September, 1929.

WALLACEA SPLENDENS Hardy.

In both sexes the eyes are green, with a large apparent, rounded, red blotch
on the upper third. As the antennae are situated very high on the head, the
blotch descends below the antennal level, where, within the blotch, a short
green band occurs. This band tapers to its ends, and above it is another band
which widens at the ends, but is hardly longer, and again above these is yet a
third green band that resembles the first. These green bands and the red
blotch are all subject to colour variation, peacock-blue, purple, etc., being sub-
stituted. Apparently the species is not uncommon at Sunnybank, as students
have collected a series, now in the Queensland University, and I myself have
added more to my collection.

OPHIODESMA INNODUS Hardy.

A sketch that I made some years ago shows that the female of this species
has a green band at antennal level, bordered above and below with a red-purple
band, the upper one being the shorter, but neither reaches the posterior eye-border,
nor does the next red band above, which resembles in general proportions the
lowest of these three. The two intervening green bands are thus fused with each
other along the posterior eye-margin and also with the green broad areas above
and below the three central red bands. The lower of these green areas is
/ exceptionally wide and fuses with yet another green band, along the anterior
eye-margin this time, that lies between the outer red curved band and the
blotch. Similarly these red and green bands are repeated in general shape and
contour just below the red blotch at the upper eye-margin. Hence there are, in
a green field, three central red bands that fail to reach the posterior eye-margin,

40 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. V,

whilst above and below these respectively, there is another red band that fails
to reach the anterior eye-margin, and also the two blotches. This makes two red
blotches and five red bands alternating with six green bands, one of which is
very wide. It will be noted that this is only one red and one green band less
than the maximum yet noted in Diptera, and possibly a red band has disappeared
from the very wide green area in the lower half of the eye. This forms the most
complete example of retained eye bands I have yet noted in the Stratiomyiidae, but
none of the red bands are complete, nor are any quite regular. The central red
band is slightly curved and is the narrowest, the adjacent ones above and below
expand towards the rear and only the lower of these two is reasonably straight.
The other two bands, adjacent to the blotches, are strongly curved, one upwards,
the lower one downwards following the contour of the equal blotches. The
symmetry of the markings is very striking.

TABANIDAE.
Genus PELECORRHYNCHUS Macq.
Two species, P. personatus Walk. and P. fergusoni, n. sp., definitely have
entirely red eyes, which character I believe to be consistent throughout the genus.

Pelecorrhynchus fusconiger-group.

In the first part of this series I defined three groups within the genus, of
which the present one is the second, containing five described species and several
undescribed.

Distribution—Only one species occurs in Tasmania and this, fusconiger
Walker, extends as a coastal species at least as far north as Sydney. The more
northern coastal species, fergusoni, seems to have a very limited range from the
Brisbane area and Stradbroke Island and possibly the northern parts of New
South Wales. Of these two, only the former reaches the mountain areas where
all the other known species occur, some showing a limited range even there.
It is to be particularly noted that the group is unknown from the Tasmanian
mountains.

Key to species of the fusconiger growp.

1. Wings with two contrasting colours; black and yellow ....................0- Z
WANE SsUNICOLOUITEd s mMOrenOrslessuhyalincenneee eee eOL oes 3
2. Thorax mainly yellow with a thin median black stripe ........... deuqueti Hardy
Thorax mainly black with a pair of yellow stripes ............ flavipennis Ferguson

3. With some dense white pubescence at base of abdomen. Thorax mainly black with a
pair of very broad, narrowly separated grey stripes, within each of which occurs
a short black stripe near the scutellum. The grey stripe is bordered laterally

withvathinswhitish: live) opr iserosnepouexers ik yeu toned Pathe hrohn overeteWeusn sae tillyardi Taylor

White pubescence at base of abdomen if present sparse and the thorax otherwise
T0828 alto) 6 US eek See a Ane Sol OR A Mem stem abe ALI Ah he ea a tide a SN 4

4. Species with some fiery red hairs on thorax and abdomen ...... claripennis Ricardo
SPeCLes WAC OUE PEGA AINS! wapeiciie.oevscts tlhe) wwsuishcey tev/etoneie Gamage nel sym peas eee CWS Cale eIIGN = Paresh oate eae thoy Clare 5

5. Thorax black with a pair of very thin whitish stripes interrupted just behind the
transverse suture, and broadening out to meet along the apical margin. (From
Barring ton! LOPS)! Pi erate atetae sieve are ara hate eNete epee Oe yc terera areas ok tone mietace netic aia ltetey’s sp.

Thorax brown or slate-greyish. The white stripes are complete or incomplete, but
CoCo Yojenpoal\-18" cee SO OR OC Ori OOOO DOGG TOC OO OOo pO TD AoC 1400 0 OOo D Oma 6

6. Thorax velvet-brown throughout with the whitish stripes conspicuous, at most,
before the transverse suture and faintly indicated beyond this; often limited
to a spot at the transverse suture. Rarely do black marks appear ..........
SA O.0 Cod GIG GOI. ORO OI OCI CO CIS FRCERIO G or ote 6.540 Otero Aicin a1 rons fusconiger Walk.

Thorax more or less strongly slate-grey coloured with a conspicuous pair of whitish
stripes complete and partly bordered laterally with thin black marks. There
may also be a thin median black stripe .................... fergusoni, n. sp.

BY G. H. HARDY. 41

In literature, under the name fusconiger, there are records of specimens
with red hairs on the body, and these doubtless should all be referred to
claripennis Ricardo. According to specimens in collections named by Mackerras,
there are two species that run to claripennis, both before me, the new one having
the wings strongly suffused with yellow and with a nebulous median spot; the
thorax of the two agrees in markings with that of fuwsconiger.

PELECORRHYNCHUS FERGUSONI, Nn. Sp.
P. fusconiger of authors in part.—Ferguson, Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, xxxiii, 1921,

2 (Queensland variety only).

Ricardo (1910) refers to fusconiger as occurring between Sydney and Moreton
Bay, but specimens from the latter locality should be referred here. Taylor (1917)
gives Stradbroke Island, and again all those specimens belong here. Ferguson
(1921) records differences in the Stradbroke Island specimens, but did not regard
the characters as more than a local variety at the time. Subsequently Mackerras
has shown (but not published) that specific differences occur in the terminalia,
and I have mounts of these made by him. fFerguson’s description and the
characters given in the key above are ample for the recognition of this species.

Hab.—Brisbane, August to October, 1924 to 1937, at the Sunnybank swamps.
Also Stradbroke Is., from which many specimens come, as far as I know, all
captured in September.

The flies do not seem to occur on the wing in any year for longer than a
fortnight or three weeks, usually about the middle of September, varying with the
early and late seasons. During 1937, a drought year, they appeared first in late
August, then disappeared, but came again in very late September and early
October. Similarly, P. personatus Walker, which normally comes in late September,
became plentiful on the same swamps in October only. These are the only two
species of the genus known to occur in the Brisbane district.

ScapriA (DIATOMINEURA) PULCHRA Ricardo.
On the female a red narrow band occurs well above antennal level, about
half eye-depth; the area above this is blackish, and below it green. These colour
marks are based upon a small series from Mt. Glorious, Brisbane.

SCAPTIA (DIATOMINEURA) AURIFLUA Don.

On the female a blue blotch margined below with red extends from the
summit to about two-thirds the distance towards the anterior eye-corners, and
below this the eye is mainly green, but the blue extends along the posterior margin
and peters out at the lowermost point of the eye. The description is from Brisbane
specimens.

ECTINOPSIS VULPECUNA Wied.
In literature two varieties are recorded and the exact determination of them
is not clear to me. On the Brisbane form the eyes of the male are green with a
thin red band about antennal level, tapering to a point and not reaching the
posterior border. ‘This red marking is broader but similar on the female and
situated at about level with the anterior eye-corners.

Genus TABANUS Lin.
Except for occasional references to the eyes on a species being green (red on
T. cyaneus Wied.),* there are no records yet made concerning eye-marks on

* Species of Tabanus seen by me show unusually green eyes, or green with slight
red reflections, but one unidentified species has red eyes with slight reflections green,
thus bridging the gap between TJ. cyaneus, which I have not examined alive, and the
more normal forms.

42 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. V,

Australian species and I myself have manuscript notes in only two cases. There
is a considerable difficulty met with in identifying species, and there is no
unanimous opinion concerning the interrelationship between species. Ricardo
made a number of groups that failed to hold. The hairy eye, as against the bare
eye, is about the last of these characters used. White indicated his ideas by
suggesting one hairy-eyed species is allied to a bare-eyed species that also has the
very long and narrow frons, and this is the first suggestion that breaks away
from the traditional scheme. It is proposed here to follow this lead, as it certainly
helps in the natural grouping of species.

Already I have grouped into order those species known from Tasmania, where
only hairy-eyed forms occur, and here I extend this section in order to incorporate
the mainland forms. Most bare-eyed species seem to conform to one or other of
those groups already formed, and some groups previously suggested are now
reduced by amalgamation. These main features are to be recognized in the
following key, the exceptions being few and perhaps not particularly important
if the key be used only as a guide.

Key to sections in genus Tabanus.

I, IMTS VGA Daron ail PEMENIKIESOCl GoscscobcacooddooobuEdoooC due DS Section 1

INTFONSENOLIN A] HCO MV CL VA WLC OG eyes ol cusscrede ye Cue S TG LGNS Rae ay cHotvon/ayeneies Se ete efor RAR ea oR: ae NIE ES 2

Ze VMrOnsSGlVvereine towards antennaey cacrcsy.cetetatcns) teenie rel stalkers horeteieio eterna one Section 2

TONS MPATAllel=SiGeG. rece storscicneler on eel else Sens lore seteiehees cr siletetace'e; eOnM ESR EOP RE Re ote Section 3

MLOnSNCOnVELEINe BLOW ALGS -ANCENMAC! Zoster cheicropene sushi alepeyenens cheyesielotene) er enene ie Section 4
Section 1.

Tabanus avidus-group.

This new group contains inter-related species, including: Tabanus alternatus
Ferg. & Hill (with synonyms limbatinervis Macq. and macquarti Ric., both names
preoccupied), 7. avidus Bigot (with synonyms fuscipes Taylor and taylori Austen),
T. davidsoni Taylor, T. doddi Taylor (with synonym abstersus Taylor, nec Walker),
T. duplonotatus Ricardo (with synonym parvicalosus Tayl., nee Ric.), 7. ochraceo-
flavus Ferg. & Henry, 7. palmensis Ferg. & Hill (with synonym nigropicta Macq.
preoce.), 7. sanguineus Bigot, JT. torresi Ferguson, T. victoriensis Ricardo and
var. heroni Ferguson, var. wentworthi Ferg. & Hill.

The two varieties are regarded as such by Ferguson, who reduced their rank,
but the matter is by no means assured yet. All these are without the appendix,
and agree in the frons, antennae and general characters. From others that I have
seen (unidentified) and from various descriptions, I suspect several more names
will fall here.

Nearest to this group, amid the hairy-eyed species, comes the Tabanus
microdonta-group, of which only one species is known and is limited to Tasmania.
It is not possible at present to draw a limit to section 1, so I cannot tell with
certainty if this will come here, but White thought it should be included with
T. victoriensis Ric.

Section 2.
This contains the gentilis-group, the gregarius-group and the regisgeorgii-
group, all of which seem likely to maintain their status. All species so far placed
in them have hairy eyes.

Section 3.
The exulans-group seems to be the hardest to understand and contains the
species most confused in literature; the limits are uncertain as they verge towards
section 2, but with this paper the hairy-eyed species are now fairly well isolated.

BY G. H. HARDY. 43

Section 4.
The Tabanus pallipennis-group is a new one and is well isolated from the

other sections and apparently it is the outskirts of a palaearctic fauna, whilst
the other three are apparently limited to the Australian region or almost so. As
far as I know, this is the only group in Australia that has banded eyes, all others
seem to have entirely green eyes except 7. cyaneus Wied., which is said to have
red eyes.

ie)

10.

ele

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

Key to species of Tabanus with hairy eyes.
Fourth radial vein without an appendix, frons rather narrow (microdonta-group) ....
i MPR ROR HR cret fon aoa cere ee aunts Sea eri ce oyaiboman etrahia -eemopeltotisl sis a" ancen sieves microdonta Macq.
Fourth radial vein with an appendix. Frons not more than four times longer than

WAG wUISUalvapMat Ch LSS Seve eepedcuets ta lhe oir cme ceter aa le ts cuba lone tela -a a oteratalens ies retain sat ele 2
Frons of female diverging towards antennae, normally becoming there one and a
halPatinvesmwAGder sth ania tu. Cite retary wie) sweyetenc we ciksesianecgatodel erencuskenaeush< suede eels wie ce 3
Frons of the female parallel-sided ..................---.- exulans-group ...... 5
Thorax with well-defined dark stripes, four anteriorly and three posteriorly on a
STE VOT OU Ueeerwracn worst steep enie cine rse ler aiisionel ons teases eM chonsnars cl sis)tere wes. regisgeorgii-group
Thorax with rather ill-defined markings on dorsum, two to five light thin stripes
Oia CEN S fea TOLWOTO LN Gross cag oO. O HOS CIC CROCE ORCC IC OIG CIE ELA MEI cn ORE es hese nn ae 4
Thorax with a median light stripe normal, but sometimes very obscure if not quite
ODSOlETCH WANES SDOLCE CE ecru ceensccSerane, oso ste oi atas Denshare wie ueneceusi seit es ene gentilis-group

Thorax never with the median stripe, wings without spots (gregarius-group) ... 13

Key to the exulans-group.

Callusabsent, seeye lars cox rome ekes eioteme re seisoa eee cie adelaidae Ferguson; pseudobasilis Tayl.
Callus not reaching eyes, being separated by a pulverulent strip .............. 6
Cailus.~nmeachin gy (ey.esmanrein Sigh -iope rick t-tetcie ni otsss Sah ced tees Shere: ols chs: epdlemysfieh aw ot eibeee te ene 8
Body covered with a uniform pulverulent overlay, brownish-yellow (sand colour),

usually completely hiding the markings ....................2.-.. vetustus Walk.
Body, Not Somcoverecds ithe, markinasedenmede aa secs soca cee cies eo cieictere cca craicnel si rat
A somewhat yellowish species from N. S. Wales and Queensland ... ocultus Ricardo
Darks forms h srs ewes Aes eae eee neocirrus Ric. (Tasm.); dixoni Ferg.

(Vict.) ; geraltonensis Tayl. (Queensl.) ; and postponens Walker (N. S. Wales).
Eairs of trons lonsersthan halt themwidtheot GON Ss seers aide oi cies s scieiisk- yokes <i 9
Fain Of trons) Short. MOLM all vacuetsveckecer-woensherercn cme neteronen ete ememoke en's: ois ceciece: teleicen sieces sree ite 10
Fringe on hind tibiae black (Tasmania) ............2.0.-ceceecene edentulus Macq.
Fringe on hind tibiae white (S. Austr.) ....................06. albohirtipes Ferg.
Myesudensely ) clothedaiwithsthairsy Ges aes ctacts lo dete si eievaieted Syst Che sdsiate «ciate siete fle 11
Eyes scantily clothed with hairs. Large species with black antennae and dark wings;

gUGYS5 000 acl ner eM eR ees coche Grom eited ado Or e-t RiO Ene aID econo oreo aloraohe-c okcrororone innotatus Ferg.
Eyes with brownish pubescence; medium to small species .....-..... exulans Erich.
Eyes with white pubescence; large species, 15 mm. ......... nb SORES ABE SEED SA 12
Abdomen black and brown with only a median line of light spots ... whitei, n. name
Abdomen more variegated and broader; with three lines of spots, the outer ones

ODT GU Shae. sose coer ethckenton a tacsuch reyes web atenany hese ation snewen iisuea sna seeeioncheuenee sow aus cals acutipalpis Macq.

Key to the gregarius-group.
Callus separated from the eyes by a pulverulent strip. Face broad, eye-margins at

AM MODLUSELAN ETO. 205 pcg eva ey cu sieey sone as cue Seo oue ogee = Sige BsWaiel.e eL aaSlLoKe ei benie tasmanicus Ferg.
CONNTS REACTS GyEOADORGIORS soocccopevco gcse anocadcdocduDdodoUod SO oOSUDOOODS 14
Costa strongly bordered with fuscous; face broad .............-.-- gregarius Brichs.
Costas not isos bordered clear eee eine eee eae ci eee reheva de crchohehe ceekeestaltare 15
Hair on frons and below callus, unusually long and abundant .......--------- 17
Hair on frons normal, that below callus short, scanty or absent ......-.-.+++--- 16
Callus short, not reaching half-way up frons ............+-see eee e teers tte teess

Hoty cwroa bio diag Ss otic hobartensis White (Tasm.) ; indefinitus Taylor (N. S. Wales) ;

moretonensis F. & H. (Queensl.) and possibly milsonensis F. & H. (N.S. Wales)
Callus reaching beyond half length of frons .... imperfectus Walk (Tasm.) ; flinderst
Ferg. (Flinders Is.) ; cirrus Ricardo (Queensl.) and dubiosus Ric. (Queensl.)

a MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. V,

17. Face excessively wide, the eye-margins lying at an obtuse angle one to the other ....
ES OR SES OG ET Oe Ee LOTT COCLOSMR REICH ITE Cre CLC OSG HOO ERC IES eee neolatifrons Ferg.

Face normal, the eye-margins lying at an acute angle one to the other (belongs to
CHEPELUTAAS=LTOUD)) | Mec.deees love chee cai c tone ee ee et ARE. eee edentulus Macq.

Species not known to me are placed in the above key in accordance with
their descriptions, but many species require a closer investigation with a view to
improving upon the characters here used.

TABANUS MICRODONTA Macq.
Macquart, 1847; Walker, 1854; White, 1915; Ricardo, 1915; and Hardy,

1934—T. wynyardensis Hardy, 1916 and 1935.

It seems that the form wynyardensis is based on unusually small specimens of
microdonta males. The differences are not apparent and an attempt to find females
of the former has yielded, so far, only females of the latter. On this account it is
best, I think, to accept the synonymy.

TABANUS ACUTIPALPIS Macquart.
Macquart, 1838; Walker, 1854; Ricardo, 1915; Ferguson, 1921; Hardy, 1934.—T.
circumdatus var., White, 1915.
The specific interpretation was given by Ferguson, but the synonymy is new.

TABANUS WHITEI, new name.
T. circumdatus White, 1915; Ferguson, 1921; Hardy, 1934.—nec Walker, Ricardo,
etc.

White used the name circumdatus under circumstances still obscure.
Apparently Ricardo had already fixed the name correctly for a mainland species,
followed by Ferguson and Henry, and this is the sense in which it is still used
for mainland specimens. However, finding circumdatus and its supposed synonym
edentulus were used by White for two species in Tasmania, the other authors
tried to divide the circumdatus known to them into two, which has proved
impossible. Actually White gave no evidence to show that circumdatus proper
occurs in Tasmania; the form he called edentulus should have been given the
name. Ferguson has already shown that edentulus used by all authors is wrongly
applied and that this should be applied to an ally which is otherwise without a
valid name, but to which White applied Walker’s name antecedens. This synonymy
is very involved, but its present elucidation has the advantage of bringing back
the naming of species to alignment with the point at which confusion arose
subsequent to the clearing up of specific identities by Ricardo and Ferguson. The
circumdatus of White is without a valid name, and it certainly does not correspond
with any specimens well known on the mainland as circumdatus. For this reason
I have found it necessary to give a new name to White’s species, which is limited
to Tasmania.

TABANUS EDENTULUS Macq.

Macquart, 1845; Walker, 1854; Ricardo, 1915; nec White, 1915.—T. antecedens
Walker, 1854; White, 1915; Ricardo, 1915; ? Taylor, 1916 and 1918; Ferguson,
1921; nec Walker, 1848.

Walker originally described antecedens from mainland specimens, and hence
it cannot be the form so called by White, which is limited to Tasmania. Walker’s
second description from a Tasmanian specimen may apply. Ferguson considered
that edentulus Macquart applies here and, as it seems the only name valid for the
species with strong evidence for its validity, I propose the interpretation should
be accepted. |

BY G. H. HARDY. 45

The structure of the frons makes its position in a section rather ambiguous.
The frons varying from diverging to parallel does not form an index to its
relationship. Other characters show it belongs to the exulans-group, but it is
placed also under the gregarius-group as a convenience for key purposes.

TABANUS EXULANS Erichson.

Erichson, 1842; Walker, 1854; Ricardo, 1915 (esculans); Hardy, 1935—T. hebes
Walker, 1848.—T. nepos Walker, 1848.—T. circumdatus Walker, 1848; Ricardo,
1915, 1917; Taylor, 1918, 1919; Ferguson and Henry, 1919; Johnston and
Bancroft, 1920; Ferguson, 1921; nec White, 1915.—T. abstersus Walker, 1850;
Schiner, 1868; Austen, 1914.—T7. fraterculus Macq., 1850.—T. brevidentatus
Macq., 1855.—T. edentulus White, 1915; Ricardo, 1915; Taylor, 1917, 1918;
Ferguson and Henry, 1919; Ferguson, 1921; nec Macquart.

The above synonymy incorporates that given for the species by Ricardo, but
there is doubt if the species incorporated by the various authors include only the
one form.

TABANUS NEOCIRRUS Ricardo.

Ricardo, 1917, 1921; Hardy, 1934; nec Ferguson.—T. bassii Ferguson, 1921;

Hardy, 1934.

The synonymy is new and the confusion here originates from Ricardo having
quoted Tasmania as the type locality, but Ferguson considered she described from
two species, the type being that from South Australia. Apparently Ferguson
redescribed the species from Victoria, including in it the same species from
Tasmania as Ricardo’s, if the type locality given by her is to be accepted.

In my earlier paper I attempted to deal with these as two species, a position
that cannot be retained. The Tasmanian record of 7. bassii, which specimen is
before me, is only a specimen of neocirrus with a very denuded abdomen, and
the narrower frons that seemed apparent is only a specific variation; careful study
shows it to be of the broad type normal to the species. Doubtless the mainland
specimens in Ferguson’s small series have the same type of denudation. It has
yet to be discovered if the South Australian specimen of neocirrus is distinct,
and it is pertinent to note that Ferguson regarded the Tasmanian series of
neocirrus before me as containing two forms.

TABANUS IMPERFECTUS Walker.

Walker, 1848, 1854; White, 1915; Ricardo, 1915; Taylor, 1918; Ferguson, 1921;

Hardy, 1934.—T. species, near imperfectus Ferguson and Henry, 1919.

I have a mainland specimen identified by Ferguson as being 7. sp., near
imperfectus, but it differs from the Tasmanian specimens only in the less dense
pubescence of the eyes, a specific variation. One Tasmanian specimen has the
frons parallel-sided.

Tabanus pallipennis-group.

Section 4, consisting of a large element in the Palaearctic region, seems to be
limited in Australia to a single group containing only two species as far as yet
known. Of these 7. pallipennis Macq. was seen by neither Ricardo nor Ferguson,
but the latter used the name for a species with spotted wings, which is normally
met with in inland districts. The original description makes no mention of the
wing spots and hence can be applied quite readily to rujinotatus Bigot and may
ultimately be found to belong there.

46 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. V,

The group is characterized by the converging frons with two calli, the second
lying above the normal one and formed into a round spot; the two may join
on abraded specimens by a median line. The abdomen has three almost equally
broad light stripes more or less interrupted at incisions, and both species have
eye-marks.

TABANUS PALLIPENNIS Macquart.

In life the eyes of the female have a green band at antennal level and another
above lower callus level. This gives one red band situated at callus level lying
between two green bands and two red blotches.

The contiguous eyes of the male have an abnormal marking. The upper
blotch is grey-black and below this lies a white band that persists after death,
and it touches the anterior eye-corners where the band is broadest, tapering
towards the posterior border, ending in a point before reaching there. Below this
is a purple band. The lowermost area covering the antennal level is green. That
white band is apparently a layer of opaque white at or near the surface, not
arising from ordinary eye-pigmentation; it extends across the two eyes as an
uninterrupted band.

Hab.—Victoria to Queensland. Widely distributed over the inland sheep areas,
recorded from Lake Hatton, reaching to Gogango, about thirty miles west of
Rockhampton. The specimens upon which the eye description is based are from
Goondiwindi, about four miles north of the township; 5 J, 3 9, September, 1935.

TABANUS RUFINOTATUS Bigot.

Eye-marks of the female only are known to me. This sex has a green band
at antennal level and another just half-way between this and the summit, so
that one red band lies at and below callus level between two green bands and
two blotches, giving a pattern very similar to that of the previous species. The fly
is common in Brisbane.

THEREVIDAE.

Chaetotary.—White refers to the bristles of the thorax as being presutural,
supraalar, postalar, prescutellar and scutellar, whereas Mann refers to them as
prealar, supraalar, postalar, prescutellar and scutellar. Relative to those of the
Asilidae, there are notopleural, presutural, intraalar, postalar, postsutural, dorso-
central and scutellar bristles. There are no supraalar bristles and the so-called
prealar often combine the notopleural with the presutural one.

Diagram of chaetotaxy.

This diagram combines the bristles
normal on a Therevid with more abundantly
represented bristles (dots) on _ certain
Asilidae. dc, dorsocentral bristles; ia,
intraalar bristles; np, notopleural bristles;
pa, postalar bristles; ps, presutural bristles ;
sq, supraalar bristles; sc, scutellar bristles.

wing

The diagram (Fig. 1) shows rows of dots representing the line of bristles
in Asiloidea and the reduced number of bristles represented on Therevidae are
drawn in full. The row np lying along the notopleural ridge is confluent with the
row ps that borders the transverse suture, and this again is confluent with the
intraalar row ia. These rows are normally reduced in regard to number of bristles
on most Asilidae and all Therevidae. The dorsocentrals, when present, are usually
over the central portion of the postsutural region, less frequently in the immediate
prescutellar region on Therevidae.

BY G. H. HARDY. 47

ECTINORRHYNCHUS VARIABILIS Macq.

On the eyes of both sexes there is only an upper blotch of red; the green at
antennal level and below invades this red along the eye-margins, producing a
rounded red blotch. This description is based on Brisbane specimens, but an old
Tasmanian specimen was used, not very satisfactorily, in an attempt to revive
the colours, and this showed traces indicating that the same marking occurs there.

ECTINORRHYNCHUS LEVIS Mann.
The eyes are entirely red on the male, those of the female have not yet been
noted.

TAENOGERA NOTATITHORAX Mann.

The eyes of the female are uniformly but obscurely greenish shot with red.
The male of this fly is unknown.

NEODIALINEURA STRIATITHORAX Mann.

The greenish-yellow eyes of the female have a red complete band just above
antennal level, and in addition the lowermost eye-border is margined red. The
markings on the male are not yet noted.

AGAPOPHYTUS RUFICAUDATUS Mann.

The eye on the female has a green band at antennal level with a red band
below and a large red blotch above; the rest is green.

AGAPOPHYTUS ALBIBASIS Mann.

The green eye on the female has a green band at antennal level bordered by
a red band above and below. The upper red band strongly tends to become thin
at anterior margin and the lower one broadens out there; otherwise the bands
are fairly uniform in width.

The male is similarly marked, but the upper band is very sinuous and does not
reach the posterior eye-margin, whilst the green band is thereby rendered irregular
in width.

AGAPOPHYTUS SQUAMOSUS Mann.

The red eyes of the female have four green bands all reaching the eye-margins.
The uppermost green band is broad and curves upwards at each end. The second
and third bands are similarly curved and it is uncertain which is to be regarded
as being at antennal level; they fuse together along the posterior eye-margin. The
lowermost band lies practically straight and at a level half-way down the face.

ACUTIPALPA POLINOSA Mann.

Synonymy.—A. semifiava Mann.

Associated with A. polinosa Mann, only recorded on the male, there are
invariably found females that correspond with A. semiflava Mann, only recorded
on the female. These have not yet been taken in copula, but field evidence is
very strong on the suggestion that they are sexes of the same species. I have
a letter from Mr. Mann, in answer to this, saying that he too has suspected the
names belong to the one species. This dimorphism is a feature of the genus, so
doubtless the synonymy is quite correct.

On the male the eye has a green band at antennal level, but the green invades
upwards along the eye-margins, isolating the large red area above into a spot.

This large triangular spot has a concave anterior side and a convex posterior side i
with a moderately straight base. Below the green band is a red one which SEMEL E I \

a

geleaz

~

48 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. YV,

both eye-margins, and the lowermost border of the eye is margined with red, a
remnant of the blotch. Elsewhere the eyes are green.

The female has a very similar design, but the green at antennal level does
not extend as far as the summit, so the red triangular area maintains contact
with the eye-margin, thus retaining the character of a blotch. This blotch is
similar in shape to the spot on the male, but with the top of the triangle cut off
by the eye-margin. The red band below does not reach the posterior eye-margin
and the whole area below this is green.

ACRASPIZA OBSCURIPES Mann.

I have only seen the characters of the eye on one male and two females,
and my notes were not made with reference to the new species below. From my
notes it would appear that the male has a green band at antennal level lying
between two red bands; the area above is reddish, and that below is green. The
female has a green band at antennal level lying between a red blotch above and
a red band below, the band not reaching the posterior eye-border. These remarks
are based upon specimens taken at Sunnybank close to where the type pair were
taken in copula.

ACRASPIZA SIMILIS, 0. sp.

Subsequent to the publication of A. obscuripes, and taken in the same place,
a new species has been discovered that at first was thought from males only to be
the same. Recently the discovery of a pair in copula has shown very decisively
that there are two species standing in collections under the name obscuripes
male, but this does not affect any of the type series in accordance with information
given to me by Mr. Mann.

g. Very similar to obscuripes Mann, but of larger average size. The eyes
have a green band at antennal level, between two red bands; the upper red band
is turned upwards near the posterior margin, which it does not reach, and the
lower red band fails (? not always) to reach the posterior border too. Above
this the eye is reddish or at least shot with red, and below it is green. The
facets above are strongly contrasting with those at and below antennal level,
with a marked line of division, which character is less marked on A. obscuripes.
The two basal segments of the antennae are equally short. The thorax each side
of the median line has 2 notopleural, 3 presutural dorsocentral, 1 intraalar and
1 postalar bristles; and a pair of scutellar marginals. The black abdomen shows
brown integuments at the base and at some incisions. The yellow hypopygium
and legs (including coxae) are further distinctive characters, as also the wing
pattern, which is hardly reduced, but resembles that of the female on both this
and obscuripes.

9. A green band at antennal level lies between a red band below and a red
blotch above; the latter does not reach the posterior eye-margin; elsewhere green.
The frons is fully twice as long as its median width and hence is obviously
narrower than that on obscuripes. The thorax is quite bright reddish instead of
deep reddish-brown, and there are only two dorsocentral bristles. The abdomen
has a slight covering of tomentose brown above, otherwise all characters are as
on the male.

Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, the holotype male and allotype female in copula,
7 3g, 8 2 paratypes all captured at Sunnybank, April, 1937 and 1938, by sweeping
grass. Others in September, October, February, March, and May, 1930, 1933, 1936
and 1937, so doubtless the species is quite common over the summer months.

BY G. H. HARDY. 49

Note.—The scutellum in this genus is said to be raised to the perpendicular,
but actually this is not morphologically comparable with that of any other genera
examined where the apex of the scutellum lies considerably higher than the base.
In the present case there is the apex with its apical bristles quite normal, but
the dorsal surface of the scutellum has a large protuberance rising perpendicularly,
giving to the observer the impression of a raised scutellum.

ACRASPIZA TRIFASCIATA Krober.

There is a male before me that evidently belongs to this species, and it
bears on its label “Bred from a Scenopinid ? larva” and on another label
“Gordonvale, W. C. Dormer, 19.10.23”. It may be presumed, I think, that this
fly was reared from an Asiloidean larva. All Therevid larvae that I have found
have been living free in the soil. Melin has pointed out that Asilid larvae may
be reared on a vegetable diet, and, with my own experience, which is limited, I
find field observations suggest that the carnivorous habits are not essential for
the Asiloidean larvae; it is possible they are omnivorous, feeding in an incidental
manner on any other larvae that may be associated with them.

Addendum.
ON EyYE-COLORATION.

Whilst writing the above paper I briefly set down some ideas on eye-coloration
and sent them to Dr. B. M. Hobby, of the Oxford University. I expected the main
theme would interest him and others who are also collecting in the field data
concerning insect behaviour. Dr. Hobby forwarded the manuscript to Dr. H.
Eltringham, of Stroud, Gloucester, an authority on related matters, and received
in reply an encouraging letter which is now before me.

Dr. Eltringham has since then allowed me to quote from his letter and a
subsequent one. He informs me it had not occurred to him that there is any
connection between the colour of insect eyes and their habits, but it is “. . . an
interesting point that might be worth investigation .. .”’ “Red and black in flies’
eyes are due to colour of the pigment surrounding the pseudocones, red being
much the commoner.” “So far as I have been able to make out, green is always
a ‘structural’ colour caused by iridescence. The fact that there are these green
eyes would, however, suggest that there is some difference in the structure. de

The letters then discuss Exner’s original paper, which goes somewhat
elaborately into refraction from the mathematical point of view, and which
Dr. Eltringham found to be unusually obscure. In 19383, Dr., C. J. Van der Horst
published a paper on the optics of the Eucone eye, purporting to show that the
existing theories in relation to this type of eye are untenable. The point was
submitted to Mr. T. R. Smith, of the National Physical Laboratory, and in his
opinion Van der Horst’s conclusions are invalid, since the optical principles
invoked are not applicable to the structure in which the elements are in
physiological continuity.

Dr. Eltringham, in his first letter, expressed the opinion that if the green
colour be a diffraction effect, and due to interference by some structure of smaller
dimensions than the average light wave, there seems little hope of detecting it ina
micro-section, and he ends on the encouraging note: “At the same time let Hardy
carry on. His results should be very interesting, but I should recommend him to
get a lot more data before publishing.”

It will be many years before my limited opportunities for field work can
bring results. The study is, of course, of basic interest and without it insect

i

50 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. V,

behaviour cannot be adequately understood. I am indebted, however, to both
Dr. Hobby and Dr. Eltringham for having cleared up the exact position relative
to the theory of eye-colour in insects. Tentatively my theory stands that green
is entirely due to refraction or some allied displacement of light, a structural
alteration. This is slowly taking place parallel with alterations in behaviour,
giving a new sense to or an improvement to vision in the Diptera. This is,
however, only one branch in the study of coloration relative to the insect’s
welfare, and I have further notes that trend towards showing the development of
body-coloration coming more or less under the studies in so-called “mimicry”.
Parallel developments in body-coloration and form are well known, but hitherto
I have seen no data or theories to indicate how these convergences have been
brought about. The purpose of the above paper and others in manuscript is to
accumulate data rather than to express a theory, data that may clear up an obscure
point relative to eye-coloration, namely, whether this has relationship to fly
behaviour.

d1

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS AND TWO NEW SPECIES FROM PAPUA.
FAMILY PYRGOTIDAE (DIPTERA).

By J. R. MALLocH.
(Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.EW.,. F.Z.S8.)

(Two Text-figures. )
[Read 26th April, 1939.]

At present I know of but one species of this family recorded from New Guinea,
Campylocera brevicornis Hendel. I have not seen the species. Before me now
there are two Papuan species, neither of them described, and below I present
descriptions of them.

In 1929 appeared a posthumus paper on the family in Australia by Dr. M.
Bezzi (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., liv, pp. 1-31) in which there was included a list
of the then known species. Keys to the genera and species from Australia were
given, so that the paper is helpful in any consideration of the family from this
region.

ADAPSILIA Waga.

Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 1 (i), tom. ii, 1842, 279.

Bezzi described a species of this genus from northern Queensland and, though
the single damaged female before me does not entirely agree with the generic
characters, I tentatively place it in Adapsilia.

ADAPSILIA AEQUALIS, Nn. Sp.

9. An entirely brownish-yellow species, with the facial foveae and parafacials
and genae polished, the latter darkened and with a black mark below eye, the
mesonotum slightly shiny. Wing yellowish-hyaline, more noticeably yellow in the
costal and base of anterior basal cells and stigma, with a narrow dark cloud on
cross-veins at apices of the basal cells, and on inner cross-vein, and a slender
fuscous streak over the spur vein near apex of second vein extending to or almost
to the outer cross-vein. All hairs and bristles, and the legs, brownish-yellow.

Frons about 1:25 times as long as wide, and about 1:5 times as wide as one
eye, protruded in front, with some fine erect hairs in centre and a few on sides
above, one of them more pronounced than the others, and four fine bristly hairs
on the vertex bent over the elevated vertical edge, the latter not very prominent.
Paratacial at base of antenna about half as wide as eye at middle and wider than
the third antennal segment, gradually narrowed below, with some microscopic
surface hairs, more evident along outer edge; gena about as high as widest part
of parafacial, with very fine sparse hairs; face with the foveae fused above,
separated below by a raised line that widens at lower extremity. Lower occiput
widened, widest part about half as wide as eye. Antennae normal, geniculated
at second joint, the first segment about half as long as second, the latter entire,
densely short, stiff yellow-haired, on upper or outer edge about two-thirds as long

52 NEW GENUS AND SPECIES FROM PAPUA,

as third segment, the latter slightly tapered to apex where it is moderately broadly
rounded; arista bare, slightly flattened, length greater than that of antenna.

Mesonotum with traces of two blackish vittae, most noticeable behind suture.
Bristles as follows: Humeral, sometimes two, notopleurals 2, sometimes either or
both duplicated, supra-alar 1, postalars 2, dorsocentrals 1 pair; scutellars 4 or
more, the brownish-yellow surface hairs long and stiff and quite numerous. One
Or more mesopleural bristles.

Legs normal, mid femur with an elongate pear-shaped depressed area on the
anterior surface extending from close to base to about the apical third, its broad
extremity towards base, its surface entirely dull. All femora with some fine
ventral bristles and the usual long basal ventral bristle. Wing as Figure 1.
Halteres brownish-yellow. Abdomen coloured as thorax, without blackish markings,

1.—Adapsilia aequalis, n. sp. 2.—E picerina setifemur, n. sp.

quite densely stiff yellow-haired, the lateral armature on the elongate composite
basal tergite bristle-like, quite prominent apically. Genital cone evenly tapered,
with numerous yellow bristly hairs, no exceptional features, and more than half
as long as remainder of the abdomen. Length, 15 mm.

Type, Papua: Mondo, 5,000 feet, Jan.-Feb., 1934 (L. E. Cheesman), British
Museum.

In Adapsilia illingworthi Bezzi, the inner cross-vein of the wing is at about
one-third from the apex of the discal cell instead of close to the middle of that cell,
and there are many other characters to distinguish the two species.

EPICERINA, Nn. gen.

This genus is very similar to Hpicerella Macquart, but differs in having all the
femora, in at least the male, armed with short stout bristles on the apical fourth
or less of the anteroventral and posteroventral surfaces, in having no dorsocentral
bristles, one or more hind marginal mesopleural bristles, one sternopleural and
one pteropleural bristle. For other characters see description of the genotype
below.

EPICERINA SETIFEMUR, ND. Sp.

do. General colour brownish-yellow, greater portion of the frons, dorsum of
thorax, including the scutellum and the postnotum, and dorsum of abdomen,
blackened or dark brown.

Head about 1:5 times as high as long in centre, tapered below in profile; frons
about 2-5 times as long as wide, slightly widened in front where it projects about
one-fifth of its length beyond the eyes. Ocelli lacking; vertex with a pair of
moderately strong bristles; orbitals lacking; interfrontalia with a number of
strong hairs anteriorly. Parafacial at base of antenna about as wide as third
antennal segment, much narrowed centrally; gena higher than width of parafacial
at base. Some fine hairs on the paratacial above. Antenna reaching to almost
the lower level of eye, basal segment not half as long as second, the latter entire,
quite densely haired, almost as long as the third segment which is tapered slightly

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 53

to, and narrowly rounded at, apex; arista distinctly pubescent, thickened on basal
fifth, thread-like beyond. Palpi moderately thick, parallel-sided, bare. Lower
occiput but slightly projecting. Eye narrowed below, the facets larger than usual.
Humeral and posterior postalar bristles very fine and short, anterior notopleurai,
the supra-alar and anterior postalar short but strong; scutellum bare, with a pair
of quite closely placed apical bristles.

Wing as Figure 2, greyish-hyaline, with pale brown markings. Third vein
bare at base. Legs normal in form, with no exceptional armature except the
femoral bristles. Abdomen glossy, largely black, the pregenital segment black
except at base. The basal composite segment as long as the next four combined,
the latter subequal in length, the sixth with some outstanding bristles laterally
at apex; pregenital segment longer than the basal one, with sparse erect fine hairs
on dorsum and more noticeable hairs below at apex; genital segment with a
prominent stout spike-like apical process. Length, 9 mm.

Type, Papua: Mafulu, 4,000 feet, Dec., 1933 (L. EH. Cheesman), British Museum.

A slender species readily recognizable by the femoral armature.

REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. OECOPHORIDAE. VIII.
By A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.R.E.S.

{Read 29th March, 1939.]

67. Gen. EuLrecHrRIA Meyr. (continued).

Recent captures at Talwood, Miles, Roma, and especially those made by Mr.
W. B. Barnard at Injune, have revealed many obscure autumnal species of this
genus, at a season when Oecophoridae are scarce in most localities. It is desirable
to describe these here. The species in the genus now number 376.

After these descriptions there follows the first instalment dealing with the
numerous genera and huge collection of species terminating with the genus
Philobota. :

892. HKULECHRIA PLATYPHAEA, N. Sp. (mdAatudaos, broadly dusky.)

9. 18 mm. Head ochreous-whitish; back of crown fuscous. Palpi with second
joint reaching base of antennae, moderately thickened with appressed scales,
terminal joint two-thirds, slender; white, base of second joint fuscous. Antennae
fuscous. Thorax white, with large anterior and posterior dark fuscous spots.
Abdomen fuscous. Legs fuscous with ochreous-whitish rings; posterior pair
ochreous-whitish. Forewings moderately broad, suboval, costa moderately arched,
apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; white with three dark fuscous fasciae;
first basal extending from one-sixth costa to one-fourth dorsum; second median,
anterior margin extending from one-third costa to mid-dorsum, posterior margin
trom two-thirds costa to before tornus; third apical, anterior margin from five-
sixths costa to tornus; cilia fuscous, apices ochreous-whitish except at tornus.
Hindwings grey; cilia grey, beneath apex ochreous-whitish except bases.

Queensland: Injune in April; one specimen received from Mr. W. B. Barnard.
This species should follow E. ombrodes (No. 552).

893. KULECHRIA PLAGIOPHAEFA, Nl. Sp. (mAayodacos, obliquely fuscous. )

9. 16 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi with second joint just exceeding
base of antennae, terminal joint two-thirds; pale brownish-ochreous. Antennae
fuscous. Abdomen ferruginous-brown; apices of segments and tuft ochreous-
whitish. Legs whitish-ochreous; anterior pair fuscous. Forewings narrow-oval,
costa moderately arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; white; a dark
fuscous spot at two-thirds, connected by an irregular paler fuscous streak with
tornus; cilia white. Hindwings and cilia whitish-grey.

In colour and marking this resembles £. gypsochroa, but the palpi are much
shorter. I place it after #. ewrygramma (No. 554).

Queensland: Injune in March; one specimen received from Mr. W. B. Barnard.

894. EULECHRIA EMMELES, nN. Sp. (éumueAns, harmonious.)

3, 2. 20-21 mm. Head pale yellow. Palpi with second joint reaching base of
antennae, moderately thickened with appressed scales, terminal joint three-fourths,
slender; pale yellow, terminal joint fuscous. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male

BY A. J. TURNER. 55

1. Thorax fuscous; apices of tegulae and a large posterior spot pale yellow.
Abdomen ochreous-grey; tuft ochreous. Legs pale yellow; anterior pair and
middle tarsi fuscous. Forewings suboval, rather narrow, costa moderately arched,
apex round-pointed, termen obliquely rounded; pale yellow with fuscous markings;
base of costal edge fuscous; a narrow fascia from two-fifths costa to mid-dorsum,
nearly straight or slightly curved inwards; a large apical blotch, its anterior edge
irregularly convex from three-fourths costa to tornus; a terminal series of dots from
before apex to above tornus, and between its extremities a slender suffused line
more or less developed, both pale yellow; cilia grey. Hindwings dark grey; cilia
whitish-ochreous, on apex grey.

Queensland: Injune in March and April; four specimens received from Mr.
W. B. Barnard, who has the type. This should follow H#. cosmosticha (No. 556).

895. EULECHRIA STENOPHYLLA, N. Sp. (oTevomvAdos, Narrow-winged.)

2. 20-22 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi with second joint exceeding
base of antennae, terminal joint three-fourths; whitish. Antennae grey; towards
base whitish. Abdomen whitish-grey. Legs whitish. Forewings very narrow, costa
gently arched, apex pointed, termen oblique; 2 and 8 connate; white faintly
ochreous-tinged; cilia white. Hindwings and cilia white.

Australian Capital Territory: Canberra in March; two specimens. I place
this before H. epibosca (No. 562).

896. HULECHRIA FUMIFERA, nN. Sp. (fumiferus, smoky.)

6. 22 mm. Head and thorax fuscous sparsely sprinkled with whitish. Palpi
with second joint just reaching base of antennae, rather stout, terminal joint three-
fifths; fuscous, extreme apex of second and extreme base of terminal joint white.
Antennae grey; ciliations in male 1. Abdomen grey; tuft whitish-ochreous. Legs
fuscous with white rings; posterior pair ochreous-grey-whitish. Forewings suboval,
costa strongly arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; fuscous densely
sprinkled with whitish, appearing grey; darker at base; markings fuscous; a
triangle on costa from one-third to two-thirds; first discal at one-third, plical
beneath it, second discal before two-thirds, crescentic, a dot above and between
discals forming apex of costal triangle; a suffused line from five-sixths costa
inwards, soon bent outwards and then downwards and continued to tornus, more
ov less interrupted; cilia grey with a broad interrupted dark basal line. Hind-
wings and cilia grey.

Queensland: Injune in February; one specimen received from Mr. W. B.
Barnard. I place this after EH. placophaea (No. 660).

897. HEULECHRIA ACOMPSA, Nn. Sp. (adkoupos, unadorned.)

$- 20-23 mm. Head and thorax fuscous mixed with whitish. Palpi slender,
second joint not reaching base of antennae, terminal joint one-half; fuscous
sprinkled with whitish. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 1. Abdomen
ferruginous; apices of segments and tuft brown-whitish. Legs fuscous sprinkled
with whitish; posterior pair mostly whitish. Forewings narrow, costa gently
arched, apex rounded, termen very obliquely rounded; fuscous sprinkled with
whitish, more densely so in centre of disc; markings dark fuscous; first discal at
one-third, plical slightly beyond, second discal at two-thirds, a dot above and
between discals, another beneath and sometimes confluent with second discal; a
small fuscous costal triangle, sometimes obsolete, its apex reaching second discal;
a fine line inwards from costa before apex, strongly angled outwards beneath costa,
thence curved to tornus, sometimes indistinct; a terminal series of dots; cilia
whitish with a fuscous submedian line. Hindwings grey; cilia grey-whitish.

a6 REVISION Ok AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. OECOPILORIDAEK. VILLI,

Queensland: Injune in March; six specimens received from Mr. W. B. Barnard,
who has the type. I place this after #. capnopleura (No. 663).

898. EULECHRIA ACERBA, 1. Sp. (acerbus, gloomy.)

3, 2. 18-20 mm. Head ochreous. Palpi with second joint reaching base of
antennae, moderately thickened, smooth, terminal joint three-fourths, slender;
fuscous, apex of second and terminal joint except apex whitish. Antennae fuscous;
ciliations in male two-thirds. Thorax fuscous. Abdomen grey; apices of segments
and tuft ochreous. Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish-grey. Forewings suboval,
costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; dark grey with
patchy whitish suffusion in disc reaching costa at two-thirds, remainder of costal
and terminal area wholly grey; stigmata obscure, fuscous, approximated, first
discal at one-third, plical beneath it, second discal before two-thirds, a dot above
and between discals nearer first, another beneath second; cilia grey. Hindwings
and cilia grey.

Queensland: Injune in March; three specimens received from Mr. W. B.
Barnard, who has the type. This may follow #. synnephes (No. 678).

899. HULECHRIA POLYPENTHES, N. Sp. (aodu7evOyns, very mournful.)

6. 26-28 mm. Head and thorax fuscous mixed with whitish, appearing grey.
Palpi with second joint reaching base of antennae, moderately stout, terminal
joint two-fifths, slender; white sprinkled with fuscous. Antennae whitish finely
ringed with blackish; ciliations in male two-thirds to one. Abdomen ferruginous-
grey; apices of segments and tuft ochreous-whitish. Legs fuscous irrorated, and
tarsi annulated, with white. Forewings narrow, not dilated, costa moderately
arehed, apex rounded, termen oblique; fuscous mixed with whitish, appearing
grey; markings dark fuscous; first discal before one-third, plical beneath it, second
discal before two-thirds, sometimes double, a dot above and between discals; a line
inwards from four-fifths costa, sharply angled outwards beneath costa, thence
curved to tornus; cilia pale grey. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

Queensland: Injune in February and March; two specimens received from
Mr. W. B. Barnard, who has the type. This may come after H. orecta (No. 708).

900. HULECHRIA DIFFICILIS, Nn. Sp. (difficilis, hard to distinguish.)

do. 18-24 mm. Head and thorax fuscous mixed with whitish. Palpi with
second joint slender, not reaching base of antennae, terminal joint one-half;
fuscous mixed with whitish. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male 1 to 14. Abdomen
dark grey; tuft grey-whitish. Legs fuscous mixed with whitish; tibiae and tarsi
fuscous with whitish rings. Forewings narrow, costa gently arched, apex rounded,
termen obliquely rounded; fuscous finely sprinkled with whitish, sometimes more
so in centre of disc; markings dark fuscous; first discal at one-third, plical beyond
it, second discal at two-thirds, sometimes forming a short transverse crescent, a
dot above and between discals, sometimes a short streak before and beneath second;
a line from three-fourths costa at first transverse, sharply angled outwards in disc,
then curved inwards to tornus, but usually more or less obsolete; cilia fuscous with
some white points. Hindwings and cilia grey.

The few examples before me show considerable variation in size and develop-
ment of marking. The length of the antennal ciliations also varies more than
usual. For their identification I rely mainly on the structure of the palpi, but
more material is desirable. Together with the following, it may be placed before
EB. phoryntis Meyr. (No. 745).

Queensland: Injune in March; Roma in April; Miles in May; four specimens.

BY A. J. TURNER. 57

901. EULECHRIA MAESTA, 1. Sp. (maestus, gloomy.)

¢. 16-18 mm. Head and thorax fuscous sprinkled with white. Palpi slender,
second joint not reaching base of antennae, terminal joint one-fourth, reaching
vertex; fuscous sprinkled with white. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male 1.
Abdomen fuscous. Legs fuscous sprinkled with whitish; posterior pair paler. Fore-
wings narrow, costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen very obliquely rounded;
fuscous sprinkled with white; markings dark fuscous; first discal at one-third,
plical beneath it, second discal at two-thirds, double or crescentic, a dot above and
between discals; a suffused basal spot and another on mid-dorsum; a subterminal
line indented beneath costa; cilia grey with a fuscous sub-basal line. Hindwings
and cilia fuscous.

Very similar to H. difficilis, but the terminal joint of palpi is much shorter.

Queensland: Injune in February and March; nine specimens received from Mr.
W. B. Barnard, who has the type.

902. EULECHRIA CLASTOSTICHA, 1. SP. (KAacrootxos, with broken lines.)

do. 28-32 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi slender, second joint exceeding
base of antennae, terminal joint three-fifths; fuscous with a few whitish scales.
Antennae whitish obscurely ringed with fuscous; ciliations in male 13. Abdomen
fuscous; tuft ochreous-grey-whitish. Legs fuscous; posterior pair paler; tibiae and
tarsi white-ringed. Forewings elongate, strongly dilated posteriorly, costa slightly
arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; fuscous sprinkled with whitish;
markings dark fuscous; a fine subcostal broken line from base to two-thirds, a
similar line below middle, bent upwards at its extremity to join subcostal line,
both lines partly continuous to a variable extent; a line from four-fifths costa, at
first nearly transverse, then bent outwards and continued near and parallel to
termen to end at tornus; a terminal series of dots; cilia grey-whitish with a darker
median line. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

Queensland: Injune in May and June; eight specimens received from Mr.
W. B. Barnard, who has the type. This may be placed after H. atrisignis (No. 764),
with which it agrees in shape of forewings.

903. HULECHRIA DRYOCOETES, 1. Sp. (dpvoxoityns, lurking in the forest.)

6. 18 mm. Head and thorax whitish-brown. Palpi with second joint much
exceeding base of antennae, terminal joint three-fourths; whitish-brown, second
joint fuscous externally from base to middle and with a subapical fuscous ring.
Antennae whitish-brown annulated with fuscous; ciliations in male 4. Abdomen
pale ochreous-brown. Legs whitish-ochreous; anterior tibiae barred with fuscous
on outer surface. Forewings suboval, costa moderately arched, apex rounded,
termen obliquely rounded; whitish-brown; markings and some scattered scales
dark fuscous; a fine streak from base of costa; a dot on base of dorsum; stigmata
rather large, first discal at one-third, plical beneath it, second discal before two-
thirds; a spot on three-fifths costa; another on costa before apex giving rise to a
line of fine dots, indented beneath costa, thence outwardly curved and running
along lower half of termen to tornus; cilia whitish-brown with some fuscous
points. Hindwings and cilia ochreous-grey-whitish.

North Queensland: Lake Barrine (Atherton Tableland) in September; two
specimens. This is not near any other species, but may precede FE. mutabilis.

904. EULECHRIA MUTABILIS, 0. Sp. (mutabilis, inconstant.)

3, 2. 16-20 mm. Head whitish. Palpi with second joint reaching base of
antennae, slender, smooth, terminal joint three-fifths, slender; white. Antennae
grey; ciliations in male 2. Thorax whitish-grey. Abdomen ochreous-whitish. Legs
ochreous-whitish; anterior pair pale rosy. Forewings suboval, costa gently arched;
apex rounded-rectangular, termen obliquely rounded; white; a small blackish spot at

G

58 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. OECOPHORIDAE. VIII,

one-third and another at two-thirds; a dark fuscous streak from mid-base along
fold, touching first spot, then bent slightly upwards and nearly reaching second
spot, but this may be partly or wholly obsolete; cilia white. Hindwings with 5
approximated to 4 at origin; white; sometimes ochreous-tinged; cilia white.

A peculiar species not near any other. I place it before HZ. cycnoptera. The
pink forelegs and curvature of vein 5 of hindwings suggest some affinity to
Machimia, but the antennal pecten is strongly developed.

Queensland: Injune in March and April; three specimens received from
Mr. W. B. Barnard, who has the type.

905. HULECHRIA ALBIPALPIS, D. sp. (albipalpis, with whitish palpi.)

o. 18 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi with second joint reaching base
of antennae, terminal joint three-fourths; ochreous-whitish, extreme base of second
joint fuscous. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male 1. Abdomen grey. Legs
whitish sprinkled with fuscous; anterior pair wholly fuscous except whitish tarsal
rings. Forewings comparatively short and broad, dilated posteriorly, costa strongly
arched, apex rounded-rectangular, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique;
fuscous with blackish markings; first discal at one-third, plical beneath it, second
discal before two-thirds; a subterminal line of dots; cilia fuscous. Hindwings and
cilia grey.

An obscure species, but easily recognized by its broad forewings and whitish
rather stout palpi. I place it before Z. thetica (No. 880).

Macpherson Range (Binna Burra, 2,500 feet) in February; one specimen.

Key to the following Genera.
1. Palpi with second joint long, rough-haired above and beneath from middle or before

ROW FE OL =: i 5.cuit ide Gi, CROACK CI RON CEC iinet met ETERS RCLChE ECC aii GCN acre Ribera Poca eee nes irs a AS tsk acy 2

IZENh a EKONRtl) Gooabao NOOO MOOUGOC OOO Odeo Naor Bob blooded od ocdale 5b omos,6.4. ous dan0 5

2. Palpi with long anterior tuft on apex of second joint .....................+.-.-- 3
EXE hoy aie aVayoyPorey oye) Otol oF cb) A eVEO Clo Oiec we o ae O. oe Ono oO OSG Ooo demon o toads Soe ac 4

oy PHOrewinessmwibhwaeand ro) CONNAter OM Sta lceah mrieca cl ici cieisie = sieienelereiencielolcnsieleie Heaarsia
Horewinesiwithwe and 3) Separatern..creutaciet) stele ec oot oe oie teie clones Corethropalpa

4. Antennaeswithsbasali:pecten: q<paswrnsiythaederste hohe. sie oe el > aia een ee tolane Pleurota
ANTENNAE, WICH OUES DC CECT ee «spe sepsncusits jsdeualisiey crane. eqersapiouerel obo cuonepeite depaxei een feuene wench shalePeus Zacorus

by Palpi-withwapical inferior tutte cis io tees uss es, sh ousuis.s seyse ss eusliavole le vairslevele sh elseueienelese cueueierene 6
Pallpim with OUtvaDICALSCULU cote c cicvecoteilore co etiotere tetra octome totelclinre ern otetey aialiaietareterre aisle mina means ions 10

Got Hindwinestwitht4 absent sey. cpitee ahaa. Sees SII AEG Oe. letretatoeenciere olate Ptochosaris
Eindwings} with) <4: Presents ays) sysyectereires ct ott thats Segal oes epeyete es UTR Aree mie eel ahaa s Ah cdaet teens 7

ds MOTCWINES with) 2 And 13 istal Ke) sii cscecvevsuaucinus, skenclecesorwleonegays. Sree w poueneacnousroncbensucxeue Pararsia
MOLewANeSsmwithearandy on SCDALTALOmeyctern ive crete re elore nel cece we geconeoueieieuscesevelclersnerersVeleuareden ores 8
SeeANtennae: Without Decten® Hei reehnctaereee chaveua totes te ce aseePene decane <o): oso atten) eileuanaartione ates ote 9
Antennae gwithyipecten M., Pitch oe hetimcuen ce er edalotothenensRoteret sy oie felcuemodcte te cies aachetauer eta en- Saropla

5° MOrewines \Clongate-OVvate® cyolirs 6 oc spdreys tas ere sieieiteel oleate oledetio lee revelene ape retcreeennte Atheropla
MOLEWAINSSSDLOAGLY) OVALE Kopitar nic tisse fo cpeberouels (Pull eusasnclelopersieaspen hekoick nee stat sheyeeeys Orthiastis

10. Palpi with second joint thickened and rough-haired towards apex posteriorly .... 11
PAL ie OCASOM se shake orate eteleleer chelehetevat tie ckevercle. one etenohter ena ne tek cliarenererera rate levieverenante tn onatiatiet siete cere tere 12
iePalpiwitheterminal joint dessithan 1one-thirdiasrs sus scseeeeeie cies ie eee Trachyzancla
Palpiwith Terminal joint lone-balt OrsMonre Wayeiete et © chalet cieleve ihe kaneiel Meleleate Protomacha

12. Palpi with second joint thickened and rough-scaled almost from base .......... 13
PP DIDI TO EMS Ola iere ccaeee le tatavec onersyie ovate uals tolerate Tateak ese hevere Yeunwe: eioumrekoLoveiisusyerel anere level onsaeheNcnsuctateateene al)

ug: Palpi- with) second joint not reaching base of antennae s-..e.....-. cece ecu eee 14
Palpi with second joint reaching base of antennae ..............-...0eeeeeeees 16

14. Forewing cilia with a basal series of broad scales ...............-e.-: Aeolocosma
Moron, poster Hb MVC) Gog omoommo oe od OO oUIoOGODe BOO NOL oGnOT oe ae vad oooMd ade die 15

LSA NCENNAe WIth Wasa DECOM sisieistelets te oe ab cote a whe tavereba tous eusielei cise ce etanartoueietone Coeranica
AntennserwithoutebasalyPeCten kr.hts hh ete ete ete cte ete is eae wie eects Sie eieveiererecaie © Buthictis

Le- Antennae withouwtebasalnpecteny ceperste tc aie ehsle dels cceteklers ielc)cromasphomn cherchater arenes Thalerotricha

Antennae With DASAL DECUCM. ccpeve cscyn Mie c ctorcsie vue forepeloueheiels! avetonarebe tratercistatn acts Trachyxzysta

BY A. J. TURNER. 59

17. Palpi with second joint rough-scaled at apex anteriorly ................+-.--+.-- 18
IPH MOE GO soococdococosovoevsrpoagcobucsugscanbO GoTo uUEE DU BCOUOOOLOMRCOdauC 19
18. Hindwings lanceolate; 3 and 4 separate .....-..---. 22 eee eee eee eee eee Acorotricha
Hindwings elongate-ovate or broadly ovate; 3 and 4 connate ............ Pachybela
1G. JMS Wratdaouie leis jeCueI Goooodbow on ud onoo Ooo dboDUu OOOO oDCCoOuD Antiopala
ASMIEIMAAG Witla WAM sooabcboocobsuotoocoUsHdoGcGFGdoDUOuO VON ONO UecODOdOD DG 20

68. Gen. PLEUROTA Hb.

Verz., p. 406; Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 747.

Tongue present. Palpi very long, porrect or ascending, not recurved; second
joint with rough hairs above and beneath from middle or before middle to apex;
. terminal joint much shorter than second, ascending, slender, acute. Antennae with
basal pecten; ciliations in male moderate or rather long. Forewings with 7 to
termen. Hindwings elongate-ovate; neuration normal. Type, P. bicostella Clerck
from Europe.

This genus is easily recognized by its peculiar palpi which, however, present
minor differences in the several species. Its closest allies are all Australian genera,
and there can, therefore, be little doubt that it is of Australian origin. It is,
therefore, anomalous that about 60 species should occur in the Palaearctic region,
while the genus is wholly unrepresented in the Indomalayan. The Huropean
species are mostly very similar and may have originated, according to Meyrick,
from a single immigrant. The simplest explanation is that some representative
spread overland, but the genus became extinct in the intermediate region, or may
possibly still survive in high altitudes, which have been insufficiently explored for
microlepidoptera. It is noteworthy that species of Plewrota, when intratropical,
appear to occur only at high altitudes.

Forty-two species.

906. PLEUROTA SEMOPHANES Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1649; Gen. Ins.,
Oecophor., Pl. 4, f. 66 (Birchip, Dimboola; W.A.: York, Geraldton).

907. PLEUROTA CALLIZONA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 753 (Beaconsfield,
Fernshaw, Macedon).

908. PLEUROTA PHOTODOTIS Meyr., ibid., 1888, p. 1653; = chrysopepla Turn.,
Tr.R.S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 76 (Stanthorpe, Glen Innes, Bathurst).

909. }PLEUROTA XYPHOCHRYSA Low., ibid., 1904, p. 108 (Stawell).

910. PLEUROTA PHORMICTIS Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 121 (Gisborne).

911. PLEUROTA AGASTOPIS, D. Sp. (ayaotwms, admirable.)

6. 20 mm. Head yellow. Palpi with second joint long, porrect, shortly
rough-scaled beneath towards apex, and with very long rough hairs above towards
apex, terminal joint three-fifths, slender, ascending; yellow, basal two-thirds of
second joint and a basal ring on terminal joint fuscous. Antennae fuscous;
ciliations in male 1. Thorax and abdomen fuscous. Forewings suboblong, costa
rather strongly arched, apex round-pointed, termen strongly oblique; whitish
mostly suffused with yellow; markings fuscous; a broad costal streak from base
to one-fourth; some suffusion on midcosta connected with a dorsal mark before
middle, and with a large circular suffused tornal spot; a row of dots from three-
fourths costa, at first outwardly oblique, soon bent parallel to termen and partly
confluent, ending on tornus; a terminal series of dots. Hindwings pale grey; cilia
pale grey, ochreous-tinged.

North Queensland: Hungella (2,500 feet) in October; one specimen.

912. PLEUROTA TYROCHROA, D. Sp. (tTupoxpoos, cheese-coloured. )

6, @. 15-16 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-yellow. Palpi with second joint
very long, short rough hairs on apical two-thirds of upper surface, longer hairs

60 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. OECOPHORIDAE. VIII,

on apical half of lower surface, terminal joint two-fifths; white, basal half of
external surface, a subapical ring, and a longitudinal streak below middle on
inner surface of second joint, and all terminal joint, fuscous. Antennae grey.
Abdomen fuscous; tuft ochreous. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior pair fuscous.
Forewings suboblong, costa slightly arched, apex rounded, termen rounded, slightly
oblique; ochreous-yellow; a narrow pale fuscous erect bar from tornus reaching
slightly above middle; cilia pale fuscous. Hindwings and cilia grey.

But for the palpi this would be taken for a small yellow species of Coesyra.

New South Wales: Sydney in November; three specimens received from
Mr. G. M. Goldfinch, who has the type.

913. PLEUROTA THIOPEPLA, N. Sp. (Oeromerdos, clothed in pale yellow.)

¢g. 20 mm. Head pale yellow. Palpi with loose spreading hairs near apex of
second joint beneath, and on apical third above, terminal joint four-fifths; pale
yellowish, basal two-thirds of external surface of second joint, and all terminal
joint, fuscous. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 2. Thorax fuscous. Abdomen
grey; tuft pale yellow. Legs fuscous; posterior pair yellow. Forewings rather
narrow, costa slightly arched, apex pointed, termen oblique; pale yellow; costal
edge fuscous towards base; a rather large fuscous tornal spot; cilia pale yellow.
Hindwings grey; cilia pale yellow.

Central Australia: Mt. Liebig; one specimen received from Mr. J. D. O. Wilson.

914. PLEUROTA HOPLOPHANES Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1651 (Caloundra to
Sydney).

915. PLEUROTA HIMANTIAS Meyr., Hxot. Micro., i, p. 121 (Glen Innes, Armidale,
Adaminaby, Gisborne, Grampians).

916. PLEUROTA BREVIVITTELLA WIk., xxix, p. 802; Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884,
p. 752; = pyrosema Meyr., 1884, p. 754 (Duaringa to Melbourne).

917. PLEUROTA PELOXANTHA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 753 (Nambour to Lismore).

918. PLEUROTA PSAMMOXANTHA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 755 (Brisbane to Sydney
and Mittagong).

919. PLEUROTA LOMOGRAPHA Low., Tr.R.S.S.Aust., 1902, p. 245 (Goolwa,
S. Aust.).—Very near P. psammoxantha. Differs as follows: a small costal mark at
four-fifths; no tornal mark; terminal half of cilia fuscous; antennal ciliations 13
(in psammozantha, 1 ).

920. PLEUROTA MacROoscIA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1651 (Glen Innes,
Armidale, Bathurst, Cooma).

921. PLEUROTA CHLOROCHYTA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 757; = perisema Low.,
Tr. R.SS.Aust., 1905, p. 108 (Guyra to Melbourne, Tasmania, Mt. Lofty).

922. PLEUROTA ENDESMA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 755 (Macpherson Range,
Mt. Kosciusko, Victoria, Tasmania). (

923. PLEUROTA STASIASTICA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 757 (Gosford, Sydney,
Bulli, Beaconsfield, Fernshaw, Gisborne).

924. PLEUROTA EPICLINES, 0. sp. (émexAyys, oblique.)

°. 17mm. Head white. Palpi with loose spreading hairs on upper and lower
surface of second joint from near base, terminal joint two-fifths; pale fuscous.
Antennae fuscous. Thorax and abdomen fuscous. Legs pale fuscous; posterior pair
ochreous-whitish. Forewings narrow, costa strongly arched, apex pointed, termen
straight, oblique; white with fuscous markings; a basal costal streak to middle; a
moderate oblique fascia from midcosta to mid-dorsum; a second oblique fascia
from before apex, narrow on costa, broad in disc, not reaching tornus; a terminal
line; cilia fuscous. Hindwings and cilia grey.

BY A. J. TURNER. 61

Near P. stasiastica, but the second fascia is not terminal and does not reach
tornus.

New South Wales: Barrington Tops in December; one specimen received
from Mr. G. M. Goldfinch, who has the type.

925. PLEUROTA GYPSOSEMA Turn., Tr.R.S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 76 (Nambour to
Robertson, N.S.W.).—This species is distinct from P. epitripta, of which I have
both sexes. It varies; of my ten examples, two from the Macpherson Range have
the forewings wholly fuscous except for a broad white dorsal streak from base
to two-thirds and a triangular white tornal spot. These are females, but I have
received a male (antennal. ciliations 1) from Mr. G. M. Goldfinch, taken at
Robertson, which corresponds to them nearly.

926. PLEUROTA ARGOPTERA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 758 (Ebor to Sydney,
Mt. Kosciusko, and Melbourne).

927. PLEUROTA LEUCOPHARA Turn., ibid., 1914, p. 558 (Ebor).

928. PLEUROTA HOLOXESTA Meyr., ibid., 1888, p. 1652; = cathara Turn., ibid., 1914,
p. 559 (Glen Innes, Guyra, Ebor, Mt. Buffalo, Beaconsfield).

929. PLEUROTA GYPSINA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 756 (Mt. Wilson, Mittagong,
Fernshaw, Beaconsfield).

930. PLEUROTA EPITRIPTA Turn., Tr.R.S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 77 (Nambour and
Macpherson Range to Lismore).—The female differs from the male in having the
whole dorsal and terminal areas of the forewings suffused with fuscous-brown, and
the oblique line from second discal to tornus very distinct.

931. PLEUROTA PROXIMA, 0D. Sp. (proximus, very near.)

6. 16-17 mm. Head and thorax white more or less tinged with grey. Palpi
with loose spreading hairs on apical half of lower, and apical three-fourths of upper
surface, of second joint, terminal joint two-fifths; fuscous, inner surface and apex
of second joint white. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male 1. Abdomen grey.
Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish. Forewings slightly dilated, costa gently
arched, apex acute, termen straight, oblique; white; base of costal edge fuscous;
stigmata blackish, first discal at one-third, plical beneath it, second discal before
two-thirds; a suffused fuscous dorsal streak, and some minute terminal fuscous
dots; cilia white. Hindwings and cilia grey-whitish.

Near P. gypsina, but the forewings are white without any ochreous tinge.
Also in that species the plical dot precedes the first discal, and the markings are
more developed in the female than in the male.

Victoria: Mt. Buffalo (4,500 feet) in January and February; three specimens.

932. PLEUROTA ACRATOPA, N. SP. (akpatwros, unmarked.) |

© 16 mm. Head and thorax whitish-ochreous. Palpi with long hairs on
upper surface of second joint from one-fourth to apex, shorter hairs on lower
surface from middle to apex, terminal joint one-half; whitish-ochreous, external
surface of second joint fuscous. Antennae fuscous. Abdomen dark grey. Legs
whitish-ochreous; anterior pair fuscous. Forewings with costa strongly arched
to middle, thence straight, apex round-pointed, termen oblique; whitish-ochreous;
cilia whitish-ochreous. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Queensland: Macpherson Range (Binna Burra, 2,000 feet) in December.
N.S.W.: Lismore in October. Two specimens.

933. PLEUROTA PLACINA, 1. Sp. (7Aaxktvos, wooden.)

6, §- 17-22 mm. Head and thorax brown. Palpi with second joint very long,
with long hairs on apical three-fourths of upper and apical half of lower surface,
terminal joint two-fifths; pale brown, outer surface except apex and inferior hairs
on second joint, and apex of terminal joint, blackish. Antennae grey with blackish

62 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. OECOPHORIDAE. VIII,

annulations; ciliations in male 2. Abdomen fuscous; tuft brownish. Legs
brownish; anterior pair fuscous. Forewings somewhat dilated, costa gently arched,
apex pointed, termen oblique; pale brown or ocheous, suffusedly darker in dorsal
area; cilia pale brown, on tornus narrowly fuscous. Hindwings grey; cilia
ochreous-whitish.

Queensland: Bribie I. near Caloundra in August; Crow’s Nest near
Toowoomba and Milmerran in September; five specimens.

934. PLEUROTA LEUCOSTEPHES, nN. Sp. (AevKooredys, white-wreathed.)

3d, 2. 12-18 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi with second joint long,
upper surface with long hairs on apical three-fifths, lower with shorter hairs on
apical half, terminal joint two-thirds; white, lower surface of second joint except
apex, and all terminal joint, fuscous. Antennae whitish; basal joint fuscous;
ciliations in male two-thirds. Abdomen grey; tuft whitish. Legs whitish; anterior
pair fuscous. Forewings narrow, costa slightly arched, apex pointed, termen
very oblique; white with some patchy fuscous suffusion; markings fuscous; first
discal at one-third, minute, plical beyond it, second discal before two-thirds; basal
area suffused with fuscous leaving a white line on fold; median and tornal areas
mostly white; a small fuscous supratornal blotch resting on termen; a similar
blotch above middle between discals, more or less connected with costa; slight
fuscous lines on veins in apical area; cilia fuscous, bases white. Hindwings and
cilia pale grey.

Very small and inconspicuous.

Queensland: Brisbane in January and February; three specimens.

935. PLEUROTA TENELLULA, n. Sp. (tenellulus, very tender, delicate.)

6, 2. 12-13 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi with second joint very long,
rough-haired above in apical two-thirds, beneath in apical half, terminal joint 3;
white, terminal joint and base, inferior hairs, and a subapical ring on second joint
fuscous. Antennae whitish-grey; ciliations in male 1. Abdomen grey. Legs
whitish; anterior pair fuscous. Forewings with costa slightly arched, apex pointed,
termen oblique; white; extreme base of costal edge fuscous; stigmata fuscous,
minute, first discal beyond one-third, plical beyond it, second discal before two-
thirds; cilia pale grey. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

Small, inconspicuous and easily overlooked.

North Queensland: Cairns in April; Queensland: Brisbane in March and April.
Six specimens.

936. PLEUROTA MACROSTICHA, N. Sp. (paxpoorixos, long-streaked.)

°. 16 mm. Head white. Palpi with second joint rough-haired beneath on
apical three-fourths, hairs longer and forming a tuft at apex, shortly rough-haired
above on apical half; white, inferior edge brown. Antennae pale grey. »- Thorax
white with sublateral brown stripes. (Abdomen missing.) Legs pale brownish;
posterior pair whitish. Forewings narrow, costa gently arched, apex pointed,
termen very oblique; white with fuscous-brown markings; a broad streak from
base of costa, becoming costal again at three-fourths, and extending to apex,
giving off a branch to costa at two-thirds, another broader to termen, and a third
to tornus, joining preceding on termen; a broad streak from base of costa along
fold, narrowing to a sharp point at one-third; cilia pale grey, on costa and beneath
apex fuscous-brown. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

South Australia: Gawler in November; one specimen received from Mr. G. M.
Goldfinch, who has the type.

937, PLEUROTA PROTOGRAMMA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 751; = crassinervis
Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 752 (Stanthorpe, Sydney, Victoria).—This species is variable:

BY A. J. TURNER. 63

fine fuscous streaks are often developed on forewings, a subcostal and a dorsal
from base, and a series on terminal veins; sometimes the whole disc is traversed
by these streaks, obscuring the light ochreous ground-colour. Its palpi are
characteristic, the long hairs beneath being of even length throughout.

938. PLEUROTA TEPHRINA Meyr., ibid., 1888, p. 750; = leucogramma Turn.,
Tr.R.S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 76 (Nambour to Mittagong, Tasmania. W.A.: Geraldton).

939. PLEUROTA CNEPHAEA Meyr., ibid., 1888, p. 1650 (W.A.: Albany, Denmark,
Geraldton).

940. PLEUROTA THEMEROPIS Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 749 (Tasmania).

941. PLEUROTA TITANITIS Turn., P.R.S.Tas., 1926, p. 148 (Cradle Mt.).

942. PLEUROTA LACTEOLA, nN. Sp. (lacteolus, milk-white.)

o. 14-15 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi with long rough hairs on apical
two-thirds of second joint above, on apical half beneath, terminal joint 4; white,
base and posterior edge of inferior hairs on second joint, and terminal joint,
fuscous. Antennae whitish-grey; ciliations in male 1. Legs whitish; anterior pair
fuscous. Forewings with costa moderately arched, apex pointed, termen oblique;
white slightly suffused with grey near base; extreme base of costal edge blackish;
stigmata blackish, distinct, first discal at one-third, plical slightly beyond; second
discal before two-thirds, sometimes a minute dot beneath second discal; a series
of minute blackish dots in a line from three-fourths costa, angled before apex,
thence parallel to termen; cilia white. Hindwings and cilia white.

Larger than P. tenellula, costa of forewings more arched, dots more distinct,
a subterminal line present, cilia and hindwings white.

Queensland: Caloundra in October. New South Wales: Brunswick Heads in
January. Two specimens.

943. PLEUROTA HOMALOTA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1649 (W.A.: Perth,
Waroona).

944, PLEUROTA PSEPHENA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 751 (Tasmania).

945. PLEUROTA ZALOCOMA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 749 (Mt. Wellington).

946. PLEUROTA TRITOSTICTA Turn., P.R.S.Tas., 1926, p. 149 (Lake Fenton, Tas.).

947. PLEUROTA PICEA, Nn. Sp. (piceus, pitch-black.)

9°. 18 mm. Head fuscous. Palpi with second joint expanded above and
beneath with long rough hairs from middle to apex, terminal joint three-fourths;
fuscous. Antennae fuscous. Thorax blackish. Abdomen fuscous; bases of segments
dark ferruginous. Legs fuscous. Forewings slightly dilated, costa gently arched,
apex pointed, termen oblique; blackish; cilia blackish. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Queensland: Noosa in May; one specimen.

69. Gen. CoRETHROPALPA Turn.

Tr.R.S.S.Aust., 1896, p. 27; Meyr., Gen. Ins., Oecophor., p. 104.

Tongue present. Palpi with second joint very long, porrect or ascending, not
recurved, with long rough hairs above and beneath, the latter forming a strong
projecting terminal tuft; terminal joint much shorter than second, ascending,
slender, acute. Forewings with 7 to termen. Hindwings elongate-ovate; neuration
normal. Type, C. melanoneura.

Nearly allied to Plewrota, but differs in the strong anterior tuft on apex of
second joint of palpi. Three species.

948. CORETHROPALPA MELANONEURA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 744; Gen. Ins.,
Oecophor., Pl. iv, f. 69; = falcata Turn., Tr.R.S8.S.Aust., 1896, p. 28 (Brisbane,
Sydney, Shoalhaven R.).

64 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. OECOPHORIDAE. VIII,

949. CORETHROPALPA CINEREA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 742; = lewconeura Turn., ibid.,
p. 77 (Brisbane to Melbourne, Mt. Lofty).

950. CORETHROPALPA HOMOPHANES, D. Sp. (duogmavns, uniform.)

9. 24 mm. Head and thorax brownish-grey. Palpi with long hairs on lower
surface of second joint from one-third, ending in a strong apical tuft, shortly rough-
haired above towards apex, terminal joint one-fourth; grey. Antennae and abdomen
grey. Legs pale fuscous (posterior pair missing). Forewings elongate, costa
slightly arched, apex round-pointed, termen oblique; pale brownish-grey; cilia grey,
apices whitish. Hindwings and cilia grey.

North Queensland: Stannary Hills near Herberton; one specimen received
from Dr. T. Bancroft.

70. Gen. EXaRsIA.

Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 269. Type, E. paracycla.

Head with appressed scales, side tufts small. Tongue rudimentary. Palpi
with second joint moderately long, ascending, with a triangular tuft of hairs from
middle to apex above, and a long dense projecting apical tuft beneath; terminal
joint as long as second, smooth, slender, acute. Antennae with basal pecten; in
male moderately ciliated. Forewings with 2 and 3 connate or stalked, 7 to termen,
11 from before middle. Hindwings with 3 and 4 connate, 5 from middle of cell.
Type, HE. paracycla. Two species.

951. EXARSIA POLIOCHRA Low., T7.R.S.S.Aust., 1903, p. 224 (Stawell).

952. EXARSIA PARACYCLA Low., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 24 (Broken Hill) .—
Antennal ciliations in male 1. Forewings grey-whitish, sometimes whiter towards
costa, lightly sprinkled with fuscous; costa narrowly pale fuscous; stigmata
fuscous, first discal at one-third, minute, often obsolete, plical before it, but often
obsolete, second discal at two-thirds; usually a series of submarginal fuscous dots
close to termen.

71. Gen. PARARSIA, N.g.

Head with side tufts large, with loose spreading hairs. Tongue weakly
developed. Palpi with second joint very long, ascending, smooth above, with a
sharply projecting apical tuft beneath; terminal joint less than half second,
smooth, slender, acute. Antennae with basal pecten; ciliations in male long.
Forewings with 2 and 3 stalked, 7 to termen, 11 from middle. Hindwings with
3 and 4 connate, 5 from middle of cell. Near H«zarsia.

953. PARARSIA MARMOREA Low., 77r.R.S.S.Aust., 1897, p. 54—Lower’s type was
said to be from Mackay, and I have received an example bearing a printed label
“Brisbane” but undated. I know of no Queensland examples, and have some
doubt as to the correctness of these localities.

72. Gen. ProcHosaris Meyr. (T77.R.S.S.Aust., 1906, p. 37.)

Tongue present. Palpi moderately long, slightly curved, subascending; second
joint with long projecting tuft of hairs towards apex beneath; terminal joint less
than half second, slender, acute. Antennae without basal pecten; ciliations in
male moderate. Forewings with 7 to termen. Hindwings lanceolate, cilia 2;
4 absent, 5 approximated to 3.

954. 7PTOCHOSARIS HORRENDA Meyr., ibid., 1906, p. 37 (Katoomba, Mt. Lofty).

73. Gen. SaropnA Meyr. (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 743.)

Tongue present. Palpi moderately long, ascending, recurved; second joint
reaching or exceeding base of antennae, with rough projecting apical tuft beneath;

BY A. J. TURNER. 65

terminal joint shorter than second, smooth, slender, acute. Antennae with basal
pecten; ciliations in male short or moderate. Forewings with 7 to termen. Hind-
wings lanceolate; neuration normal. Type, S. caelatella.

This natural genus shows considerable variation in the length of the terminal
joint of the palpi. Meyrick records one species from South Africa. There are ten
Australian species.

955. SAROPLA HEMIXANTHA, TD. Sp. (€utéavOos, half-yellow.)

do. 15 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi with second joint not reaching
base of antennae, with a strong anterior apical tuft, terminal joint one-third;
fuscous. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male 1. (Abdomen missing.) Legs
fuscous. Forewings narrow, posteriorly slightly dilated, costa straight, apex
obtusely pointed, termen straight, oblique; fuscous, markings obscurely darker;
first discal obsolete, plical present, second discal at two-thirds; a curved line of
dots from four-fifths costa to tornus; cilia fuscous. Hindwings orange-yellow;
cilia fuscous.

- South Australia: Ooldea in August (A. J. Nicholson); type in Coll. Goldfinch.
956. +SAROPLA BRACHYOTA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1648 (W.A.: Perth).
957. {SAROPLA PRODOTIS Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 246 (W.A.: York).

958. +SAROPLA AMYDROPIS Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1648 (W.A.: Geraldton).

959. SAROPLA CLERONOMA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 746 (Brisbane, Stanthorpe,
Sydney).

960. {SAROPLA ANCISTROTIS Meyr., ibid., 1888, p. 1647 (W.A.: Geraldton).

961. SaropLA HARPACTIS Meyr., ibid., 1888, p. 1646 (W.A.: Perth,
Northampton).

962. SAROPLA PHILOCALA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 746 (Noosa to Jervis Bay, Mt.
Kosciusko).

963. SAROPLA CAELATELLA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 745 (Duaringa to Melbourne,
Pt. Lincoln).

964. SAROPLA STENODESMA Low., T7r.R.S.S.Aust., 1894, p. 99 (Mt. Lofty).

74. Gen. ATHEROPLA Meyr. (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 758.)

Tongue present. Palpi long, curved, ascending; second joint much exceeding
base of antennae, with triangular apical tuft beneath; terminal joint as long as or
rather shorter than second, slender, acute. Antennae without basal pecten;
Ciliations in male long. Forewings with 7 to termen. Hindwings lanceolate or
ovate-lanceolate; neuration normal. Type, A. melichlora.

The triangular tuft on palpi varies considerably in degree of development.
In A. barytypa and A. dysprepes it is very small. Meyrick records one species
from North America. Hleven species.

965. ATHEROPLA TRIPLACA Meyr., Tr.R.S.S.Aust., 1902, p. 141 (Katoomba).

966. ,ATHEROPLA SCIOXANTHA Low., ibid., 1902, p. 242 (Stawell, Birchip).

967. ATHEROPLA CHORIAS Meyr., ibid., 1902, p. 140 (Sydney).

968. ATHEROPLA FUMOSA Turn., P.R.S.Tas., 1926, p. 149 (Tasmanian Mts.).

969. ATHEROPLA BARYTYPA, 1. Sp. (faputu7os, heavily marked.)

6. 14-16 mm. Head pale yellow. Palpi ochreous-whitish; second joint with
a small angular apical inferior projection, fuscous externally on distal half except
at apex; apical third of terminal joint fuscous. Antennae pale yellow becoming
grey towards apex; ciliations in male extremely long (12). Thorax pale yellow.
Abdomen grey, towards base whitish. Legs fuscous with whitish-ochreous rings;
posterior pair whitish-ochreous. Forewings dilated, costa strongly arched, apex
pointed, termen straight, oblique; pale yellow with fuscous-brown markings; a

66 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. OECOPHORIDAE. VIII,

costal streak, very narrow to one-fourth, thence broader to apex; an oblique
narrow fascia from costa about middle to one-third dorsum; a spot in dise at two-
thirds, touching a rather broad subterminal fascia, its anterior edge straight,
posterior edge sharply dentate; cilia pale yellow, on costa fuscous, on tornus and
dorsum grey. Hindwings rather narrowly ovate; apex rounded; whitish suffused
with pale grey towards apex; cilia pale grey, on tornus and dorsum whitish.

The slight angular projection, which represents the tuft of the palpi charac-
teristic of the genus, is distinct, but might be easily overlooked.

Queensland: Macpherson Range (low level to 4,000 feet) in November,
December and February; seven specimens.

970. ATHEROPLA DYSPREPES, 1. Sp. (dvomperns, unadorned.)

3. 13 mm. Head and thorax whitish-ochreous. Palpi with angular thickening
at apex of second joint, terminal joint 1; whitish-ochreous, outer surface of second
joint except apex fuscous. Antennae whitish-ochreous, towards base fuscous;
ciliations in male 8. Abdomen pale grey. Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish-
ochreous. Forewings narrow, costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely
rounded; whitish-ochreous; stigmata blackish, first discal before one-third, plical
beyond it, second discal before two-thirds; cilia whitish-ochreous. Hindwings and
cilia whitish-grey.

Queensland: Bunya Mts. in November and December; two specimens.

971. ATHEROPLA CROCEA, 1. Sp. (xpoxes, Saffron.)

3d, °. 12-13 mm. Head and thorax orange. Palpi with a strong anterior
triangular tuft on second joint, terminal joint three-fifths; ochreous with a broad
fuscous subapical transverse bar on second joint. Antennae ochreous annulated
with fuscous; ciliations in male 8. Abdomen and legs fuscous. Forewings dilated
posteriorly, costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen oblique; orange with dark
fuscous markings; first discal at one-third, plical before it, second discal before
two-thirds; a broad subterminal fascia leaving terminal edge orange; cilia orange,
on apex and tornus fuscous. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Differs from A. melichlora in the deep orange and fuscous forewings and the
darker hindwings.

New South Wales: Sydney in September and October; three specimens received
from Mr. G. M. Goldfinch, who has the type.

972. ATHEROPLA MELICHLORA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 759 (Katoomba,
Jervis Bay, Gisborne, Beaconsfield).

973. ATHEROPLA PSAMMODES Turn., T7r.R.S.S.Aust., 1898, p. 211 (Brisbane,
Macpherson Range, Sydney, Moruya).

974. ATHEROPLA DECASPILA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1653 (Bathurst,
Gisborne, Beaconsfield).

975. ,ATHEROPLA PSILOPIS Meyr., ibid., 1888, p. 1652 (Mt. Kosciusko).

75. Gen. Ortuiastis Meyr. (Exot. Micro., i, p. 247).

Tongue present. Palpi very long, ascending, recurved; second joint more than
twice length of face, with loose rough hairs before middle, forming a strong apical
tuft; terminal joint about half second, slender, acute. Antennae without basal
pecten; ciliations in male short. Forewings with 7 to termen. Hindwings elongate-
ovate; neuration normal.

976. ORTHIASTIS HYPEROCHA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 764 (Katoomba, Mt.
Kosciusko, Wangaratta, Mt. Erica).

BY A. J. TURNER. 67

76. Gen. Zacorus Butl. (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), ix, 1882, p. 102).

Tongue present. Palpi very long, recurved, ascending; second joint more than
twice length of face, shortly rough-haired above at apex and beneath from one-
third to apex; terminal joint shorter than second, slender, acute. Antennae
without basal pecten; ciliations in male short. Forewings with 7 to termen. Hind-
wings ovate, broader than forewings; neuration normal. Type, Z. cara. I refer
only one species to this genus.

977. Zacorus cARA Butl., A.M.N.H. (5), ix, p. 103; Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884,
p. 740 (Stanthorpe to Katoomba and Bathurst; Victoria; Tasmania).

77. Gen. THALEROTRICHA Meyr. (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 741).

Tongue present. Palpi moderately long, recurved; second joint reaching base
of antennae, shortly rough-haired beneath from middle to apex, smooth above;
terminal joint as long as or shorter than second, slender, acute. Antennae without
basal pecten; ciliations in male short or long. Forewings with 7 to termen. Hind-
wings elongate-ovate; neuration normal. Type, 7. mylicella. Four species.

978. THALEROTRICHA MYLICELLA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 741 (Stanthorpe
to Melbourne; Tasmania).

979. THALEROTRICHA HEMISPILA Meyr. (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1636; =
cremnopelta Low., ibid., 1897, p. 269).

6, °. 20 mm. Head and thorax whitish-ochreous. Palpi with second joint
expanded at apex to form an angular anterior tuft, terminal joint 1; whitish-
ochreous, outer surface of second joint except apex fuscous. Antennae ochreous-
grey, towards base fuscous; ciliations in male 6. Abdomen grey; tuft whitish-
ochreous. Legs fuscous with whitish-ochreous rings; posterior pair except tarsi
whitish-ochreous. Forewings dilated posteriorly, costa almost straight, apex
pointed, termen moderately oblique; whitish-ochreous; markings and scanty
irroration dark fuscous; first discal at one-third, plical beyond it, second discal before
two-thirds; a tornal dot above which is a circular blotch; a series of dots on apical
third of costa and termen; cilia whitish-ochreous. Hindwings and cilia whitish.

Described from the types, both of which are in the South Australian Museum.

Victoria: Moe; Hamilton.

980. THALEROTRICHA MONTIVAGA, D. Sp. (montivagus, roaming the mountain.)

6. 24-25 mm. Head, thorax, abdomen, and legs grey. Palpi with terminal
joint two-thirds; grey. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 13. Forewings scarcely
dilated, costa gently arched, apex obtusely pointed, termen straight, oblique; pale
grey; stigmata blackish, first discal at one-third, plical before it, second discal
well before two-thirds; cilia whitish-grey. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

New South Wales: Mt. Kosciusko (5,000 feet) in December; three specimens
received from Mr. G. M. Goldfinch, who has the type.

981. THALEROTRICHA MESOPLACA, 1. SP. (pecordAakos, with median blotch.)

6. 23 mm. Head white. Palpi with second joint expanded at apex to form a
small angular anterior tuft, terminal joint 1; white, second joint except apex, and
extreme apex of terminal joint, fuscous. Antennae pale grey; ciliations in male 5.
Thorax grey. Abdomen grey mixed with blackish; apices of segments and tuft
whitish. Legs grey; anterior pair fuscous. Forewings dilated posteriorly, costa
strongly arched, apex acute, termen sinuate, oblique; grey; markings fuscous; a
suffused circular blotch on mid-dorsum with some surrounding suffusion; a slender
line from midcosta towards midtermen, sharply angled in middle and continued
to four-fifths dorsum; an interrupted terminal line; cilia grey, on apex fuscous.
Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

68 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. OECOPHORIDAE. VIII,

Tasmania: Mt. Wellington in January; one specimen.

78. Gen. TracHyxystTA Meyr. (Hot. Micro., i, p. 552).

Tongue present. Palpi ascending, recurved; second joint reaching base of
antennae, thickened with dense scales roughly projecting beneath throughout;
terminal joint less than one-third second. Antennae with basal pecten; in male
rather strongly ciliated. Forewings with 7 to termen. Hindwings elongate-ovate;
neuration normal.

982. 7; TRACHYXYSTA ANTICHROMA Meyr., T7.R.S.S.Aust., 1902, p. 137 (Heales-
ville, V.).

79. Gen. Corranica Meyr. (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 759).

Tongue present. Palpi with second joint not reaching base of antennae, with
rough projecting scales beneath from middle to apex; terminal joint less than
one-half, slender, acute. Antennae with basal pecten; in male shortly ciliated.
Forewings with 7 to termen. Hindwings rather broadly ovate; neuration normal.
Type, C. isabella. Two species.

983. COERANICA ISABELLA Newm., Tr.H.S. (2), iii, 1855, p. 295; Meyr.,
P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 760 (Brisbane and Toowoomba to Melbourne and Gisborne).

984. COERANICA ERITIMA Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 760 (Victoria; South Australia;
W.A.: Cunderdin).

80. Gen. TrRAcCHYZANCLA Turn. (77.R.S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 79).

Tongue present. Palpi with second joint much exceeding base of antennae,
more than twice length of face, rough anteriorly, posteriorly expanded with long
hairs at apex; terminal joint one-sixth, slender, acute. Antennae with basal pecten;
ciliations in male long. Forewings with 7 to termen, 2 and 3 stalked. Hindwings
elongate-ovate; neuration normal.

The affinities of this genus are far from clear.

985. TRACHYZANCLA HISTRICA Turn:, T7.R.S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 80 (W.A::
Cunderdin ).

81. Gen. ProromacHa Meyr. (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 739).

Tongue present. Palpi long, recurved, ascending; second joint exceeding base
of antennae, gradually thickened towards apex, with short rough hairs at or
towards apex posteriorly and sometimes also anteriorly; terminal joint shorter
than second, slender, acute. Antennae with basal pecten; ciliations in male short.
Forewings with 7 to termen. Hindwings elongate-ovate; neuration normal. Type,
P. chalchaspis.

A natural genus, which as here defined shows slight variations in the scaling
of the second joint of the palpi. It is probably directly ancestral to Pleuwrota.
Meyrick records two species from South Africa. Hight species.

986. PROTOMACHA CHALCHASPIS Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1884, p. 740 (Tweed Hds.
to Melbourne; Hobart; Mt. Lofty).

987. PROTOMACHA CONSUETELLA WIk., xxix, p. 651; Meyr., ibid., 1884, p. 739
(Sydney, Katoomba, Jervis Bay).

988. PROTOMACHA OCHROCHALCHA Meyr., ibid., 1888, p. 1646 (W.A.: Albany).

989. PROTOMACHA STRAMINEA Turn., T7r.R.S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 78 (Brisbane).

990. PRoroMACHA PARALIA Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 122 (Adelaide).

991. PROTOMACHA ZORODES, 1. Sp. (fwpwdns, unmarked.)

6. 23 mm. Head and thorax whitish-ochreous. Palpi with second joint
much exceeding base of antennae, thickened with rough hairs at apex posteriorly,

BY A. J. TURNER. 69

terminal joint one-fifth; anteriorly fuscous, posteriorly whitish-ochreous. Antennae
whitish-ochreous; ciliations in male 6. Abdomen ochreous-whitish. Legs ochreous-
whitish; anterior pair fuscous. Forewings elongate, costa strongly arched, apex
round-pointed, termen obliquely rounded; whitish-ochreous; cilia whitish-ochreous.
Hindwings and cilia whitish.

North Queensland: Lake Barrine (Atherton Tableland), in November; one
specimen in Coll. Goldfinch.

992. PRoTOMACHA PHLOEOMIMA, 1. Sp. (@Aoroucmos, imitating bark.)

g. 18-19 mm. Head and thorax whitish sprinkled with dark fuscous. Palpi
whitish, second joint sprinkled with blackish. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 13.
Abdomen grey; bases of segments brown. Legs: anterior pair fuscous; middle
pair white sprinkled with fuscous; posterior pair grey. Forewings narrow, costa
gently arched, apex round-pointed, termen straight, oblique; white suffused and
sprinkled with fuscous, appearing grey; interrupted slender blackish longitudinal
streaks, on fold, beneath fold, on upper margin of cell, and several before apex;
cilia white with fuscous bars. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

Queensland: Yeppoon in October; two specimens.

993. PROTOMACHA ANTHRACINA Turn., Tr.R.S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 78 (Bundaberg to
Sydney).

82. Gen. Arotocosma Meyr. (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1880, p. 225).

Head smooth. Tongue present. Palpi slender, second joint not reaching base
of antennae, rough-scaled beneath; terminal joint one-half, acute. Antennae with
basal pecten; ciliations in male short. Forewings with 7 to termen, 1 not furcate
at base; cilia with a basal series of broad scales. Hindwings lanceolate; neuration
normal. Type, A. iridozona. Three species.

994. AKOLOCOSMA CYCLOXANTHA Meyr., T7.R.S.S.Aust., 1906, p. 38 (W.A.:
Albany, Perth, Mt. Barker).

995. AkoLocosmMA tIRimpozonA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1880, p. 225 (Sydney,
Beaconsfield).

996. +AEOLOCOSMA ABDITELLA WI1K., xxviii, p. 491 (Queensland).

83. Gen. Eutuictris Meyr. (Hot. Micro., i, p. 246).
Head with short erect sidetufts. Tongue present. Palpi with second joint
not reaching base of antennae, thickened with rough scales anteriorly; terminal
joint short or moderate (one-third to two-thirds), slender, acute. Antennae without
basal pecten; ciliations in male long. Forewings with 7 to termen, 1 furcate at
base. Hindwings narrowly elongate-ovate; neuration normal., Type, #. xanthodelta.
Four species.
997. EUTHICTIS PLECTANTHRA Meyr., Exot. Micro., i, p. 120 (Cairns).
998. HUTHICTIS XANTHODELTA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1637 (Deloraine,
Hobart, Mt. Lofty).
999. HUTHICTIS MARMARASPIS Meyr., ibid., 1880, p. 225 (Katoomba, Gisborne,
Beaconsfield, Tasmania).
1000. EUTHICTIS ALAMPITIS, Nn. Sp. (dAapumetis, gloomy.)
6, 9. 14-18 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen fuscous. Palpi with terminal
joint two-thirds; fuscous. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male 2. Legs fuscous;
posterior pair grey-whitish. Forewings narrow, costa in male almost straight, in
female slightly arched, apex pointed, termen straight, oblique; pale fuscous;
stigmata small, dark fuscous, first discal at one-third, plical slightly beyond it, Pal.
second discal before two-thirds; median area between stigmata grey-whitish; cilia ~ Ws AT ‘

—

wom /
\eea Nae ve
\o Se

ern
Ne rd

on VY
pale fuscous. Hindwings and cilia fuscous. / ~ aS
[Sa AO o \
= So
hae eee RAR Y]

70 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. OECOPHORIDAE. VIII,

South Australia: Mt. Lofty in October; abundant flying near the ground in
the late afternoon.

84. Gen. PacHyBrELA Turn. (J77.R.8S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 94).

Tongue absent. Palpi with second joint reaching base of antennae, much
thickened with loosely appressed scales and greatly expanded with rough scales
anteriorly at apex; terminal joint much shorter, rather stout or markedly so, more
or less acute. Antennae stout, basal pecten strong; ciliations in male moderate
or rather long. Forewings with 7 to termen. Hindwings elongate-ovate; neuration
normal. Type, P. eremica. Eleven species.

1001. PACHYBELA CREMNODISEMA Low., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1897, p. 19 (Broken Hill;
Petersburg, S.A.; Waroona, W.A.).

1002. {PACHYBELA EUADELPHA Low., Tr.R.S.S.Aust., 1901, p. 86 (Broken Hill).

1003. PACHYBELA EREMICA Turn., ibid., 1917, p. 94 (Adavale, Q.; Sea Lake,
V.).—Best distinguished from parisa by the very stout terminal joint of palpi.
In the latter this is comparatively slender.

1004. PaAcHYBELA PARISA Turn., ibid., 1917, p. 95 (Injune, Adavale).

1005. PACHYBELA PHILOTECHNA, N. Sp. (tAoTeEXvos, CUrIOUS.)

dg. 22-24 mm. Head whitish. Palpi with terminal joint three-fifths, rather
stout; whitish, outer surface of second joint sometimes fuscous at base. Antennae
grey annulated with fuscous; ciliations in male 1. Thorax fuscous. Abdomen grey.
Legs fuscous with ochreous-whitish rings; posterior pair whitish-grey. Forewings
rather narrow, slightly dilated, costa slightly arched, apex round-pointed, termen
very obliquely rounded; fuscous with whitish irroration; markings pale reddish
partly outlined with blackish scales; an irregular submedian streak from base
to one-third; three subcostal discal spots in a line, at one-third, two-thirds, and
midway between; a terminal area ill-defined anteriorly, posteriorly more or less
divided into spots by fine fuscous lines; costal edge whitish from one-fourth to
near apex; cilia fuscous, apices sometimes white.

9. 28 mm. Forewings whitish except for a broad fuscous costal streak from
base to three-fifths; submedian streak mostly blackish; discal spots approximated.

Evidently a variable species.

Queensland: Cunnamulla in April; two males and one female.

1006. PACHYBELA PELOMA Low., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1900, p. 42 (Warrego, Broken
Hill).

1007. PACHYBELA ARGOCENTRA Low., T7r.R.S.S.Aust., 1901, p. 86; = mimica Low.,
P.L.S.N.S.W., 1915, p. 482 (Broken Hill).

1008. PACHYBELA LEPORINA Meyr., Hot. Micro., i, p. 169 (W.A.: Roeburne).

1009. PACHYBELA TETRASPORA Low., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1900, p. 413 (W.A.: Derby).

1010. PACHYBELA SARCOSMA Low., T7.R.S.S.Aust., 1896, p. 164; = erebocosma
Low., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1900, p. 42 (Bourke, Broken Hill, Cockburn).

1011. PACHYBELA EURYPOLIA, D. Sp. (evpumodos, broad grey.)

6. 31 mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi with rough apical expansion of
second joint large, terminal joint one-half, stout; grey, external surface of second
joint fuscous anteriorly. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 13. Abdomen pale
grey. Legs fuscous with ochreous-whitish rings (posterior pair missing). Fore-
wings broad, costa moderately arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded;
minute discal dots at one-third and two-thirds, pale reddish, each with a dark
fuscous dot beneath; a series of dark fuscous dots on termen and apical fourth of
costa; cilia grey. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Queensland: Cunnamulla in April; one specimen.

BY A. J. TURNER. ele

85. Gen. ANTIOPALA Meyr. (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1646).

Palpi long, recurved, ascending; second joint reaching and usually much
exceeding base of antennae, smooth; terminal joint shorter than or nearly as long
as second, slender. Antennae without basal pecten (very rarely two or three scales
present). Forewings with 7 to termen. Hindwings with 3 and 4 connate or
approximated at origin. Type A. tephraea. Ten species.

1012. ANTIOPALA GENNAEA, 1. Sp. (‘Yyevvatos, noble.)

6, 9. 11-12 mm. Head orange. Palpi with second joint exceeding base of
antennae, terminal joint four-fifths; orange, in female terminal joint and a sub-
apical ring on second joint blackish. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male 5.
Thorax fuscous. Abdomen orange-ochreous. Legs fuscous; posterior pair
ochreous. Forewings with costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen straight,
oblique; orange; a dark fuscous basal fascia; a large apical blotch, dark fuscous
with purple reflections, anterior edge straight from three-fifths costa to three-fifths
dorsum; cilia orange, on tornus fuscous. Hindwings fuscous; cilia fuscous, around
apex orange.

North Queensland: Cape York in April and May; three specimens from Mr.
W. 8B. Barnard, who has the type.

1013. ANTIOPALA BATHROXANTHA, nN. SP. (fa@potavOos, yellow at the base.)

d- 16 mm. Head pale yellow. Palpi with second joint exceeding base of
antennae, terminal joint one-fourth; pale yellow. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in
male 10. Thorax fuscous with a small pale yellow posterior spot. Abdomen grey.
Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish. Forewings narrow, costa gently arched, apex
pointed, termen straight, oblique; fuscous; basal third pale yellow except for a
small basal fascia; a darker discal dot at one-third; cilia fuscous. Hindwings and
cilia pale grey.

North Queensland: Hungelia in September; one specimen in Coll. Goldfinch.

1014. ANTIOPALA FLAVITINCTA Turn., TJr.R.S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 93 (Mt.
Tambourine, Macpherson Range).

1015. ANTIOPALA NIPHOSTOLA, N. Sp. (v:dooTodos, in snow-white clothing.)

9. 18 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi with second joint much exceeding
base of antennae, terminal joint two-fifths; white. Antennae grey-whitish.
Abdomen whitish-grey. Legs whitish. Forewings narrow, costa strongly arched,
apex pointed, termen oblique; white; cilia white. Hindwings and cilia white.

Exceptional in the genus by its palpi.

New South Wales: Mt. Kosciusko (5-6,000 feet) in January; two specimens.

1016. ANTIOPALA NEUROTENES, N. Sp. (vevporevns, with tightened sinews.)

9°. 17mm. Head whitish. Palpi with second joint exceeding base of antennae,
terminal joint 1; fuscous, apex of second joint and terminal joint except apex
whitish. Antennae pale grey. Thorax pale grey; tegulae fuscous. Abdomen pale
grey. Legs grey; posterior pair ochreous-whitish. Forewings slightly dilated,
costa moderately arched, apex pointed, termen straight, oblique; pale grey with
dark fuscous streaks; a streak from base along fold nearly to tornus; stigmata
represented by short streaks, first discal at one-third, second at three-fifths; fine
interrupted streaks on all veins; cilia grey sprinkled with fuscous. Hindwings and
cilia whitish.

New South Wales: Mittagong in November; one specimen received from Mr.
G. M. Goldfinch, who has the type.

1017. ;ANTIOPALA MELANOCENTRA Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, p. 1679 (Melbourne).

1018. ANTIOPALA ANOMODES Meyr., ibid., 1888, p. 1653 (Sydney).

72 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. OECOPHORIDAE. VIII,

1019. ANTIOPALA TEPHRAEA Meyr., ibid., 1888, p. 1647 (Deloraine, Mt.
Wellington).

1020. ANTIOPALA EBENOSPILA Turn., 77r.R.S.S.Aust., 1917, p. 79 (Hungella to
Lismore).

1021. ANTIOPALA PROCLIVIS, 1. Sp. (proclivis, oblique.)

6, 2. 14-18 mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi with second joint just reaching
base of antennae, terminal joint two-thirds; whitish sprinkled with fuscous, outer
surface of second joint except apex fuscous. Antennae whitish annulated with
dark fuscous; ciliations in male 1. Abdomen pale grey. Legs fuscous; with
ochreous-whitish rings; posterior pair mostly ochreous-whitish. Forewings with
costa gently arched, apex round-pointed, termen obliquely rounded, ochreous-
whitish; markings and some irroration dark fuscous; three basal dots, costal,
median, and dorsal; costal spots near base and at one-fourth; two oblique fasciae;
a broad median fascia tolerably well defined; a more suffused subterminal fascia;
stigmata blackish, on margins of first fascia, first discal at one-third, plical before
it, second discal before two-thirds; a terminal line; cilia grey, bases obscurely
barred with fuscous, extreme apices whitish. Hindwings whitish, apex grey-
suffused; cilia pale grey, on tornus and dorsum whitish.

Queensland: National Park (3,000 feet) in October, November, and January;
sixteen specimens, including only one female.

73

TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA (ACARINA: TROMBIDIIDAE).

By Cart E. M. Guntuer, M.B., B.S., D.T.M. (Sydney), Field Medical Officer,
Bulolo Gold Dredging Limited, Bulolo, Territory of New Guinea.

(Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.ES., F.ZS8.)
(Forty Text-figures. )
[Read 26th April, 1939.]

Owing to the writer’s lack of experience, some confusion has arisen with
regard to the nomenclature of these species. Shortly after this article was
despatched for publication, a paper discussing the relation of these species to
endemic typhus in New Guinea was prepared; it included a list (but no
descriptions) of the names originally intended for them. The latter article has
already been published (1938), and the original names have therefore become
nomina nuda. A list of the present names with the corresponding original
nomina nuda is given below:

Present names. Nomina nuda.
T. hirsti var. buloloensis. T. hirsti var. morobensis.
T. riot. T. edwardsi.
N. yeomansi. N. jamesi.
N. kallipygos. N. callipygea.
N. impar. N. clauda.
N. lorius. N. jimungi.
N. edwardsi. N. rioi.
N. retrocincta. N. retrocoronata.
N. backhousei. N. fournieri.
N. dubia. N. incerta.
S. jamesi. S. rotunda.
S. blestowei. S. yeomansi.
W. morobensis. W. buloloensis.
L. australiense. HA. blestowei.

General Considerations.

Larval mites are abundant in New Guinea, where they go by the “pidgin”
name of bush-mokka, and few whites who get off the beaten track escape the
irritation of their bites. Natives occasionally complain of their attacks; the
Finschhafen tribes call them pipi; on the Rai Coast they are called gugung.
Patton (1931) states that “in New Guinea they are known as akran’”’.

The mokka is distinctly regional in its habitat. In general, the kKunai hills
(switchback country covered with kunai grass and kangaroo grass) are practically
free, although the scrub along the water-courses among these hills is fairly heavily
infested; the bush is patchy—areas of dense damp jungle in the river basins and
smaller valleys are very bad; sago-palm (sak-sak) and water-bamboo (pit-pit)
swamps are reputed to be the most heavily infested spots of all, but the drier,
less dense bush on the mountain slopes seems often to be quite free.

The larvae attack the parts of the body where the clothing exerts pressure—

around the waistline, beneath the stocking, especially on the dorsum of the foot
H

74 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

and under the garter; on the scrotum, and in the groins and armpits. They
bury the full length of their cheliceral fangs in the skin; projecting from
between the fangs is found a tubule. In colonies composed of newly-hatched
larvae, these tubules appear with rounded blind ends, without any adventitia, of
varying lengths from a few microns up. The tubule is a remarkable organ; its
wall is thin and colourless, and I have seen one 290u long. It must be possessed
of power to cause lysis of the host’s tissues at its tip, probably by reason of a
salivary secretion. That there is an irritant secretion injected by the larva is
proved by the development, at the site of a bite, of an itching papule topped
by a blister.

If such be the case, then the obvious adventitious coat surrounding the fine
tubular sheath is easily explained as a zone of reaction by the host’s tissues against
the irritation of the lysing secretion.

Brandis, in 1897, as quoted by Warburton (1928), described “long trumpet-like
organs plunged deeply into the tissues’. Fantham, Stephens and Theobald (1916)
give two illustrations showing the chelicerae, the tubule and the adventitious
coat, with the captions: “1. Leptus autumnalis with so-called sucking proboscis
(enlarged)” and “2. Do. The so-called proboscis is formed around the hypo-
pharynx sunk into the skin.” In the text the following passage occurs: ‘Around
the point attacked there arises a wheal about the size of a lentil, and around
the inserted hypopharynx a fibrinous secretion, the ‘proboscis’, which however is
a product of the host just as chitinous secretions are provoked by Trombidia
parasitic on arthropods.”

It seems that my “tubular sheath” and the “long trumpet-like organs” of
Brandis are identical with the “hypopharynx” of these writers, and I believe
that their name is the best one. It is also apparent that my “adventitious coat”
is their “fibrinous secretion’, and that it is to the description of this structure
as a “proboscis” that they object so strongly. Unless this interpretation of their
remarks be accepted, they must be credited with applying the term “hypopharynx”
to the chelicerae, which is unlikely.

Womersley (1936a) gives a sketch of 7. macropus showing the “rostral tube’,
which corresponds to the hypopharynx.

Hosts.

The following birds and mammals have been found by me to harbour larval

mites of various species:

1. Red bush-fowl, Jungle-fowl (Megapodius duperreyi).
Colonies on neck and legs. Single specimens embedded in the neck, around
the eyes, ears and beak, beneath the wings and on the legs, and arogund the
cloaca. Single specimens running free among the feathers. The following
species have been found on this bird: 7. hirsti var. buloloensis, N. yeomansi,
N. retrocincta, S. jamesi, T. rioi, N. edwardsi, N. backhousei, S. blestowei.
Found on 86 of 93 examined.

2. Grey bush-turkey (Talegallus jobiensis).
Colonies on comb and wattles. Single specimens as on the bush-fowl. T. hirsti
var. buloloensis was found on 9 of 10 examined.

3. Cassowary, Muruk (Casuarius casuarius).
Colonies and single specimens as on the bush-fowl. T. hirsti var. buloloensis
was found on 10 examined; a single specimen of Leeuwenhoekia australiense
Hirst, 1929, was found on one.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 75

Ground-pigeon (Gallicolumba jobiensis).

Colonies and single specimens as on the bush-fowl. T. hirsti var. buloloensis
was found on 6 of 7 examined.

Swamp-hen, Purple water-hen (Porphyrio melanotus).

One specimen of 7. hirsti var. buloloensis embedded near the eye on each of
2 of 4 examined.

Rail, Swamp-hen (Amaurornis moluccanus nigrifrons).

One specimen of 7. hirsti var. morobensis embedded near the cloaca on 1 of 3
examined.

Parrot (Lorius roratus subsp.).

One colony containing 12 specimens of N. lorius on the neck of 1 female of
6 examined.

Brown’s rat, Little rat (Rattus browni).

Many specimens of N. kallipygos embedded around the mammae or in the
penis of 6, and running free in the fur of 20; ova containing WN. kallipygos
cemented to the abdominal hairs of many. Four specimens of W. morobensis
running free in the fur of 2. Found on 22 of 300 examined. Brown’s rat
readily becomes domesticated; of the 300, at least 250 were taken in and
around townships, and only 2 carried mites. The remainder were trapped
in the bush.)

Brown bush rat, Mottle-tailed rat (Rattus ringens).

N. impar in rows like fringes along the free margins of the ears, and single
specimens on the penis, scrotum, or mammae. Many specimens of N. kallipygos
on the penis, abdomen, and hind legs, and running free in the fur. Ova
containing N. kallipygos cemented to the abdominal hairs. Several specimens
of W. morobensis embedded in the nose. Found on 13 specimens examined.
Arboreal “mouse” (Melomys sp.).

Single specimens of N. kallipygos running free in the fur of 1 of 2 juveniles
examined.

Arboreal rat, Monckton’s melomys (Melomys moncktoni).

N. impar in rows on the free margins of the ears. N. kallipygos running free
in the fur, and embedded in the penis, legs, and scrotum, on 2 examined.
Arboreal rat, Stalker’s melomys (Melomys stalkeri).

N. impar and N. kallipygos.as for M. moncktoni. Ova containing N. kallipygos
cemented to the abdominal hairs. Found on 1 only.

Arboreal rat, Rufous melomys (Melomys rubex).

As for M. stalkeri. Found on 1 examined.

Bandicoot, Mumut (Echymipera cockerelli).

Colonies on the scrotum, or around and just inside the lip of the pouch. The
following were found on 9 of 10 examined: T. hirsti var. buloloensis,
N. kallipygos, S. jamesi, N. edwardsi, N. impar.

Bandicoot, Mumut (Peroryctes raffrayana).

Colonies of N. impar and single specimens of N. kallipygos on the scrotum of
1 examined.

Bush pig, Wild pig (Sus papuensis).

Colonies in the groin and around the ear, on 1 juvenile of 54 examined; S80
specimens of 7. hirsti var. buloloensis.

Man.

Nineteen specimens of T. hirsti var. buloloensis from 3 men at Bulolo; 15
specimens of S. blestowei from 2 others at Wewak, and 6 specimens of
S. blestowei from 1 at Bulolo.

76 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

The “colonies” referred to occur on areas of skin which are almost bare of
fur or feathers. They are formed of groups of up to 50 larvae, packed closely
together, heads down, in hollowed-out pits in the skin. Abandoned pits can be
found on birds, filled with a waxy yellow scab which can easily be detached,
leaving the pit lined by apparently normal epithelium. Sometimes pits are found
surrounding the contour-feathers, but I have never found them around the larger
teathers. On the bandicoot, the pits are not deep, and when abandoned are covered
with an ordinary serous scab. I have not found on rodents here any colonies or
single specimens or abandoned pits, either in or around the ears, except for the
fringes of N. impar along the free margins of the ears of the various species of
Melomys and the brown bush-rat.

N. kallipygos and W. morobensis do not occur in colonies, but they do occur
consistently in fairly large numbers in the same sites on their hosts. T. rioi,
N. edwardsi, N. retrocincta, N. backhousei, N. dubia, and S. jamesi, have not yet
been found in colonies, which suggests that the chief hosts of these species have
not yet been located. These may yet be found among the two species of snipe
and one of quail, which have not yet been investigated.

The following have been examined without finding any larval mites whatever;
the larger numbers are approximate only, but are practically correct; 100 pigeons
(3 species); 80 cockatoos; 20 doves (2 species); 10 parrakeets (2 species); 6 king-
fishers; 6 owls (3 species); 38 hawks; 3 hornbills; 2 night-herons; 2 quail; 200
miscellaneous small perching birds (about 30 species); 50 snakes and lizards;
40 flying foxes; 10 bats (3 species); 5 opossums; 3 flying squirrels; 6 wallabies.

Reliable natives, however, assure me that larvae sometimes occur in colonies
on wallabies; Womersley (1936a) records 7. macropus from a wallaby at Darwin.

It will be seen that larval mites have been found on none of the tree- or bush-
trequenting birds except a parrot (No. 7 above; this species has never been
observed upon the ground; it nests in hollow branches), but on all the available
ground-birds except the quail, which lives in the kunai and is hard to come by,
and the snipe, no specimens of which have as yet been taken. A similar distinction
can be drawn among the mammals: all the species of melomys, although they build
their nests in bushes, nevertheless spend the night foraging on the ground.

I have not found mites on dogs, cats, or domestic fowls.

Technique and Notes.

When collecting specimens from man, it is necessary to examine the selected
sites before the evening bath; it is also necessary as a rule to dig them out of
the skin with a needle, and it is difficult to avoid damaging them.

Specimens embedded in the skin of game are best secured by cytting out
the section of skin and placing it overnight in a small white pot with a screw-on
lid. By morning most of the larvae will have detached themselves, and can
easily be lifted with a needle. Unless the lid fits perfectly, it is necessary to
smear the thread with vaseline to prevent the larvae escaping.

To secure those running free the host should be held over a large sheet of
white paper and wiped lightly all over with a piece of cotton wool moistened with
chloroform. The fur is then thoroughly brushed and combed, the debris spread on
slides, and systematically examined under the microscope, using the low power;
this is necessary as many of the specimens from mammals are not orange or
red, but cream or pale dirty yellow, and cannot be picked out easily.

They should be mounted in gum-chloral (on the advice of Mr. Womersley;
mine until now have been mounted without preparation in “Euparal’’).

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 77

In freshly-killed specimens which are examined at once the eyes are seen
to be underlain by a dense accumulation of ruby-red granules or droplets which
outline the ocular shields. Much of the body-colour may also be seen to be due
to red droplets lying just beneath the body wall; by screwing down the lens on to
the coverslip, this fluid can be made to run about. Most of the body-colour
fades and disappears; in about 24 hours that under the ocular shields fades
through orange and yellow to a weak fluorescent green, and in many specimens
becomes indistinguishable after a few days. The eyes themselves are clear and
colourless. In several instances I missed a second eye in older mounts, and I
owe it to Mr. Womersley that I am able to report the eyes correctly.

It is an important fact that for any given species the size and shape of the
scutum and the relative positions of the scutal setae and the pseudostigmata do
not vary; these are the only absolute criteria, since appendages may be missing,
various relationships alter with the degree of engorgement, and certain features
fade shortly after death. It is granted that these criteria may not suffice for
complete identification of a specimen, but they are essential for grouping a series
so that a full description may be pieced together.

Various decisions made by Gater (1932) on such points as the spelling
of Trombicula and the retention of Ewing’s amended definitions (1929) of the
genera Schongastia and Neoschéngastia have been followed in this paper, which is
modelled to the best of my ability on Gater’s work on the Malayan species.

The species here described have been taken at all seasons during the last
five years, from hosts from the main Lower Bulolo River basin, in the Morobe

Gra)

NEW GUINEA

AND

PAPUA.

SEPIK RIVER,

NEW
BRITAIN.

Finschheten

RZ

0,
Botello’ <o

SQ WAU.
S

PORT MORESBY.

Fig. 1.—Map of the eastern part of New Guinea, showing localities mentioned in text.

78 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

District of New Guinea, at a mean altitude of 2,500 feet; S. blestowei was also
collected on the Suein River, on the coast near Wewak, in the Sepik District (see
IMS Ih).

Type specimens of all species here described are at the School of Public
Health and Tropical Medicine, University of Sydney, and paratypes of all except
N. retrocincta and N. dubia are at the Australian Museum, Sydney.

All measurements are average figures from as large a number of specimens
as possible, up to 25 in some cases, but usually from 4 to 10. Measurements are
as follows:

Length of body: from anterior to posterior margins, not including the

cephalothorax.

Width of body: greatest width.

Length of legs: exclusive of coxae and tarsal claws.

Scutum: greatest length and width.

Pseudostigmata: distance between centres.

Eyes and scutum: distance between adjacent margins.

The following abbreviations have been used: L, length; W, width; AM,
anteromedian; AL, anterolateral (-s); PL, posterolateral (-s) (AM, AL, and PL
refer to the scutal setae).

Roman numerals refer either to the segments of the palpi or to the fore-, mid-,
and hind-legs, or to the coxae or tarsi of these legs, according to the context.

Photomicrographs were taken with a “Brownie” camera, using a technique
described by me elsewhere (1937), and drawings made from these or from
freehand sketches direct from the microscope.

Genus TROMBICULA Berlese. (Redia, ii, fasc. 2, 1905, 155.)
TROMBICULA HIRSTI var. BULOLOENSIS, n. var. Figs. 2, 3, 5.

Body: Newly-hatched, a short broad oval, flattened at the posterior end;
greatest width between coxae ii and iii. MHalf-grown, ovoid, widest at level of
coxa iii, tapering to half that width posteriorly, the posterior pole flattened or
incavated. Fully-engorged, a swollen blunt-ended oval, widest at level of coxa iii.
Striations strong; pitting on scutum, maxilla and coxae. Colour bright orange,
except those from the bandicoot, which are pale orange, and have not the chelicerae
and palpal claws so deeply pigmented. All setae, except those on the cheliceral
sheaths and the pseudostigmatic organs, are bright orange. Newly-hatched,
L, 1764; W, 147u; fully-engorged, L, 450u; W, 364u; largest seen, 480u x 390u.
Maxillary setae single, fine, curved, with long branches on the convex side.
Chelicerae stout and slightly curved. Dorsoapical tooth single, small and blunt.
Ventral tooth small and sharp. Bases of chelicerae deep orange, even in faded
specimens. A long, straight, slender nude seta on each cheliceral sheath. Palpi
angular, relatively large, projecting boldly forward. One long curved seta with
long fine branches on the convex side, on ii; one straight nude seta on iii;
on iv, near the base, one curved seta with fine branches on its convex
side, and near the apex, two nude setae, one short and stout, the other long
and fine. Appendiculum tapering bluntly, with six setae: two very long,
coarse and pigmented, with long branches on all sides over the whole length; four
finer, with branches on the distal half of the convex side; and one short, nude,
near the base. Palpal claw bifurcate, the ventral element shorter but stouter than
the dorsal; both strongly curved, with sharp points, and the central core deeply
pigmented. Scutum trapezoidal, half as wide again as long; L, 66u; W, 102u. Set
well forward on the body. Anterior margin slightly concave in its middle three-

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 79

fifths, the lateral fifths convex; anterior corners rounded; lateral margins straight
or slightly incavated opposite the ocular shields; posterior margin strongly convex,
but flattened or smoothly concave in the middle fifth, and curving forward in the
lateral fifths to meet the lateral margins; posterior corners about one-fourth of
the distance forward, and rounded. Scutal setae 5: stout, tapering bluntly, covered
with short spines over the whole surface. The AL set back from the anterior
corners and in line with the AM; the PL set well forward in the posterior corners;
the four lateral setae set on the edge of the scutum. AM, 474; AL, 504; PL, 56x.
Pseudostigmata one-third of the way back, behind the midpoint of the line joining
the AM and PL setae; 454 apart. Pseudostigmatic organs filiform, very fine, with
about 6 fine branches on the convex side of the distal third; L, 564. Ocular shield
about 7-54 from the scutum in the fully-engorged larva; closer in the newly-hatched.
Hyes double, the anterior much the larger, opposite the pseudostigmata; the
posterior just behind the PL setae. Body setae 38: of two forms—those of the

\ f

Figs. 2-7.—2. Composite dorsal and ventral diagram of Trombicula hirsti v. bulo-
loensis, n. var.; 3. Cheliceral fang of 7. hirsti v. buloloensis; 4. Same of T. rioi, n. sp.;
5. Dorsal scutum of 7. hirsti v. buloloensis; 6. Same of T. rioi; 7. Composite dorsal and.
ventral diagram of T. rioi.

dorsum and the last two rows of the venter are covered all over with fine short
branches; the remainder of those of the venter have closely-set short branches on
the convex side only. Dorsum: Setae 22, in rows approximately as follows: 2, 6, 6,
4, 2. Row 2 is set close to the posterior margin of the scutum; row 6 is along
the posterior margin of the body. Venter: Setae 16, in rows as follows: 2, 2, 6, 2,
/2, 2. Legs relatively long. i, 236u; ii, 206u; iii, 241u. Leg setae stout, with very
short branches on the convex side. Coxal setae single, fine, curved, with long fine
branches on the convex side. A similar seta, but coarser and pigmented, on each
second segment. Base of sixth segment moderately constricted; distal half of
sixth segment of i moderately expanded. All tarsi tapering, that of iii very long
and slender. A short stout spur on tarsi i and ii, a long nude seta on tarsus iii.
Nineteen specimens from three men; fifty from seven bandicoots (Hchymipera
cockerelli); many hundreds from many bush-fowl (Megapodius duperreyi), bush-
turkeys (Talegallus jobiensis), Cassowaries (Casuarius casuarius) and Ground-

80 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

pigeons (Gallicolumba jobiensis); one from a rail (Amaurornis moluccanus nigri-
frons) and two from a Swamp-hen (Porphyrio melanotus); eighty from a Bush-pig
(Sus papuensis).

T. hirsti var. buloloensis corresponds very closely with Sambon’s description
ot T. hirsti (1927); the differences are:

T. hirsti. T. hirsti var. buloloensis.
Seta on 2nd palpal segment has 3 branches. Many branches.
2 nude setae on fourth palpal segment. 2 nude, 1 branched.
Appendicular setae, 6 plain, 1 branched. 1 plain, 5 branched.
Dorsal setae 2, 6, 6, 2, 2, 2. 2216S Osa, tes
40u long. 56 long.
Scutum uniformly smaller. Larger.

It differs from Hirst’s description of 7. akamushi as quoted by Patton and
Evans (1929) as follows:

T. akamushi. T. hirsti var. buloloensis.
Anteromedian scutal seta longer than scutum. Shorter than scutum.
Pseudostigmata nearer posterior margin. Nearer anterior margin.

Dorsal setae 2, 8, 6, plus a few posterior Ye (5 (Hts 26
setae (rarely 2, 6, 8-10, 8).

Seta on 2nd palpal segment plain. Many branches.
3 palpal claws. 2 palpal claws.
No plain seta on tarsus iii. Present.

It differs from 7. wichmanni in the number and arrangement of the body-setae.

It is probably only a local variant, and it seems unnecessary to add another
new name to the list, which might also include 7. pseudoakamushi and T. deliensis.
Confusion between these closely related species is not only possible, but probable,
because it was apparently customary to dismiss them in a few lines until Gater
published his detailed descriptions of the Malayan species in 1932. The increasing
importance of certain species because of their association with endemic typhus
makes more detailed descriptions essential.

Of approximately three thousand mites collected in the Bulolo basin, almost
two thousand seven hundred are 7’. hirsti var. buloloensis. I have succeeded in
hatching out twenty-one nymphs from these larvae, but as yet no adults. Detailed
consideration of these does not come within the scope of the present work, but
superficially they resemble Hirst’s ‘“Neotrombicula autumnalis”’.

TROMBICULA RIOI, n. sp. Figs. 4, 6, 7.

Body a short, wide, blunt oval, widest at the level of coxa iii, smoothly
constricted midway. Striations strong; pitting on scutum, maxilla and coxae.
Colour light orange. L, 316u; W, 302u. Largest seen, 389u x 375u. Maxillary setae
curved, with long fine branches on the convex side. Chelicerae slender. Dorso-
apical tooth single, small, blunt. Ventral tooth a small rounded swelling only. A
long nude seta on each cheliceral sheath. Palpi rounded. One coarse straight
seta on ii, with long branches on one side; one straight nude seta on iii; on iv,
near the base, one long straight seta with fine branches on one side of the distal
half, and two nude setae near the apex. Appendiculum small and rounded, with
one short pointed nude seta near the base, and three fine setae with fine branches,
near the apex. Palpal claw bifurcate, the dorsal element the longer; both elements
slender, slightly curved, with sharp points, the central core orange. Scutum
trapezoidal, only slightly wider posteriorly; almost twice as wide as long; L, 69u;
W, 120u. Anterior margin sinuate, the central third straight or slightly concave,
the lateral thirds projecting forward; anterior corners rounded; lateral margins
slightly concave; posterior margin concave in its middle third, convex in its
lateral thirds, curving sharply forward in its lateral fifths to meet the lateral

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 81

margins; posterior corners rounded, set one-third of the distance forward. Scutal
setae 5: with short coarse branches along the whole length of one side. Set in
the corners, the three anterior in line. AM, 664; AL, 684%; PL, 75yu. Pseudo-
stigmata half-way back, behind and medial to the mid-point of the line joining
the AM and PL setae; 50u apart. Pseudostigmatic organs filiform, very slender,
with a few fine branches on the distal third; L, 754. Ocular shield 6u from the
scutum. Eyes double, the anterior much the larger and more refractile, opposite
the pseudostigmata; the posterior just behind the PL setae. Body setae 110; the
first five rows of the dorsum are slightly curved, with a few short branches on
the concave side and many slightly longer branches on the convex side. The first
four rows of the venter are slightly curved, with short branches on both sides.
The posterior setae, both dorsal and ventral, are more curved, and have longer
branches than the others, set over the whole surface. Dorsum: Setae 68, in rows
approximately as follows: 2, 14, 12, 4, 6, /8, 10, 8, 4. Venter: Setae 42, in rows
approximately as follows: 2, 2, 8, 6, /10, 6, 4, 4. The last four rows of each
surface are continuous, forming a series of concentric circles around the posterior
pole of the body, composed of 18, 16, 12, and 8 setae respectively. Legs relatively
long; i, 300u; ii, 230; iii, 300u. Leg setae long, slightly curved, with short fine
branches on the convex side. Coxal setae single, and a single seta on each
second segment. Base of sixth segment of each leg markedly constricted, and
the distal part of the sixth segment of i markedly expanded. All tarsi tapering,
the first more bluntly than the others. A short fine spur on tarsi i and ii, and
a slender, not very conspicuous nude seta on iii. Several fine nude setae at the
apex of each tarsus.
Highteen specimens from 4 bush-fowl (Megapodius duperreyi).

Key to the Australian and New Guinea Species of Trombicula.
(Constructed by H. Womersley.)

ie DOrSalesetae nm OGG ehaniay Ob. cence totenc eoey nicuapnamchowcacuensige mousPaPaE pee a io yh. ap hen eue eaboeds scl Geis’ 2
DOLSALHSCtLAGR 4s SOL MLO WiCIy PASP ACCC e A cece rue nenon ea oe trer amare a eee ciel taidnia ar al et nce Mba wo atsuatecailoneenene 3

2. Dorsal setae arranged 2, 14, 12, 4, 6, 8, 10, 8, 4; the posterior rows set closely, their
individual setae thicker and more strongly branched than the others. Scutum

with posterior margin convex laterally, concave medially; AW, 1184; PW, 120z;
Baa eleanor otpkcickaliocota io ois os Gta Osamu nC ORCC eee CROCE SAE ON REP ccliG cane is eeR ee T. rioi, n. sp.
Dorsal setae 2, 6, 8, and then about five rows of closely-placed setae branched
similarly to the others. Scutum with posterior margin evenly convex; AW, 80;

TEAS heyy gon od Le cad LTH cok URECRS AMET nes Pepa Iona te Over Guach ako Morac T. macropus Womersley 1936

3. Dorsal setae 42, arranged 2, 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 4; 60-754 long. Scutum with posterior
Haan Gyariyy Conyers AOS Os IW, WOme I, IO obo deeunoducscoededuaonooagouc

Sega To el bes eat see EIGS Bees Se eam Aster cuepeROR ESE dees sees ae Ly novade-nollandiag Hirst 11929

DOES AU ISS talemlESSet aye 4D alee reser meh see ee rts eetcay ratte c iene act SMe tet SIE Raa a LE IY 4

4. Scutum with posterior margin convex laterally, strongly concave medially. Dorsal
setae 24, arranged 2, 6, 6, 6(2), 2(6), 2 ........ T. wichmanni Oudemans 1905
Scutum with posterior margin evenly convex ........... 0... cee eee ee eee eee eee 5

5. Dorsal setae 20, 40% long, arranged 2, 6, 6, 2, 2, 2. Scutum, AW, 764; PW, 944;
TA SOLA TAC OME Milan OS uecmne pen once airs semaine citecte ra amen eis T. hirsti Sambon 1927
Dorsal setae 20, 56m long, arranged 2, 6, 6, 4, 2. Scutum, AW, 904”; PW, 1104; L,
GHOGS SANTO) IW /IK, WOS odsccosaavocvusooccdcunn T. hirsti var. buloloensis, n. var.

(The abbreviations AW and PW refer to the width of the scutum at the levels of
the anterolateral and posterolateral setae respectively. )
Genus NEOSCHONGASTIA Ewing 1929.
Manual External Parasites, 1929, 187.

NEOSCHONGASTIA YEOMANSI, n. sp. Figs. 8, 9, 22.
Body: Newly-hatched, a short broad oval, widest at level of coxa ii, rounded
posteriorly; fully-grown, a broad sharply-tapering oval, widest at level of coxa ii.

82 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

Striations very fine, absent over the posterior fourth of the body; pitting on
scutum, maxilla, and coxae, and over the posterior fourth of the body. Colour
orange-red. Newly-hatched, L, 200u; W, 167u; largest seen, 333u x 292u. Maxillary
setae single, long, fine, with long fine branches on each side. Chelicerae stout,
narrowed at the base, tapering to a sharp point. Dorsoapical tooth a short sharp
barb well back from the apex; ventral tooth long and pointed, nearer to the apex
than the dorsoapical. A long fine seta set with short fine spines on one side, on
each cheliceral sheath. Palpi rounded. One long fine curved seta set with fine
branches on the convex side, on ii; a similar seta on iii; on iv, near the base
one seta with many fine branches on all sides, and near the apex one slender
nude seta and one short stout seta. Appendiculum pointed, with six setae: one stout
with many branches, four slender with fine branches, and one nude, near the base.
Palpal claw trifurecate, with sharp points; the middle element the largest, the
dorsal and ventral elements short and equal. Scutum oblong, twice as wide as
long; L, 564; W, 100u. One-third of the distance back there is a transverse crest
composed of four curved ridges, concave posteriorly, the lateral the strongest.
Anterior to the crest the pitting is simple; posteriorly the pits are surrounded by
circular striations. Anterior margin concave; anterior corners rounded and
projecting forward; lateral margins slightly concave; posterior margin straight or
slightly concave in the middle three-fifths, the lateral fifths curving forward to
meet the lateral margins; posterior corners rounded, projecting slightly laterally.
Scutal setae 5: fine, with fine branches over the whole length on all sides. The
AM set back from the margin; the AL on the edge of the anterior corners, well
in front of the AM; the PL set forward in the posterior corners. AM, 37:5y;

Aen

Pe

ON

Figs. 8-21.—8. Composite dorsal and ventral diagram of Neoschongastia yeomansi,
n. sp.; 9. Cheliceral fang of N. yeomansi, n. sp.; 10. Same of N. kallipygos; 11. N. impar,
n. sp.; 12. N. lorius, n. sp.; 138. N. edwardsi, n. sp.; 14. N. backhousei, n. sp.; 15. Composite
ventral and dorsal diagram of N. kallipygos; 16. Same of N. impar; 17. Same of N. lorius;
18. Same of N. edwardsi; 19. N. retrocincta, n. sp.; 20. N. backhousei; 21. N. dubia, n. sp.

|

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 83

AL, 80u; PL 60un. Pseudostigmata half-way back, lateral to the midpoint of the
line joining the AM and PL setae; they are in the hollow behind the lateral curves
of the crest, like eyes beneath eyebrows; 62:54 apart. Pseudostigmatic organs
capitate, racquet-shaped. L, 37-54; stem, 9-54; head, 28u x 19u. A few fine short
setules on the head. Ocular shields 254 from the scutum. Hyes double, the
anterior in line with the AM seta or just in front of it. In the newly-hatched
larva they are close to the scutum, and relatively a little further back. Body
setae approximately 178, of two forms: those on the anterior part fine, with fine
branches; those on the posterior unstriated portion straight, stout and blunt,
covered with minute short spines all over, and set on tubercles. The latter type
comprise the last five rows on the dorsum, and the last four rows on the venter.
Dorsum: setae 100, in rows approximately as follows: 2, 16, 8(10), 12(10), 10(8),
10, 8(10), /12, 6, 6, 6, 4. Venter: setae 78, in rows approximately as follows:
2, 2, 16, 14(12), 12, 6(8), 2, /10(8), 6, 4, 4. Legs relatively long; i, 260u; ii, 215;
iii, 270u. All leg setae fine with fine branches, except for a few on each tarsus
which have a very few short branches. Coxal setae single. Sixth segment of each
leg not markedly constricted, but that of iii slightly expanded distally. All tarsi
tapering. A very slender spur on tarsus i; that on tarsus ii short and fine; a very
fine long nude seta on iii.
Fifty specimens from ten bush-fowl (Megapodius duperreyt).

NEOSCHONGASTIA KALLIPYGOS, n. sp. Figs. 10, 15, 238.

Body a broad oval, widest at level of coxa iii. A slight shallow constriction
midway, which marks a fold running obliquely around the body, dorsally at the
level of the third row of setae, ventrally just behind coxa iii. A shallow cleft in
the centre of the posterior margin, which marks the junction of two dorsal caudal
swellings or plates, roughly semicircular in shape. The anus lies in a longitudinal
fold on the ventral surface. No striations, but fine pitting over the whole surface,
on the scutum, maxilla, and coxae. Colour pale dirty-yellow to pale orange.
L, 4874; W, 3234. Cephalothorax relatively small, set back on the ventral surface;
only the tips of the chelicerae and palpi are visible from the dorsal aspect.
Maxillary setae fine, with fine branches on the convex side. Chelicerae short,
slightly curved. Dorsoapical tooth single, a comparatively long barb; ventral tooth
small. A long stout slightly curved nude seta on each cheliceral sheath. Palpi
rounded. One short curved seta on ii, with fine branches on the convex side; a
similar seta on iii; two fine long straight setae covered with short spines, on iv.
Appendiculum pointed, with five or six setae; four or five very long, curved, and
heavily branched on the convex side, set towards the apex; ‘one short and straight,
covered with fine spines, set towards the base. Palpal claw trifurcate, the ventral
element the shortest, the dorsal the longest. Scutum trapezoidal, about two and
one-half times as broad as long; L, 334; W, 8lu. Set on the forward slope of the
body. Anterior margin concave, sharply recurved around the AM seta; anterior
corners projecting forward and laterally around the AL setae; lateral margins
slightly concave; posterior margin convex, smoothly indented in the middle;
posterior corners projecting backward and laterally around the PL setae. Scutal
setae 5; long and stout, constricted at the base, tapering bluntly at the tip, covered
with fine short spines over the whole surface. Set well into the projecting corners.
AM, 28u; AL, 6384; PL, 83u. Pseudostigmata two-thirds of the way back, behind
and medial to the midpoint of the line joining the AM and PL setae, 21yu apart.
Pseudostigmatic organs capitate, racquet-shaped, the stem very slender. L, 27:5u;
stem, 12-54; head, 15u x 15u. Ocular shield absent. (Present in unhatched larva.)

84 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

Eyes double, opposite the centre of the scutum, nearer to the lateral margins of
the body than to the scutum. (The two eyes are plainly visible in the unhatched
larva, but only one can normally be made out with ease in the newly-hatched
larva.) Body setae 46 to 50, of two forms: long and stout, narrow at the base,
tapering bluntly at the tip, covered with short spines over the whole surface; and
short and fine, curved, with fine branches on the convex side. The latter compose
row 8 of the dorsum, and rows one to four of the venter. Dorsum: setae 28
(30 or 32) in rows as follows: 2, 6 (2 or 4), 4, 2, 4, 2, /6, /2. Row three varies;
it is set on the transverse dorsal constriction; row seven is composed of two very
long straight setae (L, 75u) set close together; row eight is composed actually
of two curved rows of three setae running more or less longitudinally along the
lateral edges of the dorsal caudal plates; row nine is set on the posterior margin

ae

Figs. 22-29.—Dorsal scutum of, 22. N. yeomansi; 23. N. kallipygos; 24. N. impar;
25. N. lorius; 26. N. edwardsi; 27. N. retrocincta; 28. N. backhousei; 29. N. dubia.

of the body, often more ventrally than dorsally. Venter: setae 18, in rows as
follows: 2,.2, 4, 2, /4, 4. Legs relatively short. i. 180; ii, 1304; iii, 2054. Leg
setae stout, straight, set with fine spines over the whole surface, except as below.
Coxae set well in on the ventral surface, and well forward. Coxal setae single,
curved, fine with fine branches on the convex side. A similar seta, but longer and
coarser, on each second segment. Base of sixth segments not unduly constricted.
Tarsus i truncated, the others tapering. Spur on tarsi i and ii short and fine;
no spur on iii. Four curved branched setae at the apex of each tarsus. The
central tarsal claw very long and fine, usually broken off.

Two specimens from an arboreal “mouse” (Melomys sp.), seven from two
bandicoots (Hchymipera cockerelli and Peroryctes raffrayana); many from Brown’s
rat (Rattus browni), Monckton’s melomys (Melomys moncktoni), Stalker’s melomys
(Melomys stalkeri), the Rufous melomys (Melomys rubex), and the Brown bush-
rat (Rattus ringens).

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 85

Many ova have been found cemented to the abdominal hairs of Rattus ringens,
Rattus browni, and the various Melomys, containing N. kallipygos in recognizable
stages of development. Detailed consideration of these does not come within the
scope of the present work, but the fact throws light on the life-history of this
species; it is obvious that adult females must spend at least some time as parasites
on these hosts.

So far all attempts to hatch out nymphs with the technique used for 7. hirsti
var. buloloensis have failed.

It is probable that this larva should be placed in a separate genus, a subdivision
of Neoschéngastia, on account of: The constricted body; the caudal plates; the
shape of the scutum; the substitution of pitting for striations over the whole
body-surface; the dorsal setae; the distinctive features of the tarsi; and the
variation from the usual of the life-history.

NEOSCHONGASTIA IMPAR, nh. Sp. Figs. 11, 16, 24.

Body oval, widest at level of coxa iii, with a slight shallow constriction
midway. Striations strong and very coarse; pitting on scutum, and finer and
weaker on maxilla and coxae. Colour salmon-pink. L, 2684; W, 196:5u; largest
seen, 333u «x 250u. Maxillary setae long, curved, with long fine branches on the
convex side. Chelicerae stout, tapering sharply to a long slender tip. Dorso-
apical tooth single, small, blunt. Ventral tooth a small squared tubercle at the
end of a ridge. A long straight slender nude seta on each cheliceral sheath. Palpi
angular, with a small tubercle at the lateral angle of ii. One short slender nude
seta on ii; a slender seta with two fine branches near its tip, on iii; on iv, two
nude setae, one slender near the apex, the other short, stout and rod-like near
the base. Appendiculum bluntly tapering, with four setae: one stout, with a few
fine branches on both sides, three finer, with fine branches on the convex side
only. Palpal claw bifurcate, the dorsal element stouter and more curved than, but
equal in length to the ventral. Scutum a rounded oblong; L, 48u; W, 66u. Anterior
margin sinuate, with slight convexities in the middle and at each end; anterior
corners rounded; lateral margins straight, but incavated opposite the ocular
shields; posterior margin strongly convex, straight in its middle third; posterior
corners rounded. Crest represented by two oblique ridges, concave postero-
laterally, about one-third of the distance back. Scutal setae 5: short, stout,
covered with a few short spines. The three anterior setae in the convexities of
the anterior margin, the AM slightly behind the AL; the PL well forward in the
posterior corners. AM, 37-54; AL, 194; Pl, 12-54. Pseudostigmata half-way back,
in the hollows of the crest, medial to the mid-point of the line joining the AM and
PL setae; 27u apart. Pseudostigmatic organs capitate, paddle-shaped, covered with
short sharp setules. L, 37-54; stem, 7-54; head, 30u x 9u. Ocular shields contiguous
with the scutum. Hyes double, the anterior opposite the pseudostigmata. Under-
lying the anterior eye a group of four pale fluorescent bodies; beneath the posterior
eye the number of these bodies varies from 0 to three. The posterior eye
opposite the PL setae. Body setae 68 to 72; those of the dorsum short, pointed,
with a few short spines; on the venter the first two rows are short, straight,
with a few fine branches on one side; the remainder still shorter, with a few
short spines. Dorsum: setae 26 to 30, in rows as follows: 2, 6, 6, (2), 6, 4, 2, (2).
Rows 4 and 8 vary. Venter: setae 42, arranged in rows as follows: 2, 2, /8, 6, 8, 6,
4, 2, 2, 2. Legs: there are only six segments in the mid and hind legs, due
apparently to the fusion of the third and fourth segments; i, 1504; ii, 130y;
ili, 1634. On legs i and ii the setae are short, with fine short branches on one

86 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

side; on iii they are longer, with fine long branches on one side. Coxal setae
single. Sixth segment of i and fifth of ii and iii moderately constricted. Tarsus i
is truncated, and bears a long nude seta with a tiny claw-like tip in addition to
the usual stout spur. The other tarsi are tapered, ii bearing a stout spur, iii a
long nude seta.

Sixty specimens from seven bandicoots (six Hchymipera cockerelli and one
Peroryctes raffrayana), many from two Monckton’s melomys (Melomys moncktoni),
one Stalker’s melomys (Melomys stalkeri), one Rufous melomys (Melomys ruber)
and thirteen Brown bush-rats (Rattus ringens).

The lack of a segment in the mid and hind legs, analogous to the similar
condition in Schdngastia oudemansi Walch, does not warrant erecting a new
genus. The fact is taken notice of in the name.

NEOSCHONGASTIA LORIUS, Nn. Sp. Figs. 12, 17, 25.

Body a long ellipse, slightly produced anteriorly, with a shallow constriction
behind the third coxa. Striations very fine; fine pitting on the scutum, and finer
on maxilla and coxae. Colour bright orange-red. L, 259-54; W, 173-:5u; largest seen,
278u x 200u. Maxillary setae fine, with three long fine branches. Chelicerae
slender, sharp, tapering gently. Dorsoapical tooth single, represented by a minute
prominence. Ventral tooth a minute tubercle at the end of a ridge. A slender
straight nude seta on each cheliceral sheath. Palpi rounded. One plain seta on
each segment, that on iii the longest and most slender, that on iv shorter and
very stout. Appendiculum short, bluntly tapering, with a rounded tip; bearing
four plain setae, one very stout, two longer and more slender, and one stouter still,
near the base. Palpal claw bifurcate, blunt, the two elements equal. Scutum
roughly hexagonal, almost twice as broad as long; L, 37:-5u; W, 62-54. Anterior
margin projecting in the centre, the lateral portions slightly concave; anterior
corners rounded; lateral margins straight; posterior margin strongly convex,
bluntly pointed in the centre; posterior corners rounded. A small semicircular
ridge around the anteromedial sides of the pseudostigmata. Scutal setae 5, slender,
straight, covered with fine spines. The AM in the apex of the forward projection,
in front of the AL, which are set well out in the anterior corners; the PL in
the posterior corners. AM, 364; AL, 254; PL, 37:54. Pseudostigmata one-third
of the way back, medial to the midpoint of the line joining the AM and PL setae;
20u apart. Pseudostigmatic organs capitate, a broad paddle shape. L, 304; stem,
7u; head, 23u x 9:5u. Covered with fine short setules. Ocular shields apparently
missing. Eyes double, about 194 from the scutum, the anterior opposite the
pseudostigmata. Body setae 42, stout, almost straight, covered with fine spines.
Dorsum: setae 22, in rows as follows: 2, 6, 6, 4, 2, 2. Venter: setae 20, in rows
as follows: 2, 2, 4, 2, 4, 4, 2. Row 1 is close behind the maxilla, anterior to the
tips of the first coxae. Legs: i, 134u; ii, 924; iii, 13804. Leg setae nude except
as follows: on the second segment, a prominent seta with a few very short
branches along the convex side; the setae on the sixth and seventh segments
similar but shorter. Coxal setae single; the first with 3 fine long branches,
the others nude. Tarsus ii tapering very bluntly, iii very long and slender. A
short blunt spur on tarsi i and ii, a long slender nude seta on iii. The central
tarsal claw very long and slender.

Twelve specimens from a parrot (Lorius roratus subsp.).

NEOSCHONGASTIA EDWARDSI, nn. sp. Figs. 13, 18, 26.
Body rounded, widest at level of coxa iii, slightly flattened posteriorly.
Striations very coarse and strong; pitting on scutum, maxilla and coxae. Colour

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 87

orange. Newly-hatched, L, 187-54; W, 1694; half-grown, L, 2444; W, 2134; no
fully-engorged specimens were taken; largest seen, 278u x 2504. Maxillary setae
long and fine, with a few fine branches on the convex side of the proximal half.
Chelicerae very long, straight and slender. Dorsoapical tooth a small sharp barb.
Ventral tooth apparently missing. A long fine straight nude seta on each cheliceral
sheath. Palpi slender and curved. A fine seta with many long fine branches on ii;
one with short fine branches on iii; on iv one at the base with fine branches, and
two nude at the apex. Appendiculum with eight setae: seven with fine branches,
and one nude near the base. Palpal claw bifurcate, the ventral element the longer,
both slender, blunt and slightly curved. Scutum roughly hexagonal, half as broad
again as long; L, 564; W, 87-54. Anterior margin slightly concave, slightly
recurved in the middle; anterior corners angular; lateral margins straight;
posterior margin strongly convex, the middle fifth concave; posterior corners sharp
and projecting. A slight, gently-curved ridge in front of each pseudostigma.
Scutal setae 5: relatively very long, with many long branches on all surfaces.
Set well into the angles, the AL just in front of the AM. AM, 37-54; AL, 75u;
PL, 60”. Pseudostigmata half-way back, just behind the PL setae; 36 apart.
Pseudostigmatic organs capitate, leaf-shaped, covered with minute setules. L, 29u;
stem, 6u; head, 234 x 154. Ocular shield contiguous with the scutum, curved
around the posterior corners. Eyes double, the anterior the larger, in front
of the PL setae; the posterior behind the PL setae. Body setae 96, with closely-set
short branches on the convex side, those of the venter finer than the dorsal.
Dorsum: setae 64, in rows as follows: 2, 14, 14, 10, 12, 8, 4. Venter: setae 32, in
rows as follows: 2, 2, 8, 4, 6, 6, 4. Row one on one specimen has three setae.
Row six sometimes contains eight setae. Legs relatively long. i, 210u; ii, 200u;
iii, 2304. Leg setae with fine branches on the convex side; a few straight setae
with a few short apical branches on each tarsus. Coxal setae single, slender,
with fine branches on the convex side. The sixth segment of each leg is expanded
distally, that of leg iii less than the others. Tarsi tapering. A short slender nude
seta on tarsus i instead of the usual spur; a short stout spur on ii; a long slender
nude seta on iii.

Twenty specimens from five bush-fowl (Megapodius duperreyi); one from a
bandicoot (Hchymipera cockerellt).

NEOSCHONGASIIA RETROCINCTA, n. Sp. Figs. 19, 27.

Body rounded anteriorly, flatly convex posteriorly, slightly convex laterally,
widest opposite coxa iii. Striations moderately strong, merging into pitting over
the posterior fourth of the body. Pitting also on scutum, maxilla and coxae.
A cirele of thirty small tubercles, devoid of setae, surrounding the body at the
level of the posterior margin of the anus. Within this circle, twenty-two to
twenty-five closely-set large tubercles bearing setae. Colour yellow. lL, 354u:;
W, 236u. Maxillary setae long, with fine branches on the convex side. Chelicerae
missing from both specimens. A short seta, apparently nude, on each cheliceral
sheath. Palpi rounded, narrow at the base, widest at the apex of ii. One long
seta, with long fine branches on the convex side, on ii; one with short branches on
the convex side on iii; on iv one short stout blunt nude seta near the base, and
one with short branches on the convex side, near the apex. Palpal claw trifurcate,
the middle element the longest, the ventral the shortest. Appendiculum with
5 or 6 branched setae, one stout and prominent. Scutum roughly crescentic;
L, 524; W, 87. Anterior margin strongly concave, recurved in the middle;
anterior corners rounded, large, projecting forward; lateral margins slightly

88 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

concave; posterior margin convex, indented in the middle, not clearly defined, but
merging into the body-striations; posterior corners rounded. Short curved ridges
in front of the pseudostigmata, and a diffuse longitudinal swelling down the
centre. Simple pits in front of the crest; behind it, the pits surrounded by
circular striations. Scutal setae 5, long, with Jong branches over all surfaces; set
into the angles, the AM well behind the AL. AM, 37-54; AL, 564; PL, 47u.
Pseudostigmata half-way back, lateral to the midpoint of the line joining the
AM and PL setae; behind the ridges of the crest; 534 apart. Pseudostigmatic
organs capitate, racquet-shaped, with no apparent setules, but striated. L, 37:5u;
stem, 9:54; head, 28u x 194. Ocular shield 254 from scutum. Eyes double, the
anterior opposite the AM seta. Body setae 104 (106), plus 22 to 25 caudal setae.
Those of the dorsum long, with short branches on the convex side; the first
two ventral rows long, with long branches on the convex side, the remainder
on the venter similar but shorter; the caudal setae stout, straight, nude.
Dorsum: setae 52, in rows as follows: 2, 8(10), 12(10), 6, 8(10), 8, / 8(6), / 17
tubercles, / plus 11(13). Row seven is on the part where the striations have
given way to pitting. Venter: setae 52(54), in rows as follows: 2, 2, 10(12),
12(10), 10, 8, / 4(6), 6(2), / 18 tubercles, / plus 11(12). Rows seven and eight
are on the pitted part, row seven anterior to, row eight level with the anus.
Legs relatively long; i, 2454; ii, 2074; iii, 240u. Leg setae vary; they have
branches on the convex side except as follows: on the third to sixth segment of
i, third to fifth segment of ii, and on the third segment of iii, they have branches
on all sides. Coxal setae very long, with fine branches on the convex side; a
single seta on coxae i and ii, but two on iii. The base of the sixth segment is
constricted, its distal portion expanded, on each leg. A long fine spur on tarsus
i, a shorter fine one on ii, a long nude seta on iii.

Two specimens from a bush-fowl (Megapodius duperreyi).

In the absence of chelicerae from both specimens, the justification for placing
this species in the genus Neoschdngastia rests on the fact that the scutal crest
resembles the crests of the other species of Neoschongastia here described. The
appearance of circular striations around the pits on the portion of the scutum
behind the crest resembles that of N. yeomansi and N. buckhousei; and partly
on the evidence of eyes and palpal claws.

Ewing’s key (1929) reads, in part,

“4. Chelicerae armed with a row of teeth above; palpal claw usually bifurcate ........
ONAL vb Ce co ici uci Rena areca ate AE) ARCs RMECR cue tent aeaaetobothe Schongastia Oudemans

Chelicerae each with not more than a single dorsal tooth; palpal claw trifurcate
prethahs wath-f ela rasroil=y a! yanyai/2ygey nym) ‘ose sien s zohsay t yore Mnawe SOWA ARS ca Gomme yeNes, sysiane tors Neoschongastia (new)”’

to which Womersley (1937) adds, for Neoschdngastia, ““Kyes two”; a previous
division of his key indicates that Schéngastia, among other genera, is characterized
by single eyes.

That is, besides the evidence afforded by the cheliceral teeth, Schdngastia
has single eyes and usually bifurcate palpal claws; Neoschdngastia double eyes and
trifurcate claws; the latter is the case in this species.

N. retrocincta is a member of a group, the outstanding example of which is
N. yeomansi, which contains also N. backhousei and N. dubia. The features of
this group are: Well-defined crest on scutum; typical scutal pitting, with the
pits behind the crest surrounded by circular striations; pitting, not striations,
on the posterior portion of the body; distinctive setae on the pitted portion.
It is possible that this group may be found to constitute a new genus, a second
subdivision of Neoschdéngastia.

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 89

N. retrocincta is also linked with N. dubia, in that each has multiple setae
on the third coxa. N. mutabilis Gater, 1932, also shows this feature; the number
varies from three to five, and also varies on each side of the same specimen.

NEOSCHONGASTIA BACKHOUSEI, nh. sp. Figs. 14, 20, 28.

Body oval, widest at level of coxa iii. Striations fine and moderately strong,
but weaker over the posterior sixth of the body; pitting on scutum, maxilla
and coxae, and over the posterior sixth of the body. Colour orange. L, 312y;
W, 216u. Maxillary setae single, long, fine, with a few long branches on all sides.
Chelicerae straight, slender, tapering to a sharp point. Dorsoapical tooth repre-
sented by a minute subterminal tubercle. Ventral tooth a minute pointed swelling.
A slender straight nude seta on each cheliceral sheath. Palpi rounded. A long
seta with a few long branches on the convex side on ii; a shorter seta with
a few long branches on the convex side on iii; on iv, at the base, a short seta with
a few long branches on the convex side, and two nude setae at the apex. Palpal
claw trifurcate, sharp, the middle element the longest, the dorsal and ventral
elements equal in length. Appendiculum rounded, with four or five setae, one
nude, the others stout with short branches. Scutum a rounded trapezoid, half
as wide again as long, with a crest one-third of the distance back, consisting of
two short lateral curves joined by a weaker long central curve, all concave
behind; from the centre of the crest a diffuse ridge runs back to the posterior
margin. The pits in front of the crest simple; behind the crest they are
surrounded by circular striations. Anterior margin sinuate, with three smooth
convexities; anterior corners rounded; lateral margins slightly concave; posterior
margin convex; posterior corners rounded. L, 474; W, 7du. Scutal setae 5,
long, with fine branches on all sides. The three anterior in line, in the anterior
convexities; the PL forward in the posterior corners, on the margins of the scutum.
AM, 37:54; AL, 474; PL, 44u. Pseudostigmata about two-fifths of the way back,
behind the lateral curves of the crest, lateral to the midpoint of the line joining
the AM and PL setae; 44:5u apart. Pseudostigmatic organs capitate, a broad
leaf-shape, the apex bluntly pointed, the head covered with fine setules. L, 30u;
stem, 64; head, 244 x 1ldu. Ocular shield 194 from the scutum. Byes double,
the anterior just in front of the pseudostigmata. Body setae 116, of three forms:
the first four rows of the dorsum with short branches all over; the remainder ot
the dorsum and the last two rows oi the venter with very short branches on the
convex side, a few short spines on the concave side; the remainder of the venter
with short branches on the convex side only. Dorsum: setae 72, in rows
approximately as follows: 2, 14, 14, 10, / 8, 8, 6, 6, 2, 2. Venter: setae 44, in rows
approximately as follows: 2, 2, 8, 4, 6, 8, 2, 2, / 6, 4. Legs relatively long; i, 190u;
li, 1254; iii, 1674. Coxal setae single, the first two with short branches all over,
the third with branches on the convex side only. On the second to the fourth
segments of i and ii the setae have short branches all over; on the last three
segments of these legs, and on all the segments of iii, they have branches on the
convex side only. Tarsus i has a sharp concave taper dorsally, with the dorsal
nude seta very prominent and set on a tubercle, the spur very short and fine.
The spur on tarsus ii is short, stout and blunt; there are two prominent setae set
with short spines. There is no prominent nude seta on tarsus iil.

Two specimens from two bush-fowl (Megapodius duperreyi).

NEOSCHONGASTIA DUBIA, n. Sp. Figs. 21, 29.
Body a blunt oval, widest at level of coxa iii. Striations fine and strong;

pitting on scutum, maxilla and coxae. Colour orange. L, 3334; W, 278u. Maxillary
I

90 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

setae long, with many branches on the convex side. Chelicerae missing. A short
fine seta with three very fine branches on each cheliceral sheath. Palpi stout,
rounded. <A very long seta with fine branches on the convex side on ii; a long
seta with four branches on the convex side on ili; on iv, near the base, a stout
seta with fine branches on one side, and near the apex two nude setae, one
slender, the other stout. Palpal claw trifurcate, the middle element much the
longest, the dorsal and ventral elements equal, all with sharp points. Appendiculum
rounded, with six setae: four very long, one of them coarse and heavily branched,
the other three finer, with fine branches on the convex side; two nude, one
slender, the other stout. Seutum: L, 62:54: W, 100u. Anterior margin strongly
coneave; anterior corners rounded, projecting well forward; lateral margins
straight; posterior margin convex, indented in the middle; posterior corners
small, projecting laterally. In front of each pseudostigma a short flatly-curved
ridge, about one-third of the distance back. A longitudinal diffuse ridge along the
posterior two-thirds of the midline. Pits simple in front of the crest; those behind
it surrounded by circular striations. Scutal setae 5, very long, the AM with
branches over all surfaces, set well back from the anterior margin; the others
with fine branches on the convex side only, the AL on the lateral margins of the
anterior corners, the PL in the posterior corners. AM, 47u; AL, 84:54; PL, 75yz.
Pseudostigmata half-way back, behind the ridges of the crest, lateral to the mid-
point of the line joining the AM and PL setae; 56u apart. Pseudostigmatic organs
missing. Ocular shield 19” from scutum. Eyes double, the anterior opposite the
AM setae. Body setae 196, with branches on the convex side only. On the dorsum
the anterior setae are very long; they become successively shorter, with fewer and
shorter branches, towards the posterior pole. On the venter, rows one and two are
long, row three is very short. They become successively longer towards the
posterior pole, with fewer and shorter branches. Dorsum: setae 96, in rows
approximately as follows: 2, 14, 10, 12, 6, 14, 14, 12, 8, 4. Venter: setae 100, in rows
approximately as follows: 2, 2, /12, 10, 10, 10, 12, 12, 10, 8, 6, 4, 2. Legs relatively
long; i, 278u; ii, 230u; iii, 292u. A single seta, with short branches all along one
side, on coxae i and ii; three setae with only a few short branches on one side of
the distal third, in a row along the anterior margins of coxa iii. On the second
segment of each leg a long seta with long branches all over. The other setae have
branches on the convex side only, those on the distal segments with fewer and
shorter branches. The spurs on tarsi i and ii long and stout, the dorsal nude seta
on tarsus i prominent. A very long slender nude seta on tarsus iil.

One specimen, imperfect, from a bush-fowl (Megapodius duperreyi).

In the absence of both chelicerae and pseudostigmatic organs, the placing of
this species in the genus Neoschongastia is certainly speculative. Nevertheless the
scutal crest and scutal pitting resemble those of certain other species of this genus
here described, and the evidence of trifurcate palpal claws and double eyes is of
value (see discussion on NV. retrocincta). The presence of three setae on coxa iii
is analogous to the similar condition in N. retrocincta, and N. mutabilis Gater 1932.

Key to the Australian and New Guinea Species of Neoschéngastia.
(After Womersley.)

I. Scutum with a well-defined crest, often in four curves: the pseudostigmata in the
posterior walls of the crest. Anterior part of scutum with pits only, posterior
part with circular striations surrounding pits. Body striated anteriorly, pitted
DPOSTEDLOLLY ED OUSaLSCLAe OW TO mIOO 0 nan emcicielelcienie ns yeomansi group ...... 2

Scutum without definite crest, but with a line round the pseudostigmata; simply
pitted, without striations. Body either entirely striated or entirely pitted. Dorsal
setae 22 to 64 a

(Se)

9.

10.

Tat,

12:

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 91

Coxainiwathmagsincle: Sevapis asi wke pad ao08) Pepe et eh kA LM o lame) Ome ASE ua Siicua hn oteree eee eek 3
CoxalilimwithmmMoLregthanpOMnesSelae paige schore ches) can gieas otha oto cl divas ksieeeeehora eh eskei ars 4
No striations over posterior fourth of body, but pitting over this area. Setae in this

area arising from tubercles. Dorsal setae 100, arranged 2, 16. 8(10), 12(10),

HL OY GSP) te ILO RSH LION) Fede OEM Een Ges Gta ee aes sa Bre an aa OSes ean ee N. yeomansi, n. sp.
Striations weak over posterior sixth of body, with weak pitting over this area.
Dorsal setae 72, arranged 2, 14, 14, 10, 8, 8. 6, 6, 2, 2 ...... N. backhousei, n. sp.

Coxa iii with two setae. Posterior pitted area of body relatively small, bounded
anteriorly by a circle of tubercles devoid of setae; setae in this area arising from
tubercles. Dorsal setae 64, arranged 2, 8(10), 12(10), 6, 8(10), 8, 8(6), tubercles,

TY AY? Gh gso io! 6.0 EG Gan © Id OFOLO B CRERDE ORG EO Sees © GRE Ch CRA ICRU Dean CREE DAA rs Gi Nic emrets N. retrocincta. n. sp.
Coxa iii with three setae. No pitted area posteriorly on body. Dorsal setae 96,
BVPcAiMNeeGl 2, It, TO> Wee Os abet Wel eS ee oes een ooeouagodmooee ING WhiGls sal. Soy

Body pitted all over, not striated; strongly constricted at level of coxa iii; with two
semicircular caudal plates, each bearing three fine setae. Dorsal setae 28 to 32
Eo a oly DIG Ct LG 1s & DICTS CRORE DL Can Ota Drea aca ecaa aT RT RCT RaeE Scenes N. kallipygos, n. sp.
Body striated all over, not pitted; of usual shape, or only slightly constricted at

CODEWOTIUS:f INSr CAWLEY TOMES eoneahy eG peer oles eicths tone cnaupancetine Chuaatooncic ach enlace mola tte cece 6
iPSendoshematiclorcans more on wlesssslobulan se ae seco ace ne co ee ete eee ff
Pseudostisniaic croncansrd enuiitelyarclaneaicem te se aleieayauuelel-) tiseasi-t icy: tetany icteneien <teii eheee 11
Posterior margin of scutum convex, so that the postero-lateral setae are much in

VAN AM COO fees mall Oly) Oliaitume marcus aqoigsie euces ct Ca elisa eerie tue) lis) cs lagu suet ake ges sey Pieced) Sioeviet tous 8
Posterior margin of scutum straight or sinuate, so that the posterolateral setae are

Inareolhye te Aw Bill, WeeAChAMNeGS One Tes sooo >, oancceoonoucooubsouModudoOUDS 10

Pseudostigmatic organs a broad leaf-shape. Scutum roughly hexagonal; corners
angular; posterior margin strongly convex, its lateral thirds at about 45° from
the middle third. Pseudostigmata almost in line with the posterolateral setae.
Dorsal setae 64, 264 long, arranged 2, 14, 14, 10, 12, 8, 4 .... N. edwardsi, n. sp.

Pseudostigmatic organs truly globular. Scutum roughly trapezoidal, corners
LeaRwN OG Kee NE Foes co ecOis Wolo cecad eo /O eRe ONS ob Or ae tnuo ORR ERC ChGtO nace REE DACRE eae 3 aeRO rE eeny Fae Te 9

Posterior margin of scutum rounded. Dorsal setae 32, 504 long, arranged 2, 6,
GRO Mec ler ernie ahaa OAD 20, Rhee ut nay ABs Rented MS eh SEN es chaz a. oo Ye N. coorongense Hirst 1929

Posterior margin of scutum flattened medially. Dorsal setae approximately 64, 404
NOME, Bisco 2 O. (55 Was Aone HO me whe Oe Sid WOW Socunacspccodooeucuonds
“Su soksigsn Eps yer el aioe ots SRR MSR NGS ATER Pe gee ES eat REE AEE Po ee Se N. petrogale Womersley 1934

Anterior margin of scutum four-fifths of length of posterior margin. Dorsal setae

HN, BO louis, eremennncl Oy .85' 35 Bos Gy 5° coocdooc N. antipodianum Hirst 1929.
SOLE ARSON OS AS MONS AG WAGE Goldoctosook soucrucnsessubuuoa buono ooo debe d 12
SEuULUM Wheat, Cir ISS BIG Ione IS WHS sana soocsnveseuodeeusoobsoodcss bole 13

Posterior margin of scutum evenly convex. Pseudostigmata in line with postero-
lateral setae. Dorsal setae 32, 40m long, arranged 2, 8, 6, 6, 6, 2, 2 ..........
Se chose or cen coer cette Dh ceee id SEaP knee Ou: Gace bk oar Set at Nee eee te N. dasycerci Hirst 1929

Posterior margin of scutum flattened in its middle third. Pseudostigmata well in
front of posterolateral setae. Only six segments in mid- and hind-legs. Dorsal
SUE AS i© HO, AOM ome, eieceinecs! BO, GO, (2), B 4 B CB) scocec N. impar, n. sp.

Secutum three-fifths as long as wide; roughly hexagonal; posterior margin strongly
convex, bluntly pointed in the centre; anterior margin projecting in the centre.
Pseudostigmata closer to the anterolateral setae than to the posterolaterals.
Dorsalesetaes220 5 0mlone arrnan aed Gs ont eran | eee ee N. lorius, n. sp.

Scutum not more than half as long as wide; posterior margin concave. Dorsal
Seiae se Wye lone. arceimsedl 2, Bo O53, OC). BB), B seccoccdodcoanbuuceosomoncunn
Ce Raa TROT OMTIRO Sol or ATR | Got Oe Ne tiotaeh eBay gus Ronen ay! arn Uae N. westraliense Womersley 1934

Genus SCHONGASTIA Oudemans, 1910.
Entomol. Ber., iii, No. 54, 1910, 86.

SCHONGASTIA JAMESI, n. sp. Figs. 30, 33, 36.

Body a rounded oval, flattened anteriorly, widest at level of coxa iii. Striations

coarse and moderately strong; very fine pitting on scutum, maxilla and coxae,
and over the anterior third of the venter. Colour bright orange. L, 278u;
W, 2324. Maxillary setae single, fine, with six long branches on the convex side.
Chelicerae very long, straight, slender; a minute sharp dorsoapical barb, with ten

92 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

small saw-teeth in a row on the distal two-thirds. Ventral tooth represented by a
rounded thickening opposite the fourth and fifth teeth. Cheliceral sheaths long,
slender, reaching almost to the ends of the chelicerae, and bearing a short nude
curved seta on the base of each. Palpi rounded, slender, narrow at the base,
widest towards the distal end of ii. A long seta with long branches all over
on ii; a short seta with a few long branches on iii; on iv a long seta near the
base with six branches on the convex side, two short nude setae near the apex.
Palpal claw trifurcate, the dorsal and ventral elements long and sharp, with a
shorter, finer lateral element alongside them. Appendiculum with a rounded
point, bearing seven setae; one prominent, four finer, all with branches along one
side; two nude, the one stout, short and curved, the other fine and straight.
Scutum a rounded trapezoid. L, 50u; W, 854. Anterior margin sinuate; anterior
corners rounded; lateral margins slightly concave; posterior margin convex:
posterior corners rounded. Scutal setae 5, long, with long branches on all sides.
The three anterior in line; the PL in the posterior corners on the margins of the
scutum. The AM broken off short; AL, 37:54; PL, 474. Pseudostigmata just
behind the PL setae; 37u apart. Pseudostigmatic organs capitate, leaf-shaped,
with apparently no setules on the head. L, 37:54; stem, 12:54; head, 25u x 12-5u.
Ocular shield 7u from scutum. Eyes double, the anterior just in front of the PL
setae. Body setae approximately 68. (The dorsal details cannot be made out
easily, as the only available specimens are not well cleared and are all mounted
with the dorsum down. The figures are therefore imperfect.) Those of the first
dorsal row are stout, straight, blunt, with a few short spines along one side;
those of the first two ventral rows are slender, with long branches on one side;
the remainder, dorsal and ventral, have short branches on one side. Dorsum: setae
approximately 40, in rows as follows: 2, / 12, (8), (4), (6), 4, 2, 2. Venter: setae
28, in rows as follows: 2, 2, / 6, 4, 8, 4, 2. Legs relatively very long. i, 246u;
ii, 2094; iii, 2154. Coxal setae single, long, with many branches on the convex
side. The leg setae similar, but those on the distal segments have fewer branches,
those of iii having shorter and still fewer branches. The bases of the sixth
segments are markedly constricted, their distal portions markedly expanded.
All tarsi tapering, the third very long. A fine spur on tarsus i; that on ii short
and blunt; a fine nude seta, not at all prominent, on iii.

Two specimens from a bush-fowl (Megapodius duperreyi); one from a
bandicoot (Hchymipera cockerelli).

SCHONGASTIA BLESTOWEI, n. sp. Figs. 31, 34, 37.

Body a short rounded oval, widest at level of coxa iii. Striations moderately
coarse, strong and very wavy; pitting on scutum, maxilla and coxae. Colour
dull brownish-orange. Newly hatched, L, 1674; W, 1674; average, 2034 x 168u;
largest seen, 223u « 2074. Maxillary setae single, short, stout, with four long
branches on the convex side. Maxilla typically square. Chelicerae very long,
straight, slender, with sharp points. A minute dorso-apical barb and a row
of twelve denticles along the distal three-fifths. Ventral tooth apparently missing.
Cheliceral sheaths slender, as long as the chelicerae, with a long nude seta on
the base of each. Palpi rounded, projecting boldly forward. A long seta with
a few fine branches on the convex side on ii; a similar seta, but shorter on iii;
on iv near the base a short seta with a very few fine branches on the convex
side, near the apex two nude setae, one very short and stout. Palpal claw
trifurcate, the ventral element much the longest and stoutest, the lateral very
short and fine, almost vestigial. Appendiculum rounded, with six setae; one

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 93

stout with a few stout branches, three finer with short fine branches, and two
nude, one of them short, sharp and strongly curved. Scutum rounded, straight
anteriorly. bl, 62:54; W, 94u. Crest a sinuate overhanging ledge, two-thirds of
the way back; the posterior portion of the scutum at a much lower level than

Figs. 30-40.—30. Composite dorsal and ventral diagram of Schéngastia jamesi, n. sp.
31. Same of S. blestowei, n. sp.; 32. Walchia morobensis, n. sp.; 33. Dorsal scutum of
S. jamesi; 34. Same of S. blestowei; 35. Leewwenhoekia aiustraliense Hirst; 36. Cheliceral
fang of S. jamesi; 37. Same of S. blestowei; 38. Same of L. australiense; 39. Same of W.
morobeinsis; 40. Composite dorsal and ventral diagram of L. australiense.

the anterior. Crest very faintly marked in some specimens. Anterior margin
straight; anterior corners angular, projecting very slightly forward; lateral
margins slightly convex; posterior margin strongly convex, with a smooth
indentation in the middle; posterior corners about two-thirds of the way back,
angular, projecting laterally. Scutal setae 5, the AM 37:5u, stouter than the
others, with short branches on all sides, set well back from the anterior margin,
behind the AL; the AL 75u, slender, with long branches on all sides, well
forward in the anterior corners; the PL 50yu, slender, with branches on one side
only, in the posterior corners. Pseudostigmata half-way back, directed almost
horizontally, lying under the overhang of the crest, just anterior to the PL setae;
25u apart. Pseudostigmatic organs capitate, racquet-shaped, the heads covered
with fine short setules. LL, 374; stem, 12u; head, 254 x 154. Ocular shield
applied to the scutum from well in front of the pseudostigmata to behind the
PL setae. Eyes single, small, the posterior missing; just anterior to the pseudo-
stigmata, Body setae 108, of three forms: those of the last two rows of both

94 TROMBIDIID LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA,

dorsum and venter are short, stout, curved, with short spines along the convex
side; the remainder of the dorsum stout, with closely-set branches on the convex
side; the remainder of the venter slender, with a few branches on the convex
side. Dorsum: setae 64, in rows as follows: 2, 10, 8, 10, 8(10), 10(8), / 8, 8.
Row eight is on the posterior margin, often more ventral than dorsal. Venter:
setae 44, in rows as follows: 2, 2, 10(8), 8(10), 6, 6, / 6, 4. Row six is at the
level of the anus. Legs relatively very long; i, 270u; ii, 209u: iii, 250u. Leg
setae slender, with a few fine branches on the convex side. Coxal setae single.
Sixth segments not unduly constricted or expanded. Tarsi tapering. A short
stout spur on tarsus i, the dorsal nude seta prominent, set on a tubercle. The
spur on tarsus ii short, finer and sharper. A very fine nude seta on tarsus ili,
often broken.

Fifteen specimens collected from two men near the Suein River, Sepik District;
eight specimens from abandoned colonies in the ears of two bush-fowl (Megapodius
duperreyi) from the Bulolo River basin, Morobe District; six specimens from a
man at Bulolo.

There is a strong resemblance between this species and SNS. vandersandei
Oudemans, 1905. The differences are as follows:

S. vandersandei S. blestowei
Dorsal setae 50. 64.
Ventral setae 42. 44,
Dorsal setae arranged:
As UM. WO, a, ws 3s 2p NO OS UO, SCG), ClO. G;
2 palpal claws. on
Maxillary setae plain. With 4 long branches.

Key to the New Guinea Species of Schongastia.
(Constructed by Mr. H. Womersley.)

Ss Dorsalesetaewm Ovemtiamy D0) cies cisieus: cretion sl cy cpttevroichecet tous sy silensmetiecter terns) once) ayrcliey eisai isatverteve oie teeter os (ear 2

Dorsal setae 40, arranged 2, 12, (8), (4), (6), 4, 2, 2. 50u long .... S. jamesi, n. sp.
2. Dorsal setae 52, arranged 2, 10, 10, 10, 10, 8(10), 2(10). Ventral setae 42. Maxillary
setae plain. Palpal claw bifurcate .......... S. vandersandei Oudemans 1905

Dorsal setae 64, arranged 2, 10, 8, 10, 8(10), 10(8), 8, 8. 40 long. Ventral setae 44.
Maxillary setae with four long branches. Palpal claw trifurcate ..............
Bia o 19.0 CMS I RT SIS Ne ana areas LR ves a as Be lt S. blestowei, n. sp.

Genus WALcHIA Ewing.
Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxx, 1931, 10.

WALCHIA MOROBENSIS, Nn. sp. Figs. 32, 39.

Body a broad oval, widest midway, the anterior fourth with a gradual
straight taper to a rounded point. Irregular folds radiating in all directions
from behind the pseudostigmata. No striations; pitting all over, not specially
marked on scutum, maxilla or coxae. Cephalothorax completely hidden below
the anterior point of the body. Colour a dirty cream. lL, 4254; W, 310u; largest
seen, 5354 * 38754. Maxillary setae single, long, fine, curved, with long fine
branches on the convex side. Chelicerae short, stout, almost straight, tapering
very sharply. Dorso-apical tooth single, small, sharp. Ventral tooth a small
swelling behind a shallow notch. Cheliceral sheaths almost as long as the
chelicerae, and relatively stout. Palpi small, strongly curved, ii angular. A long
nude seta on ii; a similar one on iii; on iv two short nude setae and a longer
one with a few fine short branches. Palpal claw bifureate, the two elements
curved, very long and slender, the ventral slightly longer and stouter than
the dorsal. Appendiculum small, rounded, with five setae; two long and stout,

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 95

with a few fine branches; two long and very fine, with a tew fine short branches;
and one short, nude, stout and pointed. Scutum not distinguishable in these
specimens. Pseudostigmata 53u back from the anterior margin of the body
(74u in the largest specimen) and 25 apart (this figure does not vary). An
oblique curved ridge lies around the anterior and medial aspects of each
pseudostigma. Scutal setae 4: a pair 14u in front of the pseudostigmata, 18u
long, curved, with two or three fine branches; and a pair 19u behind the pseudo-
stigmata, 30u long, curved, with five or six long fine branches. Pseudostigmatic
organs capitate, leaf-shaped, the head covered with setules. lL, 25u; stem, 6y;
head, 19u x llw. Ocular shield apparently missing. Eyes single, very indistinct
except in freshly-killed specimens; about 75u lateral to and 30u behind the corres-
ponding pseudostigma. Body setae 58, those of the dorsum and the first two rows
of the venter long, fine, with six to eight long fine branches on the convex side;
the remainder of the venter shorter, with fewer branches. Dorsum: setae 26, in
rows as follows: 2, 6, 6, 6, 4, 2. Venter: setae 32, in rows as follows: 2, 2, 8, 6, 6, 6, 2.
Row five is level with the anus. Legs relatively very short; i, 1254; ii, 111; iii,
165u. Only six segments in legs ii and iii. Leg setae long, fine, with a few fine
branches along the convex side. Coxal setae single. The sixth segment of i and
the fifth of ii short and stout; the fifth of iii is of typical shape. Tarsi bluntly
tapered, short. The dorsal nude seta on tarsus i prominent, the spur very long,
stout and curved; the spur on ii shorter but stouter. No prominent nude seta
on iii. On each tarsus two or three setae with only two fine terminal branches.

Four specimens from two Brown’s rats (Rattus browni); many from the
Brown bush-rat (Rattus ringens).

Genus LEEUWENHOEKIA Oudemans, 1911.
*s Gravenhage Ber. Ned. Ent. Ver., iii, 1911, 138.

LEEUWENHOEKIA AUSTRALIENSE Hirst. Figs. 35, 38, 40.
Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. Hyg., xix, 1925, 150.
A single specimen of this species, lacking the pseudostigmatic organs, was
taken at Bulolo from a Cassowary (Casuarius casuarius). I am indebted to
Mr. H. Womersley for its identification.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS.

My very sincere thanks are due to many people, to the Directors and
Managers of Bulolo Gold Dredging, Limited, for the encouragement they have
given me, and the excellent facilities they have provided for me to undertake
research work; to the many. members of the staff of the Company, in particular
Mr. G. M. Rio, who assisted me in obtaining specimens of all kinds; to Mr. A. T.
Simmons, my Senior Assistant, whose considerable photographic knowledge and
skill were always at my disposal; to Professor Harvey Sutton, Director of the
Sydney School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, and to Mr. K. J. Clinton
of his staff, who searched out references for me and sent me negatives of them;
to Mr. BE. Le G. Troughton and Mr. J. R. Kinghorn of the Australian Museum, and
Mr. Tom Iredale, who identified mammal and bird hosts for me; to Dr. C. T.
Backhouse, of the New Guinea Public Health Department, who has advised me
and offered suggestions; to Mr. F. H. Taylor, School of Public Health and Tropical
Medicine, University of Sydney, and Mr. H. Womersley, South Australian Museum,
without whose assistance this paper would never have been completed.

96 TROMBIDILD LARVAE IN NEW GUINEA.

References.
bwinc, H. E., 1929.—A Manual of External Parasites. London.
FANTHAM, H. B., STEPHENS, J. W. W., and THEOBALD, F. V., 1916.—The Animal Parasites
of Man. London. Page 485.
GATER, B. A. R., 1932.—Parasitology, xxiv, p. 143.
GUNTHER, C. #. M., 1957.—Lab. J. Australasia. i, 4, p. 106.
—————,, 1958.—Med. J. Australia, ii, 6, p. 202.
Hirst, S., 1920.—Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. Ilyg., Xix.
1929.—Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (10), iii, p. 564.
Patton. W. S., 1931.—Insects, Ticks, Mites and Venomous Animals. II. Croydon.
Page 331.
PATTON, W. S., and Evans. A. M., 1929.—Insects, Ticks, Mites and Venomous Animals.
I. Croydon.
SAMBON, L. W., 1927.—Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (9), xx, p. 157.
WARBURTON, C., 1928.—Parasitology. xx, p. 228.
WoOMERSLEY, H., 19536.—Records S. Aust. Museum, v, 2 ps 79s
————, 1936a.—Jowm. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., xl, p. 112.
————,, 1937.— Records S. Aust. Museum, vi, 1, p. 75.

97

THE DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII.

FAMILY OTITIDAE (ORTALIDAE).

By JoHN R. Mattocnu, Arlington, Va.
(Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8.)

(Plates iv—v.)
[Read 26th April, 1939.]

This family is in many respects similar to the Trypetidae, the only almost
invariably dependable character for its separation therefrom consisting of the
lack of incurved anterior orbital bristles on the frons. The course of the subcostal
vein at its apex is also usually distinctive, the vein in the Otitidae normally
gradually approaching the costa and connecting with it at an acute angle, while
in the Trypetidae the vein makes an abrupt angular bend forward close to its apex
and is usually faint beyond the angle. All the New Guinea Otitidae lack the
presutural bristle.

There have been many species recorded from New Guinea and adjacent
islands, as the peculiar forms and distinctive colour markings of most of them
readily attract collectors. In the Australian region the family is represented
almost exclusively by the subfamily Platystominae, though some species of almost
cosmopolitan occurrence have been brought in, probably by commerce.

The late Dr. F. Hendel published many papers on the family, the most
interesting of them, from an Australian point of view, being that on the
Platystominae. This is the predominant subfamily in the Indo-Australian region,
more than half of the approximately 500 species occurring in the region, and in
1914 only 45 in North and South America.

I present herein a key to the New Quinea and Australian genera of
Platystominae based upon materials available to me and to some extent upon
data obtained from Hendel’s paper when the genus or species is not available.

In 1924 Enderlein published a paper in which he erected several new
genera and described some new species from this region. I have incorporated his
work herein.

Material collected in Papua and Dutch New Guinea by Miss L. HE. Cheesman
has been included in this paper for geographical reasons, thus rendering the
paper more valuable.

I have to thank the British Museum (Nat. Hist.) authorities for photographs
of the wings of the type-specimens of the species in their material, and Mr.
Frank H. Taylor for the other photographs of wings when the types belong to
the School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, University of Sydney.

Subfamily ULIpIINnaer.

In this collection there is but one species of this subfamily. This is an almost
cosmopolitan species which occurs in adjoining islands and Australia.

J

98 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

PSEUDEUXESTA Hendel. (Gen. Ins., Fasc. 106, 1910, 30.)
PSEUDEUXESTA PRIMA Osten-Sacken.

Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genov., xvi, 1881, 470 (Huxesta) —EHucxesta semi-
fasciata Malloch, Insects of Samoa, pt. 6, Diptera, fase. 5, 1930, 216.

Originally described from Celebes and known from many other localities,
including Hawaii.

There is a single specimen in the collection from Wewak, New Guinea (F. H.
Taylor).

Subfamily PLATYSTOMINAE.

The genus name Platystoma is preoccupied in Mollusca, but up to the present
no writer on the group has proposed a new name for the genus.

The group segregated here may be distinguished from others in the family
by the presence of short stiff setulae on the upper surface of the first vein, usually
extending from near the humeral cross-vein to its apex, the lack of the propleural
bristle, and the presence of at most three bristles between the suture and the
anterior lateral angle of the scutellum, i.e., one supra-alar and two postalars.
Hendel has attempted to separate the group from the Pyrgotidae by the shorter
basal two antennal segments and the presence of ocelli, but these characters do
not invariably apply, as some Pyrgotidae have ocelli, and short basal segments to
the antennae.

Key to the Genera.

1. Eyes quite densely haired; arista long haired; frons with two pairs of fronto-
orbital bristles; fifth wing-vein with stiff setulae along the entire extent of the

posterniorebasalecellon upper VSuULrace wees ices eel oieie ea aeiieiee inicio 2

Byes not distinctly haired; other characters not as above in toto .............. 3

2. Face below antennal foveae with two rounded or oval elevations .. Lasioxiria Hendel
Hace pwithoutssuch) elevationsig-s. -yonclorixeci sick susie oe cl kepentencat e Dasyortalis Hendel
Allefemora withssomevshone StOumvenLLal sSpINCS us icwelelesioel sues cei siekmieleieueneue eens 3a

At most one pair of femora with short stout ventral spines ................... 3b
3a. All femora with anteroventral and posteroventral spines; an extra cross-vein between
second and third veins; arista subnude (Samoa) ......... Apactoneura Malloch

Only mid and hind femora with biseriate ventral spines, the fore femora with
spines on anteroventral surface only; venation normal; arista long-haired

GSU Oa) ates ice ss ostace sesrausauay otis hershevenoverclisnel ace vedexsitonsiiens poy suet wen siteeeyroue Xenognathus Malloch

3b. Suprasquamal ridge with erect hairs near posterior extremity; stem vein of the
wing bare at base above; lower squama about twice as large as upper; no
fronto-orbital bristles on frons; arista bare or almost so (Australia) ......

Josgo odo OU modo Om n oS dor Oe ooo) Koodo natn sano nb oO ac Duomyia Walker
Suprasquamal ridge bare, or if haired then the stem vein of the wing is haired above

at bases onthe oLrher ‘characters are not allsasmapOve, cree ci cleicne crercncepelenencle t

4. Mesopleura, sternopleura and pteropleura with numerous short stout bristles .....
OTs OTL 019 GRO O Oca HERG CeOe Con OHO Ceo cise et Oleadby os4 Go to ho rnors cig biota Pseudocleitamia, n. gen.

The above sclerites of pleura without short stout bristles .................... 44a

4a. Elongate slender species, the abdomen slim, not widened at base or at middle and
usually quite noticeably laterally compressed; arista never long haired, if
noticeably haired at base then bare beyond middle, or extremely long and with

dense short white hairs on entire extent that give it the appearance of being
thickened; antennal foveae usually long and distinct; sternopleural bristle
always lacking; fourth wing-vein never setulose above along posterior basal

CEL reratteteresseterenetencce [scahets ae terete to) aieen tia ee Cree eee ona ewe aT aeMONe Love cette latevever on ehenetenenoneheretehs 5
Stouter species, the thorax sometimes much wider than long, the abdomen either
wide at base or centrally, never laterally compressed, if rather slender species

the arista is haired to apex; fourth wing-vein sometimes setulose in part

PMIGN GoD OOODOOMNCOUUUD.6 Oot to 0 Ott odo0 So cpennOOdunbad con dGos0 Dc ebo0GOOS 14
5. Third antennal segment with quite dense decumbent stiff black hairs; face more or
less’ produced’ above, recedine below Sa... sere cee sie renee oe Conicipithea Hendel

Third antennal segment not stiff haired; face not receding below ............... 6

10.

Nil,

12.

13.

13a.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 99

Antennae and aristae exceptionally long, the former longer than the face, the aristae
still longer and with a thickened appearance because of the presence of dense

short white hairs; humeral bristle lacking ................0c02-2-ecseeeeeee 7
Antennae usually not longer than the face, the aristae shorter and never with
dense short white hairs; humeral bristle present or lacking ................ 8

Fourth wing-vein making a wide shallow dip into the discal cell from inner to outer
cross-vein and angularly bent up just beyond that vein; cross-veins rather widely
SVE NEE NIEX|. Go Gio'o 6 Ox GO Ol DIDioro ia Charen G DIGIcROlO Et DOL OATIG Y Oee Cahora Philocompus Osten-Sacken

Fourth wing-vein not dipped down into discal cell from inner to outer cross-vein,
and not angularly bent upward just beyond outer cross-vein; cross-veins quite
closely placed, sometimes interstitial ................. Antineura Osten-Sacken

First posterior cell of the wing quite noticeably narrowed at apex, the fourth vein
either sloping forward from outer cross-vein or with its apex curved appreciably

SHOIOWEN COL orb Co Grou0 O/C COND DID DITO Oe DID LOIRE ROD OOO CREED ORG, out Cod Cie OfOnG EO DRONDSO, Dra (hen aaa Sr cre emeactotD 9
First posterior cell of the wing not narrowed at apex, the fourth vein either
straight or with its apex slightly downwardly sloped ...................+-.- 13

Frons deeply or rather closely pitted or punctured; parafacials wrinkled above;
facial carina prominent, in profile exposed at least as widely as parafacial,
rounded on dorsum; two fine pairs of fronto-orbital bristles generally visible
A Guat Uc eh POSE COON OFTEN Oc SICRE ERROR Cuca RCC NCPC RSES ch) ce cma as ee salen ae Rhytidortalis Hendel

Frons not distinctly punctured nor the parafacials wrinkled above, the facial carina
TOE Foporopaabaverae shal FoPNOMVKs) GHG ooigdmote oS poems oon ono MO Ob CMON oO cis an end Cob e.coG 10

Mesonotum as wide as long; frontal orbits with two pairs of bristles; mouth opening
very large, male with a beard of long downwardly-directed bristles on posterior
DOGCLON MOLI OWASW ys. crete tar tetas: opiates ie tairstiavetad ch ciret abe FU Sialis: /oufeieh wetgatie, © Pogonortalis Hendel

Mesonotum longer than wide; frons with at most one pair of orbital bristles .... 11

Penultimate section of fourth wing-vein about one-fifth as long as ultimate and
only as long as the outer cross-vein, the latter as long as ultimate section of

fit Vein ErOnst wrinkles. tyeaeiedy sich tie die selielchet oie) sade kl. Microepicausta Hendel
Penultimate section of fourth wing-vein longer, the outer cross-vein much nearer
to the apex of fifth vein and tip of wing than in the above; frons smooth .... 12

Inner cross-vein of the wing oblique, upper extremity much nearer to the base of
wing than the lower; face with some fine short hairs in centre ..............
ata alatnet anata tetas totcrattienedetakstare te ty ratevanase bene ler heeena eho tame a medete eS Plagiostenopterina Hendel

Inner cross-vein of the wing erect or almost so; face bare in centre ...........
BOR a i his aay, tr Gethin ten Ne nS a erin t a aan nN ERA LAL AN eS Elassogaster Bigot

IDTAOHANS Vee TAyyO) TVET Gry ChoomeENl oN 4onoooucdocuadudnoobununnoobacouOUODS 13a

Frons with but one pair of orbital bristles ................. Pseudepicausta Hendel

Inner cross-vein of wing more than one-third from apex of discal cell ...........
aera aWical ebrartes anerate satana corSeohe ele teurene tlota tata atts toc cten a ate aie ie Re eran Scotinosoma Loew

Inner cross-vein of wing not more than one-fifth from apex of discal cell ........
SE eR ISON SHR a ECan TaCRCR csr ec ON SRS COT IRE EAR OPEC IRENE RENEE fiir Euxestomoea Hendel

Sternopleura with a strong upper marginal bristle .....................-++-e0. 15

Sternopleura without a well-developed bristle ..................... 00. ee ee neee 16

First posterior cell of the wing narrowed at apex; second vein nearer to third than
to costa; head higher than wide in front (Australia) ............. Celetor Loew

First posterior cell of the wing not noticeably narrowed at apex; second vein nearer
to costa than to third vein; head seen from in front as wide as or wider than

TOUTES GT went Sich Grek TORCH OIEE O ON CRON BSC De SOG CHEST CeO ELERORG ENOL O ona Ree Scholastes Loew
Mid femur much stouter and distinctly longer than the hind one, with two series
Of Shortestnonaventrallibristle sii cus stave crashes cake ceusee) ieee vale ei s/ oy susuar si sues) buss sucaere 17
Mid femur not thicker nor longer than the other pairs, if slightly stouter then with
at most finenventraly bristles ace crscueds oe ciao cicus cath choustslees oc: otece wosveyede onsys saleersiteue 18

Antennal bases close together, separated by less than the width of the third antennal
segment; discal cell of the wing much narrower at base than at apex ......
POOR Or Hck By. OLDER IDO LECT or CLIONSTG GORATH DNCEO HE OR CECE eT OREO Brea Walker

Antennal bases widely separated, distance between them exceeding length of third
antennal segment; discal cell of the wing almost as wide at base as at apex ....

Mo Ae SEER a HAE Pb arete oes eee aroihat aesbavate awerte Si55s Mesoctenia Enderlein
Hind femur much stouter than the other pairs and armed below with short stout
black bristles or spines (Pacific Islands, Fiji, Samoa) .. Pseudorichardia Hendel

All femora about equally thick, hind pair without stout ventral spines ........ 19

100

21.

22a.

23.

bo
or

to
~

28.

29.

be

DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

Cross-veins of the wing quite close together, the penultimate section of fourth vein
not one-fifth as long as the antepenultimate one ..............-.0.0e000- 20
Cross-veins of the wing not exceptionally close together, the penultimate section of
fourth vein not less than one-third as long as the antepenultimate one .... 23
Frons with two pairs of strong orbital bristles; arista with very short hairs; fifth
abdominal tergite in the male not long-bristled at apex .... Huxestomoea Hendel
Frons without or with but one pair of orbital bristles except in Loriomyia; arista
rather long haired; fifth abdominal tergite of the male long-bristled at apex;
SCUAMNACS. "SINAT Gee etetevet cto rctone ns lcversi ciety) rersten ol tele ot tts) Aetonstonth a dictehe skciel eranalceie o)aretenet ebsites 21
The cross-vein closing the anal cell angled below middle, broken, the cell at apex
below forming a short point; two pairs of fronto-orbital bristles .............
Koo noado dO OUUC Oo UO GSC ODOD Gnd OOO OUOUSIOOb US ago Doo lOb aS Loriomyia Kertész
The cross-vein closing the anal cell rather angularly curved outward at middle,
the celll note pointed MDeloOws Qtr AOR ts cre ahetet lever ay ova) ot et olfol clot siclcn al olere arenctene ete ey = cls) te 22
Second wing-vein usually much bent forward at apex, unusually close to first near
costa, sometimes almost fused with it, its tip much closer to that of first than
to tip of third in costa; head of male frequently widened, but never with

Aeon ENE AE JooemaudoboudbudocuucobododuloUs oud obaboud ooo dUadoouE 22a
Second and first wing-veins never approaching each other apically; male with the
EVESTONMBVATIAD LY MIONS SCALES Were) chetote) euereucl sieiel creletoletenenerenenatersieeiey aie Laglaisia Bigot
Second wing-vein much closer to third than to first on apical section of latter; one
pair of strong orbital bristles present ...............-0000- Cleitamia Macquart
Second wing-vein at least as close to first as to third on apical section of former;
THO) Cyd ohizvl [HOKU fs coooocucosgucc ooo UCC ObUENUOUGQOON Cleitamoides, n. gen.

Anal cell closed by an angulate cross-vein, produced into a distinct, sometimes
elongate, point or lobe at lower apical angle; frons with only the outer verticals

pLesentianagdTonewpairsOfsOLEDILAlSee ere ieietaterel 1 sietek kel ede) otetel Neosophira Hendel*
Anal cell closed by a straight or slightly curved cross-vein at apex, not produced
into aepointuor lobe at lower apicalvangele =. semi eiaer-iisieicle octane cra eieieie eee 24

Extremely short stout species, the thorax broader than long, the mesopleura well
exposed when seen from above, the tergites of basal half of abdomen in female
usually more or less telescoped so that the abdomen is usually not longer than
wide excluding the ovipositor; first posterior cell of the wing almost invariably
RIN! CrP TAlWGl ENE BYOES ooocacbacdanc0duD Dodou ad DODO ya DDDD00NDS 25

More elongate species, both the thorax and abdomen longer than wide, the segments
of the latter not noticeably telescoped; first posterior cell of wing usually
MArrowed , AVICALLY sci cicecwlsse 6 sae casyaekePoyeh es Beet oberons che yelenerbelorsucreutyeloved yeionereieucispamere 30

Posterior basal cell of the wing longer and larger than the discal cell; wings more
or less folded lengthwise and crosswise centrally, usually held close against the

abaomenkands depressed: At aAplCeSereererelevorel ane clare scheuciel ciel a cucienctouchel storceb Renoir =netatele 26
Posterior basal cell of the wing shorter and smaller than the discal cell; wings not
GURKHA ia silo) Vo eye We eeiedio clacidinGiag Modnidicia Cominco Clinical G06 Gabo coc b 6.006 o 27

Antennal bases rather widely separated; fourth wing-vein ending in the wing-tip;
vein closing the anal cell sloping outward posteriorly so that the cell is rather
ACULELYBVOINTEAEDELOW ac (LDe Xena reuoieie cieicie cierenelcneicneians Asyntona Osten-Sacken

Antennal bases closer together; fourth wing-vein ending below wing-tip; vein closing
anal cell erect or sloping forward anteriorly, the cell transverse at apex ......
“SODESODOODODUO DOO OOOO DOO COU SOCEIU SOO ODOC DD OD ODOM dOD NS Naupoda Osten-Sacken

Frons with a pair of strong orbital and two vertical bristles; antennae short, inserted
at middle of eyes in profile; arista plumose; ultimate section of fourth vein

SlPHthyaCurvenouDwWaLd cyaceisccreccie ertekeie ste rere ner en tater a oreo Chaetorivellia de Meijere
Frons without distinct orbital bristles; antennae inserted below middle of eyes in
profile; ultimate section of fourth vein not bent upward ................... 28
Bases of antennae close together; discal cell of the wing much narrower at base
than atvapesrr et ee see ME oaks ee ree <tr e re are, Senet aa ote Pani | arcu eae een tele 29
Bases of antennae well separated; discal cell of wing nearly as wide at base as at
BPSK ie tors tetera tets hata la ete tatete tela rete berate ole ee 'a he teresa ve teusteks Mencecwen seein Zygaenula Doleschall

Base of stem vein of the wing haired above; clypeus not tumid at lateral angles ....
St dhe abe PRE IE RTM. Toe ae 8 OSE. Re RR DE re Pterogenia Bigot
Base of stem vein of the wing bare above; clypeus tumid at each lateral angle ....
ANE 2 LE He sich he tatahe oh aiehe toh aval,cfeved ns MieEa ters, Wake ravens aNetebalagslisuene) ce bewchehohe teeuette Neohemigaster, n.n.

* Hendel included this genus in his key of genera of the Platystominae, but it will
dealt with in a subsequent paper, of this series, on the family Trypetidae.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 101

30. Posterior basal cell of the wing four-fifths as long as the discal cell; fourth vein as
in Rivellia, distinctly dipped down before inner cross-vein; frons with two pairs

OLPOLDIGAIADHISTIES Ae tle Sis ole sis es reek aise Mulelotederata ctstaverte + Loxoneuroides Hendel
Posterior basal cell of the wing about half as long as discal cell ................ 31

81. Fourth wing-vein distinctly dipped down into discal cell just before inner cross-vein ;
frons with two pairs of orbital bristles ........... Rivellia Robineau-Desvoidy

Fourth wing-vein not noticeably dipped down in front of inner cross-vein ...... 32

32. Squamae small; arista moderately long haired on entire length; base of R bare
DDOV CHS ee ety oekene ea) coeheun: ste TARR OSE. ROG be ote 2S oh eta eat 33
Squamae large, the lower one exceptionally so; if the eyes are protruded laterally

the abdomen is not petiolate at the base ........0.....0..00020c cc ceevccees 34

33. Eyes. protruded laterally; abdomen pedunculated; first posterior cell of wing
narrowed to apex; wing with or without a dark costal border ............

ABC COO COO 0 60 DOOD COO 0 EO Oe Ol crokd OE ote c DRE picid. OG era een Ss oes 6 Achiosoma Hendel

Eyes not protruded laterally ; abdomen elongate-ovate, not pedunculate; first posterior
cell of wing not narrowed apically; wing dark brown, with many small hyaline

SOUS hol. WAS US +p ols Sold Bla CA ne oto Rind Gar co moo Ole Bice Euthyplatystoma Hendel

34. Base of the radial, or stem, vein of the wing without setulose hairs or bristles
AD ON, CURT MRED HERR Resa Co i ol case cso! Siena) SUM eT icles: eure cou amel apenisriouis = Vsl/eheyen ektabe aus rehcencr Sule: enattenenivasiteusns 35

Base of the stem vein of the wing with stiff hairs or bristles above ............. 38

35. Eyes of male, and to a lesser extent those of female, protruded laterally, the head
distinctlyawidersthanmthemthonax aoeiietsii) cielo clereehele oie ieyenclener ok Achias Fabricius

Eyes in neither sex at all protruded laterally, the head not distinctly wider than
LEO ee Vase b-<) SS oo eeio's u Gola 0d 6 CO CHONG SEO IER CRO GER GIS) Boo Crone TC er CnGMa Oey Ce Orono iene Meno Cen er ao ner an 36

36. Fore femur with several strong ventral bristles ........... Holocnemia Enderlein
Kore femur without strong ventral bristles ................2056ss0cce eres ores 37

37. Scuteilum with two stout pointed thorns at apex ................. Ceratopelta Bigot
Scutellum with two or more normal apical bristles ........ Lamprogaster Macquart

38. Fore femur with numerous short stout bristles on the central portion of the postero-
dorsal surface that are biseriate or triseriate centrally; antennae widely
separated at bases, the flat facial carina at this point about half as wide as
LOM SNe tev CREO Nee cuca sce S erienrensnek en encbiod=: cesners neu al oui ciereliel evetetismeys dapehcee Notospila Osten-Sacken

Fore femur with usually a single postero-dorsal series of longer bristles; antennae
narrowly separated at bases, the carina at this point not nearly half as wide
AS Pa ON Siaal anv Cite Kameeucy recency oxoiletel ehsce sn auecevekecemousiteliet shales omen sister ee Huprosopia Macquart

N.B.—I have included several genera in the above key that do not belong in
the New Guinea list. One or two of these are found in Australia, and are so marked
in the key, and they have been dealt with by me in one or more of my papers
on the Diptera of Australia that have appeared in these PrROocEEDINGS. Two
other genera were described by me from Samoa and, with the Australian genera,
may be expected to occur in New Guinea. In a few other cases I have included
genera that do not occur in New Guinea because I wanted to make clear their
distinguishing characters or because the genus is new. Two concepts, Ceratopelta
Bigot and Notospila Osten-Sacken, are also included, though I doubt their claim
to generic status and include the first in my treatment of Lamprogaster, Notospila
being considered merely a subgenus of Huprosopia.

LASIOXxIRIA Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 28.
This is the only genus of Hendel’s “Trapherina” in the New Guinea region.
It is unknown to me and the description and figures suggest a close relationship
with Dasyortalis Hendel, if not their synonymy.

LASIOXIRIA HIRSUTA Hendel.
Op. cit., viii, 1914, 28.
Described from a male from Sattelberg, Huon Gulf, New Guinea. The only
structural details available are shown in Hendel’s figures; the description consists
of merely colour characters.

102 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

DASYORTALIS Hendel.

Dasiortalis Hendel, in de Meijere, Nov. Guin., ix, livr. 3, 1913, 378; Abhandl.
Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 277.

This genus is distinguished from its allies by the presence of dense short
erect hairs on the eyes, the two pairs of fronto-orbital bristles, lack of short hairs
on the upper surface of the stem vein of the wing at its base, the presence of
setulae on the fifth vein along the extent of the posterior basal cell above, and in
having the aristae long-haired.

All the known species occur in New Guinea.

Key to the Species.

1. The dark apical costal streak on the wing is distinctly separated by a hyaline
interval from the anterior outer extremity of the black fascia over the outer
cross-vein; anal cell almost entirely hyaline; frontal and dorsal thoracic bristles
and hairs fulvous-yellow in male, usually all these bristles and most of the dorsal
hairs black in the female; fore femora ‘normal in male’... ..:.......--...-

SER eer crlc cies it tntn Goad an Caen eo ainr et can ORICON me GRATER Otten ee complens (Walker) .... 2
The dark apical costal streak on the wing connected with the anterior outer extremity
OL the Dlackstascial over the! OULEr CrOSS=VielMiieie sie cleere suerte neler eter eleuciien mene arere 4

2. The short dark linear streak on the costa at apex of the first vein not connected
with the broad black fascia over the inner cross-vein, stopping at second vein;
anal cell slightly browned below; no hyaline spot just beyond apex of anal
cell; the yellow margin on upper edge of mesopleura linear ................
Ro OE OIE Bo OCR DERI DIE RO DIO paca Chgicact arcu cms kc cows complens var. separata, n. var.

The short dark linear streak on the costa at apex of the first vein connected with
the anterior edge of the broad black fascia over the inner cross-vein at third
vein; anal cell browned at apex and with the usual brown line along upper

edses Not browned alone! JOWer IMAGER ar ele laicieicienelenel celts: cichiorclovenel eee! eh=l-}isllatchslionel sie 3
3. Mesopleura with a very narrow yellow line on upper edge; a hyaline spot just
lywio Hoes Of Ehren GMP GeaoonodacuseoUadcoudD DUOMO OO OE complens (Walker)

Mesopleura with a broad yellow streak on upper edge that is about half as wide as
long; no hyaline spot just beyond apex of anal cell :-.2.. 2. 2c 23... ae

Adin did aC Ud icld 81a 0 SO Ostue TEU Homene Chasen 6 Q;0cOuEy OnG-0) Buhay, 6°G0 10-0 complens var. fasciata Curran

4. The short brown streak on the costa at apex of first vein connected with the outer
edge of the broad black fascia over the inner cross-vein; seen from in front

the head of the male is as high as wide, rounded in aspect, with the genae not
angulate; tarsi entirely whitish-yellow .........-........ angustifrons Hendel

The short brown streak at apex of the first vein not connected with the outer edge

of the broad black fascia over the inner cross-vein; apices of tarsi dark .... 5

5. The two basal cells of the wing brown, with a hyaline spot near their apices; male
with a clump of downwardly-directed bristles on the genae .... barbata Hendel

Both basal cells of the wing brown; male without genal group of bristles, but the
eenacwaneulariyssproduCed! Faken eies erate sere tee ae cts eae oe enene goniceps Hendel

DASYORTALIS COMPLENS (Walker). PI. iv, figs. 1, 2.

Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 118 (Ortalis).—Ortalis contigua
Walker, op. cit., viii, 1865, 123; Hendel, Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 277.

The legs are much more extensively lemon-yellow in the male than in the
female, the latter having the femora and tibiae largely black. The palpi of the
male are also white and almost disc-like, while in the female they are lemon-
yellow and club-shaped.

There is some variation in the wing markings (Pl. iv, fig. 1) in a number of
the specimens; the hyaline spot beyond the anal cell is sometimes very indistinct,
and in one female the short curved brown streak proximad of the apex of the
first vein connects with the fascia over the outer cross-vein on the third vein.

Recorded from New Guinea and Aru Islands. A large series from Wewak,
New Guinea (F. H. Taylor), and two specimens from Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet
and 3,000 feet (L. E. Cheesman).

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 103

DASYORTALIS COMPLENS VAR. SEPARATA, n. var. PI. iv, fig. 3.

This variety, which is very similar in all particulars to the typical form, may
be distinguished by the failure of the short dark streak near the apex of the
first vein to connect with the broad dark fascia over the inner cross-vein, and the
pale brown margin of the anal cell along the anal vein (PI. iv, fig. 3). Length,
4-5 mm.

Type, female, Dutch New Guinea: Cyclops Mts., Sabron, 930 feet, April 1936
(L. E. Cheesman).

DASYORTALIS COMPLENS VAR. FASCIATA Curran.

Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., xxii, No. 1, 1936, 54 (Lasiopsila).

This variety differs from the typical form in having the yellow streak on the
upper margin of the mesopleura widened behind, where it is almost half as wide
as it is long, instead of uniformly wide and more than four times as long as wide.
There is no hyaline spot just beyond the apex of the anal cell. Length, 4 mm.

Kavieng, New Ireland; Makada Is., off New Britain (F. H. Taylor); Solomon
Islands (W. W. Froggatt). Type locality, Matema Island.

Curran described this as the type of a new genus, Lasiopsila, which he idee
in the family Psilidae. His description is lacking in several essential characters
and his figure of the wing is slightly inaccurate, but I have no doubt as to the
identity of the species.

DASYORTALIS ANGUSTIFRONS Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 279.

Hendel states in his description that the hyaline fascia between the cross-veins
of the wing does not attain the hind margin. In the well preserved male before
me it does.

Described from a single male taken in New Guinea. Papua: Kokoda, August
1933 (L. EH. Cheesman).

DASYORTALIS BARBATA Hendel.
Op. cit., viii, 1914, 279.
Described from both sexes from New Guinea. Not known to me.

DASYORTALIS GONICEPS Hendel.

Op. cit., viii, 1914, 281.

I have one male before me that apparently belongs to this species. Hendel
makes no mention of an abnormal structure of the fore femur in this sex, but in
this specimen the femur is swollen and slightly tumid at the apex, and there
furnished with a clump of short erect black bristles.

Described from three males from New Guinea. Wewak, New Guinea (F. H.
Taylor).

CONICIPITHEA Hendel.

Abhandadl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 29.

The head in my specimens is not particularly noticeable for its forward
production at the base of the antennae, but the stiff short setulae on the outer edge
of the third antennal segment are sufficient to identify the genus. These are not
mentioned by Hendel in his’ description.

CONICIPITHEA ADDENS (Walker).
Dacus addens Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iv, 1860, 149.
Recorded from Celebes, Molucca, and Amboina, not as yet known from New
Guinea, though likely to occur there. Introduced here because of that fact and
to present the above character.

104 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

PHILOcoMPUS Osten-Sacken.

Bull. Ent. Soc. France, x, 1881, 134.

This genus contains three species, none of which is as yet known to occur
in New Guinea. One was described from Celebes and may be found in New
Guinea.

ANTINEURA Osten-Sacken.

Op. cit., x, 1881, 134.

This genus has been divided into two subgenera as below:

A. Inner cross-vein of the wing directly above the outer one, forming a continuous

VEN C sp roresasiey se caret y anes voleietovaperay Sve gene wens okey eltsgewe, a skanoges@ ey shel snevepe’e worieusue ee Antineura Osten-Sacken
AA. Inner cross-vein not directly above the outer one, curved and oblique ..............

bt Cnn ce syGionbycICctoto erO ie DiCrOse E ceCh IGG: CIRCA CCRC NSTC ORC eR ORO IRE Cae RPL CRORE REL Adantineura Hendel
N.B.—Neither of the two known species of Antineura, s.s., is Known to occur

in New Guinea; they are Malayan. The species of Adantineura are distinguished
as below:
1. Wing without a longitudinal black streak from base of third vein to middle of discal

cell (below, fork (of radial veinis palpi meds nice de «osteo rere biroi de Meijere

Wing with a longitudinal black streak from base of third vein to middle of discal
cell below fork of radial vein; palpi red, black at bases .............-..++-:- 2

27 SEipistomenshining smnetallie black =e eeesce fete en ee eee kerteszi de Meijere
Epistome yellow, thickly silvery-white-dusted .................. grandis Doleschall

ANTINEURA (ADANTINEURA) BIROI de Meijere.
Ann. Mus. Nat. Hung., iv, 1906, 188.
Described from a male from New Guinea. Not since recorded.

ANTINEURA (ADANTINEURA) KERTESZI de Meijere. Pl. iv, fig. 4.
Op. cit., iv, 1906, 189.
Described from both sexes from New Guinea. Both sexes, Wewak, New Guinea
(¥. H. Taylor).

ANTINEURA (ADANTINEURA) GRANDIS (Doleschall).
Natuurk. Tijdschr. v. Nederl.-Ind., xvii, 1858, 126 (Herina).
Described from a male taken on Amboina. May yet be taken in New Guinea.

PSEUDOCLEITAMIA, nN. gen.

Generic characters—A remarkable genus in this subfamily, readily dis-
tinguished from any other by the very narrow upper portion of the frons, which
has three or four pairs of short stout orbital bristles and four verticals. The head
is otherwise much as in Rivellia and related genera, the face being almost vertical
in profile, with shallow foveae on almost the entire height, the parafacials are
narrow and have some fine short hairs; antennae as long as the face, the third
segment about five times as long as its greatest width, narrowly rounded at apex;
aristae bare; upper occiput depressed, lower swollen. Thorax longer than wide,
with the following bristles: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals, 1 supra-alar, 2 postalars,
a strong closely-placed pair of dorsocentrals, 1 mesopleural and four subequal
scutellars. The unique feature of the thorax lies in the presence on the hind
half of the mesopleura, the anterior half of the pteropleura, and the upper margin
of the sternopleura of numerous short stout bristles. Wing as in Plate iv, Figure 5,
the apices of first and second veins wide apart, inner cross-vein about its own
length from outer, first posterior cell not narrowed at apex, vein closing the
anal cell bent in middle, first and third veins setulose on upper surface. Squamae
rather small, lower one a well developed lobe. Legs normal, rather stout.

Genotype, Pseudocleitamia setigera, n. sp.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 105

PSEUDOCLEITAMIA SETIGERA, n. Sp. PI. iv, fig. 5.

9. Black, rather dull, anterior margin of frons, basal two segments and base
of third segment of antennae yellowish-brown, thorax pale-grey-dusted, but the type
is damaged so that markings if any are not distinguishable. Wings hyaline, costa
harrowly brownish-yellow from humeral cross-vein to apex of first vein, an
oblique black fascia from below apex of the subcostal to midway to inner cross-
vein over furcation of second and third veins, a narrow black fascia from apex of
first vein to fifth enclosing the inner cross-vein, and a large black mark on apical
two-fifths of the wing, the anterior outline of which is slightly rounded, touching
the outer cross-vein, broken at apex by a wedge-shaped hyaline streak that extends
from the tip of fourth vein obliquely to near the apex of second vein that leaves
a narrow dark border from the apex of second to beyond the apex of third vein
on the costal margin; edge of the anal region slightly brown clouded apically.

Frons at vertex about one-fifth of the head-width, slightly widened to anterior
margin, where it is a little less than one-third the head-width and one-third its
own length; orbits narrow, whitish-grey-dusted; eyes bare, slightly oblique, about
1:5 times as high as long; gena reddish-yellow, about one-fourth as high as eye.
Prelabrum well exposed. The pairs of orbital bristles very close together and
strong, though not very long. The type is damaged or rubbed so that their details
are uncertain. Mesonotum with quite dense short depressed black hairs; scutellum
with one or two fine erect discal hairs. Legs black, femora more brownish apically.
Fore tarsi about 1:5 times as long as their tibiae, slightly thicker than usual,
metatarsus on all legs longer than the other four segments combined; fore femora
with sparse posteroventral bristles; mid tibia with two strong apical ventral
bristles; hind tibia with a few inconspicuous central anteroventral setulae. Second
wing-vein slightly undulated. Abdomen widest centrally, without long bristles
at apex of fifth tergite. Length, 7-5 mm.

Type, Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, May 1933 (L. E. Cheesman).

EUXESTOMOEA Hendel.

Hendel in de Meijere, Nova-Guinea, ix, Zool., livr. 3, 1913, 377; Gen. Ins., Fasc.,
157, 1914, 91; Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 187.

There are three known species of this genus, all recorded from New Guinea.
They are rather slender species, though placed by Hendel along with the stouter
forms in his generic key. To prevent mistakes in allocation I have inserted the
genus in both sections of the key to genera given herein.

The antennae are shorter than in Scotinosoma and the inner cross-vein is
hardly more than its own length from the outer, the section of fourth vein between
the cross-veins being not more than one-fifth as long as the preceding section. In
both species I have before me the third antennal segment is distinctly angulate at
apex above which is distinctive. There are striking differences in the chaetotaxy
of the two species before me that are not mentioned by Hendel. I do not know
what are the chaetotactic characters of discifera.

Key to the Species.

1. Mid and hind femora orange-yellow, remainder of legs deep black; thorax, scutellum
and abdomen glossy metallic-blue, without trace of dusting; no bristles on the
mesonotum proximad of the strong acrostichal pair; the 6 scutellar bristles
sub-equal in length, all on margin; arista short-haired, the longest hairs about
3 times as long as its basal diameter; the large apical brown mark on the
wing narrowly connected with the fascia over the cross-veins on both the costa
ANG Hina Maven ENS. ears oa che sen aeie aie tatedstetate, ol etaueh® welilavatliale ibe wee bipunctata Hendel

Legs entirely black, or black-brown; thorax with greyish dust; aristae pubescent
WO ASU yd Aer aareetle ovesurs ce totctren sessed otal Ors ase SCT SRY cotton epi al si coiie: acs uisure retin oc Sr eugires cas or tcetrancchiatten ret rel emedapare 2

106 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

2. Apical brown mark on the wing entire; mesonotum with a pair of strong bristles
proximad of the prescutellar acrostichals and more widely separated than the
latter; intermediate pair of scutellar bristles much shorter than the others, and
subdorsal in position; no apical palette on arista of the male .............
ERTS PRCOT-CHCMEMO tcl CRE CSR Cac ty GuChA orc dit cae SEL. Cooney GER creeped ae prompta (Walker)

Apical brown mark on the wing interrupted by hyaline streaks in the cells; arista
ofimale with antapicalgnaletter. sabh ise aetiean.sieebiee «eee discifera de Meijere

EUXESTOMOEA BIPUNCTATA Hendel. PI. iv, fig. 6.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 188.

The only specimen before me does not have the brown fascia from the stigma
extending entirely to the hind margin of the wing as described by Hendel; it is
broken above the fifth vein and the continuation below that vein to its fusion with
the second fascia is faint (Pl. iv, fig. 6). The post-vertical pair of bristles is
practically undeveloped. MHaiteres with yellow knobs.

Originally described from New Guinea: Maroka. One female, Papua: Mafulu,
4,000 feet, January 1934 (L. E. Cheesman).

EUXESTOMOEA PROMPTA (Walker).
Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 118 (Ortalis).
A much duller coloured species than the preceding, with better developed post-
vertical pair of bristles and brown halteres.

Recorded from New Guinea and Aru. Five specimens, Papua: Mafulu, 4,000
feet, December 1933, and Kokoda, 1,200 feet, December 1933 (L. EH. Cheesman).

EUXESTOMOEA DISCIFERA de Meijere.
Nov. Guwin., 1X, Zool., livr. 3, 1913, 377.

Described from a poorly preserved male from New Guinea. As in prompta
the bases of the abdominal tergites are whitish-grey-dusted, but in this species
the bands are broader, about half the length of the tergites, and in the male
there is an apical palette on the arista.

RHYTIDORTALIS Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 121.

This genus belongs to the same group as Pseudepicausta, having the first
posterior cell of the wing not narrowed at the apex, but is separated from its
nearest allies by the presence of rather coarse punctures on the frons.

Neither of the two known species occurs, as far as known, in New Guinea,
but the Australian rugifrons Thomson may yet be found there; the other species
is Formosan.

CLEITAMOIDES, n. gen.

Generic characters.—Similar to Cleitamia in most particulars, but differing
markedly in having the second wing-vein much closer to the first on apical third
or more of the latter than it is to third, and the orbits without strong bristles.
There is also, in all three known species, a thickened strip on the wing membrane
near the apex of the first vein that runs to the third vein. There is a striking
uniformity in the wing markings of the included species, all having a basal brown
or yellowish mark that extends to level of apex of the subcostal vein and to
fourth vein across the field, and beyond this a large rather rounded blackish-brown
mark from the costa to the hind margin that covers both the cross-veins.

Genotype, Cleitamia kerteszi Hendel.

>

AS*

" rR |
BY J. R. MALLOCH. pip ag ay 107
eu yy
Key to the Species. Nagel
1. No black streak emanating from the costal edge of the large brown mark over the
CRORES ib ab binlblnglbloe Go Ob odie a ORO eieibe bo bcd pala miro ae cle liturata (Walker)

A black or dark brown streak emanating from the costal edge of the large brown
mark over the cross-veins and extending narrowly round the costal margin to
DOOKIE O fate PHOUEUMG Ve len rtm eenetenen erento ne et Veh oneal stints, ctrauoterciorecicticdeteneuene tens ae wicre otaire 2
2. The basal brown mark on the wing not extending to the costa at apex ...........
5 Be Bald co apis SERRA SAC ICRE AED SEEGERS CRAB LAN CRC URS CCH ISG c eons OCs kc RAC oar CMP kerteszi Hendel

The basal brown mark extending to the costa on a large part of its apical half
DEE CM eM HNP Paneer e Ath ota taken h Beton wat ate hahabe 4 itn TAG, MNnealra Man asta ea here bts cite latifascia (Walker)

CLEITAMOIDES LITURATA (Walker).

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., v, 1861, 251 (Dacus).
Originally described from Dorey, and subsequently recorded from New Guinea.

CLEITAMOIDES KERTESZI Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 130—Cleitamia liturata Osten-Sacken,
Ann. Mus. Civ. Genov., xvi, 1881, 468; op. cit., (2) xix (xxxix), 1899, 559.
Described from New Guinea and known only from the original material.

CLEITAMOIDES LATIFASCIA (Walker). Pl. iv, fig. 7.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 114 (Dacus); Edwards, Trans. Zool.
Soc. Lond., xx, pt. 13, 1915, 415.

Originally described from Aru Islands and subsequently recorded from Dutch
New Guinea by Edwards. Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, April, September and
October 1933 (L. E. Cheesman). (PI. iv, fig. 7.)

CLEITAMIA Macquart.

Suites a Buffon, Diptéres, ii, 1835, 440.

This genus, the species of which are usually distinguished by the conspicuously
black-marked wings with hyaline streaks or spots, is very well represented in
New Guinea and below I present a key to the species referable to it, some of
which are known to me only from descriptions. Hendel in his paper on Platy-
stominae (Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 123) presented a key to 14 species,
which list is considerably enlarged herein.

Key to the Species.

1. Scutellum with four marginal bristles, the basal pair sometimes weak and hair-
Tei tecercis sn Sarseac eae aocanaielv cess eka rec TN ele aoe ek Renate ay ARM re tenet Soak sabe wensehraeepey oy cuicbendtcn av omesaine har Sys 2
Seutellum with six strong marginal bristles; fourth wing-vein beyond the outer
cross-vein usually markedly upwardly curved to before middle of apical section,

then sloping down to wing-margin .................. Giehased taectsaston boReacnEuaae ORs 12

2. Wing brownish-black, with three wedge-shaped hyaline streaks on the costa, one
before the apex of the subcostal vein that extends over the wing to second vein

near its furcation with third, two others between apex of subcostal vein

and that of first vein that extend backward over third vein, three hyaline streaks

on apical half, the anterior one extending diagonally from below the apex of
second vein to apex of the first posterior cell, the central one extending from
behind middle of the inner cross-vein to and including most of apical half of
second posterior cell, and the third extending from the lower half to inner
cross-vein over the discal cell to the hind margin of wing, angulate on fifth

vein, and a hyaline streak along the anal margin to apex of fifth vein ........

RR) A a Ae TES nO Bio aco CR AIG lolG. co Wololcith ciate o tib Sionted car Cie cies catharinae de Meijere*

*In 1915 (Tijdschr. v. Hnt., lviii, 129) de Meijere placed this species as a synonym
of tricurvata Walker, but there does not appear to be a great similarity in the descriptions
and I leave the matter as presented in the above key until a comparison of the types
is made.

108

10.

11.

12.

12a.

DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

Both the cross-veins of the wing enclosed in a large broad black mark or spot .. 4
Both the cross-veins of the wing not enclosed in a single large black mark or spot,
Or scoverecdapyasanuneay DlACK eS trea Ke rpemeieyedeckeveieley = cisicreveioiecchekeuele\sauoneucnedcreneleie 9
The large black spot over the cross-veins extending over the entire width of wing
fromthe COstanLOutne DIN deManeiniee ides clewakeweisicletehelre amabilis Osten-Sacken
The above black spot or mark not reaching the costal margin or only so as a mere
VAMC} 2 sexssyievcnens vogeitou coke Hee ewee oie MMT OUCR ode 25 WOLONS Takes acs acah Sus oe oie aus vance soot iain: Sipaeonebet Reh aoker eno 5

No black streak emanating from the apical border of the large discal spot, the
only dark mark beyond it consisting of a narrow costal streak that is not

connected nwithysthe mar ees tSDO ti mercuele eversiensie eiclioite\eve te (olla ive) <ue\tellc eileleiisi sl ledel onedeitene) cheteyenens 6
At least one dark streak emanating from the apical border of the large discal
F] 010) SAR Sicr Ronn REECE O07, 0:C, ce ALO Fund DCA CE ICRCLEL CICA CoRsCL A ULch CCRC SOR ICR ER CHO ACiCaen ce aia ieee rec 7

Pleura fulvous-yellow on hind margin of the mesopleura and all of the sternopleura;
mesonotum with a rather broad pale-grey-dusted central vitta from anterior
margin to the suture; no hyaline spot in the dark mark over the cross-veins,
and a wedge-shaped hyaline mark above apical part of the anal vein ........
Be ao RA aH SWa Seta aol She SeOte eiarre tal hash aCe ive laalle eh Oras tee an che teMee, eh eye ca eusesnevanensus similis Kertész

Pleura entirely metallic violet-blue; no grey-dusted central anterior vitta on the
mesonotum; a small hyaline spot behind the lower extremity of the outer cross-
vein, and the entire posterior half of the cell in front of the apical section of

ANALEVEIN SWHOLEISH hy Uline lercnsrenelelcnoishateictelcncieleaclencli-icioueisielevoneenane cheesmanae, n. sp.
Only one arcuate black streak emanating from the apical border of the large discal
SD O Grrr ec alesere neta arte eee sae rele se teste veo au areivar eerie satte iayfauieNehe taiisige Me) elie le cacteuesavieusuenene biarcuata Walker
Two arcuate black streaks emanating from the apical border of the large discal
TOYO) Eh Ihe oicnesen GOCE 0-0. ceo CHOI IO OT UI ORC ACO ASCH ono. O lhc Oia como Laue s secs cole 8

Frons in both sexes broader than long; basal halves of the femora yellow; anal
cell of the wing with a small sub-hyaline spot; lower occiput yellow on sides ....
Oo CEO IG CRE ECR CEe SE OE RCT REMERON CEE CEE RO RHEEESrt ro creR ECC astrolabei Boisduval

Frons longer than broad; basal two-thirds of femora yellow; anal cell of the wing
with only the upper and apical margins blackened; entire occiput metallic
Vie =a aevcwoucuc rare eeiaue vars ie cave ade Hatenee cotsnationts veioanttepiete lars cevenekomadewedeiesyel ace orthocephala Hendel

First posterior cell of the wing without a dark fascia; third vein beyond the inner
eross-vein evenly and but slightly arcuate, almost parallel with the apical
section of fourth; a slender curved fascia over the outer cross-vein from costa
COs ET Ga ETI ota: cans ens coro dens fauepotetinuaue Latemeuedteueh cuca meusieneueuceeme ne rivelloides Osten-Sacken

In addition to the dark costal band there is a dark fascia or short streak through
thes Nrstsposterionr Cell (Of) the; WANS fie cto sirens cc tereere nee ctelorel eel clci neh iCn eran rene 10

The oblique dark fascia through the first posterior cell is not connected with the dark
costal streak, the one over the cross-vein narrow, curved forward in front ... 11

The oblique dark fascia through the first posterior cell is connected with the costal
streak; outer cross-vein in a large black mark that occupies a large portion of
The sSECONGSPOSTEFION COMM aia ro suscep cisuictiorio vere: poueliouellowemenciaieoueieceienakel ste tricurvata Walker

The oblique dark streak in the first posterior cell dark brown at apex of fourth vein,
becoming gradually paler from there to its anterior extremity, which is pale

Drown anda distinctly widened! sania selec nace eee ostensackeni Hendel
The oblique dark streak in the first posterior cell entirely deep black, narrow, of
uniform width, not widened at anterior extremity ............... cyclops, n. sp.

A large black mark enclosing both the cross-veins of the wing, that does not touch
the narrow black costal streak, from the upper edge of which spot emanates a
slender curved black streak that extends downward to the apex of the fourth
SVC UIN Gearon Hottorges ofadeyicticvsne\ sel Zis. «pokes, sol slop cy over sy ous toqewe toc siveyeyscehewsn ayemsious reveteskodewene (romeheshane foleKs 12a

Wing not so marked, the spot enclosing the cross-veins either reaching costa or a
short brown streak over apex of the fourth vein that is not connected with the
dark mark enclosing the cross-veins, the latter mark not entirely black .... 13

The large black mark enclosing the cross-veins extending to the costa, connected
with the narrow costal stripe that extends to apex of third vein, but not with
the one that runs obliquely over apex of fourth vein (Pl. iv, fig. 12) .......
stele talrehe salon manncteMaviaer eh otary orate cereniay ara "airehaws (eran ena ane Tee fag! witarre a ener ebralaiahelertawardverane delandi, n. sp.

The large black mark enclosing the cross-veins not extending to the costa, and
connected with the narrow black stripe that ends on apex of fourth vein
slo veteaaite vel sheeneMone eesu aretha tehatomeicewenertakey/cieh svteher die orca. a esepenetsteteteaeateiceeten Meter ten enTeS excepta, n. Sp.

BY J. BR. MALLOCH. 109

13. Basal and discal cells brown, partly yellowish apically; the costal margin of wing
with three hyaline spots that do not extend over the second vein ..........

Pee Pee a eet Wee ay cel ctreme Rewer arethes ake tei chro: vist ellonee omarion ehollalieljsnieirel austere tet eple-leiroye gestroi Kertész
Basal and discal cells not entirely brown; an oblique hyaline fascia from costa or
near it to the fifth vein beyond middle of the discal cell; costal margin with

but one hyaline mark on or near costa on its basal half .................... 14

14. A wedge-shaped hyaline mark on the costa before middle of wing that extends to
third vein; the hyaline central fascia attaining the costal margin ..........

as MR a ere Ree Re Tema ohare Peed one en al he tatietishonpie dere el shaderewe od Reais ei Ah's roederi Kertész

Only a small hyaline spot between first and second veins before middle of wing;

the hyaline central fascia not attaining the costal margin ... insignis de Meijere
CLEITAMIA AMABILIS Osten-Sacken.

Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Gen., xvi, 1881, 468.

Described from New Guinea.

The large oval dark mark over the cross-veins extends from the costa to the
hind margin and has a single slender apical costal marginal streak extending
from its costal edge to midway between the apices of third and fourth veins.
There is a complete hyaline fascia in front of the large oval mark. There are
two hyaline costal marks in the basal half of the wing.

CLEITAMIA ASTROLABEI Boisduval. PI. iv, fig. 8.

Voy. V Astrolabe, pt. 2, 1835, 668 (Ortalis). —Poticara triarcuata Walker, Jour.
Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., v, 1861, 249.

This species has been recorded from several localities in New Guinea. The
head of the male varies considerably in width and is always distinctly wider than
that of the female, noticeably exceeding in width the widest part of the thorax.

New Guinea: Bulolo (F. H. Taylor), Marprik (C. M. Deland and J. R. Rigby) ;
Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, July 1933 (L. E. Cheesman), Koitaki (E. O. Pockley) ;
Dutch New Guinea: Cyclops Mts., 930 feet, Sabron, April 1936, Lake Sentani,
August 1936, 58 specimens (L. HE. Cheesman).

CLEITAMIA ORTHOCEP;HALA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 126.

Very closely allied to astrolabei, differing essentially from the latter as noted
in the foregoing key. Unknown to me except from the description and known
only from New Guinea.

CLEITAMIA SIMILIS Kertész.

Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Gen., (2) xix (xxxix), 1899, 562.

Described from New Guinea. Papua: Mafulu, 4,000 feet, January 1934 (L. E.
Cheesman).

CLEITAMIA OSTENSACKENI Kertész.
Term. Fuzet., xxi, 1898, 494.
Type locality, Madang (Frederich Wilhelm Hafen), New Guinea.

CLEITAMIA TRICURVATA (Walker).
Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., vii, 1864, 227 (Poticara).
Described from Waigou Island, New Guinea. Recorded from New Guinea
by Enderlein in 1924.
CLEITAMIA GESTROI Kertész.
Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Gen., (2) xix (xxxix), 1899, 566.

In this species and roederi the fourth wing-vein is highly arched beyond the
outer cross-vein.

Originally described from New Guinea.

110 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

CLEITAMIA ROEDERI Kertész.
Op: cit. (2) xix (Gaxxix)), 89957 565!
Described from New Guinea.

CLEITAMIA INSIGNIS de Meijere.

Tijdschr. v. Ent., lviii, 1915, 128.

A large, robust species, with a peculiar wing-pattern, the small quadrate
hyaline spot near the middle of the marginal cell, the central hyaline fascia
which does not attain either the costa or the hind margin and lies near the apex
of the discal cell, and the broad costal streak from the large dark mark enclosing
the cross-veins extending well over the third vein, its lower edge being at middle
of the tip of first posterior cell, are distinctive. The third wing-vein is con-
spicuously humped up just beyond the outer cross-vein.

Described from North New Guinea. One pair, West New Guinea; Njau-limon,
south of Mt. Bougainville, 300 feet, February 1936 (L. E. Cheesman).

CLEITAMIA BIARCUATA (Walker).
Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., viii, 1865, 133 (Poticara).
This: species is readily distinguished from astrolabei and its allies by the
character of the wing markings as noted in the foregoing key to the species.
Originally described from the island of Salawati and subsequently recorded
from New Guinea by Hendel.

CLEITAMIA RIVELLOIDES Osten-Sacken.
Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Gen., xvi, 1881, 469.

Originally described from New Guinea, the female type being in Genoa.
Not subsequently recorded.

CLEITAMIA CYCLOPS, nh. sp. PI. iv, fig. 9.

©. Similar to ostensackeni in general colour and markings, differing as
follows: Frons brownish-black to black, with a velvety mark on each side in front,
sometimes red in centre; third antennal segment dark brown; palpi dark at
bases; face violet-black; mesonotum blue-black, slightly grey-dusted on disc, with
three rather faint broad brownish vittae, the sublaterals obsolete before suture;
abdomen entirely violet-black, with rather dense, very short, yellowish pile; the
black fasciae on the wing much narrower, almost linear, the one over the cross-
veins hardly widened behind, and the one in the first posterior cell as described in
the foregoing key to the species (PI. iv, fig. 9).

All four vertical bristles and the pair of orbital bristles strong. Scutellars
four. Fore femora almost entirely black. Cross-veins of the wing almost inter-
stitial. Halteres black. Length, 8-10 mm.

Type and 2 paratypes, Dutch New Guinea: Cyclops Mts., 3,500 feet, March 1936
(L. E. Cheesman).

CLEITAMIA CHEESMANAE, n. sp. PI. iv, fig. 10.

°. Similar to similis, differing as stated in the foregoing key to the species,
and as follows: The frons is narrower and not so noticeably widened in front,
the undusted lower half of the face is not green but is purple in colour, and the
wing has but one hyaline wedge-shaped costal mark in front of the semi-circular
hyaline fascia (Pl. iv, fig. 10).

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 111

The type-specimen has 5 scutellar bristles, but I assume that the normal
number will be found to be 4, as the similarity to similis is very striking and
the two are closely allied. Length, 9 mm.

Type, Dutch New Guinea: Cyclops Mts., 3,500 feet, March 1936 (L. E. Cheesman).
Named in honour of the collector.

CLEITAMIA EXCEPTA, n. sp. PI. iv, fig. 11.

9. This species resembles astrolabei in general colour and markings, but has
6 scutellar bristles. The head is narrower than in that species, with the frons
about 1:5 times as long as wide, red in colour, with the upper orbits and the
ocellar triangle blue-green, the narrow eyes in front white-dusted, and the anterior
margin hardly darkened. The mesonotum is greenish or bluish-black, with slight
grey dusting and traces of brown discal vittae, but no transverse black band at the
suture. Pleura largely yellowish-brown. ,Legs with the femora more extensively
yellow. Wing with the same large broad black mark enclosing the cross-veins and
the narrow black costal margin beyond it, but there is only one slender curved
streak emanating from upper apical margin of the large mark, ending on apex of
fourth vein, and but one hyaline wedge-shaped mark on the costa before middle;
the anal cell is almost entirely hyaline, and the posterior edge of the black mark
beyond the anal cell is not as markedly dentate. Length, 8-9 mm.

Type and 9 paratypes, West New Guinea: 7 from Njau-limon, 300 feet, and 2
from Mt. Nomo, 700 feet, February 1936 (L. EH. Cheesman).

Types of all three new species in the collection of the British Museum (Nat.
Hist.), London.

CLEITAMIA DELANDI, n. sp. PI. iv, fig. 12.

®. Head black, frons almost imperceptibly brownish above, much darker than
in excepta, the upper orbits glossy blue-black, the lateral edges narrowly silvery in
front; vertex with four bristles, one pair of orbitals rather strong. Frons about
1:5 times as long as wide. Face vertical, dull red, edges of foveae and parafacials
glossy-black, foveae white-dusted. Genae a little higher than width of third
antennal segment, the latter extending to a little below middle of face. Antennae
red; longest hairs on aristae about as long as width of third antennal segment;
palpi slender, brownish-red.

Thorax black, rather brown at sutures, mesonotum dull centrally, metallic
blue-black on sides, the scutellum and pleura blue-black or metallic-blue. Some
whitish dust at the humeri and at suture laterally, most evident from behind,
no trace of markings. Scutellum with six bristles, the dise microscopically fine-
haired. Legs brownish-yellow, tibiae darkened apically, tarsi black. Wing
black-brown, paler brown in the costal and subcostal cells, with the following parts
whitish hyaline: Two wedge-shaped marks beyond the apex of the subcostal vein,
the first one extending to almost the fourth vein, an inverted V-shaped mark at
apex, its base near costa, its outer arm ending in apex of first posterior cell, its
inner in upper half of second posterior cell, a short streak beyond middle of the
discal cell extending from near anterior edge of latter to hind margin of the
wing, and a broad stripe along the anal angle that extends almost across the
anal cell (Pl. iv, fig. 12). Halteres dark brown. Abdomen metallic-blue, without
the usual apical bristles in type. Length, 11 mm.

Type, New Guinea: Marprik (J. R. Rigby and C. M. Deland). Type in the
collection of the School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, University of
Sydney.

112 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

CLEITAMIA TRIGONALIS de Meijere.

Nov. Guin., ix, Zool., livr. 3, 1913, 375.

This species which was described from New Guinea is entirely unknown to
me. It is similar to lituwrata, but has entirely yellow femora and different wing
markings.

LAGLAISIA Bigot.

Ann. Soc. Ent. France, (5) x, 1880, 92.

The males of this genus have the head much widened, the eyes being usually
on very long stalks, the width sometimes exceeding the entire length of the insect,
but in the females the head is not markedly wider than the thorax. The anal
cell is closed by a centrally outwardly-bent cross-vein, and the apex of the abdomen
in the males has a few quite long bristles much as in Cleitamia.

Hendel published, in his 1914 paper, a key to the then known species which
I reproduce below for the convenience of students of the group.

Key to the Species.

ile ISsOGh, Gautahy TEGO OFOYAN coos ocOE OD OURO OUO Oa SADOON OOOO DK OOOO DOROUROObUC 2
Metallic coloured species, at least the postnotum and the abdomen blackish-green .. 3
2. Inner cross-vein not longer than the section of the fourth vein between the cross-
veins; the outer cross-vein only enclosed within a brown mark that extends
narrowly along the hind margin of the wing from near the anal angle in a curve
to the middle of the submarginal cell at wing tip, widening apically ........
SL ewehec RSs teicesicue ile) Semorin rete ne ate Reda ahal cones, Oat atca) Rlramet ahora Rae oarene tere bs rene tnedel Aue ts Kochi de Meijere
Inner cross-vein longer than the section of the fourth vein between the cross-veins ;
wings brownish, a transverse whitish-hyaline streak from behind the fifth vein
to the third vein just proximad of the cross-veins in front of a large dark brown
mark over both cross-veins that encloses a small hyaline central spot, the wing
Iho) IOAN WOKE 6 otc CIO IEE OO OOS Oo Oo oo cio clo micdo Hols Soin oloie adic urls caloptera Bigot
3. Thorax and scutellum blue-black, metallic; first and second posterior cells of wing
with a brown cross-band; wing with two narrow white cross-bands in the
rea (ODER ts Cant, Slats GMa Cite 6c cao Cid oie ccers Bios Gio c's aod ido aire oe fascipennis de Meijere
Thorax and scutellum reddish-brown, mesonotum with metallic-blue discal mark,
the scutellum with a violet sheen; first and second posterior cells of the wing
without a brown cross-band; wing with but one wedge-shaped hyaline cross-band
in the middle that extends from the costa to fifth vein just proximad of the
cross-veins, a narrow brown cross-band over the latter and a continuation of

same on the apical margin of the costa to the middle of first posterior cell
SAC CRONE OIC LORE CHER ON CRER TERE CROMCECL TE GHC AO Re OG ro ia Odd Oso Oran COO oe On er ene mace oe biroi Hendel

LAGLAISIA CALOPTERA Bigot.

Ann. Soc. Ent. France, (5) x, 1880, 92.
Described from New Guinea.

LAGLAISIA KOCHI de Meijere.

Tijdschr. v. Ent., li, 1908, 120.
Described from New Guinea.

LAGLAISIA BIROI Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 136.
Described from New Guinea.

LAGLAISIA FASCIPENNIS de Meijere.
Hendel, Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 134; de Meijere, Tijds. v. Ent.,
Iviii, 1915, 134.
It is rather difficult to determine who should be credited with this species.
Hendel included it in his key to the species as fascipennis de Meij. in litt., but he

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 113

did not state whether the data given by him were to be credited to de Meijere,
whose description of the species did not appear until about a year later. Hendel
had not seen the species apparently and simply included it to make his paper
complete to date. I therefore credit the species to de Meijere.

Northern New Guinea.

LAGLAISIA STYLOPS Ennderlein.

Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berl., xi, 1923, 116.

This species apparently belongs in the group in which the thorax and abdomen
are reddish-brown, but the posterior notopleural elevation is described as greenish-
metallic. The wing is compared by Enderlein with that of biroi with the dis-
tinctions that there is no hyaline spot in the cell R, the wedge-shaped hyaline
fascia from the costa near middle is narrower and does not reach Cu,, and the
hyaline band at the wing tip does not penetrate the cell R,,;, but ends in R,,;.

North-east New Guinea.

LAGLAISIA TELESCOPICA Enderlein.
Op. cit., xi, 1923, 116.
Another closely allied species of the same colour group, differing from all
the others in the markings of the wings.
North-east New Guinea.

LorgriomyIA Kertész.
Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Gen., (2) xix (xxxix), 1899, 567.

LORIOMYIA GUTTIPENNIS Kertész.

Op. cit., (2) xix (xxxix), 1899, 567.

This is the only species of the genus and was described from New Guinea.
It is unknown to me.

PLAGIOSTENOPTERINA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 52; Malloch, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., \xxviii,
art. 15, 1931, 12.

In the paper cited above I redefined this genus, segregating four subgenera,
and using new characters for its separation from Hlassogaster. There are none
of the previously described subgenera except the typical one in the New Guinea
material before me, so I have used only the characters of it in my synoptic key
to the genera herein.

In all the species of this subgenus and in the new one dealt with below,
there are some fine hairs on the face visible with a magnification of 32 diameters.

I present below a key to the species in the present collection and include one
other not represented in it.

Key to the Species.
1. Scutellum with many piliferous punctures on the entire dorsal surface besides the

LOU) AMALIA MISC Sra isssetewen Ma aeh wan che M suc srs ce Mou cases Sewice cele roue ane lacscus Coys e spe te. Gila Sy sce 2
Scutellum without piliferous punctures on dorsum, with only the four marginal
TD ETSTLS SA Se fare IAS Sethe teeter eae te sarees ated Arata ARRAN: cette, Shoe aad Rlale ota kth. OATS Oe 3

bo

Male with an apical palette on the arista; fourth (third visible) abdominal tergite
about 1-5 times as long as fifth in male; ocellar triangle rather elongate and
narrow, quite distinctly grey-dusted or tomentose; outer cross-vein of the wing
very narrowly and faintly brown-clouded .................. aenea Wiedemann

Male without an apical palette on the arista; fourth abdominal tergite of male shorter
than fifth; ocellar triangle wider and not distinctly grey-dusted in front of the
ocelli; outer cross-vein not at all brown-clouded ........... enderleini Hendel

114 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

3. Humeral bristle weak or lacking; legs black; outer cross-vein of the wing not

noticeably brown-clouded ........2.00 cc ce secre e ccc erce se renes parva Malloch
Humeral bristle long and strong; legs largely orange-yellow; outer cross-vein of the
wing broadly clouded with dark brown ............-..++++++:- orbitalis, n. sp.

PLAGIOSTENOPTERINA (PLAGIOSTENOPTERINA) AENEA Wiedemann.
i elivemt caelo.

Zool. Mag., i (3), 1819, 29 (Dacus).

A common species of quite wide distribution, occurring throughout the
Malayan region and southward to New Guinea and Australia.

The female is difficult to distinguish from that of enderleini, but the male
is readily separated by the apical aristal palette.

A series of specimens from Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor), Keravat,
Rabaul, New Britain (F. H. Taylor), and another from Dutch New Guinea:
Cyclops Mts., Sabron, 900 feet, May 1936 (L. E. Cheesman).

PLAGIOSTENOPTERINA (PLAGIOSTENOPTERINA) ENDERLEINI Hendel.
Pl. iv, fig. 14.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 56—Stenopterina aenea Enderlein, Zool.
Jahrb., 1912, 356.

Apparently not as common as the genotype. Occurs in the Malayan region.
There are 2 specimens from Bulolo, 2 from Bulowat (F. H. Taylor), and one
specimen from Marprik (J. R. Rigby and C. M. Deland), New Guinea, and 3 from
Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, April and August 1933 (L. E. Cheesman), in this
collection.

PLAGIOSTENOPTERINA (PLAGIOSTENOPTERINA) PARVA Malloch.

Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., |xxviii, art. 15, 1931, 15.

I have seen only the type specimen, from north-east New Guinea (Kaiser
Wilhelmsland), which is in the collection of the Deutsches Entomologisches
Institut, Berlin-Dahlem.

PLAGIOSTENOPTERINA (STENOPTEROSOMA) ORBITALIS, nN. Sp. PI. iv, fig. 15.

This new subgenus is distinguished from its allies by the presence of two pairs
of very small fine upper orbital bristles on the frons, a fine short pair of divergent
ocellars, and the lack of any hairs on the lower part of the sides of the postnotum.

6, 2. Head black, lower portion of face laterally yellowish-brown, frons shiny,
glossy on ocellar region, vertex and upper orbits, with a narrow silvery-white-
dusted line on each side to orbits; face white-dusted on upper half, and in the
foveae, the parafacials also white-dusted; antennae fulvous-yellow, third segment
dark on upper edge; aristae fuscous. Frons parallel-sided, fully 1-5 times as long
as wide and a little more than one-third of the head-width, slightly bulged up in
centre in front, and with many short pale fine surface hairs; all four vertical
bristles long and strong; postvertical bristles lacking; postocular bristle
moderately long. Face concave in profile, the epistome slightly projecting, gena
about one-seventh as high as the eye, genal bristle strong. Facial foveae deep,
edges of the central carina rounded. Antennae not extending fully to lower level
of eyes, third segment four times as wide as long, the upper apex slightly angulate,
lower one rounded; aristae short-haired on less than the basal half, that of male
without an apical palette; palpi moderately wide.

Thorax shiny black, with a bluish or bronzy tinge, most noticeable on
mesonotum, with grey or yellowish dust, palest on lateral edges of mesonotum and

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 115

on pleura, that on the former forming a wide central vitta, narrowed in front
where it is also palest, pleura most densely dusted below anterior spiracle, on a
wide central fascia, and on the pleurotergite. Hairs dark, bristles black. Bristles
as follows: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals, 2 postalars, one supra-alar, and a weaker
pair of dorsocentrals; mesopleural bristie strong. Scutellum as mesonotum,
slightly granulose, with four strong marginal bristles and no hairs except one
in front of each of the anterior bristles. Legs black, fore femora almost entirely,
and mid and hind femora except their apical third or less, fulvous-yellow. Fore
femur with a series of posteroventral bristles, mid tibia with a long apical ventral
bristle, hind tibia with a series of short setulae on the central portion of the
anteroventral surface.

Wings greyish-hyaline, brown on costal margin from apex of the subcostal vein
to apex of fourth or slightly beyond it, darkest in the subcostal cell and widest at
apex, the costal cell and a stripe along the hind margin of the apical half of the
dark border yellow; a brown streak fills the entire anterior basal cell, extends
along the fourth vein to outer cross-vein and expands broadly but less intensely
backward to enclose the outer cross-vein. Inner cross-vein a little beyond middle
of discal cell, veins 3 and 4 slightly convergent at apices. Halteres yellow.
Abdomen coloured as thorax but more distinctly blue and without dusting, the
sides at apex of the composite tergite yellowish. Length: 5-6 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and 5 paratypes, Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, April, May
and Sept.-Oct. 1933 (L. E. Cheesman).

ELASSOGASTER Bigot.

Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 1859, 546.

Very similar to Plagiostenopterina, differing in the lack of hairs on the face,
the more nearly erect inner cross-vein of the wing, and the almost straight apical
section of third wing-vein.

Of the 18 known species, only 3 are reliably reported from New Guinea.

Key to the New Guinea Species.

1. Wing without dark cloud on either or both cross-veins ...........-....+-2-eeeeee 2
Wing with a dark cloud on either or both cross-veins ....................0--208: 3

2. No white-dusted vitta on the mesonotum; scutellum convex, with rounded outline
and four strong bristles, the disc with numerous decumbent fine hairs .......

Sale Gow O10 0 A Deol Geohd cc ANDeS-So-o Oth sche eee nh CMC EAE SAIN Ba aaa eR Rana SOMES eed for OLeE ORG evitta, n. sp.

A white-dusted vitta on centre of the mesonotum; scutellum slightly flattened, not
regularly rounded in outline, with a pair of short hairs near base, a moderate-

sized pair of bristles at middle of sides, and a long pair at apex, the surface
otherwise” bare) ecsaeta nar tasioti ls ssn ene cero ene BOR sae rereveWeneyatretay ehicaan eueesrens 4

3. Wing with a narrow dark costal streak at apex beyond the tip of second vein that
is diffuse posteriorly ; legs honey-yellow, the fore tibiae and tarsi deep black ....

RA Rah es PENCE SNEED EUGh oA She Bata A nama ears Mie soeutter ae reat e On Rotem eaae terraereginae Malloch

Wing with a large black spot at apex extending back from a little beyond the apex

of the second vein to the fourth vein and filling apices of submarginal and first
posterior cells; legs largely black, rather variable, but the fore tibiae and tarsi

and the mid and hind femora and tibiae always black ...... sepsoides (Walker)

4. Both the cross-veins of the wing with very large round brown spots; posterior basal
cell only one-third as long as the discal cell ............ didymus Osten-Sacken

Both the cross-veins of the wing merely broadly brown-clouded; posterior basal cell

of the wing half as long as the discal cell ............ didymoides Osten-Sacken

ELASSOGASTER SEPSOIDES (Walker).

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., vol. 5, 1861, 163 (Dacus).—Cephalia bicolor Bigot,
Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 1886, 385.—*Stenopterina unimaculata Kertész, Term. Fiiz.,
xxii, 1899, 185.

* Cited as S. immaculatus by Hendel, Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 82.

116 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

A common species throughout the Malayan region, extending southward to
Australia. Wewak and Bulwa, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor); Rabaul, New Britain
(F. H. Taylor).

ELASSOGASTER EVITTA, Nn. sp. Pl. iv, fig. 16.

3d, 2. A metallic blue-black species, with slight dusting on the sides, but no
central white-dusted vitta on the mesonotum.

Head black, jowls behind and the vibrissal angles brownish-yellow, face brown,
lateral edges of frons with a silvery-white-dusted line, the frons shiny. Antennae
reddish-yellow, palpi brown. Frons almost parallel-sided, about 1:5 times as long
as wide and one-third as wide as head, short-haired, all four vertical bristles long
and strong, each orbit with a microscopic pair of upper setulae and a pair of
similar ocellars present. Aristae subnude, third antennal segment about 3:5
times as long as its basal width, narrowly rounded at apex. Face concave in
profile, the foveae deep.

Thorax with the dorsum closely and finely piliferous punctate, the pile and
bristles black. Bristles as follows: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals, 1 supra-alar, 2 post-
alars, and a pair of strong dorsocentrals, the mesopleural strong. Scutellum convex
and evenly rounded in outline, the disc with many decumbent black hairs, the
surface not as noticeably punctate as the mesonotum; four strong marginal
bristles. Legs brownish-black, tibiae and fore tarsi darker, bases of fore and hind
femora, and bases of mid and hind tarsi reddish-yellow. Fore femora with postero-
ventral series of bristles; mid tibia with one strong apical ventral spur. Wings
greyish-hyaline, stigma blackish-brown, and a diffuse brown mark at apex beyond
tip of second vein and extending to tip of fourth, darkest over the apex of the third
vein. Stigma as long as the next two costal sections combined, the latter subequal
in length; inner cross-vein close to middle of the discal cell and almost erect;
apex of second vein rounded forward to the costal vein, that of third vein slightly
downwardly sloped. Halteres yellow.

Abdomen elongate, almost parallel-sided in the male and in that sex noticeably
compressed, the abdomen of female more ovate. Fifth tergite of male as long as
or longer than third and fourth combined. Length, 5-6 mm.

Type, male, and allotype, Makada Is., off New Britain (F. H. Taylor).

ELASSOGASTER TERRAEREGINAE Malloch.
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., liii, 1928, 352.
This Australian species may yet be found in New Guinea.

ELASSOGASTER DIDYMUS (Osten-Sacken).

Stenopterina didyma Osten-Sacken, Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. CEN EU es xvi, 1881,
465; Hendel, Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 75.

I am free to confess that I am slightly doubtful about the status of this and
the next species, though this may be due to my not having specimens of the latter.
The specimens before me do not exactly agree with Osten-Sacken’s description and
figure in that the femora are almost entirely greenish-black, only the extreme
apices being reddish, and the second wing-vein does not bend as abruptly forward
at its tip. The posterior basal cell of the wing is however a little more than
one-third as long as the discal cell and not half as long as it is called for by
Hendel’s description of his species. I accept the specimens before me as didymus.

Originally described from New Guinea. Papua: 1 specimen, Mafulu, 4,000 feet,
January 1934; 4 specimens, Mondo, 5,000 feet, February 1934 (L. E. Cheesman) ;
1 specimen, New Guinea: Marprik (J. R. Rigby and C. M. Deland).

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 117

ELASSOGASTER DIDYMOIDES Hendel.

Op. cit., viii, 1914, 76.
Originally described from Madang (Frederich-Wilhelmshafen), New Guinea,
and not known to me nor since recorded. See remarks above.

Scorinosoma Loew.

Mon. N. Amer. Dipt., iii, 1873, 45.

This genus is very closely related to Pseudepicausta Hendel and I have had to
redefine it on the basis of the characters of the genotype. I find that in the two
Australian species I previously described as belonging to Pseudepicausta and in
the genotype there are two pairs of fronto-orbital bristles present, which is not the
case in that genus, or at least in the genotype, and in the latter the mid tibia has
three almost equally long and strong apical spurs, while in Scotinosoma there are
but one long and two very short apical spurs. None of the species here included
have conspicuous dark markings on the wing except along the costa. There are
usually a number of short serially arranged setulae on the central portion of the
anteroventral surface of the hind tibia.

Key to the Species.

1. No distinct dark costal streak on the wing, the marginal cell (stigma) yellowish, and
the costal vein beyond it to apex dark brown, the brown colour not extending
on to membrane except faintly from apex of second to beyond apex of third
vein; the cross-veins at base of discal cell and the inner cross-vein rather
distinctly dark-clouded, the outer cross-vein very faintly so; no apical palette on
arista of male; posterior notopleural bristle not duplicated, short in female ....
0.00.0 0. O10 6:6 0.6 OD DUNE MU QD USO Ordo Oo O ole Crete aero eCnCIOIee ta oo eitrorcre Dee pICROIor aS erasa, Nn. sp.

A dark brown costal streak from base to apex of the wing that extends on to
membrane on at least a part of its extent; other characters not as above
ChE EOUO 6.666510 O16, SNe DRO DIS OnCIG ONCICICE CH OHO CRCORND ONO CICICU SID ERCNO RC RCI Cac sC GaceCr CIC n NCR RRC en CH RCAC RPT ae aS 2

2. Seutellum with 4 strong bristles; costal margin of wing uniformly black-brown from
base to apex, the dark colour not extending over the second vein except at its
tip; posterior notopleural bristle duplicated .............. completa (Malloch)

Scutellum with 6 well-developed bristles, the apical pair the longest; costa with a
brown streak from base to apex, darkest in the stigma and apically, yellowish
along the inner edge of the second vein and in the costal cell ............... 3
3. The brown costal streak not extending over the second vein except at its apex;
posterior notopleural bristle duplicated ................... attenuata (Malloch)
The brown costal streak extending spot-like over the second vein a little before its
apex; posterior notopleural bristle not duplicated; male with an apical palette on
CNC ATIS Care emer ne tenaE Nee wee Atay ar PSEA sire dian ol cicicsra secre pac ones nieomy cious bistrigata Hendel

SCOTINOSOMA BISTRIGATA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 120.
Described from both sexes taken at Cape York, Queensland. I have 2 males
from Northern Queensland. It ought to occur in New Guinea.

SCOTINOSOMA COMPLETA (Malloch).

Proc. US. Nat. Mus., xxviii, art. 15, 1931, 27 (Pseudepicausta).
Cairns, Queensland. Ought to occur in New Guinea.

SCOTINOSOMA ATTENUATA (Malloch).
Op. cit., Ixxviii, art. 15, 1931, 27 (Pseudepicausta).
Same locality as above.
SCOTINOSOMA ERASA, Nl. SD.

d, 2. Head brownish-yellow, frons brown, ocellar triangle, upper orbits, and
upper occiput, shiny brownish-black, frontal, facial, and postocular orbits white-

118 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

dusted. Frontal hairs yellow, the bristles black. All four vertical bristles strong,
the orbitals rather weak, and the divergent ocellars distinct though not very
long. Aristae bare, without apical palette in male, third antennal segment in that
sex much wider than in female and about four times as wide as the almost linear
parafacial. Postocular bristle indistinguishable from the setulose hairs.

Thorax shiny black, with distinct blue tinge, the mesonotum with dense white
dust on a broad central vitta and a similar vitta on each side, the intervening
glossy stripes much widened in front of the suture; pleura with a white-dusted
vitta from base of fore coxa to base of haltere; scutellum but slightly dusted.
Hairs mostly yellow, the bristles black. Legs brownish-black, fore coxae, fore
femora, all trochanters, and apices of mid and hind femora, tawny-yellow. Postero-
ventral bristles on fore femora rather long and fine; hind femora with several
bristles near apices on the anterodorsal surface. Wings yellowish-hyaline, veins
pale brown, darkest apically, the markings as described in the foregoing key to
the species. Inner cross-vein long, sloped outward at lower extremity, the latter at
two-fifths from the apex of discal cell; first posterior cell not widened at apex.
Abdomen metallic-blue, with a brownish patch on each side near base in the male.
Squamae and halteres yellow. Length, 6-7 mm.

Type, male, and allotype, Stradbroke Is., Queensland. May occur in New
Guinea.

PSEUDEPICAUSTA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 112.

The genotype, chalybea Doleschall, has no fronto-orbital bristles and the mid
tibia with three equally strong apical spurs. Whether the other four species
included below have these characters in common I do not know.

Key to the Species.
1. The entire wing beyond the outer cross-vein black-brown, with an oblique curved
white fascia before the apex; fore femur of male with a series of lanceolate

posteroventrall’ DriStless 6 ance stow eueleee ake slobarns SlGnaeaegeso cle Sek omne lagarosia Hendel

Wing not marked as above; fore femur of male without lanceolate bristles ...... 2

2. Vertex with only the outer divergent pair of bristles; both cross-veins of the wing
GAGEMCIOUGEE” ene icse ovate © suc cue line deustee © 6 Unie cou ie ele aiore aie cy arena: chalybea (Doleschall)
Vertexs with 4 strong, bristles the inner pair, IN CUnV.edi ay ere ietels crelcicieeieleleie sicueleiele iene 3

3. Species brown in colour, with grey dust; both cross-veins brown clouded, the marks
SCDATACC yo isi cieieicle oe, austere yevala latin tar awoney uel aiWeas a aioe corer ae aP ER Sc multilloides (Walker)
Species more or less metallic, generally blue or greenish-blue in colour ........... 4

4+. Inner cross-vein not clouded, outer one only faintly so .............. apicalis, n. sp.
Both cross-veins dark clouded, the marks connected in discal cell .............. 5

5. The broad brown zigzag cross-band ow the wing extends to the costa .............
SWRA CK ogsue hen viens (aie) e\ol a) olleticltovantcire teks saisile'ioivss ch eiiey axe ALCL a tay MNar ole eaelenenctensher ets angulata Hendel
The zigzag cross-band is interrupted above the inner cross-vein ... wallacei Hendel

PSEUDEPICAUSTA CHALYBEA (Doleschall).

Natuurk. Tijdschr. v. Ned.-Ind., xvii, 1858, 125 (Herina).

Apparently a widely distributed species, recorded from New Guinea northward
to the Philippine Islands. I have seen it from Aitape and Wewak (F. H. Taylor),
Aitape, New Guinea (L. E. Cheesman), Makada Is., near New Britain (F. H.
Taylor).

PSEUDEPICAUSTA LAGAROSIA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 118—? Dacus pompiloides Walker, Jour.
Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 116.

Described from a male from New Guinea. Hendel suggested the above
synonymy. The Walker species is from the Aru Islands.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 119

PSEUDEPICAUSTA MULTILLOIDES (Walker).

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 115 (Dacus).
New Guinea. Not recorded since its original description.

PSEUDEPICAUSTA ANGULATA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 118.
Celebes. I have seen this species from the Federated Malay States; it may

be expected to occur in New Guinea.
PSEUDEPICAUSTA WALLACEL Hendel.

Op. cit., viii, 1914, 117.

Described from a female from New Guinea.

The scutellum in this species has fine hairs in addition to the strong marginal
bristles.

PSEUDEPICAUSTA APICALIS, n. sp. PI. iv, fig. 17.

9. Similar in general colour to chalybea, but the mesonotum is largely brown-
dusted, which feature is best seen from the side, the disc of the scutellum is
also brownish-dusted. The mesonotal hairs are dark brown. The wing (PI. iv,
fig. 17) has the stigma dark brown, with a yellowish suffusion in the marginal
cell, there is a rather faint fuscous cloud on the outer cross-vein, and the apex
of the wing is fuscous from a little beyond the outer cross-vein to the tip. Legs
blackish-brown, fore femora and coxae and apical third or more of mid femora
brownish-yellow, mid metatarsus and most of hind one orange-yellow. Squamae
dark brown, knobs of halteres pale yellow. Vertex with 6 bristles, one small
orbital present, scutellum with 4 bristles. Other bristling as in chalybea. Length,
8 mm.

Type, Papua: Mafulu, 4,000 feet, Jan. 1934 (L. E. Cheesman).

The antennae are broken off in the type.

PoGonorTALis Hendel.

Hendel, in de Meijere, Tijdschr. v. Ent., liv, 1911, 370; Abhandl. Zool.-botan.
Ges., viii, 1914, 143.

This genus was first described in a footnote to a paper by de Meijere as above
listed and subsequently in the second paper: referred to above as a new genus.
As there is no question that Hendel supplied the data published by de Meijere,
the genus is credited to Hendel.

In the two species that I have seen there are a few setulae on the base of the
second vein on its underside, and there is a sharp raised edge on the anteroventral
margin of the hind femur about one-third from its apex in both sexes. Sometimes
there is a marked expansion of the jowls in the male and the bristles of the beard
are much shorter than in doclea, the genotype. The frons has two pairs of short
orbital bristles, the ocellars are minute, and the postocular bristle is of moderate
length.

Key to the Species.
1. Costal margin without a black or dark brown mark at apex of the stigma; body
pronzy or brassy-ereem S220, OR Ps ae a ma th. Yo dite, similis Hendel

Costal margin with a conspicuous black or dark brown mark at the apex of the
stigma that extends backward to or beyond the third vein; body blackish-

DRO WATE heeornarskerstsi a turn p arg PROP EE a LT ey ot hey sc ReBst otis sik cw ete Mapas 2
2. The black-brown apical spot on the wing does not extend basally to the apex of the
SECON VEIN A osesieoronsteve eck aust ecarre HORE oe rh te ae doclea (Walker)

The black-brown apical spot on the wing extends basally to the apex of second
vein; (Netherland: Indies) <i. aaa does ered ee eee uncinata de Meijere

120 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

POGONORTALIS DOCLEA (Walker).
List Dipt. Ins. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 1035 (Trypeta).—Pogonortalis barbifera
Hendel, Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 144.
An Australian species that very probably will be found in New Guinea.
Walker’s description unmistakably applies to Hendel’s genotype.

POGONORTALIS SIMILIS Hendel.
Op. cit., viii, 1914, 145.
Described from New Guinea.

RIVELLIA Robineau-Desvoidy.

Mém. Acad. Roy. Sci. Inst. de France, ii, Essai Myod., 1830, 729.

A large genus of almost cosmopolitan distribution, keys to the species of
which from the different faunal regions have been published by Hendel in his
paper on the subfamily. I present below a key to the recorded species from New
Guinea with the description of one new species.

Key to the Species.

1. Wing with only the subcostal cell and a spot at the apex dark brown ............
Se Soto eo Od Oo UOC EEE orice o eae cree ncror Ss, aoc connata Thomson

Whine swith Several Qay kama sClale, eet steric) ciiiensmrenaicicnetcletsictane tence tenetonet temen i Meter. 2

2. The oblique dark fasciae over the cross-veins more or less distinctly connected
at or near the hind margin of the wing; aristae usually distinctly pubescent or
sores a uel Ss Gc Go O of od DING OF O OPELEr oO O°OID 00) COORD Siro Daim Chord er ICES LD osO OOOO OG Crain 6

The oblique dark fasciae over the cross-veins of the wing not connected behind,
the one over the inner cross-vein ending at the fifth vein; aristae bare, or

pubescent (fusca); posterior basal cell of the wing hyaline ................. 3

3. The black fascia over the inner cross-vein connected in part with the black basal
TVD Ke Gaye arises eee ewoicoes fev s aocbaie a5 6 Gay nifares wy SSeS Won tis oh gs tome as gare lomeyroile Yolenslegnaey hoa affinis Hendel

The black fascia over the inner cross-vein separated from the basal black mark by

a hyalinesstripe about as) wide ais) the) Lascia smc scree coe si nie ciele cle steeielsveb oder) clene 4

4. Costal cell of the wing hyaline except at its base; the short black fascia over the
fuscatton of second and third veins and apex of the subcostal vein not fused with
the darkscloud in’ the anterior basal celle. 3-10 - eer fusca Thomson

Costal cell of the wing brown or black; the short black fascia over the fork of
second and third veins and apex of the subcostal vein fused with the black

Colour POLM tHe) WANE. WASS ya. pecs A cucbheucatee eee egse Cacao iano cues usah oles sacpet ay sncyohokey oun tears pee.

5. Thorax greenish-black; abdomen red at base or entirely so; legs brownish-black,
pases ofmmid: and hind! tarsi vellow= sec occ oe cco eee oer rufibasis, n. sp.
Thorax, abdomen, and legs, red, tibiae and tarsi brownish ...... ferruginea Hendel

6. Posterior basal cell of the wing and a streak along the fifth vein in basal half of
the discal cell hyaline; fusion of the fasciae over the cross-veins faint behind
tHE MMEEN AVE oy So as ees ee Sealant eas anne Soa ene A ova omepe tron ehetens dimidiata de Meijere

Posterior basal cell of the wing and basal half of the discal cell black-brown; fusion
of the fasciae over the cross-veins at or behind fifth vein very distinct, dark
Brown eesiebed «dt en. ctres att ach eho etidjea. sadanaiees basias- 8. Re ack 7

7. The dark marks on the wing not extending to the anal vein on the basal half; the
fusion of the fasciae over inner and outer cross-veins broad, unbroken behind
the fifth vein, but not attaining the hind margin of the wing except directly
below the outer cross-vein; mesonotum more or less reddish in front; head,
including the antennae and palpi, fulvous-yellow or red ........ connexa Hendel

The dark marks on the wing extending to the anal vein on almost its entire extent;
the fusion of the fasciae over inner and outer cross-veins evident at only the
hind margin of the wing; mesonotum blue-black; head, including the antennae
and palpi, black, the latter slightly whitened at apices ........ radiata Hendel

RIVELLIA CONNATA (Thomson).
Hug. Resa, Zool. 1, 1868, 575 (Hernia).

This species is common in Australia and has been recorded from Fiji, so that
it may yet be found in New Guinea.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 121

RIVELLIA FERRUGINEA Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 159.
The entire insect is usually reddish-yellow in colour, with the dorsum of the
thorax sometimes slightly darkened and the tibiae and tarsi brownish.
Described from New Guinea, but not in the present collection.

RIVELLIA RUFIBASIS, n. sp. PI. iv, fig. 18.

3, 2. Differs from ferruginea in having the thorax except the prothoracic
region greenish-black, the mesonotum with grey dust, the abdomen infuscated
apically in the male, brownish-red in the female, the legs except the bases of
the mid and hind tarsi brownish-black, and the wing markings darker and
broader, the brown streak along the apex of the costa in particular being much
wider. The third antennal segment is not angulate at the apex above, and the
arista is bare. Length, 5 mm.

Type, male, allotype and 2 paratypes, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor);
one paratype, Aitape, New Guinea, Oct.-Nov. 1936 (L. E. Cheesman).

RIVELLIA FUSCA (Thomson).
Eug. Resa, Zool. 1, 1868, 575 (Hernia); Osten-Sacken, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr.,
xxvi, 1882, 211.
A small blue-black or greenish-black species, with the black fasciae on the wing
very slender.
Recorded from Java, the Philippines, Formosa, and the Solomon Islands. New
Guinea: Aitape, Oct.-Nov. 1936 (L. E. Cheesman).

RIVELLIA AFFINIS Hendel.
Abhandal. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 161.
Described from New Guinea and not in this collection.

RIVELLIA DIMIDIATA de Meijere. PI. iv, fig. 19.

Tijdschr. v. Ent., li, 1908, 122.

This species was described without locality record by de Meijere, Hendel listing
it as probably from Java, but de Meijere subsequently gave the type locality as
New Guinea.

Three specimens, Dutch New Guinea: Lake Sentani Iffar, August 1936 (L. E.
Cheesman ).

RIVELLIA CONNEXA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 163.

A smaller and more intensely black marked species.

Originally described from Astrolabe Bay, New Guinea, from females only.
I have before me 3 specimens from Wewak, New Guinea, and 5 from Kavieng,
New Ireland, one pair of the latter taken in copula (F. H. Taylor), Makada Is.,
near New Britain (F. H. Taylor); Papua: Mediri (Fly River), one specimen
12.xii.22 (A. R. McCulloch).

RIVELLIA RADIATA Hendel.
Op. cit., viii, 1914, 161.
Described from New Guinea: One specimen, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H.
Taylor).
ASYNTONA Osten-Sacken.
Bull. Ent. Soc. France, 1881, 135.
A peculiar genus, readily distinguished by the wide head, especially in the
male, and the downwardly-flexed wings that generally adhere quite closely to the

122 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

body and appear wrinkled or broken. This flexure is caused by a diagonal weak
line at or near the middle of the wing with corresponding weak parts of the
veins extending apically, and a crease extending from near the base to apex along
the centre of the wing. The posterior basal cell of the wing is much longer than
the discal cell, and the fourth vein ends in the wing tip. The third vein is not
raised above the level of the membrane on the upper side and usually the setulae
there are very sparse or even lacking. A striking feature of both sexes before
me is the presence of 6 evenly-spaced bristles along the edge of the vertex in the
genotype. But in one specimen of flaviceps the second bristle from each eye is
placed well forward of the others, indicating that it is really the upper fronto-
orbital and not an extra vertical bristle. There is also frequently a very weak
additional orbital on each side rather high on the frons.

ASYNTONA TETYROIDES (Walker). PI. iv, fig. 20.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 112 (Lamprogaster).—Asyntona
doleschalli Osten-Sacken, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr., xxvi, 1882, 224.

A deep metallic-blue coloured species, with dark wings marked with a few
small sub-hyaline dots, the head with a yellow postocellar streak and the tarsi
except the apical two segments yellow. Eyes in male produced into a point on
outer side, rounded in female. Frons wider than long, narrowed in front; lateral
edges of frons, especially in the male, beaded.

Wewak, New Guinea. Recorded from New Guinea, and the Philippine Islands.
Both sexes are represented in Mr. Taylor’s material, attracted to light.

ASYNTONA FLAVICEPS Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 291.
Similar to the genotype, distinguished from it by the entirely yellow head,
tibiae, and tarsi. The frons in both sexes is longer than wide, parallel-sided, and
not beaded on lateral edges in either sex. Eyes in both sexes rounded.

Wewak, New Guinea, both sexes (F. H. Taylor) attracted to light; Solomon
Islands. Described from one female, Cretin Is., New Guinea.

Navupopa Osten-Sacken.
Bull. Soc. Ent. France, 1881, 135.

Quite similar to Asyntona, distinguished by the wing venation as stated in the
generic key given above. The genotype has no orbital bristles, but most of the
other species have at least one distinct pair. Hendel did not see the genotype,
and merely copied Osten-Sacken’s original description.

NAUPODA REGINA Hendel.
Abhandal. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 298.

This species was described from New Guinea and North Queensland. I have
it from Cairns, Queensland, and a large series from Wewak, New Guinea (F. H.
Taylor).

A Fijian species, simmondsi Bezzi, may yet be found in New Guinea. It differs
from other speeies of the genus in having the aristae long-haired, and from
regina in having the wing black from the base to the middle, the apical half or
less and the hind margin hyaline.

None of the other species of the genus are likely to occur in New Guinea.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 123

ZYGAENULA Doleschall.

Natuurk. Tijdschr. Ned.-Ind., xvii, 1858, 117.

The genotype, paradoxa Doleschall, is unknown to me and is not known to
occur in New Guinea. Hendel in his “Revision of the Platystominae’”, p. 292, gives
only Gerstaeker’s description, which does not include details of the structure or
armature of the mid femur. It is thus impossible to determine the validity of
Mesoctenia, though its author, Enderlein, had apparently both sexes of paradoxa
from Amboina before him when he erected his new genus.

MeEsocTEenrIA Enderlein.

Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berl., xi, 1924, 130.

This genus was erected for the reception of a species, ralumensis, assumed
to be new to science, but which I consider is without doubt a synonym of Zygaenula
coalescens Hendel. I distinguish the genus from Brea Walker, in the foregoing
generic key. It is hard to understand why Hendel did not couple his coalescens
with the species of Brea in his generic key as the mid femoral characters are
similar in both. Mesoctenia may be a synonym of Zygaenula; the genotype of
the latter is unknown to me.

Key to the Species.

1. Legs yellow, femora black; mesopleura with a bright yellow upper margin ..........
cede obs lgi ase tobe We psy wivcney ged apis eg ewtsifa Paik istyoMeys ‘= <M uSelee. ousk Sea bes 3 dence’ <Pavedecsye sun rresa hilaris (Hendel)

Legs entirely yellow; mesopleura black ....... PY Hale biots SEP OTO CO CtECenG: Gert nit isl ao levo ato 2
2. Wing with three pale slender dark fasciae beyond middle ...... coalescens (Hendel)
WIN Se withetounssdarketaseiale «chau ciceswcdeyere vicice pyar eueks Crave ice: scekey slats celyphoides (Walker)

MESOCTENIA COALESCENS (Hendel).

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 293 (Zygaenula) —Mesoctenia ralumensis,
Enderlein, Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berl., xi, 1924, 131.

Described from two males from New Britain, redescribed from the same
locality by Enderlein, and represented by a male now before me from apparently
the same lot.

Besides the three slender dark fasciae, the wing is pale brownish basally as
far out as the apex of the posterior basal cell.

MESOCTENIA HILARIS (Hendel).

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 294 (Zygaenula).

Described from a female specimen taken at Maroka, New Guinea. I have
before me a fine female specimen which shows the same wing markings as
coalescens and in addition a small dark spot at the apex of the fourth vein.

Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, August 1933 (L. E..Cheesman).

MESOCTENIA CELYPHOIDES (Walker).

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 112 (Lamprogaster).
Known from the original description. Generic position in question.

Brea Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 117.

This genus is readily distinguished from its nearest relatives by the very
much stouter mid than hind femur with its two series of stout spines on the ventral
surface, the curved mid tibia which fits between the two series of femoral spines,
and the short hairs on the upper surface of the aristae, the hairs being present
only at base below.

124 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

Hendel gave a key to six species in his paper on the subfamily, all except one
being known to him and described from New Guinea. In 1924 Enderlein described
two additional species, one from New Guinea. Only two of the species are known
to me, but I present below an adaptation of Hendel’s key to aid in the identification
of the species.

Key to the Species.
1. The large black mark over the inner cross-vein of the wing enclosing a hyaline spot

IN) the) Mare imal COLT rege meten scence ware Pee re Nee (es si sep Geeta) sea ou tee Cone Cede Wecteol er aoe rare cote 2
The large black mark over the inner cross-vein without a hyaline spot in the marginal
(612) | RAS ies Scene. CHOCOIG GAME CIOROIOION SS O Clin ICICI ER TEDR CEO a ipuick CRc GID eao miohcle encores OIp reno 3

bo

Legs yellow, only the fore femora at apices and the fore tibiae at bases blackened ;
mesonotum black, with a broad grey central vitta .............. discalis Walker
Legs yellow, all the tibiae black, femoral bases brown; mesonotum dull olive-green,
With) two) bLoad: COlee-pLOwMvilcaer erica oclnroricl reer eicncione discifera Hendel
The dark fascia over the outer cross-vein is much broader than the hyaline strip
separating it from the fascia over the inner cross-vein, being about equal in
width to the length of the outer cross-vein, and connected with the anterior fascia

(vt)

in the discal cell; mid and hind femora yellow .............. flavipes de Meijere

Only a slender dark fascia over the outer cross-vein that is not connected with the
broad warkvover itheminner CrOSS-VeIny Ge Ate cae ieee Gio casione siclcitiens eee = eel lets oe 4

4. Head largely, and fore femora entirely, black; male without an apical palette on the
PAT ich nites Gigi o b-o"ols ooo DIG CIE ONG OR Taio tobi c oimn olor cio alo aro dic nouhuysi de Meijere

Head and all, or almost all, of the fore femora orange-yellow; male with an apical
lanceolateupalecccrOnmenevaniSta ea eyenornacierar aoe ret meres siapateionselonane etal ecniae Menai aire 5

5. Mid and hind femora and all tibiae black; the black mark over the inner cross-vein
not filling all of basal half of the discal cell, nor extending over the fifth vein;
humeri white-dusted on upper edges .....-....-...+-+-eece08- contraria Walker

Mid femora more or less blackened, more extensively so in the female, hind femora
entirely orange-yellow, bases of all tibiae blackened; the black mark over the inner
cross-vein filling the entire basal half of the discal cell and extending well over the
Litas ea eebae ho hy ooo > GeTORcG Cid one eC nO Dao cROaaaare (ond Gt Grohe c io cling Hickok rosa oi magnifica Hendel

BREA DISCALIS Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 117.
Described from Aru Islands and not subsequently reported.

BREA DISCIFERA Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 270.
Described from Key Island from a single female.
Most nearly like magnifica, differing as noted in the key to species.

BREA FLAVIPES de Meijere.

Nov. Guin., ix, Zool., livr. 3, 1918, 371; Hendel, Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii,
1914, 272.

Described from one female from Biwak Island, New Guinea.

Similar to magnifica in most respects, differing as noted in the key ae in
having the tibiae dark brown except their apices and the apical half of the fore
femora also dark brown.

Hendel suggests the possibility that this is discalis, though Walker says that
there is a ‘blackish line’ over the outer cross-vein, which would hardly equal the
broad black fascia present in flavipes.

BREA CONTRARIA Walker. PI. iv, fig. 21.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 117.— Maria caeruleiventris Bigot, Rev. et
Mag. de Zool., 1859, 311.

This species was originally described from New Guinea and recorded from
Aru Is. It has the legs more extensively black than any of the other species

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 125

and is readily distinguished from any of them by the wing markings. MHalteres
black-brown.
A large series of both sexes, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

BREA MAGNIFICA Hendel. PI. v, fig. 22.

Abhandal. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 271.

Originally described from a single male taken in New Guinea.

Hendel states in his key that the “four hind legs” are entirely yellow, but
in his description he gives the bases of all tibiae as black-brown. The latter
statement is correct for most specimens of the male sex, but the apices of the
mid femora are in all females more or less distinctly blackened, and in a few
specimens the greater part of the mid femora is black. The different wing
markings are sufficient to distinguish it from any other species of the genus. The
costal edge between the apices of the third and fourth veins is narrowly browned,
which is not the case in contraria.

A large series of both sexes, Wewak, New Guinea (O82 H. Taylor).

BREA RALUMENSIS Enderlein.

Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berl., xi, 1924, 129.

This species was described from a single female from Ralum, New Britain.

It was merely distinguished from contraria by a few characters, of which the
following appear to be the most important: Mesonotum with three slender vittae
of yellowish-brown tomentum (white in contraria), fore coxae and fore femora
brown (yellow in contraria); of the brown basal fascia there is only a small spot
on the fork of the radius. :

It may be a variety of contraria, but I have seen no specimen that appears to
agree with it from New Quinea.

BREA BASILIS Enderlein.

Op. cit., xi, 1924, 129.

This species apparently falls with discalis and discifera in the foregoing key.
It differs from both in having the mesonotum black, with thick yellowish-grey
tomentum; there is no mention of vittae in the description. The legs are ochre-
yellow, mid and hind tibiae brown, and the fore tibiae somewhat brownish. Length,
7-5 mm.

North-east New Guinea.

I have seen no species that agrees with this one.

PTEROGENIA Bigot.

Rev. et Magas. de Zool., (2) xi, 1859, 312.

Species of this genus have been recorded from the Straits Settlements,
Sarawak, Borneo, Batchian, Molucca, Aru, Java, Formosa, Ceylon, the Philippine
Islands, New Guinea, and Australia. Hendel keyed 14 species and included 13
additional species described by Walker that he tentatively assigned to the genus
in his large paper on the Platystominae. The New Guinea and Australian species
may be distinguished as in the key given below.

A striking character of the species before me is the presence of short stiff
hairs on the upper side of the stem vein of the wing at its base as in Huprosopia.

Key to the Species of New Guinea and Australia.
1. Scutellum black, with the margin pale yellow 2
Scutellum entirely black or dark brown 3

126 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

2. The preapical dark fascia on the wing meeting the dark cloud over the outer cross-
vein; the small hyaline costal spot through stigma extending to third vein; palpi

MOKA EN EHO cogaoone FOodbe oo bonso Ss sobageanoD ooo dC DEO pectoralis Hendel
Preapical dark fascia on the wing not meeting the dark cloud over the outer cross-
vein; the small hyaline costal spot through stigma not extending over second

VEIN Palpi eEncirely. VSllO ws yer lee oneisie cele eels) =) «\-lleledelele lise) elo eee similis, n. sp.

3. Thorax entirely shiny black; aristae with very long hairs; palpi blackish-brown ....
WARIO CTOs Cid ao sob dino Daya Cod clan Uo dio gin si cd 0 OO Oona OG ‘.,..... fuliginosa Hendel
Thorax partly red or yellow; aristae moderately long-haired; palpi red, apices
aig Fear gays haere es on Big Biers gio oie DIO UDI Oa ODO d cadoomoG GoM wea odin occ Oo 4

4. Frons and mesonotum black-haired; face and lower occiput blackish-brown ......

ECC SEY. TAR. SEY cece. ctl ches aictciearectatecet tehate: PemetaveMaycRatehe (ehehet ot. nubecula Hendel
Frons and mesonotum golden-haired; face and lower occiput red .. latericia Hendel

PTEROGENIA PECTORALIS Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 316.

Described from Bogadjim (Stephansort), New Guinea. I have seen one
specimen from North-east New Guinea (Kaiser Wilhelmsland), and one, Papua:
Kokoda, 1,200 feet, August 1933 (L. H. Cheesman).

PTEROGENIA SIMILIS, N. Sp.

3, 9. Similar to pectoralis, but the wing pattern is different, the frons
narrower, the legs preponderantly yellow as in the variety of pectoralis described
by Hendel (Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 316).

Type, male, Kuranda, Queensland (Dodd).

PTEROGENIA FULIGINOSA Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 309.

This New Guinea species is not known to me except from the description.
Described from Maroka, New Guinea.

PTEROGENIA NUBECULA Hendel.
Op. cit., viii, 1914, 314.
Described from Burpengary, Queensland, and New South Wales.

I have two specimens from Kuranda, Queensland, sent to me by Mr. F. H.
Taylor. It may occur in New Guinea.

PTEROGENIA LATERICIA Hendel.

Op. cit., viii, 1914, 312.

This form was considered doubtfully distinct from nubecula by its describer.
I have seen no specimen that has golden hairs on the mesonotum, but occasionally
in this and related genera teneral specimens have the hairs yellowish instead of
black as in the mature individuals of the same species.

Queensland.

NEOHEMIGASTER, 0. N.

Hemigaster Rondani (nec Brullé), Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Gen., vii, 1875, 431.

This genus is distinguished from Pterogenia by the following characters: Base
of the stem-vein of the wing bare above, lateral angles of the clypeus more or less
produced downward and with a small rounded elevation on the dorsum, vertex with
four strong bristles, humeral bristle present. The humeral bristle is not always
present in Pterogenia, and while the antepenultimate section of the fifth vein is
either bare or setulose in that genus, in all species of Neohemigaster it is setulose.
The apex of the second abdominal tergite and usually to a lesser extent the base

of the third in all species of the latter is compressed in centre and furnished with
a sharp keel-like elevation.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 127

This last character is met with also in Tropidogastrella Hendel, but in the
latter the third antennal segment is much longer, reaching to or beyond the
epistome, and the structure of the face and prelabrum is different. Despite the
removal of this genus so far from Pterogenia in Hendel’s key to the genera, it is
closely related to both the genera now under discussion.

I have proposed the new name Neohemigaster for Rondani’s concept, with the
same genotype.

NEOHEMIGASTER ALBOVITTATA Rondani.

Op. cit., vii, 1875, 431.

I identify as this species a male from Sandakan, Borneo, sent me some years
ago by the late C. F. Baker.

Although no species known to me from New Guinea is referable to this genus,
there may be such that are as yet unknown to me, and the acceptance of the genus
contrary to Hendel’s action, who placed the genotype in Pterogenia, appears to
justify the inclusion of the above data in this paper.

I have seen two additional species of the genus from Sibuyan Island.

CHAETORIVELLIA de Meijere.

Nov. Guin., ix, Zool., livr. 3, 1913, 376.

A monobasic genus, distinguished from its allies by the single pair of strong
orbital and vertical bristles, the very short antennae which are not half as long
as the face and inserted at the middle of the eye in profile, the plumose aristae,
lack of humeral, anterior notopleural, supra-alar, and prescutellar acrostichal
bristles. Scutellum haired, with four marginal bristles.

CHAETORIVELLIA TRIFASCIATA (Doleschall).

Natuurk. Tijdschr. v. Nederl. Ind., xvii, 1858, 121 (Ortalis)—Ortalis
punctifascia Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., vi, 1862, 15.

A small glossy blue-black species, with black head on which there is a silvery-
white stripe round the eye-margins; antennae and palpi and lower half of face
brown. Pleura with a silvery central vitta. Basal two segments of all tarsi orange-
yellow. Wings whitish-hyaline, with three dark brown fasciae as follows: a short
one from the humeral cross-vein to the anal cell, a broad complete one filling the
area between the apices of the subcostal and first veins that encloses a small
hyaline spot on the costa at the middle of the stigma, and a third one much
narrower from the costa between the apices of first and second veins to fifth vein
and enclosing the outer cross-vein which sends an equally wide streak along the
costa to the apex of the fourth vein. -

Recorded from New Guinea, Djilolo, Molucca, and Amboina (type locality).
One female, Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, August 1933 (L. E. Cheesman).

SCHOLASTES Loew.

Mon. N. Amer. Dipt., iii, 1873, 38; Hendel, Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914,
248; Curran, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., xxii, ser. 4, no. 1, 1936, 23.

The robust habitus, haired aristae, strong orbital and sternopleural bristles,
the subtriangular, quite densely short-haired scutellum with its six marginal
bristles, and the almost invariable yellow sublateral lines on the mesonotum and
marginal yellow line on the scutellum readily distinguish this genus from others
in the family.

Hendel recognized 6 species, and in 1936 Curran described 3 additional species.

I give below a key to those species known to me, and notes on some others ee <

those that they are apparently most closely related to.

128 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

Key to the Species.

1. Supra-alar bristle lacking; mesonotum with almost invariably four pairs of dorso-
central bristles, the anterior one at or slightly in front of the suture; arista
of male with, that of female without, an apical palette; first wing-vein setulose

Onca aLt. OL tse basal naltsbelOwemcrierleietsterere crete riers nyo aeroieienee cinctus Guérin
Supra-alar bristle present; niesonotum with 3 or 2 pairs of short dorsocentrals,
all qpostsutubalisficess £5. dead ao Siete ee Restos ole op folleifols <elsds& ctf & dpteieeetsyateda fot cide. do 2

bo

The prescutellar pair of acrostichal bristles lacking; dorsocentrals 0+1 or 0+2;
sublateral pale line on mesonotum and pale line on margin of the scutellum
inconspicuous, the ground colour yellowish-brown; first wing-vein bare below;
neither sex with an apical palette on arista ................ aitapensis, n. sp.

Prescutellar pair of acrostichal bristles quite strong; dorsocentrals 0+2 or 0+3;
yellow sublateral lines on mesonotum and the yellow marginal line on the
COHU ATT CRUG CORIMGHOUS scobcococobandeaddooongpeoseoudscusobooboaboosbcc 3

Arista with a lanceolate preapical palette in both sexes; dorsocentral bristles 0+2 ...
SEAR ets Gus pict 6 ec ClAls Al GLEEE AS Cac ae CL AO ICR CRCNES ERCunICL Tea SEA ORES ie te eee lonchifera Hendel

eo

4. Dorsocentral bristles 0+3; general colour black, the thoracic lines whitish-yellow ;
wing with two narrow complete, or almost complete, black fasciae, one over the
inner cross-vein and the other over the outer cross-vein ........ taylori, n. sp.

Dorsocentral bristles 0+ 2; general colour dark brown, the pale lines on the thorax
not very conspicuous; wing speckled with pale brown, two darker outstanding
subquadrate marks on the costa, one at the stigma and the other before apex
Of SECON AVEInN ihe Ais 0 Fis he 8S EE AAA SEE EEE bimaculatus Hendel

SCHOLASTES CINCTUS (Guérin). PI. v, fig. 23.

Voy. de la Coquille, Zool., ii, 1830, 299 (Platystoma).

This widely distributed species occurs from the Malayan region to and
including Australia.

It must be noted that I distinguish the supra-alar from the postalar bristles,
contrary to the system used by Bezzi and Hendel. In cinctus there are two strong
postalar bristles and no supra-alar. No writer on the group has mentioned this
character heretofore, and I am unable to determine whether or not whitneyi Curran
has the supra-alar bristle. The latter species is described as having three pairs
of dorsocentrals, and though the characteristic ring-like mark over the outer cross-
vein of the species is similar to that seen in cinctus, the markings are more
fasciform, and the tip of the wing is shown as having a blackish spot, whereas in
cinctus the extreme tip is clear.

A series of specimens from Makada Is., Pondo, New Britain (F. H. Taylor);
New Guinea: Aitape, Vanimo, Wewak (F. H. Taylor), Marprik (J. R. Rigby and
C. M. Deland); and another from Dutch New Guinea: Humboldt Bay, Lake
Sentani; Papua: Kokoda (L. E. Cheesman); Mt. Lamington (Northern Division)
(C. T. McNamara).

SCHOLASTES AITAPENSIS, n. sp. Pl. v, fig. 24.

3, 2. Head brownish-yellow, frons with a broad brown transverse band on
upper half leaving only a yellow line on vertex, and a blackish-brown transverse
band on anterior half that is darkest on the anterior carina; face without a dark
mark; antennae and palpi orange-yellow. Frons a little longer than wide, slightly
widened in front, with a marked transverse carina above the lunule, the latter
broadly arched. All four vertical and the single pair of orbital bristles strong.
Aristae moderately long-haired to beyond the middle, without apical palette. Genal
bristle strong. Thorax brownish-yellow, darker on the mesonotum, the sublateral
pale lines quite distinct, but the pale edges of the scutellum not as noticeable;
pleura with a pale line above. Supra-alar bristle strong, presutural acrostichals

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 129

lacking, dorsocentrals usually two pairs, the anterior pair small and weak. Legs
yellow, apical two segments of all tarsi infuscated, metatarsi paler than the
remainder of legs.

Wings greyish-hyaline, with dark brown markings (PI. v, fig. 24), the most
conspicuous being a short fascia from the costa at base of the stigma that extends
backwards to the fourth vein, two similar marks at apex of the second vein,
and a larger spot in the wing tip that is very narrowly separated from the margin,
and in addition to these there are two short streaks from costa to fourth vein
between the two first-mentioned costal marks, the outermost one sometimes con-
necting with a mark on the outer cross-vein, four in the first posterior cell, two in
the second posterior cell, a streak from middle of the discal cell to near hind
margin, and a curved streak basad of the latter. Halteres yellow. Abdomen
coloured as thorax, but the tergites are more or less extensively violet-blue;
hypopygium of male yellow, genital cone of female black. Length, 6-7 mm.

Type, male, allotype and 6 paratypes, Aitape, New Guinea, 1 paratype, Madang,
New Guinea (F. H. Taylor); one, Solomon Is., Shortland Is., Korovo, 23.iv.1934
(H. T. Padgen, Brit. Mus.).

SCHOLASTES LONCHIFERA Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 253.
Described from Cook Islands. I have examined the type specimen in the

United States National Museum. It is a common species in the Society Islands
and probably will yet be found in New Guinea.

SCHOLASTES BIMACULATUS Hendel.
Abhandal. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 252.
Makada Is., off New Britain (F. H. Taylor).

SCHOLASTES TAYLORI, n. sp. PI. v, fig. 25.

db, 9. Head testaceous-yellow, occiput largely black above, frons with two
broad black bands, one just in front of the vertex and the other on anterior
margin, the latter separated from eyes by a narrow yellow line. Upper half of
face except lunule black. Antennae and palpi brownish-yellow. Frons about 1:25
times as long as wide, slightly widest at middle, upper orbits glossy; four vertical
and two orbital bristles strong. Arista moderately long-haired to near apex,
without apical palette. Genal bristle strong. Thorax black, with a sharply
contrasted pale yellow submarginal line on mesonotum that is. broken at the suture
and connected with the pale yellow marginal line on the scutellum; humeri pale
yellow; pleura yellow on upper margin and with a less conspicuous yellow central
vitta, the lower part of sternopleura yellowish-brown. Supra-alar and prescutellar
acrostichal bristles present, dorsocentrals usually 3 pairs. Legs pitchy-black, mid
and hind tibiae except their apices yellowish-brown, basal two tarsal segments pale
yellow.

Wings hyaline, with brownish-black transverse streaks (PI. v, fig. 25); the
most conspicuous being a fascia from stigma to hind margin, and another from
apex of first vein to hind margin that covers the bend in second vein and
encloses the outer cross-vein, at which latter point there is a hyaline central
spot; in addition to these there is a narrow streak between them from the
stigma to the inner cross-vein, 3 or 4 streaks in the apical third, and a number
of paler spots in basal third of the wing. Squamae white, with parts of edge

L

130 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

blackened. Abdomen blue-black in female, each tergite in male with a pale
yellow apical margin. Length, 6-5-7-5 mm.
Type, male, allotype and 5 paratypes, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).
This species closely resembles distigma Hendel, but lacks the two black spots
in the lower extremities of the facial foveae that distinguish the Javanese species.

ACHIOSOMA Hendel.

Gen. Insectorum, Fasc. 157, 1914, 15th April, 100; Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges.,
viii, 1914, 15th June, 200.

This genus resembles Achias superficially, but the squamae are very much
smaller, and the general structure much less robust. Hendel accepted both of
Walker’s species as valid, though Osten-Sacken considered there was but one
species.

ACHIOSOMA DACOIDES (Walker).

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., viii, 1865, 183 (Achias).—Zygothrica robusta
Bigot, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, x, ser. 5, 1880, 93.—Achias gracilis de Meijere, Nov.
Guin., ix, Zool. livr. 3, 1913, 373.

I have been unable to see a specimen of this species, or at least a specimen
that agrees with the description of Walker or with that of Hendel in 1914. Unless
there is very considerable variation in the markings of the head, and to a lesser
extent in the colours of the legs and thorax, it appears to me possible that
Hendel did not have his specimen correctly identified. He states that there is
a black cross-band on the anterior margin of the frons that sends a branch down
each antennal fovea widening below and ending at the epistome, and that there
is another parallel-margined black stripe on the gena from the eye to the genal
margin. The vertex has no black fascia. Walker states that there are two black
“vertical” bands by which he means frontal bands, so that I interpret this to
include a vertical and an anterior frontal band. Both the descriptions give the
legs as preponderantly black, though Hendel gives a small portion of the femora
blackened at apices, while Walker gives them with a small portion black at bases.
I believe Walker to have made an error here and that Hendel is correct. Walker
gives the halteres as having black knobs, which may or may not be correct. He
also gives the mesonotum as having three black stripes.

Type locality, Salwatty Island. Recorded from New Guinea.

ACHIOSOMA ASPICIENS (Walker).

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., vii, 1864, 229 (Achias).

This species is rather similar to the genotype, but in addition to having the
costa with a black border extending back to the third vein on its entire length
and slightly over that vein at apex, it has a large brown cloud over the outer
cross-vein. The mid and hind femora are also entirely yellow.

Type locality Waigou Island, North-west Dutch New Guinea.

ACHIOSOMA COSTALIS, nN. SD.

®. A brownish-yellow species, but slightly shiny.

Frons with a narrow dark brown band on vertex from eye to eye, enclosing
ocelli, a fainter subquadrate brown patch in centre of front, and on each side
in front below level of the brown mark an oblique black streak from eye to
level of base of third antennal segment, widened inwardly, and continued down-
ward as a line on each parafacial edge, the foveae yellow, and each side of the
facial carina with a brown streak that is linear above and widened below; gena

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 131

with a black stripe from eye to lower margin, narrowed below. Head about 1:25
times as wide as thorax, frons about four times as wide as one eye, much depressed
centrally, without bristles. Gena nearly twice as high as eye; width of head
at epistome less than half that across eyes; face slightly depressed above epistome
in profile. Arista moderately long-haired.

Thorax with dense yellow dusting on mesonotum, most noticeable posteriorly,
and with faint traces of narrow vittae in front, the pleura whitish-grey-dusted,
most densely so centrally, scutellum tawny-yellow, basal half of disc with many
microscopic black dots. The only well-developed bristles are the posterior noto-
pleurals and the apical pair of scutellars, the anterior notopleural and the other
four scutellars reduced to fine short hairs; disc of scutellum bare.

Wings glassy, veins brown, costa with a dark brown streak from base to
apex that extends backward to the third vein on its entire extent and narrowly
over that vein at its apex, the tip of the dark colour reaching tip of fourth
vein. First posterior cell narrowed at apex; inner cross-vein slightly oblique;
penultimate section of fourth vein about three-fourths as long as ultimate; discal
cell from base to inner cross-vein much narrower than anterior basal cell. Squamae
brownish-yellow. Halteres yellow. Legs tawny-yellow, bases of all tibiae rather
broadly dark brown, entire fore tarsi black-brown. All femora with some short
strong erect spines on the apical fourth or less below. Abdomen yellow, with the
sides of each tergite brown, the central pale part with glistening yellow pile. Basal
composite tergite subpetiolate. Length, 12 mm.

Type, Western New Guinea: Mt. Nomo, south of Mt. Bougainville, 700 feet,
February 1936 (L. H. Cheesman). British Museum.

Apparently the members of this genus are rare, but few having been
recorded, and a careful examination of a series of specimens from the same locality
may show that what I am considering to be valid species are merely variants of a
single species.

ACHIOSOMA NIGRIFACIES, n. sp. Pl. v, fig. 26.

©. Differs from the three already described species in having the head except
a centrally interrupted yellow fascia at middle of the frons dull black, and in
having the wing with the inner cross-vein broadly dark brown, the dark colour
connected with the dark costal stripe, and a large dark brown apical mark that
begins well before the outer crouss-vein, and extends to tip, is darkest on the
costa, fading out along the hind margin (PI. v, fig. 26).

Head rather dull black, the frons slightly shiny with a white-dusted line
on each side that extends down over the parafacial edges, the facial foveae white-
dusted. Antennae dark brown; palpi brownish-yellow. Frons almost half the
head-width, wider than long, depressed across centre at the yellow mark, the
head a little wider than thorax at bases of the wings, vertex with only the
outer vertical showing, this short, but the head is pressed against the thorax so
that it is impossible to determine if all four verticals have been present; ocelli
very close together and well in front of the vertex. Facial foveae deep, extending
to lower third of face, antennae lying within the foveae, third segment about
five times as long as wide; aristae plumose; palpi wider than antennae; prelabrum
exposed. Gena nearly as high as eye, and twice as high as width of parafacial,
with a deep broad oblique posterior depression above.

Mesonotum dull black, with three golden tomentose vittae, the central one
straight to near posterior extremity where it widens out and connects narrowly
on the hind border with the laterals, the latter not covering the humeri, spreading

132 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

inward at the suture, and widening on the posterior calli. The humeral bristle
is lacking, as are also the dorsocentrals, supra-alar, mesopleural, sternopleural,
and pteropleural, the anterior notopleural is short and fine, the posterior one
strong, the anterior postalar is present but the other is not; pleura almost
uniformly white tomentose; scutellum with ten marginal bristles that become
stronger to the apical pair, all situated on small elevated bases or warts, the disc
bare, microscopically granulose.

Legs black, fore femora brown, mid and hind femora yellow on basal two-
thirds, mid and hind tarsi brownish-yellow. Fore femora with three or four short
spines on apical third of the posteroventral surface, mid and hind pair with the
same armature but a little weaker and on the anteroventral surface. Dark parts
of the wing densely short brown-haired, third posterior cell with less dense but
still distinct hairing, the other cells glassy and apparently bare. Inner cross-vein
much nearer to apex of discal cell than in the other species. Halteres with
fuscous knobs. Abdomen shiny brownish-black, with grey dust at constriction
of the composite basal tergite, and large patches of dust on sides of the other
tergites, grey on the third, and yellow on the fourth and fifth. Hairs pale on
basal half, dark on apical half. Length, 11 mm.

Type, Papua: Mt. Lamington District, Northern Division, Jan—Feb. 1929
(C. T. McNamara), in Australian Museum. One paratype, topotypical, by same
collector, July 1927, retained by the author.

The presence of warts at bases of the scutellar bristles is unique in this
species, as is also the number of scutellar bristles, the others as far as I know
having but six such bristles. While the character may not invariably hold it
appears worth mentioning that there are no fine pale hairs on the ridge above
the base of the lower squama in this genus and that such hairs do occur in the
species of Achias that I have examined.

Acutias Fabricius.

Syst. Antliat., 1805, 247 (Diptera). :

This genus is readily separated from Achiosoma by the much larger lower
squama, and the more numerous thoracic bristles.

There are 13 species recorded from New Guinea. MHendel’s key is the only
one that incorporates all the species and I present a modification of it herein
in the hope that it may prove of value in the identification of the species.

The genotype, oculatus Fabricius, is not definitely known, the only data on it
available being in the older descriptions. It was recorded originally from Java,
but if this is correct it is the only species of the genus known from outside the
Australian and New Guinea regions. Hendel suggested that his platychirus was
the same species.

Key to the Species.

1. Wings with no dark costal streak, with at most a slight yellowish shade or some
small pale brown marks near base or very faint marks on the edge ....---- 2
Wing with the costal border dark brown or black, sometimes more or less broken
by evcllowishmoreneddish patehesievecimie ci. cuciethelener ee ienened- Tele deieh che lenole lesen colons 6
Thorax, tibiae, and frons yellow, the last with a round black spot; outer cross-vein
ClOUGCAN WATT DL OWA ers store onc ics «cis tie wile ctete oPe states tenenaete Seeeuatatttone venustulus Walker
Thorax ‘and ‘tibiae ‘black’ feeters oe sicehoneteles chedae RA GReRAURVORGE. eRalcDsRelekel-) Sieketetetie) kuteMied= oB-veltens
Ground-colour of thorax and scutellum deep metallic black-blue, with slight violet
tinge, the mesonotum with surface shagreened and with dark vittae, scutellum
almost dull, bare, with 6 marginal bristles; head rusty-red, anterior margin of
frons with a dark mark, antennal foveae and sides of epistome with dark

bo

iv)

10.

if be

12.

13.

14.

15.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 133

marks, no dark stripe on the genae; basal half of the costal cell, marginal
cell with the exception of the middle and extreme apex, reddish-yellow to brown,

and the inner cross-vein dark-clouded ................... fulviceps de Meijere
Ground-colour of thorax and scutellum black-brown; frons and centre of face largely
VDC Reet ee ee eee eee ea ane takin re atalote eos Sta eMedia telb alien, Sr oivay aie Suchiewley alls ana neebebalongue es 4

Scutellum bare; fore tarsi of male exceptionally widened; apical three tergites of
abdomen in male almost equally long, third a little shorter than either of the
others; centre of face black, with only two or four small indistinct spots,
Gentralhyaered aisha tems eters eiatstcrce tie ete a cl trere eter eee platychirus Hendel

Dise of the scutellum haired; fore tarsi in neither sex much widened ; fifth abdominal
tergite of male as long as third and fourth combined; other characters not as

DD ONC Ma LMM eto acess see orcas Mere Cu Lee Natl ed Sigel ioe se Nope lielicdelia\lclcoyeriey suerte: (a) elisilai saeutueteueWalle econo sae 5
Disc of the scutellum densely golden-yellow haired; bases of fore femora in male
Vi CLIO Warr eter eke Ge ete epiascncs saneora el eresiee phn (o us se, s Goatees odes spare strigatus de Meijere
Disc of the scutellum with extremely short inconspicuous pale yellow hairs; fore
FemMOranofemal en l@EKS 415 speedier sits hee ieee fers oy Syayiahelie ys Gch, Aarne n At te Be subnudus, n. sp.
Scutellum rusty-yellow; frons and genae without black-brown stripes, only the sides
of the face black-brown in both sexes; scutellum bare ..... amplividens Walker
Scutellum black or dark blue to bronzy coloured ................ 20s eeeeeeeeeees uf

Abdomen testaceous, but faintly greenish, apices of the tergites piceous; no dark
central stripe on face; inner cross-vein quite broadly clouded with black, outer
cross-vein not clouded except faintly below; tibiae and tarsi black ...........
Seer he edererels Gi cusueusieaecyens sucus) ack ene eusienels <sutespleieye tent. AOLACRYOpRtRaumus), Walker

Abdomen entirely or in large part metallic blue or blue-green; other characters not
TSO OV CMe racecar ame isa eC Sper ante Tome ay ecienel ei tn ahisieva a rec csuanecarels jes aceh auchiers qareuerestees 8

Costal streak uniformly brown, emitting two broad fasciae over the cross-veins that
are narrowly divided by a hyaline stripe from the second to the fourth vein
on field of the wing; scutellum haired on apex and sides ....... furcatus Hendel

Wing without such dark markings, when there is a dark fascia over the inner
cross-vein it is much narrower and shorter, and when there is a cloud on the

outer cross-vein it is not distinctly connected with the costal streak ........ 9
Mesonotum not vittate, uniformly covered with dense ochreous dust; scutellum
SERRE 6-6 6.4.6.5 Gined Dacha lo thal Cee eG DinteUch a Oenid CECE TBH er eeme cad CRS taal ieee ae ae thoracalis Hendel
Mesonotum dusted, but with more or less conspicuous dark vittae .............. 10
Genae with a distinct dark brown or black vertical stripe ....................+. 12
Genae without a dark vertical stripe; costal margin of the wing black-brown from
base to apex and a streak from this over the inner cross-vein .............. 11

Scutellum with fine pale hairs; no pale parts in the dark costal stripe; head with
a slender black stripe down each facial fovea and with no central facial nor
genal black (stripes! cassie sade cid Ss. Ses Se oes ose diversifrons de Meijere

Scutellum bare; a pale patch in the costal stripe each side of the fascia over the
inner cross-vein; genae, face, and frons with many brown dots RULE en vig.
SS eee eee teers ee ae eee ni nctilatiusndemMvMeijere

Mesonotum with distinct metallic sheen that is not entirely obliterated by the

AAA Gai ASS aA HEINE OVE eG. elosabere Sroteus GHEE SMC TOneT TOE MONO OTIS. Ey Ot ARAN ees Ree Stans On ve ena 13
Mesonotum not shining, entirely dull ...................... RR eT eT eee ER at eisaise iL
Legs pitchy-brown, only the femora at bases yellow, tibiae entirely pitchy-brown;

black stripes on facial foveae and genae ................. longividens Walker
Femora yellow, black only at apices below, tibiae yellow, with black extremities and

AeDLaCKTAOTSALIStLAPE!! cre eee MORN eR UN hs so ce ete eee ncate essareueh ie ie Tae ehiges le lewtera ts 14

Eye-stalks reddish-yellow below; clypeus yellow; the dark genal stripe separated
from the dark epistomal mark; fore metatarsus noticeably longer than the
remaining segments of fore tarsus combined (male); scutellum bare ........
eve h tac = bs daemehatanictey shawnee once hae kc SAR re RE Repos pte aE eh BEY ORS rothschildi Austen

Eye-stalks blackish ; clypeus with a black-brown central vitta; the dark genal stripe
united with the dark epistomal mark; fore metatarsus as long as the other
segments combined in both sexes; scutellum bare ........... latividens Walker

Hye-stalks yellowish below; clypeus with a black central vitta; genal black stripe
separated from the dark epistomal stripe; fore metatarsus shorter than remain-
ine WSEENIENts~ COMBINE y buss csewojotheas: «. DiVaacas. cere © a dud eve cvbvo ce oar ene australis, n. sp.

Genae yellow, black in front; fifth abdominal tergite of male as long as third and
fourth combined; eyes of male long stalked; outer cross-vein of the wing not
dark-clouded; scutellum haired at apex ................ albertisi Osten-Sacken

134 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

Gena with a dark stripe; fifth abdominal tergite of male longer than third and
fourth tergites combined; eyes of male not stalked; outer cross-vein of wing
distinctly brown-clouded; scutellum haired on disc ....... microcephalus Hendel

ACHIAS VENUSTULUS Walker.
Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., viii, 1865, 119.
This is the only species without a dark costal stripe that has the outer
cross-vein of the wing dark-clouded, and if the description is accurate the only
one in that group that has the femora and tibiae yellow.
Originally described from New Guinea and not subsequently recorded.

ACHIAS PLATYCHIRUS Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 204.—? Achias oculatus Fabricius, Syst.
Antl., 1805, 247 (Diptera).

Hendel suggests the possibility that this may be oculatus, and if so then
it appears certain that the original citation of Java as the type-locality is
erroneous.

The tarsi of all the legs are widened in the male, the fore pair most
conspicuously so; the apices of the fore tibiae are also widened. The femora are
armed on the apical half below with short bristles or thorns. This last character
suggests an affinity with Achiosoma, the only specimen I have seen of that genus
having similar femoral spines.

Described from a male taken in New Guinea.

ACHIAS FULVICEPS de Meijere.

Nov. Guin., ix, Zool. livr. 3, 1913, 3738.

This species also has short bristly thorns on the apical portion of the
ventral surface of the femora, longest on the posteroventral surface of the fore
pair. The wing tip from before the outer cross-vein is greyish, the basal half
of the costal cell, the marginal cell with the exception of the middle and an
apical suffusion, reddish-yellow to brown, the inner cross-vein dark-clouded.

Described from a female from New Guinea and not since recorded.

ACHIAS STRIGATUS de Meijere.

Op. cit., ix, Zool. livr. 3, 1913, 372.

Known only from a teneral male specimen. ‘The facial carina is black
below, yellow on upper half, the fore femora are yellow on their basal halves.
The scutellum is thickly golden-yellow-haired, the ventral femoral setulae are
short and weak.

Described from New Guinea and not subsequently recorded.

ACHIAS SUBNUDUS, 0. sp.

3d, °. This species is apparently very closely related to strigatus, differing
markedly in having the fore femora entirely black, and the shiny black scutellum
with extremely short fine pale hairs, noticeable only with a strong lens. There
are no ventral setulae on any of the femora in the specimens before me.

¢. Head more than 1:5 times as wide as thorax, the eye-stalks thick, vertex
with 4 bristles, the outer ones about midway between inner one and eye. Frons
black to level of bases of antennae, the yellow colour of upper occiput projecting
in a short wedge each side of ocelli. Face with a large black-brown spot
extending from above middle of facial carina to epistome and laterally to about
midway from outer edge of foveae to middle of genae; remainder fulvous-yellow

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 135

except a narrow pale yellow streak along the lower edge of the black frontal
fascia. Basal two antennal segments pale brown, third and palpi black. Thorax
brown-black, only the scutellum distinctly shiny, not metallic, pleura slightly,
mesonotum densely, greyish-yellow-dusted, the latter with 4 complete black vittae
and the lateral margins black; scutellum without dust; mesonotal hairs short
and pale, those on the scutellum very inconspicuous. Bristles as follows: 1 humeral,
2 notopleurals, 1 supra-alar, 2 postalars, 1 pair of dorsocentrals, and 1 pair of
prescutellar acrostichals; no mesopleural; scutellars 6, the apical pair the longest
and strongest. Legs black, mid and hind femora fulvous-yellow on basal halves,
tarsi normal, no evident ventral femoral spines, only some hairs present.

Wings glassy, seen against a white background the apex from before the
outer cross-vein appears stained or greyish, much as I assume those of fulviceps
must be, judging from the description, costa brownish to a little beyond the
humeral cross-vein and in stigma, the margin infuscated above fork of second
vein, and from there to level of apex of the stigma slightly yellow; fork of
second vein and inner cross-vein narrowly darkened. Ultimate section of fourth
vein slightly biarcuate, the tip slightly upcurved. Abdomen glossy brownish-
black, yellowish at base of composite tergite, with a slight aeneous tinge apically,
the hairs yellow except on fifth tergite, long on sides of basal one, the fifth with
a series of fine black bristles on apical edge.

%. Similar to the male, differing in having the head very little wider than
the thorax, the outer vertical bristles close to the eyes, the frontal fascia less
sharply defined, with no pale yellow streak along its anterior edge, and a black
streak from each eye downward on the gena that is sometimes connected with the
large black facial mark by a series of minute black dots. The fore femora are
usually fulvous-yellow at bases, and all the tibiae are of that colour centrally,
the fore pair least distinctly so. Length, 9-12 mm.

Type male, allotype, and 9 paratypes, Papua: Mt. Tafa, 8,500 feet, March 1934
(L. E. Cheesman).

This may be strigatus, but there are so many points in which it differs from
the description of that species that I prefer to describe it tentatively as new.

ACHIAS AMPLIVIDENS Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 122; Hendel, Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges.,
viii, 1914, 212.

The female only was described by Walker, but Hendel described the male.
This latter has the eyes on long stalks, in the one described by Hendel the width
of the head (17 mm.) greatly exceeded the length of the insect (12 mm.). The
scutellum is bare.

Aru Islands (Walker), New Guinea (Hendel).

ACHIAS BRACHYOPHTHALMUS Walker. PI. v, fig. 27.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., viii, 1865, 119.

A smaller species than most of the others in the genus, with the eye-stalks
shorter than usual in the male, the head being 7-5 mm. wide and the length of
the insect 10 mm. in the male specimen with the widest head before me. The
head in the male has a black-brown stripe covering each antennal fossa and
extending to lower margin of face, while the female has, in addition to these,
a short black streak on each gena from edge of eye to near middle, tapered to a
point below. The frons is black speckled in both sexes, in male dark brown
on each side against tips.

136 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

Mesonotum densely yellowish-grey-dusted with 4 uniformly wide shiny brown
vittae, neither pair extending to the posterior margin, the central pair shortest.
Scutellum shiny black, with 6 black bristles, and some microscopic pale hairs
on sides of disc. Legs black, femora tawny-yellow except their apices. All femora
with short black apical bristles on the posteroventral surfaces of fore and
mid pairs and on anteroventral of hind pair. Hind coxae densely brown-haired
in male. Wing as Plate v, figure 27. Abdomen sometimes with a marked green
tinge. Fifth tergite of male about as long as third and fourth combined. Length,
7-11 mm.

A series of about 50 specimens, both sexes, from Kuranda, N. Queensland
(F. P. Dodd).

Originally described from a female taken in New Guinea. Not known to
Hendel.

ACHIAS FURCATUS Hendel.

Gen. Ins., Fasc. 157, 1914, April, 103, Taf. 10, fig. 177; Abhandl. Zool-botan.
Ges., viii, 1914, June, 216.

Both sexes of this species were described. The scutellum is partly haired
above. The short biseriate bristles on the apical portion of the ventral surface
of the femora are stated to be quite strong. The entire brown costal streak with
the emitted fasciae over both cross-veins should readily distinguish this species
from its congeners.

Mafor and Roon.

ACHIAS THORACALIS Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 213.

Described from two females. The mesonotum is densely ochreous-brown-
dusted, without evident dark vittae, and with black hairs. This lack of vittae is
unique in the genus as far aS we know. The scutellum is bare. Coxae and
femora reddish-yellow, tibiae and tarsi black.

Dutch New Guinea.

g ACHIAS DIVERSIFRONS de Meijere.

Nov. Guin., ix, Zool. livr. 3, 1913, 371.

The only male before me has the head, including the eye-stalks, 14 mm. in
width, the stalks black except at extreme bases below, the frons with black
specks that are mostly fused, so that only an irregular mark in centre is reddish-
yellow, remainder of head testaceous except a narrow black stripe on each
antennal fovea from base of antenna to epistome, and a fuscous transverse stripe
on occiput below vertex. Vertex with 4 bristles as usual. Mesonotum with
yellowish dust and 4 dark uniform vittae, the sublaterals reddish behind suture;
scutellum black, with fine pale hairs and 6 marginal bristles. Legs black, basal
half or more of all femora yellow, hind tibiae brownish centrally. Fore tarsi of
male slightly flattened.

Wing with a black-brown costal stripe from base to apex that sends a spur
over the inner cross-vein, is narrowest for a short stretch just beyond this
and faintest in the apex of the first posterior cell. Abdomen metallic-blue, with
a reddish shade showing below in parts, hypopygium orange-yellow.

Described from New Guinea, Papua (British New Guinea): Aroa R., Central
Division (west of Port Moresby), presented to the British Museum by the Hon.
L. W. Rothschild. One male. :

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 137

ACHIAS PUNCTULATUS de Meijere.

Op. cit., ix, Zool. livr. 3, 1913, 372; Edwards, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, xx, pt.
13, 1915, 416.

Scutellum bare.

Described from a female taken in New Guinea and subsequently recorded from
Setakwa River, Dutch New Guinea, by Edwards.

ACHIAS LONGIVIDENS Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 121.

Walker described both sexes. The head is described as having two black
bands on the vertex and 4 black stripes in front. There appears thus to be a
genal stripe.

Aru Islands.

ACHIAS ROTHSCHILDI Austen.

Nov. Zool., xvii, 1910, 459.

Closely related to latividens, the outstanding differences between the species
being noted in the foregoing key to species.

New Guinea: Bogadjim (Stephansort); Papua: Milne Bay.

ACHIAS LATIVIDENS Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1895, 121.

I have before me two males that apparently belong here. The outer cross-
vein of the wing is very narrowly and faintly pale brown-clouded and the centre
of the face has an entire black stripe. The genal black stripe connects with the
short one below the antennal fovea, while the latter does not extend over the
fovea, the bottom of the latter being yellow. There are no fine hairs on the
scutellum. Fore femur with some irregular short strong posteroventral bristles
apically.

One of the specimens is from Milne Bay, from which locality Hendel also had
the species; the other is from Ferguson Island, S.E. Papua (A. S. Meek). One
male, Fly River, N.G. This specimen is in good condition and shows the long
strong yellow hairs on the inner side of the hind coxae very clearly.

Recorded from New Guinea, Aru Island, and Waigou.

ACHIAS ALBERTISI Osten-Sacken.

Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Gen., xvi, 1881, 473.
Described from New Guinea and not since recorded.

ACHIAS MICROCEPHALUS Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 215.
Described from New Guinea.

ACHIAS AUSTRALIS, n. sp. Pl. v, fig. 28.

6, 2. Head testaceous-yellow, slightly shiny, frons with a broad transverse
anterior marginal black band that covers all the eye-stalks except a line on the
upper anterior edge and descends on face to almost the level of apex of the third
antennai segment, and another similar band on the vertex that is more or less
punctiform centrally and on a transverse line behind; a narrower black stripe
covers each of the facial foveae and connects with a similar band on the epistomal
margin; a third stripe extends from the latter upward on centre of face to between
bases of antennae, widening above and below; from the lower edge of the black

138 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

eye-stalks there extends downward another black stripe that tapers below and is
there somewhat punctiform. Antennae dark brown; palpi black; prelabrum
brown; inner mouth margin black. Eyes of male on variably long slender stalks,
the entire head at times as long as or longer than the insect, in the female
the eye-stalks are much shorter, being at most as long as the thorax and scutellum.
Verticals 4, genal weak but evident; face bulging out on its upper half, concave in
profile below middle, with the epistome slightly projecting.

Thorax brown, slightly shiny, with grey dust, the mesonotum with slight
metallic tinge on dorsum posteriorly, most evident on posterior extremities of the
four dark vittae, a fifth vitta evident at posterior extremity between the submedian
pair; scutellum glossy dark brown to blue-black, with a grey-dusted transverse
mark at base, the dise bare, the margin with 6 bristles on minute raised bases.
Mesonotum with the usual bristles: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals, 1 supra-alar,
2 postalars, 1 intra-alar, a pair of prescutellar acrostichals, and no pleurals; hairs
on mesonotum mainly dark except posteriorly and laterally, those on pleura pale.

Legs tawny-yellow, apical half of all femora blackened, bases and apices of all
tibiae and a dorsal line black, tarsi black. Fore femora with six or seven short
black bristles on the apical third of the posteroventral surface; fore metatarsus
not as long as remainder of segments of that tarsus.

Wing (PI. v, fig. 28) brownish-hyaline, with a dark brown costal stripe that is
paler but not obsolescent on a short portion beyond the inner cross-vein, sends
a narrow spur on the latter, and ends on apex of fourth vein; outer cross-vein
with a slight broad brown suffusion. Halteres brown. Squamae greyish-white,
edge of upper one brown. Abdomen brown, semipellucid, with distinct green
sheen, most conspicuous apically. Fifth abdominal tergite of male not as long as
third and fourth together. Length, 12-14 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and 4 paratypes, Kuranda, Queensland (F. P. Dodd);
1 paratype, Cairns, Queensland, from the Lichtwardt collection. Two of the
Kuranda specimens are also from the Lichtwardt collection in the Deutsches
Entomologisches Institut; the type and allotype are being returned to Mr. F. H.
Taylor.

LAMPROGASTER Macquart.

Dipt. Hxot., ii, pt. 3, 1843, 211.—Ceratopelta Bigot, Bull. Soc. Ent. France, viii,
ser. 5, 1878, 34.—Liolamprogaster Enderlein, Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berl., xi, 1924, 128.—
Holocnemia Enderlein, op. cit., xi, 1924, 128.

There are probably 50 species of this genus occurring from the Philippines
southward to and including Australia. Enderlein in 1924 accepted one of Bigot’s
genera, Ceratopelta, and erected two others for the reception in one case
(Holocnemia) of a single species, and in the other (Liolamprogaster) of three
species. Ceratopelta is distinguished from Lamprogaster by the presence of two
stout spines or tubercles on the disc of the scutellum close to the apex, and I
have included it in my key to the genera in this paper, though I hardly care to
admit the validity of the concept. Holocnemia is distinguished from Lamprogaster
by the presence of stout spines on the ventral surface of the fore femur and
long fine hairs on the ventral surfaces of the other femora. The genotype,
apicalis Walker, is from Western Australia, so that it does not concern us at
the present time. Liolamprogaster is discussed in the following text.

Lacking as I do a number of the New Guinea species, I have been compelled
to adhere quite closely to Hendel’s synopsis in the following key to the species,

but

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 139

I have endeavoured to clarify specific distinctions where the species are in the

collection by giving notes on the more outstanding characters under the species.

1.

Co

12a.

Key to the Species.

Scutellum with a pair of short stout pointed processes or tubercles near apex of
disc, the margin below these with a number of bristles and setulose hairs ......
Re Dae aneney aap each sion mevon eeu ceksusueNehsasKenetsisd= toi (Ceratopelta) patula Walker

Scutellum with no apical discal tubercles, with a few marginal bristles ........... 2

Wing hyaline or slightly yellowish, usually more noticeably so along the costa, but
with no brown or black marks or spotS .....---- +e ee eee eee eee tt eee eee 3

Wing with either brown base, more or less complete dark costal streak, or black or
brown spots or markings, or at least a dark streak over the inner cross-vein
that extends to or almost to the coSta .......... eee eee eee eee eee 9

Mesonotum almost bare on the disc, the microscopic fine hairs confined to series on
the acrostichal and dorsocentral lines; abdomen with the composite basal tergite
finely haired, the other tergites practically bare; supra-alar bristle lacking;
inner cross-vein of the wing at middle of the discal cell; upper occiput more
protruded than usual, rather broadly exposed in profile; species orange-yellow,
with or without a slight bluish sheen on dorsum .............. gracilis Hendel

Mesonotum rather uniformly and closely haired on the entire surface; all the
abdominal tergites quite closely haired; supra-alar bristle present, or absent
(grossa) ; inner cross-vein beyond middle of discal cell of the wing ........ 4

Prescutellar acrostichal bristles present; fourth wing-vein straight on its apical
section, not arched upward just beyond the outer cross-vein; humeral bristle
present ; thorax and abdomen reddish, with marked blue tinge (Queensland)

big ab SSO cab Bla Olid Charo NeaO OMA SW emt Cle corer Ocoee otcuore cna Grose Gy DialeeD.o pseudoelongata Malloch
Prescutellar acrostichals lacking; fourth wing-vein usually arched just beyond the
outer cross-vein and slightly curved upward at apex ...................... 5

Humeral bristle lacking; fourth wing-vein sinuous proximad of the inner cross-vein ;
thorax and abdomen brownish-yellow, sometimes with slight bluish sheen on
dorsum, the hairs and bristles luteous or yellow .................22+.045 6

Humeral bristle present; fourth vein arched or straight proximad of the inner cross-
vein; thorax and abdomen either metallic blue or greenish, if brownish-yellow

theshainssandebristles: blacks oeec esse oh srt nse tea meen stecelionciiene eleretictsita) Gusra) celal intel sire a hsisjehe: 6 a
Distance between the cross-veins of the wing about equal to the length of the
outer one; supra-alar bristle lacking ........................ zelotypa Hendel
Distance between the cross-veins of the wing about 1:5 times as long as the outer
cross-vein ; supra-alar bristle present .................. zelotypa Hendel, var.?

Stout yellowish-brown species; gena about half as high as the eye; supra-alar
bristle lacking ; legs tawny-yellow, each tibia with a brown dorsal line from base
COMA ERE see borer craw ec rercrenee tien cneierede ismaikv et tstateereuetehs otemRehewetcieuchaichecicreraictacs grossa, n. Sp.

More slender species, preponderantly metallic blue or green in colour; gena not
more than one-fourth as High as eye; supra-alar bristle present; legs fulvous-

yellow, with no dark dorsal line on the tibiae ......................00 eee 8
Epistome with two dark brown stripes in the lower portions of the facial foveae;
squamaei with) Zedimareins! See 4e eee eee enone hsp oicienece mot austeni Sharp
Epistome without the above-mentioned black stripes, slightly browned at sides;
squamae) blackishpmanrcinedun asst nn ier acreeiche aie elongata van der Wulp
Entire costal margin of the wings broadly brown, sometimes yellow beyond inner
GEOSS=ViGLIs feapster cc eters ie cctiesy aise sie eeben SESy seco aise Tat en a aT AIS on eM eRe AeNe sresita sl ee. bre tertanane’ aimee 10
WANTS sWwithouuentine dankrcostalmancinwe qescio cies cence citicce ie creiee cle ciees ec 11
Outer cross-vein of the wing broadly clouded with brown ........ stenoparia Hendel
Outer cross-vein of the wing not brown-clouded .................. basalis Walker
Wan oe WAthoutarGarkia pICa Sp Otic set terrae seo liedicg eae chaverekcncn cise uae nie) ouchonc/oneneaeeiiegs 12
Wines Val 2 Gawk armleall sixok Or Were ooouosoodpdooodunnccobbeanuddooadoOUUES ily)
Wing with only a large reddish-brown mark at base between the costal and cubital
Gi) 0 01> eR ERE EPEC ich Dare eam aoe nG Cece a ta by Cone caine ain ia eure: EO SiS tt Ue nM er SER Car, 12a
Wing never with such large basal mark, but with two or three smaller dark spots
OM -the) Cross=vVelnss and LAGU Sheds eter eterstel cue. comet at «ew ses ears eleven el cysy/sl ome lle ehewe 13
Preponderantly metallic-blue species; scutellum with 6 bristles; inner cross-vein
near) middlevof discal! Cello santas cere o Side ees coils ce arebee basalis Walker

Brownish-yellow species; scutellum with 2 bristles; inner cross-vein less than
OMS ove! rrroyen Eyoyese Ore Chisel CA ooodacnoudooonudnoouubeonDoSs decolor, n. sp.

140 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

13. Both the cross-veins brown-clouded; thorax and abdomen metallic-green, shagreened

and with fine yellow hairs; fore femora green, fore tarsi black .-.. laeta Walker

@uter cross-vein not dark-clouded .......5 22.5.0. s0s cece cnc e case e snes sevevcese 14

14. Wing with a dark brown costal spot above the level of the outer cross-vein and
two others proximad of it on the costa; squamae dark brown ............. 15

Wing without a dark costal spot above level of the outer cross-vein, with only
two dark costal spots; squamae pale ...........-..--+ee-- eee e rete eeee 16

15. Only the inner cross-vein dark clouded; legs entirely reddish-yellow .......... 15a
A short dark streak from the costa to and enclosing the inner cross-vein; bases of
fore: FemorayanG suhemtanrsioaplaGke wer erie fep-lene -l-ta)sleB- lV maculipennis Macquart

15a. Gena one-third as high as eye; prelabrum very exposed; scutellum bare except for
CHevmMaTreinalsPVIStlesmerereierere es eteley elton lone) reba luake doa -aaarol= macrocephala Hendel

Gena not more than one-fourth as high as eye; prelabrum quite prominently
exposed; scutellum strongly haired and with six marginal bristles ........
OG. Sr BO OC CHICO On OG OIG CUD Gy COCRO er oncacee Th ck OTOrOrS (orcad cen fulvipes, n. sp.

16. Dorsum of thorax, scutellum, and abdomen, glossy, bare, reddish-brown; pleura
WAGON AL O56 Boo Dato od co Oo dO Cg aoe GOING FO tho tigre 5 dd Gd Guo hi clo abet costalis Walker

Thorax and scutellum black, shiny, abdomen greenish-black ...................

Be SOOO Ot ood UO Oo Ore O hette COCOE COO ciao a Otho ornEn Ue trisignata van der Wulp
17. Wing with three dark brown costal marks; legs entirely yellow; scutellum bare ....
sisi © ete he Sea whe Aaa ceis thts fees EEGs TELSTRA LUE LEE SSAMA SARAIA Ge Bateret ats Seeheoai akg rufipes Hendel

Wing with four dark marks on the costa; tarsi more or less blackened ........ 18

1. Oye CHONG CEAROCUCEG! soo60neoo0KdUnCOU KD a DOO KaOO OU DOD OUND ODDUDOGCUC 19
Outer cross-vein not dark-clouded; basal dark wing-spot not extending to costa;
thorax and abdomen blue-black; legs yellow ........... pumicata van der Wulp

Gs eros pleura anaes seredaish=VellOwaerereiederei-icouseasanicietcncno lll) oten sol kekaia i Repol-l-l-holor- 20

Frons dark brown to black; mesonotum steel-blue, with a short yellowish-white-
dusted vitta over the upper half of each humerus extending to suture, and a
similar one along the upper edge of each pleuron; abdomen violet-black
Pogo GOD Oo OOS OCI ci ner Gite er Orcic Crone crcl oro oreo chare: the olceorc quadrilinea Walker

20. Apical and basal dark spots on the wing very large, the latter extending from

SUDCOStanLOMUHesanalaveinun erection eerie re t-iek ren Ean lel severa Hendel
Basal spot on the wing small, extending from posterior basal cell to inner cross-
veinsrapicaluspot slender, Giffuse))-)-\-cyejyeu-iel- donene ere ote cold ster taeniata van der Wulp

LAMPROGASTER (CERATOPELTA) PATULA Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., v, 1861, 247.—L. bispinosa Walker, op. cit., viii,
1865, 118.—Ceratopelta tricolor Bigot, Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr., viii, ser. 5, 1878, 35.

A reddish-yellow species with entirely pale legs and yellowish-hyaline wings,
the costal margin deeper yellow, the dorsum of abdomen usually largely steel-blue.
The frons, genae, mesonotum, scutellum, and pleura, generally with microscopic
black dots on parts of their surfaces. Antennae not extending to lower level of
eyes; arista short-haired to beyond the middle; vertex with four bristles.
Mesonotum black-haired, pleura largely yellow-haired, the hairs rather long and
dense. Bristles as follows: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals, 2 postalars, 1 pair of dorso-
centrals and one mesopleural; the prescutellar acrostichals undeveloped. Scutellum
stout, convex, the two tubercles with minute black apices; some of the marginal
black bristles on small elevated bases; disc rather long-haired. First posterior
cell of the wing narrowed at apex; inner cross-vein slightly dark-clouded. Abdomen
broadly ovate, convex on dorsum, fifth tergite of male nearly twice as long as
fourth, and with rather long stiff hairs. Length, 12-14 mm.

Dutch New Guinea: Lake Sentani, August 1936, one male (L. E. Cheesman).
Originally described from New Guinea. Enderlein recorded it from Dutch New
Guinea and accepted the genus as valid. I incline to accept Ceratopelta as a
subgenus and so treat it here.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 141

LAMPROGASTER (LIOLAMPROGASTER) GRACILIS Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 225.

This species, costalis Walker, and angusta Enderlein were placed in a new
generic concept by Enderlein, the characters used for the segregation being the
lack of hairs on the dorsum of the thorax and abdomen, and the slender form,
especially of the abdomen. The designated genotype is angusta. ‘This species is
unknown to me, was very briefly described, and the type locality is Ternate, so we
may ignore it here.

I have a male and female that I refer to gracilis. The female is considerably
darker than the male. In the latter the humeri, lateral margins of the mesonotum,
the scutellum and most of the pleura are tawny-yellow, with many microscopic
black dots, while in the female these parts are almost entirely blackish-blue. The
mesonotum is not entirely bare in the disc, but has a double series of microscopic
fine hairs down the centre, and there are some hairs on the sides. The face and
prelabrum are fulvous-yellow and speckled with black in both sexes.

As stated by Hendel, the occiput projects behind the eyes in profile more
than in the other species of the genus, being as wide above as the parafacial,
but whether this character is maintained in the other two species I am unable to
state.

The wings are yellowish-hyaline, with a more distinct yellow tinge along the
costa as far back as the third vein to its apex. The first posterior cell is not
narrowed at its apex.

Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, May, Sept—Oct. 1933 (L. E. Cheesman). Originally
described from Astrolabe Bay, New Guinea.

Both my specimens lack the humeral and mesopleural bristles, and I can detect
only one pair of verticals.

LAMPROGASTER (LIOLAMPROGASTER) COSTALIS Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., v, 1861, 247; Osten-Sacken, Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor.
Nat. Gen., xvi, 1881, 472; Hendel, Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 231.

Osten-Sacken states that Walker’s description is “recognizable”, but considers
that the species seems to be closely allied to superna Walker and quadrilinea van
der Wulp, the former of which was unknown to Hendel. I have not seen either
of those species.

Hendel states that the dorsa of the thorax and abdomen are bare and, as
Enderlein had apparently seen neither angusta Hendel nor costalis, it may be
assumed that he placed them in his new genus Liolamprogaster on the basis of
Hendel’s statement to that effect. Hendel makes no mention of the occiput being
convex and it may be assumed to be as in typical species of Lamprogaster. The
wing has three short brown streaks on the costa, the outermost one being above
the level of the outer cross-vein.

Hendel described a variety nuda which differs from the typical form in lacking
the two grey-dusted pleural vittae, in having the apex of the scutellum almost
transverse, and a slight dark cloud on the outer cross-vein.

Described from New Guinea. Recorded from Dorey (0O.S.), and Huon Gulf
(Hendel).

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) ZELOTYPA Hendel.
Op. cit., viii, 1914, 226—L. ventralis Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., v,

1861, 248.
I give the above citation from Hendel’s paper on the group without comment.

142 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

A glossy fulvous-yellow species, with yellow or fulvous hairs and bristles,
and yellowish-hyaline wings, with a less markedly intense yellow costal border
than in gracilis, the yellow colour not extending very noticeably over the second
vein. There are no microscopic black specks on the head and thorax as in gracilis.
The upper occiput is much narrower in profile, the vertex has four fine dark
bristles, the mesonotum and scutellum are quite densely short-haired, the latter
has 4 marginal bristles, the humeral is lacking, but the mesopleural is present.
Dorsum of the abdomen rather densely short-haired.

Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, August 1933 (L. E. Cheesman). Recorded pre-
viously from Dorey, New Guinea, and Australia.

The variety of this species listed in the key is from Cairns, Queensland.

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) GROSSA, N. SD.

¢. A large robust species of a general yellowish-brown colour, with fuscous
frons, the thorax appearing darker brown because of the presence of many minute
black dots visible only under a strong lens, the abdomen infuscated, especially
apically, and no trace of any metallic sheen. Wings yellowish-tinged, darker
basally, the inner cross-vein and the stigma brown-clouded.

Frons at vertex about two-fifths the head-width, almost parallel-sided and
about 1:25 times as long as wide, with many short pale surface hairs, the orbits
narrow, densely yellowish-grey tomentose, which tomentum is carried down on
the paratacials, narrowing below; vertex in type specimen with 6 fine black bristles,
the inner pair duplicated. Antennae hardly more than half the length of face,
third segment fully three times as long as wide; arista pubescent on basal half,
simple at apex; palpi longer than antennae, slender. Facial carina with sharp
edges, the foveae deep; prelabrum poorly developed, not heavily chitinous. Gena
about half as high as eye. Face and genae black dotted, the latter with blackish
marginal line; occiput narrowly visible above in profile; parafacial in profile wider
than third antennal segment.

Mesonotum in type specimen with the black dots lacking on four wide
contiguous vittae, the central pair not attaining posterior margin, rounded at
extremities; surface quite densely covered with short decumbent black hairs;
bristles as follows: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals, 2 postalars, and 1 pair of dorso-
centrals. Scutellum slightly convex above and rounded in outline, with many
short black discal hairs and six marginal bristles. Pleura partly black dotted,
pale haired; mesopleural bristle of moderate length.

Wings large, veins brown, yellow clouds in cells of basal half. Fourth vein
near base of discal cell slightly angulate and with a short spur vein on its
anterior edge; inner cross-vein a little beyond middle of the discal cell; fourth
vein very slightly bent up beyond outer cross-vein. Squamae and halteres pale
brown. Legs rather stout, brownish-yellow, all the tibiae with a brown dorsal
line. Fore femora without posteroventral bristles. Abdomen short ovate, blackened
apically. Fifth tergite about as long as the third and fourth combined. Length,
13 mm.

Type, Dutch New Guinea: Cyclops Mts., Mt. Lina, 3,500 feet, March 1936
(L. E. Cheesman).

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) QUADRILINEA Walker. PI. v. fig. 29.
Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 111.—L. sepsoides Walker, op. cit., vii,
1864, 220; Hendel, Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 242.
A metallic black-blue species, with three narrow black costal streaks, the basal
one not extending to costa, the middle one at the stigma and enclosing the inner

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 143

cross-vein, and the outer one above level of the outer cross-vein, a narrow black
edge from midway between apices of second and third veins to apex of fourth, a
narrow cloud over the outer cross-vein, and a spot on cross-veins at base of discal
cell that connects with a basally directed streak in basal half of anterior basal
cell. The mesonotum is closely piliferous-punctate, the very short depressed pile
black, and has a yellowish-white-dusted vitta over the upper half of each humerus
extending to the suture, and one on upper edge of the pleura; scutellum slightly
alutaceous, not punctate, bare on disc, with a few fine hairs and four or six
weak bristles on sides, the apex truncate. Mesopleural and humeral bristles
lacking. Legs black, mid and hind tibiae and tarsi largely brownish-yellow, fore
femora sometimes brownish at bases.

New Guinea: Wewak (F. H. Taylor). Thirteen specimens; two pairs taken
in copula. Western New Guinea: Njau-limon, south of Mt. Bougainville, 300 feet,
February 1936; Eastern Dutch New Guinea: Jutefa Bay, sea level, 100 feet,
February 1936, four specimens (L. HE. Cheesman).

Originally described from Aru Island, and recorded from Mysol, Waigou, and
New Guinea.

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) SEVERA Hendel.
Op. cit., viii, 1914, 240.
Originally described from New Guinea and not since recorded.
Scutellum bare.

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) MACULIPENNIS Macquart.
Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 89.
This Australian species may be found in New Guinea.

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) TRISIGNATA van der Wulp.
Tijdschr. v. Ent., xxviii, 1885, 231.
Described from New Guinea and not seen by Hendel. Unknown to me.

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) AUSTENI Sharp.

Zool. Res. on material from New Britain, etc., Cambridge, Arthur Willey, pt. iv,
1900, 391.—Lamprogaster xanthoptera Hendel, Abhandadl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914,
225.

I have arrived at the above synonymy after a careful examination of a
long series of specimens from the Solomon Islands submitted to me by Sir Guy
A. K. Marshall of the Imperial Institute of Entomology and a comparison with
a specimen from New Britain, the type-locality.

There can be no doubt as to the correctness of the aeretrnietion: though
it is in only a few cases possible to see the large sack-like abdominal expansions
of the abdomen described and figured by Sharp in his paper. In one female,
however, these are widely exposed and agree well with Sharp’s figure.

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) RUFIPES Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 233.
Scutellum bare.
Described from New Guinea, Key Island.

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) PUMICATA van der Wulp.
Tijdschr. v. Hnt., xxviii, 1885, 230.

Described from New Caledonia. Unknown to Hendel and myself. May occur
in New Guinea.

144 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) BASALIS Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soe. Lond., v, 1861, 248—L. limbata van der Wulp, Tijdschr.
v. Ent., xxviii, 1885, 228.

I have before me two specimens that agree very well with the description of
this species, though they ‘have not the mesonotum, scutellum, and abdomen particu-
larly long black-haired as stated by Hendel.

The mark on the anterior half of the base of the wing up to and including the
inner cross-vein is quite dark brown, and beyond that point on the costal margin
back as far on to the field of the wing as the third vein and to the apex of the
latter there is a distinct yellow streak. The thorax and abdomen, except the apex
of the latter and the pleural sutures, are glossy metallic-blue. In the female before
me the legs, except the mid and hind coxae, are orange-yellow, while in the male
the femora all have a blackish streak on their basal half or less on ventral surface.

The vertex has 4 strong bristles; the humeral and supra-alar bristles are
lacking; the scutellum has six marginal bristles and, like the mesonotum, is rather
long black-haired on the disc. Inner cross-vein a little beyond middle of the discal
cell, the outer one twice its own length from inner one; fourth vein undulated
proximad of the inner cross-vein, highly arched just beyond outer one, then almost
parallel with third to its apex.

Known only from New Guinea. East Dutch New Guinea, Jutefa Bay, Pim, sea-
level to 100 feet, February 1936 (L. EH. Cheesman).

I have no doubt about the synonymy given above, though Hendel kept the
species separate. He did not have limbata before him and merely quoted van der
Wulp’s description.

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) DECOLOR, 1. Sp. PI. v, fig. 30.

Q. Very similar to zelotypa in general colour, the blue metallic sheen not very
conspicuous on the fulvous-yellow ground-colour, most evident on the pleura. The
main differences between the two lie in the presence of a brown cloud over the
base of the wing from costal margin to anal vein and extending to apices of first
posterior and anal cells, most noticeable on the cross-veins at the apices of these
cells, a faint brown cloud over inner cross-vein, the more approximated cross-veins,
which are usually separated by less than the length of the outer cross-vein. The
genae are also much darkened, usually dark brown. The vertex has four bristles
in both species, very small and fine in decolor, and in the latter there are but two
marginal bristles on the scutellum. The thoracic bristles are also darker than in
zelotypa though not black. Length, 7-11 mm.

Type and 7 paratypes, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) STENOPARIA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 227.

This species has much in common with basalis Walker, but the wing markings
to the apex of the costal streak, including a conspicuous cloud over the outer
cross-vein, are dark brown.

Originally described from North Queensland and very possibly will yet be
found in New Guinea.

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) ELONGATA van der Wulp.
Tijds. v. Ent., xxviii, 1885, 228.
A common species in New Guinea though not in this collection. Recorded
also from Key Island and Molucca. Papua: Itikinumu Plantation (F. P. Dodd).

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 145

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) MACROCEPHALA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., vill, 1914, 230.

This species is described by Hendel as the most robust species known to him,
with an exceptionally large head. It must resemble grossa described herein, but
the parafacial is wider, about twice as wide as the third antennal segment, and
the gena is more than half as high as the eye. In addition to these differences
the scutellum is bare on disc, and the wing has a large black-brown mark on the
base and the inner cross-vein blackened.

Described from New Guinea and not known to me except from the description.

LAMPROGASTER FULVIPES, hn. sp. Pl. vy, fig. 31.

¢. Head brown, frons pitchy-black, shiny, with yellowish-dusted line on each
side widened in front and carried down over the parafacials, the latter and the
genae dark brown, the parafacials glossy on anterior edges. Frons subquadrate,
almost half as wide as head; vertex with four moderately strong bristles, the
short glossy upper orbits with a bristle; surface hairs short and dark. Face
produced slightly below, concave centrally in profile, with irregular transverse
striae on upper half. Antennae extending to below middle of face; aristae short-
haired to near middle; palpi reddish-yellow, slightly club-shaped, with some
fine black bristles on sides. Thorax metallic-blue, without vittae or dust on
mesonotum, the pleura slightly brown-dusted. Mesonotum and scutellum with
quite dense depressed stiff black hairs, longer on the sides. Humeral, both noto-
pleurals, the supra-alar and postalar bristles present, mesopleural fine but distinct;
scutellum short, thick, rounded in outline, convex on disc. Legs fulvous-yellow,
without exceptional structure or armature.

Wings yellowish, as usual more distinctly so costally, with a rather faint
blackish streak from over inner cross-vein extending towards costa, most marked
on the former, and a small dark brown mark on fork of second and third veins;
stigma brownish-yellow. Inner cross-vein close to middle of the discal cell;
venation as in pseudoelongata Malloch, second vein in type specimen with a few
setulae on upper side on basal half (Pl. v, fig. 31). Squamae and halteres
brownish-yellow. Abdomen deep metallic-blue, glossy, with rather long black hairs.
Length 7-5 mm.

Type, New Guinea: Marprik (J. R. Rigby and C. M. Deland). Type in the
collection of the School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, University of
Sydney.

LAMPROGASTER LAETA Walker.
List Dipt. Ins. Brit. Mus., pt. iv, 1849, 805 (Chromatomyia).
Hendel placed this species in his key to the species of this genus, but stated

that he believed it belongs to Duomyia. It is an Australian species and he is
probably correct in his conclusion, though I have not seen the insect.

LAMPROGASTER (LAMPROGASTER) TAENIATA van der Wulp.

Tijds. v. Hnt., xxviii, 1885, 229.

Described from Molucca and not known to Hendel or myself,’ except from
description.

HKuUPROSOPIA Macquart.

Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. ii, 1847, 89.

In 1881 Osten-Sacken proposed the generic name Notopsila to supplant
Pachycephala Doleschall, the latter name being preoccupied, the genotype named

M

146 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

being mohnikei Doleschall. In 1924 Enderlein proposed for this same concept the
name Oncoscelia, again as a substitute for Pachycephala, apparently having over-
looked Osten-Sacken’s previous action. In 1931 I dealt with this matter briefly
and, in addition, singled out certain segregates of Huprosopia without proposing
the use of distinguishing names for any of them. Enderlein went farther than
Osten-Sacken and erected the genus Lepidocompsia for the reception of two New
Guinea species, impingens Walker and fusifacies Walker. The characters used to
distinguish this concept consisted of the presence of broad spindle-like scales on
the abdomen, and of long hairs on the entire extent of the aristae. He also proposed
a new genus, Tetrachaetina, for a new species, burgersiana, and E. brevicornis
Hendel, the distinguishing character being the 4-bristled scutellum. His new
species was from New Guinea (see under innocud, Nn. sp.).

It must be obvious that the proposal of new genera, on the basis of characters
such as those listed and used by Enderlein for his new concepts in a genus that
contains such a large number of species with all sorts of combinations of these
and similar characters, places no limit upon the number of genera that may be
suggested except the number of species involved. The application of such criteria
necessarily renders valueless such generic concepts insofar as indices to relation-
ships are concerned. I therefore do not make use of Enderlein’s genera herein.

Below I present a key to the species of Huprosopia from New Guinea.

Key to the Species.

1. Thorax dull brownish-black, with five golden-yellow vittae, three on the mesonotum
and one on each pleuron; the abdomen brownish-black, with a dorsocentral
Parawel-sidedebrigiit, VellOow wilttaie neces cl ocis chelaievatensranel ileus cieisicheetoncica ey wen cnelewenene »

ihhorax and sabdomen not vittate with brichteyellow mice cmc cede coin os ce ences 3
2. Wing greyish-hyaline with three narrowly separated black or brown fasciae on the
apical half that are fainter and slightly attenuated behind, the basal one
connected near the costa with a streak from base of wing in the subcostal cell
and the preapical one connected with an apical blackish spot; aristae of the
male slightly widened at apices; vertex with two bristles .. tigrina Osten-Sacken
Wing with numerous small fuscous spots basally, becoming more numerous to middle,
and from there to apex the membrane dark brown, with a few transverse
linear hyaline streaks in the field, two séries of the latter forming slightly
interrupted fasciae between the outer cross-vein and the tip; aristae of male
hair-like at apices; vertex with two bristles and two short fine hairs .....
SG. ORE Os CEG. Pit CRE R AR CCRC Ot Gsc, ACRE cio cuchioe aiohe ae soe ce ecrecatcT cso OL aR as aureovitta, n. sp.
Scutellum more or less distinctly emarginate or concave at apex; abdomen yellowish-
red in ground-colour, with ochre-yellow dusting; inner vertical bristles lacking,
outer pair very small; aristae haired, not spatulate at apices in male; scutellum
with G=mareinal: DTISGlESR SE. kre cite ene teetore ie Oneiie eetene touches rufiventris Hendel

Scutellum regularly rounded at apex; abdomen black or blackish-brown ........ 4

4. Wings dark brown, with many small hyaline or yellowish transverse marks in the
cells extending in most cases entirely across the cell, sometimes almost or
entirely divided centrally and then forming two series of small spots against

cs

the yeins; small species usually much less than 7 mm. in length .......... 4a
Wings either hyaline with entire or broken dark fasciae, or with brown or black
spots; species normally much more than 7 mm. in length .................. 7

4a. Only 3 or 4 hyaline marks in first posterior cell, which extend entirely across the
cell; fore femur (2) with 2 or 3 short stout preapical bristles on the postero-
ventral surface; fifth vein bare above; prescutellar acrostichals lacking; pleura
withoutiyellow=dustedizvittaen sat. eae iat oie cte Sree minuta, n. Sp.

More numerous hyaline marks in first posterior cell, mainly consisting of small
paired spots opposite each other against the veins; fore femur with some fine
bristles on the apical half or more of the posteroventral surface; prescutellar
acrostichals present; pleura with one or more golden-yellow-dusted vittae ... 5

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 147

5. Fifth wing-vein closely setulose on the entire extent of posterior basal and discal
cells above; pleura with a short golden-yellow vitta on upper margin and a
complete similarly coloured vitta on lower margin of mesopleura; vertex with
four bristles, the inner pair the Shorter ..................... setinervis, n. sp.

Fifth vein not setulose above on entire extent of posterior basal and discal cells:
pleura with a complete golden-yellow central vitta and a short one on upper

margin and a third one on upper edge of the sternopleura ................. 6

Bo WORDS Van MOWE GERM LOWISUIES) vo 6 coo ono oc no Dood obo O ODO mo OOD miliaria Hendel
WD. Wald [DUE TO GaPOvs loemswles scoooonuuogdcoonoodooboUDOGIG dubitalis, n. sp.

7. Face with a black or dark brown streak on each side, at least from the antennal
TOWOD, KO. WAG COMMONS “Goooocoocencouoonouaguc bon UDC ooorcosoumEooUHb goo DS 8

Face yellow or grey, without a black streak on each side from antennal fovea to the
EDISTOINC MMPI eer ee es eater reel ch ew epial atresia ep Moe ndc usin sticict ae ishiokze pcp a ate saa ci otredns ate 10

wm

No dark vitta over the middle of the discal cell of the wing; palpi black; scutellum
with 4 marginal bristles; abdomen of the male without yellow lanceolate scales ;
wing with two outstanding dark fasciae among the other markings, the inner
one wide on the costa and falling over the outer cross-vein, the outer one
narrower and not extending to the hind margin, the apex with a rounded black
spot, the basal half with numerous small dark spots in the cells ...........

Beeps EAN BOE ee es Sos MR ee amen ee Ie re ee es ae ee od bilineata de Meijere
A dark vitta extending over the inner cross-vein and the middle of the discal cell
of the wing, other characters of markings not as above ................... )

9. The dark fascia over the outer cross-vein connected with the preapical one before
attaining the hind margin of the wing; inner vertical pair of bristles lacking;
aristae of the male without an apical palette .............. impingens Walker

The two dark fasciae above referred to not connected behind; inner vertical pair of
bristles present; aristae of male with a lanceolate apical palette ...........

RE ee ahs eae REE ene enn chia) feb te TEIN ore Le et dante ric opne sUISneI eM SHER el Loken GRASS vale fusifacies Walker
10. Tarsi entirely black, or at most only the base of the mid metatarsus brownish .... 11
At least all the metatarsi except their extreme tips yellow .................... 3

11. The dark fascia over the outer cross-vein of the wing broken into small spots
costally ; legs except the tarsi yellow, the femora brownish marked on both sides
below at apices; mid metatarsi reddish-brown at bases; fore tibiae of male
with a small brush of short thick setulae at apex on the posteroventral surface

FORCE Orck a Ole chit vs EAC Onn cit AGE Ei A chee eA eR Oe race Pa ah ade ee cs oe penicillata Hendel.
The dark fascia over the outer cross-vein of the wing as in penicillata, but the

femora almost entinelys black rrge ery) poy i ens ee innocua, n. Sp.
The dark fascia over the outer cross-vein of the wing complete ................. 12

12. Mesonotum whitish-grey-dusted, with two broad blackish vittae .................

3.5/0 PRB OAC GIG ORES ELECT Sie tra Se Ain iro ARE RR ee Keir vie See Bee albolineata de Meijere
Mesonotum olive-grey-dusted, with seven narrow indistinct dark vittae

ORG: GO CORT CEA NE TE CR CR ORR ORE ONTO ecu penn Sa oeteE ERA cucCTS ee antck Cac Sache Mere protensa Walker
13. Abdominal tergites with pale brown preapical or central fascia; hind femora slightly
emarginate or concave below centrally ......................... potens Walker
Abdominal tergites with four brown discal spots; hind femora slightly thickened,
not emarginate or concave below centrally .............. ws. ventralis Walker

N.B.—There are several species that occur in Australia and in some of the
adjacent islands that may yet be found in New Guinea. It will thus be necessary
to take these into consideration in making identifications in the genus. One such
species that is closely similar to impingens occurs in the Solomon Islands and
may occur also in the territory now under consideration.

EUPROSOPIA TIGRINA Osten-Sacken.

Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genov., xvi, 1881, 473.

The golden-yellow vittate thorax is not unique for this species in this genus,
there being several others with that character known to me, but, taken in
conjunction with the dark vittate wing, the characters readily separate it from
any other now before me.

Known only from New Guinea. I have seen specimens, but have none before
me at this time,

148 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

EUPROSOPIA RUFIVENTRIS Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 334.

This is the only species of the group with emarginate apex to the scutellum
known from New Guinea. I have seen one of the group from the Solomon Islands
and several from Malaya.

Described from New Guinea and not subsequently recorded.

EUPROSOPIA MINUTA, n. sp. PI. v, fig. 32.

°. The smallest species of the genus known to me, distinguished from all
the others by the blackish-brown wings with their transverse hyaline markings
in the cells (Pl. v, fig. 32).

Head brownish-yellow, occiput fuscous, with grey dust, frons red on each side
ot central stripe except in front, the orbits and triangle grey-dusted; antennae
yellowish-brown; face with a small dark spot on epistome below and slightly
mesad of each fovea, the prelabrum with a similar spot on each side; palpi orange,
with dark tips. Frons at vertex not depressed, about one-third of the head-width,
a little more than that in front, and about 1:25 times as long as its anterior width;
vertex with four bristles. Antennae about two-thirds as long as face, third
segment about three times as long as wide; arista very short haired on basal
fourth or less. Edges of facial carina not sharp. Gena about one-sixth as high
as eye.

Thorax dull black, quite densely grey-dusted, mesonotum with five dark brown
irregular vittae, submedian pair broken at suture and notched on inner edge
behind suture, the sublateral pair broken at suture. Pleura pale-grey-dusted, dull
black above; scutellum with a large dark brown discal spot. Hairs black, rather
strong on pleura. Bristles as follows: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals (and some long
setulae at base of the posterior one), 2 post-alars, and a pair of dorsocentrals;
scutellum convex on disc, rounded in outline, with numerous dark discal hairs and
4 marginal bristles. Legs black, hind tibiae centrally sometimes brownish, all
metatarsi except the extreme apices whitish-yellow.

Wings brownish-black, marked as in Plate vy, figure 32. Stigma entirely brown,
nearly as long as the third section of the costa; fourth vein almost straight on
apical section, its tip almost imperceptibly turned up; inner cross-vein at about
one-third from base of discal cell; fifth vein bare above. Squamae brown. Halteres
yellow. Abdomen black, dull, grey-dusted at bases of the tergites. Genital cone
very broadly leaf-like. Length, 4 mm.

Type and 1 paratype, Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, August 1933 (L. BE.
Cheesman).

EUPROSOPIA MILIARIA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 353.—Platystoma pectorale Walker, Jour.
Proc. Linn, Soc. Lond., vi, 1862, 13.—Euprosopia diminutiva de Meijere, Nov. Guin.,
ix, Zool. livr. 3, 1913, 368.

The above synonymy is that given by Hendel in his work on the Platystominae,
but I have some doubts as to the correctness of his deductions. Until I had the
opportunity of examining the present collection I considered there was but one
small species with the peculiar type of wing markings shown for miliaria by
Hendel (Pl. 2, fig. 41). Now I have four very similar species, three of which
are dealt with herein.

Hendel’s species I have been able to determine from his photograph of the
wing and his statement that there are four strong vertical bristles and three

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 149

golden-yellow-dusted vittae on the pleura. One specimen agreeing with these
characters, a male, is before me. It has a lanceolate apical aristal palette, and
there are some very short hairs or pubescence on the basal fifth of the upperside
of the aristae. Hendel gives the aristae as bare. The fifth ventral segment of the
abdomen is furnished with a clump of about 8 downwardly-directed black bristles
on each side at apex, a character found in two of the other closely allied species
of which I have males. The hairs on the underside of the basal section of the
stem vein of the wing are indistinguishable in miliaria, and there are no setulae on
the upperside of the fifth vein along the discal cell, but the latter may have been
rubbed off. The extreme apex of the first posterior cell is dark brown.

Originally described from Isle of Lakes in the Papuan region. One male. New
Britain (Dr. Heydon).

EUPROSOPIA DUBITALIS, nN. sp. Pl. v, fig. 33.

6, 9. Very similar to miliaria as above accepted, differing essentially as
follows: Vertex with but the two outer bristles present: basal section of stem vein
of the wing with short fine hairs below. Both species have a transverse series of
bristles on the hind margin of the mesonotum, the outer one on each side being
the posterior postalar, the others the dorsocentrals and prescutellar acrostichals.
Length, 5-6-5 mm.

Type, male, Aitape, Oct-Nov. 1936 (lL. E. Cheesman), allotype, Vanimo
(F. H. Taylor), New Guinea.

HEIUPROSOPIA SETINERVIS, n. sp. PI. v, fig. 34.

A smaller and darker species than either of the other two, with wing markings
more distinctive (Pl. v, fig. 34), and only two golden-dusted pleural vittae.

9. Face largely blackened, and the third antennal segment darkened above.
The latter is shorter than in the other two species and the arista is much more
distinctly haired, the longest hairs on the basal fifth being about half as long as
the width of the third antennal segment. Vertex with four bristles, the inner pair
the shorter. Gena about one-tenth as high as the eye. Mesonotum much darker
than in the other two species, the yellowish-grey-dusting less dense and the seven
dark vittae inconspicuous. Bristling as in miliaria, the hairs on dise of mesonotum
and on most of the pleura dark, those on the pteropleura and the margins of the
mesonotum and scutellum yellow. Legs black, basal two-thirds of all tibiae fulvous-
yellow, all metatarsi except their extreme apices whitish-yellow.

Wings dark brown, with many small hyaline spots, becoming short transverse
streaks in the cells apically (PI. v, fig. 34). First, third and fifth veins closely
setulose above, the fifth on the entire extent of posterior basal and discal cells,
third more widely setulose below almost to its apex; first posterior cell slightly
narrowed at apex. Halteres yellow. Abdomen shiny black, with less dense grey-
dusting than in the other two species, the dust most distinct across bases of the
tergites, each tergite with a large poorly-defined black mark on each side, hairs
and bristles black. Length, 5 mm.

Type, West New Guinea: Mt. Nomo, south of Mt. Bougainville, 700 feet,
February 1936 (L. EH. Cheesman).

This is the only species known to me in this genus in which the fifth vein
is setulose on the extent of the posterior basal and discal cells.

EUPROSOPIA BILINEATA de Meijere. Pl. v, fig. 35.
Nov, Guwin., v, Zool, livr, 1, 1906, 92; op, cit., ix, 1913, 367,

150 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

Originally described from New Guinea and not since recorded. One male
which I refer here agrees with the rather brief description. The frons has a
narrow brown central vitta, the face has a rather broad dark brown streak in the
lower half of each fovea that extends over the sides of the prelabrum. ‘The
antennae descend to lower level of the eye, and the aristae are long-haired on their
basal halves. There are but two vertical bristles. Thorax quite densely whitish-
grey-dusted, the mesonotum with two uniformly wide black vittae that extend
over the sides of the scutellum, pleura entirely grey-dusted. Scutellum with two
short and two long apical bristles. Abdomen entirely pale-grey-dusted, quite
densely covered with moderately long whitish-yellow hairs and without scales.
Legs with the exception of the yellowish basal halves of the tibiae entirely black.
Wings as in fusifacies, but the fascia proximad of the one over the outer cross-
vein is broken into numerous spots and the apical spot is but narrowly or not at
all connected with the preapical fascia; the markings are also paler than in
fusifacies and impingens.

Dutch New Guinea: Cyclops Mts., Sabron, 930 feet, April 1936 (L. E.
Cheesman); New Guinea: Marprik (C. M. Deland and J. R. Rigby) one female;
Papua: Mt. Lamington (Northern Division) one specimen, July 1927 (C. T.
McNamara).

EXUPROSOPIA PROTENSA (Walker). Pl. v, fig. 36.
Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. London, vii, 1864, 228 (Platystoma).
New Guinea: Vanimo, Wewak (F. H. Taylor).

EUPROSOPIA POTENS (Walker). PI. v, fig. 37.

Op. cit., vi, 1862, 12 (Platystoma).

This species has the face yellow, the thoracic dorsum olive-grey-dusted, with
three, five, or seven, narrow dark vittae, and the abdomen with a pale brown
fascia near the apex of each tergite, usually quite indistinct. The wings are
hyaline, with a slight yellowish tinge, and numerous almost evenly distributed
pale brown spots. There is no noticeable anterior prolongation of the tegulae,
the scutellum has six bristles, the anterior pair rather high-placed. There are no
seales on the dorsum of the abdomen in either sex.

New Guinea, Key Is., Ternate, Gilolo, and Molucca. A long series from Wewak,
New Guinea (F. H. Taylor); four specimens, Dutch New Guinea, Cyclops Mts.,
Sabron, 930 feet, April-June 1936 (L. E. Cheesman).

EUPROSOPIA VENTRALIS (Walker). Pl. v, fig. 38, 39.

Op. cit., iii, 1859, 131 (Lamprogaster).

I have a female that I refer here, though the character of the maculation of
the dorsum of the abdomen is not distinguishable owing to its being crushed.
However, from the citation of other characters by Hendel, I am certain that my
identification of the species as the one he accepted as ventralis is correct. The
thorax and abdomen are darker in ground-colour, with the black interrupted vittae
on the former much more developed. The small black spot at the apex of the
subcostal vein is larger and more intense than in potens, and there is a short
blackish streak over the inner cross-vein that is not present in that species, there
being only a short transverse line through the vein. The preapical blackish fascia
on the wing in ventralis is also entire, the one over the outer cross-vein is almost
so and both are darker and more definitely fasciform than are the rather broken
markings in potens, In neither sex is the hind femur concave below, and the

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 151

mid and hind pairs are more noticeably browned apically than in potens. Though
it may not be constant, I may mention that in my specimen of this species the
inner pair of vertical bristles is much smaller and more incurved than in the
females of potens before me.

Originally described from Key Island, and subsequently recorded from New
Guinea by Hendel. One female, Dutch New Guinea; Cyclops Mts., Sabron, Camp 2,
2,000 feet, May 1936 (L. EH. Cheesman).

EUPROSOPIA IMPINGENS (Walker). Pl. v, fig. 40.

Op. cit., viii, 1865, 134 (Platystoma).—EHuprosopia fusifacies de Meijere, Nov.
Guin., v, Zool. livr. 1, 1906, 92; op. cit., ix, Zool. livr. 3, 1913, 367; Edwards, Trans.
Zool. Soc. Lond., xx, pt. 18, 1915, 416.

The black mark on either side of the lower edge of the face, and the con-
spicuous V-shaped black mark on the apical third of the wing, which has both
extremities widened, readily distinguishes this species from its nearest allies.
The tegulae are not at all produced forward and the aristae are long-haired on their
basal two-thirds. Abdomen with many yellow lanceolate scales on the dorsum.

Described from New Guinea. Two females, Kavieng, and Put Put, New
Ireland (F. H. Taylor), and four from Dutch New Guinea: Cyclops Mts., Sabron,
930 feet, May—June 1936 (L. E. Cheesman).

EUPROSOPIA FUSIFACIES (Walker). PI. v, fig. 41.

Op. cit., iii, 1859, 113 (Platystoma); Osten-Sacken, Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat.
Gen., xvi, 1881, 473—Huprosopia squamifera de Meijere, Nov. Guin., ix, Zool.
livr. 3, 1913, 368.

This species is very similar to the preceding, but differs in having the fasciae
of the wings as stated in the foregoing key to the species. Both sexes have
lanceolate scales on the dorsum of the abdomen.

Originally described from Aru Islands and subsequently from New Guinea. A
pair, Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, April 19383 (L. E. Cheesman); Mt. Lamington
(Northern Division), five specimens (C. T. McNamara).

EUPROSOPIA PENICILLATA Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 343; Edwards, Trans. Zool. Soc. London,
xx, pt. 18, 1915, 416.
Very like potens Walker, differing as specified in the foregoing key to species.
Described from New Guinea: Huon Gulf; Dutch New Guinea: Wataikwa
River. Unknown to me except from the description.

EUPROSOPIA AUREOVITTA, n. Sp. PI. v, fig. 42.

3; 9. Readily distinguished from any other species of the genus by the
dull brownish-black thorax with the three broad densely yellow-dusted mesonotal
vittae, the central one continued over the scutellum and the others sublateral and
continued down over the postalar declivities, and the single similarly-dusted vitta
on the pleura from below the anterior spiracle to the posterior margin of the
pteropleura. Wing dark brown, with hyaline spots in the cells, becoming sparser
and smaller apically (Pl. v, fig. 42).

Head brownish-yellow, with a yellowish-white-dusted line round the entire
eye-margins, centre of trons reddish-brown, face with a brown line from lower
part of each antennal fovea to epistome, occiput largely grey; third antennal
segment brown above; palpi brown at tips. Antennae extending about two-thirds
ot the distance to epistome; aristae short-haired on basal fifth or less, without an

152 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII,

apical palette in either sex. Outer pair of vertical bristles strong, inner pair short
and fine. Height of head barely greater than its greatest width in front; frons
slightly narrowed and a little depressed above, about 1:5 as long as wide; gena
about one-eighth as high as eye.

Thorax of male with the following bristles: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals, 1 supra-
alar, 2 postalar, and 1 pair of dorsocentrals, the prescutellar acrostichals lacking;
scutellum with 4 bristles, the outer pair well in front of the apicals and rather
highly placed. In the female the humeral is minute and the notopleurals are
hardly larger, the posterior one being directed forward and upward. Tegulae of
male normal, those of the female rather noticeably produced forward. Hairs black,
yellow on central yellow vitta and on the pteropleura. Legs black, femora grey-
dusted, fore coxae and basal two-thirds or more of all tibiae brownish-yellow, all
metatarsi whitish-yellow except their apical fifth. Fore femur with a series of
posterodorsal bristles and a few finer bristles on the apical half of the postero-
ventral surface.

Wings as in Plate v, figure 42. No costal bristle at the break basad of the
humeral cross-vein, nor hairs on the underside of the stem vein on its basal
section; fourth vein slightly forwardly bent at apex, inner cross-vein oblique.
Halteres yellow. Squamae brownish-yellow, edge of the upper one with narrow
black line. Abdomen blackish-brown, dull, with a broad, complete dorsocentral
vitta of yellow dust, the hairs on latter yellow, on sides black. Length, 7 mm.

Type male, and allotype, Papua: Mafulu, 4,000 feet, December 1933 (L. E.
Cheesman ).

EUPROSOPIA INNOCUA, hn. sp. Pl. v, fig. 43.

d, 2. This species belongs to that group in which the aristae are pubescent on
their basal fifth or less, the scutellum has four bristles, and there are no lanceolate
scales on the dorsum of the abdomen in either sex. The entirely black tarsi are
distinctive.

Head brownish-yellow, the usual grey-dusted line against the eye-margins, face
sometimes brownish centrally. Antennae ferruginous, with the third segment
brown above; the palpi darkened at apices. Frons narrowed above, about 1:25
times as long as its greatest width, the latter exceeding one-third of the head
width. Vertex with 4 strong bristles. Arista of the male with a small broad
apical palette. Gena about one-fourth the eye-height.

Thorax brownish-black, pleura paler, mesonotum with greyish-brown dust and
7 inconspicuous dark vittae, the central one entire and most evident, the next pair
broken between suture and hind margin, the outer pair obsolete before suture;
mesopleura with a brown central mark. Hairs black. Bristles as follows: 1
humeral, 2 notopleurals, 1 supra-alar, 2 postalars (the outer one sometimes dupli-
cated in the female), 1 pair of dorsocentrals, and 1 pair of prescutellar acrostichals.
Scutellum with 4 bristles as in the preceding species. Suprasquamal ridge haired
in centre. Legs black, mid and hind femora usually reddish-brown in part, at
least the mid and hind tibiae reddish-brown except apically. Fore tibia of male
with a yellow subnude stripe on the anteroventral surface except at base and
apex, the posteroventral surface with dense short slightly lanceolate black bristles
on apical sixth. Posteroventral bristles on fore femora of female stronger than
in the male. Tarsi black.

Wings greyish-hyaline, with numerous brownish-black spots (Pl. v, fig. 43).
Stem vein with some fine hairs below on basal section, costa with a fine bristle
below at basal break; fourth vein bent forward at apex; inner cross-vein oblique;

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 153

outer cross-vein enclosed in a dark spot. Halteres yellow. Squamae brown, edge
of upper one fuscous. Abdomen black, densely olive-grey-dusted, usually with a
faint narrow dark apex to tergites 3 and 4 and a brownish central fascia on fifth
tergite. The hairs dense, short, and black, longer and yellow on centre and sides
of the basal composite tergite. Length, 11-13 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and 7 paratypes, Dutch New Guinea:
Sabron, 930 feet, May 1936 (L. E. Cheesman).

It is possible that this is Tetrachaetina burgersiana Enderlein, described from
the same colony, but there are so many important characters lacking in the brief
description of the species, and such probabilities that there are many closely related
forms in New Guinea that I have felt compelled to describe this species as new and
leave the question of the identity of Enderlein’s species to the future. His genus
in any event is not tenable, in my opinion.

Another species that should be considered in connection with this one is
penicillata Hendel. The very brief description given by Hendel states that the
scutellum and pleura are distinctly reddish, and the legs are reddish-yellow, with
the femora at apices below on both sides brownish-striped, and the tarsi black,
only the base of the mid metatarsus brownish. The fifth tergite of the male is
only a little longer than the fourth or third. His comparison is with potens
Walker, which his new species resembles very strongly. In the type male of
innocua the fifth tergite is about as long as the third and fourth together. The
dense short bristles on the posteroventral surface at tip of the fore tibia of the
male of the latter could hardly be termed as “‘Burste” as in penicillata.

Cyclops Mts.,

EUTHYPLATYSTOMA Hendel.
Abhandl. Zool.-botan. Ges., viii, 1914, 398.

EUTHYPLATYSTOMA RIGIDUM (Walker).

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., i, 1857, 32 (Platystoma).—Platystoma stellatum
Walker, op. cit., i, 1857, 32.—Platystoma punctiplenum Walker, op. cit., v, 1861,
268.—Platystoma parvulum Schiner, Reise Novara, Zool., ii, 1, Dipt., 1868, 286.

I have seen no specimens of this species from New Guinea, having only one
trom Celebes, the type locality, and another from Singapore, the last sent me by
C. F. Baker.

It may yet be found in New Guinea.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES IV-V.
Plate iv.

(Walker) o& 11.—Cleitamia excepta, n. sp. type. x3.

12.—Cleitamia delandi, n. sp. type. x6.

1.—Dasyortalis complens
co-type. x12.

2.—Dasyortalis complens (Walker). 2 13.—Plagiostenopterina (Plagiostenopter-
co-type. x12. ina) aenea Wied. X6 app.
3.—Dasyortalis complens var. separata, 14.—Plagiostenopterina (Plagiostenopter-

ina) enderleini Hendel. x6.
15.—Plagiostenopterina (Stenopterosoma)

orbitalis, n. sp. type. x12.
16.—Elassogaster evitta, n. sp. type. x 6.
sp. type.

n. var. type. x12.

4.—Antineura (Adantineura) kerteszi de
Meijere. x6.

5.—Pseudocleitamia setigera, n. sp. type.
« 12° 17.—Pseudepicausta apicalis, n.

6.—Euxestomoea bipunctata Hendel. x12.

7.—Cleitamoides latifascia (Walker )
type. x3.

8.—Cleitamia astrolabei Boisd. x6.

9.—Cleitamia cyclops, n. sp. type. x3.

10.—Cleitamia cheesmanae,n. sp. type. X 3.

N

x LA
18.—Rivellia rufibasis, n. sp. allotype. x 6.
19.—Rivellia dimidiata de Meijere. x12.
20.—Asyntona tetyroides (Walker). x6.
21.—Brea contraria Walker. x6.

154 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VII.

Plate v.

22.—Brea magnifica Hendel. x 6.

23.—Scholastes cinctus (Guérin). x 6.

24.—Scholastes aitapensis, n. sp. paratype.
x 6.

25.—Scholastes taylori, n. sp. paratype. x 6.

26.—Achiosoma nigrifacies, n. sp.
x 6.

27.—Achias brachyophthalmus Walker. x 6.

28.—Achias australis, n. sp. type.

type.

29.—Lamprogaster quadrilinea Walker.
x 6.

30.—Lamprogaster decolor, n. sp. paratype.
x 6.

31.—Lamprogaster fulvipes,- n. sp. type.
x 6.

32.—Huprosopia minuta, n. sp. type. x12.

33.—Euprosopia dubitalis, n. sp. allotype.
x 6.

34.—Huprosopia setinervis,n. sp. type. x12.

35.—Huprosopia bilineata de Meijere. x 6.

36.—EHuprosopia protensa (Walker). x6.

37.—Huprosopia potens (Walker). x6.

38.—Huprosopia ventralis (Walker) type.
2 Bie

39.—Huprosopia ventralis (Walker). A
small specimen identified by J. R.
Malloch. x3.

40.—Huprosopia impingens (Walker). x 6.

41.—Huprosopia fusifacies (Walker). x6.

42.—EHuprosopia aureovitta, n. sp. type.
> PY

43.—Huprosopia innocua, n. sp. type. x3.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939. PLATE Iv.

Otitidae from New Guinea.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939. PLATE V.

Otitidae from New Guinea.

155

THE DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VIII.
DOLICHOPODIDAE.
Par Vabbé O. Parent, Ambleteuse.
(Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8.)

(Thirty-one Text-figures. )

[Read 26th April, 1939.]

I. CAMPSICNEMINAE.
Sympycnus Loew.

Neue Beitr., v, 1857, 42; Smiths. Misc. Coll. 171 (Mon. Dipt. North Amer.),
Gen. xxxii, 1864, 185.

S. PLUMIPES, n. sp. Fig. 1-3.

6. Front bleu d’acier brillant. Face a épais satiné blanc, moins large que
larticle 3 des antennes. Cils postoculaires inférieurs pales. Antennes noires,
Particle 3 triangulaire arrondi, pas plus long que large, soie glabre, insérée au
milieu du bord dorsal. Mesonotum vert brillant, varié de cuivreux, 2 séries mal
distinctes de soies acrosticales réduites, 6 d.c., 2 scutellaires, 1 prothoracique noir.
Abdomen vert sombre métallique, segment 2 jaune rouge translucide sur la moitié
basilaire. Hypopyge noir & appendices peu saillants. Hanches jaunes, II noires,
toutes a vestiture noire. Pattes jaune rouge, tarses noirs, II 4 partir du milieu du
protarse. Patte I: tibia, face dorsale, un chéte postérieur long, tarse (fig. 1) 1 fois
% aussi long que le tibia, les articles 1 et 2 filiformes, le protarse un peu plus long
que le reste, 2 un peu plus long que les 3 suivants réunis, ceux-ci aplatis dorso-
ventralement, et un peu élargis; aux bords antérieur et postérieur avec une
plumosité noire. Patte Il: femur, un préapical. Tibia, face dorsale, 3 antérieurs, 2
postérieurs; face ventrale, 2 antérieurs. Tarse simple, un peu plus long que le
tibia, protarse un peu plus court que le reste. Patte III: femur, un préapical;
tarse plus court que le tibia, les articles 1 et 2 courts, 3 le plus long, un peu plus
long que les 2 suivants réunis; protarse (fig. 2), face ventrale, avec 2-3 longs cils,
2 avec un appendice vermiforme a l’apex. Ailes (fig. 3) teintées de brun, nervures
noires, 3 et 4 a peine convergentes a l’apex; transverse postérieure légérement plus
longue que la section apicale de la 5e. Balanciers jaunes. Cuillerons jaunes 4a cils
noirs. Long: 5 mm.

Femelle inconnue.

N. Guinea: Edie Creek (F. H. Taylor).

Il. CHRYSOSOMATINAE.
CuRYSOSOMA Guérin.
Voy. Coquille Atlas, vii, 1831, 25.
1. C. apruptum Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. London, iv, 1860, 115 (Psilopus);

muticus Thomson, Hugenies Resa, Zool., i, Diptera, 1868, 509.
New Britain: Rabaul (F. H. Taylor).

156 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VIII,

2. C. ATROPURPUREUM, n. sp. Fig. 4.

9. Front vert bleu brillant, une soie orbitaire. Face a satiné blane 4 cétés
paralleles, étroite, large comme un tiers de travers d’oeil. Favoris blanes avec 3
chetes noirs prés de la bouche. Antennes noires, l’article 3 rouge brique, noir au
bord dorsal; soie ventrale de l’article 2 presque aussi longue que l’article 3; celui-ci
1 fois 4 aussi long que large; soie apicale longue comme téte, thorax et écusson

Figs. 1-7.—1-3. Sympycnus plumipes do, 1, tarse i; 2, tarse iii; 3, aile—4. Chrysosoma
atropurpureum 2, aile-—5-7. C. barbescens o, 5, hypopyge; 6, tarse i; 7, aile.

réunis. Mesonotum vert brillant, 3 acrosticales longues, 5 d.c., 2 scutellaires.
Abdomen trés brillant, 4 part le bord postérieur du segment 2 noir violacé; une
. seule série transverse de soies. Hanches noires a givré blanc, I a pilosité blanche;
au bord externe avec un peigne de 6 6pines noires; III avec un chéte externe noir,
robuste. Trochanters noirs. Femurs noirs, I et II étroitement jaunes 4 l’apex.
Tibia I jaune, II and III noirs. Tarses noirs. Patte I: tibia, face dorsale, 1 chéte
antérieur prés de la racine; tarse un peu plus long que le tibia, protarse presque
aussi long que le reste. Patte II: tibia, face dorsale, 2 antérieurs, 2 postérieurs,
3 chétes ventraux, tarse 1 fois 4 aussi long que le tibia, protarse égal au reste.
Patte III: tarse un peu plus court que le tibia, protarse égal aux articles 2 et 3
réunis. Ailes (fig. 4) sans tache; transverse apicale naissant a angle droit; trans-
verse postérieure droite. Balanciers jaunes. Cuillerons a cils pales. Long: 5 mm.

Male inconnu.

N. Guinea: Wewak (F. H. Taylor). N. Britain (Dr. Hosking).

3. C. BARBESCENS, nN. Sp. Figs. 5-7.

6. Front vert métallique brillant, avec, au coin postérieur, une plage de soies
folles noires, s’étendant jusqu’a l’avant. Face violacée brillante, sans poudré,
renflée, de largeur moyenne égale aux 2 d’un travers d’oeil. Palpes noirs a pilosité
dense, jaune blanc. Favoris longs, jaune blane. Antennes noires, l’article 2 a

BY O. PARENT. 157

chétes dorsaux et ventraux 1 fois % aussi longs que l’article 3, celui-ci légerement
plus long que large, ovale, tronqué a l’apex; soie apicale mais insérée au coin
dorsal, simple, pas plus longue que téte et mésonotum réunis. Mesonotum vert
brillant, 3 acrosticales longues, 2 d. c. a l’arriere, 2 scutellaires. Abdomen vert
doré brillant, les segments 3, 4 et 5 avec, a la base, une étroite bande noir mat, une
seule série transversale de chétes. Hypopyge (fig. 5) et ses appendices noirs, les
externes fourchus, a branche ventrale bilobée 4 l’apex. Hanches noires, a vestiture
blanche. Trochanters et femurs noirs, tibias jaunes, tarses I et II jaunes, noirs a
partir de l’apex du protarse, III entiérement noir, le protarse cependant un peu
rougeatre. Tous les femurs, face ventrale, a pilosité blanche, longue comme le
travers. Patte I: tibia, face dorsale, 2 chétes minuscules, tarse (fig. 6) un peu
plus long que le tibia, protarse plus long que le reste, un peu élargi; a la face
ventrale aplati et pelucheux, les autres articles aplatis latéralement, 2 épaissi,
échancré ventralement peu avant l’apex. Tarse II a peine plus long que le tibia,
protarse plus long que le reste. Patte III: tibia gréle, tarse sensiblement égal au
tibia, protarse sensiblement égal au reste. Ailes (fig. 7) sans tache, transverse
apicale formant arcature réguliére, transverse postérieure pratiquement droite.
Balanciers brun noir. Cuillerons blancs a large bordure noire et cils blancs.
Long: 5 mm.
Femelle inconnue.
N. Guinea: Aitape (F. H. Taylor).

4. C. COMPRESSIPES, nh. sp. Fig. 8, 9.

dg. Front vert métallique, brillant, une touffe dense de longues soies folles
noires au coin postérieur. Face a satiné blanc, a cotés convergents vers l’apex,
de largeur moyenne égale aux 2 d’un travers d’oeil. Favoris blancs. Antennes
entiérement noires, les soies de l’article 2 plus courtes que l’article 3, celui-ci
triangulaire, un peu plus long que large; soie simple, longue comme téte, thorax
et écusson réunis. Mesonotum vert sombre brillant, 3 acrosticales longues, 5 d.c.
dont les deux postérieures seules développées, 2 scutellaires. Abdomen vert sombre,
brillant, les segments noir mat, dans leur moitié basilaire, pilosité noire assez
longue, une seule série transversale de chétes. Hypopyge (fig. 8) et ses appendices
noirs, les externes fourchus. Hanches noires, I a pilosité blanche longue, 3 soies
apicales noires, III a pilosité blanche, une soie externe noire, robuste. Trochanters
jaune brun. Femurs noirs, tivia I jaune rouge, II jaune brun, III noir, tarses
noirs. Patte I: femur, face ventrale, deux séries divergentes de soies blanches,
de longueur décroissante vers l’apex, les basilaires au plus aussi longues que le
travers. Tibia inerme. Tarse un peu plus long que le tibia, protarse égal au reste,
tace ventrale, avec une série de chétules courts, les 4 articles suivants aplatis
latéralement et élargis, les articles 2, 3 et 4 d’égale longueur. Patte II: femur,
face ventrale, ligne médiane, sur les 2 basilaires, une série dense de soies fines,
blanches, rigides, aussi longues que le travers; ligne antérieure et postérieure, sur
la moitié apicale, une série de soies rigides, noires, au moins aussi longues que le
travers, les postérieures moins développées. Tibia, face dorsale, 2 chétules
antérieurs, 1 postérieur. Tarse un peu plus long que le tibia; protarse plus long
que le reste. Patte III: femur, face ventrale, une série de soies blanches peu
remarquables. Tarse plus court que le tibia, protarse un peu plus court que le
reste. Ailes (fig. 9) (les deux exemplaires sont immatures) brunies au bord
antérieur, les transverses apicale et postérieure nimbées de brun. Costa non ciliée;
transverse apicale naissant a angle légérement obtus; transverse postérieure

158 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VIII,

légérement sigmatiforme. Balanciers noirs. Cuillerons noirs a cils noirs. Long:
6 mm.

Femelle inconnue.

N. Guinea: Vanimo (F. H. Taylor).

5. C. FASCIATUM Guérin, Voy. Coquille, Zool. ii (2) i, 1838, 293 (Agonosoma).
New Guinea: Wewak, Aitape (F. H. Taylor).

6. C. FISSILAMELLATUM, n. sp. Fig. 10, 11.

6. Front violacé brillant, une soie orbitaire minuscule, arquée. Face verte, a
satiné blanc, de largeur moyenne égale aux 3 d’un travers d’oeil. Favoris blancs.
Antennes noires, article 2 a soie ventrale, un peu plus longue que l’article 3,
celui-ci 1 fois 4 aussi long que large; soie apicale simple, longue comme thorax
et écusson réunis. Mesonotum assez brillant, noir pourpre; flanquant extérieure-
ment les soies d.c. une bande longitudinale vert bleu; 4 acrosticales longues, 2 d.c.
a Varriére, 2 scutellaires. Abdomen plut6t terne, vert, les segments noir mat sur
la moitié basilaire, une seule série transverse de chétes, pilosité courte, dressée.
Hypopyge (fig. 10) et appendices noirs, les externes fourchus, la branche ventrale
plus longue que l’autre. Pattes entierement noires. Hanche I a pilosité blanche;
trois soies apicales noires, III avec plusieurs soies externes dont une noire. Patte
I: femur, face ventrale, sur le tiers basilaire, 4-5 soies noires rigides, longues 2
fois comme le travers, disposées en deux séries irréguliéres; au dela, deux séries
divergentes de soies blanches plus longues que le travers. Tibia: 3 chétes
postérieurs remarquables, 2 chétes dorsaux, quelques chétules ventraux. Tarse 1
tois # aussi long que le tibia, protarse presque aussi long que le tibia, un peu plus
long que le reste. Patte II: femur, face ventrale, a villosité blanche, un peu plus
longue que le travers. Tibia, face dorsale, une ciliation fine, droite, aussi longue
que le travers, se continuant sur tout le tarse; un chéte antérieur prés de la racine,
2 chetes postérieurs, 2 chétes ventraux. Tarse 1 fois 4 aussi long que le tibia,
protarse plus long que le reste; face ventrale, avec une série de chétules épais,
espacés. Patte III: femur, face ventrale, une pilosité blanche plus longue que le
travers. Tibia & nombreux chétes dorsaux. Tarse égal au tibia, protarse plus
long que le reste. Ailes (fig. 11) presque entiérement noires, une tache fenétre
dans la premiére cellule postérieure; une étroite bande blanche au bord postérieur.
Costa non ciliée. Transverse apicale naissant a angle obtus, transverse postérieure
fortement S-forme. Balanciers noirs. Cuillerons a cilSs noirs. Long: 7 mm.

Femelle semblable au male.

N. Guinea: Edie Creek (F. H. Taylor).

(jC ehULiEE: Ns SDs. 2%

9. Front vert métallique brillant. Face 4 satiné blanc, plane, a cdtés
paralléles, large comme les {$ d’un travers d’oeil. Palpes et trompe jaunes.
Favoris blanes. Antennes noires, chéte dorsal de l’article 2 long comme l'article 3,
celui-ci 1 fois 4 aussi long que large; soie longue comme thorax et écusson réunis.
Mesonotum vert métallique brillant, 3 acrosticales grandes, 2 d.c. a l’arriére, 2
scutellaires. Abdomen vert métallique brillant, sans bandes noires; une seule
série transverse de chétes, pilosité courte et rare. Hanche I jaune a pilosité
jaune, 2 soies noires a l’apex, II et III noires, III avec un vrai chéte externe noir.
Trochanter I jaune, II et III noirs. Pattes jaunes, femur III noir a l’apex, les
tibias confusément noirs a l’apex, III plus largement, tarses I et II noirs a partir
de apex du protarse, III entiérement. Patte I: femur, face ventrale, sur le quart
basilaire, 2 soies chétiformes noires, 1 fois 4 aussi longues que le travers. Tibia,

BY O. PARENT. 159

face dorsale, 1 antérieur, 2 postérieurs; face ventrale, 1 antérieur, 1 postérieur.
Tarse 1 fois 2 aussi long que le tibia, protarse sensiblement égal au reste. Patte IL:
tibia face dorsale, 2 postérieurs, 1 antérieur plus développé. Tarse un peu plus
long que le tibia, protarse plus long que le reste. Patte III: tarse sensiblement

1

Figs. 8-15.—8-9. Chrysosoma compressipes oc, 8, hypopyge; 9, aile.—10-11.
C. fissilamellatum ¢, 10, hypopyge; 11, aile.—12. C. futile Par. 2, aile-—13. C. latemacu-
latum 2, aile.-—14-15. C. nigrohalteratum co, 14, hypopyge; 15, aile.

égal au tibia, protarse égal au reste. Aile (fig. 12) sans tache, transverse apicale
naissant a angle droit et formant une arcature régulieére, transverse postérieure
légérement S-forme. Balanciers noirs. Cuillerons a cils blancs. Long: 5 mm.
Male inconnu.
N. Guinea: Edie Creek (F. H. Taylor).

8. C. Impressum Becker, Capita Zool., i, afl. 4, 1922, 173, fig. 138.
New Guinea: Wewak (F. H. Taylor).

9. C. INSULANUM, 0. SDP.

@. Front vert métallique brillant, une soie orbitaire. Face a satiné blanc
argent, a cotés paralléles, large comme les 2 d’un travers d’oeil. Favoris pales.
Antennes noires, soie dorsale de Varticle 2 aussi longue que I’article 3, celui-ci
triangulaire un peu plus long que large, soie apicale longue comme le thorax.

160 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINFA. VIII,

Mesonotum vert brillant, 3 acrosticales grandes, 5 d.c., 2 scutellaires. Abdomen vert
métallique; une bande noir mat a cheval sur les incisions, une seule série trans-
versale de chétes. Hanche I jaune, a soies terminales noires, II et III noires.
Trochanter I jaune, II et III noirs. Pattes jaunes, tarses I et II noirs a partir de
l’apex du protarse, III entiérement. Patte I: femur, face ventrale, une série de 5
soies jaunes, de longueur décroissante vers l’apex, les basilaires plus longues que
la demi-longueur du femur. Tibia face dorsale, moitié basilaire, 3 longues soies
noires, égales. Tarse presque 1 fois 4 aussi long que le tibia, protarse au moins
aussi long que le reste, muni de 2 chétes dorsaux antérieurs. Patte II: tibia face
dorsale, 2 chétes postérieurs minuscules, 3 antérieurs longs et robustes, face
ventrale, 3 chétes dont le proximal long et robuste. Tarse plus long que le tibia,
protarse 1 fois 4 aussi long que le reste, avec, a la face dorsale, un chéte court au
tiers apical et, face ventrale, des chétules remarquables. Patte III: tibia face
dorsale, 2 chétes antérieurs assez longs. Tarse égal au tibia; protarse égal au
reste, muni apres le milieu d’un chétule dorsal remarquable, les autres articles
comprimés et légérement dilatés. Aile sans tache; transverse postérieure
légerement S-forme. Balanciers jaunes. Cuillerons a cils jaunes. Long: 4 mm.

Male inconnu.

Duke of York Island, off New Britain (Dr. Hosking).

10. C. LATEMACULATUM, n. sp. Fig. 13.

2. Front vert métallique brillant, une soie orbitaire robuste. Face a cdtés
paralléles, verte, a satiné blanc, large au plus comme le demi-travers de loeil.
Trompe noire. Favoris blancs. Antennes noires, soie dorsale de l’article 2 plus
courte que larticle 3, celui-ci triangulaire un peu plus long que large; soie un peu
plus longue que le mesonotum. Celui-ci vert brillant, 3 acrosticales longues, 5 d.c.,
les deux derniéres plus développées, 2 scutellaires. Abdomen vert métallique, les
segments noir mat sur la moitié basilaire, une seule série transversale de chétes peu
développés. Hanches noires, I a pilosité blanche, et 3 soies apicales noires, III
avec un chéte externe noir, robuste. Trochanters et femurs noirs, tibia I jaune
rouge, II et III noirs, tarses noirs. Patte I: femur, face ventrale, a courte pilosité
blanche, tibia, face dorsale, un chétule minuscule prés de la racine. Tarse un peu
plus long que le tibia, protarse inerme, égal au reste. Patte II: tibia, face dorsale,
2 chétes antérieurs bien développés, 2 postérieurs, protarse plus long que le reste.
Patte III: protarse aussi long que le reste. Ailes (fig. 13) presque entiérement
noires, les nervures longitudinales 2 et 3 sinueuses a l’extrémité; transverse apicale
naissant a angle droit; transverse postérieure faiblement S-forme. Balanciers
noirs. Cuillerons noirs a cils noirs. Long: 6,5 mm.

Male inconnu.

N. Guinea: Vanimo (F. H. Taylor). ,

Remarque.—Cette espéce ne peut se comparer qu’a nigrilimbatum Meij. (N.
Guinea), marginale Walk. = anthracinum Beck. (N. Guinea et Kaiser Wilhelmsland)
et latefuscatum Par. (I. Samoa).

Elle se distingue: (i) de nigrilimbatum Meij. dont la femelle seule est connue
1, par la pilosité blanche des hanches I et de la face ventrale du femur I; 2, par
le tibia I présentant un seul chétule et non 3; 3, par le contour de la tache alaire.
(ii) de marginale Walk. 1, par la couleur des cils des cuillerons franchement
noirs et non brun clair; 2, par la forme triangulaire de l’article 3 des antennes;
3, par la couleur des tibias; 4, par lV’absence de chétes apicaux a la hanche I.
(iii) de latefuscatum Par. 1, par la couleur des tibias dont seul l’antérieur est
jaune; 2, par la transverse postérieure égale au manche de la furcea; 3, par la
tache de Vaile s’étendant jusqu’a l’apex.

BY 0. PARENT. 161

11. C. LucicENA Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. London, iii, 1859, 91 (Psilopus).
New Guinea: Salamaua (F. H. Taylor).

12. C. NIGROHALTERATUM, n. sp. Fig. 14, 15.

6. Front vert métallique brillant, ume soie orbitaire folle. Face de largeur
moyenne égale aux # d’un travers d’oeil, épistome renflé, vert doré brillant, clypeus
a satiné gris jaunatre. Favoris jaunes. Antennes noires, article 2 a chéte dorsal
égal a l’article 3, celui-ci conique, 1 fois 4 aussi long que large; soie apicale, simple,
longue comme téte, thorax et écusson réunis. Mesonotum vert terne, 3 acrosticales
grandes, précédées de 3-4 minuscules. 2 d.c. postérieures, 2 scutellaires. Abdomen
vert doré, une bande noir mat sur les incisions, pilosité courte, une seule série
transverse de chétes. Hypopyge (fig. 14) noir, appendices noirs, les externes
tourchus a4 pilosité claire. Hanches noires a vestiture claire, I face antérieure
avec une série externe de soies plus robustes a l’apex. Trochanters et femurs
noirs; tibias jaune rouge, III progressivement brunis vers l’apex; tarse brun noir,
les protarses I et II plus ou moins rougeatres a la racine. Patte I: femur, face
ventrale, une série de soies jaunes, de longueur décroissante vers l’2pex, les deux
basilaires plus longues, longues comme les # de la longueur du femur. Tibia face
dorsale, 3 longues soies chétiformes; face ventrale, 1 soie chétiforme vers le milieu.
Tarse 1 fois # aussi long que le tibia, protarse égal au tibia; sur le tiers basilaire
légérement élargi, aplati ventralement et pelucheux. Patte II: femur, face
ventrale, une série de soies fines, rigides, pales, longues 1 fois 4 comme le travers.
Tibia, face dorsale, ligne antérieure, 3 soies chétiformes; face ventrale, 1 soie
chétiforme longue, au quart basilaire, une courte vers le milieu. Tarse 1 fois 4
aussi long que le tibia, protarse un peu plus long que le reste. Patte III: femur,
face ventrale, une ciliation claire comme au femur II, mais un peu plus courte.
Tibia, un chéte dorsal long au quart basilaire. Tarse un peu plus court que le
tibia, protarse égal au reste. Ailes (fig. 15) brunes plus intensément au bord
antérieur, sans taches nettes et bien délimitées; transverse apicale plutéot anguleuse,
transverse postérieure modérément S-forme. Balanciers noirs. Cuillerons noirs a
cils pales. Long: 6 mm.

Femelle semblable au male, l’article 3 des antennes plus développé, presque 2
fois aussi long que large.

N. Guinea: Wewak (F. H. Taylor).

13. C. papuAsINuM Bigot, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, Sér. 6, x, 1890, 283
(Spathiopsilopus).
New Guinea: Vanimo, Aitape; New Britain: Rabaul (F. H. Taylor).

14. C. pEXOIDES, n. sp. Fig. 16-18.

6. Front vert métallique, une soie orbitaire noire, arquée, minuscule. Face
verte au fond, a satiné gris blanc, a cétés convergents vers l’apex, de largeur
moyenne égale aux # d’un travers d’oeil. Trompe jaune. Favoris blancs. Antennes
noires, article 2 a soie ventrale 1 fois 4 aussi longue que larticle 3, celui-ci pas
plus long que large, triangulaire; soie presque aussi longue que le corps entier,
terminée par une palette (fig. 16) fusiforme, 3 fois aussi longue que large, noire
sur ses 2 basilaires, blanche au dela. Mesonotum vert bleu brillant, 3 acrosticales
grandes, 2 d.c. a l’arriére, 2 scutellaires. Abdomen brillant, cuivreux doré, la
moitié basilaire des segments noir mat, le segment 1 bordé de blanc a la marge
postérieure; une seule série transverse de chétes. Hypopyge (fig. 17) et ses
appendices noirs, les externes fourchus. Hanches I jaunes presque glabres, les
soies apicales jaunes; II et III noires, 4 vestiture pale. Trochanter I jaune, II et

162 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VIII,

IiI brun noir. Pattes jaunes, femur III noir sur le huitiéme apical, tarses I et II
noircis a partir de l’apex du protarse, III entiérement noir. Patte I: femur, face
ventrale, tout au long, avec une double ciliation rigide noire, le chéte basilaire de
chaque série remarquablement long, au moins double du travers, le chéte suivant
au plus aussi long que le travers du femur, les autres de longueur progressive-
ment décroissante vers l’apex. Tibia: un chéte dorsal trés réduit prés de la racine.

Tarse presque 1 fois 3 aussi long que le tibia; protarse égal aux 2 articles suivants

Figs. 16-22.—16-18. Chrysosoma pexoides 3%, 16, palette antennaire; 17, hypopyge; 18,
aile.—19-20. C. pulverulentum o&, 19, hypopyge; 20, aile.—21-22. C. trichromatum oc, 21,
hypopyge; 22, aile.

réunis. Patte II: tarse un peu plus court que le tibia, protarse égal au reste.
Patte III: tarse plus court que le tibia, protarse un peu plus court que le reste.
Ailes (fig. 18) teintées de rouille, plus intensément au bord antérieur. Costa ciliée,
transverse apicale naissant 4 angle droit, transverse postérieure légérement sigmati-
forme. Balanciers jaune pale. Cuillerons a cils pales. Long: 6 mm.

Femelle inconnue.

N. Guinea: Wau (F. H. Taylor).

Remarque.—Cette espéce est extrémement voisine de pexum Beck. décrite de
N. Guinée et lui est peut-étre synonyme. Cependant, si la description de Becker
est exacte, elle s’en sépare: (1) par la longueur de la soie antennaire ici presque
égale au corps entier, chez pexuwm a peine plus longue que téte et thorax réunis,
(2) par la couleur du tibia III jaune et non brun noir, (3) par la forme de
Vhypopyge, (4) par la ciliation ventrale du femur I. Ici le chéte basilaire de
chaque série tranche vigoureusement par sa longueur sur les suivants, chez pexum
il semble que la décroissance de longueur soit progressive.

15. C. PULVERULENTUM, nN. sp. Fig. 19, 20.
dg. Front vert métallique terni par un poudré jaunatre; une soie orbitaire
minuscule. Face verte, a satiné jaune. Trompe jaune. Favoris pales. Antennes

BY O. PARENT. 163

jaune orange, l’article 2 avec une soie dorsale un peu plus longue que 3, celui-ci
pas plus long que large; soie apicale, noire, simple, longue comme téte et thorax
réunis. Mesonotum bleu métallique terni par un poudré jaune, 3 acrosticales
longues, 2 d.c. a Varriére, 2 scutellaires. Métaépimeére jaune. Abdomen partie
vert, partie jaune, segment 1 entiérement métallique, 2, 3 et 4 largement tachés de
jaune sur les flancs; 5 presque entiérement métallique, le reste entiérement.
Hypopyge (fig. 19) vert, 4 appendices jaunes, les cornes de la capsule trés longues,
jaunes. Hanches jaunes, II et III tachées de noir a la face externe, toutes a
vestiture pale. Trochanters et pattes jaunes, tarse I progressivement noirci, II et
III avec les 4 derniers articles noirs. Femurs pratiquement glabres a la face
ventrale. Patte I: tibia aplati dorso-ventralement; face postérieure peu avant
l’apex, une soie fine, remarquable. Tarse extrémement gréle, 2 fois 4 aussi long
que le tibia, protarse presque 2 fois aussi long que le reste, l’article 5 déprimé, un
peu élargi. Patte II: tarse presque 2 fois aussi long que le tibia, protarse 1 fois
4 aussi long que le reste. Patte III: tarse plus court que le tibia, protarse un peu
plus long que le reste. Ailes (fig. 20) & nervures noires; costa non ciliée. Trans-
verse apicale naissant a4 angle un peu aigu, transverse postérieure droite; a
lextrémité de l’aile une tache brune, presque carrée, allant de la costa a la 4e
longitudinale et respectant l’apex de l’aile. Balanciers jaunes. Cuillerons jaunes
a cils pales. Long: 5 mm.

9. Semblable au male. En particulier pour le tarse I. Cependant la soie
orbitaire est robuste, le protarse III est sensiblement égal au reste du tarse, la
tache alaire est & peine indiquée.

N. Guinea: Edie Creek (F. H. Taylor).

16. C. TRICHROMATUM, n. sp. Fig. 21, 22.

6. Front vert métallique brillant; au coin postérieur un large buisson de soies
folles jaunes. Face vert métallique au fond, a satiné gris jaune, de largeur
moyenne égale presque aux 2 d’un travers d’oeil. Favoris clairs. Antennes jaune
orange, l’article 3 brun au bord dorsal, l’article 2 a soies trés courtes, 3 conique, a
peine aussi long que large; soie apicale noire, simple, longue comme téte, thorax
et écusson réunis. Mesonotum vert métallique assez brillant, une fascie médiane
entiére, bien délimitée, noir purpurescent; sur les flancs une fascie de méme
couleur, fragmentée, 4 acrosticales grandes, 6 d.c. dont les 2 derniéres seules bien
développées, 2 scutellaires. Fiancs sombres, a satiné gris blane. Abdomen
cuivreux doré, avec une large bande noire sur les incisions, une seule série trans-
verse de chétes. Hypopyge (fig. 21) noir a appendices noirs, les externes fourchus.
Hanches I jaunes, a pilosité jaune, et 3 chétes apicaux noirs, II et III noires, a
pilosité pale, III avec un chéte externe noir. Trochanters et pattes jaunes; tibia
III brun noir, a part le sixiéme basilaire; tarses I et II brun noir a partir de
lVapex du protarse, III entiérement noir. Tous les femurs, face ventrale, tout au
long, avec une pilosité pale, fine, érigée, longue comme le travers. Patte I: tibia,
face dorsale, 2 chetes antérieurs, 3 postérieurs, 2 ventraux. Tarse 1 fois % aussi
long que le tibia; protarse un peu plus long que le reste. Patte I: tibia, face dorsale,
3 antérieurs, 3 postérieurs, 2 ventraux; tarse sensiblement aussi long que le tibia;
protarse presque 2 fois aussi long que le reste. Tarse III un peu plus court que le
tibia, protarse sensiblement égal au reste. Ailes (fig. 22) blanches au fond, une
grande tache brun noir dans la moitié apicale, une autre beaucoup plus petite au
niveau de V’embouchure de la le longitudinale. Bord antérieur de l’aile moitié
basilaire, jaune rouille. Transverse apicale formant arcature réguliére, transverse

164 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VIII,

postérieure fortement S-forme. Balanciers jaunes clair. Cuillerons jaunes, noirs a
l’apex, a cils blancs. Long: 8 mm.

Femelle semblable au male, cependant tous les tarses brun noir, l’apex du
tibia II noirci.

Makada Is., off N. Britain (F. H. Taylor).

MEGISTOSTYLUS Bigot.
Ann. Soc. Ent. France, vii, 1859, 215.

M. LonGicornis Fabr. var. LONGISETOSUS Wulp, Tijds. v. Ent., xxv, 1882, 120, Tab. x,
fig. 7 (Psilopus).
New Britain: Rabaul (F. H. Taylor), Laup (Dr. H. C. Hosking).

Sciopus Zeller.
Isis, 1842, 831.

1. S. BASISTYLATUS, nD. sp. Fig. 23, 24.

og. Front vert métallique brillant. Face couverte d’un satiné blanc. Trompe
jaune. Favoris blancs. Antennes (fig. 23) jaunes, les articles 1 et 2 largement
noirs au bord dorsal, 3 au point d’insertion de la soie; article 3, 1 fois 4 aussi long
que large, piriforme; soie simple, insérée a la base du bord dorsal. Mesonotum
vert brillant, 2-3? acrosticales longues, 2 d.c. a l’arriére, précédées de soies fines
et courtes, 2 scutellaires. Abdomen vert brillant, une large bande noir mat ala base
des segments, une seule série transverse de chétes. Hypopyge noir (en mauvais
état). Hanches I jaunes, II et III noires, toutes a vestiture pale. Trochanters et
pattes jaunes, au tarse I, article 4 noir, 5 blanc; aux tarses II et III les 4 derniers
articles noirs. Tous les femurs pratiquement glabres 4 la face ventrale. Patte I
(fig. 24): tibia, face dorsale, un chéte a la racine. Tarse trés gréle, 2 fois 4 aussi
long que le tibia, protarse un peu plus long que le tibia, égal au reste, 2 fois aussi
long que l’article suivant; celui-ci un peu plus long que 3, lequel est plus long que
4 et 5 réunis; ces derniers aplatis dorso-ventralement, et élargis; 4 une fois 4 plus
long que 5, a plumosité noire ce qui lui donne un contour ovalaire, 5 blanc argent.
Patte II: tibia face dorsale, 2 chétes antérieurs dans la moitié basilaire, 1 postérieur
prés de la racine. Tarse un peu plus long que le tibia, protarse légérement plus
long que le reste. Patte III: tarse nettement plus court que le tibia, protarse
légérement plus long que l’article suivant, les articles 4 et 5 trés courts. Ailes sans
tache, €@ nervures noires. Costa non ciliée; transverse apicale naissant a angle
droit; transverse postérieure droite, fortement oblique. Balanciers jaunes.
Cuillerons noirs a cils jaunes. Long: 5 mm.

Femelle inconnue.

N. Guinea: Sauri, Wewak (F. H. Taylor). ‘

Remarque.—Cette espéce par lVinsertion basilaire de la soie antennaire est a
rapprocher de Jespece australienne décrite par Becker sous le nom de
S. anomalicornis. Elle s’en distingue par de nombreux caractéres: couleur des
antennes, forme et dimensions relatives de l’article 3 des antennes, les soies
acrosticales robustes, les deux derniers articles du tarse I de forme et de couleur
différentes.

2. S. occuttus Par., Encycl. Entom., Diptera, vii, 1934, 124; op. cit., vili, 1935, 75.
New Britain: Rabaul (F. H. Taylor). Décrit des Iles Salomon.

3. S. rEcrus Wied., Ausser. Zweifl. Ins., ii, 1830, 225 (Psilopus).
New Guinea: Edie Creek (F. H. Taylor).

LS Ke oN
j 25 » <
e |
BY Ol PARENT O\-ON htt! | fom) G5
Ys, Nu ase” sO/
III. DriaPHoRINAR. \G ean eo

ASYNDETUS Loew. SQ Ru

Berlin Ent. Zeitschr., xiii, 1869, 35.

1. A. LATITARSATUS Beck., Capita Zool., i, afl. 4, 1922, 83.
New Guinea: Wewak (F. H. Taylor).

2. A. PORRECTUS, Nn. Sp. Fig. 25.

6. Front entiérement terni par un satiné gris blanc; 1 soie orbitaire. Face
vue de face, vert métallique, tangentiellement & satiné blane. Palpes noir profond,
porrigés; vers l’apex, élargis en spatule, a pilosité noire, rude et chétes terminaux
noirs. Favoris blancs. Antennes noires, l’article 3 nettement triangulaire, presque
aigu a l’apex; soie presque basilaire nue. Mesonotum vert clair a givré blanc;
acrosticales petites, bisériées, 5 d.c. dont la médiane faible. Abdomen brillant,
cuivreux, a givré blane sur les flanes, 4 macrochétes anaux. Hanches noires,
toutes a vestiture noire; III: 1 chéte externe noir. Trochanters et femurs noirs,

Figs. 23-31.—28-24. Sciopus basistylatus &%, 28, antenne; 24, patte i—25. Asyndetus
porrectus 3, aile.—26. Diaphorus fulvifrons, aile.—27. D. lateniger, aile.—28. Paraclius
maculifer 92, aile.—29-30. P. strictifacies ¢, 29, hypopyge; 30, aile.—31. Thinophilus
taylori o&, aile.

166 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VIII,

tibias I et II jaune rouge, III noir, tarses noirs. Patte I: tibia, 4 chétes dorsaux
en une série; tarse a pelotes un peu hypertrophiées; pas de griffes. Patte II: tibia
face dorsale, 4 postérieurs, 3 antérieurs, tous robustes; pas de ventral. Tarse:
protarse un peu plus long que l’article suivant; pelotes normales, pas de griffes.
Patte III: tibia, face dorsale, 4 antérieurs, 4 postérieurs, tous robustes, pas de
ventral; protarse un peu plus long que l’article suivant, pelotes normales, pas de
griffes. Ailes (fig. 25) grises, nervures noires; la 4e simplement coudée. Trans-
verse postérieure en face de l’embouchure de la le. Balanciers jaunes. Cuillerons
a cils blanes. Long: 3,5-4 mm.

Femelle semblable au male.

N. Guinea: Vanimo (F. H. Taylor).

DrapHorvus Meigen.
Syst. Beschr. Zweifl. Insekt., iv, 1824, 32.
1. D. atuigaAtus Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., i, 1857, 121.—Bulolo, N.
Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

2. D. FULVIFRONS, Dn. sp. Fig. 26.

g. Front a satiné fauve, large comme le tubercule ocellaire. Face a satiné
gris jaunatre. Favoris pales. Antennes noires, l’article 3 en demi cercle surbaissé;
soie a peine pubescente. Mesonotum brillant, vert bleu sombre, 5 d.c., acrosticales
bisériées, peu développées. Abdomen brillant, noir bronzé, 4 macrochétes anaux.
Appendices hypopygiaux externes noirs. Hanche I noire sur la moitié basilaire, a
vestiture noire, II et III noires, III avec un seul chéte externe. Trochanters
jaunes. Femur I jaune, II noir sur les 2 basilaires, III jaune, noirci sur la moitié
apicale, 4 part V’apex; tibias jaunes; tarses noirs a partir de l’apex du protarse.
Femurs sans vestiture remarquable. Patte I: tibia avec 2 chétes dorsaux. Pelotes
hypertrophiées, pas de griffes. Patte II: tibia, face dorsale, 2 antérieurs, 2
postérieurs, 1 seul ventral. Pelotes normales, des griffes. Patte III: tibia, face
dorsale, 2 antérieure, 4 postérieurs. Protarse a peine plus long que Il’article suivant.
Pelotes normales, des griffes. Ailes (fig. 26) teintées de rouille; nervures noires.
Balanciers jaunes. Cuillerons a longs cils noirs. Long: 5 mm.

Femelle inconnue.

N. Guinea: Edie Creek (F. H. Taylor).

3. D. LATENIGER, 0. Sp. Fig. 27.

6. Front gris, en son milieu compléetement oblitéré par la coalescence des yeux.
Face noire, a satiné gris blanc. Favoris jaunes. Antennes noires, l’article 3 demi-
circulaire, soie simple. Mesonotum vert bleu, assez brillant, malgré un léger
givré gris blanc; acrosticaux bisériés, bien développés; 5 d.c. Abdomen noir
bronzé, le segment 2 entiérement jaune, & vestiture noire, 4 macrochétes anaux
bien développés. Hanche I jaune, II et III noires, toutes a vestiture noire; III avec
un chéte externe noir. Trochanters et pattes jaunes, femur III noir sur sa moitié
apicale; tarses I et II legerement brunis a l’apex, III tombé. Patte I: femur, face
ventrale, une double série de soies presque aussi longues que le travers; tibia, face
dorsale, un chéte postérieur; face postérieure, une ciliation presque aussi longue
que le travers. Pelotes hypertrophiées, griffes absentes. Patte II: tibia, face
dorsale, 2 antérieurs, 2 postérieurs; face ventrale, un seul chéte. Pelotes normales,
des griffes. Ailes (fig. 27) de la forme ordinaire au genre. Balanciers jaunes.
Cuillerons jaunes a cils noirs. Long: 3, 5 mm.

Femelle inconnue.

N. Guinea: Aitape (F. H. Taylor).

BY O. PARENT. 167
4. D. maurus O.-S., Berl. Ent. Zeit., xxvi, 1882, 114. Z
New Guinea: Wewak (F. H. Taylor). ED
/ NS
5. D. sereNus Beck., Capita Zool., i, afl. 4, 1922, 72. poe
Makada Is., off New Britain (F. H. Taylor).
'
IV. DoLicHoPoDINAE. ea
ae
DoxicHorus Latr. Ce

Precis Caract. Ins., 1796, 159. 2
D. ziczac Wied., Analecta Ent., 1824, 40; Ausser Zweifl. Ins., 1830, 232.
Admiralty Is.: Lombrum (F. H. Taylor).

PaRACLIUS Bigot.
Ann. Soc. Ent. France, (3) vii, 1859, 215 and 227 (Paracleius).

1. P. MACULIFER, n. sp. Fig. 28.

©. Front vert bleu métallique brillant. Face a cotés paralléles, a épais satiné
blane, large comme un tiers de travers d’oeil. Cils postoculaires inférieurs blancs.
Antennes jaune rouge, l’article 3 noir sur la moitié apicale. Mesonotum vert
bleu, peu brillant; fossettes notopleurales noiratres, précédées d’une bande trans-
versale blanc de neige, interrompue au milieu; 6 chétes scutellaires, les moyens
trés robustes, les externes de moitié plus courts, les internes croisés. Abdomen
vert sombre brillant, les segments noirs a la base, et sur les flanes 4 givré blanc
argent. Hanche I jaune, II et III noires, toutes 4 vestiture noire. Pattes jaunes,
femur III avec un point noir a lV’apex, face antérieure; les tarses I entiérement
jaunes, II avec les derniers articles noircis, III entiérement noirs. Patte I: tibia,
face dorsale, 3 antérieurs robustes, 3 postérieurs faibles. Tarse a peine aussi long
que le tibia. Patte II: femur, 1 préapical. Tibia, face dorsale, 3 antérieurs, 3
postérieurs, face ventrale, un antérieur. Patte III: femur, épais, 1 préapical.
Tibia, face dorsale, 3 antérieurs, 4 postérieurs; face ventrale, tout au long, une
série dense de chétes fins. Protarse égal aux # de l’article suivant. Ailes (fig. 28)
grises, & nervures noires, une tache brune allant de la costa a la 3e longitudinale,
commencant peu aprés l’embouchure de la le et finissant a Vapex de la 2e.
Quatriéme longitudinale coudée au tiers apical, sa section apicale arquée convexe
vers l’avant. Balanciers jaunes. Cuillerons jaunes, a longs cils noirs. Long:
6 mm.

Male inconnu.

N. Guinea: Wewak (F. H. Taylor).

2. P. STRICTIFACIES, n. sp. Fig. 29, 30.

6. Front vert métallique. Face blanche trés étroite; en son milieu, réduite a
un filet 4 peine perceptible. Cils postoculaires inférieurs noirs. Antennes noires,
larticle 3 pas plus long que large; soie insérée au milieu du bord dorsal.
Mesonotum bleu vert métallique, brillant; une tache blanche peu marquée a l’avant
des fossettes notopleurales. Abdomen noir, les segments a leur base, a taches
latérales rectangulaires blane argent. Hypopyge (fig. 29) noir, bien développé, a
appendices noirs. Hanches noires a vestiture noire. Trochanters I et II jaunes,
III noir. Femurs noirs, tibias jaunes, III noir aux deux extrémités; tarses I et II
noirs a partir de l’apex du protarse; III entiérement. Patte I: tibia, face dorsale,
4 antérieurs robustes, 3 postérieurs faibles; face ventrale un postérieur, tarse un
peu plus court que le tibia. Patte II: femur, 3 préapicaux. Tibia, face dorsale, 4
postérieurs, 3 antérieurs, 1 proprement dorsal prés de la racine; face ventrale, 1
antérieur. Patte IJI: femur 3 préapicaux. Tibia, face dorsale, 4 antérieurs, 4

in =
AT™
f NN
Peaitin Gee
Yi =
2 Rp tow |}
fy)
ass“ SS

168 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. VIII.

postérieurs, 1 proprement dorsal formant groupe avec les premiers de chaque
série; pas de chétes ventraux. Protarse a peine plus court que l’article suivant.
Ailes (fig. 30) hyalines 4 nervures noires. Segment apical de la 4e un peu avant
le tiers apical brusquement coudé a angle droit, la transverse apicale ainsi formée,
arquée convexe vers l’avant; la 4e longitudinale au dela du coude se prolongeant
en courte spuria comme chez les Chrysosomatinae. Balanciers jaunes. Cuillerens
jaunes a cils noirs. Long: 5 mm.
Femelle semblable au male.
N. Ireland: Put-Put; Kavieng (F. H. Taylor).
Remarque.—Cette espéce se place a coté de P. neglectus Beck. décrit de
Palmerston, N. Australia. Elle s’en distingue comme suit:
Article 3 des antennes brun rouge. Yeux non contigus au milieu de la face. Tibia III
entierement jaune. Femurs II et III avec un seul préapical. Quatriéme longi-
CUGCIN ALS EN ONMLOULCI UC Meters aici) see ee alel ave ov ete sic enl/aike\ cue pele felts eege eu ere Lous rebeuiens neglectus Beck.
Antennes entiérement noires. Yeux pratiquement contigus au milieu de la _ face.
Tibia III noir aux deux extrémités. Femurs II et III avec 2-3 chétes pré-
apicaux. Quatriéme longitudinale fourchue comme chez les Chrysosomatinae
ase doocondooog do obDO Ge OO EOE Sloop ooo oc aa dbo old co Goes old 6 Strictifacies, n. sp.

VY. HypROPHORINAE.
THINOPHILUS Wahl.
Ofvers Kongl. Vet. Akad. Forhandl., i, 1844, 37.

T. TAYLORI, n. sp. Fig. 31.

dg. Front vert métallique assez brillant. Face guére plus large qu’un tiers de
travers d’oeil, vert métallique; le clypeus brun fauve. Palpes jaunes a pilosité
noire. Favoris jaunes. Antennes noires, l’article 3 brun rouge a la base ventrale,
pas plus long que large; soie pratiquement glabre. Mesonotum vert brillant, deux
stries bronzées flanquant intérieurement les 2 séries de soies d.c., pas d’acrosticales,
5-6 soies d.c. dont la derniére seule bien développée, 2 scutellaires, pas de pro-
thoraciques. Abdomen brillant, entiérement bleu d’acier; lamelles hypopygiales
externes brunes. Hanche I noire, jaune a la face interne, a vestiture noire; II et
III noires. Pattes jaune rouge, les tarses noircis a partir de l’apex du protarse.
Tarse I un peu plus long que le tibia. Patte Il: femur, face ventrale, moitié
apicale avec 2 séries divergentes de chétes noirs rigides, 2 fois aussi longs que le
travers. Tibia, face dorsale, 2 chétes antérieurs, 2 postérieurs, ceux-ci plus réduits.
Patte III: protarse a peine plus long que l’article suivant. Ailes (fig. 31) teintées
de rouille, A nervures noires. Balanciers jaunes. Cuillerons a cils pales. Long:
3 mm.

Femelle inconnue.

N. Ireland: Kavieng (F. H. Taylor).

169

THE DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. IX.
FAMILY PHYTALMIIDAE.

By JoHN R. MALLocH.
(Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.S.)

(Thirteen Text-figures. )

[Read 26th April, 1939.]J

This group was accorded family rank by Hendel, but it appears to me to be
composite in nature, the group containing Angitula Walker, Angituloides Hendel,
and Giraffomyia Sharp, being probably derived from a different stem from
Phytalmia Gerstaecker and Diplochorda Osten-Sacken. However, this is not the
place to deal exhaustively with the matter, there being three other genera referred
to the family, only one of which I am able to examine at this time, and none of
them belonging to the faunal region now under consideration. Below I present a
key to the genera covered by this paper, and keys to the species of those genera
that are known to occur in New Guinea.

Material collected in Papua by Miss L. EH. Cheesman has been included in this
paper for geographical reasons, thus rendering the paper more valuable.

Key to the Genera.

1. Scutellum with a pair of long, divergent, apical, finger-like processes, at the apex
of each of which there is a fine bristle; suture at hind margin of the meso-
pleura extending downward beyond the level of upper edge of the sternopleura
and appearing to cut into the former proximad of the middle; frons without an
anterior incurved pair of fronto-orbital bristles ...... Subfamily ANGITULINAE, 2

Scutellum without finger-like processes, with at most two fine divergent bristles at
apex; suture at hind margin of the mesopleura not extending downward into
the sternopleura; frons usually with a pair of fine incurved anterior orbital
HDI WO GRD EISCISS ease er ey scene nhac ison ome LOM eeteRe Subfamily PHYTALMIINAE, 4

2. Anterior margin of the pronotum with three moderately long forwardly-directed
processes, the central one with two fine apical bristles .... Angituloides Hendel

Anterior margin of pronotum without three processes as above .............+.-.. 3

3. Vertex with two quite strong bristles; inner cross-vein of the wing much beyond the
middleryot therdiscaly Celis cirs musger span: elemee eters fun esasveieusuens 2 oeyreas eis Giraffomyia Sharp

Vertex without distinct bristles; inner cross-vein at, or a little before, middle of
the GiScaleee ache LONER lenckse sare qetorsh ah ava iana tah hanson eha eta. she iaiehaile: cts Angitula Walker

4, Wirst, second, and third wing-veins closely placed, distance from costal to third vein
opposite the inner cross-vein rarely more than half as great as length of the
cross-vein; first vein ending in the costa much closer to apex of second vein
than to that of subcosta, and far beyond level of inner cross-vein; costa of male
thickened and elevated beyond middle .............. Diplochorda Osten-Sacken

First, second, and third wing-veins normally placed, the distance from the costal
to the third vein opposite the inner cross-vein distinctly greater than the length
of the latter; first vein ending in the costa about midway between apices of
subcostal and second veins, and almost directly above the inner cross-vein; costa
Ine Male InoOt thiCkenedMy weyers ie siecle cre er ele telsl none ecaeene Phytalmia Gerstaecker

170 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. IX,

Subfamily ANGITULINAE.

There is but one of the three known genera of this subfamily as yet reported
to occur in New Guinea, the others being known from New Britain and the
Solomons. No species of the other two genera are as yet known from New
Guinea. A more extensive consideration of the extralimital species is included
in a report on the species of Phytalmiidae from the Solomon Islands now ready
for the press.

ANGITULA Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 123; Hlaphomyia pt., Saunders, Trans.
Ent. Soc. Lond., v, ser. 2, 1861, 416; Edwards, F. W., Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., xx,
eis By, gil, Ole

There are two species of the genus known, but one of them being in material
now before me. Edwards has given the following distinguishing characters:

Head dark bluish, submetallic, rarely with any reddish tinge except on front and face;
antennae almost entirely dark brown; a small, but sharply-defined dark brown spot
ALSEHSMEIP MOLTEN CULTS erosee excl es tetalse ere fate val io Saas ees ete erase ie Joe es aieeverensas longicollis Walker

Head bright reddish, with two narrow dark lines on the nape; antennae yellowish except
for the tip of the third joint which is dark brown; wings with a somewhat larger
but much fainter and ill-defined brown patch at the tip .......... cyanea Guérin

ANGITULA LONGICOLLIS Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. London, iii, 1859, 123; EHlaphomyia polita Saunders,
Trans. Ent. Soc. London, v, ser. 2, 1861, 416; Osten-Sacken, Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor.
Nat. Genova, xvi, 1881, 481; Edwards, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, xx, pt. 13, 1915, 417.

A glossy-black species with the fore coxae and basal fourth or less of all
femora whitish-yellow. The face, lower part of occiput, and the genae, yellowish
in male, less noticeably so in the female; third antennal segment sometimes
yellowish basally in male but usually black in female. Basal half of the costal
margin of wing narrowly black, and a narrow black margin along the costa
between apices of second and fourth veins (Fig. 1). MHalteres black. Basal
composite tergite of abdomen about as long as the others combined, with a pair
of short, sharp, upwardly-directed tubercles at basal angles and a more or less
conspicuous somewhat centrally divided elevation or hump a little proximad of
middle.

Female, Sauri, Wewak District (F. H. Taylor), Marprik (J. R. Rigby and
C. M. Deland), Territory of New Guinea; both sexes, Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet,
April, June, August to October, 1933; Dutch New Guinea: Cyclops Mts., Sabron,
930 feet, May, 1936; Western New Guinea: Njau-limon, south of Mt. Bougainville,
300 feet, February, 1936 (L. EH. Cheesman). Seventeen specimens. Previously
recorded from Aru, Dorey, and New Guinea. ;

ANGITULA CYANEA (Guérin).

Voy. de la Coquille, Zool. ii (2), 1838, 301, Pl. 21, fig. 11 (Nerius).
This species is not known to me. Described from New Guinea.

PHYTALMIA Gerstaecker.

Stett. Ent. Zeit., xxi, 1860, 169; Hlaphomyia Saunders, Trans. Ent. Soc: Lond.,
v, ser. 2, 1861, 413.

In the key presented below I have included all species Known to me but have
not included wollastoni Edwards, of which I have seen only the description and
figure. It differs from all the others in the genus in having the anterior notopleural
bristle well developed, and the aristae with the hairs almost as long below as above

BY J. R. MALLOCH. iU7/al

and. carried to, or almost to, the apices. The wing has a very narrow dark brown
costal streak from the apex of the subcostal vein to the tip. Originally described
from New Guinea, in the paper by Edwards cited under Angitula.

Key to the Species.

1. Brownish-yellow species, with all the femora of that colour, the hind tibiae largely
dark brown; both sexes with a short stout upwardly-directed and slightly back-
wardly-curved tubercle in centre of the anterior edge of the pronotum, the lateral
portions of collar low; a pair of small tubercles on the posterior margin of the
head below in male and female; male with a pair of stout black anteriorly-
directed thorns at the middle of the anteroventral surface of the fore femur,
and a series of microscopic decumbent black setulae from near them to apex
on same surface, the posteroventral surface with one or two decumbent
forwardly-directed short black bristles nearly opposite the two strong thorns,
and some microscopic black setulae in a series from them to apex; the long apical
ventral spur of mid tibia knobbed and slightly warped at apex in male, simple
and acute at apex in female; frons with a pair of hair-like incurved anterior
orbitals, and a very fine pair of slightly recurved orbitals well above middle;
genal process of male when fully developed about two-thirds as long as entire
insect, very slender; with a short preapical branch, black or dark brown, with
NAGUUEV EET OFS. ais iat co. c., OMe ONO icr CISION IS HIRE aonE RE eeae Meta cervicornis Gerstaecker

Black or pitchy-brown coloured species, with pale yellow scutellum and sometimes
yellow thoracic markings, the greater portion of the legs blackened or browned;
one species with a central tubercle on anterior margin of the pronotum, but the
lateral portions of the collar are more or less elevated and not forwardly pro-
duced; neither sex with a pair of tubercles below on posterior margin of the
head; fore femur of male if armed with strong central bristles has them either
on the posteroventral surface, or the bristles on the anteroventral surface are
close to the base; the long apical ventral spur in both sexes simple, acute at
ALD CONCERNS tote Sa ercn es crish cues Kecatishcvieh-shetetersculsitelialteits <//5ls sey en eiayienes ohte Slice lacie) deials) Scar wirebabe leneceneher eva) sta 2

2. Anterior margin of the pronotum with a short central wart-like tubercle; fore femur
of male with a series of three or four strong closely-placed bristles beginning just
beyond middle of the posteroventral surface; femora brownish-black; mid and
hind pairs narrowly yellowish-white at bases; pleura without pale yellow
markings; epistome quite prominently protruded; genal processes of male about
as long as thorax, almost equally wide from base to beyond middle, from there
tapered to a point at apices; scutellum with the pair of apical bristles fine
FW aXe ESH GRO) Gh Eames sees a 5B Ich GORGE CLONE". CUR CRG DEERE RENTS) REMEDIES ety nig coer wallacei (Saunders)

Anterior margin of the pronotum emarginate in centre, without a central tubercle,
at most with a low transverse ridge centrally; fore femur with at least six
posteroventral bristles; pleura with yellow markings; epistome not protruded,
OT WOU Ss iS it live 1S OM speereans meen isner hors clones ome wetsseuchells ite eee RR MME wae Ome aeons er eG) chahe.e cite 3

3. Fore tibia of male with dense short stout spinules from near base to near apex on
the ventral surface, the fore femur stoutest at base, with strong bristles on both
the anteroventral and posteroventral surfaces, basally only on the latter, on
almost the entire extent of the anteroventral surface;:genal processes of male
about as long as the thorax, moderately stout, with a thumb-like projection on
the posterior side near middle; scutellar bristles as long and strong as the
Hosterion NoOtopleunaly Crow kek= scree steed © ia eyor se epee rats Sade ree ok biarmata, n. sp.

Fore tibia with only fine appressed hairs on the ventral surface in both sexes; fore
femur of male stoutest at middle, with six closely-placed bristles in a series
beginning just beyond middle; genal processes of male longer than the thorax,
expanded fan-like near base, and with a rather slender lobe from posterior
apical angle that is as long as the expanded portion; scutellar bristles repre-
sented by fine short hairs, not nearly as long as the posterior notopleural
LISELI ee ot a cette aici aoue Screen ere er eve tense stedotenniereycccusjouskew ens ene-ey al's alcicornis (Saunders)

PHYTALMIA CERVICORNIS Gerstaecker.

Stett. Ent. Zeit., xxi, 1860, 173, Pl. 11, fig. 4; Hlaphomyia cervicornis Saunders,
Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., v, ser. 2, 1861, 414.

By a strange coincidence Saunders chose the same specific name for this species
as had Gerstaecker before him.

172 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. IX,

The males before me have the head black, with an oval yellowish spot in front
of the ocelli, and a pear-shaped yellow spot on each side of the face close to the
lower margin, the tapered end of each close to the parafacials. The propleura and
basal half or more of the fore coxae are blackened. The genal thorns (Fig. 2)
are very long and slender, deep black, with the apices of the two branches white.
I have three typical males before me. Wing as in Figure 3. Length, 15 mm.

Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, August, September, October, 1933 (L. E. Cheesman),
six specimens; Mt. Lamington (Northern Division), three specimens (C. T.
McNamara). The females are not as long as the males except the ovipositor is
included in the measurement. One female, New Guinea: Marprik (J. R. Rigby
and C. M. Deland). Recorded from New Guinea and Dorey.

PHYTALMIA PRISCA Enderlein.
Arb. morph. taxon. Entom. Berlin., iii, No. 3, 1936, 230 (Archiphytalmia).
Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 ft., June, 1933 (L. E. Cheesman), British Museum (Nat.
Hist.).

PHYTALMIA WALLACEI Saunders.

Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., v, ser. 2, 1861, 414 (Hlaphomyia).

do. A much darker species than cervicornis, general colour black, part of the
trons, most of the genal processes, and the face yellow or yellowish-brown,
scutellum and thoracic sutures also of that colour. A yellow spot near the apex of
abdominal petiole, and the apices of tergites slightly paler than remainder of
tergites. Legs dark brown, bases of mid and hind femora and bases of all tarsi
yellow. Stigma brown, apex of wing faintly browned. Genal processes (Fig. 4)
much longer than in prisca, about as long as the thorax, flattened, width less than
that of frons, tapered on apical third, ending in a point. Anterior dorsal marginal
process of thorax much shorter than in cervicornis. Fore femur with postero-
ventral armature only, consisting of about three short curved bristles close to
middle. Longer mid-tibial spur sharp at apex. First posterior cell of wing not
noticeably widened at apex. Length, 12 mm.

Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, June and August, 1933 (L. EH. Cheesman).
Originally described from the island of Dorey, Mt. Lamington (Northern Division),
two specimens (C. T. McNamara).

PHYTALMIA ALCICORNIS (Saunders).

Trans. Ent. Soc. London, v, ser. 2, 1861, 415.

A larger species than wallacei, with a greater amount of yellow on the head
and thorax, there being a broad hind marginal streak on the mesopleura, another
behind the wing base that extends to the lower margin of the metapleura, and a
number of marks on the mesonotum, as well as a streak in centre of the chitinous
rounded sclerite between the base of the abdomen and bases of the hind coxae.
The apices of the abdominal tergites are also quite noticeably yellow. The genal
processes of the male (Fig. 5) are longer than the thorax, much expanded, fan-like
on the basal half, with a slender lobe extending outward from the apical posterior
angle of the “fan” that is a little longer than the latter. These processes are pale
stramineous in colour, with reddish-brown streaks, the extreme tip of the slender
lobe black. Pronotum in both sexes emarginate in centre, behind the emargination
there is a slightly-raised transverse rounded ridge, and the collar on each side of
the emargination is in the form of a rounded ridge extending forward. Scutellum
with two hair-like apical bristles that are distinctly shorter and finer than the
posterior notopleural bristle. Fore femur in both sexes thickest centrally, much

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 173

Fig. 1.—Angitula longicollis Walker, wing of female.

Fig. 2.—Phytalmia cervicornis Gerstaecker, left genal process of male from the side.
Fig. 3.—Phytalmia cervicornis Gerstaecker, wing of female.

Fig. 4.—Phytalmia wallacei Saunders, left genal process of male from above.
Fig. 5.—Phytalmia alcicornis (Saunders), left genal process of male from above.
Fig. 6.—Phytalmia biarmata, n. sp., left genal process of male from above.

Fig. 7.—Phytalmia biarmata, n. sp., right fore femur and tibia, anterior view.
Fig. 8.—Diplochorda aneura, n. sp., head of male from in front.

Fig. 9.—Diplochorda aneura, n. sp., wing of male type.

Fig. 10.—Diplochorda myrmex O.S., wing of male.

Fig. 11,—Diplochorda myrmex O.S., wing of female.

Fig. 12.—Diplochorda trilineata de Meij., wing of male.

Fig. 13.—Diplochorda minor, n. sp., wing of female type.

174 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. IX,

thicker in male than in female, and in the former with a series of about six
very closely placed slightly curved and forwardly-directed black bristles, the basal
one almost exactly at middle of the posteroventral surface. Mid-tibial spur simple
in both sexes. Length, 13-16 mm.

Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, June and August, 1933 (L. E. Cheesman). Ten
specimens, both sexes. Original locality, island of Dorey.

Four males identified as this species by Dr. Smart were sent to me by him,
and without these I should have had some doubt as to the identity of the specimens
before me, because no long apical lobe is shown in Saunders’ figure of the genal
process. In some specimens in hand this apical lobe is bent back against the
“fan” and it may sometimes be broken off.

PHYTALMIA BIARMATA, Nl. SD.

6, 2. Similar in general colour and markings to alcicornis, but the yellow
vertical mark on the metapleura is not nearly as distinct and does not attain
the lower edge.

Structurally the main distinctions lie in the form of the genal processes of
the male (Fig. 6), in the shape and ventral armature of the fore femur of the
same sex, there being bristles on both the anteroventral and posteroventral
surfaces (Fig. 7), and in the much stronger apical pair of scutellar bristles in
both sexes. In other characters the species is much as in alcicornis, the mid tibia
having the apical ventral spur simple, acute at apex, in both sexes. The frons
has the anterior incurved orbital bristles well developed, usually stronger than in
most of the allied species, but the upper reclinate pair is not evident in any of the
seven specimens before me. Wing coloured as in the other species, with the stigma
dark brown and the tip more or less suffused with pale brown. In teneral
specimens the apical clouding is usually very indistinct or lacking. Length,
12-15 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and five paratypes, Papua: Mondo, 5,000 feet, February,
1934 (L. E. Cheesman).

DipeLocHorpsA Osten-Sacken.

Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, xvi, 1881, 484; Hendel, Gen. Insectorum,
Pyrgotinae, fase. 79, 1908, 4.

Bezzi did not recognize this genus when he published his paper in 1924 (Rev.
Zool. Afric., xii, fase. 2, p. 225), so that it is not found in his key to the genera
included in the paper. He also omitted Angituloides Hendel, though in the copy
of the paper sent to me by Bezzi he pencilled it in the margin.

Key to the Species.

1. The dark brown costal stripe on the wing extending on the field to over the third
vein a little proximad of the inner cross-vein, running obliquely back to near
middle of that vein and entirely filling the first posterior cell, even spreading
renin aitt) oVer (2{-1C10) 010 CG o.cackeo 0 GIOIGG o.0 GIOIA Gg OO cick Glo olcod GEA db OO Maid” Oidiat cota ack 2

The dark brown stripe on the costal border of the wing not extending over the third
vein, or if it does then only at a point well beyond the inner cross-vein, and
neverwentinelyanilline; the first tposterior Cell) i <jiebaeie ciel ele leletele ol efellel's) eles at riteien 4

2. Posterior basal cell of the wing hyaline, narrowly dark brown at apex; the hind
marginal brown streak not or very faintly extending over the fifth vein into
the discal cell; scutellum dark brown; mesonotal black fasciae fused before
suture; frons without incurved anterior and upper reclinate orbital bristles;
gena with a short thin elevated apically-rounded process; fore femur with a
short stout spine at about one-third from apex on the posteroventral surface
Se ois om ob.cUloe oiS Hodedun Gondome ae amo bos nd cd cas aneura, nN. sp.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 175

Posterior basal cell of the wing pale brown, darker on edges; hind marginal streak
extending rather broadly over the fifth vein into the discal cell; scutellum
partly yellow; mesonotal vittae separated on their entire extent; frons with a
pair of anterior incurved and a pair of very short reclinate upper orbital
ETS CLES remresreieiret nists Sy stercct ore tane Nar rratioteter Seer mia e latee © Sra caaeg Silat a ENeTIa. a} SNe OS IRM ane acho he varer nireeatten ees 3

3. Fore femur in both sexes with a preapical posteroventral bristle ..............
By GIG LOD 0/0 OIEROTO O/OIERG CACO ORCCE CITE) CRCICIO RS cree ROTO lor DRee Caen: Batch myrmes Osten-Sacken.
Fore femur in neither sex with a preapical posteroventral bristle ................
{8 TOSCO SOLO a STEN CRS ONE HCSeaS SR Ces dCSC RE OE HOt Naa trilineata de Meijere
4. The brown costal border extends widely over the third vein from a little beyond
the inner cross-vein to its apex, sometimes faintly to apical section of fourth
vein; posterior basal cell and a broad streak covering the fifth vein and extend-
ing narrowly into the discal cell and filling the entire third posterior cell dark

[BV XOK IA UM ces Cea EERE Gb 0d 1G BIC SG. OLG OSE CHONG DICE OUGACTICRGI CTO 7G 10 OV GAT SHO: Circ 10 ICE Me ro ee a 5

The brown costal border does not extend over the third wing-vein, or if so then
OnlVavieryaraintlhye SOuatutsrexcremera Dexa cisciec casiieite ciate ciel cieetcenareiieiene 6

5. Genae with short stout process; mesonotal vittae not distinctly divided by yellow
TMCS SD ACC SU hire aa tay cea ccareyrer trey Sasi ESM -aIO To orev hoops few atoton hss Patra ike brevicornis (Saunders)
Genae without distinct processes, with at most a slightly elevated ridge; mesonotal
black vittae distinctly divided by yellow interspaces ......... concisa (Walker)

6. Posterior basal cell of the wing pale brown, and a faint pale-brown cloud over the
fifth vein that does not extend distinctly into the discal cell, and fills the third
posterior cell; face with a brown transverse band below middle; the yellow mark
on the basal (composite) abdominal tergite small, separated from the hind
margin by about its own length; no well developed bristle outside of and below
leveluot therstroneenverticalms palin ae cietelelcleeie mis ele eee cleiers craeteleloiis s minor, nN. Sp.

Posterior basal cell of the wing hyaline, and no brown cloud over the fifth vein;
face yellow; the yellow mark on the basal (composite) abdominal tergite large,
separated from the hind margin by less than half its own length; an outwardly-
curved bristle on each side of back of head outside of and below level of the
strong verticals that are about half as long as them ........ unistriata, n. sp.

DIPLOCHORDA ANEURA, N. SP.

o. A very dark species with the head and thorax much as in brevicornis,
but the wing as in myrmez.

Head pale testaceous yellow, with numerous black marks as follows: Ocellar
spot, a mark on each side of latter, a large mark on centre of frons and a small
one on each side in front, a small spot between each antenna and eye, another
in lower extremity of each facial fovea, a transverse band above epistome, the
genae including the processes, and most of the occiput except the margins.
Antennae fuscous, apex of the second and base of third segment yellowish-brown;
palpi black, testaceous at apices. Head a little wider than widest part of thorax,
frons almost one-third of head-width and more than 1:5 times as wide as long,
slightly flattened; no orbital bristles present; verticals strong, separated from each
other by about as great a distance as either is from eye-margin. Hpistome slightly
protruded; foveae distinct. Genal process short, seen from in front as Figure 8.
Hairs on upper side of aristae long at base, a few moderately long hairs at base
below.

Thorax black, slightly shiny, a yellow vitta on each side of disc of mesonotum
behind the suture that expands behind over the postalar callosity, and a large
yellow mark on the posterior notopleural callosity that connects with a vertical
streak of the same colour on the hind margin of the mesopleura; a large yellow
mark on each pleurotergite and a smaller one above it on the side of the postnotum,
the latter without a yellow central streak; postscutellum yellowish. Bristles as
follows: 1 notopleural, 1 supra-alar, and 1 postalar; mesopleural hair-like;
scutellum with two quite strong apical marginal bristles. Legs pitchy-black, apices
of fore and mid femora brownish, bases of mid and hind pairs yellow, basal two

176 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. IX,

segments of mid and hind tarsi brownish-yellow. Fore femur with a short stout
bristle at about the apical third of the posteroventral surface; mid tibia with the
apical ventral long spur sharp at tip. Wing as in Figure 9, the dark part
chocolate brown; fifth vein not present beyond outer cross-vein. Halteres brownish-
yellow. Abdomen shiny black, a narrow yellow band near the apex of the basal
composite tergite. Length, 11 mm.

Type, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor) .

This species agrees with brevicornis very closely in the structure of the head,
but in addition to the differences in the wing markings the thorax is also differently
marked.

DIPLOCHORDA MYRMEX Osten-Sacken.

Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, xvi, 1881, 488.

This species was originally described from a female. I have both sexes of a
species that I accept as that described by Osten-Sacken, though the female does not
entirely agree with his description.

The head is yellow, with five black marks on the occiput, three across the
upper half and an elongate one on each side below, the frons has a small ocellar
spot, a more or less divided larger central spot, and a small one on each side at
base of the upper orbital bristle; the face is largely black on the lower half
in the male, but in the female there are only two black spots at apices of the
foveae. Both pairs of orbitals are present. Head almost normal in the male,
the genae with slight central carina only, the eye not sharply notched, merely
slightly emarginate at ridge.

Mesonotum in male black, with two entire yellow discal vittae that expand
to cover the postalar callosities, and a yellow lateral vitta covering humerus and
posterior notopleural callosity leaving a small black mark at middle against the
suture, the vitta connects with a yellow stripe that extends along the hind
margin of the mesopleura and across the sternopleura to the venter. A broad
yellow stripe from below the squamae to venter enclosing the posterior spiracle,
and a similar stripe over centre of the postnotum and postscutellum, both widest
above. Scutellum with a yellow elongate mark on each side. These yellow
markings are wider in the female, and there is an additional yellow mark on the
propleura. Bristles as in aneura, but the mesopleural one is quite strong, though
not very long. Legs dark brown, fore femora in female browned only centrally,
in male dark brown basally, paler apically; mid and hind femora more broadly
yellow at bases than in the preceding species. Male with a posteroventral bristle
beyond middle of the fore femur, female occasionally with a similar but smaller
bristle.

Wing as Figure 10 in male, as Figure 11 in female, the costa less elevated
beyond middle in the female. Halteres yellow. Abdomen shiny black, composite
basal tergite with a yellow patch beyond middle in both sexes, in the female the
fifth tergite at apex and most of the sixth are orange-yellow. Basal tergite
longer and more slender in male than in female. Length 10-12 mm.

New Guinea: Wewak (F. H. Taylor), Marprik (C. M. Deland and J. R.
Rigby). Originally described from Katau, New Guinea.

DIPLOCHORDA TRILINEATA de Meijere.
Tijdschr. v. Ent., lviii, 1915, 124.

This species was described from Northern New Guinea. Its describer compared
it briefly with myrmez, which latter he accepted as having the black mesonotalt

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 177

vittae interrupted at the suture, and the scutellum reddish-yellow. Neither of
these characters holds good for the species if I am correct in my identification,
but the lack of yellow colour on the abdomen except on the basal tergite leads
me to accept three specimens now before me as de Meijere’s species. Unfortunately
that author did not state whether the type was a male or a female, nor did he -
state whether the fore femur had or had not a posteroventral bristle. His
description of the wing (Figure 12) leads me to infer that his type was a male.
The specimens accepted by me as this species have no trace of yellow on the fifth
and sixth abdominal tergites, and lack the posteroventral bristle on the fore femur.

One ¢, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor); two °, Dutch New Guinea: Lake
Sentani, Aug., 1936, and Cyclops Mts., Sabron, 900 feet, May, 1936 (L. E.
Cheesman).

DIPLOCHORDA OPHION Osten-Sacken.

Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat., Genova, xvi, 1881, 488.

I have not seen any specimen that I can accept as this species, and to make
the present paper as complete as possible for the genus I include below some
details from the original description.

Head, antennae, and palpi yellow; a double brown spot on the frons about
midway between antennae and ocelli. Thorax yellow, a narrow brown line on
middle of dorsum, interrupted anteriorly before the collar; the suture on each
side tinged with brown, which colour expands into a larger spot about midway
between the base of the wing and the humerus; an oblique brown streak on
middle of the pleura, and a brown shade above the hind coxae. Abdomen black
as far as the middle of the first tergite, yellow beyond, with two large osculant
black spots occupying, one on each side, the end of the first and the sides of the
second and third segments. Ovipositor ferruginous-yellow. Legs yellow, femora
with faint vestiges of a brownish ring; fore coxae brownish; tarsi brownish,
hind metatarsus yellowish. Wing subhyaline, costal border inside the third vein
brown, near the apex this colour crosses that vein, encroaching a little on the first
posterior cell; an irregular brown cloud along the fifth vein inside the third
posterior cell that is connected across the cross-veins, closing the basal cells with
the brown costal border. Length, 6-7 mm.

Hatam, New Guinea.

DipLocHorDA concisa (Walker).

Dacus concisus Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., v, 1861, 252.—Dacus
turgidus Walker, op. cit., viii, 1865, 134—Hlaphomyia brevicornis Saunders, pt.,
Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., v, ser. 2, 1861, 415.—Osten-Sacken, Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat.
Genova, Xvi, 1881, 487.

The above synonymy is given on the statement of Osten-Sacken, who examined
the type specimens in the British Museum, but I have used the name concisa instead
of turgida contrary to the course adopted by that author.

The species is, if my identification is correct, apparently a common one in some
sections of New Guinea, as there is a large number of specimens in this collection.

A black slightly shiny species with much the same markings as myrmeaz, but
readily distinguished from it by the difference in the form of the dark brown
costal border of the wing. Here this border does not extend over the third vein
until it reaches the basal third of the ultimate section of that vein and it spreads
over only the anterior or costal half of the first posterior cell, though there some-
times is a slight brownish suffusion to almost the fourth vein in the cell. The

178 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. IX,

posterior basal cell is dark brown and the brown cloud on the fifth vein extends
well over the vein into the discal cell. The male has a slight genal ridge, both
sexes have two pairs of orbital bristles, a distinct mesopleural bristle, and the
apical pair of scutellar bristles rather strong. The thoracic markings are as in
myrmex. Femora broadly yellow at bases, the fore pair almost entirely yellow,
without posteroventral bristle in both sexes. Abdomen black, with a yellow mark
on the composite basal tergite near its middle.

Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, Apr. and May, 1933 (L. E. Cheesman), thirty-one
specimens; Mt. Lamington (Northern Division), four specimens (C. T. McNamara).

DIPLOCHORDA BREVICORNIS (Saunders).

Elaphomyia brevicornis Saunders, Trans. Ent. Soc. London, v, ser. 2, 1861, 415.

I have not seen this species, but from the description and figures by Saunders
and a drawing of the apical part of the wing of the type sent me by Dr. Smart
I have been able to include it in my key to the species and, I believe, reliably
differentiate it from other species of the genus.

It is the only species with the costal border falling short of the inner cross-
vein in which the male has a well-developed genal process. This is apparently
very similar to that of aneura, but in the latter the dark brown costal border is
much wider apically, encroaching on the inner cross-vein and, in fact, spreading
into the cell in front of the latter on its anterior portion. Saunders shows a
bristle on the fore femur, but unless the drawing is incorrect it appears to be
situated on the anteroventral instead of on the posteroventral surface.

' Locality, Dorey.

The specimen figured as the female of this was correctly stated by Osten-
Sacken to be a male, and was referred by him to turgida Walker. I have followed
the same course in this paper.

DIPLOCHORDA MINOR, 0. Sp.

2. Head pale yellow, with a black dot on ocelli, a bifid central black mark on
frons, and a small black spot at base of each upper orbital bristle; face with a
small black mark at lower extremity of each fovea; occiput with a large black
subquadrate central mark behind vertex, a small spot on each side of it, and
below the latter an elongate black mark on each side. Antennae and palpi yellow,
bases of the latter browned. Both pairs of orbitals present, verticals strong, frons
a little wider than long; gena about one-fourth as high as eye, with a slight
central carina and brown line. Mesonotum yellow, with three black vittae, central
one attenuated and broken at suture; pleura black, a yellow mark above fore
coxae, a yellow stripe from posterior notopleural callosity to venter, a similar one
over the pleurotergite to venter, and another on centre of the postnotum and post-
scutellum. Bristles as in myrmex. Legs yellow, coxae and trochanters black, fore
femora slightly browned centrally, mid and hind pairs broadly dark brown
centrally, fore and hind tibiae almost entirely dark brown, mid pair yellowish
apically, fore tarsi brown, mid and hind pairs with the basal two segments
yellowish, the others brown. Fore femur without posteroventral preapical bristle.

Wing (Fig. 13) hyaline, browned along costal margin, subhyaline in costal
cell, dark brown beyond it, the dark colour not extending backward over the
third vein except a very faint shade apically; posterior basal cell and entire third
posterior cell rather pale brown, the colour not extending into the discal cell.
Halteres yellow. Abdomen elongate-ovate, petiole much widened at apex, general
colour pitchy-black, more brownish apically, yellowish on dise of fifth and sixth

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 179

tergites, the composite basal tergite with a yellow mark at about its own length
from apex. Length, including the ovipositor, 7-5 mm.
Type and one defective paratype, Bulolo, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

DIPLOCHORDA UNISTRIATA, 0. Sp.

6; 2. Rather similar to minor, differing as follows: Face yellow, frons a little
longer than wide, gena less evidently carinate centrally. Mesonotum with three
entire black vittae; pleura predominantly yellow, with a curved black stripe from
prothoracic spiracle back over upper part of the mesopleura, then downward over
middle of latter and sternopleura, ceasing well above lower edge of latter; a black
streak from below wing base to venter over mid and hind coxae, and a narrower
black streak on postnotum below each lateral angle of the scutellum, the latter
dark brown. Bristling as in minor. Legs and wings as in minor, but the brown
streak over the fifth vein is lacking. Abdomen similar to that of minor, rather
broad and short petiolate for this genus, and the yellow mark on the petiole larger
and much closer to the hind margin than in that species. Length, 7-5-9-5 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and 11 paratypes, Papua: Mondo, 5,000 feet, Jan.-Feb.,
1934 (L. E. Cheesman).

Addendum.

In 1936 (Arb. u. morph. taxon. Ent. Berl.-Dahlem, Bd. 3, No. 3, 225) Enderlein
published a review of the family Phytalmiidae in which he proposed three new
genera, two of them based on new species.

It appears to me to be unwise to erect so many monobasic genera in a family
containing so few species, especially on the basis of such apparently trivial
characters as are made use of by Enderlein. My conclusions as to the status of
his genera and species are given below.

GIRAFFOMYIA Sharp.

Records of the genotype, willeyi Sharp, are given from Ralum and Alovon, New
Britain, Bismarck Archipelago.

ANGITULA Walker.

Enderlein’s identification of cyanea is apparently correct, but his placing of
longicollis Walker as a synonym is incorrect according to specimens sent me from
the British Museum.

I consider polita Saunders, which Enderlein designated as genotype of his
new genus Angitulina, and nigra, n. sp., the genotype of ‘Enderlein’s new genus
Hammatopelma, as synonyms of longicollis, and these genera as synonyms of
Angitula.

Meacuina Enderlein.

Op. cit., Bd. 3, No. 4, 1936, 241.

I have in the press the description of a species very similar to the genotype of
this, but I consider it belongs to Giraffomyia. Whether Enderlein’s species belongs
to the same concept I am unable to say without an examination of his species. The
species, violacea, may be distinguished from any recorded in this paper by the
strongly violaceous or blue tinge on the thorax and abdomen. It is rather similar
to Angitula cyanea Guérin in most respects.

Dutch New Guinea: Dorey.

180 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. IX.

PHYTALMIA Gerstaecker.

Enderlein restricts this genus to the genotype, cervicornis.
Archiphytalmia Enderlein is inseparable from the above. His species, prisca,
is from Sattelberg, Huon Gulf, New Guinea.

ATOPOGNATHUS Bigot.

Ann. Soc. Ent. France (6) 1, 1881, 24.
The genotype, platypalpus Bigot, is unknown to me, as it was also to Enderlein.
Locality, Ternate.

ELAPHOMYIA Saunders.

Enderlein used this generic name for a group containing alcicornis Saunders,
which he designated as genotype, megalotis Gerstaecker, and wallacei Saunders.

He had apparently not seen any of these species and in using the presence or
absence of the pair of small incurved infraorbital bristles for separating the genera
he erred. This pair of bristles is present in both his concepts.

DipLocHorpa Osten-Sacken.

Enderlein did not list this genus in his paper, though he did include Phytal-
modes Bezzi, an African genus, and a so-called subfamily, Terastiomyiinae, which
is South American and considered by Hendel and others as belonging to the
Pyrgotidae.

181

TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA.
I. THE GENOTYPE OF OLIGOTOMA WESTWOOD.

By Consett Davis, M.Se., Lecturer in Biology, New England University
College, Armidale.*

(Five Text-figures. )
[Read 26th April, 1939.]

Much of the material for this and subsequent papers was gathered overseas,
when the types of many species were examined in the United States, England and
France, and those of other species were obtained on loan from several Huropean
museums. Sufficient data were obtained to justify a detailed consideration of
the taxonomy of the Order as a whole, in a series of papers of which this is the
first. This paper is presented first to enable other workers to use the facts
contained herein. The two species here considered have long been known by
incorrect names, and, in addition to the fact that one is the genotype of Oligotoma,
there is the consideration that both are exceedingly common in nearly all the
warmer countries of the world.

Genus OLicoToma, 1837.

Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (Zool.), xvii, p. 373 (as subgenus of Hmbia Latr.);
genotype O. saundersii Westw., l.c. Raised to generic rank by Burmeister (1839).

OLIGOTOMA SAUNDERSII Westwood, 1837, l.c.

Westwood’s type is in the Hope Department of Entomology, Oxford University.
It is a carded specimen in fair condition, with the mandibles dissected out and
mounted on a separate card. The labels below this specimen are: (1) ‘Hmbia
(Oligotoma) saundersii West. in Trans. Linn. Soc.’; (2) ‘W. S. Saunders. Hast
Ind.’; and (3) a blue rhomboidal label with the letter ‘W’, Westwood’s equivalent
to a type label.

Preparation of the terminalia of this specimen immediately revealed that the
species known to Krauss (1911), Enderlein (1912) and subsequent workers as
Oligotoma saundersii (misspelt saundersi in some cases) is not conspecific with
Westwood’s type. Westwood’s specimen is conspecific with examples determined
by Enderlein (l.c.) as Oligotoma latreillei (recte latreillii) (Rambur, 1842). The
name latreillii (Ramb.) must be added to the synonymy of Oligotoma saundersiit
Westw., both referring to the series so long referred incorrectly to O. latreillii
(Ramb.).

The species known to Enderlein (l.c.) and other workers as Oligotoma
saundersi must now be called by the next valid name, Oligotoma humbertiana

* Most of the work embodied in this paper was carried out when the writer held
a Linnean Macleay Fellowship in Zoology.

182 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. I,

(de Saussure, 1896). The following description of O. saundersii is from
Westwood’s type (0).

Dimensions: Length of body 7 mm.; forewing 5 mm. x 1:4 mm.; hindwing
4mm.xi14mm. General colour pale chocolate brown; bands bordering wing-veins
or their traces pale brown; veins darker brown. Dimensions and form of head
not discernible, on account of dissection. Mandibles (fig. 1) rather slender,
incurved distally, with a terminal acute tooth, the left with two subterminal teeth,
the right with one; each mandible with a blunt projection midway along the inner
margin, representing the basal end of the cutting edge. Body sclerites, except the
terminalia, normal for winged specimens of the Order. Wings with subcosta
reaching to one-quarter the length of the wing; R, strong, bordered by fine dark
lines, confluent subterminally with R.,,, the fused vein reaching the termen.

Figs. 1-4.—Oligotoma saundersii Westwood, holotype ¢.—1. Mandibles, ventral view,
x 33.—2. Right forewing, x 138, conventional lettering for venation.—3:. Terminalia from
above, x 33.—4. Terminalia from below, x 33 (9, ninth abdominal tergite; 10L, 10R,
left and right hemitergites of tenth abdominal segment; 10RP,, 10RP,, outer and inner
processes of 10R; 10LP, process of 10L; H, hypandrium (ninth abdominal sternite) ;
LCB, RCB, left and right cercus-basipodites; LC,, first segment of left cercus; RC,, RC,,
first and second segments of right cercus). B

Fig. 5.—Oligotoma humbertiana (Sauss.) ¢&, Mt. Makilling, Luzon, Philippine Isds.,
terminalia from above, x 30. Lettering as in figs. 3-4; LC,, second segment of left
cercus. (All figures based on camera lucida outlines; all setae omitted.)

R; forking to R.,, and R,,; midway along the wing; R,.; simple, becoming
obsolete before the margin. M represented only by a row of hairs and by the
pigment-band normally bordering each vein or its trace in this Order. Main
stem of Cu, strong, reaching the margin; its anterior branch (Cu,.) no stronger
than M. Anal vein short but distinct. Some five weak cross-veins between C
and R,, and two stronger between R, and R.,,. All veins, or (if obsolescent)
their traces, with broad pigment-bands, the hyaline areas between being narrow
longitudinal streaks (fig. 2).

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 183

Terminalia (figs. 3, 4) with tenth tergite divided to left (10L) and right
(10R) hemitergites, the suture between which tends to become obsolete proximally.
Right hemitergite with its outer margin produced backwards and inwards to a
slender sinuous process (10RP,), ending in two teeth, the outer blunter and
more dorsally placed, the inner sharper and more ventral. The inner part of
10RP, basally overlies another flap-like process (10RP,), the medial chitinization
of which is a continuation of the chitinization of 10RP,. Left hemitergite produced
backwards to a cultriform process (10LP), acutely tapered. Right cercus of
two subequal subcylindrical segments, the first (RC,) somewhat thicker. Left
cercus of similar form, the first segment (LC,) very slightly clavate, the second
broken. Rudimentary subannular cercus-basipodite (RCB) ventrally at base of
right cercus; left cercus-basipodite (LCB) well developed, tapered, curved
outwards, ending obtusely. Ninth sternite (H) tapered, curved to the left,
truncate distally, with a trace of a tubular structure dorsally. A slender, heavily-
chitinized spine arises subterminally from the left margin of the ninth sternite,
with two minute teeth at its point of origin; the spine curves to the right under
the end of the sternite, projecting upwards and backwards terminally.

The above description and figures are based on an old specimen which,
being the type, could not be fully dissected; it cannot therefore be as full as many
other descriptions which have been based on well-preserved series, and published
from time to time under the name Oligotoma latreillei. It is given in detail to
obviate any criticism of the identity of Westwood’s type. Fuller descriptions,
under the name QO. latreillei, have been given by Enderlein (1912), Okajima
(1926), Menon and George (1936) and Davis (1936), and by Krauss (1911) under
the name O. hova (Sauss.). Additional morphological points, not included in the
description of the type, are that only one bladder is present on the first tarsal
segment of the hind legs, and that the first abdominal sternite is much reduced.
The second segment of the left cercus is subequal to that of the right in most
examples.

The following species may now be listed as synonyms of O. saundersii Westw.:

O. latreilli (Rambur).—Hmbia latreillii Rambur, Hist. nat. Névroptéres, 1842,
p. 312. Enderlein’s description and figures of O. latreillii (l.c.) are not from
the type; he had, however, examined Rambur’s type in the de Selys collection, so
that the synonymy may be taken as established.

O. insularis M’Lachlan, 1883, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), vol. 12, p. 227—-The
identity of M’Lachlan’s species with that previously known as O. latreillei has
been suggested by several authors (e.g. Enderlein, 1912; Navas, 1918a; Friederichs,
1934, 1935), without examination of the types. In the M’Lachlan collection
(British Museum of Natural History) are M’Lachlan’s three original types, each
labelled ‘Oligotoma insularis M’Lach.’; ‘Type’. Preparation of the terminalia of
one of these, and examination without preparation of the others, left no doubt
that O. insularis is an absolute synonym of O. saundersii as defined above.

Oligotoma cubana Hagen, 1885, Canad. Entomologist, vol. 17, p. 141. (Used
as a nomen nudum, Hagen, 1866, p. 221 (Olyntha cubana) and by M’Lachlan,
1877, p. 381.) Hagen’s type is in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard
University. Preparation and examination of its terminalia showed it to be a
normal specimen of O. sawndersii Westw. The synonymy has not previously been
proved by reference to the type.

Oligotoma hova (de Saussure).—Hmbia hova de Saussure, 1896, Mitt. Schweiz.
Entomol. Ges., ix, p. 354.

184 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. I,

We are indebted to Krauss (1911) for the definite information that O. hova
refers to the insect under discussion here. Krauss saw de Saussure’s type in
the Muséum d’Histoire naturelle, Geneva, and although his figures (e.g. Pl. ii,
figs. 9A, 9B) are not from de Saussure’s type, there can be no doubt that
de Saussure’s name refers to this series.

Krauss (l.c.) used the name O. hova for this series, believing that O. saundersti
and O. latreillii both stood for the species Known to Enderlein by the former
name, and now rightly to be known as O. humbertiana (Sauss.). It is evident
from a later paper (1917) that Krauss then followed Enderlein in applying
the name O. latreillii to the insect now under discussion, and using O. saundersii
in Enderlein’s sense.

Oligotoma bramina (de Saussure)—Embia bramina de Saussure, l.c., p. 352.—
Krauss (1911, Pl. i, figs. 6, 6A) has figured the type (Mus. Geneva), and allows
it as a different species from O. hova. Although de Saussure and Krauss, with
the specimens before them, recognized O. hova and O. bramina as distinct, I
believe that they are to be considered conspecific, the type of O. bramina being
perhaps individually aberrant. The locality is Bombay, India, where O. saundersii
(= O. hova) occurs; and there are no existing descriptions of insects from this
region to support the belief that O. bramina exists as a distinct species, although
quite a number of other records of the genus for India have been published.
Krauss’s figure of the type of O. bramina shows the termination of the outer
process of the right hemitergite as slightly different in form from the normal
for O. saundersiti (O. hova), and no process at all is shown from the left hemi-
tergite, although actually such a process is present in all species of the genus;
the omission may be due to breakage, or to failure to distinguish the structure in
the unprepared terminalia. The ventral structures shown in the figure may well
represent the tubular ninth sternite, curved to the left, and its associated spine,
somewhat distorted. As Krauss’s figure is from a dried specimen, the differences
noted may not represent actual structural differences, but merely a variation in
configuration associated with the state of preservation. A careful examination of
the type of O. bramina alone can establish or reject this synonymy.

Oligotoma rochai Navas, 1917, Hnt. Mitteilungen, vi, nos. 7-9, p. 281.—
There can be little doubt that Krauss (1917) is correct in referring this species
to O. latreillii (recte O. saundersii), though Navas’s figure (fig. 17) differs
appreciably from his own verbal description and from the true structure of
O. saundersivi. This is of no significance, as a comparison of many of Navas’s
figures with the specimens from which they were made (e.g. Oligotoma albertisi,
Museo Civico di Storia Naturale, Genoa; Dihybocercus spinosus, Musée du Congo
belge, Tervueren) indicates that little importance can be attached to any of his
figures.

Oligotoma inaequalis Banks, 1924, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. 65,
no. 12, p. 421.—The type, in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard Univer-
sity, proved on examination to be a normal specimen of O. saundersii. Banks
(l.c.) writes: ‘The genitalia are similar to 0. insularis, but the second joint of
the left cercus is much longer than this joint in the right cercus. Length of
body 7-5 mm., of forewing 6 mm. Larger and darker than O. cubana, and with an
extra pale line in the wings.’ Minor variations in the lengths of the segments
of the cerci frequently occur as individual aberrations, and variations of con-
siderable degree sometimes occur, such as in a specimen figured by Krauss
(1911, Pl. ii, fig. 9H; the author has seen a similar aberration in a specimen

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 185

from Honolulu). The type of O. inaequalis shows relatively only very slight
asymmetry in this respect, and this cannot be considered of taxonomic importance.
In colour and size the specimen falls well within the normal range for O. saundersii
(syn. O. cubana), and there is in fact no extra pale line in the wings.

Localities of Oligotoma saundersii.

Below is a summary of the distributional records of this species under its
various pseudonyms. Only those based on mature males have been allowed, as
other records can have no significance. Except for specimens re-examined by
later workers, only records since the monograph of Krauss (1911) are listed, as
the determinations of earlier workers cannot be evaluated.

Westwood’s type: Hast India.

As O. latreillii (or latreillei): Bombay; Madagascar (the types of Rambur, 1842) —
Davis (1936): Queensland: Brisbane; Townsville. New Caledonia: Noumea.—
Enderlein (1910): Aldabra Isd.—Enderlein (1912): South Formosa;
Madagascar; Hast Africa: West Pemba Id.; Dar-es-salam. South Brazil: State
of Santa Catharina; Colombia: St. Jean; Cuba.—Friederichs (1923):
Madagascar: I16t Prune; Tamatave; Fort Duchesne.—Friederichs (1934):
Brazil: State of Sta. Catharina, Humboldt District. British Hast Africa:
Chiromo (Nyasaland).—Menon and George (19386): India: Salsette Isd.;
Ernakulam, Cochin State—Mukerji (1935): India: Bombay Presidency;
Central Provinces. Ceylon: Peradeniya.—Navas (1918a): Cuba; Brazil;
Colombia (probably not original references).—Navas (1922): Brazil: Bahia.—
Navas (19230): Singapore; Mascate (? Muscat); New Caledonia: Noumea:
Mozambique; Vallée du Pungoné (? R. Pungwe); French Guinea: iles de Los;
Tonquin: Cho-gahn.—Navas (1928): Sumatra: Padang.—Navas (1929):
Congo: Panga, Aruwimi; Luebo; Djamba, Bas Uelé; Kimbou, Kwango.—
Okajima (1926): Southern Japan.—Rimsky-Korsakov (1914): Formosa:
Anping; Alikang.

As O. insularis: Hawaiian Isds. (the types of M’Lachlan, 1883).—Perkins (1913):
Hawaiian Isds.: Kauai; Oahu; Molokai; Maui; Hawaii.

As OG. cubana: Cuba (the type of Hagen, 1885).

As O. hova: Madagascar (the type of de Saussure, 1896) —Krauss (1911): South
Madagascar; French Guyana: St. Jean.

As O. bramina: Bombay, India (the type of de Saussure, 1896).

As O. rochai: Brazil: Ceara (the type of Navas, 1917).

As O. inaequalis: St. Croix, West Indies (the type of Banks, 1924).

New Records: In addition to types discussed in the synonymy, mature males
of O. saundersii from the following localities have been examined by the author:
Californian Academy of Sciences, San Francisco: Honoluluu—Musewm of Com-
parative Zoology, Harvard University: St. Augustine, Trinidad, 10.5.35, N. A.
Weber; Wiecsdale, Florida, 24.4—, C. H. Paige—British Museum of Natural
History: Aldabra Isd., 08-9, J. C. Fryer; Ascension; Caia, Zambesi, 29.7.11, H.
Swale; Ceylon, coll. Thwaites; Kaunakakai, Molokai, Perkins; Mts. Waimea,
Kauai, Perkins; Zomba, Nyasaland, H. S. Stannus—Museo Civico di Storia
Naturale, Genoa: Bambili, Congo, 1907, coll. Ribotti—Museum d’Histoire naturelle,
Paris: Békily, 8. Madagascar, A. Seyrig—Colombo Museum, Ceylon: Warahaman-
kada, Southern Province, 14.3.85.—Macleay Museum, Sydney University: Rock-
hampton, Queensland, and environs; numerous records, specimens collected by
and received from Mr. W. J. S. Sloan.

P

186 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. I,

Variability of Oligotoma saundersii.

The species as herein recognized is subject to variability in the taxonomically
unimportant characters of size and colour, and in minor structural details. Total
lengths of mature males range from 5 mm. to nearly 9 mm., and the general
body colour from pale yellowish-brown to chocolate-brown. The specimen listed
from Warahamankada, Ceylon, was exceptionally dark brown. The number of
cross-veins in the wings is variable, and the structure of the tip of the outer
process of the right hemitergite is subject to minute variations. Individual
variations in the relative lengths of the segments of the cerci also occur.

It would serve no purpose to recognize any variations such as the above under
varietal or subspecific names. Members of the species have undoubtedly been
much spread over the face of the globe by man, and a detailed study of variation
could not therefore be anticipated to yield geographic data of any value.

The female (v., e.g., Davis, 1936, 1938) possesses no characters of taxonomic
importance.

OLIGOTOMA HUMBERTIANA (de Saussure, 1896).

Embia humbertiana de Saussure, 1896, Mitt. Schweiz. Entomol. Ges., ix, p. 353.
Ceylon.

Krauss (1911, Pl. i, fig. 7C) has figured de Saussure’s type (Geneva Mus.).
It belongs to the species incorrectly known to Krauss (l.c.) and Enderlein (1912)
as O. saundersii (or saundersi). Under this name it has been well figured by
other workers in addition to the above, e.g. Rimsky-Korsakov (1914), Okajima
(1926), Shao Wen Ling (1934) and Menon and George (1936). A detailed
description is therefore unnecessary here. The figure of the terminalia (fig. 5) is
from a specimen in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, from Mt. Makilling,
Luzon, Philippine Isds. The species is immediately recognizable by the external
subterminal tooth on the outer process of the right hemitergite (10RP,). The
process of the left hemitergite (10LP) ends typically in a small bifid claw
directed outwards, although variations in this structure may occur (v., e.g., Menon
and George, 1936, p. 90). The breadth of 10RP, and the size and position of its
subterminal tooth are somewhat variable; in this respect Krauss’s figure of the
type differs slightly from his figure of a specimen from Java (l.c., fig. 7), and
from the figures of authors quoted above. The taxonomic recognition of such
variations would serve no useful purpose, for the reasons noted under O. saundersii.

Specimens of O. humbertiana from Ceylon do not in general agree with
Krauss’s figure of de Saussure’s type, as opposed to published figures of specimens
from other countries, in the breadth of 10RP,;. In the Colombo Museum there
are specimens from various localities in Ceylon agreeing more closely with Krauss’s
figure 7 than with his figure 7C (the type).

It is unlikely that Hmbia klugi Rambur (1842, p. 313) refers to the insect
under discussion here. It is given (with a query) in the synonymy of ‘0.
saunders’ by Enderlein (1912). This synonymy is copied by Navas (1918a),
without query. Both authors were referring to the insect now known to be
O. humbertiana. Rambur’s type, from Brazil, is stated by Hagen (1885, p. 197)
to belong ‘to the Museum in the Jardin des Plantes, in Paris’, and Krauss (1911,
p. 30) states that it is in ‘Mus. Paris’. It is not now there, nor (fide Enderlein)
in the de Selys collection, where others of Rambur’s types are to be found.

Rambur does not describe the wings, so that it cannot be decided whether
the venation was Oligotomoid. As the type is apparently lost, and the original

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 187

description and lack of detailed locality give no hope of identification, the species
should be listed as permanently unrecognizable. It may be noted that Rambur’s
description of the appendages (cerci) is suggestive rather of a member of the
series to which belongs Olyntha brasiliensis Griffith and Pidgeon (1831-2, ex
Gray MS.). This series is certainly not related to Oligotoma, having R,.; forked,
and a new generic name is in fact required to replace Olyntha, which is a homonym
of the earlier Olynthus Hiibner (Coleoptera). This series includes Olyntha
ruficapilla Burmeister, with which Hagen synonymized Hmbia klugi; it is not
congeneric with Hmbia Latreille, as stated by Enderlein (1912).

Navas (1922) refers a series from La Paz, Lower California (Mexico) to
O. californica (Banks, 1906). The series (in the Paris Museum) proved on
examination to be O. humbertiana. The locality is a considerable distance from
Banks’s type locality (Los Angeles, California). The actual identity of O. cali-
fornica will be dealt with shortly in a paper by Mr. EH. S. Ross, of the University
of California.

De Saussure’s type locality is merely ‘Ceylon’. The following records, based
on mature males, exist under the name O. saundersii (or saundersi): Enderlein
(1912): East Africa; Formosa; South Brazil; Ceylon; Singapore.—Friederichs
(1923): Manila, Philippine Isds.—Friederichs (1934): Kagoshima, Japan; Dutch
East Indies: Buitenzorg; Malang; Padang.—Krauss (1911): Singapore; Java.
Menon and George (1936): India: Bombay; Salsette Isd.; Ernakulam, Cochin
State—Mukerji (1935): Ross Isd., Andamans; India: Barkuda Isd., Madras
Presidency; Burhanpur, Central Prov.; Calcutta; Medha, Satara District, Bombay
Presidency; Rutnagiri District; Saugor, Central Prov.—Navas (19180, 1923a):
Manila, Philippine Isds—Navas (19230): India: Pondicherry; Malabar Coast.
Seychelles: Mahé. Coroman de Gengi.—Navas (1928): Rio Cassine, Portuguese
Guinea; Minhla, Birmania (Burma?).—Okajima (1926): Southern Japan.—
Rimsky-Korsakov (1914): Anping, Formosa.—Shao Wen Ling (1934, 1935): Amoy
University, China.

The following are the localities of mature males of O. humbertiana seen by the
author: Zoological Museum, Buitenzorg: Java: Buitenzorg (several records) .—
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University: Philippine Isds.: Mt.
Makilling, Luzon, coll. Baker; La Carloto Central, Occ. Negros, L. BE. Uichanco,
3-1930; Manila, Banks —Muséuii d'Histoire naturelle, Paris: La Paz, Lower Cali-
fornia, 1914, L. Diquet—Colombo Museum: Ceylon: Bintenne, 10.28; Horo-
wupotana, 9.10.24; Katagamuwa, Southern Province, 7-11.2:36; Marai Villu, N.W.
Province, 24.3.33; Pulmoddai, Trincomali District.

The series from Borneo, from which Hagen (1885) redescribed O. saundersii,
is in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University. Hagen (l.c.)
suggested the use of the name O. bDorneensis for this series, but in the same place
decided to refer it to O. saundersti. It is not conspecific with either of the species
here under consideration, but is the same as that now known as O. vosseleri
(Krauss, 1911). This series will be considered in a later paper.

Variability of Oligotoma humbertiana.

The general colour of mature males of this species varies between pale and
dark ferruginous; the total length from 5:5 mm. to 8 mm. The number of cross-
veins in the wings is variable. Minor variations in the processes of the hemitergites
have been mentioned above.

188 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. I,

Discussion.

The tropicopolitan distribution of O. saundersii and O. humbertiana is evident
from the facts listed above. A third species, O. nigra Hagen, 1885 (syn. O.
mesopotamica HEsben-Petersen, 1929), is also very widespread; its distribution
will shortly be dealt with in a paper by Mr. E. S. Ross. All three species probably
owe their wide distribution in part to human transport. Apart from these species,
the range of the genus Oligotoma (including Aposthonia Krauss, 1911; v. Davis,
1936) extends from East Africa through India and China to Southern Japan, the
Philippines, the East Indies, New Guinea, Australia and Tasmania, and some
islands in the Indian Ocean. This distribution is in contrast to previous concepts,
as the genus was believed to be indigenous in all warm countries.

Certain species have been incorrectly referred to Oligotoma; the following
require new generic names, being actually not directly related to Oligotoma:
O. hospes Myers, 1928, Cuba; O. hubbardi Hagen, 1885, Florida; O. ruficollis de
Saussure, 1896, Central America; O. sulcata Navas, 19230, Galla Annia, Africa;
O. venosa Banks, 1924, Cuba.

These will be dealt with in later papers, except O. hospes Myers, which is
being dealt with by Mr. E. S. Ross.

The genus is exceedingly compact, showing few affinities to other members of
the Order. The general form of the right hemitergite in the male, especially the
structure marked on the accompanying figures as 10RP., and the distribution of
the main veins of the wings, remain constant throughout the component species.
The family which the genus forms, the Oligotomidae, must temporarily be
considered to contain no other genus. Notoligotoma Davis, 1936, and Anisembia
Krauss, 1911, possess structural (venational) resemblances, but these can be
regarded only as convergent. Notoligotoma belongs rather to a series of genera
including Burmitembia Cockerell, 1919, Hmbonycha Navas, 1917a, Metoligotoma
Davis, 1936, and Ptilocerembia Friederichs, 1923 (cf. Davis, 1938, p. 267, footnote
2); Anisembia rather to a series including ‘Oligotomw hospes Myers. Whether,
as Krauss (1911) considers, Haploembia is referable to the family Oligotomidae
is very problematical. It certainly possesses a long outer process to the right
hemitergite, but the remainder of this hemitergite is not otherwise very close in
structure to its homologue in Oligotoma. Another point of similarity lies in the
left cercus, whose first segment always lacks nodules. Those species referred to
Haploembia, which have nodules on this segment (e.g. H. capensis Esben-Petersen,
1920) are rightly referable to Dictyoploca Krauss, 1911 (sensu Rimsky-Korsakov,
1927) rather than to Haploembia. In its other characters, e.g. tarsal bladders,
Haploembia differs markedly from Oligotoma, and as Haploembia is entirely
wingless it is impossible to decide its affinities to Oligotoma on the im/portant
character of venation.

Acknowledgements.

My thanks are due to the following for permission to examine specimens in
their respective institutions, and for general assistance in granting facilities for
the work: Dr. R. L. Usinger, of the Californian Academy of Sciences, San
Francisco; Mr. Nathan Banks and Dr. F. M. Carpenter, of the Museum of
Comparative Zoology, Harvard University; Messrs. N. Riley and F. G. M. Westropp,
of the British Museum of Natural History; Professor G. D. Hale Carpenter, of
Oxford University; M. Lucien Berland, of the Muséum d’Histoire naturelle, Paris;
and Mr. G. M. Henry, of the Colombo Museum, Ceylon. My thanks are also due

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 189

to the following for their very generous action in forwarding types and other
specimens for examination by me at the British Museum: Dr. Oscar de Beaux,
of the Museo Civico di Storia Naturale, Genoa; Dr. P. Revilliod, of the Muséum
d’Histoire naturelle, Geneva; and Dr. H. Schouteden, of the Musée du Congo,
Tervueren, Belgium. I wish to acknowledge also the co-operation of Mr. E. S.
Ross, of the University of California, with whom I was able to conduct many
profitable discussions on general procedure in the taxonomy of the Order. Finally,
I would convey my appreciation to the authorities of the University of California
for granting all facilities in the use of their excellent library, a part of the work
without which the remainder could have been of little significance.

List of References.

BANnkKs, N., 1906.—Descriptions of New Nearctic Neuropteroid Insects. Trans. Amer. Ent.
Soc., vol. xxxii, no. i (Philadelphia).

—————,, 1924.—-Descriptions of New Neuropteroid Insects. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool,
Harvard, vol. 65, no. 12.

BURMEISTER, H., 1839.—Handbuch der Entomologie, vol. 2. Berlin.

COCKERELL, T. D. A., 1919.—Two interesting Insects in Burmese Amber. T'he Entomologist
(London), vol. 52, no. 676.

Davis, C., 1936.—Studies in Australian Embioptera, Part i. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W.,
vol. 1lxi, pts. 5-6.

, 1938.—Studies in Australian Embioptera, Part iii. Ibid, vol. Ixiii, pts. 3-4.
ESSBEN-PETERSEN, T., 1920.—New Species of Neuropterous Insects from South Africa
(Ephemerida, Megaloptera and Embiidina). Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. xvii, pt. vi.

, 1929.—Embioptera from Baghdad. Entomologists’ Monthly Magazine, series 3,
vol. 15, no. 169.

ISNDERLEIN, G., 1910.—Embiidina and Neuroptera (Percy Sladen Trust Expedition). J.

Linn. Soc. London, vol. xiv.

——, 1912.—Embiidinen, in Coll. de Selys-Longchamps, fasc. 3.

F'RIEDERICHS, K., 1923.—G6kologische Beobachtungen tiber Embiidinen. Capita Zoologica,
Deel ii, Afl. 1.

, 1934.—Das Gemeinschaftsleben der Embiiden und N&éheres zur Kenntnis der
Arten. Archiv. Naturg., N.F., Bd. 3, Hft. 3.

—, 1935.—Check-List of the Embiidae (Embioptera) of Oceania. Bernice P.
Bishop Mus., Occasional Papers, vol. xi, no. 7 (Honolulu).

GRIFFITH, W., and PIDGEON, W., 1832.—The Animal Kingdom Arranged in Conformity
with its Organization, by the Baron Cuvier, with Supplementary Additions to each
Order. Insects, vol. ii. London: Whitaker, Treacher and Co. (Plates published
separately, 1831.)

HAGEN, H. A., 1866.—-Psocinoruni et Hmbidinorum Synopsis synonymica. Verh. zool. bot.
Ges. Wien., vol. 16.

, 1885.—Monograph of the Embiidina. Canad. Entomologist, vol. 17, nos. 8-11
(London, Ontario). ‘

Krauss, H. A., 1911.—Monographie der Embien. Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23 (Stuttgart).

, 1917.—Ueber Embia rochai Navas (Embiodea). Ent. Mitteilungen, vi, nos. 7-9.

M’LACHLAN, R., 1877.—On the Nymph-Stage of the Embidae, with Notes on the Habits
of the Family, etc. J. Linn. Soc. London (Zool.), vol. xiii, no. 70.

————,, 1883.—Neuroptera of the Hawaiian Islands. i. Pseudoneuroptera. Arn. Mag.
Nat. Hist. (5), vol. 12.

MENON, R., and GrorGE, C. G., 19386.—Notes on Oligotoma collected from Bombay and
Cochin, together with the Description of a New Species. J. Bombay Univ., vol. 4,
Dis As

MuKERJI, S., 1935.——On Two Undescribed Forms of the Genus Oligotoma, with a
Description of the External Genitalia of Oligotoma michaeli, and Distributional
Records of Some Indian Forms. Rec. Ind. Musewm, vol. xxxvii, pt. 1.

Myers, J. G., 1928.—The First Known Embiophile, and a New Cuban Embiid. Bull.
Brooklyn Ent. Soc., vol. xxiii, no. 2.

NAVAS, L., 1917a.—Névropteéres de l’Indo-Chine. Insecta (Revue illustrée d’Entomologie:
Rennes), nos. 73-84.

, 1917b.—Neue Neuropteren. Ent. Mitteilungen, vi, nos. 7-9.

190 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. I.

NavAs, L., 1918a.—Embi6pteros de la América Meridional. Broteria, Série Zoolégica,
vol. xvi.
——_—_—., 1918b.—Neur6épteros Nuevos o Poco Conocidos (Décima Série). Memorias
Real. Acad. de cienc. y artes de Barcelona, vol. 14, no. 4.
—_——_——., 1922.—Algunos Insectos del Museo de Paris. Revista de la Academia de
Ciencias de Zaragoza, vii.
, 1923a.—Insecta Orientalia, i Series. Mem. Pont. Accad. Rom. dei Nuovi Lincei,
Series ii, vol. 6.
, 1923b.—Comunicaciones Entomolégicas. 6. Notas sobre Embiépteros. Revista
de la Academia de Ciencias de Zaragoza, viii.
, 1928.—Insectos Exéticos Neurépteros y Afines del Museo Civico de Génova.
Annali del Museo Civico di Sioria Naturale, Genova, vol. 58.
—————,, 1929.—-Insectes du Congo Belge (Série iii). Revue Zool. Bot. africaines
(Tervueren), vol. 18, fase. 1.
OKAJIMA, G., 1926.—Description of a New Species of Oligotoma from Japan, together
with some notes on the Family Oligotomidae. J. Coll. Agric. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, vii, 4.
PERKINS, R. C. L., 1913.—Fauna Hawaiiensis, vol. ii. Camb. Univ. Press.
RAMBuR, M. P., 1842.—Histoire Naturelle des Insectes. Névroptéres (Paris).

Rimsky-Korsakov, M., 1914.—H. Sauter’s Formosa-Ausbeute: Embiodea. Ent.
Mitteilungen, iii.
—, 1927.—A new Species of Embia from British East Africa. Revue russe

@Entomologie, vol. xxi, nos. 3-4.

DE SAUSSURE, H., 1896.—Note sur la Tribu des Embiens. Mitt. Schweiz. Entomol.
Gesellschaft, Bd. 9, Hft. 8.

SHAo WEN LING, 1934.—Notes on the Biology of Oligotoma sp.: The First Embiid from
China. Peking Natural History Bulletin, vol. 9, no. 2.

, 1935.—Further Notes on the Biology and Morphology of Oligotoma saundersii

Westwood. Ibid., vol. 9, no. 4.

WESTWOOD, J., 1837.—Characters of Embia, a genus allied to the White Ants. Trans.
Linn. Soc. London (Zoology), xvii.

Addendum.

P. 185, line 15, after Dar-es-salam, add Lindi, Morogoro. Cameroons: Garua; Rei Buba.
P. 187, line 34, after Banks, add Surigao, Mindanao, coll. Baker. Formosa: Rokki, 15.6.32,
coll. Iu. Gressitt. India: Bhadravate, Mysore, coll. P. S. Nathan.

191

A KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES.*
Part 2. MELANOPHYCEAE (Phaeophyceae).

By VALERIE May, B.Sc., formerly Science Research Scholar in Botany,
the University of Sydney.

[Read 26th April, 1939.]

In 1909 Lucas recorded 43 species of brown algae from the east coast of
Australia; since that date the number of species recorded for New South Wales
has been increased to 83, the number in this key.

Setchell and Gardner’s scheme of classification (1925) has been followed
almost exactly. In addition, the works of Newton (1931) and Tilden (1935) have
been consulted repeatedly. J. Agardh’s Species Sargassorum Australiae (1888) has
been followed for the Sargassum species in this key. Lucas’s ‘Seaweeds of South
Australia’ (1936) has been used especially in connection with the Dictyotaceae.

The abbreviations used as sub-headings under localities are as follows:

Bailey: Bailey, F. M. (1895).

C.S. & I.R.: Lucas Collection, Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Canberra.
D.T.: De Toni, G. B. (1895).

Harv. Aus.: Harvey, W. H. (1858-63).

Herb. Notes: Notes or lists of collections found at the National Herbarium, Sydney.

J. Ag.: Agardh, J. (1888).

Laing: Laing, R. M. (1900).

Lucas (1913): Lucas, A. H. S. (19138).

Lucas (1935): Lucas, A. H. S. (1935).

Lucas (1936): Lucas, A. H. S. (1936).

Lucas, C. S. & I. R. Notes: Herbarium Notes from the Lucas collection, Canberra.
Muell.: Sonder, W. (1880).

Nat. Herb.: The aigal section, National Herbarium, Sydney.

Okamura: Okamura, K. (1904).

Sonder: Sonder, W. (1871).

Tilden & Fess.: Tilden, J. E., and Fessenden, A. P. (1931).

University : The algal herbarium, University of Sydney.

The system of classification used in the present key is as follows:

MELANOPHYCEAE.
Phaeosporeae.
Sphacelariales: Sphacelariaceae (Sphacelaria) ; Cladostephaceae (Cladostephus) ;
Stypocaulaceae (Stypocaulon).
Ectocarpales: Elachisteaceae; Myrionemataceae; Ralfsiaceae; Leathesiaceae
(Leathesia); Asperococcaceae (Asperococcus); -Punctariaceae; Scytosi-
phonaceae (Ilea; Scytosiphon; Colpomenia); Ectocarpaceae (Hctocarpus;

Pylaiella); Striariaceae; Aegiraceae (Bactrophora); Chnoosporaceae
(Chnoospora) ; Heterochordariaceae.
Cutleriales.

* Continued from Vol. Ixiii, 1938, p. 218.

192 KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. II,

Sporochnales: Sporochnaceae (Sporochnus; Carpomitra).
Desmarestiales: Desmarestiaceae; Myriogloiaceae (Myriogloia).
Chordariales: Chordariaceae; Coilodesmaceae; Scytothamnaceae (Scytothamnus).
Dictyosiphonales: Dictyosiphonaceae; Spermatochnaceae (Spermatochnus).
Laminariales: Chordaceae; Laminariaceae; Lessoniaceae (Macrocystis) ;
Alariaceae (Hcklonia).
Aplanosporeae.
Tilopteridales.
Dictyotales: Dictyotaceae (Gymnosorus; Zonaria; Homoeostrichus; Padina;
Spathoglossum; Neurocarpus; Dictyota; Dilophus; Lobospira).
Cyclosporeae.
Fucales: Sargassaceae (Sargassum; Carpophyllum; Blossevillea; Cystophyllum;
Scaberia; Phyllospora); Fucaceae (Hormosira); Durvillaeaceae (Sarco-
phycus; Notheia); Splachnidiaceae (Splachnidium).

MELANOPHYCEAE Stiz.
Reproduction sexual only.
Thallus at maturity never unicellular or monosiphonous, but composed of differentiated
and complex tissues; growth terminal; reproductive structures located within the thallus
in conceptacles and associated with branched paraphyses; female gamete non-motile;
male gamete motile by means of two laterally-placed cilia of unequal length; fertiliza-

tion effected when both gametes have escaped into the water ...............2ee2eeeee
Tribe CYCLOSPOREAE Aresch.

Reproduction sexual and non-sexual.

Aplanospores present.
Fronds filamentous or complanate; reproductive organs on the surface of the thallus;
non-motile, non-sexual spores occur singly or in groups of four; bi-ciliated zoospores
SOMELIMESHPLESENEHANSO teste crete eres moneuiewelea ene ons oucuetedesautucnerouarele Tribe APLANOSPOREAE S. & G.
Aplanospores absent.
Non-sexual reproduction (where known) by zoospores with two lateral cilia; male
gametes motile, biciliated; female as above or non-motile; typical members possess
unilocular zoosporangia and plurilocular gametangia and have the gametophyte and
sporophyte of very closely similar size and structure ...... Tribe PHAEOSPOREAE Thur.

Tribe PHAEOSPOREAE Thur.

Gametangia present on macroscopic plants (zoosporangia known or unknown).
A terminal cell present and conspicuous; plants usually tufted; thallus filamentous,
monosiphonous near or at the tips, usually becoming polysiphonous below through
longitudinal walls—also there may be cortication due to descending filaments; whole
attached by filaments or discs; branching, where present, very regular; unilocular and
plurilocular reproductive structures on the same or similar plants and consisting of
transformed apical portions of usually short branchlets. The cell wall differs in
composition or constitution from that of any of the Ectocarpales in that, when older, it
darkens if treated with eau-de-javelle, turning black in mature cells ..................
I. Order SPHACELARIALES Oltmanns.
The terminal cell, if present, at least not conspicuous. This includes Cutleriales
Oltmanns. Gametes nearly or quite equal; growth in length strictly subapical, often
trichothallic; thallus variable; unilocular and plurilocular reproductive structures on
CHETSAIMCHOLASIMILAT DIATE were is) cue eceitc ys tocehede orelapeieereieneiees II. Order EcrocarPA.Les 8S. & G.
Only ‘unilocular zoosporangia present on macroscopic plants (gametangia known, or
suspected of being, on macroscopic plants).
Thallus built up by means of branching cell filaments, which adhere more or less strongly
to one another.
Specialized sori of sporangia encircle the thallus or occur at the apices of the
PIANCHIETS Sahel eee bebe oA Aah ale MINER hs ee IiI. Order SPOROCHNALES Sauvageau.
Zoosporangia immersed in the cortical filaments.
Growth sub-apical from apical filaments, not trichothallic; colourless hairs generally
present; thallus of three layers, an inner layer of slender filaments (which may dis-
appear), an intermediate layer of cells which are longer than broad or thick, and a
cortical layer of short anticlinal, assimilatory filaments—the whole enclosed in jelly
PROEEDA CNB Gey lca) Pieruchciict nc Cle IC eka d cncl Oe aie DeGoe Bice Or icc V. Order CHORDARIALES S. & G. (part.)

BY VALERIE MAY. 193

Terminal growth conspicuously trichothallic; frond clothed, where young, with
densely crowded, exserted, simple or branched, coloured, monosiphonous hairs ......
Ig eee cae ape TR PS MHL oM Es SPORT Bho eb ena CURL sesh oy Pcp tnds oy dees IV. Order DESMARESTIALES S. & G.
Intercalary longitudinal division occurs, as a result of which true parenchymatous tissue
is formed.
Growth apical or sub-apical.
Growth sub-apical from apical filaments; thallus of three layers, an inner layer of
slender filaments (which may disappear), an intermediate layer of cells which are
longer than broad or thick, and a cortical layer of assimilatory filaments combined
into a tissue; zoosporangia immersed in the cortical tissue........................
EEE eee Ne Ee AE ROA So) oye Ss sete Sueustis gerisasweius lies V. Order CHORDARIALES S. & G. (part.)
Growth in length apical; cylindrical thallus much branched and composed of two, or
sometimes three tissues, the inner tissue of elongated cells, the outer of shorter,
nearly iso-diametric or somewhat flattened cells; hairs scattered singly over the frond
ANG sSOOM, GECIGWOUS) «ss siet 6 els « tele le oe hase VI. Order DicTYOSIPHONALES S. & G.1
Growth never apical, increase in length being caused by the tissue between the blade
and stipe or (in the Chordaceae Dumont.) that just above the holdfast; plants large
and complex in structure and usually consisting of base, stipe and blade; tissue
usually differentiated into central ‘hyphal’ cells (some with trumpet cells), inter-
mediate tissue and a cortical tissue of small cells; unilocular zoosporangia of the
macroscopic plant associated with unicellular paraphyses and forming extensive sori
© 60 BAOLE OD Br OO SDhO EPIC ONPG. GIGLOMT oF. td Ro ren eos PROM ca. ERLAce VII. Order LAMINARIALES Oltmanns.

I. Order SPHACELARIALES Oltmanns.

Branches formed from initial cells below the apical cell, although hairs may arise by
direct division of the apical cells; unilocular and plurilocular reproductive structures
stipitate.
Unilocular and plurilocular reproductive structures borne on the ordinary branches
B00 Otb DEES te CeO STIOIO Can TE ced CeO CG CADPR ERTIES Sphacelariaceae Reinke (emend. Oltmanns).
The external layer of rectangular cells arranged in a regular transverse band; lower
portion of the plant often provided with a false cortex. Only genus recorded for New
SOULE CS pene t ti eet lc ANE aA, Sake: ceeds Kear Ate 2 JERS) BADE 1G 1. Sphacelaria Lyngb.
Secondary branchlets whorled; unilocular and plurilocular reproductive structures borne
on special branches growing near the apex, these special branches inserted between the
ORIN AR Ye awWALOLIS iae, aoirecoer eee ea oie os ee anche Siok an Ionscsei gti ws enouaneuaaunie Cladostephaceae Oltmanns.
Main axis densely corticate by the growth of rhizoidal filaments; secondary branches
ecorticate; hairs in tufts just below the apices of the branches. Only genus recorded

FORMING Wig SOUCY WALES AS cake mum emeus eyo ecte toate oy. secl a one lektue abe: Sree 2. Cladostephus Ag.
Branches formed by the direct division of the apical cell in a manner similar to the
formation of the hairs of Sphacelaria and Cladostephus .... Stypocaulaceae Oltmanns.

Frond pinnate; central axis consists of a number of cuboidal cells surrounded by a wide
band of corticating cells; fertile branches bear numerous sporangia in groups in the
axils. Only genus recorded for New South Wales ............ 3. Stypocaulon Kuetz.

Il. Order EctocarPates S. & G.

Punctariaceae Kjellm., Striariaceae Kjellm., Heterochordariaceae S. & G., Elachis-
teaceae Kjellm., Myrionemataceae Foslie (orthog. mut.) and Ralfsiaceae Kjellm. do not
occur here. Fronds are usually erect, membranaceous or filamentous; when globular or
prostrate they are either hollow or carnose (not so in Elachisteaceae Kjellm., Myrionema-
taceae Foslie (orthog. mut.) and Ralfsiaceae Kjellm.).

Fronds irregularly globular and hollow, or flattened and solid carnose, thick; inner tissue
of large colourless cells and loosely parenchymatous of di- or trichotomous filaments,
outer cells coloured and in anticlinal rows, held together, at least loosely, by the
surrounding jelly; zoosporangia and gametangia, with loculi uniseriate or nearly so,
immersed in the external, anticlinal rows and borne on the same or similar plants ;
plant arises from a primitive basal disc and is epiphytic or saxicolous ................
picateurs Kohay sciatieiloffeuiez on aie cives ewer culerovencuol Suceaes ech ce ena ceo SOA TRE Eee aaa ee aia ee ee Leathesiaceae S. & G.
Zoosporangia pyriform to ellipsoidal, attached at the base. Only genus recorded for
ING Wa SOUND GIWIBLES) amerosaioy ai ctiotoied-Uoy elutes eust-icrarncuce Reto aei tna ead eee Ct aS 4. Leathesia Gray.
Fronds elongated, erect when globular, not carnose.

Fronds membranaceous or flattened, at times hollow (this

includes Punctariaceae
Kjellm.).

1 See footnote on page 195.
Q

194 KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. II,

Sori definite, entirely projecting and scattered over most of the frond; fronds ligulate
or saccate, simple, differentiated into an inner tissue of nearly colourless cells and an
outer, coloured, cortical layer; growth trichothallic at first, later intercalary; hairs
DLESCMLEM atetsere eee Volos cdi eet ciehiclols alo: al) «Poke teneh trederiehehenstuenerovehaneliehakensl = tome Asperococcaceae Foslie.
Paraphyses present. Only genus recorded for New South Wales ..................
FOO DSR OES CO NCUES OREGO C. CCR DLS On ONCE ORC On SOORCREROL CREAR CRETE Leone 5. Asperococcus Lamour.
Sori usually indefinite, superficial (not projecting beyond the surface); gametangia
very closely packed; fronds cylindrical or hollow, flattened and solid or more or less
globular and hollow; main growth in length at first trichothallic, later intercalary ;
frond of two or three layers of tissues, the outer being of smaller assimilating cells;
hairs, when present, occur in Sroups ............200see0es Scytosiphonaceae? Foslie.
Frond cylindrical, not membranaceous.
Frond monosiphonous, occasionally polysiphonous; branching various; filaments arise
from superficial (occasionally penetrating) filaments, or from a small superficial disc;
cells uni-nucleate with parietal chromatophore(s); unilocular and plurilocular repro-
ductive structures arise from branchlets transformed wholly or in part, or are inter-
(OER Ale PPI AIS co CIALa Gna crate ao Od OI 510 CRG DIGI AERO ar oP ocieio io a cidiochc ca ceA Ectocarpaceae? Harv.
Fronds more complex (this includes Striariaceae Kjellm. and Heterochordariaceae
S. & G.).
Growth trichothallic; no distinct sori occur; sporangia and gametangia neither super-
ficial nor projecting, but scattered in assimilating filaments; fronds erect, branched,
gelatinous, and of two or three tissues; the central tissue of larger and longer,
colourless filaments, and the cortical of distinct, anticlinal filaments (there may be
an IntermediaterZONe)) -Aiwers stasis cere leolaee shoes aiclStoeueee eevee ersnercethe Aegiraceae S. & G.
Frond often hollow, central portion composed of anastomosing filaments with two
other layers to the outside. Only genus recorded for New South Wales ..........
nic CLOG DIOLaIOL a Or0,0 6 Ino. 0-0\d Ge Ch ORO IEDC Re OE Choro cna A oea chosen ofa o pt 11. Bactrophora® J. Ag.
Growth sub-terminal, not distinctly trichothallic; fronds elongated, solid, slender,
more or less compressed, more or less dichotomous or proliferous from the margins,
of two sets of tissues, an inner of large cells, an outer of one or more layers of small,
coloured cells in short, anticlinal rows; cryptostomata occur; gametangia uniseriate,
arising from clusters of hairs and spreading over the.surface, at times into confluent
SOLU ey eee eee ee MeN Rois © xe .0 45 go Pas feige gal errahis Eo Wes Sigoepte ie katte CRERORER Skee cot TTA ENE Chnoosporaceae S. & G.
ONLY SNUS pepe gs ware Gis ies sue is! « beep sysuspmrecaaeusge Busyalionsh es: spekous Myson Bite ae 12. Chnoospora J. Ag.

SCYTOSIPHONACEAE Foslie.

Frond solid (or very nearly so) and strap-shaped, flaccid, tapering to a small solid stipe
at base; gametangia with uniseriate loculi; gametes freed by complete dissolution of the
OMUINE Wall” fe acesierste eucpeuelte 5 5.5. ove a poke ioweys use weneh smote woke dK ona Mou rem oc S oncreinsusieys wakiskele tewaMcu otis 6. Jlea Fries.‘
Frond hollow and cylindrical, flattened, globose or difform.

Frond cylindrical or flattened, unbranched; inner layer of cells thick-walled, vertically
elongated and colourless, the outer of small, rounded, cuboidal, assimilating cells; growth
INLLELCAlALVeNCArELOe, DASE aie sila mielece chek nelensususiel ele 7. Scytosiphon Ag. (emend. Thur.)
Frond globose or difform (solid in very juvenile form); membrane rather thin and
membranaceous, entire (though it may be lacerated in age); inner tissue of large,
rounded, nearly colourless, thin-walled cells, outer of small, cuboidal, assimilatory cells;
gametangia early developed around groups of hair-filaments, later spreading over the
CNCING BET OMGSSUELAC Cee (eres eucier leoelorsistededciel ok iI Kokdewe EMER RRS 8. Colpomenia Derb. & Sol.

ECTOCARPACEAE Harv.

Creeping portion of the vegetative filaments superficial or penetrating the host merely
by rhizoids; zoosporangia and gametangia transformed branchlets or tips of branches or

pranchictssandesorscurictly terminal m-peyccye «lieicielel meine etek etna 9. Ectocarpus Lyngb.
Creeping filaments not penetrating the uninjured host; zoosporangia and gametangia
catenate, intercalary ; zooid liberation via lateral pores ...........- 10. Pylaiella Bory.

°For greater clarity the key to the genera of this family is placed at the end of the
Order Ectocarpales.

%If the growth be sub-apical, not trichothallic, and if the plurilocular reproductive
structures occur only on macroscopic plants, this genus will need to be placed in the
Chordariaceae Reichenb. (in part). Both the above mentioned points of classification are
as yet unsettled in this genus, but plurilocular reproductive structures have been
reported on macroscopic plants.

4Setchell & Gardner (1925) support priority of the generic name of Jlea Fries over
that of Phyllitis Kuetz.

BY VALERIE MAY. 195

III. Order SPOROCHNALES Sauvageau.
Unilocular and plurilocular reproductive structures on or among articulated ramuli, on

TAGS OUENGSS “GonoocunocococcobvoUdGU Guu GUD oC OoU Ga DOG Sporochnaceae (Reichenb.) Decne.
Sporangiferous regions, i.e., receptacles, cylindrical, globose or club-shaped beneath
pencils of deciduous hairs ............. 2 eee eee eee eee eee ee eee 13. Sporochnus Ag.
Sporangiferous regions, i.e., receptacles, shortly conoid or mitriform; no pencils of
WMS Js cbccosoovroncocosnsop ven oSooGD ODN OUD DUgUoDBOROOOODD 14. Carpomitra Kuetz.

IV. Order DESMARESTIALES S. & G.

Desmarestiaceae Kjellm. does not occur here.
Cortical filaments free; fronds filamentous, erect, cylindrical, solid (always in Australian
types) or later tubulose; central strands of large, colourless cells, the peripheral of two
sorts, (1) free, short, cortical filaments with rounded terminal cells, and (2) exserted,
monosiphonous filaments with basal, meristematic cells and outer cells provided with
phaeoplasts and consequently coloured; colourless hairs absent .. Myriogloiaceae Kuckuck.
Axis of frond polysiphonous or hollow below (Australian types polysiphonous always).
Only genus recorded from New South Wales .............--- 15. Myriogloia Kuckuck.

V. Order CHORDARIALES S. & G.

Chordariaceae (Reichenb.) in part, and Coilodesmaceae 8S. & G. do not occur here.
No distinct cortical, anticlinal filaments occur ................ Scytothamnaceae S. & G.
Frond filiform, repeatedly and unequally branched; the anastomosing mass of filaments,
both elongated axial and radiating peripheral, held in a jelly-like substance, reticulum
more dense in the cortical region; sporangia elongated and immersed in the peripheral
filaments. Only genus recorded from New South Wales ..... 16. Scytothamnus H. & H.

VI. Order DicTYOSIPHONALES® 8S. & G.

Dictyosiphonaceae D.T. does not occur here.
Sporangia borne at the base of more or less clavate paraphyses, or intercalary ........
ERR I rats AUS coh aVieeey oi cs elcrat en sreilal geet dg lgietececkae wlar'e Spermatochnaceae Kjellm. (lim. mut.)
Frond filiform, elongated and regularly branched; central axis consists of a central
cell and a band of corticating cells from which arise elongated, assimilatory filaments
and hairs; sporangia borne at the base of clavate paraphyses. Only genus recorded
steTs QUIN S Wa i> OUD EIN VE LES bares opsey scrapie: esto el elroserroh onlay aua/fo\ etjeh ep tun: envelletuei/<) «litte 17. Spermatochnus Reinke.

VII. Order LAMINARIALES Oltmanns.

Chordaceae Dumont. and Laminariaceae Reichenb. do not occur here.
The stipe is distinct, at least when young, and paraphyses bear hyaline appendages in
the types so far recorded from New South Wales.
Splitting arises at the transition place or within its influence; fronds composed of hold-
fast, branching stipe and a few to numerous blades; no cryptostomata or tufts of hair;
paraphyses unicellular. No outgrowths develop as in Alariaceae except in Lessoniopsis

IRGUMKS, ceoesocnbosboeones pee SCA bee odo 6 bos GUD UD Deo MUlED eo Moa Eb Lessoniaceae S. & G.
Sori on the ordinary blades; stipe scorpioid-sympodial. This is the only section recorded
TGie ING Sewn WAGES sso pwooesaldicdods6eDaooOocOObS Macrocysteae Kuetz. (lim. mut.)

Stipe solid. Only genus recorded from New South Wales ........ 18. Macrocystis Ag.

Outgrowths arise at the transition place or within its influence ..:... Alariaceae S. & G.
Mature outgrowths confined to the blade. This is the only section recorded for New
SOuthe “Wiese rscetve ts nsisletnusae eidetne cna bopens fencer aucces sich ameooaweiia) aston se ntleee cece ai anle HEecklonieae Setchell.

Lamina pinnatifid, ribless and broad. Only genus recorded from New South Wales
OR GR ol CT ERC aE inno ic a teciubt Ga tones ER EAA! eG NG scko niet CUE aoN nena Eee 19. Ecklonia Hornemann.

1. SPHACELARIA Lyngb.
Branching pinnate; pinnae frequently opposite, irregular in length, but becoming shorter
near the tips of branches; articulations about equal in length and breadth ..............
a NEL OE ADEE OSE SACRO EERO RTCA Oe HINO ICICI A COPRONESORDACACIGS Ci aCe ERE IES 1. S. cirrhosa (Roth.) Ag.
Locality.— Harv. Aus.: Port Jackson.
Branching not pinnate; articulations longer than broad ...... 2. 8S. tribuloides Menegh.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Tuggerah Lakes, Harv. Aus.: Port Jackson, Kiama (also
Victoria).

5The Order Dictyosiphonales S. & G. is here regarded as extended to include those
members of the Spermatochnaceae with growth from a distinct apical cell. This
extension is suggested by Setchell and Gardner (1925, p. 587).

196 KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. II,

2. CLADOSTEPHUS Ag.&

Whorls of ramuli very close together and difficult to differentiate; joints of the ramuli
shorter than Droad “Vskie VS ere ein ss oye wee ears wid wie eres 3. C. spongiosus (Lightft.) Ag.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Tuggerah Lakes (also Victoria). C.S. & I.R.: Narrabeen. Herb.
Notes: Lake Macquarie.

Whorls of ramuli close but distinct; joints about as long as broad ....................
aaa MO Re NRO ES CR ORS CR OROTHAIO CROMER CR TERCRC EC 4. C. verticillatus (Lightft.) Ag.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Narrabeen (also Victoria).

3. STYPOCAULON Kuetz.

Frond notably stupose, to 20 cm. or more high and harsh and stiff; fruits occur 3 or 4
Rysfaeeeaeel aba) Wea Eboleils ogodocageosodeuugoonboea aoc 5. S. paniculatum (Suhr.) Kuetz.?

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Kiama, Narrabeen, Newcastle (also Victoria). University :
Broken Bay. C.S.&I1.R.: Bondi or Long Bay—cast up.

4. LEATHESIA Gray.

Thallus of metallic-green, shining, irregularly globose, hollow sacs of up to 5 cm.
diameter ; paraphyses clavate, gradually and uniformly enlarging upwards ..............
PR ete teh eS CAS TCR ONCE CaS On re CERT CRCLCI El CIC RPE GET cl 6. L. difformis (Linn.) Aresch.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: (also Victoria). C.S.&1.R.: Eden.

5. ASspERococcus Lamour.

Fronds attenuated at the base, swelling into elongated sacs, which may be constricted into
segments; sori dotted over the surface; paraphyses numerous .. 7. A. bullosus Lamour.

Locality.— Nat. Herb.: Eden, Twofold Bay, Botany Bay.

6. InEea Fries.

There is a disc-like attachment organ; frond oval or cuneiform; no hairs or paraphyses
GCCUT MDIANC SVERVAVATIA DIC antes teen aie teisiea aie ca adele checeueicuatoieiciccnee 8. I. fascia (Muell.) Fries.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as Phyllitis fascia (Muell.) Kuetz. Farm Cove, Sydney,
Woolloomooloo Bay, Sydney. C.S. & I. R.: Plant as Phyllitis fascia (Muell.) Kuetz.
Sydney district, Maroubra, Wollongong, Kurnell, Manly, Bondi.

7. ScyTosrpHOoN Ag. (emend. Thur.).

Unbranched frond is intestiniform, sometimes articulately constricted; attachment by a
small disc; sporangia associated with paraphyses .... 9. S. lomentaria (Lyngb.) J. Ag.

Locality. Nat. Herb.: Huskisson, Jervis Bay. Lucas (1936): ‘North as far as Sydney’.

8. COLPOMENIA Derb. & Sol.

Thallus consists of pale brown bladders without stipes—attachment being by a broad
base; the cortical layer consists of 1 or 2 rows of cuboidal cells—the inner layer of larger,
TOUNTIAEARGECVIS serctoreis cis. see ree. e cseracanave, axoemerehe are siete e euevenate 10. C. sinwosa (Roth.) Derb. & Sol.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Middle Harbour, Sydney, Newcastle (also Victoria). University:
Watson’s Bay. C.S.&I1.R.: Botany Bay, Port Jackson (also Queensland and Lord Howe
Island). Muell.: Plant as Asperococcus sinuosus Bory., Tilba Tilba.

9. EcrocarPpus® Lyngb.

Plant tufted, usually about 30 mm. high and rarely, if ever, exceeding 1 cm-; usually
epiphytic; branching diffuse; articulations at the base half as long as broad, and in
the other parts four or more times longer than their breadth; plurilocular reproductive
structures egg-shaped or elongated, sessile or shortly stipitate; unilocular reproductive
structures (ess-shaped andisessile cyoc: 0s © cliciciece cll ele mpiensiet 11. #. simpliciusculus Ag.

Locality.—C.S. & 1.R.: Manly. D.T.: (also Queensland).

6 Notes in the Algal Section of the National Herbarium, Sydney, indicate that there
are intermediate forms between the two species listed below.

7Sonder (1880) lists Sphacelaria paniculata Lgb. as from Tilba Tilba. This species
is not mentioned by De Toni (1895). Sphacelaria paniculata Suhr. is a synonym of
Stypocaulon paniculatum Kuetz.

8S.&G. (1925) use chromatophore form-discoid or band-shaped, as a means of
distinguishing species of Hctocarpus. The writer has found both forms present in a single
filament of E. confervoides.

BY VALERIE MAY. 197

Plant tufted; when mature usually exceeds 2 cm. in height, and may be more than 30 cm.

long; branching alternate or secund, not opposite; plurilocular reproductive structures

very variable, but not cylindrical or obtuse-conical at maturity ....................4..

eM a RM he ae Ee abbas sero eh sated taka: Syatiaileevanepdubila @ 12. H. confervoides® (Roth.) Le Jol.
Some workers divide this species further as:

Plant always fixed; never possessing a terminal hair on the plurilocular reproductive

FSU EIGEN Xe) 16 ' erG OOkG DI O10 CHOI ORO Ce CEO Ent Ok a OTD: OF SEL rrtce ioaeEge EF. confervoides (Roth.) Le Jol.
Plant often free-floating and usually possessing a terminal hair on the plurilocular
GEVEOGUCEIVEKSEGUCEULE! sje s cele + © chebelolic leusle coslsiaieo ete ee cies EH. siliculosus (Dillw.) Lyngb.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as EF. confervoides (Roth.) Le Jol., Port Stephens; Plant
as H. siliculosus (Dill.) Lyngb., Wollongong, Port Hacking. C.S.&I1.R.: Plant as
E. confervoides (Roth.) Le Jol., (also Queensland and Lord Howe Island). Bailey:
Plant as E. siliculosus (Dill.) Lyngb. (also Queensland).

10. PYLAIELLA Bory.
Branches usually opposite, and given off at wide angles; articulations once or twice
longer than broad; plant gelatinous, adhering to paper .. 13. P. littoralis (Linn.) Kjellm.
Locality.—C.S. & I.R.: South Head, Port Jackson.

11. BacrroPpHorA J.Ag.
Lower branches pinnately branched, becoming simple and somewhat attenuate on
ascending; fertile filaments occur near the apices .... 14. B. nigrescens (Harv.) J. Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: (also Victoria). C.S. &I.R.: Eden.
Branching absent or simple, never pinnate.
Distinct stipe present; branching alternate and rare or absent; apices attenuated
LS TR CSUR ORCU ER OES FSR CH TS Ta NCR ccs Chee INrr IC Der i a 15. B. fium (Harv.) J. Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Twofold Bay (also Victoria).
No distinct stipe present; branching irregular and frequent; apices blunt ............
eee Rede h ree etic snals sep omeprosivatos hier (che daneyte” of oNsnistrayleyel ioe suichin- ia tenenc enous, 16. B. irregularis Tilden & Fess.
Locality.—Tilden & Fess.: Kiama.

12. CHNOoOSPORA J. Ag.
Fronds densely caespitose, of the same diameter throughout, except at the slightly
attenuated apices; branches forming acute angles .............. 17. C. pacifica J. Ag.
Locality.—Muell.: Plant as C. fastigiata J. Ag., N.S.W.

13. SporocHNusS Ag.

Receptacles borne on pedicels which are at least longer than the receptacle.
Receptacles linear-cylindrical, obtuse at each end; frond very lax and slender ........
PMS SOLEUS HR vtenen sat sas Pawan sheer aunt ay Seiweney aptwapepcee “cashed Ley cante wish aie fue ageratvay Sue's ae etertelyers 18. S. Moorei Harv.

Locality.— Nat.’ Herb.: Parramatta River, Port Jackson, (also Victoria).
Receptacles spherical or ovoid; frond terete ......... 19. S. radiciformis (R. Br.) Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Botany Bay, Eden. Muell.: Tilba Tilba.

Receptacles borne on pedicels which are shorter than the receptacles; fronds cylindrical ;

branching repeatedly decompound ..................2-eeceeerceres 20. S. comosus Ag.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Botany Bay (label not attached), (also Victoria).

14. CARPOMITRA Kuetz. :
Plant much branched and irregularly dichotomous; thallus compressed; branches erect
with acute axils, attenuated at the base and obtuse at the apex; receptacles occur at the
thickened apices of the branch midrib ..................0.02e0ceee 21. C. costata Batt.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as C. Cabrerae Kuetz., (also Victoria). C.S.&I1.R.: Plant
as C. Cabrerae Kuetz., Eden. Harv. Aus.: Plant as OC. Cabrerae Kuetz., Kiama.

15. Myriocito1a Kuckuck.
Branching alternate or irregular; every portion of the frond thickly clothed with long,
free, villous, hair-like, articulate filaments, which are branched at the base ..........
2099pc0000000000000000000008 Ree cecheed- ere 22. iM. Seuriws, (Harv) ikuckuck
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as Myriocladia Scurius Harv., (also Victoria). Harv. Aus.:
Plant as Myriocladia Scurius Harv., Newcastle.

®As the result of unpublished work on the variation of this species found near
Sydney, the writer considers E. siliculosus (Dillw.) Lyngb. should be included as a
variety.

10 Under the name C. fastigiata, J. Agardh included his C. pacifica and C. atlantica.
By rules of priority, C. pacifica must be accepted for our species.

198 KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. II,

16. ScyTOTHAMNUS H. & H.

Frond somewhat compressed or terete, the median part vaguely ramose, the ultimate
ramuli thins risid and "acuminate! ... see ee eee > ee 23. 8S. australis (J. Ag.) H. & H.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Manly, Bondi, (also Lord Howe Island).

17. SPERMATOCHNUS Reinke.

Apices of the filaments without peripheral filaments; branching dichotomous; branches
elongated; secondary branches few, the apices attenuate; sori not sharply differentiated
Fille eR eI PCE SCC CCE ONY 0. CICERO RES eOucn beth HELE CRMc Eee ARS 24. 8S. Lejolisii (Thur.) Reinke.
Locality.— Nat. Herb.: Plant as S. Lejolisii (Thur.) D.T., Port Stephens.

18. Macrocystis Ag.

Main stipes bear at their summits the young differentiating blades and along the greater
part of their length, at regular intervals, the mature, lateral blades, each with a pyriform
bladder at its base, which in turn is supported by a short, cylindrical stipe; blades rigid,
coarsely rugose and with spinulose margins .............. 25. M. pyrifera (Linn.) Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as M. pyrifera (Turn.) Ag., Long Bay, (also Victoria and
Lord Howe Island). C.S.&I1I.R.: Plant as M. pyrifera (Turn.) Ag., Bondi. Muell.:
Tilba Tilba.

19. EcKLONIA Hornemann.

Pinnae linear; triangular spines occur at the frond margins, and sometimes cover the
Whos Shines KE WOK oohog6bhasudooceboouobe coos 26. H. radiata (Turn.) J. Ag.
Locality —Nat. Herb.: Between Harrington and Farquhar Inlets, Tweed River, Rich-
mond River, Woy Woy, Urunga, Farm Cove, Clifton Gardens, Long Bay, Bermagui,
Jervis Bay (cast up), (also Lord Howe Island). C.S.&I.R.: Botany Bay to Long Reef.
Herb. Notes: Clarence River, Port Macquarie, Manning River, Forster, Port Stephens,
Newcastle, Tuggerah, Hawkesbury River, Port Hacking, Lake Illawarra, Nowra, Bate-
man’s Bay, Pambula. D.T.: (also Victoria). Sonder: Plant as #H. radiata Harv., (also
Queensland). (As Harvey treated EH. lanciloba as merely a variety of the plant under
discussion, this record for Queensland cannot be accepted as definite.) Muell.: Tilba
Tilba.

Pinnae linear-lanceolate, with spinose dentate margins; stipes slender ..................
BP aciin ial ieoahie Se SU LG AeTs fal eueledeee ie! Gieire: © a Sue taae ete BAe ewes errolbs, owe tape dee Leap. tere We. apexes 27. H. lanciloba Sond.
Locality.—C.S. & I.R.: Port Stephens, (also Victoria).

Tribe APLANOSPOREAE S. & G.

The Tilopteridales Kylin do not occur here (the aplanospores of these occur singly,
and unilocular zoosporangia giving rise to bi-ciliated zoospores are sometimes produced).
Fronds of moderate size, complanate; plants usually attached by a stupose base; growth
apical; reproductive structures formed from superficial cells and projecting beyond the
surface; aplanospores in groups of, usually, four, produced from a single mother cell;
no zoospores produced; gametangia usually in dense sori; distinct oogamy occurs; male
gametesswith ausinele) CiMUM Vs on ve ie) lac) ol de ciel ltt aeons VIII. Order DicryoTaLes Kjellm.

OnTy. amily; Hate cece ek tee Seas Ba ie eee eee date Ae EeE Bee Dictyotaceae Harv. (lim. mut.)
Fronds flabellate, zoned with conspicuous lines of innovation; growth in length by the
division of many marginal cells; thallus ecostate.

No independent tufts of paranemata on the frond; frond composed of several layers of
cells (distromatie in Chlanidote J. Ag.) ; reproductive organs may occur on both sides
of the thallus; sori entirely superficial at maturity.

Striae of cortical cells radiate fan-wise in pairs, as if twinned.

Sori naked and on the upper surface; sub-zonate; frond flat, fan-shaped and with
ODES ates lobes deiouele po tuahie''=(oiroign sh oi ee eR NUS IONS <4, 5 TROL eee Rees 20. Gymnosorus J. Ag.
Sori protected by a hyaline indusium; paraphyses present; frond stipitate ........
Sidve vee HORUS RORS c. drhe Aebehedeele tage: Wakes alae abche a oleh ch DSEE TRIAD SHRP PAS 21. Zonaria (Ag.) J. Ag.

Striae of cortical cells radiate fan-wise, singly; ultimate divisions of the frond fan-

shaped; thallus pleiostromatic; sori prominent; paraphyses present; indusium

F)) oY=(2¥ 4 | ewe tac SIO ONC ROM OL CECE OR COREE? Come eae okt Diaicaoi mera 5.5 Oo oe 22. Homoeostrichus J. Ag.

Independent tufts of paranemata on the fronds; thallus ecostate and flat; fronds
reniform and orbiculate, the edges involute or scrolled; lamina sometimes split into
lobes; thallus of two or more layers of parallelepipedal cells covered by a single
layer of coloured cells; reproductive structures formed in transverse zones; hairs and
reproductive structures on one side of frond only .............. 23. Padina Adanson.

BY VALERIE MAY. 199

Fronds erect, nowhere zoned with lines of innovation.

Terminal cells of the frond numerous and radiating fan-wise.
Fronds ecostate, sub-palmate, dichotomous; spores single or twinned, and evolved on
both faces of the frond; thallus of inner, empty angular cells in several layers, and
an outer zone of cubical cells scarcely smaller, but coloured ......................
COPS OUODODHC OO OOECOODOGIOOO DOD OOD OOOO OdeE Cae cag DGon 24. Spathoglossum Kuetz.
Frond prominently costate and dichotomous; thallus of an inner zone of rectangular,
empty, colourless cells, and an outer (cortical) of cubical and densely coloured
cells (monostromatic layer); reproductive structures on each face of frond; tetra-
spores collected in naked sori; paranemata occur apart from the sori, in clumps
PE ce Dee CR Ree Rear Weieev elie) col elie! suetten cles siren'ei-sy eliarey suey ex'epersy sy:er'e 25. Neurocarpus Webb. & Mohr.

Terminal cells of frond converging towards a central, apical, initial cell.
Frend ecostate; reproductive cells borne on frond proper (but on proliferations in
Glossophora J. Ag.).
Frond flat, dichotomous and composed of a median, monostromatic layer of large,
colourless cells covered on each face by a cortical layer of small, coloured cells;
hairs occur in groups on both surfaces .................... 26. Dictyota Lamour.
Fronds as above, but the central layer di- or polystromatic .... 27. Dilophus J. Ag.
Holdfast much and diffusely branched; frond erect; stem cylindrical or compressed,
especially in the upper part; cartilaginous and closely set throughout with patent
lateral branches; branches slender, flat, furnished with a midrib in the lower half;
ultimate divisions linear, spirally-twisted, alternately pinnate and _ bi-cuspidate;
reproductive structures on both surfaces, in diffuse sori, on the pinnules ..........

MST Uae eel oe ct SaeE sere ev eels Taklouatcostay ce tober er eee ie! Shere Ne et RR ee SS rer aie leu st aman 28. Lobospira Aresch.

20. GyMNosoRUS J. Ag.

Piantovaniesately, pales bEOwmM «4 seers ei cee eel oie 28. G. variegatus (Lamour.) J. Ag.
Locality. Nat. Herb.: Long Bay. C.S. & I.R.: (also Victoria and Queensland). Herb.
Notes: Tuggerah. Muell.: Plant as Zonaria variegata Mert., Port Jackson.

Plant very dark, turning black on being exposed or dried .............. 0.00. e eee eee eee
Ree re teataies icc ere l siccid bso ou seceiieicar ai a.va, op ay. ab ni aS eOMSN AOE RNY aro euetaceveon ena 29. G. nigrescens (Sond.) J. Ag.
Locality—Nat. Herb.: Cronulla, Long Bay, Narrabeen, Tuggerah, Port Stephens (also
Lord Howe Island). C.S.&I.R.: (also Queensland). Sonder: Richmond River, Ballina.

‘ 21. Zonaria (Ag.) J. Ag.

Stem terete or winged; thallus much divided, in general outline being flabellate; branches

end in deeply parted, basally woolly laciniae, whose segments are narrow-linear, trun-

cate, sparingly toothed or incised; no paraphyses occur in the sori ....................

3: ota LN Gai eGii OBS REIRERE SER RE ata CRORE CTE PTIC RC RE ee ive dea deer eon thy 30. Z. Turneriana J. Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Eden, (also Victoria).

Frond (where unbranched) or branches cuneate-flabellate.

Frond stupose on under-surface; colour variegately pale brown ...:................
FSG enti ORG Oy ETON EOL Gn OIC Oct ten SEE REREAD SnCRE Fc RaURN Weck Pin i eo ana Sd EIS ine Rute 31. Z. Diesingiana J. Ag.
Locality. Muell.: N.S.W. Laing: (also Norfolk Island).

Frond rather erect, branching; margins coarsely crenate ........ 32. Z. crenata. J. Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: (also Victoria). C.S.&I.R.: Port Jackson, Maroubra, Bondi,
Port Stephens, (also Queensland).

22. HOMOEOSTRICHUS J. Ag.
Stem terete, stupose, much branched; branches end in narrow wedge-shaped, flat
segments, which are free from stupa (wool) .......... 33. H. Sinclairii (H.& H.) J. Ag.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Bulli, Kiama, Narrabeen, Tuggerah, Bondi, Newcastle, (also
Victoria). Herb. Notes: Lake Macquarie.

23. PapIna Adanson.”
Tissue subcoriaceous; frond fan-shaped and split many times, the base stupose ........

ARSENE MSR aA AIS sds BARRIER TAM BON eer 34. P. Fraseri (Grev.) J. Ag.
Locality. Nat. Herb.: Kiama, (also Victoria, Queensland, Lord Howe Island and
Norfolk Island). C.S.&1I.R.: Eden, Maroubra. Lucas (1936): ‘Generally around
Australia’. Muell.: Tilba Tilba.

U Setchell & Gardner (1925) give the reasons for the adoption of the generic name
Neurocarpus Webb. & Mohr. in preference to the more customary Haliseris Targ. Tozz.

2 Lucas (1935) says he is ‘inclined to follow Harvey in referring’ Australian species
of Padina ‘all to Pavonia’. Until definite proof of synonymy is forthcoming, it is
perhaps wiser to leave the species as they are labelled in the herbaria consulted.

200 KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. II,

Tissue thick, subcoriaceous below, delicately membranaceous above, highly reticulate;
plant attenuated at the base; the broad, fan-shaped upper part simple or cleft, the
frond or lobes being curled into funnel-shaped cups while growing; on the upper surface
deciduous, orange filaments fringe the concentric bands, these replaced by white, chalky
powder. on the; lower, surface iiss s355 see ae . peice 35. P. pavonia (Linn.) Lamour.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Port Jackson, Forster, (also Queensland, Norfolk Island, and
Lord Howe Jsland). C.S.&I1.R.: Long Bay. Herb. Notes: Tuggerah.

24. SPATHOGLOSSUM Kuetz.
Apices squared and sinuses conspicuously rounded; plant much branched ..............

TORAH) Hes ARNE Osi lehs 0 MENS PURI RRR Abels Han Srreva fares ctodehesabanetetanstaXatetohe taledetotereteMs 36. S. cornigerum J. Ag.
Locality. Nat. Herb.: Port Jackson, Port Stephens. C.S.&I.R.: Botany Bay.

25. NeEuRocARPUS Webb. & Mohr.%

There are no veins running from midrib to margins in the New South Wales species.
Spores form a linear band on either side of the midrib, leaving wide sterile margins;
muciferous glands arranged in recurved arches from midrib to margin; the tufts of
paranemata larger than in N. Muelleri ...... 37. N. acrostichoides (J. Ag.), nov. comb.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as Haliseris acrostichoides J. Ag., Port Jackson, Port
Stephens, (also Queensland and Victoria).

Spores do not form a linear band on either side of the midrib.
Spores form a cloud-like patch, continuous from midrib to margin; muciferous glands
and tufts of paranemata scattered over the surface; axils rounded and margins entire

Sa ata cn aNe RST SESS TTR es nae eset OTe ee Se oS wee Seel arate Ertenereis 38. N. Muelleri (Sond.), nov. comb.

Locality.— Nat. Herb.: Plant as Haliseris Muelleri Sond., (also Victoria). Harv. Aus.:

Plant as Haliseris Muelleri Sond., Port Jackson.

Spores scattered over the frond.

Seements denticulatewes-- «.ccsece ccs ale 39. N. Woodwardia (R. Br.), nov. comb.
Locality.—Lucas (1913): Plant as Haliseris Woodwardia (R. Br.) J. Ag., Ballina,
(also Queensland).

DELINENUS ENtIGeG myst cheleistexs, sii & wpe otiecehers Pele tens 40. N. polypodioides (Desf.), nov. comb.
Locality.—Sonder: Plant as Haliseris polypodioides Ag., Ballina, (also Queensland).
(As Sonder treated N. Woodwardia as merely a variety of the plant under discussion,
this record for New South Wales cannot be accepted as definite.)

26. Dicryota Lamour.

Base of the plant not stupose or woolly, the attachment being by means of many long,
simple, thread-like fibres arising from the base of the frond and from the lower parts
of the principal rachides; apices of the much-elongated segments of the frond are
blunt.
Plant dark olive-green, the tips of the dichotomies lighter and flabellately expanded;
the branches of each dichotomy slightly diverge above a rotundate sinus; segments
often narrower near the base; margins of thallus have the internal stratum thicker
than the usual monostromatic; surface of the thallus (apices and margins excepted)
covered with small, dense and crowded hairs ....... 41. D. prolificans A. & E. S. Gepp.
Locality. Nat. Herb.: Long Bay, Tuggerah, (also Queensland and Lord Howe Island).
Lucas (1935): Narrabeen, Newcastle.
Membrane rather translucent, lighter in colour towards the extremities; segments of
the irregularly dichotomous frond linear-cuneate, much attenuated at the base,and quite
entines tronGdgwidthywaniable: .sthccsieee fies ote Geared be ES ote eae ote 42. D. radicans Harv.
Locality.—University: Port Stephens. Sonder: (also Queensland). Harv. Aus.:
(also Victoria).
Base of the plant stupose or woolly.
Apices of segments forked and furcate or rather rounded-obtuse; frond delicately
membranaceous, cuneate at the base, afterwards nearly linear; much and regularly
divided dichotomously, the segments being elongate-cuneate; ultimate branches approxi-
mately equal in length; frond width variable, if narrow, segments may twist spirally
and entangle; no proliferations occur on the surface; spores scattered over the disc of
the frond, leaving a clear border on the margins; cells elongated ...................
EASA RAO ROIS SSA CSIC On! SOL ORE een 43. D. dichotoma (Huds.) Lamour.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Botany Bay, Kirribilli Point, Port Jackson, Port Stephens,
(also Victoria and Queensland).

13 See footnote on page 199.

BY VALERIE MAY. 201

Frond decompound-dichotomous, densely striate—especially in the older portions;

cortical cells rectangular.

Fertile cells occur over the central area in almost linear, longitudinal, parallel lines,
Wwe WHY, LXE [RON SococacnnoadouvoCcoocGUGdoUnOUCGOuOGDOnUCD 44. D. robusta J. Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Botany Bay.

Fertile cells occur scattered irregularly over the central area .............-++2+--+0--
NM e ee eee aire tastes outcte Melee snetereeecel wees 455 Di linearis (Ag) Grev:

Locality.—Muell.: Clarence River.

27. DiLoPpHus J. Ag.

Frond caespitose, attached by radicles, decompound-dichotomous, with linear, erect
segments; adult fronds marked with conspicuous, transverse wrinkles; margins thickened,
the inner stratum of the lamina there consisting of four layers; sori occur in broken,
THEVELEN Kay IVOKEST I Gg bic aid 6 OreOia a old CHE CLUES Io oo DIA Coho cid. tect cy Oro oir 46. D. marginatus J. Ag.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Long Bay, Tuggerah, (also Victoria).

28. Losospira Aresch.

Thallus wiry and spirally much twisted, the lower portion being fibrous; the quadrate
cells of the thallus surface converge towards the apices of each terminal tooth of the
FObebM UES A ois Go eo Gee O Chom a Oc oc101d OG Go Bicic Or jola oars 0G CRCACEO COLO 1: 6 Cac ig 47. L. bicuspidata Aresch.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Eden, (also Victoria).

Tribe CYCLOSPOREAE Aresch.
IX. Order Fucaues Kylin is the only order.

Frond differentiated into axial and lateral members, and consisting of holdfast, stem,
branches and leaf-like organs; vesicles and specialized receptacles may also be present;
oogonia monosporous; growing region at the apex of the rachis, being somewhat obscure
PA Mee he Ny eas Te ty eat Aten wae hice Rt cpiceanadeHe tel det Sostiranat s\bue tarstiona ees Sargassaceael4# (Decne.) D.T.
No differentiation of frond into axial and lateral members.

Frond not homogeneous; 2 to 8 oospores (4 in Australian species) produced per
oogonium ; holdfast dise-shaped .......................... Fucaceae (Lamour.) Kjellm.
Frond moniliform and branching; internodes inflated and carrying the conceptacles;
paranemata simple. Only genus recorded from New South Wales

Frond homogeneous; no special organs developed; conceptacles scattered over the whole
frond.

NONE VSOMGY Boe ceusiaies septic sscsrsveususoneoe Gbeue tere eect ene Durvillaeaceae4 Oltmanns (lim. mut.)
Frond hollow, cylindrical, containing fluid within, pinnately branched on all sides;
thallus of two layers of cubical, epidermal cells and three layers of polygonal to ovate
cortical cells, within these are long filaments bordering on the central, mucilaginous

TESTS sald Ce Oe CK roe OOD Sloe oOo Sie otcia Glo arc Splachnidiaceae Mitchell & Whitting.
Plant pale green to brown when mature; disc holdfast. Only genus ...............
Sree Ree SSCL! DORE ROTC PROTO Che ER See eee cnolcno CIC cmsiora clepto Stas oe elt 388. Splachnidium Grev.

SARGASSACEAE (Decne.) D.T.
Receptacles specialized from the frond segments.
Receptacles, or groups of receptacles, arise from the transformation of the upper part
of proper branches.
Stem abbreviated, not vesicular, giving off long branches; leaves flat modified branches
ONO SREHD ELOTCTGEG aa. 9 CIO CHE RONG ke GID SO- Eno CRORE CLG ORCL CF OROTES LO Dace Onc eh heme ot eciee ote ce cee 29. Sargassum Ag.
Stem elongated, exceeding the branches in height; leaves flat, marginal ..............
Bee eh Shea hia eto hoe ED SY Gc: Os) co Ne ees wigs dance ane mocanse ups eh ucistisioe darts cdr otwnere nates 30. Carpophyllum Grev.
Receptacles marginal, single, arising from the transformation of an entire ramulus or
proliferation.
Vesicles distinct from other organs and stipitate; leaves unspecialized, ramuli-form and
nou passing. Into branches, je.) leaves: not mid=GFibbedy ac. oss scien ai cis leieke che eheleeiae
STORIE Ce CANOE NCB to oH EO EOL CRONE (oC REE cn toate 31. Blossevillea® Decne. (orthog. mut.)

14 For greater clarity the key to the genera of this family is placed at the end of the
Order Fucales.

1 Gardner (1913) gives reasons for the adoption of the generic name Blossevillea
Deene. (orthog. mut.) in preference to the more customary Cystophora J. Ag.

202 KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. II,

Vesicles not distinct from other organs, but are inflations in the terminal leaves; leaves
alternate, mid-ribbed and with cryptostomata .............. 32. Cystophyllum J. Ag.

Receptacles not specialized from the frond segment.
Leaves peltate, fleshy, warted externally and spirally inserted round the stem; vesicles

ATE MNOGIILEG EAVES is oe crevalclie clotelol evens tome encucielieiclistens Sana ihenarcu-pe tctewars oiamemats 33. Scaberia Grev.
Leaves take form of a flattened stem; cauline vesicles present; leaves intermixed with
small ciliary processes that may develop into leaves ............-. 34. Phyllospora Ag.

DURVILLAEACEAE Oltmanns (lim. mut.).

Frond stipitate, flat, pinnatifid or subdigitate ................ 36. Sarcophycus IKuetz.
Frond terete, vaguely branched and parasitic on other algae .. 37. Notheia Bail. & Harv.

29. Sarcassum Ag.16

Leaves pinnatifid, the lower segments being broader, the upper narrower, often ramelli-
form; frond formed by the evolution and repeated division of a primordial, pinnate, leaf-
like axis, the parts of which, by transformation, bear proper leaves, vesicles and recep-
tacles; vesicles either minute, ellipsoidal swellings in the lamella and beaked (aristate),
or larger, terminal, rounded and unbeaked (mutic); receptacles terminal, smooth, at
length racemose on a ramulus .... This is the subgenus Phyllotricha (Aresch.) J. Ag.

Vesicles minute, ellipsoidal, aristate; common caulis compressed and rugged or nodose;
lower leaves pinnatifid, upper simple, sub-linear ...... 48. S. linearifolium (Turn.) Ag.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Richmond River (questioned by Lucas). Sonder: Ballina, (also
Victoria).

Vesicles spherical, mutic, large and numerous; leaves much divided, compound, at first
trichotomous, then more vaguely dichotomous-pinnate, all the segments (laciniae) being
filiform; primary caulis rounded, rachides of branches being angulate-rounded; petiole
bases persist as spines on the branches; laciniae warted (verruculose) from the
Presence ol Cry pLOStomMatay ea. 20 4 hs a cits Gite eee ene Sere 49. S. verruculosum (Mert.) Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: (also Victoria). C.S. &1I.R.: Maroubra.
Leaves entire or dentate-serrate, but not pinnatifid or pinnate; fronds not formed as
described above.

Frond an elongated, branching axis bearing simple leaves without cryptostomata ;
vesicles crowned by a mucro or leaflet, unarmed or dentate (this is subgenus Arth7o-
phycus J. Ag.) ; branches conspicuously angular; ramuli retrofract; leaves which act as
bracts often differ conspicuously from the others.

Receptacles terete, unarmed by teeth; midrib obvious in the lower leaves, but absent
in the upper ones; vesicles almost spherical.

Lower leaves very large, oblong-lanceolate, denticulate and crowded at the base

SiO Boitboraiicn hb Outs, GREG: RCE RCIDICHCRGIC HCA a CRDEC RENCE eer Tira ae 50. S. paradoxum (R. Br.) Harv.

Locality.— Nat. Herb.: Eden, (also Victoria).

Lower leaves flat, somewhat membranaceous and almost entire (without teeth on the
margins).

HMAC AVESRCLON SACO sNINGAT Gejeyeyco erehet aye imitans heveresloye! weiter = Gyaieuokereveepetarsaeseneliey ic 51. S. fallax Sond.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Clarence River. C.S. &1.R.: Bondi, Tuggerah Lakes. Sonder:
Richmond River, Ballina.

Meavesiishorter* Wanceolatey....« si-picveporeyae wlarelanaqe sysrol verse Slaraers 52. S. laevigatum J. Ag.
Locality.—D.T.: New South Wales.

Receptacles acutely angled and dentate.
Receptacles terete, angulate or two-edged, and beset with small scattered teeth; lower
leaves flat, coriaceous, obovate-obtuse and almost entire ..............202ceeceeeees

5 OND OOh.0 0.0 G15 Ghd OKO ORCIOIDIO CHCSCRRDICICT RRO EER RE IGI eci en ers 53. S. globulariaefolium J. Ag.
Locality.—J. Ag.: Illawarra, Port Jackson.

Receptacles triquetro-prismatic with prominent acute-angled edges. .
Reeeptacles without teeth; lower leaves obovate-lanceolate, flat, coriaceous, whole or
slightly or distantly dentate, upper leaves lanceolate-serrate .. 54. S. erosum J. Ag.

Locality. Nat. Herb.: Tuggerah Lakes, Port Jackson. C.S.&I.R.: Manly. J. Ag.:
Port Stephens.

>

1 Sonder (1880) lists S. Muelleri Sond. as from New South Wales. The writer has .
been unable to trace this species; it is not mentioned by J. Agardh (1888) nor by De
Toni (1895).

BY VALERIE MAY. 203

Receptacles toothed; stem branches quadrate with branches arising from the flat
sides; leaves membranaceous, the lower being very large, oblong, lanceolate, deeply
serrate and crowded at the base, the upper very narrow, linear and sharply serrated ;
vesicles near-spherical, possessing a wing-like border and tipped with a nerved and
Serrave del caimemrcree eevee Cicis ous india eneesy sion See aden gcse 55. S. lacerifolium (Turn.) Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Ulladulla.

A short, common caulis bears several elongated, branching fronds; leaves simple and

usually bearing conspicuous cryptostomata; vesicles spherical, usually mutic and

petiolate. This is subgenus Husargassum J. Ag.

Mature, fertile branches bearing receptacles associated with and united to the petiolate,

vesicular leaves in the axils of the ordinary leaves; leaves usually serrate and costate.

WCAVESUMALEOW =e AI) cp epeneis strencletonsnel sce cher eis) oiehel eieire 56. S. angustifolium (Turn.) Ag.
Locality.—C.S. & I.R.: Port Jackson. J. Ag.: (also Queensland).
Leaves lanceolate-linear, acuminate ..................... 57. 8. carpophyllum J. Ag.

Locality.— Nat. Herb.: Botany Bay. C.S.&1.R.: Lake Macquarie, (also Queensland).
Mature fertile branches bearing receptacles not associated with or united to the
vesicular leaves.

Receptacles compressed, obovoid-oblong, slightly curved, the apex and outer margins

serrate or dentate; lower leaves oblong-elliptical, with slightly developed midribs,

coriaceous and somewhat serrate, the upper subcuneate falcate, the inner margin
entire, the outer very dentate, midrib not developed ........ 58. S. lophocarpum J. Ag.

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Wollongong, (also Lord Howe Island). C.S.&I1.R.: Narrabeen,

Manly. Okamura: Bondi, Sydney.

Receptacles not serrate or dentate.

Receptacles completely confluent with the branching system which bears them

SPR He erate ce eee wig cal pails, Gud var oregano ele ayer aie eeretenm rea gina dalle eters 59. S. aquifolium (Turn.) Ag.
Uocality.—Sonder: Plant as S. obovatuwm Grev., Ballina.

Receptacles racemose and each with a distinct pedicel.

Receptacles verrucose and cylindrical; lower leaves lanceolate, costate with serrated
margins, the upper cuneate-obovate and dentate .............. 60. S. fragile J. Ag.

Locality.—C.S. & I.R.: Hawkesbury River, (also Queensland). D.T.: Port Stephens.

Receptacles lanceolate-conoid.

Cryptostomata almost or quite absent: leaves with a prominent, percurrent midrib,

lower leaves broad lanceolate, the upper narrow-linear and entire ..............

BW Seecoha IOU TRE EER GEG TRO CREAM CHEE RTE SRS ae eae EM ea ea 61. S. neurophorum J. Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Wollongong, Thirroul, Twofold Bay, (also Lord Howe
Island). C.S.&I1.R.: Narrabeen, (also Queensland). University: Nelson’s Bay,
Port Stephens.

Cryptostomata inconspicuous or arranged in a series on either side of the midrib.
Mature vesicles ellipsoid-spherical, often apiculate and on petioles longer than the
vesicles; leaves serrate-dentate, lower broad-lanceolate, the upper narrow-linear ;
cryptostomata arranged in a series on either side of the midrib ................
Erte erect mea DE Yet fay brah tab al ohms aba atame veri aeita os at SPOT AP ERS Ey ofa dae best a RTE PTGT sires 62. S. leptopodum J. Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: (also Queensland). C.S.&I1.R.: Coogee, Bondi, Port
Jackson, Jervis Bay, (also Lord Howe Island and Victoria). Herb. Notes:
Bermagui, Port Hacking, Woy Woy, Forster, Urunga.

Vesicles spherical and petiole often shorter than the vesicle it bears.
Leaf serrations never acute.
Upper leaves lanceolate, serrate-dentate or uneven at the margins, with a series
of cryptostomata arranged on each side of the midrib; lower leaves broader and
VARTA Jor, FH CAV OuOSICOMMENE soa d5oacccuuonoGdo000e 63. S. spinuligerum Sond.
Locality. Harv. Aus.: Sydney, (also Victoria). Sonder: (also Queensland).
Lucas (1936): ‘On all the coasts of Australia except the North.’ Muell.:
Ballina.
Upper leaves small, entire or obsoletely dentate, obtuse, with two rows of small
glands; mid-rib conspicuous; lower leaves large, sessile, obtuse and whole
GELATO TY sO UTC Dy iste ce rou scray vc geristyron eos pra lor cueyie shen saeco see cc hepeoliscepa 64. S. Godeffroyi Grun.
Locality.—Muell.: Richmond River. Nat. Herb.: (also Norfolk Island). D.T.:
(also Queensland).
Cryptostomata often completely obsolete; leaves lanceolate-linear, the cauline
whole, the upper sharply acute and unequally serrate-dentate, the teeth often
being prolonged into spines; midribs smooth, percurrent ...............e++20--
Ach eac hts oMCL ours. esucriteneuop sony tie delpousaaren crletenemecacuenstusteheeceicl sicaeel cue 65. S. polyacanthum J. Ag.

204 KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. II,

Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Bondi, Little Coogee, Long Bay. C.S. & I.R.: Maroubra,
Jervis Bay, Port Jackson, Wollongong. J. Ag.: ‘Port Jackson et alius locis
New South Wales.’

30. CARPOPHYLLUM Grev.

Lower vesicles spherical-ellipsoid, terminated by a leaf or mucro; the upper piriform-
ellipsoid, mucronate; lower leaves of the young plant much pinnatifid and with uneven
MAL SING wares chara erate. Susdeee ther enmies oleae ce OReMe ere ciaro ere 66. C. phyllanthus (Turn.) H. & H.
Locality.—Muell.: Plant as C. Phyllanthus Grev., Sydney.

31. BLossEvILLBaA Decne. (orthog. mut.).%

Vesicles spring direct from the stem or primary branches.
Vesicles spherical, tmUtl@wacictesiepciereieneie ok oe ere slaieienciel ey cusienensue tees 67. B. uvifera (Ag.) Harv.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as Cystophora uvifera (Ag.) J. Ag., Long Bay, Jervis Bay
(cast up), Eden, (also Victoria and Norfolk Island). C.S.&I1.R.: Plant as Cystophora
wuvifera (Ag.) J. Ag., Bondi.
Vesicles cylindro-elliptical, apiculate; stem filiform, the lower part being warted or
muricated with the remains of old branches .... 68. B. Cephalornithos (Labill.) Kuetz.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as Cystophora Cephalornithos (Uabill.) J. Ag., (also
Victoria). Lucas (1936): Plant as Cystophora Cephalornithos (Uabill.) J. Ag.,
‘Victoria to Twofold Bay’.
Vesicles spring from ramuli of the last order.
Conceptacles occur in two linear series; vesicles, if present, mutic.
The whole plant sub-distichously pinnate, the pinnae being flattened, pinnatifid; stem
and branches flattened, pinnate along the edges; ultimate pinnules pedicellate, lanceo-
lates passinesinto) broad flat receptacles’; vesiclesisphenicall ss). 2. eiee rele ene eles eel
Sintedsa le tshe ie staal ete eee cee etehensye eiatisneiels Git s sis =, Sues aliate ak 69. B. platylobium (Mert.), nov. comb.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as Cystophora platylobium (Mert.) J. Ag., (also
Victoria). C.S.&I1.R.: Plant as Cystophora platylobium (Mert.) J. Ag., Bondi.
Frond pinnately divided, the branches emerging from the flat faces of the rachis and
generally bent back near the base (retrofract); ramuli terete, not conspicuously
compressed.
Vesicles usually numerous, but occasionally absent; plant very variable; axils sub-
rounded; receptacles compressed and somewhat less torulose than usual for the genus
OE ONS ORO Oe SO Eo OR ea eR re icin ie one ae 70. B. retroflexa (Labill.), nov. comb.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as Cystophora retroflexa (Labill.) J. Ag., Eden, Kiama,
(also Victoria). C.S.&I1.R.: Plant as Cystophora retroflexa (ULabill.) J. Ag., Bondi,
Thirroul. Muell.: Plant as Cystophora retroflexa (Lab.) Ag., Tilba Tilba, Sydney.
No vesicles occur; stem quadrate and robust (much thicker than in B. retroflexa) ;
pinnate rachides not as flat as in the above-mentioned species; bases of the pinnules
persist as small conical protuberances; receptacles elongated and slightly com-

TOTESSC eve ar cue poten reten sis) + ilshysirs oe: oil shes folgss ulon susie Queiene tele. ¢ 71. B. siliquosa (J. Ag.), nov. comb.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as Cystophora siliquosa J. Ag., Jervis Bay, (also
Victoria).

Conceptacles scattered, i.e., not confined to two linear series.
Stem flattened, the rachis being dorso-ventrally compressed and giving off pinnate,
much divided branches from the sharp edges of the rachis, these plano-compressed
like the stem; pinnules warted at the base, thence to the apex closely set with
alternate filiform, setaceous, irregularly dichotomous ramuli; receptacles’. long,
cylindrical, pointed, warted and constricted at short intervals, i.e., nodoso-filiform ;
VESICLES TIA SEM Camels eucssteyeyoicie ce tees skevetere, eucusn s/eisrsvayarenene 72. B. spartioides (Turn.) Decne.
Locality.— Nat. Herb.: Plant as Cystophora spartioides (Turn.) J. Ag., Bermagui
River, Long Bay, Sydney district, Coogee, Kiama, Thirroul, (also Victoria and Lord
Howe Island). University: Plant as Cystophora spartioides (Turn.) J. Ag., Port
Stephens. Herb. Notes: Plant as Cystophora spartioides (Turn.) J. Ag., Illawarra.
Stem usually flattened laterally and, if so, the pinnae emerging from the plane faces.
Stem terete, bearing pinnae and pinnules, ete., from all sides; secondary stems
retrofract (bend downwards at point of insertion); tertiary branches bare on their
lower half, and densely beset above with tertiary ramuli, these latter closely covered
with filiform, setaceous, ultimate ramuli, especially towards the summits; vesicles
not known; receptacles nodose .................. 73. B. paniculata (Turn.) Decne.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as Cystophora paniculata (Turn.) J. Ag., Long Bay,
Kiama, Jervis Bay (cast up), (also Victoria). C.S.&1.R.: Plant as Cystophora

See footnote on page 201.

BY VALERIE MAY. 205

paniculata (Turn.) J. Ag., Long Bay. University: Plant as Cystophora paniculata
(Turn.) J. Ag., Bondi, Port Stephens. Lucas (1936): Plant as Cystophora panicu-
lata (Turn.) J. Ag., ‘As far up as Sydney’. Herb. Notes: Plant as Cystophora
paniculata (Turn.) J. Ag., Illawarra, Tuggerah, Newcastle. Muell.: Plant as
Acrocarpia paniculata Aresch., Tilba Tilba.
Stem definitely flattened laterally, with branches arising from the plane faces; pinnae
retrofract ; vesicles present usually.
Vesicles elongate-ellipsoid, acute at both ends, occasionally absent; pinnules
slender, dichotomo-pinnate, the ultimate segments being filiform; receptacles fili-
form, distantly tortulose and ending in sterile beaks .. 74. B. polycystidea Aresch.
Locality Nat. Herb.: Plant as Cystophora polycystidea Aresch., Jervis Bay
(cast up), Long Bay (cast up), (also Victoria). Herb. Notes: Plant as Cysto-
phora polycystidea Aresch., Bateman’s Bay.
Vesicles spherical mutic; primary branches pinnated at intervals of about an inch
with closely-branched and decompound pinnae, these usually bare at the base
except for scars of broken, alternate branchlets; ultimate pinnules dichotomo-
pinnate, slender and almost setaceous; receptacles constricted and so appearing
bead-like, usually each terminated by a setaceous point ..................-0220000-
Ree E BATE Rom eet Sa UR ad cea Telbch sranarey ormet Oretieuae Sucve 75. B. monilifera (J. Ag.), nov. comb.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Plant as Cystophora monilifera J. Ag., Long Bay, Jervis
Bay, (also Victoria and Lord Howe Island). C.S.&I.R.: Plant as Cystophora
monilifera J. Ag., Bondi (cast up). Lucas C.S.&1.R. Notes: Plant as Cystophora
monilifera J. Ag., Illawarra, Sydney. Herb. Notes: Plant as Cystophora
monilifera J. Ag., Bateman’s Bay.

32. CYSTOPHYLLUM J. Ag.

Rachides densely muricated; lower leaves linear, entire, pointed and with a row of
cryptostomata on each side of the midrib; upper leaves filiform, with ovoid vesicle
swellings, like beads on a thread, the leaf continuing beyond the vesicle; receptacles
on the interior side of the terminal leaves, racemose, and each stipitate, cylindrical-
lancoid; plant frequents harbours .................. 76. C. muricatum (Turn.) J. Ag.
Locality Nat. Herb.: Port Stephens, Port Hacking, Port Jackson, Lake Macquarie,
(also Queensland and Lord Howe Island). C.S.&I1.R.: Botany Bay, Wallis Lake,
(also Victoria). Lucas (1913): Clarence River. Lucas (1936): ‘All round Australia’.

33. SCABERIA Grev.

Frond a dark colour and much branched, branching being irregular or alternate; lower
part of the stem and older branches denuded of leaves, smooth, filiform and flexuous,
the upper portion and all younger branches closely imbricated with small, vertically-
compressed leaves, which are smooth on the lower side and densely warted on the
upper side; the petioles of these are spirally inserted round the stem; vesicles spherical,
SSMS aime Wwemuscl cogocooncpoenadoogdoDdod OCD goUnOOdOOCDOOCDSOn 77. S. Agardhii Grev.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: (also Victoria). C.S.&1I.R.: Bondi (cast up). D.T.: (also Lord
Howe Island).
34. PHYLLOSPORA Ag.

Attachment consists of a central, concave, margined disc, radiating from which are
numerous short, robust, simple, closely imbricating, obtuse fibres; the solitary stem
arises from the centre of the disc; branching pinnately decompound; stem and branches
strap-shaped, of approximately the same width throughout, plano-compressed, two-edged,
somewhat thicker in the middle, and densely beset throughout with irregular, marginal
leaves, which taper to each end and are toothed or more or less entire; whole plant
VeLYs tOUlit anal LeaBtherye vein onessos fevcyoneveusvousbavrerslel herpes Gnaverere yeas 78. P. comosa (Uabill.) Ag.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Woy Woy, Long Bay, Sydney, (also Victoria and Lord Howe
Island). C.S.&1.R.: Bondi. Herb. Notes: Pambula, Bermagui, Bateman’s Bay, Nowra,
Illawarra, Port Hacking, Botany Bay, Hawkesbury River, Woy Woy, Tuggerah, Lake
Macquarie, Newcastle, Port Stephens, Manning River, Port Macquarie. Muell.: Tilba
Tilba.

35. HormMosira Endl.

Stem triquetrous with interrupted wing expansions, which are more or less dentate;
nodes approximately as long as the vesicated internodes ..............0.0eeseeeeeeee
ST dG ODT ON RCE TO tne ea ict 5 SaPh Grok an RAS DLPRC CENT cy iG. Ouet Rac ae ecae 79. H. ? articulata (Forsk.) Zan.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Port Stephens, (also Queensland).

206 KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. II,

Frond dichotomously or irregularly branched, and consisting of a series of inflated,
vesicated internodes and filiform nodes; internodes act as vesicles and receptacles, they
vary greatly in size and shape according to the habitat, and this accounts for the
synonyms; attachment by means of a minute disc; thallus coriaceous ..............
PF arcee mae whe a hse ea we See, Siete Mie sheave cide shew rete) a ROS Retro aie wide 80. H. Banksii (Turn.) Decne.
Locality.—Nat. Herb.: Botany Bay, Lake Macquarie, Long Bay, Eden, (also Victoria).
cC.S.&1.R.: (also Lord Howe Island). University: Bondi. Herb. Notes: Bermagui,
Lake Illawarra, Forster, Port Macquarie. Lucas (1936): ‘As far north as Pt.
Macquarie’. Laing: (also Norfolk Island).

36. SarcopHycus Kuetz.

Holdfast a large disc; stem sub-terete at base, soon compressed, widening and flat-
tening and so becoming lost in the base of the lamina; lamina thick, simple, or once
or twice forked, the segments being strap-shaped and more or less copiously furnished
with lateral, lanceolate lobes or pinnate, which sometimes are again lobulate or forked
as the lamina, these taper to both ends and possess undulate margins; plant very large,
tough and leathery fearesttnewrs sistele obishsies ies |. BINNS kee 81. S. potatorum (Labill.) Kuetz.
Locality.— Nat. Herb.: Eden, Pambula. C.S.&I1.R.: (also Victoria).

37. NoTHEIA Bail. & Harv.

Cylindrical base of the plant inserted in a conceptacle of the host plant, Hormosira
Banksii (Turn.) Decne.; branches linear-fusiform, much attenuated at their insertion,
and tapering towards the apex, they arise from spore cavities of older branches; axis
composed of long, interwoven filaments, the periphery being of sub-horizontal, parallel,
radiating, slender, coloured filaments .................. 82. N. anomala Bail. & Harv.
Locality. Nat. Herb.: Port Stephens, Crookhaven Heads, Newcastle, (also Victoria).
University: Long Reef. Lucas (1913): Twofold Bay.

38. SPLACHNIDIUM Grev.

Main frond quite simple, linear-club-shaped, cylindrical, tapering to the base, truncate
at the apex; lateral branches similar to the primary, and spring proliferously from its
sides; there may be tertiary similar ramuli; whole plant very mucilaginous; attach-
MENE DyMMeanseonrawconical (GiSC) A. aecr. -- taaeseeie] ete oe 83. S. ruwgosum (Linn.) Grev.
Locality.— Nat. Herb.: Ocean coasts about Sydney, Crookhaven Heads, Newcastle,
(also Victoria). C.S.&I1.R.: Middle Harbour, Narrabeen, Bondi, Long Bay. lucas
(1936): ‘As far north as Newcastle.’ Muell.: Tilba Tilba.

SYNONYMS.

Under the name of each accepted species are listed those synonyms which
various workers have attributed to it. In each case a bracketed number then
follows. This number indicates the authority quoted far the acceptance of the
synonymy. The numbers and their corresponding references are: (1) De Toni,
G. B. (1895); (2) Harvey, W. H. (1858-63); (3) Harvey, W. H. (1846-51);
(4) Agardh, J. (1888); (5) Laing, R. M. (1900); (6) Laing, R. M. (1906);
(7) Lucas, A. H. S. (1909); (8) Herbarium Notes from the Lucas Collection,
C.S.&1.R., Canberra; (9) Newton, Lily (1931); (10) Lucas, A. H. S. (1913);
(11) Setchell, W. A., and Gardner, N. L. (1925); (12) Sonder, W. (1871); (13)
The generic name has been changed by the writer in the present paper; (14)
Grunow, A. (1874); (15) Sonder, W. (1880); (16) Kuckuck (1930).

1. SPHACELARIA CIRRHOSA (Roth.) Ag. Conferva cirrhosa Dillw. (3)
Sphacelaria cervicornis Ag. (1) fusea Huds. (1)
cirrosa var. cervicornis Ardiss. (1) intertexta Roth. (3)
fusca Ag. (1) marina Dillw. (3)
irregularis Kuetz. (ex parte) (1) pennata Huds. (1), (3)
japonica Martens (1) prebrevis Dillw. (3)
pennata Lyngb. (1) villosa Dillw. (3)
pennata Lyngb. (excl. var. B). (3) Stypocaulon bipinnatum Kuetz. (1)
racemosa Reinsch. (1) Ceramium cirrhosum Hook. (3)
rhizophora Kuetz. (1) cirrhosum Ag. (1)

Conferva cirrhosa Roth. (1), (3) pennatum Roth. (1)

BY VALERIE MAY.

Varieties include:
Sphacelaria fusca Harv. (9)
2. SPHACELARIA TRIBULOIDES Menegh.
Sphacelaria brachygonia Mont. (1)

caespitula Kjellm., non Lyngb. (1)

capensis Kuetz.? (1)

cervicornis Decne.? (1)

fulva Kuetz. (1)

Novae-Hollandiae Sond. (1)

rigida Hering. (1)
Ceramium fulvum Bertol. (1)
3. CLADOSTEPHUS SPONGIOSUS (Lightft.) Ag.
Cladostephus laxus Fl. Dan. (?) excl. syn.

(1), (3)

setaceus Suhr.? (1)

verticillatus var. spongiosus Farl.
Ceramium spongiosum DC. (1)
Fucus hirsutus Linn. (non Wulf.) (1), (3)
Conferva spongiosa Huds. (3)

spongiosa Lightft. (1)

(1)

4. CLADOSTEPHUS VERTICILLATUS (Lightft.)
Ag.

Cladostephus australis var. ponticus Sperk.
(1)

hedwigioides Bory ? (1)
Myriophyllum Ag. (1), (3)
spongiosus Kuetz., non Ag.-(1)
tomentosus Kuetz. (1)

Fucus hirsutus Wulf., non Linn. (1)
verticillatus Wulf. (1), (3)

Conferva ceratophyllum Roth. (71), (3)
Myriophyllum Roth. (1), (3)
verticillata Lightft. (1), (3)

Ceramium verticillatum DC. (1), (3)

5. STYPOCAULON PANICULATUM (Suhr.)

Kuetz.

Stypocaulon filare Kuetz. (1)
gracilescens Kuetz. (1)
hordeaceum Kuetz. (1)
virgatum Kuetz. (1)

Sphacelaria filaris Sond. (1)
gracilescens Dies. et J. Ag. (1)
hordeacea Harv. (1), (2)

Muelleri Sond. (2)

paniculata Suhr., non Hering. (1), (7)
scoparia Sond. (2)
(Stypocaulon) spicigera Aresch.
virgata H.& H. (1)

6. LEATHESIA DIFFORMIS (Linn.) Aresch.

Leathesia marina J. Ag. (1)
marina Endl. (3)
tuberiformis 8S. F. Gray (1), (3), (9)

Chaetophora marina Lyngb. (1), (3)

«

(1)

Nostoc marinum Ag. (1), (3)
mesentericum Ag. (1)
Clavatella Nostoc Bory. (1)

Rivularia tuberiformis Engl. Bot. (1), (3)

Corynephora .baltica Kuetz.? (1)
marina Ag. (1), (3)

Ulva mesenterica Bonn. (1)

Corynophloea baltica Kuetz. (1)

Tremella difformis Linn. (1), (8), (11)

207

7. ASPEROCOCCUS BULLOSUS Lamour.
Asperococcus rugosus B. bullosus Duby.
(1), (3)
tenuis Zan. (1)

Turneri Hook. (1), (3),
utricularis D’Urv. (1)
Encoelium buliosum Ag. (1),
Mac-Gregoryi Suhr. (1)

tenue Kuetz. (1)
utriculare Kuetz. (1)

Gastridium Opuntia Lyngb. (1), (3)

Ulva Turneri Dillw. (1), (3)

8. ILEA FAascrA (Muell.) Fries.

Phyllitis caespitosa Le Jol. (1)
fascia Kuetz., non Le Jol. (1), (11) ;

Phycolapathum cuneatum Kuetz. (1) ac

Laminaria caespitosa J. Ag. (1)
cuneata Suhr. (1), (3), (6)
debilis Ag. (3) f
fascia Ag. (1) iS
fascia Muell. (6) stp if
papyrina Bory (3)

Fucus fascia Muell. (1),
fascia Fl. Dan. (3)

Ulva fascia Lyngb. (6) ?

Petalonia fascia Kuntze (11)

Varieties include:

Phyllitis debilis Kuetz.
filiformis Batt. (11)
Zosterifolia Reinke (11)

Petalonia debilis Derb. & Sol. (1)

Fucus Phyllitis var. subsessilis Clem. (1)

Laminaria caespitosa J. Ag. (11)

debilis Ag. (1), (11)

papyrina Bory? (1)

Phyllitis Delle Chiaje Hydrophyt. (1)

ScYTOSIPHON LOMENTARIA (Lyngb.)
J. Ag.

Scytosiphon filum var. fistulosus Ag.
filum var. lomentarius Ag. (1)
filum var. y Ag. (3)
fistulosus Ag. (1)
lomentaria Endl. (3)

Chorda filum var. fistulosa Kuetz. (1)
filum var. lomentaria Kuetz. (1)
fistulosa Zan. (1), (3)
lomentaria Lyngb. (1), (11)

Ulva fistulosa Good. & Woodw. (1)
simplicissima Clem. (1)

Conferva fistula Roth. (1)

Solenia fuscata Bory (1), (3)

Asperococcus castaneus Carm. (1), (3)

Chlorosiphon Shuttleworthianus Kuetz. (3)

10. COLPOMENIA SINUOSA (Roth.) Derb.

& Sol.

Asperococcus sinwosus Bory. (1), (7)

Ulva cavernosa Forsk. (?) (1)
sinwosa Roth. (1), (11)

FEncoelium sinuosum Ag. (1)
sinwosum Kuetz. (12)
vesicatum Kuetz. (1)

Hydroclathrus sinuosus Zan. (1)

Stilophora sinuosa Ag. (1)
vesicata Harv. (1)

(7)
(3)

(11)

(1)

g),

qQ)

208

Nostoc mesentericum Delle Chiaje
Hydrophyt. Neap. (1)
Tremella cerina Clem. (1)
rugulosa Clem. (1)
Zonaria sinuosa Ag.
Varieties include:
Colpomenia tuberculata Saund. (11)
Scytosiphon bullosus Saund. (11)
11. EcrocarPus SIMPLICIUSCULUS Ag.
Ectocarpus irregularis Kuetz. (1)
12. ECTOCARPUS CONFERVOIDES (Roth.)
Le Jol.
Ectocarpus amphibius Harv. (1 a’)
confervoides var. siliculosus Auct. (1 a’)

corymbosus Kuetz. (1 a’)
gracillimus Kuetz. (1 a’)
siliculosus Harv. (9)

siliculosus Lyngb. ex parte (1), (11)
spalatinus Kuetz. (1 a’)
viridus Harv. (1 a’)
Ceramium confervoides Roth. (1),
(11)
confervoideum Roth. (1a’)
siliculosum var. atrovirens Ag. (1)
siliculosum Ag. (1a’), (3 a’)
Conferva siliculosa Dillw. (1a’), (3 a’)
siliculosa Dillw. (excl. synonyms) (11 a’)
Varieties include:
Ectocarpus amphibius Harv.
approximatus Kuetz. (1)
arachnoideus Zan. (1)
arctus Kuetz. (1 a’)
bombycinus Kuetz. (1)
ceratoides Kuetz. (1)
confervoides f. arcta Kjellm. (1 a’)
var. hiemalis Kjellm. (1 a’)
B. subulatus Hauck. (excl. synonyms)
Glave)
f. subulatus Collins, Holden & Setchell
(11 a’)
draparnaldioides Kuetz. (1 a’)
draparnaldiaeformis Kuetz. (1)
fasciculatus Kuetz., non Harv. (1)
flagelliformis Kuetz. (1)
flavescens Kuetz. (1)
fuscatus Zan. (1a’)
hiemalis Crouan (1 4a’)
intermedius Kuetz. (1 a’)
Kochianus Kuetz. (1)
leptocarpus Kuetz. (1)
macroceras Kuetz. (1)
nebulosus Zan.? (1)
nitens De Not. (1)
ochroleucus Kuetz. (1 a’)
patens Kuetz. (1)
polycarpus Zan. (1a’)
pseudosiliculosus Crouan (1 a’)
pygmaeus Aresch. (1), (11)
rigidus Kuetz. (1a’)
rufulus Kuetz. (1 a’)

(3 a’),

(11 a’)

KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES.

Il,

Ectocarpus siliculosus nebulosus Ag.
parvis Saunders (11)
spinosus Kuetz. (1 a’)
subulatus Kuetz. (1), (11 a’)
terminales Collins, Holden & Setchell (13 )
venetus Kuetz. (1)
vermicelliferus De Not.
verminosus Kuetz. (1 a’)
Corticularia arcta Kuetz. (1 a’)
fuscata Kuetz. (1 a’)
Naegeliana Kuetz. (1)
verminosa Kuetz. (1 a’)

13. PYLAIBLLA LITTORALIS (Linn.) Kjellm.
Pylaiella flexilis Rupr. (1)
nordlandica Rupr. (1)
pyrrhogon Rupr. (1)
saxatilis Rupr. (1)
Ectocarpus compactus Ag. (1), (3)
crinitus Croall ? (1)
ferrugineus Ag. (3)
firmus Aresch. (f. vernalis Aresch. et
var. rupincola Aresch.). (1)
littoralis Ag. (1)
f. protensus Lyngb. (11)
ochraceus Zell. Zweite Polarfahrt., non
Kuetz. (1)
Conferva littoralis Linn. (1), (3)
littoralis Linn. (in part). (11)
Varieties include:
Pylaiella littoralis Kjellm. ex parte (1)
f. compacta (Linn.) Kjellm. (1)
macrocarpa Foslie (1)
varia Kjellm. (1)
Ectocarpus brachiatus Ag. (1)
compactus Ag. ex parte (1)
firmus J. Ag. (1)
var. rupincola Aresch. (1)
f. vernalis Aresch. (1)
fluviatilis Kuetz. (1)
Landsburgii Dick. (1)
littoralis Wyatt (1)
var. brachiatus J. Ag. (1)
f. brachiatus Aresch. (1)
f. vernalis Kjellm. (1)
var. y compactus J. Ag. (1)
ramellosus Kuetz. ex parte (1)
siliculosus y firmus Ag. (1)
subverticillatus Kuetz. (1)
Vidovichii in Heugl. Reise non Menagh.
(1) ;
Spongomorpha castanea Kuetz. (1)
Ceramium compactum Roth. ex parte (1)
Spongonema castaneum Kuetz. (1)
14. BacTROPHORA NIGRESCENS (Harvy.)
Jee.

Cladosiphon nigrescens Harv.
nigricans Harv. (1), (7)
15. BAcTROPHORA FILUM (Harv.) J. Ag.

Mesogloia filum Hary. (1)

(1)

(1)

q)

18 The ‘fa’? within the number bracket indicates that this is claimed by the authority
quoted as a synonym of #. siliculosus (Dill.) Lyngb., which species he regards as distinct

from E£. confervoides (Roth.) Le Jol.

BY VALERIE MAY.

17. CHNOOSPORA PACIFICA J. Ag.
Chnoospora fastigiata var. pacifica J. Ag.
(11)
Sargassum piluliferum Collins, Holden &
Setchell (11)
19. SPOROCHNUS RADICIFORMIS (R.
Ag.
Fucus radiciformis R. Br. (1), (2)
21. CARPOMITRA COSTATA Batt.
Carpomitra Cabrerae Kuetz. (9)
Fucus Cabrerae Clem. (1), (3)
costatus Stackh. (9)
Sporochnus Cabrerae Ag. (1), (3)
Cabrera gaditana Schousb. (1)
22. MyrioGuoia scuRIUS (Harv.) Kuckuck
Myriocladia scuriws Hary. (11), (16)
23. ScyTOTHAMNUS AUSTRALIS (J. Ag.)
H. & H.
Chordaria australis J. Ag. (1)
24. SPERMATOCHNUS LEJOLISII (Thur.)
Reinke.
Spermatochnus microspermus Wuetz.? (1)
Stilophora Lejolisii Thur. (1), (9)
25. MAcCROCYSTIS PYRIFERA (Linn.) Ag.
Macrocystis angustifolia var. oocysta Ag.
(1)
communis Bory (1)
Dubenii Aresch. (1)
Humboldtit Ag. (1)
latifolia Bory (M. latifolius) (1)
latifrons Bory ? (1)
orbignyana Mont. (1)
pelagica Aresch. (1)
planicaulis Ag. (1)
pomifera Bory (1)
tenwifolia Post. & Rupr. (1)
Laminaria pomifera Lamour. (1)
Fucus hirtus Humb. et Bonpl. (1)
Humboldtii Bonpl. (1)
piriferus Linn. (excl. syn. Esper) (1)
piriferus Linn. (11)
Lessonia armata J. Ag. (1)
ciliata Post. et Rupr. (1)
Varieties include:
Macrocystis Dubenii Aresch. (2)
26. EXCKLONIA RADIATA (Turn.) J. Ag.
Fucus radiatus Turn. (1)
Laminaria radiata Ag. (1)
Capea radiata Endl. (1)
Varieties include:
Ecklonia exasperata (Turn.) J. Ag. (1),
(2)
flagelliformis J. Ag. (1)
lanciloba’® Sond. (2)
Richardiana J. Ag. (1), (2)
Fucus radiatus var. exasperatus Turn. (1)
Laminaria biruncinata Bory (1)
Cunninghamii Grev. (1)
flagelliformis A. Rich. (1)
Prieurii Bory (1)
radiata var. exasperata Ag. (1)

Br.)

209

Capea biruncinata Mont. (1)
exasperata Mont. (1)
flabelliformis H. & H. (1)
Pinnaria fastigiata Endl. & Dies. ? (1)
27. ECKLONIA LANCILOBA Sond.
Capea biruncinata y elongata Sond. (1)
28. GYMNOSORUS VARIEGATUS (Lamour.)
do ANE
Zonaria variegata Mert. (1)
Dictyota variegata Lamour. (1)
Spatoglossum variegatum Ixuetz. (1)
Padina lobata Mont. ? (1)
variegata Gaill. (1)
variegata Mont. (1)
Orthosorus variegatus Trev. (1)
Stypopodium fissum Kuetz. (1)
laciniatum Kuetz. (1)
29. GYMNOSORUS NIGRESCENS (Sond.)
do “ANE
Zonaria nigrescens Sond. (1)
Orthosorus nigrescens Trev. (1)
Spatoglossum nigrescens Kuetz. (1), (12)
30. ZONARIA TURNERIANA J. Ag.
Zonaria interrupta Ag. (1)
Phycopteris angustata Kuetz., non Dictyota
interrupta Lamour. (1)
interrupta Wuetz. ex parte (1)
Fucus interruptus Turn. (1)
32. ZONARIA CRENATA J. Ag.
Zonaria flava Harv., non Ag. (1)
var. tenwior Sond. (1)
3. HOMOEOSTRICHUS SINCLAIRII (H. & H.)
J. Ag.
Zonaria Sinclairii H. & H. (1)
Phycopteris Sinclairii Kuetz. (1)
Stypopodium Sinclairii Kuetz. (1), (2)
34. PADINA FRASERI (Grev.) J. Ag.
Zonaria Fraseri Grev. (1)
Pavonia var. fuscescens Ag. (1)
3d. PADINA PAVONIA (Linn.) Lamour.
Padina anglica Kuetz. (1)
Commersoni Auct. (2)
D’Urvillaei Auct. (2)
D’Urvillaei Bory ? (5)
Fraser Grev. (2)
gymnospora Kg. (5)
Mediterranea Bory’ (1), (3)
Neapolitana Kuetz. (1)
Oceanica Bory (1)
Dictyota Pavonia Lamour. (1), (3)
Ulva cucullata Cav. (1), (38)
Pavonia Linn. (1), (3)
Flabellaria Pavonia Lamarck (1)
Zonaria gymnospora WKuetz. (14)
Pavonia Ag. (3)
Pavonia Draparn. (1)
tenwis Kuetz. (excl. var.), non Z.
Pavonia var. tenuis Ag. (1)
Fucus Pavonicus Gmel. (1)
Pavonius Linn. (1), (3)

12 Following De Toni, this synonym has not been accepted.

*0 This synonym has not been accepted by the writer.

in the key.
R

See footnote to genus Padina

210

Varieties include:
Spatoglossum versicolor K. (15)
NEUROCARPUS ACROSTICHOIDES (J. Ag.),
nov. comb.
Haliseris acrostichoides J. Ag.
Muelleri Harv. (partim) (1)
38. NruRocARPUS MUELLERI (Sond.), nov.
comb.
Haliseris Muelleri Sond. (13)
polypodioides Harv. (1)
polypodioides Hary. (excl. syn.) (2)
39. NEUROCARPUS WoOODWARDIA (R. Br.),
nov. comb.
Haliseris Woodwardia (R. Br.) J. Ag. (13)
polypodioides var. denticulata Sond. (10)
Fucus Woodwardia Brown. (1)
Woodwardia Turner Hist. (12)
40. NBEUROCARPUS POLYPODIOIDES (Desf.),
nov. comb.
Haliseris polypodioides (Desf.) Ag. (13)
Fucus ambiguus Clem. ? (1)
membranaceous Stackh. (1)
polypodioides Desf. (1)
Ulva polypodioides DC. (1)
Dictyopteris elongata Lamour. (1)
polypodioides Lamour. (1)
42. DicTYOTA RADICANS Harv.
Dictyota intermedia Zan. ? (1)
zonata J. Ag. (1)
43. DicryoTa DICHOTOMA (Huds.) Lamour.
Dictyota acuta Kuetz. (1)
attenuata Kuetz. (1)
(Dictyopteris ?) areolata Schousb. (1)
(Dictyopteris ?) complanata Schousb. (1)
dichotoma volubilis Lenorm. (1)
elongata Kuetz. (1)
implexa Lamour. (1)
intricata Kuetz. (14)
latifolia Kuetz. (1)
ornata Zan. (1)
? setosa Duby. ? (1)
sibenicensis Zan. (1)
spiralis Mont. ? (1)
volubilis Kuetz. (1)
vulgaris Kuetz. (1)
Neurocarpus anniularis Schousb. (1)
areolatus Schousb. (1)
Fucus dichotomus Bertol. (1)
Ulva dichotoma Inti (Gla (8)
Dichophyllium dicholomium Isuetz. (1), (3)
vulgare Kuetz. (1), (3)
Zonaria dichotoma Ag. (1), (5)
Haliseris dichotoma Spreng. (3)
Varieties include:
Dictyota impleza Lamour. (3)
Dichophyllium implexwm Iuetz. (3)
45. DiIcTYOTA LINEARIS (Ag.) Grev.
Dictyota aequilis Kuetz. ?? (1)
angustissima Sond. (1)
ceylanica Kuetz. ? (1)
divaricata Kuetz. (1)
fibrosa Kuetz. (1)
Zonaria linearis Ag.

37.

(13)

(excl. synon.) (1)

*tDe Toni considers this is more probably Sargassum grande.

KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. IL,

47. LOBOSPIRA BICUSPIDATA <Aresch.
Metachroma thuyoides Harv. (1), (2)

48. SARGASSUM LINEARIFOLIUM (Turn.) Ag.
Fucus linearifolius Turn. (1), (4), (12)
49. SARGASSUM VERRUCULOSUM (Mert.) Ag.
Sargassum adenophyllium Hary. (1), (4)

captllaceum H.& H. (1), (4)
Raowii H.& HW. (1); (4)
Cystophora flaccida J. Ag. (1)
verruculosa J. Ag. (1), (4)
Hucus flaccidus Labill. (1), (4)
verruculosus Mert. (1), (4)

0. SARGASSUM PARADOXUM (R. Br.) Harv.
Sargassum paradoxum J. Ag. (4)
Fucus paradoxus R. Br. (1), (4)
Cystoseira paradoxa Ag. (1)
Blossevillea paradoxva* Kuetz. ? (4)
51. SARGASSUM FALLAX Sond.
Blossevillea fallax Wuetz. (1), (4)
SARGASSUM LACERIFOLIUM (Turn.) Ag.
Fucus lacerifolius Turn. (1), (2)
Carpacanthus lacerifolius Kuetz. (1), (2),
(4)
56. SARGASSUM ANGUSTIFOLIUM
Ag.
Sargassum angustifolium (Ag.) J. Ag. (4)
flexile Grev. (1), (4)
Fucus angustifolius Turn. (1)
filiformis Klein. (1)
leptocystus Mert. (1)
trichophyllus IWlein. (1)
58. SARGASSUM LOPHOCARPUM J. Ag.
Sargassum obovatum Sond. ?, non Harvy.
nec. Grev. (1), (4)
59. SARGASSUM AQUIFOLIUM (Turn.) Ag.
Sargassum densifolium var. subcompressa
Grun. (1), (4)
herbacewum Kuetz. (1), (4)
obovatum Grey. (1), (4)
virescens Fig. et De Not.
Fucus aquifolius Turn. (1)
6. CARPOPHYLLUM PHYLLANTHUS (Turn.)
H. & H.
Carpophyllum flecuoswm Grev. (1)
macrophyllum Mont. (1)
Fucus flecwosus Esp. (1)
Phyllanthus Turn. (1)
Sargassum Phyllanthus Ag. (1)
67. BLOSSEVILLEA UVIFERA (Ag.) Hary.
Cystophora wvifera (Ag.) J. Ag. (1); (2)
Sargassum wviferum Ag. (1), (2)
Caulocystis uvifera Aresch. (1)
68. BLOSSEVILLEA CEPHALORNITHOS
(Labill.) Isuetz.
Cystophora Cephalornithos (Uabill.) J. Ag.
(1)
Cystoseira Cephalornithos Ag. (1),
Fucus cephalornithos Labill. (1), (2)
Caulocystis Cephalornithos Aresch. (1)
69. BLOSSEVILLEA PLATYLOBIUM (Mert.),
nov. comb.
Cyustophora Lyalli H. & H. (1). (2)
platylobium (Mert.) J. Ag. (13)

D5.

(Turn. )

(1), (4)

(2)

BY VALERIE MAY. 211

Fucus platylobium Mert. (1) Sirophysalis binodis Kuetz. (12)
Cystoseira platylobium Ag. (1) muricata Kuetz. (1). (2), (12)
Platylobium Mertensii Kuetz. (1) trinodis Kuetz. (12)
70. BLOSSEVILLEA RETROFLEXA (Labill.), Varieties include:
nov. comb. Cystoseira virgata Endl, et Dies. (1)
Blossevillea campylocoma Kuetz. (1) Sirophysalis binodis Kuetz. (1)
caudata Harv. (1) virgata Kuetz. (1)
Cystophora vetroflexa (Labill.) J. Ag. (13) 77. ScaBERtA AGARDHII Grey.
Fucus caudatwus Lamour. (1) Castraltia salicornoides Rich. (non
retroflecus Lahbill. (1) Martens) (1), (2)
Cystoseira retroflera Ag. (1) 78. PHYLLOSPORA COMOSA (Labill.) Ag.
71. BLOSSEVILLEA sILIQuosa (J. Ag.), NOV. Fucus comosus Labill. (1), (2)
comb.

Macrocystis comosa Ag. (1), (2)

79. HoRMOSIRA ? ARTICULATA (Forsk.) Zan.
Hormosira triquetra Decne. (1)

Fucus articulatws Forsk. (1)

Cystophora siliquosa J. Ag. (13)
72. BLOSSEVILLEA SPARTIOIDES (Turn.)
Decne.
Blossevillea intermedia Kuetz. (1) £0 ‘ :
penicillifera WKuetz. (1) curbernacisce: DEMS (CL)

Cystophora spartioides (Turn.) J. Ag. Cystoseira articulata J. Ag. (1), (7)
(1), (2) triquetra Mont. (1)

Moniliformia triquetra Decne. (1)

Fucus spartioides Turn. (1), (2)
80. HorMosirRA BANKsII (Turn.) Decne.

Phyllotricha spartioides Aresch. (1), (2)

Cystoseira spartioides Ag. (1), (2) Fucus Banksti Turn. (1)

73. BLOSSEVILLEA PANICULATA (Turn.) Cystoseira Banksii Ag. (excl. synon.) (1)
Decne. Moniliformia Banksii Bory (1)

Cystophora paniculata (Turn.) J. Ag. Varieties include:
(1), (2) Hormosira Billardieri Mont. (2)

Fucus paniculatus Turn. (1), (2) gracilis Kuetz. (2)

Cystoseira paniculata Ag. (1), (2) obconica Kuetz. (2)

Acrocarpia paniculata Aresch. (1) Sieberi Decne. (2)

74. BLOSSEVILLEA POLYCYSTIDEA Aresch. Fucus Banksii Turn. (2)

Blossevillea expansa Aresch. (1) moniliformis Labill. (2)

Cystophora polycystidea Aresch. (1) Cystoseira Banksii Ag. (2)

75. BLOSSEVILLEA MONILIFERA (J. Ag.), Moniliformia Labillardieri Bory (2)
nov. comb. Banksii Bory (2)

Blossevillea retroflexa WKuetz. (1) Sieberi Bory (2)

retroflexa Decne. (2) 81. SaRcoPHYCUS POTATORUM (Labill.)

Cystophora monilifera J. Ag. (13)

Fucus retroflecus Turn. (non Labill.) (1),
(2)

Cystoseira retroflexa Rich. (1), (2)

76. CYSTOPHYLLUM MURICATUM (Turn.)

Kuetz.
Fucus potatoruwm Labill. (1), (2)
Laminaria potatorum Lamour. (1), (2)
D’Urvillaea potatorwm Aresch. (1), (2)

J. Ag. : 83. SPLACHNIDIUM RUGOSUM (Linn.) Grey.
Cystophyllum muricatum Harv. (12) Ulva rugosa Linn. (1)
trinode J. Ag. (12) Fucus rugosus Turn. (1)
Fucus muricatus Turn. (1), (2) rugosus Linn. (2)
Cystoseira muricata Ag. (2) Dumontia auriculata Suhr. (1)
trinodis Ag. (1), (2) ; rugosa Suhr. (1), (2)

An alphabetical list of the synonyms attributed to the whole, or to part of,
species mentioned in the key has been prepared. Opposite each name is the
number of the accepted species as listed in the key, e.g., Acrocarpia paniculata

Aresch. ...... 73, indicates Blossevillea paniculata (Turn.) Decne.
Acrocarpia paniculata Aresch. 73 Blossevillea expansa Aresch. 74 Capea biruncinata Mont.
Asperococcus castaneus Carm. 9 fallax Kuetz. ayy Week DL exasperata Mont.
rugosus B. bullosus Duby. 7 intermedia Kuetz. 42 flabelliformis H. & H.

Sinuosus Bory .. .. .. 10 paradoxa Kuetz. ? 50 radiata Endl.
tenuis Zan. .. Fi See cb penicillifera Kuetz. UP} Carpacanthus lacerifolius
“Maypogird VOOR, so oo ov retroflexa Decne. 75 Kuetz. es LEE Pie
utricularis D’Urv. aio eadls retroflera Kuetz. Sephey iaks UO Carpomitra Cabrerae IWuetz. £
Blossevillea campylocoma Cabrera gaditana Schousb... 21 Carpophyllum flexuosum
Kuetz. Feit Peon hike more al Capea biruncinata y elongata Grev. Std ok
caudata Hary. ., ., ., 70 Sond. Se URE eh weceisterec O10 macrophyllum Mont,

bo bo bo bo
rrr}

[=r]

212 KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. II,

Castraltia salicornoides Rich. Corticularia verminosa Kuetz. 12 Dictyota spiralis Mont.? .. 438
(non Martens) sioh WA. Corynephora baltica Kuetz.? 6 variegata Lamour. .. .. 28
Caulocystis Cephalornithos MATTOS it eck fees, a A LO VOLWOUISPISUCEZA i ki ee
Aresch. 68 Corynophloea ballica Kuetz. 6 VULGS ATS MESSI GUZ a ete it ne ko
uvifera Aresch. . .. 67 GOystophora Cephalornithos zonata J. Ag. one .. 42
Ceramium cirrhosum Hook. 1 (Labill.) J. Ag. .. .. 68 Dumontia awriculata Suhr. dio. 10383
cirrhosum Ag. : 1 UACCILOW IAS. ee eee rugosa Suhr. Se So
compactum Roth., ex manre 13 IG Testy eo dals a an ao. (oH) D'Urvillaea potatorwmn
confervoides Roth. m2 monilifera J. Ag. een acre (o) Aresch. Sais Re At BL
confervoideum Roth... 12 paniculata (Turn.) J. Ag. 73
fulvum Bertol. 2 Cystophora platylobium Ecklonia exasperata (Turn.)
pennatum Roth. .. Ae al (Mert.) J. Ag. 69 J. Ag. 4 i, Wel
siliculosum var. atrovirens polycystidea Aresch. saan US flagelliformis an Ag. po. oa PAD
DP Sse: gs 12 retroflexra (Uabill.) J. Ag. 70 Richardiana J. Ag. .. .. 26
siliculosum Js, 12 siliquosa J. Ag. Le fa Ectocarpus amphibius Harv. 12
spongiosum DC. 3 spartioides (Turn.) J. Ag. 72 approximatus Kuetz. sy Ue
verticillatum DC. 4 woifera (Ag.) J. Ag... GT arachnoideus Zan. .. .. 12
Chaetophora marina Lyngb. 6 OEP RUCOHOSE Uo INS 5a oa HY PVN VeSUNAN Ok ag oo. 1
Chlorosiphon Shuttle- Cystophyllum muricatum bombycinus Kuetz. .. .. 12
worthianus Kuetz. 9 Harv. Sse, Mec UmmareanNUO ORACTIATUSIEAS aan ole een lic
Chnoospora fastigiata var. ENUNOME MI CAS pe lee aio ceratoides Kuetz. Bi tas esa Wr)
pacifica J. Ag... .. .. 17 £.Cystoseira articulata J. Ag. 79 compactus Ag. .. .. .. 13
Chorda filuwm var. fistulosa Banksii Ag. eae. eeee Ave Si0 confervoides f. arcta
Kuetz. Aiea Saag ti: eto Cephalornithos Ag. .. .. 68 Kjellm. ak ap dle?
filum var. lomentaria muricata Ag. Rigen EOE var. hiemalis Keel, Baad ke]
Kuetz. sor epee eters Yt) FIOM KOUICH KT: INES 5g oa, oo var. siliculosus Auct. .. 12
fistulosa Zan. 5 Peete 9 paradozxa Ag. Sey) wate we oat (en. B. subulatus Hauck.
lomentaria Lyngb. .. .. 9 platylobium Ag... .. .. 69 (exel. syn.) A snc! be
Chordaria australis J. Ag... 28 euro INES 6) ge an HD) f. swbulatus Collins,
Cladosiphon nigrescens Hary. 14 retroflexa Rich. Us Holden & Setchell .. 12
nigricans Harv. .. ote he ye spantioidesi Ae. oa tine) een lee corymbosus Kuetz. a we?
Cladostephus australis var. trinodis Ag. oH Tom ole SG) crinitus Croall ? 2D Seneca bs)
ponticus Sperk. SEPT STE: triquetra Mont. 79 draparnaldioides WKuetz. .. 12
hedwigioides Bory? .. .. 4 virgata Endl. et pices 5 draparnaldiaeformis Kuetz. 12
lacus El. Dan. (?), excel: fasciculatus Kuetz., non
syn 3 Dichophylliwm dichotomium Harv. NE a iruict Maca hr
ME opnulaun ine, 4 Kuetz. ie Bee es oe ferrugineus Ag... .. .. 13
setacews Suhr. ? no eS implexum Tenet 2s) aS (MUS PAECSCH She ioe) a lo
spongiosus Kuetz., non Ag. 4 vulgare Kuetz. .. a {4g firmus J, Ag. 1 PS) ols
tomentosus Kuetz. . 4 Dictyopteris elongata flagelliformis Kuetz. en ily
verticillatus var. spongio- Lamour. .. . ro. ho) flavescens Kuetz. Bee bo)
SUS eee Pes te polypodioides amour a AO fluviatilis Kuetz. ont Ai ake
Clawatella Nostoc ony aang 16 Dictyota acuta Kuetz. .. .. 43 WUXI PANG ok ah og a Le
Colpomenia tuberculata aequilis Kuetz. ? Aa eat, At gracillimus Kuetz. .. .. 12
Saund. 46 ale 10 angustissima Sond. .. eA hiemalis Crouan 5:10 ely
Conferva cer CNET SATETD Roth, 4 (Dictyopteris?) areolata intermedius Kuetz. .. .. 12
Gtr ooo? IDK 66 we ooo dl Schousbe Me 555, oe 48 irregularis Kuetz. eS eeert ie LAB
GCUMADORED RKO, Go oo on Il attenuata Kuetz. ete SA 9 Kochianus Kuetz. tei ee eee
HEOUOR? lsoyio- o6 S66 ooo ceylonica Kuetz. ? oe 45 Landsburgii Dick. Pt ers HLS
fusca Huds. il (Dictyopteris?) complanata leptocarpus Kuetz. .. .. 12
intertexta Roth.. 1 Schoushay.eee, ele ee littoralis Ag. Stet heNS helmeted 6c)
littoralis Linn. 13 dichotoma volubilis littoralis Wyatt .. elo
marina Dillw. ie 1 Lenorm. : 43 5 protensus eenaih, oo 1s}
Myriophyllum Roth. .. 4 divaricata ewe 45 var. brachiatus J. Ag. .. 13
pennata Huds. 1 elongata Kuetz. 43 f. brachiatus Aresch. .. 138
prebrevis Dillw. .. 1 fibrosa Kuetz. 45 f. vernalis Kjellm. HAPS
siliculosa Dillw. .. 12 implexa Lamour. 43 var. y compactus J. Ag. 13
spongiosa Huds... 3 intricata Kuetz. .. 43 macroceras WKuetz. .. .. 12
spongiosa Lightft. 3 intermedia Zan. ? 42 nebulosus Zan, ? yD
verticillata Lightft. 4 latifolia Kuetz. 43 nitens De Not. ... .. .. 12
villosa Dillw. 1 ornata Zan. 43 ochraceus Zell. Zweite
Corticularia arcta mee 12 Pavonia Lamour. 35 Polarfaht., non IKuetz... 13
Juscata \xuetz. 12 setosa ? Duby. ? 43 ochroleucus Kuetz. .. .. 12
Naegeliana Kuetz. 12 sibenicensis Zan, wien 43 patens Kuetz. ., Us baht Beek /2,

Ectocarpus polycarpus Zan.
pseudosiliculosus Crouan..

pygmaeus Aresch.

ramellosus Kuetz., ex parte

rigidus Kuetz.
rufulus Kuetz.
siliculosus Harv.
siliculosus Lyngb.
y firmus Ag.
nebulosus Ag...
parvis Saunders
spalatinus Kuetz.
spinosus Kuetz. ..
subulatus Kuetz.

subverticillatus Kuetz.
terminales Collins, Holden

& Setchell
venetus Kuetz.

vermicelliferus De Not.

verminosus Kuetz,
Vidovichii in Heugl.
non Menagh.
viridis Harv.
Encoelium bullosuwm ie
Mac-Gregoryi Suhr.
sinuosum Ag.
sinuosum Kuetz.
tenue Kuetz.
vesicatum Kuetz.
utriculare WKuetz.

Flabellaria Pavonia Lamarck

9

Fucus ambiguus Clem. ?
angustifolius Turn.
aquifolius Turn.
articulatus Forsk.
Banksii Turn.
Cabrerae Clem...
caudatus Lamour.
cephalornithos Labill.
comosus Labill.
costatus Stackh.
dichotomous Bertol.
fascia Muell.
fascia F). Dan.
flliformis Klein. ..
flaccidus Labill.
flecuosus Esp.

hirsutus Linn. (non Wult. )
non MLinn.
hirtus Humb. et Bonpl.

hirsutus Wulf.,

Humboldtii Bonpl.
interruptus Turn.
lacerifolius Turn.
leptocystus Mert.
linearifolius Turn.

membranaceous Stackh.

moniliformis Labill.
muricatus Turn.
paniculatus Turn.
paradoxzus R. Br.
pavonicus Gmel.
pavonius Linn.
Phyllanthus Turn,

Reise

12

12

13

12

12

a
“1-1 bo co

= HR
Qaon coc ©

aol ol Co
women

Aa nw oo
(2) (=) 1 (SS) We)

Ol wm DO -1
a work re w

D>
ry ~)

or co bo bo
ono oct e

BY VALERIE MAY.

Fucus Phyllitis var. subses-
silis Clem.
piriferus Linn.
Platylobium Mert.
polypodioides Desf.
potatorum Labill.
radiatus Turn.
radiciformis R. Br.
retroflexus Lapbill.
retroflecus Turn.,
Labill.
rugosus Turn.
rugosus Linn.
spartioides Turn.
trichophyllus Klein.
triqueter Delile
verruculosus Mert.
verticillatus Wulf.
Woodwardia Brown ..

non.

Gastridium Opuntia Lyngb.

Haliseris acrostichoides J. Ag.

dichotoma Spreng.

Muelleri Harv. Gontins)

Muelleri Sond. OURS?

polypodioides Harv. (excl.
syn.) Abs 3113

polypodioides var. denticu-
lata Sond. A SY ANE

polypodioides (Desf.) Ag.

Woodwardia (R. Br.) J. Ag.
Hormosira Billardieri Mont.

gracilis Kuetz.

obconica Kuetz. ..

Sieberi Decne.

triquetra Decne. :
Hydroclathrus sinuosus Zan.
Laminaria biruncinata Bory.

caespitosa J. Ag.

cuneata Suhr.

Cunninghamii Grev.

debilis Ag.

fascia Ag.

fascia Muell. Aes

flagelliformis A. Rich.

papyrina Bory? ,
Phyllitis Delle Chiaje
Hydrophyt.
pomifera Lamour.
potatorum Gamour.
Prieurii Bory
radiata Ag. ate 5
var. exasperata Ae.
Leathesia marina J. Ag.
marina Endl,
tuberiformis S. F. Gray
Lessonia armata J. Ag.
ciliata Post. et Rupr.

Macrocystis angustifolia var.
oocysta Ag. 0.0
communis Bory... ., 5,

bo
on

6
40

(Ju)

Aare wo
cow nore

co CO CO Co m1 or-1 WD 0 7
“1 co =I -1 Oo me OO cS bo fo Co ON

wn

bo
=r)

bo
rae. < ao 2)

bo bo
manrnwnn

bdoww we
SHH ke OI CO

hr or er)

Macrocystis comosa Ag. 78
Dubenii Aresch. 25
Humboldtii Ag. - og 240)
latifolia Bory (M. lati-

folius) 25
latifrons Bory ? 25
Orbignyana Mont. 25
pelagica Aresch. 25
planicaulis Ag. 25
pomifera Bory 25
tenuifolia Post. & Rupe 25

Mesogloia filum Harv. 15

Metachroma thuyoides Harv. 47

Moniliformia Banksii Bory 80
Labillardieri Bory 80
Sieberi Bory 80
triquetra Decne. so) 09)

Myriocladia Scurius Harv... 22

Neurocarpus annularis

Schousb. 43
areolatus Schousb. 43

Nostoc Marinum Ag. 6
mesentericum Ag. .. .. 6
mesentericum Delle Chiaje

Hydrophyt. Neap. 10

Orthosorus nigrescens Trev. 29
variegatus Trev. 28

Padina anglica Kuetz. 35
Commersoni Auct. 35
D’Urvillaei Auct. 35
D’Urvillaei Bory ? 35
gymnospora Kg. 35
lobata Mont.? 28
Mediterranea Bory 35
Neapolitana Kuetz. 35
Oceanica Bory 35
variegata Gaill. 28
variegata Mont. oo eae

Petalonia debilis Derb. &

Sol. 8
fascia Kuntze 8

Phycolapathum Aneation

Kuetz. 8

Phycopteris E ngustane inetes

(non Dictyota inter-

rupta Lamour.) 30
interrupta Kuetz., ex parte 30
Sinclairii WKuetz. 5.0) 3383

Phyllitis caespitosa Le Jol. 8
debilis Kuetz. BN Saye ats
fascia Kuetz. (non Le

Jol.) age 8
filiformis Batt. 8
Zosterifolia Reinke 8

Phyllotricha spartioides

Aresch. ste eda

Pinnaria fastigiata Endl. &

Dies.? 26

Platylobium Mer seni ENE, 69

214 KEY TO THE MARINE ALGAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. II, ~

Pylaiella flexilis Rupr.
littoralis f. compacta
(Linn.) Kjellm.
macrocarpa Foslie
nordlandica Rupr.
pyrrhogon Rupr.
saxatilis Rupr.
varia WKjellm.

Rivularia
Bot.

Sargassum adenophyllium
Harv. ae Sis
angustifolium (Ag.) J. £

capillaceum H. & H.
densifolium var.
pressa Grun.

flexile Grev.
herbaceum WKuetz.
obovatum Grev.
obovatum Sond.?,
Harv. nec Grev.
paradoxzum J. Ag.
Phyllanthus Ag.

non

piluliferum Collins, Holden

& Setchell
Raoulii H. & H.
uviferum Ag.
virescens Fig. et De Not
Scytosiphon

var. lomentarius Ag.
var. y Ag.
fistulosus Ag. ..
lomentaria Endl.

Sirophysalis binodis Kuetz...

muricata Kuetz.
trinodis Kuetz.
virgata Kuetz.
Solenia fuscata Bory
Spatoglossum
Kuetz.
versicolor Ix.

nigrescens

AGARDH, J.,
BaILby, F. M.,

tuberiformis Eng].

subcom-

bullosus Senviail
filum var. fistulosus Ag...

6

1 -]

WCAAADMDwWwH wos

a -1

bo
co

or
oo

1888.—Species Sargassorum Australiae.

Brisbane, xi, 7-69, Pl. 1-17.

Dr TONI, G.
ENGLER, A.,
GARDNER, N.

Pl. 481.
GRUNOW, A.,

Godeffroy, iii,
HARVEY, W. H.,
————,, 1858-63

LAING, R. M.,
XXxili, 299-301.

—————,, 1905.—Appendix to the List of Seaweeds of Norfolk Island.
XXXvili, 424,

Inst.,

B., 1895.—Sylloge Algarum, Vol.
and PRANTL, K.,
Ibe) G83
SEPP, A., and E. S.,

.—New Fucaceae.
1906.—Some Marine Algae from N.S.W.

1874.—Algen
23-50.
1846-51.—Phycologia Britannica.
.—Phycologia Australica
Kuckuck, P., 1930.—Fragmente einer Monographie des Phaeosporeen.

Meeresuntersuchungen,

Mush, =Ayent
1900.—A List of the Seaweeds of Norfolk Island.

der Fidschi-, Tonga-

1-93.

and Synopsis.

und Samoa-

London.

Spatoglossum variegatum Stypocaulon gracilescens

Kuetz. nd Ls Kuetz.

Spermatochnus micr SORPIETEIE hordeaceum ranetee

Kuetz.? 24 virgatum Kuetz. 7
Sphacelaria br nonugonta Stypopodium fissum Eeneia

Mont. Chu eter bee 2 laciniatum Kuetz.

caespitula Kjellm., non Sinclairii Wuetz.

Lyngb. 2

capensis WKuetz.? 2 Tremella cerina Clem.
cervicornis Ag. iL difformis Linn.
cervicornis Decne.? Ce rugulosa Clem.
cirrosa var. cervicornis

Ardiss. 1 Ulva cavernosa Forsk. (?) ..

filaris Sond. 5 cucullata Cav.

fulva Kuetz. 2 dichotoma Huds.

fusca Ag. 1 fascia Lyngb. ash ee

fusca Harv. 1 fistulosa Good. & Woodw.

gracilescens Dies. et J. Ne 5 mesenterica Bonn,

hordeacea Harv. 5 Pavonia Linn.

irregularis IXuetz. ex nate 1 polypodioides DC.

japonica Martens i rugosa Linn.

Muelleri Sond. 06 5 simplicissima Clem.

Novae-Hollandiae Sond. 2 sinuosa Roth.

paniculata Suhr., non Turneri Dillw.

Hering. ads 5

pennata Lyngb. 1 Zonaria dichotoma Ag.

racemosa Reinsch. il flava Harv. non Ag.

rhizophora Kuetz. 1 var. tenuwior Sond.

rigida Hering. 2 Fraseri Grey.

scoparia Sond. og | gymnospora Kuetz.

(Stypocaulon) spicigera interrupta Ag.

Aresch. .. : 5 linearis Ag. (excl. aon)

virgata H. & HL. 5 nigrescens Sona. :
Spongomorpha castanea Pavonia var. fuscescens

Kuetz. : 113} Ag. '
Spongonema aatemenin Pavonia Ag.

ESUISEZ no Pavonia Draparn
Sporochnus Gannenae Ae 21 ie Hii, ;
Stilophora Lejolisii Thur. 24 Sinclair HH. & HH:

sinuosa Ag. 10 siuosa a Pres.
nesicata Elarv. 10 tenwis Kuetz. (excl. var.),
Stypocaulon iRevachomnarzaiere non 4. Pavonia var.
Kuetz. 1 tenuis Ag.
filare Kuetz. 5 variegata Mert.
References.
Stockholm.
1895.—Contributions to the Queensland Flora. Bot. Bull. Dept. Agric.
3, Fucoideae. Padua.
1897.—Die naturlichen ee seins
Univ. Calif. Publ. in Bot., iv, 317-374, Pl. 36 aa

xliv, 249-26

ae ee
Inseln. Jour. Museum
London.

Wissenschaftliche

Trans. Proc. N.Z. Inst.,

Trans. Proc, N.Z,

BY VALERIE MAY. 215

LAING, R. M., 1906.—Notes on the Occurrence of Phyllitis fascia (Muell.) Kuetz. in New
Zealand. Trans. Proc. N.Z. Inst... Xxxix, 220-221.

Lucas, A. H. S., 1909.—Revised List of the Fucoideae and Florideae of Australia. Proc.
LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxiv, 8-60.

, 1913.—Notes on the Australian Marine Algae. 1. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W.,

XxXxXvili, 49-60, Pl. 1-5.

————, 1985.—The Marine Algae of Lord Howe Island. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ix,
194-232, Pl. 5-9.

——_——, 1936.—The Seaweeds of South Australia, Part 1, Introduction and the Green
and Brown Seaweeds. Adelaide.

Newton, Linty, 1931.—Handbook of the British Seaweeds. London.

OKAMURA K., 1904.—List of Marine Algae collected in Caroline Islands and Australia.
Bot. Mag. Tokyo. xviii, 77-96.

OLTMANNS, F., 1922.—Morphologie und Biologie der Algen. Jena.

SETCHELL, W. A., and GARDNER, N. L., 1925.—The Marine Algae of the Pacific Coast of
North America, Part 3. Melanophyceae. Univ. Calif. Pwbl. in Bot., viii, 383-898,
Pl. 34-107.

SoNpDER, W., 1871.—Die Algen des tropischen Australiens. Hamburg.

, 1880.—Algae Australianae hactenus cognitae, and Algae e manuscriptis

praecipue in Von Mueller: Fragmenta Phytographiae Australiae. xi, 1-42 and 105-107.

TILDEN, J. E., 1935.—The Algae and their Life Relations. Minnesota.

TILDEN, J. E., and FESSENDEN, A. P., 1931.—Bactrophora irregularis, a new brown alga
from Australia. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, lvii, 381-388, Pl. 20-21.

TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. II.
A NEW NEOTROPICAL GENUS OF EMBIOPTERA.
By Consett Davis, M.Se., Lecturer in Biology, New England University College.*
(Twenty-one Text-figures. )

[Read 31st May, 1939.]

OLIGEMBIA, nN. gen.

Genotype: Oligotoma hubbardi Hagen, 1885, Canadian Entomologist, vol. 17,
p. 142.

Very small Embioptera, the males with the following characters: Winged, the
main veins greatly reduced in their development without reduction in number.
R, and main stem of Cu, strong; R.,; weak; remaining veins represented only by
their bordering pigment-bands and by rows of macrotrichia, sparse and little
obvious. These remnants of the main veins follow the course of those of the genus
Embia, Ry,; being clearly forked, the fork longer than the stem; M simple; anterior
branch of cubitus (Cu,.) simple, very weak. Mandibles slender, terminally
incurved and acute. Hind legs with first tarsal segment devoid of bladders.
Terminalia with tenth abdominal tergite divided by a longitudinal suture, obsolete
proximally; right hemitergite with a long thin process directed backwards; process
of left hemitergite complex; left cercus-basipodite well-developed, associated closely
with base of left cercus; no nodules on any of the segments of the cerci.

2 unknown.

Southern parts of the United States to South America.

The genus is closely allied to Diradius Friederichs 1934 (genotype D. pusillus
Friederichs 1934), from Brazil, in which, however, the process of the left hemi-
tergite is simply tapered, and the left cercus-basipodite of different form. The
species are superficially similar to those of Oligotoma; the forking of the trace
representing R,,; immediately differentiates them, and seems to rule out descent
from Oligotoma, just as the more complex terminalia and more complete reduction
in strength of the veins rules out the descent of Oligotoma from Oligembia. To
some extent the mandibles, hind tarsi, left cercus-basipodite, elongate process of
the right hemitergite and incomplete fission of the last abdominal tergite, suggest
some relationship to Oligotoma, but whether this is due to common descent from
a type possessing some or all of these characters, or merely to convergence, is at
present problematical.

Although one of the South American species referred by Enderlein to
Rhagadochir Enderlein 1912 is herein referred to Oligembia, the others do not seem
to be closely related. The genotype of Rhagadochir (Rh. vosseleri End.) is African,
and no South American species is actually congeneric with it; a new generic name

* A considerable part of the work embodied in this paper was performed when the
writer held a Linnean Macleay Fellowship in Zoology.
i)

218 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. II,

is required for this South American series, of which Hmbia trinitatis de Saussure
1896 is a typical example. This series agrees with Oligembia in having the process
of the left hemitergite complex, but differs in the complete fission of the last
abdominal tergite, number of hind tarsal bladders, and in having the first segment
of the left cercus echinulate, the veins R,,,; and M more strongly developed, ete.

OLIGEMBIA HUBBARDI (Hagen, 1885). Figs. 1-5.

Oligotoma hubbardi Hagen, 1885, Canad. Entomologist, vol. 17, p. 142.

6. Length 4 mm.; forewing 3-7 mm. x 1:0 mm. (dimensions of the type).

General colour pale yellowish-brown, head somewhat darker, eyes black, wings
very pale brown with hyaline streaks between veins or their traces. Head (fig. 1)
slender, eyes relatively large; sides of head behind eyes relatively straight, scarcely
converging. Mandibles slender, incurved distally, acute, the apex weakly bifid.
Antennae incomplete. Body sclerites, except the terminalia, as in Oligotoma.
Wings (fig. 2) with Se reaching to one-quarter the length of the wing; R, strong,
confluent subterminally with R.,,, the fused vein not quite reaching the termen.
R,,;, M and Cu,, represented only by pigment-bands and weak rows of macrotrichia;
R,,, with fork twice length of stem; M simple; Cu, very weak; A short but
distinct. No cross-veins apparent. Terminalia (figs. 3, 4, 5) with tenth tergite
divided incompletely by a submedian suture, obsolete proximally; right lobe (10R)
produced backwards and inwards to a slender evenly-tapered process (10RP),
curved outwards terminally. Three minute claw-like hooks placed dorsally on
10RP a little before the apex. 10RP more heavily pigmented and sclerotized than
remainder of 10R, and with a circular slot half-way along inner margin. Left

Figs. 1-5.—Oligembia hubbardi (Hagen), co. 1, Head, x 28; 2, Left forewing, x 13;
3, Terminalia from above, x 64; 4, Process of left hemitergite of tenth abdominal segment,
x 64; 5, Terminalia from below, x 64.

(9, ninth abdominal tergite; 10L, 10LP, left hemitergite of tenth abdominal segment
and its process; 10R, 10RP, right hemitergite and its process; LC,, LC,, first and second
segments of left cercus; RC,, RC,, segments of right cercus; LCB, left cercus-basipodite ;
H, ninth abdominal sternite (hypandrium).)

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 219

lobe (10L) (fig. 4) tapered backwards to a process (10LP), expanding terminally,
distal face concave. Right cercus of two subcylindrical segments (RC,, RC.), the
first somewhat thicker. Left cercus of two subequal segments (LC,, LC.), the first
slightly dilated distally on the inner side, but without nodules. Ninth sternite
(H) with a more membraneous concavity on the right side of the posterior margin,
and to the left of this a subquadrate lobe directed towards the base of the left
cercus. Left cercus-basipodite (LCB) tapered, directed backwards, bifid at apex,
basally apparently distinct from left cercus and not fused thereto as in other
species.

9 unknown.

Hagen’s type, from Enterprise, Florida (Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Harvard University) is in a very battered condition, as it was, indeed, when he
received and described it. The head is moderately well-preserved; the left fore-
wing is the only wing complete, the rest being much abraded. The abdomen,
broken off, was embedded in gum on a card, the terminalia almost entirely
destroyed. Preparation of the remains of the terminalia revealed the structure of
10RP, with its associated claw-like processes, and the tip of 10LP. These characters,
and the head and left forewing, were sufficient to identify the specimen with
certainty with another series in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, three males
(one much damaged) from Royal Palm Park, Florida (coll. Blatchley). One of
these was accordingly labelled plesiotype, and the figures (except fig. 2) and much
of the above description are from this specimen. In colour and dimensions this
series agrees with the type.

OLIGEMBIA ROSSI, Dn. Sp. Figs. 6-12.

6. Length 3 mm.; head, length 0-8 mm., breadth 0-6 mm.; forewing 3:1 mm. x
0-7 mm.; hindwing 2:3 mm. x 0-7 mm.

General colour pale ferruginous, head a little darker, eyes black. R,, R.,, and
stem of Cu pale brown; bands bordering veins or their traces very pale yellowish-
brown; thin lines bordering R, (Radiusnebenlinien or pseudo-radial lines) rose.
Head (fig. 6) relatively broader and more rounded than in O. hubbardi. Right
antenna with 14 segments, length 1:9 mm., probably complete; left broken.
Mandibles (fig. 7) slender, terminally incurved and acute, the tip of the left with
a weak longitudinal division; inner margin behind apex concave, with a tooth
half-way from apex. First segment of hind tarsi (fig. 8) without even the terminal
ventral bladder found in Oligotoma. Wings (fig. 9) much as in O. hubbardi, but
with a few weak cross-veins between costa and radius, and between radius and
sector. In the left hindwing the pigment-band representing R, is disconnected
basally from the stem R,,,. Terminalia (figs. 10-12) with tenth abdominal tergite
divided by an oblique suture, obsolete proximally. Right hemitergite (10R)
produced backwards to a tapered process (10RP) ending in two teeth (fig. 11), the
outer acute, the inner obtuse, shorter, and more dorsal. Base of 10RP with more
heavily-sclerotized areas in the form of two half-rings. Left hemitergite (10L)
produced backwards to a massive process (10LP; fig. 12), bifid, the inner or right
lobe slender, irregularly tapered, heavily sclerotized, the outer or left lobe obtuse,
membraneous, and placed somewhat dorsad. Right cercus of two subcylindrical
segments (RC,, RC.), the first somewhat thicker. Segments of left cercus
(LC,, LC.) similar to those of right, the first with the left cercus-basipodite (LCB)
fused to its base as a heavily-chitinized ring, produced inwards to a tapered horn
curving forwards. Hypandrium (H) tapered, truncate distally.

? unknown.

220 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. II,

Locality.—Barro Colorado Isd., Panama Canal Zone, coll. Dr. W. M. Wheeler;
in fungus.

This species is described from a single specimen in the British Museum of
Natural History, which I received mounted on two slides, one carrying the
terminalia, somewhat distorted, and one the other parts of the insect. The
exactitude of the locality and clarity of the taxonomic characters justify its
description, especially considering the morphological and geographic interest of

the record. The species is named after Mr. EH. S. Ross, of the University of
California.

Figs. 6-12.—Oligembia rossi, n. sp., &. 6, Head, x 60; 7, Mandibles from above, x 60;
8, Tarsus of right hind leg, viewed laterally, x 60; 9, Left fore- and hind-wing, x 20;
10, Terminalia from above, x 56; 11, Process of right hemitergite of tenth abdominal
segment, ~ 280; 12, Process of left hemitergite, x 280.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 221

OLIGEMBIA BANKSI, n. sp. Figs. 13-20.

6. Length 4:8-6-2 mm.; head, length 0-8-1:1 mm., breadth 0-6-0:9 mm. Fore-
wing, length 3-8-4-6 mm., breadth 1:0-1:'2 mm.; hindwing, length 3-0-3-8 mm.,
breadth 1-0-1:2 mm.

General colour pale golden-brown, head darker, eyes black; wings very pale
brown with hyaline streaks. Head (fig. 13) relatively broader than in O. hubbardi,
the sides converging markedly behind the eyes. Greatest number of antennal
segments observed 15 (incomplete); greatest antennal length 2 mm. Mandibles
(fig. 14) similar to those of O. rossi, but with three terminal teeth on the left,
two on the right. Wings as in O. rossi, without anomalies. Hind tarsi (fig. 15)
similar to O. rossi. Terminalia (figs. 16-20) with longitudinal fission of tenth
abdominal tergite very incomplete; right lobe (10R) produced backwards and
inwards to a thin, flat tapered process (10RP), truncate distally, but apparently
smoothly tapered and acute from some aspects; inner margin of 10RP somewhat

Figs. 13-20.—Oligembia banksi, n. sp., ¢. 18, Head, x 20; 14, Mandibles from above,
x 40; 15, Hind tarsus, viewed laterally, x 60; 16, Terminalia from above, x 56; 17, Process
of right hemitergite from above, x 56; 18, Process of left hemitergite from above, x 56;
19, The same, from another specimen, viewed from a different angle, x 56; 20, Terminalia
from below, x 40. ,

Fig. 21.—Oligembia oligotomoides (Enderlein), ~ terminalia from above, x 13 (after
Enderlein, 1912).

corrugated, basally overlying an obtuse flap, similar to the structure present in
Oligotoma. Left lobe (10L) produced backwards to a bifid process (10LP), the
right lobe of which is flattened in a vertical plane, terminally subacute, but obtuse
from some aspects, curved to the left; left lobe of 10LP dorsiventral, spathulate.
Right cercus of two subcylindrical segments (RC,, RC.); first segment of left
cercus (LC,) clavate, inner margin lobed distally; basal part of inner margin
a little roughened by transverse furrows or creases, but without nodules. Second
segment (LC,) subcylindrical. Ninth sternite (H) produced backwards and to the
right in a blunt lobe, between which and the base of the left cereus are two
structures, one blunt, terminally outcurved, on the right, the other (LCB), probably
the true cercus-basipodite, on the left, i.e., at the base of the left cercus, and fused

222 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. II.

thereto; LCB curved upwards, ending in two small claws. Right cercus-basipodite
rudimentary.

? unknown.

Locality.—Villarica, Paraguay, coll. F. Schade. Holotype ¢ and series of
paratype gg, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University; paratype ¢
in the Macleay Museum, University of Sydney. Named after Mr. Nathan Banks,
Curator in Entomology, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard.

OLIGEMBIA OLIGOTOMOIDES (Enderlein 1912).

Rhagadochir oligotomoides Enderlein, 1912, Embiidinen, in Coll. de Selys-
Longchamps, p. 61.

Enderlein described this species from two males, the locality being given as
South America. I have not seen the types (in the Berlin and Stettin Museums),
but there seems little doubt from Enderlein’s description and figures that the
species should be referred to Oligembia.

Enderlein’s description may be summarized as follows: g. Pale ferruginous-
yellow, head somewhat darker, eyes black, wings greyish-white. Length 41-4$ mm.,
forewing length 3:6 mm., hindwing 3:1 mm. Venation as in O. hubbardi and
O. rossi, but with R, apparently not confluent with R.,,; cross-veins apparently
stronger; R,,; simple in left forewing of the smaller example. Terminalia as in
figure 21 (after Enderlein) ; the projection from the base of the left cercus probably
represents the left cercus-basipodite fused to the cercus, as in O. rossi, O. bantsi
and the undescribed species mentioned below.

Discussion.

The possible affinities of Oligembia have been suggested in the generic
description. Other American genera which may have some obscure relationship
to Oligembia are Teratembia Krauss 1911, from the Argentine, and the genus to be
formed for Hmbia rujicollis de Saussure 1896, from Central America, which is refer-
able neither to Embia nor, as some authors have stated, to Oligotoma (cf., e.g.,
Friederichs, 1934). Both, however, are further removed structurally than is
Diradius, or even Oligotoma.

I have received details of two interesting species referable to Oligembia from
Mr. E. S. Ross. One is from Guatemala, the other from Tres Marias Isds., off the
west coast of Mexico; the latter is structurally similar to O. banksi. These species
will be described shortly by Mr. Ross, and the preparation of a key to the species
of the genus must await these descriptions.

It is probable that further collecting in the countries adjacent to Central
America will bring to light a number of further species of the genus Oligembia.

List of References.

ENDERLEIN, G., 1912.—Embiidinen, in Coll. de Selys-Longchamps, fasc. 3.

FRIEDERICHS, K., 1934.—Das Gemeinschaftsleben der Embiiden und Naheres zur Kenntnis
der Arten. Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte, Bd. 3, Hft. 3.

Hacen, H. A., 1885.—Monograph of the Embiidina. Canad. Entomologist, vol. 17, nos.
8-11 (London, Ontario).

Krauss, H. A., 1911.—Monographie der Embien. Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23 (Stuttgart).

pp Saussure, H., 1896.—Note sur la Tribu des Embiens. Mitt. Schweiz. entomol.

Gesellschaft, vol. 9.

223

A NEW SPECIES OF CHALCID (GENUS HURYTOMA) ASSOCIATED WITH
TEPPERELLA TRILINEATA CAM., A WASP CAUSING GALLING OF THE
FLOWER BUDS OF ACACIA DECURRENS.*

By N. S. Nose, D.Sc.Agr., M.Sc., D.I.C.,
Assistant Entomologist, Department of Agriculture, New South Wales.

(Twelve Text-figures. )

[Read 31st May, 1939.]

A detailed account of the life history of Tepperella trilineata, a wasp which
causes galling of the flower buds of Acacia decurrens var. pauciglandulosa in the
vicinity of Sydney, New South Wales, has already been published by the writer
(1938).

At that time it was pointed out that the species of Hurytoma under discussion,
hitherto undescribed, occurred so abundantly in these galls that it outnumbered
T. trilineata, the primary gall-former.

The unusual behaviour of the larva of a species of Hurytoma was commented
upon, and in the present paper the life history of this species is set out in detail.

The writer (1936) has already discussed the genus Hurytoma, and both
phytophagous and parasitic species in this genus are present in Australia. The
larva of H. gahani is first phytophagous, but later becomes a predator.

MoRrPHOLOGY.

Specimens of this species were submitted to Dr. A. B. Gahan, Senior
Entomologist of the United States Department of Agriculture, and in a letter dated
29th May, 1937, he informed the writer that it differed from any of the species
in the collections at the United States National Museum. He stated that it
ran close to Hurytoma mazzinii and also H. acaciae, two Australian species, but
was neither of these two. He concluded that the species was possibly new. The
writer has since compared specimens with all the available descriptions of
Australian species of this genus and has come to the conclusion that it is
undescribed, and a description of this species is included in the present paper.

EURYTOMA GAHANI, N. sp.
The Adult.

© (fig. 1): Length: Average, 2-6 mm.; maximum, 3:0 mm.; minimum, 2:3 mm.

Head black, evenly and coarsely reticulate and bearing short white setae.
Eyes red, this colour sometimes fading completely in mounted specimens. Mandible
(fig. 2C) brown. Antenna (fig. 2B) very dark brown, except the ring joint and
the base of the scape which is light brown. The scape extends a little beyond
the antennal groove, terminating level with the median ocellus.

* This contribution is one of ten papers on Australian Chalcidoidea submitted
to the University of Sydney in fulfilment of the requirements for the degree of
Doctor of Science in Agriculture.

224 NEW SPECIES OF CHALCID (GENUS EURYTOMA),

Each segment of the funicle is very slightly wider than that preceding it.
The first segment of the funicle is a little longer than wide. The second segment
is a little shorter than the first and is exactly as wide as long. The third segment
of the funicle is slightly longer than the second and is very slightly longer than
it is wide. The fourth segment is approximately the same length as the third and
is very slightly wider than long. ‘The fifth segment is slightly shorter than the
fourth and is slightly wider than long. The club, which is approximately twice
as long as wide, is only very slightly wider than the last segment of the funicle.

Thorax black and, like the head, evenly and coarsely reticulate and bearing
short white setae. Wings hyaline; venation light brown, the postmarginal vein is
only slightly longer than the marginal vein, both being a little longer than the
stigmal vein (fig. 2D).

N.S.NOBLE

Fig. 1.—Hurytoma gahani, adult female (x 15).

Coxae and trochanters of all legs black. Coxae reticulate, more coarsely so
on the hind leg. Outer side of coxae of hind leg conspicuously grooved distally,
and in some mounted specimens the trochanter and base of the femur lie in this
groove. Femur of front and middle leg dark brown except distally, where it
fades to amber, tibia and tarsus amber. Femur of hind leg black except distally,
where it fades to amber, tibia and tarsus amber.

Abdomen black, rounded, not laterally compressed as is the case in many
species of Eurytoma reared from Australian plant galls. First five abdominal
segments smooth and shining, but at high magnifications fine reticulations can
be distinguished on these segments. Remainder of abdomen reticulate and dull,
and bearing a number of scattered white setae. No setae are present on the
first and second abdominal segments. A few short lateral setae borne in a median
position on the third segment. Setae on the fourth segment a little longer and in
a median single row laterally, but extending a little further up on to the dorsal
surface than in the third segment. Setae more numerous on the fifth segment,
being scattered irregularly over the distal half of the segment.

6: Length: Average, 25 mm.; maximum, 2°° mm.; minimum, 2:2 mm. In
general resembles the female, but is less robust. The abdomen is small and
globular, with a distinct petiole. The antenna of the male (fig. 2A) is con-

BY N. S. NOBLE. 225

spicuously larger than that of the female. The longest setae of the antenna are
approximately the length of the segments bearing them.

The type, allotype and numerous paratypes were bred by the writer from
galls caused by Vepperella trilineata on the flower buds of Acacia decurrens at
Lindfield, Sydney, New South Wales, in November, 1936.

The type, allotype and five paratypes of both sexes have been forwarded
to the British Museum of Natural History, South Kensington, London, and six
paratypes of both sexes have also been forwarded to the United States National
Museum, Washington, U.S.A.

Figs. 2, 3—EHurytoma gahani. 2: A, Antenna of male (x 36); B, Antenna of female
(x 36); C, Mandible of female (x 103); D, Stigmal knob of female (x 103). 3: A, B, C,
Ovarian eggs; D, E, Eggs after deposition (all x 103).

The Egg.

The ovarian egg (figs. 3, A-C) is just visible to the unaided eye. It is white
in colour and consists of an oval body bearing anteriorly a short pedicel with a
rounded end and posteriorly a very long slender pedicel which widens out distally.
The dimensions of the various parts of the egg are set out in Table 1. In general
features it bears a marked resemblance to the egg of Hurytoma fellis, a species
which has been studied by the writer (1936).

TABLE 1.—Dimensions of Egg of Eurytoma gahani (in millimetres).

{ )
|

Newly Deposited

Ovarian Egg. Egg.

Total

Length. Body of Egg. Anterior Pedicel. Posterior Pedicel. Body.
| Length. Width. | Length. Width. Length. Width. Length. Width.
Average 0:447 0-137 0-062 0-044 0-007 0-266 0-017 0-158 0-091
Maximum 0,492 0-142 0-066 0-050 0-007 0-310 0-020 0-172 0-096
Minimum 0-393 0:125 0:053 0-040 0-007 0-218 0-016 0-149 0-089

226 NEW SPECIES OF CHALCID (GENUS EURYTOMA),

After deposition (figs. 3, D and E) both the long and the short pedicels may
become flaccid and twisted.

The Larva.

Based on mandible size and shape and the distribution of setae, five larval
stages are recognizable, there being one more stage than in Hurytoma fellis.

Stage I.—The first stage or primary larva (fig. 4) soon after hatching is
clear and translucent, but after feeding the region of the alimentary tract becomes
green. The smallest larva measured was 0:12 mm. in length and 0:06 mm. in
width, being almost invisible to the unaided eye. It consists of a rather prominent
head and thirteen clearly defined segments, the head being somewhat chitinized
and pale amber in colour. The larva is slightly dorso-ventrally flattened, and when
seen in side view is only very slightly arched. The head is slightly narrower than
the thoracic segments, the second segment being widest, the larva then tapering
gradually to the last segment.

Figs. 4-8.—Hurytoma gahani. 4, Ventral view of first-stage larva (x 180). 5, Ventral
view of second-stage larva (x 103). 6, Ventral view of third-stage larva (x 55). 7,
Lateral view of mature larva (x 20). 8, Front view of head of mature larva (x 635).

When viewed from beneath, the head is semi-circular in outline. The mouth
is ventral and is surrounded by a short rounded tubular structure formed from
the integument. In this respect it resembles closely the first stage larva of
Habrocytus cerealeliae which has been studied by the writer (1932) and, as in this
larva, this tubular outgrowth is most conspicuous when the larva elevates the
head when moving. The mandibles (fig. 9A) are triangular in outline, unidentate,
lightly chitinized and pale golden in colour, slightly curved and have the tips
overlapping, their average length being 0-007 mm.

Dorsally the head bears a pair of very minute truncate antennae, while
ventrally and a little to each side of the mouth one pair of minute setae are present.
There are no setae or papillae on any of the abdominal segments.

BY N. S. NOBLE. raya Th

Towards the close of the first larval stage the development of lateral tracheal
trunks, united anteriorly and disappearing posteriorly, gives the first indication
of the respiratory system.

Stage II—In general appearance the second-stage larva (fig. 5) resembles
the first stage fairly closely, being still more or less translucent with the
alimentary tract imparting a dark green colour to that region of the larva. It
consists of a head and thirteen segments, the head now being somewhat smaller
in proportion to the body segments, and being now no longer more heavily
chitinized than the latter. The smallest larva measured was 0:37 mm. in length
and 0:13 mm. in width.

The mandibles (fig. 9B), which are pale amber in colour, are unidentate,
very slightly curved and triangular in outline, their average length being 0-021
mm., the maximum being 0:023 mm., and the minimum 0-018 mm.

On the dorsal surface of the head there is a pair of truncate antennae, and
on the ventral surface there is a pair of large setae, there being a shorter pair
of setae on the front border of the head. Setae are present only on the three
thoracic segments. On the first segment there is a pair of very large ventral setae
and a smaller lateral pair, while on the second and third segments there is a pair
of smaller ventral setae and also a pair of lateral setae about the same length.

The respiratory system is now an open one. It consists of the two main
tracheal trunks, one extending along each side of the body, being united anteriorly
and posteriorly by transverse commissures. From the main trunks four pairs of
spiracular trunks pass out to open spiracles, one pair being situated on segments
two, four, five and six, the spiracles on segment two being much the largest.
A limited number of tracheae pass to the various organs.

Stage I1].—The third-stage larva (fig. 6) differs little in general appearance
from the second stage. It is now more white in colour and the contents of the
alimentary tract are dark green to almost black. The larva is very slightly dorso-
ventrally flattened and in side view is very slightly arched. The smallest larva
measured was 0:50 mm. in length and 0:19 mm. in width. The mandibles (fig. 9C)
are unidentate, triangular in outline, amber in colour, with the tips conspicuously
curved and overlapping. They average 0:035 mm. in length, the maximum being
0:040 mm. and the minimum 0-033 mm.

On the dorsal surface of the head is a fairly prominent pair of antennae, which
are more or less cylindrical with rounded ends, and pale amber in colour. Between
the antennae on the dorsal surface is a pair of fine setae, a second pair also being
dorsal and further back and more to the sides of the head. On the front margin
of the head and in front of and a little to the sides of the head, there is another
pair of setae, and ventrally just above the mandibles there is also a very short
pair of setae, while by far the largest on the head is a pair of ventral setae
situated below and to the sides of the mouth. There are thus five pairs of setae
of various sizes situated on the head.

Below the mandibles there is a large number of rounded sensory papillae
of various sizes, a more limited number being situated above the mandibles.

On the first three abdominal segments there are eight setae. One extremely
minute pair are dorsal and two large pairs are ventral and one pair are lateral.
From segment four to segment twelve, inclusive, there are two pairs of setae,
one minute pair being dorsal and a larger pair being lateral. On the thirteenth
segment the lateral setae are always wanting and only in some larvae examined
can the minute dorsal setae be distinguished.

bo
bo

6

NEW SPECIES OF CHALCID (GENUS EURYTOMA),

During the later period of the second stage, further spiracles develop, and in
the third stage there are nine pairs of open spiracles situated on segments two
to ten inclusive and there is now a very well developed respiratory system. The
first pair of spiracles are much larger than the succeeding ones.

Stage IV.—The fourth-stage larva is white in colour, cylindrical and arched,
and tapering gently towards both ends. The smallest larva measured was
0:96 mm. in length and 0:32 mm. in width.

The mandibles (fig. 9D) are triangular in outline, still only lightly chitinized
and amber in colour, slightly curved and average 0:064 mm. in length, the
maximum being 0:069 mm. and the minimum 0:059 mm. The antennae, apart
from size, are very similar to those of the third-stage larva, and the number and
distribution of the setae on the head is the same in the two stages. The
distribution and number of setae on the abdomen is, however, different. In the
fourth stage there are eight elongate amber setae on the ventral and lateral
surface of the first three segments, there being two small setae on each side of
the dorsal surface of these three segments.

On the remaining segments there are two pairs of large lateral setae and
one pair of minute dorsal setae on each segment. These setae become smaller
on each succeeding segment, those on the last segment being very minute. A well
developed open tracheal system, as in the third stage, is present.

Stage V—The fifth and last larval stage (fig. 7) is cylindrical and arched,
and tapers towards both ends, much more conspicuously than do any of the
preceding stages. The colour varies from white to light grey. The alimentary
tract is black, but this, being mainly masked by fat body, imparts a darker grey
appearance to this region of the larva.

It consists of a head and thirteen segments. The average length of the
mature larva is 3:32 mm., the maximum being 3-54 mm. and the minimum 2:97 mm.
The average width of the mature larva is 1:07 mm., the maximum being 1:15 mm.
and the minimum 0:94 mm.

The head (fig. 8) is of the typical generalized chalcidoid type, being more or
less hemispherical in outline. The mandibles (fig. 9E) are now much more heavily
chitinized, being brown in colour, somewhat triangular with a very broad base,
bidentate, with one very much longer curved and more heavily chitinized tooth.
The average length of the mandibles is 0-106 mm., the maximum being 0-116 mm.
and the minimum 0-092 mm. '

The head, as in preceding stages, bears a dorsal pair of cylindrical antennae
(fig. 9F) and five pairs of setae of various sizes, their distribution being as in
the third and fourth larval stages. Below the mandibles there are also four pairs
of minute sensory setae and four pairs of minute papillae, their distribution being
shown in figure 8. ‘

The number and distribution of the setae on the abdomen is the same as in
the fourth stage, i.e. there are ten large lateral and ventral setae (figs. 9, G, H,
and I) and two pairs of smaller dorsal setae on the first three segments, while
on the remaining segments there are two pairs of lateral and one pair of dorsal
and smaller setae. With the decrease in size of the posterior segments all these
setae are brought closer together and more or less form a median circlet.

A very profusely branching open tracheal system is present with nine pairs
of open spiracles, one pair on each of segments two to ten inclusive.

Intermediate measurements of the various larval stages of Eurytoma gahani
are given in Table 2.

BY N.

Ss.

NOBLE.

TABLE 2.—Dimensions (in millimetres) of the various Larval Stages of Eurytoma gahani.

Average Width

Stage of Larva. Length. Width. renal

Stage 1 .. .. Largest 0-30 0-11 0-063
Smallest 0-12 0-06

Stage 2 .. .. Largest 0-51 0-18 0:098
Smallest ()o8%7/ 0-13

Stage 3 .. .. Largest 1:04 0-32 0-180
Smallest 0-50 0-19

Stage 4... .. Largest 1:66 0-50 0-304
Smallest 0-96 0:32

Stage 5 .. .. Largest 3:54 ihorths) 0-443
Smallest 1:68 0-64

BIOLOGY.

Length of Life of Adults.
Newly-emerged adults of both sexes of H. gahani were placed in glass tubes

six inches in length and one inch in diameter.

One end of the tube was covered
with cheese cloth and the other was plugged with cotton wool which was kept
moistened with sugar and water solution.

These were held in the laboratory

until death; the length of life under these conditions is set out in Table 3.

TABLE 3.—Length of Life of Eurytoma gahani in the Laboratory.

Length of Life Number of Number of Length of Life Number of Number of
in Days. Males. Females. in Days. Males. Females.
1 4 3 15 2 2
2 21 4 16 1 3
3 19 26 17 = =
4 29 16 18 2 —_

5 21 18 19 2 —

6 31 10 20 — 1
a 27 25 21 1 1
8 38 24 22 1 il
9 18 44 23 — —_
10 12 20 24 — =
11 4 17 25 — 1
12 10 13 26 = 1
13 5 7 27 _ 2

14 2 1
Total 250 240
Average length of life of male wasps, 6:82 days; female wasps, 8:17 days.

Maximum
Minimum

”? ” ” ” ” ” 22

” ” ” ” ” ” 1 day >

”

93

”

”

27

”

1 day.

230 NEW SPECIES OF CHALCID (GENUS EURYTOMA),

Under these conditions the average length of life was comparatively short,
but limited numbers of adults lived for more than two weeks, and a few females
lived for a period of three weeks or more, which is considerably longer than the
adults of the primary gall-former, Vepperella trilineata, lived under similar
eonditions.

Habits of Adults.

Adults are comparatively sluggish and do not fly readily, it being possible to
pick buds on which females are resting without disturbing them. However, they
can fiy quite well, and during November and December, 1936, on bright sunny
days, large numbers were to be seen flying around the galled tree, individuals
remaining on the wing for some minutes.

When confined in tubes in the laboratory, this species fed much more readily
on sugar solution than did the adults of Tepperella trilineata.

Percentage of Sexes.

Of a total of 1,605 adults which emerged from galls in 1936, 1,028 or 64-05
per cent. were females, and 577 or 35:95 per cent. were males. It will be seen that
females outnumbered males in a ratio of almost 2 to 1. It is worthy of note that
in Hurytoma fellis, the citrus gall wasp, studied by the writer (1936), of 4,889
adults, 3,122 or 63-86 per cent. were females, a percentage which is remarkably
close to that recorded for Hurytoma gahani.

Mating.

This species mated much more readily in the laboratory than did any of the
other species from the galls on Acacia decurrens. There is nothing unusual in
the procedure. The male spends a few moments on the dorsum of the female
vibrating the antennae in front of those of the latter, and fertilization follows, the
male invariably returning to the back of the female after coupling, but a second
contact was never observed. The time occupied ranged from 7 to 20 seconds,
the average being 11 seconds. Adults were frequently observed mating a few
minutes after emerging from the galls.

Oviposition.

Unlike Tepperella trilineata, the female of Hurytoma gahani at the time of
emergence from the galls has comparatively few eggs ready for deposition, and
even after being kept in tubes in the laboratory and fed for some days, the number
of well-developed eggs is still limited. Adults of Hurytoma gahani live longer
and are more vigorous than the adults of 7. trilineata, and it is probable that
Oviposition in the former species is a much more gradual process and extends over
a longer period. 1

At the time the first adults of Hurytoma gahani emerge all the flower buds
are very well developed, but it is several weeks before the tree blossoms, so that
these early emergents oviposit in advanced flower buds. During the greater part
of the emergence period of this species, however, the tree is in flower. It has
been pointed out that in globular flower-heads in which Tepperella trilineata has
Oviposited only the upper flowers open, and many females of Hurytoma gahani
oviposit in the fleshy green base of the unopened portion of the flower heads.

At the time the later adults of Hurytoma gahani emerge, viz. the last half
of December and early January, the tree has completed flowering, the normal
flowers have died and fallen, and the flower heads in which 7. trilineata has

BY N. S. NOBLE. 231

Oviposited are now present as very minute galls, and in these Hurytoma gahani
oviposits.

The tips of the antennae are held just above the surface of the plant tissues
to locate a suitable oviposition site. The abdomen is then brought down at right
angles to the normal position, the ovipositor is exposed and worked into the
gall until some stage of 7. trilineata is located, and then a single egg is deposited,
the process of oviposition being rather protracted. At the time the first adults of
Eurytoma gahani emerge, a limited number of eggs of Tepperella trilineata are
present in the buds, and the egg of EH. gahani in such instances is deposited
alongside the egg of 7. trilineata.

During the greater part of the emergence period of Hurytoma gahani,
T. trilineata is present in the first larval stage, and in large numbers of
dissections during December 1936, a single egg of Hurytoma gahani was found
adhering to the integument of a first-stage larva of T. trilineata, and in two
instances two eggs of H. gahani were found adhering to the integument of a
second-stage larva of 7. trilineata.

It is evident that the egg of H. gahani is always deposited alongside some
stage of T. trilineata, the exact stage of development of the latter species, at the
time of oviposition, apparently being of little significance.

Superparasitism.

In four instances it was evident that at least two eggs of Hurytoma gahani
had been laid in the cell occupied by Tepperella trilineata.

On 14th December, 1936, and again on 15th February, 1937, two eggs of
Eurytoma gahani were found adhering to the integument of a second-stage larva
of T. trilineata. In both cases the eggs were at distinctly different stages of
development.

On 17th July, 1936, two larvae of Hurytoma gahani, both in the fourth stage,
were found in a cell with a maturing larva of 7. trilineata. Both these larvae
were normal and active, but the larva of TZ. trilineata was very unhealthy in
appearance.

Again on ist September, 1936, two fifth-stage larvae of Hurytoma gahani were
found in the one cell accompanied by the dead remains of a fifth-stage larva of
T. trilineata.

Never more than one adult, however, was ever observed to emerge from a
single gall cell.

Larval Development.

The stages of Hurytoma gahani and Tepperella trilineata found in association
during a period of 16 months during 1936 and 1937 are set out in Table 4. It must
be remembered that as early as 16th May, 1936, gall cells were dissected in which
Eurytoma gahani had already devoured the larva of T. trilineata and was in the
last larval stage, and the number of such cells increased with each succeeding
dissection date. The figures indicated in Table 4 apply only to dissections in
which both species were still present in the cell, and this table does not give any
indication of the relative abundance of the two species.

Table 4 should be consulted in conjunction with Table 5, when considering
dissections during the second half of 1936, as the latter table indicates clearly
at the different dissection dates just what numbers of Jepperella trilineata still
remained in association with the larvae of Hurytoma gahani, the numbers of

ae, NEW SPECIES OF CHALCID (GENUS EURYTOMA),

mature larvae of the latter species present indicating the numbers of Tepperella
trilineata which had been devoured.

Though the eggs of the two species may be found in association, it was much
more usual to find the egg of Hurytoma gahani in the gall cell with the first-stage
larva of T. trilineata.

TABLE 4.—Stages of Tepperella trilineata and Eurytoma gahani found associated in Gall Cells on Acacia
decurrens during a period of Sixteen Months.

Stage of Larvae of Stage of Larvae of
Date of Number of Gall Tepperella trilineata Eurytoma gahani in
Dissection. Cells Examined. in Cell. the same Cell.

1935-36 Galls.

11/5/36 4 4 fourth. 1 second, 3 third.
1 1 fourth. 1 third.
16/5/36 3 3 fifth. 2 third, 1 fifth,
1 1 fourth. 1 third.
27/5/36 1 1 fifth. 1 third.
5/6/36 il 1 fifth. 1 third.
11/7/36 1 1 third. 1 second.
16/7/36 1 1 third. 1 second.
4 4 fifth. 3 fourth, 1 fifth.
9/8/36 9 9 fifth. 1 third, 8 fourth.
12/8/36 7 7 fifth. 7 fourth.
33 3 fourth 2 second, 1 third.
6/9/36 1 1 fourth. 1 third.
1936-37 Galls.
31/10/36 1 1 egg. 1 egg.
29/11/36 1 1 first. 1 egg.
13/12/36 1 1 first. 1 egg.
14/12/36 1 1 second. 2 eggs.
16/1/37 al 1 first. 1 first.
il 1 second. 1 first.
30/1/37 3 3 first. 3 first.
1/2/37 2 2 first. 2 first.
2 2 first. 2 eggs.
15/2/37 il 1 second. 1 first.
9/3/37 4 4 second. 4 first.
il 1 third. 1 third.
1 1 fifth. 1 fourth.
2/4/37 1 1 second. 1 first.
4 4 third. 2 first, 2 second.
20/4/37 9 9 third. 9 second. ,
7/5/37 1 1 second. 1 second.
8 8 third. 8 second.
7 7 fourth. 6 second, 1 third.
1/6/37 1 1 third. 1 second.
5 5 fourth. 5 third.
29/6/37 1 1 third. 1 second.
2 2 fourth. 2 third.
6 6 fifth. 5 third, 1 fourth.
15/7/37 13 13 fifth. 13 third.
6/8/37 14 14 fifth. 14 fourth.
13/8/37 18 18 fifth. 2 third, 16 fourth.
30/8/37 6 6 fifth, 6 fourth.
1 1 third. 1 second.

°

BY N. S. NOBLE. evo

In January and the beginning of February, 1937, the first-stage larvae of the
two species were sometimes found in association, but for the greater part of the
year the larvae of TJ. trilineata were one stage, and occasionally two stages,
ahead of the larvae of Hurytoma gahani with which they were associated, and the
size of the larvae of the former was always greatly in excess of the size of those
of the latter species.

k Ae)
en

ee
WA

Fig. 9—Eurytoma gahani: A, Mandible of first-stage larva; B, Mandible of second-
stage larva; C, Mandible of third-stage larva; D, Mandible of fourth-stage larva; H,
Mandible of fifth-stage larva; F, Antenna of fifth-stage larva. (x 180.) G, H, I, Setae
from first segment of mature larva (x 103).

Fig. 10.—Cross section of a fully-developed unilocular gall showing a maturing larva
of Tepperella trilineata in the cell together with a fourth-stage larva of Hurytoma gahani,
the latter larva being the smaller (x 7). Sectioned 14th August, 1936.

During the earlier part of the larval life the plant tissues fit closely up
against the integument of the larvae, and there is no room for movement. As the
two larvae feed upon the contents of the surrounding nutrient layer, their
alimentary tracts, which are blind sacs, become green in colour, and gradually
as the nutrient layer is devoured and the galls increase in size, the two larvae are
to be found in fairly large gall chambers in which there is room for movement,
and while it is more usual to find the small larva of E. gahani touching the larva
of 7. trilineata, the two larvae are sometimes found at opposite ends of the
chamber (fig. 10).

All stages of Hurytoma gahani, except the last larval stage, possess some
powers of locomotion, the second and third larval stages in, particular being able
to crawl along quite actively. With the increased space in the gall chambers
is correlated the further development of the respiratory systems in the two species
of larvae. This has been referred to when discussing the morphology of these
species.

The two species of larvae continue to develop normally together until the
late winter, when it is found that the majority of the larvae of T. trilineata have
reached the last larval stage. At this time the galls have also reached their full
size. However, larvae of T. trilineata, which are present in cells with the larvae
of #. gahani, are never able to pupate, and by the time the larvae of the latter
species reach the fifth or last larval stage, the larvae of TJ. trilineata have an
unhealthy appearance, and are sluggish and abnormal. Eventually the cells are
found to contain maturing larvae of Hurytoma gahani and the dead remains of
the larvae of TJ. trilineata, and finally all traces of the latter disappear, having

234 NEW SPECIES OF CHALCID (GENUS EURYTOMA),

been devoured by the last-stage larvae of Hurytoma gahani, which reach maturity
and subsequently pupate in the cell formerly occupied by the two species. Factors
which bring about the destruction of the larvae of 7. trilineata are not clear.

It is possible that the exhaustion of the food supply may play an important
part, as examination of cells in which the larva of T. trilineata are dead shows
that the inner wall is hard and dry, the nutrient layer having completely dis-
appeared, this exhaustion of the food supply possibly being due to the extra
demands made upon it owing to the presence of two larvae. This exhaustion of
the food may cause the larva of 7. trilineata to become weak or even to die, and
hunger may be the factor which causes the larva of Hurytoma gahani to become
predaceous and devour the larva with which it formerly lived in harmony. On
the other hand, it is possible that the parasitic or predatory habit may develop
normally in the larva of Hurytoma gahani once it reaches the fifth stage, and it
may attack and destroy the larva of J. trilineata regardless of the state of the
food supply.

Many larvae of T. trilineata which had recently died, but in which the stomach
contents were still quite fluid, were mounted on slides and cover slips were super-
imposed and light pressure was applied. The integument became distended, but
there was no evidence of any break in the integument, which would be present
had the larva of Hurytoma gahani made a direct attack upon it. Continued
pressure of the cover glass usually forced the stomach contents out through the
anus. In more shrivelled specimens of dead larvae of 7. trilineata gaping ruptures
were present in the integument. These must have been made by the larva of
Hurytoma gahani, but it seems much more likely that these ruptures were made
after the death of 7. trilineata, as otherwise such ruptures should be present in all
the dead larvae.

In any case Hurytoma gahani behaves as a predator rather than a parasite,
and though many hundreds of cells were examined in 1936 in which both species
of larvae were present, it was only on very rare occasions that the larva of
Eurytoma gahani was actually observed feeding on the larva of T. trilineata.

Though the great majority of the larvae of 7. trilineata were devoured during
August, 1936, at each weekly examination of galls from May onwards occasional
maturing larvae of Hurytoma gahani were found in cells with dead T. trilineata
larvae of the last stage. Though at any particular period of the year the majority
of the larvae of Hurytoma gahani are at the same stage, a few cells may be found
in which the larvae of this species are more advanced.

In Table 5 are set out the results of a series of gall dissections during the
last six months of 1936 and also in August and September, 1937, and which
indicate the various stages of both Tepperella trilineata and Hurytoma gahani
present. Some maturing larvae of Eurytoma gahani were found as early as 16th
May, 1936, but it will be seen from Table 5 that in the dissections of galls on
3rd August and 9th August only six larvae of Hurytoma gahani were found alone,
while the larvae of the two species were still together in 90 cells.

On 22nd August, 1936, however, in 52 out of a total of 58 cells examined
it was found that the larvae of Hurytoma gahani had devoured those of
T. trilineata, and in 1936 and 1937 it was mainly during the last half of August
and the first half of September that the majority of the larvae of EH. gahani
devoured those of 7. trilineata and reached maturity. A remarkable increase in
the size of the larvae of Eurytoma gahani occurs during this time, larvae of this
species which have devoured the larvae of 7. trilineata increasing to twice the size

BY N. S. NOBLE.

235

TABLE 5.—Results of Dissection of Galls on Acacia decurrens showing Stages of Tepperella trilineata
and Eurytoma gahani present during the last half of 1936 and in the spring of 1937.

Cells
contain-
ing both Tepperella trilineata. Eurytoma gahani. Cells
No. of No. of T. tri- occupied
Date of Cells Emerg- | lineata by
dissection. |} Exam- | gence and Stage V other
ined. Holes. pe Larvae. | Pupae. | Adults. | Larvae. | Pupae. | Adults. | Species.
oma
gahani.
1936 Galls.
|
8-16/6/36 | 545 — 278 262 Sa Sy 5 — — —
26/7/36 | 36 — 20 15 — — 1 — — —
28/7/36 30 a 13 16 1 a — — — =

3/8/36 75 — 49 8 13 — 5 — — —

9/8/36 | 68 —_ 41 20 6 _ 1 — — —
18/8/36 82 —_ 26 — 21 — 35 —_ — —
22/8/36 85 — 6 8 19 = | > & — — —
30/8/36 | 136 oan 13 | 9 30. 1 | 83 — — —

6/9/36 MS | <= | 1a | 2 40 3 144 cs = 50

9/9/36 77 — 5 — 12 1 45 — — 14
13/9/36 98 1 Hl — 14 9 44 — —— 29
20/9/36 151 35 — — 2 10 69 — — 35
27/9/36 222 42 1 = 1 il | Tap = = 25

4/10/36 177 34 2 — 4 4 103 1 — 29
11/10/36 113 18 — ). GB 7 — 25
18/10/36 153 54 — 67 11 — 21
25/10/36 102 28 — — — —_— 39 31 —— 4

1/11/36 114 48 — 27 BY — 2

8/11/36 109 46 —= = — — 15 44 4 —
15/11/36 35 15 — — — — | 1 17 2 —
22/11/36 | 44 Ry MN ; oo 14 5 —

|
1937 Galls.

6/8/37 20 — 17 3 — —- — — — =
13/8/37 43 2s 23 10 4 = 4 = _ 2
30/8/37 57 — 23 5 15 — 6 ee == 8

13-16/9/37 516 — 11 _ 84 8 322 — — 91

First adult of Tepperella trilineata emerged on 7th September, 1936.

Masts yee 3s 3 5 bp », 12th October, 1936.
First ,, ,, Eurytoma gahani Fr ;, 30th October, 1936.
Tastes, es spss 5 ; 3 5 5th January, 1937.

The first adult of 7. trilineata of the following generation emerged on 19th September, 1937.

of larvae of the same stage which are still accompanied by the normal larvae of
T. trilineata. This great increase takes place in a very short space of time, and
it is evident that at this period the larva of T. trilineata provides an abundant

source of highly nutritious food.

All the available evidence points to the fact that after the larva of Hurytoma
gahani devours the larva of T. trilineata it partakes of no further food, but it is
evident that this species remains in the mature larval stage within the galls for

several months prior to pupation.

236 NEW SPECIES OF CHALCID (GENUS EURYTOMA),

A number of larvae of Eurytoma gahani were taken from cells in August
after devouring the larvae of 7. trilineata and were measured, and they were just
as large as larvae of the same species removed from the galls several months
later. Moreover, it has already been pointed out that at the time the larva becomes
predaceous the inner wall of the gall cell or chamber is hard and dry.

Many larvae of Eurytoma gahani which were removed from galls on 2nd
August, 1936, and placed on cotton wool in petri dishes remained alive for periods
of two and three months and finally voided waste matter and pupated normally.

The smallest and the largest larvae of the various stages of Hurytoma gahani
measured are set out in Table 2. It will be seen that the growth in the various
stages is fairly regular, there being comparatively little overlapping in size in the
various stages, and that the larva almost doubles its size during the last larval
stage.

Dissection of the larvae of Tepperella trilineata which are in cells with
Eurytoma gahani shows that numbers of them contain also larvae of a parasite,
Megastigmus sp. As Hurytoma gahani devours the larvae of TJ. trilineata it
accidentally also becomes a predator of the larvae of Megastigmus sp. in those cells.

During 1936 and before any of the larvae of Tepperella trilineata had been
devoured, six twigs of galls were taken and every cell examined and the species
present recorded. Cells containing strange larvae were discarded, and the number
of cells in which T. trilineata occurred alone and with Hurytoma gahani were
recorded, and then all the larvae of TJ. trilineata were dissected in order to
determine whether Megastigmus sp. was present. The results of these dissections
are set out in Table 6.

TABLE 6.—Numbers of Larvae of Tepperella trilineata, Megastigmus sp. and Eurytoma gahani present in Galls
on Acacia decurrens at Lindfield, Sydney, in 1936.

| | |
| Cells
| | containing
| | | Total Cells Cells Cells Larvae of
| | Total Cells containing containing | containing Megastigmus
Twig Total Gall | containing | Larvae of Larvae of only Larvae | sp. within
No. | Cells. Larvae of Megastigmus Eurytoma Ofer | Larvae of
T. trilineata. sp. gahani. trilineata. | QT. trilineata.
Larvae of EB.
| gahani absent.
|
1 54 | 54 15 25 21 8
2 63 63 27 29 19 | 15
3 54 54 Qi. 26 15 | 13
4 136 136 50 78 36 sh mee
5 116 | 116 40 68 35 | 13
6 122 122 52 67 29 26
—_—-—— . —___—. | | | —
| |
Total 545 | 545 | 211 293 155 97

Knowing the habits of these three species, it is evident that though there were
originally 545 cells containing larvae of 7. trilineata, only 155 or 28:44 per cent. of
this species could have emerged as adults, while from the same galls, though 211
larvae of Megastigmus sp. were present, only 97 or 17:80 per cent. could have

BY N. S. NOBLE. Zor

emerged as adults, while of the 293 larvae of Hurytoma gahani present and which
occupied 53-76 per cent. of the cells, all would have emerged as adults, no larvae of
this species ever having been found parasitized, though many hundreds have been
examined. In the spring of 1937 examination of a further series of 545 gall cells
from the same tree showed that 362 or 66-42 per cent. would have yielded adults
of Hurytoma gahani, this remarkably successful species having increased in
numbers at the expense of Tepperella trilineata and Megastigmus sp. as compared
with 1936.

The preceding figures give an excellent idea of the relative abundance of the
three species of Chalcids in the galls. It is of interest to note that until the
larvae of 7. trilineata and Eurytoma gahani reach the last stage, the development
of 7. trilineata when associated with H. gahani was just as rapid as that of larvae
which were in cells alone, indicating that during this period the presence of the
larva of Hurytoma gahani has no visible adverse effect upon the larva of
T. trilineata. This is further borne out by the fact that development of galls in
which the two larvae are associated in the cells is just as rapid and normal as in
galls in which the cells were occupied by the larvae of 7. trilineata alone.

The association of these two species of larvae in the one gall chamber is a
remarkable and unusual one.

Kinsey (1920), who has made an exhaustive study of cynipid wasps, which
are the main gall-formers of the United States, in discussing inquilines in the
galls, pointed out that no struggle existed between these and the primary gall-
formers, that the larvae of the two species lived in closely identical environments,
but that they did not come in contact with one another or interfere with one
another in any way. Judged on this basis, Hurytoma gahani could not at any
stage be classed as an inquiline. In some respects during its early larval stages
its behaviour resembles that of an inquiline, but it is always a competitor and
becomes a predator in its last larval stage.

Triggerson (1914) recorded an unusual phenomenon in the case of a Cynipid
gall wasp, Dryophanta erinacei, in America. A second species of Cynipid, Synergus
erinacei, destroyed the larva of D. erinacei, and then tunnelled through the galls
to the various cavities and fed upon the occupants.

The occurrence of the parasitic and phytophagous habit in a single chalcid
species has been observed by a number of workers, but the behaviour of Hurytoma
gahani, in a number of respects, is unusual. It is the intention of the writer to
discuss phytophagy and parasitism in the Chalcidoidea in a later paper.

Pupation and the Pupal Period.

As with the other species studied in this gall complex, no waste matter is
voided during larval life, but some days prior to pupation the larva voids from
the anus a quantity of black and fairly solid waste matter. In the gall cells this
waste matter usually becomes broken to fine black particles which adhere to the
larva and later the pupa, but sometimes it remains as one long twisted black
strand adhering to the tip of the pupa. The quantity of waste matter voided
by the mature larva is considerable and much more than in any chalcid larvae
previously studied by the writer.

On first passing to the pupal stage, the pupa is a uniform white in colour,
but within twenty-four hours the head, thorax and wing buds become amber and
the pupae remain thus for approximately two weeks, when they gradually
commence to turn black, and some days before emergence the pupae are a

238 NEW SPECIES OF CHALCID (GENUS EURYTOMA),

uniform black. The average length of the pupa of Hurytoma gahani is 2:46 mm.,
the maximum being 2-66 mm., and the minimum 2:19 mm.

From August until November, 1936, large numbers of mature larvae were
dissected from galls and placed on either blotting paper or cotton wool in petri
dishes, and fifty-eight of these pupated in a normal manner and eventually emerged
as adults. The pupal period under these conditions is set out in Table 7. It will
be seen that the pupal period ranged from 25 to 36 days, the average for male
wasps being 32-84 days and for female wasps 33:13 days. The first pupa was
found in a gall on 4th October, 1936, and the first adult of Hurytoma gahani
emerged on 30th October, 1936.

TABLE 7.—Pupal period of Eurytoma gahani in the Laboratory, 1936.

Pupal Period Number of | Number of
in Days. Males. Females.
25 | — 1
26 1 —
27 —_— —_
28 1 1
29 1 2
30 1 1
31 1 1
32 4 1
33 7 6
34 ba’ 8
35 3 7
36 3 3
Total ie A 31

|

Average pupal period of male wasps, 32-84 days ; female wasps, 33-13 days.
Maximum 29 ” ” ” ” 36 ” 39 be) 36 ”
Minimum ” ” ” ” ” 26 ” be) be) 25 3”

Emergence of Adults.

Adult wasps emerge by eating a cylindrical channel out to the exterior of
the gall. In figure 11 is shown graphically the daily emergence of 2,779 adults
of Eurytoma gahani from galls on Acacia decurrens in 1936.

It will be seen that emergence commenced on 30th October, 1936, and continued
until 5th January, 1937. Though the emergence period extended over ‘68 days,
it will be seen that by far the greatest numbers emerged during the second half
of November and the first half of December. This emergence period was
approximately twice as long as that of JT. trilineata from the same tree.

In figure 11 is also shown graphically the emergence of 1,058 adults of
T. trilineata and 1,559 adults of Megastigmus sp., an internal larval parasite of
Tepperella trilineata. While figure 11 indicates the emergence periods of the three
species, it does not represent their relative abundance, as it was not always
possible to obtain emergence records of the three species from the same galls, the
total period being so extensive that galls used in the early part of the emergence
period became so hard and dry that they were unsuitable for later emergence

BY N. S. NOBLE. 239

| eGo al a St ee ae
al oa a oN IB Ss a
14,0

ae HA a

SERIE Eee Eee
suena UeaRELMRMMIEEG ce
=| OATES 1 19 ESS
ALL CCS@ CC ee PEEP EEE PRES

7 u 1S 19 a 27
PTEMBER Gaze a an M a
SEPTEMBE 5 EMERGENCE DATES Dee Be

Fig. 11.—Graph showing daily emergence of Tepperella trilineata, Megastigmus sp.
and Hurytoma gahani in 1936-37, from galls on Acacia decurrens.
(1058) ZT. trilineata
(1559) Megastigmus sp. ------------
(2779) H. gahani —--—--—:: =

records. It will be seen that the first adult of Hurytoma gahani did not emerge
until eighteen days after the last adult of TJ. trilineata emerged and only six
days before the last adult of Megastigmus sp. emerged.

In figure 12 is shown graphically the emergence of 1,605 adults of Hurytoma
gahani, representing the total emergence of this species from one batch of galls

: ug

perience tt
sta ui ut pf

Oct. Neveenes vigiaitaec ae EC
EMERGENCE Dates
Fig. 12.—Graph showing daily emergence of 1028 females and 577 males of Hurytoma
gahani from galls on Acacia decurrens in 1936-37.
(1028) females
(577) males ------------

240 NEW SPECIES OF CHALCID (GENUS EURYTOMA),

in 1936, the emergence of the two sexes being shown separately. It will be seen
that while the two sexes emerged over approximately the same period, in the
early part of the emergence period males predominated, while later the females
were greatly in excess of the males.

During the later part of the emergence period, the galls shrivel, become black
and extremely hard, and fall from the tree, but it was found that adults of
Eurytoma gahani emerged from these fallen woody galls in a normal manner.

SUMMARY.

The morphology and biology of Hurytoma gahani, a new species, which occurs
in the galls on the flower buds of Acacia decurrens caused by Tepperella trilineata,
is described.

Like that of the primary gall-former, 7. trilineata, the life cycle of Hurytoma
gahani is annual.

The adults of Z. gahani emerge from the galls mainly during November and
December, some time after all the adults of 7. trilineata have emerged.

Of 1,605 adults of Hurytoma gahani which emerged in 1936, 1,028 or 64:05 per
cent. were females and 577 or 35:95 per cent. were males. The average length of
life of male wasps was 6:82 days, and of female wasps 8:17 days, but the maximum
length of life of male wasps was 22 days and of female wasps 27 days.

The egg of Hurytoma gahani is deposited alongside the egg, or more commonly
the first-stage larva, of T. trilineata within the minute acacia flower-buds or aborted
flower-heads.

The larva of H#. gahani, on hatching, lives with the larva of Tepperella
trilineata in the one cell, the development of the latter usually being at least one
stage more advanced than the larva of Hurytoma gahani.

Five larval stages occur, and these are described in detail.

The two species of larvae live phytophagously on the plant tissues, and the
larva of 7. trilineata reaches the fifth or last larval stage, but when the larva of
Eurytoma gahani is also present, the larva of 7. trilineata never pupates.

By the time the larva of H. gahani reaches the fifth stage, the larva of
T. trilineata is unhealthy in appearance and is eventually devoured by the larva
of #. gahani.

Possible factors concerned in the change from a phytophagous to a predatory
habit in the fifth larval stage of H. gahani are discussed.

Having devoured the larva of 7. trilineata, the larva of Hurytoma gahani is
fully-fed and may remain in the gall cells for several months before pupating. The
pupal period is approximately four weeks.

Of 545 gall cells examined in 1936, 293 or 53:76 per cent. were occupied by
the larvae of Eurytoma gahani and T. trilineata together, and within 114 of the
larvae of the latter species there were also larvae of Megastigmus sp., an internal
parasite, and all of these latter larvae would have been devoured when the larvae
of T. trilineata were eaten by those of EHurytoma@ gahani.

In the spring of 1937, examination of a further 545 gall cells from the same
tree showed that 362 or 66-42 per cent. were occupied by Hurytoma gahani.

Though several thousand cells were examined, no larvae of H. gahani were
ever found to be parasitized.

The presence of the larva of EZ. gahani does not affect the development of the
galls.

BY N. S. NOBLE. 241

Acknowledgement.

The writer wishes to acknowledge his indebtedness to Dr. A. B. Gahan, Senior
Entomologist of the United States Department of Agriculture, for his critical
opinion on the species under discussion.

Literature Cited.

KINsBy, A. C., 1920.—New species and synonymy of American Cynipidae. Bull. Am. Mus.
Nat. Hist., xlii, 293-317.

NoBuE, N. S., 1932.—Studies of Habrocytus cerealellae (Ashmead), a Pteromalid parasite
of the angoumois grain moth, Sitotroga cerealelia (Olivier). Univ. Calif. Publ.
Entom., v, 311-354.

, 1936.—The citrus gall wasp, Hurytoma fellis Gir. Sci. Bull. Dept. Agr. N.S.W.,
No. 53, 41 pp.

, 1938.—Tepperella trilineata Cam., a wasp causing galling of the flower buds of
Acacia decurrens var. pauciglandulosa. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ixiii, 389-411.

TRIGGBRSON, C. J., 1914.—A study of Dryophanta erinacei (Mayr.) and its gall. Ann. Ent.
Soc. Amer., vii, 1-34.

242

THE UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS BETWEEN MOUNT GEORGE AND
WINGHAM, N. 8S. WALES.

By A. H. Votsry,* M.Sc., Lecturer in Geology and Geography,
New England University College.

(One Map; three Text-figures. )
[Read 31st May, 1939.]

The area examined lies on both sides of the Manning River between Mount
George and Wingham and adjoins the Taree District which was described in a
previous paper (Voisey, 1938).

Geological field-work was commenced in May 1937, following the receipt at
the University of Sydney of some excellent specimens of Linoproductus spring-
surensis forwarded by Mr. R. T. Cox of “Colraine’, Kimbriki. The occurrence of
fossils at Kimbriki has not been recorded previously, although their presence
has been known to local residents for many years.

The only references which have been found relating to the geology of this
locality are those by Benson (1916) and Woolnough (1911). The former recorded
Devonian rocks, serpentine and Permo-Carboniferous fossils from the vicinity of
Mount George, and the latter noted the presence of fossils in a railway cutting
at Killawarra. On Professor Sir T. W. HE. David’s map of the Commonwealth of
Australia (1932) the area covered by the accompanying map was marked as
Lower Carboniferous, with the exception of the north-western corner, which was
shown as Devonian.

Except where noted otherwise, the fossils mentioned in this paper have been
identified by Mr. H. O. Fletcher, Palaeontologist at the Australian Museum,
Sydney. They have been included in the Museum’s palaeontological collection. No
microscopical examinations of the rocks have been made so far, but it is hoped that
this work will be carried out in the near future.

Map 1 indicates the distribution of the principal rock types and thé positions
of the major faults. Parish maps were used in connection with geological mapping,
and the place names have been taken from these maps. Certain differences in
spelling are worthy of comment. Burrell Creek Post Office is situated near Burrill
Creek and the school near Bow Bow Creek is called “Bo Bo School’.

STRATIGRAPHY.
DEVONIAN.
Three areas of Devonian rocks are shown on the map and each of these consists
of a different association of rock-types.

* This paper was completed while the author was Linnean Macleay Fellow of the
Society in Geology.

VOISEY.

13 {5

BY A

Fags fee

ESS ss5r0

24

FIvvL ONV
JINONLL OL

"NLS “OlUL
—VVM001008

‘T dey

‘VAUV AHOYUOUD “LIN-NVHONIM

JO dVW 1V91901049
at

Uv

LINVI~_ 42 ALIGVHD
aA
A

savoud
AYMAUWY

% S3alLI1V9071 1SS04

SL1NV4 1v31901039

bys es] IN\LNaduas

[\\\ \eaiiziuvao any s¥adswe

F==} s3noisavio azanva
[LT []) 213 sssns ‘sauids

NVINOAAG

S3ldas

[Pama*a] IGNiWAS Y3MO1
foro’o| S3IN3S INILVTIAY

SN0d 34INOBYVD
fre} = 3NOLS3WIN

S3ANO1SanW
Swaas AVIIOVW

913

Ne Das

13SY3WOS

re

lOuW TINH
SISAVY9
AWW LY aL
WOIANTIY

1N3034

244 UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS BETWEEN MT. GEORGE AND WINGHAM,

1. Jaspers and Quartzites.

Jaspers and quartzites outcrop around the head-waters of Woolshed Creek
and continue to the north and north-east beyond the limits of the map to Wherrol
Flat, where they are cut off by a belt of serpentine presumably injected along a
major fault-plane. They give rise to very rugged topography, the Riek land
culminating in Johnston’s Peak near Wherrol Flat.

The siliceous rocks range in colour from the reds and reddish-browns of the
jaspers to the pale greens and yellows of the quartzites. The last-named, however,
are more often white and translucent. The beds are riddled with quartz veins
and are very hard. They are extensively jointed and cracked.

Stratification is indicated by colour differences and slight variations in the
physical characteristics of the units. Most traces of original sedimentary charac-
teristics have been obscured by the silicification.

It is proposed tentatively to correlate the jaspers and quartzites with the
Woolomin Series of Benson (1913) on account of their similarity to some of the
beds of that series in the Tamworth District. The micaceous phyllites, purple
schistose tuffs, and altered spilites which are associated with the siliceous rocks
in that region, however, have not been found so far in the area now being
described.

The correlation suggested is open to question and the writer has recently
assigned similar beds in the Armidale District to the Carboniferous system, but
here again no definite evidence was available (Voisey, 1938bD).

2. Banded Claystones, Cherts and Tuffs.

Portion of a large block of Devonian rocks is shown to the east of Bow Bow
Creek and Killawarra. This block is bounded by heavy faults on its northern,
southern and western sides, so that the beds are brought into contact with those
of the Carboniferous and Kamilaroi Systems.

Outcrops are poor as the rocks have been reduced by erosion to comparatively
low hills covered by a fair soil. Much of the country has been cleared and is
now well grassed.

The beds are exposed by cuttings along the main Gloucester—Taree road
between Bow Bow Creek and Tinonee and also along the roads from Killawarra
Bridge to Bootoowaa, and from Wingham to Tinonee. Isolated outcrops are seen
in gullies and quarries. There are insufficient data to permit the elucidation of the
structures in detail, since the variations in the direction of strike, together with
the complicated faulting and folding observed in the limited exposures, point to
the presence of numerous fractured folds of small amplitude and on different axes.

The rock types are similar to those described by Benson (1913a) from the
Tamworth Series. Banded claystones and cherts comprise most of the sequence.
The bands vary from a fraction of an inch to several inches in width. In the fresh
rock they are alternately light bluish-grey and dark bluish-grey, but, on weathering,
they become white, yellow or light grey. The dark grey bands are usually the
wider ones. The rock is quite hard and splintery. It exhibits a conchoidal
fracture in places. Excessive jointing has broken the beds into small blocks, and
it is difficult to obtain unweathered material. Radiolaria have been recorded
from these rocks immediately to the south (Benson, 1916; Sussmilch, 1921, p. 239).

A characteristic variant of the claystone described above weathers to a dark
or light green colour and is useful in the identification of the series.

Interbedded with the claystones and cherts are thick beds of tuff which appear
in places to be intrusive into them. The tuffs are generally dark grey or dark

BY A. H. VOISEY. 245

green in colour. They vary in texture, composition and appearance, but are
generally hard, massive, and weather to a brown colour. Some of them could be
confused with the Carboniferous tuffs, but their association with banded claystones
and cherts is sufficient to distinguish them.

HILLVIEW
FAUT

Ly Rm b
& KULLATINE
B SERIES yay

a
a 6 4
a

fi

c\
See Cs ES SSS

KANGHAT
FAULT

MANGHAT FAULT
H DINGO CREEK

DI] A/LLAWARRA
FAULT

Ay us &
a4. 4 a4 a
a AULLATINE SERIES
yay a a a

DEVONIAN. Aa
Spili

Sea Are AU Oe AAT a

Clay st
anaes Ld A

QO MILES >
Fig. 1.—Section along line A-B (Map 1). V/H = 1/1.
Fig. 2.—Section along line C-D (Map 1). V/H = 1/1.
Fig. 3.—Section along line H-F (Map 1). V/H = 1/1.

3. Spilites, Tuffs and Cherts.

A thick series of tuffs, cherts and spilites forms the Kanghat Range and its
foothills. These beds are bounded on the north by the Kanghat Fault which runs
from the west of Mount George to Hillview and beyond. Southward the series
has not been thoroughly investigated, but its continuity is interrupted by faults
before Kramback is reached.

In marked contrast with the claystones and tuffs described above, these beds
give rise to rugged topography as evidenced by Mount Kiwarriec and the Kanghat
Range, which attain heights of 2,000 feet. Steep slopes covered with talus and
dense vegetation seriously interfered with geological work in this area. Moreover,
elucidation of the sequence was rendered impracticable by the presence of strong
faults. Spilites, so wonderfully developed at the western end of Kanghat Range,
do not appear to intersect Burrill Creek which separates the Kanghat Range from
Mount Kiwarriec. Strikes are extraordinarily variable.

Pillow lavas were described from between Gloucester and Mount George by
Benson (1916). He stated that very dense, hard, fresh-looking subvariolitic spilites
with well-preserved pyroxenes but albitic felspars were exposed in railway cuttings
east of Bundook. These greenish rocks contain quartz and epidote which fill
numerous cracks and vesicles. q

The north-western extremity of Kanghat Range is an impressive feature
composed largely of spilites.

The northern slope of Bucklebore Mountain, which is a smaller range
branching east from the northern front of Kanghat, is a fault scarp which is
strewn with talus consisting of a great variety of tuffs. The most spectacular of
these is a green volcanic agglomerate containing irregular fragments up to several
inches across. This rock is associated with breccias and finer grained tuffs, some

246 UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS BETWEEN MT. GEORGE AND WINGHAM,

grey and others green and blue in colour. These outcrop in the bed of Stony
Creek near Bucklebore Mountain and also on the adjacent slopes. The brecciated
character of some of the varieties is seen best on the weathered surfaces, the rock
becoming brown and greenish-brown on decomposition.

In the foothills of Mount Kiwarric in the south-east corner of the area fine-
grained dark blue cherts are interbedded with tuffs, breccias and spilites.

CARBONIFEROUS.

With the exception of the Upper Burindi Series, which has not been identified,
the same series are developed in this area as in the adjacent Taree District
(Voisey, 1938a). The Lower Burindi Series consists essentially of olive-green
mudstones and tuffs and the Kullatine Series principally of tillite and tuff. These
two series bear faulted relationships to one another and to the Devonian beds.

1. Lower Burindi Series.

The Lower Burindi beds outcrop between Charity Creek and Dingo Creek and
are excellently exposed by road cuttings between Mount George and Killawarra.
Rocky Falls Creek has revealed a thickness of more than 1,000 feet of sediment.
The northerly dip changes from 60 degrees to 10 degrees going up the creek, and
in places the strata are practically horizontal. Variable strikes along the course
of Charity Creek and its tributaries indicate faulting and perhaps folding in that
locality. Owing to scanty outcrops away from the creeks and the absence of any
marker beds, details of the structures could not be obtained.

Tuffs and tuffaceous sandstones interbedded with mudstones make up the
sequence. The tuffs range from dark grey to light bluish-grey in colour and vary
considerably in texture. Fine-grained conglomerate bands containing pebbles up
to the size of a pea occur in places, but the most common rock is a gritty water-
sorted tuff containing fragments of felspar reaching a millimetre or more in
diameter. Fine-grained tuffs, dark bluish-grey but weathering to brown, occur,
generally in bands a few feet in thickness separated by thin beds of mudstone.

The mudstones range in thickness from a few inches to ten feet. They are
olive-green or black in colour and are rarely laminated. They contain numerous
unidentifiable plant remains. These do not necessarily indicate a fresh-water
origin since they are associated with marine fossil beds elsewhere in the Manning
District, They have been recorded from the Burindi Series in the Hunter Valley
(Osborne, 1922, p. 164).

The mudstones decompose readily on exposure to weathering agencies and
are generally found as buff or light brown crumbling material from which fresh
specimens are difficult to obtain.

Dr. Woolnough (1911) recorded tuffs containing a lamellibranch , identified
tentatively by W. S. Dun as a Pachydomus of Permo-Carboniferous age from a
railway cutting west of Killawarra Station. There is little doubt, however, that
the beds belong to the Lower Burindi suite. Of the 200 feet of mudstones and
tuffs exposed by the cutting the most important unit is a greenish-grey tuff fifty
feet in thickness. An attribute peculiar to this rock and perhaps to several other
massive tuffs in the sequence is the weathering out of spheres of the rock a little
smaller than cricket balls. These cannot be satisfactorily explained in a similar
manner to ordinary spheroidal weathering since the spheres are surrounded by the
unfractured rock separated only by a small thickness of brown decomposed
material. No suitable explanation of the phenomenon can be offered. Woolnough
regarded the bed as the equivalent of his ‘“Pachydomus” horizon, but no fossils
were found during the recent survey.

BY A. H. VOISEY. 247

As the continuity of the sequence both upward and downward has been inter-
rupted by faulting, it is not possible to estimate the maximum thickness of the
series. There is evidence, however, of at least 2,000 feet.

2. Kullatine Series.

The Kullatine beds consist almost entirely of tillite. Tuff and mudstone bands
probably make up less than a quarter of the whole thickness of several thousand
feet.

The tillite is a massive hard bluish-grey mudstone containing scattered frag-
ments of a variety of rock types including granites, porphyries, felsites, andesites,
tuffs, sandstones, cherts and quartzites. The included pebbles up to half an inch
in diameter are nearly all angular, but those above that size are more or less
rounded. While most of the rock fragments are less than two inches in diameter,
occasional larger ones reaching a foot across have been found. A most abundant
and ubiquitous pebble is a purple andesitic rock which is similar in appearance
to types found in the tillites and fluvio-glacial conglomerates in the Upper beds
of the Kullatine Series of the Macleay District.

The tillite outcrops as hard rounded boulders on the hillsides or, when more
extensively weathered, in cuttings when it has changed to a buff or yellow colour
and resembles a decomposed mudstone. The weathered rock is easily recognized,
however, by virtue of the small fragments of felspar and other minerals and rocks
which give it a speckled appearance. It is rarely that the tillite is free from the
smaller angular pebbles. The larger ones are more sporadic in their distribution,
but when present they constitute a more conclusive test.

Occasional bands of dark grey tuff of slightly variable texture break the
continuity of the tillite in places, as on F. Richardson’s property about half a
mile south-east of Charity Creek Railway Station. Two hundred feet of them
are developed at the top of the sequence below the Kamilaroi strata.

Fine-grained rocks resembling mudstones may be variants, but no definite
banding was observed.

The tillite and its associates occupy a large proportion of the area mapped.
Excellent exposures are found in the railway cuttings between Mount George and
Karaak Flat. Since the beds are dipping at a fairly high angle in most places
where measurement is possible, the immense development of tillite is apparent.

An interesting occurrence is that on the first hill on the Mount George road
past its junction with the Wingham-Gloucester road at Killawarra. A band of
sediment 3 inches to 6 inches thick embedded in tillite was found to contain
crinoid stems. This band is exposed in a gutter on the south side of the road
about half-way up the hill. Exposures being continuous for some distance, there
does not appear to be any escape from the conclusion that the tillites here, at any
rate, were laid down under marine conditions. No other fossils were found in the
series.

The tillite is indistinguishable lithologically from that occurring at the top
of the Kullatine Series in the Macleay District (Voisey, 1934). It also resembles
closely the tillites of Currabubula and Limeburner’s Creek. It is probable, there-
fore, that the glacial beds were contemporaneous with part of the glacial stage of
the Kuttung Series.

KAMILAROI*: MACLEAY SERIES.

The Kamilaroi sediments overlie the Kullatine Series without any apparent
unconformity. Indeed, there appears to be a transition from the tuffs overlying
RST HNOASIE PSs hoon (BERNA SSS RINE REE SOLE ET ONE CR Ea vt a ee

* See David, 1932.—Terminology used here in order to avoid confusion, but regarded
by the writer as synonymous with “Permian”.

248 UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS BETWEEN MT. GEORGE AND WINGHAM,

the tillite into banded mudstones which have been taken as the basal unit of the
younger series. Since the tuffs bear a marked resemblance to those lower in the
Carboniferous sequence they must be retained in it.

Continuous exposures of the junction between the Carboniferous and Kamilaroi
strata are found in the following places: (1), a creek just behind Kimbriki Public
School; (2), along the south bank of the Manning River immediately west of
“Colraine”’; (8), along the south bank of the Manning River south of Charity
Creek Railway Station.

In each of the above localities a good section of the sequence of the Macleay
Series was obtained. The variations in the thickness and nature of the sediments
are expressed by these sections, which are representative of the series in the
district.

1. Creek behind Kimbriki School.

Thickness in feet.

D. Mudstones EN er Ne eC ee Aim Mette conde Tei 100
Cc. Limestones, banded mudstones and tuffs .. .. 60
B. Tuff containing sponge spicules SEPE SAEED gest 110
A. Banded mudstones A in Ns cee rey =, ACCS MiP ee eric 220

MMOH WOW OKESE. ao /igia Y Glos soo) of. one 490

Beneath the Kamilaroi beds 200 feet of tuff were measured and then an
indeterminate thickness of tillite was found.

2. Along the Manning River in the neighbourhood of ‘“Colraine’’.

Thickness in feet.

eM CA CEOS! WHIUASEONE hea. Me ers), Ska rele ess 200

E. Linoproductus horizon RAL eee te CBMs Gel nee 8

D. Mudstones, sandstones and tuffs .. .. .. .. 200

C. Limestone with marine fossils l 120

B. Tuff containing sponge spicules {j eee Te

A. Banded mudstones LOPS TMP ES SOD SA. yank UGA LE MIDS WS 500
Tt AU AtHICKNESS| gaccmele icc ck chien CE, Vie 1,028

3. Along the south bank of the Manning River south of Charity Creek Railway
Station.

Thickness in feet.

10%, WUD KEEONEIS soehDKoKioRevess! 55° 65° 66 mo an 06 | oo 720
D and E. Tuffs and sandy mudstones with marine
fossils Seer ate 900

C and B. Marine fossiliferous limestones, argillaceous
in part interbedded with banded mudstones and

sandstones ER COROT RTO chen WroFo DP a ray eel Swe rete e Bit 560
AS Dark=erey; "MUdStOnes: 7. . sug cso). eo est sis ale 240 .
TOtalethickness® Wit eyts) wees meer 2,420

The various units grade into one another as, for example, in the last-mentioned
section, where the banded mudstones, tuffs with sponge spicules, and limestones
are interbedded. It is convenient to discuss the beds in the order in which they
occur near “Colraine”’. This may be regarded as the type-section.

A. The Banded Mudstones.

These are banded, dark and light-grey rocks weathering to grey, brownish-
grey, light brown and white. They possess a well-marked rhythm throughout and
lamination is particularly noticeable. A major rhythm of from two to six inches

BY A. H. VOISEY. 249

occurs. Some of the bands are crumbly, dark grey mudstones and others are
lighter in colour.

Lamination is more noticeable in the light sandy layers—that in the grey
mudstones is more obscure. A parting is present parallel to the lamination. In
many cases the banding is spectacular and the rock resembles the banded mud-
stones of the Tamworth Series, there being a definite contrast between the light
and dark bands. The widths of these bands vary from less than a millimetre
to several centimetres.

B. Sponge Spicule Tuff.

This rock is closely associated with both the mudstones and the limestones
and forms a link between the two. Behind Kimbriki School beds of the tuff share
in the rhythm of the banded mudstones and grade into them. In the same section
bands of it alternate with limestone. The rock is composed of what appear to be
felspar fragments embedded in argillaceous material and is in all probability a
water-sorted tuff. It contains abundant sponge spicules. These serve a useful
purpose, as the rock is very easily recognized by their presence.

On the road from “Colraine” to the cultivation the tuff beds are several feet
in thickness and pass upward into grey impure limestones which consist almost
entirely of the remains of crinoids, bryozoans and brachiopods in a matrix of
tuffaceous material in places and elsewhere of mudstone.

C. Limestones.

Nearly six hundred feet of calcareous sediments, about half of which might be
called limestone, are represented in the section south of Charity Creek. They pass
into the banded mudstones along the strike and these assume more importance
to the east. At ‘“Colraine” and near Kimbriki School the limestone is subordinate
to the argillaceous sediments. Mudstones, tuffs and sandstones are interbedded
with the limestones.

Among the thicker calcareous beds in the Charity Creek section is an
interesting bed of the banded mudstone about two feet in width and showing the
rhythms quite as clearly as the better-developed horizons around Kimbriki. This
establishes beyond any doubt the intimate relationship between the mudstones and
limestones and is in opposition to the otherwise plausible suggestion that the
former might be varves belonging to the Carboniferous glacial suite.

The limestones are generally dark grey in colour but weather to a yellow
spongy rock consisting of insoluble material with which the calcite composing the
fossils was mixed. Some of the limestone is coarsely crystalline resembling to
some extent the Cedar Party Limestone (Voisey, 1938a) with which it may be
correlated with confidence. Most of it, however, is finer in texture, more argil-
laceous and darker in colour.

D. Mudstones, Sandstones and Tuffs.

The limestones gradually pass upward into mudstones, tuffs and sandstones.
These are all dark grey in colour; the coarser beds are quite hard but the fine-
grained mudstones are easily weathered. Fossils are rare except in the Charity
Creek section, where several bands of marine forms have been found.

The beds grade into the overlying micaceous mudstones but are separated from
the main portion of them at “Colraine” and possibly in other places by a very rich
band of marine fossils called the Linoproductus horizon.

E. Linoproductus Horizon.
The horizon is beautifully developed in the neighbourhood of ‘“‘Colraine” home-
stead and has been exposed by the Manning River which has cut into its southern

250 UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS BETWEEN MT, GEORGE AND WINGHAM,

bank, revealing the folded bed. The fossils may be collected from the horizon on
either limb of an asymmetrical syncline of small amplitude.

The rock containing the shells is micaceous mudstone, the fossils being internal
and external moulds coloured by limonite. The actual shelly material is also
present, but well-preserved specimens of the forms are difficult to obtain.

Linoproductus springsurensis is particularly abundant, but the suite of fossils
collected is as follows:

Fenestella fossula Lonsdale Linoproductus springsurensis Booker.

Fenestella spp. Linoproductus cf. cancriniformis Tschern.

Protoretepora ampla Lonsdale Aviculopecten squamuliferus (Morris)

Stenopora (small dendroid form) Aviculopecten multicostatus Fletcher

Zaphrentis cf. gregoriana De Koninck Aviculopecten sprenti Johnston

Trachypora wilkinsoni Eth. Aviculopecten parkesi Fletcher

Monilopora nicholsoni Eth. Conocardium sp. (large form)

Crinoid stems (large form) Merismopteria macroptera (Morris)

Martiniopsis subradiata cf. var. Stutchburia costata Morris
branztonensis Eth. Stutchburia obliqua Eth.

Terrakea brachythaera (Sowerby) Pleurophorus sp.

Spirifer tasmaniensis Morris Myonia sp. (? small new sp.)

Spirifer stokesi Konig. Nuculana sp.

Strophalosia gerardi King Nuculana, sp. nov.

Strophalosia jukesi Eth. Nuculana waterhousei Eth.

Terrakea fragile Dana sp. Pleurotomaria morrisiana McCoy.

(Specimens F 37896—F 38012, Aust. Museum Collection.)

F. Micaceous Mudstone.

This rock is light to dark grey in colour, soft and easily weathered. It
contains a large proportion of mica, which is very useful for identification
purposes, especially since the mudstone makes very poor outcrops but yields a
light grey micaceous soil. Joints are excessively numerous, resulting in spheroidal
weathering, which is particularly well developed in cliff sections beside the river
at “Colraine’’. Calcareous nodules or concretions are common.

The mudstone is almost massive in its occurrence, only rare narrow sandstone
bands breaking its continuity. The maximum thickness measured was 720 feet
south of Charity Creek Station, and here the section was interrupted by a
fault. It is probable that the total thickness is far greater than this.

Distribution, etc.

Owing to the intense folding and faulting which has taken place, the Kamilaroi
rocks have been infolded and infaulted into Carboniferous tillite. They outcrop
largely as isolated blocks between Bundook and Hillview, except in the Kimbriki
area, where they form the limbs of an anticline.

West of Woolshed Creek the micaceous mudstones are in contact with tillite,
the lower beds of the sequence having been removed by faulting. Similar beds
containing marine fossils were recorded by Benson (1916) from Somerset, where
they are faulted against Devonian spilites.

Another small area of mudstone occurs between Woolshed Creek and Mount
George. Marine fossils were found by Benson (1916) and Sussmilch in a
railway cutting which passes through these beds. They are principally in a band
of breccia several feet in width.

= BY A. H. VOISEY. 251

Numerous specimens of Taeniothaerus subquadratus were found in the mud-
stones about half-way along the cutting which is the first one east of the railway
bridge across the Manning River. Benson (1916) listed the following forms:
Deltopecten illawarrensis, Spirifer sp., Martiniopsis subradiata, Polypora?, to which
the writer adds: Spirifer cf. tasmaniensis Morris, Spirifer duodecimcostata McCoy,
Taeniothaerus subquadratus Morris (plentiful), Linoproductus springsurensis
Booker, Aviculopecten sprenti Johnston, Aviculopecten mitchelli Eth. and Dun,
Hurydesma cordatum Morris (fairly common), Platyschisma sp. indet. (Specimens
F37671-77, Australian Museum Collection. )

Two more outcrops of the micaceous mudstone, one of which was noted by
Benson (1916), occur between Mount George and Charity Creek. The first is an
infaulted block containing Linoproductus and bryozoa, at the bend of the road
about 4 mile on the Wingham side of Mount George station. A road-material
quarry on the north of the road exposes the beds. The second is revealed by
railway cuttings a short distance to the south of the first-named outcrop.

The mudstones are seen in cuttings at Charity Creek Station and are bounded
by faults which bring them into contact with Carboniferous rocks.

More complete sequences are found on the north and south sides of the tillite
which forms the core of the Kimbriki anticline, and are terminated by faults on
all sides. Between Kimbriki and Burrill Creek the tightly infolded Kamilaroi
beds alternate with tillite. Marine fossils occur in a number of places.

Although outcrops are very poor indeed, they indicate that a belt of rocks
of the Macleay Series runs along the courses of Bow Bow and Burrill Creeks
east of Burrell Creek Post Office, and continues northwards across the Manning
River to the railway line between Karaak Flat and Killawarra. The mudstones
and limestones with the usual marine fossils are seen in cuttings along the Karaak
Flat road. Kamilaroi limestones and their associates outcrop on the hill just
before Hillview School is reached.

The rock types belonging to the Kamilaroi suite are so distinct from any
others in the district that they are readily recognized whenever they are exposed.
The fact that they are easily weathered somewhat restricts outcrops, but at the
same time this property provides a useful clue in the location of the series as a
whole. The underlying Carboniferous beds are so hard that differential erosion
along the junction serves to separate the two series.

Since the beds are lithologically and palaeontologically related to those
around Yessabah on the Macleay River, they are included in the Macleay Series
(Voisey, 1934). ‘

PLEISTOCENE TO RECENT.

The high-level river-gravels and recent alluvial deposits are shown on the
map, but will be discussed in connection with the physiography in a subsequent
publication.

IgNrEous Rocks.
Serpentine.

A belt of serpentine running north-west and south-east outcrops alongside
the Nowendoc road between its junction with the Bundook road and the village
of Mount George. It narrows near Mount George and disappears just east of the
railway station. The fault which it partly occupies continues eastward, separating
Carboniferous tillite on the north from Kamilaroi micaceous mudstone on the
south.

252 UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS BETWEEN MT. GEORGE AND WINGHAM, e

Further to the west, beyond the limits of the map, the serpentine lies between
Lower Burindi tuffs and mudstones and the Kullatine tillite. Both series of rocks
are slightly metamorphosed by the intrusion.

A possible contact between Kamilaroi beds and serpentine near Mount George
school is obscured by alluvium. This occurrence of serpentine intruding
Carboniferous tillite is the first direct evidence produced that it was injected at a
period later than the Drummond Movement at the close of Upper Burindi times.
It is of little consequence, then, that a well-exposed contact with Kamilaroi
beds has not been found, since no orogeny is Known in eastern Australia at the
close of Upper Kuttung time. The Lochinvar Movement (Carey and Browne,
1938) was not characterized by extensive faulting.

A stronger argument for a late Kamilaroi age is the fact that the serpentine
fault transgresses the trends of the rocks and earlier faults which must be
referred to the Hunter-Bowen orogeny. Evidence that the serpentine is pre-
Jurassic was produced by Benson (1918, p. 493). It will be shown in a subsequent
publication that it is overlain by Triassic beds near Broken Bago, in the vicinity
of Wauchope, N.S.W.

Carey and Browne (1938) referred the Peel Thrust and serpentine to the
Drummond Movement and suggested that there was a renewal of movement along
the thrust during the Hunter-Bowen Movement. On the other hand, they recognized
the alternative of assigning both thrust and serpentine to the Hunter-Bowen
Movement, and such a course was favoured by Carey (p. 605).

Following the evidence available in the field at Mount George it seems now
that there cannot be any reasonable doubt that the serpentine at Mount George,
and possibly in other areas, belongs to the Hunter-Bowen Movement of late
Kamilaroi times.

The physical characteristics of the serpentine are similar to those of the basic
rocks described in detail by Benson (1913a, pp. 669-693).

STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY.

The geological structures are indicated on Map 1 and in the sections (Text-figs.
1, 2). The principal points worthy of notice may be considered as follows:

1. Folds and Faults in Devonian Rocks.

The structures in Devonian rocks were not studied in detail. Little can be
written of the beds south of the Kanghat Fault except that they dip generally
north or south at high angles. Silicification has obscured most of the structures
in jasper and quartzite areas.

The banded claystones and tuffs have been tightly folded and most folds have
been extensively fractured. Owing to their incompetence the claystones have
suffered much more deformation than the more resistant spilites, agglomerates
and tuffs. As the soft Kamilaroi beds are affected to a comparable degree there
is no definite evidence to demonstrate that there was any folding of the Devonian
beds prior to the deposition of the Carboniferous rocks which, on account of their
resistance, are folded and faulted to a lesser extent.

2. The Kimbriki Anticline and Associated Folds.

This is the best developed folded structure in the area. It strikes in a
west-north-west—east-south-east direction and appears to pitch to the east-south-east.
The limbs dip at approximately 45 degrees and consist of Kamilaroi limestones
and mudstones, while the core is of Carboniferous tillites and tuffs. Near the

BY A. H. VOISEY. 253

nose of the anticline in the vicinity of “Colraine” several folds of small amplitude
occur. These strike generally north and south and pitch gently to the north.
A synecline and an anticline are exposed by cliff sections on the south bank of the
Manning River. These are asymmetrical and the axial plane is tilted to the
west. Overturning accompanied by extensive faulting has taken place about a
mile to the south. Faults have broken the folds and tillite reappears near
“Mulconda”’.

3. The Kanghat Fault.

The Kanghat Fault runs right across the area shown on the map from
west-north-west to east-south-east for a distance of about sixteen miles, and has
been traced much further to the west and to the east. It is particularly important
and has very well marked physiographical expression in the Kanghat Range and
Mount Kiwarric. These features, consisting mainly of hard Devonian rocks, rise
to approximately 2,000 feet in height and present steep escarpments towards fne
north.

The fault brings Devonian spilites, agglomerates, tuffs and cherts into contact
with Kamilaroi rocks at Somerset (Benson, 1916), Kimbriki and Mount George
and elsewhere with Carboniferous tillite. Therefore, it must have a throw which
exceeds a mile in amount, but no more exact measurement of this could be made.

4. The Hillview Fault.

This fault forms the northern boundary of the downthrown block which is
responsible for the valley through which Bow Bow Creek flows. It runs at a slight
angle to the Kanghat Fault and separates Devonian banded claystones and tuffs
on the north from the Carboniferous and Kamilaroi beds on the south.

5. The Killawarra Fault.

The Killawarra Fault runs in a north-south direction parallel to Bow Bow
Creek and passes just west of Killawarra Bridge. Owing to poor outcrops, its
position as indicated on the map is approximate only, but its presence is amply
demonstrated because it separates Devonian claystones and tuffs on the east from
Kamilaroi rocks on the west. It is probable that a number of smaller faults are
present in the neighbourhood of Killawarra Bridge.

6. The Charity Creek Fault.

This fault separates Lower Burindi from Kullatine beds north of Donkin’s
Mountain near Karaak Flat, and Lower Burindi from Kamilaroi beds near
Charity Creek station. It may continue westwards to Mount George, but as, in
such a case, it would bring tillite into contact with tillite, it would be difficult to
detect. Strike measurements can be made only rarely in tillite areas.

7. Other Faults.

Faulted relationships between Lower Burindi and Kullatine strata are
indicated north of Charity Creek, and two major faults are shown. There is no
doubt, judging from minor anomalies in strike and dip measurements, that faults
are excessively numerous throughout the whole area, and even the number of faults
shown on the map gives little indication of the shattering to which the rocks have
been subjected.

Age Relations of the Folding and Faulting.
The oldest group of faults are those which are genetically related to the
folding of the Devonian, Carboniferous and Kamilaroi beds. Especially in the

254 UPPER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS BETWEEN MT. GEORGE AND WINGHAM.

Devonian claystones are the faults in anticlines and synclines obvious results of
the extreme compression to which the beds were subjected. Numerous other
faults involving the incorporation of blocks of Kamilaroi strata in Carboniferous
areas almost certainly belong to the folding period.

The fault which is occupied by serpentine at Mount George cuts across the
folded rocks and faults associated with such folding and is therefore of later
occurrence. Its relation to the Kanghat Fault is not demonstrated in the area.

The group of very large faults, Kanghat, Hillview, Killawarra and Wingham,
also cut across earlier trends and are distinctly of later occurrence than the first
period of folding and faulting. They may be referred, tentatively, to the Hunter-
Bowen Movement, but there is not any evidence available to prove that they were
not of much later occurrence.

Acknowledgement.

I desire to thank Mr. R. T. Cox, of ‘‘Colraine”’, Kimbriki, for his hospitality
extending over a period of several months. It was he who was instrumental in
drawing attention to the important fossil beds at Kimbriki, and his careful
observations and local knowledge of the rocks have been very helpful.

References.

BENSON, W. N., 1913a.—The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of
N.S.W. Part i. Introduction, ete. Proc. LINN. Soc N.S.W., xxxXviii.

, 1913b.—The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of N.S.W.
Part iii. Petrology. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxviii.

—_————, 1916.—The General Geology of the Gloucester District. Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S.W.,
Vol. 1.

Carbpy, S. W., and BROWNE, W. R., 1938.—Review of the Carboniferous Stratigraphy,
Tectonics, and Palaeogeography of New South Wales and Queensland. Jour. Roy.
Soc. N.S.W., lxxii.

Davin, T. W. E., 1932.—A New Geological Map of the Commonwealth of Australia.

OSBORNE, G. D., 1922.—The Geology and Petrography of the Clarencetown-Paterson
District, N.S.W. Parts 1 and 2. Proc Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xlviii.

SussmMILcH, C. A., 1921.—The Geology of the Gloucester District. Jour. Roy. Soc.
N.S.W., lv.

Voisny, A. H., 1934.—The Geology of the Middle North Coast District of N.S.W. Proc.
LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lix.

, 1938a.—The Upper Palaeozoic Rocks in the neighbourhood of Taree. Proc.
LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Lxiii.

, 1938b.—The Geology of the Armidale District. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Ixiii.

WooLNouGH, W. G., 1911.—Preliminary Note on the Geology of the Kempsey District.
Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xlv.

THE LORNE TRIASSIC BASIN AND ASSOCIATED ROCKS.

By A. H. Votsry,* M.Sc., Lecturer in Geology and Geography,
New England University College.

(1 Map; two Text-figures.)

[Read 31st May, 1939.]

The first record of Triassic rocks in the neighbourhood of the Camden Haven
River appears to be that contained in a report by J. E. Carne in 1897. Carne
found well preserved plant-remains in clay-shales underlying a massive bed of
conglomerate at Perpendicular Point, a short distance south of the entrance of the
Camden Haven River. He located similar beds at Grant’s Head and Diamond
Head and erroneously correlated them with the deposits at Crowdy Head. The
rocks at the last-named locality are Carboniferous. Carne viewed the Broken Bago
Range from Wauchope and suggested that it was composed of Mesozoic rocks
underlain by Permo-Carboniferous coal measures as in the Sydney District.

Carne also referred to the Triassic beds in his paper on the Western Coalfield
(1908); Benson (1918) showed a large area of Triassic rocks south of Port
Macquarie on his sketch-map, and Osborne (1929, p. 449) remarked on Triassic
rocks in the Kempsey district. However, the suggested Mesozoic area south of
Wauchope was not shown on other maps and only the coastal headlands and
Oxley Island were marked as Triassic. The alleged occurrence at the last-named
locality will be discussed later.

The writer, in the course of his investigations, independently came upon
Carne’s fossil locality at Perpendicular Point and collected a number of well
preserved specimens which were exhibited at a meeting of the Linnean Society
in September 1937. Since then the Triassic rocks have been examined in a
number of localities and portions of the boundary have been mapped.

It has been decided to call the geological structure which the beds constitute,
the Lorne Triassic Basin. The rocks themselves will be discussed under the
name of Camden Haven Series after the river which drains the Basin.

The igneous rocks which intrude the Triassic strata, the Palaeozoic sediments
and the serpentine with which they are associated will receive brief mention.
However, the boundaries between these units have not been mapped in detail and
most of those shown on the map (Map 1) are approximations only.

STRATIGRAPHY.
TRIASSIC: CAMDEN HAVEN SERIES.
Distribution.
The Camden Haven Series, as mentioned above, forms the headlands of
Perpendicular Point and Camden Head, Grant’s Head, and portion of Diamond
Head. These occurrences are separated from one another by low swampy coastal

* This paper was completed while the author was Linnean Macleay Fellow of the
Society in Geology.

256 LORNE TRIASSIC BASIN AND ASSOCIATED ROCKS,

flats so that it is impossible to trace the beds from one headland to the

or towards the principal basin structure further inland.

GEOLOGICAL SKETCH-MAP
OR une

CAMDEN HAVEN
DISTRICT

ajelole
STACKING

” WAUCHOPE pig-SSS>), A
ree ; POINT

»6 &4 5 +7

.

[GEN ae
([MTHE “RocK
a

ott ON)
rin ey

PERPENDICULAR
cH POINT
—_ AACAMOEN HEAD
iN LAURIETON

a =.
wu oie ’ “oouy
TN LIN Fy aE UO
au ”
2 *
Af

JOHNS, RIVER

= DIAMOND

TR HEAD

LEGEND

RECENT
PLEISTOCENE

Sha ie TRIASSIC

) STEWARTS R

KAMILARO!
CARBONIFEROUS ee
DEVONIAN
LOWER PALAEOZOIC
IGNEOUS
BASALT [Xxx]
ALKALINE EXTRUSIVES <5
ALKALINE INTRUSIVE ES

hk HARRINGTON SERPENTINE Fe)

= POSSIBLE FAULTS ———

MANNING
RIVER OUNTAIN SUMMITS
RAILWAY

ROADS

iL YS
vex (MITCHELL'S
DXLEY'. ISLAND.

| WEST BROTHER
HERONS CREEK
BROKEN BAGO
WAUCHOPE

B BCOOPERNOOK

op
om |
"4

a 44a 46
Ay Wx ay Os
js a yy eN
a CARBONIFEROUS 4
hs AO Dy

aA 4
a 4 4 a 4 a 4

4
ao 4
4

No
( COMBOYNE

BASALT

Fig. 1—Sketch Section from Coopernook to Wauchope.
Fig. 2—Sketch Section from Comboyne to Camden Head.

RIVER

ALKALINE RocR

Toe —— Ie

V/H =

Niipsi= wWAls

other

BY A. H. VOISEY. 257

Conglomerates, sandstones and grits constituting the basal beds of the series
may be traced from Broken Bago, just south of the town of Wauchope, westward
towards the Comboyne Plateau. They then swing southward, running east of the
Comboyne to curve easterly just north of Upper Lansdowne. Thence the beds swing
to the north-east to the neighbourhood of Coopernook. Along the easterly rim
of the basin large intrusions of alkaline rock have interrupted the continuity
of the beds and have made alterations in the direction of dip. However, the
Triassic beds are exposed by cuttings alongside the Pacific Highway between John’s
River and Ross Glen.

Within the basin outcrops are poor, on account of the ease with which the
soft clay-shales and sandstones, which overlie the more resistant beds of the basal
stage, are weathered. Road cuttings between Kendall and Lorne expose the beds,
which, in places, are overlain by Tertiary lavas.

Lithology.

The basal beds of the Camden Haven Series may be seen to advantage almost
anywhere around the rim of the Lorne Basin. To the north-west of Lansdowne
they consist of massive conglomerates, the basal bed being upwards of fifty
feet in thickness and forming a frowning escarpment. The rock is made up of
boulders and pebbles of quartzites, jaspers, cherts, quartz, and other resistant
rock-types. Some of the boulders attain a diameter of two feet, but for the most
part, they are only a few inches across.

The conglomerate in this region, the southern rim of the Basin, is overlain
by coarse sandstones and grits which are stained reddish-brown and purple by
iron-oxides. These may be examined at various points along the road between
Coopernook and Vincent’s Lookout. The sandstones pass upwards into grey
shales containing plant remains, and reddish and purple clay-shales which resemble
those of the Narrabeen Series further south. A good section of these beds is
to be seen in the cuttings along the Vincent’s Lookout road shortly after the
railway line is crossed near Coopernook Station. An estimated thickness of about
three hundred feet cf sediment occurs here, but outcrops of the clay-shales are so
poor, and dips so slight, that no information regarding higher beds in the series
could be obtained.

In the road cuttings along the Pacific Highway just south of Ross Glen the
grey and purple clay-shales associated with bands of sandstone are well exposed.
Plant remains are said to have been found in them. It is probable that these
beds correspond with those on the Vincent’s Lookout road, but this is uncertain.

Probably the best section which has been examined is that shown by the
cuttings alongside the road to Wauchope which leaves the Pacific Highway near
Heron’s Creek.

Where this road descends to a creek near the railway tunnel through Broken
Bago, four miles by road from Wauchope, a thickness of approximately two
hundred feet of coarse grits and fine quartz-pebble conglomerates, interstratified
with purple and grey shales and sandstones, was measured. The coarse beds
are each several feet in thickness and constitute the bulk of the section. The
heavy conglomerate underlies the grits, but varies somewhat in its development
from place to place. The clay-shales and sandstones which overlie the more
resistant basal beds again give rise to very poor outcrops.

The Pacific Highway crosses the Camden Haven Series between Heron’s
Creek and the turn-off to Green Hills beach. Outcrops are scarce all the way,
but conglomerates and sandstones, probably belonging to the basal stage, are

v

258 LORNE TRIASSIC BASIN AND ASSOCIATED ROCKS,

exposed by a road-material quarry about 13 miles south of Port Macquarie near
the Green Hills Beach turn-off. Between this point and Broken Bago the Triassic
beds cross and overlie the serpentine which is so well developed in this district.

The highest known beds of the series outcrop in the neighbourhood of Lorne
and are exposed in road cuttings. These are clay-shales, generally grey in colour,
containing plant remains, and associated with sandstone bands. The exact position
of these beds in the sequence could not be determined on account of the low
dip and lack of continuous outcrops.

The Camden Head or Perpendicular Point occurrence, which is important
because it was the first outcrop of the Triassic rocks found, is somewhat anomalous
when studied in relation to the rest of the beds in the sequence. As described by
Carne, a massive conglomerate overlies purple and grey clay-shales containing
plant remains. This is the reverse of the sequence of beds elsewhere in the
area.

The section as exposed in the cliff face at Perpendicular Point is as follows:

Thickness in feet.

Conglomerate STEN aya VGOnh | Zao TTI eee aeRO tore Ret LO
Purple tclay=shale. gate. is Se UATE OPED See 110
Purple sandstonesiicah tireeiou ast He GoM ietAd) Pose te 2
Purple melay=snaley ype teat “cio wncay «seu ET toe 15
Grey clay-shales with plant-remains So a wie Re 5
Purple*clay-=shaley <i es a a ee a Saal Oe
82+

The clay-shales are lithologically identical with those of the Narrabeen Series
with which they may be correlated with confidence. This suggests a Hawkesbury
age for the overlying conglomerate.

The conglomerate contains rounded pebbles of chalcedonic quartz, jasper,
yellow quartzite, red quartzites and hard sandstones, some of which attain a
diameter of six inches. The matrix consists of fine sand-grains and clay
cemented with iron-oxide. Lenticular narrow bands of purple sandstone are
included in the conglomerate bed and suggest an estuarine origin for the deposit.
It would appear that the conglomerate is overlain by more clay-shales and sand-
stones outcropping to the north near the entrance of the Camden Haven River.

At Diamond Head, on the northern side of the headland, sandy shales contain
plant remains and overlie grey shales. The beds dip in a direction 335 degrees at
15 degrees. They are harder here than elsewhere in the area since they are
intruded by alkaline rocks and are overlain by felsite.

Coal has been found in the Triassic beds in a number of localities, but so far
no deposits of economic importance have been located. Small quantities are seen
in streaks in the Perpendicular Point section and traces are found in the railway
cuttings between Heron’s Creek and Wauchope. These are associated with sand-
stones and clayshales.

The writer has spent some time searching for the alleged Triassic beds on
Oxley and Mitchell’s Islands, but has not been able to find any. The hills on these
two islands are covered with gravel which may have been derived from Triassic
conglomerates, but, wherever quarries have been observed in these gravels, the beds
appear to be loosely consolidated sands and clays with occasional concretions
yielding harder material. They resemble the high level gravels so abundant in the
river valleys along the coast.

At Oxley Island, near the cemetery, tilted tuffs and mudstones, probably Lower
Carboniferous in age, outcrop. These could not be Triassic.

BY A. H. VOISEY. 259

The writer has not seen any written record of Triassic rocks on Oxley Island,
but on most geological maps of New South Wales and on Professor T. W. E.
David’s Map of the Commonwealth of Australia (1932) this island is so coloured.

It is tentatively suggested that earlier observers were misled by the occur-
rence of sandstone alongside the Manning River and used in punt approaches.
This is almost certainly Hawkesbury Sandstone which was used as ballast and
carried to its present location by coastal vessels many years ago.

Palaeontology.

The fossils collected by Carne from Perpendicular Point were identified by
W. S. Dun (Carne, 1897) as: Thinnfeldia odontopteroides Morris, Alethopteris
Lindleyana Royle, Equisetum, Cycad (probably Ptilophyllum oligoneurum Ten.-
Woods), Gleichenites?, Cardiocarpum, Phyllotheca sp.

Specimens collected by the writer include Equisetaceous stems, Thinnfeldia
Feistmantelti Johnston, Cladophlebis sp., and a seed. These were determined by
Dr. A. B. Walkom, who suggests that the Thinnfeldia odontopteroides determined
by Mr. Dun was probably the species now known as 7. Feistmanteli.

Correlations.

The presence of plant fossils and the purple shales characteristic of the
Narrabeen Series of the Sydney District are strong points in favour of a correlation
between part, at least, of the Camden Haven Series and the Narrabeen Series.

That the best development of the purple shales has been observed in the
isolated headland of Perpendicular Point is unfortunate, since there is some doubt
about the correlation of these beds with those of the principal Triassic area of the
Lorne Basin.

It is uncertain whether representatives of the Hawkesbury Series are present.
The conglomerate at Perpendicular Point suggests a stratigraphical break and, as
it overlies the purple shales, it may make the base of this Series. As the only
conglomerates found in the Lorne Basin up to the present are those at the base,
it is a matter of some difficulty to determine the horizon of the Perpendicular
Point occurrence. In the case of a correlation being made with the basal
conglomerate an overlapping of the purple shales is inferred. Such a suggestion
implies that the Triassic beds of the main part of the Camden Haven Series
correspond to the Hawkesbury Series and that the only beds of Narrabeen Series
are those at Perpendicular Point. This idea is not favoured on account of the
abundance of purple shale in the sequence. Hence a high horizon for the Perpen-
dicular Point conglomerate is indicated. The absence of the conglomerate to the
west may be accounted for by suggesting that it passes laterally into softer beds
which have not been identified with it.

It is not believed that any big development of the Hawkesbury Series occurs
in the area but rather that most of the beds are Narrabeen in age.

KAMILAROI:* MACLEAY SERIES.

Limestones and mudstones belonging to the Macleay Series and identical in
lithology and fossil content with those described from the Macleay and Manning
Rivers (Voisey, 1934, 1936, 1938) outcrop in the neighbourhood of Wauchope.

Limestone is being mined at the present time on M.L.2. parish of Koree.
Carne and Jones (1919) recorded it and noted that the strata dipped in a direction
S. 20° E. at 38°. The limestone is composed almost entirely of the remains of

* See David (1932). Terminology used here to avoid ambiguity, but regarded by the
writer as synonymous with ‘‘Permian”’.

260 LORNE TRIASSIC BASIN AND ASSOCIATED ROCKS,

organisms, principally crinoids and lamellibranchs. It is a Eurydesma cordatum
horizon and contains numerous well-preserved specimens of this genus and pectens.
Mr. Fletcher has identified the following forms: Deltopecten limaeformis (Morris),
EHurydesma cordatum Morris, Hurydesma hobartense. Johnston (Specimens F38013-—
15, Australian Museum Collection).

The limestone is lighter in colour than that found in the Yessabah District
(Voisey, 1934, 1936), and is generally light grey. It has been recrystallized,
but this has not deformed the contained fossils. Outcrops of the limestone are
very scarce, and the country surrounding the quarry on M.L.2 is not promising
for further geological investigations.

Associated with the limestone, and almost certainly underlying it, are
mudstones weathering brown and containing abundant fossils, including: Fenestella
fossula Lonsdale, Fenestella spp. (abundant), Protoretepora ampla Lonsdale,
Stenopora (small dendroid form), Crinoid stems, Chonetes sp., Martiniopsis sp.
indet., Linoproductus cora var. farleyensis Eth. and Dun, Aviculopecten sprenti
Johnston, Aviculopecten englehardti Eth. and Dun, Aviculopecten (small form)
sp. indet. (Specimens F38016—-24, Australian Museum Collection).

Fletcher writes: “‘Linoproductus cora var. farleyensis Eth. and Dun appears
to be abundant and several specimens were nicely preserved. This species was
described from the ferruginous sandstone of the Farley Stage. It has the general
outward appearance of Terrakea brachythaera (Sowerby), but is considered more
nearly allied to Productus cora because of the costation, the auricle-wrinkles
which pass into indefinite body corrugations and the few spines along each
lateral portion of the cardinal margin.”

No definite Kamilaroi outcrops were found in the neighbourhood of Wauchope,
except around the quarry mentioned above, and this is about three miles south-
west of the town.

CARBONIFEROUS: KULLATINE SERIES.
(a) Glacial Beds.

Conglomerates and tuffs similar to those underlying the Macleay Series at
Yessabah (Voisey, 1936) are met alongside the track leading from the Oxley
Highway to the limestone quarry near Wauchope.

Tillite, similar to that of the Kullatine Series elsewhere, outcrops on the slopes
of Broken Bago and is exposed in cuttings beside the Bago road from Wauchope
to the Pacific Highway. This occurrence was noted first by Professor W. R.
Browne in the company of the writer in 1937.

Numerous outcrops of tuff and conglomerate indicate the presence of
Carboniferous rocks over quite a large area, but the geological mapping of this
district has not been completed and further details cannot be given at present.

(bo) Plant Beds.

Excellent exposures of plant-bearing Carboniferous rocks occur between
Heron’s Creek and Ross Glen. The prevailing strike is north and south, and the
dip easterly. The highest bed examined was a conglomerate. This runs from
Heron’s Creek to Kew, keeping to the east of the Pacific Highway. Just below it
are thinly bedded mudstones and cherts containing plant remains. In the road-
cutting immediately opposite Kew School a chert bed about eight inches thick
contains numbers of beautifully preserved fronds of Rhacopteris.

Tuffs, mudstones and sandstones are seen in road and railway cuttings around
Kendall.

BY A. H. VOISEY. 261

A coal seam is exposed alongside the road opposite the sawmill in the
township.

Lower Burindi Series.
These rocks outcrop to the south of the Triassic basin in the neighbourhood
of Lansdowne. They consist principally of mudstones and tuffs similar to those
described in the Taree District (Voisey, 1938).

DEVONIAN.

In 1933 Dr. G. D. Osborne showed the writer spilites, tuffs and other rocks of
Devonian age along the Wauchope road to the Comboyne where the ascent is made
up to the plateau. In 19387, in the company of Professor W. R. Browne, an
interesting exposure of conglomerates and agglomerate associated with mudstones
and tuffs was examined in Bulli Creek. These closely resemble the Baldwin
Agglomerates of Benson (1913). Patches of angular fragments of mudstone are
set in a dark grey matrix probably tuffaceous. Hlsewhere rounded pebbles are
prevalent.

No detailed mapping was earried out in this region and relationships between
Devonian and Carboniferous strata were not ascertained.

LOWER PALAEOZOIC,

An interesting suite of rocks outcrops between Port Macquarie and the turn-off
from the Pacific Highway to Green Hills Beach. It is probable that beds of several
ages occur. The metamorphism which the strata have undergone is indicative
here of a Lower Palaeozoic sequence. Green tuffaceous rocks interbedded with
dark grey or greenish-grey mudstones outcrop in road cuttings along the Pacific
Highway between the points mentioned above. In places phyllite bands showing
puckering and contortion are interbedded with the harder tufts.

Along the Green Hills Beach track conglomerates and tuffs, differing some-
what from the types mentioned above, but dark grey in colour and resembling
those of the Kullatine Series, were examined near their contact with serpentine
which intrudes them. It is said locally that fossil shells have been found in this
neighbourhood, but the observation has not been confirmed.

On the property of Mr. J. Kenny and in that neighbourhood alongside the Port
Macquarie—Wauchope road, about five miles from the first-named town, a band of
silicified conglomerate is interbedded with phyllites. The conglomerate consists
principally of quartz pebbles. Silicification has produced a very hard compact
rock. The phyllites are soft and make poor outcrops except where they have been
cemented by iron oxides. Quartz reefs containing small quantities of gold are
present. Hard, dark grey, slaty rocks are subordinate to the phyllites.

Dyke-like intrusions of basic rock are not uncommon in this area, but their
age and origin have not been determined.

I@NEoUS Rocks.
Basalt.

The Comboyne Plateau is capped by basalt which must be several hundred
feet in thickness. Good sections of the flows are seen on the ascent from the
northern side. The rock has been leached and has given rise to a white decom-
position product which is termed “trap”.

The igneous rock was poured out during the Tertiary Era and is referable
probably to the Newer Basic Lava group (Browne, 1933).

262 LORNE TRIASSIC BASIN AND ASSOCIATED ROCKS,

Alkaline Intrusives.

The first record of intrusions of alkaline rock in the area under discussion
appears to be that given by J. E. Carne (1897), who noted diorite, quartz-felsite
and rhyolite at Diamond Head.

The volcanic plugs in the neighbourhood of Upper Lansdowne have received
slight mention in literature. C. A. Sussmilch (1932), W. R. Browne (1933) and
R. O. Chalmers (1934) made brief references to them. Browne stated (1933, p. 48)
that it was possible to recognize among these rocks “comendites, arfvedsonite-
anorthoclase trachyte, bostonite and a perlitic glass, probably trachytic with
microlites of potash felspar”. Chalmers (1934, p. 173) gives a panoramic view
from the Comboyne showing the volcanic ridge, Camelback, and the small volcanic
peaks Oliver and Kennedy, and “the large volcanic peaks Baldy, Coxcomb and
Goonook”.

The alkaline rocks are intrusive into Carboniferous and Kamilaroi rocks in
the Lansdowne area, but looking northward from the Manning River Valley other
peaks may be seen inside the rim of the Triassic Basin.

Associated with the Lansdowne plugs are several dyke-like intrusions where
the magma has welled up through a fissure in the rocks. The plugs themselves
are mainly small, simple structures which give rise to steep-sided hills, some of
which jut abruptly from the valley floor to heights of several hundreds of feet.

There has been little reference made in literature to a group of intrusions
much larger than those at Lansdowne and having much more physiographical
expression. These constitute the Three Brothers which were mentioned by Oxley
in his “Journal of Two Expeditions”, etc., in 1817-1818. The North Brother is
situated between Laurieton and Kew, the Middle or West Brother rises to the
south-west of Kendall, and the South Brother is a short distance to the west of
John’s River. Hach of the three far exceeds a thousand feet in height.

Another large body of igneous rock occurs just west of the South Brother
and, judging from the size and shape of the hills in the neighbourhood of the Rock,
these also are of similar composition.

Specimens of the alkaline rocks may be obtained by making short excursions
off the Pacific Highway between Moorlands and Kew. A variety of rock-types from
the South Brother and associated bodies may be collected along the road to Hannam
Vale and the branch road from it to Lorne. A mile and a half from the Pacific
Highway near Moorlands towards Hannam Vale is a small road-material quarry
behind a house on a slight rise. Fresh specimens of a fine-grained blue trachytic
rock and of a glassy phase of the intrusion are obtainable. The last-named is in
contact with the Palaeozoic(?) sedimentary beds into which it was thrust and is
evidently on the margin of a larger body. It is a black translucent rock through
which are scattered idiomorphic crystals of felspar.

It is evident from the relationships of the intrusions to the country rack that
they are somewhat irregular in shape and transgressive in part. The igneous rock
has spread out along the surface of Palaeozoic beds and has intruded and lifted
the Triassic strata. Some of the magma reached the surface, as evidenced by the
lava flows in the Lorne District and the felsite and rhyolite at Diamond Head.

The hypabyssal portion of the intrusion would appear to form a more or less
continuous sill-like body which was fed by magma rising up along fault planes.
The high peaks of the Brothers are due to the thickening of the sheet at these
points, probably near the sites of the principal feeders to the mass. Such indication
of the presence of pipes suggests that the igneous mass is a complex laccolite or
number of laccolites connected to one another by sills.

BY A. H. VOISEY. 263

It may be of some significance that the laccolitic and sill-like intrusions are
confined to the area occupied by Triassic sediments. The bodies outside the Lorne
Basin are plugs or dykes in Palaeozoic sediments. It is possible that these were
the feeders of sills which have been eroded. What is more likely, however, is that
they were more or less simple cores of old volcanoes.

The lavas, which may be related to the alkaline intrusions, outcrop in a number
of places west of Lorne. Beautifully-banded rhyolites occur at the saw-mill on the
track from Lorne to the Comboyne.

Felsites at Diamond Head overlie Triassic strata in the northern part of the
headland, while intrusive rock occurs to the south (Carne, 1897).

It may be deduced from the description of the field occurrence of the alkaline
rocks given above that they are post-Triassic in age. Moreover, they appear to
have welled up a fault-plane which separated Triassic and Carboniferous beds in
the neighbourhood of Kendall. At any rate, they do not appear to have been
dislocated by it. Hence, they are later than the folding and faulting which affected
the Triassic beds.

No conclusive evidence was obtained regarding the relationship existing
between the alkaline rocks and the basalts of the Comboyne Plateau. The former
certainly occupy higher ground in places, but it is suggested that there was a
great deal of erosion of the beds which the igneous rocks had invaded before
the basalts were laid down. W. R. Browne (1933, p. 41) would place the
Lansdowne intrusions, and, presumably, those of the Three Brothers, in his “Middle
Series” of Tertiary igneous rocks, together with the allied intrusions of the
Canoblas, Warrumbungle and Nandewar Mountains.

Serpentine.

Two belts of serpentine striking in a general east—west direction intersect the
Lower Palaeozoic (?) rocks. They are crossed by the Pacific Highway between the
Green Hills Beach turn-off and the Wauchope road.

The green rock is seen to best advantage at Port Macquarie.

The Kamilaroi age of the serpentine has been proved beyond reasonable doubt
on account of its intrusive relationships to tillite of the Kullatine Series and
probably to the Macleay Series (Voisey, 1939). It is overlain by the Camden
Haven Series near Broken Bago and, hence, must have antedated the deposition
of the Triassic rocks. ?

STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY.

The accompanying sections (Text-figs. 1, 2) indicate the relationships existing
between the rocks which occur in the region under consideration. The structures
may be considered in three divisions: Palaeozoic, Mesozoic, and Cainozoic.

Palaeozoic.

The Palaeozoic beds have been folded along a meridional axis. The strikes
of the beds vary in accordance with the folding and the extensive faulting which
have taken place. Structures in these rocks will be dealt with in connection with
the examination of the geology of the Hastings River district. It is hoped that
this work will be carried out in the near future.

The deformation of the Palaeozoic strata took place prior to the deposition of
the Mesozoic sediments and may be referred to the Hunter-Bowen Movement at
the close of Kamilaroi times.

264 LORNE TRIASSIC BASIN AND ASSOCIATED ROCKS,

Mesozoic.

The Mesozoic rocks lie with a violent unconformity on the steeply-dipping
Palaeozoic beds. They are in the form of a basin structure which has been broken
on the eastern margin by intrusions of alkaline rocks taking the form of irregular
sills and laccolites.

The dip of the strata at Broken Bago is south at angles ranging from 10
degrees to 15 degrees. This swings south-east, then east going towards the
Comboyne Plateau. From the hills on the plateau itself cuestas of the basal beds
swinging round the basin are seen to good advantage. At Lansdowne they are
dipping northward; further east they turn north-west. In the neighbourhood of
Ross Glen the Triassic strata are tilted by the intrusive rocks and thus the dips
there do not conform to the basin structure. Around Lorne the clay-shales are
practically horizontal, but in places show a tendency to dip to the east.

There has been a considerable amount of faulting since the formation of the
Camden Haven Series. One important example is the Heron’s Creek Fault which
has brought Carboniferous rocks belonging to the Kullatine Series into contact
with the Triassic beds. The fault has been taken advantage of by Heron’s Creek,
which follows it at the point where the stream is crossed by the Pacific Highway.
In the railway cutting behind Heron’s Creek School the Triassic sandstones and
shales are seen in vertical positions and are also twisted and fractured. Since the
Camden Haven Series should be at least 200 feet thick below the beds examined,
the movement along the fault must exceed this amount and almost certainly does
so with a considerable margin.

Alkaline intrusives intervene between similar Carboniferous and Triassic beds
in the vicinity of Kendall, as shown on the accompanying map. It may well be
that these were injected along a fissure similar to that at Heron’s Creek.

The anomalous dip of the strata at Perpendicular Point (northerly at about
20 degrees) suggests further faulting, but the swampy coastal flats make investiga-
tion of them quite impossible. The beds at Grant’s Head dip at 7 degrees to the
south-west (Carne, 1897) and are consistent with the basin structure.

It seems that the main folding movements producing the basin preceded the
introduction of the alkaline rocks, since these do not appear to have been affected.
Moreover, the intrusions almost certainly followed fractures which were formed
either during, or at some time after, the formation of the basin. This will be
realized after an examination is made of the map and sections.

Whether the Heron’s Creek and similar faults are genetically related to the
basin folding is an interesting point. If they are not, and may be referred to
Tertiary times, there is some further evidence in favour of the contention of
C. A. Sussmilch (1932) that the alkaline rocks are related to late Tertiary tectonic
lines. Sussmilch did not mention the intrusions of the Three Brothers in his
paper, but refers to those in the neighbourhood of Lansdowne.

Cainozoic.

Apart from the question of the age of the Heron’s Creek fault, there is ample
evidence of elevation of portions of the area during Tertiary times. The
basalt-covered Comboyne Plateau stands at well over 2,000 feet above sea-level.
No definite fault scarps were proved, but it would appear that there has been
warping and perhaps monoclinal folding (Sussmilch, 1932, p. 401). The elevated
position of the basal conglomerates and sandstones of the Camden Haven Series
to over a thousand feet in the vicinity of the Comboyne suggests that the whole
basin has received an eastward tilt (W. R. Browne, verbal communication). Such

BY A. H. VOISEY. 265

tilting is indicated by the easterly dip of some lava flows which overlie the
Triassic beds near Lorne. If this evidence is to be relied upon, the tilting must
have taken place after the voleanic eruptions which produced the lavas.

By comparison with other areas it may be taken that the uplift of the
Comboyne Plateau and the associated movements occurred towards the close of
Tertiary times.

CONCLUSION.

The principal aim of the writer has been to draw attention to a basin of
Triassic rocks and a fine suite of alkaline intrusives occurring in the Camden
Haven district. Both were known only to a few geologists and there has been
very little mention of them in literature.

It is hoped that the reconnaissance work carried out will be followed by a
more detailed treatment of the racks.

Bibliography.

BENSON, W. N., 1913.—The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of N.S.W.
Part i. Introduction. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxviii.
, 1918.—The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of N.S.W.
Part viii. The Extension of the Great Serpentine Belt from the Nundle District to
the Coast. Proc. LInn. Soc. N.S.W., xliii.
BROWNE, W. R., 1933.—An Account of the Post-Palaeozoic Igneous Activity of N.S.W.
Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1xvii.
CARNE, J. E., 1897.—Report on the Geology and Mineral Resources of the Coast between
Port Macquarie and Cape Hawke. Ann. Report Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1896 (1897).
, 1908.—Geology and Mineral Resources of the Western Coal Field. Mem. Geol.
Surv. N.S.W., Geology No. 6.
CARNE, J. H., and Jones, L. J., 1919.—The Limestone Deposits of New South Wales.
Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Min. Res. No. 25.
CHALMERS, R. O., 1934.—The Mid-North Coast. Aust. Mus. Mag., v, No. 5.
Davin, T. W. E., 1932.—A New Geological Map of the Commonwealth of Australia.
OSBORNE, G. D., 1929.—The Structural Geology of the Carboniferous Rocks in the Hunter
River District, ete. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., liv.
OxuEy, JOHN, 1817-18.—Journals of Two Expeditions into the Interior of New South
Wales.
SussmMincH, C. A., 1932.—Relation of the Tertiary Alkaline Rocks of Eastern Australia
to Late Tertiary Tectonic Lines. Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1xvi.
VoisgBy, A. H., 1934.—The Geology of the Middle North Coast District of New South
Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., lix.
, 1936.—The Upper Palaeozoic Rocks Around Yessabah, near Kempsey, N.S.W.
Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1Xx.
, 1938.—The Upper Palaeozoic Rocks in the Neighbourhood of Taree. Proc.
Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1xiii.
, 1939.—The Upper Palaeozoic Rocks between Mount George and Wingham.
Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Lxiv.

WwW

266

A NEW SPECIES OF MEGASTIGMUS PARASITIC ON TEPPERELLA
TRILINEATA CAM., A WASP CAUSING GALLING OF THE FLOWER
BUDS OF ACACIA DECURRENS.

By N. S. Nosrez,* D.Sc.Agr., M.Sce., D.I.C.
(Ten Text-figures.)
[Read 28th June, 1939.]

An account of investigations into the complex of insects associated with the
galling of flower buds on Acacia decurrens var. pauciglandulosa in the vicinity of
Sydney has already been published by the writer (1938b), and the life history of
Tepperella trilineata Cam., the primary gall-former, was set out in detail.

At that time it was pointed out that a new species of Megastigmus was a
common internal parasite of the larva of 7. trilineata and that the life cycles of
the two species were annual. The life history of this species of Megastigmus has
been studied, and will be set out in the present paper.

The writer in a previous paper (1938a) set out in detail the life history of
Epimegastigmus (Megastigmus) brevivalvus, which is an internal parasite of the
larva of Hurytoma fellis, a wasp causing galling of the stems of citrus, and in its
morphology and biology this species of Megastigmus resembles very closely
Epimegastigmus brevivalvus. The writer (1938a) has already discussed the habits
of the members of the genus Megastigmus throughout the world, and it has been
pointed out that the majority of these are phytophagous, living in the seeds of
various plants.

Specimens of the species under discussion were submitted to Dr. A. B. Gahan,
Senior Entomologist of the United States Department of Agriculture, who subse-
quently, in a letter to the writer dated 29th May, 1937, stated: “This species
appears to be close to Hpimegastigmus brevivalvus but is not that species, nor
does it agree with any of the descriptions of other species so far as I can tell.
It is probably undescribed.”

The writer has studied all the available descriptions of species of the genus
Megastigmus described from Australia, and has decided that the species is new.

MorrHo.oey.
MEGASTIGMUS ACACIAE, N. Sp.
The Adult.

Q (Fig. 1). Length: average 2-68 mm.; maximum 3:07 mm.; minimum 2:08
mm. Length of ovipositor: average 0-47 mm.; maximum 0:52 mm.; minimum
0-39 mm.

Head pale castaneous, with two small irregular oval black spots below and
more or less in line with the lateral ocelli. Eyes dull red; antennae brown.
Surface of head aciculate. Thorax pale castaneous; variable amount of base of

* This contribution is one of ten papers on Australian Chalcidoidea submitted to the
University of Sydney in fulfilment of the requirements for the degree of Doctor of Science
in Agriculture.

BY N. S. NOBLE. 267

propodeum dark brown to black. Surface rugose; rugae finest on pronotum; rugae
mainly transverse on the pronotum, scutum, and parapsides, more curved and
longitudinal on the axillae, and irregular on the scutellum and reticulate on the
propodeum. The legs are pale castaneous apart from the bases of the fore-coxae
which are dark brown to black. Stigmal knob as in figure 3c. Abdomen pale
castaneous, slightly paler than thorax, with slightly darker bands on the distal
portion of each segment. Surface smooth. Ovipositor dark brown, curved
conspicuously upwards, its tip being almost in line with the dorsal surface of the
abdomen (fig. 2).

Figs 1-2.—Megastigmus acaciae.
1, Adult female (x 15).—2, Lateral view of abdomen of female (x 21).

Black setae are borne on the surface of the head and thorax as far back as the
propodeum which carries a series of white hairs. On the third and succeeding
segments of the abdomen there is a single band of black setae.

In many instances specimens examined two years after either mounting or
preservation in alcohol had become somewhat paler, the oval black patches on the
head and the black on base of the propodeum having disappeared.

The tip of the ovipositor stylet (fig. 3F) and sheath (figs. 3G, 3H), the
mandible (fig. 3E), the stigmal knob (fig. 3C), and the antenna (fig. 3B) of the
female are illustrated.

In colour and structure the female resembles the female of HMpimegastigmus
brevivalvus very closely. The latter species is in general a shade darker and the
sculpture of the thorax is less distinct, but the two species can be readily separated
on the difference in shape of their stigmal knobs and the absence of the oval black
spots below the ocelli in Epimegastigmus brevivalvus.

6. Length: average 2-54 mm., maximum 3:02 mm.; minimum 2:24 mm. It is
slightly shorter and is less robust than the female. Sculpture much as in the
female. Dorsal surface of head, thorax and abdomen mainly black, the ventral
surface including the legs being pale castaneous as in the female. The black
markings are very regular. On the head there is a more or less rectangular black
patch which surrounds the ocelli. On the pronotum there is a somewhat triangular
black patch which fades towards the distal margin. The scutum, apart from the
lateral edges, is black. A median line on the scutellum and the greater part of the

268 NEW SPECIES OF MEGASTIGMUS,

propodeum are black. The antenna (fig. 3A) and the stigmal knob of the male
(fig. 3D) are illustrated.

The type, allotype, and numerous paratypes, were bred by the writer from galls
caused by Tepperella trilineata on the flower buds of Acacia decurrens at Lindfield,
Sydney, New South Wales in October, 1936.

A B cU NSN

Figs. 3-4.—Megastigmus acaciae.

3.—A, Antenna of male (x 36); B, Antenna of female (x 36); C, Stigmal knob of
female (x 105); D, Stigmal knob of male (x 105); E, Mandible of female (x 105); F,
Lateral view of ovipositor stylet (x 180); G, Ventral view of ovipositor sheath (x 180) ;
H, Lateral view of ovipositor sheath (x 180).

4.—A, B, C, Ovarian eggs (x 105).

The type, allotype, and 5 paratypes of both sexes have been forwarded to the
British Museum of Natural History, South Kensington, London, and 6 paratypes
of both sexes have also been forwarded to the United States National Museum,
Washington, U.S.A.

The Egg.
The ovarian egg, just prior to deposition, is barely visible to the unaided eye.
It consists of a minute white oval body, bearing at its anterior end a short pointed
pedicel and at its posterior end a very long slender pedicel (fig. 4, A-C), which
widens out slightly posteriorly. The dimensions are set out in Table 1.

,

TABLE 1.—Dimensions of Ovarian Egg of Megastigmus acaciae (in millimetres).

Body of Egg. Long Pedicel.
Total Length of
Length. ay; ay ae oe 9 . | Pigs =| Short
| Length. | Width. | Length, | Width. Pedicel.
| } } | |
otek | | |
| | | |
Average ea 0-438 0-133 | 0-024 | 0-297 0-006 | 0-013
Maximum .. 0-459 0-139 0-025 | 0-314 | 0-007 0-010
Minimum ... 0-409 0:125 | 0-022 | 0-287 0-005 0-017
|

BY N. S. NOBLE. 269

In general features the egg resembles very closely the egg of Hpimegastigmus
brevivalvus (Noble, 1938a).

The Larva.

Based on mandible size and shape and the integumentary setae, five larval
stages are recognizable. Five larval stages were also found in Hpimegastigmus
brevivaluus, and the various larval stages in the two species are remarkably
similar.

Stage 1.—The first-stage larva (fig. 5) is so minute that it is invisible to the
naked eye. Under the microscope it is seen to be translucent, and in side view
is slightly arched, and consists of a head and thirteen segments. The head is
more or less hemispherical in outline, and somewhat narrower than the first
abdominal segment, which is the widest portion of the larva. Each succeeding
segment becomes narrower. The smallest larva measured was 0:16 mm. in length
and 0:08 mm. in width. The integument is free of ornamentation and there is no
evidence of any respiratory system. The mouth is ventral and the mandibles
(fig. 6A), which are pale golden, are very lightly chitinized, extremely fine
pointed, and slightly curved, with the tips overlapping. Their average length is
0:009 mm., the maximum being 0:012 mm. and the minimum 0-007 mm.

Figs. 5-8.—Megastigmus acaciae.

5.—Ventral view of first-stage larva (x 180).

6.—A, Mandible of first-stage larva; B, Mandible of second-stage larva; C, Mandible
of third-stage larva; D, Mandible of fourth-stage larva; H, Mandible of fifth-stage larva;
F, G, H, setae of first segment of mature larva (all x 180).

7.—Lateral view of second-stage larva (x 180).

8.—Lateral view of mature larva (x 20).

Stage 2.—The second-stage larva (fig. 7) resembles the first very closely in
general appearance. It is translucent except for a narrow central zone in the
abdomen, the contents of which are bright green. It consists of a hemispherical
head and thirteen clearly defined segments. The larva is slightly arched. The
first and second segments are widest and the larva narrows gently to the last
segment. The dimensions of the smallest and largest larvae measured are set out
in Table 4. The head is slightly more than the width of the widest segment, and

270 NEW SPECIES OF MEGASTIGMUS,

the latter is approximately half the total length of the larva. There is no evidence
of integumentary setae or of any respiratory system. The mouth is ventral and
the mandibles (fig. 6B), which are triangular in outline, are unidentate with the
tips slightly curved and overlapping. At the base the mandibles are almost colour-
less, the tips being golden. Their average length is 0:018 mm., the maximum being
0-020 mm. and the minimum 0-015 mm.

Stage 3—The third-stage larva is somewhat more arched than the two
preceding stages and it tapers towards both ends. It is translucent to green in
colour, the region of the alimentary tract being a darker green. Superficially it
resembles the second stage. Dimensions of the largest and smallest larvae are
given in Table 4. The mandibles (fig. 6C) are triangular in outline, with the tips
curved and overlapping. The bases are pale amber, with the tips more heavily
chitinized and overlapping. Their average length is 0:044 mm., the maximum
being 0:050 mm. and the minimum 0-033 mm. In the third larval stage, as is the
case with Epimegastigmus brevivalvus, the first signs of the developing respiratory
system are to be seen. In the more advanced larvae of this stage there are
developing longitudinal tracheal trunks united anteriorly, but disappearing
posteriorly. A limited number of short tracheal branches can also be seen in
process of development, but there is no evidence of any spiracular formation.

Stage 4.——The fourth stage is pale green in colour, cylindrical and arched,
and tapering towards both ends. It resembles the third stage in all general
respects and the dimensions of larvae of this stage are set out in Table 4. A
depression in the last abdominal segment marks the position of the developing
anus. The mandibles (fig. 6D) are still triangular in outline, unidentate and
curved, with the tips overlapping. The basal half of the mandibles is pale, but
the distal half is amber in colour. The average length of the mandibles is 0-066
mm., the maximum being 0:076 mm. and the minimum 0:059 mm. A number of
rounded sensillae are to be seen above and below the mandibles. There is further
marked development of the respiratory system during this stage. Well-developed
tracheal trunks are present, united anteriorly and posteriorly, and profusely
branching tracheae can be seen passing out to the various body organs. In more
advanced larvae of this stage the developing spiracles and spiracular trunks are
to be seen.

Stage 5.—The last-stage larva (fig. 8), which varies from white to dark grey
in colour, is cylindrical and arched, and tapering towards the head and the anus.
The contents of the alimentary tract are sometimes dark grey and may give the
larva a grey appearance, but this is always masked by fat body which at times
completely obscures the grey, and the larva then appears quite white. It consists
of a head and thirteen segments, the head being conspicuously narrower than the
first abdominal segment. The average length of the mature larva is 2:63 mm., the
maximum being 2:81 mm. and the minimum 2:45 mm.; the average width is 0:91
mm., with a maximum of 1:04 mm. and a minimum of 0:83 mm. On the ventral
surface of the head and surrounding the anterior border of the first segment there
is a series of short papillae. A median circlet of short setae is present on the first
segment (fig. 6F, G, H), a limited and decreasing number of smaller setae being
present on the second and third segments. No setae are present on the fourth
to eighth segments inclusive, while a limited and variable number of short setae
are borne laterally on segments nine to twelve inclusive, there being a circlet of
minute spines on the last segment. A well defined depression in the last segment
marks the anus. The head is hemispherical in outline. The mouth is ventral.
The mandibles, which are more heavily chitinized than in the preceding stage,

BY N. S. NOBLE. 271

are somewhat triangular in outline and are four-toothed (fig. 6E). They are
brown in colour and average 0:10 mm. in length, the maximum being 0-11 mm. and
the minimum 0:09 mm. Development of the respiratory system continues during
the fifth stage, and at maturity the larva possesses nine pairs of open spiracles,
one pair being present on each segment from two to ten inclusive. Profusely
branching tracheae pass out from the two main longitudinal trunks to the various
body organs. The dimensions of the smallest and longest larvae of the various
stages measured are set out in Table 4.

BIoLoey.
Length of Life of Adults.

Newly-emerged adults were placed in glass tubes six inches in length and one
inch in diameter. One end of the tube was covered with cheese-cloth and the
other was plugged with cotton-wool which was kept moistened with sugar solution.
These were retained in the laboratory and dead wasps were removed daily; the
length of life of 500 individuals is set out in Table 2.

TABLE 2.—Length of Life of Megastigmus acaciae in the Laboratory.

|
Length of Number Number Length of | Number Number
Life in | of | of | Life in | of | of
Days. Males. Females. Days. Males. Females.
|
| |
1 13 6 8 20 12
2 | 18 14 9 | 12 5
3 10 22) 10 4 2
4 34 39 11 5 iL
5 56 | 61 2 — il
6 46 62 13 1 —
7 31 25
Total a 250 250

Average length of life of male wasps, 5:46 days; female wasps, 5:17 days.
Maximum length of life of male wasps, 13 days; female wasps, 12 days.
Minimum length of life of male wasps, 1 day; female wasps, 1 day.

It will be seen that the length of life is comparatively short, the average for
male wasps under these conditions being 5:46 days, and for female wasps 5:17 days.

Percentage of Sexes.

Of a total of 1,559 adults of Megastigmus acaciae which emerged in 1936,
1,013 or 64:98 per cent. were males and 546 or 35:02 per cent. were females. Thus
males outnumbered females almost in a ratio of 2 to 1, which the writer found to
be the case in Hpimegastigmus brevivalvus, EH. trisulcus and Hpibootania nonvitta,
Megastigmines which are parasites of the citrus gall wasp, Hurytoma fellis, and it
seems that this is a characteristic of the parasitic Megastigmines, which is in
direct contrast to the species of Hurytoma studied by the writer, females in this
genus outnumbering the males in the ratio of 2 to 1.

Mating.

Mating was observed on a number of occasions in tubes in the laboratory, and
the behaviour of the two sexes is typical of other Chalcids studied by the writer.
The male mounts the back of the female, strikes the antennae in front of those of
the female for a few moments and then moves back and fertilizes her. In the case

272 NEW SPECIES OF MEGASTIGMUS,

of two couples under observation the contact lasted 17 and 21 seconds respectively.
The male, as is usual, returned to the back of the female, but a further contact
was not established.

Oviposition.

In ovipositing, the female uses the antennae tips to locate flower buds in which
Tepperella trilineata has already oviposited. The abdomen is brought down at
right angles to the thorax, the ovipositor is exposed, and worked down into the
acacia bud and an egg is deposited. After each oviposition females under
observation withdrew the ovipositor and flew away, usually alighting on numbers
of buds before finding a suitable one in which to oviposit.

In 1936, emergence of adults of M. acaciae extended from 2nd October to
8th November., The first flower was observed on this tree on 12th November that
year, i.e., 4 days after the last emergence of adults of this parasite. Thus during
the greater part of the oviposition period of M. acaciae, flower buds only are present
and it is not until some months later that any external evidence of gall develop-
ment is visible.

Dissection of buds in which Megastigmus acaciae had been observed ovipositing
invariably revealed the presence of either eggs or first-stage larvae of Tepperella
trilineata, and on two occasions during November 1936 the eggs of Megastigmus
acaciae were dissected from the first-stage larvae of T. trilineata.

In the case of Hpimegastigmus brevivalvus (Noble, 1938a) the eggs are
deposited within the eggs of £. fellis, but do not hatch until the host has passed
to the first larval stage.

It is possible that Megastimus acaciae has the same method of oviposition and
that the eggs found in first-stage larvae were deposited originally in the host eggs.
In the case of M. acaciae, however, in 1936, the first adults did not emerge until
twenty-five days after the first Tepperella trilineata adults emerged. During the
greater part of the emergence period of M. acaciae, both eggs and first-stage larvae
of its host are present, and towards the end of the emergence period of M. acaciae
first-stage larvae of TJ. trilineata predominate, and it is possible that M. acaciae
oviposits in both the egg and the first-stage larva of 7. trilineata.

Superparasitism.

On 16th January, 1937, a second-stage larva of 7. trilineata was dissected and
found to contain two first-stage larvae of M. acaciae. On the same day two first-
stage larvae of M. acaciae were dissected from a first-stage larva of 7. trilineata.
On 2nd September, 1936, a fifth-stage larva of JT. trilineata was dissected and found
to contain both a third- and a fourth-stage larva of M. acaciae.

In all cases the larvae appeared normal and active, but more than one larva
was never observed to reach maturity within a single host larva.

Larval Development.

First-stage larvae of M. acaciae are to be found in first-stage larvae of
T. trilineata and it has been pointed out, when discussing the morphology, that
there are five larval stages. When the first-stage larva of M. acaciae hatches, the
head is quite conspicuous but, as feeding takes place, the abdominal segments
increase considerably in size so that the head becomes smaller in proportion. The
five larval stages of M. acaciae are spent within the larva of 7. trilineata.

M. acaciae spends the summer, autumn and winter in the larval stage within
the larva of 7. trilineata and the green of the contents of the midintestine of the
parasite larva can frequently be seen showing through the integument of the host

BY N. S. NOBLE. 273

TABLE 3.—Results of the Dissection of Galls on Acacia decurrens during a period of Sizteen Months showing the
Stages of Tepperella trilineata and Megastigmus acaciae Present.

|

Tepperella trilineata larvae
parasitized. Numbers and Stages of larvae
Date of Dissection. of Megastigmus acaciae within larvae
of T. trilineata.
Number. Stages.
1935-36 Galls.
11/5/36 2 Fourth. 2 first.
16/5/36 2 Fifth. 2 third.
18/5/36 1 Fourth. 1 first.
27/5/36 17 Fourth. 15 first, 2 second.
5/6/36 6 Fifth. 1 first, 2 second, 1 third, 2 fourth.
12/6/36 9 Fifth. 8 first, 1 second.
11/7/36 4 Fifth. 1 first, 3 second.
1 Second. 1 first.
16/7/36 1 Third. 1 first.
1 Fifth. 1 first.
17/7/36 9 Fifth. 6 second, 1 third, 2 fourth.
28/7/36 13 Fifth. 2 second, 11 third.
9/8/36 14 Fifth. 2 second, 9 third, 3 fourth.
12/8/36 2 Fifth. 2 fourth.
14/8/36 13 Fifth. 9 third, 3 fourth, 1 fifth.
18/8/36 8 Fifth. 5 fourth, 3 fifth.
2/9/36 4 Fifth. 3 fourth, 1 fifth.
6/9/36 1 Fifth. 1 third.
1936-37 Galls.
9/1/37 3 First. 3 first.
4 First. 4 first.
LOPUET { 1 Second. e 1 first.
1/2/37 i First. 1 first.
15/2/37 3 Second. 3 first.
3 Second. 3 first.
9/3/37 1 Fourth. 1 second.
1 Fifth. 1 second.
2/4/37 Zz Third. 2 first.
6 Third. 6 first.
AWETSG { 1 Fourth. 1 first.
5 Third. 5 first.
eC 5 Fourth. 5 first.
1 Third. 1 first.
YB als 5 Fourth. 1 first, 4 second.
29/6/37 1 Fifth. 1 second.
15/7/37 2 Fifth. 2 second.
6/8/37 3 Fifth. 2 third, 1 fourth.
13/8/37 3 Fifth. 1 second, 1 third, 1 fifth.
30/8/37 3 Fifth. 3 fifth.
13/9/37 2; Fifth. 1 fourth, 1 fifth.

In 1936 some larvae of Megastigmus acaciae had already eaten their way out of their hosts on 22nd August
and in 1937 a number of mature larvae of M. acaciae were also present on 30th August.

On subsequent dissection dates shown in Table 3, mature larvae, prepupae and pupae of M. acaciac were
present in the galls.

1936.—Date of first emergence of adults of M. acaciae, 2nd Oct.

1937.—Date of first emergence of adults of M. acaciae, 3rd Oct.

274 NEW SPECIES OF MEGASTIGMUS,

larva. During the greater part of the time it lies in the haemocoele and apparently
feeds upon the blood of the host larva and, remaining comparatively small, does not
appear to have any marked adverse effect upon the host larva. Thus, though
parasitized, the larva of 7. trilineata is able to reach the last larval stage, but is
never able to pupate, for at this time the larva of Megastigmus acaciae begins a
period of rapid development, undergoes a series of moults, reaches the last larval
stage, and devours the greater part of the internal contents of the larva of
T. trilineata.

The larva of M. acaciae, on reaching maturity, tears an opening in the
integument of the host larva and gradually works its way out. The host larval
integument appears for a short time as a small crumpled mass near the tip of
the abdomen of the parasite larva. Prior to pupation the larva of M. acaciae
reduces the host-remains to minute particles and, as a result of this final feeding,
increases in size slightly, and the particles are often to be seen adhering to the
integument of the parasite larva. The latter then voids a quantity of dark waste
matter, and becomes white in colour. Within a few days it pupates in the gall
cell formerly occupied by its host.

In Table 3 are set out the results of the dissections of galls on Acacia decurrens,
during a sixteen-months period, showing the stages of both Tepperella trilineata and
M. acaciae present. It will be seen that the larvae of the latter species were
usually several stages less advanced than the host larvae from which they were
dissected. At the time most of the larvae of M. acaciae reach maturity, the larvae
of Tepperella trilineata have pupated and some have already commenced to emerge
as adults. The dimensions of the smallest and largest larvae of the various stages
of M. acaciae measured are set out in Table 4.

TABLE 4.—Dimensions (in millimetres) of various Larval Stages of Megastigmus acaciae.

Stage of Larva. | Length. | Width.

Stage 1.. a Seales baer 0-40 0-18
Smallest .. 0-16 0-08

Stage 2 | Largest .. 0:58 0-29
| Smallest .. ae aa 0-30 0-13

Stage 3.. re Pe imbargeste a =e e2|| 0:88 0-35
| Smallest .. 0-51 0-22

Stage 4 | Largest .. 1-10 0-43
Smallest .. 0-96 0°35

Stage 5.. a .. | Largest ‘.. 2°81 1:04
| Smallest .. 1:36 i 0°56

The Pupa.

The pupa is at first white; later the eyes turn red, and the body gradually
becomes pigmented and all the colours of the adult are showing some days before
emergence.

The average length of female pupae is 2:33 mm., the maximum being 2°50 mm.
and the minimum 2:08 mm. The average length of male pupae is 2-11 mm., the
maximum being 2:23 mm. and the minimum being 1:93 mm. The first pupa was
dissected from galls on 6th September, 1936, and the first adult of M. acaciae
emerged on 2nd October, 1936.

BY N. S. NOBLE. 275

Hmergence of Adults.

In Figure 9 is shown graphically the emergence of 1,559 adults of Megastigmus
acaciae from galls on Acacia decurrens in the spring of 1936. Emergence
commenced on 2nd October and continued until 8th November, a period of 38 days,
which is only two days longer than the emergence period of its host Tepperella
trilineata. The main emergence occurred during the last half of October. During
the early part of the emergence period males predominated, but later the females
outnumbered the males.

| HA
I loc en Pe eabosalse bela tH
Shae ee, ORE ce

NUMBER OF INDIVIDUALS
oa
o

EMERGENCE DATES

Fig. 9.—Graph showing emergence of 1,559 adults of Megastigmus acaciae from
flower-bud galls on Acacia decurrens in the spring of 1936.

In Figure 10 is shown graphically the daily emergence in 1936 of 1,058 adults
of JT. trilineata and of 703 adults of M. acaciae, this representing the total
emergence of the two species from this series of galls. In this instance the first
adult of M. acaciae emerged eleven days before the last adult of 7. trilineata. The
total emergence period of 7. trilineata from these galls was thirty-six days, while
the total emergence period of M. acaciae from this same batch of galls was thirty-
four days.

120

2)

z 30

2

=

Zz
a

Ze

uw

ae

: a
w

ao

=

>

He

fm es

ase eWER ce oe asses
ErvERGENCE Dates
Fig. 10.—Graph showing total emergence of 1,058 adults of Tepperella trilineata
and 7038 adults of Megastigmus acaciae from one series of galls on Acacia decurrens in
the spring of 1936.
Tepperella trilineata
Megastigmus acaciae -----------

276 NEW SPECIES OF MEGASTIGMUS,

Galls were collected on 17th October, 1935, from the same tree, and adults of
M. acaciae were then emerging in numbers. On 28th October, 1921, galls were
collected from Acacia decurrens at Wyong, and at this time adults of M. acaciae
were emerging freely.

In Table 5 are set out the results of the periodical dissection of galls in the
spring of 1936, showing only the various stages of M. acaciae present, after the
larvae of this species have eaten their way out of the larvae of Tepperella
trilineata.

Pupae were present on 6th September, 1936, and the last pupa was found on
18th October, 1936. The first mature larvae were found on 22nd August, but
mature larvae were found up to 4th October, which was slightly more than one
month before the last adult emerged.

In the spring of 1937, in dissections made from 13th September to 16th
September inclusive, 55 mature larvae, three prepupae, and 5 pupae of M. acaciae
were found in the galls from the same tree. The first mature larva of M. acaciae
was found on 30th August, 1937, the first pupa was found on 4th September, 1937,
and the first adults of M. acaciae emerged on 38rd October, 1937, only one day later
than the first emergence of this species in the preceding year, though the emergence
of its host Tepperella trilineata was twelve days later in 1937 than in 1936.

TABLE 5.—Results of Dissections of Galls from A. decurrens in the Spring of 1936 showing the Progressive
Development of M. acaciae after leaving the larvae of Tepperella trilineata.

Number Stage of M. acaciae present.
: of Cells
Date of Vacated or
Dissection. Occupied Remarks.
by other Mature
Species. | arvae. Pupae. Adults.
| |
22/8/36 a3 80 5 = — [eee M. acaciae larvae still within
30/8/36 ae 132 4 — — host larvae.
6/9/36 af 203 Sul 19 — J
9/9/36 a 63 8 6 = |
13/9/36 ar 69 23 6 = |
20/9/36 are 116 23 12 —
27/9/36 an 197 il 24 —
4/10/36 o8 148 1 25 3
11/10/36 cea 81 = 21 4 Some of the vacated cells during this
18/10/36 aa 132 — 13 8 period must have once been occupied
25/10/36 - | 98 — — 4 by M. acaciae.
1/11/36 eaes| 112 ; _ — 2
8/11/36 a 109 — —_— —_—

First adult of M. acaciae emerged 2nd October, 1936.
Last adult of M. acaciae emerged 8th November, 1936.

Percentage of Parasitism.

In May and June 1936, 545 larvae of J’epperella trilineata were dissected, and
211 or 38-71 per cent. were found to contain larvae of Megastigmus acaciae.

In a previous paper (1939) the writer discussed the biology of Hurytoma
gahani Noble, another species of Chalcid which is present in these galls on Acacia
decurrens. The larvae of this species are to be found in the same gall cells as
larvae of the primary gall-former, Tepperella trilineata, and ultimately the larvae

BY N. S. NOBLE. PHT

of EL. gahani devour the larvae of T. trilineata with which they are associated, and
destroy at the same time any larvae of M. acaciae which happen to be present in
these cells.

In the 545 cells mentioned above, though 211 larvae of M. acaciae were present,
all but 97 were also accompanied by the larvae of H. gahani and would later have
been destroyed; thus out of the 545 cells examined, adults of Megastigmus acaciae
would only have emerged from 97 or 17:80 per cent. of them.

In the spring of 1937 a further 545 gall cells from the same tree were examined,
the larvae of Hurytoma gahani at the time of examination having already devoured
the other occupants of the gall cells. It was found that Megastigmus acaciae would
have emerged as adults from only 71 or 13-03 per cent. of the gall cells, a decrease
of more than 4 per cent. as compared with 1936.

Effect of Parasitism on the Host and on Gall Development.

At times during the course of these investigations, minute galls were observed,
which were much less advanced than the majority of the galls on the tree, and
dissection of these frequently revealed minute host larvae, which were parasitized,
and which were much less advanced than unparasitized larvae of this species in
other galls. However, such minute galls were also found, in which very backward
larvae of T. trilineata were present, and were unparasitized.

On the other hand, maturing larvae of T. trilineata have been examined in
which well-developed larvae of M. acaciae were present, without having any
apparent effect on the host larva.

At various times unilocular galls were found in which mature larvae or pupae
of M. acaciae alone were present, and these galls were just as large and normal as
galls in which the primary gall-former, 7. trilineata, was present alone. Froggatt
(1892), in the case of Trichilogaster acaciae-discoloris, causing galls on Acacia
discolor, stated that, as a result of infestation by a small black chalcid, the galls
are changed to a shapeless, fleshy mass. In the case of T. trilineata it would
appear that, provided the larvae are permitted by the parasite to reach maturity,
the presence of the latter does not affect the size or shape of the gall.

SUMMARY.

The external morphology and biology of Megastigmus acaciae, a new species, ~
are set out.

M. acaciae is an internal parasite of the larva of Tepperella trilineata, a species
which causes galling of the flower buds of Acacia decurrens and, like its host, the »
life cycle of M. acaciae is annual.

Emergence of both species commences in the spring each year. Hmergence
of adults of M. acaciae commences after most of the host adults have emerged, the
main emergence taking place in October. Of a total of 1,559 adults which emerged
in 1936, 1,013 or 64:98 per cent. were males and 546 or 35:02 per cent. were females.

Adults of M. acaciae are short. lived, the average length of life of male wasps
in the laboratory being 5:46 days, and of female wasps 5-17 days.

Eggs of M. acaciae are found in first-stage larvae of T. trilineata, but it is
possible that they may be deposited in the eggs of the latter species and remain
unhatched until after the eggs of J. trilineata had done so, this being the known
habit of Epimegastigmus brevivalvus, an allied species studied by the writer.

The entire larval period of M. acaciae is spent within the haemocoele of the
host larva. For the greater part of the larval period, the development of the
parasite larva is very slow, the latter still being comparatively small and some
being only in the first stage, when the last host-larval stage has been reached. A

278 NEW SPECIES OF MEGASTIGMUS.

period of rapid development then follows and, before the larva of TJ. trilineata
can pupate, the larva of M. acaciae devours all of its internal contents, eats its way
out of the larval skin of the host, and later pupates in the cell formerly occupied
by the host larva.

There are five larval stages, all of which are described.

Of 545 larvae of J. trilineata dissected in 1936, 211 or 38-71 per cent. were
parasitized by WM. acaciae.

Acknowledgement.

The writer wishes to acknowledge his indebtedness to Dr. A. B. Gahan, Senior
Entomologist of the United States Department of Agriculture, for his valuable
observations on the species under discussion.

Literature Cited.

Froceatrr, W. W., 1892.—Notes on Australian Cynipidae with descriptions of several new
species. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2) vii, 152-156.
Nose, N. S., 1938a.—EHpimegastigmus (Megastigmus) brevivalvus Girault: A parasite
of the citrus gall wasp (Hurytoma fellis Girault) ; with notes on several other species
of hymenopterous gall inhabitants. Sci. Bull. N.S.W. Dept. Agr., 65.
, 1938b.—Tepperella trilineata Cam., a wasp causing galling of the flower buds
of Acacia decurrens. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ixiii, 389-411.
, 1939.—A new species of Chalcid (genus Hurytoma) associated with Tepperella
trilineata Cam., a wasp causing galling of the flower buds of Acacia decurrens.
Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ixiv, 223-241.

279

A RECONNAISSANCE SURVEY OF THE VEGETATION OF THE
MYALL LAKES.

By T. G. B. Osporn? and R. N. Rogpertson.?
(Plates vi-vii; three Text-figures.)
[Read 28th June, 1939.]

The coastal dune and swamp sequences of New South Wales have been so
much disturbed in the neighbourhood of Sydney, and for many miles to the north
and south of it, that particular interest is to be found in the Myall Lakes district.
There the coastal vegetation has been very little disturbed and the series of plant
communities that it shows can be examined in an almost primitive state. The
same area also offers some interesting comparisons between the Eucalyptus forest
developed on recent sands and on hills of palaeozoic rocks. The junction between
Hucalyptus forest and sub-tropical rain-forest—locally called ‘brush’—can also be
studied. These features of ecological interest appear to justify our placing on
record the notes made on three reconnaissance visits to the area. Circumstances
will prevent our continuing the joint work.

Visits were made to the area in September 1934, June and September 1935.
The first two were with the Sydney University Rover Scouts. We are indebted
to all who took part in these camps for assistance in various ways which made
possible work in an otherwise sparsely inhabited district. We also desire to
express our thanks to certain members of the camps for technical help; to S. W.
Carey and H. Maze for access to their field-notes on the geology and physiography
of the area; to N. A. Kelly and N. C. W. Beadle for help in collecting, and to O. D.
Evans, of the Botany School, University of Sydney, for assistance in determining
some of the plants.

The Myall Lakes are an extensive series of coastal lagoons situated 32° 30’ S.
Lat., and 152° 25’ E. Long., about 50 miles north-east from Newcastle. At the
present day they communicate with the sea only indirectly, by means of the
Lower Myall River. This is a slow-moving, narrow, tortuous stream which extends
from the southern end of the Lakes to Tea Gardens on Port Stephens, eleven
miles away. Between the lakes and the Southern Pacific Ocean lies a belt of sand-
dunes, low heaths and swamps, varying in width from a few hundred yards at
Mungo to three miles or more at its northern end. From this there rise at
infrequent intervals low rounded hills of tuffaceous rock. To the west of the
lakes the country consists of broken hills and valleys—also of tuffaceous rock—
with, however, considerable swamp and heath areas.

Though the area has been inhabited by white men for over a century, much
of it, especially the dunes, heaths and swamps, is still in a primitive state. Much

1 Department of Botany, Oxford.

2Botany School, University of Sydney. The field work was carried out whilst the
writer held a Science Research Fellowship of the University of Sydney and (later) a
Linnean Macleay Fellowship in Botany.

280 VEGETATION OF THE MYALL LAKES,

of the forest has been influenced by timber-getting,? or has been partially cleared
for grazing, but sufficient remains to reconstruct the essential parts of the story.

PHYSIOGRAPHY.

During the Tertiary Period the area now occupied by the Myall Lakes, like
the rest of the East Coast of Australia, was subjected to the uplift which resulted
in the formation of the coastal tablelands. In this region the uplift probably
amounted to about 1,300 feet. The plateau of palaeozoic tuffs thus formed was

PALAEOZOIC ROCKS
UNSHADE D

RECENT SAND,
SILT »» SWAMP

Fig. 1.—Sketch Map of the Area. C.K. = Chinaman’s Knob on the Lower Myall
River; M = Mungo; B.P. = Bombah Point; V.H. = Violet Hill; S.G. = South Gibber.

rapidly attacked by streams which carved deep valleys into its surface. In a
subsequent general subsidence of some 400 feet, these valleys were drowned by
the sea and a typical rias coast was formed. The coast then presented a rugged
appearance with numerous off-shore islands. At that time landmarks like Mungo,
Violet Hill, Bombah Point and Chinaman’s Knob were all islands. The combined
action of coastal currents, waves and tides resulted in the formation of sandspits.
Under the influence of currents, these sandspits would develop on the south-
western side of the islands and, gradually extending southwards, link up with
each other. Thus there would be formed a continuous sandspit running from

2R. Dowson, who founded the Australian Agricultural Company’s Settlement at
Port Stephens, records that he ascended the Myall River in 1825 to visit a timber-camp,
and that “Cedar” (Cedrela Toona) getters had been operating in the district, under
licence, for some time previously. ‘‘Present State of Australia, etc.”’, Edition II, pp.
41-76, London, 1835.

BY T. G. B. OSBORN AND R. N. ROBERTSON. 281

island to island for twenty miles parallel to the coast. This cut off the Myall
Lakes as a large coastal lagoon studded with islands. With their appearance
above water, the sandspits became subject to the direct action of wind which
caused the sand to accumulate in dunes and to advance landwards across the
sandspits. Since the prevailing wind was an easterly, and since the coast-line ran
approximately NH-SW, the sand-dunes, advancing before the wind, did not advance
parallel to the coast, but developed en échelon.

Meantime, land was, and is still, being reclaimed from the lakes. The accumu-
lation of blown sand has caused a gradual shallowing. Sand-bars made their appear-
ance and, assisted by the water-weeds, were built above the water. There are no
recently-formed sand-islands in the lakes, but the extensive sand-bar in the lower
part of the Booloombayt Lake approaches within a foot of the surface. In certain
parts of the area—particularly on the Broadwater—the waves of the lake them-
selves have caused an accumulation of sand to form sloping beaches. The sand
thus raised above the water has come under the influence of the wind and has
formed dunes of varying sizes on the inland shore of the lakes.

Certain areas, Known locally as ‘moors’, extend for some miles without any
elevation whatever. Though known as ‘moors’ there is no accumulation of peat on
them, and they will be termed ‘heaths’ in this account. Their level nature and the
fact that they are bounded by fixed sand-dunes point to their being old lake beds
which, having been raised above the water-level, have gradually drained. (Possibly
the relatively recent 15-foot uplift recorded in places along the New South Wales
Coast may account for some of these heaths.)

While the chief reclamation of the lakes, particularly on the coastal side, has
been by sand, silt deposition has been important in some areas. Three main rivers
drain into the lakes, the Upper Myall River and Dirty Creek into Broadwater at
the south, and the Booloombayt Creek into the small lake of that name in the
centre. These streams have built silt flats of considerable areas. Silt deposition
is at present active at the outlet (on the Broadwater) of the Lower Myall River
and particularly so at the mouth of Booloombayt Creek.

Beyond the entrance of the Lower Myall into Broadwater, tide has very little
effect, and in the channel at Bombah Point which connects Broadwater and
Booloombayt, the effect of daily tides cannot be noticed. The mangrove, Aegiceras
majus, which tolerates a considerable amount of freshwater, grows with Casuarine
glauca in the upper reaches of the Lower Myall, but does not enter the lakes.

Floods are very important. The Myall Lakes present the interesting example
of a lake system which is drained at one end and filled in the centre. That is to
say, they are drained by the Lower Myall River in the south, and filled by the
Upper Myall River, Dirty Creek and Booloombayt Creek, but the largest lake—
Myall Lake proper—receives no streams of importance. During flood times the
rivers filling the lakes do so at a much greater rate than the small Lower Myall
River can drain them. Consequently, they may rise quite rapidly. The rising
waters of the Booloombayt meet the rising waters of the Broadwater and, being
unable to escape, are pushed away from the outlet into the Myall Lake. Thus
the lakes which drain Myall Lakes are also the lakes which flood it. If the floods
in the filling streams are also accompanied by spring tides on the Lower Myall
River, the northward flow of the water may be quite rapid, and a strong current
may run in the channel at Bombah Point. This channel is the only place in the
lakes which shows evidence of stream scour.

The salinity of the lakes varies periodically. Generally speaking, the water
is brackish, but following heavy rain in the surrounding ranges, it may be almost

x

282 VEGETATION OF THE MYALL LAKES,

fresh. The salinity increases greatly after periods of dry weather, especially if
such periods are accompanied by high tides in the Lower Myall.

CLIMATE.

The Myall Lakes lie in the coastal belt of New South Wales, just within the
region having a maximum summer rainfall. The two nearest stations on the
coast for which rainfall figures are available are Manning Heads and Newcastle.
Manning Heads is about as far north of the area as Newcastle is to the south.
The average annual rainfall at these two stations is 139-7 ecm. (5,505 points) and
116-1 cm. (4,571 points) respectively. The rainfall in the Myall Lakes area may,
therefore, be taken as about 127 cm. (50 inches) per annum. The average monthly
falls at Manning Heads and Newcastle are set out in the following table:

Average Annual Rainfall in Millimetres.

Jan. | Feb. | Mar. | April. | May. | June. | July. | Aug. | Sept. | Oct. | Nov. | Dec. | Year.

Manning
Heads | 123 156 146 142 137 123 112 87 84 80 94 113 1397

Newcastle 88 103 122 119 126 99 119 78 78 58 66 87 1161

160

150

140

130

120
/10
100
90
80
70

60

50

J F M A M J J A S (a) N D

Fig. 2.—Curves showing mean annual rainfall in millimetres at Manning Heads
(continuous line) and at Newcastle (broken line). Data from C.S. & I.R. pamphlet 42,
1933.

BY T. G. B. OSBORN AND R. N. ROBERTSON. 283

Occasionally very heavy falls of rain accompanied by severe flooding are
features of the summer months. Thus, in Newcastle, there are records of 25-4
or 27:94 cm. (10 or 11 inches) of rain falling within 24 hours. It will be noticed
(Fig. 2) that the late summer months, February-March, are the wettest months,
and that the spring, September—October, are the driest. The main flowering period
of the sclerophyllous shrubs is in the months August-September.

At Manning Heads the average annual humidity is 77%, the extremes being
83% in April and 71% in October. An effect of the high humidity is to be noticed
in the abundance of the epiphytic Dendrobium teretifolium on Casuarinas fringing
the slow-moving rivers. Epiphytes do not usually develop on Eucalypts, but a
young tree of Ficus rubiginosa was observed in a fork of a large Hucalyptus
tereticornis near the entrance to Booloombayt Lake, opposite to Bombah Point.

3
16) 90
wo 20 i a ag <
Y Hie rg eo eee x Zane 80
A TRissogserad= See es ees S

Smear Al UMS Sale. Ale hk Soa MORNIN TS

Fig. 3.—Curves showing mean monthly maximum (continuous line) and minimum
(broken line) temperatures at Manning Heads in °C., also mean relative humidity (as
per cent.). Data from C.S. € I.R. pamphlet 42, 1933.

The mean maximum and minimum temperatures at Manning Heads are given
below:

Mean Temperature at Manning Heads in Degrees C.

Jan. | Feb. | Mar. | April.| May. | June. | July. | Aug. | Sept. | Oct. | Nov. | Dec. | Year.

Maximum 26°2 | 25-9 | 24-7 | 22-5 | 19-7 | 17-7 | 17-0 | 18-1 | 20-5 | 22-4 | 24-3 | 25-3 | 22-0

Minimum L727) W295) 16285) V4 ae hO8 8:7 7:4 8-1 | 10-0 | 12-9 | 15-1 | 17-2 | 13-1

Night frosts are not unknown between June and August in the valley bottoms.
They may have an effect on the stunted vegetation of the large open heaths.

THE PSAMMOSERE.

The vegetation of the sand-dunes shows all stages from that of the first
colonists of bare beach to climax forest on fixed dunes. The climax is an associa-
tion in which Hucalyptus pilularis (the black-butt) is found with H. gummifera,
Angophora lanceolata, and one or other of the Banksias, B. integrifolia or
B. serrata. The sere is complicated by an admixture of certain lower-growing but
broader-leaved species, e.g., Cupaniopsis anacardioides, Clerodendron tomentosum,
in more favourable locations near the sea. It is part of an Indo-Malayan element
in the flora which, however, does not enter into the Climax. There are some
extensive blow-outs and white dunes to the south of the area, inland from
Broughton Island.

284 VEGETATION OF THE MYALL LAKES,

Strand Plants.

The strand consists of a clear white sand derived from the wastage of the
tuff rocks. Unlike the sands of the southern Australian coast, it has not a high
lime content. Cakile maritima, a doubtfully indigenous species, is the only true
strand plant.

Fore-Dune.

Dune building is begun by Festuca littoralis, a tussock grass, mingled with
which low mats of Senecio spathulatus may also occur. Spinifex hirsutus, which
also occurs, is not so important in dune formation as it is further south on the
Australian coast.

Fixed Dunes.

These are remarkable for the important role of such mat plants as Mesembryan-
themum aequilaterale, Scaevola suaveolens and Stackhousia spathulata, also for
the early appearance of woody plants such as Correa alba and Leucopogon Richei.
The mat plants may persist, binding the sand into rounded hummocks a metre
or more in height, long after wind erosion has removed the low dune on which
they had been growing.

The following is a composite list from the dune face and the crest of the first
line of dunes:

Festuca littoralis

Spinifex hirsutus

Scirpus nodosus

Dianella caerulea

Lomandra longifolia

Pelargonium australe

Oxalis corniculata
Mesembryanthemum aequilaterale
Correa alba

Acacia longifolia

Apium prostratum
Leptospermum laevigatum
Leucopogon Richei
Stackhousia spathulata
Monotoca elliptica
Convolvulus Soldanella
Cupaniopsis anacardioides
Pomax umbellata
Scaevola suaveolens
Senecio spathulatus

Kennedya rubicunda S. lautus
Euphorbia Sparmanni Sonchus maritimus
The height to which the taller of these plants will grow is dependent on
exposure. Thus Cupaniopsis, normally a small tree about 3 m. high, has been
observed growing in extensive mats, not more than 30 cm. high, on the edge of
a stable dune. The density of the vegetation appears to be dependent upon its
freedom from fire, rather than on actual exposure to wind-shearing. Dense
impenetrable thickets of shrubs and low trees occur on exposed faces of settled
dunes, pruned neatly to an angle of 25° with the horizontal. Such a thicket may
have the following composition:
Banksia integrifolia Leptospermum laevigatum
B. serrata Angophora lanceolata
Breynia oblongifolia Monotoca elliptica
Dodonaea triquetra Myrsine variabilis
Eugenia Smithii Notelaea longifolia
Clerodendron tomentosum
The lianes, Kennedya rubicunda, Hibbertia volubilis and Tecoma australis are
found intertwined with the woody plants. In such a dense thicket there is very
little ground flora. Occasional plants of Pomaxr umbellata and Commelina cyanea

occur, but are not important.

Fixed Dune Woodland.
Banksia-Angophora Forest.
Given sufficient shelter from the wind, the tree species quickly assume
dominance and a more open woodland community results. The dominants here

BY T. G. B. OSBORN AND R. N. ROBERTSON. 285

are Angophora lanceolata and one or other of the Banksia species. In some places
the twisted limbs and frequent branching of the Angophora give evidence of its
development under scrub conditions (Pl. vi, fig. 3). In such a woodland the trees
may be no more than 5 m. high. Under more favourable conditions the dominants
may be 20 m. or more.

With the dominance of the trees, two changes are to be noted. First, the
broad-leaved species of sub-tropical affinities disappear. This ‘brush’ element,
which is a characteristic feature of the dense dune scrub, is not conspicuous or is
wholly absent in the dune forest. Secondly, most of the shrub species associated
with the earlier phases are lost. Other shrubs come in, also Pteridium, Macrozamia
and various Cyperaceae. Grass is not a feature of the dune forests. This
Angophora-Banksia forest is a very characteristic community of the settled dunes
and intervening dune flats. It exists in all grades between a forest with close,
but not dense, canopy and very little undergrowth, to open scrub woodland with a
considerable undergrowth of shrubs. Finally, as a result of burning, there may be
extensive areas of scrub in which the Angophora is absent and the Banksias only
present in the shrub layer.

The following are some of the more important constituents of the under-
growth in the Angophora-Banksia forest:

Pteridium aquilinum Hriostemon lanceolatus
Macrozamia spiralis Gompholobium latifolium
Imperata cylindrica, var. Koenigii Goodia lotifolia

Schoenus ericetorum Leptospermum laevigatum
S. imberbis Halorrhagis tetragyna
Xanthorrhoea hastilis HI. teucrioides

Lomandra longifolia Monotoca elliptica
Persoonia lanceolata Styphelia viridis

P. salicina Pomax umbellata
Leptomeria acida Opercularia varia

With the destruction of the dominants a great wealth of shrubs comes in,
chiefly nanophyllous or microphyllous forms belonging to the Proteaceae,
Leguminosae, Myrtaceae or Hpacridaceae. These are given at some length in
Appendix I.

Dune Hucalyptus Forest.

On deep stable sands, whether of fixed dunes or inter-dune flats, a forest of
Hucalypts develops. Hucalyptus pilularis is the dominant and often occurs pure,
though there is commonly present H. gummifera. Occasional trees of Angophora
lanceolata persist, and Banksia serrata is generally present in the second tree-
layer. This forest has a rather open canopy, but the amount of shade, and conse-
quently the scarcity or density of the undergrowth, appear to depend largely on
the time which has elapsed since the last forest-fire. The dominants are generally
about 15 m. in height, with a secondary tree-layer—largely Banksia serrata—up to
half that height. When the forest is open, an upper shrub layer may reach 2-3 m.
It contains such species as Leptospermum stellatum, Calycothrix tetragona, Lepto-
meria acida, Persoonia salicina and Banksia aemula. Such a height is excep-
tional; most of the undershrubs do not reach more than a metre. Such plants are
Banksia spinulosa, Isopogon anemonifolius, Persoonia lanceolata, Conospermum
taxifoium, Acacia suaveolens, A. discolor, Hibbertia linearis, Eriostemum Crowei,
Bossiaea heterophylla, B. scolopendria, Gompholobium latifolium, Dillwynia erici-
folia, Hardenbergia monophylla, Trachymene linearis, Xanthosia pilosa, Leucopogon
ericoides, L. virgatus, Epacris pulchella, Styphelia viridis. Pteridium aquilinum,
occasional plants of Macrozamia and various Cyperaceous species occur, but grasses
are scarce or absent.

286 VEGETATION OF THE MYALL LAKES,

A variant of this type of forest is to be found under conditions that are
presumably less favourable. In it the height-growth of the trees is only about
8 m. and the canopy is more open. The conditions of the reconnaissance did not
permit the taking of many soil samples. Superficially, the soils were similar;
stable sands with some humus development in the upper layers. Here Hucalyptus
pilularis is less abundant to absent. #H. gummifera is more abundant and
E. micrantha is present in sufficient quantities for its white trunk and limbs to
give character to the forest. These last two species are characteristic of tree-
scrub and low scrub-forest on the Hawkesbury Sandstone near Sydney, and are
the hardiest Eucalyptus species in that area.

Apart from a change of the dominants, the vegetation appears to be essentially
similar. Trees of Angophora lanceolata and Banksia serrata are present and
Pteridium is an important constituent of the undergrowth. In one instance, this
forest community was traversed by a water-course. These, of course, are noticeably
absent on the deep sandy soils. The water-course, which was scarcely lower than
the surrounding area, was marked by a pure stand of Melaleuca linariifolia trees
3-4 m. high with twisted trunks and canopy tops. The soil beneath, which was
superficially sandy, had much Selaginella wliginosa.

Where the deep sands abut on hills of tuff rock, an ecotone forest develops.
This will be considered in connection with the vegetation of the hills. The water-
relations of such boundaries are presumably better than either the sands—where
the water-table must lie at some depth—or the hills themselves, which have a
shallow soil. On the other hand, the Hucalypt forests mentioned above appear
to be unfavourably influenced by a permanently high water-table. They do not
extend into the various swamps and heaths to be described below.

THE HyYDROSERE.

The communities to be considered here are of interest because a very full
series is available for study, extending from open water to a swamp forest of
Eucalyptus robusta. With silt deposition, the series can be traced to a high
eucalypt forest, though only vestiges of this remain.

The open water of the lake is fringed by a reed swamp, except where white
sand reaches the water’s edge, or where the shore is stony owing to tuff hills
rising directly from the lake. The water of the lake is brackish and has a pH
of 7-7-5 but all swamp soils tested are acid.

Submerged Phase.

So far as could be ascertained, the bottom of Booloombayt and Broadwater
Lakes is covered with submerged vegetation. The most abundant species is Najas
marina, which has been found to a depth of 10 feet. This extends towards the
shore to depths of about 2 feet. With it is associated Potamogeton tricarinatus,
Vallisneria spiralis, Myriophyllum sp., Ruppia maritima. Both Potamogeton and
Myriophyllum are very abundant locally at shallower depths, but we have had no
opportunity of considering the factors which influence their relative distribution.
In places outside the recognized channels, progress, even in a rowing-boat, is
difficult. On sandy bottoms in shallow water Chara sp. may be found growing
in water 1 foot, or less, in depth, to the complete exclusion of other species. This
has been observed on sandbanks at a hundred yards or more from the shore, as
well as near to the shore line.

‘Field determination made by B.D.H. Universal Indicator. The other pH deter-
minations were made with a quinhydrone electrode in Sydney. We are indebted to
N. GC. W. Beadle for these and other analyses of the swamp soils, made after his visit in
June, 1935.

BY T. G. B. OSBORN AND R. N. ROBERTSON. 287

Succession with Silt Accumulation.
Amphibious Phase.

The reeds extend from a depth of 4-5 feet—where they are scattered—to the
water’s edge. The width of this zone is variable, but it is widest where there
are long stretches of shallow water. The pioneer plant is Scirpus lacustris, which
establishes itself on the lake bottom, spreading out from the shore, in places for
as much as 25 yards. Nearer inshore, in 1-2 feet of: water, there is usually a
continuous densely-growing zone. On its landward side Scirpus becomes mingled
with Phragmites communis, which gradually assumes dominance. In the
Booloombayt Lake the reed swamp may be 10 feet in width, and it is still wider
in the lower part of Broadwater. Other plants in the amphibious phase are Typha
angustifolia, which often forms characteristic socies in the shallower water;
Cladium articulatum, C. Mariscus and Juncus maritimus. Triglochin procera
occurs in open patches of water in the shelter of the reed swamp, and Gratiola
pedunculata may form extensive submerged colonies as well as being present in
the emerged flora near the margin. It is in the Phragmites zone that both
Casuarina glauca and Melaleuca Leucadendron first make their appearance. These
are invariably small trees (up to 5 m.) generally with a leaning trunk and abundant
branches. They differ markedly in habit from the upright and taller trees which
form the next two zones in the Swamp Forest.

Swamp Forest Phase.

From the edge of the reed swamp to the junction with the stable sand or silt
flats there extends a characteristic swamp forest with a dense undergrowth of
sedges. This can be divided into two consocies in which Casuarina glauca and
Melaleuca Leucadendron are respectively dominant. The former lies nearer to the
lake.

Casuarina glauca Fringing Forest.

A closed forest of Casuarina glauca immediately succeeds the reed swamp.
The trees, unlike those near the water’s edge, grow erect to a height of about 15 m.
The ground beneath is covered with the litter of their fallen branches, and a dense
undergrowth of tussocks of Cladium junceum, the wiry stems of which stand about
40-50 cm. high. The water-table in this forest is high. Occasional openings in the
ground-cover support colonies of Cladium articulatum, with which Cotula reptans
and (©. coronopifolia occur. Other plants are Schoenus brevifolius and Lepyrodia
mucronata, the latter locally abundant. Many of the trees have a considerable
growth of the epiphytic Dendrobium teretifolium, but the epiphytic fern Platy-
cerium alcicorne, which is a feature of similar forests to the south of Sydney, was
not observed. The soil here consists largely of decomposing plant remains. The
loss on ignition is high, 68-69%; the pH is 5:3 to 5-6.

Melaleuca Leucadendron Forest.

This characteristic forest succeeds that dominated by Casuarina glauca, on the
inland side, and may occupy a much wider zone. Occasional trees, scattered in
the Casuarina zone, link the Melaleuca forest with the low-growing trees at the
water’s edge. An important factor seems to be a decrease in the humus content,
with a corresponding relative increase in the mineral matter. Melaleuca
Leucadendron can maintain itself on silt flats which have been cleared for poor
grazing land. There it regenerates freely from seed and the seedlings have to be
cut every two or three years to prevent the land reverting to forest. The under-
growth beneath the Melaleucas is very similar to that beneath Casuarina glauca;
Cladium junceum is the chief ground cover. The Melaleuca trees in this forest,

288 VEGETATION OF THE MYALL LAKES,

unlike those of the lake margin, are stout and upright. About 15 metres is an
average height, but trees of 20 m. and more are not unusual, with a diameter of
more than a metre at breast height. With their papery white bark, showing black
streaks caused by fires, and olive green-brown foliage, they are striking and
handsome trees. Occasional trees of Endiandra Sieberi occur, but otherwise, except
for some Casuarina glauca or Eucalyptus robusta at the margins, the Melaleuca
forests are a very pure community.

Eucalyptus robusta Forest.

On the landward side, where the Melaleuca forest approaches the stable sand
or tuff rocks, there is developed a forest of Hucalyptus robusta, the swamp
mahogany. Well-grown trees may be more than 20 m. high, with a rough fibrous
reddish bark and—for a eucalypt—broad, glossy green leaves. The soil here is
often very wet, with pools of standing water due to seepage and run-off from
the inland parts. Here, too, the soil commonly has a considerable admixture of
sand, washed down or blown on to the area from behind. The acidity may be
high—pH 4. The undergrowth is typically Blechnum serrulatum, either as a
carpet or rising in clumps from pools of standing water. Large tussocks of
Gahnia psittacorum occur with the Blechnum. The junction between the Hucalyptus
robusta—Blechnum swamp and stable sand is often marked by a pure ribbon-
community of Restio tetraphyllus. Many variants of this forest exist, but it
appears to be a very stable community, progression beyond which depends rather
on allogenic than on autogenic causes.

Where there is any considerable admixture of sand—e.g. where a stable dune
abuts on a Hucalyptus robusta forest—the trees can survive for a time, though
the undergrowth changes. Pteridium and Imperata replace the Blechnum. It is
probable that the Eucalypt is rooted in swamp conditions, only the upper layer
of the soil being changed. EHucalyptus robusta does not occur on deep stable
sand, though it may be found at the margins of small swamps which occasionally
occur as outliers in the stable dunes. Stunted trees also occur on some of the wet
sand heaths described below.

Eucalyptus Forest on Silt Flats.

Behind the swamp forest zones on either side of the Booloombayt Creek and
the Upper Myall River are extensive silt flats caused by the flooding of these
rivers and wash from the neighbouring hills. These flats have been largely
cleared of timber or the standing trees ring-barked and burnt. Occasional trees
of Eucalyptus saligna var. pallidivalvis (E£. grandis) are left as indicators of what
must have been a magnificent forest. Some of the standing trees here are 36-40 m.
high, rising 18 m. to the first branch. The sward now consists largely of Paspalum
distichum; occasional patches of Cladium junceum or pools with Ranunculus
aquatilis indicate the wetness of the soil.

Swamp Forest with Palms.

In the vicinity of Mungo there is an extensive area in which the palm,
Livistona australis, grows abundantly and regenerates freely in a mixed swamp
forest of both Melaleuca Leucadendron and Hucalyptus robusta. The soil
conditions are a very confused mixture of silt banks, humus masses and standing
water. The palm has a similar occurrence in patches of swamp forest along
the Hawkesbury Estuary nearer Sydney. It is an important constituent of the
subtropical rain-forest on the tuff hill at Mungo, described below.

BY T. G. B. OSBORN AND R. N. ROBERTSON. 289

Succession on Sandy Shores.

The sandy shores at the northern end of Broadwater show lines of Melaleuca
Leucadendron growing as regularly as if they had been planted. Apparently these
result from abundant germination of Melaleuca seeds from time to time in the
flotsam and jetsam cast up on the sand (PI. vii, fig. 9). Most of these crops
of seedlings fail to establish themselves, but, occasionally, they have survived.
When this happens and the sand builds up towards the lake, there is left a
regular row of young trees parallel with the shore. Except for these trees, the
sandy shore bears only occasional clumps of Juncus maritimus or Leptocarpus
tenax.

Rocky Shores.

Plants of the reed-swamp communities usually fail to establish themselves on
shores where the tuff hills come directly to the waterside. Scirpus lacustris may
be found in the water, but the succession does not advance. On the shore itself
there is an open community of Casuarina glauca, behind which the land rises
with the forest vegetation of the hills, or its modifications.

HEATHS AND SWAMPS.

The foregoing account of the psammosere and hydrosere has only incidentally
mentioned the heaths and swamps which are such a feature of the Myall Lakes
area. These are not directly connected with either of the two major seres, though
in some cases they may represent deflections of the successions.

The origin of the extensive level sandy plains, locally called ‘moors’, but which
we have termed heaths, is difficult to explain, except as the sandy bottoms of
former lake beds. Any method of gradual reclamation by vegetation does not
meet the facts, for the heaths are.sandy plains: their surface soil has no peat
and but little organic matter. An extensive heath, four or five miles long and as
much as half a mile wide, lies between the coastal dunes and the tuff hills
south-east of Booloombayt and Myall Lakes.

A soil profile in this is as follows:

Water-holding

Depth. Description. Loss on Ignition. capacity. pH.
0-3 inches .. Sand, discoloured dark brown to black 9-1% we &¢/eh 4-4
with organic matter.
3 15) Ss Yellow sandy loam. 4-05 to 3-53% 33:3 to 25:0 4-0 to 4:2
15 oD Clean white sand saturated with 0:13% 20°5 4-4

water at 16-17 inches.

The heath vegetation consists of a considerable number of shrubs and herbs.
Our lists, inevitably incomplete, include more than sixty species. Most of the
shrubs are leptophylls or nanophylls and few of them exceed 60 cm. in height.
There is also considerable local variation. That portion of the heath shown in
Plate vii, Figure 10, shows numerous scattered bushes of Banksia latifolia. With
it occur such plants as Conospermum tazifolium, Dillwynia ericifolia, Aotus
villosa, Melaleuca nodosa, Epacris obtusifolia, E. microphylla, Sprengelia incarnata
and various Cyperaceae and Restionaceae.

290 VEGETATION OF THE MYALL LAKES,

Dry Heath.

In contrast, other heaths are still drier, the surface soil is lighter in colour
and the vegetation resembles that of scrub on the inter-dune flats, but, as is
usual on the heaths, the individuals are all stunted in their growth. Throughout
the heaths as a whole there are to be found pure societies of this or that species
which—for no apparent reason—assumes local dominance. An extensive society
of Hakea pugioniformis was observed growing so thickly as to be almost
impenetrable, although it was less than a metre in height. A fire had burnt out a
part of the community, and the regenerating area was quite different floristically.
After such fires rhizomic plants, such as Hypolaena lateriflora, Leptocarpus tenaz,
Caustis fleruosa, and Schoenus ericetorum have an obvious advantage which they
share with Xanthorrhoea hastilis and X. minor.

Wet Heath.

Certain of the heaths may be classified as wet. This is a mere matter of con-
venience, and all gradations exist between the two ends of the scale. In the wet
heath there is a greater frequency of Cyperaceae and Restionaceae, Xanthorrhoea
minor is more abundant, and Sprengelia incarnata tends to be replaced by
S. Ponceletia. A comparison of the two floras can be made from the list in
Appendix II.

With increasing wetness there is an accumulation of humus which, if the high
permanent water-level be maintained for long, results in the formation of peat.
Eventually, a peat-swamp may be formed.

Peat Swamps.

Just as all gradations may exist between dry and wet heaths, so the distinction
between some wet heaths and swamps with a shallow peat layer is not easily
drawn. In extreme cases there is no difficulty. One swamp was found to have a
depth of more than five feet of dark brown, wet peat. The pH was about 4—field
test with B.D.H. Indicator. Scattered and stunted Hucalyptus robusta occurred
over the area, but they could not be termed dominant. The dominant was
Leptospermum Liversidgei, which grew as a slender bush to 2 m. The ground
cover was largely tussocks of Blechnum serrulatum, Hypolaena lateriflora was very
common, Restio tetraphyllus and Blandfordia sp. were both frequent. A feature
of this swamp was the sheets of Sphagnum between the tussocks of Blechnum.

As the depth of peat decreased, so did the height of the Leptospermum, and
Blechnum almost disappeared. The shrubs Hpacris pulchella and Sprengelia
Ponceletia appeared, with dense masses of Hypolaena fastigiata. Local societies of
Gleichenia dicarpa were almost impenetrable.

There remains to mention one swamp. This was almost surrounded by stable
dunes with typical Eucalyptus pilularis-Angophora woodland. It was a pure
society of Blechnum serrulatum, bounded at the margin by a belt of Restio tetra-
phyllus. The soil here had a loss on ignition of 89-7% and the pH was 3:7.

VEGETATION OF THE TUrr HILLS.

The vegetation of the hills composed of Carboniferous rocks differs markedly
from that of even the most settled dunes and sand flats. The local resident will
aptly refer to the ‘old’ country and the ‘new’. The former is of value for its timber
and as potential grazing-land after the forest has been cleared; the latter is almost
worthless. Extensive masses of tuff rock occur as islands in the lakes, form
occasional promontories by their shores, or rounded hills rising from the

BY T. G. B. OSBORN AND R. N. ROBERTSON. 291

surrounding sandy or swampy soil. In all cases there is a sharp break in the
floristic composition, and often in the actual vegetation type. To the west of
the lakes the ‘old’ rocks form part of the foothills to the coastal plateau. The hills
here are often steeper and more broken, but the forest types, so far as we have
seen, are essentially similar.

Two distinct and unrelated forest types are developed: the one a mixed Hucalyptus
forest; the other sub-tropical rain-forest. This is composed largely of species with
Indo-Malayan affinities, from which eucalypts are absent, except for the one species
—Hucalyptus saligna—present at the margin. The evidence available shows that
sub-tropical rain-forest develops only in sheltered areas where the micro-climate
is favourable and the soil-water relations are good. On one occasion, helped by a
party, a traverse was made along a rain-forest-eucalypt-forest junction. The
result showed clearly that the sub-tropical rain-forest, which grew thickly along
the south- and east-facing slopes of certain steep-sided valleys, hardly rose much
above the valley floor on the north- and west-facing slopes. Moreover, even with a
favourable aspect, it was absent from the ridges, for they are exposed to the
drying northerly and westerly winds. A more difficult problem in the distribution
of the rain-forest is to account for its presence on certain of the rock outcrops
near the lakes, and its absence from others.

The ‘Brush’ at Mungo, though only a few acres in extent, covers the low hill
in a distinctive sub-tropical rain-forest (Appendix III). In a depauperate form
it exists at Chinaman’s Knob and Bombah Point, but it is absent from an outcrop
of tuff rock about a mile north of Mungo and from the hills to the east of
Booloombayt Lake. The rocks are all tuffs of the Burindi Series, of essentially
the same composition. Under eucalypt forest they tend to develop a podsol;
in the Brush the soils are loamy with a considerable amount of humus. Deter-
minations of the water-holding capacities of the eucalypt forest soil averaged
about 40%, that of the rain-forest about 70%.

Eucalyptus Forest.

The forests consist of a number of species growing to about 20 m. with clean,
straight boles. The canopy is generally closed, though the shade cast is light.
The more important species are Hucalyptus maculata, EH. propinqua, H#. punctata,
E. umbra, E. acmenioides, E. microcorys and LE. siderophloia. With these, growing
to a lesser height are scattered Casuarina torulosa, Exocarpus cupressiformis,
Acacia decurrens and Brachychiton populneus. Undergrowth is sparse, but the
following shrubs were noted: Persoonia linearis, Acacia floribunda, A. Maideni,
Dillwynia floribunda, Pomaderris ellipticum and Monotoca elliptica. Much of the
soil is bare or covered with low perennial herbs or grasses and sedges.

The following list serves as an indication of the plants present; grasses,
unfortunately, have not been prominent at the seasons of our visits.

Carex paniculata Lomandra longifolia
Schoenus imberbis L. filiformis
Lepidosperma laterale Dianella caerulea
Imperata cylindrica, var. Koenigii Pomaz umbellata
Andropogon sp. Opercularia varia
Poa caespitosa Helichrysum elatum

At the head waters of small streams or other wet places, there are indications
of an invasion by Indo-Malayan types. Thus, the following were noted in one such
place: Trema aspera, Ficus aspera, Callicoma serratifolia, Melaleuca styphelioides,
Eugenia Smithii, Breynia oblongifolia. These were growing with large tussocks
of Gahnia psittacorum and amongst them Dioscorea transversa was climbing. We

292 VEGETATION OF THE MYALIL LAKES,

regard these plants as rain-forest indicators. Some are mesophyllous forms with
a leaf type quite unlike the microphyllous sclerophylls around them. The
presence of the liane, Dioscorea, is also significant. Lianes are not a feature of
the eucalypt forest, but they are abundant in the sub-tropical rain-forest.

Probably, all these forests have been modified by fire and by felling. Under
such conditions the more exacting ‘Brush’ plants would disappear.

Many of the hills formerly covered by eucalypt forest have been cleared, or had
the timber ring-barked to encourage a growth of grass, but the results can hardly
be satisfactory (Pl. vii, fig. 13). The majority of the tussocks seen in this
figure are Carex paniculata or other sedges. In places Pteridium and Imperata
are abundant. The trees regenerate freely (PI. vii, fig. 15) when they escape from
fires.

Marginal Forest.

Around the bases of the tuff hills where there is a junction of rock and sand,
there is some mingling of eucalypts characteristic of the ‘old’ country with trees of
the deep sands. MBoth types find better water-relations and grow to a great
size. Certain species of eucalypt—e.g. Hucalyptus paniculata and E. resinifera—
seem limited to these areas. We have also noticed EH. punctata, EH. umbra,
E. microcorys of the tuff forests and #H. pilularis and Angophora lanceolata of
the sands. Many of these trees were 30 m. in height, rising with massive trunks
for 12 m. to the first branch. Casuarina torulosa was common at such junctions
and Angophora subvelutina also occurred. The undergrowth consisted of tall-
growing Pteridium with Imperata. Such shrubs as Dillwynia floribunda, Gompho-
lobium latifolium and Dodonaea triquetra were present.

Sub-tropical Rain-Forest.

These forests are strikingly different from the mixed eucalypt forests. They
grow with a close canopy of dark green foliage, the leaves often having a
polished or glossy upper surface which contrasts markedly with the dull, grey
oOlive-green of the eucalypt. Most of the species have mesophyllous or even
macrophyllous foliage which casts a dense shade upon the forest floor. There
is a high percentage of lianes and ferns in the flora. Palm species, though few
in number, are a characteristic element.

Consideration of the list of plants compiled in the different ‘Brushes’ shows
that the forests are by no means of uniform composition. It is obvious that
they can be divided into two groups: (1) those in which Tristania conferta is a
characteristic tree, sometimes dominant; (2) those in which TJvristania is absent.

The first type is represented in the valleys of the hills, the second pe the
‘Brushes’ at lake level at Mungo and Chinaman’s Knob.

Sub-tropical Rain-Forest—with Tristania.

The rain-forests in the hills have probably all been exploited for timber for
many years. At the time of our visit the brush-box trees (Tristania conferta)
were being felled. Relicts, such as strangling figs or tall trees on less accessible
slopes, show that the general height growth of the trees was much greater than
at Mungo. The palm, Archontophoenix Cunninghamiana, formed definite societies
in the valley bottom. Livistona was less prominent than it was nearer the coast.

It is not proposed to describe the forest further here. The most interesting
point brought out by this reconnaissance was the clear evidence that the develop-
ment of rain-forest depends on local micro-climate rather than the underlying

BY T. G. B. OSBORN AND R. N. ROBERTSON. 293

rock. A second point is that, given the appropriate soil and water relations,
rain-forest is increasing its present areas. But the danger of fire is much more
serious to the isolated rain-forest community than it is to the eucalyptus forest.
There is no rapid regeneration of the grown tree from epicormic shoots.

Sub-tropical Rain-Forest at Sea-level.

In Appendix III is a list of species found in the small patch of rain-forest at
Mungo. It is limited to a low rounded hill of tuff which, so far as our comparison
with rock specimens collected elsewhere goes, does not differ significantly from
other tuffs that are not covered with rain-forest. This hill must have been
an island quite recently. It is so marked on some charts; and a belt of Eucalyptus
robusta swamp-forest fringes its southern and eastern sides. This isolation may
have preserved it from fire, and it appears to have been immune from timber-
getters. None of the trees are of any great height—20 to 25 m. The tallest of
them is out-topped by a number of gigantic Livistona australis which project 5 m.
or more above the general level of the trees like huge mops. Of the 78 species
included in the list, 27 are trees, all of which at some place or other rise to the
canopy. No dominant species can be recognized. Inside the forest the light is
subdued. The ground flora is chiefly ferns which grow amongst the cable-like basal
portions of the lianes. This life-form comprises 16% of the species recorded. The
better light-relations at the margins probably account for the greater frequency
of nanophanerophytes which occurs there.

The little patch of rain-forest on Chinaman’s Knob is much more open than
that of Mungo. The list is shorter, and the few species growing there which do not
also occur at Mungo are plants of the rain-forest margin, not of the established

community.

Ophioglossum coriaceum

Pteridium aquilinum

Imperata cylindrica, var.
Koenigiit

Festuca bromoides

Themeda Forskalii

Caustis flexuosa

Lepidosperma laterale

Schoenus ericetorum

S. imberbis

Leptocarpus tenax

Dianella caerulea

Lomandra longifolia

L. filiforme

Xanthorrhoea hastilis

Acianthus exsertus

Caladenia carnea

Glossodia major

Pterostylis sp.

Casuarina suberosa

C. stricta

Banksia serrata

B. integrifolia

B. aemula

Isopogon anemonifolius

Persoonia lanceolata

P. salicina

APPENDIX I.

Plants of the Dune Scrub.

Leptomeria acida
Olax stricta

Drosera auriculata
Boronia ledifolia

B. pinnata

Correa speciosa
Eriostemon lanceolatus
H. Crowet

Zieria laevigata
Tetratheca thymifolia
T. ericifolia
Billardiera scandens
Acacia longifolia

A. suaveolens

Aotus villosa

Bossiaea heterophylla
B. ensata

B. scolopendria
Dillwynia ericifolia

D. floribunda
Indigofera australis
Hardenbergia monophylla
Kennedya rubicunda
Platylobium formosum
Phyllota phylicoides
Ricinocarpus pinifolius

Dodonaea triquetra
Hlaeocarpus cyaneus
Hibbertia fascicularis
H. linearis
Leptospermum flavescens
L. laevigatum
Xanthosia pilosa
Trachymene linearis
Actinotus helianthi
Astroloma pinifolia
Brachyloma daphnoides
Epacris pulchella

H. microphylla
Leucopogon Richei

L. ericoides

L. virgatus

LL. lanceolatus
Styphelia viridis
Monotoca elliptica
Tecoma australis
Asperula oligantha
Opercularia varia
Pomax umbellata
Wahlenbergia gracilis
Dampiera stricta
Cassinia aculeata

294

VEGETATION OF THE MYALL LAKES,

APPENDIx II.
Plants of the Heaths.

Dry. Wet. Dry. Wet.
Selaginella uliginosa xe Acacia longifolia xX
Blechnum serrulatum x A. suaveolens ENG
Gleichenia dicarpa x A, juniperina 3X
Schizaea bifida x Aotus villosa x
Caustis flexuosa AY Dillwunia floribunda X x
Schoenus ericetorum aN D. ericifolia X
Costularia paludosa xX Platylobium formosum NX BN
Restio complanatus Sphaerolobium vimineum x
R. gracilis. . Bossiaea heterophylla xX
R. tetraphyllus aN x Phyllota phylicoides a
Hypolaena lateriflora x Pultenea incurvata xX
H. fastigiata x x Viminaria denudata x
Leptocarpus tenax x x Ricinocarpus pinifolius .. aX
Ayris operculata .. aE Pimelea latifolia xX Dx
Blandfordia sp. xX Callistemon lanceolatus x
Lomandra longifolia x Melaleuca nodosa xX x
Xanthorrhoea hastilis x M. thymifolia : x
X. minor : x Leptospermum flavescens. . Xx
Haemodorum sp. .. xX L. laevigatum x
Casuarina suberosa XS LL. scoparium var. xX
Banksia latifolia .. aXe L, Liversidgeti a x
B. serrata z sis x Trachymene Billardiert .. xX
Conospermum latifolium xX Epacris obtusifolia x xX
C. ericinum 4 He x E. microphylla x x
Isopogon anemonifolius x E. paludosa ee XS
Persoonia lanceolata x Brachyloma daphnoides x
P. salicina x Leucopogon Richei x
Hakea pugioniformis x L. ericoides x
Symphyonema paludosum x L. virgatus x
Leptomeria acida x Styphelia viridis .. xX
Olax stricta x Sprengelia incarnata ax
Drosera spathulata x x S. Ponceletia ae x
Boronia parviflora xX Mitrasacme polymorpha x
Eriostemum Crowei x Villarsia reniformis x
APPENDIX III.
Floristic Composition of the Brush at Mungo.
Chinaman’s Chinaman’s

Mungo. Knob. Mungo. Knob.
Aspidium decompositum x Oplismenus compositus x aX
Woodwardia aspera x xX Cyperus sp. x
Pellaea falcata .. xX Gahnia aspera .. x
Adiantum hispidulum x x Livistona australis x
Pteris tremula x aX Flagellaria indica x
Polypodium confluens x x Commelina cyanea D.<
P. tenellum A x Juncus pauciflorus x
Platycerium bifurcatum x Drymophila cuanocarpa x
Botrychium australe x Rhipogonum sp. ox
Podocarpus elatus x Smilax australis x
Gymnostachys anceps aN Dioscorea transversa x x

BY T. G. B. OSBORN AND R. N. ROBERTSON. 295

APPENDIx IIJ.—Continued.
Floristic Composition of the Brush at Mungo.

Chinaman’s Chinaman’s
Mungo. Knob. Mungo. Knob.
Alpinia caerulea xX Cupaniopsis anacardioides ENG aN
Peperomia leptostachya x Nephelium lciocarpum aN
Trema aspera .. nee x xX Nephelium sp. xe
Laportea photiniphylla X Alphitonia excelsa x xX
Cudrania javanensis xX Vitis clematidea XG x
Ficus sp. x V. antarctica x x
F., rubiginosa ot xX V. nitens x
Sarcopetalum Harveyanum ONS V. hypoglauca .. x
Stephania hernandifolia aN Elaeocarpus cyaneus x
Cocculus Moore x E. obovatus x
Mollinedia macrophulla xX xX Viola hederacea aN aN
Cryptocarya microneura Xx Scolopia Brownit NS
Clematis glycinoides Xx Passiflora edule Xx
Citriobatus multiflorus x P. Herbertiana 3 xX
Pittosporum undulatum xX Eugenia sp. .. Bs xX
P. revolutum xX Rhodomyrtus psidioides x
Acacia implexa DNS ONG Panax sp. x x
A. decurrens var. xX Myrsine variabilis x x
A. floribunda .. ees ah X | Sideroxylon australe x xX
Pultenea flexilis aN Cargillea australis x
Acronychia laevis X Notelaea longifolia X xX
A, Baueri x Lyonsia reticulata aX
Zieria Smithit .. xX Marsdenia rostrata x
Dysoxylum Fraseranum xX Solanum pseudocapsicum x
Breynia oblongifolia xX x S. stelligerum x NS
Croton Verreauxit se xX S. verbascijolium XxX
Omalanthus populifolius Se x Clerodendron tomentosum x
Poranthera microphylla ahs x Myoporum tenuifolium x
Phyllanthus Ferdinandi xX Morinda jasminoides .. Mie Xx
Elaeodendron australe Xx Asperula oligantha .. 23 x
Cupania semiglauca x x Siegesbeckia orientalis. . ae x

EXPLANATION OF PLATES VI-VII.
Plate vi.

1.—Fore dune vegetation of Festuca littoralis and Senecio spathulatus. Near South
Gibber. ‘

2.—Melaleuca Leucadendron swamp forest at margin of lake, looking towards the
water. Dense ground flora of Cladiwm junceum. Shores of Booloombayt Lake.

3.—Low forest of Angophora lanceolata on stable dune near sea; note distorted
limbs. Macrozamia spiralis at foot of trees to left. Undergrowth of Pteridium, Xanthor-
rhoea and Lomandra. Near South Gibber.

4.—Eucalyptus pilularis-E. gummifera forest on deep stable sand. Banksia serrata
in second storey (right foreground) and tall, shrubby undergrowth of Leptospermum
stellatum, Calythrix, ete. About one-fourth mile inland from landing opposite Bombah
Point.

5.—Livistona australis in swamp forest of Hucalyptus robusta, near to Mungo. Note
the palms are flowering and there is active regeneration beyond the figure. South of
Mungo.

6.—Mixed eucalypt forest on tuff hill. Xanthorrhoea arborea in centre, ground cover
of tussock grasses and Cyperaceae. Near ‘Cutler’s’, west of Booloombayt Lake.

7.—Sub-tropical rain-forest in steep-sided valley of tuff hills. A society of Archonto-
phoenix in centre. Sheltered valley to north-east of Booloombayt Creek.

296 VEGETATION OF THE MYALL LAKES.

Plate vii.

8.—Remains of Hucalyptus saligna, v. pallidivalvis on silt flat by Booloombayt Creek.
To the left is a swamp forest of H#. robusta. Near northern extremity of Booloombayt
Lake.

9.—Sandy shore at north end of Broadwater, east of Bombah Point. There is a
dense fringe of young Melaleuca Leucadendron in the middle distance; other small trees
occur between clumps of Juncus maritimus in the foreground. Tall M. Leucadendron
behind.

10.—Heath with scattered Banksia latifolia among leptophyllous shrubs and sedge-
like plants. Behind is a fringe of Melaleuca Leucadendron beyond which rises Eucalyptus
pilularis-Angophora lanceolata forest on a stable dune. About 2 miles south-east of
South Gibber.

11.—Peat Swamp, Leptospermum Liversidgei dominant, with occasional stunted
ELucalyptus robusta. Eucalypt-Angophora forest on stable dunes behind. About 1 mile
east of Bombah Point.

12.—Peaty Swamp with Blechnum serrulatum; to the left and behind are stable
dunes with Hucalyptus pilularis-Angophora lanceolata forest. About 1 mile east of
Bombah Point.

13.—Poor grass-land with tussocks of Carex paniculata on tuff hill, forming part of
the peninsula in Booloombayt Lake.

14.—Mixed eucalypt forest on tuff hill; the trees shown include #. maculata, H. wmbra
and H. microcorys. North-east of Booloombayt Lake.

15.—Natural regeneration of mixed eucalypt forest on tuff hill; poor grazing land
with tussocks of Carex paniculata. Near the northern extremity of Booloombayt lake.

Postscript, 14 July, 1939——There exists some doubt about the correct specific
name of the Melaleuca referred to in this paper as M. Leucadendron. R. T. Baker
(Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1918, and Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1913), after
comparison of the local plants with the Linnean type specimen, came to the
conclusion that they were so different as to warrant the description of two new
species, M. Smithii and M. Maideni. He questioned whether M. Leucadendron
really occurred in Australia. Nevertheless the Census of N.S.W. Plants (1916)
retains the three specific names—Leucadendron, Smithii and Maideni. In view of
the fact that there exists doubt as to the real specific designation, the name
Leucadendron which is widely used by local botanists for this plant has been
retained in this paper, though it is recognized that revision of the species may
be necessary.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939. PLATE VI.

Vegetation of Myall Lakes district.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939.

PLATE

VI.

Vegetation of Myall Lakes district,

' °
‘) =
. : < Pa
\ P
Phat ii
2 ee
me dl «4 B at
’ a it ee 7
=e ol
- 7 1
i - ee 9
z a :
eA 7
Be se
PaaS -
be E
+”.
z &
Se
+4
ids r; &
‘
F ¢
aie, :
kay .
, e.
a ; 5 '
» - .
~ - PS " -
oe =
a
ne
i
= . | :

297

AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA.

NOTES AND NEW SPECIES. NO. xI. [Mostly Elateridae.]
By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.R.H.S.
(Plates viii-ix; one Text-figure.)

[Read 26th July, 1939.]

COLYDIIDAE.

In examining what seemed to be a new species of Byrsax, Mr. Zeck found
that its tarsal formula was 4-4-4. From the similarity of form, the other
members of this genus were then examined, with the result that Byrsazr
saccharatus Pase. and B. egenus Pasc. (= coxi Cart.) are seen to be similarly
furnished. Both of these are thus true Colydiidae, near the New Zealand genus
Tarphiomimus. So close must be this relation that for the present I would call
them (?) Tarphiomimus (Byrsax) egenus Pasc. and (?) Tarphiomimus (Byrsax)
saccharatus Pasc. The remaining members recorded under the genus, B. macleayi
Pase. and B. pinnaticollis Cart., have heteromerous tarsi.

The following is the new species mentioned above.

TARPHIOMIMUS (?) ZIG-ZAG, N. Sp.

Convex, oblong; pale brown above, reddish beneath.

Head wide, trilobate, each lobe subtruncate in front, exterior angles sub-
dentate: near base of outside lobes, in one example, can be seen a small conical
protuberance. Antennae short, stout, the three apical segments strongly clavate.
Prothorax widely, arcuately, foliate; externally fringed with about five wide
crenulations, the foremost almost level with apical lobe of head; posterior third
abruptly excised and narrowed; disk strongly raised, medial area concave,
bounded on each side by a pustulose ridge; the outline somewhat variable in the
three examples, the most cénspicuous features being two subconical pustules
overhanging head and two rounded ones at basal third. Hlytra of same width as
prothorax, and of almost equal width for the greater part; widely (subtruncate)
rounded behind, with wide lateral foliation, fringed by deep; blunt, crenulations;
discal regions with shoulders prominent and widely ridged, with a variable number
of conical pustules along sides; medial area with two strongly-raised ridges,
forming straight lines at base and on apical declivity, the middle parts forming
two wide zig-zags, the intervening area foveate-punctate, with squamose derm;
underside squamose-rugulose. Dim. 3 x 14—4 x 2 mm.

Hab.—N. Queensland: Mulgrave R. (H. Hacker).

One of Mr. Hacker’s many discoveries. The species is near 7. (?) saccharatus
Pase., but, besides being less than half its size, has the following distinctions:
(a) All ridges less spinose-pustulose, (b) Fewer crenulations to pronotal foliation,
(c) Elytral spinose ridges replaced by zig-zag elevations. The only evident sexual
character lies in the frontal tubercles noted in one example. Holotype in the
National Museum.

Y

298 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

BUPRESTIDAE.
BUBASTES SUBNIGRICOLLIS, N. Sp.

Conico-cylindric, nitid. Head dark blue, prothorax, underside and legs blue-
black, tarsi coppery, elytra brilliant coppery, its suture narrowly more brightly
metallic, scutellum peacock-blue.

Head very lightly concave, with narrow frontal sulcus, uniformly, closely
punctate; eyes large, not prominent, width of head less than that of prothorax at
apex. Prothorax (3% x 5 mm.) very convex, widest near front, sides lightly arcuate,
apex subtruncate, front angles wide, base lightly bisinuate, hind angles less than
90°; disk closely and finely punctate, slightly flattened on basal half at middle,
with a well impressed medial sulcus, just traceable on apical half. Scutelluwm
small, with longitudinal depression. Hlytra of same width as prothorax at base,
lightly narrowed to apex; apices each finely bidentate, with small lunation between
teeth; striate-punctate, the seriate punctures distinct on basal half and at sides,
elsewhere indistinct; intervals lightly raised and nitid, their interspaces trans-
versely hatched and rugose. Prosternum with large, alveolate punctures,
metasternum and abdomen with finer and more distant punctures. Dim.17 x 5 mm.

Hab.—Western Australia: Wurarga (A. Goerling).

A single example sent by this observant naturalist is remarkable for its nitid
and bicolorous surface. While the general colour scheme somewhat follows that
of B. vagans Blkb., it differs greatly in (1) the colours more strongly contrasted—
nitid blue-black thorax and brilliant coppery elytra, (2) the strong transverse
ridges of the interspaces between the raised intervals of elytra. Holotype presented
to the Australian Museum.

Melobasis impressa Cart.—Further material of this, also of M. abnormis Cart.
sent by Mr. A. Goerling, together with a helpful field note, enables me to correct an
erroneous synonymy (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1937, p. 125). He writes: “I find
these” (impressa and abnormis) “always separate in places about 24 miles apart—
never together, and this is my experience for the last 3 years.” An examination of
four examples of each gives constant differences as follows:

abnormis (1923) impressa (1936)
Average dimensions, 12% x 5 mm. 152 xX 64 mm.
Upper surface subopaque, strongly
pubescent. nitid, almost glabrous.
Pronotum sulcate. often (in 3 of 4 examples) carinate.t
Elytra: costae more, punctures less defined. vice versa.
impressions subobsolete. well defined (as in description).

MELOBASIS BELLULA, N. Sp.

Hlongate-ovate; head coppery with greenish tinge, prothorax variably violet-
bronze (each predominating in different examples); elytra blue, with golden
markings, as follows: a wide basal band, having similarly wide, trilobed, extensions,
namely two lateral, extending half the total length, and a sutural of about half the
length of the lateral, and two triangular, subapical markings. Underside purple,
often bluish in part, legs and antennae blue.

Head glabrous, densely, finely punctate, eyes not protruding laterally beyond
thorax. Prothorax widest at base, thence gently, arcuately narrowed to apex,
lightly produced in front at middle, base lightly bisinuate, all angles rather wide,
the posterior subrectangular; disk with fine, not close, punctures and a smooth
medial line. Scutellum small, subecircular. Hlytra lightly widened at shoulders
and compressed behind them, narrowly and separately rounded at apex, marginal

1 Very unusual in the genus.

BY H. J. CARTER. 299

serrulation evident to apical third. Disk with well-marked subsutural concavity,
and a few punctate striae near this, otherwise seriate punctures confused with close
general punctures, these dense near base. Underside glabrous, sternal area with
round, abdomen with finer, shallow, oval punctures, rather widely spaced; apical
segment of g truncate between two spines, of 9 with oval excision between spines.
Dim. 6-7 X 2 mm.

Hab.—Western Australia: Wurarga (A. Goerling).

A lovely little species, of which 14 examples were received from the keen
naturalist squatter in a prolific Buprestid region, showing little variation in size
and markings. Holotype presented to the Australian Museum.

MELOBASIS SPINOSA, N. SD.

Narrowly ovate; very nitid greenish coppery-bronze, head green, pronotum
with green and coppery sheen; elytra greenish-bronze, purplish near apex; sternal
regions, legs and antennae green, abdomen coppery.

Head rather fiat, densely and finely punctate, width at eyes wider than that of
prothorax at apex. Prothorax: apex and base bisinuate, all angles subacute, sides
lightly narrowed in a feeble arch from base to apex, disk finely punctate, punctures
sparse and distant on basal half, closer (but clearly separate) at sides and apex;
medial fovea at base, no medial line. Scwtellwm small, subcircular. EHlytra of same
width as prothorax at base; basal half subcylindric, thence finely tapering to a
spinose apex, each elytron terminated by a triangular tooth, the margin between
tooth and suture with two small spicules; subapical margins strongly serrate; disk
finely seriate-punctate, intervals flat and impunctate. Prosternum densely punctate,
rest of underside more sparsely so; apical segment of abdomen strongly bispinose.
Dim. 8 x 3 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: S. Johnstone River (H. W. Brown).

Two examples, both, I think, male, given me by Mr. Brown some time back,
are unlike anything in the genus in the apical structure. Under the Zeiss binocular,
each apex appears trispinose. The elytral seriate punctures are regular and clear,
almost (but not) striate-punctate. Holotype presented to the Australian Museum.

MELOBASIS VIRIDISTERNA, Nl. SD.

6. Hlongate-ovate; nitid bronze and glabrous above (save for a fine frontal
pubescence); prosternum, tibiae, tarsi, antennae and parts of head metallic green,
rest of underside coppery and glabrous.

Head densely, very minutely punctate, width less than that of prothorax at
apex. Prothorax: apex bisinuate, anterior angles acute; base subtruncate, posterior
angles obtuse, sides nearly straight, lightly narrowed from base to apex; disk finely
transversely strigose, only at sides very densely and minutely punctate, without
medial line or fovea. Hlytra slightly wider than prothorax at base, feebly widening
behind middle, thence tapering to apex; subapical margins strongly serrate, the
serration continuous to extreme tip; very finely seriate-punctate, the intervals
almost flat, with subuniform punctures, especially on apical half, and some trans-
verse strigae. Prosternum forming a rectangular plate, with small triangular
process fitting into mesosternum; densely punctate, rest of underside irregularly
punctate, abdomen strongly bispinose at apex.

9°. Green colour apparently limited to antennae, tibiae and tarsi. Dim.
W112) <4 mom.

Hab.—N.S.W.: Cooma (W. Duboulay), 4 examples. Victoria: Kiata, 2 examples.

A species with an unusually fine surface sculpture, the pronotal consisting
chiefly of fine strigae, the elytral suggestive of uwniformis Cart. which, however, is

300 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

more convex, with a strongly pilose underside. WM. viridiceps has a much more
strongly punctate pronotum. The flat prosternal plate is a well marked character.
Holotype presented to the Australian Museum.

Since the publication of my Revision of the Australian species of the genus
Melobasis? I have added 14 names for new species, tabulated below. Of these 9
appear to be peculiar to Western Australia, three to Queensland and two to New
South Wales. Thus Western Australia records 39 out of a total of 81 species,
nearly 50% of the Australian species. The genus also occurs in New Guinea,
New Caledonia, Fiji, Sumatra, Java, Timor, Borneo and Penang. In Australia it
frequents various Leguminous plants, especially the numerous and widely
distributed Acacias, while individual species are associated with Cassias, Daviesia.
Dillwynia and Viminaria.

Table of Australian Melobasis described since 1923.

is blytra swith? prominent: KCOSTASMEA eons «hte ee lets in hes Re ee Gets eee area 2
Elytras without “prominent weostaes beat ce: cpm syale. fous - lel euemedsta es chaieie cleieas eects chedere aie 4
2 ULYICGAg INT COLO OMS! gryctetuoh wesc ere mc deke} sized sa AO) eucien cos suens sa cpepeuanens Wassewhs cys Gieicye impressa Cart.
Phytera aere nig wasup accents vewewerses ats co collar Varnes gs eliecal Brera cee MSU e IO SULoNeNe MRC Mase otal ALOR eee Lay Oree Seen OMe: 3
3. Elytra purplish, lateral vittae and sutural mark golden .......... aurocincta Cart.
Elytra with defined areas of light and dark bronze ................... brown Cart.
4 MA y train colorous RONZed Rete yey ie ei Sate tee Cre eee eee een bie 5
Mlytrasmetallicreoppenyen Geen wOL DUG em cick ices eieieeieLeieieie eo cicienicisiene iene aeieioe 6
Bvtr an papatcenned! spose ike keke cacsouais vous Sisneeiga Gusveeya cet cin stents act bap opie eus jauciesheke.oanancieiswemeus 11

5. Pronotum punctate, underside bronze. (Sculpture finer than in igniceps Saund.)
CRRA hte ici CaCI CAIRO SR aA ER aR ICRA isch ok ini eae ea tesa marlooensis Cart.

SEO OCD OES ON A, CLOTS CUNO OOO ROT CREE OT TING CoOTO DIGECT OREN oO roe viridisterna Cart.

Gey Elyithal ApiGeS) SPIMOSC we cesnereye ce ckes cic dene. ny.s 0 siic evfes elahie sirens eyes iter elle felsic caster cei tes spinosa Cart.
IBD Nah eH Hopvexetsti=) LORD OOT EL) § Ryiocoto loathe oss mene oteecene Uicno cto oO broke omola Gita collet GialdeGasiomo a GoS 7
Tie ULYtTA se SUMIATC=DUNCTATC™ racine iter eer cis iciet otter ema eee eee cee renee wannerua Cart.
IDVRAE), bes bAhie FophVOUEHKS Sods onisodaceonedtadgcdenosooasouooRes S644 5001006500 8
Se WipperssuTtacesblue yw welytrasnicate-pumCtale mm acrs creceiloei-eateicl teks kine dolencets pavo Cart.
Wiese GUIOTAVCS OUINGIAWISS sooacssossoccdat nomen nsaoox ss dca HOdOD0 DD UNO ONOO DNDN 9
DN Wippersand lowerssuctacereneenmn (6=1/ sli] O12 s)) meni arene rere enema pusilla Cart.
EXLVitGa, VIOLACCOUS OL DUIDLE: eile ece ota Aictes serene Te Meese eRe anu ee een ot eee 10
10. Pronotum and underside blue-bronze (12 mm. long) ................ myallae Cart.
Rronotumuandsundersidessreens (On mims lone) eee eens cence parvula Cart.
11. Elytra striate-punctate (blue with gold vittae) .................. aurocyanea Cart.
IDNA, TOE, Ore CERO, Sica UO. Goce ocooguchacooponaucododuodoouUcOaES 12
Toeily tras ereeni with Olden! sviltlaley ar che ov: .eteren on eval serena Ee CR IERIE Ree radiola Cart.
Elytra blue, with trilobed basal and preapical mark gold .............. bellula Cart.

STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) PUTEOLATA, 0. Sp.

Ovate, subconic. Head, prothorax, underside and appendages nitid bronze, the
last brassy, elytra dull brick-red with black markings as follows: an irregular
medial fascia, widened at suture, extending obliquely to sides, this connected along
suture with a wide, sagittate, preapical mark (in two examples narrowly produced
to extreme apex) and three small spots—the middle one behind the others—half-
way between the fascia and base.

Head widely excavate-canaliculate, with brassy reflections. Prothorax convex,
apex subtruncate, base bisinuate, sides nearly straight on basal two-thirds, thence
narrowed to apex, base without excisions; disk with exceptionally coarse punctures,
widely separated on basal half, closer and finer near front, rather strongly
pubescent on sides; medial channel wide and deeply impressed throughout. Hlytra
convex, subconical to apex, sides entire throughout, apices rounded; striate-

2 Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1923, pp. 64-104, with two plates.

BY H. J. CARTER. 301

punctate, the strial punctures large, crenulating sides of intervals, these sharply
convex—the 2nd, 3rd and 5th more strongly so on apical half, each interval with
a line of well marked punctures. Underside glabrous, almost impunctate, very
nitid. Dim. 10-5-12 x 3-5-4-5 mm.

Hab.—Western Australia: Lake Ningham (H. W. Brown).

Three examples examined, two given me by this enthusiastic collector, show a
species somewhat like S. convexa Cart. in colour and in the entire margins and
rounded apex of elytra. It differs strongly in its subcylindric, coarsely punctate
prothorax and the more sharply convex elytral intervals and more conical form.
Holotype in the Australian Museum.

Stigmodera brevifasciata Cart. = bifasciata Saund.—Mr. F. E. Wilson has
called my attention to the tarsal claws of this species, which are characteristically
those of Themognatha. I find the same in its close ally, S. secularis Thoms. Both
species should thus be removed from the subgenus Castiarina to that of
Themognatha.

HLATERIDAE.

This family has received somewhat piecemeal attention from Australian
authors, Elston alone venturing to deal seriously with the larger groups. The chief
difficulties attending its study are (1) the absence from Australia of well-named
collections, (2) the sketchy descriptions of many of our species by Candéze the
great specialist in the family, and (3) the slight and elusive characters that
separate species and, sometimes, genera. The purchase of the Hlston collection
by the Australian Museum, with the helpful and industrious work of this author
in putting together and translating the descriptions of our species, was the induce-
ment to the undertaking of the present paper. The large amount of new material
available here indicates the need for further revisional work in this family. My
thanks are due to Mr. K. C. McKeown of the Australian Museum, Mr. Womersley
of the Adelaide Museum, Mr. HE. W. Salter of the Macleay Museum, Mr. Clark of
the Melbourne Museum, Mr. H. Hacker of the Queensland Museum, Mr. Campbell
of the Canberra Museum, as also to Messrs. F. EH. Wilson, J. EH. Dixon and J. C.
Goudie for the loan or gift of material. I would here wish to express my apprecia-
tion of the generosity of Mr. H. W. Brown and of Mr. Gurney, of the Department
of Agriculture, for their presentation of holotypes to the Australian Museum.

LACON BULLATUS, N. Sp.

Wide, oblong; opaque reddish-brown, with short pubescence, antennae and legs
red. r

Head concave, punctate, widened to the front, here rounded on each side;
antennae short. Prothorax subquadrate, length and breadth subequal, convex,
scarcely gibbous; apex emarginate, front angles wide; sides nearly straight for
the greater part, rather abruptly narrowed in front, sinuately widened at the
posterior angles, lateral border coarsely crenulate, irregularly bicarinate, the
exterior carina sometimes reduced to a row of nodules, the two carinae forming
the lateral outline of the truncate, divaricate hind angles; disk coarsely alveolate-
punctate; an ill-defined medial depression, and, in two examples (of four),
bi-impressed. Scutellwm transversely oval. EHlytra as wide as prothorax at base,
and less than twice as long (9:5); lightly convex, very lightly enlarged behind
middle; sutural region, in two examples, depressed; striate-punctate, the striae
wide and deep, seriate punctures large and close; intervals flat, except near base,
1st with a single row of punctures, 2nd and 8rd with a double row of punctures

302 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

and transverse ridges, those exterior to 3rd studded with rows of rounded nodules.
Underside finely punctate; prosternum with a transverse ridge, tarsal sulci absent.
Dim, 17-20 x 7-8 mm.

Hab.—Western Australia: Lake Austin (H. W. Brown).

Four examples taken by Mr. Brown, who has generously given the type to
the Australian Museum. It is characterized by its unusual size and width and the
coarsely nodulose exterior elytral intervals. Holotype in the Australian Museum.

MyYRMODES (?) ELONGATUS, 0. Sp.

Elongate; subparallél; above, beneath and appendages brownish-red, sparsely
pilose.

Head quadrate, somewhat rounded in front, briefly narrowed at hind angles,
coarsely setose-punctate; antennae short, segment 1 very large, twice as long as
wide, 2-3 short and oval, 4-8 bluntly dentate, 9-10 oval, 11 elongate-oval, narrower
than 10. Prothorax convex, as wide as long (44 mm.), widest at apical third, apex
arcuate, front angles defined but wide, base subarcuate, sides entire, widely sinuate
behind, posterior angles acute, obliquely pointing outwards, without carinae, the
discal sculpture continuous to margins, without lateral sulcus; rather coarsely
punctate in middle, more finely at sides and base. Scutellum large, oval. Elytra
closely adapted to, but wider than, prothorax, shoulders obliquely truncate, sides
subparallel; striate-punctate, with large square punctures in deep, clear-cut striae;
intervals flat, closely punctate towards base, elsewhere with transverse, sometimes
undulate, rugae, with recumbent pile near sides and apex. Prosternum coarsely
and closely punctate, without sign of tarsal sulci; the rest of underside densely
covered with small punctures: tarsi rather slender, clothed beneath with tufts of
hair, post tarsi nearly as long as tibiae; segment 1 as long as 2-3 together, 2, 3, 4
successively shorter. Dim. 13-15 x 44 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Clermont (Peak Downs) (Dr. K. K. Spence).

Three examples given me by their captor can only be referred to Trieres or
Myrmodes, to the former of which it is similar, so far as may be judged by the
figure in the Genera Insectorum, but the narrow tarsi forbid its inclusion here.
While differing from the monotypic M. akidiformis Cand. in its elongate elytra,
it may provisionally be placed here. Holotype in the Australian Museum.

GLYPHEUS CRUCIGER, 0. Sp.

Elongate, oblong. Head, metasternum, abdomen, and elytral markings black,
clypeus, prothorax (above and beneath), legs and ground colour of elytra orange-
red; elytra bearing a postmedial cross, with diamond-shaped widening at suture,
the seriate punctures and the apex, also antennae, black.

Head with usual concave clypeus and narrow border; antennae -sublinear,
extending slightly beyond base of prothorax; basal segments yellow. Prothorax
subquadrate, apex arcuate, the acute anterior angles embracing the head to the
eyes; sides feebly, arcuately, widening from the apex, sinuate before the long,
divaricate hind angles; these with a strong, central carina. Disk very nitid,
almost impunctate; a few white hairs at side. Hlytra as wide as prothorax across
the hind angles and more than twice as long; striate-punctate, the round strial
punctures emphasized by dark colour; intervals convex and impunctate. Dim.
7-8 x 2:2 mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Dorrigo (W. Heron).

Three examples, alike in colour, differ slightly in size. One example sent to
Mons. E. Fleutiaux, others given, some time back, to Mr. A. M. Lea. It differs

BY H. J. CARTER. 303

clearly in pattern from recorded species while approaching G. alpinus Blkb. in size.
Holotype presented to the Australian Museum.

GLYPHEUS MILITARIS, Nl. SD.

Elongate, oblong. Head, underside (except prosternum), antennae and legs
(including tarsi) black; prothorax above and below sanguineous, with apical
border and hind angles black; elytra black with the following markings
sanguineous: an arcuate patch at each side on basal third, covering 3rd and 4th
intervals, widened and produced to sides, this narrowly connected with wide
preapical fascia, interrupted at the suture. Whole upper surface with long, upright,
black hairs. Underside glabrous, sparsely and minutely punctate.

Head less rounded in front than usual, with well-raised border and excavate
within; antennae short, segment 8 slightly longer than the rest, 4-10 subequal.
Prothoraz feebly widened behind middle, scarcely sinuate anteriorly, front angles
rounded off, sides more strongly sinuate before the long, acute, strongly divaricate
and carinate hind angles; disk with fine, sparse setae and long, upright hairs at
sides; a fine medial sulcus traceable for the greater part, except near apex. Hlytra
about as wide as prothorax, sides nearly straight, lightly rounded at apex; striate-
punctate, the seriate punctures large, black, intervals nearly flat except at base,
impunctate save for setae towards margins bearing long upright hairs. Dim.
12 x 5 (4+) mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Lithgow district (H. HE. F. Bracey).

A unique example is a striking species of a similar colour to G. sanguineus
Hlst., but differs in its red pronotum with black hind angles, different elytral
pattern, narrower form and finer sculpture, especially of underside. In some
respects it must be near G. decoratus Cand., a species with black prothorax and
different elytral pattern. Holotype in the Australian Museum (K.58776).

A second example in the S. Australian Museum, taken by the late A. M. Lea,
at Wilmot, Tasmania, is probably the other sex. It is smaller (10 x 3 mm.) with
the lateral red patch smaller and disconnected from the preapical fascia, but is
otherwise like the Lithgow insect. There are many instances of this faunal
distribution (Tasmania and alpine New South Wales).

PSEUDAEOLUS*® BIMACULATUS, N. SD.

Opaque black above and beneath, including appendages; hind angles of
prothorax, tarsi, two ill-defined plagia on apical third of elytra, and the apical
regions, vaguely, red.

Head rounded in front, strongly pubescent; antennae, with segment 1 long
and curved, 2 and 3 small, equal, 4 longer than 5, 5-10 equal, subtriangular, 11
lineate oval. Prothorax sparsely pubescent, subcylindric, lightly narrowed in front
and subsinuate behind, hind angles directed slightly outward, bicarinate. EHlytra
of same width as prothorax, apices diverging, each truncate; striate-punctate, the
striae fine and clearly cut, the punctures scarcely discernible, intervals flat and
silky, pubescent at sides and apex. Dim. 7-8 x 2 (+) mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Rockley (H. J. Carter); Queensland: Cairns (H. W.
Brown).

Four examples, two from each locality, differ from Ae. australis Cand. and
Ae. waggae Cand. in the non-fasciate elytra. If considered only as a variety of
P. australis Cand. it deserves a name. Holotype in the Australian Museum.

2Candéze considered that the Australian species of Aeolus should be placed under
a separate subgenus Pseudaeolus (Cat. Blat., 1891, p. 77).

304 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

N.B.—Ae. waggae Cand. is stated to differ from Ae. australis Cand. in having
the hind angles unicarinate. Examples from the Bogan River correspond with
description, and are smaller, paler and more pubescent than examples determined
as Ae. australis (4 examples from Mundaring, W.A. (Carter), 4 from Cue, W.A.
(H. W. Brown) ); Candéze’s locality is Sydney. The species seem to have a wide
distribution.

PSEUDAEOLUS ZIG-ZAG, N. Sp.

Opaque, castaneous, mottled with black; head black, pronotum with medial
and apical regions black; elytra castaneous with ill defined postscutellary mark,
a zig-zag fascia at apical third and the apex black; underside subfuscous red,
abdomen darker; antennae, palpi and legs testaceous. A short, pale, pubescence,
thickest on the elytra.

Head: clypeus rounded, frontal sculpture obscured by pubescence, antennae,
segment 1 stout, 2 shorter than 3, 3 than 4, 4 longer than 5, 8-11 wanting.
Prothorax longer than wide, laterally convex, sides very lightly converging to the
front, feebly sinuate behind, hind angles scarcely divergent, unicarinate, disk
without medial sulcus. Scutellum elongate-ovate. Hlytra elongate-ovate, as wide
as prothorax and nearly twice as long; striate-punctate, the striae fine, and, except
near base and sides, obscured by the dense pubescence, as also the dark markings,
intervals flat. Dim. 7 x 2 mm.

Hab.—N. Queensland: Cairns.

A single example in the Elston Collection is clearly distinct from recorded
species. Holotype in the Australian Museum. I find a second example amongst
some unlabelled Elateridae—probably from Queensland.

PSEUDAEOLUS VAGEFASCIATUS, 0. SDP.

Elongate, parallel; upper surface varicoloured, with varied amount of red, sub-
opaque, with short, pale pubescence; in general head and prothorax dark brown,
the hind angles and basal area of the latter red, the elytra chiefly dark, with ill-
defined postmedial fascia and the apex red. Underside castaneous, legs and
antennae yellow.

Head minutely, densely punctate; clypeus rounded, antennae extending well
beyond the prothorax in g, scarcely beyond the base of prothorax in the Q,
segment 1 curved, 2 and 3 short, 3 longer than 2, 4-7 subconic, 8-11 successively
narrowed, 4-10 subequal in length, 11 lineate. Prothorax longer than wide
(4 x 3 mm.), lightly convex; apex arcuate, front angles rounded off, sides nearly
straight, hind angles well developed, lightly divaricate, with a long carina parallel
to and near the external border. Hlytra of same width as prothorax and twice as
long; sides parallel for the greater part; finely striate-punctate, the punctures more
evident in external half of elytra, intervals flat, finely transversely striolate, apices
subtrunecate. Underside densely, minutely punctate. Dim. 10-12 x 3 mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Comboyne (H. J. Carter); Kurrajong and Epping
(Dr. K. K. Spence); N.S.W. (H. W. Brown).

One ¢, 3 2 before me, the ¢ with longer antennae and the red colour more
extended over the upper surface. It is the largest species of the genus recorded.
Holotype presented to the Australian Museum.

An examination of the types in the Macleay Museum shows the following
synonymy:

Melanoxanthus (Cardiophorus) froggatti Macl. 6 = M. (Cardiophorus)
fasciolatus Macl. ?.—I think these are the sexes of the same species. I have noted
this sexual colour difference in other species.

BY H. J. CARTER. 305

Elatichrosis (Chrosis) angusticollis Blkb. = EH. trisulcata Er.—Blackburn’s
description exactly fits Victorian examples that cannot be separated from Erichson’s
species.

MELANOXANTHUS.

This genus appears to be common in tropical Australia, though undetermined
in our collections. In form subconic or navicular, elytra short in proportion to
the prothorax, the hind angles of the latter strongly developed, divaricate and
carinate, the sculpture often coarse, the antennae serrate, sometimes widely so,
often ornately coloured, they are strikingly different from the Cardiophorinae.
In Mem. Soc. Roy. Liége, 1882, Candéze states “la distinction entre les deux genres”
(Megapenthes et Melanoxanthus) “est devenue absolument impossible”. Yet I
prefer to separate the Australian species of these genera known to me by the
different antennae. As with other of our northern species of Coleoptera, many
occur on both sides of Torres Straits. Thus I have identified Melanoxanthus
angularis Cand., M. ruficollis Cand. and (?) M. abdominalis Cand., described from
New Guinea, amongst Hlateridae labelled as from Cairns district by the late
F. P. Dodd. The following are, I believe, undescribed.

MELANOXANTHUS JUCUNDUS, n..sp. PI. Viii, fig. 2.

Head, antennae, underside and legs black, prothorax and tarsi red; elytra
black, with two white rectangular markings, forming a medial fascia, interrupted
at sides and suture, each sloping backward from suture to sides: sparsely
pubescent.

Head short, punctate, antennae not reaching base of prothorax, rather wide,
segment 1 tumid, 2, 3 small, 4-10 triangularly dentate, 5-10 subequal, 4 smaller
than 5, 11 oval. Prothorax about as long as wide, arcuately narrowed in front,
subsinuately widened at the acute, carinate, posterior angles. Disk moderately
convex, coarsely and evenly alveolate-punctate, short bristly hair showing laterally.
Scutellum large, triangular. Hlytra subconic, navicular, at base as wide as
prothorax at hind angles, thence narrowing to apex, here not quite covering
abdomen; striate-punctate, striae close, seriate punctures large and close, intervals
asperate and nodulose on basal half. Prosternum coarsely, metasternum more
finely punctate. Hind coxae angulately widened within, narrowed externally.
Dim. 4 x 14 mm.

Hab.—North Queensland: Townsville (Elston Coll.), Port Denison (Macleay
Museum), Wide Bay (Australian Mus.).

Four examples examined of this pretty little species. Holotype in the
Australian Museum.

Var.—Two of the examples have the apical area of the pronotum black.

MELANOXANTHUS BIARCTUS, nN. sp. PI. viii, fig. 4.

Of the same size and form as H. jucundus. Nitid black with dark pubescence,
elytra with two elongate-oval markings testaceous extending from behind the
shoulders to the apical fourth, near, but not touching, sides; legs black, tarsi red,
antennae with reddish tinge.

Head strongly punctate, clypeus rounded, antennae very similar to that of
jucundus, but 4-10 less widely dentate, more closely adjusted, 11 wider.
Prothoraz: length and breadth subequal, arcuately narrowed in front, hind angles
long, acute, slightly divergent and carinate, sides feebly widened near middle; disk
moderately convex, with large, round punctures, alveolate in middle, separate

306 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

towards sides, a linear depression behind each hind angle, basal declivity steep.
Elytra at base as wide as prothorax at hind angles, thence navicular to apex, not
quite covering abdomen; striate-punctate, with series of large round punctures
between narrowly raised intervals, underside with dense silvery pubescence. Dim.
33-4 x 14 mm.

Hab.—North Queensland: Cairns (Macleay Museum); Coen R. (C. York)
(Hacker).

Five examples; two on a card include the holotype, a third in the South
Australian Museum, and two in the National Museum, Melbourne, from Cape York.

MELANOXANTHUS COLUMBINUS, nN. sp. PI. viii, fig. 3.

Narrowly ovoid, with short, rather thick pubescence. Head black, prothorax
above and below red, with a black patch at apex, narrowing to a point near the
middle; elytra nitid black, with two curved yellow maculae at middle, formed like
the wings of a bird at rest; these nearly meeting at suture and extending along,
but not reaching, sides for about one-third of their length; underside (except
prosternum) black, legs reddish, antennae dark red.

Head: clypeus rounded, forehead coarsely punctate, antennae not reaching
base of prothorax, wide, very much as in M. biarctus, 4-10 strongly dentate, 11
oval. Prothorax rather wider than long, arcuately narrowed in front, sides
nowhere widened, hind angles lightly divergent, bi-carinate and acute, embracing
the shoulders of elytra; disk moderately convex, closely, not contiguously, punctate,
the punctures large, round and umbilicate. Scutellum large, triangular. Hlytra
slightly narrower than prothorax at the hind angles, thence converging to apex;
striate-punctate, the striae wide, intervals flat (except near base), seriate punctures
large and close with rugose edges, giving the basal half an asperate, though nitid
surface; underside rather densely clad with silvery pubescence. Dim. 4% x 14 mm.

Hab.—North Queensland: Cairns. (Macleay Museum.)

Another interesting novelty from this rich collection. The elytral pattern
suggests a dove’s wing. Hence the name. Two examples on a card include the
holotype, marked with an arrow. A third is in the South Australian Museum and
a fourth, from Wyreema, Q., is in the Queensland Museum. Examples in the
South Australian Museum from Cairns differ in having the prothorax wholly black.
These are 92 and, like froggatti Macl., show a sexual coloration.

MELANOXANTHUS FLAVOSIGNATUS, n. sp. PI. viii, fig. 1.

Ovate; nitid black, hind angles of prothorax and wide medial, interrupted
fascia on elytra yellow, legs reddish, antennae reddish-brown.

Head short, punctate and pubescent, antennae short, 4-10 strongly dentate.
Prothorax gently narrowed from base to apex, a little sinuate before the extreme
point of hind angles—these lightly divaricate and embracing elytral shoulders.
Disk moderately convex, densely covered with subcontiguous, umbilicate punctures
and with short, bristly dark hairs. Scutellum large, oval. Hlytra slightly narrower
than prothorax at hind angles, gently narrowed from base to apex, the wide yellow
fascia extending to the sutural interval, not quite reaching sides; striate-punctate,
strial punctures small, intervals flat, except on basal half—here strongly asperate
with fine nodules and transverse wrinkles. Dim. 4 (vix) x 14 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Wide Bay (Macleay Museum.) Holotype in the Macleay
Museum.

Var.—Two examples in the Australian Museum, from the same locality, are
clearly conspecific, but have the hind angles of the prothorax black.

BY H. J. CARTER. 307

MELANOXANTHUS INSOLITUS, nN. sp. PI. viii, fig. 6.

6. Elongate-oval. Head black, prothorax red, elytra black with yellow
markings as follows: a small round spot on each side at extreme base, an arcuate
diagonal macula on each, extending from behind shoulder to the 2nd elytral
interval, forming an interrupted fascia, a straight subrectangular macula at apical
third, forming a second interrupted fascia; prosternum red, strongly pubescent,
rest of underside black.

Head rather longer, but of similar structure to that of H. jucundus, antennae
4-10 dentate, 11 oval. Prothoraz arcuately narrowed in front, sides nearly straight
on basal two-thirds, posterior angles feebly divergent, acute and strongly carinate;
disk rather closely punctate, the punctures much smaller than in the other species
described here, sparsely clad at sides with pale pubescence. Scutellum large, oval.
Elytra at base as wide as prothorax and more than twice as long, sides nearly
straight, more widely rounded at apex than usual; striate-punctate, striae narrow,
seriate punctures moderately large and very distinct, intervals—especially on dark
areas—cancellately divided by transverse wrinkles, the basal area asperate and
subnodulose.

9. Of two examples on a card, what I take to be the other sex has the
pronotum dark brown, with the hind angles red, the yellow subhumeral mark
connected with the basal spot, and the two subapical marks oval. There is little
doubt of the two being conspecific. Dim. 5 x 2 mm.

Hab.—Cape York. (Macleay and the Queensland Museums.)

Less conical in form than usual, otherwise typical of the genus. A dual
carina at sides of pronotum—somewhat as in Cisseis (Buprestidae). Holotype
and allotype in the Macleay Museum.

MELANOXANTHUS LATIVITTIS, n. sp. PI. viii, fig. 7.

Elongate, subconic; very sparsely pubescent. Head, prothorax and underside
dull brownish-black, the prothorax with apical band and hind angles, also antennae
and legs, red; elytra with base brightly luteous, a wide vitta extending throughout,
gradually narrowing to apex, yellow, leaving the suture narrowly, the sides more
widely, brown.

Head deeply enclosed in prothorax, antennae with segments 2 and 3 small,
4-10 moderately serrate. Prothorax gently narrowed from base to apex, sides
feebly sinuate behind, hind angles unicarinate, closely adapted to elytral humeri,
disk rather finely alveolate-punctate. Hlytra elongate, subconic, more than thrice
as long as prothorax; striate-punctate, strial punctures rather small, intervals
lightly convex, except near base; those on dark areas rugosely wrinkled. Under-
side subglabrous, finely and closely punctate, epipleurae with larger punctures.
Dim. 4:5 x 1 (4+) mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Wide Bay.

Two examples in the Macleay Museum show a species more elongate and
narrow than usual. Type series in the Macleay Museum.

MELANOXANTHUS SEMIRUBER, Nl. sp. PI. viii, fig. 5.

Subconic. Head and antennae, prothorax and underside dull black, the hind
angles of prothorax, basal segments of antennae and legs red, elytra with basal
half chiefly red, this colour with undefined limits at base, the base,, suture and
apical half black; upper surface with short pubescence.

Head convex, antennae rather stout, submoniliform, 2—3 short, 8-10 tending to
triangular, 11 oval. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, sides nearly straight,

308 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

lightly narrowed in front, hind angles acute, slightly divaricate and strongly
carinate; disk uniformly alveolate-punctate. Scutellum large, oval. Hlytra of same
width as prothorax and about twice as long, sides narrowed from base to apex;
striate-punctate, strial punctures fairly large and close, setigerous; apical half
finely rugose. Dim. 44 x 14 mm.

Hab.—North Queensland: Cairns (Macleay and the South Australian
Museums).

Of like form to H. biarctus and H. flavosignatus. Holotype in the Macleay
Museum.

MELANOXANTHUS RUFONIGER, n. sp. Pl. viii, fig. 11.

¢. Base of head, antennae (except basal segments), a wide median vitta on
pronotum, apical three-quarters of elytra subnitid black, rest of surface, above and
below, red or yellow; dull red on head and pronotum, base of elytra, underside and
legs pale yellow, with rather dense pubescence at sides of pronotum and elytra.

Head closely punctate, antennae not quite reaching base of prothorax, segments
rather widely triangular to scutate. Prothorax: sides converging from base to
apex, hind angles acute, unicarinate, and feebly divaricate, closely embracing
shoulders of elytra; disk closely punctate, the punctures tending to coalesce in
lines, becoming finer towards sides. Elytra twice as long as prothorax, cuneiform;
clearly striate-punctate, intervals nearly flat and finely granulate.

©. Whole of head and greater part of elytra orange-red, the latter paler near
base, the sides only black, elsewhere very faintly clouded.

Dim. 8, 3 mm.; 9, 4 mm. long.

Hab.—Queensland: Tambourine Mountain (A. M. Lea).

A pair, the sexes, in the South Australian Museum, give evidence of the
thorough field-work of my old friend. The name vitticollis is barred by the triple
use of this name in the genus. The elytra are evidently liable to colour variation.
Holotype in the South Australian Museum.

Australian species of Melanoxanthus known to me.

iP eerothorax black. wor Chiefiys (SO; cys ord eee acre ok Te eT ee en oe eee 2
Prothorax Tred jor Chietly SO. ae t hale ns eae ene cas hee PU Reon ote EE ci cease 8
Prothorax trivittate, medial area black, sides yellow .............. rufoniger, n. sp.

Zeperovhnoraxquwi Olly Ch cue tutus tone lick eeilos Reusch vom ai asta lee Re ACLe (Rde eae es RS re eee 3
IST NC EDS Ayla LoubaKey Ahorslles aHsel Ge WeMlOny Soocooboboconsobacdannudooudacdendds 5

% IDVhnERe! moeyoraeS, Nomex ITChiNE og oogoocbvadcuodooHeuboodcmooDdoenouO ON biarctus, n. sp.
IDK AMEN Tasha abayeKs) “inoKOVNS (Ojo IEE) HEISOE Gaonagdoddovooodnaooconaubocuonouaecanc 4

APM ASCIARNAT TOW). fp nicieiaiels: dapele tebe cawiachok. a ete <helans fasciolatuws Macl.; ? 2 froggatti Macl.
MEY lee W EN NGHONS oa uct SieahaCRERCHS TGR Got Bic GROOT OR ENENORD TGs alco oie AiG ma OS o tiC 2 columbinus, n. sp.

ys, LDA dite OIE WEL Se ne lototcHcnala okckon cack OUD Octet ae Or creme leery eiale bts Ge clo COMME oto edt angularis Cand.
EVE OVALS ACO Melee Lonnie tates zon suresh oes Aico sasiaice neem, cotie Seay oleueh meth oReLEE ST okt eters een eS ne 5 28 6

Creivinalemank<in?SamOonre lor wless fasclate ae ecienieehee ie ein flavosignatus, n. sp.
My tralwmaniines: LOM SLC IN ailing, sets cee cpaessets nies aPorencl chee aier os Reve lic. horn chan al RO Er Ones Were 7

fe; RADCRMOL MLOtHOrax TO! hialok sek. bares, aisualep eu ncied anes mi@amaene: oni oueiepencievapehede lativittis, n. sp.
AP ExTOLMpPLOULORaM DLA CK: seis cys yates ceo esey ais vepactehanate hE svokore Petar cielo steelers semiruber, n. sp.

Se eno th ona wilt Olivers COs ga aleuuiyon sys) ol sisi (61 so0)-0 ss s gsdenth au) Colon eugeiie tenmeae reves oh ieueeeree rar a cone Weis Renee orci Tone 9
TEAKOWMoNie Teel Til ISAC IAA NSS Shogo gnoasdboouse bod wosdo nde opoboDOC ODES ital

92 Lilytras with one pair OL male: MaACUIAS AH sala cela eect a etn che el Chaatreneieta chetcliomeicteretaitcte) 2 10
Elytraswath two painsnotap alemmalclale tes . sinatra cache) clsicneietenena cl ieie insolitus, n. sp.

0) sPalemmaculaeratmchbt rane les stOuSUeUIre scr treisicepaiereuelokeucisienerehorcnenelebeoncus froggatti Macl.
Palesmacniaerslopinesbackwardsstrom) Suture miele cieberciciielcucieienene jucundus, n. sp.

WIS TENOR Vor < Viale [NEIG< CiaKeeIl ENE Gurondeodoudoddcepcauauon. So columbinus, n. sp.

iProthorax with hind (aneles black crsrs coke cla tela chores eerie icone eleweromens ruficollis Cand.

BY H. J. CARTER. 309

HYPNOIDUS FLAVOPICTUS, n. sp. PI. viii, fig. 9.

Obovate; nitid black with silvery pubescence, hind angles of prothorax,
antennae, tibiae, tarsi and elytral markings pale yellow, the last as follows: basal
mark extending and widened laterally on basal fourth, medial oval mark on each
side of suture and a wide, irregular, preapical fascia, produced along suture to apex.

Head closely pubescent, antennae mutilated, the few remaining segments
subtriangular. Prothorax convex, ovate, widest near middle, more narrowed behind
than in front, subsinuate near hind angles, these non-carinate, acute, triangular,
directed slightly outward; disk mirror-like and minutely punctate, a short basal
sulcus, bordered by carina, parallel to sides. Hlytra ovate, wider than prothorax;
striate-punctate, the strial punctures large, intervals roundly convex throughout
with light transverse wrinkles. Underside and femora black, nitid. Dim. 4-5 x 14
mm.

Hab.—New South Wales (Macleay Museum).

Two examples with incomplete antennae and legs are very distinct from
described species. Type series on card in the Macleay Museum.

H. (Cryptohypnus) dimidiatus Macl. = H. (Cryptohypnus) semifasciatus Macl.—
An examination of the types makes this evident: a slight colour difference only
between the types.

Subfamily CARDIOPHORINAE.

Three generic names, Cardiophorus, Paracardiophorus and Horistonotus, have
been applied to Australian species. Of these, Horistonotus appears to be a purely
American genus, separated from Paracardiophorus by the narrow front of head and
the more strongly developed hind angles of the prothorax and generally flatter
form. Cardiophorus is limited, fide Schwartz (Gen. Ins., p. 46b; also Deutsch. Ent.
Zeit., 1895, p. 40), to species having the lateral carina either absent, or, when
present, only on the underside.

I have examined examples of C. cinereus Hbst. (Hurope), C. ophidius Cand.
(India) and C. ruficollis L. (Hurope), kindly sent from the British Museum.
The Australian species standing under Cardiophorus in the Junk catalogue are
clearly not congeneric with these; in no instance is the lateral carina either absent
or bent downward from the hind angles, as in the above three. Omitting the
four species recorded from New Guinea, Celebes and Ternate as unknown to me,
five Australian species remain in this list as follows:

fasciolatus Macl. 2 and froggatti Macl. g are, I consider, the sexes of the same
species, differing only in the colour of the prothorax. They belong to the genus
Melanoxanthus.

macleayi Schw. = quadrimaculatus Macl. is a typical Paracardiophorus, the
lateral carina being continuous along the basal two-thirds of margin.

tumidithoraz Schw. (tumidicollis Schw.)—Unknown to me. The description
strongly suggests a Paracardiophorus, structurally similar to C. venustus Cand.

venustus Cand.—A common species in South and Western Australia, of which
many examples are before me. The lateral carina is very short, extending little
beyond the basal fourth of the margin; here abruptly terminated, not bent to
the underside. According to the tabulation of Schwartz, this short carina would
bring it under Horistonotus. But the structure of head, prothorax and elytra is
that of a typical Paracardiophorus, congeneric with P. australis Cand. and others.
Moreover, the distinction given by Schwartz for Horistonotus—‘‘Die seiten des
Prothorax sind hochstens bis zu Mitte gerandet’—fails in two species sent me

310 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

for examination, H. exoletus Hr. (Mexico) and H. flavipes Champ. (Costa Rica),
in both of which the lateral carina extends along two-thirds of the margin.

Rather than give new generic names to the few species having this short
lateral carina, it seems advisable to include all the known Australian Cardio-
phorinae under the single genus Paracardiophorus. Further, in the tabulation of
Schwartz this genus is thus characterized: ‘Die Seiten des Prothorax sind
gewohnlich bis zur den Vorderecken gerandet”’; but in no single instance, of the
hundreds examined, have I seen this lateral border continued to the front angle,
though it is generally traceable beyond the middle.

A single species of Cardiotarsus, described below, adds this genus to the
Australian Elaterid fauna.

Paracardiophorus attenuatus Elst.—This species is doubtfully fitted to its
present position. The lightly convex, little widened, prothorax, with divaricate,
rather wide hind angles, prosternal sutures well developed, hind coxae not
produced laterally, antennae with wide, subdentate, segments, present features
inconsistent with its status in the subfamily.

The greater number of the genus are found under the bark of Eucalyptus
EREES:

Horistonotus bicolor Rainb. (Rec. Aust. Mus., 1904) has been omitted by
Schenkling from the Junk Catalogue. An examination of the type shows it to be a
Paracardiophorus—one of the common varieties of P. australis Cand. in which
the pale maculae are connected to form vittae.

P. despectus Cand. = P. antennalis Schw.?—This synonymy is extremely
probable. The descriptions are almost identical. The query is a concession to
my inability to compare the types.

I have omitted certain of the more or less concolorous species from my table,
since it has been difficult to identify these with certainty; though most have been
‘hypothetically’ labelled. A few notes on these may be helpful.

Of the four black species, compactus Cand., consobrinus Cand., dissinvilis
Schw., and tumidithorax Schw., dissimilis is readily distinguished by its black
legs. It is common in Western Australia, and, as noted by the author, the 9 has,
sometimes, a red shoulder-mark. As this colour variation may apply to others,
it is possible that the three lenis Cand., moseri Schw., and xanthomus Cand. may
be forms of concolorous species. Careful field notes only can establish this.

P. tumidithoraz Schw. should be easily determined by its large size (10 mm.
long), and opaque surface. I have not seen it.

P. compactus Cand. has been hypothetically separated from consobrinus Cand.
by locality (Victoria and Queensland respectively) and the dark antennae of the
former. My examples of (?) compactus are from Beaumaris, Vict., and Mulwala
(Murray R.); of (2?) consobrinus from Cairns, Stewart R. (N.Q.), Cape’ York and
Brisbane.

P. lenis Cand. is said to be distinguished from zanthomus Cand. by basal
spot and apex red. My examples of the former are from Benalla, and of the
latter from Wattle Glen, Heathcote Junction and L. Hattah, Vict.

P,. moseri Schw. I think I know by its larger shoulder-spot and dark antennae.
Examples from Frankston and other Victorian localities.

Six species are described as brown. Of these despectus Cand. (= antennalis
Schw.) has a wide distribution in New South Wales and Victoria and beyond. My
examples are from Sydney district, Jenolan, Morgan (S.A.) and one example
(det. by M. Fleutiaux) from Queensland.

BY H. J. CARTER. 311

P. consputus Cand., from Victoria, must be very close to vagus Schw. from
New South Wales. Examples (?) of the former are from L. Hattah, Wood Wood,
Vict., and of the latter from Illawarra and Cotter R. (N.S.W.).

P. humilis Er. and jugulus Elst. are included in my table.

Of the five species described as castaneous, red or yellow, mjdbergi Elst. is
tabulated below; victoriensis Blckb. and flavipennis Cand. (a minute species from
W.A.) are unknown to me; pallidipennis Cand. is determined with a ? from
Cheltenham (Vict.), Albury and Mulwala, and longicornis Cand. from Kuranda
and Cairns. The 14 other recorded species, together with 19 new species, are
tabulated below.

N.B.—Since writing the above, I have received from M. Fleutiaux some notes
on examples sent, as identified with a (?) by me. Of compactus Cand., consobrinus
Cand., despectus Cand. and pallidipennis Cand., he writes: “Ils paraissent
appartenir a la méme espéce! Mais laquelle?” Of each Schwartz species, vagus,
moseri and longicornis, he writes: ‘M’est inconnu”! which explains my difficulties
in this group.

Table of Australian species of Paracardiophorus.

Section A.—Species with elytra concolorous or with defined areas of dark and pale colours.

ieee Vi mee tI © OLOLOUStencyry Ua srey et cue shcitcheh eka Se). chisnoa sep AGORA) A tuteliciss pair: oie Weube es heed SO OIE Re toraliaararteae Gauls 2
PES iyi Gram COLOTOU Si amen hese c eas ekseo Wau eis rod presen toe eve lies Seuerehs So a SoScaremataycie Gus vere emaiee ela east oie vai reuscan re 4
a LOuloraxcenedseheaduandmelytram blacks eseetaeeeer toc icm icicle: oreo ioie bicolor Cand.
WIPVETMSUTLACEMEECSEACEOUS) 5 eyed teens cuscemensies oo) clas ce fduden avavenetie) abel Seoaeteneuer ens mjobergi Elst.
Wj PDCrESULLACES EUS COUS OT DLAC Kay meayepeepsdevevcpcrcaoe ci sucrc wey sep siasulon se sprey Susigsuvneniswelamere casi cles peucunes tage 3
3. Black, or nearly so, post angles of prothorax red ....................-- humilis Er.
IROL, BMItSrige AMES Che joROWMOeD< ECL oococosgccouenbbooUooKuUOudON jugulus Hist.
4. Elytra black or brown, with defined red or yellow areas ............-..+------ 5
IBIKiRA, Weiser, Colonies Weranohy Counesl so socuecungoobaonoasccoDgdauco0gGbGS 8
5, Shas sneiimenls “Ha Seoraboaig, Jkosokteraicterodicsceo a5. ocr caose Ore OIONIONN can Or nn CRa Chai Ors eicicico ce Ok mone oS 6
SIZES IN ed Aik mara etl OU Sue aye aie oa eectiouss evrsea sewer Ma icetiane, Succ. uel esua elleelaut ete. Renata e rarer ce ete) chee 7
CGapsasalehallitaotmelytram:edsOrnyellowe = care cheteiceiotens. aon ctciehs ote el suenete-cicielere dimidiatus Schw.
Basal two-thirds of elytra yellow, with black humeral spot .......... divisus Cand.
Bascuawarhwlateralwex tension Ted mOrmeyellOwegaciiacisraceccnele aicus icicle enenelces elisus Cand.
ES GOW MS OULG ETS Obes) 1 Cia aualenemessea ceeiiciciekerio eck el somes: eae ciate eoed= enaceus sens octavus Cand.
BlaekemSn OULGEW SP Ot GEO sstencns rset ee eee crete eae ite ia atin eueter meties ee atau alee eucalypti Blkb.
Sane erothOonra xe COnCOlLoLrous dCaSstanCOus)m mcrae cee ele eis ceeto rene oraieceteie nue ae err ciicicicwe. stare 9
(PROthonraxavanle sate di erieangoes cosas ede ye creda zetehoneteetenorewe sevsce eremeleus incre avewe variegatus Schw.
., Ido, Wiha pele gyal chiak gHacks snl Clembasol jo onb00bvcvoccaes one 0 odd Eo ObaGanN 10
BD lyinawnred the ldanrkerareasimMOne) (OT CSS pfaSCia ve aaeeneere oes ices te 11
10. Elytra testaceous, variably suffused with fuscous .................. litoralis, n. sp.
Elytra nitid castaneous, suture and variable area black .............. cooki, n. sp.
MiyinaculleredssaplealehaltavarioushyintuScatem. screen succes sence varians. Nn. Sp.
11. Elytral fascia well defined, underside red ...................: Subfasciatus, n. sp.
Elytral fascia vaguely defined, underside black .............. nigrosuffusus, N. sp.

Section B.—Elytra with markings in a symmetrical pattern.

il, iDjkywieel Golloies Ioraesiqochingwlhy Erarenseol sscacacccandd ono und OUD O OU go oUoUoUOOOUS 2
IB|hiquceys ieee KOlleNWe | 6.5 qerciolo Dole biclabibts 0 4ia 6.0 ob be bob cia OO bol Ob Grn-40.0rd Clo moo oto o ac 4

2. Prothorax black, post angles red, elytra with black and pale vittae .. vittipennis, n. sp.
TEA aIRE.S AiEhalelershUsl! Nag o.oiola ol OIG Go On GeO 6 6-0 0. GIesod oid Cait one DEG. 6 ClO O raid clos iovorc 3

3. Elytra with orange shoulder-spot, extended on sides, and disconnected red streaks
AAR ETE ERHIORE OIRO as EDL ORR REACH ORE ROH CE RACHET ORO oS. OkO UCLA ORE BLO RCI OR OR REE ROIS OisLrE Cs rufopictus, Nn. sp.

Mlytra with) darks and spale syielllowm vill tale are taper eree telstra) «1 ell-f-l=ieieli= te alternatus, n. Sp.

A, iDiyaars, wellonig, walle 2! Gyrus eiovel Byes [SEK cooscooodonoodoKKoOe atronotatus, nN. sp.
Blytra with 4 pale spots on dark ground ..................+--+++se-s ses seeee 5
IDbhyita, QWATAMIEE rose suvon OU dlon ood oOOT DON OOd OOo MOD OUOO UO DE OOD OGboOnob GoGo DOU nS 14

Fy Pow aac Haak 4 4 OLA. ChO BOE Oooo PO Cbd dodo oo Oooo OOD UootD Coto. OOUa OOK venustus Cand.

TDA. lp naogoobUmoomoe le bos O0 25 on ono Do OOD adoro DOGcCooO One GuUoou OUD adiond 6

312 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

HetSizey5o6 MIMwlOME, icpystoys, woewe ic Gib. Aeeested oo eee Riskak sapere eet oy Sirsa eee ee 7
SIZE. Bae MI ONE sah cxcvocegsh a teyal dVopetrue cere ca ah ea er we eee oe ere ee 11
(ere Mia cullaes ryvellows Mie Gs fers aden toccuemetteneWence st cviss sieiel nes ie Tis ucic eae Sa RCRA Eat. eet eee 8
Maculae orange vor red ).Ar ott ene tie ee ike ete See eae ete eee ER AON SEES ee 10
8. Hinder pair of maculae round, basal oblong .................. fulvosignatus Cand.
HMindenspairsor imaculae. SubLaSClatemersas oy: o,4 iia Dien ee 9
Hs ASIEN TEMES Clavel wWroren inane Ao bbggobkdonoudoussouodeocood australis Cand.
Basal maculae forming anmelon gates sees ee ne eee eee hamatus Cand.
HOC MEinder spairvofimaculaerovallie ceteris siete hen hae clan ee ee ee dulcis, n. sp.
Hinder pair of maculae elongate and wide ......<.-.««:cse.«.«- occidentalis, n. sp.
AY LMA CUA ViCMLOWs | ck genspev es cep AChR el teebe NG ucie ig) Saat enodeks tov See Rae eee 12
Maculaenorangee: OF Med Navcrspctercholete auk er os oie. tie Paar Ce ee Oe eee 3
LZ basalamacniae lunate whinderstasciaters-a-)neiieeeerieeeeieiciae Aer minimus Cand.
Maculaersubpdiasonaly cruciform. ace ob ace eee subcruciatus, n. sp.
13. Basal maculae large and round, hinder oblong ...................- macleayi Schw.
Hlyviitralemacnlaersmalll janden on dase: cieuae acacia tieierkcrienen: quadristellatus, n. sp.
Loa SIZew Le =oe OM. VOM errs teewatetete nets uace scabies ie. cue Gust e ee COR ee See sae EET IEE aE eT ee 15
Size 3 mm. long. Elytra with 4 maculae and postmedial fascia .. carissimus, n. sp.
SteME Ly tral swithebasal tar ear mwideliviamedirpn:.s At-iasceevcusPece sn ercieoadl ote Sete) ee SRO IEES te a ee 16
IRM Toy SO) oo0c cn do.0 000100 FCO UDO MD SUMO MOM DOSD ROU ooOn ODO oObo ONO nS SoOabmscS 17
16. Elytral basal half red, apical black with white fascia .............. amabilis, n. sp.

Elytral basal third red, apical two-thirds black with two yellow spots ............
SUG IOOOOOSOHOODOCOUS OOODUD OR SD EON DUN OUOD OU ODO ODO OU Ob 0060000 stellatus, n. sp.

17, 1FRKOWNMOMAE< ING, Glhinucy, ‘ill Cio WARMING Soonsedocasedungcu0d008 sexnotatus, n. sp.
Prothorax with 2 orange spots, elytra with 6 maculae .......... octosignatus, n. sp.

The new species are described below.

PARACARDIOPHORUS ALTERNATUS, n. sp. PI. ix, fig. 10.

Nitid red, head and prothorax a dark castaneous, the latter mottled with pale
red; elytra with alternate intervals dark and pale yellow, appendages red; under-
side densely pubescent with pale, recumbent hair.

Head strongly punctate and finely pubescent, antennae extending well beyond
base of prothorax, rather stout, segments 2 and 3 short, 4-10 elongate conic.
Prothoraz tumid, moderately widened in front of middle, sinuate before hind
angles; lateral border abruptly terminated before half-way; disk finely and rather
closely punctate, a short sulcus near hind angles. Scutellum cordate. Hlytra wider
than prothorax at base, sides nearly straight on basal half, thence lightly narrowed
behind; striate-punctate, the striae deep, strial punctures indistinct; intervals
rather strongly convex and punctate, pubescence thick at sides and apex. Dim.
4% x 14 mm.

Hab.—Western Australia: Geraldton (J. Clark).

A unique example in the Histon Collection is unlike any recorded species.
Holotype in the Australian Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS AMABILIS, n. sp. PI. ix, fig. 6.

Head, prothorax, abdomen and parts of elytra nitid black, hind angles of
prothorax rufescent; elytra with basal half red, apical half black, except for a
transverse oval macula white (or nearly so) forming an incomplete fascia at
middle of black area; metasternum and basal margin of prosternum red; hind
femora dark, legs otherwise red; antennae with basal segments dark red, the rest
more or less infuscate.

Head lightly convex, rather densely clad with silvery hair; antennae slender,
segments 3-10 subequal, lineate-obconic. Prothorax tumid, widely rounded, widest
in front of middle, sides contracting roundly in front, a little sinuate before the
well defined, dentate hind angles, the narrow raised border evident only at posterior

BY H. J. CARTER. 313

fourth; disk closely, unevenly punctate, the larger punctures at base and sides,
a feebly depressed medial line near base. EHlytra lightly enlarged at shoulders,
subparallel for the greater part; striate-punctate, with large punctures set in deeply
impressed striae, intervals convex and clearly punctate. Underside with dense,
grey, recumbent hair. Dim. 54 x 2 mm.

Hab.—N.W. Victoria: Sea Lake (J. C. Goudie), Lake Hattah (J. E. Dixon).
S. Australia: Port Lincoln (Blackburn).

Six examples examined. It and C. venustus Cand. are the prettiest of the
Australian species. I am indebted to Mr. Dixon for one example; two others,
including the holotype, are in the Elston Collection in the Australian Museum.
Three more are in the South Australian Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS ASSIMILIS, nh. Sp. Pl. ix, fig. 3

Nitid black; elytra with four yellow maculae: two narrow, elongate, from base
along the 4th interval, rounded and enlarged at base; two small, round spots at
apical third; antennae and femora black, tarsi and basal segments of antennae
yellow, tibiae variably suffused with yellow; head strongly, elsewhere sparsely,
pubescent.

Head punctate, pubescent, antennae long and slender, extending beyond base
of prothorax. Prothorax convex, ovate, well rounded anteriorly, widest in front of
middle, sinuately and strongly narrowed behind, narrow lateral border terminated
abruptly about apical fourth; disk finely duplo-punctate, hind angles small and
subtruncate. Scutellum large, triangular. Hlytra narrowly ovate, widest behind
middle; striate-punctate, intervals convex near base, elsewhere nearly flat and
transversely wrinkled; underside lightly pubescent, minutely punctate. Dim.
5 x 1:5 mm.

Hab.—Australian Capital Territory: Black Mountain (A. Tonnoir and F.
Graham); New South Wales: Tallong (F. H. Taylor); Queensland: Bribie Island
(A. M. Lea, H. Hacker). :

Nine examples before me have been confused with C. australis Cand., but the
following comparison will distinguish them:

australis Cand. assimilis, n. sp.

Elytral marks: Two wide, oblique from Two narrow, longitudinal, from mid-base,
behind shoulders; two postmedial, forming round, luteous spot at base;
subfasciate. two postmedial small and round.

Tibiae yellow .. .. Stee ae in general dark above except at knees.

In form dssimilis is more ST with more strongly punctate prothorax.
Holotype in the Canberra Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS ATRONOTATUS, n. sp. PI. viii, fig. 10.

Biovate; head, prothorax (except hind angles, yellow), underside and elytral
markings black; elytra yellow, with two small, elongate spots near base, on the
4th interval, two oval maculae at middle of sides and the apical fourth black;
antennae black with the three basal segments yellow, legs yellow.

Head with pale pubescence, antennae not reaching the base of prothorax,
segment 1 very tumid, 2 and 3 subequal, each shorter than 4, 4-10 subequal.
Prothorax very nitid black, widest and well rounded in front of middle, lightly
narrowed and scarcely sinuate behind; disk clearly, finely, but distinctly punctate,
the punctures evenly spaced; lateral carina on basal half only. Scutellwm cordate.
Elytra narrowly ovate; striate-punctate, striae and punctures clearly impressed,
intervals convex only near base and minutely setose. Dim. 4 x 1:3 mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Craven (T. G. Sloane).

314 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

A single example was given me by my old friend. It has a distinct pattern
unlike any other, while belonging to the section that includes octavus Cand.,
macleayi Schw., subcruciatus Cart. Holotype in the National Museum, Melbourne.

PARACARDIOPHORUS CARISSIMUS, nN. Sp. PI. ix, fig. 2.

Narrow, elongate; head, prothorax and underside nitid brownish-black, almost
glabrous, elytra reddish-brown, with testaceous pattern as follows: humeral comma-
shaped mark, covering shoulders and continued laterally backward, two premedial,
elongate-oval marks, and a wide, oblique, postmedial fascia, rather widely inter-
rupted at suture, its interior hind corners connected with a sutural extension
almost to apex, posterior angles of prothorax testaceous, antennae and femora dark,
tibiae and tarsi red.

Head of typical form, antennae obscured by gum. Prothoraxr moderately convex,
ovately widened, equally narrowed each way, slightly wider in front than behind
the middle, without posterior sinuation; disk very minutely punctate and mirror-
like, lateral border continued for three-quarters of length from base. Elytra
elongate-ovate, more convex than usual, widest at middle; striate-punctate, the
round punctures well defined on light areas, intervals a little convex towards base,
nearly flat elsewhere. Dim. 3 x 1 mm.

Hab.—Western Australia: King George’s Sound.

Four examples, two in the Australian Museum, badly gummed, and two in the
National Museum, are amongst the most ornate and distinct of the genus and one
of the smallest. Holotype in the Australian Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS COOKI, n. sp. PI. viii, fig. 14.

Elongate-ovate; head and pronotum nitid castaneous, scutellum, suture and a
large, variable area of elytra black; underside red, appendages testaceous.

Head pubescent, clothing little paler than surface; antennae extending to base
of prothorax, segments subtriangular. Prothorax moderately convex, little con-
tracted in front or behind, hind angles shortly triangular, blunted at extremity,
with black margin; disk with dual system of punctures, the larger evenly spaced
some distance apart, ground punctures minute and close; very lightly pubescent;
lateral carina not extending half-way to front. Scutellum cordate, dull black.
Elytra narrowly ovate, striate-punctate, striae well impressed, serial punctures
large, regular, crenulating sides of intervals, these lightly convex and transversely
wrinkled; pubescent at sides and apex; underside lightly pubescent. Din.
4-5 x 13 mm.

Hab.—North Queensland: Endeavour River.

Three examples examined are somewhat like P. nigrosuffusus and some forms
of P. varians. From the former it is separated by smaller size, different colour,
especially of underside, and shorter lateral carina; from varians it is readily
separated by its nitid and far less hirsute surface, wider prothorax and different
sculpture. The name will indicate its habitat. Holotype in the South Australian
Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS DULCIS, n. sp. PI. ix, fig. 7.

Nitid black above and beneath, strongly pilose with silvery hair, elytra with
four large orange maculae: two, longitudinal at base, of variable size, in general
covering 3 intervals, two preapical; metasternal epipleurae red, 1st abdominal
segment with pale spot at side, antennae and legs infuscate, the basal segment of
the former and the tarsi flavous.

BY H. J. CARTER. 315

Head rounded, with raised border in front, antennae sublinear, extending
just beyond base of prothorax; segment 1 stout, 2 shorter than 3, 3 than 4,
thence subequal. Prothorax very tumid, arcuately narrowed on frontal half, less
strongly and subsinuately behind, widest about middle, with small truncate hind
angles, directed backward; the narrow lateral border quite obliterated about half-
way to the front; disk rather closely punctate, the punctures larger near sides,
these bearing white hairs, a short, well-marked sulcus near hind angles, parallel
to sides. Scutellum subcordate. Hlytra as wide as prothorax, feebly widened
behind middle, striate-punctate, punctures large in well-marked striae, intervals
convex and punctate-setose. Underside with dense, recumbent hair. Din.
5-54 x 13-2 mm.

Hab—N.W. Victoria: Lake Hattah (J. E. Dixon and C. G. Oke), Murray
River (H. S. Cope); South Australia (Macleay Museum).

Six examples before me are easily distinguished from P. australis Cand. by
the basal markings extending longitudinally from border and of orange colour
(in australis these are oblique from shoulder and testaceous). Holotype in
Australian Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS LITORALIS, . Sp. PI. viii, fig. 8.

Short, bi-ovate; head and prothorax nitid reddish, varying from red to brown
or nearly black; elytra testaceous, variably suffused with fuscous, underside red,
legs and antennae testaceous.

Head lightly pubescent, antennae unusually long and slender, extending well
beyond base of prothorax, segments linear. Prothorax convex, ovate, sides well
narrowed in front, subsinuate behind; disk microscopically punctate, raised lateral
border terminated about two-thirds of the way from base. Scutellum cordate.
Elytra ovate, of same width as prothorax at base, widest near middle; striate-
punctate, strial punctures large, crenulating sides of intervals, these with a single
line of punctures. Dim. 3-434 x 1-13 mm.

Hab.—South Australia: Adelaide (sea-beach, A. M. Lea); Western Australia:
Geraldton (J. Clark); Tasmania: Kelso (beach, A. M. Lea and A. Simson) ;
Queensland: Brisbane (Tiegs).

Sixteen examples show a little species, variable in size and colour. The five
from Tasmania show a tendency to vittate arrangement of the dark colour on
elytra, but cannot otherwise be separated from those from Adelaide and Geraldton.
As with P. nigrosuffusus, the pronotum varies in colour from pale red to brown
(or black in one example). Type series in the South Australian Museum.

Var.—An example from Brisbane, in the Queensland Museum, has the
pronotum and the apex of elytra black. This form is apparently near flavipennis
Cand., described from the Swan River; but apart from the widely separated
locality, none of the long series before me tally with Candéze’s description.

PARACARDIOPHORUS NIGROSUFFUSUS, n. sp. PI. ix, fig. 12.

Oblong; subnitid red, sparsely pubescent above, brownish-black beneath, elytra
with a wide, variable, ill-defined black, postmedial fascia; legs and antennae
flavous.

Head feebly pubescent, antennae short and extremely slender, not extending
to base of prothorax; segments linear, 2 and 3 shorter than succeeding. Prothorax
convex, subquadrangular, length and breadth subequal, sides nearly straight, the
short, blunt hind angles continuous with lateral margin, the raised border

316 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

terminated two-thirds of the distance from base; disk strongly, sparsely punctate,
with short, indistinct basal sulcus. Scutellum subcordiform. Elytra wider than
prothorax, narrowly oval; striate-punctate, striae deep, the strial punctures
distinct, intervals wide and flat, except at base, apparently impunctate, with
recumbent pale hair; underside with fine scattered punctures on sternal areas,
abdomen feebly pubescent. Dim. 5-6 x 2 mm.

Hab.—Inland N.S.W., Victoria and South Australia, ? N.W. Aust.—Bogan
River (J. Armstrong), Sea Lake (J. C. Goudie), Leigh’s Creek (Blackburn Coll.).

Thirteen examples are before me that vary in size and colour. The dark
colour sometimes extends to the pronotum. Two examples in the South Australian
Museum from the Fortescue River, N.W.A. (W. D. Dodd), have the prothorax
wholly dark brown, but may be considered as a variety of this species. Type series
in Coll. Carter (presented to the Australian Museum).

PARACARDIOPHORUS OCCIDENTALIS, 0. sp. PI. ix, fig. 9.

Ovate; head, prothorax, underside and legs black, the prothorax nitid, with
short pubescence, the last two opaque from the dense, recumbent, whitish
pubescence; elytra black, with four red markings, two comma-shaped at shoulders,
narrow at base, thickened and incurved to 3rd interval, two elongate, preapical;
tarsi and basal segments of antennae red, in some examples a small red spot at
anterior angles of prothorax.

Head strongly pubescent, antennae not reaching base of prothorax, segments
2 and 3 short, 4-10 narrowly subconic. Prothorax convex, ovate, widely rounded,
strongly narrowed in front and behind, subsinuate at the latter; hind angles short,
truneate and feebly divaricate, lateral border terminated at apical third, disk
finely, irregularly, punctate. Hlytra ovate, wider than prothorax at base and
nearly thrice as long; striate-punctate, striae deep, intervals strongly convex on
basal half, somewhat flattened on middle area, clearly punctate, also setose at
sides. Dim. 6 x 2 (vix) mm.

Hab.—Western Australia: Warren River (W. B. Dodd).

Four examples are marked somewhat like the eastern P. dulcis Cart., but differ
as follows: Size larger, the hinder pair of maculae elongate on intervals 6, 7, 8
(oval in dulcis). Holotype in South Australian Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS OCTOSIGNATUS, nh. Sp. PI. ix, fig. 4.

Biovate; nitid black, with short silvery pubescence; upper surface with
8 orange maculae, placed as follows: one near each front angle of pronotum, six
on elytra, of which two are small, basal, two oval, premedial, and two preapical,
forming a fascia interrupted at suture but extending to sides; the hind angle of
prothorax also inclined to reddish; legs and antennae black, tarsi ‘and basal
segments of the latter red.

Head rounded and narrowly bordered in front, strongly pubescent and sub-
opaque, antennae long and narrow, extending beyond base of prothorax, segment 1
stout, 2 very small, 3 shorter than 4, 4 and 5 equal, 6-10 longer and wider than
preceding, 11 lanceolate. Prothoraxz convex, widest at middle, sides arcuately
narrowed in front, and sinuately so behind; narrow lateral border obliterated about
half-way to the front, hind angles small, directed backward, non-carinate, a short
suleus near each; disk closely and indistinctly punctate-setose. Scutellwm cordate.
Elytra wider than prothorax, sides subparallel; striate-punctate, with rather
large punctures in deeply impressed striae; intervals wide, moderately convex,

BY H. J. CARTER. 317

on dark areas transversely rugose. Underside strongly pubescent. Dim. 43-5 x 13
mm.

Hab.—South Australia (Macleay Museum).

Two examples on a card are easily distinguished by pattern from all described
species. Holotype in the Macleay Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS QUADRISTELLATUS, n. Sp. PI. ix, fig. 1.

Oblong-ovate; subnitid black above, beneath and appendages, except tarsi;
elytra with four small orange spots, two premedial, two postmedial on the 6th and
7th intervals; tarsi red.

Head with short silvery pubescence, antennae long and stout, dull black,
extending beyond the base of prothorax, the segments rather widely triangular,
1 stout but shorter than usual, 2 very small, 3 smaller than 4, 3-10 subtriangular,
11 elongate-oval. Prothorax: length and breadth subequal, moderately convex,
less widened than usual, sides gently arcuate, not sinuate behind, posterior angles
acute, subtriangular, directed backward; lateral border abruptly terminated about
three-fourths from base; disk with a double system of punctures, the larger
punctures distinct and rather close, sparse pubescence at sides. Scutellum
pentagonal. Hlytra at shoulders slightly wider than prothorax, sides sub-parallel;
striate-punctate, the striae wide and deep; intervals convex and rugose. Dim.
4x1mm. (approx.).

Hab.—N. Territory: Port Darwin (W. K. Hunt).

Two examples in the South Australian Museum are unlike anything in the
genus, with slight difference of structure (less widely ovate prothorax, sharper
hind angles), but with incomplete lateral border, as in others. Type series in the
South Australian Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS RUFOPICTUS, Nn. sp. PI. viii, fig. 12.

Biovate, convex; upper surface brownish-black, variegated with red, underside
brownish-black, abdomen with medial stripe yellow; appendages testaceous. The
whole with pale pubescence.

Head densely pubescent, apical half reddish; antennae long and slender,
segment 1 tumid, 2 and 3 each shorter than 4, 4-10 subequal and subconic, 11
lineate-ovate. Prothoraz in g confusedly variegated, in (?) 9 the red is confined
to a marginal band at apex. Ovate, widest in front of middle, sides feebly sinuate
behind, the hind angles briefly triangular; disk pubescent, with moderately strong
punctures, lateral carina continuous beyond middle. Scutellum cordate. EHlytra
convex, ovate; striate-punctate, the seriate punctures large, placed in deep striae;
intervals wide and convex, pubescent, especially at sides and apex. An orange
patch covering shoulders, produced along sides and some disconnected red patches,
in longitudinal streaks. Underside black, abdomen with medial area yellow.
Dim. 4 x 1 (4) mm.

Hab.—Western Australia (Duboulay, in British Museum).

Two examples sent by Dr. Blair, amongst others, show a pretty and distinct
little species. Holotype in the British Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS SEXNOTATUS, N. Sp.
Ovate; nitid black above and beneath, vaguely pubescent, elytra each with three
red maculae, one round at base, a second near sides at basal third, a third, the

largest, oblong, on apical third, behind the second; underside glabrous, appendages
red.

318 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

Head lightly pubescent, antennae mutilated. Prothorax robust, convex, widest
at middle, sides well rounded, narrowed on front half, lightly sinuate behind; hind
angles short and wide, in one example pubescent at apex; lateral carina extending
half-way to front; disk uniformly covered with a dual system of punctures, the
larger very distinct. Scutelluwm cordiform. EHlytra slightly wider than prothorax
at base and more than twice as long; sulcate-punctate, the sulci wide and deep,
intervals very convex and strongly punctate. Dim. 5 x 2 (vix) mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Cape York.

Four examples, two in the Queensland Museum, and two in the National
Museum, Melbourne, are easily recognizable by the strong sculpture of the elytra,
besides the distinct pattern. Holotype in the Queensland Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS STELLATUS, NM. Sp. Pl. ix, fig. 5.

Ovate; nitid black above and beneath; elytra with basal third red, the rest
black, with two round testaceous spots, one on each, at apical third. Upper
surface rather densely griseo-pubescent; elytra with long upright hair; palpi and
tarsi red, basal segments of antennae partly red.

Antennae slender, extending slightly beyond the base of prothorax, segment 1
stout, as long as 2 and 3 together, 4-10 subtriangular successively slenderer, 11
oval. Prothorax convex, ovate, widest near middle, sides subsinuate behind the
short, subtrunecate hind angles directed backward, the narrow raised border
terminating abruptly at three-fourths length from base, a short indistinct basal
sulcus; disk distinctly, rather closely, punctate. Hlytra elongate-ovate, wider than
prothorax at base; striate-punctate, striae well marked, strial punctures large,
elongate; intervals flat except at extreme base, the 6th here strongly convex;
intervals finely setose. Dim. 4-44 x 14 mm.

Hab—New South Wales: Tamworth (A. M. Lea, in Department of
Agriculture).

Two examples taken by my old friend are, in colour, nearest P. dimidiatus
Schw., but smaller, more pilose, with the basal red mark shorter and the two
testaceous spots in addition on the elytra, the antennae more slender, their
segments shorter. A third example is in the South Australian Museum. Holotype
series presented to the Australian Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS SUBCRUCIATUS, Nn. Sp. PI. ix, fig. 8.

Narrow, elongate; nitid black above and beneath; feebly pubescent, elytra
with four testaceous maculae, arranged in a somewhat cruciform manner—two
starting from sides at shoulder, obliquely narrowing to a point on 4th interval at
basal third, two wider, subrhomboidal, extending from the 2nd interval, post-
median, and extending backward to sides; hind angles of prothorax variably
testaceous, legs testaceous, antennae infuscate with basal segments yellow.

Head finely punctate, lightly pubescent, antennae extending to base of
prothorax, segment 1 strongly tumid, 2 smaller but tumid, 3 narrowly lineate,
4-10 narrowly oval, 11 lineate. Prothorax narrower than usual, convex, widest in
front of middle, lightly narrowed in front, a longer convergence behind, without
sinuation; lateral border extending three-quarters of the distance to the front
margin, hind angles small, acute, an obscure neighbouring sulcus; sparsely and
minutely punctate. Scutellum cordate. Elytra little wider than prothorax at
shoulders, sides subparallel; striate-punctate, strial punctures close, well defined
except near suture, intervals convex, cross-wrinkled on the dark areas. Under-
side subglabrous, almost impunctate. Dim. 3-34 x 1 mm.

BY H. J. CARTER. 319

Hab.—South Queensland: Tambourine Mountain (A. M. Lea and A. Musgrave),
Wide Bay (Australian Museum).

Four examples of this pretty little species are before me. In two examples
the apices of elytra are reddish. Holotype in the Australian Museum.

Var.—HExamples from the Richmond River, in the N.S.W. Department of
Agriculture, taken by the late W. W. Froggatt, have the maculae so connected as
to form two curved vittae, but there is little doubt of these being conspecific.

PARACARDIOPHORUS SUBFASCIATUS, n. Sp. PI. ix, fig. 13.

Whole surface, above and beneath, more or less red, sparsely pubescent,
pronotum darker than elytra, the latter with wide postmedial fascia dark brown;
legs and antennae yellow.

Head punctate, pubescent, antennae very slender, lineate, extending to base of
prothorax, 2-3 subequal and short, 4-10 subequal, 11 needle-like. Prothorax
tumid, length and breadth subequal, sides nearly straight, slightly widened to
anterior third, thence arcuately converging to front, feebly narrowed behind,
without sinuation; lateral border very short, only apparent to _ posterior
fourth; disk closely and finely punctate, with short, bristly hair at sides and apex.
Scutellum cordate with medial depression. EHlytra of same width as prothorax,
sides subparallel; striate-punctate, with coarse, close punctures set in well-defined
striae, intervals convex, subrugose on apical half. Underside and legs strongly
pubescent. Dim. 53 x 13 mm.

Hab.—N.W. Victoria: Sea Lake (J. C. Goudie), Ouyen (J. H. Dixon.).

One each taken by my old brother coleopterists, include the sexes, the smaller,
from Ouyen, being a ¢. Holotype in the Australian Museum.

PARACARDIOPHORUS VARIANS, nh. sp. PI. viii, fig. 13.

6. Oblong; densely pubescent, whole surface more or less dull red, the elytra
with apical half variably infuscate; appendages stramineous.

Head punctate and pubescent, antennae not quite reaching base of prothorax,
segments 2 and 3 shorter than 4, 4-10 subtriangular. Prothorax convex, narrower
than usual, length and breadth subequal, widest near middle, lightly contracted in
front, more strongly and subsinuately behind, hind angles briefly triangular, with
blunt apex, disk closely punctate, asperate, and pubescent. Lateral carina extending
less than half-way to front. Hlytra elongate-ovate, sides nearly straight; striate-
punctate, the striae narrow, the serial punctures irregular and ill defined, intervals
nearly flat, feebly raised at extremities, densely pubescent, as also the underside.
Dim. 4-5 x 13 mm.

Hab.—Minnie Downs, N.E. Corner of South Australia (L. Reese), also Charters
Towers and Rockhampton, Queensland (A. M. Lea).

Var., or 9, differing only in having the pronotum black, sometimes with front
corners red, and the elytra with apical half more or less black and the humeral
region brick-red. (The Queensland examples are amongst these.)

Fifty-three examples are amongst the material sent from the South Australian
Museum, of which 44 are from Minnie Downs, that I consider conspecific, though
showing great colour variation. Twenty-nine have the red, 24 the black pronotum,
the underside being red in both series. The majority, at least, of the former are d,
of the latter 9, a colour sexual difference noted in other species of the genus. It
is not P. mjébergi Elst—a paler and more nitid species. Type series in the South
Australian Museum.

320 : AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

PARACARDIOPHORUS VITTIPENNIS, DN. sp. Pl. ix, fig. 11.

Head, prothorax and underside nitid black, the prothorax with all its angles
widely red, elytra with alternate intervals black and testaceous, antennae and legs
red.

Head pubescent, not, apparently, punctate, antennae scarcely extending to
base of prothorax, segments 2 and 3 smaller than rest, 4-10 shortly triangular,
11 oval. Prothorar convex, wider than long, widest near middle, sides with long
arcuation to front and shorter, sinuate, convergence behind, lateral border terminated
abruptly rather behind middle; disk uniformly very densely and finely punctate,
a fine, short, basal sulcus. Scutellum cordate. Elytra as wide as prothorax,
subovate, longitudinally arched; striate-punctate, striae well impressed, strial
punctures small, intervals convex, lightly cross-wrinkled on apical half. Dim.
5ul@vix)) x 1mm:

Hab.—Victoria: Lakes Entrance (F. E. Wilson).

A distinet species, differing from alternatus by colour and very different
sculpture of the pronotum, in which it is unlike any other seen by me, the tiny
punctures being densely packed, yet separate. There is a round patch at the front
angles, the red at the hind angles extending to the sulcus. Holotype in Coll.
Wilson.

Var.—Another example sent by Mr. Wilson has the hind angles of prothorax
black, apex of pronotum red and the elytral vittae less regular, but it is clearly
conspecific. National Park, Victoria (R. Blackwood).

CARDIOTARSUS MJOBERGI, N. Sp.

Oblong-oval; castaneous above and beneath, with pale recumbent pubescence;
antennae and legs pale red.

Head: clypeus oval, its margin raised; forehead punctate and pubescent;
antennae extending to base of prothorax, segments stout, elongate subtriangular,
ist tumid, 2nd and 3rd equal and together as long as the 4th, 4-10 subequal.
Prothorax longer than wide, sides slightly widened near middle, lightly narrowed
each way, sides nearly straight behind to the short, backwardly-directed hind
angles; disk finely, not closely, punctate, without sign of middle line; lateral
carina as in Paracardiophorus, ending abruptly two-thirds of the distance from
base. Scutellum subcordate, depressed in middle. Hlytra as wide as prothorax
and more than twice as long, narrowing gradually to apex; at base angulate on
each side of the scutellum: striate-punctate, the rather indistinct punctures set
in deep striae, intervals convex and punctate-setose; sides and apical half strongly
pubescent. Underside scarcely punctate, prosternum with a _ well-developed
mentoniére, the sutures narrow, but more sulcate than in most Paracardiophori.
Dim. 7 x 2 mm.

Hab.—Tambourine Mountain, Queensland (Mjoberg).

A single example in the Elston collection, Australian Museum, is described as
the first recorded Australian species of this genus. Its facies is that of an elongate
Paracardiophorus with a longer, less convex prothorax and the characteristic
cordate 4th tarsi. I am indebted to M. Fleutiaux for indicating its generic status.
Holotype in the Australian Museum.

LIMONIUS.
The species of this genus have been generally confused with the Cardiophori
(from which they are readily separated by the acute, outwardly directed hind
angles of prothorax) in Australian collections. I have nowhere seen it identified;

BY H. J. CARTER. 321

yet L. collaris Cand., the only described Australian species, is one of the commonest
of our Elateridae. Seventy-two examples are before from Sydney district (10),
Blue Mts. (12), Mittagong (7), Dorrigo (5), Barrington Tops (3), Queensland,
chiefly Cairns district (28), Victoria (5). These vary in size from 34 to 6 mm.
long, and considerably in colour as follows: Pronotum with varying amount of red,
from the typical ‘‘margine antico angulisque posticis rufis’’ to cases where the
whole is red except for a discal spot. The prosternum may be either “aeneo-niger”
or red. The head, usually black, is, in a few cases, red, the antennae, usually black
with basal segments red, are sometimes wholly red. The word ‘serrate’ scarcely
applies to the segments, which are subtriangular, gradually increasing in width
outward. The pubescence also varies in density. The affinity of the genus is
apparently with Poemnites rather than with Paracardiophorus, some examples
closely resembling a small Poemnites litura Cand. The following appear to be
distinct species or, if extreme varieties of L. collaris Cand., deserve a name.

LIMONIUS PUBESCENS, Nl. sp. or var.

Head, pronotum, prosternum and sometimes abdomen yellow or red;
appendages yellow, apical half of antennae sometimes fuscous; upper surface with
dense yellow pubescence, elytra so densely clothed that the darker ground-colour
is greatly modified by it. Dim. 4-5 mm. long.

Hab.—N. S. Wales: Tweed and Clarence Rivers; Queensland: Tambourine
Mountain (A. Musgrave and C. Geissmann).

Hight examples are before me, the pronotum sometimes a little clouded.
Holotype in the Australian Museum.

LIMONIUS NIGER, N. Sp. or var.

Whole surface, above and below, nitid bronze-black; basal segments of
antennae, tarsi and underside of legs (partly) red; sparsely pubescent, with fine
whitish hair.

Head more pubescent than the rest; pronotum distinctly but finely punctate.
Elytral intervals flat, except near base, and more coarsely punctate than pronotum.
Dim. 4—5 mm. long.

Hab.—N. S. Wales: Barrington Tops (Sydney University Exped.), Ebor (F. E.
Wilson).

Hight examples, similar in form to the others, but differing in the almost
total absence of colour and slight pubescence. Holotype in the Australian Museum.

a

LIMONIUS ANGULATUS, N. Sp. or var.

Whole surface, above and below, except hind angles of prothorax, black, the
angles yellow; legs red; antennae red or with apical half fuscous.

Very similar to the preceding, but upper surface strongly punctate. Dim.
4-§ mm. long.

Hab.—Victoria: Woori Yallock; N. S. Wales: Barrington Tops; Queensland:
Tambourine Mountain and Cairns district (28 examples). In all, 49 examples,
differing from niger in its yellow hind angles to prothorax. Holotype in the
Australian Museum.

The antennae in all examples of Limonius above, extend beyond the base
of prothorax, their segments subconic or subtriangular, not serrulate. Segment 1
tumid, 2 and 3 short, 4-10 successively longer and wider at apex, 11 oval.

oo
bo
bo

AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

LIMONIUS PALLIDUS, Nl. Sp.

Head and prothorax (except hind angles) dark red; hind angles and basal
margins of prothorax, antennae and legs pale red, upper surface with pale
pubescence; underside black, except prosternal process, this red.

Head pubescent and closely punctate, antennae extending to base of prothorax,
segment 1 tumid, 2 shorter than 3, 3-10 subequal, lineate-triangular, 11 ovate-
lanceolate. Prothorazx slightly longer than wide, sides lightly widened at middle
and sinuate before the divaricate hind angles, these with an inconspicuous carina
near and parallel to margins; disk strongly punctate with a well-marked medial
channel. Scutellum elongate-ovate. Hlytra as wide as prothorax and nearly thrice
as long; striate-punctate, intervals flat except near base and transversely rugose;
underside very nitid with sparse pubescence. Dim. 64 x 14 mm.

Hab.—Victoria: Apollo Bay (in National Museum).

Var.—Upper surface reddish-brown, hind angles of prothorax and adjacent
region red.

Five examples before me are clearly distinct from the common UL. collaris
Cand. not only in colour but in larger size, channelled pronotum and coarser
sculpture. Three have the elytra more or less pale, in two the darker colour
prevails. Holotype in National Museum, Melbourne.

LIMONIUS PYGMAEUS, Nl. Sp.

Narrowly oblong; head and prothorax dark red, elytra yellow, with the sides.
suture and apex reddish-brown; underside red, appendages yellow.

Head pubescent, antennae long, extending well beyond base of prothorax,
segments subtriangular, successively diminishing in width from 6th to the 10th,
3rd small. Prothorax lightly convex, widest at middle, sinuate behind, hind angles
well developed, acute, directed a little outwards; disk minutely punctate. EHlytra
slightly wider than prothorax at base; striate-punctate, with rather large seriate
punctures, in shallow striae; intervals flat, except near base. Dim. 3 mm. long.

Hab.—South Australia (in Macleay Museum).

Two examples seem to belong to this genus. It is smaller and narrower than
L. collaris Cand. with longer and finer antennae. Type series in the Macleay
Museum.

DICTENIOPHORUS BIFOVEATUS, N. Sp.

Elongate, oblong; head, prothorax and underside subnitid red, elytra
stramineous; antennae and legs black; subglabrous, elytra only with short, light
pubescence at sides.

Head: mandibles evident, antennae strongly dentate-serrate, extending consider-
ably beyond base of prothorax. Prothorax longer than wide, sides gently narrowed
for the greater part, more abruptly at extreme front, hind angles strongly divari-
cate, acute and carinate; disk with dense, shallow punctures, a fine medial sulcus,
obsolescent at apical fourth, and two foveae at apical third. Scwtellum elongate-
ovate. Hlytra wider than prothorax at base, sides almost parallel, separately and
narrowly rounded at apices; striate-punctate, the seriate punctures round and
regular, striae well marked, intervals nearly flat, finely punctate and rugulose;
underside nearly impunctate, prosternum very minutely so. Legs rather long,
tarsi slender. Dim. 18 x 44 mm.

Hab.—N. S. Wales: Ellenborough, Hastings River district (R. Paxton).

Two examples sent me by their captor, both 4, differ from D. ramifer Cand.
not only in colour, but in narrower form and much finer sculpture of the pronotum,

BY H. J. CARTER. 323

and dentate, not pectinate, antennae. Holotype presented to the Australian
Museum.

DICTENIOPHORUS ELEGANS, Dl. Sp.

Elongate, navicular; subnitid pale red; pronotum with medial vitta and hind
angles, elytra with suture and lateral margins black. In one example (of 8) the
elytra concolorous red. Antennae somewhat infuscate. Body with short, sparse,
pubescence. Underside and legs red.

Head subrectangular, with clypeus arcuate, antennae extending to half the
length of body, pectinate in ¢, the rami long and slender, emanating from near
middle of segments 4-10; strongly serrate in 9, segment 2 very small. Prothorar
longer than wide, sides very gradually narrowing to apex, hind angles long, acute,
divaricate and carinate; disk densely punctate, sulcate only near base. Scutellum
elongate, dark red. Hlytra as wide as prothorax across hind angles and 23 times
as long, gently narrowing to apex; striate-punctate, strial punctures small and
regular; intervals nearly flat, closely and finely punctate, with short, thick
pubescence at sides. Legs long; hind tarsi, 1 longest, 2, 3, 4 successively shorter,
5 nearly as long as 1. Dim. gf 11 x 24 mm., 9 14 x 3 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: National Park, Macpherson Range (H. J. Carter),
Tambourine Mountain (A. Musgrave and C. Geissmann); N. S. Wales: Macleay
River (H. J. Carter).

I took two of each sex in January, 1928, and there are 4 9 in the Australian
Museum. In the male the prothorax is slightly shorter than in the female examples.
Holotype and allotype in the Australian Museum.

In general facies it must be near Stichotomus fusiformis Schw., but two
characters are inconsistent with their identity: (a) The antennal rami not
springing from the base of segments; (b) the hind angles of prothorax clearly
carinate.

DICTENIOPHORUS HIRTICORNIS, N. Sp.

Hlongate-ovate; subnitid pale red above and beneath; head red or black,
antennae black, legs fuscous, upper surface with recumbent red clothing.

6. Head: clypeal region red, basal area infuscate, antennae extending nearly
to the base of prothorax, segments 4-10 strongly dentate-serrate, the margin fringed
with upright red hairs, the prominent teeth each with a tuft of longer hair.
Prothoraz: length and breadth equal, sides nearly straight for the greater part,
arcuately narrowed near front, non-sinuate behind, hind angles acute, carinate and
directed backwards (the exterior margin, at least, in line with rest of lateral
border); disk minutely and densely punctate, a short medial, sulcus on basal half
only. WScutellum elongate-oval. EHlytra of same width as prothorax at base, and
2-6 times longer; striate, striae well marked, seriate punctures obsolete or vague,
intervals narrow, equal and lightly convex, rather thickly pubescent at sides and
apex. Dim. 19 x 54 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Johnstone River (H. W. Brown).

Two examples, both male, in the collection of Mr. Brown, show a robust species
of bright colour, with unusual antennal characters. There is a tendency to
infuscation at the scutellum and the junction of prothorax with the elytra. Holo-
type generously presented to the Australian Museum.

DICTENIOPHORUS RUFOLINEATUS, Nl. SD.
9. Elongate-oblong; head, prothorax, above and below, brownish-black, elytra
black, with a wide red vitta on each, in general covering intervals 3-4, extending

324 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

from base almost to apex, and widening on basal area; abdomen and legs red,
tarsi yellow, antennae black, the basal segments red; a dark pubescence at sides
and pale recumbent pile beneath.

Head with strong, close, punctures, mandibles prominent, front lightly convex,
antennae reaching base of prothorax, strongly serrate from 4-10, 2 very short.
Prothorax transversely convex, length and width subequal, arcuately narrowed
from base to apex, hind angles robust, feebly divergent, strongly carinate; disk
with faint indications of medial sulcus on basal half, elsewhere densely, uniformly
punctate. Scutellum elongate-ovate. Elytra lightly obovate, widest behind middle,
here wider than prothorax; striate-punctate, the striae fine but clearly cut, the
seriate punctures obscure, intervals flat and strongly punctate. Prosternum densely,
rather strongly punctate, rest of underside minutely so. Dim. 15 «x 44 mm.

Hab.—N. Queensland: Cairns (H. Hacker).

A single female example in the Department of Agriculture, Sydney, bears a
label in the handwriting of the late W. W. Froggatt. Its elytral markings should
render it easy to identify. Holotype presented to the Australian Museum.

6 latet.

DICTENIOPHORUS QUADRIFOVEATUS, Nl. Sp.

Oblong; nitid reddish-brown above, antennae, legs and underside red; finely
pubescent.

¢. Head subquadrate, mandibles prominent; antennae pectinate, with long,
linear rami, emanating from near apex of segments 4-10. Prothorar: length and
breadth equal; sides almost straightly narrowed to front, hind angles acute,
moderately divaricate and carinate; disk finely and densely punctate; a thin medial
sulcus not extending to apex and four foveae, two round and deep in front of
middle, two smaller at basal third, nearer the sides than front two. Scutellum
elongate, oval. Hlytra as wide as prothorax across apices of hind angles and more
than thrice as long; striate, seriate punctures subobsolete, intervals widely convex
and transversely rugulose; underside glabrous, impunctate. Dim. 20-22 x 54-6 mm.

Hab.—N. S. Wales: Tweed River.

© wanting.

Four male examples in the collection of Mr. H. W. Brown, possibly near
D. badiipennis Cand., described from a single ¢, but Candéze distinguishes his
species by the absence of pronotal sulcus and briefly pectinate antennae, neither of
which characters applies to the above, in which the rami are unusually long.
Holotype presented to the Australian Museum.

CREPIDOMENUS CERVUS, Nl. SDP.

¢.. Narrowly subcylindric-navicular; nitid light fawn colour above and
beneath, the apical region, above and beneath, a little clouded and’ darker;
appendages red; a short, sparse pubescence on head and elytra.

Head clearly punctate, two light grooves representing the usual depression,
antennae not reaching base of prothorax, 1 tumid, 2 shorter than 3, 3-10 subequal,
lineate-triangular. Prothorar longer than wide, widest at base, sides very slightly
converging to apex, feebly sinuate before the strongly developed hind angles,
these very lightly divaricate and strongly carinate; disk with fine, sparse
punctures, medial channel fine but distinct on basal two-thirds. Hlytra of same
width as prothorax and almost exactly twice as long, finely tapering to apex;
striate-punctate, suture subcarinate, this emphasized by a subsutural sulcus on
each side, extending from just behind scutellum to apical third; the striae and

BY H. J. CARTER. 325

strial punctures very fine, intervals almost flat, with small, distinct punctures,
more evident on apical half, obsolescent towards base. Underside subglabrous,
minutely punctate.

@ much larger and wider, antennae shorter, their segments more widely
triangular; legs and tarsi wider; prothorax with a deeper and wider medial
sulcus; elytral striae and intervals wider, the latter clearly convex on basal region.
Dim. gf 13-14 x 3 mm.; 9 19 x 5 mm.

Hab.—Queensland National Park, MacPherson Range (H. J. Carter).

Four 3g, one 2 before me. The narrow form, almost concolorous surface,
reddish-fawn colour, and fine sculpture distinguish it. Holotype and allotype in
the Australian Museum.

An example of 0. queenslandicus Blkb., compared with type by Dr. Blair,
differs from the above by smaller size, duller and more roughly punctate surface.

CREPIDOMENUS DIVARICATUS, Nl. Sp.

Above and beneath nitid, reddish-brown, with short, pale pubescence, legs
and antennae reddish, tarsi pale red.

Head: anterior margin semicircular, front rather flat, with shallow triangular
impression; antennae extending slightly beyond base of prothorax, slender, segment
2 short, 3-10 subequal in length, successively narrowed. Prothorax very slightly
longer than wide, excluding hind angles, widest behind middle, thence lightly
narrowed to front, and sinuate behind, post angles long, divaricate, acute, with a
narrow carina near and parallel to the exterior border; disk very nitid, with
sparse, fine punctures and a deep, clearly-cut medial sulcus. Scutellum elongate-
oval. Hlytra rather wider than prothorax and 2% times as long, tapering rather
narrowly to apex; striate-punctate, the striae well defined, the strial punctures
subobsolete near suture, large and oblong near sides, intervals convex at base and
sides, elsewhere nearly flat and minutely punctate; underside glabrous. Dim.
15 x 4 mm.

Hab.—Queensland National Park, MacPherson Range (H. J. Carter).

I took three examples in January, 1928. Somewhat of the form of
C.. metallescens Cand., but with longer, more divaricate hind angles. The con-
colorous mahogany-brown surface is distinctive. Holotype presented to the
Australian Museum.

CREPIDOMENUS MONTANUS, N. Sp.

Above and beneath blue or greenish-black, with short white pubescence,
mandibles, also tip of prosternal process, red, antennae black, legs above more or
less concolorous with body, their underside and tarsi reddish.

Head punctate and pubescent; antennae, segment 1 very tumid, 2 shorter than
3, 4-10 successively narrowed. Prothorax robust, convex, slightly wider than
long, widest behind middle, thence lightly arcuately narrowed to front, a wide,
feeble sinuation before the divaricate, strongly carinate hind angles; disk
moderately, not closely, punctate, medial sulcus deeply impressed. Elytra slightly
wider than and 24 times longer than prothorax; striate-punctate, the striae deep,
the intervals subcostate, strial punctures irregular and somewhat confused, with
lines of small punctures on sides of intervals. Prosternum and metasternum
densely, finely punctate, abdomen sparsely so. Dim. 11-16 x 4-5 mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Mt. Kosciusko (T. G. Sloane, A. Musgrave and H. A.
Fletcher), Kiandra (D. G. Stead); Victoria: Bogong Plains (F. E. Wilson).

ew
bo
for)

AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

Twelve examples before me vary in size, and, to some extent, in density of
puncturation, the larger examples being female. The dark blue-green colour is
more pronounced in some, and more so on the upper than on the under surface.
Holotype in the Australian Museum.

CREPIDOMENUS NAVICULARIS, Nl. Sp.

Above and beneath nitid, dark castaneous, head, antennae and legs black or
nearly so, with sparse, whitish pubescence. Elytra with basal margins and apices
darkened.

Head with coarse, sparse punctures, front with wide, subtriangular impression,
antennae not extending to base of prothorax, segments lineate, 2 shorter than 3,
3-10 successively finer and shorter. Prothorax clearly longer than wide, widest
near base, thence lightly narrowed to front, hind angles scarcely, or feebly
divergent, rather thick with long carina not very close to lateral margin; disk
coarsely and rather irregularly punctate, with some smooth spaces, the punctures
more closely clustered near sides; medial sulcus wide and deep. Hlytra of same
width as prothorax and 23 times as long, tapering finely to apex; striate-punctate,
the suture a little raised and bordered by subsutural sulci; striae indistinct on
apical third, seriate punctures round and distinct; intervals narrow, convex at
base and strongly punctate. Flanks of prosternum minutely punctate, the rest
of underside impunctate. Dim. 16 x 4 mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Richmond River (W. W. Froggatt).

Two examples before me combine dark-red colour, navicular form with coarsely
punctate surface. Holotype in the Australian Museum.

(?) Crepidomenus luteipes Boh. = C. cyanescens Cand.—A probable synonymy
from close similarity of description.

Acromopus pallidus Blkb. (Histon Coll.) = A. rufipennis Macl., if Elston’s
determination be correct.

TENEBRIONIDAE.

Gonocephalum hispidocostatum Fairm. = G. costipenne Cart—This synonymy
has not been published, though my suspicions of it were endorsed some time ago
by Dr. K. G. Blair. It is one of the many species found on both sides of Torres
Strait.

The following is a list of Australian Tenebrionidae known to occur beyond
Australia, excluding cosmopolitan species.

Amarygmus jodicollis Guér. Diphyrrhyncus nicobaricus Redt.
A. morio F. (= D. apicalis Champ.)
Bradymerus crenatus Pasce. (= B. Doliema spinicollis Fairm.

granaticollis Fairm.)
B. nigerrimus Geb.
B. raucipennis Blkb.
Byrsax pinnaticollis Cart.
Ceropria immaculata Geb.
C. maculata Geb.
C. peregrina Pasce.
Chalcopterus bellus Blkb.
C. cyanopterus Hope.
C. modestus Blkb.

Chariotheca planicollis Fairm.

Dioclina nitida Cart.

Encyalesthus atroviridis Macl.
Espites basalis Pase.
Gonocephalum arenarium F.

G. hispidocostatum Fairm.

G. planatum Walk.

Hypophloeus analis Geb.
Leichenum seriehispidum Mars.
Leiochrodes suturalis Westw.
Lyprops atronitens Fairm.
Mesomorphus viliger Blanch.
Microcrypticus seriptipennis Fairm.
Notostrongylium rugosicolle Cart.

BY H. J. CARTER. 327

Palorus austrinus Champ. P. striatum Montr.

P. pygmaeus Cart. Scotoderus aphodioides Pasc.

Platolenes hydrophiloides Fairm. Setenis sulcigera Boisd.

Platydema detersum Walk. (= P. Toxicum punctipenne Pase.
valga Pasc., etc.) Zophophilus curticornis Fairm.

MYCHESTES LATICOLLIS, n. Sp. Text-fig. 1.

Widely ovate; opaque fawn colour.

Head vertical, unseen from above, epistoma rounded, antennal orbits ear-like
and raised; antennae stout, biclavate, apical segment subspherical, the preceding
(9th) cup-shaped. Prothorax very wide (24 x 4 mm.) and convex, apical third
subvertical, largely overhanging head; foliate margins thick and forming a widely

Text-fig. 1.—Mychestes laticollis. n. sp.

rounded wing, at basal third excised and obliquely narrowed to base, extreme edge
irregularly crenulate; discal area with medial concavity bounded by longitudinal
ridges, each formed by two large, oblong tubercles, not quite connected and small
tubercles behind these, two large and some smaller tubercles forming the lateral
edge of disk. Hlytra of same width as prothorax at their immediate junction,
widely ovate behind this and very convex, without evident lateral foliation, as seen
from above; surface with sparse tubercles of unequal size, subseriately placed,
more or less, in four rows, and becoming smaller towards apex, apical margins finely
crenulate; the larger tubercles, both on prothorax and elytra, dotted with small
black pustules. Underside squamose, abdomen more or less glabrous. Dim.
7x 4 mm.

Hab.—N. Queensland: Mulgrave River (H. Hacker).

A single example sent by Mr. Clark is quite distinct from the species tabulated
by me (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1937, p. 129) though nearest in sculpture to
M. ordinatus Cart., from which it is separated by (a) smaller size and unusual
relative width, (b) abbreviated form, its prothorax and elytra forming two wide
ovals, (c) the larger tubercles dotted with small pustules (a feature only seen in
M. pascoei Macl. of other Australian species). Holotype in the National Museum,
Melbourne.

328 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

PTEROHELAEUS LATIFOLIUS, N. Sp.

Oblong; nitid dark brown with a reddish tinge, foliate margins red, underside
and appendages, including tarsi, dark.

Head almost impunctate; epistoma truncate and flat in front, oblique and
raised at sides, making a wide angle with the well-raised, rounded antennal
orbits; eyes large, separated by a space less than the diameter of one; antennae:
segment 3 not as long as 4-5 together, 8-11 transverse, oval. Prothorar (3 x 10
mm., length in middle): subhorizontal foliation occupying half total width; widest
at base, thence arcuately narrowed to apex, anterior angles well advanced and
rounded, posterior acute and lightly falcate; extreme border thinly reflexed; disk
rather flat, very minutely and sparsely punctate, medial line faintly indicated by
shallow depression and feeble basal fovea. Scutellum semicircular. Elytra (14 x 11
mm.): foliation wide and lightly concave throughout, narrowed only at extreme
apex; humeral angle sharply rectangular, sides nearly straight; striate-punctate,
intervals narrow and subplanate, with faint signs of smooth strigae towards apex.
Underside of head with deep transverse strigae on neck, prosternum more finely
striolate, as also abdomen, otherwise surface nitid and glabrous. Dim. 20 x 13 mm.

Hab.—Victoria: Bendoc, East Gippsland (F. E. Wilson).

A fine species of Macleay’s Sect. ii, Subsect. i, but differing from the majority
of these by its almost flat elytral intervals. Its colour is that of rwbescens Cart.,
sculpture nearest planior Cart. While diffident in adding to the long list of this
genus, I consider a species so distinct deserves a name. Holotype in Coll. Wilson.

EUTHERAMA COERULEUM, DN. SD.

Obovate, rather strongly convex; above nitid dark blue, beneath and greater
part of femora reddish, base of femora, tibiae, tarsi and antennae blue.

Head: epistoma slightly rounded and finely punctate, forehead more coarsely
so; antennal orbits raised and rounded, antennae very long, segment 1 stout, 2 half
as long as 1, oval, 3-6 sublineate, 3 longer than 4, 8-10 subconic and subequal,
much wider than preceding, 11 ovoid, of same size as 10. Prothorar: apex
subcordiform, widest at middle, anterior angles rounded off, sides rounded and
lightly bordered, posterior angles obtuse, base truncate; disk irregularly and
rather coarsely punctate, the punctures more sparse in middle, without sign of
medial line, a biarcuate, transverse sulcus near base connecting basal foveae.
Scutellum triangular, punctate. Hlytra closely applied to prothorax and of same
width at junction, widest and greatest convexity behind middle; sulcate punctate,
each elytron with 9 sulci, besides a short scutellary one, containing close-set
punctures, the convex intervals themselves finely punctate; sternal regions rugose-
punctate, abdomen finely punctate. Dim. 8 x 3 mm.

Hab.—n. Qland: Wolfram (S. H. Parlett).

A single example in the collection of Mr. F. E. Wilson is clearly a close ally
to H. cyaneum Cart., the only other species of the genus from which it differs in
colour (whole upper surface blue), the wider and non-sulcate prothorax,* and
the coarser punctures of the prothorax and elytra. Holotype in Coll. Wilson.

*In FE. cyaneum Cart. the prothorax has a distinct medial suleus which was not
mentioned in its description.

N.B.—The dimensions are wrongly given in the original description of HE. cyanewm.
The correct dimensions of the type are 7 x 2% mm. Other examples in the South
Australian Museum measure 64 x 24, 64 x 21, and 7 x 24 mm. respectively.

BY H. J. CARTER. ' 329

DYSTALICA GRACILIS, nN. Sp.

Elongate-oblong; subopaque black, antennae and tarsi reddish, clothed above
with short bristly hair.

Head subtriangular, granulose punctate and pubescent, maxillary palpi long,
their basal segments red, apical securiform, antennae extending beyond base of
prothorax, segments 1 and 2 short, 3 as long as 4-5 together, 4-8 submoniliform
(rather longer than wide), 9-10 rounder, wider than preceding, 11 oval, large.
Prothorax wider than long, apex arcuate, anterior angles about 60°, sides lightly
widened near middle, narrowed each way, without sinuation; base with medial
area extended to form a narrow rectangular lobe, hind angles obtuse, lateral
margins fringed with bristly hair; disk almost uniformly covered with alveolate,
umbilicate punctures. Scutellum transversely oval. Hlytra wider than prothorax
at base and about 24 times as long; sides parallel; striate-punctate, with large
close punctures set in deep striae, intervals convex, cancellate, with fine punctures
and pustules along their whole length. Prosternum transversely rugose, meta-
sternum and abdomen densely and coarsely punctate, the latter alveolate, tarsi
pilose. Dim. 8 x 24 mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Warialda.

A single example sent by Mr. J. G. Brooks is an ally of D. angusta Cart., but
a still narrower insect, with a general facies of an elongate Cestrinus and, like
its congeners, distinguished by its asperate surface. The elytral intervals, under
a strong lens, have a somewhat zig-zag outline, due to the impinging of the large
punctures on their sides. Holotype in the Australian Museum.

CURCULIONIDAE.
TALAURINUS SUTTONI, Nn. Sp.

Elongate-ovate; black or brownish, depressed areas (in one example) densely
clothed with greyish scales, forming three vittae on the prothorax and more
irregular depressions on elytra. Beneath black with some small irregular patches
of grey scales on the medial regions.

Head: rostrum deeply excavate, external ridges very slightly divergent,
sparsely punctate, continuous almost to extreme base of head, in front fasciculate,
the fascicles meeting in front; internal ridges little prominent, meeting behind;
scrobes open behind. Prothorax (6 x 7 mm.): sides lightly rounded, widest in
front of middle, base not sinuate, with four irregular, compound rows of large,
rounded tubercles, the lateral rows crenulating sides, the internal rows more
irregularly clustered and less flattened than in 7. fergusoni Cart. Elytra (18 x 10
mm.) ovate, apex shortly and bluntly mucronate; base arcuate, humeral angles
prominently tuberculiform; sculpture consisting of three rows of large, oval or
round tubercles and more closely set rows of small tubercles; of the large tubercles,
rows 1 and 2 contain from 4 to 6, the 1st in row 1, at some distance from base,
tne last on apical declivity; in row 2, the 1st is at base, the last near apex; the
3rd row (sublateral) contains 10 or more; beyond the 3rd the tubercles scarcely
seriate. Of the small tubercles, two rows form the sutural edges, towards scutellum
becoming joined to form a furcate carina, continued along base to ist row of
large tubercles, a 2nd geminate series between the 2nd and 3rd rows of large
tubercles; others irregularly scattered over depressed areas. Abdominal segments
depressed in middle, the apical more notably so and notched at apex. Dim.
25-28 x 9-10 mm.

Hab.—South Queensland: Wyberba (E. Sutton).
AA

LIBRARY | =

DDm /~/

330 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

Two examples, both (?) 9, from this prolific region have been sent by their
captor. It is nearest to 7. subvittatus Ferg. and T. fergusoni Cart., but is readily
distinguished from the former by larger size, longer rostrum, surface tubercles
larger and differently placed. From the latter it is further separated by its less
wide prothorax, less flattened tubercles thereon, and the presence of a system of
smaller tubercles on elytra. Holotype in the Australian Museum.

A third example received since the above description was written is, I think, ¢.

MYTHITES VARIABILIS, Nl. Sp.

Rather dull black, ovate, elytra flattened or depressed in middle. ¢ with
patches of black tomentum in middle of abdomen, with grey scales elsewhere.

Head deeply excavate in middle, rostrum not separated from head by trans-
verse sulcus, with two subparallel ridges on each side, each feebly converging
behind, forehead convex, sometimes widely subcarinate, sparsely punctate, scrobes
open behind. Prothorar: length and breadth equal (4 mm.), widest in front of
middle, sides lightly rounded and crenulated by large tubercles, apex and base
arcuate, disk vermiculate-tuberculate, medial sulcus distinct, bordered by
vermiculate tubercles; exterior to these with irregular, discrete tubercles, with
some more or less elongate depressions clothed with grey scales. Elytra obovate
(9 x 11 mm.), considerably wider than prothorax, shoulders with prominent
tubercles embracing the rounded hind angles of prothorax, widest behind middle;
with rows of very large foveae, the two interior rows compound, each of two rows
confusedly combined between wide undulate costae, 3rd row (lateral) of single
foveae, the sutural area, including the first double row, depressed between undulate
costae. 9 larger, abdomen sublaevigate, more or less convex. Dim. ¢ 14-17 x 6-74
mm.; 2 18-20 x 73-9 mm.

Hab.—South Queensland: Wyberba, Fletcher (E. Sutton), Stanthorpe (Von
Wieldt).

Eleven examples before me differ greatly in size and sculpture, but I cannot
separate them by any definite character. The smooth, wide carina on head in some
examples, shows only slightly in others, or is wanting. In 3 examples there is a
small mucro at apex.

The variations of sculpture consist of irregularity in size and number of
foveae, and of the undulate costae, the first generally continuous throughout, the
2nd and 3rd varyingly discontinuous. The suture is bounded by fine carinae which
in some of the larger examples are more or less granulate. Holotype and allotype
presented to the Australian Museum.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES VIII-IX.

Plate viii. Plate ix.
1.—Melanoxanthus flavosignatius, n. sp. 1.—Paracardiophorus quadristellatus, n. sp.
2.—M. jucundus, n. sp. 2.—P. carissimus, nN. sp.
3.—M. columbinus, n. sp. 3.—P. assimilis, n. sp.
4.—M. biarctus, n. sp. 4.—P. octosignatus, n. sp.
5.—M. semiruber, n. sp. 5.—P. stellatus, n. sp.
6.—M. insolitus, n. sp. 6.—P. amabilis, n. sp.
7.—M. lativittis, n. sp. 7.—P. dulcis, n. sp.
8.—Paracardiophorus litoralis, n. sp. 8.—P. subcruciatus, n. sp.
9.—Hypnoidus flavopictus, n. sp. 9.—P. occidentalis, n. sp.
10.—Paracardiophorus atronotatus, n. sp. 10.—P. alternatus, n. sp.
11.—Melanoxanthus rufoniger, n. sp. 11.—P. vittipennis, n. sp.
12.—Paracardiophorus rufopictus, n. sp. 12.—P. nigrosuffusus, n. sp.
13.—P. varians, n. sp. 13.—P. subfasciatus, n. sp.

14.—P. cooki, n. sp.

PLATE VIII.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939.

Australian Elateridae.

iat

TX.

PLATE

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939.

DARE
BT RE RANA RAS TS?

WA yg TAR AN EE
EATAC ANS

aan

iteridae.

le

1D)

an

Australi

331

THE GENUS ADRAMA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF THREE NEW SPECIES
(DIPTERA, TRYPETIDAE).

By JoHN R. MALLOCH.
(Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8.)

(Two Text-figures. )

[Read 28th June, 1939.]

This short paper includes a review of the species of the genus Adrama known
to the writer, with descriptions of two new species, only one of them being as yet
known to occur in New Guinea.

The genus belongs to the Adraminii, which contains very few species and is
distinguished from most of the members of the family by the lack of the presutural
thoracic bristle, the paucity of orbital bristles, which usually consist of two or
three incurved anterior and one reclinate posterior pair of weak bristles. There
are no well developed ocellar or postvertical bristles, the humeral is not present, and
there is no pteropleural bristle in any species. Not all the species of the Tribe
have the femora spinose, but all have the first vein and part of the third setulose
on the upper surface.

It is possible that the Australian species described below will yet be found in
New Guinea.

The types of two of the new species are being returned to Mr. Frank H.
Taylor, the paratypes to the British Museum. The type of the third species and
identified specimens of the two already-known species are at present in the writer’s
collection.

ApRAMA Walker.

Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 117.

In this genus the sides of the postnotum including the lower part of the
convexity have fine erect hairs; usually all the femora with some short stout black
ventral spines on the apical portion, rarely the fore femora unspined.

Below I present a key to the species available to me:

1. Scutellum with but two bristles, the basal pair absent; fifth (apical) abdominal tergite
of male with some short stout black bristles at each apical lateral angle;
mesonotum with an entire yellow central vitta; centre of postnotum black, the
dark colour not extending to the metapleural convexity, and no black mark on
pleura in front of the latter which is not conspicuously ivory-white; no black
STOO Wim PONE OIE COINS coccnosacnchosdooossnovodoosdoobuu soso OU COS biseta, n. sp.

Scutellum with four strong bristles, two close to base, the others rather close together
at apex; fifth abdominal tergite of male not strongly bristled at each lateral apical
angle; mesonotum with the yellow central vitta present at most postsuturally ;
postnotum either without black central vitta, or with the black colour extending
to the metapleural convexity, and the pleura black in front of the latter, which is
pale ivory-white; a black spot near anterior margin of frons .............. 2

2. Postnotum, pleura, and scutellum yellowish-red, without distinct black markings; wing
with the apex slightly infuscated, the anterior edge of the infuscated area, across
the outer cross-vein blackish-brown, the dark streak extending to third vein above
HOS CULES GHOREAVEIN sooogbvonoocdcbodpUdO dD OOOO OLD ODO UDO GOdOD papwaensis, nN. Sp.

332 THE GENUS ADRAMA,

Postnotum black up to, and the pleura broadly black in front of, the metapleural
convexity, the front half of the mesopleura and dorsum of the scutellum except
narrowly along the edges also black; wing rather uniformly dark brown from
OULESRCLOSS=VELNNTEO ELD) eos revaras cleo ren cus leKel aie iov wicor eusoticlievieutsliotar ie Malone ee Poste he les Ona eee ae 3

3. Fore tarsi entirely reddish-yellow; frons except the narrow orbits black in front,
fading into reddish-yellow above middle; supra-alar bristle lacking ..........
es CROCE DIL COONCR ROO CRORE O Gececicl in a ENOIG EMO oS eT MERC CHEG Ol EL CUES cL hom BEETS flavimana, n. sp.

Fore tarsi entirely black or blackish-brown; frons with a small round black mark or

spot on anterior margin; supra-alar bristle present and strong .............. 4
4. The glossy-black marks on the metapleura and mesopleura meeting below, epistomal
DlAcK SHOtsmhusedie. ti atrseceiek mote nterhere tee eieew Gace eMC ep OPO ent meee determinata Walker

The glossy-black marks on the metapleura and mesopleura not meeting on venter,
lower half of sternopleura and the area of thorax below base of abdomen and
above hind coxae reddish-yellow; epistomal black spots small, separated ......
PCECICIR ROH CIE CR HCHO PCR GOS G cig cid bi Minooka G nicich Cs CHRO CRORE RCP RDN CHAS selecta Walker

ADRAMA BISETA, N. SD.

This species agrees with the genotype in general colour, markings, and
structure. The principal distinctions are pointed out in the above key to the
species. The type specimen is from northern Queensland.

d6.—Head orange-yellow, the face paler and with a large black spot on centre
of the epistome, the frons without black anterior markings, with narrow black edge
round the ocelli. Antennae entirely orange-yellow; palpi brownish in type, but the
mouth parts are greasy so that colour may be abnormal. Frons fully twice as long
as its central width, slightly widened in front, with the usual two long inner
vertical bristles, outside of these a short outer vertical, one pair of upper reclinate,
and two pairs of weaker incurved anterior orbitals, the surface with some
microscopic yellow hairs and faint white-dusting. Face concave in centre in
profile, the epistome slightly projecting, parafacial at base of antenna not as
wide as third antennal segment, centrally invisible in profile. Antenna not
attaining epistome, third segment 3-5 times as long as wide, slightly narrowed to
apex where it is rounded; aristae short-haired on entire extent, the longest hairs
about half as long as width of third antennal segment. Eye about 1:5 times as high
as long, narrowed below; gena one-seventh as high as eye and about equal to
width of third antennal segment.

Thorax a little darker than head, brownish-orange or red, the mesonotum with
two broad black shiny vittae that are interrupted or almost so at the suture, the
anterior portion carried laterally to margin in front of wing base; scutellum with
a broad black triangle, only the lateral margins and apex red; pleura entirely red,
postnotum and postscutellum shiny black. Bristles as follows: notopleurals 2,
supra-alar 1, post-alars 2, a weak mesopleural, and a short hair-like pair of dorso-
centrals near the posterior margin. Scutellum flattened, triangular, with a pair
of rather closely placed strong apical bristles, both sclerites with quite close short
decumbent yellow hairs, those on black vittae of mesonotum dark.

Wing (Figure 1): Stigma yellow, the preapical and apical marks brown.
First vein setulose from extreme base to apex above, third from fork to beyond
inner cross-vein. Halteres and squamae brownish-yellow or red. Legs orange-
yellow, fore tibiae from near bases and entire fore tarsi, and hind tibiae to near
apices, dark brown. Fore femur with a short stout bristle near apical third of
posteroventral surface; mid femur thicker than the others, thinner on apical half
where there are two series of short stout spines, one on the anteroventral and the
other on the posteroventral surface, hind femur with three or four anteroventral
and two posteroventral spines, all the spines black; mid tibia with a strong apical
ventral spur. Abdomen red, more or less discoloured in type, with short decumbent

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 333

black hairs that are inserted in very minute punctures, the four or five bristles on
the apical lateral angles on fifth tergite black. Basal composite tergite about as
long as the next two combined, fifth about 1-5 times as long as fourth. Length,
11 mm.

Type, N. Queensland: Cairns (Illingworth). In the collection of the School
of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, University of Sydney.

Fig. 1.—Adrama biseta, n. sp. -Wing.
Fig. 2.—Adrama papuaensis, n. sp. Wing.

ADRAMA PAPUAENSIS, Nl. SD.

6, ¥.—Similar to the above species in general colour, differing in having the
frons darkened above and with a large anterior central dark brown mark, the face
with a pair of well-separated black epistomal spots, the mesonotum entirely black
with the exception of the ivory-yellow humeri presuturally while behind the suture
the black vittae do not attain the posterior margin and are separated on the
anterior two-thirds from suture to posterior margin by a bright lemon-yellow
central stripe; the scutellum is entirely red, as are also the postnotum and post-
scutellum. There are two bright lemon-yellow or ivory-white marks on the pleura,
one, subtriangular, on the posterior margin of the mesopleura, and the other
covering the supraspiracular convexity of the metapleura; these are indistinct in
the preceding species. The wing is also different in the dark markings as shown
in Figure 2. Frons a little wider than in biseta, gena distinctly narrower. I can
detect no outer vertical bristles in this species; all the other bristles present.
Thorax with the same bristles and hairs as in the preceding species, except in
having two pairs of scutellar bristles, the additional pair close to base. Legs as in
biseta, but there is no bristle below on the fore femur in any of the specimens
before me.

Wing (Figure 2) with the same markings as in the above species, but here
the apical costal mark is darkest along the anterior edge. Veins setulose as in
biseta. Abdomen as in biseta, but there are no well developed bristles as a rule
on the posterior lateral angles of the fifth tergite. Length, 10-13 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and 1 paratype, New Guinea: Wewak (F. H. Taylor);
3 paratypes, Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, Sep.—Oct., 1933 (L. EH. Cheesman). The
last-mentioned three paratypes in the collection of the British Museum. Types in
the collection of the School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, University of
Sydney.

ADRAMA FLAVIMANA, N. Sp.

¢.—This species has the frons brownish-black except on the upper fourth, the
two black epistomal spots large, almost or quite fused centrally, the mesonotum
black, marked much as in papuaensis, but the postsutural black vittae reach the
posterior margin, there are two large glossy-black pleural marks, one on the
anterior half of the mesopleura from upper edge behind the spiracle downward to
below lower margin of the mesopleura, and the other on the pteropleura except its

334 THE GENUS ADRAMA,

upper edge that extends backward below the ivory-yellow metapleural convexity and
posterior spiracle; the postnotum and postscutellum broadly black; scutellum dark
brown on disc, only the edges red.

Head as in the two preceding species, the genae as narrow as in papuaensis,
but the three pairs of orbital bristles are much weaker than in that species. The
antennae are both broken off in the type specimen. I can detect neither the meso-
pleural nor the supra-alar bristle in the type, but all the other bristles, with the
possible exception of the weak dorsocentrals, are present, and there are two pairs
of strong scutellars. Legs almost as in biseta, no ventral bristle on fore femur,
but the fore tarsi are reddish-yellow, not blackish-brown.

Wing as in the two preceding species, but the short brown streak at inner
cross-vein descends a little more evidently below that vein, and the apical brown
mark is almost uniform in depth of colour. Veins setulose as in biseta. Abdomen
red. Fifth tergite with a few setulose hairs on lateral apical angles. Length,
9 mm.

Type, Borneo: Sandakan (C. F. Baker). Sent to me a number of years ago by
the collector.

ADRAMA SELECTA Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. London, iii, 1859, 118.

I have before me one specimen received from Dr. Baker that appears to agree
in all particulars with Walker’s species. Dr. Smart has sent me a sketch of the
thoracic markings of Walker’s type and my specimen agrees well with this, though
I am rather doubtful of the propriety of accepting the identification without a
eareful comparison of material with the types.

Originally described from Aru Islands, but recorded from the Malayan region.
My specimen is from the Philippines.

ADRAMA DETERMINATA Walker.
Dacus determinata Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., i, 1857, 133.
I have this also from Dr. Baker, taken in the Philippines. Originally described
from Borneo.

335

A NEW FAMILY OF LEPIDOPTERA.
By A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.R.E.S.

[Read 28th June, 1939.]

In his revision of the Australian Gelechiadae (these PRocrEDINGS, 1904, p. 435)
Meyrick described the genus Thalamarchis at the end of that family, but had
apparently some doubt as to the correctness of its position there. He wrote:
“this genus appears to stand quite isolated, and I am unable to see that it bears
any near relationship to any form known to me. In its large size and conspicuous
colouring it resembles an Oecophorid of the Philobota and Hypercallia groups, and
since the palpi and neuration also agree, it might be thought to be really akin to
them, but the hindwings considerably exceed the forewings in breadth, and the
antennae of male are quite without ciliations; the combination of these two
prohibitive characters seems to me conclusive. The structure of vein 2 of the
forewings, which is not widely remote from 8, removes the species from the
Xyloryctid group. It accords well with the family characters of the Gelechiadae,
but is discordant in every group of that family, and I am compelled to regard it
as representing an early unspecialised branch; perhaps other allied forms may be
discovered in West Australia.”

The genus does not appear in his revisions in the Genera Insectorum of the
Oecophoridae (1922) and of the Gelechiadae (1925), and Thalamarchis appears
to be now an unassigned genus. I propose to make it the type of a new family,
and to associate with it three hitherto unnamed genera. This small family is
known only from Western Australia. It is probably related to some early forms of
Oecophoridae, and less closely with the Gelechiadae, as a side-branch, which has not
developed much, and may have become largely extinct.

Fam. THALAMARCHIDAE, nov.

Head smooth-scaled with moderate erect side-tufts. Tongue developed. Labial
palpi long, ascending, recurved, acute. Maxillary palpi minute. Antennae without
basal pecten; in male simple. Forewings with 7 and 8 stalked, 7 to termen. Hind-
wings much broader than forewings (13-2); 3 and 4 connate, 5 from below middle
of cell, 6 and 7 widely separated at origin, parallel or diverging, 12 more or less
approximated to cell for some distance.

Gen. THALAMARCHIS.

Meyr., P.L.S.N.S.W., 1904, p. 435.

Antennae about three-fourths. Palpi very long; second joint much exceeding
vertex, moderately thickened with smoothly appressed scales; terminal
joint four-fifths, slender. Posterior tibiae densely clothed with long hairs. Fore-
wings with 2 from shortly before angle, 3 and 4 approximated from angle. Hind-
wings with 12 closely approximated to cell to about middle, 5 from about middle.

336 A NEW FAMILY OF LEPIDOPTERA,

THALAMARCHIS ALVEOLA.

Cryptolechia alveola Feld., Reis. Nov., Pl. 140, f. 35—Thalamarchis alveola Meyr.,
PEECS:N-S3w., lc, ‘p: 436.
Western Australia: Albany, Margaret River, Waroona, Perth, York, Yanchep,
Mogumber, Geraldton, Cunderdin.

Gen. PSILOSCELES, Nov. (yAocKedns, With smooth tibiae.)

Antennae about four-fifths. Palpi very long; second joint about 3 times length
of face, slender; terminal joint as long as second. Posterior tibiae smooth with a
few hairs on dorsum at apex. Forewings with 2 very oblique from about three-
fourths, 3 and 4 approximated from angle. Hindwings with 5 from below middle,
6 and 7 widely separated at origin, thence diverging, 12 closely approximated to
cell to about middle.

Rather closely allied to Thalamarchis; the points of difference being of minor
importance, with the exception of the origin of 2 in the forewings, which suggests
some relation, probably distant, to the Xyloryctidae.

PSILOSCELES DICHOCHROA, Nl. Sp. (d:xoxXpoos, double-coloured.)

3, 9. 18-20 mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous. Palpi dark fuscous with two
slender whitish side lines on anterior surface of second joint. Antennae fuscous.
Abdomen fuscous with lateral ochreous streaks. Legs fuscous; anterior coxae,
middle and posterior femora, and posterior tibiae except at apex ochreous-whitish.
Forewings dilated before middle, costa strongly arched, apex subrectangular,
termen obliquely rounded, dark fuscous; in male a slender whitish line on fold
from base to near above tornus; in female this is obsolete, being represented by
a few whitish scales only; cilia dark fuscous. Hindwings broadly ovate, termen
sinuate; deep ochreous-yellow; cilia grey; bases dark fuscous.

Western Australia: Coorow in October; two specimens.

Gen. PHILETES, nov. (drAerns, deceitful.)

Antennae about two-thirds.

Palpi with second joint reaching base of antennae, thickened with rough
scales and expanded towards apex; terminal joint as long as second, slender.
Thorax with a posterior crest. Posterior tibiae clothed with long hairs. Fore-
wings with 2 and 3 connate from angle, 4 from well above angle. Hindwings with
5 from below middle, 6 and 7 separate, diverging, 12 approximated to cell, but
not closely, to middle, gradually diverging.

The type species shows no resemblance to the two preceding, and might easily
be mistaken for one of the Xyloryctidae, but for the neuration.

PHILETES MEGALOSPILA, N. SP. (eyadoomdos, With large spot.) |

6. 24-30 mm. Head grey; side-tufts whitish. Palpi fuscous sprinkled with
whitish. Antennae fuscous. Thorax fuscous-grey. Abdomen pale grey; tuft grey-
whitish. Legs dark grey sprinkled with whitish and faintly tinged pink; posterior
pair grey-whitish. Forewings elongate-oval, costa moderately arched, apex rounded,
termen oblique; grey; a fine fuscous subcostal line from base to one-third, inter-
rupted by whitish; a large oblong fuscous white-edged median spot with a short
transverse fuscous mark just beyond; median third of costal edge pinkish; a
suffused outwardly curved whitish line at two-thirds, cut by fine fuscous lines
interrupted by whitish running into termen; cilia grey. Hindwings with termen
rounded; dark grey; cilia grey.

Western Australia: Waroona in October; Perth in November; two specimens.

BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 337

Gen. BLACOPHANES nov. (fdAakogarns, of sluggish appearance. )

Antennae about two-thirds. Tongue present but weakly developed. Palpi
with second joint reaching base of antennae, thickened with smoothly appressed
scales; terminal joint as long as second. Posterior tibiae hairy on dorsum.
Forewings with 2 from angle approximated to 3, 7 to termen. Hindwings with
5 from below middle, 6 and 7 approximated at origin, gradually diverging, 12
moderately approximated to near end of cell.

BLACOPHANES PALLIDA nN. Sp. (pallidus, pale.)

©. 35-38 mm. Head and thorax whitish. Palpi whitish sprinkled with pale
grey. Antennae whitish. Abdomen whitish; apex and underside fuscous. Legs
grey; posterior pair paler. Forewings suboblong, costa straight, apex rounded-
rectangular, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; whitish sprinkled with
grey; a discal spot at two-thirds and a terminal series of dots grey; cilia whitish.
Hindwings and cilia whitish.

Western Australia: Perth (L. J. Newman); two specimens.

BB

338

HYMENOPTEROUS PARASITES OF EMBIOPTHERA.
By Aan P. Dopp.

[Read 26th July, 1939.]

Family BrErTHYLIDAR.
Subfamily ScLEROGIBBINAE.

This small subfamily is distinguished by the fact that the antennae contain
from 22 to as many as 40 joints, compared with 12 to 13 joints in the large
subfamily Bethylinae. In his 1914 monograph of the Bethylidae (Das Tierreich,
41, Berlin), Kieffer lists six described and two undescribed species of
Sclerogibbinae, which are divided between six genera; four of the genera are
based on females, and two are erected for undescribed males. Of the eight species,
four are from Africa, two from Europe, and one each from Asia and North
America. The known females are wingless; the males are fully winged. They
appear to be rare insects; in no case have both sexes of the one species been
recognized.

While the discovery of the subfamily in Australia is of interest, the record of
the species as an ectoparasite of an Hmbiid deserves particular notice, since
nothing seems to have been known previously concerning the host relations of
these insects.

The single Australian example is a female. It disagrees with the characters
given for the four genera based on this sex, viz., Sclerogibba Riggio and T. Stefani,
Tanynotus Cameron, Mystrocnemis Kieffer and Prosclerogibba Kieffer, in the
possession of ocelli. However, in view of the small amount of knowledge of the
group and of the limited number of species, I have preferred to place the insect
in the type genus rather than to erect a new genus for its reception.

SCLEROGIBBA EMBIOPTERAE, Nl. Sp.

2. Length 4mm. Body black, except as follows: the produced anterior margin
of the head between the antennae is clear testaceous, to agree with the colour of
the antennae; the declivous anterior shoulders of the pronotum are pale
ferruginous; there is a similar pale area across the posterior margin of the
pronotum; posteriorly on the propodeum against the base of the abdomen is a
ferruginous spot. Antennae clear testaceous for basal two-thirds, the apical third
brown. Coxae black, the intermediate and posterior pair with a pale spot at apex;
anterior femora black, the other femora blackish; tibiae dusky-brown; tarsi
ferruginous.

Head flattened; from dorsal aspect slightly longer than its greatest width,
which is at one-third its length from the posterior margin, somewhat narrowed
anteriorly where it is produced in the form of a broad, very transverse ‘beak’, the
anterior margin of which is straight; posterior margin of head gently but
definitely concave, not margined but sharp, since the occiput falls away very
precipitously; mouth parts and antennal insertions on the underside, the mouth

BY A. P. DODD. 339

parts just beyond the middle, the antennae near the anterior margin; eyes very
wide apart, moderately large, rather narrow, extending for two-thirds the length
of the head almost to the posterior margin, with a pubescence of very short fine
hairs; ocelli present, small, in a triangle, the posterior pair close to the occipital
Margin, separated from the eyes by almost their own distance apart; dorsal surface
of head with fine close polygonal reticulation and very fine short dense pubescence,
and with a scattered pubescence of moderately long hairs arising from indefinite
punctures. Antennae 26-jointed; scape moderately stout, 24 times as long as wide,
excavated for its dorsal third where it fits underneath the head, the margin of the
excavation armed with several stout hairs or bristles; pedicel short, transverse,
half hidden in the scape; flagellum curved, very gradually tapering to apex; joint 1
as long as wide; 2 and the following joints distinctly wider than long, but the
several apical joints are as long as wide, and the ultimate joint is almost twice as
long as its basal width. Thorax distinctly narrower than the head and abdomen,
four times as long as its width, almost parallel-sided, the dorsal surface of
pronotum and propodeum flat; pronotum twice as long as wide, narrowly
impressed at the median line, rounded anteriorly, not margined laterally, the
posterior border rather deeply concave; mesoscutum small, shorter than its width;
scutellum convex, twice as long as the scutum, fully as long as its greatest width,
which is at two-thirds its length; propodeum without carinae or carinated margins,
its surface flat, scarcely as long as the pronotum, widening gradually toward the
posterior margin, thence narrowing very sharply; sculpture of thorax of fine close
reticulation and fine short dense pubescence, but without the long hairs and
indefinite punctures of the head. Front femora very greatly swollen; middle and
posterior tibiae as long as their femora, each with a stout apical spur; posterior
tarsi longer than their tibiae, with two tarsal claws, one of which has a short
broad inner tooth. Abdomen somewhat shorter than the thorax, with the same
fine sculpture and pubescence; convex dorsally, pointed at apex; segments 1 and 2
together occupying fully one-half the length; 1 somewhat longer than 2; 3 trans-
verse, one-half as long as 2; 4 narrower and a little longer than 3; 5 narrower
and shorter than 4; 6 triangular, somewhat longer than 5 or than its basal width.

One female reared by Mr. B. A. Smith on 8th October, 1935, at Chinchilla,
Queensland, from a larva of Oligotoma gurneyi gurneyi Frogg., var., as determined
by Consett Davis. Mr. Smith has supplied the following notes on this insect:
“The legless larva, which was nearly full-grown when found, was attached between
the prothorax and mesothorax dorsally of the Embid larva which was in the last
instar and was quite active. The parasite spun a cocoon, after the manner of
other Bethylids.”

Holotype in the Queensland Museum.

It is of interest to record that a Hymenopterous larva attached to a female of
Oligotoma gurneyi gurneyi Frogg., was collected by Consett Davis at Bagdad
Valley, Tasmania, 31.1.37.

Family ScELIONIDAE.
Subfamily ScELIONINAE.
Empipopia Ashmead.

This genus was erected by Ashmead in 1895 (Journ. Trinidad Club, Vol. 2,
No. 11, pp. 264-266) with the type species, HZ. wrichi Ashmead, which had been
reared from Embiid eggs in the island of Trinidad, West Indies. No other members
of the genus have been described. However, Imms (1913) has recorded the
existence of a species attacking the eggs of Hmbia major Imms in the Himalayas,
India.

340 HYMENOPTEROUS PARASITES OF EMBIOPTERA,

The discovery of these interesting egg-parasites in Australia is associated with
the recent investigations of our Embioptera by Consett Davis, to whom I am
indebted for the opportunity to study and describe the parasite material, which
contains three species.

In addition to the Australian species, Consett Davis has submitted a female
of another species, collected by himself at Colombo, Ceylon, in a nest of Oligotoma
greeniana End., in bark, 7.1.39.

Ashmead’s diagnosis of the characters of Hmbidobia gives the female antennae
as 12-jointed. He states: ‘Antennae inserted just above the clypeus, 12-jointed, in
the female terminating in a 4-jointed club, the funicular joints all very minute,
except the first, transverse; pedicel obconical, stouter and longer than the first
three or four funicular joints united.” In the four species I have examined, the
female antennae are 11-jointed; the funicle is either 5- or 6-jointed and the club
3- or 4-jointed, depending upon the eighth antennal joint being counted as a funicle
or club joint; this joint is wider than the seventh joint, but is much smaller than
the ninth; however, in this paper, it is considered as the small first segment of a
4-jointed club.

Whether #. uwrichi has 11- or 12-jointed antennae in the female cannot be deter-
mined without an examination of the type material. Ashmead’s description may
be correct. On the other hand, it would have been a simple mistake to have
miscounted the small funicle joints.

Despite the 1li-jointed female antennae, which might suggest the subfamily
Telenominae, the flanged or carinate lateral margins of the abdomen are typical
of the Scelioninae.

The four species recognized in this paper can be distinguished by the
following key:

1. Segment 2 of abdomen finely reticulate, without striae; metanotum hidden by the

raiseds posterion manrsineoLeunenscutell ume scpeiel-1 4s cee eerste erie eee orientalis
Segment 2 striate for the greater part; metanotum short, but not hidden under the
KAKO” SonNeheeiha Cie Ware ooucikthel Goaadgocboddcosbcodagsesoacnaodddaddoucou.e 2

2. Abdomen narrower at base, especially in the female; wings extending well beyond
apex, Of abdomen inmboOth SOXES! ead sevster tee erences Reucie te) sea peteney = longipennis

Abdomen more broadly sessile at base, especially in the female; wings not reaching
beyond apex of abdomen in the female, and very little beyond abdomen in the

SGU St ORE eR MRRNTRC ORT OLS AUTO CR END EO CR RUIER OS coe ClonnicToeO oie Om oo aoa G GoloeS 3

3. Postmarginal vein long, much longer than the stigmal vein; frons without longi-
tudinal rugaie ana striaiey Vac. is ol iche & stersicltcie ete olcledaele sueietars ts) sit Monee ley ames australica
Postmarginal vein short, scarcely longer than the stigmal vein; frons with longi-
wuidinal rusaeandwstriacw. miseries ons Deere Pc renee teks se Rape metoligotomae

EMBIDOBIA AUSTRALICA, N. Sp.

9. Length 0:95 mm. Head, mesoscutum and scutellum, and the greater part of
the abdomen, dull-black or blackish; thorax, except scutum and scutellum; deep red-
brown; first segment, base of second segment, margin between second and third
segments, and lateral margins ventrally, of abdomen red-brown; antennal ‘scape
yellow, the pedicel and funicle joints brown, the club dusky; coxae red-brown, the
femora rather dusky-brown, the tibiae and tarsi testaceous.

Head, from dorsal aspect, transverse, no wider than the thorax, the occiput
gently concave and with a complete occipital carina; from lateral aspect, the
vertex and frons are regularly convex, the cheeks are moderately broad and slope
sharply ventro-posteriorly; from frontal aspect, the head is regular in outline, and
is one-half wider than deep; frontal impression absent, but a carina extends above
the antennal prominence and the face is depressed on either side of the carina;
eyes moderately large, wide apart, densely pubescent; ocelli moderately small, very

*

BY A. P. DODD. 341

wide apart, the lateral pair separated by their own diameter from the eye margins;
head with fine pubescence and with fine dense reticulate or rugose sculpture.
Antennae 11-jointed; scape moderately long; pedicel almost twice as long as its
greatest width; funicle joints small, much narrower than the pedicel, 1 a little
longer than wide, 2 quadrate, 4 and 5 much wider than long; club compact,
4-jointed, joint 1 rather small, 2 and 3 each a little wider than long, the terminal
joint as long as its basal width. Thorax short, no longer than its greatest width
or height; pronotum declivous, scarcely visible from above; scutum very broadly
rounded anteriorly, the parapsidal furrows absent; scutellum semicircular,
margined posteriorly; scutum and scutellum with fine dense pubescence and fine
raised scaly reticulation; metanotum very short, unarmed; propodeum very short,
visible laterally only. Forewings rather short, failing to reach apex of abdomen;
moderately narrow, rounded at apex; distinctly brownish but paler toward base;
marginal cilia moderately long; discal cilia fine and dense; venation deep brown,
thick, very distinct; submarginal vein joining the costa at one-half the wing
length; marginal vein one-half as long as the stigmal vein, which is moderately
oblique, straight, with a distinct terminal knob; postmarginal vein long, three
times as long as the stigmal vein and fully one-half as long as the submarginal.
Fore and middle legs short, the posterior pair longer; tarsi 5-jointed, the posterior
tarsi no longer than their tibiae. Abdomen as long as the head and thorax united,
one-half longer than its greatest width, which is somewhat greater than that of
the thorax; broadly sessile at base, its lateral margins gently convex; segment 1
transverse, less than one-half as long as its basal width, transversely impressed
at one-half its length so that the base is broadly and shortly raised; 2 two-thirds
longer than 1, with a foveate transverse line at base; 3 the longest, one-third
longer than 1 but much wider than long; 4-6 each transverse, together two-thirds
as long as wide; 1 strongly striate; 2 more finely striate but smooth toward
posterior margin, while laterally the striae fail and are replaced by fine reticulation
and pubescence; 3-5 with fine impressed polygonal reticulation and fine pubescence,
the sculpture stronger and the pubescence less pronounced medially on 3.

6. Agrees very closely with the female, except in sexual characters. The
forewings are longer, extending for a short distance beyond the abdomen, and are
wider, with the apex more broadly rounded. Antennae 12-jointed, the scape yellow,
the pedicel dusky yellow or brown, the flagellum black; scape moderately long;
pedicel slender, nearly twice as_Jong as its greatest width; flagellar joints monili-
form; 1 somewhat shorter than the pedicel, one-half longer than wide; 2 and 3
slightly shorter than 1; 4-9 quadrate or slightly wider than long, their basal and
posterior margins truncate; apical joint about twice as long as. the penultimate.

A large series included with EH. metoligotomae and labelled “From nests of
Metoligotoma ingens Davis, Black Mountain, Canberra, F.C.T., 25.1.35, R. V. Fyfe”.
Two females labelled “From eggs of Metoligotoma illawarrae illawarrae Davis,
Austinmer, N. S. Wales, C. Davis; eggs collected 1.3.36, parasites emerged 27.3.36”.
The holotype and allotype have been selected from the Canberra series.

Holotype female and allotype male in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes
retained by the author and returned to Consett Davis.

EMBIDOBIA METOLIGOTOMAE, N. Sp.

9. Length 0:90 mm. Head, thorax and abdomen wholly black, except that the
lateral line or flange of the abdomen ventrally is reddish; coxae dusky black, the
femora dusky brown, the tibiae and tarsi clear testaceous; antennae brownish-
yellow, the club dark fuscous.

342 HYMENOPTEROUS PARASITES OF EMBIOPTERA,

Frons rather less convex than in australica, its median carina stronger and
extending to the frontal ocellus; sculpture of vertex definitely but finely rugose
in irregular raised lines; upper half of frons irregularly longitudinally rugose, the
lower half regularly longitudinally striate. Antennae as in australica. Mesoscutum
with fine scaly reticulation and fine pubescence; scutellum shining, with the
sculpture weak and indefinite. Forewings just reaching or failing by a little to
reach apex of abdomen; broader than in australica, the apex more broadly rounded;
lightly stained brownish, not appreciably paler toward base; venation very distinct,
marginal vein one-third as long as the stigmal, the postmarginal short, very little
longer than the stigmal. Abdomen one-half longer than its greatest width, broadly
sessile at base; segment 1 one-half as long as its basal width; strongly striate, but
medially at base irregularly rugose; 2 very narrowly smooth at base, followed by
the foveate line, the striate sculpture stronger than in australica but giving way
to reticulate sculpture latero-posteriorly, smooth along posterior margin; 3 very
slightly longer than 2, medially with a close polygonal reticulation and without
pubescence; 4 and 5, 3 laterally, and lateral margin of 2 with fine pubescence and
fine indefinite reticulation.

6. Abdomen rather more slender and narrower at base than in the female,
almost twice as long as its greatest width; segment 1 almost as long as its basal
width, strongly striate but not rugose medially at base. Forewings a little broader
and longer, extending a short distance beyond apex of abdomen. Antennae black,
the scape and pedicel dusky-brown; pedicel one-half longer than wide; flagellar
joint 1 subquadrate or slightly longer than wide; 2-9 each somewhat wider than
long, their basal and apical margins sharply truncate.

At once differing from australica in the short postmarginal vein, and in the
sculpture of the head; the frons and vertex in australica are finely reticulate-
rugose, without the longitudinal striae or rugae on the frons; the scutellum is
definitely sculptured like the scutum in australica, whereas in metoligotomae it is
shining and the sculpture is indefinite.

A series included with H. australica and labelled “From nests of Metoligotoma
ingens Davis, Black Mountain, Canberra, F.C.T., 25.1.35, R. V. Fyfe”. A small series
bred from eggs of Metoligotoma intermedia Davis, Nowra, N. S. Wales, Consett
Davis; eggs collected 8.10.37, parasites emerged 31.12.37. Three females bred from
eggs of Metoligotoma extorris Davis, Brush Island, near Ulladulla, N. S. Wales,
6.9.36, Consett Davis. One female in nests of Metoligotoma pentanesiana Davis,
Five Islands, N. S. Wales, 12.3.36, Consett Davis. The holotype and allotype have
been selected from the Canberra series.

Holotype female and allotype male in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes
retained by the author and returned to Consett Davis.

A female from Lady Barron, Flinders Island, Bass Strait, collected by Consett
Davis in a web of Metoligotoma tasmanica Davis, subspecies ?, 9.1.38, should be
referred to this species, although it differs in minor particulars. The legs are
darker, with the tibiae and tarsi brownish-yellow, not clear yellow. The antennae
are darker, the scape being fuscous like the club, and the pedicel and funicle
joints dusky-brown. Segment 2 of the abdomen is not narrowly smooth at base;
the striation is not so strong, and on the posterior half there is polygonal
reticulation between the striae.

EMBIDOBIA LONGIPENNIS, Nl. SD.
2. Length 0-95 mm. Black, the base of the abdomen dull reddish; antennae
dark, the joints, except the club, somewhat brownish; coxae and femora dusky-
black, the tibiae and tarsi dusky ferruginous.

BY A. P. DODD. 343

Frons rather less convex than in australica; the median carina extending to
the anterior ocellus; sculpture much as in metoligotomae, the lower half of frons
regularly longitudinally striate, the upper frons irregularly longitudinally rugose,
the vertex irregularly transversely rugose. Antennae as in australica. Mesoscutum
with fine pubescence and fine raised reticulation; scutellum shining, without
sculpture, with scattered pubescence. Forewings extending well beyond apex of
abdomen, moderately broad, the apex rather broadly rounded; lightly and uniformly
stained brownish; venation light brown, moderately distinct; marginal vein one-
half as long as the stigmal vein, the postmarginal twice as long as the stigmal.
Abdomen not wider than the thorax, almost twice as long as its greatest width;
segment 1 much more narrowed at base than in australica and metoligotomae, as
long as its basal width, very definitely raised and convex at base medially; 1 rather
strongly striate; 2 rather strongly striate, the striae becoming finer posteriorly,
smooth posteriorly, laterally with fine sculpture and pubescence; 3 for the greater
part with raised polygonal reticulation and scattered hairs, the sculpture finer and
the pubescence denser laterally, smooth along the posterior margin; 4 and 5 with
fine sculpture and pubescence.

6. Forewings very long, extending beyond the abdomen for almost the length
of the latter. Antennae black, the scape and pedicel dusky brown; flagellar joint 1
as long as the pedicel, twice as long as wide, 2 and 3 somewhat longer than wide,
4-9 each slightly longer than wide; flagellar joints not so compact, and less
quadrate in outline than in the other two species, gradually narrowing at base
and apex.

This species differs from the two preceding forms in the longer wings and the
narrower base of the abdomen; both of these differences are more pronounced
in the females. The flagellar joints of the male antennae are longer and taper
somewhat to the ends, so that the basal and apical margins are not truncate, thus
giving the flagellum a less compact appearance than in australica and
metoligotomae. j

One female (holotype) and one male (allotype) labelled “In webs of Oligotoma
gurneyi gurneyi Frogg., Hobart, Tasmania, 29.1.37, G. and C. Davis’. One female
in web of Notoligotoma nitens Davis, Sylvania, George’s River, New South Wales,
C. Davis, 11.8.35.

Holotype and allotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratype in the author’s
collection.

EIMBIDOBIA ORIENTALIS, Nl. SD.

9. Length 0:85 mm. Head and thorax black; abdomen dusky black, the basal
segment clear testaceous; antennal scape yellow, the remaining joints dusky
brown; legs clear yellow, the anterior coxae fuscous.

Head, from lateral aspect, distinctly convex; lower half of frons rather deeply
impressed, the median carina not extending for more than one-half the distance
to the anterior ocellus; occipital border of the vertex not margined or carinate;
frons and vertex with close scaly reticulation and with a pubescence of rather
long fine hairs; mandibles rather long, bidentate. Funicle joints very small, 1 as
long as wide, the others wider than long; 1st club joint small, not much wider than
the funicle, very transverse, 2 quadrate, 3 somewhat wider than long. Scutum and
scutellum with similar reticulation and the rather long pubescence of the head;
scutellum semicircular, but rather longer than in the Australian species, some-
what raised posteriorly and from dorsal aspect completely hiding the short
metanotum. Forewings just reaching apex of abdomen; rather narrow, the apex

344 HYMENOPTEROUS PARASITES OF EMBIOPTERA,

rather sharply rounded; lightly stained brownish, the infuscation deepest at one-
half the length; marginal vein two-thirds as long as the stigmal, which is rather
short and very oblique; postmarginal long, almost as long as the submarginal,
fully three times as long as the stigmal. Abdomen two-thirds longer than its
greatest width; very broadly sessile, its base as wide as the posterior margin of
the thorax; segment 1 very little wider posteriorly than across the base, one-third
as long as its basal width, faintly raised at base medially; 2 one-half longer than 1,
more than twice as wide as long, without a foveate line at base; 3 slightly shorter
than 2; 1 with fine close striae; 2-4 with a network of fine impressed reticulation;
4 and 5, and 2 and 3 laterally, with numerous hairs forming a rather scattered
pubescence.

6. Unknown.

This species differs from the three Australian forms in the following
characters: the absence of striae on the second abdominal segment; the raised
posterior margin of the scutellum hiding the metanotum; the non-carinate occipital
border of the vertex. The abdomen is even wider at its base in orientalis than in
australica and metoligotomae.

One female labelled “Colombo, Ceylon; in nest of Oligotoma greeniana End.,
in bark; 7.1.39, Consett Davis”.

Holotype in the Queensland Museum.

345

MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. VI.
DOLICHOPODINAE.
By G. H. Harpy.
[Read 26th July, 1939.]

The Australian species of Dolichopodidae are referred to eight subfamilies,

of which one, the Chrysosomatinae (these PROCEEDINGS, 1x, 1935, 248), has been
dealt with in this series. There may be some doubt as regards the subfamily
designation of the genus Mesorhaga, known to me only from the female; but the
rest of the Chrysosomatinae are clearly differentiated from the Dolichopodinae,
with which may be merged the Neurogoninae and Medeterinae. The following

should now be added to my key by inserting the figure ‘8” (Hardy, 1935, 248) in
the place of “other subfamilies’.

8.

10.

Tee

12.

13.

Hypopygium exposed, large or very large, normally reflexed so as to be carried under
the abdomen, or, if placed apically, opening downwards; frequently highly
ornamented. Postocular vestiture usually limited to a single row of bristles
and the summit is usually slightly depressed and apparently the antennae are
always situated very high on the head, with the third segment always short and
the arista dorsally placed. Although the venation is variable, this subfamily
incorporates all forms outside Chrysosomatinae that have the median vein much
upcurved, including those with this vein less strongly tending towards the radial,
and all that have an appendix on this vein. The acrostichal bristles are always
bisenialwasmtaniadss yeu kn Ownlecanerecicicichaoionie tore: aioe emia: DOLICHOPODINAE. 9

Hypopygium small, hardly noticeable or concealed. Acrostichals biserial, uniserial
or absent. Summit never depressed between the eyes, no appendix to the median

vein which is never bent to a marked degree ............. -... Other subfamilies
Thorax with a large depressed area adjacent to the scutellum .................. 11
Thorax without such a depression (Dolichopodinae of authors) ............... 10

Posterior metatarsus with upstanding dorsal bristles. The upper median vein formed
with two sharp bends close together, each at right angles and each with an
appendix. Hypopygium long, the lateral view excluding lamellae being one and
a half times longer than broad. (Wing character applies to the Australian
SHECICSHANG MSP NO te SeNEeKall) ye om repegdea eel ice so eneteroienal ear aie eh oe tones oven. Dolichopus

Posterior metatarsus without upstanding dorsal bristles. The upper median vein
bent to a variable degree, and directed to lie converging, towards the radial,
reaching the margin usually before the wing apex .................. Paraclius

Legs elongate; abdomen gently tapering, rather large species (Neurogoninae of

HEN VON) OU NG, CooeoRs RICO CICS CHOIRS OE ere Eton oy SHEE ATO tees GE ENC ON oCUD eioto EROS Clo CeererOn! c 12
Legs of normal length, abdomen short and strongly conical, not exceeding the length
of thorax. Small species (Medeterinae of authors) ...................... 13
Upper median vein strongly upturned and reaching margin before wing apex.
ELy popySivm rele xe di yy say aie tscuskeie Alera belo Preys cilshee (oko chats aie -cliees eats wus eb site Neurogona

Upper median vein only slightly curved and reaching margin beyond wing apex.

ELV POpY LUM NOt, NEMEC edn) eee one mat crsne sch oucio elietaieha a adebevencieuel ss Arachnomyia
PAM Al Vielm Tr CSOT ty maha micrste oieks staycce ocho everest aja Mach averse’ sus eres ails ta teLetiere es ole estore Medetera
VATA EVELINA SCT niece ates iet Hertel eterno nevtel hae tenons era euaenecice clsha eich ok onedehe veretalavarsviai.s Thypticus

Genus DoLicHopus Latr.
Only one species is known from Australia; it has venation like that of

D. zickzack Wied., and is represented in the collection before me by a male from

cc

346 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. VI,

Southport and a female from Brisbane, labelled with a query as being this species,
which reaches from Java to the Mandated Territory of New Guinea. The specimens
differ, however, by the larger size (5 mm.) and by the venation which is more
complete than that noted by Becker, who indicates that the fifth vein is short
and the second sinuous, whereas these veins are complete and practically straight
respectively on the present specimens. Other small differences occur, but are
hardly enough to show with certainty that the Queensland specimens are more
than a variation.

Genus PARAcLIuS Bigot.

Six species, perhaps seven, are before me. Some correspond rather well with
described forms, but three are certainly undescribed. One species is so different
in head characters that I place it here until its true valuation becomes known,
there being no genus yet proposed suitable for its reception.

Key to species of Paraclius.

1. Face of male very narrow, narrowest in centre and entirely white. Face of female
broader, slightly converging to oral margin or practically parallel, with a
pulverulent white covering usually dense. Posterior metatarsus not quite as
long as second segment, usually much shorter. Hypopygium normal ........ 2

Face on both sexes equally broad and bottle-shaped, yellowish. Posterior metatarsus
as long as second segment. Upper median vein gently curved. Hypopygium
lpaorttey ShyoVlichal whaehar wWYooel so duecadecosooobcodaoUccaodououcs un latifacies, n. sp.

2. Legs mainly black. Upper median vein bent to a rectangle. Posterior metatarsus
two-thirds as long as second segment on male, nearly equal on female ........
EPIC CRO ot CRO ORR OIG. 0 OF CAC LOnE CLAICRE COCKER TOP EE ERIC Cao CLGIENG Siero cLceinhG Sinieaesons 55 neglectus Becker

Messe mainhya yellows cksstaeh: sehr a ole creche susdaiekere caaney cicwebeustehe lauataueie enone ay sftsmaisyay ome ewelensuenaicn ate 3

8. All coxae black. Median vein gently curved. Posterior metatarsus on female not
quite equal to the second segment (9) .................. australiensis Parent

ANGaK OKO Copevey ayGlillony? Gro mMEhWby So Goo obapnocudooono cab odUdHoOuGCoUooCOnooaDOS 4

4. Upper median vein sharply bent, approaching rectangular. Posterior metatarsus
two-thirds length of second tarsal segment, or longer when stated as such

[OYAWON GE LEMRET AIS 16 Eto Chala BOO CULO Cooke crit okt Pmomao a cid omc romeo oad Gabe 5
Upper median vein gently bent. Posterior metatarsus half length of second (cv)
Np aa REN, AE Ae op i peace nal suioks Ronee al boos ome TaN ON SIENG Tenet te NORD Rotechon sehen cilipes, n. sp.

5. Intermediate tibiae with two anterior and four posterior dorsal bristles ............
ROAD REE Lee at ts sat Net Ageing AL EAU AG ini ho Git Chek Cech omic at here che darwini Parent

Intermediate tibiae with three anterior and two posterior dorsal bristles ........
Be CLR Ef GREE CUS EREIO. OOO CIEEEEG CRUICh OOF DICIOLOLO NEO OCR Cn. 1-3 OHO EEO CF CRO IRS-Sio chs O75 obtusus, nN. sp.

Intermediate tibiae with three anterior and four posterior dorsal bristles. Posterior
metatarsus only slightly shorter than second segment (2?) .... trisetosus Parent

The characters of P. australiensis and P. darwini are taken from published
descriptions. P. trisetosus Parent (2) before me approaches obtusus, Nn. Sp., and
has the median vein similarly bent, a little more so than shown by Parent. In
the key the character “median vein gently bent” refers to change in direction
of less than 45 degrees as shown in Parent’s figure 19; those “approaching
rectangular” are as in his figures 20 and 21.

It is worth noting that on P. neglectus Becker the proportional length of the
posterior metatarsus differs in the sexes, a character likely to be repeated on
australiensis and trisetosus, which are known only from the female. The two
latter species are likely to be closely related, but I am still uncertain if the
trisetosus (from Gordonvale and Palm Island) before me is correctly identified;
there are minor differences suggesting an allied species, and the males are needed
to ascertain this. Parent’s species are described in Ann. Soc. Sci. Brucelles (B),

liii, 1933, pp. 184-5, figs. 19-22.

BY G. H. HARDY. 347

PARACLIUS NEGLECTUS Becker.

Becker, Cap. Zool., i, 1922, 16; Hardy, Austr. Zool., vi, 1930, 134; Parent, Ann.
Soc. Sci. Bruxelles (B), lii, 1932, 57.

Becker’s description is very short, is based upon a specimen from Darwin
(Palmerston is the older name) and agrees rather well with Brisbane specimens
before me. These have, on the anterior tibiae, three anterior and two posterior
strong bristles on the dorsal side and one posterior on the ventral side. The
intermediate tibiae have four anterior and four posterior strong bristles dorsally
and one ventrally. The posterior tibiae have four very strong bristles alternating
with less strong ones, making seven in all anteriorly and four posteriorly on the
dorsal side and two ventrally. The bristles mentioned are liable to variation
and exclude subbasal bristles that may appear strong but do not reach the size
of those counted, and the apical bristles are also excluded; Becker makes no
mention of these.

Hab.—Northern Territory; Queensland: Brisbane, 3 ¢, 3 9, September and
October, 1928 and 1930.

PARACLIUS OBTUSUS, N. Sp.

6. Frons metallic-green, very slightly covered with a pulverulent white.
Antennae yellowish, third segment and arista mainly blackish. Postocular bristles
mainly white. Thorax metallic-green with red reflections mainly between the
acrostichals; there is a limited covering of pulverulent white and a strong black
colour shows on the area adjacent to the head, above the wings and at sides of
scutellum. Abdomen also green with black margins to each segment, anteriorly
and posteriorly, and a strong trend towards an interrupted black median stripe.
The blackish hypopygium has its lamella rather heart-shaped when seen laterally.
The legs are almost entirely yellow, the basal two-thirds of the intermediate and
posterior coxae only being black. The anterior legs have the normal row of
apical bristles on the coxae, one small subapical on the femora and on the tibiae
with three rows of dorsal, three bristles to each row, besides the two apical ones,
but all these are rather small; the metatarsus is about as long as the combined
and equal following segments, whilst all these tarsal segments combined equal the
length of the tibiae. The intermediate legs have many bristles on the coxae, one
on the anterior surface of the trochanters, a row of very thin ventral bristles
and a stout one on the anterior surface of the femora, the latter placed sub-
apically; the tibiae have, besides a pair of small subbasal bristles, three anterior
and two posterior long bristles on the dorsal surface, and five subapical bristles;
the metatarsus is longer than the second tarsal segment and all segments combined
are a little longer than the tibiae. The hind legs have a single bristle on the
coxae, another on the trochanters, a ventral row and an anterior dorsal bristle on
the femora; the tibiae have two small subbasal bristles, three anterior, four
posterior and one subapical bristle; the metatarsus is two-thirds the length of
the second segment which itself equals the combined length of the remaining
segments, and all together are a little longer than the tibiae. The upper median
vein is bent to a sharp angle, not quite a rectangle. Length about 5 mm.

©. Similar, with the normal wide face parallel-sided.

Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, 3 g, 5 9, August to November, 1928, 1929 and
1931.

Closely related to P. darwini Parent, according to description, but that species
has a somewhat triangular lamella fringed on one side by long hairs, whereas on

348 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. VI,

the present species the lamellae are somewhat heart-shaped, attached broadly at
the base and the hairs are uniformly short throughout. That process, with three
diverging hairs at the apex, is shown by Parent to be large, but is small on the
present form, which is distinguished also by the bristles of the tibiae as given
in the key. Characters mentioned by Parent, and not included above, are the same
in both species.

PARACLIUS LATIFACIES, Nl. SD.

dg. Frons and postocular region metallic-green with a slight covering of
pulverulent yellow. Face as broad as that on the female, completely covered with
a yellow pulverulent overlay including the clypeus. The eye-margins converge from
the frons to the upper part of the face, then diverge towards the oral margin, where
they again converge, giving the face a somewhat bottle-shaped outline. The reddish-
yellow antennae have the third segment and the arista black; the proboscis, palpi
and upper bristles of the head are black, the lower bristles are white.

Thorax metallic-green with a large dorsal area coppery and the acrostichal
bristles extend further than is normal with the genus. There are six dorsal
central bristles and two large widely separated scutellar bristles, and a small
bristle outside these making a second pair. Other bristles seem normal. The
metallic-green abdomen has coppery reflections showing on its apical area, and
along the apical margins of each segment. A white pulverulent overlay covers
almost the whole abdomen, but becomes strong laterally. The swollen black
hypopygium seems not quite normal to the genus and the lamellae are oblong,
leaf-like, attached by a slender stalk to one corner. All the coxae are dark
(greenish covered with a pulverulent white) and with normal chaetotaxy; this
colour extends onto the posterior trochanters, but otherwise the legs are yellow.
Omitting the small dorsal subbasal bristles and the apical, there are, on the
anterior tibiae, three anterior, two posterior dorsal bristles and two ventrals;
on the intermediate tibiae there are four each anterior and posterior dorsals, and
four each anterior and posterior ventrals; on the posterior tibiae four each
anterior and posterior dorsals and five or six, mostly small, white ventrals. The
anterior tarsi are but slightly longer than the tibiae, with the metatarsus as long
as the four following segments. The intermediate tarsi are longer than the
tibiae, with the metatarsus about equal to the two following segments. The
posterior tarsi are again longer than the tibiae, with the metatarsus equal in length
with the next segment. The wings have the upper median vein gently curved and,
although the curve is slight and the vein straightens, yet the vein ends before
the wing apex as in darwini and obtusus.

©. Similar to the male.

Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, 2 g, 5 9, August and September, 1928.

With the multiplicity of bristles on the tibiae, there is a tendency to add or
miss a bristle here and there, but in the main the character shows little variation.
If a bristle be suppressed, a hair each side may increase in size, making two
apparent bristles where one is normal. Such fortuitous bristles are liable to
mislead and need to be guarded against.

PARACLIUS CILIPES, nN. Sp.
6d. Frons and face completely covered with pulverulent white, the latter
narrow and normal. Antennae and arista blackish-brown, the latter subapically
placed. Postocular bristles black. Thorax green with some reddish reflections
and hardly any pulverulent overlay. Thoracic bristles include six dorsocentral and

BY G. H. HARDY. 349

two widely separated scutellar bristles. Abdomen green with black border on
the base and apex of each segment, and a pulverulent white spot laterally.
Hypopygium only as long as wide (lateral view), ending in a pair of broad
lamellae, somewhat square in outline. Anterior coxae yellow, the others darker,
at least on the basal two-thirds, otherwise the legs are almost completely yellow.
The intermediate and posterior coxae have one outstanding bristle apart from
the normal marginal bristles and the hairs; the trochanters are without observed
bristles. Posterior femora with one bristle situated antero-dorsally at three-
quarters the length; otherwise only apical bristles are occasionally present.
Anterior tibiae with three pairs of bristles on the dorsal side, varying to include
a fourth. Tarsi very attenuated, with the apical segment ornamented; metatarsus
one and a half times the length of second segment and about as long as the third
and fifth, the fourth very slender, about as long as the first three together, and
the fifth unusually long with six cilia on the anterior edge, tapering towards the
apex, white on the apical half and claws hardly visible; the total tarsal length
is about equal to that of the femora and tibiae combined. The intermediate tibiae
have four anterior and four posterior bristles on the dorsal side besides a pair of
subbasal bristles and a complete complement of apical ones; there are also four
ventral bristles, but all these are apparently subject to variation; the tarsi are
subequal, with the segments combined a little longer than the tibiae. The posterior
tibiae seem to have normally a pair of small subbasal bristles followed by three
anterior and four posterior on the dorsal side and no ventrals, but a set of apicals
is present; the metatarsus is about half the length of the second segment and
the others normal; the second to fifth segments equal the length of the tibiae.
The upper median vein is gently bent, running thence rather straight towards
the median, meeting the margin a little before the wing apex. Length about 5 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, May, 1935, 3 3.

From the description of P. australiensis Par., described from the female only,
the present form is distinguished by its yellow anterior coxae, the straight
section of the median vein, and other differences which might be sexual, but
with the different chaetotaxy as described above, and the posterior metatarsus
being shorter than the second segment (not almost equal to it), it seems
unlikely that the two are conspecific. There is, however, a close ally, P. ornatipes
Parent (Treubia, vii, suppl., 1932, 315, figs. 6 and 7), of which both sexes are
known, and Parent’s description of it and that given above are the same in
essential points, whilst his Figure 6 applies to both; the differences here lie in
the posterior metatarsus and the curvature of the upper median vein; Parent’s
species is from Buru.

Genus NEurogona Rond.

Rond., Dipt. Ital. Prod., i, 1856, 142; Becker, Cap. Zool., i, 1922, 61; Hardy,
Austr. Zool., vi, 1930, 1384; Parent, Ann. Soc. Sci. Bruxelles (B), lii, 1932, 163, 174.

Becker described a species of Neurogona from Formosa, recording it also
from India, Ceylon and Assam; in addition, he quotes a pair from Queensland
(Kuranda), all under the name denudata. To this Parent has added a species,
male only, from Hidsvold in which he contrasts five characters differing from
Becker’s species. A species before me is from Brisbane and the Queensland
National Park, agreeing with Parent’s form, but differing in certain respects
mentioned in the key; I do not know if it be truly distinct.

350 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. VI,

Key to species of Neurogona.

1. Ten pairs of dorsocentral bristles, with hairs between these and the acrostichals.
The prescutellar depression is unmarked. Frons covered with pulverulent white.
Eypopyelum feuned by, Beckerm (ies 44) 1.5 occ c seinen a cients denudata Beck.

Five pairs of dorsocentral bristles, the remainder reduced to hairs not distinguishable
from those adjacent to the acrostichals. Prescutellar depression and disc of the
scutellum blackish. Frons covered with pulverulent yellow. Hypopygium of the
FOE! Aikoy cian aak=qbuetreol Jane Teeny (Gat 4) Ba cdoodeoeccodondsceaccobnodenoondoc 2

The lateral edge of the fifth tergite on male produced laterally, triangular.
Hypopygium with an upstanding elongate slender process in accordance with

bo

PanenvistGescription: .ismeicie.« st aike ls se sees eile oiltee elo atelatece. avail Seats signata Parent
The lateral edge of the fifth tergite on male normal. Hypopygium without process.
BPA RI ONG GGG ORCI ED OTRO GORY Gate IGA OTIOR ROT COTO Oren TL OG ORIG En SRG Oa ee sp.

Genus AracHNoMyYIA White.

Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1916, 252; Hardy, Austr. Zool., vi, 1930, 134; Parent,
Ann. Soc. Sci. Bruxelles (B), lii, 1932, 107 (in key). —Pleuropygius Parent, Ann.
Soc. Sci. Bruxelles (B), liii, 1933, 186.

The synonymy is new. In his key, Parent gave characters for Arachnomyia,
evidently based on White’s description, which omits the prescutellar depression;
he was thus misled, renaming the genus and giving characters that are identical
with White’s genotype, except for minor differences. There are three species
before me.

Key to species of Arachnomyia.

1. Lamellae highly developed and highly ornamented ....................0eceeees 7)
Lamellae quite small, normal, with hairs, or at most with a furry covering .... 3
2. Posterior metatarsus half the length of the second tarsal segment .. arborum White

Posterior metatarsus two-thirds the length of the second tarsal segment ............
PERC RO IORCE TR cho (Ah EEN Se R Ete) ites Cy Go CREEPERS BY Riis Cw Ia My GRA AES heres, click G longipes Parent

3. Posterior metatarsus half the length of the second tarsal segment. Anterior tarsi
with the three apical segments flattened and ornamented ...... ornatipes, n. sp.
Posterior metatarsus two-thirds the length of the second tarsal segment and only the
two apical segments of the anterior tarsi are flattened, and otherwise not
OrNamMented ty. a. hensiciene: = Choweneettelie ts hove rauetchenercdeicton-lcc eRe exsiees paicy otiere wel caiern Bas enter sp.

ARACHNOMYIA ARBORUM White.

dg. Frons green with a strong covering of pulverulent white. Face white;
the eyes practically meet at the narrowest point. Proboscis and palpi yellow.
Postocular bristles white, antennae yellow, third segment missing. Thorax dorsally
metallic-bronze with a green median stripe along the acrostichals. Four pairs of
dorsocentral bristles anteriorly and a pair of large ones adjacent to the depressed
area, which is white-covered. A row of strong prothoracic bristles, one humeral,
one propleural, two notopleural and three others between the last and the dorso-
centrals. Scutellum with a pair of widely separated marginal bristles. Anterior
coxae yellow, the others blackish, the posterior ones with a lateral bristle, other-
wise bristles are not prominent on such parts of the legs as are present on the
specimen. Only one anterior leg is complete, showing femora and tibiae about
equal in length, the metatarsus very long and, together with the second segment,
about equal in length with the tibiae; subsequent segments decreasing in size and
together slightly longer than the second segment.

The abdomen has four normal segments and the hypopygium is of the same
form as on longipes, but there is no long bristle as shown in Parent’s figure, whilst
the lamellae, though laterally fringed, also apparently differ. The general design
of this is reminiscent of the tail of a lyre-bird (Menura victoriae) owing to it

BY G. H. HARDY. 351

being feathery and of a general lyre-shape. The fifth abdominal segment is
evidently present but retracted.

?. Similar to the male, face uniformly narrow, and up to six dorsocentral
bristles are present. Third antennal segment as long as wide, with the arista
placed in the median position. Five abdominal segments present and two more
incorporated in the telescopic ovipositor, all strongly tapering to a point. The
anterior legs are similar to those of the male and the intermediate tibiae
and tarsi are longer than the anterior ones, with four widely separated short
ventral bristles on the metatarsus, which equals the length of the tibiae, and the
second tarsal segment is longer than the two apical ones combined. The posterior
metatarsus is half the length of the elongated second and the median tibial bristle
is present.

Hab.—Tasmania. 1 4, slightly damaged, and 2 9, the allotype and a paratype;
from Hobart and Dunalley, February and March, 1915, 1917 and 1918.

ARACHNOMYIA ORNATIPES, Nl. Sp.

6. Conforming very closely to the genotype, this species differs remarkably
in the hypopygium which is rather small and has the lamellae small with a fur-
like covering. It differs also in the last three segments of the anterior tarsi being
highly ornamented, the intermediate tibiae with four widely separated bristles
on the anterior side and a bristle each on the trochanters and coxae; otherwise
the legs conform to those of the genotype. The anterior tarsal segments have
the last three flattened, with a fringe of long curly hairs on the edge of one, and
short straight hairs on the edge of the two apical ones.

Hab.—Queensland: National Park, February, 1921, 1 ¢ only.

Genus MeEpETERA Fisch.
Key to species of Medetera.

PU pper median vein paralleliwithy themnadialys cs sieeseeie te cie crs clckereieiicne ei ciotcnel ote eienere 2
Upper median vein strongly converging towards the radial .................... 3
2. Thoracic bristles white; only two scutellar bristles .............. extranea Becker
AVOLACICMDLIStLeSs) black fourm Scutellarmbristlesie ereiaeiinncElaniocice ae onic sp.

38. Posterior metatarsus three-fifths the length of the second tarsal segment ..........
ec ARs) CRORE AT ac ERNIE RICE CRC RG ca ORD Coric otc ICeon ORONO acc ets aa tae a nigrohalterata Par.
Posterior metatarsus one-half the length of the second tarsal segment .. palmae, n. sp.
Posterior metatarsus one-third the length of the second tarsal segment .. comes, n. sp.

MEDETERA PALMAE, N. SD.

g. Frons, face, clypeus and palpi greenish-black; occiput, thorax and coxae
similarly coloured but tending to shine more, except on the depressed area adjacent
to the scutellum, which retains a dense amount of the whitish pulverulent overlay
that covers these parts; the abdomen is also similarly covered but quite shining.
Antennae varying to black, but normally the two basal segments are reddish and
the arista is apically placed. The proboscis, all bristles except the white
postoculars, the femora except apex, and the hypopygium mainly, are black. The
anterior tibiae are normally stained with black, but otherwise the legs are yellow
with occasional black apices to segments. The halteres, the squama with its fringe,
and the wing veins are yellow.

Four apical dorsocentral bristles are large, the others are of equal size
with the acrostichals. Two widely separated large scutellar bristles occur, each
with a smaller bristle situated on the outer side along the scutellar margin. The
intermediate tibiae have a well developed anterior bristle, blackish-yellow, at

352 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. VI.

one-third its length, and a smaller one nearby on the dorsal side. The posterior
tibiae have a light dorsal subapical bristle usually visible. The anterior tarsi are
subequal, the intermediate metatarsus is equal to the length of the remaining
segments combined. The posterior metatarsus is half the length of the second
segment, as also is the third. Wings, as in nigrohalterata, have the upper median
vein first bending towards the radial, thence concave, but becoming convex beyond,
making it slightly sinuous.

©. Similar to the male.

Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, 10 g, 7 2 mainly collected from the trunk of a
palm tree in my Sunnybank garden. I have known the presence of Medetera on
this palm tree for many years, but on close inspection I find there are two
species with the habit, the companion being described below. Besides the
characters quoted, the species differ from each other in the male terminalia,
the present one being large and swollen at its base, the other similar in length
but not swollen. The two descriptions are based on material collected during
August and September, 1937, after which month they become scarce.

MEDETERA COMES, 0. Sp.

6. Face, clypeus and palpi metallic-green varying to blue and purple. Antennae
black, occiput, the thorax dorsally, and to a certain extent the abdomen above
are all coppery, elsewhere green. The whitish pulverulent overlay is dense between
the acrostichals, forming a stripe there which dilates over the depressed area
near the scutellum. The legs are black with traces of yellow on trochanters,
knees, and sometimes elsewhere. Dorsocentrals with only the two last bristles
strong. The anterior tarsi have the second segment slightly longer than the
metatarsus, the intermediate tibiae have one bristle on the anterior surface at
about one-third its length, none above, and the tarsi have the first two segments
equal. The posterior tibiae are apparently without the subapical bristle and the
posterior metatarsus is one-third the length of the second segment, the third
segment a little in excess of half the second. Wings like those of nigrohalterata,
except that the upper median vein is uniformly convex throughout its length. In
other characters the species agrees with palmae.

9. Similar to the male.

Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, 2 3g, 5 3, September to October, 1937, in my
garden at Sunnybank.

353

OBSERVATIONS ON THE BIONOMICS AND MORPHOLOGY OF SEVEN
SPECIES OF THE TRIBE PAROPSINI. [CHRYSOMELIDAE.]

By D. MArcarer CumpstTon, M.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology.
(Plate x; twenty-two Text-figures. )

[Read 26th July, 1939.]

Although considerable work has been carried out on the systematics of adult
Paropsis species, the only previous bionomical worker was Clark, who published
a short paper on Paropsis dilatata, a pest species in New Zealand (1930). This
species was introduced from Australia, and first mentioned for New Zealand in
1922.

Paropsis species are recorded from all parts of Australia, from Tasmania, and
from New Guinea. Some species are common throughout Australia (e.g., Paropsis
octomaculata). Hucalypt species are attacked chiefly, but Paropsis immaculata on
wattles, and Paropsis pictipennis and P. orphana on Leptospermum, are also quite
common. Tillyard (1926) records occasional considerable damage by both larvae
and adults to young eucalypts and wattles.

Five species of Paropsis, one of Chrysophtharta, and one of Paropsisterna
are considered in this paper. The adults were identified by Mr. Bryant of the
British Museum. Two other species of Paropsis have also been studied, but are
new species which have not yet been named. Mr. Bryant is in possession of series
of adults of these species, and descriptions are shortly to be published. Since the
classification published by Blackburn in his series of papers (1894, 1896-1901), the
genus Paropsis has been divided into nine genera. Tribe IV of the family
Chrysomelidae, subfamily Chrysomelinae, the Dicranosternini, contains
Dicranosterna, Sterromela, and Trochalodes; Tribe V, the Paropsini, contains
Paropsis, Procris, Paropsisterna, Chrysophtharta, Trachymela, and Pyrgo.
Paropsis, Chrysophtharta and Paropsisterna are therefore closely allied: this is
further apparent in a bionomical study.

Material and Methods.

Field observations and collection were carried out in Canberra, and in the
Sydney district, the species studied being found in quantity in both places. Larval
groups were studied both under natural conditions and in the laboratory; a satis-
factory breeding technique was evolved. Adults collected from the trees readily
mated and laid eggs in captivity. It was found that the adults, if not overcrowded,
could be kept readily and conveniently in Agee jars with screw-top lids, in which
were wire-gauze inlets. Fresh leaves must be provided daily. Not more than ten
beetles should be kept in each jar. Mating and oviposition took place normally.
The use of the Agee jar is a good method for obtaining records of egg batches from
individual females.

Both eggs collected in the field and eggs laid in captivity were bred through.
As long as the larvae have a sufficiency of fresh leaves they do not wander until

DD

354 BIONOMICS AND MORPHOLOGY OF TRIBE PAROPSINI,

ready to pupate. The most convenient containers for the twigs are straight glass
tubes about 4” long. Fresh leaves are necessary daily. Differences in the length
of the various stages, and in the larval behaviour, under natural and under
laboratory conditions, were small.

Both Hymenopterous (Chalcidoid) egg parasites and Dipterous (Tachinid)
larval parasites were bred out. Cocoons of some Hymenopterous larval
parasites were obtained, but the wasps did not emerge. The egg parasites
were bred in test tubes, and fed upon cut raisin. They oviposited readily. The
slight amount of work done on the egg parasites indicates ease of handling, and
ready breeding under laboratory conditions. It is always possible to obtain fresh
Paropsis eggs by keeping adults in cages with suitable food, and thus the supply
of eggs for the parasitic wasp larvae can be maintained. To obtain the Tachinids
collected final-instar larval material was placed in cages within which were
galvanized iron trays containing earth: the larvae pupated in this, and were left
undisturbed until either the beetles or the parasites emerged.

A similar procedure to that just described was followed with laboratory bred
material, the larvae dropping into the earth when ready to pupate.

Damage.

As previously mentioned, the damage to the leaves is caused by both larvae
and adults. The adult feeding on Eucalyptus leaves cuts the tissues in strips from
the edge of the leaf into the midrib, so that there results a concavity in the leaf.
The end result is a more or less regular series of notches, and, if the beetles are
numerous, the whole tree appears ragged (Pl. x, fig. 1). The adults feed alone,
never aggregated. On the other hand, the larvae feed in groups, destroying one
leaf before moving to the next. They strip the tree of its young leaves and shoots,
both apically and laterally, leaving only bare twigs (Pl. x, fig. 1). Thus the
damage caused by the adult, and that due to the larvae, are quite different in
appearance, so that it is possible, on examining a tree, to decide whether it has
been attacked by the immature, or by the mature, form.

Bionomics.

The eggs are laid on the leaves or stems of the young upper and lateral shoots
of the trees. When the egg is ready to hatch, pressure is concentrated in the
thorax, so that the hatching spines on each side of the body (Fig. 1) pierce the
chorion. By vermiform movement the spines are repeatedly drawn longitudinally
down the egg, functioning only on the backward stroke, i.e., from head to anus.
Finally two slits are cut. The larva presses on one slit to widen it, and forces its
way out. Its thorax emerges first, then its head and legs, and by clinging to the
nearest object it is able to draw out the abdomen. In about half an hour the
pigmented areas of the body have darkened. The larva then begins to feed on the
eggshells (Pl. x, fig. 2). All larvae in an egg cluster hatch out at about’the same
time, and remain feeding until the empty shells have been completely eaten. They
may remain up to two days with the egg-mass, usually less, before moving in
search of green food. The larvae are very active and capable of moving long
distances.

First-instar larvae are very gregarious (PI. x, fig. 3). In all instars feeding
takes place generally at night, in aggregations on one leaf, the larvae remaining
quiescent during the day. Final-instar larvae feed voraciously and move about
more frequently; they are responsible for a large part of the total damage. When
fully fed, they either move downwards or else drop straight from the leaf to the
ground, and wander about on the soil till a suitable point of entry is found. Before

BY D.

MARGARET CUMPSTON.

355

pupation they enter upon a motionless ‘“‘prepupal” stage, assuming a curled position

in the pupal cell (Pl. x, fig. 4), which is formed at a depth of 2”-8”.

It consists

of earth particles cemented together by a dark brown and very sticky exudation

from the anus.
the prepupa.
cast larval and pupal skins.

The pupal cell is spherical and very fragile, completely enclosing
When the adult emerges there are left behind in the broken cell the

TABLB 1.

Species. Number of eggs per batch.
Paropsis reticulata 40-100; usually 60-80.
Chrysophtharta varicollis About 40.
Paropsis maculata .. May be up to 24; usually 6.
Paropsis beata Aas 20-30.
Paropsisterna liturata .. About 12.

Paropsis obsoleta
Paropsis daegrota

Varies from 1-10; usually 6.
8 (one batch only).

Instar.
——SS Total develop-

Species. Incubation. 1 2 3 4 Prepupa. Pupa. mental period.
P. reticulata 10-14 days Gey how) oy Y/ 5-6 8-12 6-7 weeks
C. varicollis 5-6 days 5-6 4-5 3-4 5-6 4-6 7 4-5 weeks
P. maculata 4-6 days 3-5 3-5 3-4 4-5 12-14 About 5 weeks
P. beata Not known 4 3-5 4-5 4 0 10 5-6 weeks
P. liturata . Developmental cycle occupies approximately the same time as P. beata.
P. obsoleta PRM: 4 3-4 3-4 2-3 2-3 3-5 9-10 4-5 weeks
P. aegrota Total developmental period from egg to adult, about 44 weeks.

The total developmental periods cannot be compared, since the observations
were made at different periods of the year, some at Canberra, and some in Sydney.

A defence mechanism is present in the larvae of the species studied. The
only previous records in Chrysomelidae of defensive structures of the kind found
in these larvae are those of Miller (1925) and Clark (1930) for Paropsis species
in New Zealand, and Gahan (Phytodecta viminalis—London, 1922). The actual
mechanism was not described. This defensive mechanism is present in all instars
of all species examined, but in those species (e.g. P. beata) which carry a heavy
covering of bristles it is not so well developed, nor is it as readily protruded, as
in those larvae which have no protective hairs. It consists of a pair of
integumental invaginations capable of being everted by localized pressure of
body fluids between the 7th and 8th abdominal tergites (Fig. 2). A repellent
secretion is carried at the tip of the evaginated horn. Detailed anatomical and
histological descriptions will be published later.

The adults are negatively geotropic on emergence from the pupal cell. They
fly readily, making short abrupt flights from one part of the tree to another.
Spread of the insect takes place by migratory flights, which, according to Clark
(1930), occur in the heat of the day. It was found, however, that adults are most
active before midday and in the late afternoon. Copulation and oviposition take
place at these times. When quiescent the beetles usually remain on the under-
surface of a leaf. If disturbed, they drop to the ground with their legs and
antennae folded flat on the undersurface of the body; it is difficult then to
distinguish them from the background of dead leaves and twigs. When actually
handled on the leaf or stem, the beetle clings tenaciously, and is hard to dislodge.
The adult feeds both during the day and at night.

On any given tree throughout the season (November—March) the larval damage
is much more noticeable than that of the adults, which are more scattered,
dispersing by migratory flights. The last generation of imagines, after emergence,

356 BIONOMICS AND MORPHOLOGY OF TRIBE PAROPSINIT,

congregates in large numbers on the host trees, and it is at this time, after the
larvae have ceased feeding, that the damage done by the adults becomes most
conspicuous (Pl. x, fig. 1). During this period of intensive feeding masses of
fat-body are collected. Paropsis species overwinter in the adult stage, sheltering
in crevices of bark, or under stones and leaves on the ground. It is possible that
it may also overwinter as pupae or prepupae, but no field evidence in support
of this was obtained. Feeding adults were collected in Canberra as late as the
middle of May, although the larvae had disappeared finally from the field about
the beginning of April. All recent damage seen at this time was due to adults,
which were present in swarms on the trees; little migration took place. The
beetles are not gregarious, and do not overwinter in groups. Probably the final
generation of larvae enter the prepupal stage about the first week of April, and
emerge at the beginning of May. They then feed until they have accumulated
enough fat-body to last through the winter.

Adults of Paropsis obsoleta kept indoors through the winter continued to feed;
they emerged in May and laid several egg batches at the end of July. In the field
the adults were on the wing by early October; by mid-October eggs and first
and second instar larvae of Paropsis reticulata were to be found at Narrabeen,
Sydney. Paropsis species have therefore an extended season, and are absent from
the field for a few months only each year. The life-cycle ranges between four and
seven weeks (see Table ii), so that there are several generations every year;
the adults are fairly long-lived, and oviposition starts within a week to a fortnight
after emergence. Considerable overlapping of generations occurs, since each
female lays several egg-batches.

Larval Associations.

A most interesting feature exhibited by these larvae is the manner in which
they group themselves upon the leaves. This has been found to be so invariable
in certain species that it is a reliable diagnostic feature, maintained normally in
all instars, although it may be lost to a certain degree in the last. Some of the
species studied are definitely gregarious, and remain so throughout larval life,
others show loose association only, and the rest are solitary. In the first category
fall Paropsis reticulata and Chrysophtharta varicollis, the larvae of which have
distinctive and invariable types of association. Paropsis maculata, P. aegrota and
P. obsoleta have a less well-defined type of association; while Paropsis beata and
Paropsisterna litwrata are almost solitary in habit.

The larval grouping in P. reticulata consists of a more or less compact series
of overlapping rows, resting longitudinally on the leaf, the heads of the larvae
in each row touching the ventral thoracic regions of the next anterior larvae.
This arrangement gives the maximum amount of mutual protection; it is
broken while feeding, but resumed during the daytime. This larval association
is valuable for macroscopic diagnosis of the species during the first three instars.
The grouping shown in Plate x, figure 3, is not quite typical.

The larvae of Chrysophtharta varicollis arrange themselves on the leaf in
circular fashion, overlapping when numerous, with their heads all pointing toward
a central focal point: the larvae lie along the radii of the circle. In this species a
group containing larvae of all instars has been seen, indicating that the members
hatched from more than one egg-mass.

In Paropsis maculata, P. aegrota and P. obsoleta the larval association is in
pairs or more, up to many. They always form a single row, with the tip of the

BY D. MARGARET CUMPSTON. 357

abdomen of the foremost larva resting on the body (usually the thorax) of the
next following larva. When not feeding they are always found in the angle
formed by the junction of a lateral shoot with the main stem of a twig. They are
solitary in feeding habits (compare with P. reticulata and Chrysophtharta
varicollis, in which the larvae feed gregariously and when resting do not migrate
from the leaf they are attacking).

The larvae of Paropsis beata and Paropsisterna liturata are not gregarious,
and any accidental association is in pairs or in loose groups of 3 or 4. They
are more inclined to wander than the other species, particularly in the last instar,
when they are easily disturbed.

In all species, the groups frequently move from place to place, and break up
while so doing, but they always reassemble in the original formation. This larval
association is flexible enough, however, to allow grouping not only of different
instars of the same species, but of the same and different instars of different
species. This complex type of combination is only found on very small trees
where the larvae are extremely numerous.

General Morphology.

The egg is elongate-oval in shape, 1-5-3:0 mm. long and 0-6-0°8 mm. wide.
The most striking eggs are those of Paropsis reticulata, which alone have an
external ornamentation separate from the egg itself (Fig. 3): the other species
investigated have either a tuberculate shell (Pl. x, fig. 8), a slightly reticulate, or a
smooth and shining one (PI. x, fig. 11). For detailed descriptions see below. It
is worth noting here the great differences in the placing of the eggs at oviposition
by the females of the various species (see egg key). About 24 hours prior to
hatching various dark structures are visible through the chorion (Fig. 1)—ocelli,
spiracles, mandibles and tarsal claws, hairs if present (partially obscured in
tuberculate eggs), and hatching spines. Of these structures the most conspicuous
is the row of hatching spines on each side of the body.

The larvae are elongate; the abdomen is slightly curved at the posterior end.
In all species, upon hatching, the larva is colourless or pink, except for those
structures already mentioned, but darkening occurs on exposure to air; the head
capsule, prothoracic shield, legs, sclerotic areas of the 7th, 8th, and 9th abdominal
segments, and the body tubercles, all turn black. The first instar is readily
distinguished because of the paired hatching spines present on the meso- and
metathorax and first abdominal segment respectively. These are plate-like sclerotic
areas (modified body tubercles) carrying heavy protuberances with sharp cutting
edges, in species with tough-shelled eggs, or with points, in species with thin-
shelled eggs. Similar egg-hatching mechanisms occur quite commonly in other
genera (see Sikes and Wigglesworth, 1931; Van Emden, 1925; Ritterschaus, 1925).
The hatching spines are lost at the first ecdysis. The final (the fourth) instar is
the most conspicuous and striking in coloration, as a rule.

“Body tubercles” are the pigmented, round or square seta-bearing areas which
present a regular arrangement repeated on each segment, an arrangement most
apparent in the first six abdominal segments. They are not invariably present
in every instar. In addition, one species has been collected in which they are
absent from the larva at any stage. The sclerotic areas of the three terminal
abdominal segments are an outstanding feature of the larvae. They are present
in all instars of all species studied. They represent enlarged and fused tubercles
analogous with those of preceding body-segments. In general, the first two

358 BIONOMICS AND MORPHOLOGY OF TRIBE PAROPSINI,

sclerotic areas are double, that of the 9th segment single (Fig. 4). The body
tubercles occur in two distinct arrangements, the larvae of all species studied
conforming with one or other. In two species, Paropsis beata and Paropsisterna
liturata, the setae become elongated into large and conspicuous bristles. The 9th
segment always carries a pubescence. The meso- and metathorax are frequently

Prothorax.
ee

|
e al Y : r 8, aerate % dic : | 8 « Masothorax.
— clare Gr} lz TO) O @ a Q ==
e eo 4’, Mota thorax. e zl | 2 Metathorax.
(OMe On eas 16 ¢ ; sey oP.

CpUAOR a meen Ong 1
2 (Oe, 1. Se Ra sia il.
LON Me cee roller ie
bd ioe, 1V ore ead Chere lv
° el eo
ey se poe Lae
7 jee cles,
e e Vv i von eS
5 le» ee x els ie P
Eel iite ace eaulelilie kf yan. a
e 1B 9. Gap. . of- :
el vii Sap . aj
l\©@. vin. — o®, “un
Ix.

Fig. 1.—Egg of Paropsis reticulata; hatching spines visible through chorion. x 12.

Fig. 2.—Paropsis reticulata, final instar, showing horns of defence mechanism fully
extended. x 10.

Fig. 3.—Paropsis reticulata egg, showing external ornamentation. x 12.

Fig. 4.—Diagrammatic representation of tubercle pattern of Paropsis reticulata
larvae (right half of the body only).

Fig. 5.—Diagrammatie representation of the tubercle pattern of Chrysophtharta
varicollis larvae (right half of the body only).

Figs. 6, 7.—First-instar larvae of Paropsis reticulata. x 12. Note hatching spines.

Figs. 8, 9.—Final-instar larvae of Paropsis reticulata. x 4.

Fig. 10.—First-instar larva of Chrysophtharta varicollis. x 12.

Figs. 11, 12.—Final-instar larvae of Chrysophtharta waricollis. x 4.

BY D. MARGARET CUMPSTON. 359

characterized by the presence of 2 large lateral kidney-shaped tubercles, and the
prothorax by a pigmented prothoracic shield. j

The first type of tubercle arrangement is that seen in Paropsis reticulata
(Fig. 4). The pattern on the body of the larva is divided by the rows of spiracles
into a dorsal supraspiracular and lateral subspiracular parts. The latter has two
pairs of tubercles to each segment, except the prothorax, which has one pair, and
the metathorax which has three pairs. The supraspiracular region is
the distinctive part of the pattern. In the mesothorax, metathorax and first six
abdominal segments there are two transverse rows of six tubercles each on each
segment, which fall into two groups of three on each side of the median
longitudinal line. The sclerotic area of abdominal segment 7 includes all tubercles
except the outermost two of the second group of three: the sclerotic area of
abdominal segment 8 is extended to include all the tubercles of the supraspiracular
arrangement seen in the other segments. Segment 9 is completely pigmented.

Paropsis beata, P. obsoleta and Paropsisterna liturata possess a tubercle
pattern corresponding with that of P. reticulata.

The second type of arrangement of tubercles is seen in Chrysophtharta
varicollis (Fig. 5). Again, it is divided into a supraspiracular and a subspiracular
part. In the latter, there are two pairs to each segment, except the prothorax,
which has none, and the metathorax, which has three. The supraspiracular
tubercles of the meso- and metathorax are arranged in two transverse rows of
six, but on abdominal segments 1-6 the arrangement is quite distinct from that
seen in P. reticulata larvae. The supraspiracular pattern in these segments
consists of two transverse rows of eight and six respectively, and these are
grouped on each side into two sets of three separated by a single tubercle lying
in the lower row—contrast this with the arrangement in P. reticulata. Abdominal
segment 7 carries three tubercles on each side of the sclerotic area. In spite of
the close superficial resemblance of these larvae, they can be readily distinguished
by examination of the 7th abdominal segment, which in P. reticulata has two
pairs of free tubercles, while in Chrysophtharta varicollis it has three pairs.

Paropsis maculata corresponds with Chrysophtharta varicollis.

Two other species of Paropsis have been studied in the immature stages, one
of which has a tubercle pattern identical with that of Chrysophtharta varicollis.
The second species possesses no body tubercles, only the sclerotic areas of the last
three abdominal segments. Uniortunately the tubercle pattern in Paropsis aegrota
was not studied, but this species resembles closely Paropsis maculata in general
appearance and habits.

Specific Morphology of Immature Stages.

1.—Paropsis reticulata Marsh.

The eggs are deposited upright around the stem of a young shoot, forming a
compact ringed cluster, the members of which project radially, and adhere to one
another (Pl. x, figs. 5, 6). The eggs are also at times laid with the same
formation round the tip of a leaf. They are the only eggs (of the species studied)
carrying an external ornamentation, which is moulded by the ovipositor during
passage to the exterior. This ornamentation comprises four projecting horns
and four longitudinal stripes (Fig. 3). The colour of the egg varies from
almost white to mauve, the usual colour being pink, while the translucent horns
and stripes vary correspondingly from golden to purple. The latter are eaten
away by the newly-hatched larvae before the rest of the egg, and therefore may

360 BIONOMICS AND MORPHOLOGY OF TRIBE PAROPSINI,

represent a special food. The chorion is reticulated, thick and tough, and the
hatching spines of the larva are heavy and knife-like.

Outstanding features of the first-instar larvae (Figs. 6, 7) are the large
kidney-shaped tubercles on the mesothorax and metathorax. The tubercle pattern
has already been described. The setae of the body tubercles are short and only
evident microscopically, so that the larva has a smooth appearance; the general
body colour is a shiny yellow, with contrasting black pigmented areas.

The pigmentation of the body tubercles and prothoracic shield is lost during
the 2nd and 3rd instar, so that the body is a bright glistening yellow with head
capsule and terminal abdominal segments shining black, and legs and spiracles
brown. These larvae can be differentiated from those of Chrysophtharta varicollis,
which they resemble closely, during these instars, by the bright and glistening
colour and the brown spiracles (Chrysophtharta varicollis is dull cream in colour,
with black spiracles), and by the characteristic attitude assumed in grouping
(see above, p. 356). The body tubercles are rounded, not square as in Paropsis
beata.

The final-instar larva is unmistakable (Figs. 8, 9). The pigmented areas of
the body are greatly increased, and stand out sharply against the general yellow
or cream of the body. The prothoracie shield is black, but the legs are brown.
There is a median longitudinal black line extending from the prothorax to the
7th abdominal segment, and including four tubercles in each segment. There
also are large lateral black areas on abdominal segments 1-6, each partially
enclosing a white spot. The lateral tubercles enclosed in these areas are extremely
prominent and bear numerous setae. This heavy pigmentation is not unusual in
final-instar larvae—melanin formation is supposed to provide an excretory
mechanism for disposing of various toxic phenols arising in metabolism. The
typical tubercle arrangement is present: those dorsal tubercles free from the
general pigmentation stand out sharply. These larvae cannot be mistaken for
those of any other species, and are well known to collectors, since they are so
conspicuous on the tree. Paropsis reticulata is one of the commonest species found
in New South Wales. Larval association is not important as a diagnostic feature
in this instar, and may be lost to some extent.

The pupa is pale to bright yellow, with light-brown pubescence and bristles.
The terminal portion carries a ventral bilobed dark-brown shield and two rows
of small brown tubercles. The wing sheaths and legs are pallid and translucent.
The hindwings show black, and the elytra pink just prior to emergence. The
adult does not show the full pigmentation for a few days after emergence.

2—Chrysophtharta varicollis Chap.

The eggs are deposited in longitudinal, overlapping rows on the dorsal
surface of leaves at the extreme tip of the young shoots; the arrangement may
be very regular or rather irregular (Pl. x, figs. 7, 8). Hach egg is attached at one
end. The colour is white to creamy-yellow; the tuberculate chorion is very
thin and readily cut at hatching. The hatching spines of the first-instar larva
are slender and hooked.

The first-instar larva (Fig. 10) has head capsule, prothoracic shield, body
tubercles (including sclerotic areas), and legs of dull black. The general body
colour is yellowish or creamy. The second and third instars lose the pigment of
the prothoracic shield and of the body tubercles, retaining that of the head
capsule, terminal sclerotic areas and legs. The lateral tubercles of the 8th

BY D. MARGARET CUMPSTON. 361

abdominal segment, however, remain black and conspicuous in the second instar,
and in the third instar the lateral tubercles of the 7th segment are pigmented
in addition; also the ventral surface of the last three abdominal segments becomes
quite black.

The final instar is distinctive (Figs. 11, 12), with a heavy black line running
medianly down the dorsal surface, from the mesothorax or metathorax to the
7th abdominal segment. The head capsule and legs are black; the terminal areas
of the abdomen form an almost complete black area, enclosing the lateral tubercles
of the 8th segment. The subspiracular tubercles on each side of the body are
black and conspicuous, and surrounded by pigmented areas, which form two
longitudinal black lines laterally. The terminal ventral part of the abdomen is
heavily pigmented.

The pupa resembles that of Paropsis reticulata.

3.—Paropsis maculata Marsh.

The eggs are laid upright on the edge of a leaf (Pl. x, fig. 9) or on a stem
(Pl. x, fig. 10), always evenly spaced from each other, and fixed by a light-coloured
cement. They are generally so arranged that they are alternate and opposite,
placed at an angle of almost 180° to each other. The colour is purplish to bright
brown, sometimes dull green; the chorion is tough and reticulated. In this case
the body tubercles can be seen through the chorion before hatching, and also
short stout bristles.

First-instar larvae are thin and elongate (Figs. 13, 14). They are brown in
colour. The tubercles, which become noticeably larger towards the end of the
body, are black and rough, and carry short black bristles. The lateral kidney-
shaped areas of the meso- and metathorax are conspicuous. The head capsule,
legs, prothoracic shield, and sclerotic areas, as well as the tubercles, are black.
In the second instar the general body colour is greenish-brown to brown, and the
prothorax is greenish-black. There are a number of small tubercles scattered
over the body, distinct from the main pattern. The only difference in the third
instar, apart from the increase in size, is a further increase in roughness and
conspicuous appearance of the body tubercles, which are now clearly visible to
the naked eye. The terminal sclerotic areas are very rough and almost fused
into a complete shield; the dorsal tubercles of abdominal segments 4, 5 and 6
are extremely large, and the lateral subspiracular tubercles have nearly merged
into one another. The abdomen, viewed dorsally, is much wider than the thorax,
curved (almost humped) and tapering abruptly posteriorly.

In the final instar the head capsule and legs are black, the prothoracic shield
partially black only, its lateral yellow areas flecked with black specks. Below
the level of the spiracles on each side there is a broad and rough black ridge
extending from the mesothorax to the 8th abdominal segment, and including on
each segment two large black tubercles carrying numerous setae. The colour of
the meso- and metathorax and first three abdominal segments is yellowish-green,
with small but conspicuous black tubercles. Abdominal segments 4, 5 and 6 are
much enlarged, with white areas in each segment surrounding the first three
tubercles on either side of the median line; the lateral regions are black. The
terminal sclerotic areas are fused, forming a large shield. As the larva approaches
the end of the instar, the colour changes, and whole body becomes pinkish. The
meso- and metathorax and two first abdominal segments are greenish-pink; 3, 4, 5
and 6 are deeper pink, almost red laterally, with the white areas standing out on

362 BIONOMICS AND MORPIIOLOGY OF TRIBE PAROPSINI,

the dorsal surface. The colour again changes to a uniform pink which includes
the white areas, and the body tubercles become sunken and less noticeable, in the
general swelling of the body. The broad lateral bands remain black throughout.

tue eA
Wty \\ \
ite y
¥

Figs. 13, 14.—First-instar larvae of Paropsis maculata. x 10.
Figs. 15, 16.—First-instar larvae of Paropsis beata. x 10.
Figs. 17, 18.—Second-instar larvae of Paropsis beata. x 10.
Figs. 19, 20.—Third-instar larvae of Paropsis beata. x 6.
Fig. 21.—Final-instar of Paropsis beata. x 4.

Fig. 22.—Egegs of Paropsis obsoleta. x 10.

BY D. MARGARET CUMPSION. 363

The pupa is salmon-pink in colour, with light-coloured pubescence on prothorax
and abdominal segments. The usual chitinized structure at the end of the abdomen,
and two rows of small brown tubercles, are present.

4.—Paropsis beata Newm.

The dark-brown eggs are deposited in two flat rows on the dorsal surface of
the leaf, adhering by their sticky coating (Pl. x, fig. 11). The eggs are smooth
and shining, the chorion is thin and tough. The egg has a peculiar feature in the
presence of a small raised circular area with a distinct rim at the upper end of
each egg; the chorion is slightly wrinkled round the rim of this thinner area.
Through the chorion may be seen numbers of long hairs.

The larvae when just hatched are pinkish in colour, with long black bristles
(Figs. 15, 16). Later in the instar the thorax becomes green, and the abdomen
brown. The head capsule, legs, prothoracic shield, body tubercles and terminal
sclerotic areas are black. The body tubercles are square. The same colouring is
retained through the succeeding instars; with increase in length the differentiation
of thorax as clear yellow-green and abdomen as reddish-brown is more striking.
The developing larva is characterized in each instar by reduction of pigmentation
(instead of increase, which occurs in most cases) in the terminal sclerotic areas
of the 7th, 8th and 9th abdominal segments. The thoracic tubercles become less
conspicuous, and the dorsal abdominal tubercles become relatively larger and more
protuberant, but less pigmented. In the final instar they are almost continuous
across the body surface. The innermost tubercles in each segment are light brown,
the outer black. The prothoracic pigmentation also decreases in the second and
third instars (Figs. 17 and 18, 19 and 20). The lateral tubercles remain black and
prominent, and are very heavy and conspicuous in the final instar (Fig. 21). The
head capsule is black, and the legs are brown, in this instar.

In addition to the long bristles present in all instars, there is a pubescence of
fine silvery hairs arising from the tubercles, and evident even to the naked eye
(part of this pubescence has been left out of the drawings, owing to difficulty of
adequate representation). It is most conspicuous in the second and third instars.
It is of interest to note that the coloration of these larvae corresponds quite closely
with that of the Eucalypts on which they were found, and which had reddish stems
and green leaves. Protection is apparently afforded by this coloration and by the
numerous bristles, for the usual defence mechanism of the larva, though present, is
reduced in size and is not often used. In this species there is ready regurgitation
of food material from the mouth when the larva is stimulated.

The upper half of the pupa is pinkish-yellow, with pale bristles arising from
the prothorax. The abdominal portion is bright pink with a, light-coloured sparse
pubescence of long hairs arising from the lateral tubercles, the last three segments
carrying coarse light-brown bristles. The tip of the abdomen is dark brown. The
adult does not attain its black and red colours until a day after emergence.

5.—Paropsisterna liturata Marsh.

The arrangement and general appearance of the eggs is very similar to that
of P. beata. A similar raised area is present. The eggs of this species are grey
in colour with a pink tinge at the end. They are smooth and shining, with a
sticky coating, and the chorion is thin and tough. The larvae in all instars are
very similar in appearance to those of P. beata (PI. x, fig. 12). Their coloration,
the shape and arrangement of the tubercles, presence of long bristles and silvery
pubescence, and degree of larval association all correspond in the two species,

364 BIONOMICS AND MORPHOLOGY OF TRIBE PAROPSINI,

except that in the final instar none of the abdominal tubercles are black. The
pigment is completely lost in P. liturata. The pupae resemble those of P. beata.

6.—Paropsis obsoleta Oliv.

Eggs are usually laid upright in a single evenly-spaced row along the upper
surface of a leaf (Pl. x, fig. 13), sometimes on the edge (Fig. 22). The colour
of the egg is a deep livid brown, and the cement is a purplish colour. The chorion
is tough, with a slight reticulation but a general smooth appearance, and short
bristles are visible, as in Paropsis maculata.

The short stout larvae are dark brown in colour. Head capsule, legs,
prothoracic shield, sclerotic areas of the abdomen, and body tubercles are black.
The head capsule has conspicuous and comparatively long bristles; short stout
bristles project from each tubercle, while those of the terminal sclerotic areas are
long and coarse. There is nothing very distinctive in the appearance of the larva,
and it changes little in the next three instars. It is exceptional in that the final
instar is not conspicuous or different from the others in general colour or
markings; even in P. beata and P. liturata, the tubercles of the final instar are
very greatly enlarged and render this stage easily distinguishable.

7.—Paropsis aegrota Boisd.

Only one batch of these has been seen. The eggs are bright yellow and slightly
tuberculate, laid upright and circularly at the tip of a leaf (Pl. x, fig. 14).

The first-instar larvae are similar in appearance, and type of association, to
those of P. maculata. In the second and third instars a black central longitudinal
line is present, the sides of the body are black and the general body-colour is
orange. The dorsal tubercles are yellowish. Head, prothoracic shield, legs and
terminal sclerotic areas are black. In the fourth instar the prothoraciec shield is
black centrally and orange laterally; there is one pair of lateral orange spots on
each of the first seven abdominal segments. The general body-colour is a dull
orange with a black central line running from the prothorax to the 7th abdominal
segment. The tubercles are black, and become increasingly prominent towards
the end of the body. The abdomen is much broader than the head, and tapers
to a point.

In the pupa the upper half of the body is brownish-black, and the abdomen
pink. The prothoracic bristles are brownish and the pubescence of the abdomen
fine and silvery.

Tentative Keys to Eggs and Larvae.
1. Larval key.

With many of the species the final instar is so distinctive that it cannot be
mistaken for that of any other species; descriptions have already been given. The
second and third instars might be confused in one or two species, but they generally
resemble the first instar. The first instar is easily recognizable because of the
presence of the hatching spines, and this key is based on larvae of this instar.
The key is tentative only, but the tubercle arrangement on which it is based seems
to be a constant character, and its value may be substantiated by further study.

1. Tubercles of abdominal segments 2-6 inclusive, dorsal to the line of spiracles, 12
5

Teal abo brolotse Reeds Cot ik he be OG he ORI Od Onn Oo Ono Old ood rnod dine -einigmes 2

ADoser Rabdoyrnealery alZeiabopeaeabigelace —oeosnogmoge oleae Oumar soso aommonouaemod omiga ao eclde 4

2) Tubercles! TOUNGWOL (OVAL DUISULES GSOOMG fi. loiere cy oiler foeuoue) = col anele erie lelie te elie) \telil/aj/oitellviie'e)ieaelieleiniiele a
Tubercles square, with long bristles ...... Paropsis beata and Paropsisterna liturata.

Final-instar larvae in which none of the abdominal tubercles are black. Egg
batches with 12 eggs, colour of eggs grey ..........- Paropsisterna liturata.

BY D. MARGARET CUMPSTON. 365

Final-instar larvae in which the lateral supraspiracular tubercles are black. Egg
batches with 20-30 eggs, colour of eggs dark-brown ........ Paropsis beata.

3. Larvae yellow, definite and characteristic larval association .... Paropsis reticulata.
Larvae deep brown. Larval association loose .................0. Paropsis obsoleta.

4. Larvae thin and elongate, tubercles of abdominal segments 4, 5 and 6 very much
larger and more conspicuous than those of other segments. General body-colour

TOERGORIIAW ioto.o8d G:0:0:0 010 & Bid o. bid 6.0 O00, pcb 16 D.b1d. 6 dhb. bso jo Sich SIC ONO EyOnG EOI onee A Paropsis maculata.
Tubercles of those segments of the same size as the remainder. General body-colour
VG lO gliteae tren Re ray cere reiterates oe erst ee cecctte ler elieic havorauren satay sues Slaoeioney Chrysophtharta varicollis

2.—Key to eggs.

1. BHggs placed upright, non-tuberculate chorion ..................c000ccceccceers 2
IFS LENG MENS) Soe e oo one oeds OC. o pao SOO ODO DO ee OD be once Seog oe One ote Dice 5

2. ISS) EACOwEIeG! iin Ghiguark) acl womOuier 5 ooanoucagnooudouoduoduuduuduDOGoOoUnOEobOS 3
He scspacedetromucach other) Not tOouching ire. eee ls oe eee oon oe eee 4

3. Eggs with external ornamentation, forming a compact group. Colour generally pink,
IMA Ve DS MWAAES COM MTA VE incre cactenoneeitettanstehel ot oreliectc) ile eivellotaprelle belied ellie Paropsis reticulata.

Eggs without ornamentation, group not so compact. Colour yellow .. Paropsis aegrota.
AMPATrTANZEMe Mt ainda ili CAe sTOWalcneolaccei te ci cuclersicis c) cacvensheter rier cle creueuene Paropsis obsoleta.
Arrangement with eggs alternating, at 180° to each other ........ Paropsis maculata.

Hy lOFSS Wihan wloereMenay GROG coscosasccocsv0scengus00000N Chrysophtharta varicollis.
Eggs with chorion smooth, shiny and sticky. Colour deep brown .... Paropsis beata.
GOLOMMME TEE Var evens cir ete cne ee ROR sion Oo G Ae eyecare alte eheneraede Paropsisterna liturata.

Parasites.

1.—Egg parasites.

Two egg parasites were bred out (Chalcidoid, Hymenoptera). The commonest
is Neopolycystus insectifurazr Gir. (Pteromalidae), of which the male only has been
described; it was bred by the writer from P. reticulata eggs. Baoanusia albifunicle
Gir. was also obtained from P. reticulata eggs. Neopolycystus insectifurax was bred
in large numbers in the laboratory. From one original batch bred from field
material, three generations were bred through, with an average cycle from egg
to adult of 12 days. The wasps oviposit readily in the fresh egg batches supplied
to them. They did not oviposit in egg batches of Chrysophtharta varicollis.
2.—Larval parasites.

The host larva is not killed by the Tachinid parasite until the fourth instar,
or even until the prepupal stage has been reached—parasite larvae have emerged
from the host eight days after the latter has ceased feeding. A parasitized larva
can be diagnosed by the presence of a discoloured patch (caused by the “sheath”
of the parasite) on the pro- er mesothorax, usually just above the leg. In the
centre of the patch is the small hole used for air supply by the parasite. Also the
host larva appears oily and brownish in colour when the parasite larva is nearly
mature. The internal organs are completely demolished, and the parasite leaves
the empty integument by a hole cut in the thoracic ventral surface. Sometimes
pupation takes place inside the host. There may be more than one parasite per
host, but only one comes to maturity. It always lies with the anterior end directed
posteriorly in the host, respiring by means of the anal stigmata through the
thoracic aperture, and when fully grown occupies the whole body-cavity.

All attempts at obtaining parasitism of the larvae in captivity were unsuccess-
ful. The Tachinid adults bred out have not yet been identified.

Summary.

The morphology and bionomics of five species of Paropsis have been
considered. These species are Paropsis reticulata, P. maculata, P. aegrota, P. beata,
and P. obsoleta. Two other species, closely allied to Paropsis species, have also
been considered. These are Chrysophtharta varicollis and Paropsisterna liturata.

366 BIONOMICS AND MORPHOLOGY OF TRIBE PAROPSINI.

Two interesting features noted in this study are the various kinds of larval
association, and the different arrangements of the egg clusters. Drawings and
descriptions of eggs, larvae and pupae have been made, and tentative keys for the
larvae and for the eggs have been included.

Acknowledgements.

My thanks are due to Dr. A. J. Nicholson for permission to work at the
laboratories of the Division of Economic Entomology, Council for Scientific and
Industrial Research, Canberra, and for the use of apparatus there; and to Mr.
A. R. Woodhill and to Mr. A. L. Tonnoir for their interest and helpful advice.
Mr. Bryant of the British Museum kindly identified series of adults. Some of
the photographs were taken by Mr. James, photographer of the Council for
Scientific and Industrial Research, and some by Miss Burns of the Zoology Depart-
ment, University of Sydney. I am indebted to the C.S.I.R. for photographs 3, 4, 6,
8, 9, 13 and 14; and to the Zoology Department for photographs 2, 11, and 12. I
should also like to express my thanks to Mr. F. H. Taylor, who sent the material
to the British Museum for identification.

References.

BLACKBURN, Rev. T., 1894.—Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 18, pp. 220-238.

—, 1896-1901.—Revision of the genus Paropsis. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 13896,
Part i, pp. 637-693; 1897, Part ii, pp. 166-189; 1898 (July), Part iii, pp. 218-263;
1898 (November), Part iv, pp. 656-700; 1899, Part v, pp. 482-521; 1901, Part vi,
pp. 159-196.

CuLaRK, A. F., 1930.—Preliminary Account of Paropsis dilatata, Er. N.Z. Jour. Sci. and
Tech., 12.

GAHAN, C. J., 1922.—Eversible glands in Chrysomelid larvae. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond..
1921 (1922), pp. Ixvii-lxix (exhibit only).

MILER, D., 1925.—Forest and timber insects. Bull. 2, State Forest Service, New Zealand.

SIKES and WIGGLESWoRTH, 1931.—Hatching of insects from the egg, and the appearance
of air in the tracheal system. Quwart. Jour. Mic. Sci., 74, 165-192.

VAN EMDEN, F., 1925.—Zur Kenntnis der Hizaéhne der Arthropoden, insbesondere der
Coleopteren. Zeit. fur Wissens. Zool., Bd. 126, pp. 622-654.

RITTERSCHAUS, K., 1925.—Eine neue Art von Hisprengern bei Lamellicornien laryen
(Phyllopertha horticola L. und Anomala aenea De G.). Zool. Anz., 62, 31-33.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE X.

Fig. 1.—A branch damaged both by larvae and by adults. Larval damage can be
seen at the ends of the twigs, from which the young leaves have been completely stripped.

Fig. 2.—Larvae of Paropsis beata, just after hatching.

Fig. 3.—First-instar larvae of P. reticulata, showing grouping. It also shows larval
method of feeding for this species.

Fig. 4.—Paropsis reticulata. ‘‘Prepupa’”’ in cell, which is partly broken.

Figs. 5, 6.—Egeg clusters of Paropsis reticulata.

Figs. 7, 8—Egegs of Chrysophtharta varicollis. Note tuberculate chorion in figure &.

Figs. 9, 10.—Eggs of Paropsis maculata.

Fig. 11.—Egegs of Paropsis beata.

Fig. 12.—Paropsisterna liturata larvae just after hatching.

Fig. 13.—Egegs of Paropsis obsoleta.

Fig. 14.—Egegs of Paropsis aegrota.

PARE exe

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939.

opsini.

ar

of tribe I

ies

Larvae and eggs of spec

a“

5
'
r
‘ 1
z:
=
cat 4 #
3 A
bow a! ae
ae \ =
- Pa
ye ges ;
:

"

367

THE DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. X.
FAMILY CERATOPOGONIDAE.

By J. W. S. Macriz, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.E.S.
(Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8.)

(Two Text-figures. )

[Read 30th August, 1939.]

STYLOCONOPS ALBIVENTRIS (de Meij.).

Tijdschr. voor Entomol., lviii, 1915, 98.
New Guinea: Aitape, June 1938, 68 2? (S. H. Christian). New Britain: Rabaul,
no other data, 11 9? (F. H. Taylor).

FORCIPOMYIA PUNCTUM-ALBUM Kieffer.

Ann. Mus. Nat. Hung., xv, 1917, 178.

New Britain: Rabaul, no other data, 1 g, 1 9 (damaged), (F. H. Taylor).

These insects probably belong to the same species as those described by Kieffer
(1917) for which he proposed the name F’. punctum-album. The details which
should be added to his description I should prefer to defer until further material
is available for study, because the female in this collection is fragmentary. It may
be stated at once, however, that there are no definite scales, no modified tibial
spines, that the T.R. is about 0:7, and that the harpes of the male are long, slender
rods with filiform ends.

CULICOIDES sp. near MOLLIS Edw.

New Britain: Rabaul, no other data, 2 9 (F. H. Taylor).

These insects are probably the same as C. mollis, a species taken in Samoa,
and described by Edwards (1928). They differ, however, from the specimens
examined by Edwards, and from others which I have assigned to the same species
on previous occasions, in having paler, almost uniformly pale brown, legs.

CULICOIDES RABAULI, Dn. sp. Fig. 1.

A dark brown species with the wings densely clothed with macrotrichia and
characteristically adorned.

@. Length of wing about 1-4 mm., greatest breadth 0-6 mm.

Head very dark brown. Palpi dark brown, third segment much inflated about
middle, with large but relatively shallow pit; lengths of last three segments about
28, 10, and 11 units* respectively. Antennae uniformly darkish brown; segments
4-10 oval, ranging from about 10 by 9 to 9 by 7 units; 11-14 more elongate, sub-
cylindrical, sub-equal, averaging about 22 by 7 units; 15 about 31 by 7 units,
without stylet. The combined lengths of segments 4-10 and 11-15 about 65 and
118 units respectively. Thorax dark brown, the adornment consisting of large
patches, not small spots. Scutellum very dark brown, bearing 4 bristles, and
several small hairs. Wings (Fig. 1) densely clothed with macrotrichia (not shown

* The unit used is approximately 3:6 u.

368 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. X.

in diagram) which cover almost whole surface excepting radial areas, extend
practically to base between M and Cu, and are very numerous in anal cell. Adorn-
ment characteristic, as shown in diagram, the markings in the region of the fork
of Cu being particularly notable. MHalteres with white or creamy knobs. Legs
rather dark, femora and tibiae almost entirely dark brown, with only faint traces
of narrow paler bands on each side of the dark knees. T.R. about 2:2. Form of
segments and claws normal. Abdomen dark brown with a greenish tint. Sperma-
thecae two, well chitinized, obovate, sub-equal, partially collapsed in the unique
specimen but total length probably about 55, and greatest breadth 42 yu.
New Britain: Rabaul, no other data, 1 9 (F. H. Taylor).

Fig. 1.—Culicoides rabauli, n. sp. Diagram to show adornment of wing of female.
Fig. 2.—Culicoides melanesiae, n. sp. Diagram to show adornment of wing of female.

CULICOIDES MELANESIAE, nN. sp. Fig. 2.

A dark brown species with the wings densely clothed with macrotrichia and
adorned with only two distinct pale spots.

°. Length of wing about 1:2 mm., greatest breadth 0-5 mm.

Head very dark brown. Palpi dark brown, third segment without pit; lengths
of last three segments about 18, 10, and 10 units respectively. Antennae uniformly
dark brown; segments 4-10 oval to vasiform, ranging from about 10 by 7 to 12 by 6
units; 11-14 more elongate, sub-cylindrical, averaging about 17 by 5-6 units; 15
about 22 by 5-6 units, without stylet. The combined lengths of segments 4-10 and
11-15 about 85 and 89 units respectively. Thorax very dark brown, the adornment
indistinct but not composed of small spots. Scutellum very dark brown, bearing 4
bristles, and several small hairs. Wings (Fig. 2) densely clothed with macro-
trichia (not shown in diagram) which cover almost whole surface with exception
of radial areas, extend practically to base between branches of M and Cu, and are
very numerous in anal cell. Adornment as shown in diagram, consisting of two
small, clearly defined, pale spots, the one just beyond end of costa, the other
covering cross-vein. The latter spot does not extend anteriorly as far as the
margin of the wing, and covers only a small part of first radial cell. There is, too,
a suggestion of a pale spot in the anal cell at the end of the anal vein. MHalteres
with pale brownish knobs. Legs rather dark brown, with dark knees, but tibiae of
hind legs with a distinct narrow, yellowish, band at both base and apex. T.R.
about 2:2. Form of segments and claws normal; fourth tarsal segments cylindrical,
about same length as fifth. Abdomen very dark brown. Spermathecae two, well
chitinized, obovate, sub-equal, total length about 78 uw, and greatest breadth 57 wu.

New Britain: Rabaul, no other data, 1 9? (F. H. Taylor).

This insect resembles in some respects ©. flumineus Macfie, a species taken in
Malaya, but the wings are without the indistinct pale spots at the periphery
present in that species. In C. flumineus, too, the third palpal segment is furnished
with a large, shallow pit.

369

TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. III.
THE GENUS BURMITEMBIA COCKERELL.

By Consett Davis, M.Se., Lecturer in Biology, New England University College,
Armidale.*

(Six Text-figures. )

[Read 30th August, 1939.]

Genus BurMITEMBIA Cockerell, 1919.

The Entomologist (London), Vol. 52, No. 676, p. 194. Genotype, Burmitembia
venosa Cockerell, 1919, l.c., p. 195, figs. 2-3.

Cockerell’s type, in Burmese Amber (? Miocene), is in the British Museum of
Natural History (Geology Department). By the courtesy of the authorities I was
enabled to have the amber block ground down, so as to remove overlying flaws
and to reveal the structure of the insect more clearly. It is thus possible to add
certain details of the terminalia to the existing description, and to gain a truer
perspective of the morphological and evolutionary position of this very interesting
specimen. The revised generic description is as follows: Fossil Embioptera,
probably Miocene, the males winged, veins strong, R,,, simple, M simple, Cu with
two branches; several strong oblique cross-veins, and traces of numerous obso-
lescent cross-veins. Hind legs with apparently two ventral bladders on metatarsus.7
Left cercus one-segmented.

BURMITEMBIA VENOSA Cockerell 1919, l.c. Figs. 1-6.

6. Length 44 mm.; length from front of eyes to back of head, 1:0 mm.;
breadth of head at eyes approximately 1 mm.; forewing 4:3 mm. x 1:3 mm.; hind-
wing 3:5 mm. (approx.) x 1:0 mm. Original colour probably pale brown, eyes
black. Head damaged, one half behind and including eye preserved; eye relatively
large and prominent, side of head behind eye sinuous, rounded behind; posterior
border of head sinuous, with a medial swelling. Tip of maxillary palp visible,
with three subcylindrical segments, basal segments destroyed. Right mandible
(Fig. 3) with sinuous inner margin, and with a single distal incurved tooth, acute.
Left mandible not present. Base of antennae destroyed; distalia (Fig. 4)
eylindrical, slightly dilated distally. Pronotum (Fig. 1) as in recent Embioptera,
with an anterior transverse furrow dividing the notum into a small prozona and a

* Part of the work embodied in this paper was carried out when the writer held a
Linnean Macleay Fellowship in Zoology.

+ Metatarsus is used throughout this series to indicate the first segment of the tarsus,
regardless of which pair of legs is considered. It does not mean “‘tarsus of metathoracic
legs’. ‘The present usage is in accord with that previously adopted in this Order,
especially by the German workers; it is equivalent to the more modern term ‘“basitarsus’’.

KE

370 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. III,

subquadrate metazona, the latter with a trace of a longitudinal suture anteriorly.
Mesonotum apparently subtriangular. Wings (Figs. 1, 2) with main veins strong,
subcosta short, terminally curved upwards; R, terminally fused with R,,,, in the
forewing sending an additional branch to the costa; R,,; simple, reaching margin;
M simple, also reaching margin; cubitus with a strong anterior branch, not quite
reaching margin; main stem reaching margin; anal strong, longer than in most
recent Embioptera. A few strong cross-veins, and traces of others, indistinct,
fairly numerous. Venation of right wings obscured; in left forewing, strong cross-
veins from R, to Ry», (1), R2,; to Ry; (2), Rus to M (1), M to Cu, (1, oblique); in
left hindwing, strong cross-veins from R, to Ry,,; (1), Ry; to Ry, (1), Ry, to M
(2, the basal one oblique), cubital and anal areas obscured. Legs as in recent
Embioptera, the forelegs (Fig. 5) with the femur strong, the tibia weak, the first
tarsal segment dilated, ovoid, the plantar surface flattened, the second segment
small, partly embedded in the first, the third slender, dilated distally, with two
strong claws. Second legs slender, with three unmodified tarsal segments. Hind
femora (Fig. 6) incrassate; hind tarsi with two ventral bladders on first segment
(to judge by surface view; lateral view unobtainable), one on second. First
abdominal sternite partly obscured, apparently triangular, not very much reduced;
sternites II-VIII transverse, distal margins with shallow medial concavity. Ninth
sternite large, somewhat obscured, but apparently with a triangular distal process.

Burmitembia venosa Cockerell, holotype ¢@.—1. Dorsal view, x 12. 2. Ventral view
of right wings and first two legs, x 16. 3. Right mandible, viewed obliquely (from above,
inside and basad), x 16. 4. Four of distalia, x 16. 5. Tibia and tarsus of right foreleg,
yiewed laterally, x 16. 6. Hind legs and abdomen from below, x 12. Figures based on
camera lucida outlines. All setae omitted.

(Conventional lettering for venation—MXP, three distal segments of maxillary palp;
PZ, MZ, prozona and metazona of pronotum; 1C, coxa, 1TR, trochanter, 1F, femur, 1TI,
hope, Mb AN Mh lsu tarsal segments of first leg; prefixes 2 and 3 for second and
third legs; B,, B,, ventral bladders of first segment of hind tarsi; B,, ventral bladder
of second segment; I-VIII, abdominal sternites; H, ninth abdominal sternite; LC,, one-
segmented left cercus; RC,, structure probably representing first segment of right
cercus; X, area obscured by flaw in amber.)

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 371

Left cercus one-segmented, as in Metoligotoma, incurved, obtusely tapered, inner
margin with a slight medial swelling; apparently no nodules. Right cercus partly
obscured, but apparently with first segment massive, broader than long, as in
Metoligotoma, second segment wanting.

It is possible that careful examination of the terminalia, with efficient lighting
and a high-powered binocular, would reveal the structure even more fully. The
dorsal view is obscured by the right wings, but the absence of any projecting dorsal
structure in ventral view suggests that there is no elongate process to the right
hemitergite, such as is present, and visible in ventral view, in genera such as
Oligotoma, Oligembia, and Haploembia.

Discussion.

Although the exact horizon and locality of the so-called Burmese Amber is
not known, Burmitembia is of considerable evolutionary interest. It may be
assumed to be approximately Miocene in age, and te belong, broadly, to the Indo-
Malayan region. It seems to be related anatomically and geographically to a series
of recent genera comprising Hmbonycha Navas 1917, from Indo-China;
Ptilocerembia Friederichs 1923, from Sumatra and islands adjacent thereto;
Notoligotoma Davis 1936, and Metoligotoma Davis 1936, from Australia. None of
these genera seems to be directly related to Oligotoma, although Burmitembia and
Notoligotoma have R,,; simple; this resemblance to Oligotoma may be regarded
as convergent.

The five genera, Indo-Malayan to Australian in range, are characterized to a
greater or less extent by the fusion of the two segments of the left cercus in the
adult male. HEmbonycha is stated by Navas (1917) to have R,,; forked, and the
tenth tergite undivided. While the former may be true, the entirety of the tenth
tergite must be very much doubted. Navas’s figure (l.c., fig. 11) shows it as entire,
but as this figure also omits the sutures between the tenth tergite and both of the
cerci, it cannot be regarded with much confidence. The number of hind metatarsal
bladders is not given. Ptilocerembia is closely related to Notoligotoma, as
suggested previously (Davis, 1938, p. 267, footnote 2), but has R,,, forked; the
number of tarsal bladders is not known. The derivation of Notoligotoma from
Ptilocerembia seems to be concerned mainly with the loss of R;. The derivation of
Metcligotoma from Burmitembia could be accomplished by little more than the loss
of the wings; the structure of the hemitergites in Burmitembia is not known, but
they appear to be without long appendages (cf. above), as they are in
Metoligotoma. On the other hand, Ptilocerembia and Hmbonycha appear to be
derived from an ancestor more generalized than Burmitembia, with R,,; forked.

The possibly direct ancestral relationship of Burmitembia to Metoligotoma
further strengthens the idea that Metoligotoma or its ancestors reached Australia
from the Indo-Malayan region, and agrees with the modern concept of this
element of the Australian fauna and flora having reached Australia from the
north and west when the Australian and Oriental massifs made contact in Miocene
times. The discovery of an undescribed recent species of Metoligotoma from North
Queensland (Townsville), with the left cercus very similar to that of Burmitembia,
is in line with this concept. Burmitembia seems to be the only known Tertiary
fossil from the Indo-Malayan region which can reasonably be regarded as directly
ancestral to a recent type apparently confined to the Australian region.

The structure of Burmitembia, and especially of its left cercus, strengthens
the modern concept that insects were much more highly evolved at any one period

372 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. III.

of geological time than has been supposed or allowed in the past. It also argues
against the supposed recency of Metoligotoma (Davis, 1938).

Acknowledgements.

I am particularly indebted to the Keeper, Geology Department, British Museum
of Natural History, for permission to prepare and examine the type, and to Mr.
R. H. Spires, of the same department, who performed the delicate operation of
grinding down the amber block in which it is embedded, in such a way as to
reveal the more important details of its structure.

List of References.

COCKERELL, T. D. A., 1919.—Two interesting Insects in Burmese Amber. The Hntomolo-
gist (London), Vol. 52, No. 676.

Davis, C., 1936.—Studies in Australian Embioptera, Part I. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.,
Vol. Ixi, Pts. 5-6.

, 1938.—Studies in Australian Embioptera, Part III. Jbid., Vol. lxili, Pts. 3-4.

FRIEDERICHS, K., 1923.—Okologische Beobachtungen tiber Embiidinen. Capita Zoologica,
Deel. 2, Afi. 1.

NavAs, L., 1917.—Névroptéres de l’Indo-Chine. Insecta (Revue illustrée d’Entomologie,
Rennes), Nos. 73-84.

TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. IV.
THE GENUS CLOTHODA ENDERLEIN.

By Consett Davis, M.Sce., Lecturer in Biology, New England University College,
Armidale.*

(Twenty-five Text-figures. )

[Read 30th August, 1939.]

Genus CLoruops Enderlein 1909.

Zool. Anz., 35, p. 176. Genotype, Embia nobilis Gerstaecker, 1888, Mitt. naturw
Ver. Neuvorpommern und Riigen, xx, p. 1.

Enderlein’s generic concept is based on specimens from Fonteboa, Brazil, and
from an unspecified locality in Brazil, which he referred to Gerstaecker’s species.
The generic concept is clear, but some doubt might have been expressed as to the
specific identity of Enderlein’s specimens with Gerstaecker’s name; Gerstaecker’s
description can hardly be termed specifically recognizable, and his type locality
(Itaituba, Brazil) is nearly a thousand miles from Fonteboa.

In the M‘Lachlan Collection (British Museum of Natural History) there is a
dried male carrying the following old manuscript labels: ‘Itaituba’; ‘Embia nobilis
Gerst.’. It probably belongs to the series from which Gerstaecker’s description was
made. The slight differences between Enderlein’s figures and this specimen may be
attributed to individual variation and to the personal equation in the method of
figuring, so that Enderlein’s specimens appear to be rightly referable to
Gerstaecker’s name.

The generic concept is enlarged to include Antipaluria HEnderlein 1912
(genotype, A. aequicercata Enderlein 1912), as forms linking the two genera
militate against the retention of both. The genus may be re-defined as follows:

Medium to large Neotropical Embioptera, the males with the following
characters: Winged, R,,, forked (rarely simple as an individual venational
aberration), M simple, cubitus with 2-4 branches; hind tarsi with two ventral
bladders on first segment, one on second. ‘Tenth abdominal tergite entire or
divided; if divided, processes of hemitergites little prominent. Cerci symmetrical,
each with two subcylindrical segments, without nodules.

The belief of Krauss (1911) that Olyntha brasiliensis Griffith and Pidgeon,
1832 (ex Gray MS.), is congeneric with this series, is shown to be incorrect by
examination of the type, which has the first segment of the left cercus clavate
and nodulose, and the processes of the hemitergites free and prominent.

CLOTHODA NOBILIS (Gerstaecker 1888). Figs. 1-7.

Embia nobilis Gerstaecker, 1888, l.ce—Olothoda nobilis (Gerstaecker),
Enderlein, 1909, L.c.

* Part of the work embodied in this paper was carried out when the writer held a
Linnean Macleay Fellowship in Zoology.

ww
=]
He

TAXONOMIC NOTES ON TILE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. IV,

6 (itaituba, Brazil; M‘Lachlan Collection, British Museum): Length
(relaxed) 17 mm.; head, length 3:1 mm., breadth 2-5 mm.; forewing 11:2 mm. x 3-1
mm.; hindwing 10:0 mm. x 3:1 mm. Colour (dry) very dark brown, wings dark
smoky brown, with hyaline longitudinal striae and hyaline areas at cross-veins;
venation dark brown; eyes black. Head (Fig. 1) large, eyes of medium size,
prominent, sides behind eyes converging slightly, hind margin with median
swelling. Antennae incomplete, the longer (the left) with 11 segments. Mandibles
(Fig. 2) massive, a blunt tooth on inner margin nearer to apex than to base, the left
with three, the right with two subacute incurved teeth terminally. Wings (Fig. 3)
with Se reaching to nearly one-third the length of the wing; R, strong, not
confluent with R,,,; R,,, forked, fork longer than stem; in the right forewing
R, is shortly forked terminally, in the left forewing the fork of R,,, coalesces
again, the stem, separated portion, and recoalesced portion being all subequal in
length. M simple. Cubitus with anterior branch (Cu,.) giving off one posterior
branch, except in the right hindwing, where two such branches are given off
pectinately. One anal vein, relatively long. Cross-veins fairly numerous. Hind
legs (Fig. 4) with femora somewhat swollen, first tarsal segment with two ventral
bladders, one medial, one terminal; second segment with one terminal bladder.
Claws long, curved. First abdominal sternite (Fig. 5) subtriangular, relatively
large. Terminalia (Figs. 6, 7) with ninth tergite (9) transverse, anterior part
more heavily sclerotized; tenth tergite (10) transverse, with a more membraneous
medial area anteriorly; posteriorly, obtuse, curved upwards and forwards, distally
bearing a more or less membraneous epiproct. Cerci symmetrical, each with two
subcylindrical segments, the first thicker and shorter.

The homologies of the ventral structures (Fig. 7) can be understood only by
consideration of the larval structure, as found throughout the Order, and also
retained in the adult female (cf. Fig. 16). In the immature stages, the ninth
sternite is subrectangular, the tenth divided by a longitudinal suture to two
hemisternites (XL, XR). The cerci are separated from the hemisternites by
annular cercus-basipodites, which may be vestiges of the eleventh abdominal
segment, or basal segments of truly three-segmented cerci.

Although the ontogenetic stages in Clothoda have not been followed, it would
appear that the adult structure is attained by the outgrowth of the ninth sternite
(1X) to a process (IXP), on the dorsal side of which is situated the genital
aperture. The hemisternites of segment 10 are forced to the sides by this out-
growth, and in Clothoda remain as distinct structures (XL, XR), the cercus-
basipodites also remaining distinct (LCB, RCB). In other genera the hemi-
sternites and cercus-basipodites appear to form a composite structure, different on
the two sides, and in common referred to as the cercus-basipodites of the adult.
The ontogenetic process has been followed in the Australian genera (unpublished).
It seems convenient to retain the term cercus-basipodite in genera other than
Clothoda, remembering that the term covers a composite structure, including,
perhaps in some cases as its most prominent part, the hemisternite of the tenth
abdominal segment.

It is clear that, in the above interpretation, the genital aperture occupies its
characteristic Hexapod position, immediately posterior to the ninth sternite, in
the male. The tenth, and possibly the eleventh, sternites having moved laterad,
and somewhat forwards, without becoming morphologically anterior to the genital
aperture.

In CG. nobilis the process of the ninth sternite (IXP) is almost symmetrical
(possibly entirely symmetrical, as figured by Enderlein (1912, fig. 6), and distorted

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 375

Figs. 1-7.—Clothoda nobilis (Gerstaecker), Itaituba, Brazil, co.

1. Head from above, x 6. 2. Mandibles from above, x 11. 38. Right fore- and hind-
wing, x 6. 4. Right hind-leg from the side, x 11. 5. First two abdominal sternites and
adjacent structures, x 6. 6. Terminalia from above, x 15. 7. Terminalia from below,
x 6,

Figs. 8-12.—Clothoda intermedia, n. sp., holotype ¢&, Cardcas, Venezuela.
8. Head from above, x 15. 9. Left forewing, x 8. 10. Hind tarsus viewed laterally,
x 15. 11. Terminalia from above, x 15. 12. Terminalia from below, x 15.

376 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. IV,

in the specimen shown herein in Fig. 7). The process is obtuse, weakly bilobed.
The hemisternites (XL, XR) are massive, obtuse, and partly membraneous, the
cercus-basipodites (LCB, RCB) small and distinct, annular. The structures
referred to as hemisternites under the above interpretation are labelled cercus-
basipodites by Enderlein (l.c., figs. 5, 6).

Gerstaecker’s dimensions for the male are: Length 13-14 mm.; forewing
10-12 mm. Enderlein’s specimens were of the following dimensions: Length
13-14 mm.; forewing 104-114 x 24-2 mm.; hindwing 9-10 x 3 mm. (approx.).
Enderlein (l.c., fig. 4) figures the cubitus as 4-branched in the right forewing,
3-branched in the right hindwing, the same range of variation noted above.

9. See Gerstaecker (1888) and MEHnderlein (1912). Not important
taxonomically.

CLOTHODA INTERMEDIA, Nn. sp. Figs. 8-16.

6. Length (dry) 16 mm.; head, length 2-6 mm., breadth 2:1 mm.; forewing
12-0 mm. x 2-8 mm.; hindwing 10-5 mm. x 2-8 mm. Colour as in C. nobilis, a little
paler. Head (Fig. 8) as in @. nobilis, more smoothly rounded behind. Antennae
incomplete. Wings (Fig. 9) with venation similar in general distribution to C. nobilis;
R, confluent with R.,, in right forewing only; R,,, forked, without anomalies, fork
longer than stem; M simple. Anterior branch of cubitus (Cu,,.) forked only once (i.e.,
cubitus 3-branched). In the left forewing a second anal vein is present, very small,
connected to first anal vein by a cross-vein. Hind tarsi (Fig. 10) as in C. nobilis.
Terminalia (Figs. 11-12) with tenth tergite divided, hemitergites separated by
more membraneous areas; right hemitergite (10R) produced inwards in a flat
process, free distally; left hemitergite (10L) produced backwards and inwards to
a blunt process (10LP), longer than thick, termination free, curved. Cerci as in
C. nobilis; tenth hemisternites and cercus-basipodites more reduced than in
C. nobilis, apparently slightly asymmetrical, left hemisternite larger than right.
Process of ninth sternite (IXP) obtuse, not bilobed.

Locality: Caracas, Venezuela.

The above description is from a single dried male, the holotype, in the British
Museum (coll. Dr. Ernst). In the same museum are three alcoholic specimens,
1 g, 2 9, which appear to be referable to the same species. Unfortunately they bear
no data of locality, etc., and cannot therefore be used as types. On account of
their better preservation, and the presence of females, full details are given.

6. Length 17 mm.; head 2:8 mm. x 2:2 mm.; forewing 12:0 mm. x 2:8 mm.
hindwing 10-5 mm. x 2-8 mm. Colour, head, legs and wings as in the type, R,,;
similarly forked, cubitus variable; in the forewings, its anterior branch (Cu,,)
has two posterior pectinate branches, i.e., the system is 4-branched; in the right
hindwing, Cu, has one posterior branch, and is itself shortly bifid terminally, the
system being 4-branched; in the left hindwing, Cu,, has only one posterior branch,
which is itself bifid, the system being again 4-branched. First abdominal sternite
(Fig. 13) similar to that of ©. nobilis. Structure of terminalia (Figs. 14-15)
more clearly visible than in the type, due to method of preservation, but apparently
of the same original structure.

®. Length 19-20 mm.; head, length 2-8 mm., breadth 2-6 mm. Legs and first
abdominal sternite as in the male. Colour a little paler than the male. Terminalia
(Fig. 16) as in all female Embioptera, symmetrical, the tenth sternite cleft longi-
tudinally to two subtriangular hemisternites (XL, XR); the tenth tergite (10)
entire, subtriangular, obtuse posteriorly; the cercus-basipodites annular, produced
a little postero-dorsally in flat plates.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. od

CLOTHODA URICHI (de Saussure 1896). Figs. 17-25.

Embia urichi de Saussure, J. Trinidad Club, 2, No. 12 (Feb. 1896); H. whricht
de Saussure, Mitt. Schweiz. entomol. Ges., Bd. 9, Hft. 8 (July 1896); Antipaluria
urichi (de Saussure), Enderlein, 1912, Coll. de Selys-Longchamps, fasc. 3, p. 64.

(The species was named after Mr. F. W. Urich, and the correct spelling,
‘urichi’, which, in fact, appeared first, must be retained. De Saussure apparently
wrote the name ‘uhrichi’ in error (as it is written on the type labels), and Urich,
then Secretary of the Trinidad Club, probably corrected the manuscript.)

The following description is from one of de Saussure’s co-types, from the
Muséum d’Histoire naturelle, Geneva:

6. Length 11 mm.; head, length 2-0 mm., breadth 1-5 mm.; forewing 8 mm. x
2:3 mm.; hindwing 8 mm. x 2-5 mm. General colour as in the two preceding species.
Head (Fig. 17) as in C. intermedia, sides converging more behind. Mandibles as
in C. nobilis, but more slender. Antennae: left with 19, right with 20 segments,
last four cream in each case. Wings (Fig. 18) -with Se short, R, not confluent
with R.,;, R,,; simple, except in the left forewing (figured) where it is shortly
forked. M simple; cubitus with only two branches (i.e., Cu,. simple), anal short.
Hind tarsi (Fig. 19) as in two preceding species. Terminalia (Figs. 20, 21) with
dorsal structures much as in C. intermedia, the ventral structures more
symmetrical, the hemisternites fused to the sides of the ninth sternite and its
process, the cercus-basipodites annular, each with a posterior tapered process
embedded in membrane.

©. See de Saussure (1896a, b).

The simplicity of R,,, in the co-type seen by me appears to be an individual
aberration. De Saussure’s description and figure show it clearly forked (cf.
Fig. 22), a condition which may be taken as the normal for his series. In the
specimen described below it is also clearly forked in all wings.

De Saussure gives the length of the forewing as 10 mm. His statement
(1896b) that the cross-veins are not white-bordered appears to be incorrect; it may
have been due to the incidence of the light when the specimen was examined.

In the Museum of Comparative Zoology (Harvard University) there is a male
labelled ‘Port of Spain, Trinidad’, and three females labelled ‘Port of Spain,
Trinidad, July 8/20, Wheeler’. These are referable to C. wrichi. Port of Spain
may be taken as the type locality of C. urichi, as Urich, who collected the types,
was stationed there at the time.

As these specimens were preserved in alcohol, extra details were obtainable
which could net be determined from de Saussure’s dried types. The male (Figs.
23-25) was dark brown, the head and thoracic nota a little paler (golden-brown) ;
length 12 mm.; forewing, length 10 mm.; head, length 2:1 '‘mm., breadth 1:8 mm.
R,,; forked in all wings. First abdominal sternite (Fig. 23) subtriangular, relatively
large. Otherwise as in the co-type described above, except that the right hemi-
sternite of the tenth abdominal segment seems to be much reduced or aborted;
these structures may be slightly variable intraspecifically in this genus. The first
abdominal sternite in the females is of the same structure as in the male.

It is clear that in de Saussure’s figure (1896), fig. 11) of the male terminalia,
the structure marked as the ninth tergite is actually the eighth, and that labelled
the tenth is in fact the ninth tergite plus the hemitergites of the tenth segment,
with the sutures omitted. De Saussure’s description appears to have been made
from the dry material in an unprepared state.

378 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. Iv,

Figs. 138-16.—Clothoda intermedia, n. sp., locality unknown, 13-15, co.

13. First two abdominal sternites and adjacent structures, x 7. 14. Terminalia from
above, x 17-5. 15. Terminalia from below, x 17:5. 16. 2 of above: Terminalia from
below, x 17-5.

Figs. 17-21.—Clothoda wurichi (de Saussure), co-type o, Trinidad.

17. Head from above, x 17:5. 18. Right forewing, x 7 (three other wings have R,,,
entirely simple). 19. Hind tarsus viewed laterally, x 17:5. 20. Terminalia from above,
x 17-5. 21. Terminalia from below, x 17:5.

Fig. 22.—Clothoda urichi (de Saussure), <, left forewing after de Saussure (1896b), x 3.
Figs. 23-25.—Clothoda urichi (de Saussure), o, Port of Spain, Trinidad (specimen in the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University).

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 379

CLOTHODA FLORISSANTENSIS (Cockerell 1908).

Embia florissantensis Cockerell, Amer. Journ. Science, Series 4, 25, p. 230
(fig. 4), p. 231 (description).

Cockerell’s specimens are from the Miocene of Florissant, Colorado, U.S.A.
Until the types can be re-examined, little can be said of this species except
concerning its size and venation.

6. Length 123 mm.; head, length c. 2 mm.; forewing 11 mm. x 3 mm.; hind-
wing 9 mm. x 3 mm. Venation as in Clothoda urichi, R,,; forked.

Cockerell referred his species to Hmbia, believing that it was a tropicopolitan
recent genus. Actually it is a genus with a Mediterranean distribution, ranging
to South Africa; species from the New World, which have been referred to Hmbia,
are not actually congeneric with the genotype, H. savignyi Westwood. It would
therefore be misleading to retain Cockerell’s species in Hmbia, although its
structure is not sufficiently well known to be certain to which recent Neotropical
genus it belongs, if to any. I have provisionally selected Clothoda as being the
most primitive, and thus more likely to resemble a Miocene fossil, and also
because of Cockerell’s reference to de Saussure’s species.

There is no justification for Krauss’s reference (1911) of Cockerell’s species to
Oligotoma; it has R,,, clearly forked in the latter’s figure (l.c.).*

Note—EHmbia kotzbaueri Navas (1925) may possibly be referable to Clothoda;
it is certainly not referable to Hmbia Latreille, which does not occur in America.
Navas’s description does not allow any certain decision on the subject, and his
figures are notoriously inaccurate. The type (0) is recorded as in the Navas
Collection, presumably in Spain, and may therefore be no longer extant. The
species may be listed as a species inquirenda, and if the type is lost, it must be
deleted as unrecognizable; it is unlikely that further material from the type
locality (Nictheroy, near Rio Janeiro, Brazil) would establish it, as it is probable
that several species (of various genera) occupy this territory, as is the case in
other parts of South America.

Discussion.
Enderlein (1912, p. 63) erected the genus Antipaluria, genotype A. aequicercata
HWnderlein (l1.c.), from Colombia; he referred Hmbia wurichi to Antipaluria, his
knowledge of this species being based on de Saussure’s meagre description.

* Since the completion of this paper, I have received details of the type (Univ.
Colorado) from Mr. ©. S. Ross, cf the University of California. He writes: “The details
of the terminalia are absolutely impossible to make out. . .. Furthermore, it appears
that someone has tampered with the specimen, in that a chip has been removed from
just behind the expanded pair of wings, and may have thus removed the terminalia... .
Cockerell’s photograph (Amer. Journ. Sci., (4), 25, 230) cannot be improved.’’ Mr. Ross
enclosed a sketch of the wing, showing R,,. clearly forked (a condition he notes as
common to fore- and hindwing). Cu,, appears to be simple.

It is advisable to retain the species in Clothoda, as discussed above.

23. First two abdominal sternites and adjacent structures, x 11-5. 24. Terminalia
from above, x 11:5. 25. Terminalia from below, x 11:5.

All figures, except Fig. 22, based on camera lucida outlines. Setae omitted except
in Figs. 4, 10 and 19. Conventional lettering for venation.

MS, metasternum; J, II, first two abdominal sternites; 8, 9, abdominal tergites; 10,
undivided tenth abdominal tergite; 10L, 10R, left and right hemitergites of tenth
abdominal segment; 10LP, 10RP, processes of same; IX, ninth abdominal sternite;
IXP, process of same; XL, XR, left and right hemisternites of tenth abdominal segment ;
LCB, RCB, left and right cercus-basipodites; LC,, LC,, RC,, RC,, first and second
segments of left and right cerei respectively.

380 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. IV.

A. aequicercata was based on a single male (Mus. Berlin), which had the
terminalia missing, except apparently the left cercus, which was as in A. wurichi
(Clothoda urichi). Enderlein differentiated A. aequicercata from A. urichi because
it had white-bordered cross-veins, de Saussure having wrongly stated this to be
inapplicable to his species.

On the existing description, there is nothing to lead us to suppose that
Enderlein’s species differs from de Saussure’s. In view of the different locality,
I list Clothoda aequicercata as a species inquirenda; the examination of complete
specimens of this generic series from Colombia may establish the species, or may
synonymize it with C. wrichi. Such a damaged specimen should never have been
described, let alone as genotype of a new genus.

I have no hesitation in referring de Saussure’s species to Clothoda, i.e., in
synonymizing Antipaluria with Clothoda. The Venezuelan species C. intermedia
forms a perfect link between C. nobilis, from Brazil, and C. wrichi, from Trinidad.
C. intermedia has the robust build, and 3—4-branched cubitus, of C. nobilis, but the
divided tenth tergite and slightly asymmetrical terminalia of C. urichi. The
division of the tenth tergite in C. intermedia and C. urichi is not as marked as in
other genera, the central part of the tergite being somewhat membraneous (as noted
incipiently in C. nobilis), the sclerotized hemitergites being largely, with their
processes, embedded in this membrane, or merely a continuation of the membrane
somewhat differentiated. The cerci and ventral structures agree sufficiently closely
throughout the genus, and are far removed from these structures in other genera.

It is difficult to understand why Enderlein referred Antipaluria to his sub-
family Embiinae, rather than to the Clothodinae, with which it agrees far more
closely in his key to the subfamilies.

Key to the Species of Clothoda (c¢).

> MIOCeNes He COlLOrad Oi7 = ircreteuc ete ste ee Sos, esas ie de aernca ht seta mepeee mean eens florissantensis (Ck11.)
Lexerereraiitg aSObteloy boc OORh “Aeididia a Gaieidin Mtieeo Cee eto He oe REE ai b oOo oman ou Sem bis 2
Cubitus 2-branched; R,,, forked, occasionally simple; length 12 mm. or less. Trinidad
ARPES ot UR TEME Sted Ses eG. riot CRC CMCC OME RPC REMC G .O.nc Oho cceeencR Ea OCHA CHCA NERC ILC urichi (Sauss.)
Cubitus) 3—4-pranchedi- clearly tonked: lene tings jmaride 107s YU seen telene nel 3
Tenth tergite divided, the hemitergites separated by membraneous areas. Venezuela
Pigs b eee es ay oy 2: mal ones kes Ral eden oh Ms carahione Wectece reper een on owed pc a ARO ict omcpenrse rs te intermedia, n. sp.
Tenth tergite entire, sclerotization continuous from side to side. Brazil ............
es PoP SY ap nears fe hs lets Ne UE oe Hay MSU ours retest erie valve a emethe hc ciGr avails merch ate wamemae hegre hegre wre nobilis (Gerst.).

bo

Co

List of References.

COCKERELL, T. D. A., 1908.—Descriptions of Tertiary Insects. Amer. Journ. Science,
Series 4, 25.

ENDERLEIN, G., 1909.—Die Klassifikation der Embiiden, nebst morphologischen und
physiologischen Bemerkungen, besonders tiber das Spinnen derselben. Zool. Anz., 35.

, 1912.—Embiidinen, in Coll. de Selys-Longchamps, fase. 3.

GERSTAECKER, A., 1888.—Charakteristik einer Reihe bemerkungswerter Orthopteren. Mitt.
naturw. Ver. Neuwvorpommern und Riigen, Jg. 20.

GRIFFITH, W., and PIDGEON, W., 1832.—The Animal Kingdom arranged in Conformity
with its Organization, by the Baron Cuvier, with Supplementary Additions to Each
Order. Vol. 15 (Vol. 2 Insects). London: Whittaker Treacher and Co. (Plates
issued separately, 1831.)

Krauss, H. A., 1911.—Monographie der Embien. Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23. Stuttgart.

Dn SaussuRE, H., 1896a.—Two Embiidae from Trinidad. Journ. Trinidad Club, Port of
Spain, Vol. 2, No. 12 (February 1896).

———., 1896b.—Note sur la Tribu des Embiens. Mitt. Schweiz. entomol. Ges., Bd. 9,
Hft. 8 (July 1896).

NavAs, L., 1925.—Neuropteren aus Brasilien. Mitt. der Miinchner Entomol. Gesellschaft,
15.

381

TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. V.
THE GENUS DONACONETHIS ENDERLEIN.

By Consett Davis, M.Sc., Lecturer in Biology, New England University College,
Armidale.*

(Five Text-figures. )

[Read 30th August, 1939.]

DoNACONETHIS Enderlein 1909. ;

Zool. Anz., 35, p. 176. Genotype, Donaconethis abyssinica Enderlein, 190! 5 deSop
| oe Ore

Enderlein’s generic concept depends on the forking of the media. Since
venational aberrations are moderately frequent in the Order Embioptera, specimens
rightly referable to Donaconethis may occur with M simple, as a venational
anomaly, and specimens of other genera may likewise, in exceptional cases, have
M forked (cf. Navas 1923, concerning Embia ramosa). It is consequently desirable
to establish the genus on the more reliable characters of the terminalia, and at the
same time to give a more complete description of the genotype.

The following description is based on a specimen (4) in the Museo Civico di
Storia Naturale, Genoa, labelled ‘Bogos, Keren; 1870, Dr. Beccari’. It had been
identified as Donaconethis abyssinica by Navas, who (1928) has given a brief and
inaccurate description of the venational anomalies, without detailing the structure
of the terminalia. Hxamination of the terminalia showed the species to agree with
Enderlein’s description of the type (Berlin Zool. Museum), which is from Asmara,
Hritrea, only some 50 miles from Keren. The genus may therefore be re-defined
as follows:

Robust Embioptera, the males with the following characters: Winged, with
R,,, forked, M with a tendency to fork, not always manifest. Hind tarsi with one
metatarsal bladder. Terminalia with tenth tergite completely cleft longitudinally;
right hemitergite massive, with a posterior tapered process directed downzvards,
and an internal flap-like process. Process of left hemitergite bifid. First segment
of left cercus with inner margin produced into two marked lobes, each with 3-5
very large spiniform toothlets directed forwards.

The genus is differentiated from Hmbia and Rhagadochir, apart from the
variable character of venation, by the structure of the first segment of the left
cercus, with its two lobes bearing few but very large toothlets. It is different from
Hmbia, but similar to Rhagadochir (probably by convergence), in having the
process of the left hemitergite forked. It agrees with Dihybocercus severini
Enderlein (1912), the genotype of Dihybocercus Enderlein, from the Congo, in the
two lobes of the first segment of the left cercus, which, however, according to

* Part of the work embodied in this paper was carried out when the writer held a
Linnean Macleay Fellowship in Zoology.

382 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. V,

Enderlein’s figure, carry numerous small teeth in this species. Dihybocercus
spinosus Navas 1931, also from the Congo, is more closely related to Donaconethis
than is Dihybocercus severini. The structure and dentition of the first segment of
the left cercus in Dihybocercus spinosus are strongly reminiscent of Donaconethis,
and other parts of the terminalia (process of left hemitergite; posterior process of
right hemitergite; hypandrium; left cercus-basipodite) also show general resemb-
lance. The two hind metatarsal bladders, simple media (in the unique specimen),
and right cercus-basipodite of Dihybocercus spinosus suggest that it should be
placed in a new genus, as they differentiate it from Donaconethis (in the present
sense) just as the dentition of the left cercus differentiates it from Dihybocercus.

Dihybocercus berlandi Navas 1922, and D. gromieri Navas 1934, together with
another undescribed species from West Africa congeneric with the above, are related
neither to Dihybocercus nor to Donaconethis. A new generic name is required
here also.

DONACONETHIS ABYSSINICA Enderlein, 1909, l.c. Figs. 1—5.

3 (Keren, Eritrea; Genoa Museum). Length 10-9 mm.; head, length 3-1 mm.,
breadth 2-5 mm.; forewing 9 mm. x 3 mm.: hindwing § mm. x 3 mm. General
colour very dark brown. Head (Fig. 1) large, eyes small, sides of head behind
eyes at first slightly divergent, rounded behind. Antennae incomplete. Wings
(Fig. 2) with numerous cross-veins; Sc reaching to one-quarter the length of the
wing; R, confluent distally with R,.,,; R,,; forked, fork longer than stem; R,; again
forked in left hindwing (the anterior branchlet fusing distally with R,), and very
shortly forked in right hindwing. M simple in right forewing, shortly forked in
left forewing and right hindwing, more clearly forked in left hindwing. Cubitus
two-branched, with a vestige of a third branch in left hindwing and right forewing
(cf. Enderlein’s figure, 1912, fig. 7, of the right forewing of the type), and a
prominent third branch in the left forewing. Metatarsus of hind legs with only
the terminal ventral bladder, as in the African species of Hmbia. Terminalia
(Figs. 3-5) with tenth tergite completely cleft, right hemitergite (10R) posteriorly
produced downwards and inwards to a tapered process (10RP,), the parts internal
and anterior to which are more membraneous. Inner margin of 10R with a
sclerotized flap (10RP.), as in Hmbia, separated from 10R except posteriorly by
membrane; free edge of 10RP, roughened posteriorly. Left hemitergite (10L)
massive, inner margin produced backwards to a broad flat process (10LP),
terminally curved out and acute, roughened on internal edge, with a subterminal
broad, flat, acutely-ending process latero-dorsally to the left. In this detail, the
specimen differs from Enderlein’s figure and description of the type, which
indicate no lateral lobe for 10LP; it is probable that it has been broken or over-
looked in the type. Second segments of both cerci broken; first segment of left
cercus (LC,) very characteristic, inner margin dilated subterminally in a rounded
lobe, with 4-5 relatively large teeth curved slightly forwards, acute; LC, with a
more dorsal basal lobe, rounded, with 3-4 similar teeth. First segment of right
cercus (RC,) subcylindrical. Ninth sternite (H) produced backwards from the
right-hand side to an obtuse process (HP); space between HP and base of LC,
occupied by left cercus-basipodite (LCB), which has a long curved acute process
directed downwards and outwards.

Enderlein’s dimensions of the type male are: Length 11 mm., forewing 8 mm.
His description and figures (1909, 1912) tally with the above except for the
structure of the process of the left hemitergite.

9. v. Enderlein, l.c. Not of taxonomic importance.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 383

Donaconethis abyssinica, 3, Keren, Eritrea.

7

1. Head, x 7. 2. Wings, x 7 (conventional lettering for venation). 38. Terminalia
from above, x 15. 4. Terminalia from above, and slightly to the left and behind, x 15.
>. Terminalia from below, x 15.

9, ninth abdominal tergite; 10L, 10R, left and right hemitergites of tenth abdominal
segment; 10LP, process of 10L; 10RP,, 10RP,, posterior and inner processes of 10R;
LC,, RC,, first segments of left and right.cerci (second segments missing) ; LCB, RCB,
left and right cercus-basipodites; H, HP, ninth sternite and its process.

All figures based on camera lucida outlines.

Note.—The genus Donaconethis must at present be considered monotypic.
Krauss (1911) rightly classes D. ehrenbergi Enderlein 1909 (Zool. Anz., 35, p. 178)
as a doubtful species. The type male (Berlin Zool. Museum), from Hgypt, has the
terminalia missing. Its exact locality is not known. The species is likely to
remain unrecognizable; it should never have been described. It may represent a
specimen of some species of Hmbia with a venational aberration; its size, colour,
and the form of the head, suggest H. savignyi Westwood. There is no evidence
that it is referable to Donaconethis in the present sense. Enderlein, in his
‘Nachtrag’ (1912, pp. 107-108, fig. 70) describes terminalia which may belong to
his type; according to his figure, these terminalia are exactly similar to those of
Hmbia savignyi Westw.

List of References.

FENDERLEIN, G., 1909.—Die Klassifikation der Embiiden, nebst morphologischen und
physiologischen Bemerkungen, besonders itiber das Spinnen derselben. Zool. Anz.. 35.

, 1912.—Embiidinen, in Coll. de Selys-Longchamps, fase. 3.
Krauss. H. A., 1911.—Monographie der Embien. Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23. Stuttgart.

384 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. Y.

NavAs, L., 1922.—Algunos Insectos del Museo de Paris. Rev. Acad. Cienc. Zaragoega,
Vol. vii.
, 1923.—Comunicaciones Entomolégicas. 6. Notas sobre Embiépteros. Ibid.,
Vol. viii.
, 1928.—Insectos Exéticos Neurépteros y Afines del Museo Civico de Génova.
Annali del Mus. Civ. di Stor. Naturale, Genoa, Vol. 53.
—, 1931.—Insectes du Congo Belge (Série VI). Rev. Zool. Bot. africaines
(Tervueren), Vol. 21, fase. 2.
, 19384.—Décadas de insectos nueyos (Década 25). Brotéria, Série trimestral,
Vols 3.) tases t-

385

THE GEOLOGY OF THE COUNTY OF BULLER, N.S.W.

By A. H. Voisry,* M.Sc., Lecturer in Geology and Geography, New England
University College.

(One map; two Text-figures. )
[Read 30th August, 1939. ]

The County of Buller lies in the Far North Coast District of New South Wales
and is limited on the north and west by the Main Divide which marks the boundary
between New South Wales and Queensland. The Richmond Range forms a natural
boundary on the east, but the southern boundary, though following creek divides,
is less clearly defined. The area is drained by the Clarence River and its tribu-
taries, the most important of which are the Maryland, Cataract and Boonoo Boonoo
rivers and Koreelah, Tooloom, Duck and Peacock creeks.

Woodenbong, Urbenville and Bonalbo are the principal towns in the County,
but other small centres are Legume, Liston, Amosfield, Wilson’s Downfall, Boonoo
Boonoo, Acacia Creek, Capeen, Koreelah and Tooloom. Drake, Tabulam and
Mallanganee lie just outside the southern border of the County on the road between
Tenterfield and Casino.

Most of the data used in the compilation of this report were collected during
the early part of 1938 and during a trip to Rivertree in February 1934.

It is unfortunate that several problems raised by the writer in his report on
Boorook and Drake (Voisey, 1936) still remain unsolved. The most important of
these refers to the basal beds of the Drake Series and their relationship to the
Emu Creek Series. A thick soil cover prevents a close examination of the meeting
place of the two series in the neighbourhood of the Lunatic Gold-Field, but
examination of the structures in the adjoining areas suggests that the junction
is a faulted one. The continuation of the boundary of the Emu Creek Series is
believed to run through thickly wooded and rugged country which is difficult of
access. An attempt to map it in May 1938 was frustrated by heavy rains leading
to a flooding of the streams.

The purpose of this paper is to bring together a number of somewhat scattered
observations made by previous workers and the writer. The outcrops of the various
rock types are shown on the accompanying map.

Previous Literature.

Most of the earlier observations made in the County of Buller are mentioned
in the reports of E. C. Andrews (1900, 1901, 1902, 1903, 1908). HE. F. Pittman
(1908) referred to the trachyte of the South Obelisk near Tooloom, and L. F.
Harper (1929) gave a short account of the general geology of the northern and
eastern parts of the county. The writer (1936) in connection with investigations

* This paper was completed while the author was Linnean Macleay Fellow of the
Society in Geology.
FEF

386 GEOLOGY OF THE COUNTY OF BULLER, N.S.W.,

on the rocks in the neighbourhood of Boorook and Drake, reported on the
stratigraphy and palaeontology of the southern part of the area and submitted a

map.
GENERAL GEOLOGY.
Summary.
The oldest rocks found in the area belong to the Emu Creek Series and are
believed to be Upper Carboniferous in age. They outcrop principally between
Emu Creek and the Clarence River.

ae To Brisbane
GEOLOGICAL SKETCH-MAP OF THE a
WOODENBONG +

COUNTY OF BULLER

N.S. W.

‘ 4 r 5 ~ UreEnivite:.

DIVIDE J 7 . WORTH G35
PET Palla Ky) TT aBeLisn Mags

we * H a C. es

ee tAcCACy

QUEENSLAND...

"
OBELISK EX |

rossuxy & &
O e

,
{185
Ie

le < POCUPAR

N 4 > ; GREAT

UNOERCLIFFE = f
TABLE
MOUNTAIN _~
=o
yu SNe seas
* AMOSFIELD ¢
Nii il

tty

ea wicsons

yy

LEGEND ee

"

SEDIMENTARY
MESOZOIC

LOweR CLARENCE
SERIES

COAL MEASURES .

eo + . #3 To Gasino

_ 3 } % ao a eo

i = c 4 ‘ au 4 \ -\e >

PALAEOZOIC a fk TARO eases Seon

df 2! j a GOLD-FIELO?“y "4
DRAKE SERIES Coe ( ra " a a AS. ; } TABULAM

Emu CREEK senies [ih] ee

BASAL STAGE

IGNEOUS
BASALT

ALKALINE NTRS oy a : Be a | ‘ : i USS J es ; SCALE.
= . ea 5 =

GRANITE

FOSSIL LOCALITIES x MILES

. J | “i :
COUNTY BOUNDARY — -—- . ¥ : , é
SETTLEMENTS P]
ROADS

Map 1.

BY A. H. VOISEY. 387

The Drake Series, comprising more than 5,000 feet of volcanic rocks, passing
upwards into several thousand feet of marine sediments, belongs to the Kamilaroi
(Permian) System. It continues northwards from the neighbourhood of Drake to
Rivertree and beyond.

Nearly half of the County of Buller is covered by sediments of Jurassic age
belonging to the Clarence Series. These in places are overlain by Tertiary basalts
and are intruded by sills, plugs, and, perhaps, laccolites of alkaline rocks also of
Tertiary age.

Granite in Late Palaeozoic times invaded the Drake and Emu Creek Series,
but is unconformably overlain by the sediments of the Clarence Series.

CARBONIFEROUS.
The Emu Creek Series.

Mudstones and tuffs containing an abundant marine fossil fauna and outcrop-
ping at Jump-up Hill and along Hmu Creek have been described previously
(Voisey, 1936). They were traced northward to Pretty Gully by Andrews (1908)
and have been found to continue to Paddy’s Flat and beyond.

The beds are overlain unconformably by conglomerates and sandstones of the
Clarence Series and by Tertiary basalt between Pretty Gully store and Paddy’s
Flat.

The prolific Fenestellidae beds outcrop in cuttings along the Paddy’s Flat road
10 miles from Tabulam. At least 30 feet of strata are crammed with polyzoan
remains. Several small spirifers were found also. The matrix is olive-green
mudstone which weathers to a buff colour. Associated with the mudstones are
hard tuffs and tuffaceous sandstones. The beds dip in a north-easterly direction
at 45 degrees. They disappear beneath the Clarence Series about a mile from
Pretty Gully store but make their appearance beside the road again where the
descent is made to the Clarence River at Paddy’s Flat. The highest beds are
principally tuffs, tuffaceous sandstones and mudstones, but occasional bands of
conglomerate are present. The mudstones contain Fenestellidae horizons with
subordinate coarser bands of sediment. They underlie the tuffaceous group and

MARYLAND RIVER

GREAT
TABLE
MOUNTAIN

MARYLAND R.
RIVERTREE
CLARENCE
RIVER
TOOLOOM CK
LOweR
TOOLOOM
DUCK CREEK
BONALBO

S05." * .GASAL = STAGE (OF 25+
St LOWER CLARENCE . SERIES *
Ae OlOl MACNN GO:

5 Sofie

GREAT
TABLE
NTH OBELISK

p(Giraad cK
PADDYS FLAT
CLARENCE R

ie

“ DRAKE SERIES “ { emy leatlag Vasdies |
KONA) g t hogs fase

ae ieilen Ii

= 36 MILES

1.—Section from Maryland to Bonalbo. V/
2.—Section from Drake to Urbenyille, V/H

Wow
oo
ees
ila’

388 GEOLOGY OF THE COUNTY OF BULLER, N.S.W.,

comprise several hundred feet of the total of approximately 1,000 feet of rocks
exposed. The dip is generally to the south-east at 40 degrees.

The Emu Creek Series is overlain by the Lower Clarence Series in the northern
part of the County but reappears in the vicinity of Mount Barney just over the
Queensland border (Richards, Bryan and Whitehouse, 1932).

In his previous paper the writer (Voisey, 1936) discussed limestones, cherts,
etc., occurring near the junction of the Paddy’s Flat road with the main road from
Tabulam to Drake under the name of Plumbago Creek Series. It was suggested
that the beds might be related to the Drake Series. However, they seem to pass
northwards into the Emu Creek Series and hereafter will be considered part of
that series. Some of the sediments have been contact metamorphosed by the
adjacent granite. They are indurated black rocks, some possessing a rough parting
parallel to the lamination. The name slate, loosely applied to them, is somewhat
misleading since there is no evidence of any dynamic metamorphism.

KAMILAROI.

Since the limits of the Permian System are still in dispute and the use of the
term ‘Permian’ admits of a number of interpretations it has been decided to
follow the nomenclature suggested by the late Professor Sir T. W. E. David
(1932). In an earlier paper (Voisey, 1936), the Drake Series was considered as
Permian in age, but, until the controversy is settled, the better-defined name
“Kamilaroi” will be used. The writer regards “Kamilaroi”, ‘Permian’ and
“Permo-Carboniferous” as synonyms and is opposed to the division of the first-
named into Permian and Carboniferous sections.

Drake Series.

The Upper and Lower Divisions of the Drake Series continue north and north-
east of Boorook and are folded into anticlines and synclines along a meridional
axis. In the neighbourhood of Boorook beds of the Upper Division occupy a
synclinal structure which pitches gently in a northerly direction. The beds
continue northwards towards Undercliffe and Rivertree.

Andrews (1901) noted the presence of graphite produced by the intrusive
granite from dirty coal seams at a point eleven miles east of Wilson’s Downfall.
These coal seams occur with tuffs and contact-altered sediments, probably belonging
to the Upper Division of the Drake Series.

Altered tuffs and mudstones outcrop at Undercliffe Falls in contact with
granite. Andrews (1902) recorded ‘‘Permo-Carboniferous” fossils from this locality
and also from Cullen’s Creek at Rivertree (1908). The present writer in 1934
found a number of marine fossils in indurated mudstones near the old silver mines
at Rivertree. Owing to the lack of detailed mapping between here and Boorook
the stratigraphical position of the beds has not been determined. The: irregular
boundary of the granite and the contact alteration of the sediments which it has
produced add to the difficulty of mapping this rugged, well-wooded country.

North of Rivertree the Kamilaroi rocks are overlain by the Clarence Series
and Tertiary basalt.

Near the Queensland border, at Maryland Station, and running in a north-
westerly direction through the parish of Maryland, is a mass of sedimentary rock
about seven miles long and averaging about a mile wide. It is surrounded on all
sides by granite and has suffered intense contact metamorphism. The rocks are
principally indurated mudstones, sandstones and tuffs which contain numerous
Kamilaroi marine fossils including Linoproductus springsurensis and Fenestellidae,

BY A. H. VOISEY. 389

The fossil beds are located on the properties of Messrs. C. Bonner and W. E.
Barnard on portions 266, 37, 446 and 23, parish of Maryland, and portion 73,
parish of Ruby.

Good exposures occur along Maryland Creek in the portions named. So far
as the author is aware, this is the first record of the discovery. Mr. H. W. Scott,
Manager of the Stanthorpe branch of the Commercial Banking Company of Sydney,
drew the writer’s attention to the beds after having been shown the fossils by
Mr. C. Barnard some years ago.

Associated with the altered sediments are several bands of what appears to be
voleanic rock. This contains well developed phenocrysts of felspar and resembles
some of the lavas of the Drake Series. Microscopical examination will be necessary
to prove the suggested correlation.

The fossil beds dip in a south-easterly direction at high angles, reaching 80
degrees in places. Felsite (?) half a mile south of Maryland Station strikes 140°
and appears to be vertical. At Cundumbul andesite (?) strikes 120° and again
the dip is very steep. The general strike of the beds within the sedimentary area
is north-west—south-east, but, as in the case of the fossil beds, there are local
variations.

Other blocks of sedimentary rock surrounded by granite occur in the neigh-
bourhood of Maryland, one such being found about 7 miles from Liston on the
Rivertree road and another is exposed by a railway cutting just north of Dalveen
(Queensland). The last-named may consist of members of the Silverwood Series of
Devonian age (Richards and Bryan, 1924). The Maryland and Rivertree road beds
may be referred to the Drake Series and, geographically, are situated between
known outcrops of these rocks and those of the Fault Block Series (Richards and
Bryan, 1924).

The writer visited the Silverwood area and examined the members of the
Fault-Block Series before he was acquainted with the Drake sequence and for
various reasons disagreed from the arrangement of the succession tentatively put
forward by Richards and Bryan (1924). This paper (Voisey, 1934) was discussed
at a meeting of the Royal Society of Queensland and a number of other arrange-
ments and correlations were suggested (A.N.Z.A.A.S., 1935).

The most satisfactory method of dealing with the isolated occurrences appeared
to be by correlating the units with horizons in an adjacent area where the sequence
was known. Therefore, field-work was carried out around Drake and Boorook
(Voisey, 1936) with the resuit that such a sequence was obtained at a distance
of less than forty miles from Silverwood. On the evidence furnished by these
beds the writer had no alternative but to alter the arrangement which he had put
forward previously. ;

There appears to be little doubt that the lavas, tuffs, conglomerates and grits
of the Tunnel, Rhyolite Range and Hight Mile blocks belong to the Lower Division
of the Drake Series. Detailed petrological work on these beds is of the utmost
importance and will settle the correlation question.

The tuffs and mudstones of the Condamine Block suggested by Richards and
Bryan (1924, p. 65) to be contemporaneous with the volcanic beds discussed above
were regarded by Reid (1930), the writer (Voisey, 1934) and others to have
preceded them. However, at Boorook, similar beds also containing abundant
Trachypora wilkinsoni and Monilopora nicholsoni occur with other marine strata
above the lavas and tuffs of the volcanic suite. Beneath the Trachypora—Monilopora
zone at Boorook are richly fossiliferous sediments with some bands composed
almost entirely of the remains of Strophalosia and others of Fenestellidae or

390 GEOLOGY OF THE COUNTY OF BULLER, N.S.W..

lamellibranchs. The stage is suggestive of that composing part of the Wallaby
Block at Silverwood.

Although a close correlation between the individual units of the Silverwood
and Boorook—Drake areas cannot be made at the moment, it would appear from
the presence of abundant specimens of Tvrachypora, Monilopora, Fenestella,
Strophalosia and certain lamellibranechs occurring in zones in both areas that
correlation in a broad way is indicated. It seems, therefore, that the Condamine
and Wallaby beds are the equivalents at Silverwood of part of the Upper Division
of the Drake Series.

The position of the strata of the Hurydesma Block is still in doubt. The writer
(1934) attempted to show that they overlay the strata of the Condamine Block,
using as evidence certain similarities in lithology and the presence of Monilopora
in each block. If the rocks are so related the Hurydesma beds must belong to
the Upper Division of the Drake Series, possibly occurring immediately below the
main Trachypora—Monilopora zone. In such a case the somewhat forced palaeonto-
logical arguments indicating that the beds underlay the volcanic suite must be
disregarded. On the other hand, the horizon of abundant Hurydesma cordatum is
still regarded by most Australian geologists as indicating a position low down in
the Kamilaroi sequence, even though the genus has been found scattered through-
out the whole system. If we regard this horizon as occurring high up in the
Upper Division of the Drake Series it is somewhat surprising to find such a big
thickness of sediments and lavas between it and the base of the Kamilaroi system.
The lavas and tuffs of the volcanic suite cannot be placed in the Carboniferous
System since Andrews (1908) records several occurrences of definite Kamilaroi
fossils interbedded with them. The writer has seen similar fossils in the Lower
Division of the Drake Series beside Girard Creek (Voisey, 1936).

No beds directly underlying the lavas have been found in the Boorook—Drake
area. Neither Glossopteris nor Gangamopteris has been collected. The presence of
dirty coal seams at Undercliffe (Andrews, 1901) is indicative, however, of some
fresh-water deposits.

JURASSIC.
Clarence Series.

Sediments belonging to the Clarence Series occupy most of the north-eastern
part of the County of Buller, their boundary running diagonally across it from
the neighbourhood of Legume to Tabulam. Outliers occur to the west of this at
Kettle’s Lift, Pretty Gully and elsewhere.

Warping and faulting which took place, probably in Tertiary times, have
been responsible for the elevation of the sediments, the base of which rises
gradually from Tabulam at 400 feet towards Legume and to Warwick in Queens-
land where it is at approximately 1,500 feet. Outliers in the vicinity of Silverwood
attain a height of over 2,000 feet. The base of the Pretty Gully outlier lies at
about 1,100 feet.

Only the Lower Clarence Series is represented in the County and it may be
divided conveniently into two stages, the Basal Stage and the Coal Measures.

Basal Stage.

The lowest beds of the Clarence Series consist principally of conglomerates
made up of a great variety of well-rounded pebbles. Sandstones separate the
conglomerates and merge into them. Smaller lenticular sandstone bands occur
within the main conglomerate horizons which are usually about ten feet in thick-
ness, Fine-grained sediments are rare in the Basal Stage,

BY A. H. VOISEY. 391

Large tree trunks and numerous pieces of fossil wood are a distinctive feature
of the beds. They are seen to advantage in road cuttings just east of Tabulam
and alongside creeks in that locality. Magnificent examples have been found at
Warwick in Queensland just beyond the limits of the accompanying map.

The constitution of the outlier at Kettle’s Lift is noteworthy since it is a
remarkably good example of a consolidated soil or rubble which had covered the
land surface before inundation. The rock consists of granite soil in which are
set large rounded granite boulders which give the impression that they are
intrusive into the bed in which they lie. Similar rocks characterize the basal
beds of the Jurassic System in parts of the Northern Territory, notably at
Buldiva (Voisey, 1938).

Coal Measures.

The Coal Measures overlie the Basal Stage. In the County of Buller coal
seams were met at intervals from a point near the junction of the Bonalbo road
with the Tabulam—Mallanganee road to Urbenville. They are then hidden by basalt
but reappear near the junction of the Urbenville road and the New England High-
way and continue northwards into Queensland. Owing to the very gentle dip in
the north the coal measures outcrop over a much larger area than in the south of
the Clarence Basin near Coramba.

The beds consist of soft mudstones with subordinate sandstone and a number
of coal seams. Details of the properties and value of the coal in the region are
given by Pittman (1908). He recorded a workable seam nearly three feet wide
near Killarney in Queensland. Most of the seams, however, are of poor quality
and less than 2 feet in thickness. Alethopteris was found by Pittman near
Killarney.

Age of the Clarence Series.

A. B. Walkom (1918) discussed in some detail the relationship between the
Clarence Series and the Mesozoic rocks of Queensland. There seems to be little
doubt that the Coal Measures of the Lower Clarence Series can be correlated with
the lower part of the Walloon Series of Queensland. They are, therefore, Lower
Jurassic in age. The Basal Stage bears some lithological resemblances to the
Bundamba Series which consists also of massive sandstones, grits and
conglomerates. The age of this series is still in doubt since no recognizable fossils
have been found in it. Fossil wood, however, is extremely abundant in the Basal
Stage of the Lower Clarence Series and may give some clue which will lead to the
selution of the problem.

As there does not seem to be any evidence to the contrary, both the Basal
Stage and the Coal Measures are regarded as Jurassic in this paper.

PLEISTOCENE.
High-level river gravels occur alongside the Clarence River and are similar
to those of the Macleay, Manning and other rivers along the coast. On the hills
just west of Tabulam bridge they are about 70 feet above the river.

RECENT.
Beautifully terraced alluvial flats are prevalent beside the Clarence River and
are developed to a lesser extent beside some of its tributaries. The terraces in the
neighbourhood of Tabulam are particularly fine examples.

392 GEOLOGY OF THE COUNTY OF BULLER, N.S.W.,

IGNEOUS Rocks.
Granite.

E. C. Andrews (1903, 1905, 1908) has dealt adequately with the granitic rocks
of New England and part of the County of Buller and little can be added here.

The granite occupies a large area to the west of the County, its eastern
boundary running irregularly through Boorook, Undercliffe and Rivertree to pass
under the Clarence Series and basalt.

Professor Skeats (1930-32) suggested that the age of some of the granites
might be Mesozoic following verbal communications from Professor Richards, Dr.
Bryan and Dr. Whitehouse. There appears to be general agreement, however, that
the evidence upon which the suggestion was based admits of another interpretation.
It is highly improbable, therefore, that any of the granite in the area being
described is intrusive into Mesozoic rocks. Its age may be regarded as late
Palaeozoic.

Alkaline Intrusives.

A number of alkaline plugs, laccolites and sills occur in the north-eastern
portion of the County. They comprise the prominent hills North Obelisk, South
Obelisk, Edinburgh Castle and others. These were mentioned by Andrews (1903)
in his report on New England. Pittman recorded the presence of the alkaline rock
at the North Obelisk in 1908 (Pittman, 1908). He regarded its occurrence as being
that of a laccolite.

Sills of fine-grained trachytic rock intrusive into the Coal Measures of the
Clarence Series are exposed by cuttings on the Bonalbo road about 9 miles south
of Urbenville near the bridge over Lemon Tree creek. The sills, which attain
thicknesses up to ten feet in places, have slightly metamorphosed the sedimentary
rocks and, where they have followed the coal seams, have affected them consider-
ably. They are particularly well developed in close proximity to the coal, evidently
having found progress more easy in the softer rocks.

Basalt.

Sheets of basalt cap most of the ridges in the north and east of the area,
notably Pocupar or the Great Table Mountain, the Richmond, Tooloom and
MacPherson Ranges. Its base lies generally at a height of about 1,000 to 1,200
feet above sea-level, but this height varies considerably from place to place.

The basalt is post-Jurassic in age since it overlies the Coal Measures. It may
be assigned confidently to the Tertiary Era. 5;

STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY.

The Emu Creek Series has been folded on a general meridional axis and has
been extensively faulted. Details of the individual folds have not been ascertained.

The Drake Series is gently folded into anticlines and synclines at Boorook and
Red Rock, the axis of the folding being generally north and south. Further east
the folding has become more intense and, in places, the beds have assumed vertical
positions.

A faulted junction between the Emu Creek Series and the Drake Series is
indicated on the map and has been deduced from a study of the strikes in that
region. Outcrops there are very poor. The relationship between the two series
between Rivertree and Hmu Creek is in doubt since the country is difficult of
access and recent investigations were hampered by floods.

The Jurassic rocks have a general easterly dip in the south-eastern part of
the county. They flatten somewhat and turn slightly northward in the north-west

BY A. H. VOISEY. 393

region. These sediments unconformably overlie the Upper Palaeozoic rocks and
the granites.

PHYSIOGRAPHY.

The County of Buller comprises the basin of the Upper Clarence River, being
bounded by divides on the east, north and west, respectively the Richmond Range,
MacPherson Range and the Main Divide.

Basalt forms a capping on most of the ridges and was apparently poured out
over a surface which now stands at heights of between 1,000 and 1,200 feet above
sea-level. This surface tilts upwards to the west.

Deep gorges characterize the Cataract and Maryland rivers and many of their
tributaries which are working in the Palaeozoic rocks and the granites. The
Clarence Series has responded much more readily to erosion and the region which
it occupies is more or less undulating.

The alkaline intrusions around Urbenville are conspicuous features rising
steeply from the more open country.

Acknowledgements.
I desire to thank Mr. H. W. Scott of Stanthorpe for his hospitality and help
which have been given freely over a number of years.
Messrs. C. Bonner of Cundumbul Station and W. E. Barnard of the Summit
guided me to the Maryland fossil beds and gave me much useful information,
and to them also my thanks are due.

Bibliography.
ANDREWS, EH. C., 1900.—Report on the Rivertree Silver Field. Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines
and Agric. N.S.W., 1900, p. 192.
, 1901.—Note on the Occurrence of Graphite at Wilson’s Downfall. Ann. Rept.
Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1901, p. 170. f
, 1902.—Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1902.
——, 1903.—The Tertiary History of New England. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W.,
Wil, i8its Be
————, 1905.—The Geology of the New England Plateau. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W.,
viii.
—, 1908.—Report on the Drake Gold and Copper Field. Geol. Surv. N.S.W.,
Mineral Resources No. 12.
Davip, T. W. E., 1932.—Explanatory Notes to Accompany a New Geological Map of the
Commonwealth of Australia.
Harper, L. F., 1929.—Clarence Valley Development Investigation. Ann. Rept. Dept.
Mines N.S.W., 1929, p. 85.
PITTMAN, EH. F., 1908.—Coal Seams South of Maclean, Clarence River. Ann. Rept. Dept.
Mines N.S.W., 1908, pp. 164-166.
‘Rep, J. H., 1930.—The Queensland Upper Palaeozoic Succession. Qld. Geol. Surv. Pwo.
No. 278. ;
RicHARDS, H. C., and BRYAN, W. H., 1924.—The Geology of the Silverwood-Lucky Valley
Area. Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, xxxvi.
RicHArRDS, H. C., BRYAN, W. H., and WHITEHOUSE, F.. W., 1932.—Preliminary Note on the
Geology of Mount Barney. Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, xliv, 1932.
SxEats, E. W., 1930-1932.—The Age, Distribution and Petrological Characteristics of the
Granites of Eastern Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 43 (N.S.), 1930.
Voiszy, A. H., 1934.—An Interpretation of the Silverwood-Lucky Valley Upper Palaeozoic
Succession. Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, xlvi. ;
, 1936.—The Upper Palaeozoic Rocks in the Neighbourhood of Boorook and
Drake, N.S.W. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ixi, Parts 3-4.
, 1938.—Notes on the Stratigraphy of the Northern Territory with Special
Reference to the Jurassic System. Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1xxii.
Wavkom, A. B., 1918.—The Geology of the Lower Mesozoic Rocks of Qld. Proc. LINN.
Soc. N.S.W., xliii.

GG

THE GEOLOGY OF THE LOWER MANNING DISTRICT OF NEW SOUTH
WALKS.

By A. H. Voisry,* M.Se., Lecturer in Geology and Geography, New England
University College.

(One map; one Text-figure. )
[Read 30th August, 1939.]

This paper deals with the general geology of the Lower Manning River District.
The accompanying map embraces parts of the counties of Macquarie and Gloucester
which lie respectively to the north and south of the Manning River. The area
is drained by the Manning and its tributaries, Lansdowne and Dawson rivers and
Cedar Party, Dingo and Burrill creeks.

The principal towns are Taree, Wingham, Coopernook, Cundletown, Mount
George, Croki, Harrington and Kramback.

Previous Literature.

No detailed account of the geology of the region has been published, but there
are a number of references to some of the occurrences of rocks within it.

J. HE. Carne (1896) described the rocks of the principal coastal headlands,
mentioning particularly Diamond Head, Halliday Point (Black Head) and Wallaby
Point. He regarded the last two as Carboniferous in age, but they are placed more
satisfactorily now as Devonian.

W. G. Woolnough in 1911 described the Cedar Party Limestone and underlying
beds, suggesting a glacial origin for some conglomeratic material. His tentative
correlations with the sequence on the Macleay River are not likely to be
challenged.

Devonian and Kamilaroi beds were discussed by W. N. Benson (1916, 1918)
and the occurrence of serpentine in the neighbourhood of Mount George was
recorded.

References to the alkaline intrusions in the neighbourhood of Lansdowne
have been made by C. A. Sussmilch (1932), W. R. Browne (1933), R. O. Chalmers
(1934) and others.

The writer has described portions of the area more recently (Voiséey, 1938,
1939a, 19396).

STRATIGRAPHY.
DEVONIAN.

All the rocks of undoubted Devonian age in the Lower Manning District are
found south of a group of faults which will be referred to as the Manning River
Fault System. These faults separate Devonian from the Carboniferous and
Kamilaroi rocks which occupy the country to the north of the Manning River.

* This paper was completed while the author was Linnean Macleay Fellow of the
Society in Geology.

.

H. VOISEY

BY A.

AVM UY

Se Oeinlved
a18VvedOud

sLinwd Aniod

TWOI90103D | savaitwH vo
av3H yOVv19

ANILN3du3S av3H 03
SO S3AISNYINI
JINIIVY TY

NVINOA3a }
SNONFSINODYVI] pgthlos &
lou TINY
dISSVIYL
INFOOLSIIId
1N3934

QN3931

NOLONINYVH

‘Tt dew

A— THYMYTWL a=

——_—_$_—§ 9144 MI LNA

ho MY
“aka

S

%

396 GEOLOGY OF LOWER MANNING DISTRICT, N.S.W.,

The complete Devonian sequence was not elucidated owing, in a large measure,
to the complexity of the structures and the lack of sufficient outcrops. It may be
possible to sort out the Devonian succession after a detailed geological survey of
the area, but as the Carboniferous and Kamilaroi rocks were the chief concern of
the present writer it was not found practicable to devote the necessarily large
amount of time to this project.

Benson (1916, 1918) and Sussmilch (1921) were in agreement that the
Devonian sequence closely resembles that of the type-area in the Tamworth District.
The suite in each case consists of characteristic banded claystones, tuffs, spilites,
agglomerates and breccias.

The beds will be discussed under the headings of the principal localities where
they were examined.

Bundook.

Fresh-looking, dense, pale green spilites containing well-preserved pyroxenes
and albitic felspars are beautifully exposed by railway cuttings all the way from
Bundook to Somerset (Benson, 1916). They continue eastwards to the Kanghat
Range, where they are responsible for this imposing feature which rises to over
2,000 feet. The spilites continue in a westerly direction beyond the limits of the
map.

Between Bundook and Gloucester, railway cuttings reveal banded mudstones,
tuffs, cherts and breccias of Devonian age. Quite close to Gloucester they give
way to the Carboniferous suite (Sussmilch, 1921).

Kundibakh.

Two miles south of Burrell Creek Post Office, along the Gloucester road, mud-
stones and sandstones associated with hard bluish tuffs outcrop. They contain
fragmental plant remains. Although these beds resemble those of the Burindi
Series to some extent, they are included with the Devonian on account of their
association with definite Devonian rocks south of the Kanghat Fault. They dip
in a south-easterly direction at 40 degrees.

Two and a half miles south of this occurrence in the Kramback Cutting are
coarse tuffs dipping steeply in a direction 30 degrees. They are very like those at
Tiri and contain the same kind of large angular shaly fragments. Associated with
them are greenish-grey mudstones and other fine-grained blue tufts.

Banded mudstones and tuffs may be followed in road cuttings along the Pacific
Highway to the neighbourhood of Mongrani Cutting near Gloucester.

Bucklebore Mountain. :

This spur from the main Kanghat Range is composed largely of coarse tuffs-
associated with spectacular volcanic agglomerates or tuff-breccias. Fragments of
green tuffs up to several inches across are cemented into a very hard and beautiful
rock, Fresh specimens of this may be obtained from large blocks in the scree on
the south bank of the Manning River at the bend about a mile south of Charity
Creek Railway Siding. }

Mount Kiwarric.

The north-eastern slopes of Mount Kiwarrie are composed of hard blue tuffs and
grey cherts with some interbedded igneous rocks, probably spilites. These beds
dip in a southerly direction at about 70 degrees near the head of Stoney Creek, a
tributary of Bow Bow Creek. In this locality they are intruded by serpentine.

Tinonee.
Typical Devonian banded claystones with interbedded coarse tuffs are exposed
by cuttings along the Taree—-Gloucester road between Tinonee and Bow Bow Creek.

BY A. H. VOISEY. 397

At Tinonee punt approach they dip in a direction 320° at 47°. A quarry about a
quarter of a mile from Tinonee on the Old Bar road reveals a good section of the
claystones which here dip in a direction 175° at 35°.

Dips are so variable in this region that it has not been possible to determine
the details of the structures even after numerous measurements have been taken.
Examination of the sections revealed by the Brushy Cutting and railway cuttings
near Wingham shows how futile it would be to attempt to map the folds and faults
with a limited number of measurements. The soft beds appear to have been folded
and crumbled along a number of different axes.

The banded claystones and tuffs extend eastward from Wingham to the coast.

Black Head.

Rock Platforms at Black Head expose a splendid variety of green tuffs inter-
bedded with banded claystones. The suite is similar to that met around Tinonee
and is undoubtedly Devonian in age. The strata vary in strike but generally dip
in a north-easterly direction at about 45 degrees. Numbers of small faults displace
the individual beds and are seen to great advantage on the rock platforms. The
tuffs have been twisted about in places and are partly silicified, containing
numerous veins of quartz.

Red Head.

One of the best places to examine the banded claystones is at Red Head, about
a mile north of Black Head. Wave action has cleared away weathered material
and polished the rocks so that the banding is particularly well displayed in dark
and light grey shades. The strata here dip south at 55 degrees.

Wallaby Point.

Carne (1896) placed the Black Head (Halliday Point), and Wallaby Point
rocks in the Carboniferous system, comparing them with the beds at Cape Hawke
where he found Carboniferous marine fossils. However, they correspond more
closely with the known Devonian rocks and are included now in that system.

Interesting intraformational structures occur in some bands of sandy mud-
stone interbedded with tuffs. Before consolidation of the laminated mudstones
they were puckered and folded.

Fragmental plant remains are abundant in the tuffs but no identifiable
material was found. According to Carne (1896) grits and conglomerates are
present. He was impressed by the “‘concretionary weathering of some of the
sandstones”.

Doubtful Occurrences of Devonian Rocks.
Johnston's Peak.

Jaspers and quartzites are exposed by Little Run Creek west of the serpentine
belt at Wherrol Flat and are responsible for the presence of an elevated block of
country which rises to a sharp, peculiarly-shaped summit called Johnston’s Peak.
The higher portions of this rugged region were not examined, but it is assumed
that the siliceous rocks are continuous from Wherrol Flat to the neighbourhood
of Mount George (Voisey, 1939a).

No evidence was found to indicate the stratigraphical position or age of these
beds. Abutting serpentine at Wherrol Flat and Mount George, they are believed
to be related to it as the Woolomin Series of Benson (19130) is related to the
basic intrusives of the Nundle District.

398 GEOLOGY OF LOWER MANNING DISTRICT, N.S.W.,

Strathcedar.

On the road to Mooral Creek, about 24 miles from its junction with the
Wingham—Comboyne Road, oceur some rocks which bear a strong lithological
resemblance to those of the Devonian suite. They are included on the map with
the Carboniferous beds since they are surrounded by sediments of that age and are
some miles from any other known Devonian occurrence.

They outcrop alongside the road for less than a mile but, as exposures are poor,
their extent was not determined nor was their relationship to the adjacent
Carboniferous glacial beds ascertained. The rocks consist of cherts and tuffs
having, in part, a light green colour which is especially typical of the Devonian
beds near Bungay (two miles south of Wingham) and in railway cuttings east
of Wingham. Banded claystones are also present.

If the age of the rocks really is Devonian, this anomalous occurrence can be
explained only by very strong faulting.

Coopernook.

Alongside the road between Langley Vale and Coopernook Railway Station,
road-material quarries expose tuffs and banded claystones which resemble Devonian
rock-types. As in the case of the Strathcedar beds, the locality is so far removed
from other Devonian areas that doubt is thrown upon lithological correlations and
a Carboniferous age is preferred. The strata dip in a direction 98° at 55°.

Correlations.

Although the Devonian sequence has not been worked out on the merits of
the outcrops in the area under discussion, the rock types may be correlated, more
or less, with those of the Tamworth and Nundle districts (Benson 1913a, 19135).
Benson (1916, 1918) and Sussmilech (1921) were:agreed on this point after
examining the sections from Mount George to Gloucester.

Woolomin Series.

The jaspers and quartzites occurring between Mount George and Wherrol
Flat are correlated tentatively with the Woolomin Series (Benson 1913a). No
tuffs, slates or phyllites, however, were found to correspond with those in the
Nundle District. Since the siliceous rocks appear to be related to the intrusion
of serpentine, it is unsafe to place them on any fixed stratigraphical horizon.

Tamworth Series.

Benson (1918) assigned the spilites of Kanghat Mountain to the Middle
Devonian. The tuff-breccias and agglomerates of Bucklebore Mountain suggest a
position in the sequence analogous to the Upper Breccias of the Bowling Alley
(= Tamworth) Series at Nundle. Here the association of such breccias and spilites
was remarked upon by Benson (1913b).

By far the most widespread rocks of Devonian age are the banded claystones,
possibly containing radiolaria. They are referable to the Tamworth Series, some
of them belonging probably to the upper, banded, radiolarian claystones (Benson
1916), but their relationship to the spilites and tuff-breccias could not be
ascertained.

Baldwin Agglomerates.

The Kundibakh tuffaceous deposits could belong to the Baldwin Agglomerates.
Benson, however, recorded beds of this type from the Tamworth Series, and they
resemble some Carboniferous types, so that again correlation is doubtful.

BY A. H. VOISEY. 399

Barraba Series.

Beds referred to the Barraba Series by Sussmilch (1921) occur in the
Gloucester District and might be expected to outcrop to the east and north-east.
What appear to be members of this series are exposed by road cuttings between
Kramback and Nabiac, immediately to the south of the area shown on the map.

Palaeontology.

Numerous fragmental plant remains were found in the Devonian rocks, but
none were sufficiently well preserved to allow identification.

Mr. Les. Weller of Nabiac brought in several well-preserved specimens of
Lepidodendron australe from the neighbourhood of Wang Wauk, several miles
south of the area mapped. It was in this locality that the writer was shown the
same fossil by Dr. G. D. Osborne in 1933.

CARBONIFEROUS.

The Carboniferous beds have been divided into three series. These, with
approximate thicknesses, are.as follows (in descending order):

Feet.
Kullatine Series SS a RT cer ee em re Te ee Belo DO)
Upper BurindiSerieés-s2) 5 8s. se. ee Se ead) os 7 4,000
Lower Burindi Series .. .. ae ate) 4,000.4

The Kullatine Series is very variable in thickness and probably exceeds the
amount given above in some localities. The fact that it consists largely of tillite
in which bedding is poorly developed renders elucidation of structures very difficult,
and the presence of numerous faults has further interfered with stratigraphical
work.

The Upper Burindi Series has been examined only in the neighbourhood of
Taree (Voisey, 1938) and has not been located anywhere else, although it may well
occur in a number of other places.

The Lower Burindi Series is very well developed throughout the area. Its
downward limit has not been found, since faults intervene between the series and
the Devonian beds. The estimate of 4,000 feet is very conservative since sections
of strata which do not correspond with the measured thickness of about 2,500 feet
(Voisey, 1938) are known.

The Carboniferous beds are not differentiated on the accompanying map on
account of its small scale.

Lower Burindi Series.

Everywhere that Devonian and Carboniferous strata have been found in contact
in the area, faults have separated them. This would appear to be the case also
to the west of Gloucester, in the Copeland District, where C. A. Sussmilch (1921)
has reported a contact between Devonian and Carboniferous rocks.

The beds consist, for the most part, of mudstones and tuffs, the last-named
being very variable in character.

Along the Nowendoc Road between Mount George and Caffrey’s Flat, notably
beside the Nowendoc River, there are good exposures of the series together with
the tillites of the Kullatine Series. Beds of tuffs several feet thick are separated
by olive-green mudstones containing plant remains. The general dip is in a
direction 190° at 65°. Between Wingham and Wherrol Flat similar rocks are
exposed in road cuttings. Some of the hard, massive tuff bands may be traced
across the country for short distances, usually being cut off by faults.

Members of the Lower Burindi Series occupy most of the country between the
Manning River and Wherrol Flat.

400 GEOLOGY OF LOWER MANNING DISTRICT, N.S.W.,

At Tiri, where the road from Mount George to Bundook crosses the Manning
River, there is a light bluish-grey tuff, very hard and splintery, consisting of rock
fragments up to several inches in diameter set in a tuffaceous groundmass.
Occasional angular inclusions of grey shale up to two or three inches across are
found scattered through the beds. With them are quite large plant stems. These
are particularly abundant in the road cuttings on the northern side of the bridge.
None of those collected were sufficiently complete to allow identification.

Associated with the Kullatine Series, Lower Burindi beds cover a large area
in the watersheds of Dingo Creek and its tributaries, and continue for an undeter-
mined distance to the west.

Mention has been made already of the sequence in the Taree and Wingham-—
Mount George districts (Voisey, 1938 and 1939a).

At Cundletown banded olive-green mudstones dipping in an easterly direction
at about 30° outcrop in road cuttings. Further east, tuffs, sandstones and mud-
stones occur on Oxley Island.

Woolnough (1911) recorded Knorria from Carboniferous tuffs and mudstones
at Crowdy Head. These rocks have been quarried and brought south to Harrington
and used in the construction of the breakwater at the entrance to the Manning
River. During the quarrying operations a specimen of a fossil fish was found and
forwarded to the Government Geologist, who submitted it to A. Smith Woodward
for identification (Smith Woodward, 1900-1904). Having been led to the belief
that the beds in which the remains were found were Mesozoic, Woodward referred
the imperfectly preserved specimen to the genus Atherstonia. He named it
tentatively Atherstonia australis and suggested that the rocks in which it occurred
belonged to the Hawkesbury Series. The matrix in which the fish is preserved
is identical with the Crowdy Head tuffs and other Carboniferous types and there
is no chance of it belonging to the Triassic suite. Another fossil fish has been
presented to the Australian Museum recently. It is set in a similar matrix and
comes fxom the same locality as the supposed Atherstonia. The fish may belong
to the Crossopterygii, a Palaeozoic group.

A small area of mudstones and tuffs which are similar to the Crowdy Head
types occurs at Harrington. The beds are practically horizontal, a most unusual
disposition for Palaeozoic strata in this region.

Upper Burindi Series.

The Upper Burindi Series consists of mudstones, sandstones and the Taree
Limestone which contains Aphrophyllum hallense Smith, Lithostrotion stanvellense
Hth. fil., and Lithostrotion columnare Eth. fil.

The only part of the area in which the series is known to be developed has
been described previously (Voisey, 1938).

Kullatine Series.

The Kullatine Series has a wide distribution throughout the Lower Manning
District. Together with the Macleay Series it occurs in a number of places along-
side the Manning River between Tiri and Hillview. Its occurrence here has been
described already (Voisey, 1939qa).

Tillites and tuffs outcrop in association with the Lower Burindi Series beside
the Nowendoc River in the neighbourhood of Caffrey’s Flat. In this region the
Kullatine Series appears to pass conformably downward into the Lower Burindi
Series without any intervening Upper Burindi Series.

Beautiful examples of the glacial beds occur alongside the road which follows
the western branch of Dingo Creek north of Wherrol Flat. The fluvio-glacial

BY A. H. VOISEY. 401

character of massive conglomerates constituting part of the glacial stage is demon-
strated by the presence of numerous rounded boulders of igneous rocks cemented
together by material identical with the matrix of the typical tillite.

Further outcrops of tillite are exposed by the Bulga road which follows the
eastern branch of Dingo Creek. The rocks are seen to advantage on the ascent
to the Bulga Plateau from Bobin Flat. They were shown the writer at Bilen-
borough Falls by Dr. G. D. Osborne in 1938, and were mentioned by R. O. Chalmers
(1934, p. 175).

In the neighbourhood of Strathcedar tillites are intruded by serpentine.

A high ridge composed principally of glacial beds of the Kullatine Series runs
northwards from Khatabunda near Wingham to the Comboyne. The beds dip
under the Macleay Series which lies to the east.

It would appear that the glacial beds become thinner going from the west of
the area to the east. They exceed 2,000 feet in thickness in the neighbourhood of
Kimbriki and are no more than 500 feet at Taree. The light-coloured tuffs under-
lying the glacial stage near Taree have not been found west of Wingham (Voisey,
1938). They may have passed into darker tuffs resembling those of the Lower
Burindi Series, but this point has not been established.

Carboniferous lavas and tuffs have been described from the Gloucester District
by C. A. Sussmilch (1921). They have been correlated with the Kuttung Series of
the Hunter River. These rocks are shown on the map to the east of Gloucester,
forming the eastern limb of the Gloucester Syncline or Trough.

KAMILAROI: Macleay Series.

The only Kamilaroi beds which have been found outside the areas dealt with
previously (Voisey, 1938, 1939a) occur just south of the Comboyne Plateau and in
the neighbourhood of Tiri.

In the first case they overlie the Kullatine Series which occupies the ridge
west of the Wingham—Comboyne road and dip away in an easterly direction.

A road cutting near the last bridge over Killabakh Creek before the ascent to
the Comboyne Plateau (portion 32, parish of Marsh) reveals purple shales
containing angular pebbles. These shales closely resemble the Tait’s Creek Glacial
beds (Woolnough, 1911) which have been compared with the Lochinvar shales in
the Hunter Valley sequence.

About two miles south of the above-mentioned locality near Killabakh School
(portion 32, parish of Marsh) a road cutting exposes impure limestones. The
spongy weathered material derived therefrom yields well-preserved Kamilaroi
marine fossils. Those collected were identified by Mr. H. O. Fletcher as: Fenestella
spp., Crinoid stems, Spirifer sp. indet., Linoproductus springsurensis Booker,
Aviculopecten sprenti Johnston, Pleurotomaria cf. morrisiana McCoy (abundant),
and Phillipsia sp. (Specimens 38133-4 Australian Museum Collection.)

These limestones overlie the purple shales and tuffaceous rocks and are
followed by light grey micaceous mudstones.

Along the road from Mount George to Bundook, south of the bridge across the
Manning River at Tiri, road cuttings reveal micaceous mudstones, sponge-spicule
tuffs and other members of the Macleay Series. Marine fossils similar to those at
Kimbriki were found (Voisey, 1939a). The beds were associated with tillites
belonging to the Kullatine Series.

TRIASSIC: Camden Haven Series.
Conglomerates, sandstones and shales comprising the lower beds of the
Camden Haven Series outcrop to the north of the Lansdowne River. These

402 GEOLOGY OF LOWER MANNING DISTRICT, N.S.W.,

Triassic rocks form the southern margin of the Lorne Triassie Basin which was
described in an earlier publication (Voisey, 1939b).

PLEISTOCENE TO RECENT.

Raised river gravels occur at varying heights above the Manning River. They
may be referred to the Pleistocene period.

A large area of country has been reclaimed from the sea. This extends from
Taree to the coast, with the exception of some hills of older rock which rise above
the plain of recent accumulation. The lower beds are marine or estuarine sands

and muds with bands of shells. They pass up into river alluvium or swamp
deposits.

I@NEOUS ROCKS.
Serpentine.

Serpentine has been located in four places in the area: (1) Mooral Creek,
(2) Wherrol Flat, (3) Mount Kiwarric and (4) Mount George.

1. Mooral Creek.—Serpentine is seen from the Wingham—Mooral Creek road
and may be traced for several miles in a north-easterly direction from Strathcedar
Public School to the small village of Mooral Creek. It is intrusive into tillites
belonging to the Kullatine Series. One block of tillite was found caught up in
the basie rock near the Strathcedar School.

2. Wherrol Flat.—A belt of serpentine crosses Dingo Creek south of Wherrol
Flat Hall and, passing through the settlement, continues for some distance to the
north. Contact altered Carboniferous tuffs were found beside the intrusion.

3. Mount Kiwarric.—Serpentine occurs on the north-eastern slopes of Mount
Kiwarric at the head of Stoney Creek, a tributary of Bow Bow Creek. It is
intrusive into Devonian rocks. This occurrence and that at Wherrol Flat (Glen
Lewis) were referred to by Benson (1918).

4. Mount George—tThis belt of basic rock has been mentioned previously by
Benson (1916, 1918) and mapped by the writer (Voisey, 1939). Tillites of the
Kullatine Series, tuffs of the Lower Burindi Series and Kamilaroi mudstones
appear to be the contact rocks.

The Age of the Serpentine.

The age of the serpentine has been discussed in a previous publication (Voisey,
1939a) and will be dealt with also under the heading Structural Geology.

As has been pointed out, it is intrusive into Devonian, Carboniferous, and
probably Kamilaroi rocks and cannot be pre-Kamilaroi in age. The only evidence
previously brought forward to suggest that the rock is olderyconsists of a pebble
of serpentine in Kamilaroi beds and the presence of “Permo-Carboniferous” rocks
apparently overlying the Peel Thrust (Benson, 1913, p. 511). With reference to
the pebble, such evidence cannot be regarded as definite proof of a pre-Kamilaroi
age for the rocks of the Great Serpentine Belt since it may have come from quite
another locality. In the second case Benson admits that the beds are not clearly
exposed and direct proof is impossible. S. W. Carey (verbal communication)
suggests that the beds may be infaulted, and with this view the writer agrees.

That the serpentine is of late Kamilaroi age may be taken now as established
beyond reasonable doubt.

Alkaline Intrusives.

A large number of plugs of alkaline rock, including comendites, arfvedsonite-
anorthoclase-trachyte, bostonite, etc. (Browne, 1933), occur principally about the

BY A. H. VOISEY. 403

headwaters of Killabakh Creek and the Lansdowne River along the southern
margin of the Comboyne Plateau (Sussmilch, 1932; Chalmers, 1934; Voisey, 1939b).

STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY.
The structural features of the district may be considered in six sections:

1.—The Lorne Triassic Basin and Associated Intrusives.

2.—Folded Carboniferous and Kamilaroi rocks north of the Manning River
Fault System.

3.—Tightly folded Devonian rocks south of the Manning River Fault
System.

4—The Gloucester Syncline.

5—The Manning River Fault System.

6.—Serpentine Faults.

1.—Triassic sediments lie with a violent unconformity on the Palaeozoic beds.
The unconformable junction may be followed with ease from the neighbourhood
of the Comboyne Plateau to Coopernook. Basal conglomerates and sandstones
present a line of vertical cliffs which resemble, in a small way, those of the
Hawkesbury Sandstone in the Blue Mountains.

The strata dip at a low angle towards the centre of the Basin which lies to
the north of the area embraced by the map. West of John’s River, intrusions of
alkaline rock have lifted the beds and have the form of sills and laccolitic bodies
(Voisey, 1939b).

2.—South and west of the Triassic basin are Carboniferous and Kamilaroi
sediments which have been folded on a general meridional axis. These folds have
been broken extensively by faults (Voisey, 1938, 1939a).

Yielding Kamilaroi beds have been overfolded near Kimbriki, but the more
resistant Carboniferous beds have been extensively fractured and, in places, such
as Cedar Party, thrust over the Kamilaroi strata.

Two synclines and an anticline were mapped north of Wingham and Taree.
The anticline has given way along the Cedar Party Fault and the syncline on its
eastern side along the Dawson Fault. In each case the overthrusting has been
from east to west and Carboniferous beds have been pushed over those of the
Kamilaroi.

The exact position of the Dawson Fault has not been determined on account
of the exceedingly poor outcrops of Kamilaroi micaceous mudstones on the west
and Burindi mudstones and tuffs on the east. Similarly its probable continuation
along the course of the Lansdowne River has been inferred from the presence of
Burindi beds along the Koppinyarratt road to the Comboyne and the presence of
Kamilaroi sediments along the Killabakh Creek road. In most of the intervening
area Kamilaroi mudstones are suspected on account of the low ground, grey soil,
and lack of outcrops. The duplication of the Taree Limestone in the Upper Burindi
Series in and near the limestone quarries at Taree and the disturbed disposition
of the beds are evidence of the presence of the fault in that locality.

Between Wingham and Wherrol Flat, strikes are exceedingly variable and

indicate extensive faulting. One fault running east and west is shown on the
map. This is suggested by a change in the general direction of strike from north-
west—south-east to north—south. Again, however, there are many departures
from these general directions, and details of the faulting were not obtained.
The Kimbriki Anticline (Voisey, 1939a) is the most important of the folds
in the western part of the area. Along its nose the Kamilaroi beds are folded
into asymmetrical anticlines and synclines on a meridional axis. The tilt of the
axial plane of the syncline nearest to “Colraine’” is towards the west.

404 GEOLOGY OF LOWER MANNING DISTRICT, N.S.W.,

3.—The resistant spilites, agglomerates and tuffs of Devonian age constituting
the Kanghat and Kiwarric ranges have been folded, for the most part, on an east-
west axis. The less-resistant banded claystones and tuffs have been very tightly
folded into anticlines and synclines. The amplitude of these folds is small and
they have been broken at the crests so that many beds are vertical in disposition.

Splendid examples of the folding are to be seen in railway cuttings west of
Wingham and at the Brushy Cutting on the Wingham—Tinonee road. Examination
of these has been sufficient to convince the writer that any detailed interpretation
of structures, which might be based on the limited outcrops available elsewhere,
is likely to be quite unreliable.

4—The Gloucester Syncline has been described by C. A. Sussmilch (1921)
and is shown on this map in order to demonstrate its proximity to the beds of the
Lower Manning District. South and east of the syncline are regions where
meridional strikes predominate.

The geological structures between this syncline and the well worked out areas
of the Hunter Valley have been discussed by G. D. Osborne (1938).

{=

KR
er)
3
Ps
rs
=
=
o

HILLVIEW FAULi"
TRIASSIC
ALMALIN

ROCK

5.—The most important structural feature in the Lower Manning District is
the Manning River Fault System, which must rank among the largest fault
systems in the State. It comprises the Kanghat, Hillview, Killawarra, Wingham
and probably the Charity Creek faults. The principal fault in the group, the
Kanghat Fault, runs from the coast near Black Head for a distance of at least 30
miles to the west-north-west. At Tiri it is still very powerful, since Devonian and
Kamilaroi rocks are in contact with one another. It is to be expected, therefore,
that it continues westward for many miles into the Upper Manning District. The
displacement of the beds must have been very great indeed, since 7,000 feet, at
least, of Carboniferous beds have been faulted out, as well as quite that amount of
Devonian beds. In addition, the Kanghat Range is 2,000 feet higher than the
Kamilaroi beds beside the Manning River. Thus an estimate of a minimum
displacement of three miles is suggested. Lateral as well as vertical components
are involved and it is more than likely that the amount of movement was consider-
ably greater than the minimum calculated above.

The Kanghat Fault cuts across the strike of the spilites which were not found
along the Pacific Highway which follows Burrill Creek through the Kanghat—
Kiwarriec ranges. The accompanying map (p. 395) shows how clearly the fault
transgresses the strikes of the Kamilaroi and Carboniferous rocks.

Lying to the north of the Kanghat Fault is an area of Devonian strata bounded
by the Hillview, Killawarra and Wingham faults. Between the Kanghat and

Hillview faults is a sunken block through which portion of Upper Bow Bow Creek
flows.

FS g
= N
< &
> a
= &
x 4
rt \

Kamiuagot

[be

Ss
oS
ey INGHAM FAULT

i
[-}

TSR =e
~~

11'2WA DAWSON FAULT

CARBONIFERO:
7,
<—-16,000 FT “ip,

to 2

27 MILES

Section along line A-B on Map 1. V/H = 1/1.

BY A. H. VOISEY. 405

The Wingham Fault separates Lower Burindi and Kullatine beds from
- Devonian claystones in the neighbourhood of Wingham. It is obscured by alluvium
south-east of Kolodong, but there cannot be any reasonable doubt that it continues
for some distance to the east, since Carboniferous rocks lie north of the river and
Devonian rocks to the south. The displacements along this fault and Killawarra
fault are comparable in amount to that of the Kanghat Fault since they separate
Devonian from Carboniferous and Kamilaroi beds.

The Charity Creek Fault is probably part of the Manning River Fault System
but its throw is not so great as that of the other members mentioned above. It
separates Kullatine from Lower Burindi Rocks and runs from Charity Creek
railway siding to the neighbourhood of Killawarra siding.

6.—It is assumed by analogy with the Great Serpentine Belt of N.S.W. (Benson,
1913, etc.) that the serpentine in the Lower Manning District was introduced
along fault planes.

The serpentine near Mount George appears to follow a fault which separates,
in places, Carboniferous tillites from Kamilaroi micaceous mudstones. It cuts
across the strike of the Kamilaroi strata and apparently of smaller faults which
bring them into contact with tillites (Voisey, 1939a).

Actual contacts between serpentine and Kamilaroi beds are obscured and,
hence, there must remain a slight doubt as to whether the latter are intruded. It
does not seem to be possible, however, to reconcile the observed facts with the
supposition that the serpentine was faulted into its present position after being
injected prior to the deposition and folding of the Kamilaroi and Carboniferous
sediments.

At Wherrol Flat the serpentine fault separates jaspers and quartzites from
Carboniferous tuffs, ete. Owing to doubt as to the age and origin of the material
from which the siliceous rock was derived no estimate can be made of the order
of magnitude of its throw.

The serpentine at Mount Kiwarric is in Devonian beds but is cut off. by the
Kanghat Fault. It is probable, therefore, that the basic rock was injected before
the Manning River Fault System dislocated the strata.

Age Relations of the Folding and Faulting.

In the Gloucester District Sussmilch (1921) described an interesting sequence
from Devonian into Carboniferous beds. An examination of some of the country
between Gloucester and Copeland did not yield any evidence of a major orogenic
movement between the two sequences.

On account of the intensity of the pressure which affected the Kamilaroi
sediments, in a manner comparable to the crumpled condition, of Devonian clay-
stones in the Lower Manning District, it has not been found possible so far to
distinguish any orogenic movement between the deposition of these two formations.
The less distorted, but faulted, intervening sequence of the Carboniferous System
owes much to its massive and competent units.

Wherever met in the field in the area shown on the map, the boundary between
Carboniferous and Devonian strata was found to be a faulted one.

Genetically related to the folds in the Palaeozoic beds are the faults in the
crests and the troughs of such folds, e.g., the Cedar Party Fault and the Dawson
Fault. Many smaller related faults observed from time to time in the field have
not been mapped, but may be referred to this first group of movements.

The available evidence indicates that the faults containing the serpentine cut
across the folds and faults mentioned above. In turn, however, these are truncated
by the Manning River Fault System.

406 GEOLOGY OF LOWER MANNING DISTRICT, N.S.W.,

Since Triassic sediments overlie both folded Palaeozoic beds and serpentine
(Voisey, 19390) there can be no doubt that the folding and intrusions may be
assigned to the late Palaeozoic orogeny. In order to limit the possible age of the
Manning River Fault System it is necessary to consider similar structures in other
areas.

The Manning River Fault System may be compared in certain respects with
the Hunter Overthrust (Osborne, 1929), Mooki Thrust System (Carey, 1934) and
Peel Thrust (Carey and Browne, 1938). In each case doubts have arisen regarding
the ages of the movements. The question has been discussed by Osborne (1929,
p. 449), Raggatt (1929, p. 278) and Carey (1934, p. 373). No direct evidence was
available to these workers to determine whether the diastrophism affecting the
regions which they discussed was pre- or post-Triassic. Carey (1934, p. 373),
however, showed that the Mooki Thrusts, which were continuous with the Hunter
Overthrust, were parallel to the fold axes and in all probability belonged to the
same movement. Carey and Browne (1938) further developed this theme and
included with the Hunter—Mooki thrusts most other structures developed in the
Palaeozoic rocks and referred them to the late Palaeozoic orogeny, the Hunter—
Bowen Movement.

Now that the serpentine associated with the Peel Thrust has been shown to
intrude Upper Carboniferous and probably Kamilaroi rocks there is little doubt
that the writers mentioned above will welcome the opportunity to include not only
the Peel Thrust, but the Manning River Fault System in their well developed
scheme.

Further, if it is agreed that the serpentine belongs to the same orogeny, the
fact that this rock is overlain by Triassic sediments (Voisey, 1939b) must be
admitted as evidence of a pre-Triassic age for the Hunter-Bowen Movement.

Summary of Structural Geology.

1.—Devonian, Carboniferous and Kamilaroi rocks were folded on a general
meridional axis. All the observed folds were fractured generally at the crests and
troughs.

2.—Closely following on this folding fractures developed and serpentine was
injected into them.

3.—The Manning River Fault System displaced the rocks and all previously
developed structures for distances of the order of several miles.

4.—After extensive erosion, Triassic sediments were laid down upon the
upturned edges of the Palaeozoic strata and serpentine.

5.—The Triassic sediments were folded, faulted, and, later, intruded by alkaline
rocks in the form of laccolites and sills.

CONCLUSION.

An outline has been given of the stratigraphy of the Lower Manning District.
Certain structural features have been described, among them the Manning River
Fault System consisting of a group of large and important faults.

It has been suggested that the age of the serpentine is late-Kamilaroi, and
evidence produced in favour of this alteration in the accepted views.

The stratigraphical position of the alleged Atherstonia australis has been
changed from Triassic to Carboniferous.

Bibliography.

BENSON, W. N., 1913a.—The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of N.S.W.
Part i. Introduction. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxviii.

BY A. H. VOISEY. 407

Bunson, W. N., 1913b.—The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of N.S.W.
Part ili. Petrology. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxviii.

———., 1916.—The General Geology of the Gloucester District. Jour. Roy. Soe.
N.S.W., 1.

, 1918.—The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of N.S.W.
Part viii. The extension of the Great Serpentine Belt from the Nundle District to
the Coast. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xliii.

BROWNE, W. R., 1933.—An Account of Post-Palaeozoic Igneous Activity of N.S.W. Jour.
Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1xvii.

CAREY, S. W., 1934.—The Geological Structure of the Werrie Basin. Proc. LINN. Soc.
N.S.W., lix.

CarEY, S. W., and Browne, W. R., 1938.—Review of the Carboniferous Stratigraphy,
Tectonics and Palaeogeography of New South Wales and Queensland. Jour. Roy.
Soc. N.S.W., |xxii.

CARNE, J. H., 1896.—Geology and Mineral Resources of the Coast between Port Macquarie
and Cape Hawke. Ann. Report Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1896.

, 1908.—The Geology and Mineral Resources of the Western Coal-field. Mem.
Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Geology No. 6.

CHALMERS, R. O., 1934.—The Mid-North Coast. Aust. Musewm Mag., v.

Davip, T. W. E., 1932.—A New Geological Map of the Commonwealth of Australia.

OSBORNE, G. D., 1929.—The Structural Geology of the Carboniferous Rocks in the Hunter
River District, etc. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., liv.

--, 1938.—On Some Major Geological Faults North of Raymond Terrace, etc.
Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1xxi.

Raceatt, H. G., 1929.—Note on the Structural and Tectonic Geology of the Hunter Valley,
ete. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., liv.

SmItTH-Woopwarp, A., 1900-1904.—On Atherstonia australis and Ctenolates avus, etc.
Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W.,. vii, p. 88.

SussmitcH, C. A., 1921.—The Geology of the Gloucester District. Jour. Roy. Soc.
N.S.W., 1.

, 1932.—Relation of the Tertiary Alkaline Rocks of Eastern Australia to Late
Tertiary Tectonic Lines. Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xvi.

Voisny, A. H., 1938.—The Upper Palaeozoic Rocks in the neighbourhood of Taree. Proc.
Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Ixiii.

—, 1939a.—The Upper Palaeozoic Rocks between Mount George and Wingham,
N.S.W. Proc. LInn. Soc. N.S.W., Ixiv.

———_——_, 1939b.—The Lorne Triassic Basin and Associated Rocks. Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S.W., Ixiv.

WooLNouGcH, W. G., 1911.—Preliminary Note on the Geology of the Kempsey District.
Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xv.

408

A NOTE ON THE SYNONYMY OF LEPTOPS (COLEOPTERA:
CURCULIONIDAE).

By KeituH C. McKeown, Assistant Entomologist, Australian Museum.
(Contribution from the Australian Museum.)

[Read 30th August, 1939.]

Family CuRCULIONIDAE.
Subfamily ENTIMINAE (= Leptopinae).
Tribe STENOCORYNINI (= Leptopini).
BARYOPADUS Pascoe (= Leptops Schoenherr, nom. praeoc.).

The above are changes in subfamily, tribe, and generic names rendered
necessary by the fact that the name Leptops Schoenherr for the well-known genus
of Australian weevils is preoccupied by Leptops Rafinesque, a subgenus of Cat-fish.
It is unfortunate that a name so familiar to entomological workers should be
displaced but, by the law of priority, there appears to be no alternative.

The genus Leptops was founded by Rafinesque in 1820 (Ichthyol. Ohiensis,
[Dec.] 1820, p. 64); the coleopterous genus, by Schoenherr, founded on the geno-
type robustus Olivier, 1807 (Curculio), in 1834 (Genera et species Curculionidum,
mt (QD), wey 1s ZO).

The genus Leptops must now be known as Baryopadus Pascoe (Trans. Ent. Soc.
Lond., 1870, p. 186), a genus erected for the reception of B. corrugatus, a species
which Lea (Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., 1906, p. 318) proved conclusively to be a Leptops,
on these grounds: ‘This species, an unusually short, robust insect which certainly
looks somewhat aberrant for Leptops, was described as the type of a new genus
Baryopadus; but I am convinced that it belongs to Leptops. Pascoe briefly defined
the genus, stating that its most peculiar feature was the tarsi, but these are
exactly as in superciliaris and other species of Leptops. Its antennae, rostrum
and tarsi are almost exactly as in superciliaris, the sculpture of the elytra of the
same character, and certainly the two belong to but one genus; just as certainly as
superciliaris and squamosus are congeneric, and the latter is quite a normal
Leptops.” I consider that Lea’s contentions are sound.

Baryopadus is listed separately by Shenkling and Marshall in Junk’s Catalogus
Coleopterorum, pars 114, and reference to Lea’s paper has been omitted.

I am indebted to Mr. F. H. Taylor, School of Public Health and Tropical
Medicine, University of Sydney, for drawing my attention to the fact that Leptops
could not stand, and to Dr. E. J. White, of the British Museum of Natural History,
for supplying certain references.

409

THE DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI.
FAMILY TRYPETIDAE.

By JoHn R. Matitocn, Arlington, Va.
(Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8.)

(Plate xi; fifteen Text-figures. )
[Read 30th August, 1939.]

In this paper I present a review of this family on the basis of materials in
hand, the Australian species available to me, and the rather sparse literature of
the New Guinea region. I make no attempt to deal with the many Australian
species of the genus Dacus, sens. lat., but I present records of the few species of
the group now before me.

Below I give a synopsis of the various groups reviewed in the paper. While in
the main this will apply to the family in other faunal regions, there are several
segregates not represented in this region, and in its circumscribed form a strict
application of the synopsis will undoubtedly result in misleading associations of
some extralimital genera or species if applied to the latter. I have included
certain extralimital genera in my keys merely for comparative purposes or because
it appears to me that they may yet be found in this region.

I have to thank Mr. Frank H. Taylor for his kindness in supplying me with
most of the materials dealt with and for undertaking the final preparation of the
manuscript and making most of the figures to illustrate the paper. A few species
I have had the opportunity of examining in the collection of the United States
National. Museum, the wing of one type-specimen being figured for me by Mr.
C. T. Greene of that Institution. Some of the specimens belong to me; I have
also had the opportunity of including in this report data derived from a study
of specimens, belonging to tiie imperial Institute of Hntomology, taken in the
Solomon Islands, these latter forming the basis for a separate paper.

Key to the Subfamilies.

1. Ocellar and postvertical bristles almost invariably lacking, rarely represented by
microscopic hairs, the postocular cilia short, almost undeveloped; thorax without
the presutural, dorsocentral, and sternopleural bristles, humeral present in only
one or two species; antennae slender, the third segment rarely less than three
tmestas lone sas wilder ies yar bhenctay yaa Siok o Med sdaree setae: SUatataletane Sa wl aha tes Dacinae

Some or all of the above bristles present on head and thorax, postocular cilia always
distinct; third antennal segment usually distinctly less than three times as long
Ee Vfalna (100 (Ten A oe DECH ONCE PHCN DRO RORCRERORCRC HOR NC ENROL OIG DecR Ace ink CROLENT ENCES ee aCNE RS IGT) Chee 2

Costa of the wing with a deep cleft at apex of the subcostal vein, the costa with a
definite angle at anterior side of the cleft and at tip of the angle with a pair of
well-developed bristles; genus from this region with a pair of long strong erect
bristles in front of the ocelli on the interfrontalia .............. Schistopterinae

Costa of the wing with no, or a hardly perceptible, break at apex of the subcostal
vein, with or without a pair of bristles at that point; no genus with a pair of
long strong erect bristles in front of the ocelli on the interfrontalia ........ 3

lo

HH

410 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

3. Postocular cilia black or dark brown, fine at tips; scutellum with from two to ten
marginal bristles; sixth abdominal tergite of the female usually distinctly shorter
Or at leastimot loner thanwtnennitthenrctesc saicieieieaeesereie eters eine Trypetinae

Postocular cilia yellow or yellowish-white, stout and rather blunt at apices; scutellum
with two or four bristles on margin; sixth abdominal tergite of female usually
longer: than MLth ss srccnc cra ncesnetans tev eieie arn eresere: oye, 1, oe ORT Cosas eS Tephritinae

Subfamily DaAcInar.

I include two tribes in this subfamily, but Adraminii has sometimes been
given subfamily rank. The two tribes may be distinguished as below.

A. Posterior basal cell of the wing much wider than the anal cell, the vein on its
anterior side much curved up at its base so that the cell is almost as wide at
its base as at its apex; lobe of the anal cell usually longer than the free part
of the anal vein; pleurotergite without fine erect hairs ................ Dacinii

AA. VPosterior basal cell of the wing not, or very little, wider than the anal cell, the
vein on its anterior side not noticeably curved forward at its base; lobe of the
anal cell not nearly as long as the free part of the anal vein; pleurotergite
almost invariably with erect hairs on part of its surface .......... Adraminii

Tribe DaAcrInit.

I am not dealing in a complete manner with this tribe as there are so few
species in the New Guinea material before me. The few that are in the collection
include representatives of four subgenera: Callantra Walker, Chaetodacus Bezzi,
Zeugodacus Shiraki, and Bactrocera Guérin. Of these the first listed has been
considered as a genus by Hendel, but an intensive study of all the species from all
the faunal regions where the genus Dacus, sens. lat., occurs is essential to a definite
conclusion on the matter of generic and subgeneric segregations and this I am not
prepared to make at this time. I present below a key to the species now available,
with a full realization of the fact that there must be many more species in New
Guinea that are unrepresented in this collection.

Key to the New Guinea Species.

1. Abdomen elongated, with a slender basal petiole which has a short pointed tubercle
on each lateral basal angle, the apical bulbous portion of the abdomen in the
female prominently convex; wing with a broad dark-brown costal border that
extends to, or almost to, the fourth vein on its entire extent; scutellum short,
broadly rounded in outline, with two bristles (Callantra Walker) Tapeehe EN EBD
5 RB RS Ca ora oho ot Ceol ci. Ststh aic 5 ech mente oct) bic cacRo, heres atq Cuokeaen otc Ele smieroides Walker

Abdomen not elongate, more or less ovate, not petiolate, without distinct tubercles
at lateral basal angles on composite basal tergite, and only moderately convex
on apical half in both sexes; wing with a much narrower costal brown stripe,
or, if with a broad stripe, then with two or three brown fasciae on the disc;

scutellum more elongate and not evenly rounded in outline ................ 2

2. Scutellum with four marginal bristles (Zewgodacus Shiraki) .................. 3
Seas bhoten, Akdel Loy Ayo) Geena LOOKS) Ha de dous oooh ogdoadonddoceHoeauouoode 4

3. Prescutellar acrostichal and supra-alar bristles lacking ............ cucumis French
Prescutellar acrostichal and supra-alar bristles present .......... papuaensis, n. sp.

4. Wing with a broad dark-brown costal stripe that extends to third vein and from
which emanate three dark-brown fasciae, the basal one connecting with the anal
stripe, the second covering the cross-veins, and the third, which is usually
incomplete behind, lying between the outer cross-vein and the wing tip;
prescutellar acrostichals present; humeri and posterior notopleural calli orange-
Vellow NCBACtRoCenauG UELiN)) Vege. ne-yo -peteusbed holed oh eestohel teeta umbrosus (Fabricius)

Wing with a narrow dark brown stripe on the costal margin that does not extend to
third vein, and the field of the wing without dark fasciae beyond the anal stripe

(ORM CATO) LSteV4A0) hl pO CRORE > CREE ICRED OO CIC ClO Ea OID Gao od ch OD. cid thoi bb. Ia ele 5
5. Prescutellar acrostichal bristles present; humeri and posterior notopleural calli
orange-yellow ; outer cross-vein not clouded with brown ........ froggatti Bezzi

Prescutellar acrostichals lacking; lateral margins of the mesonotum from anterior
margin of humeri to wing bases ivory-white; outer cross-vein of the wing
roe Maconidhs Clloyitetsyel \yvaNed lyon] Gaocoaugnoonodouaggcosneunuc albolateralis, n. sp.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 411

Dacus (CALLANTRA) SMIEROIDES (Walker).
Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iv, 1860, 154.

The genus Callantra was erected by Walker for the reception of this species.
Hendel has since placed in it another species, from New Britain, which I have
not seen. Dacus aequalis Coquillett, from Australia, also belongs to the group.
The Australian species Dacus bryoniae Tryon may belong here also, but the petiole
of the abdomen is not so long, and the dark-brown costal stripe is narrower than
in the other species.

Head brownish-yellow, the face with an elongate black spot in lower third of
each antennal fovea; third antennal segment almost entirely brownish-black.
Frons subquadrate, a little more than one-third of the head-width, with two pairs
of incurved infraorbital and one pair of stronger reclinate supraorbital bristles;
verticals four, strong. Antennae long, geniculated at apex of first segment, the
apical two segments pendulous, basal segment slightly shorter than second, the
latter about one-third as long as third; arista bare, a little longer than third
antennal segment. Gena narrow.

Thorax brownish-black, nearly all parts closely and minutely piliferous
punctate, but slightly shiny, humeri yellowish, a yellow streak on hind margin of
each mesopleuron that extends along the transverse suture on the mesonotum, but
they do not entirely meet in centre; another elongate yellow spot on the pleuro-
tergite, and the apical two-thirds of the scutellum yellow. The bristles all weak,
as follows: 2 notopleurals, 1 supra-alar, 2 postalars, 1 mesopleural, one very fine
short pteropleural, and 2 stronger scutellars. Mesonotal hairs short and mainly
yellow, those on scutellum similar.

Legs blackish-brown, tarsi yellow, apices of femora paler brown.

Wing greyish-hyaline, with a broad dark-brown costal stripe that extends over
the third vein on its entire extent but does not reach fourth except in basal third
of the anterior basal cell, fading out about middle of that cell apically and the
middle of the first posterior cell; anal streak paler brown, entire. Inner cross-
vein about one-third from apex of the discal cell; outer cross-vein slightly curved.
sloping outward above; lobe of anal cell almost twice as long as free part of anal
vein. Halteres yellow.

Abdomen coloured as thorax, with a central transverse yellow line at middle
and another at apex of the composite basal tergite or petiole, the latter not
extending to apical lateral angles, no yellow colour on sides; surface of the
remaining tergites in poor shape in the specimen before me because of dust, but
apparently there is a large yellowish mark in centre of apex of the penultimate
tergite, on which mark the hairs are orange-yellow, and the large oval depression
on each side of the ultimate tergite is greyish-dusted. The composite basal tergite
is narrower on basal half than in aequalis, more distinctly constricted at middle
where the yellow transverse line is, and the apical half forms the base of the large,
oval, prominently convex remainder of the abdomen, which is pear-shaped when
seen from above, and straight on ventral edge when seen in profile; sheath of
Ovipositor narrowly conical, not at all depressed, with more and longer hairs than
in aequalis, and these black and not yellowish in colour.

Length, 9 mm.

Originally described from Celebes. The specimen before me is from Dutch
New Guinea, Lake Sentani, Iffar, August 1936 (L. E. Cheesman). In British
Museum.

412 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

I have compared the specimen with the type-specimen of Dacus aequalis
Coquillett in the United States National Museum to obtain the above comparative
data. In a paper on the Trypetidae of the Solomon Islands now in the press I
have included a key to all the species of this subgenus.

Dacus (BAcTROCERA) UMBROSUS Fabricius.

Syst. Antliat., 1805, 274.

This species and several others closely related to it have been placed in the
subgenus Bactrocera Guérin, but there are no outstanding characters beyond the
two or more oblique dark-brown fasciae on the field of the wing to separate it
from Dacus, sens. lat.

This species extends in range from the Malayan region to Australia. I have
before me specimens taken by Mr. Taylor at Wewak, New Guinea, Rabaul, and
Lindenhafen, New Britain.

Dacus (ZEUGODACUS) CUCUMIS French.
Dacus tryoni var. cucumis French, Jour. Dept. Agric. Vict., v, 1907, 307.—
D. cucumis French, Tryon, Proc. Roy. Soc. Qsld., xxxviii, 1927, 207.
One female, Papua: Mondo, 5,000 feet, i-ii, 1934 (L. E. Cheesman). British
Museum. Previously recorded from New South Wales and Queensland.

Dacus (ZEUGODACUS) PAPUAENSIS, Nn. Sp.

6, 2. A rather small orange-yellow species, with the usual two black spots on
the face, the thoracic dorsum not blackened, with three ivory-white vittae behind
the suture, and the abdomen without black markings though the base of the
composite basal tergite is browned. Wing with a very narrow dark-brown costal
stripe to apex of third vein or slightly beyond that, the costal cells hyaline; anal
streak present.

Frons in male a little more than twice as long as wide, with three pairs of
incurved infraorbital and one pair of supraorbital bristles, in female wider and
with two or three pairs of infraorbitals; both sexes with four strong verticals.
Third antennal segment about three times as long as second.

Thorax with mesonotum slightly browned along inner edges of the postsutural
yellow vittae, the following parts lemon-yellow: Humeri, posterior notopleural
calli, three postsutural vittae, the central one not attaining posterior margin, the
entire scutellum, posterior half of the mesopleura, but little narrowed below, a
large double spot on the pleurotergite; postnotum black-brown. Scapular bristles
quite strong; in the male there is a dark hair-like setula or bristle near the hind
edge of each humerus, but in the female this is not distinctly evident. Supra-alar
and prescutellar acrostichal bristles present; scutellars four.

Légs yellow.

Wing as Plate xi, figure 1, the costal cells hyaline, and the dark-brown costal
streak ending just beyond the apex of third vein. First and third veins setulose as
usual, the fifth vein bare; free part of anal vein in both sexes nearly as long as the
lobe. Anal streak broad to near apex of lobe of anal cell, faint beyond it.

Abdomen ovate, no visible erect fringe of third abdominal tergite of the male,
the depressions on fifth tergite of that sex poorly developed, the fifth tergite of
female very distinctly depressed centrally on each side. Hairs pale brown.

Length, 7-8 mm.

Type, male, Bulolo, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor). Allotype, Wewak, New Guinea
(J. R. Rigby).

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 413

Dacus (CHAETODACUS) FROGGATTI Bezzi.

Dacus zonatus Froggatt, nec Saunders, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxv, 1910,
868.—D. froggatti Bezzi, n.n., Dipt. of Fiji, 1928, 101.

One male, Lindenhafen, New Britain (F. H. Taylor). Originally described
from Russell Island.

Dacus (CHAETODACUS) ALBOLATERALIS, N. SD.

6, °. A brownish-yellow species, much like papuaensis in general colour and
markings, the mesonotum with three ivory-white postsutural vittae; along the
inner edge of the sublateral pair there is a blackish line. The mesonotum differs
from that of any of the other species listed in this paper in having the entire lateral
edges in front of the wing bases ivory-white, and in having also a pair of yellowish-
grey-dusted vittae extending from the anterior margin to near the posterior margin
between the postsutural vittae.

Head brownish-yellow, paler in front, the face with the usual pair of glossy
black spots in the foveae. Third antennal segment about 2:5 times as long as
second. Frons with two pairs of incurved infraorbital and one pair of reclinate
supraorbital bristles, and four strong verticals; ocellar spot black.

Legs yellow, normal in structure and armature.

Wing as Plate xi, figure 2, the costal streak dark brown, not extending over
second vein on to the field, ending near middle of apex of the first posterior cell;
inner cross-vein not clouded, outer cross-vein distinctly but narrowly clouded with
brown. First and third veins setulose as usual, fifth vein bare.

Abdomen elongate-ovate, brownish-yellow, with rather dense concolorous hairs,
the apical lateral erect fringe on third tergite of male dark brown. Male with a
central apical dark mark on the fourth and fifth tergites.

Length, 7-7-5 mm.

Type, female, Upper Watut, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor). Allotype, Papua:
Mondo, 5,000 feet, i-ii, 1934 (L. E. Cheesman). Type returned to Mr. Taylor,
allotype in collection of British Museum.

Tribe ADRAMINII.

I have some doubts about the propriety of segregating this group on the basis
of the cited characters, as there appears to me to be a great similarity between
them and those genera most closely allied to Huphranta Loew. This latter group
has consistently been well removed from Adrama and its allies by specialists on
the Trypetidae, but by making use of other characters than have been used for
group segregations it might be possible to bring these two groups together.

The haired pleurotergite is present in Adrama and in Euphranta, as well as in
a number of related genera, and there is a great similarity in the general habitus
as well as in the wing-markings of most of the genera involved. The lack of the
presutural bristle is to my mind rather an important character that links all of
them together, and it appears to me to be of more significance than the previously
used character of the spinose femora, there being other genera in which this last-
mentioned character occurs that are not at all closely related to Adrama.

As this is purely a faunal paper and not intended as a revisional one, I prefer
to leave some matters, such as this, in abeyance meanwhile, or to other and better
informed workers on the family.

Below I present a key to the genera of this group known to me, though one
of them is so known from the descriptions and figures only. Two of the genera
are not known to occur in New Guinea, but Neosophira does occur in Celebes and
it may yet be found there.

414 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

Key to the Genera.

1. At least the mid and hind femora with short stout ventral spines apically, usually
in two series; marginal cell of the wing just beyond the apex of the first vein at
least twice as wide as the submarginal cell at the same point; subcostal vein
rectangularly bent forward near tip, obsolescent beyond the angle; stigma not
half as long as the costal division in front of it; stem vein of the wing with short
stiff setulae above to near its extreme base .................. Adrama Walker

None of the femora spinose on their ventral surfaces; marginal and submarginal
cells of the wing just beyond apex of first vein subequal in width; subcostal vein
sloping forward at apex, rather faint beyond the curve; stigma much more than
half as long as the division of costa before it; none, or very few, setulae on the
upperside of the stem-vein of the wing basad of the level of the humeral cross-

NEGO ae he 14, 0 GaS. Oh BLE REL CRIECLO. Cod. colo -c CLAIROL DRASTIC ROR BRC AP ESRCDCUCuMEe A iohc Tas Sion aeO Ants cheer ers hats 2

2. Apical section of the fourth wing-vein more or less undulated and bent forward at
apex so that the first posterior cell is narrowed apically .... Neosophira Hendel

Apical section of the fourth wing-vein straight or almost so, the first posterior cell
MOS Lie LNYh WEHH COV GOWEN Ke NUNY <6 o.oo CoO Me Ded AIGOC.S DU diablas 6 ued ulate ol aailore Geo 6 3

3. A pair of fine erect bristles in centre of anterior margin of the mesonotum (central
scapular pair) the apices of which are fine and slightly curled; second wing-
vein undulated; section of fifth vein basad of the base of the discal cell not longer
than the cross-vein closing the latter; vein closing the anal cell slightly angled
below the middle, posterior lower angle of that cell hardly produced, the cell
much longer than the free part of the anal vein; pleurotergite bare ............
BAI RRORCURCR ORS Cer ChOe A ch 8 tics Gr 8 Cho BRC Ree PMC OLR MONE Curae aa Pseudosophira, n. gen.

No fine erect bristles in centre of anterior margin of the mesonotum; second wing-
vein straight; section of the fifth vein basad of the discal cell about twice as
long as the cross-vein closing base of latter; vein closing anal cell much angu-
lated at or above middle, the cell with a slender subtriangular lobe at lower
posterior angle, not nearly as long as the free part of the anal vein; pleuro-
terpite! aimed’ waite ovens weve wets Ss Pate ee Oem Ue PER ews ee dae Cyclopsia, n. gen.*

NEOSOPHIRA Hendel.

Abhandl. Zool.-Bot. Ges. Wien., viii, 1914, 138; Wien. Hnt. Zeitg., xxxiii, 1914, 73.

Originally Hendel placed this genus in the family Otitidae (Ortalidae), sub-
family Platystominae, but in the same year, as cited above, he included it in his
key to the genera of the family Trypetidae. I have not seen either of the two
species he placed in the genus, but there can be no doubt about the correctness of
his later decision.

From Hendel’s description and figures of the genotype, distorta Walker, I draw
the following data: The frons has one upper reclinate pair of orbitals and a very
weak incurved pair of infraorbitals, and one strong pair of verticals; the arista is
moderately long haired; mesonotum with 2 notopleural and 2 supra-alar (postalar?)
bristles, the other bristles lacking; scutellum with four marginal bristles. Stigma
of wing as long as the costal division before it and much longer than the one
between it and the apex of second vein; inner cross-vein beyond middle of discal
cell.

,

NEOSOPHIRA DISTORTA (Walker).

Trans. Ent. Soe. Lond., iv, n.s., 1857, 230 (Sophira). Originally described from
Celebes. May be found in New Guinea.

PSEUDOSOPHIRA, nN. gen.

The essential characters of this genus may be derived from the features given
in the foregoing keys to tribes and genera. As the genus is extralimital, all the
known species being from the Philippines, it appears essential to describe only the
venotype in order to establish the validity of the genus. This I take the oppor-
tunity of doing herein.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 415

PSEUDOSOPHIRA BAKERI, NM. Sp.

6. General colour orange-yellow to ferruginous, shiny, frons dull, upper orbits
and vertex glossy. Frons with a large pear-shaped black mark, the narrow end of
which is on vertex, the other at anterior third of the interfrontalia; face black
centrally, the mark widened from between antennae to epistome. Second antennal
segment largely black, third bright orange-yellow, barely twice as long as wide,
rounded at apex; arista with the longest upper hairs longer than the width of
third antennal segment; palpi yellow. Head slightly wider than thorax, frons
one-third of the head-width and about 1:25 times as long as wide, parallel-sided;
upper orbits well defined, extending to middle, with a short fine yellow bristle at
lower extremity, one pair of fine erect infraorbitals only and these near anterior
margin; only the inner verticals present, strong and straight. Eye higher than
long, more narrowed below than above; gena narrow.

Thorax with three deep black spots on each lateral margin of the mesonotum
as follows: One above humerus, one behind humerus, and a very small one against
the hind side of the suture; pleura with a large glossy black spot on upper
posterior angle; postnotum immaculate. The single, central, pair of scapulars
long, luteous; anterior notopleural lacking, posterior one strong; posterior postalar
much shorter than the anterior, which latter is equal to the supra-alar; prescutellar
acrostichals minute; scutellum with four strong bristles and many short stiff
hairs; pleura without bristles: pleurotergite without erect hairs.

Legs orange-yellow, hind tibiae browned centrally. Fore femur with a series
of fine yellow bristles that begins at base rather long and runs out about middle
with very short hairs. Mid tibia with a strong black apical ventral spur.

Wing (PI. xi, fig. 3)* as in Colobostrella ruficauda Hendel, but the hyaline
streak between the cross-veins attains the costa, there is a hyaline marginal streak
from the apex of the second to beyond the apex of fourth vein, and the hyaline
spot is in the second posterior cell, not near the apex of first.

Abdomen glossy ferruginous yellow, the hairs concolorous.

Length, 8-5 mm.

Type, Kolambugan, Mindanao, Philippine Islands. Sent to me a number of
years ago by C. F. Baker when I planned a review of the Trypetidae of the
Philippines.

Subfamily TRYPETINAE.

Key to the Groups.

1. Arista plumose, or long-haired, the longest hairs rarely (Acanthoneura) less than
half as long as the width of third antennal segment; scutellum with six marginal

bristles, the intermediate pair sometimes very short ..... Ge este jleusye ieyisy seals Group I
Arista much shorter haired; if plumose then the scutellum has but four marginal
DDISELSS) Vii ee Reta tematic: teak roma Sue ool RESeaev che emai tie anaes, Siete, niche Panta Matene, oz claus 2

bo

Scutellum flattened, coarsely haired on its entire surface, and with eight or more
strong but unequal marginal bristles; hairs on upperside of the first wing-vein
carriedvalmost tor the basen ss sees aie aid ese saiaereie etoresalee alate Pee eee Group II

Scutellum with but four marginal bristles, rarely with two .............. Group III

Group I.
In this group there are three genera, in which the dorsocentral pair of bristles
are almost in line with, or even in front of, the transverse line between the supra-

alar pair. Of these but one, Diarrhegmoides, is in the present collection. The
others are Malayan, but may yet be found in New Guinea or adjacent island groups.

* The tiny spots all over the wing are dirt adhering to the wing membrane,—F.H.T.

416

or

5a.

DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

Key to the Genera.

Second wing-vein conspicuously undulated beyond level of apex of first vein; petiole
of second and third wing-veins sometimes setulose above; dorsocentral pair of
bristles well behind the supra-alar line; anterior supraorbital sometimes near
ANCELION -LOUntM (OL ELONS) qinyeserstorekel aici ccarey ce) sie ne aL oc FTE Rene oaeae ge he eee te III nae 2

Second wing-vein at most but slightly bent beyond level of apex of first vein; if it
is so, then the fifth vein and the petiole of second and third veins are bare above,
the face is noticeably convex, the anterior supraorbital is above middle of frons;
or the dorsocentral pair of bristles is close to, or in front of, the supra-alar
UR TTO: somes rosrcuestelens f= 'cnexexe ros) Cheus bene ee vevedlen okerte anges ages cuss sy 8 cade vce ac sales caeiar emausihe apo nareRORS EcICirone tiene 6

Second wing-vein with several short spur-veins at right angles to it on each side
that frequently connect with the first or third veins; fourth vein conspicuously
bent forward beyond middle of its apical section so that the first posterior cell

ISiveryamuch! nNarrowediinvavexOL Winky hee eeiecee cena seen Polyara Walker
Second wing-vein without any, or but one, short spur-vein; if the latter it is near
apex on the posterior side and it does not connect with the third vein ........ 3

Fourth wing-vein bent forward at its apex so that the first posterior cell is narrowed
in the wing tip; only one pair of infraorbital bristles present ..................
SS atmo netics SARA RAS ce SMe teea fel oh oh cren tarsi era crit matte s fal Fh ee ae ae Colobostroter Enderlein*

Face in profile strongly convex, receding below; antennae not half as long as face;
anterior pair of supraorbital bristles very strong, situated at about the anterior
fourth of frons; two supra-alar, two postalar, and six equally strong scutellar
bristles present; fifth wing-vein bare above; undulation of second wing-vein not

VEL PIMARKEd" ec cee ateteerteneraensis sre at Scrat sve ere Renita tel ana sche Themaroides Hendel
Face not at all convex in profile; anterior pair of supraorbital bristles at or above
middle lot frons: [AR cee PALE. SSSR ah BAe esenes oaths £ cen Rees iy 3) Seka ents Oaks a
Second wing-vein with a deep downward loop below apex of first; gena about three-
OWNS ENS lvkslal SGN (MOM) odoloonooosdcudooscnoodoago+ Exvicopterina Malloch
Second wing-vein merely undulated, not looped; gena not more than one-fourth as
1s h=3) clare non doe Be ene Cac ca bed ce Oren cae CRP CICRCaR OIE Sloane teste sy oe Mike is Gee eee es caciG. Geo trolgio 5a

Face vertical, epistome not projecting; antennae not half as long as face; ocellars
about as long as the postverticals; petiole of second and third wing-veins not
SCtulOse! (ADOVE™ seo coe cette ee che eect ie Gaels SencLa Sista tee Pseudacanthoneura, n. gen.

Face slightly concave centrally in profile, the epistome slightly projecting; antennae
descending to distinctly below middle of face in profile; ocellar bristles repre-

Sentedaby microscopic, Mains) 4h dipivesrsadeworsts > cy egedous Mice aseke k Ade ay Aas hag eee eed deh eis 5b

5b. One pair of infraorbital bristles present; intermediate pair of scutellar bristles very
short; petiole of second and third veins bare (Malayan) ...... Themara Walker

At least two pairs of infraorbital bristles present; all three pairs of scutellars long
and strong; petiole of second and third veins setulose above ..................

A ORG BCL Os MO CHDL ice SORE ICR RCE RHE TOR MER Cure tan Aira te mnaeennatce clei Neothemara Malloch

First, third, and fifth veins setulose on at least a part of their upperside ........ 7
Only the first and third wing-veins partly setulose above ....................... 11

First wing-vein exceptionally long, ending in the costal vein above level of upper
. extremity of the outer cross-vein, the distance between its apex and that of the
subcostal vein more than twice as great as that between latter and the humeral
cross-vein; face with a central vertical rounded Keel, narrowed above and not
continued between bases of the antennae; genae and lower occiput with numerous
rather long black bristly hairs; sternopleural bristle lacking ................

Hoo gnodcoopenovUoUonU Oo Gomes b po moodotD oO AO DOD ed ADO OOO Cheesmanomyia, n. gen.
First wing-vein not exceptionally long, ending in the costal vein well before level of
upper extremity of the outer cross-vein, the distance between its apex and that

of the subcostal vein not greater than that between the latter and the humeral
cross-vein; face not markedly keeled; gena with a few bristly hairs; sterno-
pleural’ bristle present. See. cie cht She ten ctatatie de Setote et sh eeiet ae an ctrele eluate fete Meenas 8

* This genus has but four marginal scutellar bristles, though Enderlein states that it

has six. J include it in Groups I and II.

10.

iL,

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

We

the

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 417

Face quite prominently convex in profile, highest at centre, and from there receding
to epistome; vertex sharply carinate, the carina projecting behind; antennae
about half as long as face; mid tibia with no ventral submedian bristles and
with two equally long and strong apical ventral spurs; scutellum bare on disc
29 a0: 6)i6-'7S G00 tb eos Enea SM aeeh rola earths fee Hl Snir ve Ceri Mei a ROP iii SP a ON ti ae i ae Rabaulia Malloch

Face either almost flat and vertical, or, if slightly convex, not receding from middle
to epistome; vertex not sharply carinate; mid tibia either with one long and
one or more much shorter apical spurs or with a submedian ventral bristle .. 9

Antennae not half as long as face, the latter convex and more or less receding below;
anterior orbitals very strong, curved backward; hind tibia with two or three
submedian anteroventral bristles and the usual series of short anterodorsal
setulae; pteropleural bristle present; scutellum with the entire disc covered with
SHOVEL INE WHS) > Gua ot ee oreo bugs bio CRORIG: o oIGROVCL CoE EcReee one es eea ee Themarohystriz WHendel

Antennae more than half as long as face; anterior two pairs of orbital bristles
proclinate and inecurved; mid and hind tibiae without exceptional armature;
DLUcroOpleuURnaAlMbnISble™ laekiney BAe snatey es declare he hs cheese) Sancho oh eeed ata deal ee N cre dicreteehaci cis 10

Mid tibia with two long apical ventral spurs .......... Trypanocentra Hendel

Mid tibia with one long and one much shorter apical ventral spur ................
Od Dray OrONCRORSIEMO en EIA CORIO C0, Din GER CCR ich oR CREO RP CES EET rs aa ane ae Clusiosoma Malloch

Mesopleura with an outstanding bristle near lower edge centrally ; infraorbitals very
close together, the anterior pair incurved, the upper pair backwardly directed
SM Hes COMA NS wc Pel Se nalts eit a atta piseoteee Atte SRS ei sidl UAE Bs PENS Shin MES Hexacinia Hendel

Mesopleura without an outstanding bristle near lower edge centrally ; frontal bristling

TACHI “EISEN NONE ols aro Gices Wale Oot G DICT ORIEN OFELS IOs CECH ORG oto re To OrGT ONG OICHD ESE CnC SHE Me rCTONT fey oie nemenciT 12
Wing brown or black, with some hyaline incisions in the margin and three or more
STU MyaAlan emai SCAMS DW OLS chaste oie esectre aie sta e a foie ieeetemsitereucnel Shencareenckeleee seus, Ais 13
Wing hyaline or yellowish, with brown longitudinal streaks on costa and veins.. 17
Dorsocentral pair of bristles almost in line with the supra-alar bristles ........ 14
Dorsocentral pair of bristles much behind the line of supra-alar bristles ...... 15

Second wing-vein straight; fourth vein slightly arcuate on apical section; dorso-
central bristles slightly behind the transverse supra-alar line (Malayan) ......
0:0 GE Oe OO OOo id b OO OT Choe Ore O° OG OG. B'0 CIOS MERC ECECRE NCEE POR ENC CRO OIC eaonEr TE Diarrhegma Bezzi
Second wing-vein slightly undulated; fourth vein conspicuously arcuate on apical
section; dorsocentral bristles slightly proximad of the transverse line of supra-

Ura Oe SCLES MPA eet te ciate rato hciweecteney ENE iyo ile needa ve Ron ekeVeteie ta abot Diarrhegmoides, n. gen.
Setulae on the first wing-vein extending the entire length of the node above ....... S
Cher ASG COLONG or Cha ome o POte eee aed. clicks DORIS TRC 6, GEES CR CTEe Se ete EERE et ere nc an aa an Rioxaptilona Hendel
Setulae on first wing-vein not extending over node above ....................- 16

One pair of supraorbital bristles present, and usually only one pair of finer infra-
orbitals; mesonotum narrow, much longer than its greatest width; scutellum
with a few minute hairs on each side of disc; arista long haired ..............
Re Se ee ints Rocmesin ete A AH ROE SRS Dy Skt eto ae ol REE IN Geis etre oe Ste cae Termitorioxa Hendel

Two pairs of supraorbital ana two pairs of infraorbital bristles; mesonotum broad,
not much longer than its greatest width; scutellum bare; arista long haired
PICHON ICR RC ere eee aS cho] dice Alek enc. Orr PRE OGRA Loca Bah atch Goo tld ok SeeRC eee ee Rioza Walker

One pair of infraorbitals and two pairs of supraorbitals; arista short haired ........

Bo Pes Neetu ai ged ae visi ee Dee fe cee taal bg ft SN Acanthoneura Macquart
Inner cross-vein of wing at middle of the discal cell; presutural bristle lacking
UC OLEn ra Koyo’) li tacerolnedi ord CHEER n cach CRORCRE RCL Chet GES Garena. Gc CL Cae eey CLRSRS TOES ase e Sophiroides Hende}

Inner cross-vein before or beyond middle of the discal cell; presutural bristle present
SASS SIRES) CTaiciG a Mane ona aeaaa o BitaNo ke een ‘oasromteoNaro Aig: DRoloeced ip cip ay OEaLe aides chee MGI Res Sophira Walker

PoLtyara Walker.
Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., iii, 1859, 122.
This genus was erected for the reception of a single species, described from

Aru Islands.
The head is broader than the thorax in the male, with the frons broader

than long, about two-fifths of the head-width, inner verticals much longer than

the

outer, postverticals and ocellars short, anterior orbitals two pairs, incurved,

anterior pair very short and close to the second pair, two reclinate upper pairs,

418 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

the anterior pair the longer; face slightly convex, with deep lateral infra-antennal
foveae; eye a little higher than long; antennae more than half as long as face;
aristae long-haired. Thorax with the following bristles: 1 humeral, 1 presutural,
2 notopleurals, 1 supra-alar, 3 postalars, 1 pair of dorsocentrals a little behind
the level of the supra-alars. a pair of strong prescutellar acrostichals, 2 or 3
mesopleurals, 1 sternopleural, 1 pteropleural, and 6 strong scutellars, the dise of
scutellum bare. Abdomen slender, with four evident tergites, first (composite)
and fourth longer than the others, all with lateral bristles, strongest on fourth
and on apex of fifth sternite. Mid and hind tibiae with a few anterodorsal and
posterodorsal bristles. Wing with some spur-veins on both sides of the second
vein, sometimes extending entirely across the cells, the vein slightly angulate at
bases of these spur veins; cross-veins separated by less than the length of the
inner, fourth vein much curved forward about apical third; anal cell with a
long apical lobe; first and third veins setulose above and below.

POLYARA INSOLITA Walker.

Op. cit., iii, 1859, 123.

Head orange-yellow, with a black spot between bases of antennae and another
between each antenna and eye; facial foveae white-dusted. Thorax testaceous
yellow, with grey dust, mesonotum with four rather obscure black vittae, pleura
largely black, with dense grey dust, the postnotum black. Legs tawny yellow. -

Wings (PI. xi, fig. 4) greyish-hyaline, with dark brown costal stripe and paler
markings in some of the cells and on the outer cross-vein. Halteres yellow.

Abdomen black, densely grey-dusted, with a testaceous-yellow dorsocentral
vitta on its entire extent that tapers behind.

Length, 7-5 mm.

Bulolo, Wau, New Guinea, three specimens (Dr. C. E. M. Gunther, F. H.
Taylor). Walker later recorded the species from Mysol, and Osten-Sacken in 1881
listed it from Ramoi and Dorey, New Guinea.

COLOBOSTROTER Enderlein.
Zool. Jahrb., Abt. fur Syst. Geog. und Biologie, xxxi, 1911, 445.
This is a rather exceptional genus and, though it is not known to occur in

New Guinea, and may never be found there, it appears necessary to present a
few notes on the genotype.

COLOBOSTROTER PULCHRALIS Enderlein.

Op. cit., xxxi, 1911, 445.

Has much the appearance of an Otitid, the posterior basal and anal cells of
the wing being much longer than usual in the Trypetidae, the anal cell having
but a short angular extension at lower apical angle; the frons has but one
infraorbital and one supraorbital pair of bristles, and one pair of verticals, the
inner. Specimens that I have seen have but four scutellar bristles despite
Enderlein’s statement that there are six; this difference from the description has
already been noted by de Meijere. A peculiar feature of the wing is the presence
of a short spur-vein on the posterior side of the second vein above the outer
cross-vein. The forward curve of the apical section of the fourth vein is not very
marked, but the apical section of the vein is biundulate, making the upward
inflection of the tip more apparent. The wing has three blackish fasciae, the first
over the inner cross-vein that does not extend beyond the fifth vein and has a

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 419

backward extension to almost the fork of second and third veins, the second one
extends over apex of second vein and encloses the outer cross-vein, over which it
connects with the third fascia on the apical margin of the wing.

Sumatra. I have seen it from the Philippine Islands.

THEMAROIDES Hendel.

Wien. Ent. Zeitg., xxxili, 1914, 77.

This monobasic genus was erected for the reception of an old species placed by
Walker in Helomyza. I have not seen the species, which must have been known
to Hendel, as the characters used by him for the segregation of the genus are
not given by Walker in the original description. Differs from Rabaulia in bristling
of frons, etc.

THEMAROIDES QUADRIFERA (Walker).

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., v, 1861, 246 (Helomyza).

Described from a female that is testaceous in ecclour, with the apical half
of the abdomen black, the black colour most extended on sides, the wings black,
limpid at the base and along the hind border, with a white subquadrate costal
spot opposite to which the black extends nearly to the hind border, veins black,
testaceous in the limpid part, discal transverse vein straight, parted by less than
half its length from the border, and by about its length from the prebrachial
(inner) transverse vein. Length 11 mm.

Dorey, New Guinea.

THEMARA Walker.

OTD. Gitte, ty IS, 38,

I have seen several species of this genus, but none from New Guinea.

The undulated second wing-vein, presence of setulae on the first, third, and
fifth wing-veins above and on the second and fourth below, the very small inter-
mediate pair of scutellar bristles, and the wing markings distinguish the genus
from most of its allies.

Enderlein held that this and Ptiolina van der Wulp were synonyms of
Acanthoneura Macquart, but Hendel did not accept his conclusions.

CHEESMANOMYIA, Nl. gen.

Generic characters.—Belongs to the same group as Themarohystrix Hendel,
but is distinguished from it and other closely related genera by the exceptionally
long first vein (Fig. A). As in other genera of this group the wings are largely
black or very dark brown, without pale spots, though there are pale longitudinal
streaks in some of the cells. The frons is much longer than wide, with the upper
orbits glossy, the bristles consisting of two anterior incurved and two posterior
reclinate pairs of orbitals, the outer verticals and the incurved postverticals about
half as long as the inner verticals. Face convex, highest at middle (Fig. B),
antennae extending to a little below middle of face, gena and lower jowls with
numerous fine black bristles (Fig. B). Thorax much as in Themarohystriz, but
there is neither a pteropleural nor a sternopleural present and the dorsocentrals
are well behind the transverse level of the supra-alars. Mid tibia with one
long and one short apical ventral spur and no submedian ventral bristle. First
and third wing-veins setulose on almost their entire extent above, less extensively
and more sparsely so below, fifth setulose basally above, and fourth with a few
widely separated setulae centrally above and below.

Genotype, Cheesmanomyia unica.

420 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

CHEESMANOMYIA UNICA, Nl. Sp.

2°. Head tawny-yellow, frons, antennae, and palpi brighter yellow, vertical
edge and upper occiput brown. Length of frons about 1:75 times its central
width, vertex rounded. The four pairs of orbitals about equally spaced, upper
anterior and lower posterior bristles longer than the others, the anterior two pairs
incurved, upper pairs reclinate, the upper one of latter a little shorter than outer
vertical, the latter about half as long as the inner, ocellars minute; postocular
cilia fine and black.

Thorax glossy brownish-black, the humeri and a line along upper edge of
pleura to base of wing bright yellow, mesonotum in type slightly shrunken because
of the teneral nature of the specimen, showing traces of a yellowish central anterior
marginal mark. Scutellum with the usual six bristles, the intermediate pair
shorter than the others.

Legs yellow, the coxae, femora except their extremities, and basal half of hind
tibiae brownish-black.

Wing (Fig. A) dark brown, paler at. base, in costal cell, along hind margin,
and with pale streaks in centre of discal, first and second posterior, marginal and
submarginal cells. Halteres yellow.

Abdomen coloured as thorax, with numerous black hairs and some fine apical
and lateral bristles on the tergites.

Length, 8 mm.

Type, East Dutch New Guinea, Jutefa Bay Pim., sea-level to 100 feet, February
1934 (L. E. Cheesman). Type in British Museum.

Genus dedicated to the collector in recognition of the fine collection before me.

I place in this genus also the species described by de Meijere, notes on which
are presented below.

CHEESMANOMYIA NIGRA (de Meijere).

Nov. Guin., v, Zool., 1906, 95 (Riozxa).

Similar in almost all respects to wnica, differing in having the costal margin
of the wing more rounded at middle, the costal cell yellow, the central portion
of the wing including the posterior basal cell, the posterior half or more of the
discal cell yellowish-hyaline, the dark colour fading out over the outer cross-vein,
and no subhyaline elongate streaks in the cells of the apical half. There are
also some minor differences in the leg colour-markings, but the type of unica is
teneral and has been attacked by mites or dermestid larvae so that minute
distinctions are difficult to draw between it and de Meijere’s description of his
species. |

Length, 6-7 mm.

New Guinea.

RABAULIA Malloch.

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) iv, 1939, 257.

Generic characters.—Similar to Themarohystrix in structure, differing
markedly in the structure of the head (Fig. C), the face being quite prominently
conically produced, with the highest point a little below the middle in profile and
from that point roundly receding to the mouth margin which is not produced.
Antennae extending to middle of face. Eye higher than long, about six times as
high as gena. Intermediate pair of scutellar bristles shortest, the disc bare. First,

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

BY J. R. MALLOCH.

=f
“ah

D UNOS {
7 Pfs \

ae
se
ae i a
N pei tense tee

A.—Cheesmanomyia unica, n. sp. Wing.
B.—Cheesmanomyia unica, n. sp. Head in profile.
C.—Rabaulia fascifacies Malloch. Head in profile.
D.—Clusiosoma puncticeps, n. sp. Head in profile.
E.—Sophira flava (Edwards). Wing.
F.—Acanthoneura acidiomorpha Hendel. Wing.
G.—Types of armature of node of stem vein of wing: 1. Pseudacanthoneura.
2. Chrysotrypanea.
H.—Cyclopsia inaequalis, n. sp. Wing.
I.—Pseudina bulolodae, n. sp. Head in profile.
J.—Ceratitis capitata (Wied.). Anal cell of wing.
K.—Ceratitella loranthi (Froggatt). Anal cell of wing.
L.—Tephrella sexincisa Malloch. Anal angle of wing.
M.—Spathulina acrolewca (Schiner). Anal angle of wing.
N.—Sphenella marginata Fallen. Anal angle of wing.

421

422 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

third, and fifth veins setulose above, both sections of last setulose, first vein not
exceptionally long. Mid tibia with two long and two short apical ventral spurs.
Genotype, Rabaulia fascifacies Malloch.

RABAULIA FASCIFACIES Malloch.
Op. cit., (11) iv, 1939, 258, Pl. xi, fig. 18.
A small shiny-black species, with black wings, the head largely yellow, the
face with a black central narrow fascia.
Rabaul, New Britain.

THEMAROHYSTRIX Hendel.

Wien. Ent. Zeitung, xxxiii, 1914, 78; Ann. Mus. Nat. Hung., xiii, 1915, 432.

This genus was erected for the reception of a species from the Indian
Archipelago, but without more definite locality given. The generic description
is quite full, but the description of the genotype is very short and rather inadequate
for accurate identification. The type species is unrepresented in the material
before me. Curran erroneously referred a species taken by the Whitney Expedition
on Mouo Island to this genus; I deal with this species under another genus in
the following text. Below I present a key for the identification of the species
known to me at this time.

Key to the Species.

1. Face with a black central mark; wings blackish-brown, without hyaline markings

and the anal angle hardly paler than the disc .................. suttoni, n. sp.

Face and frons entirely yellow; wings dark brown, broadly subhyaline on anal
Nyt eh. Bima don oo oD 0.0 CoC MOR 46 Chui od on cloiciesduoiges cio Goin el fn Gin S.c.o1O Om ee Cl OEcict Z

A WISSOrE ere pon Wake amare Jee WALI oooogomodood¢oodeooano 0G doimon > erinaceus Hendel
MesonotummwithufivierblachkeaviGtaeurenners ri rnel- ii leieieieiciel iterate flaviceps, n. sp.

THEMAROHYSTRIX ERINACEUS Hendel.

Op. cit., xiii, 1915, 433.

Hendel describes this species as having four black mesonotal vittae, the
submedian pair continued along the sides of the scutellum, the others along the
notopleural suture, and two similar vittae on each pleuron. The abdomen is
described as: “‘Seitenrand der Tergite Schwarzbraun, die Spitze im allgemeinen
etwas verdunkelt.” The wings are similar to those of flaviceps. Length, 9 mm.

In the original description Hendel states that the base of the second vein
and the fourth vein to about the middle are setulose. This character holds in
both the species before me, and in addition it may be well to add that the second
vein has the underside, except at apex, closely setulose and that there are setulae
on the underside of the fourth vein to beyond its middle. No doubt these features
ought to be taken as of generic import.

Indian Archipelago. Described from a female specimen.

THEMAROHYSTRIX FLAVICEPS, N. Sp.

9. Wing (Pl. xi, fig. 5): In this species the first, third, a part of fourth
centrally, and all of the fifth vein are setulose above, and the second on its entire
extent from its furcation with third, and a large part of third and fourth, are
setulose below. The apical pair of scutellar bristles is a little shorter than either
of the other two pairs. The head, thorax, and abdomen are pale testaceous-yellow.
The only dark marks on the head consist of a small ocellar spot and a small spot
below each eye; antennae and palpi yellow, the third segment of former slightly
darkened above. The thorax has five narrow black vittae on the mesonotum, the
submedian pair continued over the sides of the scutellum, the pleura each have

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 423

two similar vittae, one at middle of the mesopleura that extends to hind margin of
that sclerite, the other on the upper margin of the sternopleura that does not
extend as far back, and a black spot on the lower margin of the pteropleura.
Postscutellum with an irregular black transverse line; postnotum yellow. Abdomen
with a black central spot on each of the basal three segments and a black basal
fascia on each of the others, sometimes broken; genital cone black. Fore and mid
tibiae largely black. Fore femur in female with a posteroventral series of long
strong bristles and two series of much shorter bristles on the posterodorsal surface;
mid femur with two anterior series of bristles, the lower one the least extensive
and the stronger; hind femur with one or two strong bristles beyond the middle on
the anteroventral surface. Mid tibia with one or two anteroventral bristles and a
series of posterior setulae; hind tibia with two or three rather strong anteroventral
bristles and a series of anterodorsal setulae. Knobs of halteres dark brown.

Length, 8-10 mm. ;

Type and 3 paratypes, Bulolo, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

THEMAROHYSTRIX SUTTONI, D. Sp.

6, 9. This species is very similar to flaviceps, but differs in having a vertical
black stripe on the face that extends over the prelabrum, the mesopleural vitta very
rarely extends over the spiracle, there is no black spot on the pteropleura, there
usually is a central dark spot on the sternopleura, and the postscutellum is entirely
yellow. The wings (PI. xi, fig. 6) are hardly paler on the anal angle than on the
disc. The mid and hind femora are preponderantly black, instead of very narrowly
browned at bases as in flaviceps. Abdomen with a narrow black dorsocentral vitta
on the basal three tergites, the other tergites usually entirely black.

Structurally as flaviceps. Length, 6-8 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and 11 paratypes, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).
Occasionally the central dark spot on the sternopleura is lacking.

It appears worthy of note that in Themarohystrix and Neothemara the
scapular bristles are distinct, though rather weak and fine, while in Clusiosoma,
Trypanocentra, and Cheesmanomyia these bristles are undeveloped. This lack of
scapulars in the last-mentioned group of genera is associated with a slight but
evident concavity of the occiput which allows the head to fit more closely against
the thorax than it does in the other group, and sometimes this concavity is
emphasized by a backward extension of the vertex forming a slight flange, most
pronounced in Rabaulia. I do not make use of this cephalic character in my
generic key, though it may be of even more phylogenetic significance than those
I have used.

CLusiosoma Malloch.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., li, 1926, 547.

This genus was described from Australia. I have several species before me
that I refer here and deal with them below though they do not all occur in New
Guinea. The genus is similar in general habitus and characters to Themarohystriz,
but it is readily separated therefrom on the characters of the frontal and scutellar
bristling. The upper pair of reclinate orbitals is much shorter than the second
pair, the infraorbitals are not very closely placed, they are equally long, very
distinctly shorter than the anterior supraorbital pair, and both are sloped forward
and slightly inward; the ocellars are minute, and the postverticals are much more
widely separated than in Themarohystrix. The preapical pair of scutellar bristles
is much shorter than either of the other two pairs, and there is no distinct ptero-

424 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

pleural bristle. The fore femur in the male is thicker than the other pairs, and
sometimes very strongly spined or bristled on the central part of the postero-
ventral surface and usually furnished with some short bristles on the anteroventral
surface. In the known males either the fore tibia or fore tarsus is modified. There
are no long strong bristles on the anteroventral surface of the hind femur beyond
the middle in any species as yet known to me.

Key to the Species.

Face with a brown spot on each side near lower margin; male with no modification
of apex of the fore tibia, but with a stout process at the apex of the metatarsus
that projects along the anterior side of the second segment and is covered with
minute black spines at its apex; wings greyish-hyvaline, with a brown border
on the costa, on second vein, on third vein beyond the inner cross-vein, on fifth
vein along the discal cell, and on fourth vein from before outer cross-vein to its
EN GXESS: Doin. &.6 Cucub lOO muon 0.010. Geo nia. cide 6 eAvoio els OIG OCICS Ol O1O DiOsONO.G-o-DId.b Oto puncticeps, n. sp.

Face yellow; fore tibia of male with a spongy swelling at apex on posterior side, and
the fore tarsus normal; wings quite evenly blackish-brown apically, usually

Hy aAlinevonmbasal wha fete she we cdase Secwe ve wiser eves ele ee MER Sh Teed eae oe ROR ITER ener 2
De SINE Si ese cae ete eds <ii waco a ue OMENS GMDATE ce oe es Soa ronlentel od of RAUL ch atbe ha, CEs feoits, s.r laste iteyne eds ite yanonopsine sels a ieaelede 3
ROTIN DS a aiisisec de cee ks ace CNY ake eRe copteen Seis eee atvenlencel “Slaie euolish seus Reusulebaweiemescyebie. oa anys cep one tome Raweaneen ee roeieks 7

3. Mesonotum with a broad black central vitta on entire extent that extends laterad of
the line of the dorsocentrals and is frequently divided by a yellow central
longitudinal line; sides of scutellum narrowly yellow ............:......... 4

Mesonotum orange-yellow, with a large subquadrate black mark on each side of
anterior margin along inner edges of the humeri that may emit a paler linear
streak behind, and postsuturally with four short black vittae, the central pair
falling much short of the hind margin, the pair outside the dorsocentral lines
not nearly attaining the suture; scutellum broadly yellow on margin ...... 6

4. The dark colour on the wing ceasing abruptly at apex of the entirely whitish-hyaline
costal cell, very dark in stigma and beyond it; fore femur with a series of°*
about 8 strong black bristles on the greater portion of the anteroventral surface,
most of them distinctly longer than the diameter of the fore tibia ............
PROT Det OCCE EO Boece OR ea OT LDVORTO clo RSH NCHRP CEN TICN oon eet ore AOE biseriata, n. sp.

The dark colour on the wing encroaching more or less distinctly on the apical
portion of the costal cell, the latter subhyaline; fore femur with at most some
fine setulae on the anteroventral surface, the longest of which are much shorter
WISN WS Ghee OL WAG Woy WIE) sooocadcconooeoonoC denM ooo BOON OOO SaaS 5

5. Costal cell of the wing subhyaline, dark brown on edges apically; pleural black
vittae broad, the one above occupying about three-fourths of the mesopleural
2106 U0 a cin enna rn cra eta aclu ROL CM or bree Racer KCS CheacK eC SheRCIS Oro obs centralis, n. sp.

Costal cell distinctly browned, the dark colour fading out near basal fourth; the
pleural dark vittae narrow, the upper one about one-third as wide as the meso-

LONLSLED Ges bee LOR a. SMC CRCNY OOP OCEC Seis Cho EVR ONES NOON IS COO Dic ot oobi pleuralis Malloch

6. Discal cell of the wing hyaline from base to beyond middle ...... semifusca Malloch
Discalicellusubhyalinesatbaseronlva rece eee ee ee partita, n. sp.

7. Mesonotum with either a broad central black vitta or with two complete black vittae
‘that are narrowly separated by a yellow stripe ..............-.++.:. Peon cht 8
Mesonotum with a pair of black marks on anterior margin above the humeri and
usually with tour short blackish ‘discalvittae: seeeeeeee es cee n eee 10

8. The dark colour of the wing ceasing abruptly at the apex of the entirely whitish
hy alanecostalliicellinnsy Haig ke Eels Ae ace UAT ee biseriata, n. sp.

The dark colour on the wing encroaching on the apical portion of the costal cell, the

Latter SUDMV AIM) Seis coc cotasegd sicy'elia © ei cance race he He CUO Ee Ee ee 9
9. Costal cell dark brown on only the edges apically; black vittae on pleura broad;
mid and hind femora and hind tibiae blackened .............. centralis, n. sp.

Costal cell browned to near base; pleural vittae narrow; legs entirely yellow ........
SOA ony Oo, 005 0,016.0 01023,0 O00 OOO CPO Aid RALIGEID Glo bt ds aloha. Seta bia pleuralis Malloch

10. Discal cell of wing hyaline on basal half or more ................ semifusca Malloch
Discal}cell, subhyalinesatebaseyonlys aa spec ce F ee eee eee aee ee partita, n. sp.

BY J. BR. MALLOCH. 425

CLUSIOSOMA SEMIFUSCA Malloch.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., li, 1926, 548.

A shiny fulvous-yellow species, with the centre of frons and the basal two
antennal segments dark brown, face pale yellow, occiput with a V-shaped black
mark. Frons about 2-5 times as long as wide, the lower supraorbital longest and
strongest of the orbitals, upper pair not more than one-third as long, and much
shorter and finer than the postvertical and outer vertical pairs. Antennal bases
touching; third antennal segment about 2-5 times as long as wide, rounded at apex,
extending to about lower fourth of face. Antennae inserted below middle of head
in profile; height of face not two-thirds the length of frons; eye higher than long;
gena about one-eighth as high as eye; face convex, with a shallow transverse
depression at lower fourth. Proboscis stout; palpi spatulate. Longest hairs on
aristae above longer than width of third antennal segment.

Mesonotum with a black mark on each side of anterior margin clear of the
paler yellow humeri trom which there is a trace of a blackish streak obliquely
back to the posterior notopleural callus, and four short postsutural blackish vittae,
the inner pair from suture or shortly before it to midway to posterior margin, the
outer pair just laterad of the dorsocentrals extending from close to these bristles
to near the hind-margin; pleura with a slender black vitta from prothoracic spiracle
to the pteropleura; dise of scutellum dark brown. Intermediate scutellars about
one-fourth as long as the other pairs; dorsocentrals very little behind the supra-
alars. Postnotum largely black.

Legs paler than thorax. Fore femora much thicker basally than the other
pairs, with a number of strong black bristles on posteroventral and ventral surfaces
in two or more series, longest and strongest centrally, the longest exceeding thick-
ness of femora; the anteroventral surface with a series of rather irregular short
black setulae, most numerous opposite apex of tibia; fore tibia with a protuberant
plate or flange at apex on posterior side that is densely yellowish-white pilose on
apical surface and has some fine short black hairs on outer edge; fore tarsus simple.
Hind tibia with one or two median anteroventral setulae, and a series of short
black anterodorsal setulae centrally.

Wings yellowish-hyaline, distinctly browned on apical portion beyond an
irregular line from stigma obliquely across disc basad of inner cross-vein to near
outer cross-vein, darkest in stigma and along costa; costal cell entirely hyaline.
Inner cross-vein at about two-fifths from apex of discal cell; first vein setulose
from apex of node to tip above and at apex below, third vein setulose both above
and below on most of its extent, fifth vein setulose above on extent of anal and
discal cells, fourth with a few setulae above at middle. Halteres yellow.

Abdomen almost entirely black-brown above, fifth tergite longer than third
and fourth combined in male, rounded at apex, with some quite long marginal
bristles.

Length, 5-6 mm.

Mt. Molloy, Queensland (F. H. Taylor). Originally described from Cairns,
Queensland.

CLUSIOSOMA PARTITA, N. SD.

6. Very similar to semifusca, differing in having the black mark on the
anterior margin of the mesonotum not connected with a dark posterior line, the
pleural vitta broader in front, the fore femur in the male with only three or four
long, and about the same number of short posteroventral bristles and practically
no black anteroventral setulae, and the wing browned from base of discal cell to

II

426 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

apex, only the costal cell, base of anterior, and all of posterior basal cell, the anal
cell, and anal angle of wing, subhyaline. Inner cross-vein near middle of discal
cell.
Length, 4-5-5 mm.
Type and one paratype, Vanimo; two paratypes, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H.
Taylor).
CLUSIOSOMA BISERIATA, 1. Sp.

3, 9. Head as in semifusca, the male usually with the interfrontalia infuscated
except in front, the female with the frons entirely yellow.

Thorax yellow, mesonotum with a broad black central vitta that covers all
the area between the dorsocentrals and sends a narrow streak angularly from
anterior margin above the humeri to each wing base, centrally sometimes with a
yellow streak of the ground colour; scutellum black except on sides; pleura with a
narrow black vitta from propleura to centre of pteropleura; sternopleura black on
anterior third below; postnotum black. Bristles and hairs black, as in the genotype.

Legs yellow. Fore femur much thickened at base, tapered to apex, with two or
three series of strong black bristles on the posteroventral surface, the outer series
with three to five bristles that are much longer and stronger than the others, at the
base of the series many short erect fine bristles quite closely placed, the antero-
ventral surface with a series of six to eight rather strong black bristles, the longest
distinctly longer than the diameter of the tibia. Fore tibia with the pad-like
expansion of the posterior apex as in semifusca, the entire ventral surface of the
tibia with dense short erect black hairs. Other characters as in semifusca.

Wings subhyaline at bases (PI. xi, fig. 7), the costal cells hyaline, remainder
dark brown beyond a diagonal line from below base of the subcostal vein to apex
of fifth vein. Armature of veins as in semifusca. Halteres pale yellow.

Abdomen glossy-black, yellow in varying extent basally, more extensively
yellow on dorsum in female, sheath of ovipositor black. Fifth tergite of male as
long as third and fourth combined, broadly rounded at apex and with some quite
strong apical and lateral bristles; sixth tergite of female a little shorter than fifth, .
both with a series of apical and lateral bristles not as strong as in male.

Length, 4-5 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and 14 paratypes, Wewak: Vanimo, 6 paratypes (F. H.
Taylor); Minjemfluss (R. Schlechter), New Guinea.

The last listed specimen in poor condition, from the Lichtwardt collection in
the Deutsches Entomologisches Institut, Berlin-Dahlem.

CLUSIOSOMA CENTRALIS, N. Sp.

3, 2. Similar to biseriata, differing as follows: The mesonotum shows less
yellow, the pleural vittae are much broader, the upper one covering almost all the
mesopleura and the lower covering almost the upper half of the sternopleura on
the entire length; fore femur of male with a larger number of much shorter setulae
on the anteroventral surface, instead of moderately long bristles; the costal cell
of the wing is narrowly dark brown at apex, and the anterior basal cell is almost
entirely hyaline. In the female the mid and hind femora and the basal half or
more of the hind tibiae are blackened, not entirely yellow.

Length, 4:5-5-5 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and 8 paratypes, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

CLUSIOSOMA (CLUSIOSOMINA) PUNCTICEPS, N. SD.

3g, 2. This species is an aberrant one and may be considered as entitled to
subgeneric segregation from typical Clusiosoma on the basis of the structure of

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 427

the fore tarsus of the male, the closely short-haired anterior basal portion of the
fore coxae in both sexes, and the lack of setulae on the fourth vein.

General colour stramineous, shiny, the face with a pair of black spots near the
lower margin; interocellar spot black; mesonotum with four dark-brown vittae, the
outer pair from above humeri diagonally to bases of wings, the submedian pair on
the dorsocentral lines and continued along the sides of the scutellum, with a short
forwardly-directed branch on outer side of each on posterior extremity at hind
margin of mesonotum; a narrow brown vitta from propleura to centre of ptero-
pleura, and a large brown mark on each side of postnotum. Abdomen broadly dark
brown on each side of dorsum. Wing as Plate xi, figure 8, greyish-hyaline, with
dark brown clouds on the veins except the inner cross-vein, fourth vein from base
to beyond inner cross-vein, and the anal vein.

Head as Figure D, the upper supraorbital bristles longer and the gena behind
higher than in Clusiosoma.

Thorax as in Clusiosoma, the scapulars undeveloped, and the pteropleural
lacking but the intermediate pair of scutellars is strenger, usually at least half
as long as the basal pair.

Legs entirely pale yellow. Fore femur in male thicker than other pairs, but
thickest at middle instead of at bases, the bristles on the basal fourth in several
‘ series and very short, beyond that in a single series of moderate length, the antero-
ventral surface without bristles; in female the femur has five or more moderately
strong posteroventral bristles on apical two-thirds. Fore coxae in both sexes with
quite dense short black hairs on basal half in front, at apex in male with a fringe
of short black hairs, and in female with two short bristles. Fore tibia of male —
rather thick, with a shallow groove on the entire anterodorsal surface, about six
fine erect bristles on the basal half of the anterior surface, and some microscopic
erect dark hairs on central part of the ventral surface.

Wing venation as in Clusiosoma, and the same single short black costal bristle
at apex of the subcostal vein.

Abdomen as in Clusiosoma; sixth tergite of female much shorter than fifth.

Length, 4 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and two paratypes, New South Wales: Gosford, in wild
fig, 1909.

CLUSIOSOMA PLEURALIS Malloch.

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) iv, 1939 (1st August).

This species was describea from the Solomon Islands and is not amongst those
collected in New Guinea, though it may yet be found there.

Type series in the British Museum, Imperial Institute of Entomology.

TRYPANOCENTRA Hendel.

Wien. Ent. Zeitg., xxxiii, 1914, 77; Ann. Mus. Nat. Hung., xiii, 1915, 433.

I have experienced some difficulty in arriving at a decision on the identity of
this genus, but believe that two species now in hand belong here and accept them
as congeneric with Hendel’s genotype.

In the generic description Hendel merely separated Trypanocentra from
Themarohystriz on the basis of a few characters such as the narrower frons, with
a central hair on each orbit below which there are two forwardly and inwardly
directed pairs of infraorbital bristles and above it two strong pairs of reclinate
supraorbitals. He also stated that the pteropleural bristle is absent, which is the
case in both the species in hand, but there are, as in the other genus, five so-called
supra-alar bristles instead of only three as called for in Hendel’s description. One

428 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

might assume that the scutellum should be covered with stiff hairs, as Hendel says
that apart from the characters he lists the two genera are similar, but in neither
species I have are there any discal hairs on the scutellum. His further statement
that the second and fourth wing-veins are bare does not hold in one of the species
that I have, and the one that agrees best with the genotype, there being closely-
placed setulae on the entire underside of the second vein and one or two on the
central part of the upperside of the fourth vein.

It is possible that Hendel had a different species from either of mine and I
present below a key that will aid in distinguishing them.

Key to the Species.

1. Thorax glossy orange-yellow, mesonotum with six black vittae, the central and
lateral pairs entire, the sublateral pair postsutural, lateral vittae above and
clear of the humeral calli, the pleura with two broad black vittae that are
incomplete behind; scutellum black, yellow below level of the bristles; prelabrum
yellow; second wing-vein bare below; first vein ending in the costa distinctly
beyond mMevelZoLannersCross=VeIni sce aan cee eee ene vittithorax, n. sp.

Thorax glossy-black, with the humeri and a line along the upper edge of the pleura
bright yellow, the underside of the scutellum duller yellow; prelabrum black
or dark brown; first vein ending in the costa almost directly above the inner

GROSS=VGIM ” Bycd- yeasts Potehe aoe rau P ones Nei uo ce share. cau susueren Wawel aioe efewedoneue nit eeCR RS ae noreR Ieee 2

2. Third antennal segment infuscated at apex; abdomen black .... nigripennis Hendel
Antennae entirely pale orange-yellow; sides of the abdomen on basal third distinctly
aieND Koy Paint ckereio. 6. 83 ')0,0, 6% 6.00 clin di ONAL M See ta ee Al Ona CHARS eee ete ers nigrithorax, n. sp.

TRYPANOCENTRA NIGRIPENNIS Hendel.
Ann. Mus. Nat. Hung., xiii, 1915, 434.

As already stated herein, Hendel says that the second and fourth wing-veins
are bare, though he may have omitted taking note of the underside of the second
vein, but he did note that there are no setulae on the upperside of the fourth
vein. The yellow lateral marginal stripe on the thorax is mentioned, but there is
no mention of yellow colour on the sides of the basal third of the abdomen.

Length with ovipositor, more than 5 mm.
One female from the Indian Archipelago.

TRYPANOCENTRA NIGRITHORAX, Nl. Sp.

2. A glossy-black species, with the head orange-yellow, the antennae entirely
yellow, the prelabrum brownish-black, and the upper half of occiput glossy-black;
palpi yellow. Legs yellow, mid and hind coxae, the greater part of all femora
black, fore coxae and basal two-thirds of mid and hind tibiae except extreme
bases dark brown. MHalteres yellow. Wings blackish-brown, fading into paler
brown on anal angle and in the costal cell.

Frons at middle about half as wide as one eye and about 2-5 times as long as
wide, widened in front, darkened above, upper orbits glossy-black, vertex laterally
black, centrally yellow, slightly raised. Central orbital setulose hair quite long,
infraorbitals not as long or as strong as the anterior supraorbital, the latter about
twice as long as the upper one which is subequal to the outer vertical and post-
vertical bristles, the inner vertical the longest and strongest of the frontals;
ocellars microscopic, proclinate and divergent. Face evenly convex, without
transverse depression, epistome almost transverse; foveae glossy, moderately deep,
extending to lower third of face; antennae descending to ends of foveae, third
segment about 2:5 times as long as wide at base, tapered slightly to the rounded
apex; longest hairs on the arista about twice as long as width of third antennal

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 429

segment. Eye higher than long; genal bristle moderately strong. Proboscis short
and stout; palpi club-shaped. Postocular cilia black, bristle-like, much shorter
than in Themarohystricz.

Thorax with mesonotum convex in front, slightly flattened behind, the surface
with numerous short decumbent coarse black hairs; scutellum subtriangular,
flattened and bare on disc, like the mesonotum slightly hoary in certain lights.
Intermediate scutellars not as strong as the other pairs.

Legs quite stout, fore femur with some strong posteroventral bristles, the
other pairs with no ventral bristles; fore tarsus as long as its tibia; outer apical
spur on mid tibia about half as long as the central one, a few black setulae about
middle of the posterodorsal surface; hind tibia with one anteroventral bristle and
a series of anterodorsal setulae to beyond the middle.

Wings brownish-black, paler in costal cell and on the part basad of the inner
cross-vein including the entire third posterior and axillary cells. Inner cross-vein
at middle of the discal cell, third and fourth veins divergent at apices, second
vein closely setulose on entire extent below, fourth with one or two setulae at
middle on upperside and with short closely-placed setulae on about the central
third below. Squamae and halteres yellow.

Abdomen glossy-black, sides of composite and second tergites yellowish.

Length, including ovipositor, 6 mm.

Type, Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

TRYPANOCENTRA VITTITHORAX, N. Sp.

2. Differs from the species described above in having the head except a small
black spot on ocelli entirely yellow. Thorax orange-yellow, glossy, the mesonotum
with six black vittae, the central and lateral marginal pairs entire, the submedian
pair extending from the suture to posterior margin; pleura with the two rather
broad black vittae that do not extend completely to hind margin; scutellum black,
yellow below the level of the marginal bristles. Abdomen glossy-black. Legs
entirely yellow. Wings more uniformly black than in the other two species.

Structurally similar to nigrithoraz, differing in having the frons a little wider,
the fore tibia shorter than its tarsus, the anterodorsal setulae on the hind tibiae
longer than in the other species and the same tibia with two anteroventral
bristles instead of oniy one, the first wing-vein longer, ending quite distinctly
beyond the level of the inner cross-vein which latter is a little beyond the middle
of the discal cell, and no setulae on either the second or fourth wing-veins.

Length, 6-5 mm.

Type, Papua, Mondo, 5,000 feet, February 1934 (L. E. Cheesman). In British
Museum.

Despite the difference in the armature of the wing-veins, I place the three
species in the same genus because of their similarity in other structural features.

TRYPANOCENTRA NIGRIPENNIS de Meijere.

Nov. Guin., ix, Zool., livr. iii, 1913, 366. (Acanthoneura).

If de Meijere is correct in stating that the presutural bristle is lacking,
this species does not belong here, but I suspect that he erred. Should I be correct
in placing the species in Trypanocentra, then Hendel’s species will require to be
renamed. There can be no doubt as to the close relationship of this species to
those already placed in this genus. The description calls for a species with similar
characters to nigrithoraz, the antennae being entirely yellow and the abdomen

430 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

brownish-yellow, but the legs are entirely yellow and the upper and under portions
of the mesopleura are yellow, in both of which characters it deviates from
nigrithorax.

Length, 6 mm.

Dutch New Guinea: Alkmaar.

Should my action be correct in the above placement, I propose the new name
atripennis for nigripennis Hendel.

SopHirA Walker.
Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., i, 1857, 34.

SOPHIRA FLAVA (Edwards).

Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., xx, part 13, 1915, 421 (Rioxa).

°. Entirely fulvous-yellow, rather shiny, species, with the exception of a small
round deep-black spot on each side anteriorly of the fifth abdominal tergite; all
hairs and bristles concolorous with body; wings hyaline, stigma yellow, the apical
half fuscous, a narrow dark-brown border on the costa from slightly before apex
of second to just beyond apex of fourth vein, a more diffuse brown streak along
the fifth vein from near base of discal cell to its apex, and a small pale-brown spot
near the middle of inner cross-vein.

Frons a little more than one-third of the head-width and a little longer than
wide, each orbit with two anterior incurved and two posterior reclinate bristles,
the lower one of the latter the longest; outer pair of verticals much shorter than
the inner, postvertical pair about as long as the former, parallel, ocellars lacking.
Hye slightly oblique, a little higher than long; gena not more than one-twelfth
as high as eye; face concave below middle, epistome slightly protruded, tumid
on sides, height of face less than length of frons. Third antennal segment not
more than twice as long as wide, rounded at apex; longest hairs on aristae fully
as long as width of third antennal segment; palpi wider than third antennal
segment. Postocular cilia yellow and slender.

Thorax with the mesonotum longer than wide, slightly flattened, surface with
many depressed short hairs and the following bristles: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals,
1 presutural, 1 supra-alar, 2 postalars, 1 pair of prescutellar acrostichals and 1
much longer pair of dorsocentrals between these and the supra-alar; mesopleura
with 1 bristle, the pteropleura with one setula above longer than the surrounding
hairs; secutellum subtriangular, disc flattened and bare, the margin with six
bristles, the intermediate pair the shortest.

Legs normal in structure, fore femur with an irregular posteroventral series of
bristles; mid tibia with a long apical ventral spur; hind femur with one or two
fine ventral bristles on basal half.

Wing as Figure H, stigma longer than the preceding costal section, first vein
ending almost directly above outer cross-vein, third costal section about half as
long as stigma and slightly shorter than fourth, the second vein slightly curved
forward apically, inner cross-vein at about one-third from base of discal cell;
first posterior cell slightly widened apically.

Abdomen widest at basal third, sixth tergite short, genital organ slender.

Length, 7 mm.

Originally described from one female taken at Utakwa River, Dutch New
Guinea. Four females, Papua: Kokoda, 1,200 feet, Sept—Oct., 1933 (L. HE.
Cheesman).

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 431

This species is readily distinguished from any yet described by the markings
of the wings, there being usually in the other species more than the fifth vein
dark bordered, and none having the costal markings as here. There is also no
species that is described as having a pair of deep-black abdominal spots as here.

It appears worthy of note that the undescribed male of Sophira limbata
Enderlein has a prominent conical protuberance on each gena that is armed with
numerous curled black bristles at the apex. There is also a colour distinction in
the legs, the tibiae being dark brown in the female and yellow in the male. There
is some difference also in the bristling of the legs. The inner cross-vein is well
beyond the middle of the discal cell of the wing, which is not the case in the species
redescribed above. I have both sexes of limbata from Borneo, sent to me a
number of years ago by the late C. F. Baker. Enderlein described the species from
Sumatra. One other species he described from Sumatra, appendiculata, agrees with
flava in having the stigma dark, and a dark cloud along the fifth vein, but it has
no dark-brown apical costal margin, and has a rather large dark cloud on the
fourth vein from a little before the inner cross-vein to, or beyond, the outer
cross-vein that extends into the discal cell and the first posterior cell. Both these
species have black thoracic markings.

SOPHIRA QUADRIPUNCTATA Malloch.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) iv, 1939 (1st August).
This species differs from flava in having the stigma entirely yellow, the inner
eross-vein at about one-third from the apex of the discal cell, and a pair of elongate
black marks on the fifth and another on the sixth abdominal tergite.

Solomon Islands.

ACANTHONEURA Macquart.

Dipt. Exot., iii, Pt. 3, 1843, 220; HEnderlein, Zool. Jahrb. Abtl. Syst. Geog. und
Biologie, xxxi, 1911, 414; Hendel, Wien. Ent. Zeitg., xxxiii, 1914, 82; Flieg. Pal. Reg.
in Lindner, xlix, Trypet., 1927, 16; Hnt. Mitt., xvii, 1928, 354.

Hendel in 1914 placed this genus in his key in a section that has the arista
short haired, and distinguished the concept by the bare fifth vein, fringed costa,
undulated second vein, and the broad head of the male. Some of these characters
apply to only the genotype, fuscipennis Macquart. Endlerlein in 1911 placed
along with fuscipennis, in Acenthoneura, the genera Themara Walker, and Ptiolina
van der Wulp, but I consider his action unjustified and accept both concepts as
valid genera, distinguished from Acanthoneura as shown in the foregoing key to
the genera. Hendel in 1927 changed his opinions somewhat and accepted as
Acanthoneurae two species in which the arista is moderately long-haired. He
then introduced as a distinguishing character the single pair of infraorbital
bristles. Later, in 1928, the same author further discussed the genus and some
closely related thereto and presented a short generic key. In the same paper, pages
359 and 360, he described two Australian species.

I am accepting as a member of the genus a species from Australia that differs
from the two described by Hendel as shown in the key presented below.

Key to the Australian Species.
1. Thorax yellowish-brown, mesonotum without black markings; scutellum yellow in the
middle, blackish-brown on the sides; abdomen entirely black; wing as Plate xi,
PLO UIT Cis pte d eN cten WP cviaus edie) onceked esac HGR Renn CM oRem llc temas) ai aval iaieusie, aiLomsy ayant nigriventris, n. sp.

432 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

Thorax yellow, mesonotum with black lateral marginal streak and black spot on hind
margin; abdomen black, with central subquadrate or triangular mark on each
1H) fg RM ae ROR RE ROR Cat 3a “oy CrrCRG ONG EA ON ROR GLEE GOONS kD INI cicllacto eho cne Goed able obs 2
Wing with two hyaline incisions on costa beyond apex of first vein; inner cross-vein
near middlesGf the discal cells sh ae ke ee ee australina Hendel
Wing with but one hyaline mark or incision on costa beyond apex of first vein; inner
cross-vein much beyond middle of the discal cell ........ acidiomorpha Hendel

bo

ACANTHONEURA AUSTRALINA Hendel.

Ent. Mitt., xvii, 1928, 359.

Thorax yellow, with a black lateral stripe and a large posterior black spot
on mesonotum. Wings dark coffee-brown, with the following hyaline marks: tip of
first and a large part of middle of second costal cell, almost the basal half of
subcostal cell, a spot in front of the inner cross-vein almost as wide as the cell
and one a little larger beyond the inner cross-vein in the first posterior cell about
one-third the width of the cell and twice as far from the cross-vein as the one
in front of the latter, a keel-like marginal incision in the second posterior cell
that covers three-fourths of the margin, in the discal cell a large round isolated
spot in front of the outer cross-vein, and obliquely behind it and more basally a
small hyaline spot, larger than both together is a not entirely hyaline spot near
the wing-margin, and the third posterior cell has in front of the fold a quadrate
white mark that margins on the discal cell. Especially characteristic of the species
are the two white costal incisions in the marginal cell, the first, before the tip, of
which cuts into the submarginal cell. Inner cross-vein at middle of the discal cell.
Second vein weakly undulated.

Cairns, N. Queensland. Type in Berlin-Dahlem.

ACANTHONEURA ACIDIOMORPHA Hendel.

Op. cit., xvii, 1928, 360.

The inner cross-vein is separated by about half the length of the outer from
latter, the third costal section is not longer than the first. Wing markings as
Figure F, the sketch being from the type-specimen in the United States National
Museum.

New South Wales.

ACANTHONEURA NIGRIVENTRIS, Nl. Sp.

°. Head a little wider than thorax, dull brownish-yellow, face paler, with
pale-grey dust, the interocellar spot black; hairs and bristles black. Frons a
little longer than wide, slightly narrowed to vertex, and fully one-third of the
head-width, the surface with some short erect hairs except on upper third, the
single pair of incurved infraorbitals rather short, near anterior margin, the
anterior pair of supraorbitals well above middle of frons and nearly twice as large
as the upper pair, the latter subequal to the postverticals and about half as long
as the outer verticals, the inner verticals the longest of the cephalic bristles. Face
convex in centre, the foveae quite deep; gena higher than width of third antennal
segment, the latter fully twice as long as wide, tapered to the narrowly rounded
apex; longest hairs on arista about one-third as long as width of third antennal
segment; palpi spatulate.

Thorax concolorous with head, darker on sides of mesonotum and centre of
the mesopleura, quite dull, only the scutellum distinctly shiny, the latter with the
sides blackened, postnotum blackened; all hairs and bristles black, the mesonotal
hairs very short, quite dense and depressed. Scapular bristles fine, presutural

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 433

bristle lacking, all other bristles strong, the dorsocentral pair nearer to the
acrostichals than to the supra-alar line; scutellum distinctly convex, rounded in
outline, with the discal hairs longer and finer than those on the mesonotum, the
intermediate pair of bristles almost as long as the other pairs. Metasternum
haired.

Legs normal, entirely brownish-yellow. Fore femur with a series of black
posteroventral bristles; mid tibia with some central posterior setulae and one
strong black apical ventral spur; hind tibia with the anterodorsal series of setulae
short.

Wing dark brown, the pale markings whitish-hyaline (Pl. xi, fig. 9). First
vein with the setulae extending from node to tip above, bare below; third vein
setulose from base to a little beyond inner cross-vein both above and below;
fifth vein bare; lobe of anal cell quite long and narrow; inner cross-vein less
than one-third from apex of discal cell.

Abdomen broadly ovate, the dorsum brownish-black, slightly shiny, the sides
of the composite basal tergite brownish-yellow, all hairs and bristles black. Sixth
tergite a little shorter than fifth, with a less regular series of moderately long
apical bristles than fifth. Sheath of the ovipositor flattened, conical, black.

Length, 7-5 mm. ‘

Type, New South Wales: Wattle Flat (W. W. Froggatt).

NEOTHEMARA Malloch.

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) iv, 1939, 253.

Generic characters—Similar to Themara in most wing characters, but the
second vein is not as markedly undulated, and the head in the male is not notice-
ably widened. The possession of setulae on the upper and under sides of the stem
of the second and third veins is distinctive for both genera. In Neothemara there
are at least two pairs of strong infraorbital bristles, while in Themara there is
but one pair; in the latter the lower supraorbital pair of bristles is in front of the
middle while in Neothemara it is at or above the middle. The mesopleural hairs
are much stronger in Neothemara than in Themara and related genera, though
there is no one outstanding bristle near the lower central portion such as charac-
terizes Hexacinia. The presence of setulae on the fifth wing-vein in exul is not
sufficient ground for its separation generically from the other two included in this
genus.

Key to the Species.

1. Fifth vein setulose along most of the extent of the anal cell above; wings dark
brown, with yellow markings, the most conspicuous being a V-shaped mark that
has its apex on the third vein beyond the level of the outer cross-vein, its
upper arm lying along the third vein to base, and its lower arm running
obliquely through the discal cell beyond its middle, terminating over the apex
of the anal vein (Solomon ESLET AVC KS) 5 sem astro peel ceen ONS ETCRO PRCRO eoro oe exul (Curran)

Fifth wing-vein bare above; wing markings not as above ...............+:+-+:: 2
Scutellum without evident discal hairs; wing dark brown, with subhyaline markings,
the most conspicuous being an irregular streak that stretches from apex of anal
vein forward through the apical portion of the discal cell to middle of the outer
cross-vein and is divided in second posterior cell (Solomon Islands) ..........

Ne Ri ogekS aeep a RARE Arties eel AM edd RE OR SPACE] COSMO ACU SH CH MRED aes chs Tatapeoredibnane “enetnan sega formosa Malloch
Scutellum with many short stiff blackish discal hairs; wing dark chocolate-brown,
with about 10 small yellowish-hyaline marks and the base pale (Pl. xi, fig. 10)

ay SAND Ke Tailor Sasser es eoreMade ehiedonel shes reneleeucMeney Sree ener ee ere cree ae formosipennis (Walker)

bo

434 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

NEOTHEMARA FORMOSIPENNIS (Walker).

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., v, 1861, 252 (Riozxa).

This is the only species of the genus as yet known to me from New Guinea.
The wing markings are quite different from those of the other two species
(ela tes OE

Wewak, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

PSEUDACANTHONEURA, n. gen.

Generic characters.—This genus has many of the characters of Neothemara,
but differs from it in having the petiole of the second and third wing-veins bare,
and the ocellar bristles long and strong. Frons at vertex not one-third of the
head-width, the two pairs of infraorbitals rather closely placed, incurved and
slightly forwardly directed, anterior reclinate supraorbitals at or a little in front
of middle of frons, much stronger than the other orbitals, posterior supraorbitals
reclinate; postocular cilia black, bristle-like. Eyes oval, erect, much higher than
long; antennae inserted above middle of eye in profile; third antennal segment not
twice as long as wide, rounded at apex, not extending to middle of face; the latter
vertical, with the foveae deep, extending to a little below middle; gena about one-
sixth as high as eye; arista with the longest hairs longer than width of the third
antennal segment. Thoracic bristling complete; mesopleurals 2; scutellum with
six strong marginal bristles and a few microscopic hairs on lateral edges. Fore
femur with a series of strong posteroventral bristles; mid tibia with two or three
strong black posterior bristles and two strong black apical spurs, one longer than
the other; hind tibia with two anteroventral bristles and a series of strong antero-
dorsal setulae. First wing-vein setulose from apex of node to tip above (Fig. G1);
second vein undulated; third vein setulose above and below from base to well
beyond the inner cross-vein, undulated apically; fifth vein setulose above on apical
part of posterior basal cell; the cross-vein closing anal cell rectangularly bent, the
short lobe of the cell subtriangular.

Genotype, Pseudacanthoneura septemnotata, n. sp.

PSEUDACANTHONEURA SEPTEMNOTATA, Nl. SD.

g. A large bright orange-yellow-coloured species, but slightly shiny, with
four small deep-black spots on each side of the mesonotum and three on each
pleuron, the abdomen more or less browned on bases of the tergites, and the
wings yellowish-brown, with some small yellowish-hyaline marks in the cells
and some large hyaline marks along the hind margin (PI. xi, fig. 11).

Head higher than long, uniformly orange-yellow except the small interocellar
spot which is black; bristles black, the hairs yellow. Frons about twice as long
as its width at vertex; ocellar bristles close together at bases and behind the
anterior ocellus. Palpi short and broad.

Thorax rather dull, the mesonotum with quite dense depressed short hairs
that are yellow except on the lateral margins, the mesopleural hairs strong and,
like all the bristles, black. The four small deep-black spots on the lateral margins
of the mesonotum are arranged as follows: above the humerus, above the presutural
bristle, behind the posterior notopleural bristle, and on the extreme anterior
extremity of the postalar declivity; pleural spots as follows: above the anterior
spiracle, near the upper posterior angle of the mesopleura, and on centre of the
pteropleura; postnotum with a black streak on each side. The few hairs on the
lateral portions of the scutellum are black.

Legs entirely yellow and yellow-haired, bristles dark brown. Fore tarsus
slender, longer than fore tibia, basal segment as long as the other segments
combined.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 435

Wing as Plate xi, figure 11, the veins brown. Inner cross-vein at about one-
third from apex of the discal cell. Only one strong bristle at apex of the subcostal
vein. Halteres yellow.

Abdomen broadly ovate, with quite strong bristles at apices and on lateral
margins of tergites. Hypopygium yellow.

Length, 8 mm.

Type, Vanimo, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor). Paratype, Gordonvale, North
Queensland (EH. Jarvis).

Acanthoneura insignis de Meijere, from New Guinea, is very like this species
in many respects, but has the mesonotum black vittate. It may belong to this
genus.

Rioxa Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., i, 1857, 35.

Hendel in 1928 (Hnt. Mitt., xvii, 5, p. 350) dealt with the characters of this
genus and Rioxoptilona Hendel, maintaining, contrary to Bezzi’s expressed opinion,
that the two are valid genera. His position in the discussion is that the difference
in the comparative lengths and widths of the mesonotum, and the shape of the
scutellum in’ the two genotypes justifies his action in making the separation. I
have not either genotype before me, but Hendel’s course is adopted in this paper.

Rioxoptilona does not occur in New Guinea and Australia, and typical Rioxa
also is lacking there. The species usually placed in Rioxa from Australia have
been put by Hendel in two subgenera, Termitorioxa Hendel and Dirioxa Hendel.
I accept the first as a valid genus and, though I still retain Rioxa for pornia and
two other species dealt with below, I incline to the opinion that Dirioxa may yet
be accorded full generic status.

There are apparently three species of the genus in Australia as noted below.
I do not consider Rioxva araucariae Tryon or R. jarvisi Tryon as referable here.

RioxA (DirRIoxa) PORNIA (Walker).

List Dipt. Ins. Brit. Mus., iv, 1849, 1039 (Trypeta) —Trypeta musae Froggatt,
Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., x, 1899, 501; Repr. Misc. Public. Dept. Agric. N.S.W., No. 303,
1899; Rep. Par. and Inj. Ins. (1907-8), pt. 3, 1909, 113.—Rioxa musae Tryon,
Proc. Roy. Soc. Qsld., xxxviii, 1927, 216; Wright, Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., xlviii, 1937, 28.

There has been considerable difference of opinion both as to the correct name
for this species and as to its distribution. endel erred in stating that the
“dornten Schenkel” was part of the original description and that on this account
it could not be a Trypetid. Walker referred to the apical ventral spines on the
“shanks” or tibiae and not to thorns on the femora. Without a doubt the descrip-
tion applies to what has been most commonly called musae, although Walker’s
description of the wing markings is rather involved.

The species has the round hyaline spot over the outer cross-vein of the wing
almost the width of the first posterior cell, but always separated from the wedge-
shaped hyaline mark in the second posterior cell by a brown line along the fourth
vein, and the hyaline mark in the apex of the discal cell is carried over the fifth
vein to the wing-margin. The third wing-vein is bristled above and below to over
the outer cross-vein.

Queensland and New South Wales. Type locality of pornia, Port Stephens,
N.S.W.

RroxA (DirioxA) TESTACEA Hendel.

Ent. Mitt., xvii, 1928, 352.
This species has the hyaline spot in the first posterior cell near the outer
cross-vein smaller than in pornia and connected with the large wedge-shaped

436 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

hyaline mark in the second posterior cell, and the hyaline mark in the apex of
the discal cell not extending entirely across the cell so that the apex of the third
posterior cell is dark brown.

North Queensland. Type in Deutsches Entomologisches Institut, Berlin-
Dahlem.

Rroxa (Dirioxa) Brcotor (Macquart).

Dipt. Exot., Suppl. v, 1855, 124, Pl. 7, fig. 7 (Urophora); Hendel, Ent. Mitt.,
1928, 353.

The figure of the wing of this species shows the triangular hyaline mark in
the second posterior cell separated from the hyaline spot in the first posterior cell,
the latter smaller than in pornia, the third posterior cell brown, with a narrow
stripe-like hyaline mark near the apex of the discal cell carried to the wing-
margin over the fifth vein, and a small hyaline dot near basal third of the third
posterior cell.

It may be noted that many of Macquart’s figures are rather inaccurate in
detail and that he may really have figured pornia, but if his type is still in
existence, or specimens agreeing with his figure are found, the matter will be
settled.

The given type-locality, Tasmania, is undoubtedly erroneous as usual.

TERMITORIOXA Hendel.

Ent. Mitt., xvii, 1928, 351.

This concept was proposed as a subgenus, but I accept it as a genus. The
distinguishing characters lie in the presence of but one pair of reclinate supra-
orbital bristles and either one or two pairs of much weaker incurved infraorbitals,
two, instead of but one, strong apical ventral spurs on the mid tibia and the more
widely separated and less extensive setulae on the third wing-vein. These charac-
ters may not all be the same in other species than pornia, as I have not seen the
other two referred to Rioxa. In pornia the scutellum has no short discal hairs,
while in the present genus there are a number of short black hairs on each side
above the level of the bristles.

TERMITORIOXA TERMITOXENA (Bezzi).

Bull. Ent. Res., x, 1919, 2 (Rioxa).

I have seen two female examples from the original type series from Darwin,
N.T., and one male labelled Palmerston, N. Australia, xi, 1908, from the Oldenberg
collection in the Deutsches Entomologisches Institut, Berlin-Dahlem.

The type material is slightly teneral and has very evident pale streaks in the
centre of some of the cells that are not present in the matured male before me,
and the base of the wing is also hyaline and not yellowish as in the latter. There
are no black spots on the hind margin of the mesonotum as described by Bezzi,
but only two rather indistinct brown marks and in line with these, on each lateral
angle of the scutellum, two small subtriangular brownish marks. In pornia the
hind tibia has an extensive anterodorsal and a shorter anteroventral series of
short setulae, while in termitoxena there is only the anterodorsal series present.

Rioxorpritona Hendel.
Wien. Ent. Zeitg., xxxiii, 1914, 78.
I am accepting as belonging to this genus an Hast Indian species that has the
setulae on the upperside of the first vein extending the entire length of the node.
The general appearance is similar to that of Acanthoneura, the wings being

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 437

similarly marked. The intermediate pair of scutellars are short, and there are no

discal hairs. In both sexes there are some long anteroventral bristles on the hind

femur, and in the male the fore femur has several series of closely-placed ventral

bristles and the fore tibia is densely short stiff haired on the entire ventral surface.
Not known to occur in New Guinea.

DIARRHEGMOIDES, nN. gen.

Generic characters—Frons longer than wide, inner verticals much longer
than the other cephalic bristles, outer pair very short, not longer than the
parallel postverticals, ocellars minute, two fine reclinate supraorbitals, the upper
a little the shorter, and two incurved infraorbitals, the lower the shorter. Eyes
about 1:5 times as high as long, gena very narrow. Antennae pendulous, third
segment about twice as long as wide, broadly rounded at apex, downy; arista
with hairs above, about 6 of them long. Thorax convex on dorsum, mesonotum
a little longer than wide, with the following bristles: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals,
1 presutural, 1 supra-alar, 2 postalars, 1 pair of long dorsocentrals slightly
proximad of the supra-alar line, 1 pair of prescutellar acrostichals; the mesopleural,
sternopleural, and pteropleural bristles present; scutellum with 6 bristles, basal
pair much the longest, intermediate pair not half as long as the apical. Second
wing-vein very slightly bent at the hyaline mark, third much arched beyond the
inner cross-vein; first and third setulose to almost their apices, third with a few
setulae at base below. Legs normal, mid tibia with an apical ventral bristle.

Genotype, Diarrhegmoides hastata, n. sp.

DIARRHEGMOIDES HASTATA, N. Sp.

3, °. Head dull yellowish-white, frons except the orbits yellowish-brown to
fuscous, ocellar spot black, genae and sides of the prelabrum dark brown, occiput
except narrowly on edges shiny-black; palpi and basal two segments of antennae
and base of third segment yellow, remainder of third segment brownish-black.
Frons at vertex fully one-third of the head-width, slightly widened to anterior
margin, and nearly twice as long as wide at vertex, the orbits not sharply defined.
Eye higher than long, more narrowed below than above, anterior facets enlarged;
frons slightly protruded in front; face receding a little below, the foveae shallow;
gena about half as high as width of third antennal segment, the bristle far back
and short and fine. Antennae inserted at middle of eye in profile, third segment
less than twice as long as wide, broadly rounded at apex, downy; arista sparsely
haired, the longest upper hairs fully half as long as width of third antennal
segment.

Thorax shiny-black, with pale-grey dust, mesonotum with a faint brownish
central vitta on which the dust is quite distinct and somewhat silvery, humeri
white, and a white vitta from each extending back clear of the lateral margins
to the posterior postalar bristle; a broad white vitta on pleura from base of
fore coxae to bases of wings below the mesopleural bristle; scutellum yellowish-
white, base broadly brown. All hairs and bristles black. All thoracic bristles
except the intermediate scutellar pair long, the posterior notopleural shorter than
the anterior one.

Legs yellow, mid and hind femora of female slightly browned.

Wing as Plate xi, figure 12, the general colour brownish-black, the markings
whitish-hyaline, the veins dark brown. A single quite long costal bristle at apex
of the subcostal vein, setulae on first vein from apex of node. MHalteres pale
yellow.

438 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

Abdomen entirely glossy-black, with black hairs and bristles, elongate-oval, the
bristles at apices of tergites fine, fifth tergite of male more densely and shorter
haired than the other tergites, slightly tapered at apex, longer than fourth;
sixth tergite of female distinctly shorter than fifth; sheath of ovipositor elongate-
conical, flattened.

Length, 3:-5-4 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and one male paratype, Edie Creek, New Guinea, February
1935 (F. H. Taylor).

DIARRHEGMOIDES ARAUCARIAE (Tryon).

Proc. Roy. Soc. Qsld., Xxxviii, 1927, 219 (Rioza).

This species is apparently referable to this genus. It is very similar to the
genotype, but differs in the wing markings, in having a black mark extending in
centre to apex of the scutellum, and in having the abdomen shiny-black with a
white fascia on the apex of each tergite from second to fourth inclusive. The legs
are also largely infuscated. The length is much greater, 7-7-5 mm.

South Queensland.

The species is known to me only from the description.

HEXACINIA Hendel.

Wien. Ent. Zeitg., xxxiii, 1914, 82.

This genus was erected for the reception of Acinia stellata Macquart, but this
name was preoccupied and Rondani’s specific name for the same species must be
used.

The genus is readily recognized by the strong bristle near the middle of the
lower edge of the mesopleura, and the presence of several fine upcurved bristles
on the lower margin of the gena in front of the usual genal bristle.

There are three accepted species of the genus, all occurring in southern Asia or
the East Indies. A fourth species is described below.

Key to the Species.
1. Mesonotum with 6 dark-brown yittae; wing with no hyaline mark at apex of the
first posterior cell, and with four hyaline dots in the second posterior cell, two
Gye Wao jin Was Chie COATMOSA)) GoscanonoccdgdooobonoobMuonOdONS palposa Hendel
Mesonotum not vittate, sometimes with dark dots laterally; a hyaline or subhyaline
mark at the apex of first posterior cell; two spots in second posterior cell, both
iDAbRHoK=y Doeth =p bole RtRS itcionn cleats Wore Oches Get Opec rid Odo a Oke oD O-conG.d piovolo fra cipro cao GOO fe,
The hyaline spot at apex of first posterior cell not extending entirely across the cell,
subquadrate (Gast indies) ances meee eee radiosa Rondani (stellata Macquart)
The hyaline or subhyaline mark at apex of the first posterior cell extending across
the entire apex, not subquadrate, usually lunate in shape ................+. 3
3. Only two hyaline marks between the apex of first and second veins, the basal one
touching the tip of first vein; apical pale mark in first posterior cell conspicuous;
pleura unspotted or with only one or two faint brownish dots (Philippine Islands)
Chee HCO pCO TeqgG.alo,thorDto OxeuG tbe) Gy betyiicol oso sEIbic: Gio a eso eiGeclcna, tatoo tosG-cnb stigmatoptera Hendel
Three hyaline marks between the apices of first and second veins on the costa, the
basal one on tip of first vein; apical pale mark in first posterior cell indistinct,
brownish-hyaline; pleura with 10-12 black-brown dots .... multipuwnctata, n. sp.

N.B.—I have examined two of the already known species in the collection of the
United States National Museum. »

bo

HEXACINIA MULTIPUNCTATA, N. Sp.
dg, 2. Similar to the other species in having the head, thorax, and abdomen
pale orange-yellow, and the wings dark brown, with numerous hyaline dots or
short streaks across some of the cells, the hairs on the pale marks glistening
white, on other parts of the wing dark brown.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 439

Face with a small dark mark on each side of epistome, prelabrum with a
similar mark on each side, dots at bases of the bristles very inconspicuous,
ocellar spot dark, occiput with a black mark on each side above neck. Frontal
bristling as in the genotype, yellowish-brown in colour, infraorbitals close together,
the lower one incurved, upper one longer than lower, incurved and slightly
reclinate, supraorbitals reclinate, the upper not half as long as the lower; ocellars
minute; outer verticals brown, about half as long as inner and equal to the
postverticals; postocular cilia dark brown, pointed; frons about 1:25 times as
long as its vertical width, narrowed in front, with some short dark hairs
centrally. Face convex centrally, concave in profile, foveae shallow. Eye much
higher than long, gena about as high as width of third antennal segment. Longest
hairs on arista about as long as width of third antennal segment, the latter about
2-5 times as long as wide, rounded at apex; palpi spatulate, not segmented.

Mesonotum with the insertions of bristles black, and a number of black-brown
dots as follows: above each humerus, behind each notopleural bristle, the supra-
alar, and base of wing, mesad of the presutural bristle, between the supra-alar
and dorsocentral, and between the postalar and acrostichals; pleuca with 6 black
dots in a line between the anterior and posterior spiracles, evidently rudiments
of a black vitta, and about 6 black dots on lower half; scutellum with a black dot
at base of each bristle, smallest at the intermediate pair; postscutellum with a
blackish spot on each side. Dorsocentral bristles slightly behind the supra-alars.
All the usual bristles present in addition to the lower central one on the meso-
pleura, the mesopleura with two posterior bristles.

Legs entirely yellow except a small black spot beyond middle of ventral surface
of mid and hind femora. Fore femur with a series of strong posteroventral bristles;
the other femora without ventral bristles; mid tibia with a strong apical ventral
spur, and the posterodorsal series of setulae shorter than that on anterodorsal
surface of the hind tibia, the anteroventral bristles on hind tibia longer than
the setulae; tarsi normal.

Wing dark brown, the pale markings subhyaline (Pl. xi, fig. 13). First vein
setulose on entire extent from apex of node to tip above, bare below, third vein
setulose on most of its extent above and on basal half below; fifth vein bare.
Halteres yellow.

Abdomen with the usual quadriseriate brownish-black spots on dorsum, genital
cone in female yellow, all hairs and bristles black, the apical bristles on tergites
quite strong.

Length, 6-7 mm.

Type, male, allotype, and 4 paratypes, Wewak, New Guinea; one paratype,
Rabaul, New Britain (F. H. Taylor).

ENICOPTERINA Malloch.
Proc. R. Ent. Soc. London, 1939 (in press).
I recently described this monobasic genus from Fiji. It may yet be found
in New Guinea.

Group II.
This Group is merely an arbitrary one and contains but one genus, with
apparently three species, two of them known to me.
Possibly more species may yet be found in this region and, should such be
the case, the data presented below will enable students to determine them.

440 DIPTERA OF TILE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

Xarnura Walker.

Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., i, 1857, 28.

This genus is readily distinguished from its allies by the flattened and coarsely-
haired scutellum which has 8 or more marginal bristles. The hairs on the aristae
are about one-third as long as the width of the third antennal segment, though
Walker’s figure shows them comparatively longer. The presence of short black
setulae on the upper surface of the first vein of the wing to near its base is an
exceptional character in this section of the family. The presutural and dorso-
central bristles are present, the latter far behind the transverse line of the supra-
alars, and the pteropleural, sternopleural, and two upper mesopleural bristles are
all strong. First and third veins setulose, fifth vein bare.

Genotype, Xarnuta leucoteles Walker.

The two species before me are distinguished as below.

A. Wing dark brown, broadly subhyaline on anal angle and whitish-hyaline across apex
of first posterior cell, inner cross-vein paler than other veins ................

EUS Te Be code NCTE EAT oS AS SLOT ENSIGN a HORST FEES GLa TRUE TS Sica ania le Patera Wastes cone enee ore leucoteles Walker

AA. Wing yellowish-brown, dark brown at stigma, on a patch below stigma, a narrow
angulate fascia over the outer cross-vein and a large patch in apex except the

tip of first posterior cell which is whitish hyaline; anal angle and hind margin

broadly subhyaline; inner cross-vein not paler than the other veins ..........

Sea corsa ce Uens ace Mee va: sirSy aie sare ne lks) oa ad Achy s hs Wecin se oie fa eine tease: Sigal oyna ares Gielen are: eco tou esue Siege confusa Malloch

XARNUTA LEUCOTELES Walker.
Op. cit., i, 1857, 28.
This species was originally described from Singapore. I have seen it from
Aru Islands; it may be quite generally distributed in this region.

XARNUTA CONFUSA Malloch.

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, (11) iv, 11939.
A recently described species from the Solomon Islands.

XARNUTA MOROSA de Meijere.

Tijdschr. v. Ent., lvii, 1914, 198.

This species is known to me only from the description. The wing is dark
brown, with three hyaline marks in the submarginal cell, one just beyond the inner
cross-vein, the second before apex of second vein, and the third a little beyond the
latter in the upper part of the apex of the cell, a narrow hyaline fascia from third
to fifth vein between the cross-veins, two hyaline marks beyond it in the first
posterior cell, the apical one a streak along fourth vein at its apex, a large hyaline
mark in apex of the first posterior cell, and some fainter hyaline markings in the
third posterior cell and in anal angle.

Batavia.

Group III.

This group contains species all of which, except Oedaspoides, have the
postocular cilia black and bristle-like, and most of them have the wing-markings
fasciform, though a few have the wings black or dark brown with a number of
hyaline spots or marginal markings and a few discal dots or spots. None have
the wings with a large number of small hyaline spots on dark fasciae, nor have
any species the wings hyaline with stellate apical dark mark. In only one genus
included in this Group are the postvertical and another pair of more widely spaced
bristles just below their level yellowish-white and stubble-like as in the Tephritinae.
The first wing-vein in the latter group is always setulose on the upper side of the

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 441

node, while in most species of Group III the node is bare, though sometimes it is
setulose and even the section of the vein proximad of the node is at least partly
setulose. Possibly a strict application of the type of armature of this vein will
result in a different alignment of the genera. I figure the two main types of
armature to make clear this previously unused character (Figs. G1, G2).

Key to the Genera.
1. Mid and hind femora with short closely-placed stout spines on apical halves of the

anteroventral and posteroventral surfaces ................... Callistomyia Bezzi
Mid and hind femora without short stout spines on the apical halves of the antero-
WEINWPEYl Qian! FOOSWSieOnrE mina! SWEPIEVORS Goce sauacadcudoosusoodouougududuuucGuoOe 2

2. Pleurotergite (i.e., that section of the thorax above the impressed line over the
posterior spiracle) with some erect fine or stiff hairs on a portion of its surface;
presutural bristle lacking; dorsocentral bristles lacking, or but one postsutural
discal pair of bristles present; metasternum haired or setulose ............. 3

Pleurotergite bare, rarely with one or two fine erect hairs, if there are any hairs
present the presutural bristle is present; dorsocentral bristles present (ex.
COVGCOS CTE UULCA I Arete SE eae Re Ga da ew eee eres RS ec 6

3. Frons with but one pair of orbital bristles, which are situated close to the anterior
margin and directed inward; prescutellar acrostichal bristles very short; first
wing-vein setulose from well proximad of base of node to tip (Nederland Indies)
88 ic fancies Oe Bu eat renee TT Saaen ideas sone ACO NO acticin EG Cc eHe cae ara i ar Bre Dimeringophrys Enderlein

TDPOMS Walla Cie IGE wo MOEwAS Cit Gaon! joeISHES, GoocouucccocucnvoddadouuoobucuEs 4
AM SCCM OD Cura eb rIStlemlaCkillp amor tiepencteteistsr cise ucts oie el craicr ale ai erereney coche: cliche che netetensle 4a
Stare laurel loeSoe joceserore Gavel Choisy, Siow oGoscasceonoaacunaaccdguhouaouodsuund 5

4a. Stigma much shorter than costal cell; second vein straight .. Xanthotrypeta Malloch
Stigma subequal to the costal cell measured along the costal vein; second vein very
MNOCICEAb bys UM utate de eye ne cite aise ties eh cers soeeie savas Seta Colobostrella Hendel

5. Frons with one pair of incurved infraorbital and one pair of reclinate supraorbital
bristles, very closely placed, the latter near anterior third .....................

oS 6S tes OTE Inco Oller Seer eeer teeter aed a ai see PRE nai Stat RA ma a ee Ptiolina van der Wulp

Frons with two pairs of infraorbital and one pair of supraorbital bristles, the

LFttereWielle above timid GIETOE sirOMStea mem atc scious cvelele cis caress aicieln eucicusiens ters) ice sits 5a

5a. Infraorbitals strong, upper near the supraorbital pair ............ Huphranta Loew
Both infraorbital pairs weak, on anterior third, the upper far in front of supra-
Glos foewee waouGla mS MERWE WHODEIP WHIRL GoaonouvasadacooaoduKdE Cyclopsia, n. gen.

6. Second wing-vein with a short spur-vein near its apex on posterior side; fourth vein
bent forward at apex (Nederland Indies) .............. Colobostroter Enderlein
Second wing-vein without a preapical spur-vein on posterior side; fourth vein not
NoOLUceablye Went erOnwardinace ap Gxqumrenisisuaccsucsvonsiel oer epee cron le neaiet nae si sie Ul

|

Second wing-vein looped or sharply curved forward above inner cross-vein, fused
with first for a short stretch, then bending down and continuing to the costa; first
vein setulose from near base to apex above; first posterior cell not narrowed at

apex; gena nearly as hign as eye (Malayan) ............ Enicoptera Macquart
Second wing-vein not looped, straight or almost so, well removed from first above
inner cross-vein; gena not more than one-third as high as eye .............. 8

Loa)

Only two pairs of orbital bristles present; humeral bristle lacking ................
BEN ean ey cite tie aso ealonaF GUSTS A Soe 1a re Ro Oe Sako Noe) al tga? COMER ELV. OST ER eae wale onaee Ortaloptera Edwards*

Mores thane twou pairs) Of OLbitalss son theshimerale presents erie eens aeicieleieieicnea aoe 9
9. Scutellum with but two bristles (Hast Indies) ........ Ichneumonosoma de Meijere
Scutelltimiwithye tour soristlesienuiscyemnciicns apts Cuca e ert Ra eater eovec tists cent cuebanenays 10
LO, Seeing leon lovoisls Weise Gop saopnevacsoccunubbunsuaeoouc Colobostrella Hendely
Sternopleuralktbristie: PRESemt wer cess wees eRe oe Ee, Pee ees ured | sie » Ga iets Stes 11

* This genus is unknown to me except from the description. It may have pleurotergal
hairs and belong near Huphranta.

7 This genus is introduced here nieeely for comparison. Hendel gives as a synonym
Kambangania de Meijere, which in the male has a deep excavation near the base of the
underside of the mid metatarsus, and it also has four pairs of orbital bristles. It appears
probable to me that the genus belongs to the Huphranta group but, not having seen
specimens, I am unable to say if the pleurotergite is haired, so place it in both sections
in the key. See text of this paper.

JJ

442 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

11. Six or more pairs of incurved infraorbital bristles present .. Carpophthorella Hendel
Not more than three pairs of infraorbital bristles present ..................... 12

12. Arista with the longest hairs at least as long as the width of the third antennal
segment; scutellum with numerous hairs on the disc and sides; metasternum
haired; lobe of the anal cell long and narrow, parallel-sided to near its apex,

about four times as long as its basal width (East Indies) .... Gastrozona Bezzi
Arista pubescent or with its longest hairs not nearly half as long as the width of
ChirdrantennalySeemiente cecrerctereiere eta chavecateteltaue) no. etre vader stiemen steteaitatfelciretaMare ralteltaure enolate 13

13. Frons with no bristles on anterior two-fifths, the upper three-fifths with four pairs
of bristles, the anterior two pairs apparently representing the infraorbitals,
the second one much stronger than the first, both erect and sloping forward, the
supraorbitals extremely short, only the upper pair reclinate, the posterior pair
of Infraorbitalssabovermiddleyof fronsinm. 1 -)-)e eet alee eine Pseudina, n. gen.

Frons with bristles on anterior two-fifths of its extent, not arranged as above .. 14

14. Frons with three pairs of incurved infraorbitals and one pair of reclinate supra-
orbitals, the upper pair of the latter and the outer vertical pair lacking; ocellars
and postverticals represented by microscopic hairs; lobe of the anal cell elongate,
narrowed from base to apex, at base a little less than half as wide as its
Kevek S18 ee ain Giciol ahd uO 0 Gee’ B:0.Olp GNC UO OOOO CRO occa ereaniaio chowwis wrcahcio i Cristobalia Malloch

Frons with two or three pairs of infraorbital and two pairs of supraorbital bristles,
the posterior pair of latter sometimes very short; outer verticals present; other
CharacterseNows/aASTADONE weschcuspe Aleks lolovate esos usivsriecokep os itobsloue. epous Pasion sucioustexs keusroPevevenel ene 15

15. The postvertical and a pair of equally long bristles slightly below their level and
more widely spaced, yellowish-white and stubble-like; lobe of the anal cell
sinuous; node of first vein setulose above .................. Ceratitis McLeay*

Postvertical and the outer lower pair of bristles near them black and fine, the lower
pair usually much shorter and weaker than the postverticals; lobe of anal cell
TVOE pe SITU OUS we ebe fase eoy opera Usuap os sieeese lame. sts nstichensnanaveden spore eens teu onsus: aytenehe hovel haciews Remus uc me keene 16

16. Fourth wing-vein bent or dipped down into the discal cell proximad of the inner
cross-vein; first vein almost rectangularly bent forward to costal vein, the stigma
not halfas lons) on costa as) the costal celles. > ee cena ee es Anomoea Walker

Fourth wing-vein straight proximad of the inner cross-vein ..................-. 17,

17. Wing dark brown on the costal half or more, with or without a hyaline or subhyaline
mark on the costa beyond the apex of first vein and with the hind margin more
or less broadly hyaline, the posterior edge of the dark portion usually irregular ;

lobe of the anal cell rather short, tapered to apex .............. Hemilea Loew
Wing either black with hyaline marginal and discal markings, or almost equally black
and hyaline, the black markings not confined to costal half .............. 18

18. Frons not less than twice as long as wide, the ocellar bristles quite short and fine,
not longer or stronger than the posterior supraorbitals; anal cell with long

vat Mole” oaodadd os oUpu cd bdoo Om amo ooo do coco OO O Pseudospheniscus Hendel
Frons much less than twice as long as wide, the ocellar bristles long and strong,
distinctly longer and stronger than the posterior supraorbital pair .......... 19

19. Postocular cilia yellowish-white; scutellum yellow, with black spots at bases of the
bristles; third antennal segment sharply angulate at apex above ............

OSU O NO oo COM D Out TO WO Oe eC eo oo Oe Sees roams Oedaspoides Bezzi
Postocularveilia and allyotherycephalic bristlessblackas- ieee ieee 20

20. Scutellum black and yellow; anal cell with an elongate apical lower lobe (fig. K)
£0 CHOON OA DO EF CUO OI ROLCEO OIC OL CEA Re EOICIGIO ICO OREO Gc loko naa OG Ceratitella, n. gen.7
Scutellum black; anal cell with a very short angular lower apical lobe ............
FOTOS OUI PORE OD OF ACO IHORR Pr RRP otcr a tore daira c mioec aolonere Spheniscomyia Bezzi
N.B.—It should be noted here that where I have given in parentheses ( ) the
locality of a genus listed in the above key it is not treated in the following text,
though there may be, in one or two cases, some reference to such a genus under
one of those that occur in New Guinea or Australia. There is a possibility that

some of these genera may yet be found in the region covered by this report.

EUPHRANTA Loew.
Mon. Europ. Bohrfl., 1862, 28—Lagarosia van der Wulp, Tijdschr. v. Ent.,
Xxxiv, 1891, 210.

* The characters cited for the segregation of this genus will suffice for use in this
region only.
7 See note, p. 465.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 443

I am synonymizing the above two generic names after a careful comparison
of the type-species of each. Hendel, in his key to the genera in 1914, presents no
better character for the segregation of Lagarosia from its allies than the type of
wing markings, and a classification based upon this character is unreliable.

My examination of the genotypes discloses the fact that they are closely
related, having the same cephalic characters as well as the same thoracic bristling,
the presutural bristle being absent in both, while the wing venation and bristling
are the same. One important character, not mentioned by any writer on the
family except Hendel, that links both and segregates them from most related
genera known to me, is the presence of many erect fine hairs on the metapleura
above the central furrow. I consider therefore that the above cited synonymy is
warranted.

The long-haired aristae, four scutellar bristles, 2-3 infraorbital and 1 supra-
orbital, lack of the presutural bristle, very small ocellars, the setulose third
wing-vein, and metapleural hairs, will separate this genus from any other in the
Australian region.

But one species is as yet reported from Australia.

EUPHRANTA MINOR Hendel.

Ent. Mitt., xvii, No. 5, 1928, 362.

A small species, 4 mm. in length without ovipositor. Head yellow, frons
shiny, as wide aS one eye and 1:5 times as long as wide; two infraorbitals.
Longest hairs on aristae about two-thirds as long as width of third antennal
segment. Thorax reddish-brown, whitish-dusted, shiny, hind margin of mesonotum
and the scutellum bare, the latter paler yellow, flattened on disc. Mesophragma
(= pleurotergite) white-haired. Halteres yellow. Legs including the coxae yellow.
Abdomen rusty-coloured, shiny, yellowish-haired, the apical two tergites with black
Marginal bristles. Venation and markings of the wings as in Staurella cruz
Bezzi. The brown basal cross-band lacking, the one over the inner cross-vein as
in crux. There are some additional dark markings, including a straight fascia
over the outer cross-vein to the costa, but the tip of the wing has a white mark
that extends over the tips of third and fourth veins and is convex inwardly;
the posterior basal cell is brown, with only a small hyaline mark on the hind
margin; base of wing hyaline, the veins yellow.

Darwin (Palmerston), N. Territory, Australia. Type in collection of Deutsches
Entmologisches Institut.

EUPHRANTA SCUTELLATA Malloch.

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) iv, 1939.

A larger species than minor, averaging 8 mm. in length, with thorax black
except on each side just behind suture, two large spots in centre of postsutural
area, and the apical two-thirds of the scutellum which are yellow. Legs pre-
ponderantly black. Wing with a large black-brown mark from base of stigma to
apex that extends back to middle of the discal cell, a large spot on costa just
beyond apex of first vein and the extreme apex whitish-yellow.

Solomon Islands.

XANTHOTRYPETA Malloch.
Op. cit., (11) iv, 1939, 250.

Generic characters.—This genus is similar to Huphranta in all characters,
but lacks the sternopleural bristle. The frons has two pairs of inwardly-directed

444 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

infraorbitals, the upper one twice as far from the lower as it is from the single
pair of reclinate supraorbitals, ocellars microscopic, the postverticals mere hairs,
outer verticals about half as long as inner pair, surface of frons shiny. Longest
hairs on arista about as long as width of third antennal segment, the latter
three times as long as wide, slightly tapered to the narrowly rounded apex;
face concave in profile, parafacials invisible centrally in profile, gena narrow.
Central pair of scapular bristles lacking, lateral pair distinct, presutural, acro-
stichal, sternopleural, and pteropleural bristles lacking, scutellum flat above, with
four strong bristles and the dise closely short-haired, metapleural (pleurotergite)
with the upper half above the impressed line furnished with numerous fine erect
hairs. First wing-vein setulose from well before node to apex above and at apex
below, third setulose to about midway from base to inner cross-vein above and at
base below; first posterior cell not narrowed at apex; anal cell with a subtriangular
apical lower angle or lobe.
Genotype, Xanthotrypeta bimaculata Malloch.

XANTHOTRYPETA BIMACULATA Malloch.

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) iv, 1939, 250, Pl. x, fig. 13.

A reddish-yellow species, with an elongate shiny-black mark on each side of
anterior margin of mesonotum above the humeri, the frons darkened centrally, legs
yellow, the mid and hind tibiae largely browned, the wings yellowish, more
distinctly so in front, with a fuscous fascia from stigma to over the inner cross-
vein that is carried forward to connect with the large apical black-brown mark
beginning midway between the cross-veins and filling the apical third or more of
the wing except the hind margin as far in as the middle of the discal cell, a
small mark in margin of the second posterior cell near lower extremity of the
outer cross-vein, and a narrow lunate mark across the apex of the first posterior
cell, these excepted portions whitish-hyaline.

Length, 8 mm.

Solomon Islands. Type in Imperial Institute of Entomology.

CYCLOPSIA, nN. gen.

Generic characters.—Frons depressed down centre, with two pairs of rather
closely placed weak incurved infraorbital bristles on anterior fourth, and one pair
of stronger reclinate supraorbital bristles near upper third, only the inner verticals
present; ocelli extremely close together. Antennae extending to lower fourth
of face, third segment fully three times as long as second and its own width,
slightly tapered to the rounded apex; arista with the longest hairs not more
than half as long as width of third antennal segment. Face slightly receding
below, foveae rather deep, epistome not projecting; eye higher than long, more
narrowed below than above; gena narrow, the bristle weak. Thorax with the
following bristles: outer pair of scapulars, 2 notopleurals, 1 supra-alar, 2 postalars,
4 scutellars, the prescutellar pair of acrostichals widely separated, the mesopleural,
pteropleural, and sternopleural bristles rather weak, the acrostichal pair reduced
to short fine hairs. Scutellum flattened, subtriangular, disc minutely haired. Legs
normal, femora not spinose; mid tibia with a strong apical ventral spur. Wings
narrow, much as in Adrama, but the second vein is straight, about as far from
costa as from third vein just beyond apex of first, and the stigma is equal in
length to the costal cell. Abdomen elongate-ovate, basal composite tergite nearly
as long as the next two tergites combined, fifth tergite longer than fourth,
tapered to apex.

Genotype, Cyclopsia inaequalis, n. sp.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 445

CYCLOPSIA INAEQUALIS, Nn. sp.

6. Head orange-yellow, dull on face, genae, and lower occiput, shiny from near
anterior margin of frons and becoming glossy behind and on upper occiput, the
frons with a large brownish-black mark from near anterior margin to ocelli
that is narrow in front and widens to fill entire width at ocelli, the vertex reddish-
yellow, upper occiput glossy-black except in centre; third antennal segment
brownish-black except extreme base; palpi yellow. Frons nearly twice as long as
wide; surface hairs microscopic, yellow.

Thorax brownish-yellow, distinctly shiny, the humeri and a broad streak down
the posterior third of the mesopleura to middle coxae lemon-yellow, the posterior
notopleural calli and scutellum pale-yellow; mesonotum with two broad brown
vittae along the inner edges of the humeri traceable on entire extent, darkest
in front and paler behind the suture, the intervening area grey-dusted and with
quite dense pale hairs; pleura blackened in front of the yellow central stripe
except on the propleura, and entirely black behind it, including the postnotum,
the latter slightly grey-dusted. All the bristles black; hairs largely pale, the
scutellar hairs black. Scutellars four.

Legs orange-yellow, mid and hind tibiae dark brown; fore legs missing. Mid
tibia with a series of very short posterodorsal setulae; no setulae evident on the
hind tibia, tarsi incomplete, the metatarsi long and slender.

Wing as Figure H, hyaline, yellow along the costa from the fork of second
and third veins, with a small deep brown transverse mark on the inner cross-vein
that does not extend to costa, and the entire apex dark brown from slightly
before the outer cross-vein and well before the apex of second vein, the inner
edge of the mark almost straight. First vein setulose from a little before node
to apex above, bare below; third vein setulose from base one-third of the distance
to inner cross-vein above and at extreme base below; lobe of anal cell elongate
triangular. Halteres yellow.

Abdomen glossy reddish-yellow, blackened from apex of composite tergite to
tip, with a subtriangular grey-dusted mark in centre of apices of third and
fourth tergites. Hairs quite dense, short, decumbent, and black; no bristles
present.

Length, 8 mm.

Type, Dutch New Guinea, Cyclops Mts., Sabron, Camp 2, 2,000 feet, May
1936 (L. HE. Cheesman). Type daimaged in shipping, the head mounted on same
card, fore legs missing.

This genus connects the Adraminii with the Huphranta group rather distinctly.

COLOBOSTRELLA Hendel.

Wien. Ent. Zeitg., xxxiii, 1914, 79; Ann. Mus. Nat. Hung., xiii, 1915, 428.

This genus probably belongs to the group with haired pleurotergite, but I
have not seen the genotype, which is described from Celebes. It may occur in
New Guinea.

In Hendel’s description the following bristles are given as lacking or
rudimentary: ocellar, postvertical, presutural, dorsocentral, and sternopleural.
He also lists the “Schietelborsten’”, but I am uncertain just what bristle he
refers to by this name. In his 1914 key he states that there is but one infraorbital
bristle, and in 1915 he states that there is an infraorbital and a supraorbital pair.
If Kambangania de Meijere is a synonym then there is a difference in the frontal
bristling, as de Meijere says that in his genotype there are four pairs of orbitals,

446 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

the anterior and posterior pairs being weak and hair-like. In both the genotypes
the second wing-vein is distinctly undulated, and the first vein enters the costa
much farther from the apex of the subcostal vein than the latter is from the
humeral cross-vein. In Xanthotrypeta the stigma and the costal cells are subequal
on the costal edges, and the second vein is straight. In Xanthotrypeta the inner
cross-vein is at or slightly before the middle of the discal cell, while in the other
two species it is about the apical third of that cell.

COLOBOSTRELLA RUFICAUDA Hendel.

Op. cit., xiii, 1915, 429.

A shiny reddish-yellow species. Mesonotum with a large glossy-black rounded
mark on each side between the humeri and the suture and two similar elongate
marks behind the suture that widen behind; pleura with two black spots, one at
the prothoracic spiracle and one before the mesopleural suture; postnotum with
two black stripes. Abdomen with a black mark on each side of each tergite. Wing
yellowish-hyaline, with a narrow black fascia from middle of stigma to over
second vein, a broader slightly-curved fascia from costa to middle of discal cell
just beyond the inner cross-vein that is narrowly connected on the costa with the
large apical black mark, the latter with a hyaline spot near apex of the first
posterior cell.

Celebes.

Possibly a synonym of Sophira bistriga Walker, described from Celebes.

PSEUDINA, nl. gen.

Generic characters.—Frontal bristling different from that of any allied genus,
the orbitals consisting of four pairs, the upper two pairs very small and evidently
the supraorbitals, the upper infraorbital pair at upper third of orbits and twice
as long as the anterior pair, both pairs slightly proclinate and incurved; ocellars
minute, shorter than the incurved postverticals; outer verticals much shorter than
the inner pair; face slightly carinate in centre, epistome not projecting; post-
ocular cilia dark and bristle-like; antennae normal; aristae pubescent. Thorax
with all bristles present, the four scapulars fine, dorsocentral pair distinctly
behind the supra-alars, prescutellar acrostichals strong; mesopleurals 2; scutellum
with one or two luteous hairs and four strong black marginal bristles. Wings
marked much as in Rioxa, the first vein setulose from near apex of node to tip
above, bare below, third vein setulose from base to near level of outer cross-vein
above and below, fifth vein bare; inner cross-vein about one-fifth from apex of
discal cell. Legs normal, fore femur with posteroventral bristles, mid tibia with
no central setulae, and a strong apical ventral bristle, hind femur without ventral
bristles, hind tibia with a regular series of short closely-placed anterodorsal
dark setulae. ;

Genotype, Pseudina buloloae, n. sp.

PSEUDINA BULOLOAR, Nl. Sp.

¢. Glossy brownish-yellow, face a little paler, small ocellar spot black;
mesonotum without dust or vittae; humeri, scutellum, and a streak along upper
edge of pleura lemon-yellow; abdomen with black mark on each side of each
tergite at curve; legs yellow: wings dark brown, with hyaline and yellowish
markings (Pl. xi, fig. 14).

Frons shiny, depressed centrally, a little longer than wide and slightly
narrowed in front, with a few microscopic pale hairs; profile as Figure I.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 447

Mesonotal hairs short, dark, depressed and numerous. Scutellum short, flattened
above. Legs normal.

Wing-veins dark brown. Lobe of anal cell elongate; first posterior cell
parallel-sided at apex; stigma short, black-brown except a hyaline line across
base. Halteres yellow. Squamae brown, the fringe dark brown.

Abdomen broadly ovate, convex above, with blackish hairs and black bristles.
Fifth tergite longer than fourth, rounded at apex, with some quite strong apical
and lateral bristles.

Length, 6 mm.

Type, Bulolo, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

This species reminds one of the species of the Rioxa group, but there are
only four scutellar bristles, though a bristly hair on one side in the type-specimen
is in the position that the intermediate pair of bristles occupies and may represent
that pair, and the arista a merely short pubescent.

HeEmMILEA Loew.

Mon. Eur. Bohrfl., 1862, 32.—Ocnerus Costa, Atti Acad. Sci. Napoli, v (2), 1844,
102.

This genus is unrepresented in the New Guinea collection before me, but it
may yet be found here as there are species occurring as close as the Solomon
Islands and Fiji.

In a paper now in the press dealing with the Solomon Islands species I
present data on the species from this region so that it may be possible to identify
any such that occur in New Guinea if already described.

The genus extends from Europe to Japan and southward to the Solomons
with some closely-related species that have been removed to other genera in
Africa. All the known species have the costal half or more of the wing dark
brown, and the posterior half hyaline, the costa sometimes having a hyaline mark
close to the apex of first vein, and the hind edge of the dark portion being more
or less irregular in most species.

CALLISTOMYIA Bezzi.

Mem. Ind. Mus., iii, 1913, 124.

This genus contains four species, only one of which is known to occur in
the region under consideration. The genotype, pavonina Bezzi, occurs in India and
Formosa. I have examined specimens. The outstanding character of the genus
consists of the small stout spines on the apical halves or more of the antero-
ventral and posteroventral surfaces of the mid and hind femora. The genotype
has the following bristles on the head and thorax: 2 supraorbitals, 3 infraorbitals,
inner verticals long, outer pair short, postverticals short; 1 humeral, 1 presutural,
2 notopleurals, 2 postalars, a pair of dorsocentrals almost in line with the
acrostichals, 4 scutellars, 1 mesopleural, 1 pteropleural, 1 sternopleural, and a fine
propleural just below the humerus. Ocellars lacking. Scutellum flat, sub-
triangular. First and third wing-veins setulose, those on first vein carried to base
of the node. Venation closely similar to that of Sophira. Sixth tergite of
abdomen in female shorter than the fifth.

CALLISTOMYIA HORNI Hendel.
Hint. Mitt., xvii, 1928, 361.
Similar to the other species of the genus in general coloration, agreeing
with pavonina Bezzi in having a black spot on the lower centrai portion of the

448 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

face, and differing from it in the lack of a black fascia on the bases of the
abdominal tergites. Thorax brownish-yellow, the humeri and a vitta below the
notopleural suture lemon-yellow, the latter continued to base of the wing, scutellum
lemon-yellow, mesonotum with five black vittae posteriorly.

Darwin (Palmerston), N. Territory, Australia. Type in the collection of the
Deutsches Entomologisches Institut, Berlin-Dahlem, Germany.

CARPOPHTHORELLA Hendel.
Wien. Ent. Zeitg., xxxiii, 1914, 80; Ann. Mus. Nat. Hung., xiii, 1915, 448.
This genus was erected for the reception of a new species, magnifica, from
Formosa. It is the only species as yet assigned to the genus. The very striking
character of the 6 to 10 pairs of strong incurved equal infraorbital bristles
distinguishes the genus from its nearest allies. The species bear a superficial
resemblance to those of Gastrozona Bezzi and Callistomyia Bezzi.
There are two known species that may be separated as below.
A. Frons with 6-7 pairs of infraorbital bristles; wing with a subhyaline mark on costa
just beyond apex of first vein; mid and hind tibiae browned apically (Formosa)
OTC OSOMAIC OA one Oinitie Gna O Mich GEES Huts tec CACC REMC CRRA See IDeecacntaciacrere oar’ eto, Bic magnifica Hendel
AA. Frons with 10 pairs of infraorbital bristles; wing without a subhyaline mark on
the costa just beyond apex of first vein; legs entirely orange-yellow (Solomon
TSTDIVAS Masco oy stcucte sconce guste mosucnedel cage. sce ucleysNetals Mauamer ious utes trea sacmnitene setifrons Malloch
It is possible that setifrons will be found in some of the other island groups
in the same region.

CARPOPHTHORELLA SETIFRONS Malloch.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) iv, 1939.
The large number of closely-placed pairs of incurved infraorbital bristles in
this species will at once distinguish it from any other in this region.
Solomon Islands.

CRISTOBALIA Malloch.

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) iv, 1939.

Generic characters.—Frons at vertex less than one-third of the head-width,
narrowed to anterior margin and more than twice as long as wide, with three pairs
of infraorbital and one pair of supraorbital bristles, the ocellar and outer vertical
pairs undeveloped; aristae very short haired, longest hairs about twice as long as
width of arista at base. Thoracic bristling complete, scutellars four. First and
third wing-veins setulose; inner cross-vein at middle of the discal cell.

CRISTOBALIA LUTEA Malloch.
Op: cit.) (11) Miv, 1939% 265; Pl. oxi) figs 22:
Described from the Solomon Islands.

ANOMOEA Walker.

Ent. Mag., iii (1), 1835, 80—Phagocarpus Rondani, Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., iii,
ial, 17d

Most recent writers on the family have used Rondani’s name for this genus
under the belief that Chevrolat’s similar name had priority over that of Walker. It
has been conclusively proven that the part of Chevrolat’s Catalogue containing the
name Anomoea did not appear until 1837. Thus Walker’s name must be used for
the Trypetid genus.

The genus has been generally misinterpreted by writers on the family and a
number of species have been placed in it that do not properly belong to it, while
at least one species that belongs here has been placed in another genus.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 449

The most striking character for the recognition of the genus is the down-
wardly bent antepenultimate section of the fourth wing-vein, a character met with
in the Otitid genus Rivellia Robineau-Desvoidy. The anai cell has a long narrow
apical lower lobe that is sometimes as long as the free part of the anal vein, and
the third antennal segment is about twice as long as wide, nearly attaining the
epistomal edge.

There are four species of the genus, as I interpret it, known to me; they may
be distinguished as in the key given below. All except the genotype, permunda,
may yet be found in New Guinea or on islands close to it.

Key to the Species.

PETAR CSE Ii eatwnye LOW pus ipcican cess oO ica oe es oxoal « averctee oka iae Sayeed onrrchimwowd a sheers O58 2
Inlay Wyihtin Gena aa Oe IdlR@k UNOS sonscosccubebeudavogub eu suuoaguaanabodD 3
2. Thorax largely, and the legs entirely yellow (Palaearctic, Formosa) .. permunda Harris
Thorax entirely, and the legs largely black ...................... nigrithorax, n. sp.

(st)

The small hyaline mark in the costal cell of the wing quadrate, extending to the
costal vein, the latter yellow along the edge of the mark (Solomon Islands)
518 BROLACERO EG at Oko ca DEAE Geneon Gian SOLS Lats oi 5lo "ca ROO NCES SAGE MONCH ce CREA RSE ER Ree quadrata Malloch
The small hyaline mark in the costal cell of the wing elongate, not attaining the
costal vein, the latter black along the edge of the mark (Fiji Islands) ........
O76 6, Beh ae na Eaeby Ciel OREN NSH? olitlen ORE RPGR Gl Oia SEO TORD EE ICIS a CrGer eS camer Roun eR Cec ORT curvinervis (Bezzi)

ANOMOEA NIGRITHORAX, N. Sp.

?. Head black, frons dull brown, with whitish-grey dusting, most evident on
the orbits, face brown, shiny below, with rather dense whitish-grey dust, gena
brown, occiput shiny black; antennae and palpi red. Frons at vertex fully one-
fourth of the head-width, slightly narrowed to anterior margin, and fully twice as
long as its central width; uppermost of the three pairs of incurved infraorbital
bristles at about two-fifths from upper margin, not much in front of and distinctly
laterad of the anterior pair of supraorbitals, the latter much longer than the
posterior pair; outer verticals about half as long as the inner pair; surface hairs
centrally rather numerous, short, erect and dark. Antennae elongate, nearly
attaining the epistome, third segment about three times as long as wide, rounded
at apex; arista pubescent. Gena not higher than width of third antennal segment,
with numerous short stiff black hairs, vibrissal angle more produced than in the
other species.

Thorax black, glossy, the mesonotum rather densely grey-dusted on disc, with
three black vittae on anterior half. Dorsocentral bristles slightly in front of the
transverse supra-alar line; secutellars subequal, the hairs on sides of scutellum
very minute.

Legs black, fore femora brownish on anterior surface, fore tibiae, mid tibiae
except their bases, and apices of hind tibiae, and all the tarsi orange-yellow.

Wing hyaline, with black markings as Plate xi, figure 15, the small hyaline
mark in the costal cell quadrate, extending entirely across the cell, the vein in
front of it black. Second vein not running for any distance closely alongside the
costal vein at its apex as in some of the other species, third vein with a distinct
arch beyond the black preapical fascia, inner cross-vein at about its own length
from outer; setulae on third vein extending to or slightly beyond the inner cross-
vein above. Halteres yellow.

Abdomen glossy-black, with narrow grey-dusted apical fascia on second and
third tergites. General shape broadly ovate, ovipositor sheath flattened, short
and broad.

Length, 4:5 mm.

Type, Edie Creek, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

450 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

SPHENISCOMYIA Bezzi.

Mem. Ind. Mus., iii, 1913, 146.

This genus is very similar to Tephrella Bezzi, differing essentially in having
all the cephalic bristles including the postocular cilia black, the latter short and
fine, and the scutellum with four strong bristles. There is a slight angular
production of the lower apex of the anal cell that is sometimes not evident in
Tephrella.

SPHENISCOMYIA SEXMACULATA (Macquart).

Dipt. Ezot., ii, Pt. 3, 1848, 222 (Urophora).

There is some question as to the distinctness of this species from atilia Walker.
The entirely yellow hind tibiae have been cited as a distinguishing character for
the latter. In both the specimens I have from this region the hind tibiae are
infuscated on their basal halves or more, and in the specimen in which the
antennae are present they are largely darkened.

Admiralty Island; Papua. Recorded by Hendel from Australia in 1928 (Ent.
Mitt., xvii, 364).

PSEUDOSPHENISCUS Hendel.

Suppl. Ent., ii, 1913, 82.

This genus contains species that rather closely resemble those of Anomoea,
but the fourth wing-vein is straight before the inner cross-vein. The frons is
usually about two or more times as long as its central width, and the ocellar
bristles are quite weak, contrasting markedly with those of Spheniscomyia. I
have not enough material to justify definite conclusions on the status of the genus
or the various species referred here, but it appears possible that some future
worker may subdivide the present concept. In the only New Guinea species I
have the frons is a little less noticeably narrowed than in some of the other
species, and the antennae are a little shorter than in such species as fossata
Fabricius, to which it is rather closely similar in most other features.

I present below a key to the three species from this region that are known
to me at this time.

Key to the Species.

1. The entire costal margin of wing from base to middle of apex of first posterior cell
black, the black pattern sending three branches to or almost to hind margin, the
first on the anal cell that is narrow and does not reach the apex of sixth vein,
the second very broad, tapered behind and covering the basal two-thirds of the
discal cell, the third in the form of an inverted V, with its inner arm over the
outer cross-vein and enclosing it and the outer arm ending near apex of the

Lounth kveln (CH is))* eee torsivevecce eters ey eed estate eo: Orehc colons tor te reeetone reno (eves weseiee bifidus Bezzi
Costal border not entirely black, the costal cell partly whitish-hyaline, and another
‘break in the dark mark beyond apex of first vein, the pattern not as above .. 2

2. Costal cell with two subquadrate whitish-hyaline marks; mesopleura except its
anterior margin lemon-yellow (Fiji) .................. mesopleuralis Malloch
Costal cell hyaline, dark brown along the anterior and apical edges; mesopleura
entirely Black Ais.) sea aes Se Ty, A I EEE BRD: AA oe taylori, n. sp.

PSEUDOSPHENISCUS TAYLORI, 1. Sp.

3, 9. Head entirely orange-yellow, the ocellar spot only dark. Frons at vertex
one-fourth of the head-width, hardly narrowed in front, and twice as long as wide;
with the usual bristles, the ocellars about as long as the posterior supraorbitals.
Antennae extending to lower third of face.

Thorax shiny black, humeri and propleura brownish-yellow, mesonotum rather
densely brownish-grey-dusted, with three faint linear dark vittae, the outer pair

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 451

most evident and along the lines of dorsocentrals. Apical scutellar bristles
much shorter than the basal pair, most markedly so in the male.

Legs orange-yellow, mid and hind coxae and femora and basal halves of hind
tibiae blackened. Posteroventral bristles on fore femora quite strong; apical ventral
spur on mid tibia strong; hind tibia with a series of weak anterodorsal setulae.

Wing whitish hyaline, with black markings as Plate xi, figure 16. Inner
cross-vein at a little more than its own length from outer; third vein setulose
to inner cross-vein above; first vein setulose from just before apex of node to tip
above, and at apex below. Halteres black.

Abdomen broadly ovate, glossy-black, with black hairs and bristles.

Length, 3-4 mm.

Type, male, Bulolo, New Guinea (F. H. Taylor); allotype, Papua: Ishurava,
3,000 feet, July 1933 (L. E. Cheesman); paratype, in poor condition, Wewak,
New Guinea (F. H. Taylor).

CerRATITIS McLeay.

Zool. Journ., iv, 1829, 475.

This genus is represented by but one species in this region, the widely distributed
Mediterranean Fruit Fly. It may be readily distinguished from all other genera
of the family by the characteristic diamond-shaped apical palette on the anterior
pair of supraorbital bristles of the male, the small black spots or short streaks
in the centre of the cells of the basal half of the wing, and the dense stubble-
like yellow bristles on the posteroventral and apical portion of the anteroventral
surfaces of the fore femora of the male. The characters cited in the foregoing
key to the genera will distinguish both sexes from other genera in this region,
though they cannot invariably be successfully applied for the distinction of the
genus in other regions.

CERATITIS CAPITATA (Wiedemann).

Anal. Entomology, 1824, 55 (Trypeta).

This species is distributed from Southern Hurope through tropical portions
of Africa and Asia as well as in the Hawaiian Islands, and tropical portions of
Australia. It has been introduced in commerce in some other sections of the
world, but has failed to establish itself permanently, notably in Florida. The
lack of continuous supply of suitable fruits for the larvae prevents its being more
than a passing menace except in strictly tropical countries.

In addition to the characters mentioned above, it may be worthy of note that
the stubble-like postvertical and lateral bristles on the head and the setulose node
of the first vein of the wing should be carefully considered as possible indices to
a closer affinity with the Tephritinae than with the Trypetinae.

I have seen no specimens from this region.

I figure the characteristic anal cell of this species (Fig. J).

OEDASPOIDES Hendel.
Wien. Ent. Zeitg., xliv, 1927, 63.
This genus is unknown to me, so that I have to depend upon Hendel’s
description for distinguishing data.
Despite the suggestive generic name the genus is apparently not very closely
related to Oedaspis Loew, the frons in the latter being much broader and more
convex, and the scutellum markedly convex and highly polished.

452 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

In his comparative data Hendel states that the third antennal segment is
sharply angled at the upper apical corner, the sixth abdominal tergite of the
female is shorter than the fifth, and the postocular cilia yellow and pointed. The
wings have several dark fasciae as in Oedaspis and Rhagoletis Loew. In some
respects the genus must resemble Chrysotrypanea described herein, but in the
latter the third antennal segment is rounded at apex, and the orbitals are 3 + 2
instead of 2 + 2, and the postocular cilia stubble-like and pale yellow.

There are two species that Hendel places in Oedaspoides.

OEDASPOIDES ESCHERI (Bezzi).
Boll. Lab. Zool. Portici, v, 1911, 21 (Oedaspis).
Described from Sydney, N.S.W.

OEDASPOIDES ACUTICORNIS Hendel.

Wien. Ent. Zeitg., xliv, 1927, 63.

Head pale yellow, with whitish dust on orbits, triangle, and face; bristles
reddish-yellow, behind pale-yellow. Thorax black, humeri, suture, pleura over
the fore coxae and in front of wing bases ochre-yellow, densely grey-dusted. Hairs
pale yellow, the bristles reddish. Scutellum yellow, undusted, and at the bases
of the two apical bristles black. Postnotum grey-dusted. Abdomen ochre-yellow,
the bases of the tergites with dark fasciae, broader laterally, centrally interrupted
on tergites 2 to 4. Genital cone as long as tergites 5 and 6 combined, glossy-
black, with dark hairs, other abdominal hairs whitish-yellow. Legs and halteres
yellow. Wings as in escheri; the hyaline fasciae are all narrower, not wider,
than the brown ones, and there is no hyaline dot at apex of first vein.

Sydney, N.S.W.

CERATITELLA, Nh. gen.

Generic characters.—Quite similar in general appearance to Ceratitis capitata,
but all the cephalic bristles and the postocular cilia are black, the anterior supra-
orbital bristles in the male are simple, the fore femora in the same sex have only
the normal bristles, the wings are not as wide at the anal angle, though the
markings are quite similar, especially in the basal cells, the lobe of the anal
cell is much as in the other genus but not as markedly sinuate, there is no
outstanding costal bristle at the apex of the subcostal vein, and the third antennal
segment is rather noticeably sharpened at the upper apex. In this last character
the genus appears to resemble Oedaspoides, as well as in the swollen and black
and yellow scutellum, but the black postocular cilia and the black dotted and
streaked basal portion of the wing are different from that of Hendel’s genus.

Genotype, Ceratitella loranthi (Froggatt).

CERATITELLA LORANTHI (Froggatt).

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxv, 1911, 863 (Ceratitis).

dg. Head orange to brownish-yellow, with a lemon-yellow band across anterior
fourth of frons, the face and anterior portion of genae yellowish-white, glossy,
ocellar black spot small; antennae, aristae, palpi, and proboscis orange-yellow. All
bristles, including the genal one, black, central minute hairs on frons and genal
margins black, those on lower portion of back of head yellow. Orbitals 2 + 2, the
upper reclinate pair much shorter than the lower and not longer than the
moderately long ocellar pair; post-verticals shorter and finer than the latter, outer
verticals about half as long as the inner pair. Width of frons at vertex about

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 453

two-thirds its length and two-fifths width of head, slightly widened in front.
Face slightly concave in profile, epistome not protruded, centre flat, a slender
fovea on each side most evident below, lower margin transverse; eye vertical,
about 1:25 times as high as long, longest at middle opposite antennal insertion,
and about seven times as high as gena. Antennae extending to lower fifth of
face, with noticeable apical upper point; arista subnude. Postocular cilia very
short and setulose. Palpi spatulate; proboscis short and stout.

Thorax glossy black, the humeri, a large spot on each basal lateral angle of
the scutellum, the posterior portion of the mesopleura above a line from near
the spiracle to near the lower posterior angle, and most of the pleurotergite,
lemon-yellow; disc of the mesonotum with dense yellowish-grey dust on two
vittae from near anterior to near posterior margin, fused in front and behind,
with a short lateral spur on anterior edge of the suture, and a short vitta laterad
of the outer one behind the suture; hairs on the yellow parts and on dorsal vittae
yellow, on other parts mainly black, all the bristles black. All bristles present,
the dorsocentral and acrostichal pairs equally long, the former in line with the
supra-alar pair; scutellum convex and thick, with four strong bristles, the basal
pair in the yellow marks, the hairs fine and dark.

Legs entirely tawny-yellow. Fore femora with a series of black posteroventral
bristles; hind tibia with a series of short anterodorsal black setulae on basal
two-thirds or more.

Wing as Plate xi, figure 17, with black dots and streaks in cells on basal
third and the veins blackened, a broad brownish-black fascia from the stigma to
hind margin just in front of apex of anal vein, this connected on costa with a
broad costal band of the same colour that extends to wing-tip, filling apex of first
posterior cell, and very slightly notched below before apex and narrowly separated
from the costal vein along parts of its extent, and a third dark fascia that
emanates from the junction of the other two and extends obliquely to wing-
margin over both cross-veins. Costal spine very inconspicuous; first vein setulose
above from base of node to apex, and at apex below, third vein setulose from
base to beyond inner cross-vein above and below, fifth vein bare. Two streaks
from second vein to costa more intensely black than the other portions of the
cell, may sometimes contain vestigial spur-veins. Anal cell as Figure K. Squamae
white. Halteres yellow.

Abdomen shiny-tawny to srange-yellow, with black lateral marks on third and
fifth tergites and the apices of second and fourth narrowly whitish-grey-dusted,
hairs pale on the pale-dusted parts and base of second tergite, mainly black on
other parts. Fifth tergite with an apical series of fine black bristles.

Length, 4 mm.

Sydney, N.S.W., bred from Loranthus sp., Dec. 1938 (L. R. Clark).

ORTALOPTERA Edwards.

Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., xx, Pt. 18, 1915, 419.

This genus is a peculiar one, with characters that make it difficult to associate
it with either Trypetidae or Phytalmiidae, though the cephalic and wing characters
strongly suggest the latter relationship. There are two pairs of orbitals, the supra-
orbital pair strong and reflexed, the infraorbital pair short, weak, and incurved.
The arista is long haired. The thorax lacks the humeral, presutural, prescutellar,
and propleural bristles, and has the scapular, notopleural, supra-alar, and meso-
pleural bristles strong, and the pteropleural and sternopleural bristles weak but

454 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

distinct. Scutellars four. Edwards states that the genotype has a preapical bristle
on the mid tibia, a character he states, erroneously, occurs also in Rioxa formosi-
pennis Walker. I have never seen a species of Trypetidae with a preapical dorsal
bristle on any tibia. The wing-veins are bare, another very exceptional character,
the second vein is undulated, and the anal cell is longer than the free part of the
anal vein, without an apical lobe, though longest on its lower edge, the vein closing
the cell slightly arcuate, and the inner cross-vein is far before the middle of the
discal cell.

ORTALOPTERA CLEITAMINA Hdwards.

Oyo, Olin, 20:5 Jeti, iB} allay, Zeit).

This species is quite similar to certain species of the genus Cleitamia, notably
in the wing markings. General colour uniformly dull-black, the head dull light-
ochreous-brown, with some darker mottling on the vertex, antennae and palpi
ochreous, third segment of former darker at apex. Legs blackish-brown, fore
femora, apices of mid tibiae, and the greater part of mid and hind tarsi more
reddish-brown. Wings dark brown, hyaline in costal, subcostal, posterior basal,
and anal cells, on a narrow fascia at middle that runs straight to fifth vein and
then curves apically, ending in hind margin below the outer cross-vein, a broadly
arched streak as wide as the fascia that is separated by a brown interspace about
its own width from the fascia, extending forward from fifth vein to second vein,
then running along the hind side of that vein and ending in the apex of the first
posterior cell, the anal angle also hyaline. Length, 10 mm.

Dutch New Guinea, Mimika River.

Subfamily TEPHRITINAE.

This group is usually distinguished from Trypetinae by the longer sixth
abdominal tergite of the female, the yellow stubble-like postocular cilia, yellow
postvertical, upper supraorbital, and outer vertical bristles, and the speckled wings,
on which the setulae of the first vein commence at the base of the node on its
upper surface. Frequently the pteropleural and posterior notopleural bristles are
yellow, and usually the surface of the thoracic dorsum has flattened yellow scale-
like bristles instead of fine hairs. The scutellum has never more than four bristles
and often has but two, the apical pair being absent or much shorter than the
basal pair. The dorsocentral pair of bristles are in most cases close to the suture,
thé arista is pubescent or bare, and the fifth vein is bare, while the third is rarely
setulose to beyond the inner cross-vein above. In one or two genera I have
included, the sixth abdominal tergite is not longer than the fifth. I include
Tephrella and Platensina here though they are generally placed in Trypetinae.

Key to the Genera.
1. Head on lower margin in profile much longer than at bases of antennae; proboscis
slender, chitinous, and geniculated at middle, without fleshy labellae, the apical

Section as lone as head on lower smaneineed-recieaeieeeiceicene Paroxyna Hendel
Head not or very little longer on lower margin than at base of antennae in profile;
jaye oVof(tes Kiwoybhe, \ypidoy tone Chokeeyl IRVINE, Gasdouuéancoo000d50050dnn 50000055 2

bo

Wing exceptionally broad, less than twice as long as wide, the widest point at outer
cross-vein, the anal angle undeveloped (PI. xi, fig. 21), ground colour brownish-
black, with some small hyaline wedge-shaped marginal incisions, the extreme
apex white, and sometimes some small hyaline dots in the field ..............
Paps arena Fat ice ACs oats car aOR ae ir BOER Rare eS acirez Fito ince ade hcintk cpeeh ae Platensina Enderlein

Wing either normal in width or slender, not less than twice as long as wide, widest
point usually near middle of discal cell, the anal angle usually well developed,
and not coloured and marked as above, or if but little more than twice as long as
wide and the markings and ground colour as above, then there is no hyaline
MArk At the SXtrEMEMCIP! . A rene steve cco: cee relhey oD eleren canes Rete oenrereteltehe Moen n eR OIE TEE aaa 3

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 455

38. Wing black or brownish-black, with whitish-hyaline incisions in the margin and at
most four small hyaline dots in the field ...................:.--60---+---- 4

Wing hyaline, with black or brown marks, sometimes fasciate markings broken by
numerous small hyaline dots, or yellowish-brown, with hyaline fasciae ...... 5

4. Wing more than 2:5 times as long as wide, the anal angle well developed; sixth
abdominal tergite of female about 1:25 times as long as fifth; apex of wing with

Bowhitertransverse /StreaMkesyinys sci. s lsdehesie) «fel eleaeders + cuetedencle si selere Spathulina Rondani
Wing not or very little more than twice as long as wide, without white mark at
extreme tip; sixth abdominal tergite of female not longer than fifth ..........

6 POOR D Oto Cano: 6 O10 DIE COROIGIG CCRC CRO IELG CCI cSne cir RSE ICRA ERO nares exicne a =areriee Tephrella Bezzi

5. Wing yellowish-brown, with hyaline markings, those on the dise consisting of three
fasciae from hind margin to near the second vein, converging in front; inner
cross-vein at or very close to middle of the discal cell; apical ventral spur on

mid tibia not longer than apical diameter of the tibia .... Chrysotrypanea, n. gen.

Wing not marked as above; inner cross-vein much beyond middle of the discal cell;
apical ventral spur of mid tibia much longer than apical diameter of the

TEL ODIET ts Hiker Buk PECL C HOES CoeeCalG tb. ce GIG Sonate GU CNOLE RGEG: SUCIC Ger foes Ieee Ieee OLS eR ORME ES SCRA RE Err ROARS Fer ke 6

6. Wing brown or brownish-black, with many small hyaline spots on entire area, the
base largely hyaline, with a black spot at base of the anterior basal cell that
extends over the fourth vein into the posterior basal cell; fore femur of male
thicker than the other femora; genital cone of female circular in cross section ;

third antennal segment more than twice as long as wide, distinctly angulate at

MPD CTL Pl CANICOLNER atalensacieiel ois ai chek rene elon sie eiiebereisueleue lets omeushe Camaromyia Hendel

Wing brown, with hyaline spots or with an apical star-like dark mark, or marked
with black along the costa and a black fascia from costa to hind margin over

the cross-veins, never with a black spot at base of the anterior basal cell that
extends over fourth vein into the posterior basal cell; fore femur in neither sex

‘much thicker than others; genital cone of female usually flattened, oval in

cross section; third antennal segment, if twice as long as wide, without upper

OLGA MecuTT Sl Cumawactewcicia cute eet elt eckenaarcchentie miloxeaen elec tera crore te maleratctay sir eeetey evarclaltetencusints 7
7. Wing markings consisting of a large star-like mark on apical half or less from which
emanate a few dark rays; scutellar bristles 2; infraorbitals 3 pairs ..........

ree reer Es ere a eo Uentin cues eh ean cael arte panies otieasey ahisyio. aie ertaneua he awl eeuacieedes Trypanea Schrank

Wing markings not as above, not confined to apical half nor star-like; scutellar
bristles 4, the apical pair sometimes short; infraorbitals 2 pairs .......... 8

8. Wing hyaline, with some brownish-black markings along the costa, a large mark at
apex which usually encloses one or two hyaline dots, and a similarly coloured

fascia from the costa to hind margin that encloses both the closely placed cross-

AYGUI TIS acy eset So AES Gacdrcrs Gn Sr GEM MCT PRO hc ao Rr al Sphenella Robineau-Desvoidy
Wing dark brown, with many indiscriminately arranged variably-sized hyaline spots
ONy CHE EN GIRE RARE Shame 5. Rea Tanimura er Gale Eis ans ecm le ltn cng seen mt als Tephritis Latreille

TEPHRELLA Bezzi.

Mem. Ind. Mus., iii, 1918, 151.

This genus superficially resembles Spheniscomyia Bezzi in structure, colour,
and wing markings, but may at once be distinguished from it by the presence of
but two scutellar bristles, the yellow postvertical and outer vertical bristles and
postocular cilia, the latter being stout, and stubble-like; the cross-vein closing the
anal cell is either straight or very slightly angled at centre so that the lower
posterior corner of the anal cell is not produced into a lobe.

I have recently described a species of this genus from the Solomon Islands,
and have another from Western Australia that I provisionally refer here. They
may be distinguished as below.

A. Wing (Fig. L) black, the costal cell with three whitish-hyaline marks, one against
the humeral cross-vein, a larger one before middle, and a narrower one near
apex, three pairs of whitish-hyaline marginal incisions, one just beyond the
apex of first vein, one in the second posterior cell, and one in the third
posterior cell below middle of the discal cell, and three small hyaline discal
spots, one in the first posterior cell beyond the outer cross-vein, one near apex,
and another before middle of the discal cell; pleura and lateral margins of

456 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

mesonotum and scutellum brownish-yellow, remainder of thorax black; cross-
Vein (closing thesanal) cell straienit ass jeeieiel. ere Reena eee sexincisa Malloch
AA. Wing black, costal cell whitish-hyaline on basal half, the six whitish-hyaline
incisions in the wing margin larger and longer than in sexincisa, the outer one
in the second posterior cell curved and extending forward to a little over the
third vein, the inner one to anterior extremity of the outer cross-vein, the pair
in third posterior cell widely separated, the basal one extending across the
discal cell near base, the other extending to fifth vein just before outer cross-
vein; thorax black, propleura brownish-yellow ; vein closing the anal cell slightly
aricked at Jig gle 5.5 5 3% ciate aerial. oleh anita she eae one rulio a aiatamoeraan aye australis, n. sp.

TEPHRELLA AUSTRALIS, N. Sp.

9. Head testaceous-yellow, slightly yellowish-grey-dusted, the ocellar spot
hardly darkened. Outer vertical, ocellar, and orbital bristles except the posterior
supraorbital, dark brown. Frons slightly more than one-third of the head-width
and about 1:25 times as long as wide, with three pairs of strong incurved infra-
orbitals and two pairs of supraorbitals, the posterior the shorter, the anterior
close to middle of frons; ocellars slightly behind the level of posterior edge of
anterior ocellus. Antennae short, extending to lower third of face, third segment
about twice as long as wide; arista pubescent. Gena not as high as width of
third antennal segment.

Thorax shiny-black, grey-dusted, pleura more distinctly so, the propleura
brownish-yellow, bristles brown, the scale-like mesonotal hairs pale yellow.

Legs yellow. Fore coxae each with a brown bristle near apex on anterior
side; fore femur with a series of brown posteroventral bristles; mid tibia with
an apical ventral brown bristle.

Wing brownish-black, whitish-hyaline at base to middle of costal cell and
on basal half of edge in front of the anal vein, the other whitish-hyaline markings
as in Plate xi, figure 18. Inner cross-vein at about its own length from apex of
discal cell; second vein slightly bent in the dark part between the costal hyaline
marks. Halteres yellow.

Abdomen glossy-black, abraded in type-specimen. Sixth tergite subequal to
fifth; sheath of the ovipositor elongate-conical, the ovipositor slender, spine-like,
yellow.

Length, 4 mm.

Type, Western Australia.

SPATHULINA Rondani.

Dipt. [tal. Prodr.. i, 1856, 113.

This genus is distinguished from its allies by the black wings with whitish-
hyaline marks, one at the tip distinguishing it from Tephrella (Fig. M; PI. xi,
fig. 19). The pair of dorsocentral bristles are at the suture quite noticeably in
front of the supra-alar line. Scutellars two. ;

SPATHULINA ACROLEUCA (Schiner).

Reise Novara, Zool., ii, i abt., B. Diptera, 1868, 268 (Tephritis).

This species is rather variable in wing markings and has been described
under several specific names. The distribution is very wide, from Africa through
Asia to Australia, including Guam, Fiji, ete.

Efflatoun records parceguttata Becker, which is accepted as a synonym of this
species, as having been reared from larvae feeding on Ceruana pratensis in
Egypt, and states that the larvae are known to live on Composites in South
Africa.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 457

Shiraki, who records this species from Formosa, states that Schiner’s type-
specimen could not be found in his collection in Vienna, but there can be no
doubt that his species is the one dealt with above, regardless of whether there
may be some confusion in the matter of the relationship of forms described
under different names from other regions.

I have specimens before me from Townsville, Queensland; Canberra, A.C.T.
(F. H. Taylor).

The Canberra specimen has a hyaline dot near the apex of the discal cell of
the wing.

CHRYSOTRYPANEA, Nl. gen.

Generic characters.—This genus is an aberrant one in this subfamily, the
fasciate wings being like those of certain Trypetinae, though the yellow post-
vertical, outer vertical, and posterior supraorbital bristles, and thick yellow
postocular cilia clearly link it with the Tephritinae. Head higher than long,
face slightly produced below; frons more than one-third of the head-width, and
longer than wide, with hardly any central hairing, the orbitals 3 + 2, ocellars
long, in line with the posterior edge of the anterior ocellus. Proboscis stout and
short. Thorax with the normal bristles, the posterior notopleural yellowish-white
and pteropleural stout and white, the other bristles black; basal scutellars long,
apical pair microscopic. Legs rather stout, apical ventral bristle on mid tibia
not longer than apical diameter of the tibia. Wing normal in shape, inner cross-
vein at middle of discal cell, anal cell with triangular apical lower lobe; first
vein setulose from base of node to tip above and at apex below (Fig. G2); third
vein bare. Sixth abdominal tergite of female slightly shorter than fifth; sheath
of ovipositor conical, circular in cross-section.

Genotype, Chrysotrypanea trifasciata, n. sp.

CHRYSOTRYPANEA TRIFASCIATA, Nl. Sp.

9. Head dull orange-yellow, frontal orbits grey-dusted. Antennae extending
to lower third of face, third segment about 1:5 times as long as wide, rounded at
apex, hairs on basal segment yellow, on second black; arista subnude. The three
pairs of incurved infraorbital bristles equal in length, upper pair near middle, well
in front of the anterior pair of supraorbitals, the latter close to upper third and
about one-third longer than posterior pair. Gena about as high as width of third
antennal segment.

Thorax brownish-yellow, mesonotum except narrowly on lateral margins, and
the entire scutellum, glossy-black, lower part of pteropleura and the postnotum
black, greyish-dusted. Mesonotum thickly covered with depressed yellow scale-like
bristles. Metasternum bare.

Legs entirely yellow, hairs and bristles black, fore coxal bristles yellow. Fore
femur with a complete posteroventral series of bristles; no hind tibial setulae.

Wings (Plate xi, fig. 20) yellowish-brown, with a rather faint broad subhyaline
fascia from middle of costal cell to near hind margin and three narrow anteriorly
convergent hyaline fasciae beyond it from hind margin to near second vein, the
first from near apex of anal vein, ending in front of inner cross-vein, second
between the cross-veins, the third from near upper apex of second posterior cell
ending in submarginal cell above level of outer cross-vein; ground colour dark
along the edges of the hyaline fasciae. Halteres yellow.

KK

458 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

Abdomen glossy-black above, including the sheath of ovipositor, yellow below,
the dorsum with similar yellow scale-like armature to the mesonotum. Bristles
yellow.

Length, 3-5 mm.

Type, Seaford, Victoria, from gall on Dogwood.

PLATENSINA Enderlein.

Zool. Jahrb., xxxi, Abtl. Syst. Geog. und Biologie, 1911, 453; Hendel, Ann.
Mus. Nat. Hung., xiii, 1915, 461; Curran, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., xxii, ‘No. 1, 1936, 29.

This genus was originally erected for the reception of a new species, sumbana
Enderlein. Subsequently Hendel included six old and two additional new species
in the genus. Whether these are all distinct species is a matter of considerable
doubt as the general features of several of them are extremely similar. A
comparison of the figures of the wings of the genotype, platyptera Hendel, and
malaita Curran shows a remarkable resemblance in the shape and the markings,
and examination of a series of specimens may reveal whether they are valid species
or not. Each of the three species was described from a single female example.

The genus is distinguished from its allies by the broad wing, with the peculiar
type of markings, and the two bristles at the apex of the subcostal vein.

There are two specimens in my present material, one of them a female very
like malaita Curran, the other a male and quite distinct from that species in wing
markings.

PLATENSINA PARVIPUNCTA, 0D. SD.

og. Type specimen greasy, but apparently pale yellowish-brown or ferruginous in
general colour, the mesonotum darker except on lateral margins, the abdomen glossy-
black, yellowish at base; legs entirely brownish-yellow; wings dark brown, with the
following hyaline marks: the cell basad of the humeral cross-vein, extreme base
and a mark before middle of the costal cell, a narrow irregular streak from below
the latter to apex of the anal cell, a transverse mark from the costa to second vein
just beyond apex of first vein, two small triangles on hind margin, the basal one
close to the tip of anal vein, and a narrow apical margin from just before apex of
third to beyond apex of fourth vein. There is in the type specimen a slight short
narrow hyaline mark along the edge of the second posterior cell just above the
apex of the fifth vein.

Head in profile subquadrate, slightly higher behind, the frons a little longer
than wide, three pairs of incurved infraorbital and two pairs of reclinate supra-
orbital bristles, the upper one of the latter white and much shorter than the lower,
inner verticals as usual much the longest on head, luteous, postverticals short,
parallel and, like the postocular cilia, white, ocellars moderately long, brown. Face
vertical, not visible in profile except at epistome, with slight antennal foveae
separated by a raised line. Antennae a little more than half the length of face,
third segment not twice as long as wide, rounded at apex, downy; arista very
short haired; eye higher than long; gena about half as high as width of third
antennal segment. Proboscis short and thick; palpi moderately wide.

Thoracic bristles, yellowish, as follows: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals, 1 pair of
dorsocentrals in line with the supra-alars, 1 pair of prescutellar acrostichals,
1 presutural, 2 mesopleurals, 1 pteropleural, 1 sternopleural, 2 long basal and
2 short apical scutellars. There are about four quite strong erect setulae or
bristles in a series on the propleura.

Legs slender, fore femur with a few rather long bristles on the postero-
ventral surface, mid tibia with one long apical ventral spur.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 459

Wing as in Plate xi, figure 21. The usual two bristles at the apex of the
subcostal vein, first vein setulose to apex, third with a few microscopic hairs at
base above and below.

Abdomen narrowly ovate, fifth tergite longer than fourth, with a few bristles
apically on sides. Hypopygium small.

Length, 5 mm.

Type, Cairns, N. Queensland (Illingworth).

PLATENSINA DUBIA, Nn. Sp.

©. Very similar to malaita Curran, the bristling of the frons as in parvipuncta;
there is a small dark-brown mark between each antenna and eye not mentioned by
Curran in his description, and the third antennal segment is quite broadly rounded
at apex. Thorax brownish-yellow, mesonotum black except on lateral margins and
densely grey-dusted. Bristles as in parvipuncta, the apical scutellars about half as
long as the basal pair. Legs as in parvipuncta. Wing: Costal cell with a hyaline
spot before middle and another near apex as in malaita, but the stigma has a much
narrower hyaline mark at base than in that species, and the hyaline spot near the
base of the first posterior cell is much smaller than in malaita or sumobanda.
Abdomen glossy-black, without grey-dusting on any part of the dorsum, genital
cone as long as the three preceding tergites combined.

Length, 5 mm.

Type, Gordonvale, N. Queensland, in scrub (Illingworth).

One wing of the type-specimen is much damaged.

I take this opportunity to draw attention to the similarity between the genera
Platensina and Protephritis Shiraki. The author of the latter separated them in
his key by a very slight difference in the position of the dorsocentral bristles.
This difference is largely imaginary, and in fact it is my opinion that the character
has been to some extent overemphasized in the classification of the family. In any
event, both the genera, so far as my material shows, would fall in the same section
of Shiraki’s key. A very careful examination of the genotype of Protephritis
(Tephritis sauteri Enderlein) reveals that the only character that might be utilized
for its separation from typical Platensina is the narrower wing with, peculiarly
enough, its wider anal region. The first vein is setulose at apex below, but it is so
in dubia also, though not in parvipuncta, and though there are some setulae on the
third vein below almost to the inner cross-vein there are traces of similar setulae
on the third vein in dubia both above and below though the dark colour of the
vein and membrane as well as the setulae makes them difficult to see. It requires
ho vivid imagination to discern, from the similarity of the wing markings, that
both these generic concepts have had a common origin, and one may be pardoned
for accepting them as but subgenera. Of course the same attitude may be adopted
with regard to several other concepts in the same subfamily, many of them being
founded upon quite nebulous characters.

SPHENELLA Robineau-Desvoidy.

Mém. présentés Ac. Roy. Sci. Inst. France, ii, 1830, 773, Essai Myodaires.

This genus contains three palaearctic species, and one is recorded from
Formosa. Three species occur in Africa, one of them the genotype, which I have
also from Australia.

SPHENELLA MARQGINATA (Fallen).

Ortalides Sueciae (1) 1820, 7 (Tephritis).—Trypeta heterura Thomson, Eug.
Resa, ii, Zool, i. Insecta, 1868, 584.

460 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. \XI,

A small dark species with dense grey-dusting on the thorax and abdomen, the
legs tawny-yellow, the wings (PI. xi, fig. 22) hyaline, with some marks along costal
margin up to the apex of the stigma brownish, the stigma darkest, a rather narrow
fascia from the costa to the hind margin enclosing both the cross-veins, and an
irregular marginal band from before apex of second vein round the wing margin
to beyond apex of fourth vein, black: there are also two faint dark spots on the
fifth vein about middle of the discal cell and one about middle of the anal vein
(Fig. N). The arista is almost bare, the third antennal segment reaches almost to
the slightly produced epistome and is slightly angulate at apex above, the frons
has two pairs of incurved infraorbitals and two pairs of reclinate supraorbitals,
the uppermost one of the latter short and pale yellow, the ocellars are long and
dark, the inner verticals are the longest bristles on the head and are dark while
the much shorter outer verticals, the parallel postverticals, and the postocular cilia
are yellowish-white. The dorsocentral bristles are almost in transverse line with
the supra-alar bristles, the presutural is present, as are also one mesopleural and
one sternopleural; the pteropleura has one or two long stiff outstanding setulae:
scutellum more or less yellowish and with four subequal black bristles. The cross-
veins of the wing are rather closely placed, separated by about the length of the
inner one.

Length, 3-4 mm.

Tallong and Scone, N.S.W.; Canberra, A.C.T. (F. H. Taylor). This Huropean
species occurs also in Africa and the Canary Islands. I have seen one specimen
that is evidently this species from Tonga.

The larvae feed on various species of Senecio, Centaurea, and Picris.

_ | believe this is Urophora ruficeps Mcq., Dipt. Exot., Suppl. 4, 1850, p. 288.

CAMAROMYIA Hendel.
Wien. Ent. Zeitg., xxxiii, 1914, 95—Malloch, Dipt. Patag. and S. Chile, Pt. vi,
fase. 4, 1933, 273.
This genus was erected for the reception of a widely distributed species, Dullans
Wiedemann, but several additional species from Africa and South America have
since been placed in it.

CAMAROMYIA BULLANS (Wiedemann).

Trypeta bullans Wiedemann, Aussereur. Zweifl. Ins., ii, 1830, 506—Tephritis
tenera Loew, Zeitschr. ges. Naturw., 1869, 8.—Acinia rufa Macquart, Dipt. Exot.,
ii, Pt. 3, 1843, 228.—Tephritis meleagris Schiner, Reise Novara, Zool. ii, i abt.,
B. Diptera, 1868, 272—Tephritis adspersa Coquillett, Invert. Pac., p. 30 (1904).—
Camaromyia bullans Hendel, Wien. Ent. Zeit., xxxiii, 1914, 95; Abh. Ber. K. Zool.
Mus. Dresden, xiv, 1914, 63.—Tephritis wolffi Cresson, Ent. News, xlii, 1931, 5.

In this species the scutellum has the apical pair of bristles about half as long
as the basal pair, the antennae of the male are dark brown to fuscous in colour,
with the apex of the second segment and base of the third yellow, and in the female
they are entirely yellow, with the aristae in both sexes thickened to near the
middle, yellow at extreme base, white to near middle, the apical portion dark
brown. The genital cone in the female is glossy-black, cylindrical, and tapered
to apex. Rarely in teneral specimens or in those that have been damaged this
cone may be flattened through pressure, so that care should be exercised to deter-
mine on the basis of other characters where such specimens fall in the generic
key. The wing is marked as shown in Plate xi, figure 23.

Illawarra and Botany Bay, N.S.W.; Brisbane, Queensland. The distribution
in the New World extends from the southern United States to Patagonia, and in

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 461

the Old World throughout most of the Palaearctic Region except Japan, and in
Australia. Possibly it may yet be found in intermediate points in the latter.

TEPHRITIS Latreille.

Nouv. Dict. Hist. Nat., xxiv (Tab.), 1804, 196.

This genus, as accepted here, has the wings brown, with many small hyaline
marks or spots indiscriminately arranged in the cells on almost the entire field,
the frons with but two pairs of infraorbital bristles, and the proboscis quite thick
and short.

There is but one species before me from this region which I re-describe below.*

TEPHRITIS PELIA Schiner.

Reise Novara, Zool., ii, i abt., B. Diptera, 1868, 271.

3, 2. Very similar to plebeia Malloch from New Zealand, with two hyaline dots
in the dark-brown stigma, and a hyaline spot at the apex of the first posterior cell
of the wing, but the genae are much narrower, not more than one-sixth of the
eye-height as against one-third in plebeia, there is no small hyaline spot in the dark
patch in the marginal cell below the stigma, there is a yellowish patch on each
side of the composite basal segment of the abdomen in the male that is not present
in plebeia, and the genital cone of the female is bright orange or fulvous-yellow
with a black tip, not entirely glossy-black.

Head testaceous-yellow, with greyish-white dust, most evident on the ocellar
triangle, the frontal orbits and parafacials, occiput broadly black centrally, with
grey dust; antennae, aristae and palpi yellow, the palpi brownish apically; infra-
orbital, anterior supraorbital, ocellar, and inner vertical bristles black, all others
and the short hairs yellowish-white. Gena about one-sixth as high as eye, eye
slightly oblique, higher than long; head in front about three-fourths as high as at
occiput; epistome projecting. Frons about 1:25 times as long as wide, parallel-
sided, and more than one-third of the head-width, all black bristles long and strong.
Third antennal segment about 1:5 times as long as wide, angulate at upper apex;
avista pubescent; palpi rather long and strap-like.

Thorax black, densely brownish-grey-dusted on dorsum and upper part of
pleura, grey-dusted below, the humeri, posterior notopleural callosities, and
scutellum more or less yellowish, a dark brown spot at insertion of each of the
acrostichal and basal scutellar bristles, all the bristles except the pteropleural and
scapulars black. SBristling complete, the apical pair of scutellars about half as
long as the basal pair. Surface hairs pale yellow and decumbent. -

Legs tawny-yellow. Fore tarsi longer than their tibiae, mid and hind pairs
shorter; fore femur with the posteroventral series of bristles complete, hind pair
with no anteroventral bristles.

Wings greyish-hyaline, with dark-brown markings (Pl. xi, fig. 24), the most
distinctive being the bipunctate stigma, and the peculiar hyaline spot at the
apices of the submarginal and first posterior cells. First vein setulose from base
of node below the humeral cross-vein to apex and below on apical third, third vein
with a few setulae at base above and sparsely setulose between base and inner
cross-vein below. MHalteres yellow.

Abdomen coloured as thorax, densely dark-grey-dusted, with faint traces of a
pair of brown discal spots on tergites 3 to 5 inclusive, sides of composite basal
tergite of male usually yellowish, hypopygium of that sex fulvous-yellow, the

*T have been unable to find «a species agreeing with the description of Tephritis
11-guttata Thomson.

.
462 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

genital cone of the female flattened, glossy-orange or fulvous-yellow, with black
apex, broadest above. Hairs yellowish-white, bristles at apex of fifth tergite in
male and sixth in female quite strong and black.

Length, 3-5-4 mm.

I am accepting as this species, which was originally described from Sydney, a
number of specimens from Illawarra and Botany Bay (Peterson); Tallong,
N. S. Wales; Canberra, A.C.T. (Taylor). This may be the species recorded by
Macquart as leontodontis De Geer.

TRYPANEA Schrank.

Briefe Donaumoor, 1795, 147.—Urellia Robineau-Desvoidy, Mém. présentés Ac.
Roy. Sci. Inst. France, ii, 1830, 775, Essai Myodaires.

This generic concept is a difficult one to maintain in cases where many species
are available, as I have shown in my paper on the Patagonian Trypetidae. I am,
however, segregating the single species now before me from Australia in Trypanea
as an index to its closest affinities in the Old World fauna. The stellate dark apical
wing-mark is quite characteristic in this species and is distinctive enough to
warrant this procedure tentatively, though there is little in the line of structural
features to justify the perpetuation of the segregation.

TRYPANEA GLAUCA (Thomson).

Hugen. Resa, ii, Zool. i. Insecta, 1868, 581 (Trypeta).

6. Very similar in wing markings to neodaphne var. gamma Malloch from
Patagonia, differing in the three incomplete branches of the brown mark over the
first and second posterior cells of the wing (PI. xi, fig. 25).*

Head testaceous-yellow, with pale-grey dust, centre of occiput broadly black;
antennae, aristae, palpi, and proboscis yellow, second antennal segment with a
small dark mark above. Head a little wider than thorax, in profile with the face
almost vertical, epistome slightly protruded and about two-thirds as high as at
occiput; eye oblique, at middle about two-thirds as high as its extreme length;
gena fully half as high as width of third antennal segment, the latter about 1:5
times as long as wide, its upper apex angulate; aristae subnude. Frons fiat,
about 1-25 times as long as wide, and almost parallel-sided, with three pairs of short
fine yellowish infraorbitals, the other bristles rubbed off, but scars of four verticals
and one pair of supraorbitals distinct.

Thorax black, densely whitish-grey-dusted, humeri and a spot below wing base
yellowish. Most of the bristles rubbed off, but those remaining and the short
hairs are yellow. Bristles as follows: 1 humeral, 2 notopleurals, 1 presutural,
1 supra-alar, 1 pair of dorsocentrals close to the suture, 1 pair of acrostichals,
2 postalars, 1 mesopleural, 1 sternopleural, 1 pteropleural, and a pair of scutellars
near base. :

Legs yellow. Fore tarsus shorter than its tibia, basal segment rather stout,
in dorsal view about four times as long as wide, all the segments except fifth with
a few long pale hairs on anterior edge, longest on basal segment; mid and hind
tarsi slender, longer than their tibiae, basal segment much more than four times
as long as wide.

Wing milky, veins yellow, dark brown in the dark markings. First vein
setulose from base of node to apex above and on apical half below, third vein with
a few setulae at base above and below. Halteres yellow.

“The tiny dots on the photograph are dirt, the three irregular patches on the fifth
vein are pieces of wing membrane.—F.H.T.

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 463

Abdomen coloured as thorax, immaculate, with yellow bristles and hairs.
Tergites subequal in length, with some lateral bristles on fifth.

Length, 3 mm.

Waterfall, N.S.W. (H. Peterson). This and other specimens from the same
collector sent me by the late C. F. Baker in general sweepings. Type locality,
Sydney. ;

ParoxyNna Hendel.
Flieg. Palear. Reg., in Lindner, xlix, Trypetidae, 1927, 146.
There are a large number of Old World species of this genus, but there is only
one known to me from the Australian region.

PAROXYNA SORORCULA (Wiedemann).

Aussereur. Zweifl. Ins., ii, 1830, 509 (Trypeta).

A very small species characterized by the long head, slender geniculated
proboscis, and slender hyaline wings with numerous small fuscous marks
(Pl. xi, fig. 26).

It is recorded from many tropical and subtropical countries in the Eastern and
Western Hemispheres, extending in the latter into the Patagonian region, though
in the Old World confined to the warmer section. It has been described under
several specific names in three genera.

I have four specimens from Tambourine Mt., Queensland (C. Deane).

Recorded from Fiji by Bezzi, and possibly occurs rather generally throughout
this region, though its small size may be responsible for its being overlooked by
most collectors.

Shiraki, in dealing with the Formosan Trypetidae, retained the species in the
genus Hnsina Robineau-Desvoidy despite Hendel’s having placed it in Paroxyna.

Subfamily SCHISTOPTERINAE.

This subfamily, as I accept it, contains five genera, only one of them occurring
in the region now under consideration, the others being African.

The distinguishing character consists of a deep cleft in the costal margin
of the wing at the apex of the subcostal vein, the apex of the section of the costa in
front of the cleft sharply angulate and with a pair of bristles that are usually quite
strong and conspicuous.

Bezzi distinguished two subfamilies in the group, segregating Schistopterinae
from Rhabdochaetinae by the fact that in the former there are no strong bristles
on the interfrontalia in front of the ocelli, while in the other group, to which the
sole representative we have to consider belongs, there are at least two strong erect
bristles in front of the ocelli, usually convergent and slightly forwardly directed
at their apices.

This same combination of cleft costa and interfrontal bristles is met with in
some other families, notably in the Milichiidae.

RHABDOCHAETA de Meijere.
Bijd. Dierk., 17-18 Afl., 1904, 109.
There are seven described species of this genus known to me, but only one is
from this region.

RHABDOCHAETA CROCKERI Curran.
Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., xxii, No. 1, 1936, 28.
Described from the Solomon Islands and not known from elsewhere, though it
may be expected to occur on adjacent island groups.

464 DIPTERA OF THE TERRITORY OF NEW GUINEA. XI,

Unidentified Species from New Guined.

Ptilona bischofi Kertész, Term. Fuzet.. xxiv, 1901, 427.—Bezzi says this is not a
Ptilona.

Sophira bistriga Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. London, iv, 1860, 160—See under
Colobostrella ruficauda Hendel, in text.

Trypeta brevivitta Walker, op. cit., viii, 1865, 124.—Genus doubtful.

Ptilona lateralis Kertész, Term. Fuzet., xxiv, 1901, 428.—A Rioza according to Bezzi.

Trypeta indistincta de Meijere, Nov. Guin.. ix, Zool. livr. iii, 1913, 364—Genus ?.

Acanthoneura sexguttata de Meijere, Nov. Guin., ix, Zool. livy. iii, 1913, 364.

Acanthoneura debeauforti de Meijere, op. cit., v, 1906, 94 (Riora).

Acanthoneura insignis de Meijere, op. cit., ix, Zool. livy. iii, 1913, 366——See under
Pseudacanthoneura septemnotata, n. sp. in text.

Riora (?) nivistriga Walker, Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., v, 1861, 246
(Helomyza).

Themaroides (?) optatura Walker, op. cit., viii, 1865, 116 (Helomyza)—Czerny has
said this is the female of quadrifera Walker.

“Helomyza”’ ortalioides Walker, op. cit., viii, 1865, 116—A Trypetid.

Dacus speculifera Walker, op. cit., viii, 1865, 122—A Callistomyia ? according to
Bezzi.

Ptilona variabilis Kertész, Term. Fuzet., xxiv, 1901, 426.—Not a Ptilona according
to Bezzi.

Dacus biarcuatus Walker, Jour. Proc. Linn. Soc. London, viii, 1865, 122.—Allied
to Callistomyia according to Bezzi.

Addendum, by F. H. Taylor.

It has been suggested to me that a few remarks on the method adopted to
make the photographs of the wings would be of service.

First of all the wing is taken off the fly with a sharp pointed pair of forceps
and placed in absolute alcohol. It is then mounted direct into Euparal and
weighted down with a small bottle of mercury, a half-dram vial serves the purpose,
until the Euparal has set.

Any good type of projection lamp will serve as the illuminant for the camera.
The lens should be of 3:5 cm. focal length; no eye-piece is used. The plate or cut
film is “Process”. It is a great mistake to use any other type of plate or film as
it is essential to have complete control over the negative during development. The
developer used is the “‘Kodak” process formula, Hydroquinone-Caustie Potash. The
negative must not be overdeveloped.

Wings showing a lot of “pattern” are comparatively easy to photograph,
requiring from two to five seconds’ exposure at f. 6:3. Wings which have very
little or no ‘‘pattern” should have not more than one second exposure at the above
lens stop, should be slightly underdeveloped and then intensified. The mercury-
ammonia intensifier serves the purpose.

When the negatives are dry the background must be completely blocked out
with “Opaque’’, using a fine sable-hair brush to go round the wing. A hand lens
should be used to see that the “Opaque” does not encroach on the wing.

Any slow gaslight paper with a glossy surface will give excellent prints from
negatives produced by the above means.

There is no necessity to retouch the wings in any way, as the veins stand out
quite well.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939. PLATE XI.

New Guinea Trypetidae.

4
1%
- te
x
“ae x
‘
. : ~
i .
: z “i
' =
: i
ey"
=
# 1
r
f
«| oT
; fee >
ft ‘an
‘
.
: ct
~
; °
a
»

BY J. R. MALLOCH. 465

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI.
Fig. 1.—Dacus papuaensis, n. sp. Wing, type. x 6:5.
Fig. 2.—Dacus albolateralis, n. sp. Wing, type. x 6-5.
Fig. 3.—Pseudosophira bakeri, n. sp. Wing, type. 5.
Fig. 4.—Polyara insolita Walker. Wing. xX 5d.
Fig. 5.—Themarohystria flaviceps, n. sp. Wing, paratype. x 5.
Fig. 6.—Themarohystrix suttoni, n. sp. Wing, paratype. xX 6:5.
Fig. 7.—Clusiosoma biseriata, n. sp. Wing, paratype. x 6:5.
Fig. 8.—Clusiosoma puncticeps, n. sp. Wing, type. xX 6:5.
Fig. 9.—Acanthonewra nigriventris, n. sp. Wing, type. x 5.
Fig. 10—Neothemara formosipennis Walker. Wing. x 5.
Fig. 11.—Pseudacanthoneura septemnotata, n. sp. Wing, type. x 5.
Fig. 12.—Diarrhegmoides hastata, n. sp. Wing, allotype. x 6d.
Fig. 13.—Hexacinia multipunctata, n. sp. Wing, paratype. x 6:5.
Fig. 14.—Pseudina buloloae, n. sp. Wing, type. x 6:5.
Fig. 15.—Anomoea nigrithorax, n. sp. Wing, type. x 6:5.
Fig. 16.—Pseudospheniscus taylori, n. sp. Wing, type. x 6:5.
Fig. 17.—Ceratitella loranthi (Froggatt). Wing. x 6:5.
Fig. 18.—Tephrella australis, n. sp. Wing, type. x 6:5.
Fig. 19.—Spathulina acrolewca (Schiner). Wing. x 6:5.
Fig. 20.—Chrysotrypanea trifasciata, n. sp. Wing, type. x 6:5.
Fig. 21.—Platensina parvipwicta, n. sp. Wing, type. x 6:5.
Fig. 22.—Sphenella marginata Fallen. Wing. x 6:5.
Fig. 23.—Camaromyia bullans Wied. Wing. x 6°5.
Fig. 24.—Tephritis pelia Schiner. Wing. x 6:5.
Fig. 25.—Trypanea glauca Thoms. Wing. x 6:5.
Fig. 26.—Paroxyna sovorcula Wied. Wing. x 6:5.

Note re Ceratitella (pp. 442, 452 supra), added 6 September, 1939.—The
Formosan genus Paratrirhithrum Shiraki (Mem. Fac. Sci. and Agric., Taihoku
Imp. Univ., Formosa, viii, 1938, Hnt. No. 2, 137) differs in having the third antennal
segment tapered to the narrowly rounded apex, the apex of the subcostal vein
farther from the apex of the first and the latter running into the costal vein at a
much more acute angle, not almost rectangularly bent forward to join that vein,
while the third vein is much more arched on its apical portion, the apex being
distinctly more deflected. The scutellum is also entirely black, though this is
hardly a generic character.

LL

466

THE ASSOCIATION BETWEEN THE LARVA DESCRIBED AS TROMBICULA
HIRSTI VAR. BULOLOENSIS GUNTHER 1939, AND TROMBICULA MINOR
BERLESE 1904. (ACARINA: TROMBIDIIDAE.)

By Cart E. M. GuntHer, M.B., B.S., D.T.M. (Sydney), Field Medical Officer,
Bulolo Gold Dredging Limited, Bulolo, Territory of New Guinea.

(Three Text-figures. )

[Read 27th September, 1939.]

Previous work on Trombidiid Nymphs and Adults.

Apart from Hirst’s paper on the nymphal form of the “Harvest bug” (1926),
I have not had access to the original articles on the subject, but am indebted to a
paper by Warburton (1928) for the following information.

Brandis first, in 1897, bred nymphs from the European Harvest Bug, Leptus
autumnalis Shaw, in sterile earth; these were of the general Trombicula form,
and suggested 7. holosericeum.

Then, in 1906, Miyajima obtained nymphs of Microtrombidium akamushi; and,
in 1916, he and Okumara bred adults and established this larva as belonging to
the genus Trombicula.

Ewing is mentioned as stating that Leptus irritans has been bred to the adult,
and that the latter belongs to the genus Jrombicula also.

Meanwhile Bruyant obtained one nymph from Leptus autumnalis in 1910, but
there is some doubt about its identification with the adult Microtrombidium
pusillum Hermann, to which it was at first assigned.

Finally, in 1925, Hirst bred out a single female nymph from the harvest bug,
and definitely established it as belonging to the genus Jrombicula.

Apart from these, no other larval species has so far been linked up with its
corresponding adult, although both larvae and adults, separately, have been
thoroughly worked out.

TROMBICULA MINOR Berlese.

Redia, ii, fase. 2, 1904 (1905), 155.—T. hirsti var. morobensis Gunther 19388,
202, nom. nud.—T.. hirsti var. buloloensis Gunther 1939, 78. :

This larva occurs in great numbers in the Morobe District on the mainland
of New Guinea. Of approximately 3,000 larval mites taken in four years, it
numbered about 2,700; the remainder were distributed over 13 other species. It
has been found on nine hosts: Man, Bush pig (Sus papuwensis), Bandicoot
(Echymipera cockerelli), Bush turkey (Talegallus jobiensis), Bush fowl
(Megapodius duperreyi), Ground pigeon (Gallicolumba jobiensis), Cassowary
(Casuarius casuarius), Rail (Amaurornis moluccanus nigrifrons), and Rail
(Porphyrio melanotus).

The larva is shown in Figure 1, which is from my detailed description of the
species (1939). The probable association of this larva with endemic typhus in New
Guinea has been discussed (1938).

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 467

While investigating this larva, I was so fortunate as to breed out 23 nymphs,
and to obtain four specimens in intermediate stages. It was, however, Mr. H.
Womersley who, after checking my material, pointed out that, as far as can be
determined, these nymphs are identical with Trombicula minor Berlese 1904, which
I had not recognized. The credit, therefore, belongs to him for this discovery.

Preparation of breeding jars.—A wide-mouthed clear-glass jar with a ground-
glass stopper, of 4 ounces capacity, was used. Dry soil was finely crumbled and
placed in the jar to a depth of one-quarter of an inch. The open jar and its stopper
were then sterilized in an autoclave. When cool, sterile water was added drop by
drop until, by stirring with a glass rod, the soil was evenly moistened, care being
taken not to add enough water to cause caking of the soil or the formation of mud.
The stopper was smeared with a little sterile soft paraffin.

GS

Figs. 1-3. Trombicula minor.
Fig. 1.—Composite dorsal and ventral diagram, 7’. minor, larva.
Fig. 2.—T. minor, nymph. a, Dorsal view of palp. 6b, Dorsal view of chelicera and
cheliceral sheath. c, Lateral view of chelicera.
Fig. 3—ZT. minor, nymph. a, Crista. b, First tarsus.

Obtaining and checking larvae.—A freshly-shot bush fowl or other host was
examined with a hand-lens and all sections of skin bearing large larvae were cut
out and placed in white china pots with screw-on lids. These were allowed to
stand all night; by morning most of the larvae had detached themselves. The
largest were placed one at a time in a hollow-ground slide, covered with a cover-
slip, and examined with the low power. Once one is accustomed to the salient
characteristics of the species, only a few seconds are needed to identify each larva
and to determine whether it is sufficiently engorged to be worth trying out.

When checked they were dropped into the jar. By selecting a number of very
large larvae there is some chance of obtaining a few which are sufficiently engorged
to go on to the nymphal stage without seeking a fresh host for a further feed.
Some of the largest were often found hidden beneath the sections of skin; this I
believe to be an indication that they are ready to bury themselves and prepare for
metamorphosis.

Too large a number in one jar makes subsequent checking too complicated.
It was finally found that from 10 to 15 was a convenient number.

Only vigorous and active larvae were selected. It was found too tedious
inducing them to climb onto a needle-point and to hold on while being transferred
from the pots; a convenient method is to lay the pot on its side, chase a larva

468 TROMBICULA HIRSTI VAR. BULOLOENSIS AND T. MINOR,

out with a needle, and induce it to climb on to a rectangular coverslip held in its
path.

When the desired number had been tallied into the jar, the stopper was
inserted and the jar placed on a window-ledge where it would get as much direct
sunlight as possible. It was found that in jars kept in the shade, moulds covered
the soil in a few days. The heat of the sun, however, causes water from the soil
to condense on the shady side of the jar; if too little water has been added
originally, the soil becomes dry and caked, and more sterile water has to be
dropped in.

Behaviour of larvae.—Some of the larvae bury themselves in the soil imme-
diately; others climb the sides of the jar, usually becoming imprisoned in the
drops of water on its sides. At first the plan of freeing these latter with a bent
wire and dropping them back on the soil was followed, but as they invariably set
out to climb up the sides again, it was decided that they were probably in search
of another host. It was thought simpler to remove all such larvae on the second
and subsequent days. All larvae so removed were checked again under the
microscope.

It was found that even after being held in a drop of water for several days
most larvae would begin to walk about within a few seconds of being placed on a
piece of filter-paper to dry. The longest period noted was 20 days, mostly spent
in water; 4 such larvae, when dried and examined, although unable to move about,
or even to turn themselves over, still made feeble movements with their legs.

Some of the earlier batches had in their jars slices of apple, banana, paw-paw,
liver, or steak, transfixed with a toothpick and placed upright. Moulds grew
rapidly and made it impossible to breed out any nymphs, but it was noted that
even newly-hatched larvae were not particularly attracted to any of these
substances, and none gave any appearance of feeding on them. The method was
abandoned.

Breeding-time——F rom four batches a total of 23, comprising 7 living nymphs
and 16 dead nymphs, was collected; the periods ranged from 17 to 20 days from
the time they were placed in the jars. From two batches transitional forms were
obtained. From nine batches there was no result.

Assuming that the larvae, when they were put into the jars, were so nearly
engorged as to make no difference, this fixes the time for emergence of the nymph
under these conditions at from 17 to 20 days. Most of the dead ones were found
on the 19th and 20th days, and most of the living ones on the 18th day, which
makes me inclined to fix the average time at from 17 to 18 days.

There is, of course, no means of telling whether this is the usual time under
natural conditions—it is possible that the temperature and humidity inside the
jar are higher than is usually found in nature, and that they may therefore have
forced earlier development. It is unlikely that these conditions could have retarded
development. Hirst’s nymph took 33 days to emerge, but it had its habitat in a
much colder climate, and its hatching-time would reasonably be expected to be
longer.

When they first emerge, the nymphs are extremely soft and fragile, and
easily break up with even the most careful handling. They harden after several
hours, but in these breeding-jars they apparently do not live long. Once dead,
they shrivel rapidly. For these reasons, most of the present specimens were of
no use for detailed study when mounted.

Transitional stage—In one jar which had too little moisture, the soil became
absolutely dry. On the 24th day, since no nymphs had emerged, the soil was gently

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 469

crumbled and searched. One apparently dead larva was found, but on examination
it proved to be an intact larval skin, colourless and transparent, the legs and palpi
empty, but containing within the body a pupa-like mass. This mass was orange
in colour; its posterior margin had the shape of the posterior pole of a nymph,
and bore typical setae; anteriorly there was no projection of any cephalothorax;
but ventrally, outlines suggestive of immature folded legs were quite distinctly
visible.

From another batch three living nymphs and three specimens in transitional
stages were obtained. One of the latter group was much further advanced than
the one described above, and one had partly cast its larval skin. These specimens
leave no doubt that the larva, when ready for metamorphosis, withdraws inside
its own skin and there goes through the nymphochrysalis stage.

The Nymphs.—Berlese’s description (1904) is from damaged specimens, and
is therefore incomplete. However, my specimens agree with every point in
Berlese’s description, except that the fore-tarsus is slightly longer and wider; but
the ratio of the length to the width of the fore-tarsus (2:5:1) as laid down by
Berlese is retained. Berlese’s description, however, makes no mention of the
number of genital suckers, so the specimens cannot be definitely stated to be
adults; that they were not bred out, but were taken running free, makes the
assumption that they are adults rather than nymphs possible. This, however,
does not affect the validity of the comparison between my specimens and his, and
his name should therefore be used.

Description of the Nymph (Figs. 2, 3).—Colour, bright orange-red. Body oval,
widest at level of coxa iii, without any marked constrictions; covered with closely-
set fine setae bearing long fine branches on all sides. Total length, including
chelicerae, 6804; abdomen, length 500u, width 3254. Coxae i and ii set close together
at front of body, projecting partly beyond the margin; coxa iii two-fifths of the
distance back, and coxa iv half-way back, well in from the margin. Cephalothorax
projecting boldly forward. Chelicerae stout, long, sharply curved. No cheliceral
teeth. Cheliceral sheaths reaching almost half-way along the chelicerae; bulbous in
the middle third, which bears about five fine setae with a few branches; two fine
nude setae towards the apex. Palpi long, curved, widest at the distal part of segment
ii. A few fine setae with a few fine short branches on ii; on iii and iv, more similar
setae. Palpal claw single, long, stout, curved,and sharp. Two accessory bristles near
its base. Appendiculum long, rounded, bearing about 6 to 8 fine setae with fine
branches. Crista of typical shane; as in diagram; bearing a seta 28u long, with
fine branches on all sides, at the centre of each lateral margin. Greatest width
50u. Pseudostigmata at the anterolateral angles, 37-5u apart. Pseudostigmatic
organs filiform, 854 long, with 4 or 5 short widely-spaced branches on the distal
fourth. Eyes single, close to the crista, just lateral and posterior to the pseudo-
stigmata. Legs each with seven segments, covered with closely-set branched
setae. Two curved claws on each tarsus. Tarsus i typically long and expanded.
Lengths, excluding coxae, as follows: i, 4164; ii, 223u4; iii, 250u; iv, 292u.
Genital opening with its anterior end opposite the posterior ends of coxa iv.
Furnished with two pairs of large, roughly circular suckers. Setae: the general
body-setae almost straight, with many relatively long, fine branches on all sides.
On the cephalothorax the setae are of similar type, but are shorter, finer, and
slightly curved. On the palpi and legs the setae are thicker, very slightly curved,
and bear a few branches along the convex side only.

470 TROMBICULA HIRSTI VAR. BULOLOENSIS AND T. MINOR.

Acknowledgements.

My thanks are due to Mr. H. Womersley, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., of the South
Australian Museum, not only for his discovery mentioned above, but also for his
kindness in obtaining copies of references for me, and in checking this paper.

References.

BERLESE, A., 1904.—Redia. ii, fase. 2 (1905), 155.

GUNTHER, C. E. M., 1938.—The Probable Vector of Endemic Typhus in New Guinea.
Med. Journ. Aust., 6 August, 202.

, 1939.—Trombidiid Larvae in New Guinea. Proc. LINN. Soc. N. S. WALES,

Ixiv, 1939, 73.

Hirst, S., 1926.—On the Nymphal Form of the ‘Harvest Bug’ Trombicula (Neotrom-
bicula) autumnalis. Annals App. Biology, xiii, 140-143.

WARBURTON, C., 1928.—The Harvest Bug: An Account of the Present State of Our
Knowledge of the Larval Trombidiid Mites Attacking Man. Parasitology, xx,
228-236.

471

OBSERVATIONS ON THE LIFE HISTORY OF NHOSCHONGASTIA
KALLIPYGOS GUNTHER 19389.
(ACARINA: TROMBIDIIDAE.)

By Cart EH. M. Gunruer, M.B., B.S., D.T.M. (Sydney), Field Medical Officer,
Bulolo Gold Dredging Limited, Bulolo, Territory of New Guinea.

(Two Text-figures. )

[Read 27th September, 1939. ]

NEOSCHONGASTIA BIPYGALIS, Nom. nov.

N. kallipygos Gunther, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wass, lxiv, 1939, 83.

Owing to the regrettable use of the specific name kallipygos by Derrick, Smith,
Brown and Freeman (1939), before the species was described, a change of name
becomes necessary.

Life History.—As far as is known the life history of the trombidiid mites is as
follows:

According to Patton and Evans (1929) it is likely that the eggs are laid
singly in the ground.

The larvae are mostly parasitic on birds and mammals—the genus Hannemania
is confined to frogs. When ready for metamorphosis the larvae bury themselves in
the ground (this has been observed for Trombicula akamushi, Leptus autumnalis,
and Trombicula minor).

The nymph is reported to be parasitic on other arthropods, although there is
a possibility that it is a vegetable feeder.

The adult is supposed to live in decaying vegetable matter on the forest floor,
or in the sand and silt left by floods, and by assumption (Hirst, 1926), in the nests
of field mice.

Nowhere is there any mention of the adult or nymph being parasitic on either
birds or mammals, nor is there any record of ova being found cemented to fur
or feathers in the manner of louse ova.

The larvae of Neoschongastia bipygalis occur in New Guinea as parasites on
the following hosts: The brown bush rat (Rattus ringens), Brown’s rat (Rattus
browni), Monckton’s melomys (Melomys moncktoni), Stalker’s melomys (Melomys
stalkeri), the rufous melomys (Melomys ruber), an arboreal ‘‘mouse” (Melomys
sp.), Bandicoot (Echymipera cockerelli), and Bandicoot (Peroryctes raffrayanda).

On the first five of these it can be found in large numbers embedded around
the mammae, or in the penis, and on the bare parts of the hind legs; specimens
have also been taken running free in the fur. From the other three hosts only a
few specimens have been taken. It seems likely that the rats are the principal
hosts, the others being only casual hosts.

On each of the five principal hosts are to be found many ova cemented to the
abdominal hairs. Some are undifferentiated, but in those in late stages of develop-
ment the details of the contained larvae can clearly be seen through the shell.

472 LIFE HISTORY OF NEOSCHONGASTIA KALLIPYGOS,

They show the characteristic scutum, first tarsi, dorsal setae, chelicerae, and
caudal plates of the normal larva, Neoschéngastia bipygalis (Fig. 1, which is the
illustration of this larva from my detailed description, and Fig. 2b).

There is no possibility that these ova may have been laid in the nests of the
rats, and have become entangled in their fur, for they are definitely cemented to
bundles of 5 to 10 hairs at their bases, and the larva lies always in the same
relative position in the ovum.

Fig. 1.—Larva of N. bipygalis.
Fig. 2.—a, Undifferentiated ovum; b, Ovum in late stage, showing contained larva.

The adult female must certainly be a parasite of these hosts for as long
as it takes her to deposit her eggs. Nothing further can be assumed positively,
but the possibilities are:

1. That the adults live in the nests of these rats, and that the ovigerous
females deposit their eggs while the rats are sleeping. If this be so, then
investigation of nests should result in specimens of adults being taken.

2. That the ovigerous female is a normal parasite of the rats—which would
demand that it resembles, for instance, one or other of the two suborders of lice—
and that it lives either by sucking or by biting. In this case, adults should be
found on the rats.

In view of the fact that nobody knows what the adults of the larval genus
Neoschongastia look like, the question is not likely to be settled until the hymph
at least can be bred, although the finding of an ovigerous female bearing an ovum
of the typical shape and size would be conclusive.

I have tried with ten larvae to breed nymphs, using the technique which
was successful with Trombicula minor, but the larvae neither buried themselves in
the soil nor made any considerable efforts to crawl around; they just died.

So far I have been unable to obtain any rats’ nests, nor have I found any
promising adults on rats. For the present, therefore, all that can be done is to
describe the ova, and point out that their presence on the abdominal hairs of
various rats indicates for this species a radical variation from what we know of
the normal life history of the Trombidiidae.

BY C. E. M. GUNTHER. 473

Ovum (Figures 2a, 0b).

Location: Found cemented to the abdominal hairs of various New Guinea
rats: Rattus ringens, R. browni, Melomys moncktoni, M. stalkeri, and M. rubex.
Colour a dirty yellow to light brown. Bell-shaped, cemented to the hairs at its
base. The walls consisting of a lining layer, a clear centre, and an outer
laminated layer. The apex produced into a small conical tubercle. The larva
lying with its head away from the base, its chelicerae projecting into the conical
tubercle. The undifferentiated ovum is larger, with thick walls. As the larva
matures the shell shrinks and becomes thinner, the latter mainly due to shedding
of the outer laminated layer. Average measurements: Height, early, 541u; mature,
380u. Width at base: early, 5084; mature, 370u. Width across equator: early,
412u; mature, 270u. Thickness of shell: early, 1414; mature, 70u.

Acknowledgement.
Mr. H. Womersley, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., has been so kind as to check this paper
for me.

References.

DERRICK, SMITH, BROWN and FREEMAN, 1939.—WMed. Journ. Aust., 28 January, 150.
GuNTHER, C. EH. M., 1939.—Trombidiid Larvae in New Guinea. Proc. LINN. Soc. N. S.
WALES, Ixiv, 73.

, 1939a.—The Association between the larva described as Trombicula hirsti var.
buloloensis Gunther 1939, and Trombicula minor Berlese 1904, Proc. LINN. Soc. N. S.
WALES, Ixiv.

Hirst, 8S., 1926.—On the Nymphal form of the ‘Harvest Bug’ Trombicula (Neotrombicula)
autumnalis. Ann. Applied Biology, xiii, 140.

Patron, W. S., and Evans, A. M., 1929.—Insects, Ticks, Mites and Venomous Animals
of Medical and Veterinary Importance, Part 1, Croydon.

fe
S(vis

MM

474

TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. VI-X.

By Consrerr Davis, M.Se., Lecturer in Biology, New England University College,
Armidale.*

(Highty-three Text-figures.)

[Read 27th September, 1939.]

PART VI. THREE NEW ASIATIC GENERA RELATED TO EMBIA LATREILLE.
(Thirty-two Text-figures. )

Genus METEMBIA, Nn. gen.

Genotype, Metembia ferox, n. sp.

Indian Embioptera closely related to Embia Latreille (s. str.), but with two
ventral bladders on the first segment of the hind tarsi.

6. Wings as in Embia, with R,,; clearly forked, M simple, and Cu two-
branched, except for individual anomalies; terminalia with tenth abdominal
tergite completely cleft, right hemitergite as in Hmbia, with a short posterior
process directed inwards and downwards, and an inner flap-like process separated
from the remainder of the hemitergite, except posteriorly, by a membraneous
area. Process of left hemitergite simple, acute. First segment of left cercus with
two internal lobes, armed with large sharp teeth.

METEMBIA FEROX, nN. Sp. Figs. 1-3.

dg. Length 6:-5-8:-5 mm.; head 1:2-15 mm. x 0:9-1:1 mm. Forewing 4-4-6-0
mm. x 1:0-1:2 mm.; hindwing 4:0-5-0 mm. x 1:0-1:2 mm. Antennae incomplete.
General colour very dark brown, eyes black, longitudinal bands on wings smoky-
brown. Head (Fig. 1) with eyes small, sides behind eyes scarcely converging,
smoothly rounded behind. Wings as in generic description, fork of R,,, subequal
to stem, all veins well-developed; cross-veins variable, fairly numerous. Hind
tarsi with two well-developed ventral bladders on first segment, one on second.
Terminalia (Figs. 2-3) with ninth abdominal tergite (9) very short, slightly
asymmetrical; tenth tergite completely cleft longitudinally, right hemitergite
(10R) produced downward and inward to a tapered, acute process (10RP,); inner
margin of 10R with an elongate flap-like process (10RP,), separated from 10R
by membrane except at posterior end. Left hemitergite (10L) produced back-
ward from its inner margin to a slender process (10LP), acutely tapered, curving
outward very slightly. Right cercus composed of two subequal subcylindrical
segments (RC,, RC,), arising from a well-developed pad-like cercus-basipodite
(RCB). First segment of left cercus (LC,) with inner margin produced to two
rounded lobes, the basal one more dorsal, the distal more ventral in position; both
lobes furnished with a number of sharp, prominent teeth. Second segment (LC,)
subcylindrical. Ninth sternite (H) produced backwards to a short blunt lobe
(HP), between which and the base of LC, is the left cercus-basipodite (LCB),
acute, curved outwards.

* Part of the work embodied in this paper was carried out when the writer held a
Linnean Macleay Fellowship in Zoology.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 475

9. Hight females, from the same locality as the males, are probably referable
to this species. They are not of taxonomic importance.

Locality —Nedungadu, Southern India, coll. P. S. Nathan, 13 males, and 8
females probably conspecific. Holotype male, 11 paratype males, and females,
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University; one paratype male in the
Macleay Museum, Sydney University.

METEMBIA IMMSI, n. sp. Figs. 4-8.

6. Length 14 mm.; head 2:0 mm. x 1:8 mm.; forewing 8 mm. x 1:8 mm;
hindwing, length and breadth as forewing. Antennae incomplete. General colour
mid-brown, head darker, eyes black. Wing-veins dark brown, bordered by pale
smoky-brown bands. Head (Fig. 4) as in the preceding species, but relatively
broader, the eyes relatively larger; left mandible with three acute teeth, right
with two, on inner face. Wings as in the preceding species, R,,; simple in the right
forewing of the type; cross-veins numerous, 2—4 from costa to R,, 4-6 from R, to
R»,3, 1-2 from R,,, to R,,;, 0-1 from R, to R;, 2-3 from sector to media, 0-1 from
media to Cu,.. R, dichotomizes terminally, one branch going to the costa, the
other to R.,;. Hind tarsi as in the preceding species. Terminalia (Figs. 5-8)

Figs. 1-3.—Metembia ferrox, n. sp., holotype ¢. 1. Head from above, x15. 2. Terminalia
from above, x 30. 3. Terminalia from below, x 30.

Figs. 4-8.—WMetembia immsi, n. sp., holotype ¢. 4. Head from above, showing outline
of mandibles, x 15. 5. Terminalia from above, x 15. 6. Process of left hemitergite from
above, x 30. 7. Left cercus from above, x 30. 8. Terminalia from below, x 15.

All original figures based on camera-lucida outlines, except figures 26-27, which
were prepared with constant reference to an ocular micrometer.

Conventional lettering for text-figures:

9, ninth abdominal tergite: 10L. 10R, left and right hemitergites of tenth abdominal
segment; 10LP, 10RP, processes of 10L, 10R; LC,, LC,, RC,, RC,, first and second
segments of left and right cerci; LCB, RCB, left and right cercus-basipodites; H, ninth
abdominal sternite; HP, process of H.

476 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. VI-X,

similar in general arrangement to the preceding species; 10RP, subobtuse; 10RP.,
more slender; 10LP broader, with a slight dorsal flange longitudinally (Fig. 6);
RCB smaller. First segment of left cercus (LC,) very characteristic; basal lobe
smaller, distal lobe strongly incurved, with stronger teeth; outer margin of LC,
convex. Left cercus-basipodite (LCB) subobtuse, directed backwards.

©. Unknown.

Locality.—Shimoga, Mysore, India: River Tunga, 1,865 ft., coll. P. S. Nathan,
1.vii—. A single male, well preserved, in the Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Harvard University (holotype). Named after Dr. A. D. Imms, to whom much of
our knowledge of Indian Embioptera is due.

Key to the Species of Metembia (¢).

1. First segment of left cercus incurved, external margin convex ........ immsi, n. sp.
First segment of left cercus not incurved, external margin concave ...... ferox, n. sp.

Genus PSEUDEMBIA, Nn. gen.

Genotype, Pseudembia paradoza, n. sp.

Indian Embioptera related to Metembia, but differentiated by the following
characters of the male terminalia: Left hemitergite with a simple posterior
process, acute or truncate, and with a dorsal lobe, shert and obtuse, arising from
the hemitergite laterodorsally on the right of the insertion of the posterior
process. First segment of left cercus with two internal lobes, the basal one small,
the distal one large, both covered wholly or partly with numerous small teeth.

PSEUDEMBIA PARADOXA, Qh. Sp. Figs. 9-14.

6. Length 11-12 mm.; head 1:8-2-2 mm. x 1-4-1555 mm.; forewing 9-0-9-5
mm. x 1:8-2:0 mm.; hindwing 8-0-8-5 mm. x 1:8-2-°0 mm. General colour (in
alcohol) mid- to pale ferruginous, eyes black, wing-veins golden-brown bordered by
pale-brown bands, with rather broad hyaline inter-venal lines. Head (Fig. 9)
broad, eyes rather large, sides behind eyes converging markedly. Antennae with
up to 22 segments, all except first very slender; total length up to 5 mm. Wings
as in HEmbia, the holotype with anomalies as follows: In both forewings, R, is
forked terminally; in the right hindwing there is an additional pigment-band, but
no vein, between Cu, and the cubital stem (Cu,). First segment of hind tarsi
with two large ventral bladders. Terminalia (Figs. 10-14) with right hemitergite
(10R) as in Hmbia, the posterior process (10RP,) short, acute, the inner process
(10RP.) elongate, slenderly tapered in front. Left hemitergite (10L) complex,
with a large laterodorsal lobe directed to the right, short and obtuse, and an
elongate posterior process {10LP), curving downwards terminally, irregularly
tapered, acute (Figs. 11, 12). Right cercus with two subcylindrical segments
(RC,, RC.), with a basal annular cercus-basipodite (RCB). First segment of left
cercus (LC,) complex, outer margin convex, inner margin with a small basal
lobe dorsally, furnished with small teeth; inner margin distally dilated inwards,
dilation with a large concavity for the accommodation of the basal lobe of the left
hemitergite; small teeth present on a blunt lobe dorsad to the concavity; ventral
parts of distal lobe smooth (Fig. 13). Hypandrium (H) produced to an obtuse
process (HP) to the right of the mid-line; left cercus-basipodite (LCB), between
HP and base of LC,, with a short blunt median process.

2. Unknown.

Locality—India: Namkum, Ranchi, Bihar, coll. W. B. R. Laidlaw, 1928
(holotype g and paratype ¢ in the British Museum).

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 477

PSEUDEMBIA TRUNCATA, Nl. Sp. Figs. 15-19.

do. Length 14 mm.; head 2:4 mm. x 2:0 mm.; forewing 12 mm. x 1:9 mm.;
hindwing 11 mm. x 1:9 mm. Antennae incomplete. General colour as in
Ps. paradoxa, darker, probably due to dry state of specimen. Head (Fig. 15),
wings, and hind tarsi (Fig. 16) as in Ps. paradoxa, wings without venational
anomalies. Terminalia (Fig. 17-19) resembling Ps. paradoxa, but with the distal
part of the inner margin of the first segment of the left cercus (LC,) smoothly
dilated, without any concavity, and evenly furnished with small teeth; basal lobe
of left hemitergite correspondingly smaller. Process of left hemitergite (10LP)
obliquely truncate terminally (Fig. 18).

%. Unknown.

Locality.—Shimoga, Mysore, R. Tunga, 1,865 ft.; coll. P. S. Nathan, 13.iv.—
(holotype g in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University).

Key to the Species of Pseudembia (c).

1. Distal part of inner face of first segment of left cercus with a large concavity; left

hemitergite with a large obtuse basal lobe .................... paradoxa, Nn. sp.
Distal part of inner face of first segment of left cercus smoothly dilated; basal lobe
Ofmlettivnennitergitensraal lM Acai Sshucer arc oko eo. cuttodelis chekotentes cueholaiyis. truncata, n. sp.

Figs. 9-14.—Pseudembia paradoxa, n. sp., holotype ¢%. 9. Head from above, x 15.
10. Terminalia from above, x 15. 11. Left hemitergite from above, x 30. 12. Distal part
of left hemitergite viewed laterodorsally from the left, x 30. 138. First segment of left
cercus from above and slightly to the right. x 30. 14. Terminalia from below, x 15.

Figs. 15-19.—Pseudembia truncata, n. sp., holotype o&. 15. Head from above, x 15.
16. First segment of hind tarsus viewed laterally, x 30. 17. Terminalia from above, x 15.
18. Process of left hemitergite from above, x 30. 19. Terminalia from below, x 15.

478 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. VI-X,

Genus PAREMBIA, Nn. gen.

Genotype, Oligotoma valida Hagen, 1885, Canad. Entomologist, 17, p. 150.

Embioptera closely related to HEmbia Latreille, but with two relatively large
ventral bladders on the first segment of the hind tarsi. Venation and terminalia
not generically distinguishable from Hmbia.

Metembia differs from Parembia in the bilobed, strongly-toothed first segment
of the left cercus; Pseudembia differs in the complex form of the left hemitergite;
its left cercus has the first segment bilobed, as in Metembia, but the teeth are
small, as in Parembia.

PAREMBIA VALIDA (Hagen, 1885). Figs. 20-24.

Oligotoma valida Hagen, 1885, l.c—Hmbia major Imms, 1913, Trans. Linn. Soe.
London, Zool., xi, p. 1.

Under Oligotoma michaeli M’Lachlan, Hagen (l.c.) described a female from
Amballa, Kumaon Himalayas, introducing the name Oligotoma valida, and there-
after considering the specimen as O. michaeli. This female is in the Museum of
Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, with the label ‘O. valida Hagen*; fem.
of O. michaeli; Mon. Emb. 150’ in Hagen’s writing. The asterisk is Hagen’s
characteristic type designation. The specimen is conspecific with the species well
described from both sexes by Imms (l.c.) as Hmbia major. It is regrettable that
Hagen’s name must displace that of Imms, by priority; knowledge of the species
will, however, be due to Imms’s excellent description, although the name is
displaced.

Hagen’s specimen agrees in colour and size (18 mm.) with Imms’s series, and
has the characteristic number of hind metatarsal bladders (two). It is, of course,
no relation to Oligotoma michaeli; the male described from Amballa by Hagen
(1.c.) is not O. michaeli either, but is, in fact, a large, dark specimen of O. nigra
Hagen, the type series of which, smaller and paler, is from Egypt (Museum of
Comparative Zoology).

In view of the close proximity of Amballa to Imms’s localities, and of the
knowledge that the species is unlikely to show variation in such a short range,
since series from as far away as Mesopotamia and Bihar are scarcely more than
subspecifically distinct, there seems to be no alternative but to reject the name
major, even though Hagen’s type, being a female, has no taxonomic features apart
from the tarsal bladders and the exceptional size.

In the British. Museum of Natural History there are two well-preserved
_ Specimens (4, 9), labelled ‘Embia major Imms. Bhowali, Kumaon Himalaya, July
1912, A. D. Imms’. These are presumably intended as types, though not so labelled.
I name the ¢ allotype of Parembia valida (Hagen).

Full details of the morphology of the species, and of individual variation,
are given by Imms (le.). The accompanying figures (20-24) are from the
specimens mentioned above (British Museum), figure 20 from the female, the rest
from the male allotype. The occasional forking of the media, noted by Imms, is
demonstrated in Figure 22.

PAREMBIA MINOR (Mukerji, 1927). Fig. 25.

Hmbia minor Mukerji, 1927, Rec. Ind. Museum, xxix, p. 253.
Full details have been given by Mukerji (l.c.). The differences from P. valida
(EZ. major), as tabulated by Mukerji (l.c., p. 265) scarcely warrant more than
subspecific rank, but, as I have not seen the specimens, I am unwilling to reduce

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 479

the status. The size differences are significant, subspecifically at least, but the
structural differences listed seem to be based on a misapprehension. Mukerji
appears to base his comparison on Imms’s description, not on actual specimens,
of P. valida, and the differences noted in the compression of the ninth tergite
and curvature of the process of the left hemitergite seem likely to represent
merely a variation in method of preparation and in disposition of the structures
when figured. The smoothness of the tarsal bladders appears to be concerned, not

28

Figs. 20-24.—Parembia valida (Hagen) (= Embia major Imms). 20. 9, hind tarsus
viewed laterally, x 15. 21-24, allotype ¢. 21. Head from above, x 6. 22. Left forewing,
x 6. 23. Terminalia from above, x 15. 24. Terminalia from below, x 15.

Fig. 25.—Parembia minor (Mukerji), ¢%, terminalia from above (after Mukerji, 1927,
fig. 5B).

Figs. 26-27.—Parembia persica (M’Lachlan), ¢@ from Persia. 26. Terminalia from
above, x 11-5. 27. Terminalia from below, x 11:5.

Figs. 28-32.—Parembia persica (M’Lachlan), co from Baghdad. 28. Head from
above, x 15. 29. Left forewing, x 8. 30. Hind tarsus viewed laterally, x 15. 31.
Terminalia from above, x 15. 32. Terminalia from below, x 15.

480 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. VI-X,

with structural difference, but with the power of the microscope used. The inner
surface of the concavity of the first segment of the left cercus is not denticulate
in the specimen of P. valida (E. major) here figured (Figs. 23, 24), and the
‘ventral process’ (left cercus-basipodite of this paper) agrees in this specimen
with Mukerji’s description of P. minor. The number of antennal segments is an
unreliable criterion, being subject to individual variation and to breakage. All
the structural differences noted by Mukerji seem, therefore, to be open to question.

Figure 25, after Mukerji (l.c., Fig. 5B), represents a dorsal view of the male
terminalia of Parembia minor.

PAREMBIA PERSICA (M’Lachlan 1877). Figs. 26-32.

Embia persica M’Lachlan, 1877, J. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., xiii, 70, p. 382.

The type, from Shahrud, North Persia, is not in the M’Lachlan Collection
(British Museum), where all M’Lachlan’s other types of this Order are preserved.
It may therefore be assumed to be irretrievably lost. The following description is
from two males in the Paris Museum, from Bender-Bouchir, Persia (coll. Dr.
Bussiéres, 1905). These had been identified by Navas as Embia tartara de Saussure
1896, which is probably a synonym of P. persica (M’Lachlan) (v. infra). Navas
(1923, p. 9, fig. 1) has described these specimens, but his figures are inaccurate.

6. Length 9-5 mm.; length of forewing 8 mm., of hindwing 7 mm. General
colour rather pale brown, eyes black, wings mid-brown with hyaline intervenal
lines (M’Lachlan’s data are: Black, rather shiny; length 9:5-10-5 mm.). Venation,
tarsi, and terminalia as in P. valida (no venational anomalies); the first segment
of the left cercus (LC,) is slightly different in form, the longitudinal channelling
of the inner face, basad to the internal lobe, being less marked.

9 (of this series) unknown (cf., however, Silvestri, 1923).

Several series from Mesopotamia (Baghdad, coll. H. Scott; Amara, Basra, coll.
P. A. Buxton) are in the British Museum; they have been described by Hsben-
Petersen (1929a) and Silvestri (1923), and the terminalia adequately figured; the
number of tarsal bladders has been overlooked, and Esben-Petersen gives the
colour as blackish-brown (apparently following M’Lachlan), whereas, in members
of the same series seen by me, it was mid- to rather pale brown.

The males agree with the above description of P. persica, and there seems no
need to introduce the alternative name scotti (Hsben-Petersen), unless specimens
from M’Lachlan’s type locality should prove different from the present specific
concept.

Silvestri (1.c.) considers these specimens to be probably a subspecies of Hmbia
Savignyi Westwood; Hsben-Petersen (19296) denies this. In view of the difference
in the tarsi, considered here as generic, Silvestri’s view cannot be followed.

Embia tartara de Saussure 1896 (Mitt. Schweiz. entomol. Ges., Bd..9, Hft. 8,
p. 352), from Turkestan, is probably synonymous with P. persica in the present
sense. We owe our knowledge of the type of H. tartara to Krauss (1911, p. 67,
Pl. v, figs. 22, 22A), who studied it in the Geneva Museum. He notes that the
second segment of the left cercus is broken, its former attachment being evident;
de Saussure considered it as unbroken and originally one-segmented. Krauss’s
figures of the terminalia are from the dry, unprepared specimen, and show the
hemitergites as not quite tallying with the present figures (of P. persica); the
left cercus and cercus-basipodite, however, agree closely with the present figures.
The locality is probably closer to M’Lachlan’s type locality than any of those listed
here (Baghdad, Amara, Basra, Bender-Bouchir).

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 481

Key to the Species of Parembia (<¢).
1. Inner face of first segment of left cercus, basad to echinulate lobe, not markedly
channelled longitudinally. Pale to mid-brown. Mesopotamia, Persia, Turkestan
EME Ee eae festa one Lepaoe eae seaeh hie, mua ousousueNeaetiomeis bien elke alco ya) shen Ian eis persica (M’Lachlan)

= tartara (Sauss.), = scotti (Esb.-Petersen)

Inner face of first segment of left cercus markedly channelled longitudinally basad

to echinulate lobe. Dark brown to black. India ........................... 2

R, Iberian Copal sshd, B AWE ose .6 BiploD dia Om. ciololcibioia oro malolalowsiteckelavc o oo minor (Mukerji)
Wengihedi2 ios) Ime UI AONwEtima lavas’ sepscis alee sels clersiecieee sac valida (Hagen)

= major (Imms)

Note——The above may represent three subspecies, in which case P. persica

should be selected as type subspecies, by priority. EHmbia rabaulti Navas 1934

(Mem. Pont. Accad. Nuovi Lincet, Series iii, Vol. i, p. 224, fig. 101) may belong to

Parembia, and may be synonymous with one of the above. The poor description

does not allow any definite conclusion; the type (¢; Mus. Berlin) requires
re-examination.

DISCUSSION.

Apart from the hind tarsi, Parembia is generically inseparable from Hmbia
Latreille. Its separation on this character seems to be justified geographically,
and it facilitates the drawing up of a generic concept for Hmbia, and the con-
sideration of the relationships of the more advanced Metembia and Pseudembia.

It is not possible to state whether the number of hind metatarsal bladders of
Embia (one) or Parembia (two) is the more primitive condition. The Neotropical
genus Clothoda, the most generalized recent Embiopteron in other characters,
agrees with Parembia in this respect, but this cannot be used as a safe argument
for the primitive nature of two hind metatarsal bladders on an altogether different
line of descent. For instance, Embia and Parembia might possibly be derived from
an extinct Old World genus with only one hind metatarsal bladder, and with
generalized terminalia as in Clothoda.

The differentiation of Metembia and Pseudembia from Parembia has proceeded
along two rather divergent courses, and this prevents the use of less than three
generic concepts; it is impossible to consider the species of Pseudembia congeneric
with those of Metembia, but not with Parembia, while an attempt to group the
three as a single genus overlooks the close relation of Parembia to Hmbia,
and would include three series, two of which would be more divergent from the
third than the third would be from Hmbia.

Metembia has been derived from Parembia chiefly by modification of the
first segment of the left cercus, which is parallel to that found in Dihybocercus
or, perhaps more closely, considering the dentition, Donaconethis. Pseudembia
has the first segment of the left cercus also bilobed, as in Metembia, but with small
teeth, as in Parembia; its left hemitergite has been considerably modified from
the simple form common to Parembia and Metembia.

List of References.

ESBEN-PETERSEN, P., 1929a.—Embioptera from Baghdad. Ent. Mo. Mag., Series 3, Vol. 15,

No. 169.
, 1929b.—Further Remarks on Embioptera from Baghdad. Ibid., Vol. 15, No. 179.

HAGEN, H. A., 1885.—Monograph of the Embiidina. Canad. Entomologist, 17. (Wondon,
Ontario).

Imus, A. D., 1913.—On Embia major, sp. nov., from the Himalayas. Trans. Linn. Soc.
London, Zool., xi, 12.

Krauss, H. A., 1911.—Monographie der Hmbien. Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23 (Stuttgart).

M’LACHLAN, R., 1877.—On the Nymph-Stage of the Embidae, with Notes on the Habits
of the Family, ete. Journ. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., xiii, 70.

482 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON TIE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. VI-X,

MuxKergi, S., 1927.—On the Morphology and Bionomiecs of Hmbia minor sp. noy., with
Special Reference to its Spinning Organ. Rec. Ind. Musewm, xxix, 4.

NavAs, L., 1923.—Comunicaciones Entomolégicas. 6. Notas sobre Embi6pteros. Rev.
Acad. Cienc. Zaragoza, viii.

— , 1934.—Insecta Orientalia. Mem. Pont. Accad. Nuovi Lincei, Series III, Vol. 1.

DE SAUSSURE, H., 1896.—Note sur la Tribu des Embiens. Mitt. Schweiz. entomol.
Gesellschaft, Bd. 9, Hft. 8.

SILVESTRI, F., 1923.—Thysanura, Termitidae and Embiidae collected in Mesopotamia and
N.W. Persia by W. Edgar Evans, B.Sc., late Capt. R.A.M.C., and Dr. P. A. Buxton.
Trans. Ent. Soc. London.

PART VII. THE GENUS DICTYOPLOCA KRAUSS.
(Ten Text-figures. )

Genus DicryopLoca Krauss 1911.

Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23, p. 54—Genotype, Dictyoploca cercocyrta Krauss, l.c.

African Embioptera, the males with the following characters: Wingless; first
segment of hind tarsus with two ventral bladders; first segment of left cercus
echinulate, second segment distinct, subcylindrical.

This definition of the genus (sensu Rimsky-Korsakov, 1927) separates it from
Haploembia Verhoeff, which has the first segment of the left cercus smooth (cf.
Krauss, 1911, figs. 16A, 17B). It differs from the wingless species of Embia Latr.
(wrongly divided off as Monotylota) in the presence of an extra tarsal bladder,
and in the lack of an inner flap-like process to the right hemitergite of the tenth
abdominal segment.

The Australian genera Notoligotoma Davis and Metoligotoma Davis would
agree structurally with the above diagnosis (the former having the males winged
as well as wingless), except that they have the second segment of the left cercus
reduced or absent.

DicryopLoca CERCOCYRTA Krauss 1911 (1.c.). Figs. 1, 2.

¢ (after Krauss). Length 9 mm. General colour dark yellowish-brown. Head
large, elliptical, evenly narrowed behind eyes. First segment of hind tarsi with
two ventral bladders, the proximal one very large. Terminalia (Figs. 1-2) with
tenth abdominal tergite completely cleft; right hemitergite produced back to a blunt
hook-like process (10RP), directed inward and downward; process of left hemi-
tergite (10LP) obtuse, ending spathulately. First segment of left cercus (LC,)
incurved, internally truncate and echinulate. Second segment of left cereus (LC,),
and both segments of right cercus (RC,, RC.), subeylindrical. Process of ninth
sternite (HP) small, obtuse, directed to the left. Left cercus-basipodite small.
© unknown.

Locality—Port Elizabeth, South Africa; type in Hamburg Museum.

DICTYOPLOCA CAPENSIS (Hsben-Petersen 1920). Fig. 3.

Haploembia capensis Esben-Petersen, 1920, Ann. S. Afr. Museum, xvii, 6, p. 503.

3g (after Esben-Petersen). Length 10-11 mm. General colour dark brown.
Head somewhat narrowed behind, with almost straight lateral margins and rounded
hind angles. Hind tarsi as in preceding species. Terminalia (Fig. 3) with process
of right hemitergite (10RP) bifid, directed inward; process of left hemitergite
(10LP) essentially similar to the preceding species. Echinulate process of first
segment of left cercus (LC,) rounded, not truncate as in D. cercocyrta.

©. Length 17 mm. Colour, and hind tarsi, as in the male.

Locality.—Dunbrody, Cape Province. Location of types not stated.

BY CONSETT DAYIS. 483

Figs. 1-2.—Dictyoploca cercocyrta Krauss. o¢ terminalia from above and below (after
Krauss, 1911).

Fig. 3.—Dictyoploca capensis (Hsb.-Pet.). o& terminalia from above (after Hsben-
Petersen, 1920).

Wigs. 4-6.—Dictyoploca burensis R.-Korsakoy. o&: 4. Head from above. 5. First
two segments of hind tarsus, viewed laterally. 6. Terminalia from above (after Rimsky-
Korsakov, 1927).

Fig. 7.—Dictyoploca sjostedti (Silvestri). o& terminalia from above (from Enderlein,
1912, after Silvestri, 1910).

Figs. 8-10.—Dictyoploca rimskyi, n. sp. Holotype oc. 8. Head from above, x 15.
9. Terminalia from above, x 15. 10. Terminalia from below, x 15.

Magnifications for Figures 1-7 not given by respective authors. Figures 8-10 based
on camera lucida outlines. Setae omitted.

484 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. VI-X,

DIcTYOPLOCA BURENSIS Rimsky-Korsakov 1927. Figs. 4-6.

Revue russe d@’Entomologie, xxi, 3-4, p. 145.

é¢ (after Rimsky-Korsakov). Length 10 mm. General colour brown to black.
Head as in Figure 4; hind tarsi as in Figure 5. Terminalia (Fig. 6) with process
of right hemitergite (10RP) slender, acute, directed backward; process of left
hemitergite (10LP) tapered, acute, margins sinuous. First segment of left cercus
(LC,) incurved, inner margin rounded and echinulate distally. 9 unknown.

Locality—Bura Mountains, British East Africa. Location of type not stated.

DIcTYOPLOCA SJOSTEDTI (Silvestri 1910). Fig. 7.

Embia sjostedti Silvestri, 1910, Sjostedt’s Kilimandjaro-Meru Exped., Bd. 3,
p. 41 (Stockholm).—Haploembia sjéstedti (Silvestri), Enderlein, 1912, Coll. de
Selys-Longchamps, fasc. 3, p. 69, fig. 40.

¢ (from Enderlein, after Silvestri). Length 15 mm. General colour black,
legs and cerci brownish. Head little longer than broad, posterior angles rounded.
Hind tarsi as in preceding species (cf. Silvestri, l.c., Fig. 7). Terminalia (Fig. 7)
with only very slight differences from D. burensis, e.g. the first segment of the left
cercus (LC,) less incurved, the process of the right hemitergite (10RP) curved
inward terminally, and the process of the left hemitergite (10LP) straighter.

©. Length 15-6 mm.; general colour brownish-red.

Locality—Ngare-na-nyuki, Lower Meru, Tanganyika. Location of types not
stated.

Enderlein’s copy of Silvestri’s figure shows the first segment of the left cercus
of the male smooth. It may be assumed to be echinulate, since the species bears
very great resemblance on other characters to D. burensis. The differences, noted
above, may be due to the disposition of the parts when figured, and not to structural
difference; if this were so, D. burensis would fall as a synonym. The two species
are best considered as distinct pending further information.

DIcTYOPLOCA RIMSKYI, n. sp. Figs. 8-10.

d. Length (dry) 13 mm.; head 3-8 mm. x 2:9 mm. General colour very dark
brown to black. Head (Fig. 8) similar in general form to D. burensis, relatively
longer. Antennae very long (10 mm.), the left with 31 segments, the right with
30. Hind tarsi missing; presumably with two metatarsal bladders, as the species
is in its other characters closely related to the preceding. Terminalia (Figs. 9-10)
with the right hemitergite (10R) produced inward and downward to a short acute
process (10RP), inner margin sinuous. Left hemitergite (10L) produced back-
ward from its inner margin to a slender process (10LP), tapered, subacute. Right
cercus composed of two subcylindrical segments (RC,, RC.), arising from a pad-
like basipodite (RCB). First segment of left cercus (LC,) clavate, echinulate at
middle of inner face, where it is produced into a weakly-bilobed process, flattened
dorsiventrally. Second segment (LC.) subcylindrical. Process of ninth sternite
(HP) obtuse, placed to the right of the mid-line; left cercus-basipodite (LCB)
obtuse. 9 unknown.

Locality—Athi River, British East Africa, May 8-19, 1899, C. S. Betton; holo-
type ¢@ in the British Museum of Natural History. Dedicated to Dr. M. Rimsky-
Korsakov.

Key to the Species of Dictyoploca (0c).

ic inst scementuot Letts cercusmncunved struncatem eri enieeeneiecee cercocyrta Krauss
MITStSerImentnOtMerticercusmrolunged: anternallliveersenrer in enerelencienncnicieiekensnsieieiencnaienene 2
2 Process Of jleLt hemitergitevoDtusel jcc. +2 < cde Coe ie ean capensis (Esb.-Pet.)

Process (Of, left (hemitereite7SUDACUUC) sciences se) sieme eeicreneln oieoe eleenchanercrcusione rer icnenctewenen nenon ene 3

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 485

8. Process of right hemitergite short, directed inward .................. rimskyi, n. sp.
Process of right hemitergite long, directed backward ..................-.++++-+es+ 4
4. Inner margin of first segment of left cercus almost straight .... sjdstedti (Silvestri)
Inner margin of first segment of left cercus markedly concave .. burensis R.-Korsakoyv

List of References.

EINDERLEIN, G., 1912.—Hmbiidinen, in Coll. de Selys-Longchamps, fase. 3.

EXSSBEN-PETERSEN, T., 1920.—New Species of Neuropterous Insects from South Africa
(Ephemerida, Megaloptera, and Hmbiidina). Ann. S. Afr. Museum, xvii, 6.

Ikrauss, H. A., 1911.—Monographie der Embien. Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23 (Stuttgart).

Rimsky-Korsakov, M., 1927.—A New Species of Embia from British Hast Africa. Rev.
russe d’Hntomologie, xxi, 3-4.

SILVESTRI, F., 1910.—Embiidae, in Sjostedt’s Kilimandjaro-Meru Exped. (Stockholm).
(Not seen in the original.)

PART VIII. THE GENUS DIHYBOCERCUS ENDERLHIN, AND A NEW AFRICAN
GENUS RELATED TO IT.

(Twenty-five Text-figures. )

Genus DirHysocercus Hnderlein 1912.

Coll. zool. de Selys-Longchamps, fase. 3, p. 109 (as subgenus of Hmbia Latr.).

Genotype, Hmbia (Dihybocercus) severini Enderlein, 1912, l.c-—Raised to
generic rank, Navas, 1931, Rev. Zool. Bot. africaines (Tervueren), Vol. 21, fase. 2,
Dp. 134.

African Embioptera, the males with the following characters: Winged, R,,;
forked, M simple, cubitus 3-branched, the two lateral branches arising anteriorly
from the stem, pectinate. First segment of hind tarsi with two large ventral
bladders. Tenth abdominal tergite completely cleft; process of left hemitergite
complex, with a flat latero-dorsal lobe. First segment of left cercus with inner
margin produced in two lobes, both bearing numerous small teeth.

Three species: Uganda, Congo and Rhodesia.

Enderlein’s generic diagnosis depends on the lobes of the first segment of the
left cereus, a character found in unrelated genera also (Donaconethis End.,
Pseudembia Davis, Metembia Davis, and others). The above diagnosis delimits the
genus from these parallel genera. Additional points not recorded by Enderlein in
the genotype (e.g. number of tarsal bladders) are deduced from the structure of a
new Rhodesian species, very closely related to D. severini, described below.

The genus as here recognized differs from Donaconethis End. (sensu Davis
1939) in the number of tarsal bladders, dentition of the left cercus, and in the
simplicity of the media, which tends to fork in Donaconethis. Dihybocercus
appears to stand closest to Rhagadochir End. (s.str., i.e. congeneric, in a narrower
sense than Enderlein’s, with Rh. vosseleri End.). It is differentiated chiefly by the
form of the first segment of the left cercus, which has only one echinulate internal
lobe in Rhagadochir.

DIN YBOCERCUS SEVERINI Enderlein 1912. Figs. 1-2.

Hmbia (Dihybocercus) severini Enderlein, 1912, l.c—Dihybocercus severini
Enderlein, Navas, 1931, l.c.

6 (after Enderlein). Length 12 mm.; forewing 93-11 mm. x 2-6-3-2 mm.;
hindwing 9-10 mm. x 2-8-3:-4 mm.; head 24 mm. x 1:8 mm. General colour rust-red,
front of head and terminalia dark brown, legs brownish, wings brown with dark-
brown veins and hyaline streaks. Head relatively broad, flattened, sides behind
eyes somewhat rounded, weakly converging, hind angles rounded. Hyes prominent,

486 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA, VI-X,

fairly large. Wings (Fig. 1) as in generic description. Details of hind tarsi not
given by Enderlein, but presumably with two metatarsal bladders, as in the other
species. Terminalia (Fig. 2) with right hemitergite (10R) produced downwards
and inwards in a short, slender, subobtuse process (10RP,); inner process of 10R
not detailed by HEnderlein. Process of left hemitergite (10LP) long, sinuously
tapered terminally, with a flat basal lobe directed upwards and to the right.
First segment of left cercus (LC,) with two rounded echinulate lobes internally;
other segments of cerei (LC., RC,, RC.) subcylindrical. Left cercus-basipodite
(LCB) produced outwards, ending acutely.

a

Figs. 1-2.—Dihybocercus severini Iind., ¢. 1. Right fore- and hindwing, x 3.
Terminalia from above, x 14. (After Enderlein, 1912, Figs. 72, 71.)

Figs. 3-9.—Dihybocercus rhodesiae, n. sp., holotype ¢@. 3. Head from above, x 20.
4. Left fore- and hindwing, x 8. 5. Hind tarsus viewed laterally, x 20. 6. Terminalia
from above, x 20. 7. Process of left hemitergite from above, x 40. S. The same from
below, x 40. 9. Terminalia from below, x 20.

to

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 48

“A

° unknown.
Locality.—Belgian Congo: 311 km. from Kindia. Types (¢@) in Coll. de

Selys-Longchamps, Stettin Museum, and Musée du Congo, Tervueren; not seen by
the author.

DIHYBOCERCUS RHODESIAE, nh. Sp. Figs. 3-9.

6. Length 12-15 mm.; head 2-1 mm. x 1:8 mm.; forewing 7-6 mm. x 2:2 mm.;
hindwing 6-8 mm. x 2:1 mm. General colour very dark brown, wings with dark
smoky-brown bands bordering dark-brown veins, with hyaline streaks between.
Head (Fig. 3) relatively broad, eyes rather small, sides behind eyes at first
diverging, then smoothly rounded. Antennae incomplete. Wings (Fig. 4) as in
the generic diagnosis, but with R, or R,; tending to branch terminally in one or
more wings: in the holotype, R; is simple, but R, is shortly bifid in both forewings.
Hind tarsi (Fig. 5) with two well-developed bladders on first segment, one on
second. Terminalia (Figs. 6-9) with tenth tergite completely cleft; right hemi-
tergite (10R) triangular, posteriorly ending in an acute process (10RP,), directed
inward and downward. 10R with an inner subrectangular flap (10RP.), connected
posteriorly to 10R, anteriorly separated by membrane. Ventral to 10RP, is a
triangular membraneous lobe, partly concealed, chitinized only medially. Left
hemitergite (10L) with a long process (10LP), terminally acute, sinuously tapered,
with an irregular basal lobe dorsally and to the right (Figs. 7-8). First segment
of left cercus (LC,) similar to D. severini, the basal lobe placed more ventrally
than the distal lobe. Ninth sternite (H) produced backward, slightly to the right
of the mid-line, to an obtuse process (HP). Left cercus-basipodite (LCB) situated
between HP and base of LC,, directed outward, acutely tapered. Right cercus-
basipodite (RCB) small, subannular. 2 unknown.

Locality.—Rhodesia (Marshall Collection; British Museum of Natural History):
holotype @ and paratypes (%).

Closely related to D. severini. It is therefore admissible to assume similarity
in the hind tarsi, ninth sternite, and inner process of right hemitergite. It differs
from Enderlein’s description of D. severini in the narrower process of the left
hemitergite. In view of the possibility that this process may be viewed obliquely
in Enderlein’s figure, or inaccurately figured, it may be that it should be regarded
as a subspecies only; the possibility of absolute synonymy cannot be discarded
entirely. The present course seems the simplest way in which to place the
additional generic facts on record.

DIHYBOCERCUS CONFUSUS, n. sp. Figs. 10-20.

A pinned male in the British Museum of Natural History carries the following
labels: ‘Gulu, W. Madi, Uganda, 5,000 ft., V-1926, G. D. Hale Carpente1’;
‘Rhagadochir vosseleri End., det. Friederichs 1936’. The terminalia of the dried
specimen had not been prepared; preparation showed the determination to be
incorrect, and the specimen is therefore described as a new species, in the genus
Dihybocercus.

6. Length 9 mm.; head, length 2-0 mm., breadth 1:6 mm. Forewing 8 mm. x
24mm. General colour smoky-brown, prothorax and legs (especially femora) more
orange-brown, eyes black. Wing-veins dark brown, bands bordering veins smoky-
brown, lines between bands hyaline. Head (Fig. 10) with eyes large, prominent,
sides behind eyes slightly and smoothly converging, rounded behind. Antennae
incomplete. Wings (Fig. 11) with all veins strong, cross-veins numerous, fork of
R,,,; nearly twice length of stem. Stem of cubitus with two anterior branches

488 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. VI-X,

pectinately. Hind tarsi (Fig. 12) with two ventral bladders on first segment, one
terminal, one medial; second segment short, with a terminal bladder ventrally.
Terminalia (Figs. 13-20) with tenth abdominal tergite completely divided by a
longitudinal cleft; right hemitergite (10R) posteriorly curving downwards to a
short spiniform process (10RP,), directed outwards (Figs. 14-15), with a small
concavity and then a blunt projection outside the spine. Inner margin of right
hemitergite with a flat process (10RP.) separated from the body of the hemitergite,
except posteriorly, by membraneous areas (Fig. 14); process curving inwards
anteriorly. Left hemitergite (10L) produced backwards to a slender process

a

Figs. 10-20.—Dihybocercus confusus, n. sp., holotype @. 10. Head from above, x 15.
11. Left forewing, x 8. 12. Hind tarsus viewed laterally, x 15. 13. Terminalia from
above, x 15. 14. Right hemitergite from above, x 45. 15. Extremity of right hemitergite
viewed obliquely from above, right, and behind, x 45. 16. Process of left hemitergite
from above, x 45. 17. The same from below, x 45. 18. First segment of left cercus,
viewed from above and slightly to the left, x 45. 19. The same, viewed from above and
to the right, x 45. 20. Terminalia from below, x 15.

Figs. 21-25.—Odontembia spinosa (Navas), holotype ¢@. 21. Head from above, x 15.
22. Hind tarsus viewed laterally, x 15. 28. Terminalia from above, x 11. 24. Process of
left hemitergite viewed laterally from the right, x 15. 25. Terminalia from below, x 11.

All original figures based on camera lucida outlines.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 489

(10LP), sinuously acute at apex, with a blunt irregular flap-like process latero-
dorsally to the left (Figs. 16-17). First segment of left cercus (LC,; Figs. 18-19)
with inner margin produced into lobes, one subapical, the other median, the latter
again subdivided by a shallow depression into two blunt lobes; all lobes echinulate.
Second segment (LC.) subcylindrical. Right cereus with first segment (RC,)
slightly dilated distally, second (RC.) thinner, subcylindrical. Ninth sternite
(H, Fig. 20) produced back to an obtuse process (HP) somewhat to the right
of the mid-line; to the left of this is a concavity, filled by the left cercus-basipodite
(LCB), which gives off an acute process towards the left. Right cercus-basipodite
(RCB) subannular, small.
Locality.—Gulu, Uganda. Holotype ¢ in the British Museum.

Key to the Species of Dihybocercus (<¢).

1. Posterior process of right hemitergite bifid ........................ confusus, Nn. sp.
Posterior process of right hemitergite simply tapered ..................200eeeeee 2
Ao JECOOESS OF liGar Increase loro“) oconccnconboonbes=yoodebbpoobDaoDO severini Enderlein

Process of left hemitergite narrower

Genus ODONTEMBIA, Nn. gen.

Genotype, Dihybocercus spinosus Navas, 1931, Rev. Zool. Bot. africaines
(Tervueren), Vol. xxi, fasc. 2, p. 134.

African Embioptera closely related to Dihybocercus, but with the two internal
lobes of the first segment of the left cercus each armed with 4-5 large, sharp teeth,
and the right cercus-basipodite produced backward, in the male. Other characters
as in Dihybocercus.

The structure and dentition of the left cercus are strongly reminiscent of
Donaconethis (sensu Davis 1939). The remaining characters agree most closely
with Dihybocercus, the venation and tarsal bladders separating these two genera
from Donaconethis. The right cercus-basipodite, small and subannular in
Dihybocercus and Donaconethis, appears to be partly fused to the first segment of
the right cercus in Odontembia, and is produced back to a free obtuse lobe.

The genus probably represents a direct specialization of Dihybocercus, notably
in the modification of the left cercus convergent to Donaconethis. One species:
Congo.

ODONTEMBIA SPINOSA (Navas 1931). Figs. 21-25.

Dihybocercus spinosus Navas, 1931, 1.c.

The following re-description is from Navas’s unique type (Musée du Congo,
Tervueren, Belgium):

6. Length* 10 mm.; forewing 7:5 mm. x 1:8 mm.; hindwing 6-5 mm. x 1:8 mm.;
head 1:8 mm. x 1:5 mm. General colour orange-brown, eyes black, wing-veins dark
brown, bordered by mid-brown bands. Head (Fig. 21) broad, eyes large, prominent,
sides behind eyes converging posteriorly. Venation as in the previous genus. Hind
tarsi (Fig. 22) with two large ventral bladders on the first segment, one on second.
Terminalia (Figs. 23-25) very characteristic; tenth tergite completely cleft, right
hemitergite (10R) produced posteriorly to an acute process (10RP,), directed
downward and inward. Inner margin of 10R with only a trace of a flap-like
process. Process of left hemitergite (10LP; Fig. 24) very complex, irregularly
tapered distally, flattened in a vertical plane, somewhat twisted, with a median
dorsal lobe directed forward. This lobe, the dorsal face of 10LP basad to it, and
the left face distad to it, are minutely nodulose. Right cercus with two sub-

* These dimensions do not agree with those given by Navas (l.c.) for the same
specimen.

NN

490 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBLOPTERA. V1-X,

cylindrical segments (RC,, RC.); base of RC, partly fused to right cercus-
basipodite (RCB), the inner part of which is produced backward in an obtuse
lobe. First segment of left cereus (LC,) highly characteristie (the figure of Navas,
l.c., Fig. 70, is inaccurate), inner margin produced into two rather slender lobes,
the basal one placed more ventrally than the terminal one; basal lobe with two
very large, sharp teeth at apex, and two on distal face; terminal lobe with five
such teeth on anterior face. Second segment (LC.) subcylindrical. Ninth sternite
(H) produced to a blunt process (HP), curved to the left. Jeft cercus-basipodite
(LCB) produced backward, termination acute. 9 unknown.

Locality —Lulua, Belgian Congo, 1929, Dr. Walker; holotype ¢ in Mus. Congo,
Tervueren.

List of References.

Davis, C., 1939.—Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. v. The Genus Donaconethis

Enderlein. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ixiv, 3-4.
IENDERLEIN, G., 1912.—Embiidinen, in Coll. zool. de Selys-Longchamps, fasc. 3.
NavAs, L., 1931.—Insectes du Congo Belge (Série VI). Rev. Bot. Zool. africaines, Vol.

xxi, fasc. 2 (Tervueren).

PART IX. THE GENUS ENVEJA NAVAS.

(Six Text-Figures.)

Genus Envesa Navas 1916.

Mem. R. Acad. cienc. y artes de Barcelona, Vol. 12, No. 13, p. 23. Genotype,
Enveja bequaerti Navas, l.c.

Robust Embioptera, the males with the following characters: Mandibles huge,
projecting inwards, distally overlying labrum. Winged, with R,., forked, the fork
exceeding the stem; M simple; cubitus two-branched. All veins strong, cross-
veins rather numerous. First segment of hind tarsi with two very large ventral
bladders. Tenth abdominal tergite completely cleft by a longitudinal division
placed to the left of the mid-line; right hemitergite with a long posterior process;
process of left hemitergite complex. First segment of left cercus with a basal
echinulate internal lobe, otherwise smooth. Second segment of left cercus, and
both segments of right cercus, subcylindrical.

One species: Congo.

This remarkable genus has no close allies. It is perhaps most closely related
to Dihybocercus, from the same general region. It is immediately differentiated
from Dihybocercus by the extraordinary mandibles, and by the first segment of the
left cereus (with only one lobe); additional but less important differences are
found in the right hemitergite and the two-branched cubitus. EHnveja is not at all
closely related to Hmbia Latreille, as stated by Navas (l.c.).

ENVEJA BEQUAERTI Navas 1916 (l.c.). Figs. 1-6.

The following description is based on two specimens (¢) (Mus. Congo,
Tervueren), each labelled: ‘Enveja Bequaerti Nav.’; ‘Musée du Congo. Mufungwa
Sampwe, 1/16-xii-1911, Dr. Bequaert’; ‘Enveja Bequaerti Nav.; Navas S.J. det.’.
They may be regarded as cotypes (A and B); cotype B also bears Navas’s pink
manuscript label ‘Typus’, but there seems no need to distinguish it as holotype or
lectotype, as the two specimens are conspecific, and probably collected at exactly
the same time.

6. Length 17-5 mm. (A), 17 mm. (B); forewing 10-5 mm. x 2:5 mm. (A),
11 mm. x 3 mm. (B); hindwing 9 mm. x 2:5 mm. (A), 9 mm. x 3 mm. (B). Head
(B) 4:5 x 3-4 mm. General colour dark brown, head with ferruginous areas (as in

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 491

other members of the Order, but slightly different in position, probably due to
changes in the structure of the head associated with the development of the
mandibles; compare Figure 1 with that given by Davis, 1936, Fig. 42). Prothorax
orange-brown; wings with dark brown veins bordered by pale-brown bands, with
hyaline streaks between; margins of wings pale, tawny. Head (Fig. 1) relatively
very large, with a median anterior projection behind the clypeus, angular, and a
rhomboidal depression behind this projection; whole of head minutely granulate.
Eyes relatively small. Mandibles (Fig. 2) huge, incurved, each in the form of a
quadrant of a ring, distally truncate, roughened, overlying labrum. Maximum

Figs. 1-6.—Hnveja bequaerti Navas, 0. 1. Head from above. x 6. 2, Mandibles from
above, x 6. 3. Right forewing, x 6. 4. Hind tarsus viewed laterally. x 15. 6. Terminalia
from above, x 25. 6. Terminalia from below, x 25.

Figures 1 and 3 from cotype B, other figures from cotype A. All figures based on
camera lucida outlines. Setae omitted except in Figure 4,

492 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. VI-X,

antennal length 8 mm., with 18 segments. Wings (Fig. 3) with R,.; forked, fork
nearly twice as long as stem; M and Cu, simple. R, confluent subterminally with
R.,3;. The following venational anomalies occur: In both cotypes, R; is terminally
forked in the right forewing. In the left forewing of cotype A, R; and M become
confluent, and almost immediately separate again. The cross-veins are variable,
as shown in the following table:

Cotype A— Oa Lala ann [Relay dayne Tate ING IRI AIC hey
Right forewing .... — —_— — 1 — 1 —
Left forewing .. .. — — — —_— — confluent —
Right hindwing .. .. a 1 2 1 — 2 1
Left hindwing .. .. _— 1 —- 1 1

Cotype B—

Right forewing .. .. 2 3 3 2 1 1 2
Mekt. forewink, waa) se 1 3 3 2 1 2 2
Right hindwing .. .. 2 4 2 2 1 1 2
Heit -hindwineww eke 2 4 2 1 1 1 2

* In addition to terminal confluence.

This extreme variability is characteristic of the Embioptera, and justifies the
usual omission of details of position of the cross-veins. The above table shows
how small is the significance even of the relative frequency of the cross-veins, as
a great difference occurs between the two cotypes, which are structurally indistin-
guishable on other characters, and obviously conspecific.

Hind tarsi (Fig. 4) with ventral bladders very large, especially the more basal
bladder of the metatarsus. Terminalia (Figs. 5-6) with longitudinal division of
tenth abdominal tergite complete, placed to the left of the mid-line; right hemi-
tergite (10R) with outer margin produced backward and inward as a heavily-
sclerotized process (10RP,), slender, distally truncate, upper part of distal margin
concave, lower part furnished with minute teeth. Inner part of posterior margin
of 10R heavily sclerotized as a subrectangular plate (10RP.). Left hemitergite
(10L) produced backward from its right-hand part to a broad process (10LP),
sharply truncate distally, inner margin sinuous; 10LP with a subobtuse dorsal
lobe, as a continuation of its outer margin, directed backwards and a little to the
right, exceeding the main part in length. Right cercus with two subcylindrical
segments (RC,, RC.), arising from a small ventral subannular cercus-basipodite
(RCB). First segment of left cercus (LC,) subcylindrical, inner margin produced
near base to a blunt lobe, armed apically with small nodules; second segment
(LC.) subcylindrical. Ninth sternite (H) tapered back to an obtuse process (HP),
directed somewhat to the left; left cercus-basipodite (LCB) a flat plate between
HP and LC,, terminally obtuse. 9 unknown.

Locality —Mufungwa Sampwe, Belgian Congo; types in Musée du Congo,
Tervueren.

List of References.

Davis, C., 1936.—Studies in Australian Embioptera. Part i. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W.,
Ixi, 5-6.

NavAs, L., 1916.—Neurépteros Nuevos o Poco Conocidos, Séptima Série. Mem. R. Acad.
cienc. y artes de Barcelona, Vol. 12, No. 13.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 493

PART X. THE GENUS LEPTEMBIA KRAUSS.

(Ten Text-figures. )

Genus LEPTEMBIA Krauss 1911.

Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23, p. 71. Genotype, Leptembia hamifera Krauss,
1911, le.

Robust Hmbioptera, the males with the following characters: Winged, R, not
confluent with R.,,; R,,; forked, the fork longer than the stem; M simple; cubitus
three-branched, i.e. its anterior branch bifid. Tenth abdominal tergite completely
cleft longitudinally; right hemitergite massive, convex; process of left hemitergite
simple. First segment of left cercus with an internal echinulate forwardly-directed
process, longer than thick.

Two species: Hast Africa (Sudan; Zambesia).

I do not agree with Enderlein (1912), who includes this genus in Hmbia
Latreille. The left cercus immediately differentiates it. The right hemitergite
has not the characteristic form of Hmbia (s.str.), and the venational differences
appear to be significant: R, and R.,, are nearly always confluent in Hmbia, and the
cubitus is two-branched in most cases.

Krauss does not state the number of hind metatarsal bladders in the geno-
type. There are two in ZL. surcoufi (Navas), which I consider to be congeneric;
this probably applies to L. hamifera also, and offers a further point of difference
from EHmbia (s. str.).

LEPTEMBIA HAMIFERA Krauss 1911 (l.c.). Figs. 1-4.

6 (after Krauss). Length 15 mm.; forewing 10 mm. x 2:7 mm.; head
2:3 mm. x 1:8 mm. General colour pale ochreous, head darker, eyes black; wings
hyaline, with ochreous veins and narrow bordering lines; radius brown. Head
with sides behind eyes convergent, rounded behind. Antennae incomplete; eyes
small, reniform. Wings (Fig. 1) as in the generic description. Terminalia
(Figs. 2-4) with tenth tergite completely divided, right hemitergite (10R) massive,
swollen, with a rather short blunt process on the posterior inner angle. Process
of left hemitergite (10LP) acute, directed backward and curving to the left.
Right cercus with two subcylindrical segments (RC,, RC.); first segment of left
cercus (LC,) subcylindrical, inner margin subterminally produced to a slender
forwardly-directed hook, armed with sharp teeth (Fig. 4). Inner surface of LC,,
anterior to this hook, longitudinally channelled, with small teeth on the upper
part. Second segment (LC.) subcylindrical, more slender. Ninth sternite (H)

Se
Ri SSS
Ras3
Ru)
Rs A
Mm Gua Culb 4

Figs. 1-4.—Leptembia hamifera Krauss, ¢, after Krauss, 1911, Pl. v, figs. 23A-D.
1. Left forewing. 2. Terminalia from above. 3. Terminalia from below. 4. Left cercus
from below. (Krauss does not state the magnifications, but from his dimensions given

in the text they are here approximately x 4, x 12, x 12, and x 16 respectively.)

494 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. VI-X,

produced backward to an obtusely-tapered process (HP), curving to the left; left

cercus-basipodite (LCB) simple, apparently truncate; right cercus-basipodite

(RCB) small, with a peg-like extension posteriorly on the inner side. 9? unknown.
Locality—Sudan; type in the Vienna Museum (not seen by the author).

LEPTEMBIA SURCOUFI (Navas 1933). Figs. 5-10.

Embia surcoufi Navas, 1933, Broteria, Serie trimestral, Vol. 2, fase. 1.

Navas (l.c.) has noted the similarity to the genotype of Leptembia, without
accepting Krauss’s genus. The following description is from Navas’s unique type
(Muséum d’Histoire naturelle, Paris) :

6. Length 14:5 mm.; head 2:3 mm. x 1:9 mm.; forewing 11-5 mm. x 3:0 mm.;
hindwing 10:-5 mm. x 3-4 mm. Body and legs pale orange-brown, head black,
abdomen darker posteriorly; wing-veins dark brown, bordered by smoky-brown
bands. Hyes black, antennae dark brown. Head (Fig. 5) with eyes large,
prominent; sides behind eyes straight, converging strongly. Antennae incomplete.
Wings (Fig. 6) as in L. hamifera. Hind tarsi (Fig. 7) with two large ventral
bladders on first segment, one on second. Terminalia (Figs. 8-9) with tenth
abdominal tergite completely divided; right hemitergite (10R) large, convex, with

Figs. 5-10.—Leptembia surcoufi (Navas), holotype ¢%. 5. Head from above, x 7.

6. Left, forewing, x 7. 7. Hind tarsus viewed laterally, x 18. 8. Terminalia from above,
x 13. 9. Terminalia from below, x 13. 10. Terminalia from above after Navas, 1933,
Fig. 90.

Figures 5-9 prepared with constant reference to an ocular micrometer. Setae omitted
except in Figures 7 and 10.

a large oblique postero-ventral process (10RP,), the two ends of which are acute,
with a shallow distal concavity between. Inner margin of 10R produced forwards
to a process (10RP.), anteriorly separated from 10R by membraneous areas. Left
hemitergite (10L) smaller, inner margin produced back to a slender tapered process
(10LP), acute, curving outward distally. Right cercus composed of two sub-
cylindrical segments (RC,, RC.) ; cercus-basipodite (RCB) small. First segment of
left cereus (LC,) subeylindrical; inner margin produced near base to a forwardly-

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 495

directed echinulate lobe, broader than in L. hamifera. Second segment (LC.)
elongate-subcylindrical. Ninth sternite (H) produced backwards to a tapered
process (HP), between which and the base of LC, is the left cercus-basipodite
(LCB), embedded in membrane; LCB with a blunt flap directed upward near the
base of LC,, and with a terminal truncate portion adjacent to HP.

I publish without comment a tracing of the figure of Navas (l.c., Fig. 90), a
dorsal view of the terminalia of this specimen. 9 unknown.

Locality —Zambesia: Chemba, coll. I. Surcouf, Nov. 1928 (Mus. Paris).

Key to the Species of Leptembia (¢).
1. Echinulate lobe of first segment of left cercus subterminal ........ hamifera Krauss
Echinulate lobe of first segment of left cercus basal .............. surcoufi (Navas)

List of References.
ENDERLEIN, G., 1912.—Embiidinen, in Coll. zool. de Selys-Longchamps, fasc. 3.
Krauss, H. A., 1911.—Monographie der Embien. Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23 (Stuttgart).
NavAs, L., 1933.—Décadas de insectos nuevos. Década 23. Brotéria, Série trimestral,
Vol. 2, fase. 1.

496

ELEMENTARY HYDROGRAPHY OF SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA.

By FRANK A. CRAFT, B.Sc.*

(Ten Text-figures. )

[Read 25th October, 1939.]

Introduction and Acknowledgements.—This paper is a preliminary attempt to
collect and evaluate some of the geographical facts disclosed by stream gauging
Statistics cover many of the largest rivers of the
region, and it is not anticipated that future information will affect the general
tenor of the conclusions reached herein.

The statistics employed were made available by the Hydrographic Branch
of the N.S.W. Water Conservation and Irrigation Commission. The writer’s thanks
are tendered to many of the officers of that. service, including Messrs. H. H. Dare
and G. Evatt (Commissioners), the late Mr. A. Morrison, and Messrs. V. T. England
and G. E. Robinson. The essentials of the paper were prepared in the University
of Sydney Department of Geography, which is under the direction of Professor

in south-eastern Australia.

J. Macdonald Holmes.

ed TASH T/T/

}

Text-fig. 1.—Locality map, with
key to stations enumerated in Table 1.
A number of stations have been
omitted because of shortness of record,
lack of continuity of record, or lack
of significance by comparison with
longer-established or higher-class
stations recording flows of similar
magnitude on the same river.

* This research was undertaken whilst the writer held a Linnean Macleay Fellowship

oy the Society in Geography.

BY F. A. CRAFT. 497

MEAN VOLUMES

Widths show

annual volumes

in millions of

acre feet

Text-fig. 2.—Map to show volumes discharged by the principal gauged streams,
Notice that many of the coastal streams have no significant gaugings, and are thus
represented by blank spaces.

Distribution of Flows and Catchments.

The principal facts are set out in Tables 1 and 2, and Text-figs. 2 and 3.
There is an apparent predominance of the south-eastern group of streams,
especially those flowing to the Murray. This is partly offset by the coastal rivers
Clarence and Fitzroy, and by the Macleay, Burdekin, Mary, and Burnet. Of the
latter group, the Macleay and Burdekin have not been gauged at all in their main
channels, and the others have only short records.. However, all except the Burdekin
are probably smaller, in average discharge, than those set out below (Table 2).
Attention is particularly drawn to the tremendous variations between maximum

00

498 ELEMENTARY TWYDROGRAPHY OF SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA,

acre ft/sq.mile
2200

1000
600
400
200
100
50
29

7
de W.

ley arregzo
/ iS)

aS
i

ey,
a

Text-fig. 3—Map to show the distribution of the principal stream catchments, so far
as they are known. The inland limit of productive catchments is shown, whilst the
names inserted within this limit (Warrego, Balonne, ete.), with their enclosing lines, show
the approximate distribution of the main billabong and distributary areas.

and minimum annual totals, and the caution that must be used when discussing
matters on the basis of average values.

Although the greatest streams attain a fair average volume, this is mainly
due to the run-off from limited areas of headwater country. Many of the rivers
are only gauged low down on their courses, outside the main plateau zone, but in
every case where tributaries from the highlands are measured separately, they are
found to contribute a volume quite out of proportion to the ratio between their
catchment areas and those of the main streams. A few of the outstanding examples
are given (Table 3).

pe 1s Ne CNet, 499

In other words, we envisage a typical catchment of south-eastern Australia,
whether belonging to the coastal or Murray-Darling system, as consisting of a
limited area of headwater country with a high run-off, and a great area with a low
run-off. The catchments on which this paper is based cover rather more than
400,000 square miles, exclusive of the areic plains of the lower Darling. Of this
area, 12,600 square miles, or 3:-4% of the total, have a run-off greater than an
equivalent depth of 10 inches (25:4 cm.) per annum, and the proportion might
be considerably reduced if the upper Goulburn (Vic.), the Ovens and the Mitta
basins, aggregating 8,000 square miles, did not have to be included en bloc. The
portion with an equivalent annual depth of run-off greater than 3 inches is only
12:5% of the total considered.

In order to find why a few limited districts are so productive of water we
may consider the highest points in Australia, about Mt. Kosciusko, where the
Tooma and Swampy Plain (Murray system), and the Snowy and Tumut Rivers
rise. It has already been indicated that the district has a notable orographical
rainfall much in excess of that of the nearby valleys to the west, and of those
highlands slightly on the eastern or leeward side (Craft, 1934). It is also likely
that their summer evaporation is low, not only on account of altitude and lower
temperature, but also because of the daily formation of cloud due to local con-
vection. In the summer months, particularly on the hotter days, cumulus gathers
from 10 a.m. onwards, and by early afternoon it has covered 50% to 80% of the
sky, with a boundary sharply defined by the edge of the higher plateau (4,500
feet plus). Apart from thunderstorms, which help to keep the catchments moist,
this cloud has an obvious blanketing effect.

Similar conditions also apply to the Victorian heights at the heads of the
Mitta, Goulburn and Latrobe Rivers, and with other streams, such as the eastern
tributaries of the Shoalhaven, Wollondilly and Nepean Rivers, there is an almost
daily indraught of air in the warmer season. This affects the country to a
distance of 50 miles inland, and gives coolness, moisture, frequent mists on
the higher points, and much cloud.

Other convection centres occur at Gangerang (Blue Mountains), Moonbi
Ranges, Barrington Tops (Namoi-Hunter-Manning focus), and the Macleay-Dorrigo
and Nymboida scarps facing respectively eastward and northward on the north-
eastern coast of New South Wales. The phenomenon is, of course, well known
in tropical regions.

The foregoing are some of the more notable cases observed in the field, and
it is worthy of notice that all have considerable areas of swamp land, especially
those in the south-eastern highlands of the continent. In the more northerly
plateaus of New England and of eastern Queensland, the swamps tend to dry up
in their respective dry seasons, whilst in the isolated areas of higher run-off, like
the Nymboida (Clarence) and upper Brisbane valleys, the moist areas are mostly
in the rain-forests of slopes or scarps. Generally speaking, these latter cases appear
to be much less influenced by swamp or moist soil areas than those of the cooler
regions.

It is certain, from rain and stream records, that rainfall on the select areas
is higher than usual (cf. Text-fig. 3). This would probably be emphasized if
rainfall stations were not located consistently in valley settlements, to the exclusion
of the top country. It is also reasonable to suppose, as we have indicated, that
there is a lower evaporation in these major contributing places, giving an
additional reason for the existence of the swamps, and the effectiveness of the

500 ELEMENTARY ILTYDROGRAPITY OF SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA,

districts concerned for both high- and low-water run-off. The very presence of the
swamps must further tend to check evaporation and to conserve water.

Whilst we have definite information of the gathering grounds of the stream
water, the extent and nature of losses are very uncertain. Thus Balonne River—
the Queensland trunk stream of the Darling—appears to lose much of its water
by evaporation from swamps and distributaries before its “through” channel, the
Culgoa, joins the Barwon to form the name stream, Darling River. The Macquarie
and Lachlan both degenerate into many distributaries; 37% of the original volume
of the Lachlan passes Booligal, and only a portion of this finds its way to the

REGIMES

RELATIONSHIP

tuumn| Winter|Spring|SummerAutums

Maxima Minima

Text-fig. 4.—Regimes for the principal rivers of the region. Station numbers are
shown. Sach polygon contains 13 ordinates, from January to January. The ordinates
are percentages of yearly averages. The inset gives a summary of the types; for instance,
2a has summer and winter maxima, autumn minimum.

BY F. A. CRAFT. 501

Murray. The position is so well recognized that Lachlan water is excluded, as
inconsiderable, from River Murray agreements between the States and the
Commonwealth.

The main stream, Murray, appears to lose 20% of the water originally
contributed to it, the loss being estimated between the tributary gauges and the
confluence with the Darling. Streams like Wimmera, Paroo and Warrego, flowing
on the arid borderlands, do not contribute to the main rivers.

Stream Characteristics.

Regimes and their Classification.—The regimes disclose four principal stream
types, namely:

1. Queensland Type.—Summer maximum, low at other seasons, with
spring minimum.

2. Transition Type.—a. Barwon Subdivision; summer and winter maxima,
autumn minimum. 0b. Clarence Subdivision; summer and winter
maxima, spring minimum.

3. Sydney Coastal Type—Autumn or winter maximum, spring or early
summer minimum.

4. Victorian Type.—Winter or spring maximum, minimum in late summer
or autumn.

The letters ‘“a’ and “b” (Text-fig. 4) show the earlier and later incidence,
respectively, of phases in the northern and southern streams of the type.

This classification is brought out by the map (Text-fig. 4). The incidence of
maxima and minima for individual stations of types 1 and 4 is reasonably constant.
Thus the maximum flow of a river like the Murray is always found within
the range of the cooler season (Jun.—Nov.), with most occurrences in
September—October. Similarly, the maximum of a river like the Fitzroy always
occurs in summer. In contrast, the coastal streams of type 3 are likely to have
a maximum for a given year in almost any month. The Nepean and Shoalhaven
are characteristic: the regime laid down on averages is much less realistic than
with the other types, and is really a summation of chance storms.

The combination of summer and winter influences in the Transition type, 2,
is well shown by the Darling system, but it is not a constant factor (Text-fig. 5).
The Barwon at Walgett is dominated by winter flow in years above the average,
but summer flow is a little greater than winter in minimal years. With the
Namoi, the winter flow is the greater under all conditions, but the two rivers have
this much in common—summer flow varies much less than winter fiow. In this
area of approximately equal average rainfall at all seasons, the winter rain for
run-off comes mainly in 37% to 38% of the seasons. Summer run-off is, however,
more widely distributed in time.

In general, the only notable difference between the incidence of a rainy
season, on one hand, and major flow, on the other, is found in the south. Here
a prolongation of the winter rains into September and October gives a later
maximum flow than is shown elsewhere in the Victorian type. The effect of
melting snow trom the hills over 5,000 feet is a minor factor, and it does not
give the double maximum usually found under such conditions of climate. This
will be readily understood when the small area of appreciable snow storage is
remembered; this amounts to something of the order of 500 square miles, at
most, for the whole of south-eastern Australia, split up amongst a number of
rivers. This estimate excludes the forest country intermittently covered with snow

502 ELEMENTARY HYDROGRAPHY OF SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA,

Bar won

2
e 3
on
Sa)
J
x
wo
g 4
en

Each division

Text-fig. 5.—Partial regimes for the transition rivers. In each case, the upper curve
is the regime for years above their annual average; the lower curve represents the
balance. Summer flows tend to predominate in a majority of years, but strong winter
influences in a minority of years give the observed higher winter maximum. Periods:
1.—above average, 15 years; below average, 26 years; 2.—above, 17 years; below, 28
years: 3.—above, 14 years; below, 385 years. Stations are: Barwon, 2; Darling, 15;
Namoi, 60 on Key.

in winter to a depth of a foot or more, liable to complete melting and replace-
ment within the winter itself. (See also Craft, 1934, 316, 317, 324).

In the warmer regions of more inconstant flow, the streams depend on the
greater rainstorms for their volume. Failure of these storms, even without
temporarily arid or drought conditions, will give a season of minimal flows. This
is very marked on the Queensland coast, where the large drainage areas give
enhanced flows. The Fitzroy has already been quoted in this regard, and a
comparison of its greatest and least flows with those of the Murray is instructive
(Table 2).

All told, the averages and diagrams based on them give a fair indication of
discharges and regimes for the south-eastern streams, but they should not be
relied on beyond a certain point for northern New South Wales, and for the whole
of Queensland. :

Variability of Flow.

The tables of figures give some idea of the differences met in the annual
totals of the various stations, and they lead to the consideration of the relative
importance of extremely low and high flows in stream economy. Some con-
sideration of seasonal and annual variability may be added.

Extremes of Flow.—Flows of exceptionally great magnitude were examined
on a monthly basis, the figure of 200% of the monthly mean being chosen rather
arbitrarily as the lower limit. That is, if the mean for a given month at a
given station were 100 units, and an individual record for that month was 205

BY EF. A. CRANT. 503

units, the whole 205 would be credited as an exceptional flow for that month. This
was done because the size of each average is largely determined by the greater
flows, which are few in actual number, and are usually well above the 200%
limit. On the other hand, the usual totals were considerably below the average.
Quartile and octile groupings were tried before the arbitrary figure was adopted,
but without success.

Having obtained all the exceptional flows for one month, the next month was
treated in a similar manner, and finally the twelve monthly totals were added
together. The gross figure thus obtained was expressed as the percentage of
the total flow of water recorded at the station for the whole period of gauging.
Thus a figure of 58% for the Warragamba indicates that 58% of the total water
recorded as passing that station did so in months 100% or more above their
respective monthly averages.

It was found that stations located at different points on the same river gave
very similar results, and that three distinct groupings appeared, namely:
a,—Streams of the south-eastern highlands, which owe a comparatively small
proportion of their totals to exceptional flows, the Murrumbidgee being the
northern limit of the type; b,—Streams of the central coastal region, between
Brisbane and Sydney, owe more than half their volumes to exceptional flows;
c,—Streams rising in the lower and drier highlands, or in the cyclonic storm
areas of the eastern coast of Queensland, owe the greater part of their flow to
exceptional months. The outstanding records are as follows (see also Text-fig. 6):

Percentages of Total Volumes due to months of Excessive Flow (more than 200%
of monthly means).

Group 1—less than 50%.—Uatrobe 8; Yarra 12; Snowy (Jindabyne) 18;
Murray (Albury) 20; Tumut 22; Mitchell, Ovens, ea. 25; Murrumbidgee
(Gundagai) 32; Glenelg (Sandford) 40.

Group 2—50% to 60%.—Clarence (Newbold-Gorge) 53; Brisbane (Lowood)
57; Yass 57; Warragamba 58; Hunter (Singleton) 59.

Group 3—more than 60%.—Namoi (Narrabri) 62; Shoalhaven (Welcome
Reefs) 62; Lachlan (Cowra) 63; Nepean (Penrith) 63; Macquarie (Dubbo) 64;
Barwon (Walgett) 65; Peel (Bowling Alley) 66; Darling (Menindie) 67; Fitzroy
(Wattlebank) 70; Colo 71; Lockyer Creek 76; Dawson (Taroom) 81.

A calculation was also made for exceptionally low recordings. In this case,
the amount of water passing does not have a great effect on the total, but the
number of months subject to minimal flow is of great importance, especially from
the economic standpoint. It was found that groups of very low recordings occur
at many stations, and the actual number less than 20% of their respective monthly
means was determined, and expressed as a percentage of the total number of
months for which readings have actually been made. Thus a figure of 10% for
the Mitchell indicates that 10% of months have recordings less than 20% of their
respective monthly averages. (Text-fig. 7.) ‘

Percentages of Months of Exceptionally Low Flow (less than 20% of means).

Group 1—less than 10% .—Uatrobe 0; Yarra 0; Snowy (Jindabyne) 1; Murray
(Albury) 1; Tumut 3; Ovens 8; Murrumbidgee (Gundagai) 8; Mitchell 10.

Group 2—20% to 40%.—Clarence 22; Hunter (Singleton) 27; Shoalhaven
(Welcome Reefs) 28; Brisbane (Lowood) 30; Warragamba 30; Glenelg (Sandford)
31: Namoi (Narrabri) 33; Lockyer Creek 33; Barwon (Walgett) 34; Nepean
(Penrith) 36.

504 ELEMENTARY HYDROGRAPHY OF SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA,

MAXIMA Wha. MINIMA

7/7 /\ 62-81 Lu Me 77 /\4\ -81
TIT I]} 53-59 YN, Av} TMIfT 22-36

O-10

————s}

Text-fig. 6—Dependence of streams for volume on maximum flows. All flows over
200% of their monthly means were totalled, and the complete total thus obtained was
expressed as a percentage of the gross volume measured for the stream in the whole of its
record. In the first group, 62% to 81% of the gross flow was due to these individual
exceptional flows; in the second, 53% to 59%; in the third, 40% down to 8%.

Text-fig. 7W—Percentages of months with flows less than 20% of their respective
means. A figure of “10’’ shows that only 1 month out of 10 (= 10%) fell below the
mean for the month of record. Notice the close correspondence with Text-fig. 6. The
south-eastern rivers have few exceptionally low months; the inland and north-western
have many—up to four-fifths of the total number of months recorded.

Group 38—more than 40%.—Lachlan (Cowra) 41; Macquarie (Dubbo) 41;
Peel (Bowling Alley) 42; Colo 44; Darling (Menindie) 44; Fitzroy (Wattlebank)
70; Dawson (Taroom) 81.

These figures show conclusively that streams which rely on exceptional flows
to build up their monthly averages also have a large number of months which
contribute little to the discharge volume. There is a clear difference, on both
counts, between the south-eastern group and the remainder. Of that balance, the
rivers in the warmer northern section have the greatest number of months of
exceptionally low flows, and a high percentage of water derived from those of the
greatest magnitude.

In all this discussion the topographical factor should not be forgotten. Group 1,
in each of the above sets of figures, is associated with the highest of the plateau
country, but others of the higher and more abrupt plateaus also have a favourable
influence on stream discharges. This is brought out by the map of annual
variability.

Annual Variability (Text-fig. §)—This was calculated as percentage of varia-

4 are % : Standard Deviation
tion, according to the formula: Coefficient of Variation = ———————_——_——— x 100%.
Mean

When the probable error in calculating S.D. was greater than 15% of the S.D.,

BY F. A. CRAFT. 505

the result was discarded. In general, a 12-year record was the minimum necessary
to give a figure within the limit imposed. The accepted values are given in
Table 1.

In broad outlines, the map corresponds with the facts obtained by the study
of exceptional flows. The south-eastern rivers are the least variable, and are
followed by some members of the east coastal group, in country easily penetrated
by the inward drift of moist air from the eastern coast.

/

Witt kee
{if
ALLEL

VARIABILITY ! iy
RIVER im i]
119 Rainfall “Reliability |
after J. Andrews
PPT
40 Phtd daa
35

oft

IVE
(/
\ oS

35 Cann
emer Tl
eae a

ca

Pritikin

ns

PITEEL LWW

ns a
Vdeermgp prt

il Nf

Text-fig. 8.—Coefficients of variation for recorded catchments. The lowest figures
indicate the least variability, and the highest show the greatest variability. The value
of average figures varies accordingly, being greatest when variability is least. For
rainfall, the higher the figure attached to the isolines, the greater the “reliability” of
rainfall. In the south, there is a general correspondence between variations of rain
and river: in the north, it is probable that rivers depend more on concentration than on
erude amount of rainfall.

506 ELEMENTARY HYDROGRAPHY OF SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA,

A zone of high variability extends along a NW-SE line from the Lachlan valley
to the Shoalhaven, recalling, in a shadowy manner, the southern Andes
(de Martonne, 1927). This feature is probably due, in part, to the occurrence
of lower and gentler topography here, associated with the northern limit of the
most constant and effective winter rains. At the same time, the south-eastern
highlands have a screening effect in winter, and there is a considerable flow of
descending air from the south-west. Towards the north, also, a similar feature
is repeated in the Queensland border country, to the north of New England
Plateau. In that case, the streams involved are Condamine River and Lockyer
Creek.

It is interesting to compare stream variability with rainfall ‘reliability’.
Using modal values, which exclude exceptionally low and high records, Andrews
(1932) obtained a map of which some details have been reproduced here (Text-
fig. 8). It will be realized, of course, that the river stations represent flows from

5000 cusec
intervals

Text-fig. 9.—Types of flood curves, drawn from daily discharges. 1 (Station 54,
Murrumbidgee, Aug.-Oct., 1916) shows two “flash’’ floods due to separate periods of
concentrated rainfall. 2 (Station 50, Murray, June-Oct., 1931) shows the most severe
flood phase recorded for that station; one major period of rain was experienced to give
a symmetrical curve. 3 (Station 50, July-Oct., 1917) gives a saw-toothed curve due to
heavy rainfall experienced at repeated intervals, and giving the greatest seasonal flow
recorded for the station. 4 (Station 15, Darling, Sept.-Dec., 1931) demonstrates the slow
rise and fall of a river of low gradient, derived from vast areas of country, with natural
equalizers in the form of distributary ‘deltas’. 5 (Station 79, Warragamba, May-June,
1930) shows ‘‘flash’”’ floods, one of extreme type, derived from a compact, relatively small
catchment in a period of heavy general rainfall.

BY F. A. CRAFT. 507

the higher, more rugged, and less settled country rather than the lower lands,
whilst the rainfall stations are located in valleys or on plains. For this reason,
the writer believes that rainfall “reliability” isolines for the south-eastern
highlands cannot be accurately drawn. A similar condition, of affairs might well
prevail for much of the Main Divide highlands.

On the whole, however, there are marked correspondences between the two
sets of values. Both show less variable conditions in the south-east than elsewhere;
both emphasize the NW-SE area of greater variability which has been described
above, with differentiation along the line of the highlands proceeding northwards.
In this respect they vary from Taylor’s earlier map of rainfall “reliability”, based
on departures from the average, which gives isolines concentric about the centre
of the continent. On the basis of what has been disclosed above, respecting the
distribution of exceptionally low and high flows, it will be agreed that Andrews’
map, empirical though it is, gives a more realistic picture than Taylor’s (1920).

Variation of Streams with Rainfall—The “station profiles’ are continuous
curves showing the height of the river at a particular station for each day. If
translated into terms of volume by reference to station rating curves, the quick
rise and fall which they show become still more apparent (Text-fig. 9). The
small portions published give some idea of conditions met.

With regard to the seasonal aspect, the writer made an investigation of
conditions on the upper Murray which, as we have seen, is one of the most constant
of the rivers, as well as one of the largest. For the Jingellic and Albury gauging
stations, there was a positive correlation between winter (May—October) rainfall
and winter flow (June—November), taking the actual totals of precipitation and
rainfall in each case. This correlation varied from 0-78 to 0-86, + 0-03 to 0-04,
with a period of 42 years for Jingellic and 55 years for Albury (1935, 131). (See
also Text-fig. 10.)

For the upper Murray catchments, then, the volume of rainfall is the main
factor determining winter flow. It must be borne in mind that the greatest’ run-off
takes place from alpine or forested areas, and that conditions are as normal as
they can be in the region. For the storage of snow, it corrects itself within the
season, thus causing no error of any consequence in the correlation.

In fact, there can be little delayed run-off, or carry-over from winter to
summer, and if such a conclusion is reached for a river ‘like the upper Murray,
it can hardly be departed from in the cases of the less constant rivers with lesser
facilities for water storage in the shape of swamp, marsh, or other moist soil
areas.

It should also be remarked that the station profiles establish this conclusion
independently. The quick rise to a crest, and the rapid fall from it for individual
rises or “freshes” show that there is little delayed run-off. In the cooler lands,
the seasons with monthly totals above the average (and, indeed, those below the
average, too) owe these to a whole series of “freshes’, separated by phases of
lower levels and smaller flows. The only divergences from this rule occur at those
rare times when there are closely-spaced rainstorms extending over a period of
weeks, or even months. In this respect, the major floods and inundations of the
River Murray are worthy of special notice. Relatively high levels have been
maintained at such times by exceptional incidence of rain. (Text-fig. 9, 3.)

In this cooler region, with its greater “reliability” of rainfall, exceptionally
humid periods are long, extending over a number of seasons: the group of years
1916 to 1918 is a case in point. On the other hand, invasions of semi-arid

508 ELEMENTARY HYDROGRAPHY OF SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA,

conditions are rare, but they may persist even through the winter season, as in
1902.

In the warmer regions, the exceptionally high flows are produced by severe
storms of limited duration, and the succeeding periods of low water are more
emphatic and prolonged than those in the more constant south. For example, the
first three months of 1917 showed the Fitzroy discharging 5,623; 2,558; and 3,560
units (x 10% acre feet) respectively. The discharge for April was only 81 units, and
the next four months were also below their respective averages.

tunit river = 10° ac.ft.

1 + rain —o-oinch

Text-fig. 10.—la shows the Murray at Albury in 1917. and rainfall at Batlow in the
Same year; 1b treats the same group in 1902. 2a shows the Brisbane River at Lowood,
and Esk rainfall station, in the middle valley of the river, for 1926-27; 2b is for the
same group in 1922-23. Note the logarithmic scale of the ordinates. There is,a general
similarity between rainfall and river curves, which appear to keep closer together in the
south. This is a suggestion pointing to future research.

The variations of flow in this warm country produced by varying intensities
of rainfall are suggested by Text-fig. 10, parts 2a, b. The rainfall station chosen—
Esk—in the middle Brisbane valley, has a record similar to those of other rain-
recording points of the catchment, and might be expected to be representative.
The periods of maximum and minimum river flow recorded were chosen, and the
corresponding rainfall curves drawn to match them. With (a), a rainfall of 49
inches was enough to give a river flow of 2,085,000 acre feet; with (b), a rainfall
of 32 inches gave a mere 80,000 acre feet, or 3-8% of the other. Such differences

BY F. A. CRAFT. 509

might appear fantastic if they were not discernible in all the rain and river
statistics of the summer rainfall type.

The portion of the run-off which is delayed by storage in the catchments is
used to supply the drought flow of streams, and is thus economically important,
even although it is small. There is no indication that it forms a considerable
fraction of the normal low-water flow—that is, in times when there is the usual
rainfall. It has been indicated that this is the case even in the cooler and higher
districts.

As an example, the Snowy at Jindabyne shows a tendency to decrease to a
volume of 5,000 to 6,000 acre-feet per month after two consecutive drought months
(rainfall less than 0-5 inch per month as shown by each of the three nearest
rainfall stations). This flow represents a depth of 0:13 to 0:16 inch for the
catchment involved, so that delayed run-off from this productive catchment is by
no means great. It must be noted that two successive drought months are a rarity
here, there is much cloud, and there are considerable areas of Swamp and moist
soil.

A sound conclusion appears to be that very little of the water which finds
its way into streams is delayed for any considerable time in the catchments—
say, for a period of a month or more.

References.

ANDREWS, J., 1932.—Rainfall Reliability in Australia. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lIvii, 95.
CraFrt, F. A., 1934.—Regimes and Cyclical Volume Changes of the upper Murray and
Snowy Rivers, N.S.W. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., lix, 314.
, 1935.—The Relationship between Erosion and Hydrographic Changes in the
Upper Murray Catchment, N.S.W. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ix, 121.
MARTONNE, E. bE, 1927.—Regions of Interior-Basin Drainage. Geog. Rev., xvii, 397.
TAYLOR, GRIFFITH, 1920.—Australian Meteorology, Oxford.

TABLE 1.

Principal statistical details for the rivers of south-eastern Australia, showing lengths of records, areas of catchments,
run-off in acre feet per sq. mile (see also table on teat-fig. 3), mean run-off, and coefficient of variation, omitting
doubtful cases.

Notes.—x1, ana-branch of Murray, which rejoins the main river ; x2, excluding 1918, a year of high flow ;
x3, too low, cf. No. 61; x4, minor regulation by water supply dams, which now intercept a greater proportion
of flow ; x5, for comparison of flow and variability ; x6, principal Lachlan distributary ; x7, cross stream,
Murrumbidgee to Murray.

Flow.

Record. Catchment. Var.

“No. River and Station. ——_—__——— §q. miles. Per %

Start. Years. Acre feet. sq. m.

1 Avoca, Coonooer. . 33 ws 1890 35 1,029 63,000 61 80
2 Barwon, Walgett Ee hs 1886 45 53,500 1,122,000 21 78
3 Bell, Wellington oe be 1913 21 710 72,000 101 100
4 Belubula, Canowindra .. ate 1909 25 816 112,000 Nz 95
® Billabong, Cocketgedong a 1916 15 — 54,500 — 112
6 Brisbane, Lowood Ac D0 1910 22 3,950 655,000 166 81
i Broken, Goorambat si te 1887 47 . 730 223,000 306 95
8 Campaspe, Rochester .. Be 1886 48 1,350 208,000 154 —
9 Chichester, Dam ae aS 1913 14 76 130,000 1,710 —_—
10 Clarence, Tabulam ae ae 1917 16 1,724 526,000 305 89
11 an Gorge-Newbold he 1917 16 6,674 2,143,000 321 77
12 Colo, Upper Colo Ae A 1910 23 1,680 338,000 202 79
13 Condamine, Chinchilla .. wa 1925 7 7,366 177,000 24 —_—

14 Corang, Hockey’s an a 1925 9 — 42,000 — —

ELEMENTARY TWYDROGRAPHY

River and Station.

oo Nn ee

on

bo bo bb bo bo bo
rag

for)

eonoc,n

or ot Or Or Or Or ot
NO ork WN ©

or ¢

Darling, Menindie
Dawson, Taroom

Glebe
Dumaresq, Riverton
Edward, Deniliquin x1
Fitzroy, Wattlebank x2
Glenelg, Sandford
Goodradigbee, Brindabella

3 Wee Jasper
Goulburn, Murchison (Vic.)
Goulburn, Rosemount (N.S.W.)
Hawkesbury and Tributaries—

Short Records—

Hawkesbury, Richmond x3

Cox, Cedar Vale ,
Nepean, Pheasant’s Nest
> Wallacia x4
Wollondilly, Burragorang

Hunter, Moonan Flat

5 Muswellbrook ..

5 Singleton
Indi, Bringenbrong
Kiewa, Kiewa
Lachlan, Wyangala

+5 Cowra ..

55 Forbes . .

a6 Booligal
Latrobe, Rosedale
Lockyer, Tarampa
Loddon, Bridgewater
Macalister, Maffra
Macintyre, Boggabilla
Macquarie, Wellington

a Dubbo

5 Warren
Mitchell, Bairnsdale
Mitta, Tallangatta
Molonglo, Yarralumla
Mongarlowe, Charleyong
Murray, Bringenbrong ..

3 Jingellic
5 Albury
op Barham. .

a Mildura ; a3
Murrumbidgee, Cotter Junction
a Gundagai

5 Wagga
5 Hay
oh Balranald
Namoi, Old Cuerindi
35 Gunnedah
Narrabri

Nepean, Penrith
Nymboida, Bueearumbi
Ovens, Wangaratta
Peel, Bowling Alley

OF

SOUTH-EASTERN

TABLE 1.—Continued.

AUSTRALIA,

Record. Catchment.
Sq. miles.

Start. Years.
1885 49 221,675
1911 21 6,100
1924 8 8,500
1920 13 2,000
1898 36 —
1915 16 53,286
1900 20 3,300
1919 12 _—
1915 19 443
1882 52 3,966
1907 12 3,100
1926 5 4,600
1927 6 1,040
1924 10 274
1924 10 —
1926 7 1,813
1912 22 290
1907 27 1,630
1898 36 6,580
1908 13 493
1886 48 434
1920 14 3,200
1893 41 4,470
1893 41 7,550
1909 25 =
1901 19 1,475
1910 22 965
1882 52 1,856
1901 9 850
1925 8 9,050
1909 25 5,482
1886 48 7,690
1902 31
1890 32 1,770
1886 48 5990
1927 7 700
1925 8 —
1906 15 820
1891 42 2,520
1877 57 6,500
1905 29 —_
1877 56 92,000
1927 Gi 2,660
1887 46 8,400
1885 49 10,700
1887 47 17,520
1887 47 _
1916 17 940
1912 21 6,600
1892 41 9,800
1892 42 4,240
1922 11 1,888
1887 47 2,090
1916 17 130

Flow.

Acre feet.

2,386,000
328,000
540,000
215,000

1,570,000

3,450,000
599,000
116,000
315,000

2,384,000
134,000

925,000
314,000
154,000
219,000
320,000
92,000
310,000
685,000
442,000
554,000
519,000
540,000
577,000
215,000
693,000
66,000
201,000
292,000
474,000
605,000
710,000
574,000
686,000
1,079,000
51,000
81,000
1,140,000
1,897,000
3,657,000
4,126,000
8,095,000
486,000
2.723.000
2,830,000
2,239,000
2,133,000
182,000
431,000
517,000
958.000
969,000
1,191.000
66,000

BY F. A. CRAFT. Bilt

TABLE 1.—Continued.

Flow.
Record. Catchment. ———————————————___ FVar.
No. River and Station. ——___—_—_—_————._ §q. miles. Per Of
Start. Years. Acre feet. Sq. m.
65 Peel, Carroll Gap sys ets 1924 8 1,800 116,000 64 —
66 Shoalhaven, Warri at atc 1915 i 572 192,000 335 119
67 a Welcome Reefs .. 1910 22 1,066 ~ 352,000 330 106
68 Snowy, Jindabyne A se 1903 31 716 951,000 1,330 32
69 aa Orbost .. 5 Ae 1907 18 5,210 1,749,000 336 36
70 Stanley, Silverton BG Pe 1916 16 515 465,000 902 80
7k Swampy Plain, Indi... ae 1906 8 320 616,000 1,926 —
72 Ag as Khancoban .. 1927 7 228 436,000 1,912 —
73 Tambo, Bruthen ne Age 1906 19 1,040 212,000 204 62
74 Thames (England) x5 ye 1904 28 — 2,120.000 — 29
75 Thomson, Heyfield ag ate 1901 21 550 323,000 587 34
76 Tooma, Warbrook Ns a 1910 11 713 634,000 888 —
77 a5 Possum Point .. af 1927 7 189 415,000 2,200 —
78 Tumut, Tumut .. Aes Sve 1905 29 980 1,017,000 1,036 46
79 Warragamba, Nepean J. ae 1904 30 3,383 590,000 174 58
80 Willandra, Tocabil x6 .. a6 1921 13 — 113,000 — oo
81 Wimmera, Horsham wie os 1889 36 1,530 144,000 94 88
82 Yanko Ck., Offtake x7 ie 1902 26 — 205,000 — 89
83 Yarra, Warrandyte ma Si 1892 33 972 740,000 17 31
84 Yarrangobilly, Caves... x3 1911 20 _ 51,000 — 49
85 Yass, Yass Bee e: ef 1916 17 500 67,000 134 —
TABLE 2.

to

Largest streams gauged in Australia. Compare Text-fig.

Annual Flows.

Station Catchment Record Acre feet X 10°.
No. River. (Sq. mls.) Years.
Mean. Max. Min.
52 Murray in aie Ae 92.000 56 8.095 _ 24,452 1,320
20 Fitzroy .. ae a8 53.286 16 3.450 13,301 137
55 Murrumbidgee fe 50 10,700 49 2.830 7,712 384
15 Darling ae as oe 221,675 49 2.386 11,107 1
24 Goulburn .. See SA 3,966 52 2.384 6,202 567
11 Clarence .. te ns 6.674 16 2,143 6.066 532
69 Snowy a3 sve 0 5,210 18 1.749 2,972 776
63 Ovens ys Bis Ses 2,090 47 1,191 4.023 141
2 Barwon oe5 a a 53,500 45 emi 22: 3,866 16
45 Mitta Ae oO 60 1,990 48 1,079 3.370 238
78 Tumut wy Be Ae 980 29 1,017 2,387 283

61 Nepean he ite é0 4,240 42 958 2,947 67

512 ELEMENTARY HYDROGRAPHY OF SOUTILT-EASTERN AUSTRALIA,

TABLE 3.

Comparison of certain main stream catchments (including all headwaters) with gauged headwaters. Note the especial
productiveness of limited areas of the highlands.

Depth of Run-off.

Station River. Area. ———— —_—— ———
No. (Sq. miles.) Inches. Cm.
50 Murray .. an ne i sis 6,500 10°5 PAS'7/
30 Indi ss ste oF is ae 495 16°8 42-6
31 Kiewa ais ok we sia ee 454 23°9 60°7
io Swampy Plain .. ats a te 228 35°8 91-0
Ud Tooma te ee a'b te ns 189 41-0 104°2
54 Murrumbidgee .. ik as tee 8,400 6-1 15-5
23 Goodradigbee Be es te an 443 113983 33°38
78 Tumut a ae pie Re sts 980 19-3 49-0
69 Snowy Lf; shi Pe ats a 5.210 6°3 16:0
68 Snowy a is ia: ye Ee 716 24-9 63°3
29 Hunter .. vi; A ae 33 6.580 1:9 4°8
25 Hunter .. a eo Ae ee 290 6:0 15:2
59 Namoi vie ats te a Be 6,600 110%) oli
64 Peel a ele ahs 60 he 130 5 24-1

513

STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES.
By T. Harvey JOHNSTON and Patricia M. Mawson, University of Adelaide.
(Sixty-six Text-figures. )

[Read 25th October, 1939.1

The present communication is the fifth of a series dealing with the nematode
parasites of Australian marsupials, the earlier papers giving accounts based
largely on material from Queensland and Central Australia.

Twenty-five species are proposed as new and are distributed amongst eleven
genera, three of which (Cyclostrongylus, Parazoniolaimus, and Maplestonema) are
new.

Types of new species described in this report are deposited in the South
Australian Museum, Adelaide.

This investigation has been made possible by the Commonwealth Research
Grant to the University of Adelaide. We desire to acknowledge assistance in
regard to material from Professor J. B. Cleland; Messrs. L. Gallard, Narara;
A. S. Le Souef, Director, Sydney Zoological Gardens; and W. L. Rait, Adelaide.
Much of the material was collected by the senior author between 1908 and 1911
during his residence in New South Wales. The locality quoted as Lower Hawkes-
bury is in the vicinity of Milson Island and the township of Hawkesbury River.

List of Hosts and Parasites dealt with in this Paper.

Macropus rurus Desm.: Pharyngostrongylus alpha J. & M.; Zoniolaimus longi-
spicularis (Wood); Cloacina magnipapillata, n. sp.; C. longispiculata J. & M.

Macropus MAgor Shaw: Pharyngostrongylus alpha J. & M.; P. beta J. & M.;
Zoniolaimus longispicularis (Wood); Zoniolaimus sp.; Cloacina obtusa, n. sp.;
C. expansa, n. sp.; C. magnipapillata, n. sp.; Cyclostrongylus clelandi, n. gen., n. sp.

Macropus rospustus Gould: Pharyngostrongylus alpha J. & M.

MAcROPUS UALABATUS Less. & Garn.: Pharyngostrongylus alpha J. & M.: P. beta
J. & M.; P. epsilon J. & M.; Zoniolaimus ualabatus, n. sp.; Z. clelandi, n. sp.;
Z. setifer Cobb; Z. brevicaudatus Cobb; Parazoniolaimus collaris, n. gen., n. sp.;
Cloacina macropodis J. & M.; C. wallabiae, n. sp.; Cloacina sp.; Macropostrongylus
dissimilis, n. sp.; Cyclostrongylus wallabiae, n. gen., n. sp.; Cyclostrongylus
dissimilis, n. gen., n. sp.; Maplestonema typicum, n. gen., n. sp.

MACROPUS RUFICOLLIS Desm.: Pharyngostrongylus alpha J. & M.; P. beta J.& M.:
P. delta J. & M.; P. epsilon J. & M.; P. zeta J. & M.; P. eta J. & M.; P. brevis
Canavan; P. iota, n. sp.; P. macropodis Y. & M.; Macropostrongylus lesouefi, n. sp.;
M. wallabiae, n. sp.; Zoniolaimus communis J. & M.; Z. onychogale J. & M.;
Zoniolaimus sp.; Buccostrongylus australis J. & M.; Buccostrongylus setifer, n. sp.;
B. labiatus, n. sp.; Cyclostrongylus gallardi, n. gen., n. sp.; Austrostrongylus
wallabiae, n. sp.

Macropus PARMA Waterhouse: Pharyngostrongylus epsilon J. & M.; P. parma,
n. sp.

PP

514 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

MAcROPUS THETIDIS Lesson: Pharyngostrongylus alpha J. & M.; P. delta J. & M.;
P. epsilon J. & M.; P. zeta J. & M.; P. theta, n. sp.; Zoniolaimus sp.; Cloacina
bancroftorum J. & M.; C. similis J. & M.; C. thetidis, n. sp.; Cloacina sp.; Bucco-
strongylus buccalis J. & M.; Globocephaloides thetidis, n. sp.; Hypodontus thetidis,
Nn. sp.

TRICHOSURUS CANINUS Ogilby: Asymmetricostrongylus trichosuri, nN. sp.
PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS Yorke & Maplestone.

The original species, P. macropodis, was described by Yorke and Maplestone in
1926. Monnig in the same year described australis, attributing it to a preoccupied
genus Spirostrongylus, but transferred it in 1927 to Rugopharynz which was shown
by Wood (1929) to be a synonym of Pharyngostrongylus. This latter author
described P. woodwardi in 1930. Canavan in 1931 added P. brevis. We described
two others in 1938 and recently added four more (1939). In the present report
three others are described and host records relating to nine of the known species
are mentioned.

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS THETA, nN. Sp. Figs. 1-2.

From stomach, Macropus thetidis, New England.

Male 4:8; female 4:5 mm. Head with six small papillae; buccal cavity 9u
long; followed by transversely striated chitinized vestibule 0-04 mm. long, 8yu
internal and 14u external diameter, with wall becoming narrowed suddenly just
before joining oesophagus. Oesophagus 0:56 mm. long, anterior part 0-37 mm.,
followed by a narrower portion around beginning of which is nerve ring, posterior
region widening into bulb before joining intestine. Cervical papillae not observed.
Excretory pore at level of nerve ring.

Male: Bursa with ventral lobes very small and separated from each other as
well as from lateral lobes; lateral and dorsal lobes continuous, dorsal longer.
Ventral rays parallel, cleft nearly to base; not reaching edge of bursa; externo-
lateral shorter than, and slightly divergent from, laterals; laterals reaching edge
of bursa, cleft three-quarters of their length; externo-dorsal long, thin, arising
from same root as laterals, diverging from them, not reaching edge of bursa;
externo-lateral, laterals and externo-dorsal each elevate bursa into slight papilla
at their termination. Dorsal ray long, bifurcating just before its mid-length, each
of the two slender branches reaching bursal edge and giving off a very short
lateral ray at about mid-length. Spicules 1:9 mm. long, half of body length, stout,
with striated alae extending nearly to tips. Gubernaculum present, 404 long; with
a pair of less chitinized leaf-like alae extending alongside the spicules.

Female: Body tapering suddenly behind vulva and again behind anus; tail
pointed, 0-2 mm. long, ventrally directed; vagina muscular, 0°35 mm. long; vulva
0:13 mm. in front of anus; ripe eggs not seen.

The species differs from P. australis in its shorter length, the form of the
vestibule, length of the externo-dorsal ray, width of the dorsal ray, absence of
median dorsal thickening of the bursa, relatively longer spicules, and the absence
of papillae on the bursa. It differs from P. brevis in its shorter length, absence of
leaf crown and cervical papillae, relatively shorter spicules, and in the relatively
larger narrower vestibule. It can be distinguished from P. alpha and P. beta by
the different dorsal ray, the form of the bursa (which is not deeply subdivided),
and the absence of bursal papillae.

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS IOTA, Nn. sp. Figs. 3-4.
From Macropus ruficollis, Ourimbah, Gosford district (L. Gallard).

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON. 515

About 9 mm. long. Head with external leaf-crown similar to that of P. gamma,
with six similar papillae. Vestibule 1 mm. long,

P. macropodis, and P. eta;
Posterior end of very narrow oesophagus

0-2 mm. wide; without striations.
obscured by granular material, hence length not determined.

Male: Spicules 2:9 mm. long, one-third of body length. Bursa deeply lobed,
papillated. Ventral rays cleft, not quite reaching edge of bursa; externo-lateral
divergent from laterals near tip and shorter than laterals; laterals extending nearly

=

Gittee| EGGequmenanscan

Te PCORBBRRRABECEt

Figs. 1-2, Pharyngostrongylus theta. 1. bursa of male; 2. head.

Figs. 3-4, P. iota. 3. dorsal ray of bursa; 4. anterior end.

Figs. 5-7, P. parma. 5. head; 6. bursa; 7. posterior end of female.

Figs. 2 and 5 to same scale; figs. 1, 3, 4, and 6.

Figs. 8-10, Cyclostrongylus wallabiae. 8. head; 9. anterior end; 10. bursa.

Figs. 11-13, C. gallardi. 11. head, lateral view; 12. posterior end of female; 13. bursa.

Figs. 8 and 11 to same scale; figs. 9 and 12.

2,
Ay

516 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

to edge; externo-dorsal stout, arising separately, not reaching bursal edge. Dorsal
ray bifurcating at half-length and its branches not quite reaching edge, each
branch giving off a short lateral ray at about mid-length.

Female: Vagina exceedingly long (1-4 mm.), wide, with very small eggs
(0:07 mm. by 0:04 mm.); vulva 0-85 mm. and anus 0-63 mm. from tip of tail; tail
long, tapering.

This form is very like P. macropodis, P. gamma and P. eta, differing from
them in the absence of striations on the vestibule and in general measurements.
It most closely resembles P. gamma, differing in having a relatively narrower
vestibule, a much longer vagina and a stouter dorsal ray whose lateral rays are
more robust and relatively shorter, and whose terminal branches are longer.

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS PARMA, Nn. Sp. Figs. 5-7.

From oesophagus, Macropus parma, Narara, Gosford district (L. Gallard).

Filiform worms, tightly rolled; male 7°3 mm. long; females 6-7—7-5 mm. Body
ending abruptly at anterior end and surmounted by six small papillae. Mouth
opening 10u in diameter; continuous with, and of same width as, buccal cavity
(14u deep) and vestibule. Posterior part of buccal cavity surrounded by thick
chitinous ring about 4u long; followed by vestibule 154 long, and with stout
chitinous walls 9u thick at anterior end, narrowing posteriorly and marked with
radial striations. Oesophagus 0:54 mm. long, of uniform width until suddenly
constricted near its posterior end and then widening into a terminal elongated
bulb; nerve ring surrounding it at level of constriction, 0-4 mm. from anterior end;
excretory pore near base of oesophagus.

Male: Bursa large, lobes not divided from one another. Owing to the close-
ness of the helix it is very difficult to roll the bursa into a position allowing the
dorsal ray to be seen in dorsal view. Ventral rays reaching edge of bursa; externo-
lateral ray stout, tapering at tip, not reaching edge; laterals cleft for half their
length, reaching edge of bursa; externo-dorsal arising separately, stout, tapering,
shorter than externo-lateral. Dorsal ray dividing near its base into two long
narrow branches reaching nearly to edge of bursa and each giving off near its
origin a short stout lateral branch. Spicules 0-96 mm. long, 1:7:-6 of body length;
narrow, with striated alae; tips curved, bluntly pointed.

Female: Posterior end tapering; tail bluntly pointed, 0-3 mm. long; vulva
0:15 mm. in front of anus; vagina fairly long, wide. Eggs in vagina 0:1 x 0:04 mm.

This species differs from other members of the genus Pharyngostrongylus
chiefly in its attenuate form and coiled habit, and in the structure of the vestibule.

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS ALPHA Johnston & Mawson 19388.

This parasite has been identified amongst collections taken from the following
hosts: Macropus rufus, from Wentworth (coll. W. L. Rait); M. major, Coonamble;
M. ualabatus, Lower Hawkesbury (coll. J. B. Cleland): M. rujficollis, Bathurst
district; M. thetidis, New England; and M. robustus (robustus), N.S.W. (coll.
A. S. Le Souef, Sydney Zoological Gardens).

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS BETA Johnston & Mawson 1938.

From Macropus udlabatus, Lower Hawkesbury (coll. J. 3B. Cleland);
M. ruficollis from Bathurst district, Ourimbah (Gosford district), and Sydney
Zoological Gardens; and M. major, Coonamble.

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS GAMMA Johnston & Mawson 1938.
From Macropus ruficollis, Bathurst district.

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON. 517

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS DELTA Johnston & Mawson 1938.

From Macropus ruficollis, Bathurst district, and from Sydney Zoological
Gardens; M. major, Narrabri; and M. thetidis, New England.

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS EPSILON Johnston & Mawson 1938.

From Macropus ualabatus, Lower Hawkesbury River; M. parma, Gosford
district; M. thetidis, New England; and M. rujficollis, Bathurst district.

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS ZETA Johnston & Mawson 1938.
From Macropus rujicollis, Bathurst district; and M. thetidis, New England.

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS ETA Johnston & Mawson 1938.
From Macropus rujicollis, Bathurst district.

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS BREVIS Canavan 1931. ‘
From Macropus rujicollis, Bathurst district; and M. ualabatus, Lower Hawkes-
bury district.

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS MACROPODIS Yorke & Maplestone 1926.
Specimens, probably belonging to this species, were taken from Macropus
rujicollis from Bathurst district.

CYCLOSTRONGYLUS, nN. gen.

Trichoneminae; with long buccal capsule, thick cuticular collar around mouth,
the inner surface of which is marked with parallel longitudinal striations
extending into the buccal cavity and resembling at first sight a leaf crown of
Many narrow elements; arising from this collar are four submedian and two
lateral papillae. Oesophagus varies in form in different species. Main stem of
dorsal ray soon bifurcates, each branch giving off a short lateral ray. Posterior
end of female resembles that in Cloacina. From stomach of marsupials. Type,
C. wallabiae, n. sp., from Macropus ualabatus.

The generic name is applied because of the circumoral cuticular ring or
collar. The genus differs from Coronostrongylus in the absence of a leaf crown;
and from Pharyngostrongylus in the shape of the bursa and in the absence of a
vestibule. We have assigned to this genus, in addition to the type, two species
C. clelandi and C. gallardi. A fourth species, C. dissimilis, has been placed here
provisionally, but it probably belongs elsewhere, its state of preservation preventing
us from giving a sufficientiy detailed account of it.

CYCLOSTRONGYLUS WALLABIAE, nN. sp. Figs. 8-10.

From Macropus ualabatus, Lower Hawkesbury (coll. J. ‘B. Cleland).

Worms of moderate size; male 8-5 mm. long; female 5-1 mm.; somewhat coiled.
Anterior end rounded, surmounted by wide thick mouth-collar, bearing four small
submedian papillae and a pair of small rounded laterals. Mouth opening round,
large, leading into a long cylindrical buccal chamber 0-04 mm. long, 0-15 mm.
internal diameter, with the walls about 7» thick anteriorly but diminishing
posteriorly; walls marked with transverse striations. At base of buccal cavity a
rather disc-like wider ring of chitin lying against anterior end of oesophagus.
Latter 0:07 mm. long in male, 1:11 of body length; wider than buccal capsule; and
consisting of two parts—the anterior portion longer and narrowing suddenly at
level of nerve ring, 0-55 mm. from head end of worm; the posterior part widening
to form a bulb. Excretory pore at 0-56 mm., just behind nerve ring; cervical
papillae not seen.

518 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

Male: Spicules short; 0-7 mm. long, 1:12 of body length; with very narrow
striated alae. Gubernaculum not observed. Ventral lobes of bursa short, separate
from one another; dorsal lobe with wide median cleft. Ventral rays long, cleft
nearly to base: externo-lateral, short, lifting wall of bursa; laterals cleft nearly
to base, reaching edge of bursa; externo-dorsal arising separately, nearly reaching
bursal edge. Dorsal ray long, bifurcating soon after origin; each branch tapering
and forming projection on edge of dorsal lobe, and giving off short lateral ray at
about mid-length.

Female: The only available specimen is rather unsatisfactory. Body tapering
suddenly behind region of vagina to end in long bluntly-pointed tail. Uteri parallel;
vagina short; vulva at 0:25 mm., and anus at 0-2 mm. from tip of tail. Hgg in
vagina 0-041 x 0:025 mm.

CYCLOSTRONGYLUS GALLARDI, n. sp. Figs. 11-13.

From Macropus ruficollis, Ourimbah, Gosford district (LL. Gallard).

Male 4-5 mm. long; female 5-6 mm. Head with characteristic cuticular collar
round anterior end, through which the hypodermis projects in six small rounded
papillae. Mouth small, circular, 10u diameter, leading to narrow buccal cavity,
17u long, followed by wide buccal capsule 30u long, 124 wide internally, 19u wide
externally. Striations of hypodermis (resembling a leaf crown) 7u deep and not
reaching top of buccal cavity. Oesophagus 0°53 mm. long, 1:8-11 of body length;
longer anterior region of uniform width, becoming constricted suddenly, then
widening into large spherical bulb before joining intestine. Nerve ring around
oesophageal constriction, 0-48 mm. from anterior end of worm; excretory pore
just in front of nerve ring; cervical papillae not observed.

Male: Spicules 1:9-2 mm., 1:2-4 of body length; slender; with wide striated
alae and blunt tips. Gubernaculum small. Bursa large, ventral part shorter than
dorsal; lobes all joined but marked off by shallow indentations. Ventral rays cleft
nearly all their length, reaching bursal margin; externo-lateral divergent from
laterals, extending nearly to edge; medio- and postero-lateral cleft for half their
length, a little shorter than externo-lateral; externo-dorsal arising separately and
not reaching edge of bursa. Dorsal ray bifurcating after about one-third to one-
quarter its length, each branch almost immediately giving off a very short lateral
ray before extending nearly to edge of dorsal lobe; these branches relatively long
and parallel.

Female: Body tapering gradually to posterior end; tail bluntly pointed,
straight, 0-3 mm. long. Vagina muscular, 0-4 mm. long; vulva 0:13 mm. in front
of anus. Eggs in vagina 0:08 x 0:04 mm.

This species differs from C. wallabiae in the different form of the buccal
capsule, papillae and dorsal ray of the bursa; from C. clelandi in regard to the
lips, bursal rays and the characters of the buccal capsule; and from C. dissimilis
in the form of the oesophagus and the dorsal ray. (

CYCLOSTRONGYLUS CLELANDI, hn. sp. Figs. 14-15.

From Macropus major, Coonamble (coll. A. S. Le Souef).

Slender worms, 10-11 mm. long, widest in anterior third, with fine annulate
cuticular striations. Head surrounded by large cuticular mouth collar through
which project four short cylindrical submedian and two very short lateral papillae.
Mouth large, circular; buccal cavity 0:065 mm. long, 0:05 mm. wide; with walls
marked by numerous longitudinal lines, at first sight suggesting a leaf crown of
numerous elements. Oesophageal region packed with granular material in all but
one specimen examined; oesophagus 1:7 mm. long in female, 1:6 of body length;

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON. 519

narrow; with small posterior bulb. Nerve ring, cervical papillae and excretory
pore not recognized.

Male: Spicules 1:7 mm. long, 1:6 of body length, stout, with wide striated
alae. Bursa large; ventral lobes joined, laterals separated from ventral and dorsal
by shallow indentations. Ventral rays long, parallel; externo-lateral long, only
slightly divergent from medio- and postero-laterals, all three of same length and
nearly reaching edge of bursa; externo-dorsal arising separately, long, thin.
Dorsal ray dividing before one-third length into two divergent branches, each
giving off a very short lateral ray just before its middle. Genital cone short;
accessory cone present.

Female: Body narrowing behind vulva to end in tapering pointed tail; vagina
short; vulva at 6-8 mm., anus at 3-8 mm. from tip of tail. No eggs were seen in
the only female found, which was immature, and about 11 mm. long.

CYCLOSTRONGYLUS DISSIMILIS, n. sp. Figs. 16-18.
From Macropus ualabatus, Milson Island, Lower Hawkesbury (J. B. Cleland).
Only one specimen, a damaged male, was found, but the unusual shape of the
oesophagus warrants the inclusion of a description of the worm which was 13-9 mm.

oSSmm

Figs. 14-15, Cyclostrongylus clelandi. 14. head; 15. bursa.

Figs. 16-18, C. dissimilis. 16. head; 17. oesophageal region; 18. bursa.

Figs. 19-22, Zoniolaimus setifer, enlarged from Cobb (1898, fig. 30). 19. lateral view
of head; 20. anterior view of head; 21. lateral view of anterior end; 22. posterior view
of bursa.

520 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

in length. Head very indistinct, with cuticle so swollen that it appears
asymmetrical. Only two short conical papillae observed. Mouth leads into a thin-
walled cylindrical buccal capsule, 0-015 by 0:02 mm., opening into oesophagus.
Latter 1 mm. long; 1:14 of body length; anterior half narrow and surrounded near
its posterior end by nerve ring, posterior half increasing in diameter so that it has
the form of a cone, with the base near the intestine. Excretory pore in vicinity of
junction of the two oesophageal regions.

Spicules 2-5 mm. long, 1:5:6 of body length, with striated alae. Gubernaculum
not seen. Bursa large; lobes well marked, distinct from one another. Ventral ray
long, thin, nearly reaching bursal edge, cleft for entire length; externo-lateral
arising with lateral but divergent from it after half length, and nearly reaching
edge of bursa; lateral cleft for half length, nearly reaching edge; externo-dorsal
short, stout, arising from base of laterals. Dorsal ray stout, short, bifurcating
about half length, each branch dividing beyond mid-length into two rays, the inner
being slightly longer and thinner.

As already stated, this species has been placed under the genus only pro-
visionally, since the condition of the solitary specimen has prevented a more
detailed account being given and a satisfactory assignment being made.

ZONIOLAIMUS Cobb 1898.

In a recent paper (1939) we rehabilitated Cobb’s genus, giving a diagnosis
and describing some new species. Labiostrongylus Yorke and Maplestone was
placed as a synonym and the numerous species described under that genus were
transferred to Zoniolaimus. Since the two species named by Cobb came from New
South Wales material, an attempt has been made to interpret his formula and
figures relating to them. In addition to describing two new species in this paper,
we give host and locality records for three already known.

ZONIOLAIMUS SETIFER Cobb 1898. Figs. 19-22.

From the “brush wallaby”’, Moss Vale. We have already indicated that
Macropus ualabatus is the species referred to. The following description is based
on the figures and formula given by Cobb (1898, fig. 30).

Length of male, 7°75 mm. Head with eight lips, the four submedian larger
than laterals, dorsal and ventral, and bearing each a long bristle (0:02 mm.) near
the bases. Buccal capsule cylindrical, about 0:02 mm. wide, with base 0:04 mm.
from top of lips. Oesophagus 1:23 mm. long, widening at about half its length into
an elongate bulbous portion, then narrowing into a constricted region followed by
a spherical bulb. Nerve ring at 0-4 mm. from head end and surrounding oesophagus
at about two-thirds its length; excretory pore near beginning of median swollen
portion of oesophagus, and about 0:52 mm. from anterior end of worm.

Male: Spicules thin, apparently 1-6 mm. long (i.e. 1:4-8 of body length). Bursa
large, all rays except externo-dorsal reaching edge. Ventrals parallel, cleft half
their length; externo-laterals arising with laterals, diverging from them near tip;
laterals cleft half their length; externo-dorsal thin, arising from base of laterals
but divergent from them. Dorsal ray bifurcating between one-third and one-half
its length, each branch giving off short lateral ray soon after its origin. Genital
cone present; accessory cone of two small bodies. The breadth of body of the
male at base of buccal capsule, 0-069 mm.; at nerve ring, 0:13 mm.; at posterior
end of oesophagus, 0:22 mm.; maximum width 0:28 mm.; width near bursa,
0-08 mm.

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON. 521

No particulars are given of the female, except a drawing of the anterior end.

The measurements given for the Z. setifer (setiferus in Cobb) agree with the
sizes indicated in the diagrams. This worm then is much smaller than most species
of the genus. We have not been able to identify it amongst our material.

ZONIOLAIMUS BREVICAUDATUS Cobb 1898.

Host not mentioned, but presumably from a “brush wallaby” (i.e. Macropus
ualabatus) from Moss Vale, where Cobb was for a time engaged in official parasito-
logical work.

The only information relating to this species is embodied in two figures, one
of the female genitalia and one of male apparatus, together with the formula for a
female worm. The diagrams are of little use in identification, as also are the
measurements of the female. In no specimen of Zoniolaimus examined by us,
however, are the spicules so short in relation to other parts of the male. They are
apparently 1:5 mm. long. The measurements of a female, according to Cobb’s
formula, are: length of body 7-5 mm.; length of buccal capsule 0:06 mm.; anterior
end to nerve ring 0-33 mm.; oesophagus 1:07 mm. (i.e. 1:7 of body length); vulva
from tip of tail 0-38 mm.; anus from tip of tail 0-23 mm.; maximum width of body
0:32 mm. The figures in Cobb’s paper (figs. 102 and 103) are said to be natural
size; the length of the female is given as 7-5 mm., but the length of the sexual
organs (as figured) is 30 mm. We suggest, therefore, that an error has occurred
either in reduction of the original figures, or perhaps of a decimal place in the
stated length of the worm. On the other hand, no such error has been detected
in the case of Z. setifer (Cobb 1898, fig. 30), where the measurements given agree
very well with the figures.

The spicules of Z. brevicaudatus as indicated in a diagram (which is stated
to be natural size) are of the same length as those of Z. setifer, but a comparison
of the figures given for the two species shows them to be much shorter than those
of the latter in relation to other parts of the male system.

ZONIOLAIMUS CLELANDI, n. sp. Figs. 23-25.

From the stomach of Macropus ualabatus, Lower Hawkesbury (coll. J. B.
Cleland).

Male 21 mm.; female 30 mm. long. Lateral lips very prominent, with a median
terminal papilla; submedian lips rounded, each with a long seta. Buccal capsule
0-1 mm. wide, 0:07 mm. long; base 0:15 mm. from tip of submedian lips.
Oesophagus 4 mm. long; 1:5 of body length.

Male: Dorsal lobe of bursa long. Dorsal ray long, giving off a fairly long
branch on each side, the main stem continuing for a distance somewhat greater
than the length of each branch, and then bifurcating into two rather broad
terminal rays reaching the edge of the bursa. Spicules 7-2 mm., 1:3 of body length.

Female: Tail long, tapering; vulva at 1-7 and anus at 0:9 mm. from tip of tail:
vagina narrow, twisted, 1:5 mm. long; eggs (in vagina) 0-12 by 0-07 mm.

The species resembles Z. longispicularis and Z. communis. It differs from the
former in the form of the lateral and submedian lips and in the presence of setae
on the lips, the thinner dorsal ray and the different form and position of the
branches of that ray. It differs from Z. communis in the form of the dorsal ray,
relative sizes of the lateral and submedian lips, length of setae on the lips, and in
the rather shorter spicules.

ZONIOLAIMUS UALABATUS, nN. sp. Fig. 26.
From stomach, Macropus ualabatus, Lower Hawkesbury (coll. J. B. Cleland).

522 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

Only immature females found; short, stout; 6-4-7 mm. long; 0:3 mm. maximum
breadth; body with fine longitudinal striations. Head differs from that of any
other known member of the genus in having the four submedian lips smaller than
the laterals. Submedians conical, each with short seta; laterals tall, wider distally
where they bear each a small median rounded papilla; a dorsal and a ventral lip
present, conical, as large as lateral lips. Buccal capsule 0-045 mm. wide; 0-051 long
from top of lips. Oesophagus 1:1-1-4 mm. long; 1:6-7 of body length; base
surrounded by a pair of sheath-like prolongations of intestinal wall. Nerve cord
at 0:35-0-4 mm. from head end; excretory pore just behind nerve ring; cervical
papillae not observed.

Body narrows suddenly behind vulva, and again behind anus to end in narrow
pointed tail, 0°3 mm. long. Anus 0:17 mm. behind vulva. Since the above account
was written two adult females, 20 mm. long, were found amongst the material
from the same host, the organs in these worms presenting the same proportions
as in the younger specimens.

ZONIOLAIMUS LONGISPICULARIS (Wood 1929).

This large species, originally described as a Labiostrongylus, has been identified
amongst material collected from M. rufus, Wentworth, South-Western New South
Wales, and from Balranald; and M. major, from Narrandera and Narrabri.

ZONIOLAIMUS COMMUNIS Johnston & Mawson 1939.
From Macropus ruficollis, Bathurst district.

ZONIOLAIMUS ONYCHOGALE Johnston & Mawson 1939.
From Macropus ruficollis, Bathurst district.

ZONIOLAIMUS SP.
Immature specimens and females, not identifiable specifically, were found in
Macropus thetidis, New England; M. major, Coonamble; M. ualabatus, Lower
Hawkesbury; and M. ruficollis, Ourimbah, Gosford district.

PARAZONIOLAIMUS, DT. gen.

Trichoneminae: Lips prominent, laterals largest, dorsal and ventral smallest.
Short cuticular projecting frill around head region just behind lips, followed by
slight constriction. Bursa large; ventral lobes separate; dorsal ray giving off a
pair of lateral branches and then bifurcating. Female with tapering pointed tail;
vulva a short distance in front of anus. From stomach of marsupials. Type,
P. collaris, n. sp., from Macropus ualabatus.

This genus is close to Zoniolaimus from which it differs in the possession of a
cuticular frill surrounding the head.

PARAZONIOLAIMUS COLLARIS, Nn. sp. Figs. 27-29.

From stomach, Macropus ualabatus, Lower Hawkesbury (J. B. Cleland).

Body long, stout; male 15-16-5 mm. long; adult female 20-30 mm.; young
females (devoid of eggs) from 11mm. long. Anterior end with eight lips; two laterals,
long, upright, each with small round terminal papilla; four submedian shorter,
stout, bent inwards, each bearing rounded papilla with upwardly-directed bristle,
the tip of which divides into two; distal end of each submedian lip dividing into
two short laterally-directed processes; ventral and dorsal lips short, conical.
Behind origin of lips arises a cuticular frill, with free outer edge, 0:03 mm. wide,
marked with circular concentric striations, parallel to its edge. Head in this
region 0-18 mm. diameter, and followed by somewhat constricted neck region

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON. 523

widening after 0:06 mm. to form body proper. Buccal cavity 0:07 mm. in diameter;
squarish in side view; lined by thick chitin; base 0:1 mm. from anterior end of
submedian lips. Oesophagus about 1:4:2 (or less) of body length; widening
towards its posterior end, to become surrounded by sheath-like granular prolonga-
tion of intestinal wall. Nerve ring surrounding oesophagus about 0:6 mm. from

Figs. 23-25, Zoniolaimus clelandi. 23. dorsal lobe of bursa; 24. ventral and lateral
lobes of bursa; 25. head.

Fig. 26. Z. walabatus, head.

Figs. 23, 24, and 25 to same scale.

Figs. 27-29, Parazoniolaimus collaris. 27. head; 28. anterior end; 29. half of bursa,
ventral and lateral lobes folded over dorsal lobe. All figures to same scale.

Fig. 30, Maplestonema typicum, head.

Figs. 31-32, Macropostrongylus lesouefi. 31. head, sublateral view; 32. bursa.

Fig. 33, M. wallabiae, head.

Figs. 34-36, M. dissimilis. 34. head; 35. bursa; 36. posterior end of female.

Figs. 30, 31, and 34 to same scale; figs. 32, 33 and 35.

524 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

anterior end of body; cervical papillae long, threadlike, about half-way between
nerve ring and frill; excretory pore about 0-2 mm. behind nerve ring.

Male: Bursa large, ventral lobes separate from one another, joined to lateral
lobes; dorsal lobe prolonged with rather large median indentation. Ventral rays
long, parallel, cleft nearly all their length. Externo-lateral ray short, about half
length of laterals; externo-dorsal two-thirds length of laterals with which it arises.
Laterals long, parallel, cleft nearly all their length. Dorsal ray very broad at
base; giving off at about mid-length a pair of lateral club-shaped branches, and
soon afterwards dividing into two club-shaped rays forming an arch reaching into
prolongations of the dorsal lobe. Genital cone with small button-like structure on
its tip. Spicules 4:05 mm. long in a male 16 mm. long, 1:4 of body length; with
striated alae extending nearly all their length, widening near distal ends. Spicules
difficult to trace in whole specimens, and have to be dissected out. Gubernaculum
0:08 mm. long, canoe-shaped.

Female: Body tapering to a pointed tail; intestine narrowing suddenly about
0-3 mm. from anus and surrounded by narrow band of tissue (glandular?) before
passing to anus; latter 0:7 mm. from tip of tail. Vagina thin, long; vulva about
0-35 mm. in front of anus; eggs 0:09 mm. by 0:07 mm.

MAPLESTONEMA, Nn. gen.

Since males have not been found, we cannot give a complete diagnosis.

Trichoneminae. Anterior end rounded; no mouth collar; six equal elongate
papillae around mouth; deep buccal cavity supported only by narrow ring of
chitinous substance near its base; oesophagus of uniform width. Male unknown.
Female with tail tapering to a point; vulva just in front of anus. From stomach
of marsupials. Type M. typicum, n. sp., from Macropus ualabatus, Lower
Hawkesbury. °

This genus differs from its nearest relatives Macropostrongylus and Cloacina
in the absence of a leaf crown, and in the possession of six equal oral papillae.
It differs from Buccostrongylus in the structure of the buccal capsule; and from
Spirostrongylus Y. & M. in the absence of the leaf crown and in the characters of
the buccal capsule. The generic name is proposed in recognition of Dr.
Maplestone’s contributions to Australian helminthology.

MAPLESTONEMA TYPICUM, nN. sp. Fig. 30.

From Macropus ualabatus, Lower Hawkesbury.

We have examined only two immature female specimens. They are small
and coiled; about 6-1 mm. in length. Flattened anterior end with six short thin
digitate papillae surrounding wide mouth; latter leading into large cavity, 40u
long, 354 in diameter. This cavity, at about three-fourths length, is surrounded by
ring of chitin 8u long, 5u thick. No leaf crown. Oesophagus 0:95 mm. long, rather
wide, slightly enlarged towards posterior end; surrounded by nerve ring at about
end of its anterior half (0-4 mm. from head); excretory pore just behind this
level, 0-47 mm. from head end. Body tapering gradually at posterior end, tail
pointed, tip curved dorsally. The vulva can just be distinguished, 0:25 mm. in
front of the anus. The latter is equidistant from the vulva and the tip of the tail.

MACROPOSTRONGYLUS Yorke & Maplestone 1926.
This genus was based on M. macropostrongylus Y. & M. (type) and M. australis
Y. & M. from Macropus sp. from North Queensland. Baylis (1927) added a third
species, M. yorkei, from the same region. Wood in 1930 described M. baylisi from
Macropus robustus woodwardi. M. macropostrongylus and M. yorkei were recorded

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON. 525

by us from Queensland wallabies (1939). We now add two new species from the
red-necked wallaby and one from M. ualabatus in New South Wales.

MACROPOSTRONGYLUS LESOUEFI, nN. sp. Figs. 31-32.

From stomach of Macropus ruficollis, Sydney Zoological Gardens.

Short worms tapering more towards anterior end. Male 6-2-8-4 mm.; female
about 10-7 mm. Anterior end with two large prominent lateral papillae, and four
small submedian papillae, the latter each with two short bristles. Buccal capsule
about 0:04 mm. long and 0:02 mm. in diameter in male; wall not regularly
chitinized but middle part (i.e. middle longitudinal layer) most strengthened; wall
ending anteriorly in six (perhaps eight) rounded knobs, presumably corresponding
to a leaf crown. Oesophagus about 0:95 mm. long (in male); comprising two
parts, a longer anterior, about the middle of which is the nerve ring, and a shorter
posterior portion, narrow at the beginning but widening to a bulb. Excretory
pore not detected; cervical papillae long, hair-like, at 0-25 mm. from anterior end
of worm.

Male: Spicules seem to vary in length in specimens otherwise identical, but
they are always short, 0-:36-0-7 mm.; stout; ends tapering, rounded; wide striated
alae extending nearly to tip. Bursa large; dorsal lobe longest; ventral lobes
short, joined ventrally. Ventral rays long, thin, cleft nearly all their length;
laterals and externo-dorsals arising from same root, long, thin; medio- and postero-
laterals longest, cleft half their length. Dorsal ray bifureating after half its
length, each branch giving off stout lateral ray from its mid-length. Genital cone
very small.

Female: Uteri parallel; ovejectors 0:15 mm. long; vagina about 0:25 mm. long;
vulva about 0-9 mm. and anus at 0:6 mm. from tip of tail.

This species closely resembles M. macropostrongylus but differs from it in the
length of the spicules and oesophagus as well as in the shape of the female tail
and in the characters of the head.

It is named for Mr. A. S. Le Souef, Director of the Sydney Zoological Gardens
and author of important works dealing with Australian vertebrates.

MACROPOSTRONGYLUS WALLABIAR, nN. Sp. Fig. 33.

From stomach, Macropus rujicollis, Bathurst district.

Male 8-4 mm., female 11:4 mm. long; cuticle marked with fine striations.
Anterior end blunt; mouth collar with six small rounded papillae. Buccal capsule
0:045 mm. deep and 0:025 mm, wide (internal measurement) except at anterior
end where walls bend outwards; walls much thicker in posterior half than in
anterior. Short leaf crown probably present, arising from anterior end of -capsule
but number and shape of elements indistinguishable. Oesophagus about 0:8 mm.
long, with wider anterior part and short thin posterior part ending in bulb. Nerve
ring appears to be around thinner part of oesophagus. Cervical papillae long,
threadlike, at 0:25 mm. from anterior end of worm.

Male: Spicules short, about 0-8 mm. long, 1:10 of body length, with wide
striated alae and bluntly rounded tips. Bursa large; ventral lobes small, not
joined ventrally and almost separate from lateral lobes; dorsal lobe wide, long.
Condition of specimen prevented disposition of bursal rays from being ascertained
accurately. Ventral rays short, parallel, almost to edge of bursa; externo-lateral
ray divergent from laterals for most of its length; laterals stout, cleft for half
their length and reaching almost to bursa; externo-dorsal arising separately, long,
stout, not reaching edge of bursa. Dorsal ray indistinct; two main branches

526 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

apparently reaching edge of dorsal lobe and each giving off a lateral ray at about
mid-length. Genital cone short.

Female: Ovejectors long, thin; vagina short, wide; vulva 0-8 mm., and anus
0-3 mm. from tip of tail. Tail long, tapering, ending in point. Hggs 0:13 mm.
by 0-07 mm.

This species closely resembles Spirostrongylus spirostrongylus Y. & M. 1926 in
the arrangement of the buccal capsule, but those authors do not indicate the
presence of oral papillae. It has been assigned to Macropostrongylus on account
of the buccal capsule, leaf crown, shape of bursa, general arrangement of rays, and
character of female tail; but it differs from other species of this genus in that
the lateral and submedian oral papillae are of equal size.

MACROPOSTRONGYLUS DISSIMILIS, i. Sp. Figs. 34-36.

From Macropus ualabatus, Lower Hawkesbury.

Rather plump worms; males 6-5 mm.; females, often coiled, 6-8 mm. long.
Anterior end truncated, bearing four small conical submedian papillae and two
very small laterals. Buccal capsule continuous from oral opening, 10u deep, 15u
in diameter, with chitinized walls. Oesophagus widening gradually towards base;
0-55 mm. long. Nerve ring at 0:19, excretory pore at 0-46, and threadlike cervical
papillae 0:1 mm. from anterior end of worm. Anterior part of intestine surrounded
by granular lobes.

Male: Bursa large; lobes not deeply separated from one another; rays all thin
and reaching nearly to edge of bursa; externo-lateral divergent from laterals;
externo-dorsal arising separately; dorsal ray stouter, bifurcating after half its
length, each branch immediately giving off a lateral ray almost as long as itself.
Genital cone small, pointed. Spicules 0:7 mm. long, 1:9 of body length, with wide
striated alae. Apparently two gubernacula, the larger of which is more anteriorly
situated and may be a chitinization of the spicule sheath.

Female: Body tapering suddenly at vulva; tail pointed, backwardly directed.
Ovejectors 0-3 mm. long; vagina 0:35 mm. long; vulva 0-29 mm. and anus 0:2 mm.
from tip of tail. Eggs 80u by 50u.

This species is placed in the genus with some reserve because of the absence
of a leaf crown and because the submedian papillae are larger than the laterals.
It seems related to M. yorkei which it resembles in many features but differs in its
much smaller size, in the shape of the buccal capsule, and in the absence of a leaf
crown, which we have recognized in our specimens of yorkei, though Baylis
regarded its presence as doubtful.

BuccostRoneGyLus Johnston & Mawson 1939.

Although the general appearance of the head of two species now to be
described, Buccostrongylus setifer and labiatus, does not at first sight suggest that
they belong to the same genus, they have essentially similar structure; the chief
difference being in the size of the oral papillae and lips. In these features they
represent extremes of which the type species of the genus, B. buccalis, is the mean.
There is also a difference in the formation of the leaf crown which in the type
is formed by the indented anterior edge of the buccal capsule, but in B. setifer by
an accessory projection inwardly from the anterior edge of the buccal capsule. In
the latter species there is also a difference in the form of the dorsal ray, the lateral
branches coming off before instead of after the bifurcation, but these variations
are not considered sufficient to justify the erection of a new genus.

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON. yl

BUCCOSTRONGYLUS BUCCALIS Johnston & Mawson 1939.
This species has been found in Macropus thetidis from New England, the
nematodes possessing lips slightly more prominent and the spicules a little longer
than those described previously from Queensland material.

BUCCOSTRONGYLUS AUSTRALIS Johnston & Mawson 1939.
Specimens of this species were found in Macropus ruficollis from Bathurst
district. Previously recorded from two other species of Macropus from
Queensland.

BUCCOSTRONGYLUS LABIATUS, nN. sp. Figs. 37-38.

From stomach of Macropus ruficollis, Bathurst district.

Worms slender, short, usually coiled. Male 3-7-4:3 mm.; female 5-6 mm. long.
Cuticle marked with fine longitudinal striations. Cuticle of mouth collar raised
into six rounded lips, outgrowths of the subcuticular tissue between these form
six small rounded papillae; four submedian lips each with a bristle; two lateral
lips without bristle. Cuticle around mouth further raised into 6-8 peri-oral lips,
the ventrals being larger than the others.

Within the mouth is a long straight chitinized buccal capsule or vestibule. In
all specimens this is very indistinct, only its outline and posterior limits being
perceptible; its termination is 0:043 mm. from top of lips and about 0:01 mm. wide
(external), but the anterior end is not clear. It is not striated. Oesophagus thin,
0:65-0:75 mm. long, 1:7:5 of body length, terminating in large distinct bulb. Nerve
ring surrounding oesophagus at about half length; excretory pore just behind
nerve ring; cervical papillae not observed. Intestine without processes around
base of oesophagus.

Male: Spicules about 1 mm. long, 1:3-7—4:3 of body length; with very wide
striated curved alae; distal ends of spicules lying together, each surmounted by a
small dise of thin chitinous material. Gubernaculum probably present; genital
cone short. Bursa wide, much shorter ventrally than dorsally; lobes not separated
by deep indentations. Ventral rays parallel, nearly reaching edge of bursa and
cleft nearly all their length. Externo-lateral and externo-dorsal shorter than
laterals with which they arise, and lifting side wall of bursa; laterals reaching
practically to edge of bursa, and cleft for half length. Dorsal ray long, bifurcating
after one-quarter of its length, almost immediately afterwards each branch giving
off a short lateral ray and then continuing nearly to edge of bursa, the two branches
coming closer together near their distal ends.

Female: Body tapering rapidly but evenly from region of vagina to end in
blunt point. Ovejectors about 0-5 mm. long, narrow; vagina about 0:3 mm. long;
vulva 0:37 mm., and anus 0-3 mm. from tip of tail. Hggs in vagina about 0:09 mm.
by 0:05 mm.

This species differs from B. setifer chiefly in regard to the lips and papillae.

BUCCOSTRONGYLUS SETIFER, nN. sp. Figs. 39-41.

From stomach of Macropus ruficollis, Bathurst district.

Short worms, tapering to both ends, tending to be somewhat coiled. Cuticle
with fine longitudinal striations. Male 4:8 mm.; female 6-5-7 mm. long. Mouth
surrounded by six low rounded papillae, each with a tapering bristle, those in
submedian positions being very long, and the two laterals short. The buccal
capsule differs from that in other members of this genus in being much longer
(0:075-0:085 mm.) and in enclosing a wider cavity near its anterior end, where
the walls become narrowed to a fine rim around the mouth. This enlarged part is

528 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

0-015 mm. wide and about 0:02 mm. deep, while the succeeding portion is 0:01 mm.
in internal diameter. It differs also in having a definite leaf crown of a few
(4, perhaps 6) elements projecting from the wall of the anterior wide part of
the capsule.

Figs. 37-38, Buccostrongylus labiatus. 37. head; 38. bursa.

Figs. 39-41, B. setifer. 39. head; 40. bursa; 41. posterior end of female.

Figs. 38 and 40 to same scale.

Figs. 42-45, Cloacina expansa, 42. head; 43. bursa; 44. posterior end of female;
45. anterior end.

Figs. 46-48, C. obtusa. 46. head; 47. bursa; 48. posterior end of female.

Figs. 42 and 46 to same scale; figs. 43, 45, and 47; figs. 44 and 48.

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON. 529

The anterior end differs from that of pharyngostrongyles in that there is no
differentiation into buccal capsule and vestibule, the whole structure, referred to
above as buccal capsule, being a continuous cylinder. There are also no striations
on this structure. There is, as in other species of Buccostrongylus, a slight
inflation of the cuticle around the anterior end.

Oesophagus 0:1 mm. long; with two parts, a long wide anterior and a shorter
narrow posterior, the latter terminating in a slight bulb. Nerve cord not seen.
Excretory pore near posterior end of anterior portion of oesophagus.

Male: Spicules stout, 1-3-1:4 mm. long, 1:4 of body length; with wide striated
alae extending almost to the rounded tips. Bursa very closely resembling that of
pharyngostrongyles in being small and covered with papillae on inner surface of
ventral and lateral lobes. Lobes well separated from one another; dorsal widest
and longest. Externo-lateral and externo-dorsal rays shorter than laterals with
which they arise, projecting on wall of bursa. Dorsal ray with two lateral branches
at about its mid-length, the main stem continuing a short distance before dividing
into two rays reaching edge of bursa; lateral branches stout, entering into dorsally
projecting pockets of bursal wall. Gubernaculum not observed.

Female: Body ending in tapering pointed tail, about 0:38 mm. long; distance
from anus to vulva about 0:28 mm. Uteri long, straight; ovejectors narrow; vagina
wide, quite long; eggs (in vagina) about 0:12 mm. by 0:06 mm.

This species differs from other members of the genus in the length of the
buccal capsule, presence of a leaf crown, form of bursa, and shape of female tail.

CLoacina Linstow 1898.

This imperfectly characterized genus was known only from the type species,
CO. dahli, from a wallaby in New Britain. In 1938 we recognized representatives
amongst Australian material and, as a result, were able to give a diagnosis differen-
tiating it from Macropostrongylus and to add fifteen new species from Central
Australian kangaroos and wallabies. A study of material from Queensland has
permitted recognition of five additional species (1939). We now describe five
more new forms and record the occurrence of four known species from New South
Wales Macropods.

CLOACINA EXPANSA, hh. Sp. Figs. 42-45.

From Macropus major, Coonamble (coll. A. S. Le Souef).

Male 9-6 mm.; female 15-18 mm.; cuticle widened at level of base of lips,
inflated region thinning out to end near the level of the posterior end of the
oesophagus; buccal capsule 0:05 mm. diameter, 0:01 mm. long. Oesophagus 0:55 mm.
long; nerve cord at 0:3 mm., excretory pore at 1 mm. (i.e. about 0-35 mm. behind
end of oesophagus), and cervical papillae at 0:12 mm. from head end.

Male: Bursa as in C. longispiculata; spicules 5:8 mm., 1:1:7 of body length.

Female: Anus at 0:3 mm., and vulva at 0-4 mm. from tip of tail; eggs 0:14
by 0:07 mm.

This species closely resembles ©. longispiculata in general form, shape of
bursa, oesophagus, submedian papillae; shape of posterior end of the female; and
spicule:body-length ratio. It differs in the following features: slightly greater
length; greater extension backwardly of the widened cuticular region at the head
end; wider buccal capsule with thicker, shorter chitinous ring; absence of lateral
papillae; cervical papillae nearer anterior end; and the longer. narrower vagina.
The specific name is given because of the wide cuticular inflation anteriorly.

QQ

530 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

CLOACINA OBTUSA, nN. Sp. Figs. 46-48.

From Macropus major, Coonamble (coll. A. S. Le Souef).

Males 11:5-13 mm. long; females 18-22 mm.; not tapering markedly at anterior
end which is truncate; six large lips, submedians with small two-jointed papillae.
Buccal capsule 0:055 mm. wide; 0-015 mm. deep with base 0:04 mm. from top of
lips. Leaf crown of six elements arising from base of capsule and bluntly pointed
at distal ends. Oesophagus 0°75 mm. long, widening at base; surrounded by nerve
ring about its middle. Excretory pore just in front of posterior end of oesophageal
region; thus nerve ring is 0:36, and excretory pore 0:68 mm. from anterior end of
worm.

Male: Bursa large, lobes not deeply separated. Ventral rays together, extending
nearly to edge, cleft for most of their length; externo-lateral stout, tapering, almost
reaching to edge; laterals extending nearly to edge, cleft for three-fourths of their
length, tips separate; externo-dorsal arising separately, shorter than laterals.
Dorsal ray stout, bifurcating after one-third length, each branch ending in two
short processes, of which outer is shorter and stouter, neither reaching edge of
bursa. Spicules about 3-5 mm. long, 1:3 of body length. Gubernaculum absent.
Genital cone very short, rounded.

Female: Body tapering suddenly beyond vulva to end in pointed dorsally-
directed tail, 0:27 mm. long. Vagina about 0-8 mm. long; vulva 0:2 mm. in front
of anus; eggs in vagina 0-1 by 0:05 mm.

This species resembles C. macropodis in its head region but differs in its
greater length; blunt elements of the leaf crown; longer buccal capsule; and in
the spicule:body-length ratio. The specific name is given on account of the
blunt tips of the elements of the leaf crown.

CLOACINA MAGNIPAPILLATA, Nn. Sp. Figs. 49-52.

From Macropus major (type host), Coonamble (coll. A. S. Le Souef); and
M. rufus, Wentworth (coll. A. L. Rait).

Male 10-11 mm.; female 12-15 mm. long; head with six low lips, submedians
with long, two-jointed papillae, laterals each with small papilla; buccal capsule
0:032 mm. diameter, 0:01 mm. deep, base 0:02 mm. from top of lips. Elements of
leaf crown arising from base of capsule; sharply pointed, with tips incurved.
Oesophagus 0:75 mm. long (in male), wider at base but without definite bulb.
Nerve ring at 0:35 mm., excretory pore at 0:7 mm., and cervical papillae at 0:09 mm.
from anterior end.

Male: Bursa large; lobes not deeply divided except ventrals which are separate
from one another. Ventral rays long, cleft nearly all their length; externo-lateral
long; laterals cleft for three-fourths length, reaching nearly to edge of bursa;
externo-dorsal as long as, and arising with, laterals. Dorsal ray bifureating after
one-third length, each branch giving off a shorter lateral ray after half length,
neither reaching edge of bursa. Spicules 3-8 mm. long; 1:2-:7 of body length.
Genital cone small; accessory cone of two prominent processes. Gubernaculum
not seen.

Female: Posterior end tapering gradually from region of vagina; tail J:23 mm.
long, ending in point. Vagina long, twisted; vulva 0:35 mm. in front of anus.

This species resembles Cloacina curta and ©. wallabiae in the head region. In
general characters it suggests the latter species but differs from it in size; form
of the dorsal ray; spicule—body-length ratio; absence of definite oesophageal bulb;
and less sudden tapering of the posterior end of the female.

531

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON.

Figs. 49-52, Cloacina magnipapillata. 49. head; 50. posterior end of female; 51.

bursa; 52. dorsal ray.
Figs. 53-54, C. wallabiae. 53. head; 54. bursa.
Fig. 55, C. thetidis, head.
Figs. 49, 53 and 55 to same scale; figs. 51 and 52.
Figs. 56-58, Globocephaloides thetidis. 56. head,
view; 5S. bursa, dorsal view.
Figs. 59-62, Hypodontus thetidis.
61. bursa, lateral view; 62. dorsal ray.
Figs. 58 to 62, to same scale.
Figs. 63-64, Austrostrongylus wallabiae.
Figs. 65-66, Asymmetricostrongylus trichosuri,

lateral view: 457. bursa, ventral

59. head. ventral view: 60. head. lateral view;

63. head; 64. bursa.
65, head; 66. posterior end of female,

532 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

CLOACINA WALLABIAE, nh. sp. Figs. 53-54.

From Macropus ualabatus, Lower Hawkesbury district (coll. J. B. Cleland).

Only five specimens found; 4—6 mm. long; some rather coiled. Apparently only
four outer lips, the laterals being absent and their position marked by a pair of
small conical papillae; submedians each with long two-jointed papilla; inwardly
from outer lips and from lateral papillae are six distinct rounded inner lips;
inwardly from these latter, projecting beyond them, is the leaf crown of six finely-
pointed triangular elements, 0:04 mm. long, arising from base of buccal capsule;
latter 0-038 mm. in diameter internally, 0:01 mm. long, with walls 4y thick.
Oesophagus 0°55 mm. long, widening towards base to a more or less definite bulb;
nerve ring at about mid-oesophagus; excretory pore at level of three-fourths length
of oesophagus. Cervical papillae, long, threadlike, about 0:15 mm. from anterior
end of worm.

Male: Spicules about 0:9 mm. long, 1:4 of body length, thin, with very wide
striated alae. Ventral rays long, thin, cleft about half length; externo-lateral
stout, tapering; laterals thinner and longer; externo-dorsal arising with laterals,
shorter and divergent from them. Dorsal ray bifurcating near its origin, each
branch continuing nearly to edge of bursa and giving off shorter lateral ray after
about one-third of its length. Genital cone very short; accessory cone of two large
projecting lobes.

Female: Body tapering suddenly beyond vulva, which is 0-5 mm. in front of
anus; tail about 0:3 mm. long, ending in rounded point; vagina long, narrow; eggs
0-08 by 0-04 mm.

This species most closely resembles (©. robertsi in the general appearance of
the head but differs in the spicule—body-length ratio; shape of the dorsal ray;
length of vagina; and in the position of the excretory pore; as well as in the
rather different configuration of the head region.

CLOACINA THETIDIS, nN. sp. Fig. 55.

From Macropus thetidis, New England.

Only one female found, 6-5 mm. long. Lips not distinct; four submedian
papillae arising from elevations of mouth collar, each papilla consisting of two
thin joints; leaf crown arising from base of buccal capsule giving appearance of
six rounded inner lips, on two of which the inner edge can be seen projecting as a
pointed tip like the leaf crown elements in other species of Cloacina; similar
pointed tips presumed to be present on other lips though not seen. Buccal capsule
0-055 mm. diameter, of uneven height (0-008 mm.—0:01 mm.), base 0:034 mm. from
anterior end. Oesophagus 0:6 mm. long, wide, straight. Nerve ring at 0:26 mm.,
and cervical papillae at 0:09 mm., from anterior end.

Posterior end of body tapering to a dorsally-directed point; tail 0-2 mm. long.
Vulva. 0-35 mm. from tip of tail. Specimen is probably young, eggs being present
only in uterus, where they measure 0:11 by 0:08 mm. :

This species differs from all Known species in the wide shallow buccal capsule,
the long thin papillae at the anterior end, and the rounded ends of the elements
of the leaf crown.

CLOACINA stmMiILis Johnston & Mawson, 1939.

Females from stomach of Macropus thetidis, New England.

These nematodes very closely resemble C. similis and C. petrogale but, since
males are absent, it is difficult to place them exactly. The head differs from that
in these species in having a relatively wider buccal capsule, thinner papillae, and
less obvious lips, The distinct leaf crown, the presence of a lateral papilla, the

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON. 533

deep buccal capsule and the long, thin anteriorly-placed cervical papilla suggest
both these species. The posterior end has the characteristic short conical tail, long
vagina with rather small eggs, and anus equidistant from the vulva and the tip of
the tail. The positions of nerve ring and excretory pore agree most closely with
those in C. similis, but the oesophagus differs slightly in shape, the terminal bulb
being more distinct and larger.

The parasites may be placed provisionally under C. similis.

CLOACINA BANCROFTORUM Johnston & Mawson 19839.
This species was recognized amongst material from Macropus thetidis from
New England.

CLOACINA LONGISPICULATA Johnston & Mawson 1939.
We have identified the species from Macropus rufus from Wentworth, South-
western New South Wales (coll. W. L. Rait).

CLOACINA MACROPODIS Johnston & Mawson 1938.
From Macropus walabatus, Lower Hawkesbury district (coll. J. B. Cleland).
Our specimens differ a little from those from Central Australia, the oesophagus
being somewhat longer and spicules slightly shorter. The general features and
arrangement of parts, however, are similar in both and there does not appear
to be sufficient justification for the erection of a new species.

CLOACINA SP.
Two poorly preserved female specimens of Cloacina were found in the stomach
of Macropus thetidis, New England. Their condition has not permitted us to
make a definite identification.

GLOBOCEPHALOIDES Yorke & Maplestone 1926.

The genus was based on female specimens described as G. macropodis, from a
Northern Queensland Macropus sp. Recently (1939) we added two other species,
G. wallabiae and G. affinis, also from Queensland, and have been able to extend the
diagnosis on account of the finding of males. We now add another species,
G. thetidis.

GLOBOCEPHALOIDES THETIDIS, n. Sp. Figs. 56-58.

From the intestine of Macropus thetidis, New England.

Male 6 mm.; female unknown. Buccal capsule 60u long, 504 maximum width,
20u wide at base; dorsal tooth projecting 20u from base of capsule. Mouth opening
254 diameter. Oesophagus 0:58 mm., 1:10 of body length. Nerve ring and
excretory pore not seen. Spicules 0:045 mm., 1:13:3 of body length. Bursa with
ventral lobes separated in front, ventral and lateral lobes continuous, dorsal lobe
small and elongate. Ventral rays long, thin, separate, reaching edge of bursa;
externo-lateral stouter, slightly shorter than ventrals; medio-lateral stout, distal
part narrowing suddenly; postero-lateral slightly thinner than medio-lateral,
narrowing as in latter ray; medio- and postero-lateral not quite reaching bursal
edge; externo-dorsal thin, shorter than postero- and medio-laterals, raising edge of
bursa into papilla-like structure. Dorsal ray ending in two short, probably
bidigitate, processes.

The species differs from G. macropodis (female) in the size of the buccal
capsule, relative size of the dorsal tooth, and length of oesophagus; from G. affinis
(female) in the form of the chitinous support for the buccal capsule, and in the
relative size of the tooth; from G. wallabiae (male) in size, relative length of the
spicules, length of ventral rays, and form of the medio- and postero-lateral rays,

534 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES,

Hyropontus Monnig 1929.

This genus, belonging to the Ancylostomatidae, Necatorinae, is so far known
only from its type species, H. macropi Monnig, whose name should be emended
to H. macropodis. The host was Macropus rufus from Pretoria Zoological Gardens.
We add a second species, H. thetidis.

HyYPopONTUS THETIDIS, n. sp. Figs. 59-62.

From the caecum of Macropus thetidis, New England.

Male about 11 mm. long; female about 14 mm. Mouth collar with six very
small papillae; buecal capsule with two dorsal cutting plates anteriorly, ventral
margin notched. Dorsal gutter in buccal capsule, ending anteriorly in two short
lateral arms, narrowing posteriorly. Anterior end of oesophagus with three pointed
triangular teeth about 30 long, projecting into buccal capsule. Cervical glands
extending back about 0:5 mm. from anterior end. Oesophagus 1:05-1:1 mm. long,
1:10-11 of body length (in male). Nerve ring at 0-6 mm. from anterior end.
Cervical papillae and excretory pore not seen.

Male: Dorsal lobe of bursa longest; ventrals not joined in front. Ventral rays
short, together; externo-lateral short, tip diverging from laterals; laterals cleft at
tips, not quite reaching edge of bursa; externo-dorsal arising separately, tapering,
not reaching edge of bursa. Dorsal ray bifurcating soon after origin, each branch
giving off a shorter lateral ray just after its mid-length, neither branch quite
reaching edge of bursa. Prebursal papillae not seen. Spicules 0:87 mm., i.e.
1:12:6 of body length. Gubernaculum large, elongate.

Female: Vulva 0:3 mm., and anus at 0:1 mm. from tip of conical tail.

The species closely resembles H. macropodis whose males are 13-15 mm., and
females 17-20 mm. long. The relative measurements agree closely; the chief
differences between the two are the shorter gubernaculum, greater distance between
the vulva and the tip of the tail, and the lower position of the bifurcation of the
dorsal ray.

AUSTROSTRONGYLUS Chandler 1924.

This genus of Trichostrongylinae was based on A. macropodis Chandler from
Macropus bennetti from Zoological Gardens, Houston, Texas. We added (1938)
A. minutus from M. dorsalis in Queensland. We now give an account of another,
A. wallabiae n. sp.

AUSTROSTONGYLUS WALLABIAE, hn. sp. Figs. 63-64.

From the intestine of Macropus ruficollis, Bathurst district.

Worms very tightly coiled; tapering markedly at anterior end; cuticle with
6-8 longitudinal folds, marked with transversal striations, the cuticle between the
folds being unstriated. The folds begin just posterior to the dilated cuticle around
the head (0:08 mm. from anterior end) and extend in the female to the region just
anterior to vulva; in the male to within a short distance of bursa where they give
place to ringed striations; in the female there is little trace of striation between
the vulva and anus, but on the tail fine rings are definite.

The worms are characterized by regularly-placed masses of granular tissue,
forming a projection over the vulva, another a little anterior to the vulva, and
one in the dorsal lobe of the bursa where it obscures the dorsal ray.

There are probably four small papillae at the anterior end, in submedian
positions. Buccal capsule dome-shaped, 0:0832 mm. diameter at base, 0:022 mm.
long at centre, its thin chitinous walls with outwardly projecting ridge at their
base; walls continuous inwardly with floor of buccal capsule and cuticular lining

BY T. H. JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON. 535

of oesophagus; dorsal tooth 0:02 mm. long, 0:01 mm. wide near base; ventral tooth
about 4u long. Oesophagus about 0-38 mm. long, widening slightly towards base.
Nerve cord at 0-2 mm., and excretory pore at 0:28 mm. from anterior end of worm.

Male: About 5-3-5-5 mm. long, 0-2 mm. maximum diameter. Spicules very fine,
proximal terminations hard to observe; probably between 0-4 and 0:8 mm. long.
Gubernaculum not seen. Bursa distinctive in having a very short dorsal lobe and
the two lateral lobes extended laterally, so that in their natural position (i.e. before
flattening) they fold together, the bursa then having the appearance of a ventral
outgrowth of the posterior end of the body. Lobes not asymmetrical. Ventro-
ventral ray bending ventrally; postero-ventral almost straight; externo- and medio-
laterals stout, tapering, with distal ends divergent from one another; postero-
lateral thin, long; externo-dorsal long, thin, arising from same base as laterals
but immediately separating from them. Dorsal ray short, thin, giving off a lateral]
branch at each side soon after its origin, the main stem dividing into two short
branches at distal end; the lateral branches may be asymmetrical.

Female: About 6:9 mm. long; body narrowing suddenly about 0-1 mm. from
posterior end to a tapering, pointed tail. Position of vulva (1:15 mm. from
posterior end) marked by presence of a projecting mass of granular tissue just
beneath its cuticle, probably a kind of protective flap, somewhat like that occur-
ring in Haemonchus. Vagina short; ovejectors muscular; uteri divergent but hard
to trace as specimens do not clear easily. Anus probably at beginning of narrow
tail, about 0:08-0:09 mm. from posterior end. ;

The species closely resembles A. macropodis (from Macropus bennetti, which
is the Tasmanian subspecies of M. ruficollis), but differs from it in the different
form of the bursa, dorsal ray, length of postero-lateral ray and greater divergence
of the externo- and medio-lateral rays. The characters of the head region, buccal
cavity and cuticular ornamentation are similar.

The species differs from A. minutus in its greater size, wider bursa, form of
the lateral rays, and relatively shorter dorsal tooth.

ASYMMETRICOSTRONGYLUS Nagaty 1932.

The name was proposed by Nagaty for Trichostrongylus asymmetricus Cameron
1926 (as type), 7. australis Wood 1930, and T. dissimilis Wood 1930, but no
diagnosis was given. The first was described from Macropus bennetti and the
other two from M. woodwardi, Wood also recording A. asymmetricus from the
latter marsupial. Lent and Freitas (1934, 252) consider the genus invalid.

ASYMMETRICOSTRONGYLUS TRICHOSURI, n. sp. Figs. 65-66.

From the oesophagus of Trichosurus caninus, Gosford district.

Only females were collected. Very thin filiform worms, about 4:5 to 5:1 mm.
long, with maximum breadth about 50u. Cuticle with fine longitudinal striations
and with more widely separated transverse markings. Anterior end about 17 in
diameter, apparently surmounted by six lips. Oesophagus 0:86 mm. long, of even
diameter. Vulva a narrow transverse slit, 1:68 mm. from posterior end of
oesophagus and at about mid-length of worm; uteri divergent; eggs large, 60u
long, 27u wide. Posterior end tapering, narrowing suddenly from anus to end in
blunt point; tail 0:06 mm. long.

The absence of males prevents our comparing the species with those described
from Australian marsupials. The type, A. asymmetricus (Cameron), is described as
having six papillae and no buccal tooth. If these papillae resemble the structures

536 STRONGYLATE NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES.

which we refer to as lips, then our species could be placed under Nagaty’s genus,
as we have done.

Literature.

BayLis, H. A., 1927.—Some New Parasitic Nematodes from Australia. A.M.N.H.. (9),
20, 214-223.

, 1934.—Some Parasitic Worms from Australia. Parasitol... 26, 129-132.

CAMERON, T. W. M., 1926.—On a New Species of Trichostrongyle Worm from the Bennett's
Wallaby. J. Helminth., 4, 28-26.

CANAVAN, W. P., 1931.—Nematode Parasites of Vertebrates in the Philadelphia Zoological
Garden and vicinity, II. Parasitol., 23, 196-228.

CHANDLER, A. C., 1924.—A new Genus of Trichostrongylid Worm from the Kangaroo.
Parasitol., 16, 160-168.

Cops, N. A., 1898.—Extract from MS. Report on Parasites of Stock, Agric. Gaz. N.S.W..,
9, 296-521, and 419-454.

JOHNSTON, T. H., and Mawson, P. M., 1938.—Strongyle Nematodes from Central
Australian Kangaroos and Wallabies. Tr. Roy. Soc. South Austr., 62 (2), 263-286.

————,, 1938.—Some Nematodes from Australian Marsupials. Rec. South Austr. Mus.,
6 (2), 187-198.

, 1939.—Strongyle Nematodes from Queensland Marsupials. Tr. Roy. Soc. South
Austr., 63 (1), 121-149.

Lent, H., and Freitas, J. F. T., 1934.—Sobre dois novos generos da subfamilia Tricho-
strongylinae Leiper. parasitos de Tinamus solitarius Vreill. Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz,
28, 247-257.

MOonnic, H. O., 1926.—Three New Helminths. Jr. Roy. Soc. S. Africa, 13 (3), 291-298.

, 1927.—On a New Physalopteran from an Eagle and a Trichostrongyle from
the Cane Rat with notes on Polydephis quadricornis and the genus Spirostrongylus.
Tr. Roy. Soc. South Africa, 14 (3), 261-265.

, 1929.—Hypodontus macropi, n. gen., n. sp., a Hookworm of the Kangaroo.

Rep. Dir. Vet. Serv. Pretoria, 15, 303-506.

NaGaty, H., 1932.—The Genus Trichostrongylus Looss 1905. Ann. Trop. Med. Parasit.,
26, 457-518.

YORKE, W., and MAaPLESTONE, P. A., 1926.—The Nematode Parasites of Vertebrates.
London.

537

ECTOCARPUS CONFERVOIDES (ROTH) LE JOL.
By VALERIE May, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Botany.
(Forty-six Text-figures. )
[Read 27th September, 1939.]

The Ectocarpales include the simplest known forms of the Melanophyceae
(Phaeophyceae). Therefore, in any discussion of the origin of a land flora from
marine plants, a knowledge of the life-history and cytology of these forms is
advantageous.

The Ectocarpaceae comprise filamentous forms which may bear sexual and
asexual reproductive structures on the same plant. As Knight (1923) indicated,
a more intimate knowledge of these forms may lead to a better understanding of
the problem of the origin of the alternation of generations among algae.

The life-history of Pylaiella litoralis Kjellm. has been investigated by Knight
at Port Erin, Great Britain (1923); that of Hctocarpus siliculosus (Dillw.) Lyngb.
by Berthold at Naples, Italy (quoted by Knight, 1929), by Knight at Port Hrin
(1929), by Kylin at Kristinberg, Sweden (1933), by Fgyn at Herdla, Norway
(1934), and by Papenfuss at Wood’s Hole, U.S.A. (1935).

The investigation reported here has been concerned with the variation in form
shown by E. confervoides, its host relationships, and particularly its cytology and
life cycle. The coastline examined in detail extends from Five Islands, Wollongong,
to Palm Beach, near Sydney, N.S.W.

SYSTEMATICS.

The Species.—A difference of opinion exists as to whether £. siliculosus should
be accorded the status of a species or should be regarded as a variety of
E. confervoides. Batters, quoted by Knight (1929), respects the species-distinction;
so also do Setchell and Gardner (1925), although they say: “We know full well
from our Own experience that it is difficult to draw a satisfactory line of demarca-
tion between the two species, but feel that the best we can do is to keep them
distinct and draw the line somewhat arbitrarily.” The distinction, if any, between
the two species is the usual presence of a terminal hair on the plurilocular
structure of H. siliculosws and its absence from that of H. confervoides.

If this distinction be accepted, both EH. confervoides and E. siliculosus occur
near Sydney, N.S.W. Forms corresponding to the typical EH. confervoides and
H. siticulosus were found, but as a complete series of variation exists between the
two extremes (Figs. 3, 6, 9, etc.), and since plurilocular structures terminated by
hairs may occur in the form which is usually non-haired (Figs. 1 and 2), there
seems to be no reason for regarding the form siliculosus as other than a variation
of H. confervoides. The life cycle of H. confervoides, reported in this paper, is in
agreement with that reported previously for EZ. siliculosus.

Vegetative Anatomy.—The plant is filamentous, growth being intercalary and
occurring usually at the base of the filaments (Fig. 3). Branching is irregular and
usually not opposite. It occurs by the development of a “blow-out”, usually at the

RR

538 ECTOCARPUS CONFERVOIDES,

upper end of a cell. The angle at which the branch emerges varies greatly; when
most acute (Fig. 3a), the branch tapers to a long, terminal hair, the cells of which
are elongated and possess but little protoplasm. The angle of branching becomes
more obtuse as fewer hairs are formed (Fig. 9a). Knight (1929) reports that at
Port Erin there is an increase in the angle of branching and a decrease in the
production of hairs during the course of a season, plants in the upper and lower
limits of the Hctocarpus-zone, however, maintaining the end-of-season form. At

Fig. 1.—E. confervoides showing associated plurilocular structures, which are either
hair-tipped or not. x 48.

Fig. 2.—As Figure 1, but reproductive structures are larger. a and b are from the
same plant. x 48.

Fig. 3.—a shows the habit of the hair-producing form, intercalary growing regions
occurring at the base of the hairs. a, b (haired plurilocular structure) and c (non-
haired) are from the same plant; d and e show variations of the non-haired form of
plurilocular reproductive structure. x 48.

Fig. 4.—An abnormal (bent) plurilocular reproductive structure. x 204.

Fig. 5.—An abnormal plurilocular reproductive structure, showing branching at the
apex. x 204.

Fig. 6.—This shows how a stalked, terminal plurilocular structure (b) may become
sessile and lateral (a) by sympodial development of a lateral branch. x 220.

Fig. 7.—Shows proliferation into the crumpled empty outer wall of a burst pluri-
locular structure. x 204.

Fig. 8.—a shows three cells which occurred in a single branch. In i the form of the
chromatophore is banded, in ii it is intermediate, and in iii discoid. b shows an almost
reticulate form of chromatophore. c and e show variation in the shape of the plurilocular
structures of a filament. d shows a constricted plurilocular structure which is abnormal,
due to failure of a central cell to divide. f shows a conical plurilocular structure, the
opposite in form to such as in Fig. 3b. (a, b, f x 196; c, d, e, x 48.)

BY VALERIE MAY. 539

Sydney relatively little of the acute-angled, hair-producing form has been found
at any time, and no evidence has been obtained of a seasonal change in appearance.

False cortex may occur in the basal portions of the plant. This is formed by
one or more lateral branches, each originating near the base of a cell, growing
downwards around the main axis (Fig. 9g). Where growth is dense, the loose
intertwining of the basal filaments gives a further measure of mechanical support.
The prostrate portion of the thallus is poorly developed.

The Vegetative Cell.—The size of the vegetative cell varies greatly (May, 1938,
and Fig. 17); the average measurements are 20-80u x 30u. Usually the lateral walls
are thicker than the transverse ones, but this difference is less obvious than that
between the outer and enclosed walls of the plurilocular reproductive structures.
Chromatophores occur in the parietal cytoplasm; these range from large band-
shaped and spirally-arranged forms (Fig. 80), to small, numerous, discoid ones
(Fig. 10a). Usually a single plant possesses one of these forms of. chromatophores,
but Figure 8a shows the transition in a filament from one extreme type to the
other. Closely associated with the chromatophores are round, highly refractive

Fig. 9.—a shows a wide angle of branching and very slight production of hairs; this
habit accompanies the broader form of plurilocular structure. Variation in the length of
the stalk of the plurilocular structure is shown. 0b, c, d and e show developmental stages
of a plurilocular structure. f is a mature plurilocular reproductive structure, in which
the apical tiers have divided actively. g shows false cortex; the laterals have arisen from
the basal end of the cells of the main axis and have grown down adpressed to the
filament. (a, x 48; b-g, x 204.)

Fig. 10.—a shows an extreme form of discoid chromatophores; as usual, the
pyrenoids are drawn black. b,c and d (apices of branches) show the habit of this form
of E. confervoides, i.e. broad angle of branching and very little suggestion of hair-
formation. The plurilocular structures possess usually not more than one stalk cell.
e shows one plurilocular structure in greater detail. The apical cells have not divided
as much, relatively, as those in Fig. 9f. (a, e, x 196; b, c, d, xX 48.)

Fig. 11.—This shows plurilocular reproductive structures which are associated with
forms as in Fig. 10e. a and b are from the same plant. x 204.

540 ECTOCARPUS CONFERVOIDES,

bodies, the “pyrenoids”. Usually these appear on the surface of the chromato-
phores, though they may be free except for cytoplasmic connections. Figure 27
shows the variation which may occur in any one cell. The chromatophore often
has a gap representing the former position of a pyrenoid. Knight (1929) and
later Mathias (1935) suggested that the pyrenoid body is a transformed portion
of the chromatophore.

Fig. 12.—This shows unilocular structures, sessile (a) or with one stalk cell (6b).
x 204.

Fig. 13.—a shows uni- and plurilocular reproductive structures occurring together.
b shows a series of unilocular structures, which vary in shape. ec is a surface section
of a unilocular structure; dense cytoplasm and many discoid chromatophores with
pyrenoids are shown. (a, c, x 204; b, x 48.)

Fig. 14.—This shows stages in the growth of the diploid germling. a is an older
plant than b. In athe upright (ii) and prostrate (i) portions of the thallus are clearly
differentiated. x 212.

Glistening droplets of fucosan, which stain red in hydrochloric acid-vanillin
(Knight, 1929), are usually present, especially near the nucleus. Non-staining
droplets (freshly-formed fucosan? (Knight, 1929) ) occur mainly near the
chromatophores, but as hydrochloric acid-vanillin disturbs the cell-contents, the
original positions cannot be stated with certainty. The size of these globules
varies, but they are usually somewhat larger than the ‘“‘pyrenoids”. They were
observed only in fresh material. Further work on the presence and relative
abundance of fucosan has been done by Knight (1929), who believes it is a storage
product and has correlated its absence with cell division. The nucleus occurs near
the centre of the cell (Fig. 16). The nucleolus may contain one or more clear
areas (Figs. 17a and 17b).

Reproductive Structures.—The plurilocular reproductive structures are very
much more common than are the unilocular. The plurilocular structures arise as

BY VALERIE MAY. 541

a short tier of cells occurring terminally or as a side branch. The densely cyto-
plasmic contents of the initials of the reproductive structures distinguish them
from the vegetative cells. In Figure 24, from c to b are vegetative cells, while
those from b to the apex of this same filament will later form a plurilocular
structure. Each densely cytoplasmic cell of such a filament divides by vertical
walls into first two (Fig. 18), then four (Fig. 20) cells. Further division is
irregular, and the position of the cross walls varies (compare Figs. 22 and 23).
Dividing nuclei were seen in longitudinal as well as transverse sections (compare
Figs. 21 and 25); this indicates that cell division occurs also in the vertical plane.
The mature plurilocular structure consists of numerous, small cells, approximately
4u square, each with very dense contents (Fig. 8f, etc.). The outer wall of the
whole structure is very much thicker than are any of the internal ones (Fig. 6).
It remains after the contents are shed and the inner walls mainly dissolved
(Fig. 7). Proliferation is common, i.e. new growth occurs at the base of the
empty case (Fig. 7).

Two extreme forms are found, one in which the plurilocular structure is
elongated, thin, cylindrical, and terminated by a fine hair. This form is stalked
and usually associated with acute-angle branching (Fig. 3). The other form of
plurilocular structure is short, thick, rather conical and not terminated by a hair.
This form is sessile and is usually associated with obtuse-angle branching (Fig. 8).
All gradations between the two exist. Both forms differ in the degree of division
in the topmost two or three tiers of cells (compare Figs. 9f and 10e). The size of
the mature plurilocular structure varies greatly.

Figure 6 shows how a stalked, terminal plurilocular structure (b) may become
sessile and lateral (a) through the growth of a lateral branch. The structures
shown in this figure are of a form which is approximately intermediate between
the extremes possible for this species. On rare occasions some portion of the
initial filament of the plurilocular structure may remain vegetative (Fig. 8d);
other abnormal examples show bending (Fig. 4) or branching (Fig. 5), which may
be due to injury.

Plants bearing unilocular reproductive structures are extremely rare, but those
that are found bear the structures abundantly. They are associated with the pluri-
locular structures on the same plant (Fig. 13a). They are oval in shape and
usually sessile, but they may possess a one-celled stalk (Fig. 12). Variations in
shape are shown in Fig. 13b. No burst or empty containers have been found.

The initial of the unilocular reproductive structures arises as a densely cyto-
plasmic cell (Fig. 28), in which a central vacuole is soon visible (Fig. 29). The
peripheral nuclei and plastids are at first indefinitely arranged (Fig. 30), but
later they become associated; each group contains a single nucleus and presumably
indicates a future zooid. At this stage the plastids are nearer the periphery than
are the nuclei (Fig. 31).

Hither type of reproductive structure is liable to occur in any season.

FIELD OBSERVATIONS.
Distribution.

General.—E. confervoides occurs in pools in the rock platforms of exposed
coastal headlands, and is never exposed to the air. These pools nearly all become
submerged at high tide and some extend downward at least to extra-low-tide
mark. During the season of most abundant growth, Ectocarpus was found inside
Sydney Harbour (Balmoral) and Broken Bay (near Church Point); these places
are more sheltered than the normal habitats.

542 ECTOCARPUS CONFERVOIDES,

E. confervoides has been found in all its forms on Hormosira Banksii, which
is at all times the most common host. Similar forms grow also on rocks and wood,
and on various other plants, including Ulva, Colpomenia, Ecklonia, Zonaria,
Dictyota, Sargassum, Blossevillea, Amphiroa and Corallina species. From this it
appears that Ectocarpus in the Sydney district is not dependent on any particular
host or hosts. Knight reports (1923) a definite host correlation in Pylaiella
litoralis through the season, while Papenfuss (1935) indicates the presence of an
E. siliculosus—host relationship which is obligate in the case of the sexual plant.

Seasonal.—During the course of a year there occurs a marked rise and fall in
the abundance of Hctocarpus. The maximum abundance occurs about March to
April. It is, however, fairly prevalent from January to June and it is possible
to find plants at all times of the year in pools which are exposed at low tide for
only a very short time. As conditions become favourable a progressive upward
migration occurs, the plants occupying positions which are exposed at low tide
for increasingly longer periods. As EH. confervoides increases in abundance, it
appears on any plants which happen to occur in suitable pools. Thus the seasonal
change is related to conditions of the pools and not to distribution of a host.
Later in the season the amount of Hctocarpus diminishes, the last remaining
plants being limited to: (1) Deep pools, in which tufts of Hctocarpus occur
occasionally; (2) Extensive, shallow, cliff-sheltered pools, in which Hctocarpus
grows lithophytically; (3) Pools exposed for very short periods at low tide. This
zone probably extends below the lowest tide mark, and is the only permanent
habitat of H. confervoides.

Local distribution may be affected by a storm, the plants on occasion being
smothered by sand.

As EH. confervoides grows both on rocks and on Hormosira Banksti, which is
plentiful throughout the year, the changes in its abundance are not connected with
substrate. As the permanent habitat is rarely, if ever, exposed between tides, it is
thought that seasonal migration may be connected with changes throughout the
year in the conditions experienced during exposure. WHctocarpus plants in pools
which are exposed during the day frequently exhibit a reversible plasmolysis, due,
no doubt, to increased salinity of the pool water.

Bursting of the Plurilocular Structures and Development of Zooids.

Plurilocular reproductive structures at all stages of development may be found
together. No factor could be correlated with the liberation of zooids, despite an
analysis of the habitat-factors during twenty-four hours of HE. confervoides plants
growing in a pool at Narrabeen headland. Artificial methods which cause bursting
are described by Knight (1929); these were not used by the writer.

The bursting of a plurilocular structure commences by a tear which appears
at the apex, and the contents are freed in sudden bursts through this. The internal
walls have previously been dissolved. After the zooids of the upper half have been
freed, the rate of liberation becomes more rapid for a time; later, however, the
rate decreases progressively. Usually about five zooids remain permanently .inside
the encasing wall. The rounded zooids within the plurilocular structure become
elongated during a laboured passage through the aperture; they then escape
rapidly and again assume their rounded form. These rounded, freed zooids form
a dense ellipsoidal or spherical mass at the mouth of the bursting structure. The
outer zooids of this mass soon become pyriform and active, cilia and an eye-spot
are now distinguishable in addition to the chromatophores and pyrenoids. Knight
(1929) reports that there are two chromatophores in each swarmer. Kylin (1933)

BY VALERIE MAY. 543

says there is usually only one. As cells of the adult plant may contain one to
humerous chromatophores (Figs. 8b and 10a) no importance need be attached to
the number in the zooid. Each zooid rotates before moving away, and it retains
this rotation throughout its motile stage. The motile zooids tend to radiate from,
not congregate about, the plurilocular structures. On loss of motility, the zooids
again become rounded. The time taken for these processes appears to vary. The
inside of the empty outer wall of a plurilocular structure shows highly refractive
protuberances; these mark the position of former main cross-walls. Very small,
‘circular structures, apparently of the same substance, are freed with the zooids.

The size of the zooids, before and after motility, is usually constant. A series
of them showing progressively greater size may, however, be found on occasion.
The greater size is due to the presence of a greater volume of cytoplasm than is
normal. It is suggested that the variation in size of these zooids depends upon the
irregularity in the divisions of the plurilocular structures before bursting, and is
in no wise connected with fusion. Equally large zooids may be found at the mouth
of or inside the plurilocular structures. The inequality of size of the divisions of
the unburst structure is shown in Figure 9e.

No sign of fusion of the zooids was ever observed, so that the zooids of the
plurilocular structures function as zoospores, reproducing the plant asexually.

The resting zoospore has a thin enveloping wall. On germination, the contents
pass out of this to form a rounded mass, from which a filament later arises. This
produces a branching system of prostrate and upright filaments (Fig. 14). In
some instances the substrate may be the parent plant, but it is thought that such
epiphytes do not develop to maturity. Sometimes a loosened zoospore may
germinate within the encasing walls of a plurilocular zoosporangium. Material
kept in the laboratory in tanks showed the development of unloosened zoospores
(aplanospores) from within the zoosporangium; the filaments grew freely through
the surrounding walls. A similar development in another species has been seen
under natural conditions. Kylin (1933) describes the development of #. siliculosus
in detail.

Host RELATIONSHIPS.

Parasitism has been reported in H. Padinae Sauv. by Sauvageau (quoted by
Williams, 1925); this suggested the advisability of an investigation of
E. confervoides from this point of view. Plants of Hormosira Banksii (Turn.)
Decne. and Colpomenia sinuosa (Roth) Derb. and Sol., on which H. confervoides
was growing, were examined in section. The methods used in fixation, staining,
etc., are described under the heading ‘‘Cytology”.

In Colpomenia the large, central cells were unaltered, but the arrangement of
the small, epidermal cells was disturbed by the filaments of the Ectocarpus. In all
cases the filaments of Hctocarpus appear to pass between the epidermal cells,
displacing them, but no case has shown the development of haustoria, and there
is no close apposition between the cells of the two plants (Figs. 32 and 33). We
may say, then, that HE. confervoides on C. sinuosa behaves as an epiphyte, the basal
portions of which are endophytic.

The results obtained in the case of Hormosira were rather more unusual. The
epidermal cells of this plant develop a thick, cuticle-like layer to their outer wall.
This layer is periodically shed, a new one replacing it (Fig. 37). A cast of the
cell detail of the plant surface is retained usually by the portion shed. Successive
layers may remain superimposed on the plant (Fig. 36). When epiphytes, often
including Hctocarpus, are present on the surface of the “cuticle” they are shed with

5A4 ECTOCARPUS CONFERVOIDES,

it (Fig. 37). However, Hctocarpus is able sometimes to continue growth through
the “cuticle” layers as they are produced (Figs. 34, 35). This character, as well
as re-infection, accounts for the continued growth of Hctocarpus on Hormosira
throughout the season. In portions of Hormosira bearing Ectocarpus, occasionally
there is no sign of the cuticle-like layer. In these parts, the large, inner, cortical
cells of Hormosira lie nearer the surface, and the epidermal cells are rather more
loosely arranged than usual. These portions may be termed Hctocarpus-galls
(Figs. 38, 39). No haustoria have been observed, nor is there very close associa-
tion of the cells of the two plants, so that parasitism does not seem indicated. The
presence of foreign filaments within the “cuticular” surface apparently suffices to
cause Hormosira to develop loose-celled galls, on which the “cuticle” layer is no
longer formed. Figure 38 shows the change from normal to a gall.

It appears that from both Colpomenia and Hormosira, E. confervoides gains
position but not nutrition, penetration of the outer layers of the host being
endophytic, not parasitic. This conclusion is supported by the abundant growth
of the same plant on rocks. Furthermore, parasitic algae are usually associated
(Setehell, 1914) with specific hosts; this is certainly not the case here.

CytToLoGy AND LirrE History.

Method.—Cytological details were obtained from the non-haired variety of
E. confervoides. This is the more common form in the Sydney district. The
plants examined were mainly epiphytes on H. Banksii; those growing on C. sinuosa
were found to possess the same number of chromosomes. Since the forms of
E. confervoides found on various hosts (e.g. Ulva, Colpomenia, Ecklonia, Zonaria,
Dictyota, Sargassum, Blossevillea, Amphiroa, and Corallina species) correspond
microscopically to plants growing on H. Banksii, it appears highly probable that
they are cytologically identical. A morphological difference has been reported as
accompanying a difference in the number of chromosomes, when this has been
_ found within the species H#. confervoides (Papenfuss, 1935).

After fixation in 1% chrom-acetic acid in salt water, the material was washed
well and then was embedded in paraffin. Sections for the study of host relation-
ships were cut at thicknesses up to 64; for nuclear detail the most satisfactory
thickness was 3u. Staining presented many difficulties. There is very little
differentiation shown by Hctocarpus when treated with the usual combinations of
stains. The cleanest and clearest staining obtained was that given by magdala red
and aniline blue, the sections being left for some days in the magdala red. Iron
alum-Haematoxylin-light green was the staining combination used for confirmation
of the chromosome number.

Observations.—In material treated as described above, the pyrenoid bodies and
the nucleus appear more prominently than they do in the living state. The
nucleus, except for the nucleolus, appears nearly uniform, and lightly-stained. The
single nucleolus stains most heavily at its periphery; inside this band there may
be one, two, or three colourless areas (Figs. 16, 17).

The cell detail is shown more clearly by the vegetative than by the repro-
ductive cells. In some cases interpretation of the cell contents of the chambers
of the plurilocular structure is almost impossible because of the small size, dense
protoplasm, and especially the uniformity of staining.

The diameter of the nucleus usually measures approximately 3-6u, that of the
nucleolus 1:8u. Serial sections 3u thick showed all necessary nuclear detail in the
one section.

BY VALERIE MAY. 5A5

The chromosomes are only slightly elongated, if not spherical. They are very
small, but it is possible to count them, especially when at the metaphase stage of
division.

The chromosome number in the normal vegetative cell (Fig. 15) and in the
plurilocular zoosporangium (Figs. 21, 22, 25) is 16, so that the asexual zoospores
also have 16 chromosomes. Meiosis occurs during the formation of the unilocular
reproductive structure, so that the daughter nuclei and the zooids each carry the
haploid number of chromosomes (Figs. 30, 31). The figures given here are
similar to those of Knight (1929).

Fig. 15.—Longitudinal section of a vegetative cell showing mitosis. x 1,360.

Fig. 16.—Longitudinal section of a vegetative cell showing a resting nucleus.
Nucleolus has two light areas. x 1,360.

Fig. 17.—Transverse sections of vegetative cells showing variation in size. The
peripheral arrangement of the chromatophores in the cytoplasm is illustrated. The
nucleolus contains one (a) or two (b) clear areas within it. x 1,360.

Fig. 18.—Transverse section of an initial of a plurilocular structure, after the forma-
tion of the first vertical wall. x 1,360.

Fig. 19.—Transverse section of an initial of a plurilocular structure, after the forma-
tion of the second vertical wall in one cell only. ‘This view is less common than that
shown in Fig. 20. x 1,360.

Fig. 20.—Transverse section of a plurilocular reproductive structure after the forma-
tion of the second vertical wall; one quadrant shows a nucleus dividing. x 1,360.

Fig. 21.—As Fig. 20. x 1,360.

Fig. 22.—Transverse section of a plurilocular reproductive structure at a later stage
than shown above, further vertical walls having formed. Nuclear division is shown.
x 1,360.

Fig. 23.—This figure shows a different order in the formation of vertical walls from
that shown in Figure 22. x 1,360.

546 ECTOCARPUS CONFERVOIDES,

Fig. 24.—A longitudinal section of an initial. of a plurilocular structure. at the
filament stage. The cells which are about to divide actively (from b to apex) can be
distinguished from the normal vegetative cells (c to b) by their dense contents, especially
cytoplasm. Wall formation is incomplete at a. x 1,360.

Fig. 25.—Longitudinal section of a plurilocular reproductive structure, in which
mitosis is shown. There are sixteen chromosomes. x 1,360.

Fig. 26.—Longitudinal section of a young plurilocular reproductive structuré. x 1,360.

Fig. 27.—A selection of chromatophores and associated pyrenoids from a single cell.
x 1,360.

Fig. 28.—Transverse section of an initial cell of a reproductive structure. It is
distinguished from a vegetative cell (see Fig. 24) by the dense cytoplasmic contents. As
the nucleus is resting, the cell could be the initial of a uni- or a plurilocular structure.
an Os ;

Fig. 29.—Transverse section of a unilocular structure showing three nuclei. Wacuole
formation is apparent. The proportion of cytoplasm to vacuole is much greater here than
in a more mature structure (compare Fig. 30b). In one nucleus chromosomes are visible.
It is unusual for division in a unilocular structure not to be simultaneous (compare with
Figs. 30 and 31). x 1,360.

BY VALERIE MAY. 547

From the above it appears that the plant is diploid (2n = 16); it reproduces
asexually by means of diploid zoospores which are developed from plurilocular
reproductive structures. Very rarely unilocular reproductive structures are
developed from this diploid plant; this development is associated with meiotic
division, so that the zooids produced are haploid, each carrying eight chromosomes.

Life History.—It has been shown above that the diploid plant gives rise freely
to diploid zooids (from plurilocular structures) and, very rarely, to haploid zooids
(from unilocular structures). Zooids from the plurilocular structures (zoosporangia)
develop asexually, i.e. are zoospores. Zooids from the unilocular structures have not
been observed by the writer. These zooids occur so rarely that their function
must be of relative unimportance in this life history. A survey of the relevant
literature (see below) suggests that their behaviour may be variable. Cytological
evidence suggests they could either (1) fuse, and then produce the usual diploid
plant, or (2) develop directly to a haploid soma (as yet not found in the field).
This soma would be another phase of the life history and would finally give rise
to cells capable of fusing and so reforming the normal diploid plant; asexual
reproduction of this hypothetical soma would, of course, be possible. If reduction
division followed the formation of a zygote, the result would be the same as if the

.20ooids had developed without fusion; but a case narallel to this is unknown
in the Melanophyceae so far.

It is unlikely that haploid plants occur within the district (Five Islands,
Wollongong, to Palm Beach) examined by the writer. The examination of a wider
area may disclose their existence, though material collected from some dozen places
between Sydney, N.S.W., and Brisbane, Qsld., appeared identical with that which
was found near Sydney.

No plants of H. confervoides which differ morphologically or cytologically
from those described in this paper have been found by the writer at any season,
and there appears to be no relationship between EH. confervoides and its substrate.
This differs from where (Papenfuss, 1935) an n and 2n soma have been found.
Further, there is no seasonal drift from host to host, as was found in Pylaiella
litoralis (Knight, 1923).

Kylin (1933) said: “Dass diese Pflanzen, wenn sie an der schwedischen
Westkiiste tiberhaupt lebensfahig sind, besonders selten vorkommen, kann gar nicht
Wunder nehmen, da unilokul4re Sporangien so selten sind’, and “Wegen einer
reichen vegetativen Vermehrung der diploiden Generation mittelst Schwarmer aus
diploiden plurilokularen Sporangien ist aber der Generationswechsel weggefallen,
und tibrig bleiben dann nur diploide Individuen.” These statements could well
apply to the Sydney district.

The life history described above may be expressed diagrammatically as in
Figure 44. The dotted line shows both methods of development possible for the
haploid zooids from the unilocular structures.

This diagram may now be compared with other published results of Ectocarpus.

Discussion —Knight (1923) has shown the life history of Pylaiella litoralis to
be one of fluctuating alternation with similarity of form. The diploid plant is the

Fig. 30.—a and b show longitudinal sections of vacuolated unilocular structures
undergoing simultaneous nuclear division, eight chromosomes appearing in each nucleus.
a is a surface section. Serial sections show seven peripheral nuclei in the next section
and two surface ones (as here) in the third. b is a more median section than a, and
shows the vacuole occupying a central position. ec shows an initial of a plurilocular
structure (ii) associated with unilocular structures (i). (a, b, x 1,360; c, x 216.)

Fig. 31.—As Fig. 30 a and b, but an association of nuclei with chromatophores is
suggested. x 1,360.

548 ECTOCARPUS CONFERVOIPES,

<0 As
Ba
1,

Nowses
BEER

=

a

Fig. 32.—e Longitudinal section of a fold in Colpomenia sinuosa. The epidermal zone
is disturbed by filaments of Ectocarpus, while the large central cells are unaltered.
b shows a surface section of this same fold and so more detail of the narrow epidermal
zone is obtainable. x 76.

Fig. 33.—This is the central portion of the tissue shown in Fig. 32b. The filaments of
Ectocarpus only are shown in cell detail. The loose arrangement of the tissues is clearly
shown. There is no sign of parasitism. x 316.

Fig. 34.—Penetration of the ‘cuticle’ of Hormosira Banksii by filaments of
Ectocarpus. x 204.

Fig. 35.—As Fig. 34, but the tip of the penetrating filament is flattened into a
“holdfast”. x 204.

Fig. 36.—Transverse section of the thallus of Hormosira Banksii showing shed
“cuticle” layers. x 264.

Fig. 37.—As Fig. 36, but epiphytic Hctocarpus is being shed with the ‘“‘cuticle’’. x 264.

Fig. 38.—Longitudinal section of a gall on Hormosira Banksii. As in Figs. 34, 35
and 39, the “‘cuticle’’ is shown as black. The large-celled, central tissue of Hormosira
protrudes towards the surface. Filaments of Ectocarpus and epidermal cells of
Hormosira are associated in the gall. The apparent difference in the thickness of the
“cuticle” on either side of the gall is due to the ‘cuticle’ having been torn loose in one
casey x) 60:

Fig. 39.—The edge of a gall is shown in detail; penetration of the “cuticle” by
filaments of Hctocarpus. is illustrated. x 264.

BY VALERIE MAY. 549

more prevalent and reproduces itself asexually by zooids which are formed in the
plurilocular zoosporangia. Reduction occurs in the first division of the unilocular
gametangium, whose haploid zooids either straightway fuse (Knight, 1929), and
presumably give rise to the diploid plant or, much more generally, form a haploid
soma (Knight, 1923). The plurilocular structure of the haploid soma gives rise to
gametes which either fuse, then give rise to the diploid plant, or develop asexually
to produce anew the haploid soma. Diagrammatically this may be shown as
Figure 40.

Papenfuss (1935) has summarized the contradictory reports of early workers
regarding the behaviour of zooids of H. siliculosus. Sauvageau (1896-7) and
Kuckuck (1891-1912) held that the zooids of the plurilocular structures were
asexual. Kuckuck (1891) and Reinhardt (1884) reported the zooids of the
unilocular structure as asexual. Oltmanns (1899) reported that sexual zooids were
produced from the plurilocular structures. Detailed work on this species has been
done by Berthold (quoted by Knight, 1929); Knight (1929); Kylin (1933); Fdéyn
(1934), and Papenfuss (1935).

Plants collected at Naples by Berthold were haploid, with eight chromosomes
(Knight, 1929). Their plurilocular structures produced gametes which usually
fused before further growth, but which could develop asexually. The culture
obtained from the products of the plurilocular structures contained small plants,
some bearing plurilocular structures only (plants, haploid, i.e. from the unfused
zooids?), others bearing pluri- and unilocular structures (plants developed from
zygotes?). It may be that reduction occurs in the diploid unilocular structure,
the zooids produced then giving rise to the usual haploid plants. Unfortunately,
work was not continued on these cultured plants; their cytology was not
investigated.

Knight (1929) reaffirmed the sexual nature of the zooids described by
Berthold, and determined the chromosome number (eight) of the plants which
grow freely near Naples.

Bjgrn Fgyn (reported by Fdyn, 1934) repeated and extended the investigation
of Berthold. Gametes from plurilocular structures of plants of different sex were
mixed and copulation occurred. Zygotes, with which were associated a few female
gametes, were then cultured. Plurilocular structures on the resultant plants gave
rise to asexual zoospores. Zooids from unilocular structures (which might occur
on plants which bore plurilocular structures) also germinated directly.

F¢éyn summarizes thus: ‘Hs ist bei dem neapler Material ein Genera-
tionswechsel vorhanden zwischen einer haploiden sexuellen Generation, die nur
pluriloculare Behaiter erzeugt, und einer diploiden, vegetativen Generation mit
zwei Sorten von Behaltern: pluriloculare mit diploiden Schwérmern und
uniloculare mit haploiden Zoosporen. Dass Gameten, die nicht zu Kopulation
kommen, sich parthenogenetisch entwickeln kénnen, hat schon Berthold gezeigt,
dass die sich direkt zu Geschlechtspflanzen entwickeln, wissen wir von Hartmann
(1929).”

It is highly probable that the diploid plant, readily obtained in culture, occurs
naturally at Naples. As Papenfuss (1935) says: “. . . it is evident that such
plants exist there. Both Berthold and Oltmanns observed “neutral” spores from
plurilocular sporangia, and Oltmanns states that these are generally larger than
the gametes, facts which indicate that these zoids were diploid zoospores.”

A diagrammatic scheme is shown in Figure 41.

The results obtained by Knight at Port Erin were that the plants were
diploid (sixteen chromosomes) and gave rise to asexual zoospores from the

550 ECTOCARPUS CONFERVOIDES,

plurilocular structures. Reduction occurred in the first division of the unilocular
structures, the zooids thereof (each with eight chromosomes) fusing after libera-
tion. The zygote produced the normal, diploid plant. Diagrammatically this may
be represented as in Figure 42.

The main difference between these two sets of results is that the prevalent
plant was haploid in one case and diploid in the other; also that the plurilocular
structures gave rise to potentially sexual zooids in one case and to asexual zooids
in the other.

Figure 45 is a theoretical scheme showing the range of development possible
in the complete life cycle of Ectocarpus confervoides. In certain localities, phases
of the life history may be absent. The form of the life history occurring at any
one place may be determined by the habitat there. This scheme would account
for the existence of conflicting reports.

Kylin (1933), at Kristinberg, found individuals of E. siliculosus (presumably
diploid), which bore plurilocular structures. The swarmers from these developed
directly to new individuals, which were morphologically the same as the parent
plant. Unilocular structures occurred extremely rarely and never in his cultures;
when present they either occurred alone or were associated with the plurilocular
structures. No haploid plants were found. Kylin says: “. . . erklare ich den
Wegfall des Generationswechsels mit einer vegetativen Vermehrung der vorhan-
denen diploiden Individuen mittelst diploider rein vegetativer Schwarmer aus
diploiden plurilokularen Sporangien.” As in the plant cycle as lived at Sydney,
the products of the unilocular structures are negligible, and Kylin says further
(1933): “Primar liegt meiner Meinung nach bei Hctocarpus siliculosus an der
schwedischen Westktiste ein Generationswechsel mit zwei einander morphologisch
gleichen Generationen vor. Wegen einer reichen vegetativen Vermehrung der
diploiden Generation mittelst Schwarmer aus diploiden plurilokularen Sporangien
ist aber der Generationswechsel weggefallen, und tibrig bleiben dann nur diploide
Individuen.” These results are shown in Figure 44.

Papenfuss (1935), at and near Wood’s Hole, found both haploid (eight
chromosomes) and diploid (sixteen chromosomes) plants. The haploid form was
represented only at Penikese Island, 20 miles from Wood’s Hole, while the diploid
plants occurred also at Wood’s Hole itself. The more common plant was the
diploid, and it bore both unilocular and plurilocular structures. Zooids formed in
the plurilocular zoosporangia were asexual. Meiosis occurred during the develop-
ment of the unilocular structures; the zooids produced from these gave rise to
the haploid soma. The haploid plant was inferior to the diploid in size, length of
cells, and size of plurilocular structures. These reproductive structures produced
gametes, all those from one plant being of the same sex. The male and female
gametes both varied greatly in size; so, as a result, did the zygotes. The zygote
developed into the normal diploid plant. Parthenogenetic development of either
gamete led to the re-formation of the haploid plant. This scheme is represented
diagrammatically in Figure 43.

Foéyn (1934) at Herdla, obtained results which are in agreement with those of
Papenfuss.

This life history differs from that reported by Knight (1929) in the behaviour
of the haploid zooids produced in the unilocular structures. Papenfuss suggests
that this difference is due to a misinterpretation by Knight. Kylin (1933) also
criticizes Knight’s work and thinks that the copulation described by her was
merely the blundering and sticking together of asexual zooids. Knight describes
fusions as being rare and associated with clump formation, the fusing zooids

BY VALERIE MAY. 551

both being motile and taking about 20 minutes to coalesce. In contrast, Papenfuss
states that the fusions between zooids from the haploid plurilocular gametangia are
numerous, the female zooids are non-motile at fusion, clump formation does not
occur, and the time of fusion is less than half a minute. He suggests Knight’s
observations were of abnormalities and that both localities present life histories
identical with that reported from the United States of America. Papenfuss reports
that the haploid plant was absent if the specific host were not present. This fact

may account for. Knight’s failure to find this form at Port Erin, if indeed it does
form part of the life history in Britain.

Reduction

Habloid

ae
4
\
’ eens
\ Fusions. 1

' \’

i Wa
A Oy

© ! :

a Te Qe;

Reduction Reduction 44

Reduchion, .
Fig. 40.—Pylaiella litoralis, Port~Erin (Knight). Haploid and diploid plants are
morphologically identical and are most abundant at different seasons.

Fig. 41.—Ectocarpus siliculosus, Naples (Berthold, Knight, and Fgyn).

The haploid
plant occurs naturally.

The diploid plants were produced in culture by Berthold and,

later, by F¢yn; if this soma occurs naturally, the life history is the same as that shown
in Figure 438.

Fig. 42.—Hctocarpus siliculosus, Port Brin (Knight).

Haploid plants absent (or
missed ?).

Fusion of haploid zooids questioned by Papenfuss (1935) and Kylin (1933).
Fig. 43.—Ectocarpus siliculosus, Herdla (Fgyn), Wood’s Hole (Papenfuss). The
haploid plants are smaller than the diploid, and they bear male or female gametes. No
fusion of zooids from unilocular reproductive structures was noted. The haploid plants
are absent if the specific host is not present.

Fig. 44.—Hctocarpus confervoides (= siliculosus), Kristinberg (Kylin), Sydney (May).
Unilocular reproductive structures are extremely rare, and the behaviour of the haploid
zooids is unknown. A haploid soma has not (yet?) been seen.

Fig. 45.—Hctocarpus confervoides (= siliculosus), theoretical scheme.
scheme includes all reported forms of the life history.
either sexually or asexually.
occur.

This theoretical
Any haploid zooid may develop
In certain localities a phase of the life history may not

552 ECTOCARPUS CONFERVOIDES,

Whether the Port Erin—Wood’s Hole life-histories are the same or not, all
reported life-histories of H. confervoides (including EH. siliculosus), including that
presented in the present paper, fit the scheme given in Figure 45.

Great differences exist in the proportion of haploid to diploid phases in the
life cycle—the relative importance of any phase varying with locality. At Naples
conditions favour the haploid plant (diploid not yet recorded as occurring
naturally); at Port Erin, Kristinberg, and Sydney, they favour the diploid (haploid
occurring rarely, if ever) and at Wood’s Hole and Herdla the balance between the
haploid and diploid phases is more even—both occurring relatively commonly. We
do not know yet what factor or factors control these relative proportions, except
that at Wood’s Hole the occurrence of the haploid phase is known to be dependent
on the presence of a specific host. In those localities where a haploid soma has
not been found, unilocular structures are very rare. Papenfuss (1935) says: “The
absence of the sexual generation of Ectocarpus in certain localities is due,
undoubtedly, to an effect of the environment which inhibits the formation of
unilocular sporangia. ... It is probable that a very slight difference in the environ-
ment may determine the absence of unilocular sporangia, for the writer found that
asexual plants growing on Spartina at Grassy Island bore plurilocular sporangia
only, while the plants which grew on Chorda in the same locality but in slightly
deeper water, bore both plurilocular and unilocular sporangia.”

The problem now existing is to find what conditions are responsible on one
hand for the production of an abundant crop of unilocular structures as against
where there is an almost complete inhibition of the formation of these reproductive
structures. In the first case, an alternation of haploid and diploid somas occurs
40",

36°55

gms./litre.
3s"
20°C.
Water
temperature.
Lge
30", 36°35
gms./litre.

Air
18°C. temperature,

25"

20"

5 36-15
it gms ./litre.

Salifity of|Water.

15 s | \\
15°C 1 35-95
' \ gms. /litre.
!
Depth 4 } '
youp4ticf 1! / ' d
Water, ! 1 , 1
above \ ! ,
Plants. , f ‘ \
Ai \
we PA b+ \ 35-75
3° 1 ; ! \ gms./litre.
lm 1 i : ' vA
n \ ! (\ /
2u ¥ Vv 1 Vey if.
Y OC) a Rao es eee as) Nee [on Aer Ente ie ol —4 AY +t
o" - Water not moving. Water not moving.
Oe Darhness| OSS “G55
WO, BY U2) eget, Sed Sy 6l ei BE 7192 10) SEM BAL 2) Sy APS Rey ir ia gtion i Eeemeey Bitre:
A.M. Yoon Midnight AM.

Fig. 46.—An analysis of the habitat factors for twenty-four hours (April 25-26, 1936)
of #. confervoides growing in a rock pool at Narrabeen headland, near Sydney.

)

BY VALERIE MAY. 553

(e.g. Wood’s Hole, Herdla, and probably Naples), while in the second case the
alternation of generations is overwhelmed and there remain no, or practically no,
haploid individuals (e.g. Port Erin, Kristinberg, and Sydney).

The only evidence we have as to the conditions favouring the formation of
unilocular structures on asexual plants is that given by Papenfuss (1935) and
quoted above, i.e. that slightly greater depth (or specific hosts?) favours the
formation of unilocular structures. The fact that F¢yn, at Herdla, Norway, has
reported the occurrence of haploid plants, and Kylin, at Kristinberg, Sweden, has
been unable to find these, suggests that the form of the life cycle is determined by
relatively local factors.

It would be most advantageous if one could compare the conditions under
which H#. confervoides thrives in those localities in which it has been studied. To
facilitate this comparison, there is given here, in graph form (Fig. 46), an analysis
for 24 hours of the habitat of H. confervoides on the coast near Sydney at the
season of its maximum prevalence.

SUMMARY.

1.—An investigation has been made of H. confervoides found growing on the
coast near Sydney, N.S.W.

2—A systematic examination led to H. siliculosus (Dillw.) Lyngb. being
regarded as merely a variety of H. confervoides (Roth) Le Jol.

3A seasonal migration up and down the rock platform is reported.

4—Host relationships have been investigated. H. confervoides has been shown
to be slightly endophytic in Colpomenia sinuosa and Hormosira Banksii. In the
latter, curious gall-formations are formed.

5.—A cytological investigation has been carried out on H. confervoides found
growing near Sydney. The chromosome numbers are 16 and 8; all plants found so
far are diploid; reduction division occurs in the unilocular structure. Asexual
zoospores from plurilocular reproductive structures may, under artificial conditions,
act as aplanospores.

6.—A discussion is given of the life cycle of H. confervoides as reported from
various localities. The conditions under which it flourishes near Sydney are
noted in order to facilitate comparisons.

Work described in this paper was performed by the writer while holding a
Caird Scholarship (1936) and a Science Research Scholarship (1937).

This investigation was carried out under the supervision of Assistant Professor
J. McLuckie, University of Sydney. Thanks are also due to Dr. L. Fraser,
University of Sydney, for her assistance and encouragement, and to Professor J.
Turner, University of Melbourne, for his criticism of the manuscript.

References.

Fern. B. Ruup, 1934.—Uber den Lebenscyklus einiger Braunalgen. Bergens Mus. Arbok.
Naturvidensk. rekke, Nr. 2, 1-9.

HARTMANN, M., 1925.—Untersuchungen Uber relative Sexualitat. 1. Versuche an
Ectocarpus siliculosus. Biol. Zentralb., 45, 449-467.

KNIGHT, MARGERY, 19238.—Studies in the Hctocarpaceae. ils The Life-history and
Cytology of Pylaiella litoralis Kjellm. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin.. 53, 343-360, Pls. 1-6.

————,, 1929.—Studies in the Ectocarpaceae. 2. The Life-history and Cytology of
Ectocarpus siliculosus Dillw. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin.. 56, 307-332, Pls. 1-6.

KYLIN, HaRALp, 1933.—Uber die Hntwicklungsgeschichte der Phaeophyceen. Lunds Univ.
Arsskrift., N.F. Avd. 2, 29(7), 1-102, Taf. 1-2.

MATHIAS, W. T., 1935.—Life History and Cytology of Phloeospora brachiata Born. Publ.
Hartley Bot. Lab., No. 138, 3-33.

Ss

554 ECLOCARPUS CONFERVOIDES.

May. VALERIE, 1938.—A Key to the Marine Algae of New South Wales. Part 1.
Chlorophyceae. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 63, 207-218.

PAPENFUsSsS, G. F., 1935.—Alternation of Generations in Ectocarpus siliculosus Dillw. Bot.
Gaz.. 96, 421-446, Pls. 6-7.

SETCHELL, W. A., 1914.—Parasitic Florideae. 1.
Pls. 1-6.

and GARDNER. N. L., 1925.—The Marine Algae of the Pacific Coast of North

America. Part 3. Melanophyceae. Univ. Calif. Pwbl. in Bot., 8, 383-898, Pls. 34-107.

WILLIAMS, J. Luoyp, 1925.—The Phaeophyceae and their Problems. Brit. Ass. Adv.
Pres. Add. Sec. K. Southampton. 182-196.

Univ. Calif. Publ. in Bot.. 6, 1-34,

Sct...

559

A NOTE ON THE RE-EXAMINATION OF AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF
CERATOPOGONIDAE (DIPTERA).

By J. W. S. MAcFIr.
(Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.ES., F.Z.8.)

(Three Text-figures. )

[Read 25th October, 1939.]

In 1889 Skuse described 17 species of Ceratopogonidae collected in Australia.
Thanks to the courtesy of Mr. A. R. Woodhill and Mr. Frank H. Taylor, I have
been permitted to re-examine one or both sexes of 6 of these species, namely those
named by Skuse Ceratopogon subnitidus, sydneyensis, marmoratus, molestus,
aeratipennis, and minusculus, and also the type material of Culicoides multi-
maculatus Taylor and C. townsvillensis Taylor.

Two of these species, namely C. marmoratus and C. molestus, are Culicoides,
and should be recognizable from the figures of the wings given by Skuse. The
descriptions of the others, published fifty years ago, are not sufficiently detailed to
enable the insects to be recognized now, or to be separated from other species of
the same genera. They are, indeed, insufficient to indicate to what genera the
insects belong, and thus Kieffer (1917) supposed all four to be Culicoides, whereas
in fact one is Forcipomyia, one Apelma, and two Dasyhelea.

The brief notes which follow may assist in the recognition of these species.

FORCIPOMYIA SUBNITIDA (Skuse).

Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. WALES, xiv, 1889, 299.

This insect is a Forcipomyia, not a Culicoides as Kieffer (1917) supposed.
Dickinson and Hill (1916), and McEachran and Hill (1916) have referred to this
species in connection with their work on Onchocerca gibsoni, but as it is a
Forcipomyia this reference requires confirmation. The male (which is not known)
is more likely to show characteristic features, but the following details about the
female may assist recognition.

2. Head with palpi rather dark brown, third segment with deep pit of
moderate size. Antennae dark brown, segments forming an almost continuous
series: 4-14 from sub-spherical to flask-shaped, ranging from about 9 by 9 to
10 by 7 (maximum) units;* 15 about 15 (including nipple-like stylet of about
3 units) by 6 units. Thorax and scutellum very dark brown or blackish. Wings
unadorned, as shown in Skuse’s figure. Legs with femora and tibiae uniformly
dark brown, tarsal segments (excepting last which is infuscated) paler brown.
Knees not pale. No tibial spines. Without scales. T.R. about 2. Abdomen very
dark brown or blackish; without scales. Spermathecae two, highly chitinized,
pyriform, subequal; total length about 70u and greatest breadth 45z.

* The unit used is approximately 3-5u,

556 AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF CERATOPOGONIDAER,

APELMA SYDNEYENSIS (Skuse).

Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. WALES, xiv, 1889, 302.

This insect is now much damaged and lacks the hypopygium. It is a species
of Apelma, not a Culicoides as Kieffer (1917) supposed, but in its present condition
shows no clear means by which it might be distinguished from other known
species.

CULICOIDES MARMORATUS (Skuse).

Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8S. WALES, xiv, 1889, 304.

This insect is a Culicoides, and should be readily recognized by the adornment
of the wings. The male (which is not known) may furnish additional diagnostic
characters. The following details about the female may facilitate recognition.

©. Head with palpi very dark, third segment longer than fourth and fifth
together, with a small sub-apical pit. Antennae brown: segments 4-10 from
sub-spherical to oval, ranging from about 10 by 10 to 11 by 8 units; 11-14 more
elongate, ranging from about 16 by 8 to 21 by 9 units; 15 about 31 by 8&8 units,
without stylet. The combined lengths of segments 3-10, 4-10 and 11-15 about 88,
73 and 105 units respectively. Wings densely clothed with macrotrichia which,
indeed, cover almost the whole surface. Adornment as shown in Skuse’s figure.
The pale spot just beyond end of costa is double; that enveloping cross-vein rather
small, covering only base of first radial cell. Legs with femora and tibiae uniformly
dark brown. Knees not pale. T.R. about 2:1. Fourth tarsal segments not cordiform.

CULICOIDES MOLESTUS (Skuse).

Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. WALES, xiv, 1889, 305.

This insect is a Culicoides, and should be recognizable by the adornment of the
wings, and the cordiform fourth tarsal segments. The male (which is not known)
may furnish additional diagnostic characters. The following details about the
female may facilitate recognition.

°. Head with antennae brown: segments 4-10 from sub-spherical to shortly
oval, ranging from about 8 by 7-8 to 9 by 7 units; 11-14 slightly longer, ranging
from about 11 by 6-7 to 14 by 6 units; 15 about 21 by 7 units, without stylet.
The combined lengths of segments 4-10 and 11-15 about 57 and 72 units
respectively. Wings with macrotrichia rather scanty, mostly at tip. Adornment as
shown in Skuse’s figure, but in the specimen examined by me the pale spot
enveloping cross-vein larger, covering proximal half of first radial cell, and the
spot between branches of Cu more central, not abutting on Cu, Legs darkish
brown with paler knees. T.R. about 2:2. Fourth tarsal segments cordiform.

CULICOIDES MULTIMACULATUS Taylor. Fig. 3.

Aust. Zoologist, i, pt. 6, 1918, 169. ;

Thanks to the kindness of Mr. F. H. Taylor, I have had the opportunity to
examine two females of this species, the type and another specimen taken with it.
A few details may therefore be added to the original description (published in
1918) to assist in differentiation from other species now known.

The eyes are bare, narrowly separated above. Palpi relatively short, the third
segment inflated about middle, with a large, shallow pit, which is subdivided:
lengths of last three segments about 25, 8, and 11 units respectively. Antennae
with segments 4-10 oval to vasiform, ranging from about 11 by 8 to 12 by 7 units;
11-14 more elongate, subequal, 17-20 by about 7 units; 15 about 30 by 9
(maximum) units, without stylet, The combined lengths of segments 3-10, 4-10,

BY J. W. S. MACFIE. 557

and 11-15 about 102, 85, and 103 units respectively. Wings finely adorned, the
distribution of the pale spots as shown in diagram (Fig. 3). In addition to these
pale spots, certain parts of the wing are paler than the rest, namely, the area
immediately below R,,;, and narrow zones along veins M,, M., Cu, Cu,, and Cu..
Macrotrichia abundant, covering almost whole surface excepting radial areas, and
extending to base between M and Cu. Legs with all knees dark, and a narrow
pale band both a little above and a little below them. T.R. almost 2. Fourth tarsal
segments sub-cylindrical, not cordiform.

_ Fig. 1.—Dasyhelea aeratipennis (Skuse). Hypopygium, ventral view, to show ninth
segment and aedeagus only.
Fig. 2.—Dasyhelea minuscula (Skuse). Hypopygium, ventral view. A, ninth segment
(at lower magnification than other figures); B, side-piece and clasper; C, harpes;
D,. aedeagus (perhaps abnormal).
Fig. 3.—Culicoides multimaculatus Taylor, female. Diagram to show adornment
of wing.

DASYHELEA AERATIPENNIS (Skuse). Fig. 1.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. WALES, xiv, 1889, 303.

This insect is a Dasyhelea, not a Culicoides as Kieffer (1917) supposed. The
following details may be added to the original description to facilitate future
recognition.

3, 2. Head with eyes densely hairy. Palpi brown, third segment about as long
as fourth and fifth together, without definite pit. Antennae rather dark brown.
In male, segments 4-11 gradually narrowing from about 9 by 11 to 10 by 7 units;
12-14 binodose, elongate, subequal, lengths about 20 units; 15 about same length,
without stylet. In female, segments forming an almost continuous series: 4-10
from sub-spherical to oval, ranging in one specimen from about 7 by 8 to 9 by 5-6
units; 11-14 subequal, about 10-11 by 5-6 units; 15 about 14 by 5-6 units, without
stylet. The combined lengths of segments 4-10 and 11-15 about 59 and 56 units
respectively. Thorax with scutellum yellow, bearing 5 bristles and one or two small
hairs. Wings well clothed with macrotrichia which, however, are not as dense as
is suggested in Skuse’s figure, but are distributed in the normal manner. Second
radial cell small, almost square in male, slightly longer than broad in female.
Legs with femora and tibiae darkish brown, and tarsal segments (excepting
last which is infuscated) almost colourless. T.R. in both sexes about 2:5. Abdomen
blackish. Spermatheca single, highly chitinized, collapsed in the specimen
examined, but probably oval. Hypopygium (Fig. 1) very dark brown. Ninth
sternite without bristles, prolonged posteriorly in middle line as a conical process
with an expanded and somewhat scoop-shaped end. Side-pieces short, broadest near
apex; claspers short, very dark. Harpes apparently similar to those of D. similis
C.I. & M., an irregularly-shaped transverse band on each side, with a rather feebly
chitinized posterior extension between, Aedeagus with lateral bars strongly
denticulated,

558 AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF CERATOPOGONIDAE.

DASYHELEA MINUSCULA (Skuse). Fig. 2.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. WALES, xiv, 1889, 299.

This insect is a Dasyhelea, not a Culicoides as Kieffer (1917) supposed. The
following details may be added to the original description to facilitate future
recognition.

go. Head with eyes densely hairy. Palpi darkish brown, short, third segment
without definite pit. Antennae darkish brown, with ample dark plume, and
finely sculptured segments: segments 4-11 ranging from about 8 by 10 to 9 by 6
units; 12-14 elongate but not clearly binodose, their lengths about 16, 15, and 11
units respectively; 15 about 18 by 6 units, without stylet. Thorax very dark
brown with traces of usual adornment. Scutellum yellowish, bearing 4 bristles.
Wings with both radial cells completely obliterated. Venation and distribution of
macrotrichia as shown in Skuse’s figure, but junction of R,.; squarer, more normal.
Legs rather pale brown, especially segments 1-4 of tarsi. T.R. about 2. Abdomen
very dark brown. Hypopygium (Fig. 2) with ninth sternite devoid of bristles,
prolonged posteriorly beyond aedeagus. Ninth tergite with a pair of large conical
processes posteriorly, and apparently no hairy processes. Claspers very highly
chitinized, much attenuated distally, almost claw-like. Harpes forming an
irregularly-shaped transverse band with a long posterior process, the end of which
is expanded and feebly chitinized. Aedeagus perhaps abnormal in the specimen
examined, asymmetrical, the chitinized parts in ventral view as shown in the
figure.

LASIOHELEA TOWNSVILLENSIS (Taylor).

Aust. Zoologist, i, pt. 6, 1918, 169 (Culicoides).

Mr. F. H. Taylor has kindly permitted me to examine specimens (females) of
this species, including the type. The insect, originally described (1918) as a
Culicoides, would now be placed in the genus Lasiohelea Kieffer 1921. It resembles
closely L. lefanui Carter, an African species, and may indeed prove to be conspecific.
Very similar if not identical forms have been taken in Malaya and elsewhere.

Several of the species of Lasiohelea differ to only a very slight degree. The
following additional characters of this species may therefore be helpful in
differentiating it from other species which may be found in Australia.

The eyes are bare. Palpi with third segment much inflated, with large shallow
pit: lengths of last three segments in one specimen about 15, 6, and 9 units
respectively. Antennae with segments 4-10 from disc-shaped to oval, ranging in
this specimen from about 6 by 8 to 8 by 6 units; 11-14 elongate, subequal,
17-18 by 5-6 (maximum) units; 15 about 22 (including nipple-like stylet of about
2 units) by 5 units. The combined lengths of segments 3-10, 4-10, and 11-15
about. 60, 50, and 93 units respectively. Wings as in L. lefanwi, but bare areas
along veins not quite so conspicuous. T.R. about 2. Claws and empodium normal.
Spermatheca single, of the same type as that of L. lefanwi, its diameter about 70.

References.

CLELAND, Dopp and FERGUSON.—Further Investigations into the Etiology of Worm Nests
in Cattle, 1916. Commonwealth of Australia.

DICKINSON and Hi.Lu.—Investigations into the Cause of Worm Nodules in Cattle, 1916.
Commonwealth of Australia.

McEacHrRAN and HiLu.—Investigations into the Cause of Worm Nodules (Onchocerca
gibsoni) in Cattle at Darwin, Northern Territory, Australia, Vet, Jowrn.. xxiii
(Giiss), BLOGs iis;

559

TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTHRA. XI-XIV.
By Consetrr Davis, M.Se., Lecturer in Biology, New Hngland University College.
(Fifty-one Text-figures. )

[Read 29th November, 1939. ]

PART XI: A NEW GENUS FROM THE CONGO.
(Seven Text-figures. )
Genus DINEMBIA, Nn. gen.

Genotype, Dinembia ferruginea, n. sp.

Fairly large Embioptera, the males with the foliowing characters: Winged,
R,,; forked, fork longer than stem; M simple; cubitus two-branched. Hind tarsi
with two relatively small ventral bladders on the first segment, one on the second.
Terminalia with tenth abdominal tergite completely cleft; right hemitergite large,
processes much as in Hmbia Latreille, but with the inner flap-like process
continuous with the hemitergite, not separated by membrane as in Hmbia. Process
of left hemitergite simple. First segment of left cercus produced inward sub-
terminally, process not prominent; relatively few, but large, sharp teeth, directed
forward, along the whole of the inner margin anterior to the subterminal
projection; teeth practically in a single row. Right cercus-basipodite large,
produced inward and backward, incompletely sutured off from first segment of
cercus.

Differs from Hmbia Latreille in the form and dentition of the left cercus; the
right cercus-basipodite; and the number of bladders on the hind tarsi. The
terminalia of the single species are throughout different from those of Hmbia
savignyi Westw., the genotype of Hmbia, and of its numerous fairly homogeneous
congeners. The separation of Dinembia is further justified by geographic
considerations, as species of Hmbia, relatively closely related to Hmbia savignyi,
occur in the same region, while no transitional species are known connecting
Dinembia with any of the true species of Hmobia.

DINEMBIA FERRUGINEA, nh. sp. Figs. 1-7.

6. Length 11:5-12 mm.; head, length 1:9 mm., breadth 1:6 mm.; forewing,
length 10-11 mm., breadth 2-:3-2:'5 mm. General colour ferruginous, head and
thoracic nota a little paler than the remainder; eyes black; wing-veins dark brown
bordered by brown bands. Head (Fig. 1) with eyes relatively large; sides behind
eyes converging, rounded posteriorly. A raised area, more or less semicircular, is
present in the middle of the epicranium. Antennae incomplete. Mandibles (Fig. 2)
with acute teeth terminally, and subterminally on the inner face, the left with
three, the right with two. Wings (Fig. 3) as in the generic diagnosis, cross-veins
vather numerous. Hind tarsi (Fig. 4) as in generic description. Terminalia
(Figs. 5-7) with right hemitergite (10R) massive, convex, posteriorly produced
inward and downward to an acute process (10RP,). Inner margin of 10R repre-
sented by a heavily-sclerotized strip (10RP.), directly continuous with 10R, with-
out separating membranes; free edge of 10RP. sinuate and posteriorly corrugated.
Left hemitergite (10L) small, inner margin produced backward as a rather short

560 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. XI-XIV,

process (10LP), obliquely truncate at tip, subacute; 10LP basally marked off from
10L by a clear boundary. First segment of left cercus (LC,) with inner margin
depressed in a shallow concavity medially, distally enlarged to a slight swelling or
process; entire inner margin anterior to process armed with large, sharp,
forwardly-directed teeth, nearly all of which are in a single longitudinal row.
Second segment of left cercus (LC.) shorter and thinner, subcylindrical. First
segment of right cercus (RC,) subeylindrical, basally separated from basipodite
(RCB) by an internal groove, not by a complete suture. RCB produced backward

Figs. 1-7.—Dinembia ferruginea, n. gen. et sp., o.
1. Head from above, x 12. 2. Mandibles from above, x 12. 3. Right forewing, x 2:7.

rc

4. Hind tarsus viewed laterally, x 22:5. 5. Terminalia from above, x 22:5. 6. Terminalia
from above, x 22:5 (different aspect). 7. Terminalia from below, x 22:5.

Fig. 3 semi-diagrammatic, remainder based on camera lucida outlines. All setae
omitted. Figs. 1-5, 7, from the holotype; Fig. 6 from paratype, viewed from a different
angle, stippling on 10RP, proportional to sclerotization.

on inner side, obtusely tapered. Second segment of right cercus (RC.) similar
to LC, Ninth sternite (H) with hind margin extended to a blunt subquadrate
process (HP). Left cercus-basipodite (LCB), between HP and base of LC,,
produced to the left into a sharp spine.

° unknown.

Locality.—Elisabethville, Belgian Congo, 11° 40’ S., 27° 34’ E.; holotype ¢
(numbered 2263) and paratype gj (2979) in the Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Harvard University.

Conventional lettering on Text-figures: 9, ninth abdominal tergite; 10L, 10R, left and
right hemitergites of tenth abdominal segment; 10LP. 10RP, processes of 10L, 10R;
10RP,, 10RP,, posterior and inner processes of 10R; LC,, LC,, RC,, RC,, first and second
segments of left and right cerci; LCB, RCB, left and right cercus-basipodites; H, ninth
abdominal sternite (hypandrium) ; HP, process of H.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 561

PART XII: THE GENUS HAPLOEMBIA VERHOEFF.

(Fifteen Text-figures. )

Genus HAaPLoEMBIA Verhoeff 1904.

Abh. Leop.-Carol. Akad. Naturf. Halle, Bd. 82, p. 201 (as subgenus of Hmbia
Latr.). Raised to generic rank, Enderlein, 1909, Zool. Anz., 35, p. 188.

Genotype, Embia solieri Rambur 1842, Hist. nat. Névroptéres, p. 3131—
(Synonym, Dityle Friederichs 1907, Verh. Zool. bot. Ges. Wien, Bd. 57, p. 272.)

Rambur’s type (de Selys Collection) is a female, lacking head and legs
(Enderlein, 1912, p. 66). I follow the interpretation of Enderlein (l.c.) and Krauss
(1911) as to the identity of Rambur’s species, and the structure of the male. It
would be beneficial if a male specimen, agreeing with this concept and collected
near the type locality (environs of Marseilles), could be selected as an allotype for
this species, fixing it with certainty.

Medium to small Embioptera, the males with the following characters: Wing-
less; two ventral bladders on the first segment of the hind tarsus, one on the second.
Right hemitergite of tenth abdominal segment produced backward and inward to a
long process. First segment of left cercus somewhat clavate, but without nodules.

HAPLOEMBIA SOLIERI (Rambur 1842). Figs. 1-4.

Embia solieri Rambur 1842, l.c—Hmbia grassii Friederichs, 1906, Mitt. Zool.
Mus. Berlin, Bd. 3, p. 227.

6 (after Krauss). Length 8-9 mm. General colour dark brown, with or
without paler flecking. Head elliptical or slightly trapezoidal, eyes small, antennae
with 18-20 segments. Mandibles (Fig. 1) elongate, incurved. Hind tarsi (Fig. 2)
with two metatarsal (basitarsal) bladders. Tenth abdominal tergite (Figs. 3-4)

Figs. 1-4.—Haploembia solieri (Ramb.), <&, from Crete (after Krauss, 1911, Pl. iii,
figs. 17D, F, H and J respectively). 1. Left mandible. 2. Tarsus of right hind-leg
from inside. 3. Terminalia from above. 4. Part of same, further enlarged.

Figs. 5-6—Haploembia megacephala Krauss, ¢ (after Krauss, 1911, PI. ii, figs.
16A, B). 5. Terminalia from above. 6. Terminalia from below.

1As Verhoeff (l.c., p. 167) states that this species has two hind metatarsal bladders,
some of his material must have been determined correctly. However, his figure (Pl. iv,
fig. 26) of a male from Sicily, given as H. solieri (Ramb.), appears to be of a species of
Embia (perhaps H. ramburi R.-Kors.). Haploembia was therefore based on a partly
misidentified series.
TT

562 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. XI-—XIV,

deeply cleft, right hemitergite (10R) produced backward and inward from outer
margin to an elongate, acutely-tapered process (10RP,), sinuous, terminally directed
slightly either to the right or to the left. Basally, the inner margin of 10RP,
overlies an obtuse flap-like process (10RP.), similar to that in Oligotoma; I follow
Krauss (1911, explanation to Pl. iii, fig. 17J) in referring to this as a process of
10R, not as a ‘median plate’. Process of left hemitergite (10LP) elongate, narrowly
tapered, acute, rotated about axis. Right cercus composed of two subcylindrical
segments (RC,, RC,), the first thicker, curved inwards a little and slightly clavate.
Left cercus composed of similar segments (LC,, LC,), the first with curvature and
distal swelling stronger than in RC,. Ninth sternite produced back to an obtuse
lobe (HP), on the left of which is an elongate chitinous structure, possibly
homologous with the structure referred to in other genera as the left cercus-
basipodite.

9. See Enderlein (1912) and Krauss (1911). Not important taxonomically.

Note.—The species seems to have a wide distribution around the Mediterranean,
exclusive of Syria. Males agreeing with this concept are recorded from Crete
(figured in this paper, after Krauss), Dalmatia (figured by Krauss, 1911, and
Enderlein, 1912), the French Riviera (Friederichs, 1906), and Sicily (Grassi and
Sandias, 1893-4). Many of the records cited by Krauss (l.c.) are based on females
or larvae, and do not therefore prove the occurrence of this species.

HAPLOEMBIA TAURICA (Kusnezov 1903).

Embia taurica Kusnezov, 1903, Rev. russe Entomol., 3, p. 208—Haploembia
taurica (Kusnezov), Krauss, 1911, p. 53.

¢ (after Kusnezov, l.c.). Length 8-11 mm. General colour dark brown, shiny,
legs and antennae paler. Head subtriangular, eyes fairly large, subreniform.
Number of antennal segments 18-19. Tarsi as in H. solieri. Terminalia similar
to H. solieri, but with the process of the left hemitergite bent to the left in the
form of a hook.

9. See Kusnezov (l.c.). Not of taxonomic importance.

Locality.—South Coast of the Crimea, from Cape Sarytsch to the Bay of
Alushta, up to 150 metres above sea-level.

Although no figures exist, and no types seem to be extant, the species may be
listed as recognizable, at least being capable of differentiation from the other
known species. The selection and complete description of a neotype (¢) from the
type region would be very advisable.

HAPLOEMBIA MEGACEPHALA Krauss 1911. Figs. 5-6.

Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23, p. 53, Pl. ii, figs. 16-16B.

¢ (atter Krauss, lc.). Length 15 mm.; head 3 mm. x 2 mm. General colour
very dark rust-brown. Head very large, broadly elliptical. Mandibles elongate,
bidentate. Terminalia (Figs. 5-6) similar to the two preceding species; but with
the process of the left hemitergite (10LP) flat, terminally outcurved in an ovoid
knob. First segment of left cercus more clavate than in H. solieri.

? unknown.

Locality.—Syria (holotype ¢ in Vienna Museum).

HAPLOEMBIA ANTIQUA (Pictet 1854). Figs. 7-15.

Embia antiqua Pictet, 1854, Traité de Paléontologie ou Histoire naturelle des
animaux fossiles, 2nd edition, vol. 2, p. 370.—Pictet and Hagen, 1856, Neuroptera,
in Berendt, Die im Bernstein befindlichen organischen Reste der Vorwelt, vol. 2,

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 563

p. 56.—Oligotoma antiqua (Pictet), Hagen, 1885, Canad. Entomologist, 17, p. 176;
Krauss, 1911, Zoologica, Hit. 60, Bd. 23, p. 47; Hnderlein, 1912, in Coll. zool. de
Selys-Longchamps, fasc. 3, p. 95.

The following description is from an excellently-preserved female, in Baltic
Amber (as were the original specimens). It is in the Harvard University collection
(number 9306). It must be freely admitted that there is no certainty that it
belongs to Pictet’s species, or even to the genus Haploembia, but the present course
involves the least addition to the nomenclature of the Order compatible with the
facts observed.

The early descriptions do not fix the species, nor do any types appear to be
extant; the present specimen may therefore be referred to Pictet’s specific name.
As it is a female, the main generic characters are lacking, but the tarsal bladders
prove that the specimen cannot be referred either to Hmbia Latr. or to Oligotoma
Westw. If such a female were found in Europe to-day, it would certainly be

8 7

Figs. 7-15.—Haploembia antiqua (Pictet), 9. 7. Head viewed obliquely, from left,
below and anteriorly, x 25. Labial palp obscured. 8. Head viewed from behind and to
the right, x 25. 9. Four of distalia of antenna, x 25. 10. Pronotum from above and to
the right, x 25. 11. Right foreleg from below, inside and anteriorly, x 25. 12. Tarsus of
left foreleg from outside, x 25. 13. Left hind-leg from outside, x 25. 14. Tarsus of right
hind-leg, from inside and distally, x 25. 15. Terminalia viewed laterally, from the left,
x 25.

Figs. 1-6, magnifications not stated by Krauss. Figs. 7-15 based on camera lucida
outlines. Stippling in Figs. 11 and 15 to represent degree of pigmentation. The black
areas of Figs. 7 and 8 represent a mouth-secretion, obscuring certain structures. MXP,
maxillary palp; LR, labrum; CL, clypeus; 7, 8, 9, abdominal tergites; 10, tenth abdominal
tergite of 9; ? LCB, structure probably representing left cercus-basipodite; VII, VIII, IX,
abdominal sternites of 92; X, longitudinally-cleft tenth abdominal sternite of 9; G,
position of @ genital aperture.

>
564 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. XI-—XIV,

referred to Haploembia; this does not prove, however, that the genus, as defined
on the characters of the male (above), existed in Oligocene times.

Two points may be noted supporting the present classification. First, Hagen
(1885, p. 177) noted that the original specimens (wingless, length 10 mm., colour
as in the present specimen) had the last tergite asymmetrical, and concluded that
he was studying males; the males of the recent species of Haploembia are wingless.
Secondly, it would not be surprising to find such a highly-specialized type as
Haploembia in the Oligocene; a very highly-specialized Embiopteron (Burmi-
tembia) is known from Burmese Amber (? Miocene).

In view of the general entomological interest of this specimen, it is described
rather fully.

9. Length just over 9 mm.; length of head 1-6 mm.; breadth of head not
discernible, as only oblique views could be obtained. General colour (to judge
from the amber specimen) dark chocolate-brown, with paler areas, especially on
thorax and inner parts of legs; no trace of pattern on head. Head (Figs. 7-8)
ovoid, pilose, eyes subreniform, broadest behind, extending forward below insertion
of antennae, with some 200 ommatidia, and with a few setae interspersed. Antennae
some 3 mm. long, each with 19 segments exclusive of the subannular basal sclerite
fused to the head-capsule. Basal segments of same general relative sizes as in
recent Embioptera (Figs. 7-8); distalia (Fig. 9) subcylindrical, each slightly
swollen distally. Palps as in recent Embioptera, maxillary with 5, labial with 3
subeylindrical segments, terminal segment longest in each case. Whole of mouth-
region obscured by a secretion, such as is noted when living Embioptera are placed
in fixative (e.g. Carnoy). Pronotum (Fig. 10) trapezoidal, broader behind, with a
transverse sulcus in anterior third (cf. Hagen, 1885, p. 177); trace of a shallow
longitudinal furrow medially in front of transverse sulcus (i.e. on ‘prozona’), none
behind (on ‘metazona’). Forelegs (Fig. 11) as in recent Embioptera, with femora
somewhat swollen, tarsi three-segmented (Figs. 11-12), the first segment very
greatly dilated, plantar surface flattened, with spinning-hairs; second segment
small, basally embedded in first; third segment longer than second, more slender at
base, with two sharp claws distally. Second pair of legs slender, as in recent
Embioptera. Hind legs (Figs. 13-14) with coxae small, fused to thorax.
Trochanter small, oblique; femur greatly swollen, to accommodate flexor muscles;
tibia more slender, somewhat curved. Three tarsal segments, the first with two
ventral bladders, one medial, one terminal; second segment short, with a terminal
ventral bladder; third segment a little longer than first, slender, curved, with two
well-developed claws.

Mesonotum and metanotum subrectangular. Wings absent. First eight
abdominal tergites subrectangular, subequal, ninth shorter, transverse, tenth entire,
subtriangular; abdominal tergites except 9 and 10 paler than head and thorax.
Pleurites represented by dark longitudinal bars placed laterally on abdominal
segments 2-8. Abdominal sternites ii—viii subrectangular, viii large, with medial
and posterior sclerotized areas. Ninth sternite large, heavily-sclerotized. <A
membraneous pad marks the position of the genital aperture between the eighth
and ninth sternites. Tenth sternite divided longitudinally, halves subtriangular.
Cercus-basipodites small, subannular. Cerci apparently symmetrical; first segment
short, little longer than thick; second difficult to see, being at the end of the
amber block, but apparently longer and thinner than first (Fig. 15).

The whole structure of the specimen is scarcely distinguishable, if at all,
from that of a female of a recent species of Haploembia, or of certain other genera
not closely related (e.g. Notoligotoma, Metoligotoma, Parembia).

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 565

Species incorrectly referred to Haploembia.

The genus Dictyoploca contains two species previously referred to Haploembia
(H. capensis Hsb.—Petersen, H. sjéstedti (Silv.) End.); the genus has been dealt
with previously (Davis, 1939). Anisembia wheeleri (Mel.) Krauss was incorrectly
referred to Haploembia by Enderlein (1912). Both Dictyoploca and Anisembia
have the left cercus echinulate in the male, the second segment being reduced in
Anisembia. To judge from the other characters of the male (especially the hemi-
tergites), neither genus is at all closely related to Haploembia, though Dictyoploca,
in common with many other genera, has the two hind metatarsal bladders as in
Haploembia.

Navas has described a number of species in the genus Haploembia which
belong to Monotylota Enderlein (recte Embia Latr., of which Monotylota must be
regarded as a synonym). Navas’s generic classification is based on a complete
misapprehension, as indicated by his remarks (1918, p. 361) concerning H. laufferi
Nav.: ‘I refer it to Haploembia, not admitting as distinct the genus Monotylota
Enderlein, erected on a character of little importance, namely, that the third
segment of the tarsi of the hind legs carries one callus on the lower part, as
against two in Haploembia. ... Such a character ... is difficult to perceive.’
Navas apparently confuses the term ‘metatarsus’, taking it as the third instead
of the first segment. The ‘difficulty to perceive’ the character is not significant.
Any adequate description of a member of this Order entails maceration of at
least some parts; even in very old dried material, maceration allows the tarsal
bladders to be seen with ease, even with the dissecting microscope, if a search is
made on the correct segment.

Actually, ‘Wonotylota’ is exceedingly different from Haploembia, quite apart
from the tarsi; its male terminalia are on exactly the same general lines as
Embia savignyi Westw. (the genotype of Hmbia), and its numerous winged
congeners. ‘Monotylota’ differs from Hmbia, in fact, only in the absence of wings,
which is known to bea very subsidiary character in this Order. Monotylota should,
therefore, be rejected as a synonym of Hmbia Latr. Some of the more obvious
differences from Haploembia lie in the echinulate first segment of the left cercus,
and in the processes of the right hemitergite, in the male.

Navas (1918) has described Haploembia (Monotylota) laufferi (p. 360), and
-re-described Embia duplex Navas (1908, p. 288), as Haploembia duplex, on page 359
of the same work; both descriptions are from males, from Spain, and are accom-
panied by figures of the terminalia. These figures (l.c., 14 and 15) bear no
resemblance to Haploembia, but appear to be almost incredibly bad delineations
of Embia ramburi Rimsky-Korsakov; the figure of H. duplex shows the left cercus
echinulate, and although these nodules are omitted in the figure of H. laufferi, the
general facies of an Hmbia is not obscured even by the poor drawing. The
difference between H. laufferi and H. duplex appears to lie in the shorter second
segment of the left cercus of the former, a difference which may be individual,
e.g., following regeneration from a damaged larval cercus.

I have examined a male of Embia ramburi Rimsky-Korsakov (determined by
Rimsky-Korsakov), from Ronda, Spain (Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard
University). It agrees well with the current concept of the species (cf.
Friederichs, 1934, fig. 2a, ¢ from Barcelona; Friederichs had studied males from
the type locality, and has given (1923, fig. 3) a semi-diagrammatic figure).

It may be assumed that H. duplex and H. laufferi, and also Embia cephalotes
Navas 1908 (referred by Enderlein, 1912, to Haploembia solieri, with a query), are
referable to Embia ramburi, and, in any case, not to Haploembia. The same
probably applies to Haploembia codinai Navas (1922, p. 126), from Ceuta, Morocco.

566 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA, XI-XIV,

The type of E. cephalotes is a female, and no information of a specific nature
could be obtained from it. The types (¢) of H. lauwfferi and H. codinai are
recorded as being in Spain (Navas Collection and Mus. Catalufia respectively),
and may be no longer extant. The four species are best deleted from any subse-
quent lists, as unrecognizable, but probably synonyms of Hmbia ramburi. The
same may be said of H. silvanoi Navas (1908, p. 269).

Haploembia algerica Navas (1930, p. 136) is a wingless species of Hmbia. I
have examined the type (4) in the Paris Museum. The species will be re-described
when the genus Hmbia is dealt with. Navas’s figure (1930, fig. 45) bears no
similarity to the actual type.

Haploembia bourgi Navas (1923, p. 15) was described from a female from
Africa (Galla Aroussi, Valley of the Ouébi, Djiboanno). I have examined the
specimen (Mus. Paris); it is impossible to say to what species or genus it belongs.
It should be deleted from future lists as unrecognizable. There is no evidence
that Haploembia extends to this region.

Navas (1923) described two species (Haploembia collaris, H. clypeata) from
females from HElisabethville, Belgian Congo. He later (1928) transferred the
former species to Oligotoma, on the basis of two males from Carin Cheba, Birmania
(Burma), which showed some resemblance in colour (dark brown with orange
prothorax). These two males (Genoa Museum) are certainly referable to
Oligotoma, but cannot of course be referred to collaris Nav., from geographic
considerations; they will be redescribed in due course under the genus Oligotoma,
as a new species. Actually, there are several species from the Congo region with
dark brown body and orange pronotum (e.g. Embia lunaris Nav., Hnveja bequaerti
Nav., Embia femorata Nav.), to any of which either one or both H. collaris or
H. clypeata might belong. As these two species cannot be established even by
collection of males from the same locality (since numerous species occupy this
region, rendering identification of a male with a previously-collected female
impossible), they should be deleted from subsequent lists.

It will be seen that records of recent species rightly referable to Haploembia
are, in fact, restricted to regions not far from the coasts of the Mediterranean
and Black Seas.

Relationships of Haploembia.

The differences of Haploembia from Dictyoploca and Embia (syn. Monotylota)
are clearly marked, and no close relationship seems to exist. The affinities of
Haploembia seem to tend rather towards Oligotoma, as noted in the family classi-
fication of Krauss (1911). This affinity is to be seen in the smooth left cercus,
and in both processes of the right hemitergite, in the male. The long outer process
of this hemitergite overlies an obtuse medial flap in both genera; even the medial
sclerotization of this flap, characteristic of Oligotoma, is present in Haploembia, to
judge from Krauss’s figures (1911, Pl. iii, figs. 17B, H and J). Haploembia is wing-
less; Oligotoma possesses species with wingless forms in the male. The only
generic difference that can be readily selected lies in the tarsal bladders, which
seem to be a fairly reliable supplementary generic character throughout the Order,
showing intragenerie variability in only one exceptional case.

Key to the Species of Haploembia (<).

ee COS GAGE O OS CoC OOOO EO COSI CIRM Oto concn oo Ronn Kronos p antiqua (Pictet)
FREGEMNE co ciagd, a aiane eons abs peeks SAO eh GHD IG, itor osday aicaneteaplane: Srlcue Vaupsiial sy oepePaptere ad eaebe eke: aie Wee on alse Romagt enn eee 2

2. Process of left hemitergite of tenth abdominal segment acutely tapered, not bent to
the "lett terminally re Meets ers cis Chota cee here susie ere MINN oer oltre solieri (Rambur)

Process of Jlefoyhemitereitel NOtiasraAbOvel Gs Here ciserete cle te benny cues ere Gheoueionciohene, <icteknens te 3

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 567

3. Process of left hemitergite ending in an ovoid knob bent to the left ................
BS ee eG Ido CII Co ANSEL ORGS MONE ER CMO EMCO TER ETH CUE ten here csRan megacephala Krauss
Process of left hemitergite terminally bent to the left in the form of a hook ........
MILA Gl Crem etre terns a, AMMEN Na. ne cee a Nats ene Mich shat oth Cateye ee evel span eee taurica (Kusnezov)

List of References.

Davis, C., 1939.—Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. vii. The Genus Dictyoploca
Krauss. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., lxiv, 5-6.

ENDERLEIN, G., 1909.—Die Klassifikation der Embiiden, nebst morphologischen und
physiologischen Bemerkungen, besonders tiber das Spinnen derselben. Zool. Anz., 35.

——_—_——,, 1912.—_Embiidinen, in Coll. zool. de Selys-Longchamps, fase. 3.

FRIEDERICHS, K., 1906.—Zur Biologie der Embiiden. Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berlin, Bd. iii, Hft. 2.

, 1907.—Zur Systematik der Embiiden. Verh. Zool. bot. Ges. Wien., 57.

, 1923.—Gkologische Beobachtungen tiber Embiidinen. Capita Zoologica, Deel ii,
JN Ale

—, 1934.—Das Gemeinschaftsleben der Embiiden und N&heres zur Kentniss der
Arten. Arch. f. Naturg., N.F., Bd. 3, Hft. 3.

Grassi, G. B., and SanpiAs, A., 1893-4.—Constituzione e sviluppo delle societa dei
Termitidi. Appendice II: Contribuzione allo studio delle Embidini. Atti Accad. Gioen.
Catania, (4), 6-7.

HaGEN, H. A., 1885.—Monograph of the Embiidina. Canad. Hntomologist, 17 (London,
Ontario).

Krauss, H. A., 1911.—Monographie der Embien. Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23 (Stuttgart).

Kusnezov, N. J., 1903.—A New Species of Hmbia Latr. from the Crimea. Rev. russe
adEntomologie, 3.

NavAs, L., 1908.—Neur6épteros de Espafia y Portugal. Brotéria, Série Zoolégica, v-vii.

——_———, 1918.—Neur6épteros Nuevos o Poco Conocidos. Mem. Real. Acad. de cienc. y
artes de Barcelona, xiv, 4.

, 1922.—Insectos de la Excursi6én de D. Ascensio Codina a Marruecos, 1921.
Treballs del Museu de Ciénc. Naturals de Barcelona, iv, 4.

, 1923.—Communicaciones Entomoldégicas. 6. Notas sobre Embiépteros. Revista
de la Academia de Ciencias de Zaragoza, viii.

, 1928.—Insectos Ex6ticos Neurdépteros y Afines del Museo Civico de Génova.
Ann. Mus. Civ. Storia Naturale Genoa, 53.

, 1930.—Insectos del Museo de Paris. Brotéria, Série Zool6gica, xxvi, fase. 3.

Picret, F. J., 1854.—Traité de Paléontologie ou Histoire naturelle des animaux fossiles,
2nd edition, vol. 2 (Paris).

, and H. A. HaGceEeN, 1856.—Neuroptera, in Berendt, G. C., Die im Bernstein
befindlichen organischen Reste der Vorwelt, vol. 2 (Berlin).

RAMBuR, P., 1842.—Histoire naturelle des Insectes. Névroptéres (Paris).

VERHOEFF, K. W., 1904.—Zur vergleichenden Morphologie und Systematik der Embiiden.
Abh. Leop.-Carol. Akad. Naturf. Halle, 82.

PART XIII: A NEW WEST AFRICAN GENUS.
(Twenty-two Text-figures. )

Genus BERLANDIELLA, nN. gen.

Genotype, Hmbia (Dihybocercus) berlandi Navas, 1922, Rev. Acad. Cienc.
Zaragoza, vii, p. 30.—Dihybocercus berlandi Navas, 1931, Rev. Zool. Bot. africaines
(Tervueren), vol. 21, fase. 2, p. 134.

Rather large, pale-coloured African Embioptera, the males with the following
characters: Winged, R, not confluent with R.,;, R,,, forked, M simple; cubitus with
more than two branches (rarely up to six branches), the extra branches usually
given off posteriorly in pectinate arrangement from the first anterior branch of the
main stem. Hind tarsi with two prominent ventral bladders on first segment, one
on second. Tenth abdominal tergite with a complete longitudinal division; right
hemitergite as in Hmbia Latr., with an acute postero-ventral process directed

568 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. XI-—XIV,

inward, and an inner flap-like process. Process of left hemitergite simple, as in
Embia. First segment of left cercus with inner margin composed of two longi-
tudinal ridges, one above the other, with a shallow longitudinal concavity between;
ridges smooth or undulating in general contour, furnished along practically the
entire length with small blunt teeth or nodules. Hypandrium and cercus-
basipodites as in Hmbia.

Three species: Portuguese Guinea to Southern Nigeria, and inland.

The new genus is differentiated from Hmbia by the venation (R,-R,,, and Cu,:)
and the number of tarsal bladders. The first segment of the left cercus is different
from that of any true Embia. Berlandiella stands perhaps closest to Dinembia
Davis, from the Congo, which agrees in the number of tarsal bladders (as opposed
to Embia). The form of the cubitus and of the right cercus-basipodite differen-
tiates Dinembia from Berlandiella; the first segment of the left cercus of the
former is also highly characteristic, with one series of large pointed. teeth.

Berlandiella is very obviously different from Dihybocercus End., especially in
the process of the left hemitergite, which is complex in the latter genus.
Berlandiella resembles Leptembia Krauss in the venation, tarsal bladders and left
hemitergite, but differs in the right hemitergite and in the first segment of the
left cereus, which in Leptembia carries a forwardly-directed echinulate lobe, longer
than thick.

BERLANDIELLA BERLANDI (Navas 1922). Figs. 1-5.

Embia (Dihybocercus) berlandi Navas, 1922, 1.c.

The following description is from Navas’s type (Mus. Paris):

6. Length 15 mm.; head 2:4 mm. x 1:9 mm.; forewing 10 mm. x 2-7 mm.;
hindwing 9 mm. x 2-5 mm. General colour pale ferruginous, eyes black, veins
dark brown (R,) to pale golden-brown (remainder), longitudinal bands bordering
veins very pale yellowish-brown, almost hyaline; intervenal lines hyaline. Head
(Fig. 1) with eyes relatively large, prominent; sides behind eyes converging only

Sc

Figs. 1-5.—Berlandiella berlandi (Navas), holotype ¢@ (Baraguine, Middle Niger).
1. Head, x 8. 2. Right forewing, x 8. 3. Terminalia from above, x 15. 4. The same,
viewed more from the left, x 15. 5. Terminalia from below, x 15.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 569

slightly; clypeus with a curved furrow, concave side anterior. Antennae with 27
segments. Wings as in generic diagnosis; cubitus 4-branched in right forewing
(Fig. 2), 3-branched in other wings. Hind tarsi as in generic description.
Terminalia (Figs. 3-5) with right hemitergite (10R) produced postero-ventrally
to an acute inwardly-directed process (10RP,). Inner margin of 10R with a rather
short flap-like process (10RP.). Left hemitergite (10L) subtriangular, process
(10LP) tapered, acute, curved to the left terminally. Right cercus with two sub-
cylindrical segments (RC,, RC.), the first thicker, the second damaged in the type;
right cercus-basipodite (RCB) subannular. First segment of left cercus (LC,)
massive, inner face with a shallow longitudinal concavity or groove; longitudinal
ridges, of rounded contour, above and below groove, the upper ridge bilobed
(especially obvious viewed from the left and above); both ridges with a number
of nodules throughout whole length, arranged haphazard, not uniseriate. Second
segment (LC,) subcylindrical. Hypandrium (H) produced back to a blunt process
(HP) somewhat to the right of the mid-line; left cercus-basipodite (LCB), between
HP and LC,, large, without any prominent process.

© unknown.

Locality.—The type carries the following labels: ‘Hmbia Berlandi Nav.; Navas
S.J. det.’; ‘Type’; ‘Muséum Paris: Bassin du Moyen Niger, Baraguine. R. Chudeau,
1909’; ‘Mai’. In the same collection are three specimens (() collected in the same
month, but with ‘Doko’ replacing ‘Baraguine’ on the label. Their lengths range
from 12 mm. to 17 mm. The colour, venation, etc., agree with the type. In the
limited time at my disposal in Paris, I was unable to prepare the terminalia;
examination in the dry condition suggested that they were the same as the type.

BERLANDIELLA GROMIERI (Navas 1934). Figs. 6-18.

Embia gromieri Navas, 1934, Brotéria, Série trimestral, vol. 3, fase. 1, p. 18.

The following description is from Navas’s type (Mus. Paris):

6. Length 12 mm.; head 2:2 mm. x 1:9 mm.; forewing 10 mm. x 2-5 mm.
Colour as in B. berlandi. Head (Fig. 6) much as in B. berlandi. Wings in general
as in B. berlandi; right forewing (Fig. 7) with R, terminally forked, cubitus
4-branched, two of the branches coalescing. Left hindwing with cubitus 4-branched;
in other wings 3-branched. Hind tarsi (Fig. 8) as in B. berlandi. Terminalia
scarcely different from B. berlandi, but with the left cercus (Fig. 9) less prominently
bilobed on the inner face.

© unknown.

Locality.—Kindia, French Guinea, coll. Dr. Gromier, 1927.

This species is scarcely worthy of separation from B. berlandi (Nav.), the
only significant difference lying in the left cercus. This difference is very slight,
and examination of longer series might lead to the rejection of B. gromieri, or at
least its reduction to a subspecies of B. berlandi. It is perhaps significant that
Navas (1928) refers to Embia berlandi, a specimen from Portuguese Guinea
(described below), which, on the valid characters of the terminalia, differs more
from B. berlandi than does B. gromieri. None of Navas’s specimens, however, had
had the terminalia prepared for examination in any way.

Other localities—A series of males (Mus. Paris) from Man, Ivory Coast
(12.iv.30, coll. Ch. Alluaud and P. A. Chappuis), appears to be referable to
B. gromieri (Figs. 10-12): Length 11 mm —-15 mm.; head, length 1-8—-2-2 mm.,
breadth 1-5-1-7 mm.; forewing, length 9-11 mm., breadth 2:2-2:4 mm.; hindwing,
length 8-10 mm., breadth 2:2-2-4 mm. Colour, form of head, and tarsi, as in the
type; antennae up to 4:2 mm., with 28 segments. Wings with cubitus composed

570 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. XI-XIV,

of three or more branches. (In one specimen, 3-branched in all wings; in another,
4-branched in all wings; in a third, 6-branched in left forewing (Fig. 10), suggestive
of the cubital system in Isoptera; 5-branched in both hindwings, 4-branched in
right forewing.) Terminalia (Figs. 11-12) agreeing with the type, left cercus
searecely distinguishable.

A single specimen (¢) from Danané, Ivory Coast (Mus. Paris; date and
collectors as above) seems to be conspecific: Length 12-5 mm., forewing 10 mm. x-
2-2 mm., hindwing 9 mm. x 2-4 mm. Colour and structure (including terminalia;
Figs. 13-14) as in the specimens from Man. Cubitus 4-branched in left hindwing,
3-branched in other wings (second branch weak in right forewing).

Figs. 6-9.—Berlandiella gromieri (Navas), holotype o& (Kindia, French Guinea).
6. Head from above, x 8. 7. Right forewing, x 8. 8. Hind tarsus viewed laterally, x 8.
9. Left cercus (aspect as in Fig. 4), x 28.

Figs. 10-12.—Berlandiella gromieri (Navas), &@ (Man, Ivory Coast). 10. Base of
left forewing, showing exceptionally well-developed cubital system, x 20. 11. Terminalia
from above, x 20. 12. Left cercus viewed from above and to the right, x 20.

Figs. 13-14.—Berlandiella gromieri (Navas), &@ (Danané, Ivory Coast). 13. Process
of left hemitergite from above, x 20. 14. Left cereus (aspect as in Fig. 12), x 20.

Figs. 15-18.—Berlandiella gromieri (Navas), ¢& (Ibadan, Southern Nigeria). 15.
Mandibles from above, x 20. 16. Hind tarsus viewed laterally, x 20. 17. Terminalia from
above, x 20. 18. Terminalia from below, x 20.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 571

A single male from Ibadan, Southern Nigeria (25.2.10, coll. S. J. Simpson;
British Museum of Natural History) extends the range of the species a considerable
distance to the east. Dimensions: Length 145 mm.; head 2:0 mm. x 1:6 mm.;
forewing 10 mm. x 1:8 mm.; hindwing 9 mm. x 1:8 mm. Colour and general
structure as in the type (Figs. 15-18); cubitus 3-branched in all wings. As the
specimen cleared well when prepared, I figure the mandibles (not cleared in the
type specimen). They have sharp teeth terminally and subterminally on the
inner side (the left three, the right two), and a blunt tooth further back on the
inner margin. The ventral view of the terminalia (Fig. 18) agrees with the type.

BERLANDIELLA ERRANS, nN. sp. Figs. 19-22.

Hmbia berlandi Navas, 1928, Ann. Mus. Civ. Storia Naturale Genova, vol. 53,
p. 388.

6. Length 13 mm.; head 2-6 mm. x 2:0 mm.; forewing 11:5 mm. x 3 mm.; hind-
wing 11 mm. x 3 mm. Colour as in B. berlandi and B. gromieri. Head (Fig. 19)
and tarsi as in the preceding species; wings (Fig. 20) with cubitus 3-branched.
Terminalia (Figs. 21-22) closely similar to the two preceding species; first segment
of left cercus (LC,) with upper ridge almost straight in dorsal view, not strongly
bilobed as in the other species; left cercus-basipodite (LCB) with a small
outwardly-directed spine; this was not observed in the other species, but may
possibly be present, being very small and obscure.

? unknown.

Locality —Farim, Portuguese Guinea, coll. L. Fea, iv—v, 1899; holotype ¢ in
Museo Civico di Storia Naturale, Genoa (carried the label: ‘Hmbia Berlandi Nav.;
P. Navas S.J. det’.).

There seems no course open but to give specific status to this specimen, if it
is to be allowed that B. gromieri is specifically distinct from B. berlandi. Further
collecting may indicate that there is a continuously-varying population, in which
case the three units might be treated as subspecies, B. errans occurring in

Figs. 19-22.—Berlandiella errans, n. sp., holotype &@ (Farim, Portuguese Guinea).
19. Head from above, x 8. 20. Right forewing, x 8. 21. Terminalia from above, x 15.
22. Terminalia from below, x 15.

Figs. 1-9 prepared with constant use of ocular micrometer; all other figures based
on camera lucida outlines. Setae omitted except in Fig. 16.

572 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. XI-—XIV,

Portuguese Guinea, B. gromieri with a more or less coastal distribution to the
south and east, and B. berlandi inland. B. berlandi has specific priority.

The complexity of the cubital system seems well established for the genus, not
being due to individual aberration; 13 males, referred to three species, from seven
localities, have been studied, and in no case was the cubitus less than three-
branched in any of the wings.

Key to the Species of Berlandiella (¢).

1. Inner margin of first segment of left cercus not bilobed in dorsal view (Fig. 21)
PACE ane et SON catch Oy TERE A SOE, Old Gad OF OFO OLD CHO CROF ORE LOT aero soot DCN =DrOCa ca cho Noss errans, N. Sp.
Inner margin of first segment of left cercus bilobed in dorsal view .............. Pe
2. Concavity between lobes of dorsal ridge of first segment of left cercus deep (Fig. 4)
Be a LAG os cho no mAT RE OULU one Chic >. 0 210-CLab CCE R CREE RON ERC cS ieialorreh ayaa cee berlandi (Navas)
Concaivity, between lobes shallows GEE e 9) yar ter-) ale) nestenenereneyetey Welton nan gromieri (Navas)

List of References.

NavAs, L., 1922.—Algunos Insectos del Museo de Paris. Rev. Acad. Ciene. Zaragoza, vil.

— , 1928.—Insectos Exéticos Neurépteros y Afines del) Museo Civico de Génova.
Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, vol. 53.

, 1931.—Insectes du Congo Belge (Série vi). Rev. Zool. Bot. africaines, vol. 21,

fase. 2 (Tervueren).

, 1934.—Décadas de insectos nuevos (Década 25). Brotéria, Série trimestral,

>

Vols a, Lasc de:

PART XIV: THE IDENTITY OF EMBIA RUFICOLLIS DE SAUSSURE AND OF
OLIGOTOMA VENOSA BANKS.

(Seven Text-figures. )

De Saussure (1896) described a single male specimen as Hmbia ruficollis,
giving the locality as ‘America Centralis’. The only points of note in his descrip-
tion are the size (length 6-5 mm., wing length 5 mm.), the colour (dark brown
with orange-ferruginous pronotum), and the venation (R,,, simple, distinct only
at base; M, Cu, obsolete). The brief mention of the terminalia does not seem to
be based on a critical examination; it may be assumed to be as inaccurate as the
descriptions of the terminalia of other species (EH. trinitatis, EH. urichi) in the same
paper, which do not agree with the types.

Krauss (1911) briefly re-described the type (Muséum d’Histoire naturelle,
Geneva), as Oligotoma ruficollis, figuring only the head and prothorax (1911,
Pl. ii, fig. 10). His brief description of the terminalia (Supra-anal plate asym-
metrical, right process short, dagger-shaped, left hooked at the end; cerci only a
little asymmetrical, first and second segments of equal length) is valuable, although,
if the specimen described below is really conspecific, he has confused the right
process with the left. Krauss also gives a detailed locality (Bugaba, Central
America, 250-400 metres), presumably from the type label. Krauss’s reference of
the species to Oligotoma has been followed by all subsequent authors.

In the Paris Museum there is a single specimen (1) from Costa Rica (coll.
Paul Serre, 1920). It has been identified as Oligotoma ruficollis by Navas (1924).
I believe the specific identification to be correct, but the specimen is not referable
to Oligotoma. The new genus here proposed is based on this specimen, rather than
on de Saussure’s; if it should prove not conspecific, the present specimen, not de
Saussure’s name, should be retained as the genotype.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 573

The specimen under discussion seems to be conspecific with two males
described and semi-diagrammatically figured by Friederichs (1934), as Oligotoma
rujicollis. Friederichs’s specimens were also from Costa Rica (Mojica, Guanacaste,
Rio Bianco: Farm La Caja, nr. San José; Mus. Hamburg).

Genus SAUSSURELLA, Nn. gen.

Genotype, Hmbia ruficollis de Saussure, 1896, Mitt. Schweiz. entomol.
Gesellschaft, Bd. 9, Hft. 8, p. 358.

Small Neotropical Embioptera, the males with the following characters:
Winged, R,,, simple, terminally subobsolescent; M and Cu,. simple, subobsolescent.
Hind tarsi with only one metatarsal bladder. Tenth abdominal tergite completely
cleft, right hemitergite with an elongate posterior process, but without any process
on the inner margin. Process of left hemitergite simple. Left cercus composed of
two subcylindrical segments, of equal length, the first very slightly thickened
distally, but without nodules.

The genus differs from Oligotoma Westw. in the right hemitergite, which lacks
the inner flap-like process characteristic of the latter genus. It is to be considered
as fairly closely convergent to Oligotoma, rather than as fairly closely related. It
differs from two other Neotropical genera (Diradius Fried., Oligembia Davis) in
the simplicity of the trace of R,,;, which is forked in these genera; they have the
tenth abdominal tergite only incompletely cleft, a further important difference.
Saussurella is probably most closely related to the Antillean genus (undescribed),
to which ‘Oligotoma’ hospes Myers belongs; this genus* may be ancestral. It is
much larger, with less obsolescent venation; its chief difference, however, lies in
the clavate, echinulate first segment of the left cercus.

SAUSSURELLA RUFICOLLIS (de Saussure 1896). Figs. 1-4.

Hmbia ruficollis de Saussure, 1896, 1.c—Oligotoma ruficollis (de Saussure),
Krauss, 1911, Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 238, p. 42, Pl. ii, fig. 10; Navas, 1924, Brotéria,
Série Zooldgica, vol. xxi, fasc. 2, p. 63; Friederichs, 1934, Arch. f. Naturg., N.F.,
1si¥0l, By Jebtws & Ws Gules wake

6. Length 6 mm.; forewing 4 mm. x 1:2 mm.; head 1:1-mm. x 0:9 mm. General
colour dark chocolate-brown, head almost black, pronotum orange-red; wing-veins
dark brown, bordered by mid-brown bands. Head (Fig. 1) elongate, eyes somewhat
prominent, sides behind eyes rounded, converging behind. Antennae defective.
Wings (Fig. 2) with R, strong, R,,, distinct, the two veins not confluent terminally,
but joined by several cross-veins. R,,; simple, distal half represented only by a
row of macrotrichia; M and Cu, simple, subobsolescent, as the distal part of R,.;.
Stem of cubitus strong; anal short but distinct.

Hind tarsi with one metatarsal bladder. Tenth abdominal tergite (Fig. 3)
completely cleft by a median longitudinal division; inner edge of right hemitergite
(10R) straight, simple; 10R produced backward to an elongate process (10RP),
expanded distally, and curving to the right; left-hand margin rounded near tip;
outecurved portion acute. Left hemitergite (10L) produced backward from inner
margin to a simple, tapered, subacute process (10LP). Right cercus missing (in
the specimens described by Friederichs, l.c., with two subcylindrical segments).
Left cercus with two segments, the first (LC,) very slightly swollen distally,
without nodules; the second (LC,) thinner, of subequal length. Ninth sternite
(H) (Fig. 4) tapered backwards to an elongate process (HP), curved to the left;

* This genus will shortly be described by Mr. E. S. Ross, of the University of
California.

574 TAXONOMIC NOTES ON THE ORDER EMBIOPTERA. XI-XIV,

left cercus-basipodite (LCB) slender, obtusely tapered; space between HP and
LCB largely membraneous.

Locality—Costa Rica (Mus. Paris). The specific identification requires
checking against the type (Mus. Geneva).

Note.—Friederichs (l.c.) has described a female from Costa Rica, which he
believes to be referable to this species. It possesses no features of taxonomic
importance.

A
Cula Culb

Figs. 1-4.—Saussurella ruficollis (Sauss.), &, Costa Rica (Mus. Paris). 1. Head
from above, x 35. 2. Right forewing, x 10. 3. Terminalia from above, x 35 (right cercus
missing). 4. Terminalia from below, x 35. (Based on constant use of ocular micrometer.)

Figs. 5-7.—Saussurella venosa (Banks), holotype ¢, Santa Clara, Cuba (Museum of
Comparative Zoology, Harvard University). 5. Head from above, x 16:5. 6. Left fore-
wing, x 16:5. 7. Appearance of damaged terminalia from above, x 16:5. (Based on
camera lucida outlines. )

SAUSSURELLA VENOSA (Banks 1924). Figs. 5-7.

Oligotoma venosa Banks, 1924, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. 65, no. 12,
p. 421.

Banks’s type g, from Santa Clara, Cuba, is in the Museum of Comparative
Zoology, Harvard University. It is in such a battered state that a valid specific
description cannot be prepared; but it is sufficiently well preserved to prove with
certainty that it cannot be referred to Oligotoma. I refer it to Sauwssurella
provisionally; another possibility is that it belongs to the undescribed genus
containing ‘Oligotoma’ hospes Myers, or perhaps even to Anisembia Krauss, both
of these genera being known to occur in Cuba. The differential feature between
these genera (the left cercus) is missing in the type; the right hemitergite, as
preserved in the type, does not place the species, as this structure, and its process,
agree in general form in ‘Oligotoma’ hospes Myers (also from Cuba), and
Saussurella ruficollis (Sauss.).

Further collecting from the type region may clear this matter up; I submit
further details of the type as a step in this direction.

BY CONSETT DAVIS. 575

6. Length not discernible in broken type; forewing 4:0 mm. x 1:1 mm. Colour
(in balsam) black. Head (Fig. 5) similar in size and general form to SN. ruficollis.
Wings (Fig. 6) as in S. rujicollis, but with R,,, and M stronger, and cross-veins
strong, influencing the direction of the main veins. Terminalia (Fig. 7) much
battered; process of right hemitergite (10RP) apparently as in S. ruficollis;
process of left hemitergite obscured. Left cercus missing; first segment of right
cercus (RC,) subcylindrical, partly obscured; second segment broken.

The specimen is very much smaller than O. hospes Myers.

List of References.

BANKS, N., 1924.—Descriptions of New Neuropteroid Insects. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool.
Harvard, vol. 65, no. 12.

FRIEDERICHS, K., 1934.—Das Gemeinschaftsleben der Embiiden und N&aheres zur Kenntnis
der Arten. Arch. f. Naturg., N.F., Bd. 3, Hft. 3.

Krauss, H. A., 1911.—Monographie der Embien. Zoologica, Hft. 60, Bd. 23 (Stuttgart).

NavAs, L., 1924.—Insectos de la América Central. Brotéria, Série Zoolégica, vol. xxi,
fase. 2.

DE SAUSSURE, H., 1896.—Note sur la Tribu des Embiens. Mitt. Schweiz. entomol.
Gesellschaft, Bd. 9, Hft. 8.

f ‘ 7 i .
i \ é 4 j ii ‘
i j ; 1 J ; t he
- i } ili ; rr ! ‘ bane
TH 4 i, 4 a \ pat" -
t 2 . ‘ ' : t r
a4 cy rt i La ‘ tse fi ' ,
' - ‘ ‘*E LTEE } v3 : Pi
;
F r [ rv; t , ! stig :
; f , : rT: { my } (Pai
’ + yy
i; 5 f { , i
pM wT
" \ j i
j .
; Pi {
.
' sanmnhhesdiatn 3h bie "
' .
.
H 4
\
: {
‘
'
y

577

THE GENERAL GEOLOGY OF THE DISTRICT EAST OF YASS, N.S.W.
By KATHLEEN SHERRARD, M.Sc.
(Plate xii; three Text-figures.)
[Read 29th November, 1939.]

The district of which the geology is described in this paper lies across the
common boundary of the Counties of Murray and King in New South Wales and
includes parts of the Shires of Goodradigbee and Gunning. It comprises the
whole of the Parishes of Manton, Mundoonen and Morumbateman, with the portions
in Bango, Jerrawa, Dixon, Nanima, Toual and Hume adjoining them, covering
in all about 150 square miles. Its western boundary is 3 miles east of the town
of Yass and 185 miles south-west of Sydney by road, and in part adjoins the
eastern boundary of an area described previously (Sherrard, 1936).

The general geology of the area shown in the sketch-map (Fig. 1) has been
investigated, particularly in regard to the nature of rock types, to the junctions
between sedimentary and igneous rocks, to the determination of the age of the
sedimentary rocks, and to the structural and age relationships of the sediments
to each other.

Acknowledgements.—The author wishes to acknowledge gratefully the courtesy
of Professor L. A. Cotton, M.A., D.Sc., in granting her facilities for study in the
Geological Department of the University of Sydney, and of Mr. R. A. Keble, F.G.S.,
Palaeontologist to the National. Museum, Melbourne, who has kindly advised her
in the determination of graptolites. She also wishes to express her appreciation
to Miss Irene Crespin, B.A., Commonwealth Palaeontologist, Canberra, and to
Dr. Dorothy Hill, M.Sc., Ph.D., of the University of Queensland, who have been
good enough to examine specimens for her. She is also grateful to Dr. Ida Brown,
D.Se., of the University of Sydney, for much helpful discussion.

Previous Literature.

No detailed description of the geology of the whole of this area has been
published hitherto. In the geological map of New South Wales published by the
Department of Mines in 1914, it is shown as composed of porphyry in its western
half with Silurian sediments to the east.

Some localities, especially Morumbateman (or Nanima) Creek and Jerrawa,
have figured in gold, bismuth, silver, copper, iron and other mineral mining
(Ann. Reps., 1888, 1907, 1916, 1921; Watt, 1897). Shearsby (1911) included the
north-western part of this area in his “Geology of Yass’. He named and described
the Bango Limestone Bed of the Silurian Series, named the igneous rock east
of it, “No. 1 Porphyry”, and called the sediments further east the “Jerrawa
Shales”, regarding them as the lowest member of the Silurian Series, no fossils
having then been obtained from them. In 1937 descriptions of graptolites from
this district were published (Sherrard and Keble, 1937).

UU

578 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

GEOLOGICAL
SKETCH-MAP

OF
DISTReGy
EAS TO VASsS

SCALE

; ) ; 1 Mile

PARISH OF
\ ian ti ap DIXON
7m. W\A3 o ie
PARISH OF \ \o NE \ MM be ta N Neen : ni
\ A \ 1 \ iN ee Redo aan von “sf

Goh ate ai bade se eins
YASS \ © \ei\ 2%" PARISH OF \ MONDOONE Re
(UuIENTENE Ky ele ONE Tio-ahD: Mo Na a

eu RR

a ay .
PARISH OF 9° 9 ©
<N Sa Che Ue 8
Alluvium Conglomerate

2? SILURIAN

PARISH OF AON PN me eq ye ‘ ' ie
/ os x \ N a * . ° Boat

CoarseCrystal tulfs Dacite Quartz Porphyry

~= 2 SILURIAN
a LEZ
\ He LE
ON ' Flow breccia U Fine iG N
BOAMBOLO se SEO Mundoonen Series
a i RASS)
Limestone Sandstones. Shales

Parish Bousdanes UPPER ORDOVICIAN

Geological Boundaries lundoonen Seri
Fault Lines

Graptolite Localities ASIN
Metamorphosed Rocks

A Limestone Graptolite Slates

Quartzites etc.
Granodiorite
x ?_AGE

Section Lines

No puequod oL 3

KMS del

Conglomerate

2S

Flow breccia
? AGE
x x

Granodiorite

UPPER
andi

2 e |
v v
As &S
NY

loonen Senes

Sandstones. ales G

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD.

PHYSIOGRAPHY.

The area lies in the Southern Highlands of New South Wales, and is one of
varied relief, ranging from 2,674 feet above sea-level at Mt. Mundoonen, the
highest point of the Mundoonen Range, to 1,800 feet, where the Yass River leaves
it in the west.

The igneous rocks outcropping in the west provide an undulating surface,
which slopes to a rather steep-sided valley in which the Yass River flows. More
marked relief is shown where sedimentary rocks outcrop.

A strip of rugged and heavily timbered country, comprising a section of the
Mundoonen Range, rises 600 to 700 feet above the general level. From the north
of the map the Range runs nearly due south for about 3 miles, being composed
in that portion of coarse sandstone generally dipping to the west. At about its
highest point, Mt. Mundoonen, the range turns abruptly to a nearly easterly
direction for the remainder of its passage through this district, a further 6 miles,
falling in altitude towards the east and running generally across the strike of*the
country which is here composed of alternate bands of sandstones and shales.

Cockaloc

Graptolite Mundoonen
Tng YassR Slates Meloy Range

Morum
botemon Cr

Kinys Creek 10 Berrebangalo (showing apparen! dip)

Mt Margules Limestone

lume Cr

Coarse Crystal tulfs
Docile

LURIAN

Quarlz Porphyry
? SILURIAN

Fine tulls elc

ORDOVICIAN

i)
Cathennes ond
Limestone
reek s

Mundoonen Range along Railway

raptohite Slates
jariziles elc

GEOLOGICAL SECTIONS

Fig. 2.

The coarse sandstone of the western Mundoonen Range, striking in an almost
meridional direction, must have stood for some time as a barrier against erosion
by the western part of the Yass River. The Range would then have been a north
and south one throughout its length and all drainage to the east would have been
carried by the ancestral Jerrawa Creek system. Misery Trigonometrical Station
and the rugged ground around it and in the south-east of the Parish of Manton
are relics of the original Mundoonen Range. Active erosion by the lower part of
the Yass River at the time when its course probably lay near the present line
of Morumbateman Creek, and by its tributaries from the east, caused the change to
the present direction of the Divide. The river, probably aided by faulting, of
which there is confirmatory evidence elsewhere, eventually effected a passage
through it. A valley was more easily eroded in the softer rocks dipping beneath
the sandstone, on which the river now flows at a level of 1,800 to 1,900 feet above
sea-level in a valley one mile in width with sides rising abruptly 200 feet. Here
is revealed the widest exposure of the graptolite-bearing slate. The river flows
north for about three miles along the strike of the slates, the greatest distance

580 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

during which it deserts its generally western route. Alluvium and gravel,
10-20 feet thick, lie along the river, making flats in places up to 400 yards wide.
On this account exposures of older rocks can seldom be obtained on the banks of
the river. The valley is narrower upstream, when the river is flowing through
the metamorphosed rocks of the south-east of the Parish of Mundoonen.

Manton’s Creek, after leaving the ranges round Mount Hawkins where it rises,
reaches the relatively level ground in the neighbourhood of the railway and,
slackening speed, has built up thick beds of gravel and alluvium, on which several
branches of the creek now meander. Rejuvenation of the stream subsequently
caused these branches to cut beds 8 to 10 feet deep through the alluvium. Next
it reaches igneous rocks, running nearly due south for five miles, its course
apparently controlled by the meridional strike of the tuffs and lavas. Running
parallel with the stream and a mile west of it, rising 400 feet above it, lies the
north and south ridge terminated by Manton Trig. The creek turns west round
the Trig. Station where the ridge seems to be cut off by a fault.

The other important drainage-carrier of the south-western area, Morumbateman
Creek, flowing from south-east to north-west, has deposited less alluvium than
the other streams.

The sector of the district to the north-east of the Mundoonen Range is drained
by Jerrawa and Hovell’s (or the western branch of Jerrawa) Creeks and their
tributaries, all of which flow to the Lachlan River. In the extreme east of the
area, where Jerrawa Creek has uncovered granodiorite, a deep deposit of alluvium
was the result of the arrest of the stream’s flow before a passage was cut through
the igneous intrusion.

Uplift of the area is responsible for the rejuvenation which all the streams
have experienced.

GENERAL GEOLOGY.

The rocks outcropping in this area include igneous and sedimentary types.
The oldest rocks are sedimentary, in places having been metamorphosed by those
of igneous origin. Ordovician and Silurian fossils have been found in some
of the sediments, but over a large area they have so far proved unfossiliferous.
The bedded rocks have been classified as follows:

Age Nature of Rocks Approximate
Thickness
? Tuffs and Lavas
Silurian Limestone (Bango Beds) 2
? Tuffs and Lavas
’ (ii) Sandstone with narrow bands of shale;

Upper Micaceous sandstone, shale and lime- about
Ordovician stone ? 5,000 feet
(i) Graptolite slates, interbedded with

(Mundoonen narrow bands of sandstone and about
Series) quartzite ? 2,000 feet

UPPER ORDOVICIAN.

Mundoonen Series.
Rocks of this age include slates, sandstones, quartzites, shales and a
subordinate amount of limestone. They are grouped as the Mundoonen Series,
since they are typically developed in the Parish of that name. The former

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD. 581

designation, Jerrawa Shales (Shearsby, 1911), which covered at any rate some
of these sediments, is not being used here since confusion might be caused through
the Jerrawa Shales having been regarded as of Silurian age. In addition, a
somewhat similar name has been given to a rock series in another locality.

The Mundoonen Series is strongly folded, with dips up to 70 degrees, the
folding being along an axis not quite meridional. However, the folding is irregular,
and in places the beds are contorted, puckered and overfolded, and faults can
be observed. The series has been folded into a great dome-shaped fan-fold, so
that the oldest beds, the graptolite slates, are exposed by erosion only in the central
-anticlines of the dome, the anticlines on either side being less strongly marked
folds where only younger rocks have been brought up (see Section A-B, Fig. 2).

(i) The Graptolite Slates.

The central anticline passes through the middle of the area mapped and the
oldest rocks revealed in it are a series of blue-black graptolite-bearing slates
interbedded with layers of unfossiliferous sandstones and quartzites, these beds
together being probably about 2,000 feet thick. The slates are not all fossiliferous,
but in parts of the area graptolites are fairly common; for instance, in the valley
of the Yass River near the junction of the Parishes of Manton, Mundoonen and
Morumbateman, where the river flows close to the central axis of the dome at its
greatest breadth revealing the slates over a strip of country about 4 miles from
east to west and about 4 miles from north to south. To north and south of
this outcrop the strip of slate narrows, because of the pitch of the dome fold,
as well as on account of the rising contours of the country from which younger
overlying sediments have not been eroded away to so great an extent, preventing
the exposure of the slate on the Mundoonen Range. In the exposed slate, graptolites
have been found in about thirty localities, though not always well preserved
(see Map, Fig. 1).

The second exposure of slate which yields graptolites is a narrow band, which
in the extreme north of the area forms the country surrounding the Needles Trig.
Station, and can be traced south as a ridge crossing the railway line in Portion
239, Parish of Jerrawa, 14 miles west of Jerrawa Railway Station, after which it
can be followed continuously to the south, still forming a ridge, nearly to the
Hume Highway, until in Portion 200, Par. Manton, it is cut off, apparently by a
fault (see Section C—D, Fig. 2). In four places in this band graptolites have
been found.

The following graptolites have been obtained:

SOUTHERN LOCALITIES: Climacograptus bicornis (Hall), C. tubuliferous
Lapworth, C. missilis Keble and Harris, Diplograptus (Orthograptus) calcaratus
Lapworth, D. (0O.) calcaratus var. basilicus Lapworth, D. (O.) cf. truncatus Lapw.,
Cryptograptus tricornis (Carruthers), Glossograptus hincksii Hopk., Dicellograptus
ef. complanatus Lapworth, D. divaricatus Hall var. rigidus Lapworth, D. cf. sextans
Hall, D. elegans Carruthers, D. cf. moffatensis Carruthers, D. cf. pumilus Lapworth,
D. cf. smithi Ruedemann, Dicranograptus ramosus Hall, D. hians T. S. Hall,
D. zic-zac Lapw., Retiograptus yassensis Sherrard and Keble, and Leptograptus sp.

NORTHERN LOCALITIES: Diplograptus (Orthograptus) calcaratus var. vulgatus
Lapw., D. (0.) cf. calcaratus Lapw., Dicellograptus elegans Carruthers, Retiograptus
latus Keble and Benson, Retiograptus sp., and cf. Leptograptus.

These forms indicate an horizon about the top of the Eastonian and base of
the Bolindian zones of the Upper Ordovician.

or
~
bo

GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

It is hoped that a more detailed map of the occurrence of the graptolites, with
the zones in the Upper Ordovician represented, may be published later.

The stratigraphic relation between the northern and southern graptolite
localities has not been established definitely. The northern slate band, as has
been said, breaks off in Portion 200, Par. Manton, where the ground drops
abruptly about 50 feet. This is about 300 yards from a road connecting Jerrawa
railway station with the Hume Highway. Limestone Creek rises near this point,
and has cut a valley across the strike of the slate, but all efforts to trace the blue
slate band on the opposite side of the creek, that is, the south bank of the valley,
have been unsuccessful (see Section C-D, Fig. 2). Search to the south on the
rugged and heavily-timbered Mundoonen Range reveals only sandstones and narrow
bands of reddish-purple shale, which overlie the blue slate. The conclusion has
been drawn that an east and west fault cuts off the slate band and may, indeed,
have formed Gunning Gap between Mts. Mundoonen and Margules, through which
the Hume Highway climbs the Mundoonen Range near this point, and continuing
west, have cut off the north and south ridge through Manton Trig. As well as the
abruptly terminated slate ridge in Portion 200, there are similar cut-off spurs to
either side of it along the line of the suggested fault.

There is undoubtedly faulting in other parts of the Range, for instance, in a
railway cutting in Portion 42, Par. Jerrawa (described later). The narrow ridges
on the top of the Range, in places bounded by precipitous sides, such as near the
Gap Trig., may also be due to faulting. Wide time-gaps would separate such faults.

The slate in the extreme north of the area near the Needles Trig. Station
shows strong crumpling and twisting and overfolding to the west. Actually the
graptolites in the northern outcrop seem to be contained within a synclinal pucker.
A railway cutting in Portion 239, Par. Jerrawa, 30 yards long, exposes a section
through this apparent syncline. It seems probable that an eroded overfolded
anticline rather than a syncline is exposed. At the western end of the cutting
white and purple sandstones dip east at 45 degrees. They are overlain by heavily
mineralized slates which, however, immediately bend round and dip to the west
(see Section HE-F, Fig. 2), the westerly dipping slate containing graptolite
fragments. Twenty yards further east, the slate, after being folded into a com-
pressed anticline, possibly faulted, is overlain by a red gritty sandstone dipping
east at 70 degrees. Since the blue slate, well exposed near the Needles, 2 miles
to the north of this outcrop, is greatly crumpled and contorted, and, as well, much
bending and twisting can be observed in the yellow bleached splintery slate in
road cuttings near the railway line, 50 yards to the west of the blue slate and
also in slate 400 yards east, it is considered that overfolding has caused the
apparent dip to the east in the railway cutting as well as elsewhere in slate
outcrops in the north of the area. ;

Though fewer fossil forms have been found in the northern area than in the
southern, all genera found in the north are represented in the south and, con-
sequently, it is likely that there is no wide time-gap between the deposits in the
two localities. It seems probable, therefore, that in the north, or Jerrawa area,
the outcrop is that of the same dome as in the south, or Yass River district.
It is narrower, however, because of the northward pitch of the dome (see Sections
C-D and E-F, Fig. 2).

In Portion 131, Par. Morumbateman, Glossograptus hincksii and Diplograptus
sp. are preserved among other forms as ferruginous impressions on a contorted
and fractured quartzitic slate dipping north-west at 50 degrees. The blue slate

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD. 583

underlying this bed in the south-east of the same Parish, in Portions 38, 141
and 150, is spotted with smudges of red oxide of iron, perhaps replacing graptolites.
The beds dipping beneath this spotted slate have been metamorphosed, becoming
altered to a baked slate-like hornfels in which no fossils are found. The meta-
morphosed beds are described later. Further south and south-east lies the area
which has been worked for gold, bismuth, etc.

The sandstones and quartzites interbedded with the slates have yielded neither
macroscopic nor microscopic fossils. The quartzite occurring in beds about 30
feet wide is seen in thin section to be built up of angular quartz grains, most
of which are in contact, with only a minimum of cementing secondary silica. It
has caused small waterfalls across several of the creeks where it outcrops, for
instance in Portion 1, Par. Mundoonen. Bands of chert are intercalated with the
sandstone in places, as on the west side of Portions 90 and 152, Par. Morum-
bateman, outcropping on the Yass-Gundaroo road, 300 yards east of the 12th
milepost.

(ii) Sandstones, shales, ete.

Overlying the graptolite slates, etc., with conformable dip and strike, is a
series of about 5,000 feet of brown micaceous sandstone, yellow and purple shales,
and massive sandstones and quartzites, in which no fossils have been found. No
macroscopic fossils having been found, thin sections of many of the rocks were
submitted to Miss Irene Crespin, Commonwealth Palaeontologist, who was unable
to find any trace of microscopic fossils. Though the Upper Ordovician graptolite
slates beneath these beds are more intensely folded, probably on account of their
lithological character, the direction of dip and strike is generally the same in
both, and there seems no unconformity between them (see Section A-—B).

The axes of the folds in these upper beds of the dome above the graptolite
slates are spaced about 1 mile apart, as shown best in exposures along the railway
line and along the Yass River in the Parish of Manton, especially Portion 164.
The strata show small fractures in places. A good example of a fluted anticline
occurs in the bed of Jerrawa Creek, where it is crossed by the Berrebangalo
road in Portion 2, Par. Mundoonen (PI. xii, fig. 1). These beds outcrop along the
ridge of the Mundoonen Range, covering the graptolite slates, whose outcrop is
only found along the top of the range in one small patch.

Tronstone.—Bands of ironstone are interpolated between many of the beds of
the series. Sometimes these are merely deposits along joint planes less than an
inch wide, but in other places their width has attracted attempts to mine them,
for instance in Portion 50, Par. Mundoonen (Ann. Rep., 1921), where a hematitic
iron occurs. White shales from which the iron has leached to'‘form this deposit or
others, can be seen in railway cuttings near Jerrawa.

Limestone.—On the east of the main anticline two small outcrops of limestone
occur, one in Portion 30, Par. Mundoonen, where it was formerly burned for
lime. A weathered surface shows a grey saccharoidal rock with traces of banding
or bedding. Opaque white lumps are caught in some of the layers. The other, a
very small outcrop, on Limestone Creek, in Portion 8, Par. Jerrawa, is a dull,
grey rock, with small protuberances on a weathered surface. Dr. Dorothy Hill
has kindly examined thin sections cut from these limestones, but reports that
no organic structure whatever can be observed.

The Mundoonen sandstone, near the top of the series, is generally found in
beds about 1 foot in thickness. Quartzitic layers occur within it and rare

584 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

narrow bands of well-cleaved grey and purple micaceous shale, a few inches thick
only, though at the top of the whole series wider bands of the same nature occur.
These uppermost Mundoonen beds have generally a uniform dip to the west, but
pressure has caused a few wide open folds in these resistant rocks, as well as
some faults. One is well exposed in a railway cutting in Portion 42, Par. Jerrawa,
almost at the contact of sedimentary and igneous rocks (PI. xii, fig. 2). A nearly
vertical slip to the west of more than the height of the cutting (40 feet) has
occurred. On the downthrow side (west), a soft closely-bedded sandy shale dipping
to the west is in contact, along the fault plane, with a hard and massive
sandstone whose irregular beds, up to 1 foot in thickness, dip to the west at
70 degrees. The fault channel is very clean and narrow, not more than 4 inch
of iron-impregnated breccia filling it. The direction of dip in the sediments is
unaltered by this fault.

SILURIAN.
Limestone.

In the extreme north-west of the area in Portion 22, Par. Bango, a limestone
occurs, which has been placed by Shearsby (1911) among the Bango Beds of the
Silurian System. It is revealed only by excavation, as its outcrop is covered
by alluvium. A face of about 40 feet is exposed in a quarry which has not
reached the bottom of the bed. An alluvial overburden of about 10 feet rests on
the limestone. The quarry, which is not worked now, lies in an angle formed
by the junction of Bango and Hard’s Creeks, which have deposited in this
neighbourhood at least 10 feet of alluvium. Alluvium covers all outcrops west of
the quarry to Bango Creek, a distance of about half a mile. In places the creek
has cut through the alluvium, exposing flow breccia (described later) in its bed,
and the same rock occurs in Portion 6, Par. Bango, immediately west of the
creek, where the igneous rock dips or is jointed at 20 degrees to the south-west.
Alluvium also bounds the limestone for a quarter of a mile to the east, but in
Portion 39, Par. Bango, flow breccia is met again.

Though limestone outcrops through alluvium to the north beyond the limit of
the present map (Shearsby, 1911), flow breccia rises out of the alluvium 150 yards
north of the quarry in Portion 40, Par. Bango. In Hard’s Creek, 4 mile south-west
of the quarry, is more of the same rock, while a 5-foot-high railway cutting 1 mile
immediately south of the quarry exposes only a rather decomposed igneous rock
closely related to the others, and no limestone. Nor has it been picked up further
to the south.

The mask of alluvium makes it impossible to determine the exact relation
of the limestone to the igneous rock, but it seems possible that it was deposited
during a temporary lull in volcanic activity, and was subsequently covered by
the igneous rock now to the west of it, when activity recommenced, this overlying
lava converting the limestone to marble. It will be shown later that, in Portion 28,
Par. Bango, 2 miles to the east of the limestone quarry, calcareous fossils are
entangled in coarse crystal tuff as a result of a shorter interruption in igneous
activity than the relationship suggested at Bango quarry would represent.

The rock is coloured creamy-yellow on a weathered surface and it is only on
such a surface that fossils are found, since the rock is entirely recrystallized,
and freshly broken rock reveals only an interlocking mass of calcite crystals
coloured in streaks of white and brown. Dr. Dorothy Hill has kindly examined
specimens and identifies the following forms: Halysites sp., fine dendroid Favosites,

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD. 585

and some which “‘may be excessively altered Alveolites’’. She says: “The specimens
of Halysites have the general aspect of the species of Halysites occurring at
Mt. Canoblas (Gap, etc.), but I am unable to give a precise specific determination
owing to the poor preservation. The assemblage is thus Upper Ordovician or
Silurian and a more precise determination on this material alone would not be
justifiable.”

POST UPPER ORDOVICIAN.
I. Fine Tuffs, etc.

In the bed of Morumbateman Creek, while travelling west, the Mundoonen
Series can be followed upward from typical massive sandstone, through purple
shale and clay slate all dipping almost due west at high angles, about 50 to 60
degrees, until a well bedded tuff is reached, which dips nearly west at 30 degrees
and overlies the more steeply dipping shales and slates of the Mundoonen Series
(see Section A-B). In a southward bend of the creek in Portion 43, Par.
Morumbateman, in a bank 12 feet high, a series of several beds of tuff, all dipping
5 degrees north of west at 30 degrees, rest on micaceous slate dipping at 55 degrees
in a direction 10 degrees south of west. Further downstream, 20 yards after the
creek has turned west again, it has cut through the tuff cover, showing it to rest
unconformably on a micaceous slate bed about 45 feet wide dipping west at 45
degrees. In this, the highest exposed bed of the Mundoonen Series, a thin section
(S.1089) shows that bedding planes are marked by undulose strings of brown and
bleached mica, about 0-5 mm. apart, between which is an interlocking mosaic of
quartz grains and minute mica flakes. It is possible that this slate may be of
tuffaceous orfgin itself, and that the heat of the overlying younger tuff has
promoted the growth of mica in the older slate.

The overlying tuff series shows considerable variation in grain size in its
different beds, each of which is about 2 feet thick. The lowest (S.1100) consists
of a vesicular banded, greenish-grey, medium-grained rock with some porphyritic
crystals of felspar and quartz. In thin section may be seen an occasional larger
crystal up to 0-5 mm. long (making up less than 5% of the whole) which is set
among fragments one-fifth that size in a devitrified ground-mass. The fragments
are principally felspar, plagioclase and orthoclase, with subordinate quartz, while
the constituents of the devitrified ground-mass are indeterminate, but are probably
felspar and quartz. Limonite and chlorite are present. The proportion of fragments
to ground-mass in so fine-grained a rock is difficult to determine, but is probably
about 1:3. When compared with rocks previously described from the Yass
District, this type would be classified as a medium tuff, Type 1 (Sherrard, 1936,
Pl. vi, fig. 7), but would be called a “fine essential tuff” in the classification of
Wentworth and Williams (1930), since the mineral fragments are less than 4 mm.
in length.

Above this band lies a coarse crystal tuff (coarse essential tuff, Wentworth
and Williams, 1930) with felspar predominating over quartz fragments, both of
which average about 1 mm. in length. The fragments of both quartz and felspar
are somewhat rounded and are packed fairly closely, making up about 75% of
the rock, and are set in a ground-mass, devitrified and showing spherulitic
structure. Overlying this bed is another fine essential tuff, while above again
is an extremely fine-grained rock (S.1103) which is regarded as a sediment which
has been recrystallized by the heat of the overlying tuff. Similar interbedded
altered sediments are described later. The 12-foot bank in Morumbateman Creek is

586 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

capped by a coarse crystal tuff (S.1106) of which the mineral contents, grain-size
and shape, and ground-mass are similar to those in the coarse crystal tuff
described above. Traces of bedding are noticeable in both. In places this
uppermost tuff is rich in fragments of recrystallized calcium carbonate. Other
bands are very porous, with carbonates in the cavities. All the tuffs are com-
paratively rich in apatite.

Although there is no continuous outcrop, the tuffs of Morumbateman Creek
can probably be connected up to the south with a vesicular tuff outcropping at the
south-east corner of Portion 24, Parish of Nanima, 14 miles east of Morumbateman
village. It dips west at 25 degrees, and a thin section shows that angular quartz
grains predominate over féelspar, and rough bedding planes are outlined by thin
biotite flakes. Though the majority of fragments in this fine essential tuff are
less than 4 mm. in length, yet there is an unusually large number, perhaps 10%
of the rock, of both quartz and felspar grains 1 mm. long.

Travelling north from Morumbateman Creek outcrops of fine tuffs can only be
picked up irregularly, until the Yass River in Portion 85, Par. Manton, is reached,
where a series of tuffs and sediments, probably tuffaceous, is exposed, but no
vertical section exists to show their true relation to each other and to underlying
rocks. The upturned edges of the beds are separated by alluvium and their quasi-
parallelism of direction of dip and strike is all that can be ascertained. The
lowest bed exposed dips due west at 45 degrees. It is a micaceous slate (S$.1447)
which may be tuffaceous in origin. In thin section it is similar to the micaceous
slate at the top of the Mundoonen Series in Morumbateman Creek (S.1089) and
below the lowest tuff there. Twenty yards of alluvium separates the slate from
the overlying dense, waxy-lustred, fine-grained, blue-grey rock, which dips at 45
degrees in the direction 15 degrees south of west. It outcrops in the bed of a small
tributary creek entering the Yass River at this point. It is composed of rather
rare small angular fragments of quartz, arranged with their long axes parallel,
and of discontinuous threads of brown mica set in a matrix of secondary quartz.
It is a shale, possibly tuffaceous in origin. The overlying rock, a fine tuff, separated
from the last-mentioned by alluvium, is coarser grained than it and is well-bedded.
As well as quartz fragments about 4 mm. long, it contains, caught between threads
of biotite, prisms of calcite 1 mm. across, which are probably altered from
plagioclase felspar. A shale overlies this tuff, and it is succeeded by a closely-
cleaved slate dipping 10 degrees north of west at 50 degrees, which in turn is
overlain by a dense greenish waxy-lustred fine-grained recrystallized sediment of
the type common in the district, though this one is distinguished by an abundance
of calcite. It dips at 35 degrees in the same direction as the preceding. Above
this is a coarse crystal tuff with closely-packed fragments of quartz 1 mm. long,
and of altered plagioclase and chlorite. The next rock to the west is porphyritic,
with white earthy phenocrysts and a rare quartz grain set in a dull greerish-black
ground-mass. Its dip cannot be determined, and it is separated by 20 yards of
alluvium from the previous rock. It may overlap and conceal some of the finer
tuffs such as outcrop in Morumbateman Creek. In thin section it is found to be
highly altered. Idiomorphic felspar prisms are clouded by alteration to sericite
and secondary quartz has also developed in them. Primary quartz is rare. The
micro-spherulites of the devitrified ground-mass have broken up so that minute
fragments of secondary quartz are scattered through the mass and entangled
with isotropic chlorite. There is also some calcite. The rock is an andesitic tuff
or lava. It forms a ridge 40 feet high and 100 yards wide. In this sequence from

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD. 587

well-bedded sediments, comparable to those regarded as Upper Ordovician in
Morumbateman Creek, to coarse tuff and lava, though the evidence is not conclusive,
it is suggested that they form a conformable series.

In low cuttings on the Yass—-Gundaroo Road, 100 yards to the south, the
andesitic lava outcrops in an even more altered form than on the Yass River.
It is accompanied by the outcrop of an altered fine-grained sediment only. North
of the Yass River, outcrops of the tuffs, interbedded sediments, and lavas can be
followed continuously to the old Gap Road, near which, in Portions 129, 106 and
165, Par. Manton, sparse outcrops occur of westerly dipping beds, which pass
upward from unaltered sediments through fine essential tuffs to recrystallized
shales, coarse tuffs and andesitic lavas. To the north the fine tuffs are lost
and do not outcrop in cuttings on the Hume Highway.

However, in Portion 106, Par. Bango, at a point $ mile east of Coolalie railway
station, where the road from Yass to Jerrawa approaches closest to the railway
line, a disused railway cutting reveals a series of bedded tuffs resting on a coarser-
grained igneous rock. The cutting is about 10 feet deep and exposes a well-bedded
series dipping 20 degrees south-west (PI. xii, fig. 3). The rock in these beds is
green and even-grained, feels gritty, and contains much quartz. Distinct white
bands are shown in places. Thin sections show variations in texture in different
layers within the same field of view. Angular quartz and felspar grains, with
long axes parallel and never quite in contact, and a few chlorite grains are set in
a devitrified ground-mass. The chlorite flakes are green, though sometimes
darkened by magnetite grains along cleavage cracks. Quartz is always in con-
siderable excess over felspar. The bedding is strongly marked. The mineral
fragments in some layers average just less than 4 mm. in length, bringing them
into the fine essential tuffs (Wentworth and Williams, 1930), while other layers
are finer with fragments about one-tenth of a millimetre. The proportion of
fragments to matrix also varies from about 1:1 to 1:3.

There is a thickness of about 4 feet of bedded tuffs overlying the coarse-
grained igneous rock, a porphyry, to be described, and resting upon the tuffs
is a coarse crystal tuff which is at the top of the cutting. The average size of
the mineral grains in this rock (8.950) is just greater than 4 mm., but there are
many larger, and also some rounded aggregates built up of secondary quartz.
Quartz is in excess of felspar, which is principally plagioclase. Iron oxide has
collected along the cleavage planes in the bleached chlorite. Apatite is present.
The ground-mass consists of micro-spherulites, probably of quartz and felspar.
Compared with other coarse crystal tuffs in the district, this one contains smaller
fragments and they are less closely packed. Bedded tuffs are also exposed in the
5-foot-high bank of a dam nearby.

As explained in the section “Physiography” above, Manton’s Creek in the
neighbourhood of the railway lies at the bottom of 10 feet of alluvium. In the bed
of one of its branches, four hundred yards to the west of the tuffs just described,
and 3 mile east of Coolalie railway station, shales dipping south-west at 20 degrees,
and therefore apparently overlying the tuffs of Coolalie cutting, are revealed. The
shales are dense, of a resinous lustre and coloured yellow-brown, and in thin
section found to be extremely fine-grained with minute flakes of brown mica
indicating bedding planes. Contact metamorphism seems to have caused secondary
recrystallization.

Summing up the information regarding fine tuffs, ete., which has been
obtained, it is found that the types of tuff do not correspond exactly in the

588 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

different outcrops.. In general, it may be said the lowest tuffs, which are fine-
grained, rest on a tuffaceous slate belonging to the Mundoonen Series. This lowest
tuff is not always well bedded and is sometimes richer in quartz than felspar,
and sometimes the reverse. Variations in coarseness are also observed. It is
succeeded by a coarse crystal tuff bed. Clastic sedimentary deposits usually
intervene at this level and were subsequently altered by the coarse tuffs or lavas
which overlie them.

II. Coarse-Grained Igneous Rocks.

West of the fine-grained tuffs the country is covered by coarse-grained
igneous rocks, which outcrop over a strip stretching from Portion 117, Par.
Bango, in the north to beyond the southern limit of the area mapped, that is,
more than 15 miles, and widening, from east to west, from 3 miles in the north to
5 miles in the south. To the west these rocks junction with others described
previously (Sherrard, 1936).

Throughout this area the coarse-grained igneous rocks are indistinguishable
in the hand-specimen. They are greenish- or bluish-grey in colour, all rich in
glassy quartz grains, containing phenocrysts of dull-white felspars and a
subordinate amount of a black ferro-magnesian mineral. The ground-mass is
dense and waxy-lustred. Thin sections, however, reveal differences and enable
the rocks to be divided into two distinct groups. The rocks of one group show
a fragmental texture and are coarse crystal tuffs with rounded or angular mineral
grains packed in close contact with the minimum of matrix. In the second group,
the rocks are porphyritic, with crystal phenocrysts, often idiomorphic, set in a
devitrified ground-mass, the phenocrysts being present in about equal proportion to
the ground-mass. These rocks are either lavas or hypabyssal types, and textural
differences or field relations, to which reference will be made later, permit the
sub-division of this group into quartz-porphyry, dacitic flow breccia and dacite.

(i) Quartz-Porphyry.

The origin by intrusion of the quartz-porphyry is clearly demonstrated in
the instructive section exposed in the disused railway cutting near Coolalie
railway station, to which previous reference was made. The porphyry which
outerops near here in the form of low rounded tors, was quarried through to a
depth of about 10 feet in order to form the railway bed, thus revealing a
diagrammatic section illustrative of intrusion by stoping (Pl. xii, fig. 4). At the
upper surface of the intrusion a rectangular block of porphyry nearly 2 feet
square has replaced a block of the overlying bedded tuffs described above, which
has foundered and fractured, leaving irregular small pieces strewn through the
porphyry. A rim of about 4 feet of mixture of lumps of bedded rock within
porphyry surrounds the entire upper surface of the intrusion.

Hand-specimens of the intrusive rock are greyish-green, speckled by pheno-
crysts of quartz and opaque white felspars, both large, set in a _ lustreless
ground-mass. In thin section the porphyry is found to be of the type normal to
the Yass District (Sherrard, 1936, Pl. vi, fig. 1), with large allotriomorphic
quartz crystals, whose edges have been corroded, prismatic twinned plagioclases,
some about Ab,,An,, others zoned and clouded by alteration to sericite,
which has developed along cleavage cracks. Large prismatic sections of mica
occur, showing strong pleochroism from green to straw-yellow. Large apatites,
ilmenite and leucoxene are accessories. The ground-mass, present in about equal

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD. 589

proportion to the phenocrysts, is highly devitrified, with spherulites probably
composed of quartz and felspar (8.319).

Hand-specimens from the actual line of contact of porphyry and tuff show
it to be a sharp one as far as the unaided eye can detect, though in places
fractures about % inch in throw disturb its line. Thin sections cut along the
contact show crystals from the porphyry becoming separated from each other and
pressed into the tuff as separate individuals surrounded by tuff, becoming cracked
and torn apart in the process. Some of the mineral chips in the overlying tuff

ML
iC

Fig. 3.—A. Crystal-lithic tuff, Portion 106, Par. Bango (S.942). Ordinary light.
Phenocrysts breaking away from porphyry fragments.—B. Quartz-porphyry intruding
tuff, Railway Cutting near Coolalie (8.383). Ordinary light. Quartz and felspar have
developed radial cracks and bedding planes in tuff bent round xenocrysts.—C. Rock at
contact with granodiorite. Portion 85, Par. Dixon (8.998). Ordinary light.

(Por) porphyry, (gl) glass, (Q) quartz, (F) felspar, (QF) intergrown quartz and
felspar, (E) epidote, (Cl) chlorite.

have been derived in this manner, though it cannot be said in what proportion.
Nockolds (1933) describes minerals of a magma wedging their way into xenoliths
at Bibette Head, Alderney, and Thomas and Campbell Smith (1932) describe
porphyritic felspars from granite which have been introduced into a contact rock
“at any rate a foot or so from the contact’. At Coolalie, bedding planes of the
tuff are bent around these inclusions, simulating flow structure, but this appearance
is quite plainly due to the forcing in of the xenocrysts. Another effect is the
development of radial cracks in quartz and felspar crystals, ‘ultimately shattering
them (8.383, see fig. 3, B).

Although at the junction some of the quartz crystals are markedly corroded,
and secondary quartz and calcite and an occasional garnet have developed, the
chemical effect of the intrusion has extended through an extremely narrow zone,
no doubt because the junction observed is one made by an almost solid magma
which had become viscous and inert before reaching this level (Daly, 1908). This
condition also accounts for the rim of xenoliths of tuff seen within the porphyry
near its upper surface, which could not sink further through the viscous magma.
The calcite along the junction must have developed from solution of felspar, since
there is no reaction for carbonate from the unaltered tuff. Secondary silica has
replaced many cleavage laminae of mica.

590 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

A thin section made from the junction of a xenolith with its porphyry host
shows developments similar to those at the upper contact. Marked corrosion has
occurred round the borders of the crystals from the porphyry which have been
forced into the tuff, and secondary quartz sheaths have enveloped some of them.
Secondary quartz can also be seen replacing mica laminae.

Another instance where intrusion has occurred can be seen in a railway cutting
in Portion 233, Par. Jerrawa, near the crest of the Mundoonen Range, where
porphyry is revealed beneath bedded sediments about 10 feet below the surface.
It does not outcrop here (PI. xii, fig. 5). It has reached the surface in a low
railway cutting immediately west of Jerrawa station, where porphyry outcrops
for about 200 yards. A narrow dyke may be seen in a cutting on the Hume
Highway, 13 miles east of Yass in the south-eastern corner of Portion 80, Par.
Manton, which contains a green, porphyritic rock with white phenocrysts. In
thin section, it differs from other rocks examined, through the crowd of small
idiomorphic, zoned plagioclases set in a glassy ground-mass, which in some cases
can be seen actually to have solidified just as some of the small felspars were
splitting away along the cleavage of the large felspars (S.1370).

No connection at the surface has been found, but it seems probable that the
quartz-porphyry and dykes originate from the same magma as the big Gunning
granitic outcrop, whose western margin reaches the area mapped. It is described
below.

(ii) Dacite.

There is insufficient field evidence from exposures in cuttings, quarries, etc.,
to prove that all the rocks with porphyritic crystals are intrusive in the manner
of that at the Coolalie railway cutting. For reasons to be given later, the rock
outcropping in the west of the area has been classified as a dacitic flow breccia.
Thin sections from outcrops occurring between the flow breccia on the west and
the sedimentary rocks in the east prove that both coarse crystal tuff and dacite
occur among them, but the determination of the exact limits of the outcrop of each
would require the examination of an almost infinite number of thin sections,
on account of their similarity in the hand-specimen. Fifty thin sections which have
been examined show these two types outcropping in three alternating north and
south strips with coarse crystal tuff bands on either side of dacite, suggesting
that they may form an interbedded series, though it is possible that in places
the outcrop of dacite is the result of intrusion along a dyke channel.

Like the others, the dacite is a greenish-grey medium-grained porphyritic
rock with crystals of quartz, felspar and black mica set in a dull ground-mass.
In thin section are found large quartz crystals, well rounded and sometimes
embayed by corrosion, hypidiomorphic prisms of plagioclase which is determinable
when fresh enough as Ab,;An,;. Small prisms of pleochroic brown or green biotite,
occasionally chloritized, also occur. Small chips of quartz and plagioclase are set
between the large phenocrysts. Apatite is common as an accessory. The ground-
mass is highly devitrified and is a mosaic of minute interlocking crystals, probably
of quartz and felspar. The proportion of phenocrysts to ground-mass is about
2:3. The rock seems best described as a dacite and is closely similar in texture to
some of the dacites of Victoria. With less quartz it passes into andesite, as above.

Dacite outcrops in a narrow band from Portion 117, Parish of Bango, in the
north near the railway line, then along Manton’s Creek and later running south-
south-east to the north-west corner of Portion 255, Par. Nanima. The rock from
the bed of Manton’s Creek, Portion 93, Par. Manton, is typical (8.1549).

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD. 591

There is some field evidence in support of a bedded origin for this dacitic
lava. On the railway line in Portion 30, Par. Bango, where the present line
swings away from a disused railway mound, a low cutting reveals recrystallized
fine sediment underlying altered dacite (Pl. xii, fig. 6). The same relation is
seen in cuttings in Portion 118, slightly north. In the south of Portion 225,
Par. Manton, in the valley of Manton’s Creek, at its junction with a tributary from
the west, a fine-grained sediment and a glassy tuff dip beneath altered dacite. In
these localities at any rate the dacite originated as a bedded flow.

(iii) Coarse Crystal Tuff.

The coarse crystal tuffs are everywhere uniform in appearance. They are
coarse in grain, greyish-green in colour, rich in quartz, with felspar generally
white and opaque and a subordinate femic mineral. They sometimes contain
fragments of other rocks. In thin section they are fragmental, being made up
of angular grains of quartz and felspar, just under 1 mm. long on the average,
though they range up to 3 mm. in length in the tuff from Portion 207, Par. Manton,
% mile north-east of Manton Trig. They would be classed among the coarse
essential tuffs and coarse accidental tuffs of Wentworth and Williams (1930).
The large quartz crystals are generally more or less rectangular, but sometimes
are corroded and embayed. Plagioclase is often considerably clouded by alteration
to sericite. The mica in some of the tuffs is a green pleochroic biotite, occasionally
having iron oxide lodged along the cleavage planes; in others it is present in
the form of green chlorite showing ultra-blue polarization colours. Occasional
lithic fragments are present. Between the mineral fragments are closely packed
small chips of quartz, altered felspar, some apatites up to 0-5 mm. long, isotropic
green chlorite, calcite and ilmenite, all of which are set in a ground-mass making
up perhaps one-sixth of the rock, which is in some cases isotropic, but has usually
been devitrified sufficiently to show a spherulitic structure. Traces of flow
structure are also present as a rule. A similar coarse crystal tuff was illustrated
previously (Sherrard, 1936, Pl. vi, fig. 4).

The only vertical section expusing any thickness of this tuff is in a road-metal
quarry in Portion 21, Par. Nanima, 4 mile south of Cockatoo Trig., and beside
Morumbateman Creek. A face 30 feet deep has been exposed, the upper 15 feet
of which shows pronounced spheroidal weathering, divided off by more or less
horizontal joint planes. In the lower 15 feet the rock is solid, without any
jointing. The bedding planes seen in the tuffs exposed in the vertical section at
Portion 43, Par. Morumbateman, are not seen here. The rock in the quarry
is the normal fragmental type. In places vughs of white carbonate with copper
and iron pyrites occur. A thin section (S.879) made from the solid rock in the
quarry 20 feet below the surface, where neither spheroidal nor horizontal joints
disturb the mass, shows normal coarse crystal tuff with more than 75% of the rock
consisting of fragments of quartz and plagioclase, the latter in the greater
quantity, and only a few lithic fragments of devitrified glass and of a porphyritic
rock. Apatite is common. There is a rough parallelism of arrangement of the
fragments. The rock at the top of Cockatoo Trig., 200 feet above the quarry and
3 mile north of it, consists largely of lithic fragments of porphyry or dacite with
a fragmental tuffaceous matrix between them.

A erystal-lithic tuff (S.942) outcropping 4 mile north-east of Coolalie railway
station contains an unidentifiable organic fragment. A thin section shows large
pieces of porphyritic rock which were cracked and dragged apart before the

592 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

solidification of the tuff. Pieces of porphyry now form both large and small
fragments in the tuff. In addition, many of the separate crystal fragments of this
tuff were originally the quartz, felspar and mica phenocrysts of the porphyry
(see Fig. 3, A). The sparse matrix is devitrified.

In Portion 28, Par. Bango, on the eastern margin of that parish, a railway
cutting has exposed an igneous rock of the usual greyish-green coarse-grained
type which contains many white calcareous inclusions, up to 1 inch across, with
protruding knobs on their surfaces. In addition, fragments of a porphyritic rock
up to 4 inches in diameter can be seen. In thin section, the rock is found to be
fragmental, with pieces of porphyry or dacite, angular quartz and felspar grains
just under 1 mm. in length, recrystallized calcite, green chlorite and apatite set in
a nearly opaque ground-mass, which is, however, devitrified in places. Some of
the quartz and felspar grains in this tuff, also, have been derived from porphyry
fragments, and can be seen splitting away from them. Cracks can be seen
through porphyry pieces, movement along which has detached crystal particles.
This rock is a coarse accidental tuff. The fossils which now form white calcareous
inclusions, have become almost entirely recrystallized and little structure is left.
Dr. Dorothy Hill, who kindly examined them, reports ‘the slides and specimens
are unidentifiable. The recrystallized calcite patches may have had an algal rather
than a coral origin.”

These occurrences form part of the band of crystal tuff which outcrops
immediately east of the flow breccia in a band from 1 to 2 miles wide. It is
found in the north in Portion 106, Par. Bango (S.942 above), immediately east of
Manton Trig. and along the Yass-Canberra road.

The second band of coarse crystal tuff is a narrow one and not continuous.
The tuffs are found in thin beds, perhaps only 2 feet thick as in the vertical
section in Portion 438, Par. Morumbateman, in Portions 86 and 106, Par. Manton, in
all of which places they are interbedded with fine tuffs and clastic sediments.
Some of the tuffs are rich in calcite, in some cases derived from organic fragments
and in others from altered plagioclase.

(iv) Flow Breccia.

In the west of the area the rock-type designated here ‘flow breccia” occurs.
It outcrops over a strip of country about 2 miles wide running south-south-east
from Portion 6, Parish of Bango, near the junction of Bango and Hard’s Creek
to the southern border of the area. On the west it passes into the rock described
and figured previously as quartz-porphyry tuff (Sherrard, 1936, p. 139, Pl. vi,
figs. 2, 3). Its eastern boundary is marked by a pronounced north and south
scarp, which runs parallel to and about 1 mile west of Manton’s Creek, rising about
400 feet above the creek. Manton’s Creek and the Yass River have cut through
the scarp just south of Manton Trig. It has been suggested earlier that a fault
cuts through the scarp at this point, south of which a lower scarp runs south,
parallel to Dog Trap Ford road near the western boundary of the Parish of Nanima.

The rock is well jointed, outcropping in low jagged tooth-like boulders which
become like a series of tombstones in Portion 189, Par. Nanima, 12 miles south
of Yass. Several small quarries for building-stone for local use, in Portion 2338,
Par. Nanima, show vertical joints from 4 to 8 inches apart. The outcrops of
flow breccia form a series of ridges, 4 mile apart, striking across country west-
south-west and rising in height towards the south-south-east from not more than
a foot or two near the mouth of Kitty’s Creek until in Portion 30, Par. Hume,

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD. 593

the creek has cut a gorge with sides about 50 feet high through one of them.
This gorge is only 20 yards wide, and the rock forming it is either jointed or dips
at 15 degrees in a direction 25 degrees west of south.

In a hand-specimen this is another of the coarse-grained, greyish-green rocks
with glassy quartz and opaque white felspars set in a dense resinous-lustred ground-
mass. However, thin sections from this outcrop distinguish it from the other types.
These sections, nevertheless, show confusing features, in some respects suggesting
an intrusive rock, in others a tuff, while flow structure is not uncommon. Large
crystals of quartz are corroded and embayed and up to 3 mm. long. Small
hypidiomorphic plagioclases (1 mm. long), about Ab,,An,,, and a green pleochroic
biotite occur, with apatite as a common and galena as a rare accessory mineral.
Angular chips of quartz and felspar, 4 mm. long and less, are seen between the
phenocrysts. In the devitrified ground-mass, which is present in proportion to
crystals of about 2: 3, flow structure is often shown, though it seems less marked
towards the south near Big Hill. Some of the large quartz and felspar crystals
have been fractured apart, but the pieces remain clese enough together for the
original shape of the phenocryst to be seen. The rock (8.1516) from Portion 38,
Par. Nanima, is typical. In considering the origin of this rock, at first sight
the phenocrysts and comparatively large percentage of ground-mass in it suggest
a dyke rock which picked up the interstitial angular fragments during its
intrusion. Moreover, the presence in this neighbourhood of quartz reefs and the
advanced silicification of the rock along its western border through Portions 8’,
31, 186, 190 and 191, Par. Nanima, might be expected to have followed intrusion
as a dyke. But such an origin would not produce a rock with flow structure,
which also remains unexplained if the angular chips of quartz are regarded as
due to an early stage of metamorphism, producing shattering of quartz crystals
through unequal expansion in an acid igneous rock (Harker, 1932). At Coolalie,
where an apparent flow structure has developed as described above, the xenocrysts
were forced into an already closely-bedded rock, which is not the case here.
However, Williams (1926), quoting Fenner in Alaska, says flow structure is no
proof of a lava origin and pyroclastic material is capable of flowing by mobility
of the associated gases. On the other hand the high proportion of ground-mass
in this rock (two-fifths) would not usually occur in a coarse tuff, and the rock
seems most satisfactorily explained as a flow breccia according to Iddings’
definition (1909), where fragments of a molten magma after having been exploded
are pictured as falling back within the crater or mouth of the fissure and
subsequently flowing like other lava. To describe the rock more fully, the term
“dacitic flow breccia” is used. The rocks described here respectively as dacite
and dacitic flow breccia are undoubtedly much alike, but the latter is distinguished
by flow structure and by a closer packing of hypidiomorphic phenocrysts and
mineral chips than in the former.

Support for a bedded origin is lent by the occurrence in Portion 41, Par.
Nanima, immediately to the east of any observed outcrop of flow breccia, of a
rather finer type dipping west at 30 degrees. It contains quartz and plagioclase
phenocrysts, often hypidiomorphic, more than 1 mm. in diameter, but a pre-
dominating number of small angular chips less than 41 mm. The devitrified
ground-mass makes up at least 50% of the rock. This rock (8.519) is assumed
to be a border phase of the flow breccia dipping beneath the main mass. Its
outcrop is not continuous to the north, but a fine-grained tuff or tuffaceous sediment
striking north is found in Portion 33, Par. Nanima, one mile to north of the

VV

594 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

other. The difference between §S.519 and rocks described from nearer Yass
previously (Sherrard, 1936; Pl. vi, fig. 7) as medium tuffs, is in the higher
proportion of ground-mass and the occurrence of hypidiomorphie phenocrysts in
the former.

Thin sections of lavas from Marysville and Taggerty in Victoria (Hills, 1929,
1932), kindly made available for comparison by Dr. E. S. Hills, show marked
resemblances in one case to the rock described here as “dacitic flow breccia” and
in another to its border phase.

The cause of the silicification in rocks in the Parish of Nanima mentioned
above, may be pictured as due to vapours rising between bedding planes of the
flows. An earthy-brown porphyritic rock outcropping in Portion 186, Par. Nanima,
is seen in thin section to retain the texture of a flow breccia, and has phenocrysts
of quartz, plagioclase and a little bleached chlorite, but it has a ground-mass
formed of an interlocking mosaic of secondary silica (S.1018). In Portion 31,
a fine-grained pinkish porphyritic rock consists entirely of a mosaic of small
angular secondary quartz grains (the original ground-mass probably) with
occasional patches composed of rather larger but still angular interlocking quartz
grains, which have apparently replaced the original phenocrysts. The quartzite in
Portion 8, half a mile south-west of the junction of Morumbateman Creek and the
Yass River, which contains large well-shaped quartz grains showing strain
polarization and aggregates of secondary quartz set in a mosaic of fine secondary
quartz, may also have originally been an igneous rock.

Another altered form of flow breccia occurs in Portion 34, Par. Bango, 4 mile
south-east of the limestone quarry. It is a green medium-grained granular rock.
with numerous elliptical cavities up to an inch across, into which acicular quartz
erystals have grown. A thin section shows an intergrown mass of epidote and
quadrangular quartz grains in about equal quantities. There are also some
aggregates of secondary quartz. It would seem that solutions derived from the:
limestone have caused development of epidote here.

In comparing thin sections of dacitic flow breccia with those of rocks described
in a previous communication as quartz-porphyry tuff and rhyolite tuff, whose
outerops traced on a previous map (Sherrard, 1936) abut against flow breccia as
shown on the present map, sections of the two types of tuff show a higher
proportion of crystals to ground-mass than does typical flow breccia. Examination
of a number of sections suggests the likelihood of one grading into the other,
due perhaps to the existence of a series of superimposed flows and tuffs. A
section from the rock in Portion 6, Par. Bango, 150 yards to the west of Bango
Creek and more than half a mile west of the limestone quarry, while still a flow
breccia, shows affinities with the coarse crystal tuffs, with a greater proportion
of crystals to ground-mass than in typical flow breccia.

The eastern boundary of the flow breccia can only be traced with exactness
in those places where its border phase outcrops or where siliceous solutions have
penetrated, presumably along a junction.

Age of the Igneous Rocks.

The age of the igneous rocks in this area is not determinable with certainty.
Exposures along Morumbateman Creek give more evidence than any others. The
banks of the creek are generally low, and vertical sections are not seen, but the
dips and strikes obtained from the upturned edges of the beds in the creek
suggest a conformable passage. Passing downstream from the slate of Portion 37,

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD. 595

Par.. Morumbateman, which graptolites prove to be of Upper Ordovician age,
‘sediments conformably dipping above one another can be followed for two miles,
with few breaks on account of an alluvium cover, until Portion 43, where the
‘creek: is flowing south for a short distance over a micaceous slate, possibly
tuffaceous, still in the Mundoonen Series, which dips at 55 degrees in a direction
10 degrees south of west. Twenty yards south-west of it on the west bank of
the creek is the vertical bank of fine tuffs described above with their lowest
member dipping 30 degrees in a direction 5 degrees north of west. Micaceous
slate can be picked up again 20 yards downstream after Morumbateman Creek
has turned west once more, where it dips west at 45 degrees, outcropping for 15
yards with upturned edges underlying tuff on the river bank above. These
relations indicate a slight unconformity between the Mundoonen Series and the
tuff, though probably they do not mark any great time interval (see Section A-B).

The outcrops along the Yass River in Portion 85, Par. Manton, are each
separated from the other by alluvium, though conformity between slates and tuffs
is suggested by parallelism of dip and strike. Along the railway line the over-
folding in graptolite-bearing slate in Portion 239, Par. Jerrawa, gradually smooths
out and to the west the slate is overlain by conformable sandstones. Lack of
sections in railway cuttings or elsewhere prevents observation of the complete
sequence before the igneous rocks outcrop, one of the lower tuffaceous members
of which contains remnants of calcareous fossils whose age is indeterminate.

The quartz-porphyry is younger than the fine tuffs since it has intruded
them.

All that can be said with certainty is that the interbedded fine tuffs, coarse
crystal tuffs, lavas, etc., are post-Upper Ordovician in age. If the suggestion of the
limestone of Portion 22, Par. Bango, being interbedded with flow breccia can be
upheld, these igneous rocks are probably of Silurian age, and the junction between
tuffs and sediments in Portion 43, Par. Morumbateman, is then an Upper
Ordovician-Silurian one.

Metamorphism Due to Tuffs, ete.

In each outcrop of the junction of tuffs with sedimentary rocks which has been
examined, there has been found an extremely fine-grained rock interbedded with
the lower members of the tuff series. In a hand-specimen, each of these is a dense,
either lustreless or slightly waxy, uniform-textured rock of a dirty grey, greenish
or yellowish colour with a conchoidal fracture. In thin section with magnification
about 35 times, little can be determined from the dense even-grained texture of
yellow or grey colour. Bedding planes are generally faintly marked by parallel
arrangement of minute pleochroic brown-mica flakes. Sometimes secondary quartz
is in the act of replacing these flakes. Prisms entirely composed of a mosaic of
secondary quartz are also present. Clastic grains of quartz and felspar and
rounded aggregates of secondary quartz corroded by the matrix are only rarely
found. With higher magnification (about 100 times), the matrix is seen to be
composed of a mosaic of crystalline material, probably secondary quartz. A thick
powdering of black grains of ilmenite, or of yellow grains and washes of limonite
determine the colour.

Typical examples of this change have been found in Portion 142, Par.
Morumbateman, in a rock which dips below slate containing Glossograptus hincksii,
to which reference was made previously. This locality is passing into the contact
zone of the granodiorite. In one example (S.1305) numerous round, white blebs
are seen in thin section one-tenth millimetre across, which is about fifteen times

596 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

the size of the average single grain. These aggregates are made up of inter-
locking grains of secondary quartz. Sometimes there is a dark centre in these
white blebs, which is composed of rosettes of stumpy green chlorite flakes.
Between the blebs in the ground-mass, with magnification about 100 times, a cloud
of minute colourless mica flakes is recognizable by the high polarization colours,
but whether the material with low polarization colours wrapped around by the
mica is quartz or felspar, cannot be determined.

A similar baking of the shale is found in railway cuttings in Portions 30 and
118, Par. Bango, where it underlies dacite (Pl. xii, fig. 6).

With regard to the origin of these rocks, their extremely fine grain separates
them from an ordinary sediment, to which they might be referred on account of
the traces of bedding planes. An origin as an argillaceous sediment which has
been entirely recrystallized to a rock of the adinole type by contact metamorphism
seems to describe them best. This change is known in the neighbourhood of acid
igneous rocks (Harker, 1932, p. 132). :

Rocks closely similar in hand-specimen and thin section, which occur to the
west of Yass, were described and figured previously (Sherrard, 1936, Pl. vi, figs.
9,10). They were then doubtfully described as tuffs, but their relation to adinoles
seems closer. There is a noticeable resemblance between plates published then
and those of Milch (1917) illustrating his description of adinoles.

Granodiorite.

In the extreme north-east of the area, along the junction of the Parish of
Mundoonen with that of Dixon, outcrops the western fringe of a large igneous
intrusion which centres around the town of Gunning, 25 miles east of Yass.
Several granite hills crowned by tors rise out of the micaceous sandstone of the
Mundoonen Series, which here dips east forming part of the east limb of the main
Upper Ordovician anticline.

The coarse-grained black and white granitic rock of Portion 85, Par. Dixon,
is seen in thin section to be very rich in quartz, in which small idiomorphic, fresh
prisms of twinned plagioclases are in places graphically intergrown. Many of the
felspars are zoned, others by their extinction angles approximate to Ab,,An,. This
rock has two ferro-magnesian minerals, unlike the other igneous rocks of the
district. Large prisms of highly pleochroic brown biotite occur, as well as a little
brown hornblende, which also shows strong pleochroism, and is in places being
replaced by biotite. There is less apatite in this rock than in other types in the
area. The rock is a granodiorite. Small basic segregations are not uncommon.

From the rock outcropping 4 miles to the north on the Hume Highway,
Portion 153, Par. Dalton, a specimen was examined. This is further into the heart
of the granitic mass and outside the area mapped. The rock here is darker in
colour, with a higher proportion of femic minerals and less quartz than in the
previous rock. A thin section shows more hornblende, some of which is being
replaced by biotite. Graphic intergrowth between quartz and the zoned plagio-
clases is also noticeable in this rock. All but the outermost zone of the felspar
shows a development of epidote (S.1286).

Effects of the Intrusion.

The intrusion of granodiorite has disturbed the usual north and south strike
of the country rock, which in its neighbourhood has swung round to east and west.
A typical example of the country rock forms a hill 3 mile south of the grano-
diorite. It is a micaceous, felspathic sandstone, which under the microscope shows
small clastic grains of quartz embedded in a mass of sericitized felspar, pleochroic

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD. 597

green mica and some epidote. Not more than 40 yards from the granite a micaceous
sandstone, dipping 35 degrees due south and striking at right angles to the edge
of the granite, is found (S.1274). The junction between it and the granite is
covered. In thin section, the sandstone is fine-grained with small quartz grains
caught in bunches of mica flakes. The matrix is of secondary quartz and sericite
flakes, which may represent metamorphosed felspar. It is, in fact, similar to the
last-mentioned, although so much closer to the granite outcrop.

Thirty yards north of it and parallel in strike is a series of rather obscure
rock types, which protrude from the grass surrounding the actual outcrop of the
granodiorite and only 20 yards from it, in parallel bands about 12 feet in width.
One of these (S.986) is a dense, green, greasy-looking fine-grained rock, which a
thin section shows is principally composed of spherulites of secondary quartz and
felspar, about 0-5 mm. in diameter, with which a profusion of pleochroic green
mica needles of the same length have intergrown.

More highly recrystallized types have, in the hand-specimen, the even-grained
appearance and light colour of aplite. The principal constituents of one of these
(S.988) are well-shaped simply-twinned felspars, 0-5 mm. long, showing spherulitic
structure, with which secondary quartz may be intergrown. Epidote crystals up
to 1 mm. long are developed also. A coarser black and white variety (S.998)
contains felspar which is micrographically intergrown with quartz, chlorite with
ultra-blue polarization colours, and crystals of epidote 1 mm. long (see Fig. 3, C).
Small rare angular grains of quartz which could be called clastic are present in
all the types.

Half a mile north-west of the granodiorite, near the Berrebangalo crossing of
Jerrawa Creek, a dyke-like outcrop of a coarse white granular rock with faint,
dark parallel banding occurs (8.1261). A thin section shows entire recrystalliza-
tion to a mosaic of small interlocking grains of quartz, which surround a few
large grains showing intense strain, and all of which are arranged with their long
axes parallel. Epidote in narrow parallel strings gives the banded appearance
noticeable in a hand-specimen.

It is difficult to determine if these rocks were originally aplites or felspathic
sandstones, which remained as roof pendants in the granodiorite. Their disposition
in the field in parallel bands, rising out of a grassy paddock, with direction of
strike parallel to that of the country rock here, does not serve to differentiate
between these alternative origins. Micrographic intergrowth of quartz and felspar
can be developed in either type as a result of contact metamorphism (Harker,
1932). The development of epidote in the main granodiorite mass itself, as well
as in the metamorphosed types, seems to link them together, and suggests that
these altered rocks were originally dykes which have been, metamorphosed, as
apparently has the entire western margin of the granodiorite mass itself also.
However, the conformity of the metamorphosed rocks with what seems an
undoubted sediment (S.1274), supports a sedimentary origin for them, which on
the whole seems the more likely.

Further afield, the effect of the intrusion is also pronounced. On the Hume
Highway, near Hovell’s Creek, the easterly dipping sediments have been altered
to strongly-cleaved greasy schists, seen in thin section to consist of elongated
flakes of somewhat bleached brown mica, highly polarizing tale and small flakes
of colourless chlorite showing ultra-blue under crossed nicols, all set between
interstitial layers of secondary quartz (8.1217). Along the Yass River in Portion
126, Par. Mundoonen, in the south-east corner of the area, another typical specimen

is a greenish-blue well-cleaved quartz-schist also dipping to the east, which show, Ly =f
Ssh PE
pore morn ‘,

\
iz eR Ae

fay

598 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS,

in thin section much secondary quartz caught between fibres of bleached pleochroic
brown mica (S.1048).

These schists have developed from the micaceous sandstone of the eastern limb
of the main anticline of the Mundoonen Series. The eastern limb of the overlying
massive sandstone does not outcrop within the limits of the area mapped. It may
have been stoped away during the intrusion of the granodiorite. Alteration in
sandstone of the western limb is seen in a railway cutting, in Portion 233, Par.
Jerrawa, just west of the top of the Mundoonen Range, at a point where the igneous
rock has nearly reached the surface, brown spots having developed in cream-
coloured sandstone due to the crystallization of iron oxide in magnetite cubes.

The igneous intrusion, no doubt, also introduced the broad quartz reefs
commonly traversing the graptolite slates and overlying beds, as, for instance, in
‘Portion 1, Par. Mundoonen, at the junction of the road from Morumbateman Creek
with the Yass—Gundaroo road. A similar origin is pictured for the white films of
finely divided silica, which, east of about Portion 3, Par. Mundoonen, near Green-
fields Farm Post Office, have penetrated along bedding and joint planes in the
slates, masking any graptolites which may have been present.

? TERTIARY.

Along the banks of the Yass River are found remnants of a horizontal deposit
of a coarse, consolidated but porous conglomerate, deeply stained with iron. It is
about 5 feet thick and is found at varying heights above the present river level.
In places it is 5 feet above that datum, but can be found at heights up to 100 feet.
In Portion 138, Par. Toual, near the causeway crossing the Yass River, the
conglomerate is only 5 feet above the river, but 3 mile south-east of that point,
an outcrop half an acre in extent is found 100 feet above river level. These
variations must be due to differential earth movements, since the deposition of the
conglomerate. The river, in eroding its present valley, has sometimes undercut
the conglomerate, causing blocks to tilt over. Otherwise it is always horizontal.

Fragments in the conglomerate are principally of reef quartz with fewer
pebbles of slate and sandstone. Fragments of reef quartz up to 5 inches across
can be found, though the average diameter is about 1 inch. They show a roughly
parallel arrangement. In the Yass River valley the conglomerate has only been
found resting on slate, its outcrop furthest downstream being in an old stream
course 100 yards south of the river, in Portion 19, Par. Morumbateman. Deposits
have also been recognized on Morumbateman Creek, in Portion 43, Par. Morum-
bateman, and as far as half a mile south of the Yass River’s present course, in
Portions 69 and 132, Par. Morumbateman.

To the north of the Mundoonen Range, similar conglomerate has been observed
in Portion 173, Par. Jerrawa, a. mile south-west of Jerrawa railway station, and in
the south-east corner of Portion 164 in the same parish, 14 miles north-west of
Jerrawa railway station. ;

No fossils have been found in this conglomerate. It is, however, tentatively
correlated with a leaf-bearing conglomerate found in Portion 35, Par. Dalton
(Shearsby, 1911), 9 miles north-east of Jerrawa, from which Cinnamomum has
been obtained (Ettingshausen, 1888) and which is therefore probably of Middle
or early Tertiary age (Hills, 1939). At Dalton much of the conglomerate has been
silicified, and is but slightly iron-stained, while the fragments are generally smaller.
A thin section cut from the conglomerate of Portion 28, Par. Morumbateman, shows
a matrix of red-brown oxide of iron which coats many of the fragments, penetrating
some of them, but there are many voids between them.

BY KATHLEEN SHERRARD. 599

The origin of this conglomerate is pictured as being due to a temporary base-
level having been reached by the ancestral Yass River, which, having slowed down,
deposited its load of detritus. Subsequent uplift, apparently differential, from
the present varying heights of the conglomerate, rejuvenated the Yass River which
cut a new valley, removing by erosion much. of the conglomerate deposited.

SUMMARY.

This paper deals first. with the structural and stratigraphical relations of
slates containing graptolites belonging to the top of the Hastonian and base of
the Bolindian zones of the Upper Ordovician period, and of arenaceous non-
fossiliferous sediments conformable ‘with : them, the whole making up the
Mundoonen Series, which in the east of the area has been intruded and meta-
morphosed by granodiorite.

The Mundoonen Series is overlain with a slight unconformity by a westerly-
dipping series of narrow beds of alternating fine and coarse tuffs sometimes inter-
bedded with recrystallized sediments. The uppermost of the thin beds is of coarse
erystal tuff which in places contains unidentifiable fossils. This tuff is succeeded
to the west, in turn, by dacitic lava, more coarse crystal tuff and finally by dacitic
flow breccia. Although no vertical section reveals the exact relations of these last
four to one another, as are revealed those of the thin beds of tuff, they, too, are
considered to be a bedded series dipping west.

A restricted outcrop of limestone with Silurian or Upper Ordovician fossils
occurs between outcrops of flow breccia, its exact relation to which is obscured by
alluvium, but it may also be a member of the interbedded series.

Quartz-porphyry has intruded fine tuff in one place, and the Mundoonen
sediments in others.

The deposition of conglomerate, probably in Lower to Middle Tertiary times,
and the subsequent physiographical history and recent deposition of alluvium are
also described. (Numbers, such as (S.319), etce., refer to thin sections and
specimens in the author’s collection.)

References.
Annual Report of the Department of Mines for N.S.W., 1888, 1907, 1916, 1921.
Datuy, R. A., 1908.—Mechaniecs of Igneous Intrusion, 3rd Paper. Amer. Journ. Sci., ser. 4,
xxvi, 1908, p. 17.
ETTINGSHAUSEN, C., Baron von, 1888.—Contributions to the Tertiary Flora of Australia.
Dept. Mines N.S.W., Mem. Geol. Surv., No. 2, 1888.
HARKER, ALFRED, 1932.—Metamorphism. Methuen and Co., London, 1932.

Hiuus, E. S., 1929.—Geology .. . of Cathedral Range. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xli, n-s.,
1929, p. 176.
, 1932.—Geology of Marysville, Victoria. Geol. Mag., \xix, 1932, p. 145.
————,, 1939.—-Age . . . of Cainozoic Volcanic Rocks of Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,

li, n.s., 1939, p. 112.

IppInGs, J. P., 1909.—Igneous Rocks, Wiley and Sons, New York, 1909.

Miteu, L., 1917.—Uber Adinolen und Adinolschiefer des Harzes. JZeits. Deuts. Geol.
Gesell., 1xix, 1917, p. 349.

Nocko.ps, S. R., 1933.—Contamination in Acid Magma. Journ. Geol., xli, 1933, p. 584.

SHEARSBY, A. J., 1911.—Geology of the Yass District. Rept. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., xiii,
1911, p. 106.

SHERRARD, K., 1936.—Structural Geology and Petrology of ... Yass. Proc. LINN. Soc.
N.S.W., lxi, 1936, p. 131.

———— and KeEp1ig, R. A., 1937.—Occurrence of Graptolites near Yass. Proc. LINN. Soc.
N.S.W., Ixii, 1937, p. 308.

THOMAS, H. H., and CAMPBELL SMITH, W., 1932.—xXenoliths in Tregastel-Ploumanac’h
Granite. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., \xxxviii, 1932, p. 290.

Watt, J. A., 1897.—Ann. Rep. Dept. Mines, N.S.W., 1897, p. 186.

600 GEOLOGY OF DISTRICT EAST OF YASS.

WENTWORTH, C. K., and WiLuIAMsS. H., 1930.—Classification and Terminology of Pyro-
clastic Rocks. Bull. Nat. Res. Council, No. 89, 1930-32, Wash., D.C., p. 19.
WILLIAMS, HoweE.L, 1926.—Notes on Characters and Classification of Pyroclastic Rocks.

Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc.. xiv, 1926, p. 223.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XII.

1.—Double anticline in Upper Ordovician sediments, Jerrawa Creek, Berrebangalo.

2.—Fault in Upper Ordovician sediments, Portion 42, Par. Jerrawa.

3.—Beds of fine tuff, Portion 106, Par. Bango, near Coolalie.

4.—Porphyry which has replaced stoped block of tuff, Portion 106, Par. Bango, near
Coolalie.

5.—Upper Ordovician sediments intruded by porphyry, Portion 233, Par. Jerrawa.

6.—Sediments underlying lava, Portion 30, Par. Bango. (Hammer head lies along

junction. )

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1939. PLATE XII.

Geology of district east of Yass, N.S.W.

~

t

601

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE MICROBIOLOGY OF AUSTRALIAN SOILS. V.

ABUNDANCE OF MICROORGANISMS AND PRODUCTION OF MINERAL NITROGEN
IN RELATION TO TEMPERATURE.

By H. L. Jensen, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society.
(Five Text-figures. )
[Read 29th November, 1939. ]

Although much research work has been devoted to the study of the influence
of temperature on microbial processes in the soil, we still possess little knowledge
concerning the influence of this factor on the actual abundance of soil organisms
in general and total numbers of bacteria in particular. Plate counts from soil
have usually revealed little or no correlation between bacterial numbers and soil
temperature (review of literature is given by Taylor, 1936; cf. also Eggleton,
1938), although frozen soils have sometimes been reported to show increased
numbers of bacteria (cf. Waksman, 1932). Russell and Hutchinson (1913) carried
out plate counts from soil stored at different temperatures, and found no definite
correlation between bacterial numbers and temperature of storage. Similar experi-
ments were undertaken by Taylor (1936), who used the method of direct
microscopic counting; no significant differences were found between numbers of
bacteria in soil stored at 5°C. and at approximately 16°C. for 8-9 days. Using
both plate and direct methods, the present author (Jensen, 1936) found similar
results with soils kept for 10 days at temperatures from 5°C. to 37°C. without
addition of organic matter. In the presence of decomposable organic materials,
microorganisms tended to accumulate in higher numbers at lower temperatures,
although the intensity of the decomposition, as expressed by the evolution of
carbon dioxide and in some instances also the formation of nitrate, increased with
the temperature. It was deemed desirable to extend some of these observations
over a longer interval of time, using the production of nitrate and ammonia as an
index of decomposition.

Experimental.

Two soils were used for the experiments. The first (4) was a heavy loam
of acid reaction, rich in organic matter, from grass field; it was mixed with 3 parts
of sand and then with 1% CaCO,; the pH of the mixture was 7:8, total
N-content 0:120%. The other soil (B) was a heavy alkaline loam, fairly rich
in organic matter, from a flower bed; this was mixed with equal parts of sand;
DH 7:7, total N-content 0:103%. Soil A was incubated with and without addition
of 1% dried and finely ground mycelium of Penicillium sp., and soil B with and
without addition of 1% hay (dried and finely ground mixture of young grass
and clover plants). The C- and N-contents of these two materials are given
elsewhere (Jensen, 1936). Portions of 600 gm. of air-dry soil were adjusted to
approximately two-thirds of their water-holding capacity and kept in big glass
dishes (internal diameter 18:5 cm., depth 4:5 cm.) for about 3 months at 4 levels

Www

602 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE MICROBIOLOGY OF AUSTRALIAN SOILS. V,

of temperature: 4-6°C. (soil B) or 6—-8°C. (soil A*); 14-16°C.; 24-26°C.; and
37°C. The moisture content was kept as constant as possible by restoration of the
loss of weight due to evaporation every 3-4 days with distilled water. Periodical
determinations were made of: total bacteria by direct microscopic counting;
bacteria and actinomycetes by plate counting; density of fungal mycelium;
NH,- and NO,-N. The glass slides for estimation of fungal mycelium were left
in contact with the soil for 7 days prior to each examination, except in soil B
with hay, where examinations were also made after 4 days at 25°C. and 37°C.
All methods were the same as previously described (Jensen, 1936).

The experimental results are shown graphically in Text-figures 1-4. In
soil A without addition of organic matter (Fig. 1) the direct counts of bacteria
fluctuate irregularly without any marked influence of the temperature (cf. Taylor,
1936). The plate counts, on the other hand, show a marked increase after the
first 15 days, and then a gradual decline. The influence of the temperature
stands out clearly: the lower the temperature of incubation, the higher is the
maximal number and the slower the decline. It is noteworthy that after the

1000

800

600

Direct Counts.mill.per em

£ 120

Plate Counts,mill.per

NO; 2s NH4a-N, p.p.m.

15 30 62 94
Incubation, Days.

Fig. 1.—Multiplication of microorganisms and production of ammonia and nitrate in
soil A without addition of organic matter. Here, as in Figs. 2-4, numbers of bacteria
(incl. actinomycetes) are expressed in millions per gm. and amounts of ammonia and
nitrate in parts per million of soil dried at 98°C.

* The refrigerator, which was used as an incubator, was running at a somewhat
lower temperature when the experiments with soil B were carried out.

BY H. L. JENSEN. 603

30th day the direct counts are at 7°C. only 8 to 10 times as high as the plate
counts, but at 37°C. 40 to 60 times as high. The plate counts were almost entirely
due to bacteria; actinomycetes never exceeded 1 mill. per gm.

The figures for mineral nitrogen (nearly all nitrate) are almost reciprocals
of the plate counts. At the two highest temperatures the curves rise rapidly during
the first 30 days and then remain about level, while at the low temperatures
the nitrate formation is much less vigorous and at 7°C. not noticeable until
after 62 days.

The corresponding sets of figures for soil B (Fig. 2) are even more striking.
The direct counts are here practically stationary at 25°C. and 37°C., but at the
lower temperatures, and especially at 5°C., they tend to rise with advancing time
of incubation.

The plate counts show the same general trend: at 37°C. a slow but conspicuous
decline, at 15°C. and 25°C. comparatively little change, and at 5°C. first a small
increase during the first 28 days and then a big rise towards the end of the

i
>
°o
o

we
'
So
o

Direct Counts,mill.per gm.
°
Ss r)
3° o

Plate Counts,mill.per gm.

0 15 28 51 85
Incubation, Days.

~

Fig. 2.—Multiplication of microorganisms and production of ammonia and nitrate
soil B without addition of organic matter.

n

604 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE MICROBIOLOGY OF AUSTRALIAN SOILS. V,

experiment. In this soil, too, actinomycetes were rather scarce (max. 3 mill.
per gm.).

The curves for mineral nitrogen (chiefly or exclusively nitrate) are even more
clear-cut than in soil A. At 5°C. the nitrate content actually declines during
incubation, at 15°C. the process of nitrification is little active, but gains strongly
in activity with increasing temperature. The observation of Prescott and Piper
(1930), that differences in temperature between 11°C. and 34°C. have little
influence on the rate of nitrate production, can thus hardly be considered generally
valid. As to the decrease in nitrate content at 5°C., it is interesting to note,
although no exaggerated importance should be attached to this single observation,
that the disappearance of 10 parts per million (i.e. 107 per gm. of soil) of mineral
nitrogen has coincided with an increase in total bacteria equal to about 450 mill.
cells per gm. of soil, which quantity may be estimated to contain approximately
9y of organic nitrogen. The suggestion lies close at hand that disappearance of

per gm.

Direct Counts

100 mill.

15

per gm.

Plate Counts

100 mill.
S

NH,-*NO,-Nyp.p.m.

TUS 30

62 G4a.|.
72 LS Zoe Whe
40
20
0
15 30 7 15 30

Density of
mycelium %

? 15 30 nS 30 7

Incubation, Days.

Fig. 3.—Multiplication of microorganisms and production of ammonia and nitrate in
soil A with addition of 1% fungal matter. Densities of mycelium as in Fig. 4 expressed
as percentage of microscopic fields showing presence of fungal hyphae.

BY H. L. JENSEN. 605

nitrate at low temperature may be due simply to nitrate consumption by
multiplying bacteria, and not to a preponderance of denitrifying bacteria at this
temperature, as suggested by Lebrun and Radet (1933).

In both soils fungal mycelium was generally very sparsely represented,
except for a few isolated instances (soil A at 7°C. after 15 days, and soil B at
25°C. after 15 days) where densities of about 6% were observed. Otherwise the
density was at the most 1:1%, without any correlation with temperature or time;
these figures have therefore not been included in the graphs.

It thus applies to both control soils that incubation at increasing temperature
results in a stronger mineralization of the humus nitrogen but in a less
abundant microflora, especially bacteria capable of developing on agar plates.

Figure 3 shows the results from soil A with addition of mycelium. They
agree completely with those of former experiments in shorter intervals of time
(Jensen, 1936): numbers of bacteria, total as well as plate counts, show first
a rapid rise and then a gradual decline, at 37° C. approaching a constant level
already after 15 days. At each point of time, even after 7 days, we find an almost

Direct Counts

&

: { js = e\

a 's, (LIBRARY) 2

2 — ‘ py Br =
ie ats Sy,

ef
Eb gs
Firs
Ome
on iar
on i ~
zo 4 / Sei a Sl. samp os oe
° i Sse’ ar ay miei td = ea COIS Che ee Bie 1§°
/ hea Ree Nena rh re eee == o
| ees «oh ecm ID Vesa 225
, wHev?
200
ear?
o 50 —— iE Se eed eangee = 25°
a So ae Par Perret pinks BOP S Cea o
ante Vor Rees i eee aa,
z= | Ve a ae Se
50 ZA
lo}
=
a SS US
28 Si 85a.
o
Las SI od BEY Bee
>F 20
ae
£2 lo
AB
0 = ;
815 «38 51 B15 28 48 15 28 4815

Incubation, Days.
Fig. 4.—Multiplication of microorganisms and production of ammonia and nitrate in
soil B with addition of 1% hay.

606 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE MICROBIOLOGY OF AUSTRALIAN SOILS. _ V,

perfect inverse relationship between temperature and numbers of organisms.
The growth ef fungal mycelium behaves similarly: maximal development, which
reaches its highest values at 7-15°C. and is least at 37°C., takes place during the
first 7 to 15 days and is followed by a decline which is slowest at 7°C. and most
rapid at 37°C. After the 30th day all densities of mycelium were very low
at all temperatures, and have therefore been omitted from the graph. The curves
for mineral nitrogen are here again almost complete reciprocals of the bacterial
numbers and the mycelial densities. At 7°C. there is hardly any formation of
mineral nitrogen during the first 30 days, but a definite increase takes place
during the last 32 days, when nearly all fungal growth has ceased and the numbers
of bacteria are falling. At 37°C., on the other hand, most of the mineral nitrogen
is produced after 30 days, at which time mycelial growth has already disappeared
and the numbers of bacteria have reached an almost constant level.

In soil B, which was exposed to a still lower minimum temperature, the results
are similar but even more striking (Fig. 4), in respect of both total counts, plate
counts, growth of mycelium, and production of mineral nitrogen, except that the
initial rise in bacterial numbers is somewhat more rapid at the higher tempera-
tures, especially 25°C., in the very early stages of decomposition (4 to 8 days).

In both soils with addition of organic matter, but especially B, actinomycetes
figured prominently in the plate counts at 25° and 37°C., but were less numerous
at 15°C. and very sparse at 5° and 7°C.

Very little accumulation of ammonia took place except at the lowest tempera-
ture, where the following amounts of NO, and NH,-N (in parts per million)
were found:

Soil A (7°C.)
Days NO,-N NH,-N

Soil B (5°C.)
Days NO,N NH,-N

0 31 0 | 0 30 8
30 (0) 45 | 15 37 37
62 48 25 | 28 33 43
94 147 13 51 50 48

| 85 63 55

Even at 5°C. nitrification thus goes on, although slowly and without keeping
pace with the ammonia production (cf. Schoénbrunn (1922), who observed the
same phenomenon even at 0°C.). The lack of nitrate accumulation in the
corresponding control soil without addition of organic material is thus not due
to complete inhibition of the nitrifying bacteria by the low temperature, but must
be ascribed to more complex causes—perhaps inactivity of microorganisms capable
of producing ammonia from the resistant humus compounds, or the accumulation
of an abundant microflora capable of utilizing the otherwise nitrifiable nitrogen
for cell synthesis.

From the direct counts of bacteria we may roughly estimate the quantities of
nitrogen present as bacterial substance, by assuming that 1,000 mill. bactérial cells
of average size represent 1 mgm. of protoplasm with 20% dry matter containing
10% N, i.e. 1,000 mill. bacteria represent 207 of nitrogen. If we regard all the
bacteria found after 4-7 days and onwards, as well as the mineral nitrogen formed,
as derived from the organic matter added (since it igs by no means certain that
the soil humus would be attacked to the same extent as in the control soils
without addition of organic material), we may tentatively account for the per-
centages of added nitrogen that have been transformed into bacterial protoplasm
plus mineral nitrogen in the two soils with addition of fungal mycelium and hay
at the different times and temperatures. This calculation is shown graphically

BY H. L. JENSEN. 607

in Figure 5; it is to be noted that soil A received 352 parts per million of N
in mycelial substance, and soil B 273 p.p.m. of N in hay. We see that at the end
of the experiment some 75-80% of the added nitrogen can be accounted for at 37°C.,
and of this only a very small fraction is represented by bacterial substance. At
5° and 7°C. only approximately one-half of the added N can be accounted for, and
a good deal of this, especially im soil B, is present as bacteria. The intermediate
temperatures occupy intermediate positions. In the early stages of the decom-
position the calculated amount of bacterial nitrogen far exceeds that of mineral
nitrogen at the lowest temperatures, but the ratio of mineral nitrogen to bacterial
nitrogen is widened with both advancing time and increasing temperature, yet at
each stage being narrower at lower temperature; if it had been possible to
calculate the amount of nitrogen in vegetative fungal mycelium, which is produced
most abundantly at low temperatures, and to add it to the bacterial nitrogen, it
would further have accentuated the general principle of increasing synthesis of
microbial substance with decreasing temperature.

% of added N.

Soil A. (Fungal Matter). Soil B.(Hay).

Fig. 5.—Calculated percentages of added nitrogen accounted for as bacterial sub-
stance + (NH,+NO,)N. Black parts of columns: nitrogen estimated as present in
bacterial cells. White parts: (NH,+NO,)N. y

Conclusions.

The results as a whole agree completely with what was previously found in
short-period experiments: the rapidity of decomposition of organic matter, as
measured by formation of carbon dioxide, nitrate and ammonia, increases with
increasing temperature, but the abundance of microorganisms decreases. When the
accumulation of soil humus is known generally to increase with decreasing tempera-
ture (cf. Waksman, 1936), the explanation must be sought not merely in the general
retarding influence of temperature decrease on biological processes according to
the law of van’t Hoff, but also to the fact that decreasing temperature causes
larger proportions of the transformed organic material to be converted into

608 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE MICROBIOLOGY OF AUSTRALIAN SOILS. V.

microbial substance, certain constituents of which contribute to the humus of the
soil. In its relation to temperature the soil microflora as a whole thus seems to
conform to a general biological rule governing the size of populations; this has
previously been most clearly observed in plankton populations, which reach their
greatest density in cold sea-water (cf. Bélehradek, 1935). No doubt this
phenomenon has also something to do with the high numbers of bacteria sometimes
observed in frozen soil; a reinvestigation of this problem by means of direct
counting methods might prove fruitful. When no definite correlation is usually
found to exist between soil temperature and numbers of bacteria under natural
soil conditions, it must be remembered that a complicating factor is here
represented by the food supply in the form of residues of higher plants, the growth
of which in its turn depends on the temperature (Hggleton, 1938). It seems quite
likely, however, that the frequently observed spring and autumn maxima in
bacterial numbers (Taylor, 1936) may arise, if at these seasons there prevails a
soil temperature insufficiently low to check the growth of bacteria altogether
(such as might happen in winter time), yet low enough to permit the accumulation
of higher numbers of bacteria than in summer time.

Summary.

Two soils were incubated with and without addition of decomposable organic
material (hay and fungal mycelium) for about 3 months at 4 ranges of temperature,
from 5°C. to 37°C. Determinations were made at different time-intervals of the
abundance of microorganisms, by both microscopical and plate methods, as well as
of ammonia and nitrate. The rate of nitrate accumulation, from the soil humus
as well as from the added materials, increased with the temperature, whereas
the numbers of bacteria and the densities of fungi showed an inverse relationship,
becoming highest at the lowest temperature, i.e. the lower the temperature of
decomposition, the greater a proportion of nitrogen in the transformed organic
matter is temporarily locked up as microbial substance before eventually appearing
as ammonia and nitrate. At 5°C. the numbers of bacteria were occasionally
so high as to account for approximately one-third of the nitrogen present in the
added organic material.

References.

BELEHRADEK, J., 1935.—Temperature and Living Matter. (Protoplasma-Monographien,
No. 8. G. Borntraeger, Berlin.)

EcGGLeTon, E. W. G., 1938.—The Influence of Environmental Factors on Numbers of Soil
Microorganisms. Soil Sci., 46, 351-3638.

JENSEN, H. L., 1936.—Contributions to the Microbiology of Australian Soils. iv. Proc.
Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 61, 27-55.

LEBRUN and RADET, 1933.—Les reserves azotées du sol et leur mobilisation dans les sols
calecaires de Champagne. Ann. Agron., N.S., 3, 478-492.

Prescott, J. A., and Piper, G. R., 1930.—Nitrate Fluctuations in a South Australian Soil.
Journ. Agr. Sci., 20, 517-531.

RUSSELL, E. J., and HuTCcHINSON, H. B., 1913.—The Effect of Partial Sterilisation of Soil
on the Production of Plant Food. Journ. Agr. Sci., 5, 152-221.

SCHONBRUNN, B., 1922.—Uber den zeitlichen Verlauf der Nitrifikation (etc.). Cent. Bakt.,
li, 56, 545-565.

Taytor, C. B., 1936.—Short-Period Fluctuations in the Number of Bacterial Cells in Soil.
Proc. Roy. Soc. London, B, 119, 269-295.

WAKSMAN, S. A., 1932.—Principles of Soil Microbiology. 2nd Ed. (Williams & Wilkins,
Baltimore).

————, 1936.—Humus, its Origin, Chemical Composition and Importance in Nature.
(Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore).

XXXili

ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
31st May, 1939.

Mr. H. C. Andrews, B.A., Vice-President, in the Chair.

Miss Marion W. Hutley, B.Sc., was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society.

The Chairman offered congratulations to Dr. H. G. Raggatt on attaining the
degree of Doctor of Science of the University of Sydney, and to Dr. C. J. Magee
on attaining the degree of Doctor of Science in Agriculture.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(26th April, 1939), amounting to 10 Volumes, 146 Paris or Numbers, 4 Bulletins,
4 Reports and 8 Pamphlets, received from 87 Societies and Institutions, were laid
upon the table.

PAPERS READ.

1. A New Species of Chalcid (Genus Hurytoma) associated with Tepperella
trilineata Cam., a Wasp causing Galling of the Flower Buds of Acacia decurrens.
By N.S. Noble, D.Sc.Agr., M.Se., D.1.C.

2. The Upper Palaeozoic Rocks between Mount George and Wingham, New
South Wales. By A. H. Voisey, M.Sc.

3. The Lorne Triassic Basin and Associated Rocks. By A. H. Voisey, M.Sc.

4. Taxonomic Notes on the Order Hmbioptera. ii. Description of a New
Neotropical Genus. By Consett Davis, M.Sc.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Professor J. Macdonald Holmes sent, for exhibition, several plants collected
in the Lismore district.

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
28th June, 1939.

Mr. EH. Cheel in the Chair.

Letters were received from Dr. H. G. Raggatt and Dr. C. J. Magee, returning
thanks for congratulations.

The Chairman announced that the Royal Zoological Society of Victoria has
decided to offer a prize of £25 for an essay on any scientific aspect of the fauna
of Australia. The prize is open to all interested persons and essays should be
forwarded to the Hon. Secretary, Royal Zoological Society of Victoria, 80 Swanston
Street, Melbourne, C.1, on or before 30th December, 1939.

The Chairman announced that members were invited by the Biological Society,
Sydney University, to a symposium on “The Origin of Life’, on Wednesday, 12th
July, at 8 p.m., in the Organic Chemistry Lecture Theatre, University of Sydney.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(31lst May, 1939), amounting to 11 Volumes, 136 Parts or Numbers, 3 Bulletins,
4 Reports and 12 Pamphlets, received from 69 Societies and Institutions and 2
private donors, were laid upon the table.

XxX

XXXiV ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.

PAPERS READ.

1. A New Species of Megastigmus parasitic on Tepperella trilineata Cam., a
Wasp causing Galling of the Flower Buds of Acacia decurrens. By N. S. Noble,
D.Se.Agr., M.Se., D.I.C.

2. A Reconnaissance Survey of the Vegetation of the Myall Lakes. By
Professor T. G. B. Osborn, D.Se., F.L.S., and R. N. Robertson, Ph.D., B.Sc.

3. The Genus Adrama, with Descriptions of Three New Species (Diptera,
Trypetidae). By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by F. H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.S.)

4. A New Family of Lepidoptera. By A. Jefferis Turner, M.D., F.R.E.S.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. EH. Cheel exhibited specimens and drawings of grasses with notes thereon
as follows: (1) Cynodon.—Four species of the genus are recorded for Australia by
Bentham (F1. Aust., vii, 1878, p. 608), namely, C. dactylon, C. tenellus, C. convergens
and C. ciliaris. The three latter species are classed in the genus Microchloa by
Domin, and Brachyachne by the late Dr. O. Stapf and C. E. Hubbard of Kew,
England. The common “Couch Grass” of Australia is still retained in the genus
Cynodon by the Kew authorities and the species C. dactylon is noted for its
variability, but only one variety has been recorded in botanical literature, namely,
var. pulchellus (Bentham, l.c.). Specimens collected by HE. Cheel at Hillston in
November, 1926, and Inverell by Mr. Sommerlad in May, 1939, were exhibited which
may belong to the latter variety, but as there are no authentic specimens available
for comparison they are tentatively recorded under this varietal name. (2)
Brachiaria notochtona Stapf.—Originally described by Dr. Domin of Prague under
the name Panicum notochtonum, and recorded and illustrated by Maiden and Cheel
(Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., 1914, p. 1034) under Domin’s name, afterwards by Hughes as
Urochloa notochthona. (3) Brachiaria piligera (F.v.M.) Hughes var. intercedens
Cc. E. Hubbard.—Recorded and illustrated as Panicum intercedens Domin by Maiden
and Cheel (Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., 1914, p. 1035), and Panicum helopus Maiden, not
Bentham or Trin. (Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., 1908, p. 241). (4) Themeda arguens C. EB.
Hubbard, syn. Anthistria frondosa R. Br.—Darwin, F. H. Taylor, March, 1939.

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
26th Juxny, 1939.

Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Sc., Ph.D., President, in the Chair.

Dr. C. E. M. Gunther, New Guinea, and Miss Joan Johnston, Bexley, were
elected Ordinary Members of the Society.

The President announced that the proclamation protecting certain wild flowers
had been extended for another year from Ist July, 1939. Five species, Clianthus
Dampieri, Grevillea asplenifolia, G. Caleyi, Sprengelia incarnata, and Persoonia
pinifolia, have been added to the list this year.

The President drew attention to the following International Congresses to
which the Society has been invited to nominate representatives: 7th International
Botanical Congress, Stockholm, 17th—25th July, 1940; 18th International Geological
Congress, London, 31st July-8th August, 1940; 138th International Zoological
Congress, Paris, July, 1940. Any members who may be likely to attend any one
of these three Congresses are invited to inform the Secretary of their intention.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(28th June, 1939), amounting to 25 Volumes, 164 Parts or Numbers, 5 Bulletins
and 4 Pamphlets, received from 89 Societies and Institutions, were laid upon the
table.

ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXV

PAPERS READ.

1. Australian Coleoptera. Notes and New Species. No. xi. By H. J. Carter,
B.A., F.R.E.S.

2. Observations on the Bionomics and Morphology of seven Species of the
Tribe Paropsini (Fam. Chrysomelidae). By D. Margaret Cumpston, M.Sc.,
Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology.

3. Hymenopterous Parasites of Embioptera. By Alan P. Dodd.

4. Miscellaneous Notes on Australian Diptera. vi. Dolichopodinae. By
G. H. Hardy.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. HE. Cheel exhibited fresh flowering specimens of Calythrix from cultivated
plants raised from seed obtained from Denman. The species is allied to C. tetragona
and has been regarded as a form of that species, but it is proposed to describe it as
a new species when investigations are complete.

Professor J. Macdonald Holmes showed some coloured slides of the Kyogle
and Broken Hill districts.

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
30th Aueust, 1939.

Mr. F. H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.S., in the Chair.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(26th July, 1939), amounting to 7 Volumes, 117 Parts or Numbers, 1 Bulletin,
4 Reports and 7 Pamphlets, received from 69 Societies and Institutions and 1
private donor, were laid upon the table.

PAPERS READ.

1. The Geology of the Lower Manning District of New South Wales. By A. H.
Voisey, M.Sc.

2. The Geology of the County of Buller, New South Wales. By A. H. Voisey,
M.Sc.

38. The Diptera of the ‘Territory of New Quinea. No. x. Family
Ceratopogonidae. By J. W. S. Macfie, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.H.S. (Communicated by
F. H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8.)

4. Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. iii-v. By Consett Davis, M.Sc.

5. The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. No. xi. Family Trypetidae.
By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by F. H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.S.)

6. A Note on the Synonymy of Leptops (Coleoptera: Curculionidae). By
K. €. McKeown.

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
27th SEPTEMBER, 1939.

Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Sc., Ph.D., President, in the Chair.

Messrs. S. L. Allman, B.Sc.Agr., Sydney, T. Langford-Smith, Chatswood, and
A. J. Marshall, Newtown, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society.

The President announced that the Council is prepared to receive applications
for four Linnean Macleay Fellowships tenable for one year from 1st March, 1940,
from qualified candidates. Applications should be lodged with the Secretary, who
will afford all necessary information to intending candidates, not later than
Wednesday, 1st November, 1939.

XXXVi ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.

The attention of members was drawn to a meeting of the proposed Australian
Association of Scientific Workers to be held at the Botany School, University of
Sydney, on Wednesday, 4th October, 1939, at 8 p.m.

The President referred to the death of William Butler Gurney, Government
Entomologist, who had been a member of the Society since 1901.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(30th August, 1939), amounting to 16 Volumes, 129 Parts or Numbers, 6 Bulletins
and 2 Pamphlets, received from 69 Societies and Institutions, were laid upon the
table.

PAPERS READ.

1. The Association between the Larva described as Trombicula hirsti var.
buloloensis Gunther and Trombicula minor Berlese. By C. E. M. Gunther, M.B.,
Bisse avr

2. Observations on the Life-history of Neoschéngastia kallipygos Gunther
(Acarina, Trombidiidae). By C. E. M. Gunther, M.B., B.S., D.T.M.

3. Ectocarpus confervoides (Roth.) Le Jol. By Valerie May, B.Sc., Linnean
Macleay Fellow of the Society in Botany.

4. Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. vi-x. By Consett Davis, M.Sc.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. EH. Cheel exhibited samples of material known in the trade ase“Rice-Paper”,
which is used to make artificial flowers. A Sydney firm submitted the material for
identification with a view of extensive cultivation in Australia. With the assist-
ance of Dr. Samuel Record, Professor of Forest Products in the Yale University,
New Haven, Connecticut, it has been classified as Tetrapanax papyriferum (Hook.)
K. Koch. A closely related plant is cultivated in the Botanic Gardens, Sydney,
and a few private gardens under the name Fatsia japonica (Thunb.) Dene., and is
frequently mistaken for the true Rice-Paper plant listed in catalogues as Fatsia
papyrifera and Aralia papyrifera.

Mr. Cheel also submitted the following notes on recent classification of certain
species of Australian grasses: (1) Chamaeraphis spinescens of Maiden figured in
Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., September, 1900, is Chamaeraphis squarrosa Chase. Specimens
collected at Hillston in November, 1926, were exhibited; (2) Panicum reversum
F.v.M., of Maiden with an illustration (Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., September, 1897) is
Paractaenum novae-hollandiae Beaud. (Syn. Panicum paractaenum Kunth. vide
Royal Herbarium, Kew (England) authorities).

A series of cultivated specimens of nine species and varieties of Callistemon
were exhibited to show the fugacious nature of the chaff-like bracts which support
the individual flowers arranged in the spike-like inflorescence. The bracts in most
species are shed before the petals and filaments are expanded. In Callistemon
acuminatus the bracts are shed simultaneously with the petals and filaments. The
leaves of Callistemon viminalis are shed just before spring and renewal of foliage
takes place about three weeks after defoliation. The seed capsules and seeds are
fully matured in ten to twelve months. The other species are not fully developed
until about two and a half years.

Miss J. Vickery exhibited specimens, from the Broken Hill district, of
Trisetum pumilum Kunth., a small European grass already naturalized in South
Australia; Hragrostis barrelieri Daveau, a Mediterranean grass species which has
sometimes been confused with #. cilianensis; Statice Thouini Viv., a native of the
Eastern Mediterranean region which has appeared spontaneously in an irrigated
area at Broken Hill. It occurs in South Australia and had probably been intro-

ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. - XXXV1l1

duced from there; two forms of Atriplex spongiosum F. Muell. collected from the
same locality; Galenia secunda Sond., a native of South Africa, a species which
has only been collected previously in New South Wales near Newcastle and Mait-
land; Swainsona fissimontana J. M. Black, a native pea described from the Broken
Hill district.

The first three of the species exhibited do not appear to have been recorded
previously from New South Wales.

Dufay colour photographs of some aspects of the ground flora in the Wilcannia,
Broken Hill and Silverton districts, and a number of specimens illustrating some
of the more important and conspicuous herbaceous elements of the vegetation were
also exhibited.

Professor E. Ashby exhibited lantern slides and a specimen of wood illus-
trating the activities of beavers in the construction of dams, using Populus
tremuloides.

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
25th OctToser, 1939.

Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Sc., Ph.D., President, in the Chair.

The President reminded candidates for Linnean Macleay Fellowships, 1940-41,
that Wednesday, 1st November, 1939, was the last day for receiving applications.

The President referred to the death of Bishop Dwyer, who had been a member
of the Society since 1920.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(27th September, 1939), amounting to 18 Volumes, 70 Parts or Numbers, 7 Bulletins
and 2 Reports, received from 47 Societies and Institutions, were laid upon the table.

PAPERS READ.

1. Elementary Hydrography of South-eastern Australia. By F. A. Craft, B.Sc.

2. A Note on the Re-examination of Australian species of Ceratopogonidae. By
J. W. S. Macfie, M.A., D.Se., F.R.E.S. (Communicated by F. H. Taylor, F.R.E.S.,
F.ZS8.)

3. Strongylate Nematodes from Marsupials in New South Wales. By Professor
T. Harvey Johnston, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., and Patricia M. Mawson.

- NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. E. Cheel exhibited flowering specimens taken from cultivated plants:
Leptospermum emarginatum, Callistemon hortensis Hort. C. acuminatus,
Callistemon hybrid (C. acuminatus x C. lanceolatus), C. linearis, C. pinifolius and
C. pachyphyllus.

Mr. J. A. Dulhunty exhibited specimens and photographs of Macrozamia
Macdonnelli from Macdonnell Range, Central Australia. The species is confined
to this region, and is closely related to coastal types, but has much larger seeds.
It grows near permanent water and fresh springs, but not near the mound springs.
It has remained isolated in Central Australia on account of surrounding desert
conditions, which have evidently persisted since late Cretaceous or early Tertiary
time.

Mr. J. R. Kinghorn exhibited a specimen of Bufo marinus Linn., the Giant
Toad, introduced into Queensland cane-fields from Hawaii in 1934 to control the
cane borer. It was stated at a conference of sugar planters in Puerto Rico the

XXXVili ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.

same year that “if conditions in Australia and Fiji are at all comparable to those
in Puerto Rico, the white grub problem in those countries would be solved within
ten or fifteen years”. In a recent letter Dr. K. J. A. W. Lever, of the Department
of Agriculture, Fiji, stated that the toad was not introduced into Fiji until 1936,
and that among other insects in the stomach of one specimen examined were two
banana borers, Cosmopolites sordidus Chevyr., the first record for Fiji. No records
are yet to hand regarding its economic status in Queensland, into which State its
introduction did not go unchallenged. The Giant Toad is a very prolific breeder
and is now extremely plentiful in the Cairns—Gordonvale district and is spreading
rapidly over the country. The fear is that the toad may interfere seriously with
the endemic herpetological fauna.

The Secretary referred to the recent death of Mr. Fred Turner, at the age of
87. Mr. Turner had been a member of the Council from 1897 to 1912 and during
that period had been an active member of the Society. He was a member of the
Society from 1891 to 1923.

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
29th NovemMsBeER, 1939.

Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Sc., Ph.D., President, in the Chair.

The President announced that the Council had reappointed Miss Ilma M.
Pidgeon, M.Sc., Miss Valerie May, B.Sc., and Miss Margaret Cumpston, M.Sc., to
Linnean Macleay Fellowships in Botany, Botany and Zoology respectively, for one
year from 1st March, 1940, and had appointed Mr. J. A. Dulhunty, B.Sc., to a
Linnean Macleay Fellowship in Geology for one year from ist March, 1940.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(25th October, 1939), amounting to 8 Volumes, 79 Parts or Numbers, 2 Bulletins,
7 Reports and 4 Pamphlets, received from 55 Societies and Institutions, were
laid upon the table.

PAPERS READ.

1. The General Geology of the District east of Yass, N.S.W. By Kathleen
Sherrard, M.Sc.

2. Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. Parts xi-xiv. By Consett
Davis, M.Sc.

3. Contribution to the Microbiology of Australian Soils. v. Abundance of
Microorganisms and Production of Mineral Nitrogen in relation to Temperature.
By H. L. Jensen, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Professor Macdonald Holmes handed to the Society a set of about 160 photo-
graphs taken by Dr. Brough and Messrs. Beadle and Langford-Smith during the
excursion to the far west of New South Wales in August, 1939.

Dr. H. L. Kesteven exhibited a vertical projector designed for examination of
large sections and for use in place of a camera lucida.

XXX1X

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.
Received during the period 27th October, 1938, to 25th October, 1939.
(From the respective Societies, etc., unless otherwise mentioned.)

ABERYSTWYTH.—Welsh Plant Breeding Station, University College of Wales. Bulletin,
Series H, No. 15 (1939); “The Welsh Journal of Agriculture’, xv (19389); ‘“‘Ley-
farming and a Long-term Agricultural Policy”, by R. G. Stapledon (From Herbage
Reviews, vi, 3, 1938).

Accra.—Geological Survey Department, Gold Coast Colony. Report for the Financial
Year 1937-38 (19388).

ADELAIDE.—Department of Mines: Geological Survey of South Australia. Annual Report
of the Director of Mines and Government Geologist for 1937 (1938); Bulletin No. 18
(1939) ; Mining Review for the Half-years ended 30th June, 1938 (No. 68) (1938)
and 31st December, 1938 (No. 69) (1939).—Field Naturalists’ Section of the Royal
Society of South Australia and South Australian Aquarium Society. “South Australian
Naturalist”, xix, 2-4 and Supplement (1938-1939).—Public Library, Museum and Art
Gallery of South Australia. 54th Annual Report of the Board of Governors, 1937-38
(1938); Records of the South Australian Museum, vi, 2 (1938).—Royal Society of
South Australia. Transactions, |xii, 2 (T.p. & ec.) (19388); Ixili, 1 (1939).—South
Australian Ornithological Association. ‘‘The South Australian Ornithologist”, xiv, 8
(1938) ; xv, 1-3 (1939).—University of Adelaide. ‘The Australian Journal of Experi-
mental Biology and Medical Science’, xvi, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xvii, 1-3 (1939).—
Woods and Forests Department. Annual Report for the Year ended 30th June, 1938
(19388). ;

ALBANY.—New York State Library, University of the State of New York. New York
State Museum Bulletin Nos. 314-316, 318, 319 (1938-1939).

ALGER.—Institut Pasteur d’Algerie. Archives, xvi, 3-4 (T.p. & ec.) (1938); xvii, 1-2
(1939).—Société d’Histoire Naturelle de VAfrique du Nord, Bulletin, xxix, 6-9
(T.p. & c.) (1938); xxx, 1-3 (1939).

AMSTERDAM.—Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen. Proceedings, xli, 6-10 (T.p. &c.)
(1938); xlii, 1-2 (1939); Verhandelingen Afdeeling Natuurkunde, 2e Sectie, xxxvii,
5-7 (1938).—Nederlandsche Entomologische Vereeniging. Entomologische Berichten,
x, 222-227 (1938-1939) ; Tijdschrift voor Entomologie, Ixxxi, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938);
Ixxxii, 1-2 (1939).

ANN ArRBoR.—University of Michigan. Contributions from the Laboratory of Vertebrate
Genetics, No. 7 (1938) ; Miscellaneous Publications of the Museum of Zoology, No. 40
(1938) ; Occasional Papers of the Museum of Zoology, T.p. & ec. for Nos. 296-342
(Vol. xiii) (1934-1936); Nos. 3878-390; T.p. & ec. for Nos. 343-390 (Vol. xiv)
(1936-19388) ; Nos. 391-402 (1938-1939).

ATHENS.—Zoological Institute and Museum, University of Athens, Acta, ii, 3-4 (1939).

AUCKLAND.—Auckland Institute and Museum. Annual Report, 1938-39 (1939); Records,
ii, 3 (1938).

BALTIMORE.—Johns Hopkins University. Bulletin of the Johns Hopkins Hospital, Ixili, 4-6
(T.p. & c.) (1938); lxiv, 1-6 (T.p. & c.) (1939); Ixv, 1-3 (1939).

BANDOBNG.—Dienst van den Mijnbouw in Nederlandsch-Indie. Bulletin of the Netherlands
Indies Vulcanological Survey, Nos. 84-86 (1938-1939); Publications of the Mining
and Geological Survey Department in the Netherlands Indies during 1900-1939 (1939) ;
Wetenschappelijke Mededeelingen, No. 27, le Stuk (1938); “On Polylepidina,
Orbitocyclina and Lepidorbitoides” by Dr. Ir. Tan Sin Hok (Batavia-Centrum, 1939).

xl DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

BASEL.—Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, xlix, 1937-38 (1938).

BaTAviA.—Departement van Economische Zaken. Bulletin du Jardin Botanique, Serie iii,
Supplement Vol. i, Index; Supplement Vol. iii, 1 (1938); xvi, 1-2 (1938-1939) ;
“Treubia’”’, xvi, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xvii, 1-3 (1939).—Koninklijke Natuurkundige
Vereeniging in Nederlandsch-Indie. Natuurkundig Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch-
Indie, xecviii, 5-6 (T.p. & c.) (19388); xcix, 1-5 (1939).—Natuurwetenschappelijke
Raad voor Nederlandsch-Indie te Batavia (Netherlands India Science Council).
Publication, Nos. 14-16 (1939).

BERGEN.—Bergens Museum. Arbok, 1938, 1 (1938); Arsberetning, 1937-38 (1938).

BERKELEY.—University of California. Bulletin of the Department of Geological Sciences,
xxiv, 11-12 (1938-1939); Publications, Botany, xviii, 6-7 (1938); xix, 7 (1939);
Physiology, viii, 4 (1938); Zoology, xlii, 6 (1938); xliii, 9-10 (1939); Publications
of the University of California at Los Angeles in Biological Sciences, i, 10-12 (1939).

BERLIN.—Deutsch-Auslandischer Buchtausch. ‘Flora’, Neue Folge, xxxiii, 1-4 (T.p. & c.)
(1938-1939).—Zoologische Museum. Mitteilungen, xxiii, 2 (T.p. & c.) (1938).

BERLIN-DAHLEM.—Botanisch Garten und Museum. Notizblatt, xiv, 123-124 (1938-1939 ).—
Deutsches Entomologisches Institut. Arbeiten uber morphologische und taxonomische
Entomologie aus Berlin-Dahlem, v, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); vi, 1-3 (1939); Arbeiten
uber physiologische und angewandte Entomologie aus Berlin-Dahlem, v, 3-4
(T.p. & c.) (1938); vi, 1-2 (1939); Entomologische Beihefte aus Berlin-Dahlem, vi
(1939).

BERN.—N aturforschende Gesellschaft. Mitteilungen a.d. Jahre 1938 (1939).—
Schweizerische Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, 119. Jahresversamm-
lung, 1938 (1938).

BIRMINGHAM.—Birmingham Natural History and Philosophical Society. List of Members,
1939 and Annual Report for 1938; Proceedings, xvii, 1 (1939).

BLOEMFONTEIN.—WNasionale Museum. Argeologiese Navorsing, i, 9-10 (1939); Soologiese
Navorsing, i, 8 (1939).

BomBay.—Bombay Natural History Society. Journal, T.p. & c. for xxxix, 3-4 (1938);
xl, 2 (Ep: & ec for xl, 1-2) (1938); 3-4 (1938-1939); xli, 1 (1939).—Haffkine
Institute. Report for the Year 1937; 1938 (1939).

Bonn.—Naturhistorischer Verein der Rheinlande und Westfalens. ‘‘Decheniana’’, xcvii
(A and B); xcviii, A, 1 (1938).

Boston.—American Academy of Arts and Sciences. Proceedings, Ilxxiii, 1-4 (1938-1939).—
Boston Society of Natural History. Proceedings, xli, 6-7 (1939).

BRISBANE.—Department of Agriculture. Queensland Agricultural Journal, 1, 4-6 (T.p. &c.)
(1938); li, 1-6; lii, 1-3 (1939).—Department of Mines: Geological Survey of
Queensland. “Queensland Government Mining Journal’, xxxix, Sept.-Dec., 1938
(T.p. & c.) (1938); xl, Jan.-Aug., 1939 (1939).—Queensland Musewm. Memoirs, xi,
3 (T.p. & c.) (1939).—Queensland Naturalists’ Club and Nature-Lovers’ League.
“The Queensland Naturalist”, xi, 1-3 (1939).—Royal Society of Queensland. Proceed-
ings, xlix, 1937 (1938); 1, 1938 (1939).—University of Queensland. University of
Queensland Papers, Department of Biology, i, 10 (1939); ‘‘Water Conservation in
Australia”, by H. H. Dare (John Murtagh Macrossan Lectures for 1939) (1939).

Brno.—Prirodovedecka Fakulta, Masarykovy University. Spisy (Publications) (Botanical
only), Cis. 263, 267 (1938); “The Profile of Equilibrium as a Basis of the Study
of River Terraces” by Jan Krejci (1939).

Brooktyn.—Brooklyn Botanic Garden. “Genetics”, xxiii, 6 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xxiv, 1-5
(1939).

BRUXELLES.—Académie Royale des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts de Belgique.
Annuaire, 1939, 105m™e Année (1939); Bulletin de la Classe des Sciences, 5™° Sé6rie,
xxiv, 3-12 (T.p. & c.) (1938).—Musée Royal d Histoire Naturelle de Belgique.
Bulletin, xiv, 1-60 (T.p. & c.) (1988); Mémoires, Nos. 82-85 (1938); Mémoires, 2™°

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. xli

Série, Fasc. 13-14 (1938); Mémoires, Hors Série (Résultats Scientifiques du Voyage
aux Indes Orientales Néerlandaises), ii, 19; iii, 18-19 (1938).—Société Entomologique
de Belgique. Bulletin and Annales, Ixxviii, 3-12 (T.p. & c.) (19388); Ixxix, 1-5
(1939).—Société Royale de Botanique de Belgique. Bulletin, lxx, 2 (T.p. & c.); 1xxi,
1-2 (T.p. & c.) (19388-1939).—Société Royale Zoologique de Belgique. Annales, 1xviii,
1937 (19388); lxix, 1938 (1939).

Bupaprst.—‘Index Horti Botanici Universitatis Budapestinensis”’, iii (1938).

BuENos AIRES.—WMinisterio de Agricultura de la Nacion: Direccion de Propaganda y
Publicaciones. Publicacion Miscelanea, No. 43 (1938).—Sociedad Argentina de
Ciencias Naturales. Revista, ““Physis’’, xii, 44 (T.p. & c.) (1938).

BuITENzoRG.—N ederlandsch-Indische Entomologische Vereeniging. Entomologische
Mededeelingen van Nederlandsch-Indie, iv, 3-4 (1938); T.p. & ec. for ii-iv, 1937-1938
(19389) ; v, 1-3 (1939).

CaEN.—Société Linnéenne de Normandie. Mémoires, Nouvelle Série, Section Botanique,
i, 4 (Ep. &-e.) (1938).

CaiIRNS.—North Queensland Naturalists’ Club. “North Queensland Naturalist’’, vii, 56-58 ;
viii, 59 (all with Supplements) (19388-1939).

Ca.LcurrTa.—Geological Survey of India. Memoirs, |lxxii, 2 (T.p. & ¢.) (1938); Ixxili
(1939); Memoirs, Palaeontologia Indica, N.S. xxv, 1; xxvi, 1; xxvii, 1 (1939);
Records, Ixxii, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1938) ; xxiii, 2-3 (1938); Ixxiv, 1 (1989) ; Geographical
Index to the Memoirs, Vols. i-liv, Records, Vols. i-lxv and General Reports of the
Director for the Years 1897-1903 by T. H. D. La Touche (1938).—Zoological Survey
of India. Report for the Years 1935 to 1938 (19388) ; Memoirs of the Indian Museum,
xiii, 1 (1938); Records of the Indian Museum, T.p. & c. for xxxix; xl, 1-4 (1938).

CAMBRIDGE.—Cambridge Philosophical Society. Biological Reviews, xiii, 4 (T.p. & c.)
(1938); xiv, 1-3 (1939).—University of Cambridge. Abstracts of Dissertations
approved for the Ph.D., M.Sc., and M.Litt. Degrees during the Academical Year
1937-38 (1939).

CAMBRIDGE, Mass.—Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College. Annual Report
of the Director for 1937-38 (1938); Bulletin, Ixxxii, 3-6 (T.p. & c.) (1938); Ixxxiii;
Ixxxiv (1939) ; Ixxxv, 1-3 (1938-1939).

CANBERRA.—Administration of the Territory of New Guinea. Geological Bulletin, No. 1
(1939).—Commonwealth Bureau of Census and Statistics. Official Year Book, No. 31,
1938 (1939).—Council for Scientific and Industrial Research: Divisions of Economic
Entomology and Plant Industry. Contributions (Economic Entomology), Nos. 128-
140; (Plant Industry), Nos. 101-109 (1938-1939).

Carn Town.—Royal Society of South Africa. Transactions, xxvi, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1938);
xxvii, 1 (1939).—WSouth African Museum. Annals, xxiv, 5 (T.p. & ¢c.); xxxii, 4
(1938); List of Papers published in Vols. i-xxx, together with an Index to Authors
and Subjects (1938).

CHANGSHA (formerly Peiping).—National Geological Survey .of China. Geological
Bulletin, Nos. 31-32 (1938).

CHICAGO.—Chicago Academy of Sciences. Bulletin, v, 6-8 (1938); “The Chicago
Naturalist”, i, 2-4 (Index) (1938).—Field Museum of Natural History. Botany,
Leaflet 22-23 (1938-1939) ; Zoology, Leaflet 14 (1938); Publications, Botanical Series,
xii, pt. 2, No. 3; T.p. & c. for xiii, pt. 2; xvii, 5; xviii, 3-4 (T.p. & c.); Title page
for xix; xx, 1 (1938-1939) ; Geological Series, vi, 21-22, vii, 4 (1938); Report Series,
xi, 2 (1938); Zoological Series, xiii, 11; xx, 30-37; xxii, 3-4; xxiv, 1-4 (1938-1939).

CHRISTCHURCH.—Canterbury Museum. Records, iv, 5 (1939).

CINCINNATI.—Lloyd Library of Natural History. ‘‘Lloydia’, i, 1-4 (T. p. & c.); ii, 1
(1939).

CLuUJ.—Gradina Botanica. Buletinul, xviii, 1-4, Appendix 1-2 (T.p. & c.) (1988); xix,
1-2 (1939).

xlii DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

CoLomsE0.—Colombo Museum. Spolia Zeylanica (Ceylon Journal of Science, Section B—
Zoology and Geology), xxi, 2 (1939).

CoLuMBUS.—Ohio State University and Ohio Academy of Science. “Ohio Journal of
Science”, xxxviii, 5-6 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xxxix, 1-4 (1939).—Ohio State University:
Ohio Biological Survey. Bulletin 35 (T.p. & c. for Vol. vi, Bulletins 30-35) (1938).

CoPENHAGEN.—Det Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab. Biologiske Meddelelser,
xiv, 3, 5-8 (T.p. & c.); xv, 1 (1939); Mémoires, Section des Sciences, 9™°® Série,
Dy (ez Cy LOL VIL EVA CI py sic.) Gi938))-

DuBLIN.—Royal Dublin Society. Scientific Proceedings, N.S. xxii, 6-14 (1939).—Royal
Irish Academy. Proceedings, xliv, Section B, 10-11 (T.p. & c.); xlv, Section B, 1-12 .
(1938-1939).

East LANSING.—Wichigan State College of Agriculture and Applied Science. Report of
the Division of Veterinary Science for the Year ended June 30, 1938 (no date).

EDINBURGH.—Royal Botanic Garden. Notes, xix, 95 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xx, 96 (1939);
Transactions and Proceedings of the Botanical Society of Edinburgh, xxxii, 3, Session
1937-38 (1938).—Royal Physical Society. Proceedings, xxiii, 1 (1939).—Royal Society
of Edinburgh. Proceedings, lviii, 2-3 (T.p. & c.); lix, 1 (1938-1939); Transactions,
lix, 2 (1938).

FRANKFuRT a.M.—Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, 440-443.
(1938) ; “Natur und Volk”, Ixviii, 6-12 (T.p. & c.) (19388); Ixix, 1-5 (1939).

GENEVA.—Société de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle. Compte Rendu des Séances, lv, 3
CE:p: & c.) (1938) ; lvi,; 1=2 (1939).

GENOVA.—WMuseo Civico di Storia Naturale Giacomo Doria. <Annali, lviii (1935-1939).—
Societa Entomologica Italiana. MBollettino, Ilxx, 1-10 (T.p. & c.) (1938); Ixxi, 1-5
(1939) ; Memorie, xvi, 1-2 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xvii, 1 (1939).

GIESSEN.—Botanische Institut. Fifteen separates by E. Kuster (1932, 1936-1938).

GLEN OSMOND, South Australia.—Waite Agricultural Research Institute. Reprint Numbers
229, 230, 232-239, 241-244, 246-250, 252, 254, 255, 257-259, 261-263, 266, 267,
269 (19387-1939).

GRANVILLE.—Denison University. Journal of the Scientific Laboratories, xxxiii, pp. 61-369
(T.p. & ec.) (1938) ; xxxiv, pp. 1-63 (1939).

HAuiIrax.—Nova Scotian Institute of Science. Proceedings, xix, 4, 1937-38 (T.p. & c.)
(1939).

HaLie.—Kaiserlich Leopold.-Carolin. Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher. Nova Acta
Leopoldina, Neue Folge, vi, Nos. 34-44 (T.p. & c.) (1938-1939).

HarupmM.—Société Hollandaise des Sciences. Archives Néerlandaises de Phonetique
expérimentale, xv (1939); Archives Néerlandaises des Sciences exactes et naturelles,
Série IIIC (Archives Néerlandaises de Physiologie de l’homme et des animaux),
xxiii, 2-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xxiv, 1 (1939); Archives Néerlandaises de Zoologie, iii,
2-4 (T.p. & c.) (1939).

HELSINGFORS.—Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica. Acta Botanica Fennica, xxi-xxiii
(1938); Acta Zoologica Fennica, xxii-xxy (1939); Memoranda, xiv, 1937-1938
(1938-1939 ).—-Societas Scientiarum Fennica. Acta, Nova Series A, i, 1-9 (T.p. & c.)
(1927-1930) ; ii, 1-13 (T.p. & c.) (1930-19388) ; iii, 1-2 (1939); Acta, Nova Series B,
ii,’ 2, 4 (1938, 1939); Arsbok-Vuosikirja, xvi, 1937-38 (1938); Bidrag till Kannedom
af Finlands Natur och Folk, lxxxvii, 1 (1939); Commentationes Biologicae, vii, 1-6
(1938) ; Commentationes Physico-mathematicae, x, 1-5 (1938).—Societas Zoolog.-
botanica Fennica Vanamo. Annales Zoologici, v (1937-1938).—Suomen Hyonteistie-
teellinen Seura (Entomological Society of Finland). Suomen Hyonteistieteellinen
Aikakauskirja (Annales Entomologici Fennici), iv, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); v, 1-2
and Appendix (1939).

HirRoSHIMA.—Hiroshima University. Journal of Science, Series B, Div. 1, vi, 7-9; vii, 1-6
(1939) = Div. 2; im), LO=15 Cisps & cs) (11939):

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. xliii

Hopart.—Royal Society of Tasmania. Papers and Proceedings for the Year 1938 (1939).

INDIANAPOLIS.—Indiana Academy of Science. Proceedings, xlvii, 1937 (1938); xlviii, 1938
@g939)):

ItHaca, N.Y.—Cornell University. One volume of Abstracts of Theses, 1937 (1938); one
volume of Abstracts of Theses, 1938 (1939); Cornell Studies in English, xxvii (1937).

JAMAICA PLAIN.—Arnold Arboretum. Journal, xix, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xx, 1-3 (1939).

JOHANNESBURG.—South African Association for the Advancement of Science. South
African Journal of Science, xxxiv-xxxv (1937-1938).

KuRASHIKI.—Ohara Institute for Agricultural Research. Berichte, viii, 3 (1938).

Kyiv.—Académie des Sciences de la R.S.S. @’Ukraine: Institut Botanique. Journal, 16
(24)-19 (27) (1938); one volume in Russian on EHEugleninae, by D. O. Chipenko
(1939); one volume entirely in Russian on Fungi (1938).

Kyoto.—Kyoto Imperial University. Memoirs of the College of Science, Series B, xiv, 2
(1938).—Takeuchi Entomological ‘Laboratory. Tenthredo. Acta Entomologica, ii,
2-3 (1938-1939).

LAGUNA.—University of the Philippines: College of Agriculture. “The Philippine Agri-
eculturist’”, T.p. & ec. for xxvi; xxvii, 5-10 (1938-1939) ; xxviii, 1-4 (1939).

La PLata.—Iustituto del Museo de la Universidad Nacional de La Plata. Notas del
Museo de La Plata, Antropologia, iii, 8-10; iv, 11; Botanica, iii, 17-20; Geologia,
iii, 5-6; iv, 7; Palaeontologia, iii, 12-15; iv, 16; Zoologia, iii, 9-15; iv, 16 (1938-1939) ;
Revista, N.S. i, Seccion Antropologia, pp. 35-91; Seccion Geologica, pp. 117-159;
Seccion Paleontologia, pp. 109-314 and i (complete); Seccion Zoologia, pp. 119-216;
ii, Seccion Botanica, pp. 3-226; Seccion Paleontologia, pp. 3-35 (1938-1939).

Le Catre (Cairo).—Société Fouad 1*&* d@Entomologie. Bulletin, xxii, 1938 (1939).

Lm@NINGRAD.—Académie des Sciences de VU.R.S.S. Bulletin, Classes des Sciences mathé-
matiques et naturelles, Série Biologique, 1938, 2-6 (1938); Bulletin, Série Biologique,
1939, 1 (1939); Bulletin, Classe des Sciences mathématiques et naturelles, Série
Chimique, 1938, 2-6 (1938); continued as Journal de Chimie Generale (Jurnal
Obschej Chimii), ix (Ixxi), 1-12 (1939); Comptes Rendus (Doklady), Nouvelle
Series xix) 97 G93 8) i sexe 1-9) (LISS) i> sexin 1=9) (G938) 5) sexi d=9) F939) exexilis EK6
(1939).—Geological and Prospecting Service, U.S.S.R. Soviet Geology (formerly
Problems of Soviet Geology), viii, 5-12 (T.p. & c.) (19388); ix, 1-3 (1939).—JLenin
Academy of Agricultural Sciences in U.S.S.R.: Institute for Plant Protection. Plant
Protection, Nos. 16-18 (1938-1939); Institute of Plant Industry: Supplement 84 to
the Bulletin of Applied Botany, Genetics and Plant Breeding (1938).—Société
Entomologique de VU.R.S.S. Revue d’Entomologie de 1’U.R.S.S., xxvii, 3-4 (1938).

LikcEe.—Société Royale des_Sciences de Liége. Bulletin, 7™* Année, 3-12 (T.p. & c.)
(1938); 8me Année, 1-5 (1939).

Lispoa.—Universidade de !Lisboa, Faculdade de Ciencias, Instituto Botanico. Trabalhos,
iii (1935-1936). ‘

LiIvERPOOL.—Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine. Annals of Tropical Medicine and
Parasitology, xxxii, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xxxiii, 1-2 (1939).

LIUBLJANA (Yugoslavia).—Prirodoslovno drustvo (Natural Science Society). Prirodo-
slovne Razprave, iii, 9-11 (1938-1939).

LONDON.—British Museum (Natural History). Great Barrier Reef Expedition, 1928-29.
Scientific Reports, v, 5 (1937); vi, 1 (1938); Mosquitoes of the Ethiopian Region.
Part 2. By the late Alwen M. Evans (1938); The British Rhaetic Flora. By T. M.
Harris (1938).—Geological Society. Quarterly Journal, xciv, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938);
xev, 1-2 (1939).—Linnean Society. Journal, Botany, li, 337 (1937); 340 (T.p. & c.)
(1938); lii, 341 (1939); Zoology, xl, 271 (1937); 273-274 (1939); Proceedings,
150th Session, 1937-38, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); 151st Session, 1938-39, 1-3 (1939).—
Ministry of Agriculture. Journal, xlv, 7-12 (T.p. & c.); xlvi, 1-6 (1938-1939) ;

xliv DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

Register of Accredited Poultry Breeding Stations and Accredited Hatcheries 1939
(1938).—Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew. Bulletin of Miscellaneous Information, 1938
(1939) ; Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, Fifth Series, iv, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938-1939).—
Royal Entomological Society. Proceedings, Series A, xiii, 7-12 (T.p. & ¢.); xiv, 1-8
(1938-1939) ; Series B, vii, 10-12 (T.p. & c.); viii, 1-8 (1938-1939); Transactions,
Ixxxvii, 6-23 (T.p. & c.) ; lxxxviii, 1-7; Ixxxix, 1-8 (1938-1939).—Royal Microscopical
Society. Journal, Series iii, lviii, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); lix, 1 (1939).—Royal
Society. Philosophical Transactions, Series B, ccxxix, 559-564 (T.p. & ec.) (1938-
1939); ccxxx, 565-568 (1939); Proceedings, Series B, cxxvi, 842-845 (T.p. & c.);
exxvli, 846-848 (19388-1939).—Zoological Society. Proceedings, eviii, Series A, 3-4
(T.p. & ¢.); Series B, 3-4 (T.p. & c.); Series C, 8-13 (T.p. & c) (1988); cix,
Series A, 1-3; Series B, 1-2 (1939); Transactions, xxiv, 2-4 (1938-1939).

Los ANGELES.—See under Berkeley, University of California.

Lunp.—K. Universitets i Lund. Lunds Universitets Arsskrift (Acta Universitatis
Lundensis), Ny Foljd, Avd. 2, xxxiv, 1938 (1938).

Lyon.—Société Linnéenne de Lyon. Annales, N.S. Ixxiii, 1926-27 (1928); Bulletin
Mensuel, 7®@ Année, Nos. 1-10 (Contents) (1938).

MapiIson.—Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and \Letters. Transactions, xxxi (1938).

MANCHESTER.—Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal of Conchology,
xxi, 3-5 (19388-1939)—Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society. Memoirs and
Proceedings, Ixxxii, 7-9; pp. i-lii (T.p. & c.) (1938); Ixxxiii, 1-5 (1938-1939).—
Manchester Museum. Museum Publication 115 (1938).

MANHATTAN.—American Microscopical Society. Transactions, lvii, 4 (T.p. & ce.) (1938);
Iviii, 1-3 (1938).

MANILA.—Bureau of Science. “Philippine Journal of Science’, Ixv, 1-2; Ixvi, 2-4
(Uti, Cs G)) 8 Ibaiah, ale4b (GM, Cs @hyys Ibaati aloth (Uubey We @)) 9 Ibebic, lech (Ubi Ae ce.)
(1938-1939).

MARSEILLE.—Faculté des Sciences de Marseille. Annales, 2° Série, x, 3 (T.p. & ec.) (1937);
xi, 1 (1938).

MELBOURNE.—‘‘Australasian Journal of Pharmacy”, N.S. xix, 226-228 (Index) (1938);
xx, 229-237 (1939) (From the Publisher).—Council for Scientific and Industrial
Research. Twelfth Annual Report for Year ended 30th June, 19388 (1938); Bulletin,
Nos. 121-129 (1938-1939); Journal, xi, 4 (T.p. & ¢c.) (19388); xii, 1 (with Supple-
ment), 2-3 (1939); Pamphlet, Nos. 85-90 (1938-1939).—Department of Agvicultiu7e
of Victoria. Journal, xxxvi, 11-12 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xxxvii, 1 (with Supplement),
2, 3 (with Supplement), 4 (with Supplement), 5-10 (1939).—Field Naturalists’ Club
of Victoria. ‘‘The Victorian Naturalist’, lv, 7-12 (T.p. & c.); lvi, 1-6 (19388-1939).—
McCoy Society for Field Investigation and Research. Reports, No. 3 (1939).—
Royal Society of Victoria. Proceedings, li (N.S.), 1-2 (T.p. & ec.) (1939).—Unviversity
of Melbourne. Calendar for 1939 (1938).

Mexico.—Instituto de Geologia: Universidad Nacional de Mexico. Memoria de la
Comision geologica del Valle del Mezquital, Hgo (1988).

Monaco.—IJnstitut Oceanographique de Monaco. Bulletin, Nos. 749-760 (T.p. &’c. for
Nos. 739-760) (19388); 761-775 (1939); Rapport pour l’Année 1937, 1938 (no date).

MoNTREAL.—ZJnstitut (formerly Laboratoire) Botanique de VUnviversité de Montréal.
Contributions, Nos. 29-31 (1937-1938); “Un Manuscrit Botanique Prélinnéen.
L’ ‘Histoire des Plantes de Canada’’’, par Frére Marie-Victorin (From Revue
Trimestrielle Canadienne, Septembre, 1936); “Le Président de l’Acfas pour 1937-38:
le Frére Marie-Victorin. Biographie et bibliographie’ par Marcelle Gauvyreau (From
Annales de VAcfas, iv, 114-189) (1938).

Moscow.—Kossino Limnological Station of the Hydrometeorological Service of U.S.S.R.
Proceedings, xxii (1939).—‘‘Microbiology”’’ (a Journal of General, Agricultural and
Industrial Microbiology), vii, 5-10 (1938).

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. xlv

MUNCHEN.—Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen, Mathematisch-
Naturwissenschaftliche Abteilung, Neue Folge, 45 (1939); Sitzungsberichte, 1938,
1-2, (T.p. & c.) (1938); “Georg Simon Ohm” by W. Ferlach (1939); “Richard von
Hertwig’’—Gedachtnisrede, by Karl von Frisch; “Wissenschaft und Volk’’—Festrede,
by J. Zenneck (1938).

NANTES.—Société des Sciences Naturelles de VOuest de la France. Bulletin, 5™e Série,
vii, 1937, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (19388).

NAPLES.—Stazione Zoologica di Napoli. Pubblicazioni, xvii, 1-3 (T.p. & ce.) (1938-1939).

New DsELHI.—Imperial Agricultural Research Institute. Agriculture and Animal Hus-
bandry in India, 1936-37 (1939); Catalogue of Indian Insects. Part 24 (1939);
Scientific Reports for the Year ending 30th June, 1938 (1939); ‘‘The Indian Journal
of Agricultural Science”, viii, pt. 4, 4 Articles; pt. 5, 5 Arts.; pt. 6, 4 Arts.; ix, pt. 1,
@ ANCES fot 75 D> AWEESS jos Bo <b Aue, (ipsa at)))c

New HaAven.—Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences. Transactions, xxxiii, pp.
133-338 (1939).—Yale University: Peabody Museum of Natural History. Bulletin
of the Bingham Oceanographic Collection, vi, 5-6 (1938-1939).

NEw YorkK.—American Geographical Society. ‘Geographical Review”, xxviii, 4 (T.p. & c.)
(1938); xxix, 1-3 (1939).—American Museum of Natural History. 70th Annual
Report for the Year 19388 (1939); Bulletin, T.p. & c. for xxv (1908-1915) ; Ixxiv, 5-7
(1938) ; Ixxvi, 1-2 (1939); “Natural History”, xlii, 3-5 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xliii, 1-5
(T.p. & c.); xliv, 1-2 (1939).—New York Academy of Sciences. Annals, xxxvii, pp.
97-328 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xxxviii (complete) (1939); Transactions, Series ii, i, 1-2
(1938).—New York Botanic Garden. “Brittonia’’, iii, 1 (1938).

NoumMeEa.—Nouvelle-Calédonie et Dépendances: Services des Mines. “L’Industrie minérale
de la Nouvelle-Calédonie en 1938’’ par Ph. le Chartier de Sedouy (1939).

Osto.—Det Norske Videnskaps-Akademi i Oslo. Arbok, 1938; Avhandlinger, I. Mat.-
Naturv. Klasse, 1938 (1938); Hvalradets Skrifter (Scientific Results of Marine
Biological Research), No. 19 (1939); Skrifter, I. Mat.-Naturv. Klasse, 1938 (2 vols.)
(1939).—Université de Oslo. Archiv for Mathematik og Naturvidenskab, xli, 4
(4viio, 62 @)) S sdbbl, ae (LB)

OTTawA.—Department of Agriculture. Circular, Nos. 136, 138, 139 (1938); Farmers’
Bulletin, 63 (1938); Report of the Minister of Agriculture for the year ended
March 31, 1938 (1938); Technical Bulletin, 17, 18 (1938); “Canadian Seed Potatoes
in South American Countries’. A Report. By H. S. Arkell (1938); Dominion
Experimental Station, Kentville, N.S. Results of Experiments 1931-1936 inclusive;
Dominion Experimental Station, Shorden, Manitoba. Results of Experiments 1931-
1937; Experimental Station, Lacombe, Alberta. Progress Report for the Years 1932
to 1936; Experimental Sub-station Regina, Sask. Results of Experiments 1931-1936
inclusive (1938); Division of Botany. Progress Report of the Dominion Botanist
for the Years 1935 to 1937 inclusive (1938); The Fruit, Vegetables and Honey
Act and Regulations (1938).—Department of Mines: Geological Survey of Canada.
Memoirs, 199, 207, 210 (with Maps, etc.), 211, 213-215, 217, 218 (1936-1938) ; Report
of Mines and Geology Branch for the Fiscal Year ended March 31, 1938 (1939) ;
National Museum of Canada: Bulletin, No. 91 (1938).—Royal Society of Canada.
Transactions, Third Series, xxxii, Section v; List of Officers and Members (1938).

Panto Auro.—Stanford University. Stanford University Publications, University Series,
Biological Sciences, vi, 4; viii, 1 (19389) ; Geological Sciences, ii, 1-3 (1927); Natural
History Museum: Microentomology, i, 1-4 (19386); ii, 1-3 (1987); iii, 1-3 (19388);
iv, 1-2 (1939); Stanford Ichthyological Bulletin, i, 1-4 (1988-1939).

Paris.—‘Journal de Conchyliologie’’, Ixxxii, 4 (T.p. & c.) ; Ixxxili, 1-2 (1938-1939) (From
the Publisher).—Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle. WBulletin, 2° Série, x, 4-6
(T.p. & c.) (1938); xi, 1 (1939).—Société Hntomologique de France. Annales, cvii,
3-4 (Tp. & c.) (19388); eviii, 1-2 (1939); Bulletin, xli, 12 (1936); xliii, 9-20
(ip & e) (1938) 3 cxliv, 1-1/2) (1939).

PaviA.—Istituto Botanico della R. Universita di Pavia. Atti, Serie iv, x, 1938 (1938).

xlvi DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

Pri-Pai.—National Institute of Zoology and Botany: Academia Sinica. ‘“‘Sinensia’’, viii,
1-4 (1937).

PePprEl (formerly Shanghai).—Science Society of China. Contributions from the Bio-
logical Laboratory, Botanical Series, x, 3 (T.p. & c.) and Index to Vols. i-x (1938);
Zoological Series, xii, 5-10 (19387-1938); xiii, 1-4 (19388-1939).

PEeRM.—Institut des Recherches Biologiques a@ VUniversité de Perm. Bulletin, xi, 7-8
(1938); Travaux, vili, 1-2 (1988).—WM. Gorky State University of Perm. Scientific
Memoirs, ii, 4 (1936); iii, 1 (1937).

PreRTH.—Department of Agriculture of Western Australia. Journal, Second Series, xv, 4
(T.p. & c.) (1988); xvi, 1-2 (1939).—G@eological Survey of Western Australia.
Annual Progress Report for the Year 19388 (1939); Bulletin, No. 97 (1939).—Royal
Society of Western Australia. Journal, xxiv, 1937-38 (1938).

PHILADELPHIA.—Academy of Natural Sciences. Proceedings, xc, 1938 (1939).—American
Philosophical Society. Memoirs, i, pt. 2; x (1939); Proceedings, Ixxix, 2-4 (T.p..& c.)
(1938); Ixxx, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1939); Ixxxi, 1-2 (1939); Transactions, N.S. xxxi,
1-2 (1939); Serial List of Publications (1938); Year Book, 1938 (1939).—University
of Pennsylvania. Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory for the Year 1937,
xxxv (1938).—Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology. ‘‘The Journal of Experi-
mental Zoology”, Ixxix, 2-3 (T.p. & c.) (1938); Ixxx, 1-3 (T.p. & c.); Ixxxi, 1-3
(T.p. & c.) (1939).—Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Report of the Penrose
Research Laboratory in conjunction with the 67th Annual Report of the Society
GSZS)E

PIETERMARITZBURG.—Natal Museum. Annals, ix, 1-2 (1938-1939).

PLyMouTH.—Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom. Journal, T.p. & ec.
for xxii (1937-1938); xxiii, 1-2 (1938-1939).

Porticit.—R. Laboratorio di Entomologia Agraria di Portici. Bollettino, ii (1938-1939).

PraG.—Museum Nationalis Pragae. Acta (Sbornik Narodniho Musea vy. Praze), i,
1938S—B (Hist. Naturalis) (1938).—Deutsche Naturwissenschaftlich-medizinische
Verein fur Bohmen “Lotos” in Prag. Naturwissenschaftliche Zeitschrift ‘‘Lotos’’,
Ixxxvi (1938).—Museum Nationale de Prague: Section Hntomologique. Bulletin
(Sbornik Entomologickeho Oddeleni Narodniho Musea vy. Praze), xvi (Nos. 151-160)
(1938 ).—Societas Hntomologica Czechosloveniae. Acta xxxv, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938).

PRETORIA.—Department of Agriculture and Forestry of the Union of South Africa:
Division of Plant Industry. ‘‘Bothalia’’, i, 1-4 (Index); ii, 1-2 (Index); iii, 1-2
(1921-1937) ; Memoir No. 19 of the Botanical Survey of South Africa (1938).—
Transvaal Museum. Annals, xix, 2-4 (1938-1939).

RENNES.—Société Géologique et Minéralogique de Bretagne. Compte Rendu des Séances,
Troisi¢éme Année, Nos. 2-4, 1937 (1937, 1939) ; Mémoires, iv (1939).

RicHMOND.—Hawkesbury Agricultural College. H.A.C. Journal, xxxv, 10-12 (Index) ;
xxxvi, 1-9 (19388-1939).

Riea.—Latvijas Biologijas Biedriba (Societas Biologiae Latviae). Raksti (Acta), viii
(1938 ).—Naturforscher Vereins zu Riga. Arbeiten, Neue Folge, xxii (1938); Korres-
pondenzblatt, Ixiii (1939).

,

Rio DE JANEIRO.—Instituto Oswaldo Cruz. Memorias, xxxitii, 1-4 (T.p. & ¢.) (1938);
Monographias, No. 1 (1937).

RIvVERSIDE.—University of California: Graduate School of Tropical Agriculture and Citrus
Experiment Station. Papers, Nos. 346-347, T.p. & ec. for Vol. xiv (Nos. 336-350),
367, 368, 374, 376, 378-380, 386-391 (19388).

St. GEorGE’s West.—Bermuda Biological Station for Research, Incorporated. Contribu-
tions, T.p. & c. for i (Nos. 1-37) (19381-1936); T.p. & c. for ii (Nos. 38-72) (1936-
1937); ili, 77-94 (19388-1939).

St. Louis.—Academy of Science of St. Louis. Transactions, xxix, 4, 6 (1987, 1938).—
Missouri Botanical Garden. Annals, xxv, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xxvi, 1-2 (1939).

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. xlvii

SAN Digco.—San Diego Society of Natural History. Occasional Papers, No. 4 (1938);
Transactions, viii, 33-34 (T.p. & c.); ix, 1-9 (1928).

SAN FRANCISCO.—California Academy of Sciences. Proceedings, Fourth Series, T.p. & c.
for xix (1930-1931); xxii, 3-6 (1937); xxiii, 7-16 (1937-1938).

Sao PauLo.—Departamento de Zoologia, Faculdade de Filosofia, Ciencias e Letras, Univer-
sidade de Sao Paulo. Zoologia, Nos. 1-2 (1937-1938).—Museu Paulista. Revista,
xxii-xxiii (1938).

Saproro.—Hokkaido Imperial University. Journal of the Faculty of Science, Series iv,
iv, 3-4 (T.p. & c.); v, 1 (1939); Series vi, vi, 2-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938-1939).

SEATTLE.—University of Washington Oceanographic Laboratories. Publications in
Oceanography, iii, 2 (1938); Publications in Oceanography, Supplementary Series,
Nos. 70-79, continued as Publications in Oceanography, Contribution, Nos. 80-82
(1938-1939).

SENDAI.—Tohoku Imperial University. Science Reports, Second Series, xix, 2 (1938);
Fourth Series, xiii, 2-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938-1939); xiv, 1-3 (1939).

SHANGHAI.—Department of Geology of the Shanghai Science Institute. Studies from the
Department of Geology of the Shanghai Science Institute, Separate Print, No. 6
(From Journ. Shanghai Sci. Inst., Section ii, Vol. ii, pp. 205-223) (1938). Science
Society of China—see under Pepei.

SHaARON.—Cushman Laboratory for Foraminiferal Research. Contributions, xiv, 3-4
(1938); xv, 1-2 (1939).

Sor1a.—Société Botanique de Bulgarie. Bulletin, viii (1939).

StTocKHOLM.—Kungliga Svenska Vetenskapsakademien. Arkiv for Botanik, xxix, 2
(1939) ; Arkiv for Kemi, Mineralogi och Geologi, xii, 6 (T.p. & ec.) (1938); Arkiv for
Matematik, Astronomi och Fysik, xxvi, 1-4 (1938-1939); Arkiv for Zoologi, xxx, 1-4
(T.p. & c.); xxxi, 1-2 (1938-1939); Arsbok, 1938 (1938); Avhandlingar i
Naturskyddsarenden, Nos. 1-2 (1938-1939); Handlingar, Tredje Serien, xvi, 6-7
(T.p. & ec.) ; xvii, 1-5 (1938-1939); Levnadsteckningar, vi, 2 (T.p. & c.) (1933-1938) ;
Skrifter i Naturskyddsarenden, Nos. 35-36 (1938-1939).—Statens Vaxtskyddsanstalt.
Flygblad, Nos. 38-44 (1938-1939); Meddelande, Nos. 22, 25-28 (1938-1939) ;
Vaxtskyddsnotiser, 1938, 1, 4-6 (T.p. & c.) (1988); 19389, 1-2 (1939); Skrifter,
T.p. & c. for ili, 1937-1938 (1938).

Sypnuy.—Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911-14. Scientific Reports, Series C
(Zoology and Botany), i, 3; ii, 4, 8; iii, 5; ix, 4; x, 7 (1938) (From the Government
Printer, Sydney).—Australian Institute of Agricultural Science. Journal, iv, 4
(T.p. & c.) (1938).—Australian Museum. Annual Report of the Trustees for the
Year ended 30th June, 19388 (1939); Australian Museum Magazine, vi, 11-12
(T.p. & c.) (1938); vii, 1-2 (1939) ; Memoir, vii (1939); Records, xix, 8 (T.p. & c.)
(1938); xx, 4 (1939).—Australian Veterinary Association. ‘Australian Veterinary
Journal’, xiv, 5-6 (Index) (1938); xv, 1-5 (1939).—Department of Agriculture,
N.S.W. “Agricultural Gazette of N.S.W.’’, xlix, 10-12 (T.p. & c.) (1938); 1, 1-10
(1939); Catalogue of the Periodical Literature filed in the Library, Department of
Agriculture, N.S.W., June, 1938 (1938); Contributions from the N.S.W. National
Herbarium, i, 1 (1939); Live Stock Diseases Report, No. 14 (1939); Regional Soils
Series, No. 2 (1939); Science Bulletin, Nos. 59, 62-66 (1938-1939).—Drug Houses
of Australia Lid. ‘‘Australasian Pharmaceutical Notes and News’, N.S. xvii, 11-12
(1938) ; xviii, 1-10 (1939).—EHducation Department. ‘‘Education Gazette”, xxxii, 11-12
(Index) (19388); xxxiii, 1-10 (1939).—Institutes of Surveyors in Australia. “The
Australian Surveyor’, vii, 4 and two Supplements, 5, 6 and Supplement, 7 (1938-
1939).—WMicroscopical Society of N.S.W. Journal, i (N.S.), 1-5 (1938-1939).—
Naturalists’ Society of New South Wales. ‘“‘The Australian Naturalist’, x, 4-5
(1938-1939).—Orchid Societies of N.S.W. and Queensland. “Australian Orchid
Review”, iii, 4 (1938); iv, 1-2 (19389).—Public Library of N.S.W. Annual Report
of the Trustees for the Year ended 30th June, 1938 (1938).—Royal Society of New
South Wales. Journal and Proceedings, Ixxi, 2 (T.p. & c.) (1938); Ilxxii, 1938
(1939) ; Ixxiii, 1-2 (1989).—Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales. Proceed-
ings for the Year 1938-39 (1939); “The Australian Zoologist”’, ix, 2 (1938).—School

xlviii DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, University of Sydney, Commonwealth Health
Department. Service Publication (School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine),
No. 2 (1939).—Sydney University Science Association. Science Journal, xvii, 3
(1938).—“‘The Medical Journal of Australia’, 1938, ii, 18-27 (T.p. & c.) (1938);
1939, i, 1-25 (T.p. & c.); ii, 1-17 (1939) (From the Editor).—University of Sydney.
Calendar, 1938 (1938); Journal of the Cancer Research Committee, viii, 3-4
(T.p. & ¢c.) (1938) (Final Issue).—Wild Life Preservation Society of Australia.
“Australian Wild Life’, i, 5 (1939).

TASHKENT.—Universitas Asiae Mediae (University of Central Asia). Acta, Series va,
15-17; vi, 35-41; viid, 5-6; viiia, 22-26, 29-49, 51-53; vilib, 30-32, 35; x, 3; xiia, 15-16
(1937-1938).

Toxyo.—Imperial Fisheries Institute. Journal, xxxiii, 2 (1939).—National Research
Council of Japan. Japanese Journal of Botany, ix, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938-1939) ;
Japanese Journal of Geology and Geography, xv, 3-4 (T.p. & ce.) (1938); Japanese
Journal of Zoology, viii, 2 (1939); Report, ii, 7, April, 1937-March, 1938 (1938).—
Tokyo Bunrika Daigaku (Tokyo University of Literature and Science): Zoological
Institute. Science Reports, Section B, iii, Nos. 55-63 (T.p. & ec.) (1938) (Exchange
concluded).—Waseda University: Faculty of Science and Engineering: Office of the
Scientific Expedition to Manchoukuo. Report of the First Scientific Expedition to
Manchoukuo, Section V, Div. 1, pt. 1, Div. 2, pt. 4 (1939); Div. 1, pt. 5, 7, 9; 11, 13
(1938 ).—Zoological Society of Japan. Annotationes Zoologicae Japonenses, xvii, 3-4
(T.p. & c.) (1938) ; xvili, 1 (1939).

TorontTo.—Royal Canadian Institute. Proceedings, Series iiiA, iii; Transactions, xxii, 1
(1938).

TRING.—Zoological Museum. Novitates Zoologicae, xli, 1-2 (1938).

TRONDHJEM.—Det Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskab. Forhandlinger, xi, 1938
(1937); Skrifter, 1938 (1939); Muwseet: Arsberetning, 1937 (1938) ; Oldsaksamlingens
Tilvekst, 1937 (1938).

TuNIS.—IJnstitut Pasteur de Tunis. Archives, xxvii, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); xxviii, 1-2
(GIBBS):

UppsaALa.—Royal University of Uppsala. Zoologiska Bidrag fran Uppsala, xvii (1938).

URBANA.—University of Illinois. Illinois Biological Monographs, xvi, 4 (T.p. & c.); xvii, 1
(1938).

UtrecHt.—Botanisch Museum en Herbarium van de Rijksuniversiteit. Mededeelingen,
Nos. 48-51 (1938).

VANCOUVER.—University of British Columbia. Reprints, Biological Sciences, Nos. 1-8
(1937-1939).

VERSAILLES.—Centre National de Recherches agronomiques. ‘“‘Annales des Epiphyties et
de Phytogénétique’’, Nouvelle Série, iv, 2-4 (T.p. & c.) (1938); v, 1 (1939).

VIENNA.—N aturhistorische Museum in Wien. Annalen, xlix (1939).

WarRsAw.—Panstwowe Muzeum Zoologiczne (Polish Museum of Zoology). Acta Orni-
thologica, ii, 13-20 (T.p. & ec.) (1988-1939); iii, 1-3 (1939); Annales, xiii, 13-24
(1938-1939) ; Fragmenta Faunistica, iii, 18-26 (T.p. & c.) (1938); iv, 1-13 (1939).

WaASHINGTON.—American Chemical Society. ‘Industrial and Engineering Chemistry”, xxx,
10-12 (T.p. & ec.) (1938); xxxi, 1-9 (1939).—Carnegie Institution of Washington.
Elihu Root Lectures on the Influence of Science and Research on Current Thought.
Fifth Lecture. Cultural Contacts of Science. By Sir R. Gregory (1938); News
Service Bulletin, School Edition, ii, 1-36 (Index) (1930-1932); iii, 1-31 (Index)
(1933-1935) ; iv, 1-33 (Index) (1936-1938); Publications, Nos. 476, 487, 490-492, 494,
495, 497, 500 (4 vols.), 501, 508, 504 (1938); Supplementary Publications, Nos. 36-40,
42-45 (1938).—National Academy of Sciences. Proceedings, xxiv, 10-12 (T.p. & c.)
(1938); xxv, 1-8 (1939).—Smithsonian Institution. Annual Report of the Board of
Regents for the Year ending June 30, 1937 (1938); Bureau of American Ethnology:
55th Annual Report, 1937-38 (1939); Bulletins, 118-123 (1938-1939).—U.S. Depart-

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. xlix

ment of Agriculture. Agricultural Statistics, 1938 (1938); Leaflet No. 164 (1938);
Year Book of Agriculture, 1938 (1938).—U.S. Geological Survey. Bulletins, 874C,
885, 886C-D (T.p. & c.), 888, 891, 893, 894, 895C-D (T.p. & c.), 896, pts. 1-2, 897C-D
(T.p. & c.), 898B-D, F, 899A, 900A, 902-904, 909A-C, 910A (1938-1939) ; Professional
Papers, 187, 188, 189A-F, H, 190, 191, 193A-C (1938-1939); Water Supply Papers,
774, 796F-G (T.p. & c.), 801-808, 805, 810, 815, 820, 822-827, 829-834, 836B, 837-840,
842 (1938-1939).—U.S. National Museum. Bulletins, 170, 172-174 and T.p. & ec. for
100, Vol. vi (1938-1939); Proceedings, Ixxxy, 3035, 3039, 3040, Ixxxvi, 3041-3064
(1938-1939) ; Report on the Progress and Condition of the Museum for the Year
ended June 30, 1938 (1939).

WELLINGTON.—Department of Scientific and Industrial Research: Geological Survey
Branch. 32nd Annual Report (N.S.), 1937-38 (1938); Geological Bulletin, No. 39
(N.S.) (1939); Geological Memoirs, Memoir No. 4 (1938); Hight separates (1938-
1939).—Dominion Museum. “New Zealand Journal of Science and Technology”, xx,
2A-6A (T.p. & c.); 2B-6B (T.p. & c.); xxi, 1A-2A, 1B (1938-1939).—Royal Society
of New Zealand. Transactions and Proceedings, Ixviii, 2-4 (T.p. & c.); lxix, 1
(1938-1939).

Woops Hoite.—WMarine Biological Laboratory. Biological Bulletin, Ixxv, 2-3 (T.p. & c.)
(1938) ; Ixxvi, 1-3 (T.p. & ec.) ; Ixxvii, 1 (1939).

PrivATE Donors (and Authors, unless otherwise stated).

Bock, Prof. Sitxten, Naturhist. Riksmuseets, Evertebratavdelning, Stockholm 50, Sweden
(donor).—Further Zoological Results of the Swedish Antarctic Expedition, 1901-1903,
iii, 4 (Stockholm, 1938).

Dr Toni, Dr. GiusEPPE, 37 Contrada del Carmine, Brescia, Italia (donor).—“Diagnoses
Algarum Novarum post Sylloges editionem Descriptarum. 1. Myxophyceae.’”’ Centuria
i-v and Bibliographia et Index. By Joseph de Toni (1937-1938); ‘“Osservazioni
intorno alla nomenclatura botanica sistematica’’ (From Archivio Botanvico, xiv, 3-4,
pp. 265-282, Novembre, 1938).

Houmes, Professor J. MAcDONALD, Department of Geography, Sydney University.—‘‘The
Erosion-Pastoral Problem of the Western Division of New South Wales” (University
of Sydney, Publications in Geography, No. 2, 1938).

OsBORN, Professor T. G. B., D.Sc., F.L.8S., University of Oxford, Oxford, England.—Two
Reprints—‘‘Some Comparisons between the Vegetation of Morocco and Australia’’,
and “Dampier’s Australian Plants’, by T. G. B. Osborn and C. A. Gardner (1939).

REYCHLER, LUCIEN, St. Nicolas (Waes), Belgium.—‘A New Experiment concerning the
Germination of Seed after Liberation of the Germ by Operation’’ (1938); “The Scien-
tific Contribution to the Ghent Floral Show of 1938. What this Contribution should
be in the Future” (1938).

TAYLOR, FRANK H., F.R.E.S., F:Z.8. School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine,
Sydney University (donor).—‘“‘A Facsimile of the Lepidopterologische Zutrage, 1820,
of Jacob Hiibner’ by Francis J. Griffin (Reprinted from Journ. Soc. for the
Bibliography of Natural History, i, 6, pp. 161-192) (19388).

VANDERBILT, W. K., 230 Park Avenue, New York, U.S.A. (donor).—Bulletin of the
Vanderbilt Marine Museum, vii (1938).

VoisEy, A. H., M.Sc., New England University College, Armidale, N.S.W.—‘‘House Types
of the Northern Territory, Australia’ (From “The Australian Geographer”, iii, 3)

(1987).

Watkom, A. B., D.Sc., Science House, 159 Gloucester Street, Sydney.—“A Brief Review
of the Relationships of the Carboniferous and Permian Floras of Australia” (From
Compte Rendu du deuxiéme Congrés pour l’Avancement des Etudes de Stratigraphie

Carbonifére, Heerlen, 1935) (1938).

Younc, C. KuANGsSoN, Director of the Press Bureau of the Chinese Delegation, 18, Rue
Charles-Galland, Geneva, Switzerland (donor).—‘‘Japanese Aggression and the League
of Nations. 1938. v, and 1939. vi’ (1938, 1939).

ays

1927
1929
1905
1906
1922
1899

1932
1927
1938

1912

1888
1919
1935
1907

1920
1929
1935
1923
1921
1924
1911
1932
1931
1920

1901
1927

1930
1934

1905

1903
1936
1899
1932
1938

1901
1931
1933
1908

1928

LIST OF MEMBERS, 1939.
ORDINARY MEMBERS.

*Albert, Michel Francois, ‘‘Boomerang’’, Elizabeth Bay, Sydney.

Allan, Miss Catherine Mabel Joyce, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney.

Allen, Edmund, ‘‘Daintree’’, Curlew Street, Toowong, Brisbane, Queensland.

Anderson, Charles, M.A., D.Sc., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney.

Anderson, Robert Henry, B.Sc.Agr., Botanic Gardens, Sydney.

Andrews, Ernest Clayton, B.A., F.R.S.N.Z., No. 4, ‘“Kuring-gai’’, 241 Old South
Head Road, Bondi.

Andrews, John, B,A., Ph.D., Department of Geography, Sydney University.

Armstrong, Jack Walter Trench, “Callubri’, Nyngan, N.S.W.

Ashby, Professor Eric, D.Se. (Lond.), D.I.C., F.L.S., Botany School, Sydney
University.

Aurousseau, Marcel, B.Se., c/o Mr. G. H. Aurousseau, 16 Woodland Street,
Balgowlah.

Baker, Richard Thomas, The Crescent, Cheltenham.

Barnett, Marcus Stanley, 44 Fox Valley Road, Wahroonga.

Beadle, Noel Charles William, M.Sc., 36 Anglo Street, Chatswood.

Benson, Professor William Noel, B.A., D.Sc., F.G.S., University of Otago, Dunedin,
N.Z.

Blakely, William Faris, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.

Boardman, William, B.Sc., Australian Institute of Anatomy, Canberra, A.C.T.

Bourne, Geoffrey, D.Sc., c/o Australia House, Strand, London, England.

Brough, Patrick, M.A., D.Sc., B.Sc.Agr., Botany School, Sydney University.

Brown, Horace William, 871 Hay Street, Perth, W.A.

Brown, Miss Ida Alison, D.Se., ‘““Caversham’’, 166 Brook Street, Coogee.

Browne, William Rowan, D.Sc., Geology Department, The University, Sydney.

Bryce, Ernest John, 47 Nelson Road, Killara.

Burges, Norman Alan, M.Sc., Ph.D., 35 Wetherell Street, Croydon.

Burkitt, Professor Arthur Neville St. George Handcock, M.B., B.Sc., Medical School,
The University, Sydney.

Campbell, John Honeyford, O.B.E., 1.5.0., 336 Chapel Street, Ottawa, Canada.

Campbell, Thomas Graham, Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Box 109,
Canberra City, A.C.T.

Carey, Miss Gladys, M.Sec., 32 Rawson Street, Epping.

*Carey, Samuel Warren, M.Sc., c/o Messrs. Burns, Philp & Co., Ltd., Port Moresby,
Papua.

Carne, Walter Mervyn, c/o Department of Commerce, A.M.P. Buildings, Collins
Street, Melbourne, Victoria.

Carter, Herbert James, B.A., F.R.E.S., “Garrawillah’’, Kintore Street, Wahroonga.

*Chadwick, Clarence Earl, B.Sc., High School, Cessnock, N.S.W. ?

Cheel, Edwin, 40 Queen Street, Ashfield.

Churchward, John Gordon, B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., 1 Hunter Street, Woolwich, Sydney.

Clark, Laurance Ross, M.Sc., Flat 6, “Del Rey’’, 744 New South Head Road, Rose
Bay.

Cleland, Professor John Burton, M.D., Ch.M., The University, Adelaide, S.A.

Colefax, Allen N., B.Sc., Department of Zoology, Sydney University.

Coleman, Mrs. Edith, ‘““‘Walsham’’, Blackburn Road, Blackburn, Victoria.

Cotton, Professor Leo Arthur, M.A., D.Sc., Geology Department, The University,
Sydney.

Craft, Frank Alfred, B.Sc., 5 Main Street West, Lithgow, N.S.W.

* Life member.

1937
1925

1937

1929

1934
1932

19386

1934
1925
1937
1927
1921
1937
1937
1926

1932
1930
1914

1938

1930
1911

1935
1938
1936

1936
1912
1910
1936

1939

1939
1925
1919
1897
1885
1928
1917

1932
1911

1930
1938
1930
1932

1907
1939

LIST OF MEMBERS. li

Cumpston, Miss Dora Margaret, M.Sc., Department of Zoology, Sydney University.

Cunningham, Gordon Herriot, Ph.D., 1 Sadgrove Terrace, Mt. Albert, Auckland,
S.W.2, New Zealand.

Currie, George Alexander, D.Sc., B.Se.Agr., University of Western Australia, Perth,
Western Australia.

Dakin, Professor William John, D.Sc., Department of Zoology, The University,
Sydney.

Davidson, Harold James, 14 Princess Avenue, North Strathfield.

*Davis, Harrold Fosbery Consett, M.Sc., New England University College, Armidale,
N.S.W.

Day, Maxwell Frank, B.Sc., Biological Laboratories, Harvard University,
Cambridge, Mass., U.S.A.

Day, William Eric, 23 Galling Avenue, Strathfield.

de Beuzeville, Wilfred Alexander Watt, J.P., ‘‘Melamere,’’ Welham Street, Beecroft.

Deuquet, Camille, B.Com., 43 Church Street, Wollongong, N.S.W.

*Dixson, William, ‘‘Merridong’”’, Gordon Road, Killara.

Dodd, Alan Parkhurst, Prickly Pear Laboratory, Sherwood, Brisbane, Q.

du Boulay, William Lawrance, 79 New South Head Road, Edgecliff.

Dulhunty, John Allan, B.Sc., Department of Geology, Sydney University.

Dumigan, Edward Jarrett, State School, Toowoomba East, Queensland.

*Iillis, Ralph, 2420 Ridge Road, Berkeley, California, U.S.A.
Ienglish, Miss Kathleen Mary Isabel, B.Sc., March Street, Yass, N.S.W.
Enright, Walter John, B.A., West Maitland, N.S.W.

Ford, Edward, M.B., B.S., School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney
University.

Iraser, Miss Lilian Ross, D.Sc., ‘‘Hopetoun’”, Bellamy Street, Pennant Hills.

Froggatt, John Lewis, B.Sc., Department of Agriculture, Rabaul, New Guinea.

Garretty, Michael Duhan, M.Sc., Chloride Street, Broken Hill, N.S.W.

Gibbs, William James, B.Sc., No. 4 Flat, San Jose, Warner’s Avenue, North Bondi.

Gilmour, Darcy, M.Sc., Department of Physiology, Strong Memorial Hospital,
Rochester, New York, U.S.A.

Goerling, August, Marloo Station, Wurarga, Western Australia.

Goldfinch, Gilbert Macarthur, University Club, 70 Phillip Street, Sydney.

Griffiths, Edward, B.Sc., Department of Agriculture, Farrer Place, Sydney.

Griffiths, Mervyn Edward, B.Se., National Institute for Medical Research,
Hampstead, London, N.W.3, England.

Gunther, Carl Ernest Mitchelmore, M.B., B.S., D.T.M., Bulolo, New Guinea.

Hackney, Miss Frances Marie Veda, B.Sc., 40 Smith Street, Summer Hill.

Hale, Herbert Matthew, South Australian Museum, Adelaide, S.A.

Hall, Leslie Lionel, 24 Wellesley Road, Pymble.

Halligan, Gerald Harnett, F.G.S., ‘‘The Straths’’, Pacific Highway, Killara.

Hamilton, Alexander Greenlaw, “Tanandra’’, Hercules Street, Chatswood.

Hamilton, Edgar Alexander, 16 Hercules Street, Chatswood.

Hardy, George Huddleston Hurlstone, ‘Waldheim’, Waldheim Street, Annerley,
Brisbane, 8.3, Queensland.

Harris, Miss Thistle Yolette, B.Sc., 129 Hopetoun Avenue, Vaucluse, Sydney.

Haviland, The Venerable Archdeacon F. B., Moore Street, Austinmer, South Coast,
N.S. W.

Heydon, George Aloysius Makinson, M.B., Ch.M., School of Public Health and
Tropical Medicine, The University, Sydney.

Hill, Miss Dorothy, M.Sc. (Qld.), Ph.D. (Cantab.), University of Queensland,
Brisbane, Queensland.

Holmes, Professor James Macdonald, Ph.D.. B.Sc., F.R.G.S.. F.R.S.G.S., Depart-
ment of Geography, Sydney University.

Hossfeld, Paul Samuel, M.Sc., Alice Springs, North Australia.

Hull, Arthur Francis Basset, M.B.H., Box 704, G.P.O., Sydney.

Hutley, Miss Marion Winifred, B.Se., 112 Ashley Street, Chatswood.

* Life member.

lii

1938

1917
1938

1930
1939
1907

1930
1933
1930

1923
1937
1938

1938

193%
1938

1932
1936
1923

1922
1932

L931

1939
1932
1905
1937

1933
1932

1917
192i
1919
1934
1937
1932
1937
1938

1936
1930

1926

1920

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Ingram, Cyril Keith, 3 ‘‘Penleigh Hall’, 155 Parramatta Road, Haberfield.

Jacobs, Ernest Godfried, ‘Cambria’, 106 Bland Street, Ashfield.

Jacobs, Maxwell Ralph, Dr.Ing., M.Sc., Dip.For., Commonwealth Forestry Bureau,
Canberra, A.C.T.

Jensen, Hans Laurits, Department of Bacteriology, Sydney University.

Johnston, Miss Joan, B.Se., 31 Dunmore Street, Bexley.

Johnston, Professor Thomas Harvey, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., The University, Adelaide,
eA

Joplin, Miss Germaine Anne, B.Sc., Ph.D., Geology Department, Sydney University.

Judge, Leslie Arthur, 36 Romsey Street, Hornsby.

Julius, Sir George Alfred, B.Sec., B.E., M.I.Mech.E., M.I.E.Aust., 67 Castlereagh
Street, Sydney.

Kendall, Mrs. W. M., M.Se. (née Williams), 71 Victoria Road, Drummoyne, Sydney.

Kesteven, Geoffrey Leighton, B.Sc., ‘Allerton’, 89 Redmyre Road, Strathfield.

Kesteven, Hereward Leighton, D.Se., M.D., ‘Allerton’, 89 Redmyre Road,
Strathfield.

Kinghorn, James Roy, C.M.Z.S., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney.

Langford-Smith, Trevor, 45 Wyvern Avenue, Chatswood.

Lawrence, Miss Elizabeth Frances, M.A., M.Se., Economic Branch, Bank of New
South Wales, Head Office, George Street, Sydney.

Lawson, Albert Augustus, 9 Wilmot Street, Sydney.

Lee, David Joseph, B.Se., Cotton Experiment Station, Biloela, Queensland.

Lindergren, Gustaf Mauritz, Swedish Chamber of Commerce, 38 Carrington Street,
Sydney.

Mackerras, Ian Murray, M.B., Ch.M., B.Se., Box 109, Canberra, A.C.T.

Magee, Charles Joseph, D.Sc.Agr. (Syd.), M.Se. (Wis.), Department of Agriculture,
Iarrer Place, Sydney.

*Mair, Herbert Knowles Charles, B.Sec., Botanic Gardens, Darwin, Northern
Territory.

Marshall, Alan John, St. Paul’s College, Newtown.

Martin, Donald, B.Se. c/o University of Tasmania, Hobart, Tasmania.

Mawson, Sir Douglas, D.Sc., B.E., F.R.S., The University, Adelaide, S.A.

May, Miss Valerie Margaret Beresford, B.Sc., Department of Botany, Sydney
University.

Maze, Wilson Harold, M.Sc., Geography Department, Sydney University.

McCulloch, Robert Nicholson, B.Sc.Agr. (Syd.), B.Se. (Oxon.), Department of
Agriculture, Farrer Place, Sydney.

McKeown, Keith Collingwood, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney.

Mclkie, Rev. Ernest Norman, B.A., The Manse, Guyra, N.S.W.

McLuckie, John, M.A., D.Sce., Botany Department, The University, Sydney.

Melvaine, Miss Alma Theodora, B.Se., Council for Scientific and Industrial Research,
Division of Plant Industry, Box 109, Canberra City, A.C.T.

Mercer, Miss Evelyn Anne, National Herbarium, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.

Messmer, Pearl Ray (Mrs. C. A.), Treatts Road, Lindfield.

Middleton, Bertram Lindsay, B.A., M.D., Bridge House, Murrurundi, N.S.W-’

Miller, David, Ph.D., M.Sc., F.R.S.N.Z., F.R.E.S., Cawthron Institute, Nelson, New
Zealand.

Morisset, Lieut.-Colonel Casimir Vaux, “Dimby Plains”, Quirindi, N.S.W.

Munch-Petersen, Hrik, Ph.B., M.Sc. (Haunensis), M.I.F., Commonwealth Council
for Scientific and Industrial Research, Division of Animal Health and Nutrition,
Animal Health Research Laboratory, cr. Flemington Road and Park Street,
Parkville, Melbourne, N.2, Victoria.

Mungomery, Reginald William, c/o Meringa Sugar Experiment Station, Box 146,
Gordonvale, North Queensland.

Musgrave, Anthony, F.R.E.S., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney.

* Life member.

1939
1925
1922
1935
1920

1912

1920

1927
1910

1927

1921

1922

1936
1920
1937

1934

1935
1918

1938

1929
19386
1932
1925

1927

1932
O'S
1928
1930

1937
1909

1928
1916
1926

1898
1935

1905
1911
1904

LIST OF MEMBERS. liii

Naylor, George Francis King, M.A., M.Sec., Dip.Ed., Australian Institute of Indus-
trial Psychology, 12 O’Connell Street, Sydney.

Newman, Ivor Vickery, M.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.M.S., F.L.S., Department of Biology,
Victoria University College, Wellington, New Zealand.

Nicholson, Alexander John, D.Sc., F.R.E.S., Council for Scientific and Industrial
Research, Box 109, Canberra City, A.C.T.

Noble, Norman Scott, M.S., D.Sc.Agr., D.I.C. (Lond.), M.Sc. (Calif.), Department
of Agriculture, Farrer Place, Sydney.

Noble, Robert Jackson, B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., Department of Agriculture, Farrer Place,
Sydney.

North, David Sutherland, c/o Colonial Sugar Refining Co., Ltd., Broadwater Mill,
Richmond River, N.S.W.

O’Dwyer, Miss Margaret Helena, B.Sc., Ph.D., D.I.C. (Lond.), Forest Products

’ Research Laboratory, Princes Risborough, Aylesbury, Bucks., England.

Oke, Charles George, 34 Bourke Street, Melbourne, C.1, Victoria.

Oliver, Walter Reginald Brook, F.L.8., F.Z.S., D.Sc., F.R.S.N.Z., 26 Ventnor Street,
Seatoun, Wellington, E.5, New Zealand.

Osborn, Professor Theodore George Bentley, D.Sc., I.L.8., Professor of Botany,
University of Oxford, Oxford, England.

Osborne, George Davenport, D.Sc., Geology Department, The University, Sydney.

Perkins, frederick Athol, B.Sc.Agr., Biology Department, University of Queensland,
Brisbane, Q.

Pidgeon, Miss Ilma Mary, M.Sc., Botany School, Sydney University.

Pincombe, Torrington Hawke, B.A., Box 1652 JJ, G.P.O., Sydney.

Plomley, Kenneth Francis, Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Division
of Plant Industry, Box 109, Canberra, A.C.T.

Plomley, Norman James Brian, B.Sc., c/o Bank of New South Wales, Brisbane
Street, Launceston, Tasmania.

Pope, Miss Elizabeth Carington, B.Sc., 36 Kameruka Road, Northbridge.

Priestley, Professor Henry, M.D., Ch.M., B.Sc., Medical School, ‘The University,
Sydney. '

Pryor, Lindsay Dixon, B.Se., Dip.For., c/o Department of the Interior, Canberra,
A.C.1T. ;

Raggatt, Harold George, D.Sc., Geological Survey, Department of Mines, Sydney.

Roberts, Noel Lee, 43 Hannah Street, Beecroft, Sydney.

Robertson, Rutherford Ness, Ph.D., B.Sc., 15 The Boulevard, Lewisham.

Roughley, Theodore Cleveland, B.Sc., F.R.Z.S., Chief Secretary’s Department,
Box 1A, G.P.O., Sydney.

Rupp, Rev. Herman Montagu Rucker, B.A., 24 Kameruka Road, Northbridge.

Salter, Keith Eric Wellesley, B.Sc., ““Hawthorn’’, 48 Abbotsford Road, Homebush.

*Scammell, George Vance, B.Se., 7 David Street, Clifton Gardens.

Selby, Miss Doris Adeline, M.Sc., M.B., c/o 254A George Street, Sydney.

Sherrard, Mrs. Kathleen Margaret, M.Sc., 43 Robertson Road, Centennial Park,
Sydney. j

Simpson, Arthur Cecil, 72 Hornsey Lane, Highgate, Middlesex, England.

Smith, George Percy Darnell, D.Sc., F.1.C., F.C.S., c/o Lyon’s Boat Shed, The
Spit, Mosman, Sydney.

Smith, Thomas Hodge, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney.

Smith, Miss Vera Irwin, B.Sc., F.L.S., “Loana’’, Mt. Morris Street, Woolwich.

Stanley, George Arthur Vickers, B.Sc., c/o Messrs. Robison, Maxwell and Allen,
19 Bligh Street, Sydney.

Stead, David G., ‘‘Boongarre’’, Pacific Street, Watson’s Bay.

Still, Jack Leslie, B.Sc., Bio-chemical Laboratory, University of Cambridge,
Cambridge, England.

Stokes, Edward Sutherland, M.B., Ch.M., 15 Highfield Road, Lindfield.

*Sulman, Miss Florence, ‘‘Burrangong”’, McMahon’s Point.

Sussmilch, Carl Adolph, F.G.S., 11 Appian Way, Burwood.

* Life Member.

liv

1930
1938
1921

1902
1904

1917
1930

1934

1909
1930
1911
1936
1897

1928
1927

1911
1926
1934
1938
1934
1932

1925
1936

1923

1923

1888
1902

1934

LIST OF MEMBERS.

Taylor, Frank Henry, F.R.E.S., F.Z.S., School of Public Health and Tropical
Medicine, Sydney University.

Tonnoir, André Léon, Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Box 109,
Canberra City, A.C.T.

*Troughton, Ellis Le Geyt, C.M.Z.S., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney.
Turner, A. Jefferis, M.D., F.R.E.S., Dauphin Terrace, Brisbane, Queensland.
Turner, Rowland E., F.Z.S., F.R.E.S., c/o Standard Bank of South Africa, Adderley

Street, Cape Town, South Africa.

Veitch, Robert, B.Sc., F.R.E.S., Department of Agriculture, William Street,
Brisbane, Queensland.

Vickery, Miss Joyce Winifred, M.Se., National Herbarium, Botanic Gardens,
Sydney.

Voisey, Alan Heywood, M.Sc:, New England University College, Armidale, N.S.W.

Walkom, Arthur Bache, D.Sc., Science House, Gloucester and Essex Streets, Sydney.

Ward, Melbourne, Pasadena Flats, Cross Street, Double Bay, Sydney.

Wardlaw, Henry Sloane Halcro, D.Se., Physiology Department, The University,
Sydney.

Waterhouse, Douglas Frew, M.Sc., Council for Scientific and Industrial Research,
Box 109, Canberra, A.C.T.

*Waterhouse, Gustavus Athol, D.Sc., B.E., IF.R.E.S., 39 Stanhope Road, Killara,
Sydney.

Waterhouse, Lionel Lawry, B.E., ‘Rarotonga’, 42 Archer Street, Chatswood.

Waterhouse, Walter Lawry, D.Sc.Agr., M.C., D.I.C. (Lond.), Faculty of Agriculture,
Sydney University.

Watt, Professor Robert Dickie, M.A., B.Sc., University of Sydney.

*Whitley, Gilbert Percy, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney.

Wilson, Miss Janet Marion, B.A., 8 Lloyd Avenue, Hunter’s Hill.

Wilson, Ralph Dudingston, M.Sc., M.Se.Agr., Biological Branch, Department of
Agriculture, Farrer Place, Sydney.

Womersley, Herbert, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum, Adelaide, South
Australia.

Woodhill, Anthony Reeve, B.Sc.Agr., Department of Zoology, Sydney University.

Wright, Fred, 35 Bligh Street, Sydney.

Zeck, Iimil Herman, 268 Blaxland Road, Ryde.

HoNorRARY MEMBERS.

Hill, Professor J. P., Institute of Anatomy, University of London, University
College, Gower Street, London, W.C.1, England.

Wilson, Professor J. T., LL.D., M.B., Ch.M., F.R.S., Department of Anatomy, the
New Museums, Cambridge, England.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.

Bale, W. M., I’.R.M.S., 63 Walpole Street, Kew, Melbourne, Victoria.
Broom, Robert, M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., Transvaal Museum, Pretoria, Transvaal, South
Africa.

ASSOCIATE.
Waterhouse, John Talbot, 39 Stanhope Road, Killara.

* Life Member.

— ee

lv

INDEX.

(1939.)

(a) GENERAL INDEX.

Address, Presidential, i.

Adrama, the Genus, with Descriptions of
Three New Species (Diptera, Trypetidae),
3el.

Algae, of N.S.W., Marine,
Part 2, 191.

Allman, S. L., elected a member, xxxv.

Andrews, HE. C., elected a Vice-President,
SOK:

Ashby, Prof. E., elected a member of Council,
xxvii—see Exhibits.

Association between the Larva described as
Trombicula hirsti var. buloloensis Gunther
1939, and Trombicula minor Berlese 1904.
(Acarina: Trombidiidae.), 466.

Australian, Coleoptera, Notes and New
Species. No. xi. (Mostly Elateridae),
297—Diptera, Miscellaneous Notes on, v.
On Eye-coloration, and other Notes, 34;
vi. Dolichopodinae, 345—-Lepidoptera, Re-
vision of, Oecophoridae, 54—Soils, Contri-
butions to the Microbiology of, v, 601.

“Australian Journal of Science”, publication
commenced, ii.

a Key to the,

Balance Sheets for Year ending 28th Feb-
ruary, 1939, xxvili-xxx.
Barrington Tops District, the Ecology of the

Upper Williams River and, iii. The
Eucalypt Forests, and General Discus-
sion, 1.

Buller, N.S.W., Geology of the County of,
385.

Burmitembia Cockerell, 369.

Carter, H. J., Australian Coleoptera. Notes
and New Species. INOS ExI- (Mostly

* Blateridae), 297—-Representative of the
Society at Jubilee Meeting at Canberra of
A.N.Z.A.A.S., ii—Retirement from Council
and appreciation of services, ii.

Ceratopogonidae (Diptera), A Note on the
Re-examination of Australian Species of,
555.

Chalcid (Genus Hurytoma), a New Species
of, associated with Tepperella trilineata
Cam., a Wasp causing Galling of the
Flower Buds of Acacia decurrens, 223.

Cheel, E., see Exhibits.

Clothoda Enderlein, 373.

Coleoptera, Australian, Notes and New
Species. No. xi (Mostly Hlateridae), 297.

Congo, a New Genus (of Embioptera) from
the, 559.

Contributions to the Microbiology of Aus-
tralian Soils. v. Abundance of Micro-
organisms and Production of Mineral
Nitrogen in relation to Temperature, 601.

Craft, F. A., Elementary Hydrography of
South-eastern Australia, 496.

Cumpston, D. Margaret, appointed Linnean
Macleay Fellow in Zoology, 1939-40, v—
Observations on the Bionomics and Mor-
phology of Seven Species of the Tribe
Paropsini (Chrysomelidae), 353—reap-
pointed, 1940-41, xxxviii.

Davis, Consett, Linnean Macleay Fellow in
Zoology, Summary of year’s, work, iii—
Reappointment and resignation, v—Con-
gratulations to, vy—Taxonomic Notes on the

Order Embioptera. i, 181—ii, 217— iii,
369—iv, 3873—v, 381—vi-x, 474—xi-xiv,
559.

Description of a New Genus and Two New
Species from Papua. Fam. Pyrgotidae
(Diptera), 51.

Dictyoploca Krauss, 482.

Dihybocercus Enderlein, and a New African
Genus related to it, 485.

Diptera, Australian, Miscellaneous Notes on,
v, 34—vi, 345.

Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. vii.
Family Otitidae (Ortalidae), 97—viii.
Dolichopodidae, 155—ix. Family Phytal-
miidae, 169—x. Family Ceratopogonidae,
367—xi. Family Trypetidae, 409.

Dodd, A. P., Hymenopterous Parasites of
Embioptera, 338. ,

Donaconethis Enderlein, 381.

Donations and Exchanges,
XXXViii.

Dulhunty, J. A., appointed Linnean Macleay
Fellow in Geology, 1940-41, xxxviii—see
Exhibits.

Dwyer, Rt. Rev. J. W., reference to death,
XXXVii.

XxXxi, XXxiii-

Ecology of the Upper Williams River and

Barrington Tops _ Districts. iii. The
Eucalypt Forests and General Discus-
sion, 1.

Ectocarpus confervoides (Roth) Le Jol., 537.

Blections, xxvii, XxxXi, xXxxili-xxxv.

Elementary Hydrography of South-eastern
Australia, 496. :

Embia Uatreille, Three New Asiatic Genera
related to, 474.

lvi

Embia ruficollis de Saussure, the Identity of,
and of Oligotoma venosa Banks, 572.

Embioptera, Hymenopterous Parasites of,
338.

Embioptera, Taxonomic Notes on the Order,
i, 181—ii, 217—iii, 369—iv, 373—v, 381—
vi-x, 474—xi-xiv, 559.

Enveja Navas, 490.

Exchange relations, i.

Exhibits:

Ashby, Professor E., Lantern slides and a
specimen of wood illustrating the activi-
ties of beavers in the construction of
dams, using Populus tremuloides, xxxvii.

Cheel, E., Fresh flowering specimens of
Dahlia from an evergreen perennial plant
raised by Mr. W. Sharland of Malvern,
Victoria, xxxii—Specimens and drawings
of the following grasses: (1) Cynodon
dactylon var. pulchellus, (2) Brachiaria
notochtona, (3) Brachiaria piligera var.
intercedens and (4) Themeda arguens,
xXxxiv—Fresh flowering specimens of
Calythrix from cultivated plants raised
from seed obtained from Denman?
xxxv—Samples of material Known in the
trade as “Rice-Paper’’, which is used
to make artificial flowers; a series of
cultivated specimens of nine species and
varieties of Callistemon; notes on recent
classification of certain species of Aus-
tralian grasses, xxxvi—F lowering speci-
mens taken from cultivated plants of
Leptospermum and Callistemon, xxxvii.

Dulhunty, J. A., Specimens and photo-
graphs of Macrozamia Macdonnelli from
Macdonnell Range, Central Australia,
XXXViil.

Holmes, Professor J. Macdonald, Several
plants collected in the Lismore district,
xxxiili—Coloured slides of the Kyogle
and Broken Hill districts, xxxv—Set of
about 160 photographs taken during the
excursion to the far west of New South
Wales in August, 1939, xxviii.

Kesteven, H. L., Vertical projector
designed for examination of large
sections and for use in place of a
camera lucida, xxviii.

Kinghorn, J. R., Specimen of Bufo marinus
Linn., the Giant Toad, introduced into
Queensland cane fields from Hawaii in
1934, to control the cane borer, xxxvii.

Vickery, Joyce W., Specimen of Trian-
thema portulacastrum L., from Narrabri,
xxxii—Specimens recently collected in
Broken Hill district, and Dufay colour
photographs of some aspects of the
ground flora in the Wilcannia, Broken
Hill and Silverton districts, xxxvi.

Fisheries of New South Wales, a Review of
the Scientific Investigation of the, vi.

INDEX.

and Joyce W. Vickery,
Ecology of the Upper Williams River
and Barrington Tops Districts. iii. The
Bucalypt Forests, and General Discus-
sion, 1.

Fuller, Mary E., obituary notice, i.

Fraser, Lilian,

General Geology of the District east of Yass,
N.S.W., 577.

Genus Adrama, with Descriptions of Three
New Species (Diptera, Trypetidae), 331.
Geology, of the County of Buller, N.S.W.,
385—of the Lower Manning District of

N.S.W., 394.

Gunther, C. E. M., elected a member, xxxiv—
Observations on the Life-history of
Neoschéngastia kallipygos Gunther 1939
(Acarina: Trombidiidae), 471—The Asso-
ciation between the Larva described as
Trombicula hirsti var. buloloensis Gunther
1939, and Trombicula minor Berlese 1904
(Acarina: Trombidiidae), 466—Trombidiid
Larvae in New Guinea (Acarina: Trom-
bidiidae), 73.

Gurney, W. B., reference to death, xxxvi.

Hackney, Frances M. V., elected a member,
XXXi.

Haploembia Verhoeff, 561.

Hardy, G. H., Miscellaneous Notes on Aus-
tralian Diptera. v. On EHye-Coloration
and other Notes, 34—vi. Dolichopodinae,
345.

Holmes, Prof. J. Macdonald, see Exhibits.

Hutley, Marion W., elected a member, xxxiii.

Hydrography, Elementary, of South-eastern
Australia, 496.

Hymenopterous Parasites of Embioptera,
338.

Hynes, Sarah, obituary notice, i.

International
to, xxxXiv.

Congresses, attention drawn

Jensen, H. L., Macleay Bacteriologist, Sum-
mary of year’s work, iii—Contributions to
the Microbiology of Australian Soils. v.
Abundance of Microorganisms and Produc-
tion of Mineral Nitrogen in relation to
Temperature, 601.

Johnston, Joan, elected a member, XXxXiv.

Johnston, T. H., and Patricia M. Mawson,
Strongylate Nematodes from Marsupials in
New South Wales, 513.

Kesteven, H. L., see Exhibits.

Key to the Marine Algae of N.S.W. Part 2.
Melanophyceae (Phaeophyceae), 191.

Kinghorn, J. R., see Exhibits.

Langford-Smith, T., elected a member, xxxv.
Lepidoptera, a New Family of, 335.

INDEX.

Lepidoptera, Australian, Revision of, Oeco-
phoridae. viii, 54.

Leptembia Krauss, 493.

Leptops (Coleoptera: Curculionidae),
on the Synonymy of, 408.

Linnean Macleay Fellowships, 1939-40, reap-
pointments and appointments, v—1940-41,
applications invited, xxxv, xxxvii—reap-
pointments and appointment, xxxviii.

Lorne Triassic Basin and Associated Rocks,
255.

Lower Manning District of N.S.W., Geology
of the, 394.

Note

Macfie, J. W. S., A Note on the Re-
examination of Australian Species of
Ceratopogonidae (Diptera), 555—Diptera

of the ‘Territory of New Guinea. K
Family Ceratopogonidae, 367.

Magee, C. J., congratulations to, xxxiii—
thanks for congratulations from, xxxiii.
Malloch, J. R., Description of a New Genus
and Two New Species from Papua. Fam.
Pyrgotidae (Diptera), 51—Diptera of the
Territory of New Guinea. vii. Family
Otitidae (Ortalidae), 97—ix. Family Phy-
talmiidae, 169—xi. Family Trypetidae,
409—The Genus Adrama, with Descrip-
tions of Three New Species (Diptera,

Trypetidae), 331.
Marshall, A. J., elected a member, xxxv.

Mawson, Patricia M., see Johnston, T. H.,
and Patricia M. Mawson.

May, Valerie, appointed Linnean Macleay
Fellow in Botany, 1939-40, v—Ectocarpus
confervoides (Roth) Le Jol., 537—Key to
the Marine Algae of N.S.W., Part 2.
Melanophyceae (Phaeophyceae), 191—re-
appointed 1940-41, xxxviii.

McKeown, K. C., Note on the Synonymy of
Leptops (Coleoptera: Curculionidae), 408.

Megastigmus, a New Species of, parasitic on
Tepperella trilineata Cam., a Wasp caus-
ing Galling of the Flower Buds of Acacia
decurrens, 266.

Meyrick, E., obituary notice, i.

Miscellaneous Notes on Australian Diptera.
v. On Eye-coloration and other Notes, 34—
vi. Dolichopodinae, 345.

Mount George and Wingham, N.S.W., Upper
Palaeozoic Rocks between, 242.

Myall Lakes, A Reconnaissance Survey of
the Vegetation of the, 279.

Naylor, G. F. K., elected a member, xxxi.
Nematodes, Strongylate, from Marsupials in
IN-SIW., 513.

Neoschongastia kallipygos Gunther 1939,
Observations on the Life-history of, 471.
Neotropical Genus of Embioptera, A New,

ailie
New Family of Lepidoptera, 335.

lvii

New Guinea, Diptera of the Territory of, vii.
Family Otitidae (Ortalidae), 97—viii.
Dolichopodidae, 155—ix. Family Phytal-
miidae, 169—x. Family Ceratopogonidae,
367—xi. Family Trypetidae, 409—Trom-
bidiid Larvae in, 73.

New Species of, Chalcid (Genus Eurytoma)
associated with Tepperella trilineata Cam.,
a Wasp causing Galling of the Flower Buds
of Acacia decurrens, 223—Megastigmus
parasitic on Tepperella trilineata Cam., a
Wasp causing Galling of the Flower Buds
of Acacia decurrens, 266.

Newman, L. J. W., obituary notice, ii.

New South Wales, Key to the Marine Algae
@in Teen 745 all

Noble, N. S., A New Species of Chalcid
(Genus Hurytoma) associated with Tep-
perella trilineata Cam., a Wasp causing
Galling of the Flower Buds of Acacia
decurrens, 223—-A New Species of Mega-
stigmus parasitic on Tepperella trilineata
Cam., a Wasp causing Galling of the
Flower Buds of Acacia decurrens, 266. -

Note on the Re-examination of Australian
Species of Ceratopogonidae (Diptera), 555.

Note on the Synonymy of Leptops ¢€Coleop-
tera: Curculionidae), 408.

Observations on the Bionomics and Mor-
phology of Seven Species of the Tribe
Paropsini (Chrysomelidae), 353.

Observations on the Life-history of
Neoschéngastia kallipygos Gunther 1939
(Acarina: Trombidiidae), 471.

Oligotoma Westwood, 181.

Oligotoma venosa Banks, the Identity of
Embia ruficollis de Saussure and of, 572.
Osborn, Prof. T. G. B., Representative of
Society at Celebrations of 150th Anniver-
sary of Linnean Society of London, ii.
Osborn, T. G. B., and R. N. Robertson, A
Reconnaissance Survey of the Vegetation

of the Myall Lakes, 279.

Papua, Description of a New Genus and Two
New Species from, Family Pyrgotidae
(Diptera), 51.

Parent, O., Diptera of the Territory of New
Guinea. viii. Dolichopodidae, 155.

Paropsini (Chrysomelidae), Observations on
the Bionomics and Morphology of Seven
Species of the Tribe, 353.

Phillips, M. A., obituary notice, ii.

Pidgeon, Ilma M., reappointed Linnean
Macleay Fellow in Botany, 1939-40, v—
Summary of year’s work, iv—reappointed,
1940-41, xxxviii.

Pope, Elizabeth C.,
Macleay Fellow in Zoology,
Summary of year’s work, iii.

Presidential Address, i.

reappointed Linnean
1939-40, v—

lvili INDEX.

Proclamation protecting certain wild flowers
extended for one year from ist July, 1939,
XXXiv.

Raggatt, H. G., congratulations to, xxxiii—
thanks for congratulations from, xxxili.
Reconnaissance Survey of the Vegetation of

the Myall Lakes, 279.

Review of the Scientific Investigation of the
Fisheries of N.S.W., vi.

Revision of Australian Lepidoptera. Oeco-
phoridae, viii, 54.

Robertson, R. N., see Osborn, T. G. B., and
R. N. Robertson.

Roughley, T. C., elected a Vice-President,
xxxi—Representative of Society at Jubilee
Meeting at Canberra of A.N.Z.A.A.S., ii—
A Review of the Scientific Investigation of
the Fisheries of N.S.W., vi.

Royal Zoological Society of Victoria, prize
for essay on any scientific aspect of the
fauna of Australia offered by, xxxiii.

Sherrard, Kathleen, General Geology of the
District east of Yass, N.S.W., 577.

Soils, Australian, Contributions to the Micro-
biology of, v, 601.

South-eastern Australia, Elementary Hydro-
graphy of, 496.

Strongylate Nematodes from Marsupials in
N.S.W., 513.

Sussmilch, C. A., elected a Vice-President,
2ST

Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera.
i, 181—ii, 217— iii, 369—iv, 373—v, 381—
vi-x, 474—xi-xiv, 559.

Tepperella trilineata Cam., a Wasp causing
Galling of the Flower Buds of Acacia
decurrens, A New Species of Chalcid
(Genus Hurytoma) associated with, 223—a
Wasp causing Galling of the Flower Buds
of Acacia decurrens. A New Species of
Megastigmus parasitic on, 266.

Trombicula hirsti var. buloloensis Gunther
1939, The Association between the Larva
described as, and JTJvrombicula minor
Berlese 1904 (Acarina: Trombidiidae), 466.

Trombidiid Larvae in New Guinea (Acarina:
Trombidiidae), 73.

Troughton, E. Le G., elected a member of
Council, xxvii.

Turner, A. J.. A New Family of Lepidoptera,
335—Revision of Australian Lepidoptera.
Oecophoridae. viii, 54.

Turner, Fred, reference to death, xxxviii.

i

Upper Palaeozoic Rocks between Mount
George and Wingham, N.S.W., 242.

Upper Williams River and Barrington Tops
Districts, The Ecology of the, iii. The
Eucalypt Forests and General Discussion, 1.

Vickery, Joyce W., see Exhibits—see also
Fraser, Lilian, and Joyce W. Vickery.

Voisey, A. H., Linnean Macleay Fellow in
Geology, Summary of year’s work, iv—
reappointment and resignation, v—con-
gratulations to, v—Geology of the County
of Buller, N.S.W., 385—Geology of the
Lower Manning District of N.S.W., 394—
Lorne Triassic Basin and Associated
Rocks, 255—Upper Palaeozoic Rocks
between Mount George and Wingham,
N.S.W., 242.

Walker, J. J., obituary notice, ii.

Waterhouse, G. A., elected Hon. Treasurer,
EXONS KI s

Waterhouse, W. L., elected a Vice-President,
BXSXSKIG

West African Genus (of Embioptera), a
New, 567.

Woodhill, A. R., retirement from Council, ii.

Yass, N.S.W., General Geology of the
District east of, 577.

(b) BIOLOGICAL INDEX.

New names are printed in SMALL CAPITALS.

,

This biological index is now restricted to genera and species of which there is some
description, synonymy, reference to previously published description, or other record of

importance.

Lists of species in this volume which are not indexed individually include:
Species of plants in Upper Williams River and Barrington Tops Districts (pp.

2-33);

Marine Algae of N.S.W. (Melanophyceae) (pp. 206-214);

Fossils from the Macleay Series, Manning River district (pp. 250-251);
Fossils from the Lorne Triassic Basin (pp. 259-260) ;

Plants from the Myall Lakes district (pp. 284-295);

Upper Ordovician Graptolites from district east of Yass, N.S.W. (p. 581).

— =~ Sa

il arta a iy i aati

Acacia decurrens, 240, 277
var. pauciglandulosa, 266
Acanthoneura, 417, 431
acidiomorpha, 432
australina, 432
debeauforti, 464
insignis, 435, 464
sexguttata, 464
NIGRIVENTRIS, 431-2
Achias, 101
albertisi, 133, 137
amplividens, 133, 135
AUSTRALIS, 133, 137
brachyophthalmus, 133, 135
diversifrons, 133, 136
fulviceps, 133-4
furcatus, 133, 136
gracilis, 130
latividens, 133, 137
longividens, 133, 137
niicrocephalus, 134, 137
oculatus, 134
platychirus, 133-4
punctulatus, 133, 137
rothschildi, 133, 137
strigatus, 133-4
SUBNUDUS, 133-4
thoracalis, 133, 136
venustulus, 132, 134
Achiosoma, 011
aspiciens, 130
COSTATIS, 130
dacoides, 130
NIGRIFACIES, 131
Acinia rufa, 460
Acraspiza obscuripes, 48
SIMIMIS, 48
trifasciata, 49
Acroniopus pallidus. 326
Tufipennis, 326
Actina BRISBANENSIS, 37
incisuralis, 37
Acutipalpa polinosa, 47
semiflava, 47
Adantineura biroi, 104
grandis, 104
kertészi, 104
Adapsilia AEQUALIS, 51
Adrama, 414
BISETA, 331-2
determinata, 332, 334
FLAVIMANA, 332-3
PAPUAENSIS, 331, 333
selecta, 332, 334
Aeolocosma abditella, 69
cycloxantha, 69
iridozona, 69
Aeolus australis, 304
waggae, 304
Agapophytus albibasis, 47
ruficaudatus, 47
squamosus, 47
Agonosoma, 158
Amaurornis moluccanus nigrifrons,
75, 466

INDEX.

Angitula, 169, 179
cyanea, 170, 179
longicollis, 170, 179

Angitulina, 179

Angituloides, 169

Angophora lanceolata, 283, 285-6

Anisembia wheeleri, 565

Anomoea, 442, 448
curvinervis, 449
NIGRITHORAX, 449
permunda, 449
quadrata, 449

Anthistria frondosa, xxxiv

Antineura, 99
biroi, 104
grandis, 104
kertészi, 104

Antiopala anomodes, 71
BATHROXANTHA, 71
ebenospila, 72
flavitincta, 71
GENNAEA, 71
melanocentra, 71
NEUROTENES, 71
NIPHOSTOLA, 71
PROCLIVIS, 72
tephraea, 72
Antipaluria aequicercata, 373, 379
urichi, 377
Apactoneura, 98
Apelma sydneyensis, 556
Arachnomyia, 345
arborum, 350
longipes, 350
ORNATIPES, 350-1
Aralia papyrifera, xxxvi
Archiphytalmia, 172, 180
Asperococcus, 194
bullosus, 196
Asymmetricostrongylus
CHOSURI, 535
Asyndetus latitarsatus, 165
PORRECTUS, 165

Asyntona, 100

doleschalli, 122

flaviceps, 122

tetyroides, 122
Atheropla BARYTYPA, 65

chorias, 65

CROGKA, 66

decaspila, 66

DYSPREPES, 66

fumosa, 65

melichlora, 66

psammodes, 66

psilopis, 66

scioxantha, 65

triplaca, 65
Atopognathus platypalpus, 180
Atriplex spongiosum, xxXxvii

Austrostrongylus macropodis, 534-5
minutus, 534-5
WALLABIAR, 534

TRI-

Bactrocera, 410
umbrosus, 410, 412
Bactrophora, 194
filum, 197
irregularis, 197
nigrescens, 197
Banksia integrifolia, 283
serrata, 283, 285-6
Baryopadus, 408
corrugatus, 408
BERLANDIELLA, 567
berlandi, 568-9, 571-2
EBRANS, 571-2
gromieri, 569, 571-2
BLACOPHANES, 337
PALLIDA, 337
Blossevillea, 201
Cephalornithos, 204
monilifera, 205
paniculata, 204
platylobium, 204
polyeystidea, 205
retroflexa, 204
siliquosa, 204
spartioides, 204
uvifera, 204

lix

_ Brachiaria notochtona, xxxiv

piligera var. intercedens, xxxiv

Brea, 99
basilis, 125
contraria, 124
discalis, 124
discifera, 124
flavipes, 124
magnifica, 124-5
nouhuysi, 124
ralumensis, 125

Bubastes SUBNIGRICOLLIS, 298

vagans, 298

Buccostrongylus australis, 527

buccalis, 526-7
LABIATUS, 526-7
SETIFER, 526-7
Bufo marinus, xxxvii
Burmitembia, 369
venosa, 369
Byrsax egenus, 297
macleayi, 297
pinnaticollis, 297
saccharatus, 297

Cakile maritima, 284

Callantra, 410
smieroides, 410-1

Callistemon acuminatus,

XXXVii

‘hortensis, xxxvii
lanceolatus, xxxvii
linearis, XxxXvii
pachyphyllus, xxxvii
pinifolius, xxxvii
viminalis, xxxvi

Callistomyia, 441
horni, 447

Calythrix tetragona, Xxxv

XXXVi,

lx

Camaromyia, 455
bullans, 460
Cardiophorus fasciolatus, 304
froggatti, 304
macleayi, 309
quadrimaculatus, 309
tumidicollis, 309
tumidithorax, 309
venustus, 309
Cardiotarsus MJOBERGI, 320
Carpomitra, 195
costata, 197
Carpophthorella, 442, 448
magnifica, 445
setifrons, 448
Carpophyllum, 201
phyllanthus, 204
Castiarina PUTEOLATA, 300
Casuarina glauca, 287
Casuarius casuarius, 74, 466
Cedrela Toona, 280
Celetor, 99
Cephalia bicolor, 115
CERATITELLA, 442, 452, 465
loranthi, 452
Ceratitis, 442, 452
capitata, 451
Ceratopelta, 101, 138
patula, 139, 140
tricolor, 140
Ceratopogon aeratipennis, 555
marmoratus, 555
minusculus, 555
molestus, 555
subnitidus, 555
sydneyensis, 555
Ceruana pratensis, 456
Chaetodacus, 410
ALBOLATERALIS, 410
froggatti, 410, 413
Chaetorivellia, 100
trifasciata, 127
Chamaeraphis spinescens, xxxvi
squarrosa, XXXvi
CHEESMANOMYIA, 416, 419
nigra, 420
TNICA, 420
Chnoospora, 194
pacifica, 197
Chromatomyia, 145
Chrosis angusticollis, 305

Chrysophtharta varicollis, 355, 360,

365

Chrysosoma abruptum, 155
ATROPURPUREUM, 156
BARBESCENS, 156
COMPRESSIPES, 157
fasciatum, 158
FISSILAMELLATUM, 158
FUTILE, 158
impressum, 159
INSULANUM, 159
latefuscatum, 160
LATEMACULATUM, 160
lucigena, 161

INDEX.

Chrysosoma marginale, 160
muticus, 155
nigrilimbatum, 160
NIGROHALTERATUM, 161
papuasinum, 161
PEXOIDES, 161
PULVERULENTUM, 162
TRICHROMATUM, 163

CHRYSOTRYPANEA, 455, 457
TRIFASCIATA, 457

Cladostephus, 193
spongiosus, 196
verticillatus, 196

Cleitamia, 100
amabilis, 108-9
astrolabei, 108-9
biarcuata, 108, 110
catherinae, 107
CHEESMANAE, 108, 110
CYCLOPS, 108, 110
DELANDI, 108, 111
EXCEPTA, 108, 111
gestroi, 109
insignis, 109, 110
liturata, 107
orthocephala, 108-9
ostensackeni, 108-9
Tivelloides, 108, 110
roederi, 109, 110
similis. 108-9
tricurvata, 107-9
trigonalis, 112

CLEITAMOIDES, 100, 106
kertészi, 107
latifascia, 107
liturata, 107

Clerodendron tomentosum, 283

Cloacina bancroftorum, 533
curta, 530
dahli, 529
EXPANSA, 529
longispiculata, 529, 533
macropodis, 530, 533
MAGNIPAPILLATA, 530
OBTUSA, 530
petrogale, 532
robertsi, 532
similis, 532-3
THETIDIS, 532
WALLABIAE, 530, 532

Clothoda, 373
florissantensis, 379
INTERMEDIA, 376
nobilis, 373
urichi, 377

Clusiosoma, 417, 423
BISERIATA, 424, 426
CENTRALIS, 424, 426
PARTITA, 424-5
pleuralis, 424, 427
PUNCTICEPS, 424, 426
semifusca, 424-5

Clusiosomina PUNCTICEPS, 426

Coeranica eritima, 68
isabella. 68

Colobostrella, 441, 445
Tuficauda, 446, 464
Colobostroter, 416, 441
pulchralis, 418
Colpomenia, 194
sinuosa, 196, 548-4, 553
Conicipithea, 98
addens, 103
Corethropalpa cinerea, 64
faleata, 63
HOMOPHANES, 64
leuconeura, 64
melanoneura, 63
Correa alba, 284
Cosmopolites sordidus, Xxxviii
Crepidomenus CERVUS, 324
eyanescens, 326
DIVARICATUS, 325
luteipes, 326
METALLESCENS, 325
MONTANUS, 325
NAVICULARIS, 326
QUEENSLANDICUS, 325
Cristobalia, 442
lutea, 448
Cryptohypnus dimidiatus, 309
semifasciatus, 309
Cryptolechia alveola, 336
Culicoides flumineus, 368
marmoratus, 556
MELANESIAE, 368
molestus, 556
multimaculatus, 555-6
RABAULI, 367
sp. near mollis, 367
townsvillensis, 555
Cupaniopsis anacardioides, 283
CYCLOPSIA, 414, 441, 444
INAEQUALIS, 445
CYCLOSTRONGYLUS, 517
CLELANDI, 518
DISSIMILIS, 519
GALLARDI, 518
WALLABIAE, 517
Cynodon ciliaris, Xxxiv
colvergens, XXXiv
dactylon, xxxiv
var. pulchellus, xxxiv
tenellus, XXxiv
Cystophyllum, 202
muricatum, 205

Dacus addens, 103
aequalis, 411
ALBOLATERALIS, 413
biarcuatus, 464
bryoniae, 411
concisus, 177
cucumis, 412
determinata, 334
froggatti, 413
PAPUAENSIS, 412
pompiloides, 118
smieroides, 411
speculifera, 464

—

SSS. a ee

Dacus tryoni var. cucumis, 412
turgidus, 177
umbrosus, 412
zonatus, 413
Dahlia excelsa, Xxxii
imperialis, xxxii
Damaromyia hirsuta, 38
NEOHIRSUTA, 38-9
SIMILIS, 38
Dasyhelea aeratipennis, 557
minuscula, 558
Dasyortalis, 98
angustifrons, 102-3
_ barbata, 102-3
complens, 102
var. fasciata, 102-3
var. SEPARATA, 102-3
goniceps, 102-3
Dendrobium teretifolium, 283
Diaphorus alligatus, 166
FULVIFRONS, 166
LATENIGER, 166
maurus, 167
serenus, 167
Diarrhegma, 417
DIARRHEGMOIDES, 417, 437
araucariae, 438
HASTATA, 437
Diatomineura aurifiua, 41
pulchra, 41
Dicteniophorus badiipennis, 324
RIFOVEATUS, 322
ELEGANS, 323
HIRTICORNIS, 323
QUADRIFOVEATUS, 324
ramifer, 322
RUFOLINEATUS, 323
Dictyoploca burensis, 484-5
capensis, 482, 484
cercocyrta, 482, 484
RIMSKYI, 484-5
sjostedti, 484-5
Dictyota, 199
dichotoma, 200
linearis, 201
prolificans, 200
radicans, 200
robusta, 201
Dihybocercus berlandi, 382, 567-8
CONFUSUS, 487, 489
gromieri, 382
RHODESIAE, 487, 489
severini, 381-2, 485, 487, 489
spinosus, 382, 489
Dilophus, 199
marginatus, 201
Dimeringophrys, 441
DINEMBIA, 559
FERRUGINHA, 559
Diplochorda, 169, 180
ANEURA, 174-5
brevicornis, 175, 178
concisa, 175, 177
MINOR, 175, 178
myrmex, 175-6

INDEX.

Diplochorda ophion, 177
trilineata, 175-6
UNISTRIATA, 175, 179

Diplograptus, 582

Diradius pusillus, 217

Dirioxa bicolor, 436
pornia, 435
testacea, 435

Dolichopus, 345
zickzack, 345
ziczac, 167

Donaconethis, 381
abyssinica, 381-2
ehrenbergi, 383

Duomyia, 98

Dystalica angusta, 329
GRACILIS, 329

Eehymipera cockerelli, 75, 466, 471

icklonia, 195
lanciloba, 198
radiata, 198
Ketinopsis vulpecuna, 41
Ketinorrhynchus variabilis, 47
levis, 47
Ectocarpus, 194
confervoides, 197, 537, 553
Padinae, 543
siliculosus, 197, 537, 553
simpliciusculus, 196
Elaphomyia, 170, 172, 180
alcicornis, 180
brevicornis, 177-8
cervicornis, 171
megalotis, 180
polita, 170
wallacei, 180
Elassogaster, 99
didymoides, 115, 117
didymus, 115-6
EVITTA, 115-6
sepsoides, 115
terraereginae, 115-6
Elatichrosis angusticollis, 305
trisuleata, 305
Embia antiqua, 562
berlandi, 567-9
bramina, 184
cephalotes, 565-6
duplex, 565
femorata, 566
florissantensis, 379
grassii, 561
gromieri, 569
hova, 183
humbertiana, 186
klugi, 186
latreillii, 183
lunaris, 566
major, 339, 478
minor, 478
nobilis, 373
persica, 480
rabaulti, 481
ramburi, 565-6

1xi

Embia ruficollis, 222, 572-3
savignyi, 383
severini, 485
silvanoi, 566
sjostedti, 484
solieri, 561
surcoufi, 494
tartara, 480
taurica, 561
trinitatis, 572
urichi, 377, 379, 572
Embidobia, 339
AUSTRALICA, 340, 344
LONGIPENNIS, 340, 342
METOLIGOTOMAE, 340-1, 344
ORIENTALIS, 340, 343-4
urichi, 339
Embonycha, 371
Enicoptera, 441
Enicopterina, 416, 439
Enveja bequaerti, 490, 566
EPICERINA, 52
SETIFEMUR, 52
Epimegastigmus brevivalvus, 266,
277
Eragrostis barrelieri, xxxvi
cilianensis, XxXxvi
Eucalyptus acmenioides, 5, 13
campanulata, 5, 13
carnea, 13
fastigata, 7, 13
gummitfera, 283, 285
obliqua, 6, 13
pauciflora, 8, 13
pilularis, 283, 285
punctata, 5, 13
robusta, 288
saligna, 3, 13, 291
stellulata, 13
tereticornis, 283
viminalis, 6, 13
Wilkinsoniana, 13
Eulechria ACERBA, 56
ACOMPSA, 55
ALBIPALPIS, 58
CLASTOSTICHA, 57
difficilis, 56
DRYOCOETES, 57
EMMELES, 54
TUMIFERA, 55
MAESTA, 57
MUTABIMIS, 57
PLAGIOPHABA, 54
PLATYPHARA, 54
POLYPENTHES, 56
STENOPHYLLA, 55
Euphranta, 441-2
minor, 443
scutellata, 443
Euprosopia, 101
albolineata, 147
AUREOVITTA, 146, 151
bilineata, 147, 149
diminutiva, 145
DUBITALIS, 147, 149

xii

Euprosopia fusifacies, 147, 151
impingens, 147, 151
INNOCUA, 147, 152
miliaria, 147-8
MINUTA, 146, 148
penicillata, 147, 151
potens, 147, 150
protensa, 147, 150
rufiventris, 146, 148
SETINERVIS, 147, 149
squamifera, 151
tigrina, 146-7
ventralis, 147, 150

Eurytoma fellis, 226
GAHANI, 223, 240, 277

Eutherama coeruleum, 328
cyaneum, 328

Euthictis ALAMPITIS, 69
marmaraspis, 69
plectanthra, 69
xanthodelta, 69

Euthyplatystoma, 101
rigidum, 153

Euxesta semifasciata, 98

Euxestomoea, 99, 100
bipunctata, 105-6
discifera, 106
prompta, 106

Exarsia paracycla, 64
poliochra, 64

Fatsia papyrifera, Xxxvi
Festuca littoralis, 284
Ficus rubiginosa, 283

Forcipomyia punctum-album, 367

subnitida, 555

Galenia secunda, xxxvii
Gallicolumba jobiensis, 75, 466
Gastrozona, 442
Giraffomyia, 169, 179
Globocephaloides allinis, 533

macropodis, 533

THETIDIS, 533

wallabiae, 533
Glossograptus hincksii, 582
Glypheus CRUCIGER, 302

decoratus, 303

MILITARIS, 303

sanguineus, 303
Gonocephalum costipenne, 326

hispidocostatum, 326
Gymnosorus, 198

nigrescens, 199

variegatus, 199

Habrocytus cerealellae, 226
Hakea pugioniformis, 290
Halysites, 584
Hannemania blestowei, 73
Haploembia algerica, 566
antiqua, 562, 566
bourgi, 566
capensis, 482, 565
clypeata, 566

INDEX.

Haploembia codinai, 565-6
colJaris, 566
duplex, 565
Jaufteri, 565-6
megacephala, 562, 56
sjostedti, 484, 565
solieri, 561-2, 565-6
taurica, 562, 567

‘“ Helomyza ”’ ortalioides, 464

Hemigaster, 126

Hemilea, 442, 447

Hernia, 120

Hexacinia, 417, 438
MULTIPUNCTATA, 438
palposa, 438
radiosa, 438
stellata, 438
stigmatoptera, 438

Holocnemia, 101, 138

Homoeostrichus, 198
Sinclairii, 199

Horistonotus bicolor, 310
exoletus, 310
flavipes, 310

Hormosira, 201
? articulata, 205
Banksii, 206, 542-4, 553

Hypnoidus dimidiatus, 309
FLAVOPICTUS, 309
semifasciatus, 309

Hypodontus macropi, 534
macropodis, 534
THETIDIS, 534

~I

Ichneumonosoma, 441
Tlea, 194
fascia, 196

Kambangania, 441

Lacon BULLATUS, 301
Lagarosia, 442
Laglaisia, 100
biroi, 112
caloptera, 112
fascipennis, 112
kochi, 112
stylops, 113
telescopica, 113
Lamprogaster, 101, 122-3, 150
austeni, 139, 143
basalis, 189, 144
bispinosa, 140
costalis, 140-1
DECOLOR, 139, 144
elongata, 139, 144
FULVIPRS, 140, 145
gracilis, 139, 141
GROSSA, 139, 142
laeta, 140, 145
limbata, 144
macrocephila, 140, 145
maculipennis, 140, 143
patula, 139-40
pseudoelongata, 139

Lamprogaster pumicata, 140, 143

quadrilinea, 140, 142
Tufipes, 140, 148
sepsoides, 142
severa, 140, 143
stenoparia, 139, 144
taeniata, 140, 145
trisignata, 140, 143
ventralis, 141
xanthoptera, 143
zelotypa, 139, 141
Lasiohelea lefanui, 558
townsvillensis, 558
Lasioxiria, 98
hirsuta, 101
Leathesia, 193
difformis, 196
Lecomyia cyanea, 37
Leeuwenhoekia australiense, 95
Leptembia hamifera, 493, 495
surcoufi, 493-5
Leptops, 408
Leptospermum emarginatum,
Xxxvii
Liversidgei, 290
Leptus autummnalis, 466, 471
irritans, 466
Leucopogon Richei, 284
Limonius ANGULATUS, 321
NIGER, 321
PALLIDUS, 322
PUBESCENS, 321
PYGMAEUS, 322
Liolamprogaster, 138
costalis, 141
gracilis, 141
Livistona australis, 288
Lobospira, 199
bicuspidata, 201
Loriomyia, 100
guttipennis, 113
Lorius roratus, 75
Loxoneuroides, 101

Maccullochella macquariensis, xix

Macrocystis, 195
pyrifera, 198

Macropostrongylus australis, 524

baylisi, 524
DISSIMILIS, 526
LESOUEFI, 525
macropostrougyius, 524-5
WALLABIAE, 525 ‘
vorkei, 524

Macropus bennetti, 534-5
dorsalis, 534
major, 516-8, 522, 529, 530
parma, 516-7
robustus (robustus), 516

woodwardi, 524

ruficollis, 514, 516-8, 522, 525,

527, 534-5
rufus, 516, 522, 530, 533

thetidis, 514, 516-7, 522, 527,

532-4

Macropus ualabatus,
519-522, 524-6, 532-3
Macrozamia Macdonnelli, xxxvii
MAPLESTONEMA, 524
TYPICUM, 524
Maria caeruleiveutris, 124
Meachina, 179
Medetera, 345
COMES, 351-2
extranea, 351
nigrohalterata, 351
PALMAR, 351
Megapodius duperreyi, 74, 466
Megastigmus ACACYAE, 266, 277
Megistostylus longicornis var. longi-
setosus, 164
Melaleuca Leucadendron, 287
linariifolia, 286
Melanoxanthus angularis, 308
BIARCTUS, 305, 308
COLUMBINUS, 305, 308
fasciolatus, 304, 308-9
FLAVOSIGNATUS, 305, 308
froggatti, 304, 308-9
INSOLITUS, 307-8
JUCUNDUS, 305, 308
lativittis, 307-8
Tuticollis, 308
RUFONIGER, 308
SEMIRUBER, 307-8
Melobasis abnormis, 298
aurocincta, 300
aurocyanea, 300
BELLULA, 298, 300
browni, 300
igniceps, 300
impressa, 298, 300
marlooensis, 300
myallae, 300
parvula, 300
pavo, 300
pusilla, 300
radiola, 300
SPINOSA, 299, 300
uniformis, 299
VIRIDISTERNA, 299, 300
wannerua, 300
Melomys moncktoni, 75, 471, 473
tubex, 75, 471, 473
sp., 75
stalkeri, 75, 471, 473
Mesembryanthemum aequilaterale,
284
Mesoctenia, 99
celyphoides, 123
coalescens, 123
hilaris, 123
Talumensis, 123
METEMBIA, 474
FEROX, 474, 476
IMMSI, 475-6
Metoligotoma, 371
extorris, 342
illawarrae illawarrae, 341
ingens, 341-2

516-7,

INDEX.

Metoligotoma intermedia, 342
pentanesiana, 342
tasmanica, 342

Microepicausta, 99

Microtrombidium akamushi, 466
pusillum, 466

Monotylota laufferi, 565

Mugil dobula, xiv

Mychestes LATICOLLIS, 327
ordinatus, 327
pascoei, 327

Myriogloia, 195
Scurius, 197

Myrmodes akidiformis, 302
(?) ELONGATUS, 302

Mythites VARIABILIS, 330

Najas marina, 286
Naupoda, 100
regina, 122
Neodialineura striatithorax, 47
Neoexaireta spinigera, 37
NEOHEMIGASTER, 100, 126
albovittata, 127
Neoplatycephalus macrodon, xiv
NEOSCHONGASTIA, 88
antipodianum, 91
BACKHOUSEI, 89, 91
bipygalis, 471
callipygea, 73
clauda, 73
coorongense, 91
dasycerci, 91
DUBIA, 89, 91
EDWARDSI, 86, 91
fournieri, 73
IMPAR, 85, 91
incerta, 73
jamesi, 73
jimungi, 73
KALLIPYGOS, 83, 91, 471
LORIUS, 86, 91
petrogale, 91
RETROCINCTA, 87, 91
retrocoronata, 73
rioi, 73
westraliense, 91
YEOMANSI, 81, 90-1
Neosophira, 100, 414
distorta, 414
Neothemara, 416, 433
exul, 433
formosa, 433
formosipennis, 433, 434
Nerius, 170
Neurocarpus, 199
acrostichoides, 200
Muelleri, 200
polypodioides, 200
Woodwardia, 200
Neurogona, 345
denudata, 350
signata, 350
Notheia, 202
anomala, 206

Ixiii

Notoligotoma, 371
nitens, 343
Notospila, 101

Ocnerus, 447

ODONTEMBIA, 489
spinosa, 489

Oedaspoides, 442, 451
acuticornis, 452
escheri, 452

OLIGEMBIA, 217
BANKSI, 221
hubbardi, 218
oligotomoides, 222
ROSSI, 219

Oligotoma antiqua, 563
borneensis, 187
bramina, 184
californica, 187
cubana, 183
greeniana, 344
gurneyi gurneyi, 339, 343
hospes, 188, 573-4
hova, 183
hubbardi, 188, 217-8
humbertiana, 181, 186-8
inaequalis, 184
insularis, 183
latreillei, 181
latreillii, 183
mesopotamica, 188
michaeli, 478
rochai, 184
tuficollis, 188, 572-3
saundersii, 181, 185-6, 188
sulcata, 188
valida, 478
venosa, 188, 572, 574

Olyntha brasiliensis, 187, 373
cubana, 183

Onchoecerea gibsoni, 555

Ophiodesma innodus, 39

Ortalis contigua, 102
punctifascia, 127 ©

Ortaloptera, 441, 453
cleitamina, 454

Orthiastis hyperocha, 66

Ostrea angasi, xx
commercialis, xx, xxii
glomerata, xx

Pachybela argocentra, 70
cremnodisema, 70
erebocosma, 70
eremica, 70
euadelpha, 70
EURYPOLIA, 70
leporina, 70
mimica, 70
parisa, 70
peloma, 70
PHILOTECHNA, 70
sarcosma, 70
tetraspora, 70

lxiv

Padina, 198
Fraseri, 199
pavonia, 200

Panicum helopus, xxxiv
intercedens, Xxxiv
notochtonum, Xxxiv
paractaenum, XXxvi
reversum, XXXVi

Paracardiophorus ALTERNATUS,

311-2

AMABILIS, 312
antennalis, 310
ASSIMILIS, 313
ATRONOTATUS, 311, 313
attenuatus, 310
australis, 312-3, 315
bicolor, 311
CARISSIMUS, 312, 314
compactus, 310
eonsobrinus, 310
consputus, 311
cookI, 311, 314
despectus, 310
dimidiatus, 311, 318
dissimilis, 310
divisus, 311
DULCIS, 312, 314, 316
elisus, 311
eucalypti, 211
flavipennis, 311
fulvosignatus, 312
hamatis, 312
humilis, 311
jugulus, 311
lenis, 310
LITORALIS, 311, 315
longicornis, 311.
macleavi, 312
minimus, 312
mjobergi, 311, 319
moseri, 319
NIGROSUFFUSUS, 311, 314-5
OCCIDENTALIS, 312, 316
octavus, 311
OCTOSIGNATUS, 312, 316
pallidipennis, 311
QUADRISTELLATUS, 312, 317
RUFOPICTUS, 311, 317
SEXNOTATUS, 312, 317
SUBCRUCIATUS, 312, 318
SUBFASCIATUS, 311, 319
STELLATUS, 312, 318
tumidithorax, 310
vagus, 311
VARIANS, 311, 314, 319
variegatus, 311
venustus, 311
victoriensis, 311
VITTIPENNIS, 311, 320
xanthomus, 310

Paracleius, 167

Paraclius, 345
australiensis, 346, 349
CILIPES, 346, 348
darwini, 346-7

INDEX.

Paraclius LATIFACIES, 346, 348
MACULIFER, 167
neglectus, 346-7
OBTUSUS, 346-7
ornatipes, 349
STRICTIFACIES, 167
trisetosus, 346

Paractaenum novae - hollandiae,

XxXxvi

PARARSIA, 64
marmorea, 64

Paratrirhithrum, 465

PARAZONIOLAIMUS, 522
COLLARIS, 522

PAREMBIA, 478
major, 481
minor, 478, 481
persica, 480-1
scotti, 480-1
tartara, 481
valida, 478, 481

Paropsis aegrota, 355, 364-5
beata, 355, 363-5
Immaculata, 353
maculata, 355, 361, 365
obsoleta, 355, 364-5
octomaculata, 353
orphana, 353
pictipennis, 353
reticulata, 355, 359, 365

Paropsisterna liturata, 355, 363-5

Paroxyna, 454
sororcula, 463

Pelecorrbynchus claripennis, 40
deuqueti, 40
FERGUSONI, 40-1
flavipennis, 40
fusconiger, 40
tillyardi, 40

Penaeopsis macleayi, xviii

Penaeus plebejus, xviii

Peroryctes raffrayana, 75, 471

Phagocarpus, 448

Pharyngostrongylus alpha, 514, 516
australis, 514
beta, 514, 516
brevis, 514, 517
delta, 517
epsilon, 517
eta, 515-7
gamma, 515-6
IOTA, 514
macropodis, 514-7
PARMA, 516
THETA, 514
zeta, 517

PHILETES, 336
MEGALOSPILA, 336

Philocompus, 99

Phyllospora, 202
comosa, 205

Phytalmia, 169, 180
alcicornis, 171-2
BIARMATA, 171, 174
cervicornis, 171, 180

Phytalmia prisca, 172
wallacei, 171-2
Phytodecta viminalis, 355
Plagiostenopterina, 99
aenea, 113-4
enderleini, 113-4
ORBITALIS, 114
parva, 114
Platensina, 454
DUBIA, 459
PARVIPUNCTA, 458
platyptera, 458
sumbana, 458
Platystoma, 128, 150-1
parvulum, 153
pectorale, 148
punctiplenuimn, 153
stellatum, 153
Pleurota ACRATOPA, 6L
AGASTOPIS, 59
argoptera, 61
brevivittella, 60
callizona, 59
chlorochyta, 60
enephaea, 63
crassinervis, 62
endesma, 60
EPICLINES, 60
epitripta, 61
gyposema, 61
gypsina, 61
himantias, 60
holoxesta, 61
homalota, 63
hoplophanes, 60
LACTEOLA, 63
leucogramma, 63
leucophara, 61
LEUCOSTEPHES, 62
lomographa, 60
macroscia, 60
MACROSTICHA, 62
peloxantha, 60
phormictis, 59
photodotis, 59
PICEA, 63
PLACINA, 61
protogramma, 62
PROXIMA, 61
psammoxantha, 60
psephena, 63
pyrosema, 60
semophanes, 59
stasiastica, 60
TENELLULA, 62
tephrina, 63
themeropis, 63
THIOPEPLA, 60
titanitis, 63
tritosticta, 63
TYROCHROA, 59
xyphochrysa, 59
zalocoma, 63
Pogonortalis, 99
barbifera, 120

Pogonortalis doclea, 119, 120
similis, 119, 120
uncinata, 119
Polyara, 416-7
insolita, 418
Polydora ciliata, xxi
Populus tremuloides, xxxvii
Porphyrio melanotus, 75, 466
Poticara triarcuata, 109
Protomacha anthracina, 69
chalchaspis, 68
consuetella, 68
ochrochalcha, 68
paralia, 68
PHLOEOMIMA, 69
straminea, 68
ZORODES, 68

PSEUDACANTHONEURA, 416, 434
SEPTEMNOTATA, 434, 464

Pseudaeolus BIMACULATUS, 303
VAGEFASCIATUS, 304
ZIG-ZAG, 304

PSEUDEMBIA, 476
PARADOXA, 476
TRUNCATA, 477

Pseudepicausta, 99, 117
angulata, 118-9
APICALIS, 118-9
chalybea, 118
lagarosia, 118
multilloides, 118-9
wallacei, 118-9

Pseudeuxesta prima, 98

PSEUDINA, 442, 446
BULOLOAE, 446
PSEUDOCLEITAMIA, 98, 104
SETIGERA, 105
Pseudorichardia, 99
PSEUDOSOPHIRA, 414
BAKERI, 415
Pseudospheniscus, 442
bifidus, 450
mesopleuralis, 450
TAYLORI, 450
Psilopus, 155, 161, 164
PSILOSCELES, 336
DICHOCHROA, 336
Pterogenia, 100
fuliginosa, 126
latericia, 126
nubecula, 126
pectoralis, 126
SIMILIS, 126
Pterohelaeus LATIFOLIUS, 328
planior, 328
tubescens, 328
Ptilocerembia, 371
Ptilona bischoti, 464
lateralis, 464
variabilis, 464
Ptiolina, 441
Ptochosaris horrenda, 64
Pylaiella, 194
littoralis, 197, 537, 542, 547
ZZ

INDEX.

Rabaulia, 417, 420

fascifacies, 422
Rattus browni, 75, 471, 473

Tingens, 75, 471, 473
Rhabdochaeta crockeri, 463
Rhagadochir oligotomoides, 222

vosseleri, 217
Rhytidortalis, 99

tugifrons, 106
Rioxa, 417, 435

bicolor, 436

musae, 435

(?) nivistriga, 464

pornia, 435

testacea, 435
Rioxaptilona, 417, 436
Rivellia, 101

affinis, 120-1

connata, 120

connexa, 120-1

dimidiata, 120-1

ferruginea, 120-1

fusca, 120-1

radiata, 120-1

RUFIBASIS, 120-1

Rugopharynx, 514

Sarcophycus, 202
potatorum, 206

Sargassum, 201
angustifolium, 203
aquifolium, 203
carpophyllum, 203
erosum, 202
fallax, 202
fragile, 203
globulariaefolium, 202
Godeffroyi, 203
lacerifolium, 203
laevigatum, 202
leptopodum, 203
linearifolium, 202
lophocarpum, 205
neurophorum, 203
paradvxum, 202
polyacanthum, 203
spinuligerum, 203
verruculosum, 202

Saropla amydropis, 65
ancistrotis, 65
brachyota, 65
eaelotella, 65
cleronoma, 65
harpactis, 65
HEMIXANTHA, 65
philocala, 65
prodotis, 65
stenodesma, 65

SAUSSURELLA, 573
Tuficollis, 573-4
venosa, 574

Scaberia, 202
Agardhii, 205

Scaevola suaveolens, 284

lxv

Scaptia auriflua, 41
pulchra, 41

Scholastes, 99
AITAPENSIS, 128
bimaculatus, 128-9
cinctiis, 128
lonchifera, 128-9
TAYLORI. 128-9

Schongastia, 88
BLESTOWEI, 92, 94
JAMESI, 91, 94
rotunda, 73
vandersandei, 94
yeomansi, 73

Sciopus BASISTYLATUS, 164
occultus, 164
rectus, 164
Scirpus lacustris, 287
Sclerogibba EMBIOPTERAE, 338
Scotinosoma, 99
attenuata, 117
bistrigata, 117
completa, 117
ERASA, 117
Seytosiphon, 194
lomentaria, 196
Scytothamnus, 195
australis, 198

Senecio spathulatus, 284
Sophira, 417
bistriga, 446, 464
flava, 430
quadripunctata, 431
Sophiroides, 417
Spathiopsilopus, 161
Spathoglossum, 199
cornigerum, 200
Spathulina, 455
acroleuca, 456
Spermatochnus, 195
Lejolisii, 198
Sphacelaria, 193
cirrhosa, 195
tribuloides, 195
Sphenella, 455
marginata, 459
Spheniscomyia, 442
sexmaculata, 450
Spirostrongylus, 514
spirostrongylus, 526
Splachnidium, 201
rugosum, 206
Sporochnus, 195
comosus, 197
Moorei, 197
radiciformis, 197
Stackhousia spathulata, 284
Statice Thouini, xxxvi
Stenopterina aenea, 114
didyma, 116
immaculatus, 115
unimaculata, 115
Stichotomus fusiformis, 323

Ixvi

Stigmodera bifasciata, 301
brevifasciata, 301
convexa, 301
PUTEOLATA, 300
secularis, 301

Styloconops albiventris, 367

Stypocaulon, 193
paniculatum, 196

Sus papuensis, 75, 466

Swainsona fissimontana, XXXVii

Sympyecnus PLUMIPES, 155

Synearpia Jaurifolia, 3, 13

Tabanus abstersus, 45
acutipalpis, 43-4
adelaidae, 43
albohirtipes, 43
antecedens, 44
avidus, 42
bassii, 45
brevidentatus, 45
circumdatus, 44-5
cirrus, 43
dixoni, 43
dubiosus, 43
edentulus, 43-5
exulans, 43, 45
flindersi, 43
fraterculus, 45
gentilis, 43
geraltonensis, 43
gregarius, 43
hebes, 45
hobartensis, 43
imperfectus, 43, 45
indefinitus, 43
innotatus, 43
microdonta, 43-4
milsonensis, 43
moretonensis, 45
neocirrus, 43, 45
neolatifrons, 44
nepos, 45
ocultus, 45
pallipennis, 46
postponens, 43
pseudobasilis, 43
regisgeorgii, 45
rufinotatus, 46
tasmanicus, 43
vetustus, 43
WHITEI, 43, (new name), 44
wynyardensis, 44

Taenogera notatithorax, 47

INDEX.

Talaurinus fergusoni, 330
subvittatus, 330
SUTTONI, 329
Talegallus jobiensis, 74, 466
? Tarphiomimus egenus, 297
saccharatus, 297
? ZIG-ZAG, 297
Tephrella, 455
AUSTRALIS, 456
sexincisa, 456
Tephritis, 455
adspersa, 460
leontodontis, 462
meleagris, 460
pelia, 461
tenera, 460
wolffi, 460
Tepperella trilineata, 240, 266, 277
Teratembia, 222
Termitorioxa, 417
termitoxena, 436
Tetrapanax papyriferum, xxxvi
Thalamarchis, 335
alveola, 336
Thalerotricha cremnopelta, 67
hemispila, 67
MESOPLACA, 67
MONTIVAGA, 67
mylicella, 67
Themara, 416, 419
Themarohystrix, 417, 422
erinaceus, 422
FLAVICEPS, 422
SUTTONI, 422-3
Themaroides, 416
(?) optatura, 464
quadrifera, 419

Themeda arguens, XXXiv
Thinophilus TAYLORI, 168
Thypticus, 345
Trachyxysta antichroma, 68
Trachyzanela histrica, 68
Trianthema portuwacastrum, Xxxii
Trichilogaster — acaciae-discoloris,
277
Trichostrongylus asymmetricus,
535
australis, 535
dissimils, 535
Trichosurus caninus, 535
Trisetum pumilum, xxxvi
Trombicula akamushi, 80, 471
edwardsi, 73

Trombicula hirsti, 80-1
var. BULOLOENSIS, 78, 81, 466
var. morobensis, 73, 466
holosericeum, 466
macropus, 81
minor, 466, 471
novae-hollandiae, 81
RIOT, 80-1
wichmanni, 81
Trypanea, 455
glauca, 462
neodaphe var. gamma, 462
Trypanocentra, 417, 427
nigripennis, 428-9
NIGRITHORAX, 428
VITTITHORAX, 428-9
Trypeta brevivitta, 464
bullans, 460
heterura, 459
indistincta, 464
musae, 435

Urellia, 462
Urophora ruficeps, 460

Walchia buloloensis, 73
MOROBENSIS, 94
Wallacea splendens, 39

Xanthotrypeta, 441, 442
bimaculata, 444
Xarnuta, 440
confusa, 440
leucoteles, 440
morosa, 440
Xenognathus, 98

Zacorus cara, 67
Zeugodacus, 410
cucumis, 410, 412
PAPUAENSIS, 410, 412
Zonaria, 198
crenata, 199
Diesingiana, 199
Turneriana, 199
Zoniolaimus brevicaudatus, 521
CLELANDI, 521
communis, 521-2
longispicularis, 521-2
onychogale, 522
setifer, 520-1
ualabatus, 521
Zygaenula, 100, 123 ,
paradoxa, 123
Zygothrica robusta, 130

LIST OF PLATES; LIST OF NEW GENERA. Ixvii

LIST OF PLATES.

PROCEEDINGS, 1939.
i-lii.—Hcology of Williams River and Barrington Tops districts.
iv—v.—Otitidae from New Guinea.
vi-vii.—Vegetation of Myall Lakes district.

viii-ix.— Australian Hlateridae.
x.—Larvae and eggs of species of tribe Paropsini.
xi—mNew Guinea Trypetidae.

xlii—Geology of district east of Yass, N.S.W.

LIST OF FAMILY AND GENERA DESCRIBED AS NEW IN THIS VOLUME

(1939).

Page. Page.
Berlandiella (Hmbioptera) .. .. 567 Odontembia (Hmbioptera) .. .. 489
Blacophanes (Thalamarchidae) .. 337 Oligembia (Embioptera) BE ie eae
Ceratitella (Trypetinae) so oo: GRR Pararsia (Oecophoridae) eee mayo eniyl

Cheesmanomyia (Trypetinae) ao Zale) Parazoniolamus (Nematoda: Tri-
Chrysotrypanea (Tephritinae) .. 457 choneminae ) Dees | See Glo. Ga
Cleitamoides (Otitidae) .. .. .. 106 Parembia (Embioptera) ... .. .. 478
Cyclopsia (Trypetinae) .. .. .. 444 Philetes (Thalamarchidae) .. .. 336
Cyclostrongylus (Nematoda: Tri- Pseudacanthoneura (Trypetinae).. 434
choneminae) Sb, pe Eee RE eno Pseudembia (Embioptera) .. .. 476
Diarrhegmoides (Trypetinae) Weer on Pseudina (Trypetinae) .. .. .. 446
Dinenvotn (im bioptera))) sa see D D9 Pseudocleitamia (Otitidae) .. .. 104

IF/NCEPUAG, (CRATPROOICENS)) 55 oo oo Pseudosophira (Trypetidae, Ad-
Maplestonema (Nematoda: Tricho- raminii) SSS mae OE ene:
neminae) Bhat (Gl eha Mna LU ip eee MR 4 Psilosceles (Thalamarchidae) >. 356
Metembia (Hmbioptera) .. .. .. 474 Saussurella (Hmbioptera ) Ge be DUS.

Neohemigaster (Otitidae) new name 126 Thalamarchidae (Lepidoptera) .. 335

ey

ea : d
i *. t > }

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

_ LINNEAN SOCIETY

Crease " 5 v ~

OF

NE EW | SOUTH Wat ES

- : “FOR THE YEAR —

1939. -

Par ‘ts I-II (Pages i-verrii; 1- -2i6).
: CONTAINING Fava PROCEEDINGS OF THE ANNUAL MEETING

AND PAPERS READ IN MARCH-APRIL.

With five. plates. — :
[Plates (i-v.] s

SYDNEY:

PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY

_AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING | CO., LTD.,
Seamer ‘Street; Glebe, Sydney,
and —
SOLD BY. THE SOCIETY,
Cee Science House, Gloucester and HMssex Streets, Sydney. —

)

ae POU ae cee OO es
Eee _ PRICE 12/3.

Registered at the General Post Office, Sednby. for transmission
by post as a_ periodical,

; ue Agent in Europe:
David Nutt, $12 Shaftesbury Avenue, London, W.C.2.

- Nos. 281-282

The dear Society of of New: South Wales
LIST OF OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, es a ea
a President: — jp eee f
Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Se., Ph. ID 5% Be MAREE:
( Vice-Presidents: age a $5 ae ¥
W. L: Waterhouse, D.Se. Aer. E. C. Andrews, B.A. 7
Cc. A. Sussmilch. Abe Cc. Roughley, “B.Sc, ~
\ . -
fe Hon, Treasurer: G. A Waterhouse, D.Sc, iB. E. a
CSuerebaby: 1h B. Walkom, D.Se. : seine ei
: ~ Council: E
¢. Anderson, M.A., D.Sc. ~~ ALF, Basset Hull. be uzee
R. H. Anderson, B.Sc.Agr. T. C. Roughley, B.Sc. — ; NS
BE. C. Andrews, B.A. ao ' C. A. Sussmilch. ee y
Professor E. Ashby, D.Se. F. H. Taylor. a eis ;
5 W. R. Browne, D.Sc. -E. Le G. Troughton. ~ ae es 5 ae
Professor A. N. Burkitt, M.B., B.Se. A. B. Walkom, D.Se. ~ per eS
~ E. Cheel. * _- H.S. BH. Wardlaw, D.Sc. Se ee ie
Profesor W. J: Dakin, D.Sc. ' -G. A. Waterhouse, D<Sc., B.E.. cas
A: G. Hamilton,” W. L. Waterhouse, D.Se. Ager.

Professor J, .Macdonald Holmes, - B. Se., ;

Ph.D.

« NOVICE 00

: With the exception of Volume: Il, Part £ Volume. Vv, Part 2, and Vohune VI,
Part 4, of the First Series, the Publications of the Linnean Society of New South |
Wales may be obtained from the Society, Science House, 159 Gloucester ‘Street,
Sydney, or from David Nutt, 212 Shaftesbury Avenue, London, We paling siCcs z
of copies of First Series, Volumes I to VI GREE), is limited. eit ke Rae ey

Auditors, EY H. Rayment, F.C.P.A~ Joe Yi ea ae

da

Year. | Part 1. | Part 2.| Part 3. | Part 4.
S.A |saSs-ds RSPR leo PICS E: 3 eae
yee BS Ae 3 0° SADV Ai 08 7: 6.
1877 Ss 4 0 4 0 4 0 _—
1878 5-0 Bee OF SB Os 76
1879 6.0 6 =0ret nO 6.6
18380 671-6 _ (226 1356
1881 6.20" } 10. 0--'|240 0 gee
1882 a6) LO Of GN db, 205 AhetOs sO
1883 10 0 5 0 TO sfee ie.
1884 8-0.) 12. <0 425. 0. 1525-20.
1885 ‘ 12.0 7 Or Alb) OST ETE Ce
1886 10 6 12 0 13 0 12 6
1887 7 0 822.0 AZO 2 Or
1888 157 0 -|24 0. } 20°20 | 48. -0
= 1889 LEAD 16.0; 19° 0-1-0
1890 11 0 9 0 9. 0) A5C92 08
1891 10 0 9.156 751 20 hen! 26
1892 6 6 4 6 (820 = 8°20,
1893 bgn0e | texO 6 0 9 0
1894 AD Ola) -12~°0- 5} S08 85 OS
1895 15 0 8 6 | 10.0%*| 12 0
1896 9x0? 6 6 C226 27-6
1897 10 0 8 6 9 0 1Z 6:
1898 \| 3.0 6-0 812.0 =F 140

1 Supplement 1s. 6d. additional. Ese
2? Supplement 2s. 6d. additional. ' Mia,
* Supplement 3s. additional. t

Part 1. | Part 2, | Part 3. | Part 4, —
Sites 2 rm : : = “ = z ag!
eee SiO soli ss cur lanSaeeerie 8.) (i bee
1899 e222 6.2) 12. 50, 0 Ovt 10926
1900. ..- Sopa exe Sh 1096 276
£901->5 5. of 0 OSS OS Es oad Wag as by Pia
1902 - i poe) TGs 7 6 1-15 0.
1903 ‘ 9 0 12°56 14° 0 15 0
1904 ods | PLO SO TL Cre 2 FAQE AOS 8
AGODS we Ane 6.704 P10--0 4-12 26 8 05.
1906 Sei nltedone O 12° 6° j-12—6 15-0:
£907 4 2B OAS. 8 36 op Shb AO WIS S80
1908 Pet ced | esl = a! Feat) 14 0. | 12 6
1909 230, LOS | a OF) 1676S
1910. ‘ Pye fast a ee 0} 11 0 SM OS WIS - 36
1911 * EAS wot ay 9 6 9 46. 1|- 10+ 08>
LOLA Ae SBR 25 0 12 i682 415—-0.
1913. y. 14 0 fit 3} 6 0 ISL =
ROU 4) <2 ees] AB Oo Hee Diy. |e Se Oat eat Oe ee
1915 17% 0 L2G kOr ONS ie Oke:
1916 A 107-0) 312)..0 7). 15 0 TD) Hike
LOA Se 14 0 5 9 20S S| AZS56.951s 16862
1918 * 20° On 14 202 (221 = 0% pt0220-
1919. 12 6 |P1L 6 Li G7 stees Ge
1920-8 Sy oS CO Berl aA 6s bo Gas ae Oe
1921 2 ee 0 8 0 iy AER os Wee ame ee

\

ey ae =S
hee See Peg Si eet

ement. 1s. additional. - fy eI Se
* Supplement 2s. 6d. additional, ra Ne AR a aces

‘ Supp

Parts 3-4. | E

Dee
S.

DRAW OD

2s [Issued 15th February,
aa. Be PervAaan . 5

Sr

4to, liand 3087
Sean ROR ee LOOT Negara

Fe <i _ SA

n- Macleay; FE. et

ys PLS. (18817.

EA eee oe
“WALES, 2 vols.,
10s. each; Vo
Parts’ 7s. 6d. each
she pe

ped

\

PROCEEDINGS, , 1939, PARTS oe

CONTENTS.
; ; Pages.
Presidential Address, delivered at the Sixty-fourth Annual General ;
Meeting, 29th March, 1939, by Mr.-T: €. Roughley : 7 %r oon = i-xxvii

BUIBECIOHS sy ee Wl Re RN RR: SORES ee A” aaa eva

- i} t
Balance-sheets for the year ending 28th February, 1939 NEE Sora N. POs XXvViii-xxx
Abstract of Proceedings ~ wh ae See Re che see UREN see RO SEES fey SPeNCOREL ean Tete XXXi-XXXii

The Ecology of the Upper Williams River and Barrington Tops Districts.
iii. The Eucalypt Forests, and General Discussion. By Lilian Fraser,
D.Se., and Joyce W. Vickery,;-M.Sc. (Plates hee this, era i etet Pastry ase ae 1-33 -

_ Miscellaneous Notes on Australian Diptera. v. On Eve: coloration, and :
other Notes. By G. H. Hardy. (One Text-figure.) . op Bae ae ee ee SAG

Description of a New Genus and Two New Species from Papua. Family
Pyrgotidae (Diptera). By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by Frank f
H. Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.S8.) (Two Text- figures.) Spe tage, eee 51-53

Revision of Australian Lepidoptera. Oecophoridae... villi. By A. Jefferis — 2 f
viTeT. * WMisD Mich RBS an Nien het ge Soe an ae ee a Cea eRe 54-72

Trombidiid Larvae in New Guinea (Acarina: Trombidiidae). By Carl
E. M. Gunther, M.B., 'B.S., D:T.M. (Communicated by Frank H.

Taylor, F.R.ES. FAS.) (Forty Textfigures.) .. -. .. 2... 73-96
The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. \ . Family \ Otitidae

(Ortalidae). By John R. Malloch. cea ite by Frank H.

Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.8.) (Plates iv-v.) Rao uae gre, lente A See Sale

The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. viii. Dolichopodidae. By —
VYabbé O. Parent. (Communicated by Frank H. Eealors F.R.E.S.,
» B28.) Cvhirty-one:'TRext-Heures,) Sac 4h. eee ge ae 155-168 ©

The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. ix. Family bad nea ae an
‘By John R. Malloch. (Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E. S., a es
FS J bThirtcen “Lext-fieures:) 64.0 h ee eee a4 i pare "169-180

Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. Dea The “Genotype of ; :
Oligotoma Westwood. By Consett Davis, M.Sc. (Five Text-figur es.) 181-190

A Key to the Marine Algae of New South Wales. Part 2. Melanopihycede
¢(Phaecophy.ceae):. By Valerie® May; (BSC. te a ee oh pe he

~

7

(Issued 15th September, 1939.)

oc

] . Vol. LXIV. | = re Nos. 283-284.
Parts 3-4. ; |
ee oe Tae

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE a

_ LINNEAN SOCIETY

OF

aN EW ‘SouTH Wates

FOR THE YEAR|

1939.

- Parts ILI-IV (Pages 217-465).
CONTAINING PAPERS. READ IN MAY-AUGUST.

With six plates.
[Plates vi-xi.]

Se SYDNEY:
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY
AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., aie
Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, - ~
; ¥ - and eH)
“a SOLD BY THE SOCIETY,
Science House, Gloucester and Essex Streets, sydney.

1939.
PRIC E 12/8.

~

¢

Registered at the General Post Office, Sydney, for transmission
; by oe as a periodical. ~

Vanes

Agent in Hurope:
David Nutt, 212 Shaftesbury Avenue, London, WG-2.

The Linnean Society of New South Wales —
LIST OF OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1939-40, Pee

_ President: aan
Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, BSe., Ph.D. Be ee ing

Vice-Presidents: % Pose eas
W.\ LL. Waterhouse, D.Se. Agr. ; E. C. Andrews, B.A.
Cc. A. Sussmilch. 2 2 bit C, _ Roughley, B.Se, e

Hon. Treasurer: G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., B.E.

7 ~ = —

Secretary: A. B. Walkom, D.Sc, ia ‘
atnw Council: Z +
C. Anderson, M.A., D.Sc. Ai B. Basset Hull ee ee Seen
R. ‘HW. Anderson, B.Se.Aer. T. C. Roughley, B.Sc. ;
EB. C. Andrews, B.A. _ -C. A. Sussmilch. - :
Professor E. Ashby, D.Sc. KF, Hi Paylory ><; y, oes 3
W. R. Browne, D.Sc. E. Le G. Troughton. mae : m7 on
Professor A. N. Burkitt, M.B., B.Sc. A. B. “Walkom, D.Se. :
E. Cheel. — H. S. H. Wardlaw; D.Sc.
Profesor W. J. Dabit D. Sc.: G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., B.E. £ ?
A. G. Hamilton. W. lL. Waterhouse, D.Sc.Agr: ae a a
Professor J. Macdonald- Holmes: BSc. ary io P
Ph.D. : on seer.
Auditor: F, H. Rayment, F.C.P.A, PS GR ate
N OTIC TI C E 2 ‘ ie
= = yO

¥. With the exception of Volume iE, Pork 4, Volume V, Part 2, and Syiienc VI,

Part 4, of the First Series, the Publications of-the Linnean Society of New South =

Wales may be obtained from the Society, Science House, 159 Gloucester Street,
Sydney, or from David Nutt, 212 Shaftesbury Avenue, London, W.C.2. - ‘The stock
of copies of First Series, Volumes I to VI: (ee ty a is eeitede

Year. Part 1. | Part 2. | Part 3. | Part 4. _ Year. _| Part 1.| Part 2. | Part 3: | Part 4.

zak f p= ty Ap IT 5 = 3 ~

2 s. d. Se.deank Bods 3. d. 3 mS ears Bact oa eel as bey eau Coe

1875-76 30 3 0 5 OG % Oo | 1899 Be [e126 12 0 10-0 106-2
1877 AO AO 4 0 —. 1900 he BAO. 406. 10 = Ose tee &
1878 5 0 5 0 6 0. 7° 6 1901 10-0 | 9.0 3b 0) 276
1879 6 0 6 0 8 0 6 6 ~1902 2 0 Ge 2 26° -15=-0"
“1880 6 6 —_— 7 6 7-6 1903 ~9 0 12 6 °| 14 0 15 0
1881 -6 0 10 0 10 0 — |) 1904. 10° 0 7 6 9 0 10 0.
1882 y oad 3 10570) 24-5;.68 10 0 1905 \. 6 04°} 10. 0 126 4-0 8-08
1883. 10 0 Dn 7-0 |} 8 O jl: £906 12 6 12 6 | 12 6 }-15.-0
1884 8 0 12 0 25 0 25 0 1907. oy 8 0 8-65-15 20 134-035

1885 12 0 TBS to 08) LONG 1908. | TSO | 97-0 PESOS 126s
- FB86. 25 oy se 10 6 12°70 13 0 12. 6 1909 od bee ba 8 17 .0.-)\14°°0 |,16~ 6
1887 0 8 0 |-12-0 27 +O 1910, 14:0 TIO Sere a0 12 6

1888 5 15,0 |-24 0 20 0 18 0 1911 eh = 9), 629-6 9. -62-|-50 0S
1889 11 0 16 0 19 0 1.0, 1912 8 6 125 0 12 6 |.15 0

e 1890 11 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 1913 14 0 Thee 620 Si 3 Or-
1891 10 0 9 6 | 170 76 1914 13-0 3617! 02, | 25. 0.15390

1892 6 6 4 6 8 0 8 .0 19156 17:0 12 6 10°. - O53 tt D>
1893. 5» 0 {41 40 60 179 0 1916 ~ <1 -10.°0 12> O: 425 20 = 1719250
1894 12:40 12:0 13.0 8 0 1917 ete eas| igh eee -9 0 12260) 6-2 6e

1895 15-0 8 6 10° 00* 212.60. 1918 20 0 14 0 24 0.11980 ca
1896 9540" 6 6 ay BEA: Yap 7 ARM 5 1919 bE SPS A bs Ecol Sa Fae oy ee Se Bs I Sa 8)
1897 10 0 8 6 9 0 712 6 1920 10 9 7 6 90 =B 11307
1898 3.0 6 0 |12 0) 14 0 1921 9 0 8. 0™-)-7 6 9 6

2 Supplement e 6d. additional, “Supplement 1s. additional. Sous
* Supplement. 2s. 6d. additienal. - Boe Smulees 2s, 6d. additional. }

7 nae 38. sGaitional. —

2 oe A
~ i x =\

. BY J. R. MALLOOH. Sie : 465 Sic
Je hens _ EXPLANATION OF PLATE ES its DO irae pene repay ref
A Fig 1—Dacus: papuaensis, Qn. SD. _ Wing, . type. x 6: Bis ue ees : ae, ae
Fig. 2.—Dacus albolateralis, n. sp. Wing, type. x 6: 5. es pace PGE SS ae eae
| Fig. . 3.—Pseudosophira bakeri, n, sp. Wing, type x 5. Ga etre pepe Sh Gee ae GR 2
‘ s Fig. 4.—Polyara insolita Walker. Wing. x 5. 45x : GHe es
Serie Z a ). ‘Fhemarohystrix flaviceps, n. sp. Wing, paratype. x 5: Be re ite :
Fig. - 6.—Themarohystria suttoni, n. sp. “Wing, paratype. x 6-5... _ Za pe
- Fig. 7.—Clusiosoma biseriata, n. sp. Wing, paratype. ~x 65. Eee tes Z ASR Eee :
se 2 Rig. 8. —Clusiosoma puncticeps, Keo: “Wing, type. x 6:5. sc te i bine sa
‘ig. 9.—Acanthoneura nigriventris; n. sp. Wing, type. x 5. ~- ep staat, ees
“Fig. 0 eothemara formosipennis Walker.’ Wing. x 5. af | = eae
Piet tk —Pseudacanthoneura septemnotata, n. ‘sp. Wing, type. MSHS Lad Sey RT RM
- Fig. 12 .—Diarrhegmoides hastata, n. sp. Wing, allotype. x 65, PR ers pte PES
| ‘Fig. ‘Ear —Hexacinia. multipunctata, n. sp. Wing, paratype. x 6: 8. ‘ : é Beas
za Fig. 14.—Pseudina buloloae, n \sp... Wing, type. -x 6°5. Pee ae Seka ie cgi

, ee, 15.—Anomoea nigrithorax, n. sp. Wing, type. x 6 58 J - : ES Ny ea gee 1 PSS ape
‘ 16 .—-Pseudospheniscus taylori, n. sp: Wing, type. K 65. Serene oA ee : Sik :
Fig. ‘H.—Ceratitella loranthi. (Froggatt). Wing. x 6 8. 5 le tiene = Ee sey So eee
Fig, 18. —ephrella australis, n. sp. “Wing, type. x 6:5... e =! * : ae ae see
Fig. 19, —Spathulina acroleuca (Schiner). Wing. x 65. wees ates ee a a ie er fn
Fig. 20:—Chrysotrypanea trifasciata, he spi Wing, ‘tyre. X65; 2+ a ae : = Gates: ats
* Fig. 21.—Platensina parvipuncta, Nn. sp. Wing, type. pbeos 3G a pape e See
_ Fig. 22: ~—Sphenella marginata Fallen. » Wing. x 6:5. ep ce te ze SERS SNCS REE SA as oe ag
Fig. 23. —Camaromyia bullans Wied. Wing. x & ae an OSes Cat : os
ae 4, —Fephritis pelia Schiner, Wing. Fee inant oN Se : Nan : ot Rak
Fig: 25.—Trypanea glauca Thoms. Wing. x-6-5. 39 : ‘pie
os 26. Perk aronune sororcula Wied. - Wing. %-6:5- ee

PROCEEDINGS, , 1939, PARTS 3-4,

CONTENTS.

Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. ii. A New Neotropical Genus
of Embioptera. By Consett Davis, M‘Se. (Twenty-one Text-figures. )

A New Species of Chalcid (Genus Hurytoma) associated with Tepperella
trilineata Cam., a Wasp causing Galling of the Flower Buds of
Acacia decurrens.’ By N. S. Noble, DStyEte M.Sce., D.1.C. (Twelve
Text-figur es.)

The Upper Pdlaeozoic Hecke petwaen Mount Conrce and Winehan.. N. S.
Wales. By A. H. Voisey, M.Sc. (One Map and three Text-figures.)

The Lorne Triassic Basin and Associated Rocks. By A. H. Vesey: M.Sc.
(One Map and two Text-figures.). . ke

A New Species of Megastigmus ASS on Tepperene ees Can a
Wasp causing Galling of the Flower Buds of Acacia decurrens. By
N. S. Noble, D.Se.Agr., M.Sc., D.I.C. (Ten Text-figures.) “

A Reconnaissance Survey of the Vegetation of the Myall Lakes. By Prof.

, T. G@. B. Osborn, D.Sc., F.L.S., and R. N. Robertson, Ph.D., ee
(Plates vi-vii and three Text-figures.) aa Be 4

Australian Coleoptera. Notes and New Biatiese Now Xi. ~ (Mostly
Hlateridae.). Byokie = Ji: cae B.A., F.R.E.S. (Plates vili-ix_and
one Text-figure.) é

The Genus Adrama, with Beseriptone: of Three Nees Species! (Caiman:
Trypetidae). By John R. Malloch.. (Communicated by Frank H.
Taylor, F.R.E.S., F.Z.S.) (Two Text-figures.) .. _

A New Family of Lepidoptera. By A. Jefferis en M. D., “ER. E. S.

Hymenopterous Parasites of Embioptera. By Alan P. Dodd ;

Miscellaneous Notes on Australian Diptera. -vi. Dolichopodinge. By
G. H. Hardy

Observations on the Bipnemicn a Marnhiotoey of ‘Seren Sneciss of thé:

Tribe Paropsini (Chrysomelidae). By D. Margaret Cumpston,
__ M.Se., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the See in Zoology. (Plate X
and twenty-two Text-figures. ) Woe Rae Sy
The Diptera of the Territory of New Guinea. xe Gea ish Ceratapoeonnine:
-By J. W. S. Macfie, M.A., D.Se., F.R.E.S. (Communicated q Frank Hi.
Taylor, F.R.ES., F.Z.8.) (Two Text-figures.) . 3
Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. iii. The Genus Burmitembdia
Cockerell. By Consett Davis, M.Sc. (Six Text-figures.)

Taxonomie Notes on the Order Embioptera. iv. The Cats Clothodes

Enderlein. By Consett Davis, M.Sc. (Twenty-five Text-figures.) ~
Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. -y. The Genus Wonnconeis
Enderlein. By Consett Davis, M.Sc. (Five Text-figures.) .
The Geology of the County of Buller, N.S.W. By A. H. veer M.Sc.
(One Map and two Text-figures.) . : 5
The Geology of the Lower Manning District of New South Wales: By
A. H. Voisey, M.Sc. (One Map and one Text-figure. ) .
A Note on the Synonymy of Leptops (Coleoptera: Cnreilionidacy. By
K. C. McKeown . hs a. UNvny Nova pee ened ata en
The Diptera of the Territyty. of New ainea” xi. Family Trypetidae.
By John R. Malloch. (Communicated by Frank H. Taylor, F.R.E.S.,
F.Z.8.) (Plate xi and fifteen Text-figures. )

*

Pages.

217-222.

223-241

242-254

255-265 °

266-278.

279-296

297-330

381-334
335-337

338-344 ~

345-352

353-366

369-372

373-380

, 381-384

385-393

394-407 -

408

409-465

8 7.

367-368

: (Issued 15th December, 1989.)

: i Vol LXiv Se SE
Parts 5-6. .

ef PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

>

OF

Pt New SouTH WALES

FOR THE YEAR z ae
~ EOPAT
1939. AN) Cer
: [S76 RF o> a
eee 2 S/o ad AD
Bats) Parts V-VI (Pages 466-608); xexiii-levii. Ree fae ARY)|
‘ CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN SEPTEMBER-NOVEMBER, & \ Pes } a
. ~~ ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES, \— AN ye
LIST OF MEMBERS, AND INDEX. : Seca Zs “e aSy >
With one plate. XW 4 ®
ERlate xiii Ne 3
is = eS g é ‘
oar SYDNEY:
eet PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY
ies _AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LTD.,
: Noes : Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney,
tee and
< “SOLD BY THE SOCIETY,
; Science House, Gloucester and Hssex Streets, ELE
: (eae ~ 1989.
as PRICE 8/9. :
. s SS Se at the General Post Office, Sydney, for transmission
é 3 by post as a periodical.
igthee aes i Agent in Europe:
es i David Nutt, 212 Shaftesbury Avenue, London, W.C.2.
7, % i rate 5 —10
. ey Lae ie
ie

[oo Se = = See oe
: ona Nos. 285-286.

LINNEAN SOCIETY

* Council: _ x
C. Anderson, M.A., D.Sc. ‘A. F. Basset Hull.
R. H. Anderson, B.Sc.Aer. T. C. Roughley, B.Sc. _
E. C. Andrews, B.A. Cc. A. Sussmilch.
Professor BE. Ashby, D.Sc. ‘ F. H. Taylor. 2.
W.-R. Browne, D.Sc. | E. Le G. Troughton.
Professor A. N. Burkitt, M.B., B.Se. _A. B. Walkom, D.Sc.
E. Cheel. H. S. H. Wardlaw, D.Sc.
Profesor W: J. Dakin, D.Sc. G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., BE. “4
A. G..Hamilton. BWA

Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Sc.,
Ph.D.

With the .exception of Volume TT Part 4, Volume. We Part rs and Velde VI,
Part 4, of the First Series, the Publications of the Linnean Society of New South

Wales

Sydney, or from David Nutt, 212 Shaftesbury Avenue, London, W.0.2. ‘The stock |
of copies of First ELIS Volumes I to -VI Os is limited. ;

Year. Part 1. | Part 2. | Part 3. | Part 4. a] = 2 Year.” /Part 1.) Part 2. | Part 3 | Part 4.
Soa ; _—— —_ -
Sedo sedis 1s Od. Seedy Yee Reet Oy s. d Ss. d. 8.(d.
has oe 3- 0 3 0 5 0 C28 1899... ~ | 12-6 12 0 10 0-| 10 6
1877 oot] 420 4.0 4 0 — 1900 8 0'/10 6 10 Oo TRG:
1878 ee 5 0 5 0 GEO ae eo. 1901 : eel OsG 90 SD. SOrss L7e7 One
1879 oe 6 0 6 0 8 0 6. 6 1902- .. 2 v0) 7 6, 7 6 1bEO>
1880 ae 6 6 — y ie) in) 1903 a Oa b2e=6 14 0° / 15 0
1881 : 6 0 10 0 10 0 i 1904 10 0 7-6 9. .0 10 0
1882 A VBE 10 oOo: COL ot Ona OOS ae og te 6-0 | S100 Leo G~ eR Oss
1883 2101030 5Y- 00 t--Oxat 28,0 OD Ge eS Oe en 12 6 ||,15-°0
1884 2 8 0 12 0 25-0 25 0 AQOTR Ae et Oe abe 8 64|21b =0 AS)0r>
1885 on P20. Chae 8 15-0 17 6 1908 DRO] 9- 0 14 0 12°. 6S.
1886 Sai LOO 12 0 13 0 12 6 1909 i 1250 17. 0 1i4)O) AV 16) Gre
1887 7 0 8 0 12 0 27 0 1910 1-200, 11 0 FO, 4R1o- 6
1888 15 0 24 0 | 20 0 18 0 1911 ote 9-6 9. 6 956341020"
1889 11 0 16 0 19 0 TL 70 1912 Sa 8. 6 7/250 12-64 15 0
1890. lade 0 el 90: 9 0 9 0 1913 . | 14 0 ke 26 6.04 |b43 107
1891 2 10 0 9 6 igeOs 16 a Rey i eens Stee hs he seat) LTS OFF). 25-0 S119. G
1892 6 6 4 6 8 0 8 0 TOG ent 17 0 12 6 10 0 1T 0s
1893 5°40 11 0 6 0 9 0 T9L6:. ox ‘| 10 -0 12 -0.<|-15>.0~-' 19:0
1894 12 0 12-0 13°_0 8 0 1917 on a OFT ONO) 12.6. 116. 6
1895 15 0 8 6 10).025,) 220.0 1918 20-°O.-| 14 70 1-24. 0 _|.19- 8 >
_ 1896 3 9 0 6 NOB AT. Oy Bie 6 Hea OLO- 12°65.) TL 6S A786 AS 0,
— 1897 eerie Oteg O 8 6 9 0 12 6 1920-3 0S ae TIO 9 Reai8 9-0 1104
, 1898 ie 3 0 6 0 12 0 g WBN 0 ies cage I bt Pepsi 9:0 8 0 7 6 8° 6
1 Supplement is. 6d. additional. _ ; “Supplement 1s. additional. : ie
* Supplement 2s. 6d. additienal. ® Supplement 2s. 6d. additional. — :

_* Supplement 3s. additional. , ESSA : 5 he a ye

The Linnean Society of New South _ Wales

LIST OF OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1939-40. oe is

)

- GF = x. Js

President: »-
Professor J. Macdonald Holmés, B.Sc., Ph.D. bias ; bi.
‘Vice-Presidents: ; a

W. L. Waterhouse, D.Sc.Aegr. B. C. Andrews, B.A, ~~
Cy A. Sussmilch. Thee TOs Rous nleys B.Se..

Hon. iiecanGeBee G. A. Waterhouse, D.Se., B.E.
Secretary: A. B. Walkom, D.S@

L. Waterhouse, DuSe: PASE. Bee z ats

a : + A
A a _ Auditor: F. ea Ss oe: 2 z eae \
: 4 NOVICE.
/ > ee a = B+: =e / =e

may be obtained from the Society, Science House, 159 - Gloucester Street, -

a bie dive ae A or
i Sao eet eae
: j
ines = el y) i =
: Sy j ‘ BPR Tix
z i
9 a fe at
t Le [
Bt Ke Ne Tae
ent AY = é x ae

is 2 = Cis y = :
i m : = A ey :

Le: SS aes a | a See:
Part 5 s zs

pea

nN
{

cae

oa

ren
eoooceor
zy
S

Ww

06s Te 0,

“poDoDN Don

| Part | Part. | Part’ | Part. ate ees eae
Od Oe Bye tee |g ease ate

Parts 1-2. | Parts 3-4.

ee

ue
fon
eA

t

au
Reco

7

%

iy

QO

oe

par
450
WRWOWAOM

Las

NABAaR0
met

00 © 00. ] 00 00

a

|OOCSOWORRE

7

n

AN GOW.

Be
|NFo-

ete)

a7
a

ze ee ; y ~ 7 a: : A Wa x s ee BS Fi Ss i RB Exe
oF THE ProceEDives Ussuea Lath February, 1926]. rose 08.
as Ae ta es A oe m Seat we

ase

= By y William Macleay, FL. Ss. “(18811

=

PROCEEDINGS, 1939, PARTS 5-6.

CONTENTS.
Pages
The Association between the Larva described as Trombicula hirsti var.
buloloensis Gunther 1939, and YTrombicula minor Berlese 1904.
(Acarina: Trombidiidae.) By C. E. M. Gunther, M.B., B.S., D.T.M,
(Three Text-figures.) Moafarthe Shep a Weert Vo Tk ake ie ona ee AES Ee 2 Ne REO)
; %
Observations on the Life-history of Neoschdngastia, kallipygos Gunther
1939. (Acarina: Trombidiidae.) By C. E. M. Gunther, M.B., B.S., fe
DTM set aC Two ext hi Sires ys es 50 sis 8 a Ne a ee cd NCR re wae eb es fem ASS
Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera, vi-x. By Consett Davis,
M.Sc. (Eighty-three TOXE-HEMTOS:) st) ae 474-495
Elementary Hydrography of South-eastern Australia. By Frank A. Craft,
B.Se. (Ten ‘Text-figures.) Ae Caley RR, < “cteey, tks cc bibs Seen Gee Ameo PLO aenL
Strongylate Nematodes from Marsupials in New South Wales. “By ~
Professor T. Harvey Johnston and Patricia M. Mawson. (Sixty-six
Text-figures. ) net ite tmgeleap ene Lapis yetnarn, eta Dee) ees] Real teens tne cae eee ate ey rteael

Ectocarpus confervoides (Roth) Le Jol. By Valerie May, B.Sc., Linnean
Macleay Fellow of the Society in Botany. (Forty-six Text-figures.) 537-554

A Note on the Re-examination of Australian Species of Ceratopogonidae
(Diptera). By J. W.S. Macfie. (Communicated by Frank Be Taylor, ce
F.R.E.S., F.Z.S.) (Three ‘Text-figures.). WAG of A) ACY SE eH Ea de 555-558

Taxonomic Notes on the Order Embioptera. xi-xiv. By a Davis,
M.Se; (hifty-onéesRexttisyres. i) 210.42. Save Bateees, cement mee rae 559-575

The General Geology of the District east of Yass, N.S.W. By Kathleen
Sherrard, M.Sc. (Plate xii and three Text-figures.) «ue rahe espero aec oh OM OOO.

Contributions to the Microbiology of Australian Soils. v. Abundance of
Microorganisms and Production of Mineral Nitrogen in relation to
Temperature. By H. L. Jensen, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society.

(Hive. Mexistipunes.)* os? sone igs OOP Reece oe ge ee ee OT SOUS
Abstract of Proceedings .. .. Ree eed es Wh ages Ohm eee Seite >
Donations and Exchanges at i deg ete BIE ot art Dae sha toy Ecieenliy ;
Take de, Members cor os brane Te a ey ee K, eS Liv
Index Stil adage AAV IXV-
EIS ROL ePIQUCS tiert sone er laiap tases pene ek Se ots ts ie ea a ame eee Ixvii

List of New Family and Genera .. .. .. a DONE As a eee 5 OAXViL

/WHOL LIBRARY
AM
LAEa $

MBL,

|
WH

sdialos sath oatinaens i

m7 © aie

Par

a Oe Re
eng RESO omer
ares ‘

PO emmy

he A